t

.me/
Exam_
Sakha_
Off
ici
al
Coordinate
Geometry
With Sessionwise Theory & Exercises
Coordinate
Geometry
With Sessionwise Theory & Exercises

Dr. SK Goyal
 ARIHANT PRAKASHAN (Series), MEERUT
All Rights Reserved

© AUTHOR
No part of this publication may be re-produced, stored in a retrieval system or
by any means, electronic mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, web or
otherwise without the written permission of the publisher. Arihant has obtained
all the information in this book from the sources believed to be reliable and true.
However, Arihant or its editors or authors or illustrators don’t take any responsibility
for the absolute accuracy of any information published, and the damages or loss
suffered thereupon.
All disputes subject to Meerut (UP) jurisdiction only.

Administrative & Production Offices

Regd. Office
‘Ramchhaya’ 4577/15, Agarwal Road, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -110002
Tele: 011- 47630600, 43518550
Head Office
Kalindi, TP Nagar, Meerut (UP) - 250002 Tel: 0121-7156203, 7156204
Sales & Support Offices
Agra, Ahmedabad, Bengaluru, Bareilly, Chennai, Delhi, Guwahati,
Hyderabad, Jaipur, Jhansi, Kolkata, Lucknow, Nagpur & Pune.

ISBN : 978-93-25298-64-4
PO No : TXT-XX-XXXXXXX-X-
XX
Published by Arihant Publications (India) Ltd.
For further information about the books published by Arihant, log on to
www.arihantbooks.com or e-mail at [email protected]
Follow us on
 PREFACE
IF YOU CONTINUOUSLY PUT YOUR EFFORTS ON AN ASPECT, YOU HAVE VERY
GOOD CHANCE TO GET POSITIVE OUTCOME i.e. SUCCESS

It is a matter of great pride and honour for me to have received such an overwhelming response
to the previous editions of this book from the readers. In a way, this has inspired me to revise this
book thoroughly as per the changed pattern of JEE Main & Advanced. I have tried to make the
contents more relevant as per the needs of students, many topics have been re-written, a lot of
new problems of new types have been added in etcetc. All possible efforts are made to remove
all the printing errors that had crept in previous editions. The book is now in such a shape that
the students would feel at ease while going through the problems, which will in turn clear their
concepts too.
A Summary of changes that have been made in Revised & Enlarged Edition
— Theory has been completely updated so as to accommodate all the changes made in JEE Syllabus &
Pattern in recent years.
— The most important point about this new edition is, now the whole text matter of each chapter has
been divided into small sessions with exercise in each session. In this way the reader will be able to
go through the whole chapter in a systematic way.
— Just after completion of theory, Solved Examples of all JEE types have been given, providing the
students a complete understanding of all the formats of JEE questions & the level of difficulty of
questions generally asked in JEE.
— Along with exercises given with each session, a complete cumulative exercises have been given at
the end of each chapter so as to give the students complete practice for JEE along with the
assessment of knowledge that they have gained with the study of the chapter.
— Last 13 Years questions asked in JEE Main & Adv, IIT-JEE & AIEEE have been covered in all the
chapters.

However I have made the best efforts and put my all Coordinate Geometry teaching
experience in revising this book. Still I am looking forward to get the valuable suggestions and
criticism from my own fraternity i.e. the fraternity of JEE teachers.
I would also like to motivate the students to send their suggestions or the changes that they
want to be incorporated in this book. All the suggestions given by you all will be kept in prime
focus at the time of next revision of the book.

Dr. SK Goyal
 CONTENTS

1. COORDINATE SYSTEM AND COORDINATES 1-71

LEARNING PART Session 3
Session 1 — Section formulae
— Introduction — Centroid of a Triangle
— Coordinate Axes — Incentre
— Rectangular Cartesian Coordinates — Some Standard Results
of a Point — Area of Triangle
— Polar Coordinates of a Point
Session 4
— Relation between the Polar and Cartesian
— Locus and Its Equation
Coordinates
— Change of Axes the Transformations of Axes
Session 2 — Removal of the Term xy from F(x,y) = ax2 +
— Distance between Two Points 2hxy + by2 without Changing the Origin
— Choice of Axes
PRACTICE PART
— Distance between Two Points in Polar
Coordinates — JEE Type Examples
— Chapter Exercises

2. THE STRAIGHT LINES 73-190

LEARNING PART — The Distance Form or Symmetric Form or
Session 1 Parametric Form of a Line
— Definition Session 2
— Angle of Inclination of a Line
— Position of Two Points Relative to a
— Slope or Gradient of a Line Given Line
— Angle Between Two Lines — Position of a Point which lies Inside a Triangle
— Lines Parallel to Coordinate Axes — Equations of Lines Parallel and Perpendicular
— Intercepts of a Line on Axes to a Given Line
— Different Forms of the Equation of a — Distance Between Two Parallel Lines
Straight Line — Distance of a Point From a Line
— Reduction of General Equation to — Area of Parallelogram
Standard Form
 Session 3 Session 5
— Points of Intersection of Two Lines — The Foot of Perpendicular Drawn from the
— Concurrent Lines Point (x1 , y1 ) to the Line ax + by + c = 0
— Family of Lines — Image or Reflection of a Point (x1 , y1 )
— How to Find Circumcentre and Orthocentre by about a Line Mirror
Slopes — Image or Reflection of a Point (x1 , y1 ) in
Different Cases
Session 4
— Use of Image or Reflection
— Equations of Straight Lines Passing Through a
Given Point and Making a Given Angle with a Session 6
Given Line — Reflection of Light
— A Line Equally Inclined with Two Lines — Refraction of Light
— Equation of the Bisectors — Condition of Collineirty If Three Given Points
— Bisector of the Angle Containing in Cyclic Order
The Origin
— Equation of that Bisector of the Angle Between PRACTICE PART
Two Lines Which Contains a Given Point — JEE Type Examples
— How to Distinguish the Acute (Internal) and — Chapter Exercises
Obtuse (External) Angle Bisectors

3. PAIR OF STRAIGHT LINES 191-239

LEARNING PART Session 5
Session 1 — To Find the Point of Intersection of Lines
— Introduction Represented by ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy +
— Homogeneous Equation in Two Variables c = 0 with the Help of Partial Differentiation
— Removal of First Degree Term
Session 2
— Equation of the Lines Joining the Origin to the
— Angle between the Pair of Lines ax2+2hxy+by2
Points of Intersection of a Given Line and a
Session 3 Given Curve
— Bisectors of the Angle between the Lines
Given by a Homogeneous Equation PRACTICE PART
— JEE Type Examples
Session 4
— Chapter Exercises
— General Equation of Second Degree
— Important Theorems
4. CIRCLE 241-362
LEARNING PART Session 5
Session 1 — Tangents from a Point to the Circle
— Definition — Length of the Tangent from a Point to a Circle
— Equation of Circles in Different Forms — Power of a Point with Respect to a Circle
— Locus of the Mid-point of the Chords of the — Chord of Contact
Circle that Subtends an Angle of 2q at its Centre — Chord Bisected at a Given Point
Session 2 — Pair of Tangents
— Diametric Form of a Circle — Director Circle
— Equation of Circle Passing Through Three Non- Session 6
Collinear Points — Diameter of a Circle
Session 3 — Two Circles Touching Each Other
— Intercepts Made on the Axes by a Circle — Common Tangents to Two Circles
— Different Forms of the Equations of a Circle — Common Chord of Two Circles
— Position of a Point with Respect to Circle — Family of Circles
— Maximum and Minimum Distance of a Point Session 7
from the Circle
— Angle of Intersection of Two Circles
Session 4 — Radical Axis
— Intersection of a Line and a Circle — Radical Centre
— Product of the Algebraical Distances PA and — Co-axial System of Circles
PB is Constant when from P, A Secant be
— Limiting Point
Drawn to Cut the circle in the Point A and B
— Image of the Circle by the Line Mirror
— The Length of Intercept Cut-off from a Line by
a Circle PRACTICE PART
— Tangent to a Circle at a Given Point — JEE Type Examples
— Normal to a Circle at a Given Point — Chapter Exercises
5. PARABOLA 363-459
LEARNING PART — Intersection of a Line and a Parabola
Session 1 — Equation of Tangent in Different Forms
— Introduction — Point of Intersection of Tangents at any Two
— Conic Section Points on the Parabola
— Section of a Right Circular Cone by Different — Equation of Normals in Different Forms
Planes — Point of Intersection of Normals at any Two
— Conic Section : Definition Points on the Parabola
— Equation of Conic Section — Relation Between ‘t1’ and ‘t2’ if Normal at ‘t1’
— Recognisation of Conics meets the Parabola Again at ‘t2’
— How to Find the Centre of Conics — Co-normal Points
— Parabola : Definition — Circle Through Co-normal Points
— Standard Equation of Parabola Session 3
— Some Terms Related to Parabola — Pair of Tangents SS1 = T 2
— Other forms of Parabola with — Chord of Contact
Latusrectum 4a — Equation of the Chord Bisected at a
— Smart Table Given Point
— General Equation of a Parabola — Diameter
— Equation of Parabola if Equation of — Lengths of Tangent, Subtangent, Normal and
axis, Tangent at Vertex and Latusrectum Subnormal
are given — Some Standard Properties of the Parabola
2
— The Generalised form (y-k) = 4a (x-h) — Reflection Property of a Parabola
— Parabolic Curve — Study of Parabola of the Form
2
Session 2 (ax + by) + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
— Position of a Point (x1 , y1 ) with respect to a PRACTICE PART
Parabola y2 = 4ax — JEE Type Examples
— Parametric Relation between the Coordinates — Chapter Exercises
of the Ends of a Focal Chord of a Parabola
6. ELLIPSE 461-553
LEARNING PART — Smart Table
Session 1 Session 3
— Ellipse Definition — Pair of Tangents
— Standard Equation of Ellipse — Chord of Contact
— The Foci and Two Directrices of an Ellipse — Chord Bisected at a Given Point
— Tracing of the Ellipse — Diameter
— Some Terms Related to an Ellipse — Conjugate Diameters
— Focal Distances of a Point — Properties of Conjugate Diameters
— The Shape of the Ellipse, — Equi-Conjugate Diameters
— when b>a x2 y2 — Director Circle
—— + —— = 1,
2 b2
— Mechanical Construction ofaan Ellipse — Sub-Tangent and Sub-Normal
— Smart Table — Concyclic Points
Session 2 — Some Standard Properties of the Ellipse
— Position of a Point with Respect to an Ellipse — Reflection Property of an Ellipse
— Intersection of a Line and an Ellipse — Equation of an Ellipse Referred to Two
— Equation of Tangent in Different Forms Perpendicular Lines
— Equations of Normals in Different Forms PRACTICE PART
— Properties of Eccentric Angles of the Co- — JEE Type Examples
normal Points
— Chapter Exercises
— Co-normal Points Lie on a Fixed Curve
7. HYPERBOLA 555-638
LEARNING PART Session 3
Session 1 — Diameter
— Hyperbola : Definition — Conjugate Diameters
— Standard Equation of Hyperbola — Properties of Hyperbola
— The Foci and Two Directrices of a Hyperbola — Intersection of Conjugate Diameters and
— Tracing of the Hyperbola Hyperbola
— Some Terms Related to Hyperbola — Director Circle
— Focal Distances of a Point — Asymptotes
— Conjugate Hyperbola — Rectangular Hyperbola
— Position of a Point with Respect to a — The Rectangular Hyperbola xy = c2
Hyperbola
— Study of Hyperbola xy = c2
— Intersection of a Line and a Hyperbola
— Properties of Rectangular Hyperbola xy= c2
Session 2 — Reflection Property of a Hyperbola
— Equations of Tangents in Different Forms
— Equation of a Hyperbola Referred to Two
— Equations of Normals in Different Forms Perpendicular Lines
— Pair of Tangents
— Chord of Contact
PRACTICE PART
— JEE Type Examples
— Equation of the Chord Bisected at a
Given Point — Chapter Exercises
 SYLLABUS

JEE MAIN
Cartesian system of rectangular coordinates in a plane, distance formula, section
formula, locus and its equation, translation of axes, slope of a line, parallel and
perpendicular lines, intercepts of a line on the coordinate axes.

Straight Lines
Various forms of equations of a line, intersection of lines, angles between two
lines, conditions for concurrence of three lines, distance of a point from a line,
equations of internal and external bisectors of angles between two lines,
coordinates of centroid, orthocentre and circumcentre of a triangle, equation
of family of lines passing through the point of intersection of two lines.

Circles, Conic Sections

Standard form of equation of a circle, general form of the equation of a circle, its
radius and centre, equation of a circle when the end points of a diameter are
given, points of intersection of a line and a circle with the centre at the origin and
condition for a line to be tangent to a circle, equation of the tangent. Sections of
cones, equations of conic sections (parabola, ellipse and hyperbola) in standard
forms, condition for y=mx + c to be a tangent and point (s) of tangency.
JEE ADVANCED
Analytical Geometry
Two Dimensions Cartesian Coordinates, distance between two points, section
formulae, shift of origin.
Equation of a straight line in various forms, angle between two lines, distance of
a point from a line. Lines through the point of intersection of two given lines,
equation of the bisector of the angle between two lines, concurrency of lines,
centroid, orthocentre, incentre and circumcentre of a triangle.
Equation of a circle in various forms, equations of tangent, normal and chord.
Parametric equations of a circle, intersection of a circle with a straight line or a
circle, equation of a circle through the points of intersection of two circles and
those of a circle and a straight line.
Equations of a parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard form, their foci,
directrices and eccentricity, parametric equations, equations of tangent and
normal.
 CHAPTER

01
Coordinate System
and Coordinates
Learning Part
Session 1
● Introduction ● Coordinate Axes
● Rectangular Cartesian Coordinates of a Point ● Polar Coordinates of a Point
● Relation between the Polar and Cartesian Coordinates

Session 2
● Distance between Two Points ● Choice of Axes
● Distance between Two Points in Polar Coordinates

Session 3
● Section formulae ● Centroid of a Triangle
● Incentre ● Some Standard Results
● Area of Triangle

Session 4
● Locus and Its Equation

● Change of Axes or the Transformations of Axes

2
● Removal of the Term xy from F ( x, y ) = ax + 2hxy + by 2 without Changing the Origin
● Position of a Point Which Lies Inside a Triangle

Practice Part
● JEE Type Examples
● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Introduction, Coordinate Axes, Rectangular Cartesian
Coordinates of a Point, Polar Coordinates of a Point,
Relation between the Polar and Cartesian Coordinates

Introduction Rectangular Cartesian

The great philospher and mathematician of France Rane
Descartes (1596-1665) published a book ‘La Geometric’
Coordinates of a Point
in 1637. Let X ′ OX and Y ′ OY be two perpendicular axes in the
Descartes gave a new idea i.e. each point in a plane is plane of paper intersecting at O. Let P be any point in the
expressed by an ordered pair of algebraic real numbers plane of the paper. Draw PM perpendicular to OX. Then
like ( x , y ), (r , θ ) etc., called coordinates of the point. the lengths OM and PM are called the rectangular
The point ( x , y ) is called cartesian coordinates and (r , θ ) is cartesian coordinates or briefly the coordinates of P.
called polar coordinates of the point. Then represents Y
different forms of equations which are developed for all
P (x, y)
types of straight lines and curves.
y
Thus the Coordinate Geometry (or Analytical Geometry) is
that branch of mathematics in which geometrical problems X′ X
O x M
are solved with the help of Algebra.

Coordinate Axes Y′

The position of a point in a plane is determined with Let OM = x and MP = y

reference to two intersecting straight lines called the Then, the position of the point P in the plane with respect
coordinate axes and their point of intersection is called to the coordinate axes is represented by the ordered pair
the origin of coordinates. (x, y). The ordered pair (x, y) is called the coordinates of
If these two axes of reference (generally we call them x point P.
and y axes) cut each other at right angle, they are called i.e. OM = x -coordinate or abscissa of the point P
rectangular axes otherwise they are called oblique and MP = y -coordinate or ordinate of the point P.
axes. The axes divide the coordinate plane in four
Remarks
quadrants. 1. The ordinate of every point on X-axis is 0.
Y 2. The abscissa of every point on Y-axis is 0.
3. The abscissa and ordinate of the origin O(0, 0) are both zero.
II I II Y
4. The abscissa and ordinate of a point are at perpendicular
is

quadrant quadrant
I (α ≠ 90°)
y-axis

quadrant
ax

distance from Y-axis and X-axis respectively.

ue

quadrant
liq

90° α 5. Table for conversion sign of coordinates :

ob

X′ X X′ X
O x-axis O x-axis
III Quadrants XOY X ′OY X ′OY ′ XOY ′
III IV quadrant IV (I) (II) (III) (IV)
quadrant
quadrant quadrant
Y′ Sign of x coordinates + − − +
Y′ Sign of y coordinates + + − −
(a) Rectangular axes (b) Oblique axes Sign of ( x, y ) ( +, + ) ( −, + ) ( −, − ) ( +, −)

6. Equation of X-axis, y = 0 and equation of Y-axis, x = 0.

 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 3

Polar Coordinates of a Point Relation between the Polar

If OP = r (radius vector)
and ∠XOP = θ (vectorial angle) and Cartesian Coordinates
P (r, θ)
Let P ( x , y ) be the cartesian coordinates with respect to
r
axes OX and OY and (r , θ ) be its polar coordinates with
θ respect to pole O and initial line OX.
O X
(Pole) Initial line It is clear from figure
OM = x = r cos θ … (i)
Q (r, – θ) and MP = y = r sin θ …(ii)
Then, the ordered pair of real numbers (r , θ ) called the Y
polar coordinates of the point P. P(x, y)

Remarks r y
1. r may be positive or negative according as θ is measured in
anticlockwise or clockwise direction. θ lies between − π to π i.e. θ
− π < θ ≤ π. If it is greater than π, then we subtract 2π from it O x X
and if it is less than − π, then we add 2π, to it. It is also known M
as principal value of P.
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
2. Always taken θ in radian.
x2 +y2 =r2 or r = ( x 2 + y 2 )
y Example 1. Draw the polar coordinates
Dividing Eqs. (ii) by (i), then
 π  π  π  π
 2 ,  ,  −2 ,  ,  −2 , −  and  2 , −  on the plane. y  y 
 3  3  3  3 tan θ =   or θ = tan −1  
x x
Sol.
S –2, –
π
P 2,
π i.e. (r cos θ, r sin θ ) ⇒ ( x , y ) …(iii)
3 3
 −1  y  
 ( x + y ), tan    ⇒ (r , θ ) …(iv)
2 2
and
2 2   x 
O X If r and θ are known then we can find ( x , y ) from Eq. (iii)
2 2
and if x and y are known then we can find (r , θ ) from
Eq. (iv).
π π
Q –2, R 2, – y 
3 3
Q θ = tan −1  
x
5π
y Example 2. Draw the polar coordinate  3,  on y
 4 If α = tan −1
x
the plane.
Then, values of θ in four quadrants
5π
Sol. Here, θ= >π
4 Quadrant I II III IV
O X θ α π −α −π + α −α
3π
3 4 y Example 3. Find the cartesian coordinates of the
points whose polar coordinates are
P 3, 5π or 3, – 3π
4 4   4   π
(i)  5 , π − tan −1    (ii)  5 2 , 
5π 3π   3  4
then, θ − 2π = − 2π = −
4 4  4
 5π   3π  Sol. (i) Given, r = 5, θ = π − tan −1  
∴ 3,  is same 3, −   3
 4  4
4 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

  4 (ii) Given, x = − 3, y = 4

Now, x = r cos θ = 5 cos  π − tan −1   
  3 ∴ r = ( x 2 + y 2 ) = (9 + 16) = 5
  4
= − 5 cos  tan −1    and α = tan −1
y
 = tan −1  = tan −1  4 
 4
  3 x −3  3
  3  3 Since, point ( −3, 4 ) lies in II quadrant
= − 5 cos  cos −1    = − 5 × = − 3
  5  5  4
∴ θ = π − α = π − tan −1  
 3
  4
and y = r sin θ = 5 sin  π − tan −1   
  3 Hence, polar coordinates of the given points, will be
 −1  4  
  4 5 , π − tan    .
= 5 sin  tan −1     3 
  3
  4 4 y Example 5. Transform the equation r 2 = a 2 cos 2θ
= 5 sin sin −1   = 5 × = 4
  5 5 into cartesian form.
Hence, cartesian coordinates of the given point will be y 
Sol. Q r = (x 2 + y 2 ) and θ = tan −1  
( −3, 4 ). x
π
(ii) Given, r = 5 2, θ = y
4 or r 2 = (x 2 + y 2 ) and tanθ =
x
 π 1
 1 − tan 2 θ 
Now, x = r cos θ = 5 2 cos   = 5 2 × =5
 4 2 Given, r 2 = a 2 cos 2θ = a 2  
 1 + tan 2 θ 
 π 1
and y = r sin θ = 5 2 sin   = 5 2 × =5  y2 
 4 2 1 − 
or ( x 2 + y 2 ) = a2  x2 
Hence, cartesian coordinates of the given point,
 y2 
will be (5, 5). 1 + 
 x2 
y Example 4. Find the polar coordinates of the points or ( x 2 + y 2 )2 = a 2 ( x 2 − y 2 )
whose cartesian coordinates are This is the required equation in cartesian form.
(i) (−2 , − 2) (ii) (−3 , 4) Aliter :
Sol. (i) Given, x = − 2 , y = − 2 r 2 = a 2 cos 2θ
∴ r = (x 2 + y 2 ) = (4 + 4) = 2 2 or r 2 = a 2 (cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ )
x = r cosθ and y = r sinθ
α = tan −1y   −2
 = tan −1  = tan −1 1 = π
Q
and
 x  −2 4 and r 2 = x2 + y2
Since, point ( −2, − 2) lies in III quadrant.  x2 y2
then r 2 = a2  2 − 2 
π 3π r r 
∴ θ= −π +α = −π + = −
4 4
or r 4 = a2 ( x 2 − y 2 )
Hence, polar coordinates of the given points will be
 3π  or ( x 2 + y 2 )2 = a 2 ( x 2 − y 2 ).
2 2, −  .
 4
Remark : If we find θ, from the equation,
y Example 6. Transform the equation x 2 + y 2 = ax into
y −2 polar form.
tanθ = = =1
x −2 Sol. Q x = r cosθ, y = r sinθ
π
then, θ = and then Given, x 2 + y 2 = ax
4
⇒ r 2 = a (r cos θ )
 1 1
( x , y ) = (r cos θ, r sin θ ) = 2 2 × ,2 2 ×  r = a cosθ
 2 2 or
= (2, 2) ≠ ( −2, − 2) This is the required equation in polar form.
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 5

Exercise for Session 1

1. The polar coordinates of the point whose cartesian coordinates are ( −1, − 1) is
π 3π  π 3π 
(a)  2,  (b)  2,  (c)  2, −  (d)  2, − 
 4  4  4  4
  5 
2. The cartesian coordinates of the point whose polar coordinates are 13 , π − tan−1    is
  12 
(a) (12, 5) (b) (−12, 5) (c) (−12, − 5) (d) (12, − 5)

3. The transform equation of r 2 cos 2 θ = a 2 cos 2θ to cartesian form is ( x 2 + y 2 ) x 2 = a 2λ, then value of λ is
(a) y 2 − x 2 (b) x 2 − y 2 (c) xy (d) x 2 y 2

4. The coordinates of P′ in the figure is

P –3, – π
3

X
–π
O
3

P′

π π π π
(a)  3,  (b)  3, −  (c)  −3, −  (d)  −3, 
 3  3  3  3

5. The cartesian coordinates of the point Q in the figure is

π
P 2,
3
Q
2 2
π/3
X
O –π/6
2 2 π
S 2, –
6
R
–2, π
3

(a) ( 3, 1) (b) (− 3, 1) (c) (− 3, − 1) (d) ( 3, − 1)

6. A point lies on X-axis at a distance 5 units from Y-axis. What are its coordinates ?

7. A point lies on Y-axis at a distance 4 units from X-axis. What are its coordinates ?

8. A point lies on negative direction of X-axis at a distance 6 units from Y-axis. What are its coordinates ?

9. Transform the equation y = x tan α to polar form.

10. Transform the equation r = 2 a cos θ to cartesian form.

Session 2
Distance between Two Points, Choice of Axes, Distance
between Two Points in Polar Coordinates

Distance Between Two Points Notations : We shall denote the distance between two
points P and Q of the coordinate plane, either by | PQ | or
Theorem : The distance between two points P ( x 1 , y 1 ) by PQ.
and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) is given by
Corollary 1 : The above formula is true for all positions
| PQ | = ( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 1 ) 2 of the points (i.e. either point or both points are not in the
Proof : Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) be any two points in 1st quadrant) keeping in mind, the proper signs of their
the plane. Let us assume that the points P and Q are both coordinates.
in 1st quadrant (for the sake of exactness). Corollary 2 : The distance of the point P ( x , y ) from the
Y origin O(0, 0 ) is given by
Q (x2, y2)
| OP | = ( x − 0 ) 2 + (y − 0 ) 2 = ( x 2 + y 2 )
y2–y1
(x1, y1)
Corollary 3 : The above formula can also be used as
P
x2– x1
R y2 ( x 1 − x 2 ) 2 + (y 1 − y 2 ) 2
y1 Corollary 4 : (i) If PQ is parallel to X-axis, then y 1 = y 2
and so
X′ X
O L M
x1 | PQ | = ( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 = | x 2 − x 1 |
x2
Y′ (ii) If PQ is parallel to Y-axis, then x 1 = x 2 and so

From P and Q draw PL and QM perpendiculars to X-axis. | PQ | = (y 2 − y 1 ) 2 = | y 2 − y 1 |

From P draw PR perpendicular to QM and join PQ. Then Corollary 5 : If distance between two points is given, then
OL = x 1 , OM = x 2 , PL = y 1 , QM = y 2 use ± sign.
∴ PR = LM = OM − OL = x 2 − x 1
Remarks
and QR = QM − RM = QM − PL = y 2 − y 1 1. If three points A( x1, y1 ), B( x 2, y2 ) and C( x 3, y3 ) are collinear,
Since, PRQ is a right angled triangle, therefore by then AB ± BC = AC
pythagoras theorem. C
( PQ ) 2 = ( PR ) 2 + (QR ) 2
B
∴ | PQ | = ( PR ) 2 + (QR ) 2 (Q PQ is always positive)

= ( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 1 ) 2 A

∴ The distance PQ between the points P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B

Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) is given by ( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 1 ) 2
C
(difference in x coordinates) 2
or A
+ (difference in y coordinates) 2
2. When three points are given and it is required to :
(difference of abscissaes) 2 (i) an Isosceles triangle, show that two of its sides
or (or two angles) are equal.
+ (difference of ordinates) 2
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 7

(ii) an Equilateral triangle, show that its all sides are equal then | PQ | = (a cos α − a cos β )2 + (a sin α − a sin β )2
or each angle is of 60°.
(iii) a Right angle triangle, show that the sum of the = a 2 {(cos α − cos β )2 + (sin α − sin β )2 }
squares of two sides is equal to the square of the third
side. a 2 {cos 2 α + cos 2 β − 2 cos α cos β + sin 2 α
=
(iv) an Isosceles right angled triangle, show that two of its + sin 2 β − 2 sin α sin β }
sides are equal and the sum of the squares of two equal
sides is equal to the square of the third side. = a 2 {1 + 1 − 2(cos α cos β + sin α sin β )}
(v) a Scalene triangle, show that its all sides are unequal.
= a 2 (2 − 2 cos(α − β ))
3. When four points are given and it is required to
(i) a Square, show that the four sides are equal and the = 2a 2 (1 − cos(α − β ))
diagonals are also equal.
(ii) a Rhombus, (or equilateral trapezium) show that the  α − β
= 2a 2 ⋅ 2 sin 2  
four sides are equal and the diagonals are not equal.   2 
(iii) a Rectangle, show that the opposite sides are equal and
the diagonals are also equal. α − β
= 4a 2 sin 2  
(iv) a Parallelogram, show that the opposite sides are equal  2 
and the diagonals are not equal.
  α − β 
(v) a Trapezium, show that the two sides are parallel and =2a sin  
the other two sides are not parallel.   2 
(vi) An Isosceles Trapezium, show that the two sides are   α − β 
parallel and the other two sides are not parallel but equal. = 2asin   (Qa > 0)
  2 
4. If A, B, C be the vertices of a triangle and we have to find the
coordinates of the circumcentre then, let the circumcentre be
P( x, y ) and use PA2 = PB2 and PA2 = PC2 this will give two y Example 9. If the point ( x , y ) be equidistant from the
equations in x and y then solve these two equations and ( x, y ). points (6, − 1) and (2, 3) , prove that x − y = 3 .
Sol. Let P ≡ ( x , y ) , A ≡ (6, − 1) and B ≡ (2, 3)
Important Remarks for By the given condition, PA = PB
Objective Questions ⇒ ( x − 6) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = ( x − 2) 2 + ( y − 3) 2
(i) If ( x 1 , y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) are the ends of the hypotenuse or ( x − 6) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = ( x − 2) 2 + ( y − 3) 2
of a right angled isosceles triangle, then the third or x 2 − 12x + 36 + y 2 + 2y + 1
vertex is given by
= x 2 − 4 x + 4 + y 2 − 6y + 9
 ( x 1 + x 2 ) ± (y 1 − y 2 ) (y 1 + y 2 ) m ( x 1 − x 2 ) 
 ,  8x − 8y = 24
 2 2  or
or x −y =3
(ii) If two vertices of an equilateral triangle are ( x 1 , y 1 )
and ( x 2 , y 2 ), then coordinates of the third vertex are y Example 10. Using distance formula, show that the
 x 1 + x 2 m 3 (y 2 − y 1 ) y 1 + y 2 ± 3 ( x 2 − x 1 ) points (1, 5), (2, 4 ) and ( 3, 3) are collinear.
 , 
 2 2  Sol. Let A ≡ (1, 5), B ≡ (2, 4 ) and C ≡ (3, 3) be the given points,
then
y Example 7. Prove that the distance of the point
| AB| = (1 − 2)2 + (5 − 4 )2 = 2
(a cos α , a sin α ) from the origin is independent of α.
Sol. Let P ≡ (a cos α, a sin α ) and O ≡ (0, 0) C
2
then | OP | = (a cos α − 0) + (a sin α − 0)
2 2
B
= (a 2 cos 2 α + a 2 sin 2 α ) 2
A
= a 2 (cos 2 α + sin 2 α ) = a 2
= | a | , which is independent of α. | BC | = (2 − 3)2 + ( 4 − 3)2 = 2
y Example 8. Find the distance between the points and | AC | = (1 − 3)2 + (5 − 3)2 = 2 2
(a cos α , a sin α ) and (a cos β, a sin β), where a > 0. Clearly, | AB| + | BC | = 2 + 2 = 2 2 = | AC |.
Sol. Let P ≡ (a cos α, a sin α ) and Q ≡ (a cos β, a sin β ) Hence, A, B, C are collinear.
8 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 11. An equilateral triangle has one vertex at | BC | = (3 − 5)2 + (6 − 10)2 = 4 + 16 = 2 5

the point (0, 0) and another at ( 3, 3 ) . Find the
| CD | = (5 − 3)2 + (10 − 2)2 = 4 + 64 = 2 17
coordinates of the third vertex.
Sol. Let O ≡ (0, 0) and A ≡ (3, 3 ) be the given points and | AD | = (1 − 3)2 + ( −2 − 2)2 = 4 + 16 = 2 5
let B ≡ ( x , y ) be the required point. Then | AC | = (1 − 5)2 + ( −2 − 10)2 = 16 + 144 = 4 10
OA = OB = AB
and | BD | = (3 − 3)2 + (6 − 2)2 = 4
Y
D C

(x, y)B

A(3, 3)

A B
X′ X
O Clearly, | AB| = | CD |, | BC | = | AD | and | AC | ≠ | BD |
(0, 0)
Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram.
B(x, y)
Y′ y Example 13. Let the opposite angular points of a
⇒ (OA )2 = (OB )2 = ( AB )2 square be ( 3, 4 ) and (1, − 1). Find the coordinates of the
⇒ ( 3 − 0) 2 + ( 3 − 0) 2 = ( x − 0) 2 + ( y − 0) 2
remaining angular points.
Sol. Let A(3, 4 ) and C(1, − 1) be the given angular points of a
= ( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 3 ) 2
square ABCD and let B( x , y ) be the unknown vertex. Then
⇒ 12 = x 2 + y 2 = x 2 + y 2 − 6x − 2 3y + 12 AB = BC
Taking first two members then ⇒ ( AB )2 = ( BC )2
x 2 + y 2 = 12 …(i)
⇒ ( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 4 ) 2 = ( x − 1) 2 + ( y + 1) 2
and taking last two members, then
⇒ 4 x + 10y − 23 = 0
6x + 2 3y = 12 or y = 3(2 − x ) …(ii)
 23 − 10y 
⇒ x=  …(i)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get  4 
x 2 + 3 (2 − x )2 = 12 A(3, 4)
or 4 x 2 − 12x = 0
D
⇒ x = 0, 3
Putting x = 0, 3 in Eq. (ii), we get y = 2 3, − 3
O
Hence, the coordinates of the third vertex B are (0, 2 3 ) or
(3, − 3 ). B(x, y)

Short Cut Method : According to important note :

C(1, –1)
 x 1 + x 2 m 3( y 2 − y 1 ) y 1 + y 2 ± 3( x 2 − x 1 ) 
 , 
 2 2  Also, in ∆ ABC,
( AB )2 + ( BC )2 = ( AC )2
 0 + 3 m 3( 3 − 0) 0 + 3 ± 3( 3 − 0) 
i.e.  ,  ⇒ ( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 4 ) 2 + ( x − 1) 2 + ( y + 1) 2
 2 2 
3 m 3 3 ± 3 3 = ( 3 − 1) 2 + ( 4 + 1) 2
or  , 
 2 2  ⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 3y − 1 = 0 …(ii)
⇒ (0, 2 3 ) or (3, − 3 ) Substituting the value of x from Eqs. (i) into (ii), we get
2
 23 − 10y   23 − 10y 
 +y − 4   − 3y − 1 = 0
2
y Example 12. Show that four points (1, − 2) , ( 3, 6 ) , 
 4   4 
( 5 , 10) and ( 3 , 2) are the vertices of a parallelogram.
⇒ 4y 2 − 12y + 5 = 0
Sol. Let A ≡ (1, − 2), B ≡ (3, 6), C ≡ (5, 10) and D ≡ (3, 2) be the
or (2y − 1)(2y − 5) = 0
given points. Then
1 5
| AB| = (1 − 3)2 + ( −2 − 6)2 = 4 + 64 = 2 17 ∴ y= or
2 2
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 9

1 9
Putting y = in Eq. (i), we get x = , Also, | AB | = (a − c )2 + (b − d )2
2 2
5 1 = a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + d 2 − 2ac − 2bd
and putting y = in Eq. (i), we get x = −
2 2
 9 1 = r12 + r 22 − 2 (ac + bd ) [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
Hence, the required vertices of the square are  ,  and
 2 2
 1 5 Y
− ,  .
 2 2 A (a , b )

y Example 14. Find the circumcentre of the triangle r1

whose vertices are ( −2, − 3) , ( −1 , 0) and (7, − 6 ) . Also B(c, d)
find the radius of the circumcircle. θ r2
Sol. Let A ≡ ( −2, − 3), B ≡ ( −1, 0) and C ≡ (7, − 6) . X′ X
O
Let P ≡ ( x , y ) be the circumcentre of ∆ABC. Y′
(–1, 0)B
By using Cosine formula in ∆ AOB
(OA )2 + (OB )2 − ( AB )2
(–2, –3)A cos θ =
P (x,
y) 2 ⋅ OA . OB
C(7, –6) r12 + r 22 − (r12 + r 22 − 2 (ac + bd ))
=
2r1 r 2
Since, P is the circumcentre 2(ac + bd ) (ac + bd )
= = …(iii)
∴ | PA | = | PB| = | PC | ⇒ ( PA )2 = ( PB )2 = ( PC )2 2r1 r 2 r1r 2
( x + 2) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = ( x + 1) 2 + ( y − 0) 2 (ac + bd )
= [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
= ( x − 7 ) + ( y + 6)
2 2
(a + b 2 ) (c 2 + d 2 )
2

⇒ x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 13 = x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 1 (ac + bd )
=
= x + y − 14 x + 12y + 85
2 2
(a + b 2 ) (c 2 + d 2 )
2

Taking first two members, we get

Also from Eq. (iii),
x + 3y + 6 = 0 …(i)
r1r 2 cosθ = ac + bd or OA .OB cosθ = ac + bd
and taking 1st and last member then, we get
3x − y − 12 = 0 …(ii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Choice of Axes
x = 3, y = − 3 For simplification we carefully choose the axes or the
Hence, circumcentre is (3, − 3). origin. Some situations are given below :
Radius of the circumcircle
(i) If two lines are perpendicular then point of
= PB = (3 + 1)2 + ( −3 − 0)2 intersection is taken as origin and these lines must be
= 16 + 9 = 5 units taken as the coordinate axes.
(ii) If two fixed points A and B are given then we take
y Example 15. If the line segment joining the points | AB| = 2a and the mid-point of AB as origin ‘O’, line
A(a, b ) and B(c , d ) subtends an angle θ at the origin O, AOB as X-axis and the line perpendicular to AB
prove that through O is taken as Y-axis then the coordinates of
ac + bd the fixed points are ( ±a, 0 ). Similarly if AOB as Y-axis
cos θ =
(a 2 + b 2 )(c 2 + d 2 ) and the line perpendicular to AB through O is taken
as X-axis then the coordinates of the fixed points are
or OA .OB cos θ = ac + bd
(0, ± a ).
Sol. Let OA = r1 and OB = r 2
(iii) If there is a symmetry of any kind then take the
Now, r1 = | OA | = (a 2 + b 2 ) …(i) coordinates of the points in a general way i.e. ( x i , y i ),
i = 1, 2, 3, … etc.
and r 2 = | OB| = (c + d )
2 2
…(ii)
10 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 16. Show that the triangle, the coordinates of y Example 18. Let ABCD be a rectangle and P be any
whose vertices are given by integers, can never be an point in its plane. Show that PA 2 + PC 2 = PB 2 + PD 2
equilateral triangle.
Sol. Let A as the origin and AB and AD as the X and Y-axes
Sol. Let A ≡ (0, 0), B ≡ (a , 0) and C ≡ (b, c ) be the vertices of respectively. Let AB = a and AD = b, then
equilateral triangle ABC where a, b, c are integers then, B ≡ (a , 0) , D ≡ (0, b ) and C ≡ (a , b )
| AB| = | BC | = | CA | Let P ≡ ( α, β )
⇒ ( AB )2 = ( BC )2 = (CA )2 Y P(α, β)
⇒ a 2 = (a − b )2 + c 2 = b 2 + c 2
From first two members, we get (0, b)D C(a, b)

b 2 + c 2 = 2ab …(i)
and taking first and third members, then
b2 + c 2 = a2 …(ii)
X′ X
From Eqs. (i) and (ii) we get A(0, 0) B(a, 0)
a = 2b (Qa ≠ 0) Y′
From Eq. (ii), b 2 + c 2 = (2b )2
Now, LHS = PA + PC 2
2
or c = 3b
2 2
= ( α − 0) 2 + ( β − 0) 2 + ( α − a ) 2 + ( β − b ) 2
or c = ±b 3
= 2α 2 + 2β 2 − 2aα − 2bβ + a 2 + b 2 …(i)
which is impossible, since b and c are integers.
and RHS = PB + PD2 2

y Example 17. In any triangle ABC, show that = ( α − a ) 2 + ( β − 0) 2 + ( α − 0) 2 + ( β − b ) 2

AB 2 + AC 2 = 2 ( AD 2 + BD 2 ) = 2α 2 + 2β 2 − 2aα − 2bβ + a 2 + b 2 …(ii)
where, D is the middle point of BC. From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
PA 2 + PC 2 = PB 2 + PD 2
Sol. Let D as the origin and DC and DY as the X and Y-axes
respectively. Let BC = 2a, then
B ≡ ( −a , 0), C ≡ (a , 0) and let A ≡ (b, c )
Y
Distance between Two Points
A(b, c) in Polar Coordinates
Let O be the pole and OX be the initial line. Let P and Q be
two given points whose polar coordinates are (r1 , θ 1 ) and
X′ X (r2 , θ 2 ) respectively.
B(–a, 0) D (0, 0) C(a, 0)

P(r1, θ1)
Y′

Now, LHS = AB 2 + AC 2 r1
Q(r2, θ2)
= ( b + a ) + ( c − 0) + ( b − a ) + ( c − 0)
2 2 2 2
–θ
2
)
(θ 1 r2
= 2 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) …(i)
θ 1 θ2
and RHS = 2 ( AD 2 + BD 2 ) O X Initial line
(Pole)
= 2 {(b − 0)2 + (c − 0)2 + a 2 }
= 2 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) …(ii) Then, OP = r1 , OQ = r2
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get and ∠ POX = θ 1 , ∠ QOX = θ 2
AB 2 + AC 2 = 2 ( AD 2 + BD 2 ) ∴ ∠ POQ = θ 1 − θ 2
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 11

By using Cosine formula in ∆POQ, ∴ | AB| = | BC | = | CA |

Hence, points A , B, C are the vertices of an equilateral
(OP ) + (OQ ) − ( PQ )
2 2 2
cos( ∠ POQ ) = triangle.
2(OP )(OQ ) Aliter :
π
r12 + r22 − ( PQ ) 2 Q ∠ BAX =
or cos(θ 1 − θ 2 ) = 2
2 r1 r2 π
and ∠ CAX =
∴ | PQ | = (r12 + r22 − 2 r1 r2 cos(θ 1 − θ 2 )) 6

B 3, π
Remark 2
Always taking θ1 and θ2 in radians.

π
y Example 19. Prove that the points (0, 0) ,  3 ,  and
 2
3 C, 3 π
 π  6
 3 ,  are the vertices of an equilateral triangle.
 6 3
π/3
 π  π
Sol. Let A ≡ (0, 0), B ≡ 3,  and C ≡ 3,  π/6
 2  6 X
A(0, 0)
Here, given coordinates are in polar form
π π π
π  ∴ ∠ BAC = − =
∴ | AB| = (02 + 32 − 2 ⋅ 0 ⋅ 3 cos  − 0 = 3 units 2 6 3
2 
Q In ∆ ABC
AB = AC
  π π ∴ ∠ ACB = ∠ ABC = α
| BC | = 32 + 32 − 2 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 3 cos  −   (say)
  2 6  π
∴ α +α + = π
 π 3
= 18 − 18 sin  = (18 − 9 ) = 3 units
 6 π
or α=
3
 π 
and | CA | = 32 + 02 − 2 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 0 cos  − 0  = 3 units Hence, | AB| = | BC | = | CA |.
 6 
12 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 2

1. If the distance between the points (a, 2) and (3, 4) be 8, then a equals to
(a) 2 + 3 15 (b) 2 − 3 15 (c) 2 ± 3 15 (d) 3 ± 2 15

2. The three points ( −2 , 2), (8, − 2) and ( −4, − 3) are the vertices of
(a) an isosceles triangle (b) an equilateral triangle (c) a right angled triangle (d) None of these
 π  5π 
3. The distance between the points 3 ,  and 7,  is
 4  4
(a) 8 (b) 10 (c) 12 (d) 14

4. Let A(6, − 1), B (1, 3) and C( x , 8) be three points such that AB = BC, then the value of x are
(a) 3, 5 (b) −3, 5 (c) 3, − 5 (d) −3, − 5

5. The points (a + 1, 1) , (2a + 1, 3) and (2a + 2 , 2a ) are collinear, if

1 1
(a) a = − 1, 2 (b) a = ,2 (c) a = 2, 1 (d) a = − , 2
2 2

6. If A ≡ (3, 4) and B is a variable point on the lines | x | = 6. If AB ≤ 4 then the number of positions of B with integral
coordinates is
(a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 10 (d) 12

7. The number of points on X-axis which are at a distance c units (c < 3) from (2, 3) is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 0 (d) 3

8. The point on the axis of y which its equidistant from ( −1, 2) and (3 , 4) , is
(a) (0, 3) (b) (0, 4) (c) (0, 5) (d) (0, − 6)

9. Find the distance between the points (at12, 2 at1) and (at 22, 2 at 2 ) , where t1 and t 2 are the roots of the equation
x 2 − 2 3x + 2 = 0 and a > 0.
a 2a  1 1
10. If P (at 2, 2 at ), Q  2 , −  and S(a, 0) be any three points, show that + is independent of t.
t t  SP SQ

11. Prove that the points (3, 4), (8, − 6) and (13, 9) are the vertices of a right angled triangle.

12. Show that the points (0, − 1), (6, 7), ( −2 , 3) and (8, 3) are the vertices of a rectangle.

13. Find the circumcentre and circumradius of the triangle whose vertices are ( −2, 3), (2 , − 1) and (4, 0) .

14. The vertices of a triangle are A(1, 1), B(4, 5) and C(6, 13) . Find cos A.

15. Two opposite vertices of a square are (2 , 6) and (0,−2) . Find the coordinates of the other vertices.

16. If the point ( x , y ) is equidistant from the points (a + b , b − a ) and (a − b , a + b ), prove that bx = ay .

17. If a and b are real numbers between 0 and 1 such that the points (a , 1), (1, b ) and (0, 0) form an equilateral
triangle, find a and b.
18. An equilateral triangle has one vertex at (3, 4) and another at ( −2 , 3). Find the coordinates of the third vertex.

19. If P be any point in the plane of square ABCD, prove that

PA2 + PC 2 = PB 2 + PD 2
Session 3
Section Formula, Centroid of a Triangle, Incentre,
Some Standard Results, Area of Triangle

Section Formula Y

Definition : If P be any point on the line AB between A B(x2, y2)

n
and B then we say that P divides segment AB internally in

)
,y
(x
P
the ratio AP : PB. J
m
P
B A H
A (x1,y1)
B B
P A
A P X′ X
O L N M
Also, if P be any point on the line AB but not between A
Y′
and B ( P may be to the right or the left of the points A, B)
then P divides AB externally in the ratio AP : PB Clearly, the ∆ s AHP and PJB are similar and therefore,
their sides are proportional
Note
AP Positive, in internally division AH PH AP
= ∴ = =
PB Negative, in externally division PJ BJ PB
x − x1 y − y1 m
or = =
(i) Formula for Internal Division x2 − x y2 − y n
(i) (ii) (iii)
Theorem : If the point P ( x , y ) divides the line segment
joining the points A ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B( x 2 , y 2 ) internally in From Eqs. (i) and (iii), we have
the ratio m : n, then prove that x − x1 m
=
mx 2 + nx 1 x2 − x n
x=
m +n ⇒ nx − nx 1 = mx 2 − mx
my 2 + ny 1 ⇒ (m + n ) x = mx 2 + nx 1
y= mx 2 + nx 1
m +n ∴ x=
m +n
Proof : The given points are A ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B ( x 2 , y 2 ). Let
us assume that the points A and B are both in 1st quadrant and from Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we have
(for the sake of exactness). Since P ( x , y ) divides AB y − y1 m
=
internally in the ratio m : n i.e. AP : PB = m : n. From A, B y2 − y n
and P draw AL, BM and PN perpendiculars to X-axis. ⇒ ny − ny 1 = my 2 − my
From A and P draw AH and PJ perpendiculars to PN and
BM respectively, then ⇒ (m + n ) y = my 2 + ny 1
my 2 + ny 1
OL = x 1 , ON = x , OM = x 2 , AL = y 1 , PN = y and BM = y 2 ∴ y=
m +n
∴ AH = LN = ON − OL = x − x 1
Thus, the coordinates of P are
PJ = NM = OM − ON = x 2 − x
 mx 2 + nx 1 my 2 + ny 1 
PH = PN − HN = PN − AL = y − y 1  , .
 m +n m +n 
and BJ = BM − JM = BM − PN = y 2 − y
14 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Corollary 1 : The above section formula is true for all y Example 20. Find the coordinates of the point which
positions of the points (i.e. either point or both points are divides the line segment joining the points ( 5, − 2) and
not in the 1st quadrant), keeping in mind, the proper signs (9, 6 ) in the ratio 3 : 1.
of their coordinates.
Sol. Let the required point be (x , y ), then
Corollary 2 : If P is the mid-point of AB then m = n, the
 3 × 9 + 1 × 5
coordinates of the middle-point of AB are x=  =8
 3+1 
 x1 + x2 y1 + y2 
 ,   3 × 6 + 1 × ( − 2) 
 2 2  and y=  =4
 3+1 
Remarks
1. If P ( α, β ) be the mid-point of AB and if coordinates of A are Thus, the coordinates of the required point are (8, 4 ).
( λ, µ ) then the coordinates of B are ( 2α − λ, 2β − µ ), i.e.
(Double the x-co-ordinate of mid point – x-coordinate of given y Example 21. Find the length of median through A of
point, Double the y-co-ordinate of mid point – y-coordinate of a triangle whose vertices are A ( −1, 3), B (1, − 1) and
given point). C ( 5, 1) .
2. The following diagram will help to remember the section
formula. Sol. Let D be the mid-point of BC, then coordinates of D are
 1 + 5 − 1 + 1
 ,  i.e. (3, 0)
 2 2 
m n
A B A
P (x, y) (–1, 3)
(x1, y1) (x2, y2)
C(5, 1)
3. For finding ratio, use ratio λ : 1, then coordinates of P are
 x1 + λx 2 y1 + λy2  D(3, 0)
 ,  . If λ is positive then divides internally and
 1+ λ 1+ λ 
B(1, –1)
if λ is negative, then divides externally.
4. The straight line ax + by + c = 0 divides the joint of points
A ( x1, y1 ) and B ( x 2, y2 ) in the ratio ∴ Median AD = (3 + 1)2 + (0 − 3)2
AP λ ( ax1 + by1 + c ) = 16 + 9 = 25
= =−
PB 1 ( ax 2 + by2 + c )
= 5 units
0
c=

y Example 22. Determine the ratio in which

by +

y − x + 2 = 0 divides the line joining ( 3, − 1) and (8, 9 ) .

ax +

Sol. Suppose the line y − x + 2 = 0 divides the line segment

λ 1
A P B
joining A (3, − 1) and B (8, 9 ) in the ratio λ : 1 at point P,
(x1, y1) (x2, y2)  8λ + 3 9 λ − 1
then the coordinates of the point P are  , .
 λ +1 λ +1
But P lies on y − x + 2 = 0 therefore
 9 λ − 1  8λ + 3
If ratio is positive, then divides internally and if ratio is negative   −  +2=0
then divides externally.  λ +1  λ +1

Proof : Coordinates of P are  1

 x + λx 2 y1 + λy2  ⇒ 9 λ − 1 − 8λ − 3 + 2λ + 2 = 0
, 
 1+ λ 1+ λ  2
⇒ 3λ − 2 = 0 or λ =
QP lies on the line ax + by + c = 0, then 3
 x + λx 2   y1 + λy2  2
a 1  + b  + c =0 So, the required ratio is : 1, i.e. 2 : 3 (internally) since here
 1+ λ   1+ λ  3
or ( ax1 + by1 + c ) + λ ( ax 2 + by2 + c ) = 0 λ is positive.
λ ( ax1 + by1 + c )
or =−
1 ( ax 2 + by2 + c ) Shortcut method
5. The line joining the points ( x1, y1 ) and ( x 2, y2 ) is divided by the According to Remark 4 :
y x
X-axis in the ratio − 1 and by Y-axis in the ratio − 1 .  − 1 − 3 + 2 2
y2 x2 λ=− =
 9 −8+2 3
6. In square, rhombus, rectangle and parallelogram diagonals
bisect to each other. or λ :1 = 2:3
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 15

y Example 23. The coordinates of three consecutive Shortcut Method

vertices of a parallelogram are (1, 3), ( −1, 2) and (2 , 5). According to Remark 5 :
Then find the coordinates of the fourth vertex. λ y − ( − 3) 1
=− 1 = =
Sol. Let the fourth vertex be D (α, β ). Since ABCD is a 1 y2 6 2
parallelogram, the diagonals bisect to each other. 1
∴ The ratio is : 1 i.e. 1 : 2 (internally)
i.e. mid-point of BD = mid-point of AC 2
 α − 1 β + 2  2 + 1 5 + 3
∴  ,  = ,  y Example 25. The mid-points of the sides of a triangle
 2 2   2 2 
are (1, 2), (0, − 1) and (2 , − 1). Find the coordinates of the
 α − 1 β + 2  3  vertices of a triangle with the help of two unknowns.
or  ,  =  , 4
 2 2  2 
Sol. Let D (1, 2), E (0, − 1) and F (2, − 1) be the mid-points of
, 5) BC , CA and AB respectively.
C(2 Let the coordinates of A be (α, β ) then coordinates of B and
C are ( 4 − α, − 2 − β ) and ( −α, − 2 − β ) respectively
(see note 1)
Q D is the mid-point of B and C
D(1, 2)
A(1, 3) C B
(–α,–2–β) (4–α,–2–β)
B(–1, 2)

On equating abscissaes and ordinates, we get

E F
α −1 3
= or α − 1 = 3 or α = 4 (0, –1) (2, –1)
2 2
β +2
and = 4 or β + 2 = 8 or β = 6
2
A (α, β)
Hence, the coordinates of the fourth vertex D (α, β ) is ( 4, 6).
4 −α −α
y Example 24. In what ratio does X-axis divide the line then 1=
2
segment joining (2 , − 3) and ( 5 , 6 )?
⇒ 1 = 2 − α or α = 1
Sol. Let the given points be A (2, − 3) and B (5, 6). Let AB be −2 − β − 2 − β
divided by the X-axis at P ( x , 0) in the ratio λ : 1 and 2=
2
internally. Considering the ordinate of P, then
⇒ 2 = − 2 − β or β = − 4
λ × 6 + 1 × ( − 3)
0= Hence, coordinates of A , B and C are
λ +1
(1, − 4 ), (3, 2) and ( −1, 2) respectively.
1
or λ=
2 y Example 26. Prove that in a right angled triangle
1 the mid-point of the hypotenuse is equidistant from
∴ The ratio is : 1 i.e. 1 : 2 (Internally)
2 its vertices.
B(5, 6) Sol. Let the given right angled triangle be ABC, with right
angled at B. We take B as the origin and BA and BC as the
X andY -axes respectively.
1 Let BA = a and BC = b
then A ≡ (a , 0) and C ≡ (0, b )
O P(x, 0)
X Let M to be the mid-point of the hypotenuse AC, then
λ a b
coordinates of M are  , 
 2 2

A(2, –3)
16 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y
(ii) Formula for External Division
C(0, b) Theorem : If the point P ( x , y ) divides the line joining the
points A ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B ( x 2 , y 2 ) externally in the ratio m : n
then prove that
a b
M
2 2 mx 2 − nx 1 my 2 − ny 1
x= ,y =
m −n m −n
X′ X Proof : The given points are A ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B ( x 2 , y 2 ). Let
B(0, 0) A(a, 0)
us assume that the points A and B are both in the 1st
Y′ quadrant (for the sake of exactness). Let P ( x , y ) be the
2 2 point which divides AB externally in the ratio m : n, so that
 a  b (a 2 + b 2 )
∴ | AM | = a −  + 0 −  = ... (i) AP m
 2  2 2 = .
BP n
2 2
 a  b (a 2 + b 2 ) Y
| BM | = 0 −  + 0 −  = …(ii)
 2  2 2
P(x, y)
2 2
(a 2 + b 2 )

)
 a  b

y2
and | CM | = 0 −  + b −  = …(iii)

2,
B

(x
 2  2 2 S

From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get

A R
| AM | = | BM | = | CM | (x1,y1)
X′ X
y Example 27 Show that the line joining the mid-points O L M N
of any two sides of a triangle is half the third side.
Y′
Sol. We take O as the origin and OC and OY as the X and Y-axes
respectively. From A, B and P draw AL, BM and PN perpendiculars on
Y
X-axis. Also, from A and B draw AR and BS perpendiculars
on PN ,
A(b, c)
then AR = LN = ON − OL = x − x 1
b–a c a+b c BS = MN = ON − OM = x − x 2
F E
2 2 2 2
PR = PN − RN = PN − AL = y − y 1
X′ X and PS = PN − SN = PN − BM = y − y 2
B(–a, 0) O C(a, 0)
Clearly, the ∆s APR and BPS are similar and therefore their
Y′ sides are proportional.
AP AR PR
Let BC = 2a, then B ≡ ( −a , 0), C ≡ (a , 0) ∴ = =
PB BS PS
Let A ≡ (b, c ), if E and F are the mid-points of sides AC and
m x − x1 y − y1
AB respectively. or = =
a + b c  b − a c 
n x − x2 y − y2
Then, E≡ ,  and F ≡  , 
 2 2  2 2 (i) (ii) (iii)
2 2 From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
 a + b b − a c c 
Now, FE =  −  +  −  =a m x − x1
 2 2   2 2 =
1 1 n x − x2
=
(2a ) = ( BG )
2 2 ⇒ mx − mx 2 = nx − nx 1
Hence, the line joining the mid-points of any two sides of a ⇒ (m − n ) x = mx 2 − nx 1
triangle is half the third side.
mx 2 − nx 1
or x=
m −n
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 17

Also, from Eqs. (i) and (iii), we have Remarks

m y − y1 1. The following diagram will help to remember the section
= formula
n y − y2
+
⇒ my − my 2 = ny − ny 1 –
⇒ (m − n ) y = my 2 − ny 1 n B(x2, y2)
m
my 2 − ny 1
or y=
m −n A(x1, y1)

 mx − nx 1 my 2 − ny 1  m  mx 2 − nx1 my2 − ny1 

= λ, then 
Thus, the coordinates of P are  2 , . 2. Let
 m−n
,
m−n 

 m −n m −n  n
 mx − x m y − y 
(Here, m ≠ n)  n 2 1 2 1  λx 2 − x1 λy2 − y1 
or  m , n  or  , 
Corollary 1 : The above formula is true for all positions of  −1
m
−1   λ −1 λ −1 
the points, keeping in mind, the proper signs of their  n n 
coordinates.
y Example 28. Find the coordinates of a point which
Corollary 2 : The above coordinates can also be expressed
divides externally the line joining (1, − 3) and ( −3, 9 ) in
as
the ratio 1 : 3.
 mx 2 + ( −n ) x 1 my 2 + ( −n ) y 1 
 ,  Sol. Let the coordinates of the required point be P ( x , y ),
 m + ( −n ) m + ( −n ) 
 1 × ( − 3) − 3 × 1
Then, x= 
and this can be thought of as the coordinates of the point  1−3 
dividing AB internally in the ratio m : − n
 1 × 9 − 3 × ( − 3) 
AP m and y= 
Corollary 3 : Q =  1−3 
PB n
i.e. x = 3 and y = −9
P Hence, the required point is (3, − 9 ).
(x, y)
B
y Example 29. The line segment joining A (6, 3) to
A (x2, y2)
(x1, y1) B ( −1, − 4 ) is doubled in length by having its length
added to each end. Find the coordinates of the new
AP m ends.
or −1= −1
PB n Sol. Let P and Q be the required new ends
AP − PB m − n Let the coordinates of P be ( x 1, y1 )
or =
PB n Given, AB = 2AP
AB m − n ⇒
AB 2
=
or = AP 1
PB n
i.e. A divides BP internally in the ratio 2 : 1.
Now, we can say that B divides AP in the ratio m − n : n
internally. P(x1, y1)
(m − n ) x + nx 1 mx 2 − nx 1
i.e. x2 = ⇒ x=
(m − n ) + n m −n A(6, 3)

(m − n ) y + ny 1 my 2 − ny 1
and y2 = ⇒ y=
(m − n ) + n m −n
Corollary 4 : (for proving A, B and C are collinear) B(–1, –4)

If A, B, C three points are collinear then let C divides AB in

the ratio λ : 1 internally. Q(x2, y2)

If λ = + ve rational, then divide internally 2 × x 1 + 1 × ( − 1)

Then, 6=
and if λ = − ve rational, then divide externally. 2+1
18 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

19 y Example 30. Using section formula show that the

⇒ 19 = 2x 1 or x 1 =
2 points (1, − 1), (2 , 1) and (4, 5) are collinear.
2 × y 1 + 1 × ( −4 )
and 3= Sol. Let A ≡ (1, − 1), B ≡ (2, 1) and C ≡ ( 4, 5)
2+1
Suppose C divides AB in the ratio λ : 1 internally, then
13
⇒ 13 = 2y1 or y1 = λ ×2+1×1 C(4, 5)
2 4=
λ +1
 19 13 
∴ Coordinates of P are  ,  . ⇒ 4 λ + 4 = 2λ + 1
 2 2
3
Also, let coordinates of Q be ( x 2 , y 2 ) or λ=−
2
AB 2 B(2, 1)
Given, AB = 2BQ ⇒ = i.e. C divides AB in the
BQ 1 ratio 3 : 2 (externally).
i.e. B divides AQ internally in the ratio 2 : 1 Hence, A , B,C are collinear. A(1, –1)
2 × x2 + 1 × 6
Then −1 =
2+1 y Example 31. Find the ratio in which the point (2 , y )
9 divides the line segment joining (4, 3) and (6, 3) and
⇒ −9 = 2x 2 or x2 = −
2 hence find the value of y.
2 × y2 + 1 × 3 Sol. Let A ≡ ( 4, 3), B ≡ (6, 3) and P ≡ (2, y )
and −4 =
2+1 Let P divides AB internally in the ratio λ : 1
⇒ −15 = 2y 2 or y 2 = −
15 6λ + 4
then, 2= ⇒ 2λ + 2 = 6λ + 4
2 λ +1
 9 15 1
∴ Coordinates of Q are  − , −  ⇒ −4 λ = 2 or λ = −
 2 2 2
Aliter : Q AB = 2AP
AB 2 AB 2 A(2, 3) B(4, 3) C(6, 3)
⇒ = ⇒ +1= +1
AP 1 AP 1 ∴ P divides AB externally in the ratio 1 : 2 (Qλ is negative)
AB + AP 3 BP 3 1×3−2×3
⇒ = ⇒ = Now, y = =3
AP 1 AP 1 1−2
∴ P divides AB externally in the ratio 1 : 3
1 × ( −1) − 3 × 6 19
x1 = =
Then,
1−3 2 (iii) Harmonic Conjugates
1 × ( −4 ) − 3 × 3 13 If four points in a line, then the system is said to form a
and y1 = =
1−3 2 range. Let four points say P , Q , R, S .
 19 13 If the range ( PQ , RS ) has a cross ratio equal to −1, then it is
∴ Coordinates of P are  , 
 2 2 called harmonic.
Also, AB = 2BQ PR SQ PR SP
i.e. . = −1⇒ =− =λ (say)
AB 2 AB 2 RQ SP RQ SQ
⇒ = ⇒ +1= +1
BQ 1 BQ 1 PR λ
AB + BQ 3 AQ 3 ∴ = ⇒ PR : RQ = λ : 1 (internally)
⇒ = ⇒ = RQ 1
BQ 1 BQ 1
SP λ
∴ Q divides AB externally in the ratio 3 : 1 and = − ⇒ PS : SQ = λ : 1 (externally)
3 × ( − 1) − 1 × 6 9 SQ 1
then, x 2 = =−
3−1 2 S
3 × ( −4 ) − 1 × 3 15 R
and y2 = =− Q
3−1 2 P
 9 15
∴ Coordinates of Q are  − , −  . Hence, R and S are called the harmonic conjugates to
 2 2
each other with respect to the points P and Q.
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 19

y Example 32 Find the harmonic conjugates of the  x + x 3 y2 + y 3 

D ≡ 2 , 
point R ( 5, 1) with respect to the points P (2 , 10) and  2 2 
Q (6, − 2).
 x + x1 y 3 + y1 
Sol. Let S (α , β ) (be the harmonic conjugates of the point R(5, 1 )). E ≡ 3 , 
 2 2 
Suppose R divides PQ in the ratio λ : 1 internally, then S
divides PQ in the ratio λ : 1 externally, then  x + x2 y1 + y2 
and F ≡ 1 , 
P(2, 10)  2 2 
Y

A(x1, y1)
x3+x1 y3+y1
R(5, 1) E 2 2
x1+x2 y1+y2
Q(6, –2) F C(x3, y3)
2 2 G

D x2+x3 y2+y3
S(α, β) 2 2
B(x2, y2)
X′
6λ + 2 O
X
5= ⇒ 5λ + 5 = 6λ + 2
λ +1 Y′
∴ λ =3
The coordinates of a point dividing AD in the ratio 2 : 1 are
−2λ + 10
Also, 1=   x2 + x 3  y2 + y 3  
λ +1  2⋅  + 1⋅ x 1 2 ⋅   + 1⋅y1 
λ + 1 = − 2λ + 10 ⇒ 3λ = 9   2 
,
 2  
 2 +1 2 +1 
∴ λ =3  
 
3×6−1×2
Now, α= =8
3−1  x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 
or  , 
3 × ( −2) − 1 × 10  3 3 
and β=
3−1 and the coordinates of a point dividing BE in the ratio 2 : 1
= −8 are
Hence, harmonic conjugates of R(5, 1) is S(8, − 8).   x 3 + x1  y 3 + y1  
2 ⋅   + 1⋅ x 2 2 ⋅   + 1⋅y2 
  2 
,
 2  
Centroid of a Triangle 


2 +1 2 +1 


Definition : The point of intersection of the medians of
 x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 
a triangle is called the centroid of the triangle and it or  , 
divides the median internally in the ratio 2 : 1.  3 3 
Theorem : Prove that the coordinates of the centroid of Similarly the coordinates of a point dividing CF in the
the triangle whose vertices are ( x 1 , y 1 ),( x 2 , y 2 ) and ratio 2 : 1 are
( x 3 , y 3 ) are  x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 
 , 
 x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3   3 3 
 , 
 3 3  ∴ The common point which divides AD , BE and CF in the
Also, deduce that the medians of a triangle are concurrent. ratio 2 : 1 is
Proof : Let A ≡ ( x 1 , y 1 ), B ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ≡ ( x 3 , y 3 ) be  x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 
 , 
the vertices of the triangle ABC. Let us assume that the  3 3 
points A, B and C are in the 1st quadrant (for the sake of
Hence, medians of a triangle are concurrent and the
exactness) whose medians are AD , BE and CF respectively
coordinates of the centroid are
so D , E and F are respectively the mid-points of BC , CA
and AB then the coordinates of D , E , F are  x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 
 , 
 3 3 
20 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Important Theorem Corollary 2 : If two vertices of a triangle are ( x 1 , y 1 ) and

( x 2 , y 2 ) and the coordinates of centroid are (α, β), then
Centroid of the triangle obtained by joining the middle coordinates of the third vertex are
points of the sides of a triangle is the same as the centroid (3α − x 1 − x 2 , 3β − y 1 − y 2 )
of the original triangle.
Corollary 3 : According to important theorem ∆s ABC
Or and DEF are similar
If (a 1 , b 1 ), (a 2 , b 2 ) and (a 3 , b 3 ) are the mid-points of the
Area of ∆ABC ( BC ) 2
sides of a triangle, then its centroid is given by ∴ =
Area of ∆DEF ( EF ) 2
 a1 + a2 + a 3 b1 + b2 + b 3 
 ,  4 { (a 2 − a 3 ) 2 + (b 2 − b 3 ) 2 }
 3 3 
= =4
Proof : Let D , E , F are the mid-points of BC , CA and AB {(a 2 − a 3 ) 2 + (b 2 − b 3 ) 2 }
respectively now let coordinates of A are (α, β) then ∴ Area of ∆ ABC = 4 × Area of ∆DEF
coordinates of B and C are (2a 3 − α, 2b 3 − β) and i.e. Area of a triangle is four times the area of the triangle
(2a 2 − α, 2b 2 − β) are respectively. formed by joining the mid-points of its sides.
A(α, β)
y Example 33. Two vertices of a triangle are ( −1, 4 ) and
( 5 , 2) . If its centroid is (0, − 3) , find the third vertex.
(a 3 , b 3 ) F E(a2, b2) Sol. Let the third vertex be ( x , y ) then the coordinates of the
centroid of triangle are
 −1 + 5 + x 4 + 2 + y   4 + x 6 + y
 ,  i.e.  , 
B D(a1, b1) C  3 3   3 3 
 4 + x 6 + y
Now,  ,  = (0, − 3)
Q D (a 1 , b 1 ) is the mid-point of B and C, then  3 3 
2a 1 = 2a 3 − α + 2a 2 − α ⇒ α = a2 + a 3 − a1 4+x 6+y
⇒ = 0 and =−3
and 2b 1 = 2b 3 − β + 2b 2 − β ⇒ β = b 2 + b 3 − b 1 3 3
⇒ 4 + x = 0 and y + 6 = − 9
Now, coordinates of B are (2a 3 − α, 2b 3 − β)
or x = − 4 and y = − 15
or (a 3 + a 1 − a 2 , b 3 + b 1 − b 2 )
Hence, the third vertex is ( −4, − 15).
and coordinates of C are (2a 2 − α, 2b 2 − β)
or (a 2 + a 1 − a 3 , b 2 + b 1 − b 3 ) Shortcut Method
Hence, coordinates of A, B and C are According to corollary 2
A ≡ (a 2 + a 3 − a 1 , b 2 + b 3 − b 1 ), ( x , y ) = (3 × 0 − ( −1) − 5, 3 × ( −3) − 4 − 2)
B ≡ (a 3 + a 1 − a 2 , b 3 + b 1 − b 2 ) = ( −4, − 15)
and C ≡ (a 2 + a 1 − a 3 , b 2 + b 1 − b 3 ) y Example 34. The vertices of a triangle are
∴ Coordinates of centroid of triangle ABC are (1, 2), (h, − 3) and ( −4, k ). Find the value of
 a1 + a2 + a 3 b1 + b2 + b 3 
 ,  {(h + k ) 2 + (h + 3k ) 2 }. If the centroid of the triangle
 3 3 
which is same as the centroid of triangle DEF . be at the point ( 5, − 1) .
Corollary 1 (Finger Rule) : If mid-points of the sides of a 1+h − 4 2−3+k
triangle are ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ) and ( x 3 , y 3 ), then Sol. Here, = 5 and = −1
3 3
coordinates of the original triangle are then, we get h = 18, k = −2
(x 2 + x 3 − x 1 , y 2 + y 3 − y 1 ) , ∴ = (h + k )2 + (h + 3k )2
(x 3 + x 1 − x 2 , y 3 + y 1 − y 2 )
= (18 − 2)2 + (18 − 6)2
and (x 1 + x 2 − x 3 , y 1 + y 2 − y 3 ) .
= (162 + 122 ) = 20
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 21

y Example 35. If D ( −2 , 3), E (4, − 3) and F (4, 5) are the Hence, (| AG | 2 + | BG | 2 − | CG | 2 )

mid-points of the sides BC , CA and AB of triangle ABC,  64 16 16 
=  × 10 + × 58 − × 34
then find (| AG | 2 + | BG | 2 − | CG | 2 ) where, G is the 9 9 9 
centroid of ∆ ABC. 32
= (20 + 29 − 17 )
Sol. Let the coordinates of A be (α, β ) 9
then coordinates of B are (8 − α, 10 − β )  32  32
=  × 32 =
and coordinates of C are (8 − α, − 6 − β ) 9  3
Q D is the mid-point of BC, then
8−α +8−α y Example 36. If G be the centroid of the ∆ABC and O
= −2
2 be any other point in the plane of the triangle ABC,
10 − β − 6 − β then show that
and =3
2 OA 2 + OB 2 + OC 2 = GA 2 + GB 2 + GC 2 + 3GO 2 .
i.e. α = 10 and β = − 1 Sol. Let G be the origin and GO be X-axis.
B(–2, 11) O ≡ (a, 0), A ≡ ( x 1, y1 ), B ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 )
and C ≡ ( x 3 , y 3 )
Now, LHS = OA 2 + OB 2 + OC 2
F(4, 5)
= ( x 1 − a )2 + y12 + ( x 2 − a )2 + y 22 + ( x 3 − a )2 + y 32
(–2, 3)D
= ( x 12 + x 22 + x 32 ) + (y12 + y 22 + y 32 )
A(10, –1)
− 2a ( x 1 + x 2 + x 3 ) + 3a 2
E(4, –3)
 x1 + x 2 + x 3 
Q = 0
C(–2, –5) = ∑ x 12 + ∑y12 − 0 + 3a 2 3
 
 i.e., x 1 + x 2 + x 3 = 0
∴ Coordinates of A , B, C are (10, − 1), ( −2, 11) and ( −2, − 5)
respectively. = ∑ x 12 + ∑y12 + 3a 2 ...(i)
Now, coordinates of centroid and RHS = GA + GB + GC + 3GO
2 2 2 2

 10 − 2 − 2 −1 + 11 − 5
G≡ ,  = x 12 + y12 + x 22 + y 22 + x 32 + y 32 + 3 {(a − 0)2 }
 3 3 
 5
= ∑ x 12 + ∑y12 + 3a 2 ... (ii)
i.e. G ≡ 2, 
 3 Hence, from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
2 OA 2 + OB 2 + OC 2 = GA 2 + GB 2 + GC 2 + 3GO 2 .
 5
∴ AG = (10 − 2) +  −1 − 
2
 3 y Example 37. If G be the centroid of ∆ ABC, show
 64  8 that
= 64 +  = (10)
 9 3 AB 2 + BC 2 + CA 2 = 3 (GA 2 + GB 2 + GC 2 ) .
2 Sol. We take B as the origin and BC and BY as the X and
 5
BG = ( −2 − 2)2 + 11 −  Y-axes respectively.
 3
Y
(28)2 4
= 16 + = (58) A (h , k )
9 3
2
 5
and CG = ( −2 − 2)2 +  −5 − 
 3 G

 400 4 X′ X
= 16 +  = (34 ) B(0, 0) C(a, 0)
 9  3
Y′
22 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Let BC = a, then B ≡ (0, 0) and C ≡ (a , 0)

and let A ≡ (h , k ) Incentre
then, coordinates of G will be Definition : The point of intersection of internal angle
 h + 0 + a k + 0 + 0 h + a k  bisectors of triangle is called the incentre of the triangle.
 ,  , i.e.  , 
 3 3   3 3
Theorem : Prove that the coordinates of the incentre of a
Take ∆ ABC as in 1st quadrant (for the sake of exactness). triangle whose vertices are
Now, LHS = ( AB )2 + ( BC )2 + (CA )2 A ( x 1 , y 1 ), B ( x 2 , y 2 ), C ( x 3 , y 3 ) are
= ( h − 0) 2 + ( k − 0) 2 + a 2 + ( h − a ) 2 + ( k − 0) 2  ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 ay 1 + by 2 + cy 3 
 , 
= 2h 2 + 2k 2 − 2ah + 2a 2 ... (i)  a +b +c a +b +c 
RHS = 3 ((GA ) + (GB ) + (GC ) )
2 2 2
where, a, b, c are the lengths of sides BC, CA and AB
2 respectively.
  a + h 
2
k 
2
a + h 
= 3  − h +  − k  +  − 0 Also, prove that the internal bisectors of the angles of a
  3  3   3  triangle are concurrent.
2 2 2
 k   a + h   k   Proof : Given A ≡ ( x 1 , y 1 ), B ( x 2 , y 2 ), C ≡ ( x 3 , y 3 ) be the
+  − 0 +  − a +  − 0 
3   3  3   vertices of ∆ ABC and BC = a, CA = b and AB = c . Let AD

be the bisector of A. We know that the bisector of an angle
3
= {(a − 2h )2 + ( −2k )2 + (a + h )2 + k 2 of a triangle divides the opposite side in the ratio of the
9
sides containing the triangle.
+ (h − 2a )2 + k 2 } BD AB c
1 ∴ = = ... (i)
= {6a + 6h + 6k − 6ah }
2 2 2 DC AC b
3
A(x1, y1)
= 2h 2 + 2k 2 − 2ah + 2a 2 ... (ii)
Hence, from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get A/2 A/2
AB 2 + BC 2 + CA 2 = 3 (GA 2 + GB 2 + GC 2 ) c b+c : a b
F E
y Example 38. The vertices of a triangle are (1, a ), (2, b ) I
and (c 2 , − 3) B/2 C/2
B/2 C/2
(i) Prove that its centroid can not lie on the Y-axis. B (x2, y2) D C(x3, y3)
(ii) Find the condition that the centroid may lie on the c:b
X-axis. Hence, D divides BC in the ratio c : b
Sol. Centroid of the triangle is  cx + bx 2 cy 3 + by 2 
 1 + 2 + c 2 a + b − 3  3 + c 2 a + b − 3 ∴ Coordinates of D are  3 , 
G≡ ,  i.e.  ,   c +b c +b 
 3 3   3 3 
DC b DC b
(i)Q G will lie on Y-axis, then From Eq. (i), = or +1= +1
BD c BD c
3 + c2
=0 DC + BD  b + c  a b +c 
3 or =  or = 
BD  c  BD  c 
⇒ c2 = −3
c = ±i 3 ac
or ∴ BD =
Q Both values of c are imaginary. (b + c )
Hence, G can not lie on Y-axis. Also, in ∆ ABD, BI is the bisector of B.
a+b−3 AI AB c b +c
(ii) QG will lie on X-axis, then =0 Then, = = =
3 ID BD  ac  a
⇒ a+b−3=0  
b +c 
or a+b=3
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 23

∴ I divides AD in the ratio b + c : a BD = BF = β

∴ Coordinates of I are CD = CE = γ
 cx 3 + bx 2 cy + by 2  Also, a = BC = BD + DC = β + γ ....(i)
 (b + c ) ⋅ + a ⋅ x 1 (b + c ) ⋅ 3 + b ⋅y1 
 c +b c +b  b = CA = CE + AE = γ + α …(ii)
,
 b +c +a b +c +a  and c = AB = AF + BF = α + β …(iii)
 
  Adding all, we get
 ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 ay 1 + by 2 + cy 3  a + b + c = 2 (α + β + γ )
i.e.  , 
 a +b +c a +b +c  or 2s = 2 (α + β + γ )
Similarly we can show that the coordinates of the point ∴ s =α +β + γ
which divides BE internally in the ratio c + a : b and the From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
coordinates of the point which divides CF internally in the
α = s − a, β = s − b , γ = s − c
ratio a + b : c will be each
 ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 ay 1 + by 2 + cy 3  y Example 39. Find the coordinates of incentre of the
 ,  triangle whose vertices are (4, − 2) , ( −2 , 4 ) and ( 5 , 5).
 a +b +c a +b +c 
ab bc Sol. Let A ( 4, − 2), B ( −2, 4 ) and C (5, 5) be the vertices of the
and CE = , AE = , given triangle. Then
(c + a ) (c + a )
a = BC = ( −2 − 5)2 + ( 4 − 5)2 = 50 = 5 2
bc ac
AF = , BF = b = CA = (5 − 4 )2 + (5 + 2)2 = 50 = 5 2
a +b a +b
Thus, the three internal bisectors of the angles of a and c = AB = ( 4 + 2)2 + ( −2 − 4 )2 = 72 = 6 2
triangle meet in a point I. C
a
 ax + bx 2 + cx 3 ay 1 + by 2 + cy 3  (5, 5)
I ≡ 1 ,  B
 a +b +c a +b +c  (–2, 4)

Corollary 1 : If ∆ ABC is equilateral, then a = b = c c

b

 x + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 
incentre =  1 ,  = centroid
 3 3 
A(4, –2)
i.e. incentre and centroid coincide in equilateral, triangle.
Corollary 2 : AE = AF = s − a Let ( x , y ) be the coordinates of incentre of ∆ ABC. Then
BD = BF = s − b ax + bx 2 + cx 3
x= 1
a+b+c
CD = CE = s − c
A 5 2 × 4 + 5 2 × ( − 2) + 6 2 × 5
=
5 2 +5 2 +6 2
A/2 A/2 20 2 − 10 2 + 30 2
=
F E
16 2
40 5
= =
I 16 2
C/2
B/2
ay + by 2 + cy 3
B/2 C/2 and y= 1
a+b+c
B D C
a +b +c 5 2 × ( − 2) + 5 2 × 4 + 6 2 × 5
=
where, s= 5 2 +5 2 +6 2
2
40 5
and | BC | = a, | CA | = b, | AB| = c = =
16 2
Proof : Let AE = AF = α
 5 5
∴ The coordinates of the incentre are  , 
(Q Lengths of tangents are equal  2 2
from a point to a circle)
24 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 40. If  , 0 ,  , 6 and ( −1, 6 ) are

3 3 Sol. Let coordinate of A be (1, 1) and mid-points of AB and AC
2  2  are F and E.
∴ F ≡ ( −2, 3) and E ≡ (5, 2)
mid-points of the sides of a triangle, then find
Y
(i) Centroid of the triangle B(–5, 5)
(ii) Incentre of the triangle D(2, 4)
C(9, 3)
Sol. Let A ≡ (α, β ), then coordinates of B ≡ ( −2 − α, 12 − β ) and (–2, 3) F
E(5, 2)
coordinates of C ≡ (3 − α, 12 − β ). But mid-point of BC is A(1, 1)
3  X¢
O
X
 , 0
2 
Y¢
A(–1, 12)
Hence, coordinates of B and C are (2 × ( −2) − 1, (2 × 3 − 1)
and (2 × 2 − ( −5), 2 × 4 − 5) respectively.
i.e. B ≡ ( −5 ,5) and C ≡ (9, 3)
F E
3,
6  1 − 5 + 9 1 + 5 + 3 5 
2 Then, centroid is  ,  i.e.,  , 3
(–1, 6)  3 3  3 
Also, a = BC = ( −5 − 9 )2 + (5 − 3)2 = 200 = 10 2

B D C b = CA = (9 − 1)2 + (3 − 1)2 = 68 = 2 17
(–1, 0) 3, (4, 0)
2
0 and c = AB = (1 + 5)2 + (1 − 5)2 = 52 = 2 13
then 3 = − 2 − α + 3 − α Then, incentre is
⇒ α = −1  10 2 × 1 + 2 17 × ( −5) + 2 13 × 9
 ,
and 0 = 12 − β + 12 − β  10 2 + 2 17 + 2 13
⇒ β = 12
10 2 × 1 + 2 17 × 5 + 2 13 × 3
∴ Coordinates of vertices are 
10 2 + 2 17 + 2 13 
A ≡ ( −1, 12), B ≡ ( −1, 0) and C ≡ ( 4, 0)
(i) Centroid : The centroid of ∆ ABC is  5 2 − 5 17 + 9 13 5 2 + 5 17 + 3 13 
i.e.  , 
 x 1 + x 2 + x 3 y1 + y 2 + y 3   5 2 + 17 + 13 5 2 + 17 + 13 
 , 
 3 3 
y Example 42. If G be the centroid and I be the
 −1 − 1 + 4 12 + 0 + 0 2 
or 

,  i.e.  , 4
 3 
incentre of the triangle with vertices A( −36, 7 ), B(20, 7 )
3 3 25
(ii) Incentre : We have and C(0, − 8 ) and GI = (205) λ, then find the value
3
a = BC = ( −1 − 4 )2 + (0 − 0)2 = 5 of λ.
b = CA = ( 4 + 1)2 + (0 − 12)2 = 13 Sol. Coordinates of centroid are
 16 
and c = AB = ( −1 + 1) + (12 − 0) = 12
2 2
G ≡  − , 2
 3 
∴ The incentre of ∆ ABC is
 ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 ay1 + by 2 + cy 3  and a = BC = (20 − 0)2 + (7 + 8)2
 , 
 a+b+c a+b+c  = 625 = 25
 5 × ( −1) + 13 × ( −1) + 12 × 4 5 × 12 + 13 × 0 + 12 × 0 b = CA = (0 + 36)2 + ( − 8 − 7 )2
or  , 
 5 + 13 + 12 5 + 13 + 12  = 1521 = 39
i.e. (1, 2)
c = AB = ( −36 − 20)2 + (7 − 7 )2
y Example 41. If a vertex of a triangle be (1, 1) and the = (56)2 = 56
middle points of two sides through it be ( − 2, 3) and
Therefore, the coordinates of incentre are
( 5, 2), then find the centroid and the incentre of the
triangle.  25 × ( −36) + 39 × 20 + 56 × 0 25 × 7 + 39 × 7 + 56 × ( −8)
I ≡ , 
 25 + 39 + 56 25 + 39 + 56 
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 25

Y
i.e., I ≡ ( − 1, 0) B(2, 8)
2
 16  (205)
∴ GI =  − + 1 + (2 − 0)2 =
 3  3 F(3, 4)
25
but given GI = (205) λ D (1, 1)
3 X¢ X
O A (4, 0)
1 25
∴ (205) = (205) λ
3 3 E (2, –3)
1
⇒ λ=
25 C (0, –6)
Y¢

Some Standard Results then B ≡ (6 − α, 8 − β )

and C ≡ ( 4 − α, − 6 − β )
1. Excentres of a Triangle Also, D is the mid-point of B and C, then
This is the point of intersection of the external bisectors of 6−α + 4 −α
1= ⇒α = 4
the angles of a triangle. 2
8−β −6−β
1)

and 1 = ⇒β = 0
,y

2
(x1

A
I3 I2 ∴ A ≡ ( 4, 0), B ≡ (2, 8) and C ≡ (0, − 6), then
a = | BC | = (2 − 0)2 + (8 + 6)2 = 200 = 10 2
(x2, y2)B C(x3, y3)
b = | CA | = (0 − 4 )2 + ( −6 − 0)2 = 52 = 2 13
I1
and c = | AB | = ( 4 − 2)2 + (0 − 8)2 = 68 = 2 17
Hence, the coordinates of the excentre opposite to A are
The circle opposite to the vertex A is called the escribed  −ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 ay1 + by 2 + cy 3 
circle opposite A or the circle escribed to the side BC. If I 1  , 
 −a + b + c −a + b + c 
is the point of intersection of internal bisector of ∠ BAC
 −10 2 × 4 + 2 13 × 2 + 2 17 × 0
and external bisector of ∠ ABC and ∠ ACB, then i.e.,  ,
 −10 2 + 2 13 + 2 17
 ax − bx 2 − cx 3 ay 1 − by 2 − cy 3 
I1 ≡  1 ,  −10 2 × 0 + 2 13 × 8 + 2 17 × ( −6)
 a −b −c a −b −c  
−10 2 + 2 13 + 2 17 
 − ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 − ay 1 + by 2 + cy 3 
or I1 ≡  ,   −20 2 + 2 13 8 13 − 6 17 
 −a + b + c −a + b + c  or  , 
 −5 2 + 13 + 17 −5 2 + 13 + 17 
 ax − bx 2 + cx 3 ay 1 − by 2 + cy 3 
Similarly, I 2 ≡  1 ,  2. Circumcentre of a Triangle
 a −b +c a −b +c 
The circumcentre of a triangle is the point of intersection of
 ax + bx 2 − cx 3 ay 1 + by 2 − cy 3  the perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle (i.e., the
and I3 ≡ 1 , 
 a +b −c a +b −c  lines through the mid-point of a side and perpendicular to
it). Let A( x 1 , y 1 ),B( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) be the vertices of
where, | BC | = a, | CA| = b and | AB| = c
∆ABC and if angles of ∆ABC are given, then coordinates
of circumcentre
A
y Example 43. If the coordinates of the mid-points of
sides BC , CA and AB of triangle ABC are (1, 1), (2, − 3)
and ( 3, 4 ) , then find the excentre opposite to the F E
vertex A. O
Sol. Let D (1, 1), E(2, − 3) and F(3, 4 ) are the mid-points of the
sides of the triangle BC , CA and AB respectively. Let B D C
A ≡ ( α, β )
26 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

 x 1 sin 2 A + x 2 sin 2 B + x 3 sin 2C Two Important Tricks for Circumcentre

are  ,
 sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2C (a) If angles of triangle ABC are not given and the
vertices A( x 1 , y 1 ), B( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) are given,
y 1 sin 2 A + y 2 sin 2 B + y 3 sin 2C 
 then the circumcentre of the ∆ABC is given by
sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2C 
 ( x 1 + x 2 ) + λ(y 1 − y 2 ) (y 1 + y 2 ) − λ( x 1 − x 2 ) 
 , 
Or  2 2 
 ax 1 cos A + bx 2 cos B + cx 3 cos C Here, we observe that
 ,
 a cos A + b cos B + c cos C
x 1 − x 3 y1 − y 3 
P =
ay 1 cos A + by 2 cos B + cy 3 cos C  x 2 − x 3 y 2 − y 3 

a cos A + b cos B + c cos C  → →
R1 ⋅ R2
where, | BC | = a, | CA| = b and | AB| = c ∴ λ=
| P|
y Example 44. In a ∆ABC with vertices A(1, 2), B(2, 3) (b) If the angle C is given instead of coordinates of the
 1  vertex C and the vertices A( x 1 , y 1 ), B( x 2 , y 2 ) of
and C( 3, 1) and ∠A = ∠B = cos −1  ,
 10  ∆ABC are given, then the circumcentre of ∆ABC is
 4 given by
∠C = cos −1   , then find the circumcentre of ∆ABC .  ( x 1 + x 2 ) ± cot C (y 1 − y 2 ) (y 1 + y 2 ) ± cot C ( x 1 − x 2 ) 
 5  , 
 2 2 
 1 
Sol. Since, ∠A = ∠B = cos −1  
 10 
Remark
1 Circumcentre of the right angled triangle ABC, right angled at A
⇒ cos A = cos B =
10 is B + C.
3 2
then, sin A = sin B =
10 y Example 45. Find the circumcentre of the triangle
3 1 3 whose vertices are (2, 2), (4, 2) and (0, 4).
∴ sin 2A = sin 2B = 2 × × =
10 10 5
Sol. Let the given points are ( x 1, y1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ) and ( x 3 , y 3 ) respec-
 4
and ∠C = cos −1   tively.
 5 for the matrix
⇒ cosC =
4
then, sinC =
3  x 1 − x 3 y1 − y 3  2 −2
5 5 P= = 
x 2 − x 3 y 2 − y 2  4 −2
3 4 24
∴ sin2C = 2 × × = → →
5 5 25 R1⋅ R 2
∴ λ=
Let the circumcenter be ( x , y ), then | P|
x sin 2A + x 2 sin 2B + x 3 sin 2C 2 × 4 + ( −2) × ( −2) 12
x= 1 = = =3
sin 2A + sin 2B + sin 2C 2 × ( − 2) − 4 × ( − 2) 4
3 3 24 ∴ Circumcentre of the triangle
1× +2× +3×
= 5 5 25 = 13  ( x + x 2 ) + λ (y 1 − y 2 ) (y 1 + y 2 ) − λ ( x 1 − x 2 )
3 3 24 6 ≡ 1 , 
+ +  2 2 
5 5 25
 2 + 4 + 3( 2 − 2) 2 + 2 − 3( 2 − 4 ) 
y sin 2A + y 2 sin 2B + y 3 sin 2C ≡ , 
and y= 1  2 2 
sin 2A + sin 2B + sin 2C
≡ (3, 5)
3 3 24
2× +3× +1×
= 5 5 25 = 11 y Example 46. Find the circumcentre of triangle ABC if
3 3 24
+ + 6 π
5 5 25 A ≡ (7, 4 ), B ≡ ( 3, − 2) and ∠C = .
3
 13 11
Hence, coordinates of circumcenter are  ,  . π
 6 6 Sol. Here, x 1 = 7, y1 = 4, x 2 = 3, y 2 = − 2 and ∠C =
3
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 27

∴ The circumcentre of ∆ABC y Example 47. Find the orthocentre of ∆ABC if

 ( x + x 2 ) ± cot C (y1 − y 2 ) (y1 + y 2 ) m cot C ( x 1 − x 2 ) A ≡ (0, 0), B ≡ ( 3, 5) and C ≡ (4, 7 ).
≡ 1 , 
 2 2 
Sol. Here, x 1 = 3, y1 = 5, x 2 = 4, y 2 = 7
 1 1  3× 4 +5×7
 ( 7 + 3) ± ( 4 + 2) ( 4 − 2) m ( 7 − 3)  ∴ λ= = 47
≡ 3 , 3  3×7 − 4 ×5
 2 2 
  ⇒ Orthocentre of ∆ABC ≡ ( 47(7 − 5), − 47( 4 − 3))
≡ (94, − 47 )
 2  2
≡ 5 + 3, 1 −  or 5 − 3, 1 + 
 3   3 4. Nine Point Centre of a Triangle
3. Orthocentre of a Triangle If a circle passing through the feet of perpendiculars (i.e.,
The orthocentre of a triangle is the point of intersection of D , E , F ) mid-points of sides BC , CA, AB respectively (i.e.,
altitudes H , I , J ) and the n x
(i.e., the lines through the vertices and perpendicular to mid-points of the line joining the orthocentre O to the
opposite sides). angular points A, B, C (i.e., K , L, M ) thus the nine points
D , E , F , H , I , J , K , L, M all lie on a circle.
Let A( x 1 , y 1 ), B( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) be the vertices of
∆ABC and if angles of ∆ABC are given, then coordinates A K
E
of orthocentre are F
O
A
E
F J I
N
H L G
M

B D C
B D H C
 x 1 tan A + x 2 tan B + x 3 tan C This circle is known as nine point circle and its centre is
 ,
 tan A + tan B + tan C called the nine point centre. The nine-point centre of a
y 1 tan A + y 2 tan B + y 3 tan C  triangle is collinear with the circumcentre and the
 orthocentre and bisects the segments joining them and
tan A + tan B + tan C 
radius of nine point circle of a triangle is half the radius of
 ax 1 sec A + bx 2 sec B + cx 3 sec C the circumcircle.
or  ,
 a sec A + b sec B + c sec C Corollary 1 : The orthocentre, the nine point centre, the
centroid and the circumcentre therefore all lie on a
ay 1 sec A + by 2 sec B + cy 3 sec C 
 straight line.
a sec A + b sec B + c sec C 
Corollary 2 : If O is orthocentre, N is nine point centre, G
where, | BC | = a, | CA | = b and | AB | = c is centroid and C is circumcentre, then to remember it see
Important trick for orthocentre : ONGC (i.e. Oil Natural Gas Corporation) in left of G are 2
and in right is 1, therefore G divides O and C in the ratio 2
orthocentre of the triangle whose vertices are (0, 0), (x 1 , y 1 )
: 1 (internally).
is given by
Corollary 3 : N is the mid-point of O and C
( λ(y 2 − y 1 ), − λ ( x 2 − x 1 ))
1
x x + y 1y 2 Corollary 4 : Radius of nine point circle = × Radius of
where, λ= 1 2 2
x 1y 2 − x 2y 1
circumcircle
Remarks Remarks
1. The orthocentre of a triangle having vertices ( α, β ), ( β, α ) and
1. The distance between the orthocentre and circumcentre in an
( α, α ) is ( α, α ).
equilateral triangle is zero.
 1 
2. The orthocentre of a triangle having vertices is  − , − αβγ  2. If the circumcentre and centroid of a triangle are respectively
 αβγ  ( α, β ) ( γ, δ) then orthocentre will be ( 3γ − 2α, 3δ − 2β ).
3. The orthocentre of right angled triangle ABC, right angled at A
is A.
28 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 48. If a triangle has its orthocentre at (1, 1) Similarly,

b tan β = R sin β and c tan γ = R sin γ
 3 3
and circumcentre at  ,  , then find the centroid ∴ Coordinates of the vertices of a triangle are :
 2 4
A ( R cos α, R sin α ), B ( R cos β, R sin β )
and nine point centre. and C ( R cos γ , R sin γ )
Sol. Since, centroid divides the orthocentre and circumcentre in ∴ Centroid
the ratio 2 : 1 (internally) and if centroid G ( x , y ), then  R (cos α + cos β + cos γ ) R (sin α + sin β + sin γ )
(G ) ≡  , 
2 1 3 3  3 3 
O (1, 1)  G ( x , y )  C  , 
2 4 Since, G divides H and O in the ratio 2 : 1 (internally), then
3
2× +1×1 R 2⋅ 0 + 1⋅ x
4 (cos α + cos β + cos γ ) =
x= 2 = 3 2+1
2+1 3
R x
3 or (cos α + cos β + cos γ ) = ...(i)
2× +1×1 3 3
4 5
and y= = R 2⋅0 + 1⋅y
2+1 6 and (sin α + sin β + sin γ ) =
3 2+1
 4 5
∴ Centroid is  ,  and nine point centre is the mid-point R y
 3 6 or (sin α + sin β + sin γ ) = ...(ii)
3 3
of orthocentre and circumcentre.
Dividing Eqs. (ii) by (i), then we get
 3 3
1 + 1 +  y  sin α + sin β + sin γ 
∴ Nine point centre is  2, 4  , i.e.  5 , 7  . = 
 4 8 x  cos α + cos β + cos γ 
 2 2 
 

y Example 49. The vertices of a triangle are Area of a Triangle

A (a, a tan α ) , B (b , b tan β) and C (c , c tan γ ) . If the
circumcentre of ∆ ABC coincides with the origin and Theorem : The area of a triangle, the coordinates of
H ( x , y ) is the orthocentre, then show that whose vertices are ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ) and ( x 3 , y 3 ) is
y  sin α + sin β + sin γ  1
| x 1 (y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 (y 3 − y 1 ) + x 3 (y 1 − y 2 ) |
= . 2
x  cos α + cos β + cos γ 
x1 y1 1
Sol. If R be the circumradius and O be the circumcentre 1
∴ OA = OB = OC = R
or | x2 y2 1|
2
or (a 2 + a 2 tan 2 α ) = (b 2 + b 2 tan 2 β ) x3 y3 1

= (c 2 + c 2 tan 2 γ ) = R Proof : Let ABC be a triangle with vertices A ( x 1 , y 1 ),

B ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ). Let us assume that the points
or a sec α = b sec β = c sec γ = R A, B and C are in 1st quadrant (for the sake of exactness).
or a = R cos α, b = R cos β, c = R cos γ Draw AL, BM and CN perpendicular on X-axis. Let ∆ be
sin α
then, a tan α = R cos α ⋅ = R sin α the required area of the triangle ABC, then
cos α
Y
A(a,a tan α)
A(x1, y1)

H R
(x, y) 2 G C(x3, y3)
1 O (0, 0) B
R (x2,y2)
R
X′ X
B C O M L N
D E
(b,b tan β) (c,c tan γ) Y′
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 29

∆ = Area of triangle ABC and Area of quadrilateral ABCD : The area of a

= [Area of trapezium ABML + Area of trapezium ALNC quadrilateral can be found out by dividing the
− Area of trapezium BMNC] quadrilateral into two triangles.
1 ∴ Area of quadrilateral ABCD
[ Q Area of trapezium = (Sum of parallel sides)
2 A(x1, y1)
× (Distance between them)] D(x4, y4)
1 1
∴ ∆ =  ( BM + AL ) ( ML ) + ( AL + CN )
 2 2 B
1  (x2, y2)
( LN ) − ( BM + CN ) ( MN ) 
2 
1 1 C(x3, y3)
=  ( BM + AL ) (OL − OM ) + ( AL + CN ) (ON − (OL )
 2 2 = Area of ∆ABC + Area of ∆DAC
1 
− ( BM + CN ) (ON − OM )  1 x 1 y 1+ 1
 x y 2 1 x 3 y 3
2 =   2 +  
2  x 2 y 2 2 x 3 y 3 2 x 1 y 1
1 1
=  (y 2 + y 1 ) ( x 1 − x 2 ) + (y 1 + y 3 ) ( x 3 − x 1 )
2 2 1 x 4 y 4 + 1
x y 1 1 x 3 y 3
+   1 +
1  2  x y  2 x y  2 x4 y4
− (y 2 + y 3 ) ( x 3 − x 2 )  1 1 3 3
2  1  x 1 y 1 + 1 2 2 + 1
x y x y 3 1 x 4 y 4
1
= [ x 1 (y 2 + y 1 − y 1 − y 3 ) + x 2 ( −y 2 =|   3 |+  
2 2  x 2 y 2 2 x 3 y 3 2 x 4 y 4 2  x 1 y 1
− y 1 + y 2 + y 3 ) + x 3 (y 1 + y 3 − y 2 − y 3 )]   x 3 y 3  x 1 y 1
Q = − 
1   x 1 y 1  x 3 y 3
= [ x 1 (y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 (y 3 − y 1 ) + x 3 (y 1 − y 2 )]
2
∴ Area of polygon whose vertices are
The area of triangle ABC will come out to be a positive ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y 3 ), . . . , ( x n , y n ) is
quantity only when the vertices A, B, C are taken in
1 x1 y1  x 2 y 2  x 3 y 3
+ ..... +
x y n
anticlockwise direction and if points A, B, C are taken in | + +  n |
clockwise direction then the area will be negative and if 2 x 2 y 2  x 3 y 3  x 4 y 4  x 1 y 1
the points A, B, C are taken arbitrary then the area will be
Or
positive or negative, the numerical value being the same
in all cases. Stair Method Repeat first coordinates one time in last for
A A down arrow use positive sign and for up arrow use
Thus in general i.e., + – negative sign.
B C B C
x1 y1
1
Area of ∆ ABC = | x 1 (y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 (y 3 − y 1 )
2 x2 y2
+ x 3 (y 1 − y 2 ) |
This expression can be written in determinant form as
1 x3 y3
follows ∴ Area of polygon =
2
x1 y1 1
1
| x2 y2 1| xn yn
2
x3 y3 1
Corollary 1 : Area of triangle can also be found by easy x1 y1

method 1
= | {( x 1 y 2 + x 2 y 3 +… + x n y 1 )
1 x 1 y 1+ 1
x y 2 1 x 3 y 3 2
∆ =|   2 +  |
2  x 2 y 2 2 x 3 y 3 2 x 1 y 1 − (y 1 x 2 + y 2 x 3 +… + y n x 1 )}|
30 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Corollary 2 : If the coordinates of the vertices of the Corollary 4 : Area of the triangle formed by the lines of
triangle are given in polar form i.e., the form y = m 1 x + c 1 , y = m 2 x + c 2 and y = m 3 x + c 3 is
A (r1 , θ 1 ), B (r2 , θ 2 ), C (r 3 , θ 3 ). 1(c − c 3 ) 2 (c 3 − c 1 ) 2 (c 1 − c 2 ) 2
∆=  2 + + 
Y 2 (m 2 − m 3 ) (m 3 − m 1 ) (m 1 − m 2 )
A(r1, θ1)
Remarks
1. If area of a triangle is given then, use ± sign.
2. The points A ( x1, y1 ), B ( x 2, y2 ) and C ( x 3, y3 ) are collinear, then
B area of ( ∆ ABC) = 0.
(r2, θ2) C(r3, θ3) 3. Four given points will be collinear, then area of the
X quadrilateral is zero.
O
4. Area of the triangle formed by the points ( x1, y1 ), ( x 2, y2 ) and
1 x − x3 x2 − x3
Then, area of triangle ( x 3, y3 ) is ∆ = | 1 |
2 y1 − y3 y2 − y3
1
= | r1 r2 sin (θ 1 − θ 2 ) + r2 r 3 sin (θ 2 − θ 3 ) + r 3 r1 sin (θ 3 − θ 1 )| 1
5. If one vertex ( x 3, y3 ) is at (0, 0) then, ∆ = | x1 y2 − x 2 y1 |
2 2
1
= | ∑ r1 r2 sin (θ 1 − θ 2 ) |
2 y Example 50. The coordinates of A,B, C are
Corollary 3 : If a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0, a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0 and (6, 3),( −3, 5) and (4, − 2) respectively and P is any points
a 3 x + b 3 y + c 3 = 0 are the sides of a triangle, then the area ( x , y ) . Show that the ratio of the areas of the triangles
of the triangle is given by (without solving the vertices) | x + y − 2|
2
PBC and ABC is .
a1 b1 c 1 7
1
∆= a2 b2 c 2 Sol. We have
2 | C 1C 2C 3 | 1
a3 b3 c3 | { x (5 + 2) − 3 ( −2 − y ) + 4 (y − 5)}|
Area of ∆ PBC
=2
where, C 1 , C 2 , C 3 are the cofactors of c 1 , c 2 , c 3 in the Area of ∆ ABC 1
| {6 (5 + 2) − 3 ( −2 − 3) + 4 (3 − 5)}|
determinant 2
a2 b2 P(x, y)
Here, C1 = = (a 2 b 3 − a 3 b 2 )
a3 b3
a3 b3 B
C2 = = (a 3 b 1 − a 1 b 3 ) (–3, 5) A(6, 3)
a1 b1
a1 b1
and C3 = = (a 1 b 2 − a 2 b 1 )
a2 b2
a1 b1 c1 C(4, –2)
and a2 b2 c 2 = c 1C 1 + c 2C 2 + c 3C 3 | 7 x + 7y − 14 | 7 | x + y − 2 | | x + y − 2 |
= = =
a3 b3 c3 | 49 | 49 7
Or
y Example 51. Find the area of the pentagon whose
∆ 2
vertices are A (1, 1), B (7, 21), C (7 − 3) , D (12 , 2) and
Area of triangle =
2 | ∆1 ∆2 ∆ 3 | E (0, − 3) .
a1 b1 c1 Sol. The required area
a1 b1 a2 b2
∆ = a2 c 2 , ∆1 = , ∆2 = 1 1 1  7 21   7 –3 12 2   0 –3
where, b2
a2 b2 a3 b3 = | + +  + + |
a3 b3 c3 2 7 21 7 –3 12 2 0 –3 1 1
1
a3 b3 = |(21 − 7 ) + ( −21 − 147 ) + (14 + 36) + ( −36 − 0) + (0 + 3)|
and ∆3 = 2
a1 b1 1 137
= | − 137 | = sq units
2 2
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 31

y Example 52. Show that the points (a , 0), (0, b ) and h k 1

1
1 1 Now, Area of ∆PAB = | 3 4 1 | = 10
(1, 1) are collinear, if + = 1 2
a b 5 −2 1
Sol. Let A ≡ (a , 0), B ≡ (0, b ) and C ≡ (1, 1) or 6h + 2k − 26 = ± 20
Now, points A , B,C will be collinear, if area of ∆ABC = 0 ⇒ 6h + 2k − 46 = 0 or 6h + 2k − 6 = 0
1 a 0 0 b 1 1 ⇒ 3h + k − 23 = 0 or 3h + k − 3 = 0
or | + + |= 0 Solving h − 3k − 1 = 0 and 3h + k − 23 = 0,
2 0 b 1 1 a 0
we get h = 7, k = 2
⇒ | (ab − 0) + (0 − b ) + (0 − a )| = 0
Solving h − 3k − 1 = 0 and 3h + k − 3 = 0,
or ab − a − b = 0
we get h = 1, k = 0
1 1
or a + b = ab or + = 1 Hence, the coordinates of P are (7, 2 ) or (1, 0 ).
a b
y Example 55. Find the area of the triangle formed by
y Example 53. Prove that the coordinates of the
the straight lines 7 x − 2y + 10 = 0, 7 x + 2y − 10 = 0 and
vertices of an equilateral triangle can not all be
9 x + y + 2 = 0 (without solving the vertices of the
rational.
triangle).
Sol. Let A ( x 1, y1 ), B ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) be the vertices of a
Sol. The given lines are :
triangle ABC. If possible let x 1, y1, x 2 , y 2 , x 3 , y 3 be all
rational. 7 x − 2y + 10 = 0
1 7 x + 2y − 10 = 0
Now, area of ∆ ABC = | x 1 (y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 (y 3 − y1 ) 9x + y + 2 = 0
2
2
+ x 3 (y 1 − y 2 ) | 7 −2 10
1 7
= Rational …(i) ∴ Area of triangle ∆ = 2 −10 ...(i)
Since, ∆ ABC is equilateral 2 | C 1C 2C 3 |  
9 1 2
3
∴ Area of ∆ ABC = (side)2 7 2

4 where, C 1 = = 7 − 18 = − 11,
9 1
3
= ( AB )2 9 1
4 C 2 =  = − 18 − 7 = − 25
7 − 2
3
= {( x 1 − x 2 )2 + (y1 − y 2 )2 }
7 −2
4 and C 3 =  = 14 + 14 = 28,
= Irrational …(ii) 7 2
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), 7 −2 10
Rational = Irrational and 7 2 −10 = 10C 1 − 10 C 2 + 2C 3
 
which is contradiction. 9 1 2
Hence, x 1, y1, x 2 , y 2 , x 3 , y 3 cannot all be rational.
= 10 × ( −11) − 10 × ( −25) + 2 × 28 = 196
y Example 54. The coordinates of two points A and B 1
∴ From Eq. (i), ∆ = × (196)2
are (3, 4) and ( 5, − 2) respectively. Find the coordinates 2 | − 11 × ( −25) × 28 |
of any point P if PA = PB and area of ∆ APB is 10. 196 × 196 686
= = sq units
Sol. Let coordinates of P be (h ,k ). 2 × 11 × 25 × 28 275

Q PA = PB ⇒ ( PA )2 = ( PB )2 y Example 56. If ∆ 1 is the area of the triangle with

⇒ ( h − 3) + ( k − 4 ) = ( h − 5) + ( k + 2)
2 2 2 2
vertices (0, 0), (a tan α , b cot α ), (a sin α , b cos α ) ; ∆ 2 is
⇒ ( h − 3) 2 − ( h − 5) 2 + ( k − 4 ) 2 − ( k + 2) 2 = 0
the area of the triangle with vertices
(a, b ), (a sec 2 α , b cos ec 2 α ) , (a + a sin 2 α , b + b cos 2 α )
⇒ (2h − 8) (2) + (2k − 2) ( −6) = 0
and ∆ 3 is the area of the triangle with vertices (0, 0),
⇒ ( h − 4 ) − 3 ( k − 1) = 0
(a tan α , − b cot α ), (a sin α , b cos α ) . Show that there is
⇒ h − 3k − 1 = 0 …(i) no value of α for which ∆ 1 , ∆ 2 and ∆ 3 are in GP.
32 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

1 1
Sol. We have, ∆1 = | (a tan α ) (b cos α ) − (a sin α ) (b cot α ) | and ∆3 = |(a tan α ) (b cos α ) − ( −b cot α ) (a sin α ) |
2 2
(Q one vertex is (0,0))
1
=
1
| ab || sin α − cos α | ... (i) = | ab| |sin α + cos α | ... (iii)
2 2
Since, ∆1, ∆ 2 , ∆ 3 are in GP, then ∆1∆ 3 = ∆22
1 a − (a + a sin α ) a sec α − (a + a sin α )
2 2 2
and ∆ 2 = | | 1 1
2 b − (b + b cos 2 α ) b cosec2 α − (b + b cos 2 α ) ⇒ | ab || sin α − cos α | × | ab ||sin α + cos α |
2 2
(See remark 4) 1
1 −a sin α a (tan α − sin α )
2 2 2 = | ab | | cos 2α |
2 2
[from Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii)]
= | | 4
2 −b cos2 α b (cot 2 α − cos2 α )
⇒ | sin 2 α − cos 2 α | = | cos 2α | 2
1 − sin 2 α sin 2 α ( sec2α − 1 ) ⇒ | − cos 2α | = | cos 2α | 2
= | ab | × | |
2 − cos2 α cos α ( cosec α − 1 )
2 2
⇒ | cos 2α | = | cos 2α| 2
1  − sin α sin α tan α
2 2 2
⇒ | cos 2α | (1 − | cos 2α | ) = 0
= | ab | × 
| |
2 − cos α cos α cot α
2 2 2 ∴ 1 − | cos 2α | = 0 (Q| cos 2α | ≠ 0)
1 ⇒ | cos 2α | = 1
= | ab | × | − sin 2 α cos 2 α cot 2 α + sin 2 α cos 2 α tan 2 α| or cos2α = ± 1 or cos2α = 1
2
1 and cos2α = − 1
= | ab | × | − cos 4 α + sin 4 α |
2 or 2α = 2nπ, 2α = (2p + 1) π
1 π
= | ab | × |sin 2 α + cos 2 α | × |sin 2 α − cos 2 α | or α = n π, α = p π + ; n , p ∈ I
2 2
1 For these values of α the vertices of the given triangles are
= | ab | × |1| × | − cos 2α |
2 not defined. Hence ∆1, ∆ 2 and ∆ 3 cannot be in GP for any
1 value of α.
= | ab | × | cos 2α| ... (ii)
2

Exercise for Session 3

1. The coordinates of the middle points of the sides of a triangle are (4, 2), (3, 3) and (2, 2), then coordinates of
centroid are
(a) (3, 7 / 3) (b) (3, 3) (c) (4, 3) (d) (3, 4)

2. The incentre of the triangle whose vertices are ( −36, 7), (20, 7) and (0, − 8) is

(d)  , 1
1
(a) (0, − 1) (b) (−1, 0) (c) (1, 1)
2 

3. If the orthocentre and centroid of a triangle are ( −3, 5) and (3, 3) then its circumcentre is
(a) (6, 2) (b) (3, − 1) (c) (−3, 5) (d) (−3, 1)

4. An equilateral triangle has each side equal to a. If the coordinates of its vertices are ( x1, y1), ( x 2, y 2 ) and ( x 3, y 3 )
x1 y1 1
then the square of the determinant x 2 y 2 1 equals
x3 y3 1
4
3a 3 3
(a) 3a4 (b) (c) a4 (d) a4
2 4 8

5. The vertices of a triangle are A (0, 0), B (0, 2) and C(2 , 0) . The distance between circumcentre and orthocentre
is
1 1
(a) 2 (b) (c) 2 (d)
2 2
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 33

6. A (a, b ), B ( x1, y1) and C ( x 2, y 2 ) are the vertices of a triangle. If a, x1, x 2 are in GP with common ratio r and
b , y1, y 2 are in GP with common ratio s, then area of ∆ABC is
1
(a) ab (r − 1) (s − 1) (s − r ) (b) ab (r + 1) (s + 1) (s − r )
2
1
(c) ab (r − 1) (s − 1) (s − r ) (d) ab (r + 1) (s + 1) (r − s )
2
 1 2 
7. The points ( x + 1, 2), (1, x + 2),  ,  are collinear, then x is equal to
 x + 1 x + 1
(a) −4 (b) −8 (c) 4 (d) 8

8. The vertices of a triangle are (6, 0), (0, 6) and (6, 6). Then distance between its circumcentre and centroid, is
(a) 2 2 (b) 2 (c) 2 (d) 1

9. The nine point centre of the triangle with vertices (1, 3 ), (0, 0) and (2, 0) is
 3  2 3
(b)  ,
2 1
(d)  1,
1
(a)  1,   (c)  ,  
 2   3 3 3 2   3

10. The vertices of a triangle are (0, 0), (1, 0) and (0, 1). Then excentre opposite to (0, 0) is

(a)  1 −
1
(b)  1 +
1
(c)  1 +
1
(d)  1 −
1 1 1 1 1
, 1+  , 1+  , 1−  , 1− 
 2 2  2 2  2 2  2 2

11. If α , β, γ are the real roots of the equation x 3 − 3px 2 + 3qx − 1 = 0, then find the centroid of the triangle whose
 1  1  1
vertices are α ,  , β,  and  γ,  .
 α   β  γ

12. If centroid of a triangle be (1, 4) and the coordinates of its any two vertices are (4, − 8) and ( −9, 7), find the area of
the triangle.

13. Find the centroid and incentre of the triangle whose vertices are (1, 2), (2 , 3) and (3, 4).

14. Show that the area of the triangle with vertices ( λ , λ − 2), ( λ + 3 , λ ) and ( λ + 2 , λ + 2) is independent of λ.

15. Prove that the points (a, b + c ), (b , c + a ) and (c, a + b ) are collinear.

16. Prove that the points (a, b ), (c, d ) and (a − c, b − d ) are collinear, if ad = bc.

 y − y2
17. If the points ( x1, y1), ( x 2, y 2 ) and ( x 3, y 3 ) are collinear, show that ∑  1  = 0, i.e.
 x1x 2 
y1 − y 2 y 2 − y 3 y 3 − y1
+ + =0
x1x 2 x 2x 3 x 3 x1
∆ ABC 2
18. The coordinates of points A, B, C and D are ( −3, 5), (4, − 2), ( x , 3x ) and (6, 3) respectively and = , find x.
∆ BCD 3

19. Find the area of the hexagon whose vertices taken in order are (5, 0), (4, 2), (1, 3), ( −2 , 2), ( −3, − 1) and (0, − 4).
Session 4
Locus and Its Equation, Change of Axes the
Transformation of Axes, Removal of the Term xy from
F(x, y) = ax2 + 2hxy + by2 without Changing the Origin,
Position of a Point which lies Inside a Triangle

Locus and Its Equation How to Find the Locus of a Point

Locus : The locus of a moving point is the path traced out Let ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the coordinates of the moving point say P.
by that point under one or more given conditions. Now, apply the geometrical conditions on x 1 , y 1 . This
For example 1. If a point P moves in a plane such that gives a relation between x 1 and y 1 . Now replace x 1 by x
and y 1 by y in the eliminant and resulting equation would
whose distance from a fixed point O (say) in the plane is
be the equation of the locus.
always constant distance a. Thus the locus of the moving
point P is clearly a circle with centre O and radius a. Corollary 1 : If x and y are not there in the question, the
coordinates of P may also be taken as ( x , y ).
P Corollary 2 : If coordinates and equation are not given in
a
the question, suitable choice of origin and axes may be made.
O Corollary 3 : To find the locus of the point of intersection
of two straight lines, eliminate the parameter or
parameters from the given lines. If more than one
parameter, then additional condition or conditions will
For example 2. If a point P moves in a plane such that also be given.
whose distance from two fixed points A and B (say) are
always equal i.e. PA = PB Note
Simplify the equation by squaring both sides if square roots are
P there and taking LCM to remove the denominators.
P Q
P
y Example 57. Find the locus of a point which moves
such that its distance from the point (0, 0) is twice its
P
distance from the Y-axis.
Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point whose locus is required.
A D B
By hypothesis | OP | = 2 | PM | (Q P lies in any quadrant)
(The point P cannot be at Q because AQ ≠ BQ ) ⇒ ( x 12 + y12 ) = 2| x 1|
Obviously all the positions of the moving point P lies on Y
the right bisector of AB. Thus the locus of the moving
point P is the right bisector of AB.
M P(x1, y1)

Equation of a Locus
A relation f ( x , y ) =0 between x and y which is satisfied
by each point on the locus and such that each point
X′ X
satisfying the equation is on the locus is called the O
equation of the locus.
Y′
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 35

Squaring both sides, then Changing ( x 1, y1 ) to ( x , y ), then

x 12 + y12 = 4 x 12 x 2 + y 2 = c 2 − a2
⇒ 3x 12 − y12 = 0 which is the required locus of P.
Changing ( x 1, y1 ) to ( x , y ), then
y Example 60. A point moves such that the sum of its
3x 2 − y 2 = 0 distances from two fixed points (ae , 0) and ( −ae , 0) is
which is the required locus of P. always 2a. Prove that the equation of the locus is
2
x2 y
y Example 58. Find the locus of the moving point P + = 1, where b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 )
such that 2PA = 3PB, where A is (0, 0) and B is (4, − 3) . a2 b 2
Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point whose locus is required. Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point whose locus is required
and A (ae , 0) and B ( −ae , 0) be the given fixed points.
Y
P(x1, y1) Y
P(x1, y1)
X′ X
A
(0, 0)

X′ X
B(–ae, 0) O A(ae, 0)

B(4, –3)
Y′ Y′

By hypothesis, By hypothesis, | PA | + | PB | = 2a
2 PA = 3 PB or 4 ( PA )2 = 9 ( PB )2 or ( x 1 − ae )2 + (y1 − 0)2 + ( x 1 + ae )2 + (y1 − 0)2 = 2a
⇒ 4 { x 12 + y12 } = 9 {( x 1 − 4 )2 + (y1 + 3)2 }
or ( x 12 + y12 − 2aex 1 + a 2e 2 ) + ( x 12 + y12 + 2aex 1 + a 2e 2 )
⇒ 4 ( x 12 + y12 ) =9 ( x 12 + y12 − 8x 1 + 6y1 + 25) = 2a ...(i)
or 5x 12 + 5y12 − 72x 1 + 54y1 + 225 = 0 Let l = x 12 + y12 − 2aex 1 + a 2e 2
Changing ( x 1, y1 ) to ( x , y ), then and m = x 12 + y12 + 2aex 1 + a 2e 2 (l − m method)
5x 2 + 5y 2 − 72x + 54y + 225 = 0 then, Eq. (i) can be written as
which is the required locus of P. l + m = 2a ...(ii)
and l − m = − 4aex 1
y Example 59.A point moves so that the sum of the
or ( l + m ) ( l − m ) = − 4aex 1
squares of its distances from two fixed points A (a , 0)
and B ( −a , 0) is constant and equal to 2c 2 , find the or 2a ( l − m ) = − 4aex 1 [from Eq. (ii)]
locus of the point. or l − m = − 2ex 1 ...(iii)
Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point whose locus is required. Adding Eqs. (ii) and (iii), then
2 l = 2a − 2ex 1 or l = a − ex 1
Y
Squaring both sides,
P(x1, y1)
l = a 2 − 2aex 1 + e 2 x 12
⇒ x 12 + y12 − 2aex 1 + a 2e 2 = a 2 − 2aex 1 + e 2 x 12
X′ X ⇒ (1 − e 2 )x 12 + y12 = a 2 (1 − e 2 )
B(–a, 0) O A(a, 0)
x 12 y12
or + =1
a2 a 2 (1 − e 2 )
Y′ x 12 y12
or 2
+ =1 [Qb 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 )]
By hypothesis, ( PA ) + ( PB ) = 2c
2 2 2
a b2
⇒ ( x 1 − a ) + (y1 − 0)2 + ( x 1 + a )2 + (y1 − 0)2 = 2c 2
2 Changing ( x 1, y1 ) to ( x , y ), then
x2 y2
⇒ 2x 12 + 2y12 + 2a 2 = 2c 2 + =1
a2 b2
or x 12 + y12 = c 2 − a 2 which is the required locus of P.
36 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 61. Find the equation of the locus of a Adding Eqs. (ii) and (iii),
point which moves so that the difference of its 2 l = ( 3x 1 + 4 )
distances from the points ( 3, 0) and ( −3, 0) is 4 units. Squaring both sides,
Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point whose locus is required 4l = 9 x 12 + 24 x 1 + 16
and A (3, 0) and B ( −3, 0) be the given fixed points. ⇒ 4 ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 ) = 9 x 12 + 24 x 1 + 16
Y x 12 y12
⇒ 5x 12 − 4y12 = 20 or − =1
P(x1, y1) 4 5
Changing ( x 1, y1 ) by ( x , y ), then
x2 y2
− =1
X′ X 4 5
B(–3, 0) O A(3, 0)
which is the required locus of P.

y Example 62. The ends of the hypotenuse of a right

Y′
angled triangle are (6, 0) and (0, 6 ) . Find the locus of
By hypothesis the third vertex.
| PB | − | PA | = 4 (assume | PB | > | PA |) Sol. Let C ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point (third vertex) whose locus
⇒ ( x 1 + 3) 2 + ( y 1 − 0) 2 − ( x 1 − 3) 2 + ( y 1 − 0) 2 = 4 is required and A (6, 0) and B (0, 6) be the given vertices.
⇒ ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 ) = 4 + ( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 ) Y
C(x1,y1)
Squaring both sides then,
x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 = 16 + x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 + 8 B
(0, 6)
( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 )
or (12x 1 − 16) = 8 ( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 )
or (3x 1 − 4 ) = 2 ( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 ) X′ X
O A(6, 0)
Again, squaring both sides, then
9 x 12 − 24 x 1 + 16 = 4 x 12 + 4y12 − 24 x 1 + 36 Y′

or 5x 12 − 4y12 = 20 By hypothesis
x 12 y12 ( AC )2 + ( BC )2 = ( AB )2 (Q ∠ ACB = 90° )
⇒ − =1
4 5 ⇒ ( x 1 − 6) + ( y 1 − 0) + ( x 1 − 0) + ( y 1 − 6) 2 = 62 + 62
2 2 2

Changing ( x 1, y1 ) by ( x , y ), then ⇒ 2x 12 + 2y12 − 12x 1 − 12y1 = 0

x2 y2
− =1 or x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 − 6y1 = 0
4 5
which is the required locus of P. Changing ( x 1, y1 ) by ( x , y ), then
Aliter (l − m method) : x 2 + y 2 − 6x − 6y = 0
Since, | PB | − | PA | = 4 which is the required locus of third vertex C.
⇒ ( x 1 + 3) 2 + ( y 1 − 0) 2 − ( x 1 − 3) 2 + ( y 1 − 0) 2 = 4 Aliter 1. Slope of AC × slope of BC = − 1
 y1 − 0   y1 − r 
⇒ ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 ) − ( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 ) = 4 ...(i) ⇒   ×  = −1
 x 1 − c   x 1 − 0
Let l= x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9
or x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 − 6y1 = 0
and m= x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9
Aliter 2. Mid-point of AB is M ≡ (3, 3)
then, Eq. (i) can be written as
Q MA = MB = MC ⇒ ( MA )2 ≡ ( MC )2
l − m =4 ... (ii)
( 3 − 0) 2 + ( 3 − 6) 2 = ( x 1 − 3) 2 ( y 1 − 3) 2
and l − m = 12x 1
⇒ ( l + m ) ( l − m ) = 12x 1 or x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 − 6y1 = 0

⇒ ( l + m ) ( 4 ) = 12x 1 [from Eq. (ii)] ∴ Required locus is

x 2 + y 2 − 6x − 6y = 0
⇒ l + m = 3x 1 ...(iii)
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 37

y Example 63. Find the equation of the locus of a  y − 1  y − 1

⇒ x=  1 + 
point which moves so that the sum of their distances  2   2 
from ( 3, 0) and ( −3, 0) is less than 9.  y − 1  y + 1
⇒ x=   
Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the moving point whose  2   2 
or 4x = y 2 − 1
locus is required and A (3, 0 ) and B ( −3, 0 ) are the given
or y 2 = 4x + 1
points.
Y y Example 65. A stick of length l rests against the
P(x1, y1) floor and a wall of a room. If the stick begins to slide
on the floor, find the locus of its middle point.
Sol. Let the cross section of the floor and wall be taken as the
X′ X coordinate axes and AB be one of the position of the stick.
B(–3, 0) O A(3, 0)
Let the mid-point of AB be P ( x 1,y1 ), then coordinates of A
and B are (2x 1, 0) and (0, 2y1 ) respectively.
Y
Y′

By hypothesis, B (0, 2y1)

| PA | + | PB | < 9
⇒ {( x 1 − 3)2 + (y1 − 0)2 } + {( x 1 + 3)2 + (y1 − 0)2 } < 9 P(x1, y1)
⇒ ( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 ) < 9 − ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 )
On squaring, we get X′ X
O
( x 12 + y12 − 6x 1 + 9 ) < (81 + x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 ) A(2x1, 0)

− 18 ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 ) Y′

(Qa < b ⇒ a < b provided a >0)

2 2 But given, | AB | = l
⇒ ( AB )2 = l 2
⇒ −12x 1 − 81 < −18 ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 )
⇒ (2x 1 − 0)2 + (0 − 2y1 )2 = l 2
⇒ ( 4 x 1 + 27 ) > 6 ( x 12 + y12 + 6x 1 + 9 )
⇒ 4 x 12 + 4y12 = l 2
(Q If a > b, then −a < − b)
On squaring, we get Changing ( x 1, y1 ) by ( x , y ), then
16x 12 + 729 + 216x > 36x 12 + 36y12 + 216x 1 + 324 4 (x 2 + y 2 ) = l 2
⇒ 20x 12 + 36y12 < 405 which is the required locus of P.
Aliter :
Changing ( x1, y1 ) by ( x, y ), then
Since, | AB | = l
20x 2 + 36y 2 < 405
Let ∠OAB = α
which is the required locus of P.
∴ OA = l cosα and OB = l sinα
y Example 64. Find the locus of a point whose then, A ≡ (l cos α, 0)
coordinate are given by x = t + t 2 , y = 2t + 1, where t is and B ≡ (0, l sin α )
variable. Y

Sol. Given, x = t + t2 ...(i)

B
and y = 2t + 1 ...(ii)
 y − 1
From Eq. (ii), t =  ...(iii)
 2  P(x, y)

On eliminating t from Eqs. (i) and (iii), we get required

locus as α
X′ X
2 O A
 y − 1  y − 1
x=  + 
 2   2  Y′
38 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Let P ( x , y ) be the mid-point of AB, then which is the required locus of G.

2x = l cosα ...(i) (ii) If the circumcentre be C ( x , y ) . Since in semicircle angle
2y = l sinα ...(ii) 90° , then AB is the diameter of the circumcircle OAB.
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), then ∴ Circumcentre is the mid-point of AB.
4 (x 2 + y 2 ) = l 2 a+0
Then x= ⇒ a = 2x
which is the required locus of P. 2
0+b
and y= ⇒ b = 2y
y Example 66. Find the locus of the point of 2
intersection of the lines x cos α + y sin α = a and On substituting in a 2 + b 2 = 1, we get
x sin α − y cos α = b , where α is variable. (2x )2 + (2y )2 = 1
Sol. Given equations are 1
x cos α + y sin α = a ...(i) or x2 + y2 =
4
and x sin α − y cos α = b ...(ii) which is the required locus of C.
Here, α is a variable, on eliminating α. Squaring and adding
Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get required locus as y Example 68. Two points P and Q are given, R is a
( x cos α + y sin α )2 + ( x sin α − y cos α )2 = a 2 + b 2 variable point on one side of the line PQ such that
or ( x 2 cos 2 α + y 2 sin 2 α + 2xy cos α sin α ) ∠ RPQ − ∠ RQP is a positive constant 2α. Find the
locus of the point R.
+ ( x 2 sin 2 α + y 2 cos 2 α − 2xy sin α cos α ) = a 2 + b 2
Sol. Let the X-axis along QP and the middle point of PQ is
⇒ x 2 (cos 2 α + sin 2 α ) + y 2 (sin 2 α + cos 2 α ) = a 2 + b 2
origin and let coordinates of moving point R be ( x 1, y1 ).
⇒ x 2 + y 2 = a2 + b2
Y
y Example 67. A variable line cuts X-axis at A, Y-axis at R(x1, y1)
B, where OA = a, OB = b ( O as origin) such that
a 2 + b 2 = 1. y1
Find the locus of X′ X
Q O x1 M P
(i) centroid of ∆ OAB (–a, 0) (a, 0)

(ii) circumcentre of ∆ OAB

Y′
Sol. (i) Coordinates of A and B are (a , 0) and (0, b ) respectively.
If centroid of ∆ OAB be G ( x , y ) Let OP = OQ = a
0+a+0
then x= ⇒ a = 3x then coordinates of P and Q are (a, 0) and ( −a, 0)
3
respectively.
0+0+b
and y= ⇒ b = 3y Draw RM perpendicular on QP
3
∴ OM = x 1 and MR = y1
Y
and let ∠ RPM = θ and ∠ RQM = φ
B(0, b) Now, in ∆RMP,
RM RM y1
tanθ = = = ...(i)
MP OP − OM a − x 1
b
and in ∆RMQ,
RM RM y1
tan φ = = = ...(ii)
X′ X
QM OQ + OM a + x 1
O a A(a, 0)
But given
Y′ ∠ RPQ − ∠ RQP = 2α (constant)
⇒ θ − φ = 2α
On substituting in a + b = 1, we get
2 2
∴ tan (θ − φ ) = tan 2α
(3x )2 + (3y )2 = 1 tan θ − tan φ
⇒ = tan 2α
or x2 + y2 =
1 1 + tan θ tan φ
9
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 39

y1 y1 coordinates of the same point P referred to the new axes

−
a − x1 a + x1 O ′ X ′ , O ′ Y ′ are ( X , Y ) .
⇒ = tan 2α
 y1   y1  From O ′ draw O ′ L perpendicular to OX. from P draw PM
1+  . 
 a − x1   a + x1  perpendicular to OX to meet O ′ X ′ in N. Then
[from Eqs. (i) and (ii)] OL = h, O ′ L = k, OM = x , PM = y , O ′ N = X
2x 1y1
⇒ = tan 2α and PN = Y
a 2 − x 12 + y12
we have x = OM = OL + LM = OL + O ′ N = h + X
or a 2 − x 12 + y12 = 2x 1y1 cot 2α
i.e. x = X +h ...(i)
or x 12 − y12 + 2x 1y1 cot 2α = a 2
and y = PM = PN + NM = PN + O ′ L = Y + k
Hence, locus of the point R ( x 1, y1 ) is
i.e. y =Y + k ...(ii)
x 2 − y 2 + 2xy cot 2α = a 2
from Eqs. (i) and (ii),
X = x − h and Y = y − k
Change of Axes OR the Thus, if origin is shifted to point (h, k ) without rotation of
axes, then new equation of curve can be obtained by
Transformations of Axes putting x + h in place of x and y + k in place of y.

In coordinate geometry we have discussed the coordinates Remarks

of a point or the equation of a curve are always considered 1. In this case axes are shifted parallel to themselves, then it is
on taking a fixed point O as the origin and two also called Transformation by parallel axes.
perpendicular straight lines through O as the coordinates 2. Inverse translation or shifting the origin back : Some
times it is required to shift the new origin back. Then putting
axes. For convenient the coordinates of the point or the x − h in place of x and y − k in place of y in any equation of
equation of the curve changes when either the origin is curve referred to the new origin to get the corresponding
changed or the direction of axes or both are suitably. equation referred to the old origin.
These processes in coordinate geometry are known as the 3. The above transformation is true whether the axes be
rectangular or oblique.
transformations or change of axes. This process of
transformation of coordinates will be of great advantage y Example 69. Find the equation of the curve
to solve most of the problems very easily. 2x 2 + y 2 − 3x + 5y − 8 = 0 when the origin is
(i) Change of origin OR Shifting of origin transferred to the point ( −1, 2) without changing the
(Translation of Axes) direction of axes.
To change the origin of coordinates to another point (h, k ) Sol. Here, we want to shift the origin to the point ( −1, 2) with-
whereas the directions of axes remain unaltered. out changing the direction of axes. Then we replace x by
x − 1 and y by y + 2 in the equation of given curve, then
Y Y' the transformed equation is
2 ( x − 1) 2 + ( y + 2) 2 − 3 ( x − 1) + 5 ( y + 2) − 8 = 0
P(x, y) w.r.t.
old axes ⇒ 2x 2 + y 2 − 7 x + 9y + 11 = 0
P(X, Y)
Y w.r.t. new axes y Example 70. The equation of a curve referred to the
y
X
new axes, axes retaining their direction and origin is
O'
N
X' (4, 5) is x 2 + y 2 = 36 . Find the equation referred to the
k
h original axes.
X
O L M Sol. Here we want to shift the ( 4, 5) to the origin without
x
changing the direction of axes. Then we replace x by x − 4
Let O be the origin of coordinates and OX , OY be the and y by y − 5 in the equation of given curve then the
original coordinate axes. Let O ′ be the new origin and required equation is
(h, k ) its coordinates referred to the original axes. Draw ( x − 4 ) 2 + (y − 5 ) 2 = 36
two lines O ′ X ′ and O ′ Y ′ through O ′ and parallel to OX
and OY respectively. Let P ( x , y ) be any point referred to ⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 10y + 5 = 0
the original axes OX , OY . Again suppose that the
40 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 71. Shift the origin to a suitable point so OM = x , PM = y , ON = X , PN = Y

that the equation y 2 + 4 y + 8 x − 2 = 0 will not contain Now, x = OM = OL − ML
term in y and the constant. Q Angle between any two lines = Angle between 
 
Sol. Let the origin be shifted to the point (h , k ) without  their perpendiculars i.e. ∠XOX ′ = ∠NPM = θ 
changing the direction of axes. Then we replace x by x + h
and y by y + k in the equation of the given curve then the = OL − QN = ON cos θ − PN sin θ
transformed equation is = X cos θ − Y sin θ
(y + k )2 + 4 (y + k ) + 8 ( x + h ) − 2 = 0 i.e. x = X cos θ − Y sin θ ...(i)
⇒ y 2 + (2k + 4 ) y + 8x + (k 2 + 4k + 8h − 2) = 0 and y = PM = PQ + QM = PQ + NL
Since, this equation is required to be free from the term = PN cos θ + ON sin θ
containing y and the constant, we have
= Y cos θ + X sin θ
2k + 4 = 0 and k 2 + 4k + 8h − 2 = 0
i.e. y = X sin θ + Y cos θ ...(ii)
3
∴ k = −2 and h= Now, multiplying Eqs. (i) by cos θ and Eq. (ii) by sin θ and
4
adding we get
3 
Hence, the point to which the origin be shifted is  , − 2 . X = x cos θ + y sin θ ...(iii)
4 
Also, subtracting the product of Eq. (i) by sin θ from the
y Example 72. At what point the origin be shifted, if product of Eq. (ii) by cos θ , we get
the coordinates of a point ( −1, 8 ) become ( −7, 3) ? Y = − x sin θ + y cos θ ...(iv)
Sol. Let the origin be shifted to the point (h , k ) without also x 2 + y 2 = X 2 + Y 2 = OP 2 are unchanged i.e. the
changing the direction of axes. Then we replace x by x + h distance of the point P from the origin O remains
and y by y + k and we get new co-ordinates. Here, given
old coordinates and new coordinates are ( −1, 8) and ( −7, 3) unaffected by the rotation of axes.
respectively. Rule : When the axes are rotated through θ, replace ( x , y )
We have −1 + h = − 7 and 8 + k = 3 by ( x cos θ − y sin θ, x sin θ + y cos θ ).
⇒ h = − 6 and k = − 5 Shifting the coordinate axes back : Some times it is
Hence, the origin must be shifted to ( −6, − 5). required to shift the new coordinates axes back. Then
replace ( x , y ) by
(ii) Rotation of Axes
( x cos θ + y sin θ, − x sin θ + y cos θ ).
(Change of Directions of Axes)
To find the change in the coordinates of a point when the
directions of axes are rotated through an angle θ the Independent Proof (Aliter)
origin being fixed. The relations X = x cos θ + y sin θ and
Y´ Y Y = − x sin θ + y cos θ can be obtained independently.
Proof : Draw PM and PN perpendiculars to OX and OX ′
P
and also ML and MQ perpendiculars to PN and OX ′
θ X´ respectively.
Q Y
N Y´
θ
P Old (x, y)
New (X, Y)
θ
X
O M L θ
X´
Let OX and OY be the original system of coordinate axes. N
Let OX ′ and OY ′ be the new axes obtained by rotating the θ
Q
θ L
original axes through an angle θ. Let P be a point in the θ
plane whose coordinates are ( x , y ) and ( X , Y ) referred to X
O M
old and new axes respectively. Draw PM and PN
perpendiculars to OX and OX ′ and also NL and NQ We have, OM = x , PM = y , ON = X
perpendiculars to OX and PM. We have and PN = Y
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 41

Also, angle between any two lines (b) Finding X and Y in terms of x and y
= Angle between their perpendiculars lines X = Sum of the products of the elements of top-row
i.e. ∠ XOX ′ = ∠ MPN = ∠ PMQ = θ with the corresponding elements of first row.
∴ X = ON = OQ + QN i.e. X = x cos θ + y sin θ
= OQ + ML and Y = Sum of the products of the elements of
top-row with the corresponding elements of second
= OM cos θ + PM sin θ row.
(QOQ = OM cos θ and ML = PM sin θ) i.e. Y = − x sin θ + y cos θ
= x cos θ + y sin θ Hence, X = x cos θ + y sin θ 
i.e. X = x cos θ + y sin θ 
Y = − x sin θ + y cos θ
and Y = PN = PL − NL = PL − QM
(ii) Matrix method :
= PM cos θ − OM sin θ
 X   cos θ sin θ   x  x 
(Q PL = PM cos θ and QM = OM sin θ ) Y  =  − sin θ cos θ  y  = A y  (say)
= y cos θ − x sin θ       
i.e. Y = − x sin θ + y cos θ  x  cos θ − sin θ   X  X 
and y  = sin θ cos θ  Y  = A ′ Y 
      
Remark :
The results Eqs. (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) can be conveniently where, A ′ is the transpose matrix of A.
remembered by the following methods. (iii) Complex number method :
(i) Light heavy method : Let x , y be light and X ,Y be Let z = x + iy
heavy then heavy X ,Y down and x , y up then
and Z = X + iY , where i = −1
x y
then z = Ze iθ …(i)
X cosθ sinθ
Y − sinθ cosθ i.e. ( x + iy ) = ( X + iY ) (cos θ + i sin θ )
On comparing real and imaginary parts, we get
third row is obtained by differentiating second row with
respect to θ . x = X cos θ − Y sin θ

For remembrance C S (Civil Services) y = X sin θ + Y cos θ

↓ ↓ Again from Eq. (i), Z = ze −iθ

 C → cos θ 
cos θ sin θ  i.e.  i.e. ( X + iY ) = ( x + iy ) (cos θ − i sin θ )
 S → sin θ 
↓ ↓ On comparing real and imaginary parts, we get
 (cos θ ) ′ = − sin θ  X = x cos θ + y sin θ 
−sin θ cos θ  
 (sin θ ) ′ = cos θ  
Y = − x sin θ + y cos θ
(a) Finding x and y in terms of X and Y
x = Sum of the products of the elements in the left
y Example 73. If the axes are turned through 45°, find
most column with the corresponding elements of the the transformed form of the equation
first column 3x 2 + 3y 2 + 2xy = 2.
i.e. x = X cos θ − Y sin θ Sol. Here, θ = 45 ° so sin θ = cos θ =
1
and y = Sum of the products of the elements in the 2
left most column with the corresponding elements of Replacing ( x , y ) by ( x cos θ − y sin θ, x sin θ + y cos θ )
the second column.  x − y x + y
i.e.  , 
 2 2 
i.e. y = X sin θ + Y cos θ
Hence, x = X cos θ − Y sin θ  Then, 3x 2 + 3y 2 + 2xy = 2 becomes
 2 2
y = X sin θ + Y cos θ  x − y  x + y  x − y  x + y
3  +3  +2    =2
 2   2   2   2 
42 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

⇒ 3 (2x 2 + 2y 2 ) + 2 ( x 2 − y 2 ) = 4 y Example 76. If ( x , y ) and ( X , Y ) be the coordinates

⇒ 8x + 4y = 4
2 2
of the same point referred to two sets of rectangular
or 2x 2 + y 2 = 1 axes with the same origin and if ux + vy , when u and v
which is free from the term containing xy.
are independent of X and Y become VX + UY , show
that u 2 + v 2 = U 2 + V 2
y Example 74. Prove that if the axes be turned Sol. Let the axes rotate an angle θ and if ( x , y ) be the point with
π
through the equation x 2 − y 2 = a 2 is transformed respect to old axes and ( X , Y ) be the co-ordinates with
4 respect to new axes, then
to the form xy = λ . Find the value of λ . x + iy = ( X + iY ) e iθ = ( X + iY ) (cos θ + i sin θ )
π 1 On comparing real and imaginary parts, we get
Sol. Here, θ = so sin θ = cos θ =
4 2  x = X cos θ − Y sin θ
Replacing ( x , y ) by ( x cos θ − y sin θ, x sin θ + y cos θ ) 
y = X sin θ + Y cos θ
 x − y x + y Then, ux + vy = u ( X cos θ − Y sin θ ) + v ( X sin θ + Y cos θ )
i.e.  , 
 2 2  = (u cos θ + v sin θ ) X + ( −u sin θ + v cos θ ) Y
then, x 2 − y 2 = a 2 becomes but given new curve VX + UY
 x − y
2
 x + y
2 then, VX + UY = (u cos θ + v sin θ )
 −  =a
2
 X + ( −u sin θ + v cos θ )Y
 2   2 
On comparing the coefficients of X andY , we get
 x − y x + y  x − y x + y
⇒  +   −  =a
2
V = u cos θ + v sin θ ...(i)
 2 2   2 2 
and U = − u sin θ + v cos θ ...(ii)
 2x   −2y 
⇒     =a
2 Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
 2  2  V 2 + U 2 = (u cos θ + v sin θ )2 + ( − u sin θ + v cos θ )2
a2 = u2 + v 2
or xy = −
2
Hence, u2 + v 2 = U 2 + V 2
a2
Comparing it with xy = λ, then we get λ = − . Aliter 1 (By matrix method) :
2
x  cos θ − sin θ X  X cos θ − Y sin θ
y Example 75. Through what angle should the axes be y  = sin θ =
cos θ Y  X sin θ + Y cos θ
…(i)
  
rotated so that the equation 9 x 2 − 2 3 xy + 7 y 2 = 10 x  X cos θ + Y sin θ
Q ux + vy = [u v ]   = [u v ]  
may be changed to 3x 2 + 5y 2 = 5 ?  
y X sin θ + Y cos θ
Sol. Let angle be θ then replacing ( x , y ) by [from (i)]
( x cos θ − y sin θ, x sin θ + y cos θ ) = uX cos θ − uY sin θ + vX sin θ + vY cos θ
then, 9 x 2 − 2 3xy + 7y 2 = 10 becomes = X (u cos θ + v sin θ ) + Y ( − u sin θ + v cos θ )
but given new curve VX + UY
9 ( x cos θ − y sin θ )2 − 2 3
Then, VX + UY = X (u cos θ + v sin θ ) + Y
( x cos θ − y sin θ ) ( x sin θ + y cos θ ) ( − u sin θ + v cos θ )
+ 7 ( x sin θ + y cos θ )2 = 10 On comparing the coefficients of X andY , we get
⇒ x 2 (9 cos 2 θ − 2 3 sin θ cos θ + 7 sin 2 θ ) V = u cos θ + v sin θ ...(ii)
+ 2xy ( −9 sin θ cos θ − 3 cos 2θ + 7 sin θ cos θ ) U = − u sin θ + v cos θ ...(iii)
Squaring and adding Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
+ y 2 (9 cos 2 θ + 2 3 sin θ cos θ + 7 cos 2 θ ) = 10
u2 + v 2 = U 2 + V 2
On comparing with 3x 2 + 5y 2 = 5 (coefficient of xy)
Aliter 2 (Best approach) :
we get − 9 sin θ cos θ − 3 cos 2θ + 7 sin θ cos θ = 0 ux + vy = Re ((u − iv ) ( x + iy ))
or sin 2θ = − 3 cos 2θ = Re ((u − iv ) ( X + iY ) e iθ ) ...(i)
or tan 2θ = − 3 = tan (180° − 60° ) and VX + UY = Re ((V − iU ) ( X + iY ) ) ...(ii)
or 2 θ = 120° From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
∴ θ = 60° V − iU = (u − iv )e iθ
Taking modulus both sides, then
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 43

| V − iU | = | u − iv | | e iθ |   x + y 
2
  x − y 
−5  −3 +    + 20  −2 +  
2 .   2    2 
⇒ (V + U ) = u + v
2 2 2
1
  x + y 
or u + v =U + V
2 2 2 2
− 22 −3 +    − 14 = 0
  2 
(iii) Double Transformation ⇒ x 2 − 14 xy − 7y 2 − 2 = 0
(Origin Shifted and Axes Rotated)
If origin is shifted to the point. O ′ (h, k ) and at the same
time the directions of axes are rotated through an angle θ Removal of the Term xy from
in the anticlockwise sense such that new coordinates of
P ( x , y ) become ( X , Y ).
f ( x, y) = ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2
Y
Y´
without Changing the Origin
P (x, y) Clearly, h ≠0
(X, Y) Rotating the axes through an angle θ, we have
θ X´ x = X cos θ − Y sin θ
θ and y = X sin θ + Y cos θ
O´
Q f ( x , y ) = ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2
X After rotation, new equation is
O
F ( X , Y ) = (a cos 2 θ + 2h cos θ sin θ + b sin2 θ ) X 2
Then, we get x = h + X cos θ − Y sin θ ...(i)
+ 2 { (b − a ) cos θ sin θ + h (cos 2 θ − sin2 θ ) } XY
and y = k + X sin θ + Y cos θ ...(ii)
+ (a sin2 θ − 2h cos θ sin θ + b cos 2 θ ) Y 2
In practice we have to replace x by h + x cos θ − y sin θ
and y by k + x sin θ + y cos θ. Now, coefficient of XY = 0
Again, if we want to shift the coordinate axes back to their a −b
Then, we get cot 2θ =
original positions, then we obtained X and Y by solving 2h
Eqs. (i) and (ii), then Remark
X = ( x − h ) cos θ + (y − k ) sin θ Usually, we use the formula, tan2θ =
2h
for finding the angle of
a− b
and Y = − ( x − h ) sin θ + (y − k ) cos θ
rotation, θ.
a− b
y Example 77. What does the equation However, if a = b, we use cot 2θ = as in this case tan2θ is not
2h
2x 2 + 4 xy − 5y 2 + 20x − 22y − 14 = 0 becomes when defined.
referred to rectangular axes through the point
( −2 , − 3) , the new axes being inclined at an angle of y Example 78. Given the equation
45° with the old ? 4 x 2 + 2 3xy + 2y 2 = 1, through what angle should the
Sol. Let O ′ ( −2, − 3) be the new origin and axes are rotated axes be rotated so that the term in xy be wanting from
about O ′ through an angle 45° in anticlockwise direction the transformed equation.
then replacing x and y by Sol. Comparing the given equation with ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 , we
− 2 + x cos 45° − y sin 45° get a = 4, h = 3 b = 2 . If axes are to be rotated at θ, then
and −3 + x sin 45° + y cos 45°
2h 2 3 π
 x − y  x + y tan 2θ = = = 3 = tan
i.e. −2 +   and −3 +   respectively in the a−b 2 3
 2   2 
π π π 4π
given curve, then the new equation of curve will be 2θ = ,π + ⇒ 2θ = ,
2 3 3 3 3
  x − y    x − y    x + y  π 2π
2 − 2 +    + 4  −2 +     −3 +   ∴ θ= ,
  2    
2   2  6 3
44 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

For λ < − 4 :
Position of a Point which Lies ++++++++
Inside a Triangle 8λ – 12 – – – – – – – – 3/2
7λ + 6 – – – – – + + + + + + + + + + +
–6/7
If any point say ( P ) lies within the triangle ABC,
λ + 4– – ++++++++++++++
then ∆1 + ∆2 + ∆ 3 = ∆ –4

A
Then, − (7 λ + 6) − (8λ − 12) − ( λ + 4 ) = 22
5
⇒ −16λ = 20 ∴ λ = −
4
which is impossible.
6
For −4 ≤ λ < − :
P
7
Then, − (7 λ + 6) − (8λ − 12) + ( λ + 4 ) = 22
6
⇒ −14 λ = 12 ∴ = −
7
B C which is impossible.
6 3
where, ∆ = Area of triangle ABC, For − ≤ λ < :
7 2
∆ 1 = Area of ∆PBC, Then, (7 λ + 6) − (8λ − 12) + λ + 4 = 22 ⇒ 22 = 22
∆ 2 = Area of ∆PCA, 6
Q at λ = − , area of ∆ PBC = 0
∆ 3 = Area of ∆PAB 7
−6
Also, ∆ 1 ≠ 0, ∆ 2 ≠ 0, ∆ 3 ≠ 0, ∆ ≠ 0 ∴ λ≠
7
(Each individual area must be non-zero)  6 3
∴ λ ∈ − , 
y Example 79. Find λ if ( λ , λ + 1) is an interior point of  7 2
∆ ABC where, A ≡ (0, 3) ;B ≡ ( −2 , 0) and C ≡ (6, 1) . For λ ≥ :
3
Sol. The point P ( λ , λ + 1) will be inside the triangle ABC, then 2
Then, 7 λ + 6 + 8λ − 12 + λ + 4 = 22 ⇒ 16λ = 24
Area of ∆ PBC + Area of ∆ PCA + Area of ∆ PAB = Area of
3
∆ ABC ∴ λ=
2
 λ λ + 1 1  λ λ + 1 1  λ λ + 1 1
1 1 1 3
⇒ |−2 0 1| +  | 6 1 1| + | 0 3 1| Q at λ = , area of ∆PCA = 0
2   2  2  2
 6 1 1 0 3 1 –2 0 1
3
∴ λ≠
 0 3 1 2
1
= | −2 0 1|  6 3
2  Hence, value of λ ∈  − ,  .
 6 1 1  7 2
⇒ | 7 λ + 6 | + | 8λ − 12 | + | λ + 4 | = 22
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 45

Exercise for Session 4

1. The equation of the locus of points equidistant from ( −1, − 1) and (4, 2) is
(a) 3x − 5y − 7 = 0 (b) 5x + 3y − 9 = 0 (c) 4x + 3y + 2 = 0 (d) x − 3y + 5 = 0

2. The equation of the locus of a point which moves so that its distance from the point (ak , 0) is k times its
a 
distance from the point  , 0 , (k ≠ 1) is
k 
(a) x 2 − y 2 = a 2 (b) 2x 2 − y 2 = 2a 2 (c) xy = a 2 (d) x 2 + y 2 = a 2

 1 1
3. If the coordinates of a variable point P be t + , t −  , where t is the variable quantity, then the locus of P is
 t t
(a) xy = 8 (b) 2x 2 − y 2 = 8 (c) x 2 − y 2 = 4 (d) 2x 2 + 3y 2 = 5

4. If the coordinates of a variable point P be (cos θ + sin θ, sin θ − cos θ ), where θ is the parameter, then the locus
of P is
(a) x 2 − y 2 = 4 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 2 (c) xy = 3 (d) x 2 + 2y 2 = 3

5. If a point moves such that twice its distance from the axis of x exceeds its distance from the axis of y by 2, then
its locus is
(a) x − 2y = 2 (b) x + 2y = 2 (c) 2y − x = 2 (d) 2y − 3x = 5

6. The equation 4xy − 3x 2 = a 2 become when the axes are turned through an angle tan−1 2 is
(a) x 2 + 4y 2 = a 2 (b) x 2 − 4y 2 = a 2 (c) 4x 2 + y 2 = a 2 (d) 4x 2 − y 2 = a 2

7. Transform the equation x 2 − 3xy + 11x − 12y + 36 = 0 to parallel axes through the point ( −4, 1) becomes
ax 2 + bxy + 1 = 0 then b 2 − a =
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 16 64 256
8. Find the equation of the locus of all points equidistant from the point (2 , 4) and the Y-axis.

9. Find the equation of the locus of the points twice as far from ( −a , 0) as from (a , 0).

10. OA and OB are two perpendicular straight lines. A straight line AB is drawn in such a manner that OA + OB = 8.
Find the locus of the mid point of AB.

11. The ends of a rod of length l move on two mutually perpendicular lines. Find the locus of the point on the rod
which divides it in the ratio 1 : 2.

12. The coordinates of three points O, A, B are (0, 0), (0, 4) and (6, 0) respectively. A point P moves so that the area
of ∆POA is always twice the area of ∆POB. Find the equation to both parts of the locus of P.
 ab 
13. What does the equation (a − b ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) − 2abx = 0 become, if the origin be moved to the point  ,0 ?
a − b 

14. The equation x 2 + 2xy + 4 = 0 is transformed to the parallel axes through the point (6, λ). For what value of λ its
new form passes through the new origin ?
1°
15. Show that if the axes be turned through 7 ; the equation 3x 2 + ( 3 − 1) xy − y 2 = 0 become free of xy in its
new form. 2

16. Find the angle through which the axes may be turned so that the equation Ax + By + C = 0 may reduce to the
form x = constant, and determine the value of this constant.

17. Transform 12x 2 + 7xy − 12y 2 − 17x − 31y − 7 = 0 to rectangular axes through the point (1, − 1) inclined at an
 4
angle tan−1  to the original axes.
 3
 Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember
1 If D, E, F are the mid-points of the sides BC, CA, AB of 10 If ABCD is a parallelogram, then D = A − B + C.
∆ABC, the A=E + F−D 11 If D, E, F are the mid-points of the sides BC, CA, AB of
B=F+ D−E ∆ABC, then the centroid of ∆ABC = centroid of ∆DEF. If
and C=D+E−F area of ∆ABC = ∆, then area of ∆AFE = area of ∆BDF =
∆
2 Orthocentre, nine point centre, centroid, circumcentre of a area of ∆CED = area of ∆DEF = and area of
4
triangle are collinear. Centroid divides the line joining parallelogram CEFD = area of parallelogram BDEF = area
orthocentre and circumcentre in the ration ∆
2 :1 (Internally) and nine point centre is the mid-point of of parallelogram AEDF =
2
orthocentre and circumcentre.
12 Orthocentre of the right angle triangled ABC, right angled
3 The circumcentre of a right angled triangle is the at A is A .
mid-point of the hypotenuse.
13 Circumcentre of the right angled triangle ABC, right
4 In an equilateral triangle orthocentre, nine point centre, B+C
centroid, circumcentre, incentre coincide. angled at A is .
2
5 The distance between the orthocentre and circumcentre 14 X-axis divides the line segment joining ( x1, y1 ), ( x2 , y2 ) in
in an equilateral triangle is zero. the ratio − y1 : y2 and Y-axis divides the same line
6 The orthocentre of a triangle having vertices (α , β ), (β, α ) segment in the ratio− x1 : x2 .
and (α , α ) is (α , α ). 15 Area of the triangle formed by ( x1, y1), ( x2 y2 ), ( x3 , y3 ) is
7 Orthocentre of the triangle formed by the points 1 x1 − x3 x2 − x3
| |.
 1   1  1  1  2 y1 − y3 y2 − y3
α ,  ; β,  ;  γ,  is  − , − αβγ
 α   β  γ   αβγ  16 The area of the triangle formed by y = m1 x + c1,
i.e. all points and orthocentre lie on xy = 1. 1 (c1 − c 2 )2
y = m2 x + c 2 , y = m3 x + c 3 is Σ .
8 Points in a triangle : Centroid (G ) , Incentre (I ), Excentres 2 | m1 − m2 |
(I1, I2 , I3 ), Orthocentre (O ), Circumcentre (C ) are given by
17 Area of the quadrilateral formed by
 m1 x1 + m2 x2 + m3 x3 m1 y1 + m2 y2 + m3 y3 
 ,  , where ( x1, y1 ) ( x2 , y2 ) ( x3 , y3 ) , ( x4 , y4 ) is
 m1 + m2 + m3 m1 + m2 + m3 
1 x1 − x3 x2 − x4
| |
m1 m2 m3 2 y1 − y3 y2 − y4
G 1 1 1 18 If ( x1, y1 ), ( x2 , y2 ) are the ends of the hypotenuse of a right
I sin A sin B sin C angled isosceles triangle, then the third vertex is given by
I1 − sin A sin B sin C  x1 + x2 ± ( y1 − y2 ) y1 + y2 m ( x1 − x2 )
sin A − sin B sin C  , 
I2  2 2 
I3 sin A sin B − sin C
O tan A tan B tan C 19 Given the two vertices ( x1, y1 ) and ( x2 , y2 ) of an equilateral
C sin 2A sin 2B sin 2B triangle, then its third vertex is given by
 x1 + x2 ± 3 ( y1 − y2 ) y1 + y2 m 3 ( x1 − x2 )
and vertices  , 
 2 2 
A ≡ ( x1, y1 ), B ≡ ( x2 , y2 ), C ≡ ( x3 , y3 ) and A, B, C are the
angles of ∆ABC. 20 Circumcentre of the triangle formed by the points
( x1, y1 ), ( x2, y2 ) and ( x3 , y3 ) is same as that of triangle
9 If the circumcentre and centroid of a triangle are
formed by the points (0, 0 ),
respectively (α , β ), (γ, δ ), then orthocentre will be
( x2 − x1, y2 − y1 ), ( x3 − x1, y3 − y1 ).
(3γ − 2α , 3δ − 2β).
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
This section contains 5 multiple choice examples. Each l Ex. 3. Orthocentre of triangle with vertices (0, 0 ), (3, 4)
example has four choice (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which and (4, 0) is
ONLY ONE is correct.
æ 5ö
(a) ç3, ÷ (b) (3, 12)
è 4ø
l Ex. 1. Locus of centroid of the triangle whose vertices are
(a cos t , a sin t ), (b sin t , - b cos t ) and (1, 0 ), where t is a æ 3ö
(c) ç3, ÷ (d) (3, 9)
parameter, is è 4ø
(a) (3 x - 1)2 + (3y )2 = a 2 - b 2 Sol. (c) Denote the points are ( x1, y1 ), ( x 2, y 2 ) and ( x 3, y 3 ) from the
matrix
(b) (3 x - 1)2 + (3y )2 = a 2 + b 2
é x - x 3 y1 - y 3 ù
P =ê 1
(c) (3 x + 1)2 + (3y )2 = a 2 + b 2 ë x 2 - x 3 y 2 - y 3 úû
(d) (3 x + 1)2 + 3y 2 = a 2 - b 2 é - 4 0ù
=ê
Sol. (b) Let A º (a cost, a sin t ), B º (b sin t, - b cost ) and C º (1, 0 ) ë - 1 4 úû
® ®
æ a cost + b sin t + 1 a sin t - b cost ö R 1× R 2
\Centroid º ç , ÷ \ l=
è 3 3 ø |P |
a cost + b sin t + 1 ( -4 ) ( -1 ) + 0 1
Let x= Þ3 x - 1 = a cost + b sin t …(i) = =-
3 - 16 4
a sin t - b cost
and y = Þ3y = a sin t - b cost …(ii) \Circumcentre of the triangle
3
æ x + x 2 + l(y1 - y 2 ) y1 + y 2 - l ( x1 - x 2 ö
On squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get ºç 1 , ÷
è 2 2 ø
(3 x - 1 ) 2 + (3y ) 2 = a 2 + b 2
æ 3 - 4 l 4 + 3 l ö æ 13 ö
which is locus of centroid. ºç , ÷ º ç2, ÷
è 2 2 ø è 8ø
æ 13 ö
l Ex. 2. The incentre of triangle with vertices (1, 3 ), (0, 0 ) i.e. C º ç2, ÷
è 8ø
and ( 2, 0 ) is æ7 4ö
and centroid G º ç , ÷
æ 3ö æ2 1 ö æ2 3 ö æ 1 ö è3 3 ø
(a) ç1, ÷ (b) ç , ÷ (c) ç , ÷ (d) ç1, ÷
è 2 ø è 3 3 ø è3 2 ø è 3ø \Orthocentre
Sol. (d) æ 7 4 13 ö
Y H º ç3 ´ - 2 ´ 2, 3 ´ - 2 ´ ÷
è 3 3 8ø
B (1, Ö3)
æ 3ö
º ç3, ÷
è 4ø
Aliter : Let orthocentre
H º ( a, b )
B (3, 4)
X Y
O A (2, 0)

Let O º ( 0, 0 ), A º (2, 0 )
and B º (1, 3 ) F
Q OA = 2 = OB = AB E
Þ DOAB is an equilateral. H
\ Incentre = Centroid X
O D A(4, 0)
æ0+2+1 0+ 0+ 3ö
ºç , ÷
è 3 3 ø \ Slope of BH ´ slope of OA = - 1
æ 1 ö æ b - 4 ö æ 0ö
\ Incentre º ç1, ÷ Þ ç ÷ ´ ç ÷ = -1
è 3ø è a -3ø è 4ø
48 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ a -3 = 0 1 1 1
1
Þ a =3 …(i) = | x1 y1| | r r 1 | = 0 (QC1 and C 2 are identical)
2 r2 r2 1
and slope of AH ´ slope of OB = - 1
æ b - 0 ö æ 4ö Þ Points A, B, C are collinear.
Þ ç ÷ ´ ç ÷ = -1
è a - 4ø è 3 ø
3
l Ex. 5. Let A be the image of ( 2, - 1) with respect to Y -axis.
From Eq. (i) , b=
4 Without transforming the origin, coordinate axis are turned
æ 3ö at an angle 45° in the clockwise direction. Then, the
Hence, orthocentre is ç3, ÷ .
è 4ø coordiates of A in the new system are
æ 1 3 ö æ 3 1 ö
(a) ç - ,- ÷ (b) ç - ,- ÷
l Ex. 4. If x 1 , x 2 , x 3 as well as y 1 , y 2 , y 3 are in GP, with the è 2 2ø è 2 2ø
same common ratio, then the points ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ) and æ 1 3 ö æ 3 1 ö
(c) ç , ÷ (d) ç , ÷
(x3 , y 3 ) è 2 2ø è 2 2ø
(a) lie on a straight line Sol. (a) Since, the image of (h, k ) w.r.t. Y -axis is ( -h, k ).
(b) lie on an ellipse \Coordinate of A are ( -2, - 1 ).
(c) lie on a circle If ( X , Y ) are the coordinates of A w.r.t. the new coordinate axes
(d) are vertices of a triangle obtained by turning the axes through an angle 45° in the
Sol. (a) Let common ratio of GP is r, then x 2 = x1r , x 3 = x1r 2, y 2 = y1r clockwise direction, then
and y 3 = y1r 2. X = - 2 cos( -45° ) - sin( -45° )
2 1 1
Let A º ( x1, y1 ), B º ( x 2, y 2 ) and C º ( x 3, y 3 ) =- + =-
2 2 2
x y1 1
1 1 and Y = 2 sin( -45° ) - cos( -45° )
\ Area of DABC = | x 2 y 2 1 |
2 x y 1 2 1 3
3 3 =- - =-
2 2 2
x1 y1 1
1 æ 1 3 ö
= | x1r y1r 1 | \ Required coordinates are ç - , - ÷.
2 è 2 2ø
x1r 2 y1r 2 1

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n
This section contains 3 multiple choice examples. Each Q Area of Sn < 1 Þan2 < 1
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d). Out of which 100
MORE THAN ONE may be correct. Þ <1
2n - 1
Þ 2n - 1 > 100 > 2 6
l Ex. 6. Let S1, S 2 , ¼, be squares such that for each n ³1,
Þ n -1 >6
the length of a side of Sn equals the length of a diagonal of Þ n >7
Sn + 1 . If the length of a side S1 is 10 cm, then for which of the \ n = 8, 9, 10, ¼
following value of n is the area of Sn less than 1 sq cm?
(a) 7 (b) 8 (c) 9 (d) 10 l Ex 7. If each of the vertices of a triangle has integral
Sol. (b,c,d) coordinates, then the triangles may be
If a be the side of the square, then diagonal d = a 2 by (a) right angled (b) equilateral
hypothesis (c) isosceles (d) scalene
an = 2 an + 1 Sol. (a,c,d) Let A º ( x1, y1 ), B º ( x 2, y 2 ) and C º ( x 3, y 3 ) be the vertices
an an - 1 an - 2 a of triangle ABC. Given x1, y1, x 2, y 2, x 3, y 3be all integers.
Þ an + 1 = = = = ¼= 1 n 1
2 ( 2 )2 ( 2 )3 ( 2) Now, area of DABC = x1(y 2 - y 3 ) + x 2(y 3 - y1 ) + x 3(y1 - y 2 )
a1 10 2
Þ an = = = Rational …(i)
( 2 )n - 1 (2 ) (n - 1)/2
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 49

If DABC is equilateral then, æ 1 ö æ5 ö æ 1ö

(a) (1, 6) (b) ç - , 5÷ (c) ç , 6 ÷ (d) ç -7, ÷
3 è 2 ø è6 ø è 8ø
Area of DABC = (side ) 2
4 Sol. (b,c,d) Let vertex of the DABC be A( x, y )
3
= {( x1 - x 2 ) 2 + (y1 - y 2 ) 2 } \ AB = AC
4
Þ ( AB ) 2 = ( AC ) 2
= Irrational …(ii)
It is clear from Eqs. (i) and (ii), DABC can not be equilateral. Þ ( x - 1 ) 2 + (y - 3 ) 2 = ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y - 7 ) 2
Þ 6 x - 8y + 43 = 0 …(i)
l Ex. 8. ABC is an isosceles triangle. If the coordinates of æ 1 ö æ5 ö
Here, use observe that the coordinates ç - , 5 ÷ , ç , 6 ÷ and
the base are B(1, 3 ) and C ( -2, 7 ). The coordinates of vertex A è 2 ø è6 ø
can be æ 1ö
ç -7, ÷ satisfy the Eq. (i).
è 8ø

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains one solved paragraph based 3 Sol. Q a, b are the roots of x 2 - 6ax + 2 = 0
multiple choice questions. Each of these questions has \ a + b = 6a …(i)
four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is
and ab = 2 …(ii)
correct.
Again, b, g are the roots of x 2 - 6bx + 3 = 0
Paragraph \ b + g = 6b …(iii)
(Q. Nos. 9 to 11) and bg = 3 …(iv)
Again, g, a are the roots of x 2 - 6cx + 6 = 0
æ 1 ö æ 1ö æ 1ö
If A ça , ÷, B çb , ÷, C ç g , ÷ be the vertices of a DABC, where \ g + a = 6c …(v)
è a ø è bø è g ø
and g a =6 …(vi)
a , b are the roots of x 2 - 6ax + 2 = 0; b , g are the roots of from Eqs. (ii), (iv) and (vi), we get
x 2 - 6bx + 3 = 0 and g , a are the roots of x 2 - 6cx + 6 = 0; ab × bg × ga = 2 × 3 × 6
a, b, c being positive. Þ abg = 6
\ a = 2, b = 1, g = 3
9. The value of a + b + c is
9. (b) Adding Eqs. (i) , (iii) and (v), we get
(a) 1 (b) 2 2( a + b + g ) = 6 (a + b + c )
(c) 3 (d) 5 1
or a + b + c = (2 + 1 + 3 ) = 2
10. The coordinates of centroid of DABC is 3
æ 11ö æ 1 11 ö æ Sa S ab ö
(a) ç1, ÷ (b) ç , ÷ 10. (c) Centroid of DABC º ç , ÷
è 9ø è 3 18 ø è 3 3 abg ø

æ 11 ö æ 2 11 ö æ 2 + 1 + 3 2 ×1 + 1 ×3 + 3 ×2 ö
(c) ç 2, ÷ (d) ç , ÷ ºç , ÷
è 18 ø è 3 19 ø è 3 3 ×2 ×1 ×3 ø
æ 11 ö
11. The coordinates of orthocentre of DABC is º ç2, ÷
è 18 ø
æ 1 ö æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
(a) ç - , - 2÷ (b) ç - , - 3 ÷
è 2 ø è 3 ø 11. (d) Orthocentre of DABC º ç - , - abg ÷
è abg ø
æ 1 ö æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
(c) ç - , - 5÷ (d) ç - , - 6 ÷ º ç - , - 6÷
è 5 ø è 6 ø è 6 ø
50 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains one solved example. The answer to æ 1 ö æ cos q ö
Þ -2ç - sin q÷ - 0 + 1 ç - sin q - ÷ =0
this example is a single digit integer ranging from 0 to 9 è 3 ø è 3 ø
(both inclusive).
Þ 3 sin q - cos q = 2

æ 1 ö 3 1
l Ex.12. If the points ( -2, 0 ), ç -1, ÷ and (cos q, sin q ) are Þ sin q - cos q = 1
2 2
è 3ø
æ pö
collinear, then the number of values of q Î[0, 2 p ] is or sin ç q - ÷ = 1
è 6ø
Sol. (1) Since, the given points are collinear, then p p
-2 0 1 or q-
= 2np +
6 2
1 p p 2p
-1 1 =0 for n = 0, q= + = Î[ 0, 2 p ]
3 6 2 3
cos q sin q 1
Number of values q is 1.

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n
This section contains one solved example. Which has Sol. (A) ® (p); (B) ® (r); (C) ® (p, q); (D) ® (r, s)
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I and (A)Q Points are collinear
four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any given l+1 1 1
statements in Column I can have correct matching with \ 2l + 1 3 1 = 0
one or more statement(s) given in Column II. 2l + 2 2l 1
Þ ( l + 1 )(3 - 2 l ) - 1(2 l + 1 - 2 l - 2 )
l Ex. 13. Match the following
+ 1 ( 4 l2 + 2 l - 6 l - 6 ) = 0
Column I Column II or 2 l2 - 3 l - 2 = 0
or (2 l + 1 ) ( l - 2 ) = 0
A. The points (l + 1, 1), (2l + 1, 3) and (p) a prime
1
(2l + 2, 2l ) are collinear then number of number \ l = 2, -
values of l is 2
Number of values of l is 2.
B. Area of DABC is 20 sq units, where A , B (q) an odd (B) Q Area of triangles ABC is 20 sq units.
and C are (4 , 6), (10, 14) and (x , y) number
D
respectively. AC is perpendicular to BC, C
then number of positions of C is

C. In a DABC coordinates of orthocentre, (r) a composite

centroid and vertex A are respectively number (4, 6) A B (10, 14)
(2, 2), (2, 1) and (0, 2). The x-coordinate of O
vertex B is

D. A man starts from P(- 3, 4 ) and reaches (s) a perfect

the point Q (0, 1) touching the X-axis at number E
R(l , 0) such that PR + RQ is minimum,
Q C can not be at D and E
then 10 | l | is
\ Four positions are possible two above AB and two below AB.
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 51

(C) B(a, g) P
Y

Y
H(2, 2)
(0, 2) A
Q(0, 1)
X¢ X
A R O
G(2, 1)
X¢ X
O
Y¢

C(a, b)
C
Y¢
Q ÐPRA = ÐQRO
a+ a+ 0
Q =2 From similar triangles PAR and QOR
3
AR PA l+3 4
\ a =3 = or =
RO QO 0-l 1
Þ x-coordinates of vertex B = 3
(D) For PR + RQ to be minimum, it should be the path of light 3
or l=- \ 10 | l | = 6.
5

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n
Directions (Ex. Nos. 14 and 15) are Assertion-Reason Statement II The area of the triangle is constant with
type examples. Each of these examples contains two respect to translation :
statements.
Sol. (a) Area of triangle is unaltered by shifting origin to any point.
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason) If origin is shifted to (100, 102), then A, B, C becomes A¢( 0, 0 ),
Each of these examples also has four alternative choices, B ¢(2, 3 ), C ¢( 4, 5 ) respectively. Hence, both statements are true
(a), (b), (c) and (d) only one out of which is the correct and Statement II is correct explanation for Statement I.
answer. You have to select the correct choice as given
below : l Ex. 15. Statement I If centroid and circumcentre of a
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a triangle are known its orthocentre can be found
correct explanation for Statement I
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is not a
Statement II Centroid, orthocentre and circumcentre of a
correct explanation for Statement I triangle are collinear.
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false Sol. (b)Q Centroid divides orthocentre and circumcentre in the
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true ratio 2 : 1 (internally).
\We can find easily orthocentre.
l Ex. 14. Statement I The area of the triangle formed by Þ Statement I is true, and centroid, orthocentre and
the points A(100, 102 ), B (102, 105 ), C(104, 107 ) is same as the circumcentre are collinear Statement II is true but Statement II
is not correct explanation for Statement I.
area formed by A ¢ (0, 0 ), B ¢ ( 2, 3 ), C ¢ ( 4, 5 ).
52 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Subjective Type Examples

n In this section, there are 7 subjective solved examples. Sol. Since, m1 and m2 are the roots of the equation
l Ex. 16. The four points A (a, 0 ), B (b, 0 ), C ( g, 0 ) and x 2 + ( 3 + 2) x + ( 3 - 1) = 0
D ( d, 0 ) are such that a, b are the roots of equation
then m1 + m2 = - ( 3 + 2 ), m1m2 = ( 3 - 1 )
ax 2 + 2hx + b = 0 and g, d are those of equation
a ¢ x 2 + 2h ¢ x + b ¢ = 0. Show that the sum of the ratios in \ m1 - m2 = (m1 + m2 ) 2 - 4m1m2
which C and D divide AB is zero, if ab ¢ + a ¢ b = 2hh ¢ . = (3 + 4 + 4 3 - 4 3 + 4 ) = 11
Sol. Since, a, b are the roots of ax 2 + 2hx + b = 0
and coordinates of the vertices of the given triangle are ( 0, 0 ),
2h b
\ a+b=- and ab = …(i) (c / m1, c ) and (c / m2, c ).
a a
and g, d are the roots of a ¢ x 2 + 2h ¢ x + b ¢ = 0 1 c c
Hence, the required area of triangle = ´c - ´c
2h ¢ b¢ 2 m1 m2
then, g + d=- and gd = ...(ii)
a¢ a¢
1 æ 1 1 ö 1 | m - m1|
Let C divides AB in the ratio l :1 = c2 ç - ÷ = c2 2
2 è m1 m2 ø 2 | m1m2|
(α, 0) (γ, 0) (β, 0)
then A B
1 11
λ C 1 = c2
l ×b + 1 × a 2 ( 3 - 1)
g=
l+1 1 2 11 ( 3 + 1 )
= c ×
g-a 2 ( 3 - 1) ( 3 + 1)
\ l=
b-g æ 33 + 11 ö 2
and let D divides AB in the ratio m :1 =ç ÷c
è 4 ø
(α, 0) (δ, 0) (β, 0)
then A B
µ D 1 l Ex. 18. If x coordinates of two points B and C are the
d=
m ×b + 1 × a roots of equation x 2 + 4 x + 3 = 0 and their y coordinates are
m+1 the roots of equation x 2 - x - 6 = 0. If x coordinate of B is
d-a
\ m= less than x coordinate of C and y coordinate of B is greater
b-d
than the y coordinate of C and coordinates of a third point A
but given l+m=0 be (3, - 5 ) , find the length of the bisector of the interior angle
g -a d-a
Þ + =0 at A.
b-g b-d
Sol. Q x 2 + 4 x + 3 = 0 Þ x = - 1, - 3
Þ ( a + b ) ( g + d) - 2 ab - 2 gd = 0
and x 2 - x - 6 = 0 Þ x = - 2, 3
æ 2h ö æ 2h ¢ ö 2b 2b ¢
Þ ç- ÷ ç- ÷- - =0 Also, given that x and y coordinates of B are respectively less
è a øè a¢ø a a¢
than and greater than the corresponding coordinates of C.
[from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
\ B º ( -3, 3 ) and C º ( -1, - 2 )
or ab ¢ + a ¢b = 2hh ¢
Now, AB = (3 + 3 ) 2 + ( -5 - 3 ) 2 = 10
l Ex. 17. If m1 and m 2 are the roots of the equation and AC = (3 + 1 ) 2 + ( -5 + 2 ) 2 = 5
x 2 + ( 3 + 2 ) x + ( 3 - 1) = 0 AB 2
\ =
Show that the area of the triangle formed by the lines AC 1
Let AD be the bisector of Ð BAC, then
æ 33 + 11 ö 2
y = m1 x , y = m 2 x and y = c is ç ÷c . BD AB 2
4 = =
è ø DC AC 1
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 53

Y \ r sin( q + 60° ) = 1
B (–3,3)
r {sin q cos60° + cos q sin 60° } = 1
ì1 3 ü
Þ r í sin q + cos qý = 1
î 2 2 þ

X´ X
ìï 1 a 3 a 2 üï
D O Þ rí ´ + ´ 1 - 2 ý =1 [from Eq. (i)]
ïî 2 r 2 r ïþ

a 3
(–1,–2)C Þ + (r 2 - a 2 ) = 1
2 2
3 a
Þ (r 2 - a 2 ) = 1 -
× 2 2
×
2
3 2 a
or (r - a 2 ) = 1 + -a
4 4
Y´ A (3,–5) Þ 3r 2 - 3a 2 = 4 + a 2 - 4a
Thus, D divides BC internally in the ratio 2 : 1 Þ 3r 2 = 4a 2 - 4a + 4
æ 2 ( -1 ) + 1 ( -3 ) 2 ( -2 ) + 1 (3 ) ö = 4 (a 2 - a + 1 )
\ Dºç , ÷
è 2+1 2+1 ø 2
\ r= (a 2 - a + 1 )
æ 5 1ö 3
Thus, D º ç- , - ÷
è 3 3ø Hence, length of side of an equilateral triangle
5ö 1ö
2 2 2
Now,
æ æ
AD = ç3 + ÷ + ç - 5 + ÷ = (a 2 - a + 1 ) units.
è 3 ø è 3ø 3

196 196 14 2
= + = units l Ex. 20. In a D ABC , A º (a, b) , B º (1, 2 ), C º ( 2 , 3 ) and
9 9 3
point A lies on the line y = 2 x + 3 where a, b Î I. If the area
l Ex. 19. The distance between two parallel lines is unity. of D ABC be such that [ D ] = 2 , where [.] denotes the greatest
A point P lies between the lines at a distance a from one of integer function, find all possible coordinates of A.
them. Find the length of a side of an equilateral triangle Sol. Q( a, b ) lies on y = 2 x + 3
PQR, vertex Q of which lies on one of the parallel lines and then b = 2a + 3
vertex R lies on the other line. Thus, the coordinates of A are ( a, 2 a + 3 ) …(i)
Sol. Let PQ = QR = RP = r 1 ì a 2 a + 3½ ½1 2½ ½2 3 ½ü
D = í½ + +
and Ð PQL = q 2 î½1 2 ½ ½2 3½ ½a 2 a + 3½ýþ
then, Ð XQR = q + 60° 1
= | 2 a - (2 a + 3 ) + 3 - 4 + 4 a + 6 - 3 a|
Given, PL = a and RN = 1 unit 2
PL a 1
In D PQL, sin q = = = | a + 2|
QP r 2
\ a = r sin q …(i) but [D] = 2
Y é1 ù
Þ êë 2 | a + 2 | úû = 2
R (r, θ + 60°)
| a + 2|
Þ 2£ <3
2
r r Þ 4 £| a + 2 | < 6
1 Þ 4 £a + 2 <6
P (r, θ) and -6 < a + 2 £ - 4
60° Þ 2 £ a < 4 and -8 < a £ - 6
r a
θ
X′ X Q a ÎI
(0, 0) Q N L
\ a = 2 , 3 , - 7, - 6
Y′ Hence, possible coordinates of A are (2, 7 ), (3, 9 ), ( -7, - 11 ) and
RN 1 ( -6, - 9 ).
and in DQRN, sin( q + 60° ) = =
QR r
54 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

l Ex. 21. Let S be the square of unit area. Consider any l Ex. 22. The circumcentre of a triangle with vertices
quadrilateral which has one vertex on each side of S. If a ,b,c (a , a tan a ), B (b, b tan b) and C (c , c tan g ) lies at the origin,
and d denote the lengths of the sides of the quadrilateral, where 0 < a, b, g < p / 2 and a + b + g = p. Show that its
prove that 2 £a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + d 2 £ 4. orthocentre lies on the line
Sol. Given S be the area of square with vertices æa ö æbö ægö æa ö æbö ægö
4 cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷ x - 4 sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ y =y
O ( 0, 0 ), A (1, 0 ), B (1, 1 ), C ( 0, 1 ). è2ø è 2ø è 2ø è2ø è 2ø è 2ø
Let PQRM be the quadrilateral with vertices Sol. Since, the circumcentre of the triangle is at the origin O, we
P ( p, 0 ), Q (1, q ), R (r , 1 ) and M( 0, m ) have OA = OB = OC = R, where R is the circumradius of the
and sides MP = a , PQ = b, QR = c, RM = d circumcircle.
\ (OA ) 2 = R 2 Þa 2 + a 2 tan 2 a = R 2 Þ a = R cos a
Y
R(r, 1) Therefore, the coordinates of A are ( R cos a, R sin a ).
(0, 1)C B(1, 1) Similarly, the coordinates of B are ( R cosb, R sin b ) and those of
d c C are ( R cos g, R sin g ).
Q (1, q)
(0, m)M Thus the coordinates of centroid G of D ABC are
a b
æR R ö
ç (cos a + cosb + cos g ), (sin a + sin b + sin g ) ÷
è3 3 ø
X′ X
O P(p, 0) A(1, 0) Now, if P (h, k ) is the orthocentre of D ABC, then
Y′ R 1 ×h + 2 × 0
(cos a + cosb + cos g ) = (QPG : GO = 2 : 1 )
2 2 2 3 1+2
Then, a =p +m
O
b 2 = (1 - p ) 2 + q 2
1
c 2 = (1 - q ) 2 + (1 - r ) 2 G

d 2 = r 2 + (1 - m ) 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
P
\ a + b + c + d = p + (1 - p ) + q + (1 - q )
Þ R (cos a + cosb + cos g ) = h ...(i)
+ r 2 + (1 - r ) 2 + m 2 + (1 - m ) 2 R 1 ×k + 2 × 0
and (sin a + sin b + sin g ) =
= 2 [ p 2 + q 2 + r 2 + m 2 - p - q - r - m + 2] 3 1+2
éæ 2 2 2 2 ù Þ R (sin a + sin b + sin g ) = k ...(ii)
1ö æ 1ö æ 1ö æ 1ö
=2 êçp - ÷ + çq - ÷ + çr - ÷ + çm - ÷ + 1 ú ³2
êë è 2ø è 2ø è 2ø è 2ø úû Dividing (ii) by (i), then
sin a + sin b + sin g k
Þ a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + d 2 ³2 …(i) Þ =
cos a + cosb + cos g h
also, since 0 £ x £1
\ x 2 £1 4 cos( a / 2 ) cos(b / 2 ) cos( g / 2 ) k
Þ =
1 + 4 sin( a / 2 ) sin(b / 2 ) sin( g / 2) h
\ a 2 £ 1, b 2 £ 1, c 2 £ 1, d 2 £ 1
(Because, a + b + y = p by identity)
Þ a2 + b2 + c2 + d 2 £4 …(ii)
Hence, the orthocentre P (h, k ) lies on the line
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get æ aö æbö ægö æ aö æbö ægö
4 cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷ x - 4 sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ y = y
2 £a2 + b2 + c2 + d 2 £4 è2ø è2ø è2ø è2ø è2ø è2ø
#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 15 multiple choice questions. 8. The vertices of a triangle are (0, 3), (−3, 0) and (3, 0). The
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c), (d) out of which coordinates of its orthocentre are
ONLY ONE is correct.
(a) (0, − 2) (b) (0, 2)
1. Vertices of a variable triangle are (3, 4), (5 cos θ, 5 sin θ) (c) (0, 3 ) (d) (0, − 3 )
and (5 sin θ, − 5 cos θ), where θ ∈ R. Locus of its 9. ABC is an equilateral triangle such that the vertices B
orthocentre is and C lie on two parallel lines at a distance 6. If A lies
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 8y − 25 = 0 between the parallel lines at a distance 4 from one of
(b) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 8y − 25 = 0 them, then the length of a side of the equilateral triangle
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 6 x − 8y − 25 = 0 is
(d) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 8y − 25 = 0 88
(a) 8 (b)
3
2. If a rod AB of length 2 units slides on coordinate axes in
the first quadrant. An equilateral triangle ABC is 4 7
(c) (d) None of these
completed with C on the side away from O. Then, locus 3
of C is 10. A, B, C are respectively the points (1, 2), ( 4, 2), ( 4, 5). If
(a) x 2 + y 2 − xy + 1 = 0
T 1 , T 2 are the points of trisection of the line segment AC
(b) x 2 + y 2 − xy 3 + 1 = 0 and S 1 , S 2 are the points of trisection of the line segment
(c) x 2 + y 2 + xy 3 − 1 = 0 BC, the area of the quadrilateral T 1 S 1 S 2 T 2 is
(d) x 2 + y 2 − xy 3 − 1 = 0 (a) 1 (b)
3
(c) 2 (d)
5
2 2
3. The sides of a triangle are 3x + 4y, 4 x + 3y and 5x + 5y
units, where x > 0, y > 0. The triangle is 11. (i) The points ( −1, 0), ( 4, − 2) and (cos 2 θ, sin 2 θ) are
(a) right angled (b) acute angled collinear
(c) obtuse angled (d) isosceles  1 − tan 2 θ 2 tan θ 
(ii) The points ( −1, 0), ( 4, − 2) and  , 
4. Let P and Q be the points on the line joining A( −2, 5)  1 + tan 2 θ 1 + tan 2 θ
and B (3, 1) such that AP = PQ = QB. Then, the mid-point are collinear
of PQ is (a) both statements are equivalent
1   1  (b) statemetn (i) has more solution than statement (ii) for θ
(a)  , 3 (b)  − , 4
2   4  (c) statement (ii) has more solution than statement (i) for θ
(c) ( 2, 3 ) (d) ( − 1, 4 ) (d) None of the above

5. A triangle ABC right angled at A has points A and B as 12. If α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , β 1 , β 2 , β 3 are the values of n for which
(2, 3) and (0, − 1) respectively. If BC = 5 units, then the n −1 n −1

point C is ∑ x 2r is divisible by ∑ x r , then the triangle having

r =0 r =0
(a) ( 4, 2) (b) ( −4, 2) vertices (α 1 , β 1 ), (α 2 , β 2 ) and (α 3 , β 3 ) cannot be
(c) ( −4, 4 ) (d) ( 4, − 4 ) (a) an isosceles triangle
6. The locus of a point P which divides the line joining (b) a right angled isosceles triangle
(1, 0) and (2 cos θ, 2 sin θ) internally in the ratio 2 : 3 (c) a right angled triangle
for all θ is (d) an equilateral triangle

13. A triangle ABC with vertices A( −1, 0), B  −2,  and

(a) a straight line (b) a circle 3
(c) a pair of straight lines (d) a parabola  4
 7
7. The points with the coordinates (2a, 3a ), (3b, 2b ) and (c , c ) C  −3, −  has its orthocentre at H. Then, the
 6
are collinear
(a) for no value of a, b , c (b) for all values of a, b , c orthocentre of triangle BCH will be
c 2c (a) ( −3, − 2) (b) (1, 3 )
(c) if a, , b are in HP (d) if a, , b are in HP
5 5 (c) ( −1, 2) (d) None of these
56 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

4
14. If ∑ ( x i2 + y i2 ) ≤ 2x 1 x 3 + 2x 2 x 4 + 2y 2y 3 + 2y 1y 4 , the 15. Without change of axes the origin is shifted to (h, k ),
i =1
then from the equation x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 6y − 7 = 0,
points ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y 3 ), ( x 4 , y 4 ) are
(a) the vertices of a rectangle then term containing linear powers are missing, then
(b) collinear point (h, k ) is
(c) the vertices of a trapezium (a) (3, 2) (b) ( −3, 2)
(d) None of the above (c) ( 2, − 3 ) (d) ( −2, − 3 )

#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 2 :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each 19. The points A( −4, − 1), B( −2, − 4 ), C ( 4, 0) and D(2, 3) are
questions has four choices (a), (b), (c), (d) out of which the vertices of a
MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
(a) parallelogram (b) rectangle
16. If ( −6, − 4 ), (3, 5), ( −2, 1) are the vertices of a (c) rhombus (d) square
parallelogram, then remaining vertex can be 20. The medians AD and BE of the triangle with vertices
(a) (0, − 1) (b) ( − 1, 0) A(0, b ), B(0, 0) and C (a, 0) are mutually perpendicular if
(c) ( − 11, − 8 ) (d) (7, 10) (a) b = a 2 (b) a = b 2
17. If the point P( x , y ) be equidistant from the points (c) b = − a 2 (d) a = − b 2
A(a + b, a − b ) and B (a − b, a + b ) then
(a) ax = by
21. The points A( x , y ), B(y, z ) and C (z, x ) represents the
(b) bx = ay vertices of a right angled triangle, if
(a) x = y (b) y = z
(c) x 2 − y 2 = 2(ax + by )
(c) z = x (d) x = y = z
(d) P can be (a, b )
22. Let the base of a triangle lie along the line x = a and be
18. If the coordinates of the vertices of a triangle are
of length 2a. The area of this triangles is a 2 , if the vertex
rational numbers, then which of the following points of
lies on the line
the triangle will always have rational coordinates
(a) x = − a (b) x = 0
(a) centroid (b) incentre
a
(c) circumcentre (d) orthocentre (c) x = (d) x = 2a
2

#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 3 :

Paragraph Based Questions
n
This section contains 2 solved paragraphs based upon 24. Length of DE is
each of the paragraph, 3 multiple choice questions have
to be answered. Each of these question has four choices
(a) 17 (4 − 3 )
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. 17
(b) (8 + 3 )
Paragraph I 2
(Q. Nos. 23 to 25) 17
(c) (4 + 3 )
ABC is a triangle right angled at A , AB = 2AC. A ≡ (1, 2), 2
B ≡ ( −3, 1). ACD is an equilateral triangle. The vertices of two (d) 15 ( 4 + 3 )
triangles are in anticlockwise sense. BCEF is a square with
vertices in clockwise sense. 25. The y-coordinate of the centroid of the square BCEF is
1 3
23. If area of ∆ACF is S, then the value of 8S is (a) − (b) −
4 4
(a) 42 (b) 51 5 7
(c) 62 (d) 102 (c) − (d) −
4 4
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 57

Paragraph II 26. Length of perpendicular from M to OA is equal to

1
(Q. Nos. 26 to 28) (a) 3 (b) (c) 3 (d) 2 − 3
 1 3
Let O( 0, 0) , A( 2, 0) and B 1,  be the vertices of a triangle.
 3 27. The perimeter of region R is equal to
Let R be the region consisting of all those points P inside ∆OAB (a) 4 − 3 (b) 4 + 3
satisfying. (c) 4 + 3 3 (d) 2 + 4 ( 2 − 3 )
d ( P , OA ) ≤ min {d ( P , OB ), d ( P , AB )}, where, d denotes the
distance from the point P to the corresponding line. Let M be the 28. The area of region R is equal to
peak of region R. (a) 2 − 3 (b) 2 + 3 (c) 2 3 (d) 4 + 3

#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 4 :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 5 questions. The answer to each 31. The ends of the base of an isosceles triangle are
example is a single digit integer ranging from 0 to 9 (both (2 2, 0) and (0, 2 ). One side is of length 2 2. If ∆ be
inclusive). the area of triangle, then the value of [∆ ] is (where
29. If the area of the triangle formed by the points [⋅] denotes the greatest integer function)
(2a, b ), (a + b, 2b + a ) and (2b, 2a ) be ∆ 1 and the area of the 32. If ( x , y ) is the incentre of the triangle formed by the
triangle whose vertices are (a + b, a − b ), (3b − a, b + 3a ) and points (3, 4 ), ( 4, 3) and (1, 2), then the value of x 2 is
(3a − b, 3b − a ) be ∆ 2 , then the value of ∆ 2 / ∆ 1 is 33. Let P and Q be points on the line joining A( −2, 5)
30. The diameter of the nine point circle of the triangle with and B(3, 1) such that AP = PQ = QB. If mid-point of
vertices (3, 4 ), (5 cos θ, 5 sin θ) and (5 sin θ, − 5 cos θ), where b
PQ is (a, b ), then the value of is
θ ∈ R, is a

#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 5 :

Matching Type Questions
n
The section contains 2 questions. Each question has four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I and four
statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any given statement in Column I can have correct matching with one or more
statement(s) given in Column II.
34. Consider the triangle with vertices A(0, 0), B (5, 12) and C(16, 12). 35. The vertices of a triangle are A( − 10, 8), B (14, 8) and
Column I Column II C( −10, 26). Let G, I, H , O be the centroid, incentre,
orthocentre, circumcentre respectively of ∆ABC.
A. If(λ , µ ) are the coordinates of centroid of (p) 3
triangle ABC, then (λ + µ ) is divisible by Column I Column II
B. If (λ , µ) are the coordinates of circumcentre of (q) 5 A. The inradius r is (p) a prime number
triangle ABC, then 2λ is divisible by
B. The circumradius R is (q) an even number
C. If (λ , µ ) are the coordinates of incentre of (r) 7
triangle ABC, then µ is divisible by C. The area of ∆IGH is (r) a composite number

D. If (λ , µ ) are the coordinates of excentre (s) 9 D. The area of ∆OGI is (s) a perfect number
opposite to vertex B, then λ + µ is divisible by
58 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 6 :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Q. Nos. 36 to 39) are Assertion-Reason 37. Statement I Let the vertices of a ∆ABC be A( −5, − 2),
type questions. Each of these questions contains two B(7, 6) and C(5, − 4 ). Then, the coordinates of the
statements :
circumcentre are (1, 2).
Statement I (Assertion) and
Statement II In a right angled triangle, the mid point
Statement II (Reason)
of the hypotenuse is the circumcentre of the triangle.
Each of these question also has four alternative choices
(a), (b), (c) and (d), only one out of which is the correct 38. A line segment AB is divided internally and externally in
answer. the same ratio at P and Q respectively and M is the
You have to select the correct choice as given below mid-point of AB.
(a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is a A Q
correct explanation for statement I M P B
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is not a
Statement I MP, MB, MQ are in G.P
correct explanation for statement I
(c) Statement I is true, statement II is false Statement II AP, AB and AQ are in H.P.
(d) Statement I is false, statement II is true 39. Statement I Transformation of the equation
36. The vertices of a triangle an A(1, 2), B ( −1, 3) and C(3, 4 ). x 2 − 3xy + 11x − 12y + 36 = 0 to parallel axes through the
1
Let D, E, F divide BC , CA, AB respectively in the same point ( − 4, 1) becomes ax 2 + bxy + 1 = 0, then b 2 − a = .
ratio. 64
Statement I The centroid of triangle DEF is (1, 3). Statement II If the axes turned through an angle θ,
then the equation f ( x , y ) = 0 is transformed by replacing
Statement II The triangle ABC and DEF have the same
( x , y ) by (( x cos θ − y sin θ), ( x sin θ + y cos θ)).
centroid.

Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 7 :

Subjective Type Questions
n
In this section, there are 7 subjective questions.  a 3 a 2 − 3  b 3 b 2 − 3
43. If the points,  , , ,  and
40. If A ( x 1 , y 1 ), B ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) are the vertices of a a − 1 a − 1  b − 1 b − 1 
∆ ABC and ( x , y ) be a point on the internal bisector of  c 3 c 2 − 3
  are collinear for three distinct values a, b, c
angle A, then prove that c − 1 c − 1 
x y 1  x y 1 and a ≠ 1, b ≠ 1 and c ≠ 1, then show that
bx 1 y 1 1 + c  x 1 y 1 1 = 0 abc − (bc + ca + ab ) + 3 (a + b + c ) = 0
   
x 2 y 2 1  x 3 y 3 1 44. Show that the area of the triangle whose sides are
where, AC = b and AB = c . ∆2
ar x + br y + c r = 0, r = 1, 2, 3 is , where C 1 , C 2
41. If a, b, c be the pth, qth and rth terms respectively of a 2 | C 1C 2C 3 |
HP, show that the points (bc , p ), (ca , q ) and (ab , r ) are and C 3 are the cofactors of c 1 , c 2 and c 3 respectively in
collinear. the determinant
a 1 b1 c 1
42. A line L intersects three sides BC, CA and AB of a
triangle in P, Q, R respectively, show that ∆ = a2 b2 c2
BP CQ AR a3 b3 c3
⋅ ⋅ = −1
PC QA RB
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 59

45. If A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , ..., A n are n points in a plane whose 46. If by change of axes without change of origin, the
coordinates are ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y 3 ) , ..., ( x n , y n ) expression ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 becomes
respectively. A 1 A 2 is bisected in the point G 1 ; G 1 A 3 is a1 x 12 + 2h 1 x 1 y 1 + b1 y 12 , prove that
divided at G 2 in the ratio 1 : 2 ; G 2 A 4 is divided at G 3 in
the ratio 1 : 3; G 3 A 5 at G 4 in the 1 : 4 and so on until all (i) a + b = a1 + b1
the points are exhausted. Show that the coordinates of (ii) ab − h 2 = a1 b1 − h 12
the final point so obtained are
(iii) (a − b ) 2 + 4h 2 = (a1 − b1 ) 2 + 4h 12
x 1 + x 2 + ..... + x n y 1 + y 2 + ..... + y n
and
n n

#L Coordinate System and Coordinates Exercise 8 :

Questions Asked in Previous 13 Year’s Exams
n This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, the distance of any one of them from the point (1, 0) to
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. 1
the distance from the point ( −1, 0) is equal to . Then, the
47. If a vertex of a triangle is (1, 1) and the mid-points of 3
two side through this vertex are ( − 1, 2) and (3, 2), then circumcentre of the triangle ABC is at the point
the centroid of the triangle is [AIEEE 2005, 3M] [AIEEE 2009, 4M]
5  5 
 1 7  7 (a)  , 0 (b)  , 0
(a)  ,  (b) 1,  4  2 
3 3  3
5 
 1 7  7 (c)  , 0 (d) (0, 0)
(c)  − ,  (d)  − 1,  3 
 3 3  3
51. The x-coordinate of the incentre of the triangle that has
48. Let O(0, 0), P(3, 4 ), Q(6, 0) be the vertices of the triangle the coordinates of mid-points of its sides are (0, 1), (1, 1)
OPQ. The point R inside the triangle OPQ is such that the and (1, 0) is [JEE Main 2013, 4M]
triangles OPR, PQR, OQR are of equal area. The (a) 2 + 2 (b) 2 − 2
coordinates of R are [IIT-JEE 2007, 3M]
(c) 1 + 2 (d) 1 − 2
4   2
(a)  , 3 (b) 3, 
3   3 52. The number of points, having both coordinates are
integers, that lie in the interior of the triangle with
 4  4 2
(c) 3,  (d)  ,  vertices (0, 0), (0, 41) and (41, 0) is [JEE Main 2015, 4M]
 3  3 3
(a) 820 (b) 780
49. Let A(h, k ), B(1, 1) and C(2, 1) be the vertices of a right (c) 901 (d) 861
angled triangle with AC as its hypotenuse. If the area of 53. Let k be an integer such that the triangle with vertices
the triangle is 1, then the set of values which ‘k’ can take
(k , − 3k ), (5, k ) and ( −k , 2) has area 28 sq units. Then, the
is given by [AIEEE 2007, 3M]
orthocentre of this triangle is at the point
(a) {1, 3 } (b) {0, 2} [JEE Main 2017, 4M]
(c) ( − 1, 3} (d) { − 3, − 2}  1  1
(a)  2,  (b)  2, − 
 2  2
50. Three distinct points A, B and C are given in the
 3  3
2-dimensional coordinates plane such that the ratio of (c) 1,  (d) 1, − 
 4  4
 Answers
Exercise for Session 1 Exercise for Session 4
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (b) 1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (b)
4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (±5, 0) 7. (c) 8. y2 − 8 y − 4x + 20 = 0
7. (0, ± 4) 8. (−6, 0) 9. 3x2 + 3 y2 − 10 ax + 3a2 = 0 10. x + y = 4
9. θ = α 10. x2 + y2 = 2 ax 11. 9x2 + 36 y2 = 4l 2 12. x2 − 9 y2 = 0
1
13. (a − b) (x + y ) = a b
2 2 2 2 4
14. −3
Exercise for Session 2 3
−1  B  C
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (d) 16. tan   , − 17. xy = 0
 A (A 2 + B 2 )
13.  ,
3 5 5 2
6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (c) 9. 8a  and
 2 2 2 Chapter Exercises
63
14. 15. (5, 1) and (−3, 3) 17. a = b = 2 − 3 1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (a) 6. (b)
65
7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (d)
1+ 3 7 − 5 3  1 − 3 7 + 5 3 
18.  ,  or  ,  13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (b,c,d) 17. (b,d) 18. (a,c,d)
 2 2   2 2  19. (a,b) 20. (b,d) 21. (a,b,c) 22. (b,d) 23. (b) 24. (b)
25. (d) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (4) 30. (5)
Exercise for Session 3 31. (3) 32. (9) 33. (6)
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (c) 34. (A ) → ( p, q); (B ) → ( p, r ); (C ) → ( p, s); (D ) → ( p)
7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. ( p, q) 35. (A ) → (q, r , s); (B ) → ( r ); (C ) → (q, r , s); (D ) → ( p)
12. 333 sq units 13. Centroid = incentre ≡ (2 , 3) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 47. (b) 48. (c)
2 49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (a)
3 45
18. − , 19. 34 sq units
67 17
 3. Let a = 3x + 4y , b = 4x + 3y , c = 5x + 5y

Solutions ∴ cosC =

=
a2 + b2 − c2
2ab
(3 x + 4y ) 2 + ( 4 x + 3y ) 2 − (5 x + 5y ) 2
2(3 x + 4y ) ( 4 x + 3y )
xy
1. Since, the distance of all points from O( 0, 0) = 5 =− <0
(3 x + 4y ) ( 4 x + 3y )
∴ O( 0, 0 ) be the circumcentre.
⇒ C > 90 °
Centroid of triangle (G )
Hence, triangle is obtuse angled.
 3 + 5 cosθ + 5 sin θ ) 4 + 5 sin θ − 5 cosθ 
≡ ,  4.
 3 3  A
P Q
B

Let H(α , β ) be the orthocentre of the triangle, then

Q AP = PQ = QB
α = 3 + 5 cosθ + 5 sin θ
1 
⇒ (α − 3 ) = 5 cosθ + 5 sin θ …(i) ∴ mid-point of PQ = mid-point of AB =  , 3
2 
and β = 4 + 5 sin θ − 5 cosθ
⇒ (β − 4 ) = 5 sin θ − 5 cosθ …(ii)
5. z A = 2 + 3i ; z B = − i and AB = ( 4 + 16) = 20 = 2 5
On squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Y
(α − 3 ) 2 + (β − 4 ) 2 = 25 + 25
A (2, 3)
⇒ α 2 + β 2 − 6α − 8β − 25 = 0
Hence, the locus of H(α , β ) is
x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 8y − 25 = 0
C
2. Y
C(a, b)
5

X¢ X
B O
2
2 (0, –1) B
60°
X¢ q Y¢
X
O A D
Y¢ ∴ ( AC ) = ( BC ) 2 − ( AC ) 2 = 5
Let AB = AC = 2 zC − z A AC iπ / 2 i
∴ = e =
and ∠BAO = θ z B − z A AB 2
Let C ≡ (α , β ) i
⇒ zC − (2 + 3i ) = ( −i − 2 − 3i )
∴ α = 2 cosθ + 2 cos(180 ° − (60 ° + θ )) 2
= 2 cosθ − 2 cos(60 ° + θ ) or zC = 2 + 3i − i + 2 = 4 + 2i
 1 3 ∴ C ≡ ( 4, 2 )
= 2 cosθ − 2 cosθ × − sin θ × 
 2 2  6. Let P ≡ (h, k ) and A ≡ (1, 0), B ≡ (2 cosθ, 2 sin θ )
= cosθ + 3 sin θ …(i) Q PA : PB = 2 : 3
β = 2 sin(180 ° − (60 ° + θ )) 4 cosθ + 3
and ∴ h= ⇒ 5h − 3 = 4 cosθ …(i)
= 2 sin(60 ° + θ ) 5
4 sinθ + 0
 1 3 and k= ⇒ 5k = 4 sinθ …(ii)
= 2 sin θ × + cosθ ×  5
 2 2 
OA squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
= sin θ + 3 cosθ …(ii) (5h − 3 ) 2 + (5k ) 2 = 16
Eliminating θ from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get ∴ Locus of C is (5 x − 3 ) 2 + (5y ) 2 = 16
α 2 + β 2 − αβ 3 − 1 = 0 or 25( x 2 + y 2 ) − 30 x − 7 = 0
Hence, the locus of H(α , β ) is which is a circle.
x 2 + y 2 − xy 3 − 1 = 0
62 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

2a 3a 1 T1 divides AC in the ratio 1 : 2 internally, then

1
7. 3b 2b 1 = 0  1 × 4 + 2 × 1 1 × 5 + 2 × 2
2 T1 ≡  , 
c c 1  1+2 1+2 
⇒ 2a(2b − c ) − 3a(3b − c ) + 1(3bc − 2bc ) = 0 or T1 ≡ (2, 3 )
or − 5ab + ac + bc = 0 and T2 is the mid-point of T1 and C, then
c=
5ab  2 + 4 3 + 5
or T2 ≡  , 
a+ b  2 2 
2c 2ab or T2 ≡ (3, 4 )
or =
5 a+b S1 divides BC in the ratio 1 : 2 (internally), then
2c
Hence, a, , b are in HP. B S1 S2 C
5
(Q BS1 = S1S 2 = S 2C )
8. Y
B (0, 3)  1 × 4 + 2 × 4 1 × 5 + 2 × 2
S1 ≡  , 
 1+2 1+2 
45° 45°
or S1 ≡ ( 4, 3 )
and S 2 is the mid-point of S1 and C, then
 4 + 4 3 + 5
S2 ≡  , 
X¢
45° 45°
X  2 2 
C (–3, 0) O A (3, 0)
or S 2 = ( 4, 4 )
Y¢
Area of quadrilateral T1S1S 2T2
It is clear from the figure orthocentre ≡ ( 0, 3 )
2 3
9. Let, A( 0, 0)
Coordinate of B are (2 cot θ, 2 ) and coordinate of C are
{ 4 cot (60 ° − θ ), − 4 } 4 3

y=x tanq
Y
y=2 B =1 4 4
2
2
A q 3 4
6 X
(0,0) 60°–q

C 2 3
y=–4
y=x tan (q – 60°) 1
= (6 + 16 + 16 + 9 ) − (12 + 12 + 12 + 8 )
2
∴ AB = AC
3
⇒ ( AB ) 2 = ( AC ) 2 = sq units.
2
4 cot 2 θ + 4 = 16 cot 2 (60 ° − θ ) + 16
4cosec 2θ = 16cosec 2 (60 ° − θ ) 11. Statement (i) :
⇒ sin(60 ° − θ ) = 2 sin θ Q Points ( −1, 0 ), ( 4, − 2 ) and (cos2θ, sin 2θ ) are collinear.
− 1 − cos2θ 0 − sin 2θ
 3 1  ∴ =0
⇒  cosθ − sin θ = 2 sin θ 4 − cos2θ − 2 − sin 2θ
 2 2 
⇒ 2 + sin 2 θ + 2 cos2θ + sin 2θ cos2θ
3
∴ tanθ = + 4 sin 2θ − sin 2θ cos2θ = 0
5
⇒ 5 sin 2θ + 2(1 + cos2θ ) = 0
∴ The required length
or 10 sin θ cosθ + 4 cos2 θ = 0
= AB = ( 4 cot 2 θ + 4 ) or 2 cosθ (5 sin θ + 2 cosθ ) = 0
28 4 7 2
=2 = or cosθ = 0 and tanθ = −
3 3 5
π
10. A C or θ = mπ +
T1 T2 2
 −2 
Q A ≡ (1, 2 ), B ≡ ( 4, 2 ), C ≡ ( 4, 5 ) (Q AT1 = T1T2 = T2C ) and θ = nπ + tan −1   ; m, n ∈ I
 5
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 63

Statement (ii) : 15. ( x + h ) 2 + (y + k ) 2 − 4( x + h ) + 6(y + k ) − 7 = 0

 1 − tan θ 2 tan θ 
2
⇒ x 2 + y 2 + 2 x(h − 2 ) + 2y (k + 3 ) + (h 2 + k 2 − 4h + 6k − 7 ) = 0
Q Points ( −1, 0 ), ( 4, − 2 ) and  ,  are collinear.
 1 + tan 2 θ 1 + tan 2 θ  According to question
1 − tan 2 θ 2 tan θ h − 2 = 0, k + 3 = 0
−1 − 0−
1 + tan 2 θ 1 + tan 2 θ ∴ h = 2, k = − 3
∴ =0
1 − tan 2 θ 2 tan 2 θ hence, (h, k ) ≡ (2, − 3 ).
4− −2 −
1 + tan 2 θ 1 + tan θ2
16. If the remaining vertex is (h, k ), then
⇒ 10 tan 3 θ + 4 tan 2 θ + 10 tan θ + 4 = 0 Case I Y
or (2 tan 2 θ + 2 ) (5 tan θ + 2 ) = 0 (3, 5)
or tan 2 θ ≠ − 1 (–2, 1)
2
∴ tanθ = −
5
 −2 
⇒ θ = pπ + tan −1   , p ∈ I X¢
O
X
 5 (h , k )
n −1 (–6, –4)
∑x
r=0
2r
Y¢
12. Q = integer
n −1
h − 2 = 3 − 6, k + 1 = 5 − 4 or h = − 1, k = 0
∑x
r=0
r
∴ Fourth vertex is ( −1, 0 ).

1 ⋅ (1 − x 2n ) Case II Y
(–2, 1)
(1 − x 2 ) (3, 5)
⇒ = integer
1 ⋅ (1 − xn )
(1 − x )
X¢ X
O
1 + xn
⇒ = integer
1+x
n must be 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, ……
∴ vertices are (1, 7), (3, 9), (5, 11) (h, k) (–6, –4)
Y¢
Here, ( AB ) 2 = 8, ( BC ) 2 = 8, (CA ) 2 = 32
∴ triangle cannot be an equilateral. h + 3 = − 2 − 6, k + 5 = 1 − 4 or h = − 11, k = − 8
∴ Fourth vertex is ( −11, − 8 ).
13. The orthocentre of ∆BCH is the vertex A( −1, 0).
14. Given, x12 + y12 + x 22 + y 22 + x 32 + y 32 + x 42 + y 42 Case III (h , k )
Y
≤ 2 x1 x 3 + 2 x 2 x 4 + 2y 2y 3 + 2y1y 4
⇒ ( x1 − x 3 ) 2 + ( x 2 − x 4 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 3 ) 2 + (y1 − y 4 ) 2 ≤ 0
or ( x1 − x 3 ) 2 + ( x 2 − x 4 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 3 ) 2 + (y1 − y 4 ) 2 = 0 (–2, 1)
(3, 5)
or x1 = x 3 , x 2 = x 4 , y 2 = y 3 , y1 = y 4 O
X¢ X
x1 + x 2 x 3 + x 4
or =
2 2
y1 + y 2 y 3 + y 4
and = (–6, –4)
2 2
D(x4, y4) B(x2, y2) Y¢

h − 6 = − 2 + 3, k − 4 = 1 + 5
or h = 7, k = 10
∴ Fourth vertex is (7, 10).
17. (PA )2 = (PB )2
A(x1, y1) C(x3, y3) ⇒ ( x − a − b ) 2 + (y − a + b ) 2 = ( x − a + b ) 2 + (y − a − b ) 2
⇒ ( x − a + b ) 2 − ( x − a − b ) 2 = (y − a + b ) 2 − (y − a − b ) 2
Hence, AB and CD bisect each other ⇒ (2 x − 2a )(2b ) = (2y − 2a ) (2b )
Therefore, ACBD is a parallelogram. Also, or x =y
( AB ) 2 = ( x1 − x 2 ) 2 + (y1 − y 2 ) 2 = ( x 3 − x 4 ) 2 + (y 3 − y 4 ) 2 = (CD ) 2 and P is the mid-point of AB i.e., (a, a )
Thus, ACBD is a parallelogram and AB = CD. If P be (a, b ), then bx = ay (Qa = b )
Hence, it is a rectangle.
64 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Now, in right angled triangle ABG,

18. Let vertices of triangle ABC are
( BA ) 2 = ( AG ) 2 + ( BG ) 2
A ≡ ( x1 , y1 ), B ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ≡ ( x 3 , y 3 )
1 1
where, x1 , x 2 , x 3 , y1 , y 2 , y 3 ∈ Q ⇒ b 2 = (a 2 + 4b 2 ) + (a 2 + b 2 ) [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
9 9
∴ a = BC = ( x 2 − x 3 ) + (y 2 − y 3 )
2 2
⇒ a 2 = 2b 2
= rational or irrational ∴ a = ±b 2
similarly, b = CA, c = AB
Then, incentre 21. Q ( AB ) 2 = ( x − y ) 2 + (y − z ) 2
 ax + bx 2 + cx 3 ay1 + by 2 + cy 3  ( BC ) 2 = (y − z ) 2 + (z − x ) 2
≡ 1 ,  and (CA ) 2 = (z − x ) 2 + ( x − y ) 2
 a+b+c a+b+c 
Case I If x = y , then
∴Incentre has rational or irrational coordinates but centroid,
circumcentre and orthocentre have always rational coordinates. ( AB ) 2 + (CA ) 2 = ( BC ) 2
Case II If y = z , then
19. Since, A ≡ (−4 − 1), B ≡ (−2, − 4), C ≡ (4, 0), D ≡ (2, 3)
( AB ) 2 + ( BC ) 2 = (CA ) 2
D C Case III If z = x, then
( BC ) 2 + (CA ) 2 = ( AB ) 2
22. C (a, 2a+l)

A B

∴ ( AB ) = ( −4 + 2 ) + ( −1 + 4 ) = 13
2 2 2

( BC ) 2 = ( −2 − 4 ) 2 + ( −4 − 0 ) 2 = 52 x–a
x=a B(x, y)
(CD ) 2 = ( 4 − 2 ) 2 + ( 0 − 3 ) 2 = 13
and ( DA ) 2 = (2 + 4 ) 2 + (3 + 1 ) 2 = 52
Clearly, AB = CD and BC = AD
∴ABCD is a parallelogram. (a, l)
Again, ( AC ) 2 = ( −4 − 4 ) 2 + ( −1 − 0 ) 2 = 65 A
and ( BD ) 2 = ( −2 − 2 ) 2 + ( −4 − 3 ) 2 = 65 Let A ≡ (a, λ )
∴ AC = BD then, B ≡ (a, 2a + λ )
Hence, ABCD is a rectangle. and C ≡ ( x, y )
20. Y Area of ∆ABC = a 2 (given)
A (0, b) 1
⇒ × 2a × | x − a | = a 2
2
⇒ | x − a| = a
⇒ x −a = ± a
⇒ x = 0, x = 2a
Sol. (Q. Nos. 23 to 25)
b E a, b
2 2
AB = (1 + 3 ) 2 + (2 − 1 ) 2 = 17
90° 1 1
G AC = AB = 17
2 2
E
(0, 0)
X¢ X
B D a, 0 C (a, 0)
2

2 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) F
Q BG = BE = ×
3 3 2
1
⇒ ( BG ) 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) …(i)
9
C
2 2 a2 
and AG = AD = ×  + b 2  60°
3 3  4  D 60°
60°
1
⇒ ( AG ) = (a 2 + 4b 2 )
2
…(ii) A B
9
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 65

For coordinates of C : n Sol. (Q. Nos. 26 to 28)

zc − z A AC i π / 2 i
= e = Y
z B − z A AB 2
i
⇒ zc − (1 + 2i ) = ( −3 + i − 1 − 2i ) B 1, 1
2 Ö3
i 1 F E
= ( −4 − i ) = − 2i +
2 2 15° r r
3
or zc = X¢ X
2 O 15° D A (2, 0)
3 
∴ C ≡  , 0
2  Y¢

For coordinates of D : Given, O ≡ ( 0, 0 ) A ≡ (2, 0 )

zD − zA  1 
= eiπ / 3 and B ≡ 1, 
zC − z A  3
1 i 3 1  Let P ≡ ( x, y )
⇒ z D − (1 + 2i ) =  +   − 2i 
2 2  2  If I be the incentre of ∆OAB.
If in radius = r, then
1 i 3
= + 3 −i + ID = IE = IF = r, if P at I ,
4 4
then d ( P , OA ) = d ( P , OB ) = d ( P , AB ) = r ,
5   3
or z D =  + 3 + i 1 +  But d ( P , OA ) ≤ min. {d ( P , OB ), d ( P , AB )}
4   4
which is possible only P lies in the ∆OIA
5 3 ∴ M be the peak of region R.
∴ D ≡  + 3, 1 + 
4 4 ∴ M=I
For coordinates of F : 26. Length of perpendicular from M to OA = ID = r = OD tan15°
zF − zB = 1 × (2 − 3 )
= e −iπ / 2 = − i
zC − z B
=2 − 3
9 
⇒ z F − ( −3 + i ) = − i  − i  27. Perimeter of region
2 
7 R = IO + OA + AI
⇒ zF = − 4 − i = r cosec 15 ° + 2 + r cosec 15 °
2
 7 = 2r cosec15° + 2
∴ F ≡  −4, −  , then
 2 = 2(2 − 3 ) ⋅
2 2
+2
 1 9 ( 3 − 1)
E ≡ ,− 
 2 2 2 2
= ( 3 − 1)2 ⋅ +2
( 3 − 1)
1 2 1
= 2 2( 3 − 1) + 2
1 3 51
23. S= | 0 1| = ⇒ = 2 + 4 (2 − 3 )
2 2 8
7 1
−4 − 1 28. Area of region R = × OA × r
2 2
∴ 8S = 51 1
= × 2 × (2 − 3 ) = (2 − 3 )

2 2
3 9
2

24. DE =  + 3 −  + 1 +
5 1
+ 
4 2  4 2 29. We know that the area of the triangle formed by joining the
mid-points of any triangle is one fourth of that triangle, then
2
3 
2
 11 3 17 ∆ 2 = 4 ∆1
=  + 3 +  +  = (8 + 3 )
4  2 4 2 ∆2
∴ =4
∆1
25. y-coordinate of the centroid of the square
30. Since, the distance of all points from O(0, 0) = 5
7
0− ∴Circumradius ( R ) = 5
BCEF = 2=−7
2 4 Hence, diameter of nine point circle = R = 5
66 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

31. Let B ≡ (2 2, 0), C ≡ (0, 2 ) (B) C (16, 12)

∴ BC = (8 + 2 ) = 10
A
20 11
O (l, 4)

2Ö2 2Ö2
A (0, 0) 13 B (5, 12)

(OA ) 2 = (OB ) 2 = (OC ) 2

⇒ λ + µ 2 = ( λ − 5 ) 2 + (µ − 12 ) 2 = ( λ − 16 ) 2 + (µ − 12 ) 2
2

B D C ⇒ ( λ − 5 ) 2 + (µ − 12 ) 2 = ( λ − 16 ) 2 + (µ − 12 ) 2
or ( λ − 5 ) = − ( λ − 16 )
and AD = ( AB ) − ( BD )
2 2
21
∴ λ= ⇒ 2 λ = 21
 10 11 2
= 8 −  =
 4 2 (C) Incentre of ∆ABC is
1  11 × 0 + 13 × 16 + 20 × 5 11 × 0 + 13 × 12 + 20 × 12
∴ ∆= ⋅ BC ⋅ AD  , 
2  11 + 13 + 20 11 + 13 + 20 
1 11 55 ≡ (7, 9 )
= ⋅ 10 ⋅ =
2 2 2 Here, µ =9
⇒ [∆] = 3 (D) Excentre opposite to vertex B is
32. Let A ≡ (3, 4), B ≡ (4, 3) and C ≡ (1, 2)  11 × 0 + 13 × 16 − 20 × 5 11 × 0 + 13 × 12 − 20 × 12
 , 
∴ a = | BC | = (9 + 1 ) = 10  11 + 13 − 20 11 + 13 − 20 

b = | CA | = ( 4 + 4 ) = 2 2 ≡ (27, − 21 )
Here, λ = 27, µ = − 21
c = | AB | = (1 + 1 ) = 2
∴ λ + µ =6
10 × 3 + 2 2 × 4 + 2 × 1
⇒ x= 35. C (–10, 26)
10 + 2 2 + 2
3 ( 10 + 3 2 )
= =3
( 10 + 3 2 )
∴ x2 = 9 18 (b) 30 (a)

33. A
P R Q B

Q AP = PQ = QB
A B
Let R is the mid-point of PQ such that PR = RQ. (–10, 8)
24 (c)
(14, 8)
Now, AR = AP + PR = QB + RQ = RB
⇒ AR = RB − 10 8 1
1
∴ R bisects the line segment AB, then ∆ = | 14 8 1 | = 216
2
 − 2 + 3 5 + 1 − 10 26 1
R≡ , 
 2 2  a + b + c 30 + 18 + 24
s= = = 36
1  2 2
≡  , 3 = (a, b ) (given)
2   − 10 + 14 − 10 8 + 8 + 26
G≡ , 
1 b  3 3 
∴ a = , b =3 ⇒ =6
2 a ≡ ( −2, 14 )
34. (A) Centroid of ∆ABC is  30 × − 10 + 24 × − 10 + 18 × 14 30 × 8 + 24 × 26 + 18 × 8
I ≡ , 
 0 + 5 + 16 0 + 12 + 12  30 + 24 + 18 30 + 24 + 18 
 ,  ≡ (7, 8 )
 3 3  ≡ ( −4, 14 )
Here, λ = 7, µ = 8 H = A ≡ ( −10, 8 )
∴ λ + µ = 15 O = mid-point of BC ≡ (2, 17 )
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 67

∆ 216 comparing with ax 2 + bxy + 1 = 0.

(A) r = = =6
s 36 1 3
∴ a = ,b = −
BC 30 8 8
(B) R = = = 15
2 2 ∴ b2 − a
− 4 14 1 9 1 1
1 = − =
(C) Area of ∆IGH = | − 2 14 1 | = 6 64 8 64
2
− 10 8 1 ⇒ Statement I is true.
2 17 1 Hence, both statements are true and statement II is not correct
1 explanation of statement I.
(D) Area of ∆OGI = | − 2 14 1 | = 3
2 40. Let AD be the internal bisector of angle A.
− 4 14 1
A (x1, y1)
36. The centroid of triangle ABC is G(1, 3). If D divided BC in the
ratio λ : 1, then A/2 A/2

 3λ − 1 4λ + 3  λ + 3 3λ + 4 P
D≡ , , E ≡  , 
λ +1 λ +1 λ + 1 λ + 1  C (x2, y2) D C (x3, y3)
 −λ + 1 3λ + 2
and F ≡ ,  BD AB c
 λ +1 λ +1 Then, = =
DC AC b
∴The centroid of triangle DEF is (1, 3).  cx + bx 2 cy 3 + by 2 
Both statements are true and statement II is correct ∴ D≡ 3 , 
 c+b c+b 
explanation of statement I.
Let P ≡ ( x, y ). According to question, P ( x, y ) lies on AD,
37. Q AB = ( − 5 − 7 ) 2 + ( −2 − 6 ) 2 = 4 13
therefore P , A, D are collinear
BC = (7 − 5 ) 2 + (6 + 4 ) 2 = 2 26  x y 1
 x 1
and CA = (5 + 5 ) 2 + ( −4 + 2 ) 2 = 2 26 1 y1
∴  = 0
Q ( BC ) 2 + (CA ) 2 = ( AB ) 2 and | BC | = | CA | cx 3 + bx 2 cy 3 + by 2 1
 c+b c+b 
⇒ ∆ABC is right angled isosceles triangle and right angle at C.  
∴Circumcentre is mid-point of A, B ≡ (1, 2 ). Both statements
 x y 1 
are true and statement II is correct explanation of statement I. 1 
or x1 y1 1  = 0
38. Let A ≡ (0, 0), M ≡ (h, k ), B ≡ (2h, 2k ) and let same ratio λ : 1 (c + b )
cx 3 + bx 2 cy 3 + by 2 c + b
 2h λ 2kλ   2h λ 2kλ 
P ≡ , , Q =  ,  x y 1  x y 1
 λ + 1 λ + 1  λ − 1 λ − 1  x1 y1 1 +  x1 y1 1 = 0
or    
2λ
AP = (h 2 + k 2 ), AB = 2 (h 2 + k 2 ), cx 3 cy 3 c bx 2 by 2 b
(λ + 1)
 using the addition 
2λ  property of determinants
AQ = (h + k )
2 2

(λ − 1)
x y 1  x y 1
AP − AB λ − 1 AP
Q = = or c
x1 y1 1 
 + b x1 y1 1
= 0
AB − AQ λ + 1 AQ
x 3 y 3 1 x 2 y 2 1
∴ AP , AB and AQ are in HP.
x y 1  x y 1
⇒ AM + MP , AM + MB and AM + MQ are in HP
Hence, b
x1 y1 1 
 + c x1 y1 1
= 0
∴ MP , MB and MQ are in GP.
Both statements are true and statement II is correct x 2 y 2 1 x 3 y 3 1
explanation of statement I. 41. Let first term and common difference of corresponding AP are
39. Replacing x by (x − 4) and y by y + 1 is A and D.
x − 3 xy + 11 x − 12y + 36 = 0, then
2 Since, pth term of HP = a
1
( x − 4 ) 2 − 3( x − 4 ) (y + 1 ) + 11( x − 4 ) − 12(y + 1 ) + 36 = 0 ∴ pth term of AP =
⇒ x 2 − 3 xy + 8 = 0 a
1
x 2 3 xy ⇒ A + (p − 1) D = ...(i)
or − +1=0 a
8 8
1
Similarly, A + (q − 1 ) D = ...(ii)
b
68 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

1 Aliter :
and A + (r − 1 ) D = ...(iii)
c Let middle point O of BC as the origin, BC as the X-axis and
Subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (i), yy ′ as Y-axis.
1 1
(p − q ) D =
− …(iv) R
a b Y
and subtracting Eq. (iii) from Eq. (ii), (h, k)
1 1 A
(q − r ) D = − ...(v)
b c
Dividing Eq. (iv) by Eq. (v),
Q
1 1
−
p −q a b (b − a ) bc X´
= = × B O P C
X
q −r 1
−
1 ba (c − b )
(–a, 0) (a, 0)
b c Y´
p − q bc − ac
⇒ = ...(vi) Let BC = 2a
q − r ac − ab
∴ OB = OC = a
Let A (bc , p ), B (ca , q ), C (ab , r )
q−p Then, B ≡ ( −a, 0 )
Slope of AB = and C ≡ (a , 0 )
ca − bc
Let A ≡ (h, k )
r −q
and Slope of BC = Let P , Q, R divides BC , CA and AB in the ratio λ : 1, µ : 1 and
ab − ca
ν:1
q−p BP CQ AR
= [from Eq. (vi)] i.e. = λ, = µ, =ν
ca − bc PC QA RB
Since, Slope of AB = slope of BC Case I : Two sides divided internally and one side divided
Hence, A, B, C are collinear. externally.
42. Suppose the equation of the line L is ax + by + c = 0. Let the Hence, λ, µ are positive and ν is negative
coordinates of A, B, C be respectively ( x1 , y1 ) ; ( x 2 , y 2 ) ; ( x 3 , y 3 ).  λa − a   µh + a µk 
Now, P ≡ , 0 ; Q ≡  , 
Suppose P divides BC in the ratio λ : 1 , then coordinates of P  λ+1   µ + 1 µ + 1
 λx + x 2 λy 3 + y 2 
are  3 ,  since P lies on L.  − aν + h k 
 λ+1 λ+1  and R≡ , 
 ν+1 ν + 1
A Since, points P ,Q, R are collinear.
R λa − a
Q 0 1
λ+1
1 µh + a µk
∴ 1 =0
2 µ+1 µ+1
−aν + h k
1
P ν+1 ν+1
B C
λa − a 0 λ+1
or µh + a µk µ + 1 = 0
 λx + x 2   λy + y 2  −aν + h k ν + 1
⇒ a 3  +b 3  +c=0
 λ+1   λ+1 
λa − a 0 λ + 1
⇒ a ( λx 3 + x 2 ) + b ( λy 3 + y 2 ) + c ( λ + 1 ) = 0
or k µh + a µ µ + 1 = 0
⇒ λ (ax 3 + by 3 + c ) + (ax 2 + by 2 + c ) = 0
− aν + h 1 ν + 1
λ BP (ax 2 + by 2 + c )
∴ = =−
1 CP (ax 3 + by 3 + c ) Applying R2 → R2 − µR3 , then
CQ (ax 3 + by 3 + c ) λa − a 0 λ + 1
Similarly, =− k a + aµv 0 1 − µv = 0
QA (ax1 + by1 + c )
AR (ax1 + by1 + c ) −av + h 1 v + 1
and =−
RB (ax 2 + by 2 + c ) λa − a λ + 1
or −k =0
BP CQ AR a + aµv 1 − µv
Hence, ⋅ ⋅ = −1
PC QA RB
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 69

λ −1 λ + 1 or − abc (a − b ) (b − c ) (c − a )
or −ka =0
1 + µv 1 − µv + (ab + bc + ca ) (a − b ) (b − c ) (c − a )
or − ka {( λ − 1 ) (1 − µv ) − ( λ + 1 ) (1 + µν )} = 0 − 3 (a + b + c ) (a − b ) (b − c ) (c − a ) = 0
or − ka { − 2 λµν − 2 } ⇒ − (a − b ) (b − c ) (c − a )
⇒ 2ka ( λµν + 1 ) = 0 {abc − (ab + bc + ca ) + 3 (a + b + c )} = 0
or λµν = − 1 (Q ka ≠ 0 ) ∴ abc − (ab + bc + ca ) + 3 (a + b + c ) = 0
BP CQ AR Q a,b, c are distinct 
or ⋅ ⋅ = −1  
PC QA RB ∴a ≠ b, b ≠ c, c ≠ a 
∴(a − b ) (b − c ) (c − a ) ≠ 0 
Case II : All the three sides will be divided externally  
a, b, c are distinct.
R
Aliter : Suppose the given points lie on the line
Y lx + my + n = 0
A  t3   t 2 − 3
then, l   +m  +n=0
 t − 1  t −1
where, t = a, b, c
X´ X
B O C P ⇒ lt 3 + mt 2 + nt − (3m + n ) = 0 ...(i)
i.e. a, b, c are the roots of Eq. (i)
Y´ m
then, a+b+c=−
Q l
n
ab + bc + ca =
Here, λ, µ and ν are negative. l
Now, in case I formula for internal division will be used then (3m + n )
we can show that abc =
l
λµν = − 1 Now, abc − (bc + ca + ab ) + 3 (a + b + c )
BP CQ AR (3m + n ) n 3m
i.e. ⋅ ⋅ = −1 = − − =0
PC QA RB l l l
43. Since, given points are collinear, then Hence, abc − (bc + ca + ab ) + 3 (a + b + c ) = 0

a3 a2 − 3 44. Q ∆c = ∆2
1
a −1 a −1 where, ∆c be the determinant of cofactors of ∆.
1 b3 b2 − 3
1 =0 A1 B1 C1
2 b −1 b −1 Let, ∆c = A2 B2 C 2
c3 c2 − 3
1 A3 B3 C 3
c −1 c −1
then, A1 = b2c 3 − b3c 2 , B1 = a 3c 2 − a 2c 3 , C1 = a 2b3 − a 3b2
a3 a2 − 3 a − 1 A2 = b3c1 − b1c 3 , B2 = c 3a1 − c1a 3 , C 2 = a 3b1 − a1b3
1
⇒ b3 b2 − 3 b − 1 = 0
(a − 1 )(b − 1 )(c − 1 ) 3 A3 = b1c 2 − b2c1 , B3 = a 2c1 − a1c 2 , C 3 = a1b2 − a 2b1
c c2 − 3 c − 1
Given lines are
a3 a2 − 3 a − 1 a1 x + b1y + c1 = 0 ...(i)
or b3 b2 − 3 b − 1 = 0 a 2 x + b2y + c 2 = 0 ...(ii)
c3 c2 − 3 c − 1 a 3 x + b3y + c 3 = 0 …(iii)
Let P be the point of intersection of Eqs. (ii) and (iii), then
a 3 a 2 a a 3 a 2 –1 a 3 –3 a x y 1
= =
⇒ b b b + b b –1 + b 3 –3 b
3 2 3 2
b2c 3 − b3c 2 c 2a 3 − c 3a 2 a 2b3 − a 3b2
c3 c2 c c 3 c 2 –1 c 3 –3 c x y 1
i.e. = =
A1 B1 C1
a 3 –3 –1
A B 
+ b 3 –3 –1 = 0 ∴ P ≡  1 , 1
 C1 C1 
c 3 –3 –1
Similarly, if Q and R be the points of intersections of Eqs. (iii)
1 a a2 1 a2 a3 1 a a3 and (i) and Eqs. (i) and (ii) respectively, then
or −abc 1 b b + 1 b b −3 1 b b 3 + 0 = 0
2 2 3
A B  A B 
Q ≡  2 , 2, R ≡  3 , 3
1 c c2 1 c2 c3 1 c c3  C2 C2   C3 C3 
70 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

A1 B1 = x12 (a cos2 α + h sin 2α + b sin 2 α )

1
C1 C1 A1 B1 C1 + x1y1 (2h cos2α − a sin 2α + b sin 2α )
1 A B2 1 + y12 (a sin 2 α − h sin 2α + b cos2 α ) ...(i)
∴ Area of ∆PQR = | 2 1 |= A2 B2 C 2
2 C2 C2 2 | C1C 2C 3 | But, from question the expression ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 transforms
A3 B3 A3 B3 C 3 into
1
C3 C3 a1 x12 + 2h1 x1y1 + b1y12 …(ii)
2 Therefore, the expressions (i) and (ii) are the same. Hence,
a1 b1 c1
1 ∆2 equating the coefficients, we get
= a 2 b2 c 2 =
2 | C1C 2C 3 | 2 | C1C 2C 3 | a1 = a cos2 α + h sin 2α + b sin 2 α …(iii)
a 3 b3 c 3
2h1 = 2h cos2α − a sin 2α + b sin 2α …(iv)
45. Since, G1 is the middle point of A1 A2 where b1 = a sin 2 α − h sin 2α + b cos2 α …(v)
A1 ≡ ( x1 , y1 ) and A2 ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) On adding Eqs. (iii) and (v), we get
 x + x 2 y1 + y 2  a1 + b1 = a (cos2 α + sin 2 α ) + b (sin 2 α + cos2 α )
∴ G1 ≡  1 , 
 2 2  or a1 + b1 = a + b ...(vi)
A4 Again, a1 − b1 = a (cos α − sin α )
2 2

A5 + 2h sin 2α + b (sin 2 α − cos2 α )

3 4
1 ⇒ (a1 − b1 ) = (a − b ) cos2α + 2h sin 2α
G4 A2 (a1 − b1 ) 2 = (a − b ) 2 cos2 2α + 4h 2 sin 2 2α
1 G3
2 + 4h (a − b ) sin 2α cos2α …(vii)
1
A3 Again, from Eq. (iv)
G2 G1
2h1 = 2h cos2α − (a − b ) sin 2α
A1 ∴ 4h12 = 4h 2 cos2 2α + (a − b ) 2 sin 2 2α
Since, G2 divided G1 A3 internally in the ratio 1 :2 − 4h (a − b ) sin 2α cos2α …(viii)
  x1 + x 2  y + y2  On adding Eqs. (vii) and (viii), we get
 2 ⋅   + 1. x 3 2 ⋅  1
 
 + 1.y 3 
 (a1 − b1 ) 2 + 4h12 = (a − b ) 2 + 4h 2
2 2
∴ G2 ≡  , 
Again, 4a1b1 − 4h12 = (a1 + b1 ) 2 − (a1 − b1 ) 2 − 4h 2
 2+1 2+1 
  = (a + b ) 2 − (a − b ) 2 − 4h 2 [from Eq. (vi)]
 
Hence, a1b1 − h1 = ab − h 2
2
 x + x 2 + x 3 y1 + y 2 + y 3 
i.e. G2 ≡  1 , 
 3 3  47. Vertex of triangle is (1, 1) and mid-point of sides through this
vertex are ( −1,2 ) and (3, 2 )
Again G3 divides G2 A4 internally in the ratio 1 :3
A (1, 1)
  x1 + x 2 + x 3  y + y2 + y3 
 3 ⋅   + 1. x 4 3 ⋅  1
 
 + 1. y 4 

3 3
∴ G3 ≡  , 
 3+1 3+1  (–1, 2) (3, 2)
 
 
 x + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 y1 + y 2 + y 3 + y 4 
i.e. G3 ≡  1 , 
 4 4 
B C
Proceeding in this way, we can show that
⇒ Vertex B and C come out to be ( −3, 3 ) and (5, 3 )
 x + x 2 + ...+ xn y1 + y 2 + K + yn 
Gn − 1 ≡  1 ,  1 −3 + 5 1 + 3 + 5  7
 n n  ∴ Centroid is , ⇒ 1, 
3 3  3
or we can say that the coordinates of the final point are
48. Y
x1 + x 2 + ...+ xn y + y 2 + ...+ yn
and 1 P (3, 4)
n n
46. Let the axes be rotated through an angle α, since ( x , y )
be the coordinates with respect to old axes and ( x 1 , y 1 )
be the coordinates with respect to new axes, then
x = x1 cosα − y1 sin α
and y = x1 sin α + y1 cosα R
Now, the expression ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 becomes X¢ X
O Q(6, 0)
a ( x1 cosα − y1 sin α ) 2 + 2h ( x1 cosα − y1 sin α )
( x1 sin α + y1 cosα ) + b( x1 sin α + y1 cosα ) 2 Y¢
 Chap 01 Coordinate System and Coordinates 71

Q Area of ( ∆OPR ) = Area of ( ∆PQR ) = Area of ( ∆OQR ) ⇒ x-coordinate of incentre

∴ By geometry R should be the centroid of∆OPQ 2 × 0 + 20 2 × 0 + 2 × 2
=
 0 + 3 + 6 0 + 4 + 0  4 2+2+2 2
∴ R≡ ,  ≡ 3, 
 3 3   3 2
= =2 − 2
49. Given, the vertices of a right angled triangle are A(1, k ), B (1, 1) 2+ 2
and C(2, 1 ) and area of ∆ABC = 1 sq unit 52. Y
C B
Y (0, 41)
A (1, k)

C (2, 1)
B (1, 1)
X¢ X X¢ X
O O A(41, 0)
Y¢
Y¢
We know that, area of right angled triangle
1 1 Total number of integral points inside the square
= × BC × AB = (1 ) (k − 1 )
2 2 OABC = 40 × 40 = 1600.
1
= k − 1 ⇒ ± (k − 1 ) = 2 Number of integral points on AC = Number of integral points
2 on OB = 40 (namely (1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3 ), … , (40, 40)
⇒ k = − 1, 3 Hence, number of integral points inside the
∴ K = { −1, 3 } 1600 − 40
∆OAC = = 780
2
50. Let P ≡ (1, 0) and Q ≡ (− 1, 0)
Aliter : x > 0, y > 0 x + y < 41 or 0 < x + y < 41
AP BP CP 1
Given that, = = = ∴ Number of integral points inside the ∆OAC = 40C 2 = 780.
AQ BQ CQ 3
k −3k 1
⇒ 3AP = AQ or 9 ( AP ) 2 = ( AQ ) 2 1
53. | 5 k 1 | = 28
Let A ≡ ( x, y ), then 2
−k 2 1
a(( x − 1 ) 2 + (y − 0 ) 2 ) = ( x + 1 ) 2 + (y − 0 ) 2
⇒ 8 x 2 + 8y 2 − 20 x + 8 = 0 ⇒ 5k 2 + 13k + 10 = ± 56
5 ⇒ 5k 2 + 13k − 46 = 0
⇒ x2 + y 2 − x + 1 = 0 …(i)
2 or 5k 2 + 13k + 66 = 0
Circumcentre of ∆ABC = Centre of circle Eq. (i) ∴ 5k 2 + 13k − 46 = 0
5  and 5k 2 + 13k + 66 ≠ 0 (Q D < 0)
=  , 0
4  ⇒ k = 2, −
23
5
51. From the figure, we have 23
a = 2, b = 2 2 , c = 2 ∴ k = 2, k ≠ − (Qk ∈ I )
5
x1 = 0, x 2 = 0, x 3 = 2 (Q BC = a, CA = b, AB = c ) ∴Vertices an A ≡ (2, − 6 ), B ≡ (5, 2 ), C ≡ ( −2, 2 ).
Y Denote the points are ( x1 , y1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ) and ( x 3 , y 3 ) from the
 x − x 3 y1 − y 3  4 −8
matrix P =  1 =  
x 2 − x 3 y 2 − y 3  7 0 
C (0, 2) → →
R 1 ⋅ R 2 28 1
∴ λ= = =
|P | 56 2
(1, 1)
(0, 1)  1 1 
 7 + × − 8 − 4 − × − 3
∴Circumcentre of triangle is  2 , 2 
B  2 2 
X  
(0, 0) (1, 0) A (2, 0)
 3 5  5 2
or  , −  and centroid is  , − 
 2 4  3 3
Now, x-coordinate of incentre is given as then, orthocentre
ax1 + bx 2 + cx 3 5 3 2 5  1
a+b+c =  × 3 − 2 × , − × 3 + 2 ×  or 2,  ,
3 2 3 4  2
 CHAPTER

02
The Straight Lines
Learning Part
Session 1
● Definition ● Angle of Inclination of a Line
● Slope or Gradient of a Line ● Angle Between Two Lines
● Lines Parallel to Coordinate Axes ● Intercepts of a Line on Axes
● Different Forms of the Equation of a Straight Line ● Reduction of General Equation to Standard Form
● The Distance Form or Symmetric Form or Parametric
Form of a Line
Session 2
● Position of Two Points Relative to a Given Line ● Position of a Point which Lies Inside a Triangle
● Equations of Lines Parallel and Perpendicular to ● Distance of a Point From a Line
a Given Line
● Distance Between Two Parallel Lines ● Area of Parallelogram
Session 3
● Points of Intersection of Two Lines ● Concurrent Lines
● Family of Lines ● How to Find Circumcentre and Orthocentre by Slopes
Session 4
● Equations of Straight Lines Passing Through a Given ● A Line Equally Inclined with Two Lines
Point and Making a Given Angle with a Given Line
● Equation of the Bisectors ● Bisector of the Angle Containing The Origin
● Equation of that Bisector of the Angle Between ● How to Distinguish the Acute (Internal) and Obtuse
Two Lines Which Contains a Given Point (External) Angle Bisectors
Session 5
● The Foot of Perpendicular Drawn from the ● Image or Reflection of a Point ( x1 , y 1 ) about a Line
Point ( x1 , y 1 ) to the Line ax + by + c = 0 Mirror
● Image or Reflection of a Point ( x1 , y 1 ) in Different Cases ● Use of Image or Reflection
Session 6
● Reflection of Light ● Refraction of Light

● Condition of Collineirty If Three Given Points are in Cyclic Order

Practice Part
● JEE Type Examples
● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Definition, Angle of Inclination of a Line, Slope or X¢

Gradient of a Line, Angle Between Two Lines,

Lines Parallel to Coordinate Axes, Intercepts of a
Line on Axes, Different Forms of the Equation of
A Straight Line, Reduction of General Equation to
Standard Form, The Distance Form or Symmetric
Form or Parametric Form of a Line

Definition Remarks
1. The number of arbitrary constants in the equation of a
A straight line defined as the curve which is such that the straight line is two (we observe three constants a, b and c in the
line segment joining any two points on it lies wholly on it. equation ax + by + c = 0 of a straight line. The given equation
of line can be rewritten as   x +   y + 1= 0 or
a b
Theorem : Show that the general equation of the first  c  c
degree in x , y represents a straight line. a b
px + qy + 1 = 0 where p = and q = .
c c
Proof : The general equation of the first degree is
Thus, we have only two arbitrary constants p and q in the
ax + by + c = 0 ...(i) equation of a straight line.
Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) be the coordinates of any two Hence, to completely determine the equation of a straight line,
we require two conditions to determine the two unknowns in
points on the curve given by Eq. (i), then general.
ax 1 + by 1 + c = 0 ...(ii) 2. A straight line is briefly written as a ‘line.’
ax 2 + by 2 + c = 0 ...(iii) 3. The equation of a straight line is the relation between x and y,
which is satisfied by the coordinates of each and every point
Multiplying Eq. (iii) by λ and adding to Eq. (ii), we have on the line.
a ( x 1 + λx 2 ) + b (y 1 + λy 2 ) + c (1 + λ ) = 0

or
 x + λx 2 
a 1
 y 1 + λy 2 
 +b   + c = 0 ( λ ≠ − 1)
Angle of Inclination of a Line
 1+ λ   1+ λ  The angle of inclination of a line is the measure of the
This relation shows that the point angle between the X-axis and the line measured in the
 x 1 + λx 2 y 1 + λy 2  anticlockwise direction.
 ,  lies on Eq. (i). Y
 1+ λ 1+ λ 
But from previous chapter we know that this point divides
the join of P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) is the ratio λ : 1. B

Since, λ can have any value, so each point on the line PQ 150°
lies on Eq. (i) i.e. the line wholly lies on Eq. (i). Hence, by 30°
X' X
the definition of the straight line as given above we O A
conclude that Eq. (i) represents a straight line.
Y'
Hence, the general equation of first degree in x , y viz
ax + by + c = 0 represents a straight line. Here, angle of inclination of line AB = 150 °.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 75

Remarks Y 135° Y
O
1. When two lines are parallel, they have the same inclination. X′ X
2. The inclination of a line which is parallel to X-axis or coinciding 45° 45°
with X-axis is 0°.
3. The angle of inclination of the line lies between 0° and 180° i.e. 45°
π 45°
0 < θ ≤ π and θ ≠ . X′ X
2 O

Y′ Y′
Slope or Gradient of a Line Theorem : If P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) are two points on a
If inclination of a line is (θ ≠ 90 ° ), then tan θ is called the line l, then the slope m of the line l is given by
slope or gradient of the line. It is usually denoted by m. y − y1
m= 2 ,x1 ≠ x2
θ is positive or negative according as it is measured in x2 − x1
anticlockwise or clockwise direction.
If x 1 = x 2 , then m is not defined. In that case the line is
Y perpendicular to X-axis.
B
Y

(x2,y2) Q
π+ θ
θ
X′ X (x1,y1) P θ y2
O N
π– θ
A y1
Y′
θ
A
i.e. Slope of AB = m of AB =m ( AB ) X′
O L M
X
x1
= tan θ or tan [ − ( π − θ )] x2
= tan ( π + θ ) Y′
= slope of BA = m of BA
=m( BA ) Proof : Given P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) are two points on
a line l, let line l makes an angle θ with positive direction
∴ m( AB ) = m( BA )
of X-axis. Draw PL, QM perpendiculars on X-axis and
Hence, we do not take into consideration the direction of a
line segment while talking of its slope. PN ⊥ QM
Then, PN = LM = OM − OL = x 2 − x 1
Remarks and QN = QM − NM = QM − PL
1. Slope of a line is not the angle but is the tangent of the
inclination of the line. = y2 − y1
2. If a line is parallel to X-axis, then its slope = tan0 ° = 0. Also, ∠QAM = ∠QPN = θ
3. Slope of a line parallel to Y-axis or perpendicular to X-axis is not Now, in ∆QPN
defined. Whenever we say that the slope of a line is not defined.
QN y 2 − y 1 Difference of ordinates
4. If a line is equally inclined to the axes, then it will make an angle tan θ = = =
of 45° or 135° with the positive direction of X-axis. Slope in this PN x 2 − x 1 Difference of abscissaes
case will be tan 45° or tan135°. i.e. ± 1
y2 − y1
. or m=
Y x2 − x1
Y
45° π
X′
O
X If x 1 = x 2 , then tan θ = ∞ or θ = i.e. m is not defined or
45° 2
45° the line is perpendicular to X-axis.
45°
45° 135° Remarks
X′ X 1. When the two lines are parallel, then their slopes are equal
O
i.e. m1 = m2.
Y′ Y′ 2. If three points A, B, C are collinear, then slope of AB = slope of
BC = slope of AC.
76 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 1. Find the inclination of the line whose y Example 6. For what value of k the points
slope is −
1
. (k , 2 − 2k ), ( − k + 1, 2k ) and ( − 4 − k , 6 − 2k ) are
3 collinear ?
Sol. Let α be the inclination of a line then its slope = tanα Sol. Let A ≡ (k , 2 − 2k ), B ≡ ( −k + 1, 2k ) and C ≡ ( − 4 − k , 6 − 2k )
are collinear, then
1
∴ tan α = − = − tan 30 ° Slope of AB = Slope of AC
3 2k − (2 − 2k ) 6 − 2k − (2 − 2k )
⇒ =
= tan (180 ° − 30 ° ) = tan 150 ° −k +1−k − 4 −k −k
⇒ α = 150 ° 4k − 2 4  1 
⇒ = k ≠ (QDenominator ≠ 0)
− 2k + 1 − 4 − 2k  2 
y Example 2. Find the slope of the line through the
⇒ ( 4k − 2) ( − 4 − 2k ) = 4 ( − 2k + 1)
points (4, − 6 ), ( −2 , − 5) .
⇒ (2k − 1) ( − 2 − k ) − ( − 2k + 1) = 0
− 5 − ( − 6) 1
Sol. Slope of the line m = =− ⇒ (2k − 1) ( − 2 − k + 1) = 0
−2 − ( 4 ) 6 1
∴ k ≠ , ∴ k = −1
2
y Example 3. Determine λ , so that 2 is the slope of
the line through (2 , 5) and ( λ , 3) .
Sol. Slope of the line joining (2, 5) and ( λ , 3)
Angle Between Two Lines
3−5 −2 Theorem : The acute angle θ between the lines having
= = =2 (given) slopes m 1 and m 2 is given by
λ −2 λ −2
⇒ − 2 = 2λ − 4 m − m 2 
θ = tan −1  1 
⇒ 2λ = 2 1 + m 1m 2
∴ λ =1 Proof : Let l 1 and l 2 be two non-perpendicular lines,
y Example 4. Show that the line joining the points neither of which is parallel to the Y-axis.
(2 , − 3) and ( − 5 , 1) is parallel to the line joining (7, − 1) Y l2
π−θ l1
and (0, 3) .

Sol. Slope of the line joining the points (2, − 3) and ( − 5, 1) is θ

1 − ( − 3) 4
m1 = =−
− 5 −2 7
θ1 θ2
and slope of the line joining the points (7, − 1) and (0, 3) is X′ X
O
3 − ( − 1) − 4
m2 = = Y′
0−7 7
Here, m1 = m 2 Let m 1 and m 2 be the slopes of two given lines l 1 and l 2
Hence, lines are parallel. respectively. Let θ 1 and θ 2 be the inclinations of these
lines.
y Example 5. Find whether the points
∴ m 1 = tan θ 1 and m 2 = tan θ 2
( − a, − b ), [ − (s + 1) a, − (s + 1) b ] and [(t − 1) a, (t − 1) b ]  π
Let θ and π − θ be the angles between the lines  θ ≠  .
are collinear ?  2
Sol. Let A ≡ ( − a, − b ), B ≡ [ − (s + 1) a, − (s + 1) b ] and Then, θ 2 = θ + θ 1 or θ = θ 2 − θ 1
C ≡ ((t − 1) a, (t − 1) b ) ⇒ tan θ = tan (θ 2 − θ 1 )
− ( s + 1) b + b b
Then, slope of AB = =  tan θ 2 − tan θ 1   m 2 − m 1 
− ( s + 1) a + a a ⇒ tan θ =  =  ...(i)
( t − 1) b + ( s + 1) b b
 1 + tan θ 2 tan θ 1   1 + m 1m 2 
and slope of BC = =
( t − 1) a + ( s + 1) a a  m − m1 
Also, tan( π − θ ) = − tan θ = −  2  ...(ii)
Hence, given points are collinear.  1 + m 2m 1 
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 77

From Eqs. (i) and (ii) the angle between two lines of slopes π
y Example 8. The angle between two lines is and the
m 1 and m 2 is given by 4
 m − m2  1
tan θ = ±  1 
slope of one of them is . Find the slope of the other
 1 + m 1m 2  2
line.
  m − m2  
⇒ θ = tan −1  ±  1  Sol. If θ be the acute angle between the lines with slopes m1 and
  1 + m 1m 2   m 2 , then
m − m 2 
Hence, the acute angle between the lines l 1 and l 2 is given tanθ = 1 
by 1 + m1m 2
m − m 2  π 1
θ= and m1 =
θ = tan −1 1 . Let
4 2
1 + m 1m 2
1 −m 
Corollary 1 : If two lines, whose slopes are m 1 and m 2 are π 2
then tan = 2 
parallel, 4  1 
1 + ⋅m2
iff θ = 0 ° (or π) ⇔ tan θ = 0  2 
⇔ m1 = m2 1 − 2m 2
⇒ 1 = 
Thus, when two lines are parallel, their slopes are equal. 2 + m2 
1 − 2m 2
Corollary 2 : If two lines, whose slopes are m 1 and m 2 are ⇒ = ±1
perpendicular, 2 + m2

π π Taking positive sign then,

iff θ =  or −  ⇔ cot θ = 0 1 − 2m 2 = 2 + m 2
2  2
1
⇔ m 1m 2 = − 1 ∴ m2 = −
3
Thus, when two lines are perpendicular, the product of and taking negative sign then,
their slopes is −1. The slope of each is the negative 1 − 2m 2 = − 2 − m 2
reciprocal of the slope of other i.e. if m is the slope of a ∴ m2 = 3
1
line, then the slope of a line perpendicular to it is − . Hence, the slope of the other line is either −
1
or 3.
m 3

y Example 7. Find the angle between the lines joining y Example 9. Without using pythagoras theorem, show
the points (0, 0), (2 , 3) and (2 , − 2), ( 3 , 5). that the points A ( − 1, 3), B (0, 5) and C ( 3 , 1) are the
Sol. Let the given points be A ≡ (0, 0), B ≡ (2, 3), C ≡ (2, − 2) and vertices of a right angled triangle.
D ≡ (3, 5). Let m1 and m 2 be the slopes of the lines AB and Sol. In ∆ ABC, we have
CD respectively.
5−3
3−0 3 5 − ( − 2) Slope of side AB = = 2 = m1 (say)
∴ m1 = = and m 2 = =7 0 − ( − 1)
2−0 2 3−2
1−5 4
Let θ be the acute angle between the lines Slope of side BC = = − = m2 (say)
3−0 3
 3 
 m − m   2 −7  and Slope of side CA =
3−1 1
= − = m3 (say)
∴ tanθ = 1 2 =
  −1−3 2
1 + m1m 2 1 +  3 ⋅ 7
   1
  2  Clearly, m1m 3 = 2 ×  −  = − 1
 2
− 11 11
=  = ∴ AB and CA are perpendicular to each other i.e.
 23  23
∠ BAC = 90°
 11
∴ θ = tan −1   Hence, the given points are the vertices of a right angled
 23
triangle.
78 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 10. A line passes through the points Y l

A (2 , − 3) and B (6, 3) . Find the slopes of the lines
N P(x,y)
which are a >0
(i) parallel to AB (ii) perpendicular to AB a x= |a|= a

3 − ( − 3) 6 3 X′ X
Sol. Let m be the slope of AB. Then m = = = O a
6−2 4 2
(i) Let m1 be the slope of a line parallel to AB, then Y′
3 Here, |a| = a
m1 = m =
2
l Y
(ii) The slope of a line perpendicular to AB is a<0
1 1 2
− =− =− P(x,y) N
m 3 3
2 x= |a|= –a a

X′ X
y Example 11. Show that the triangle which has one of –a O
the angles as 60°, can not have all vertices with
integral coordinates. Y′
Here, |a| = –a
Sol. Let ABC be a triangle whose vertices are A ( x 1, y1 ), B ( x 2 , y 2 )
and C ( x 3 , y 3 ). Assume x 1, x 2 , x 3 , y1, y 2 , y 3 all are integers. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the line l, then
Let ∠BAC = 60°
x = a is the required equation. (Here, | a | = a )
y − y1
Slope of AC = 3 = m1 (say)
x 3 − x1 Remarks
y − y1 1. In particular equation of Y-axis is x = 0 (Qa=0 )
and Slope of AB = 2 = m2 (say) 2. A line is parallel to Y-axis, at a distance from it and is on the
x 2 − x1
negative side of Y-axis, then its equation is x = − a .
C (x3,y3)
(ii) Equation of a line parallel to X-axis : Let l be a
straight line parallel to X-axis and at a distance b from it, b
being the directed distance of the line from the X-axis.
Therefore, the line lies above the X-axis, if b > 0 and if
b < 0, then the line would lie below the X-axis.
60°
(x1,y1) A B (x2,y2) Y b>0
Here, m1 and m 2 are rational numbers
(Q x 1, x 2 , x 3 , y1, y 2 , y 3 are integers) b y=|b|=b P(x,y)
l
m − m2
∴ tan ( ∠BAC ) = 1
1 + m1m 2 b
= Rational (Qm1 and m 2 are rational)
X′ X
But tan ( ∠BAC ) = tan 60° = 3 = Irrational O M

Q Rational number ≠ Irrational number Y′

Here, |b|= b
Which is contradiction so our assumption that the vertices
are integers is wrong. Hence, the triangle having one angle Y b<0
of 60° can not have all vertices with integral coordinates.
M
Lines Parallel to Coordinate Axes X¢
O
X

(i) Equation of a line parallel to Y-axis : Let l be a b

straight line parallel to Y-axis and at a distance a from it, a
l
being the directed distance of the line from the Y-axis . –b y=|b|= –b P(x,y)
Therefore, the line lies on the right of Y-axis if a > 0 and if Y¢
a < 0, then the line would lies on the left of Y-axis. Here, |b|= –b
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 79

Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the line l, then y = b is the Sol. Since, the given (both) lines are parallel to Y-axis and the
required equation (Here, | b | = b ). required line is equidistant from these lines, so it is also
parallel to Y-axis. Let equation of any line parallel to Y-axis is
Remarks x =a
1. In particular equation of X-axis is y = 0 (Qb = 0 )  7 15
− + 
2. A line parallel to X-axis at a distance b from it and is on the  2 2 8
negative side of X-axis, then its equation is y = − b. Here, a = = = 2 units
2 4
y Example 12. Find the equation of the straight line Hence, its equation is x = 2 .
parallel to Y-axis and at a distance (i) 3 units to the
right (ii) 2 units to the left. Intercepts of a Line on Axes
Sol. (i) Equation of straight line parallel to Y-axis at a distance a If a line cuts X-axis at A (a , 0 ) and the Y-axis at B (0, b )
units to the right is x = a .
then OA and OB are known as the intercepts of the line on
∴ Required equation is x = 3
X-axis and Y-axis respectively. | a | is called the length of
(ii) Equation of straight line parallel to Y-axis at a distance a
intercept of the line on X-axis. Intercept of a line on X-axis
units to the left is x = − a.
may be positive or negative and | b| is called the length of
∴ Required equation is x = − 2. intercept of the line on Y-axis. Intercept of a line on Y-axis
may be positive or negative.
y Example 13. Find the equation of the straight line
parallel to X-axis and at a distance Y
B(0,b)
(i) 5 units above the X-axis
(ii) 9 units below the X-axis.
y intercept
Sol. (i) Equation of a straight line parallel to X -axis at a distance
b units above the X -axis is y = b.
∴ Required equation is y = 5
X′ X
(ii) Equation of a straight line parallel to X -axis at a O x intercept A(a,0)
distance b units below the X -axis is y = − b. Y′
∴ Required equation is y = − 9
Remark
y Example 14. Find the equation of the straight line If a line parallel to Y-axis, then its intercept on Y-axis is not
which passes through the point (2 , − 3) and is defined and if a line parallel to X-axis, then its intercept on
X-axis is not defined.
(i) parallel to the X-axis
Intercepts in II quadrant Intercepts in I quadrant
(ii) perpendicular to the X-axis Y
Y
B (0,b)
Sol. (i) Let equation of any line parallel to X -axis is B (0,b)

y =b ....(i) b b
Since, it passes through the point (2, − 3) . X′ X X′
A(a,0)
X
A a O O a
Putting y = − 3 in Eq. (i), then (–a,0)
Y′ Y′
b= −3 Intercept on X-axis = –a, length of Intercept on X-axis = a, length of
Hence, required equation of the line is y = − 3 . intercept on X-axis = |a| intercept on X-axis = |a|
Intercept on Y-axis = b, length of Intercept on Y-axis = b, length of
Eq. (i) Let equation of any line perpendicular to X -axis intercept on Y-axis = |b| intercept on Y-axis = |b|
= Equation of any line parallel to Y-axis is
Intercepts in III quadrant Intercepts in IV quadrant
x =a ...(ii) Y Y
Since, it passes through the point (2, − 3) putting x = 2 in A(–a,0) a A(a,0)
X′ X X′ X
Eq. (ii) a O O
Then, 2=a ⇒ a=2 b b
Hence, required equation of the line x = 2 . B (0,–b)
B (0,–b)
Y′ Y′
y Example 15. Find the equation of a line which is Intercept on X-axis = –a, length of Intercept on X-axis = a, length of
7 15
equidistant from the lines x = − and x = .
intercept on X-axis = |a| intercept on X-axis = |a|
Intercept on Y-axis = –b, length of Intercept on Y-axis = –b, length of
2 2 intercept on Y-axis = |b| intercept on Y-axis = |b|
80 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Different Forms of the Equation of a y Example 17. What are the inclination to the X-axis
and intercept on Y -axis of the line
Straight Line 3y = 3 x + 6 ?
(i) Slope-Intercept Form Sol. The given equation can be written as
Theorem : The equation of the straight line whose slope x
y= +2 ...(i)
is m and which cuts an intercept c on the Y-axis is 3
y = mx + c Now, comparing Eq. (i) with y = mx + c , then we get
1
Y m=
3
B
P (x,y) Let θ be the inclination to the X -axis, then
θ
tan θ = tan 30°
Q M ∴ θ = 30° and c = 2.
c
θ
X′
R O L
X y Example 18. Find the equation of the straight line
A cutting off an intercept of 3 units on negative direction
 3
Y′ of Y -axis and inclined at an angle tan −1   to the
 5
Proof : Let AB be a line whose slope is m and which cuts
axis of x.
an intercept c on Y-axis. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the
line. Draw PL ⊥ to X-axis and QM ⊥ to PL.  3
Sol. Here, c = − 3 and θ = tan −1  
 5
Then, from figure,
∠ PRL = ∠ PQM = θ, OQ = c 3
or tanθ = =m
5
∴ PM = PL − ML = PL − OQ = y − c
Hence, the equation of the line
and QM = OL = x y = mx + c
PM 3
Now in ∆PQM, tan θ = i.e. y = x −3
QM 5
y −c or 3x − 5y − 15 = 0
⇒ m= ⇒ y = mx + c
x y Example 19. Find the equation to the straight line
which is the required equation of the line. cutting off an intercept of 5 units on negative
direction of Y -axis and being equally inclined to the
Remarks axes.
1. If the line passes through the origin, then c = 0 (Q 0 = m.0 + c
⇒ c = 0) and hence equation of the line will become y = mx. Sol. Here, c = − 5
2. Equation of any line may be taken as y = mx + c.
m = tan 45° or tan135°
3. If the line is parallel to X-axis, then θ = 0°
i.e. m = tan0 ° = 0. Hence, equation of the line parallel to X-axis i.e. m = ±1
is y = c. Y
135°
45°
y Example 16. If the straight line y = mx + c passes X′
O
X
45° 45°
through the points (2 , 4 ) and ( −3 , 6 ) , find the values of
m and c . 45° 45°
Sol. Since, (2, 4 ) lies on y = mx + c (0,–5)
∴ 4 = 2m + c ...(i)
Again, ( −3, 6) lies on y = mx + c Y′
∴ 6 = − 3m + c ...(ii)
Hence, required equation is
2 24
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get m = − , c =
5 5 y = ( ± 1) x − 5
or y = ± x −5
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 81

y Example 20. Find the equations of the bisectors of Now, in triangle PQN ,
the angle between the coordinate axes. PN y − y 1
tan θ = =
Sol. Let L1 and L 2 be the straight lines bisecting the co-ordinate QN x − x 1
axes. y − y1
Both L1 and L 2 pass through origin ∴ m=
x − x1
∴ Equation of line through origin is y = mx
for L1, m = tan 45° = 1 or y − y 1 = m (x − x 1 )
Y which is the required equation of the line.
L2 L1 Aliter : Let the equation of the required line be
y = mx + c ...(i)
5°
13

45° where, m is the slope of the line.

X′ X
O Since line Eq. (i) passes through the point ( x 1 , y 1 ), therefore
y 1 = mx 1 + c ...(ii)
Subtracting (ii) form (i), we get
Y′
y − y 1 = m (x − x 1 )
∴ Equation of line L1 is y = x
i.e. x −y =0
which is the required equation of the line.
For L 2 , m = tan 135° = − 1 Corollary : If the line passes through the origin, then
∴ Equation of line L 2 is y = − x putting x 1 = 0 and y 1 = 0 in y − y 1 = m ( x − x 1 ).
i.e. x +y =0 It becomes y = mx , which is the equation of the line
Hence, equations of the bisectors of the angle between the passing through the origin and having slope m.
coordinate axes are x ± y = 0.
Remark
(ii) The Point–Slope Form of a Line The equation y − y1 = m ( x − x1 ) is called point-slope form or
Theorem : The equation of the straight line which one point form of the equation.
passes through the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) and has the slope ‘m’ is y Example 21. Find the equation of a line which
y − y 1 = m (x − x 1 ) makes an angle of 135° with the positive direction
Proof : Let AB be a straight line whose slope is m and of X-axis and passes through the point ( 3 , 5) .
which pass through the point Q ( x 1 , y 1 ). Let the line AB Sol. The slope of the line = m = tan135° = − 1
cuts X-axis at R and ∠BRX = θ, then
Here x 1 = 3, y1 = 5 .
tan θ =m ∴ The required equation of the line is
Y B y − 5 = − 1 ( x − 3)
y 1) P(x,y) or x +y −8=0
x 1,
Q( θ
N
y Example 22. Find the equation of the straight line
bisecting the segment joining the points ( 5 , 3) and (4 , 4 )
and making an angle of 45° with the positive direction
θ of X-axis.
X′ X
R O M L
A Sol. Here, m = slope of the line = tan 45° = 1.
Y′
Let A be the mid-point of (5, 3) and ( 4 , 4 ) . Then, the
coordinates of A are
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the line AB. Draws PL and QM
5 + 4 3 + 4 9 7
perpendiculars from P and Q on X-axis respectively. Also  ,  i.e.  ,  .
 2 2   2 2
draw QN perpendicular from Q on PL, then from figure
Hence, the required equation of the line is
∠PRL = ∠PQN = θ, OL = x , OM = x 1 , PL = y , QM = y 1 7  9
Then, QN = ML = OL − OM = x − x 1 y − = 1 x − 
2  2
and PN = PL − NL = PL − QM = y − y 1 or x −y −1=0
82 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 23. Find the equation of the right bisector Now, triangles PHQ and QKR are similar, then
of the line joining (1, 1) and ( 3 , 5) . PH QH
=
Sol. Let m be the slope of the line joining (1, 1) and (3, 5). QK RK
5−1 4 y − y1 x − x1
Then, m= = =2 ⇒ =
3−1 2 y1 − y2 x1 − x2
∴ Slope (M) of right bisector of the join of (1, 1)
 y − y1 
( 3, 5) = −
1 or y − y1 =  2  (x − x 1 )
and
m  x2 − x1 
1 which is the required equation of the line.
∴ M=−
2 Aliter I : Let the equation of the required line be
 1 + 3 1 + 5
Mid-point of the join of (1, 1) and (3, 5) is  ,  y = mx + c ...(i)
 2 2 
where m is the slope of the line.
i.e. (2, 3) .
Hence, equation of the right bisector passing through (2, 3) Since, line Eq. (i) passes through the points ( x 1 , y 1 ) and
1 ( x 2 , y 2 ) therefore
and having slope M = − is
2 y 1 = mx 1 + c ...(ii)
1 y 2 = mx 2 + c
y − 3 = − ( x − 2) and ...(iii)
2
Now, subtracting Eqs. (ii) from (i), we get
or x + 2y − 8 = 0
y − y 1 = m (x − x 1 ) ...(iv)
(iii) The Two-Point Form of a Line and subtracting Eqs. (ii) from (iii), we get
Theorem : The equation of a line passing through two y 2 − y 1 = m (x 2 − x 1 ) ...(v)
given points ( x 1 , y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) is given by Dividing Eqs. (iv) by (v) then, we get
 y − y1  y − y1 x − x1
y − y1 =  2  (x − x 1 ) =
 x2 − x1  y2 − y1 x2 − x1
Proof :
 y − y1 
Let AB be a line which passes through two points or y − y1 =  2  (x − x 1 )
 x2 − x1 
Q ( x 1 , y 1 ) and R ( x 2 , y 2 ). Let P ( x , y ) be any point on
the line AB. which is the required equation of the line.
Y B Aliter II : Since points, P ( x , y ), Q ( x 1 , y 1 ) and R ( x 2 , y 2 )
y 1)
Q ( x 1, P(x,y) are collinear then area of ∆ PQR = 0
) H
,y 2 x y 1 x y 1
R(x 2 1
K
i.e. | x 1 y 1 1 | = 0 or x 1 y 1 1 = 0
2
x2 y2 1 x2 y2 1
X′ X
O N M L which is the required equation of the line.
A
Y′
y Example 24. Find the equation to the straight line
Draws PL, QM and RN are perpendiculars from P , Q and R  a  a
joining the points  at 1 ,  and  at 2 ,  .
on X-axis respectively. Also draws QH and RK are  t1   t2 
perpendiculars on PL and QM respectively. Then from
figure  a
Sol. The equation of the line joining the points at 1,  and
ON = x 2 , OM = x 1 , OL = x , RN = y 2 ,  t1
 a
QM = y 1 and PL = y at 2 ,  is
 t2
then, RK = NM = OM − ON = x 1 − x 2
 a a 
−
QH = ML = OL − OM = x − x 1 a  t 2 t1 
y− =  ( x − at 1 )
QK = QM − KM = QM − RN = y 1 − y 2 t 1  at 2 − at 1 
 
and PH = PL − HL = PL − QM = y − y 1  
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 83

a a (t 1 − t 2 ) Hence, equation of altitude AD which passes through (0, 4 )

⇒ y− =− ( x − at 1 )
t1 at 1t 2 (t 1 − t 2 ) 1
and having slope is
a 1 5
or y− =− ( x − at 1 ) 1
t1 t 1t 2 y − 4 = ( x − 10)
5
or t 1t 2y − at 2 = − x + at 1
or x − 5y + 10 = 0
or x + t 1t 2y = a (t 1 + t 2 )
which is the required equation of the line.
y Example 27. Find the equations of the medians of
y Example 25. Let ABC be a triangle with A ( −1, − 5) , a triangle, the coordinates of whose vertices are
( −1, 6 ) , ( −3 , − 9 ) and ( 5 , − 8 ) .
B (0, 0) and C (2 , 2) and let D be the middle point of BC.
Find the equation of the perpendicular drawn from B to Sol. Let A ( −1, 6), B ( −3, − 9 ) and C (5, − 8) be the vertices of
AD. ∆ ABC. Let D , E and F be the mid-points of the sides BC , CA
Sol. Q D is the middle point of BC. and AB respectively.
 0 + 2 0 + 2  − 3 + 5 − 9 − 8
∴ Coordinates of D are  Coordinates of D ≡  , 
,   2 2 
 2 2 
 17 
Y i.e. 1, − 
C(2,2)  2
D  5 − 1 − 8 + 6
Coordinates of E ≡  , 
X′
(0,0)B
X
 2 2 
M
i.e. (2, − 1)
Y
(–1,6)A
(–1,–5)A
Y′ X′ X
O E
i.e. D(1, 1) F
1+5
Slope of median AD = =3
1+1 C(5,–8)
1 (–3,–9)B D
∴ Slope of BM which is perpendicular to AD = − .
3 Y′
Hence, equation of the line BM is
 −1 − 3 6 − 9 
1 and coordinates of F ≡  , 
y − 0 = − ( x − 0) ⇒ x + 3y = 0  2 2 
3
which is the required equation of the line. i.e. ( −2, − 3 / 2)
∴ Equation of the median AD = Equation of line through
y Example 26. The vertices of a triangle are  17 
( −1, 6) and 1, −  is
A (10, 4 ), B ( −4, 9 ) and C ( −2 , − 1). Find the equation of  2
the altitude through A. 17
− −6
−1 − 9 −10 y −6= 2 ( x + 1)
Sol. Q Slope of BC = = = −5
−2 + 4 2 1+1
1 1 29
∴ Slope of altitude AD = − = ⇒ y −6= − ( x + 1) or 29 x + 4y + 5 = 0
−5 5 4
Y Equation of median BE is
(–4,9) B −1 + 9
y +9 = ( x + 3) or 8x − 5y − 21 = 0
2+3
A(10,4) and equation of median CF is
3
D − +8
X′ X y +8= 2 ( x − 5)
O −2 − 5
(–2,–1) C
or 13x + 14y + 47 = 0
Y′
84 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 28. Find the ratio in which the line segment 1 1 1

⇒ ⋅ OA ⋅ OB = ⋅ OA ⋅ PL + ⋅ OB ⋅ PM
joining the points (2 , 3) and (4 , 5) is divided by the line 2 2 2
joining (6 , 8 ) and ( −3 , − 2) . 1 1 1
⇒ ⋅ OA ⋅ OB = ⋅ OA ⋅ PL + ⋅ OB ⋅ OL
Sol. The equation of line passing through (6, 8) and ( −3, − 2) is 2 2 2
−2 − 8 1 1 1
y −8= ( x − 6) or ab = ay + bx
−3 − 6
2 2 2
⇒ 9y − 72 = 10x − 60
⇒ ab = ay + bx
or 10x − 9y + 12 = 0 ...(i)
Let the required ratio be λ : 1.
x y
or + =1
Now, the coordinates of the point P which divide the line a b
segment joining the points (2, 3) and ( 4, 5) in the ratio λ : 1 is which is the required equation of the line.
 2 + 4 λ 3 + 5λ  Aliter I : Equation of the line through A (a, 0 ) and B (0, b )
P , 
 1+ λ 1+ λ  is
Clearly P lies on Eq. (i), then b −0
y −0 = (x − a )
2 + 4λ   3 + 5λ  0 −a
10   −9   + 12 = 0
 1+ λ  1+ λ 
or − ay = bx − ab
or 20 + 40λ − 27 − 45λ + 12 + 12λ = 0
5
or bx + ay = ab
or 7 λ + 5 = 0 or λ = −
7 x y
or + =1
5 a b
∴ The required ratio = λ : 1 = − : 1 = − 5 : 7
7 which is the required equation of the line.
Hence, the required ratio is 5 : 7 (externally).
Aliter II : Points A (a, 0 ), P ( x , y ) and B (0, b ) are collinear,
(iv) The Intercept Form of a Line : we have
slope of AB = slope of AP
Theorem : The equation of the straight line which cuts
off intercepts of lengths of a and b on X-axis and Y-axis b −0 y −0
⇒ = ⇒ bx − ab = − ay
respectively, is 0 −a x −a
x y x y
+ =1 ⇒ bx + ay = ab ⇒ + =1
a b a b
Proof : Let QR be a line which cuts off intercepts OA = a or
and OB = b on the X-axis and Y-axis respectively, where a 0 1
a ≠ 0. The line is non vertical, because b is finite. Let
x y 1 =0
P ( x , y ) be a general point on the line.
0 b 1
Draws PL and PM perpendiculars on X-axis and Y-axis
respectively. Then PL = y and OL = x also join OP. Clearly, ⇒ a (y − b ) − 0 + 1 ⋅ (bx ) = 0
Y or bx + ay = ab
R B(0,b) x y
or + =1
a b
M x P(x,y)
which is the required equation of the line.
y y Example 29. Find the equation of the line through
A(a,0)
X′ X (2 , 3) so that the segment of the line intercepted
O L Q
between the axes is bisected at this point.
Y′
Sol. Let the required line segment be AB.
Area of ∆OAB = Area of ∆OAP + Area of ∆OPB Let O be the origin and OA = a and OB = b.
Then the coordinates of A and B are (a , 0) and (0, b )
respectively.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 85

a+0
∴ =2 ⇒ a= 4 Hence, the required equations are
2 x y x y
0+b + = 1 and + =1
and =3 ⇒ b=6 6 8 7 7
2
i.e. 4 x + 3y = 24 and x + y = 7
Y
B(0,b) y Example 31. Find the equation of the straight line
x y
through the point P (a, b ) parallel to the line + = 1.
a b
(2,3)
Also find the intercepts made by it on the axes.
x y
A(a,0) Sol. Let the line + =1
X′ X a b
O
meets the axes in A and B respectively. So that
Y′ OA = a , OB = b
Hence, the equation of the required line is
Y
x y
+ =1 B'(0,b' )
4 6
i.e. 3x + 2y = 12
P(a,b)
y Example 30. Find the equation to the straight line (0,b)B
which passes through the points ( 3 , 4 ) and have A'(a',0)
intercepts on the axes : X′ X
O (a,0)A
(a) equal in magnitude but opposite in sign
Y′
(b) such that their sum is 14
Let the required parallel line meet in A ′ and B′ respectively,
Sol. (a) Let intercepts on the axes be a and −a respectively. so that
∴ The equation of the line in intercept form is OA ′ = a ′ (say)
x y and OB ′ = b ′ (say)
+ = 1 or x − y = a ...(i)
a −a ∴ Equation of required line is
Since, Eq. (i) passes through (3, 4 ) , then x y
+ =1 ...(i)
3− 4 =a a′ b′
∴ a = −1 Since, ∆′s OAB and OA ′ B ′ are similar, then
From Eq. (i), x − y + 1 = 0 OA ′ OB ′
which is the required equation of the line. =
OA OB
x y a′ b′
(b) Let the equation of the line be + = 1 i.e. = =λ (say)
a b a b
This passes through (3, 4 ). ⇒ a ′ = aλ , b ′ = bλ
3 4
Therefore + =1 ...(ii) Substituting these values in Eq. (i), then
a b x y
It is given that a + b = 14 + =1 ...(ii)
aλ bλ
∴ b = 14 − a It passes through (a, b ), then
Putting b = 14 − a in Eq. (ii), we get a b
3 4 + =1
+ =1 aλ bλ
a 14 − a 2
⇒ = 1 or λ = 2
⇒ 42 − 3a + 4a = 14a − a 2 λ
From Eq. (ii) required equation is
⇒ a 2 − 13a + 42 = 0
x y
⇒ ( a − 7 ) ( a − 6) = 0 + =1
2a 2b
∴ a = 6, 7 Evidently intercepts on the axes are 2a and 2b.
Then, b = 8, 7 (Qb = 14 − a )
86 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(v) The Normal Form or Perpendicular Form OR

⇒ cosec α =
of a Line p
Theorem : The equation of the straight line upon which or OR = p cosec α
the length of perpendicular from the origin is p and this Thus, AB makes intercepts p sec α and p cosec α on X-axis
normal makes an angle α with the positive direction of and Y-axis respectively.
X-axis is x y
∴ Equation of AB is + =1
x cos α + y sin α = p. p sec α p cosec α
Proof : Let AB be a line such that the length of or x cos α + y sin α = p
perpendicular from O to the line be p
which is the required equation of the line AB.
i.e. ON = p
Aliter II : The points Q ( p sec α, 0 ), P ( x , y ) and
and ∠ NOX = α R (0, p cosec α ) are collinear, then
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the line. Draw PL p secα 0 1
perpendicular from P on X-axis.
x y 1 =0
Y
0 p cosec α 1
B R
N
or p sec α (y − p cosec α ) − 0 + 1 ( px cosec α ) = 0
or p (y sin α − p ) + px cos α = 0
p P(x,y)
or x cos α + y sin α = p
y α
α which is the required equation of the line AB.
X′ X
O L Q
x A
Y′ Remarks
1. Here, p is always taken as positive and α is measured from
Let line AB cuts X and Y-axes at Q and R respectively. positive direction of X-axis in anticlockwise direction between 0
and 2 π ( i.e. 0 ≤ α < 2 π ).
Now, ∠ NQO = 90 ° − α 2. (Coefficient of x) 2+ (Coefficient of y) 2 = cos 2 α + sin2 α = 1
∴ ∠ LPQ = 90 ° − (90 ° − α ) = α 3. cosα and cos ( 90° − α ) are the direction cosines of ON.
LQ LQ 4.
In ∆PLQ, tan α = =
PL y II quadrant I quadrant
Y Y
∴ LQ = y tan α ...(i)
B B
ON
Also, in ∆ONQ, cos α =
OQ
N N
p p p
⇒ cos α =
OL + LQ α α
X′ X X′ X
⇒ OL cos α + LQ cos α = p A
O O
A
⇒ x cos α + y tan α cos α = p Y′ Y′
cos α < 0, sin α > 0, p > 0 cos α > 0, sin α > 0, p > 0
(Q OL = x and LQ = y tan α )
∴ x cos α + y sin α = p III quadrant IV quadrant
Y Y
which is the required equation of the line AB. B
α α B
Aliter I : Q ∠ NOQ = α X′
O
X X′
O
X

then ∠ NOR = 90 ° − α p p
OQ OQ N N
Now, in ∆ONQ, sec α = =
ON p
A A
or OQ = p sec α
Y′ Y′
OR
Also in ∆ONR, sec (90° − α ) =
ON cos α < 0, sin α < 0, p > 0 cos α > 0, sin α < 0, p > 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 87

Corollary 1 : If α = 0 °, then equation x cos α + y sin α = p In ∆ONA, cos30° =

ON p
=
becomes x cos 0 ° + y sin 0 ° = p OA a
i.e. x = p (Equation of line parallel to Y-axis) Y
π B
Corollary 2 : If α = , then equation x cos α + y sin α = p
2
π π
becomes x cos   + y sin   = p b
2 2 N
60° p
i.e. y = p (Equation of line parallel to X-axis). X′
O
30°
a X
A
Corollary 3 : If α = 0 °, p = 0 then equation
Y′
x cos α + y sin α = p becomes x cos 0 ° + y sin 0 ° = 0
i.e. x = 0 (Equation of Y-axis) 3 p 2p
⇒ = or a =
π 2 a 3
Corollary 4 : If α = , p = 0 then equation
2 ON p
and in ∆ONB, cos60° = =
π π OB b
x cos α + y sin α = p becomes x cos   + y sin   = 0
2 2 ⇒
1 p
= or b = 2p
i.e. y =0 (Eq. (i) of X-axis). 2 b
1 1  2p 
Q Area of ∆OAB = ab =  
y Example 32. The length of perpendicular from the 2 2  3
origin to a line is 9 and the line makes an angle of 2p 2
120° with the positive direction of Y -axis. Find the ( 2p ) =
3
equation of the line.
2p 2 50
Sol. Here, α = 60° and p = 9. ∴ = (given)
3 3
∴ Equation of the required line is
⇒ p 2 = 25
x cos 60 ° + y sin 60 ° = 9
or p =5 (Qp > 0)
Y ∴ Using x cos α + y sin α = p , the equation of the line AB is
120°
x cos 30° + y sin 30° = 5
B
60° N
or x 3 + y = 10

30° Reduction of General Equation to

X′
O
60° A
X Standard Form
Let Ax + By + C = 0 be the general equation of a straight
Y′ line where A and B are not both zero.
 1  3 (i) Reduction of ‘Slope-Intercept’ Form
⇒ x   +y   =9
 2  2
Given equation is Ax + By + C = 0
or x + y 3 = 18 ⇒ By = − Ax − C
y Example 33. Find the equation of the straight line on  A  C
⇒ y = −  x + −  (Assuming B ≠ 0)
which the perpendicular from origin makes an angle of  B  B
30° with X-axis and which forms a triangle of area Comparing it with y = mx + c
 50 
  sq units with the coordinates axes. A
slope (m ) = − = −
coefficient of x
 3 we get
B coefficient of y
Sol. Let ∠ NOA = 30° C constant term
Let ON = p > 0, OA = a , OB = b and y intercept (c ) = − =−
B coefficient of y
88 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Corollary 1 : Find angle between the lines (ii) Reduction to ‘Intercept’ Form
A1 x + B 1 y + C 1 = 0 and A2 x + B 2 y + C 2 = 0.
Given equation is Ax + By + C = 0
Slope of the line
A ⇒ Ax + By = − C
A1 x + B 1 y + C 1 = 0 is − 1 = m 1 (say) A B
B1 ⇒ x+ y =1 (Assuming C ≠ 0)
−C −C
and slope of the line
A2 x y
A2 x + B 2 y + C 2 = 0 is − = m2 (say) ⇒ + = 1 (Assuming A ≠ 0, B ≠ 0)
B2 (− C / A) (− C / B )
If θ is the angle between the two lines, then x y
Comparing with + =1
a b
  A1   A2 
m1 − m2    − B  −  − B  C constant term
  1 2 we get, x-intercept (a) = − =−
tan θ = = A coefficient of x
1 + m 1m 2   A1   A2 
1 +  −  −  constant term
  B1   B2 
C
and y-intercept (b) = − =−
B coefficient of y
A B − A2 B 1
= 1 2 
A1 A2 + B 1 B 2 (iii) Reduction to ‘Normal’ Form
A B − A2 B 1 Given equation is Ax + By + C = 0 . Let its normal form
∴ θ = tan −1  1 2 
be x cos α + y sin α = p.
A1 A2 + B 1 B 2
Clearly, equations Ax + By + C = 0 and
Corollary 2 : Find the condition of (i) parallelism (ii)
x cos α + y sin α = p represent the same line.
perpendicularity of the lines
A B C
A1 x + B 1 y + C 1 = 0 Therefore, = =
cos α sin α −p
and A2 x + B 2 y + C 2 = 0
Ap
(i) If the two lines are parallel, θ = 0 ° ⇒ cos α = −
C
∴ tan θ = tan 0 ° = 0
Bp
sin α = −
A1 B 2 − A2 B 1
 and ...(i)
⇒ = 0 C
A1 A2 + B 1 B 2
cos 2 α + sin2 α = 1
⇒ A1 B 2 − A2 B 1 = 0 2 2
 Ap   Bp 
A1 B 1
= −  + −  = 1
or (Remember)  C   C 
A2 B 2
which is required condition of parallelism. C2
or p2 =
(ii) If the two lines are perpendicular, θ = 90 ° A2 + B 2
∴ tan θ = tan 90 ° = ∞ | C|
⇒ p=
A1 B 2 − A2 B 1
  (A + B 2 )
2
⇒ =∞
A1 A2 + B 1 B 2 | C| A
From Eq. (i), cos α = − . ,
⇒ A1 A2 + B 1 B 2 = 0 (Remember) C (A + B 2 )
2

which is required condition of perpendicularity. | C| B

sin α = − . .
Remark C (A + B 2 )
2
If two lines are coincident, then
Putting the values of cos α, sin α and p in
A1 B 1 C 1
= = (Remember) x cos α + y sin α = p, we get
A2 B 2 C 2
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 89

 − | C|    1
x ⋅
A  x + y  − | C| . B  where, cos α = −
2
= − cos 60° = cos (180° − 60° )
 C 2 2 
(A + B )   C 2 
(A + B ) 
2
cos (180° + 60° )
  or
∴ α = 120° or 240°
| C|
= 3
( A2 + B 2 ) and sin α = − = − sin 60° = sin (180° + 60° )
2
    or sin (360° − 60° )
− A  x + − B y = C ∴ α = 240° or 300°
⇒
 2 2 
(A + B )   2 
(A + B ) 
2
(A + B 2 )
2
α = 240° , p = 2
  Hence,
∴ Required normal form is
This is the normal form of the line Ax + By + C = 0.
x cos 240° + y sin 240° = 2
Rule : First shift the constant term on the RHS and make
it positive, if it is not so by multiplying the whole equation y Example 35. Find the measure of the angle of
by ‘− 1 ’ and then divide both sides by intersection of the lines whose equations are
3x + 4 y + 7 = 0 and 4 x − 3y + 5 = 0.
(coefficient of x ) 2 + (coefficient of y ) 2
Sol. Given lines are 3x + 4y + 7 = 0, 4 x − 3y + 5 = 0. Comparing
y Example 34. Reduce x + 3y + 4 = 0 to the : the given lines with A1x + B1y + C 1 = 0, A 2 x + B 2y + C 2 = 0
respectively, we get
(i) Slope-intercept form and find its slope and y-intercept A1 = 3, B1 = 4 and A 2 = 4, B 2 = − 3
(ii) Intercept form and find its intercepts on the axes Q A1A 2 + B1B 2 = 3 × 4 + 4 ( −3) = 0
Hence, the given lines are perpendicular.
(iii) Normal form and find the values of p and α
Sol. (i) Given equation is x + 3 y + 4 = 0 y Example 36. Find the angle between the lines
⇒ 3y = − x − 4 (a 2 − ab) y = (ab + b 2 ) x + b 3
 1  4 and (ab + a 2 ) y = (ab − b 2 ) x + a 3
⇒ y = −  x + − 
 3  3 where a > b > 0.
which is in the slope-intercept form y = mx + c Sol. The given equations of lines can be written as
1 4
Where slope (m ) = − and y-intercept (c ) = − (ab + b 2 ) x − (a 2 − ab ) y + b 3 = 0 ...(i)
3 3
and (ab − b ) x − (ab + a ) y + a = 0
2 2 3
...(ii)
(ii) Given equation is
x + 3y + 4 = 0 Comparing the given lines (i) and (ii) with the lines
A1x + B1y + C 1 = 0 and A 2 x + B 2y + C 2 = 0
⇒ x + 3y = − 4
respectively, we get
x 3y
⇒ + =1 A1 = ab + b 2 , B1 = − (a 2 − ab )
−4 −4
x y and A 2 = ab − b 2 , B 2 = − (ab + a 2 )
⇒ + =1
−4 − 4 / 3 Let θ be the acute angle between the lines, then
x y A B − A 2 B1
which is in the intercept form + = 1 tanθ = 1 2
a b A1A 2 + B1B 2
4
where x-intercept (a ) = − 4 and y-intercept (b ) = − (ab + b 2 ) × ( − (ab + a 2 )) − (ab − b 2 ) × ( − (a 2 − ab ))
3 tan θ =
(ab + b 2 ) (ab − b 2 ) + (a 2 − ab ) (ab + a 2 )
(iii) Given equation is x + 3y + 4 = 0
− {a 2b 2 + a 3b + ab 3 + a 2b 2 − a 3b + a 2b 2 + a 2b 2 − b 3a }
⇒ x + 3y = − 4 =
(a 2b 2 − b 4 + a 4 − a 2b 2 )
⇒ − x − 3y = 4 (RHS made positive)
− 4a 2b 2 4 a 2b 2
Dividing both sides by ( −1)2 + ( − 3 )2 = 2 , we get = 4 =
a − b  a − b
4 4 4

 1  3
−  x + −  y =2  4 a 2b 2 
 2  2 ∴ θ = tan −1  4 
a − b4 
Which is the normal form x cos α + y sin α = p .
90 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 37. Two equal sides of an isosceles triangle The Distance form or Symmetric form
are given by the equations 7 x − y + 3 = 0 and
x + y − 3 = 0 and its third side passes through the or Parametric form of a line
point (1, − 10) . Determine the equation of the third Theorem : The equation of the straight line passing
side. through ( x 1 , y 1 ) and making an angle θ with the positive
Sol. Given equations direction of X-axis is
7x − y + 3 = 0 ...(i) x − x1 y − y1
= =r
and x +y −3=0 ...(ii) cos θ sin θ
represents two equal sides AB and AC of an isosceles where, r is the directed distance between the points ( x , y )
triangle ABC. Since its third side passes through D (1, − 10)
then its equation is
and ( x 1 , y 1 ).
y + 10 = m ( x − 1) ...(iii) Proof : Let AB be a line which passes through the point
Q AB = AC Q ( x 1 , y 1 ) and meet X-axis at R and makes an angle θ with
Let ∠ ABC = ∠ ACB = θ the positive direction of X-axis.
then ∠ ACE = π − θ Y B
Y P(x,y)
r
(x1,y1)Q θ
A N

θ
X′ X
X′ X O R M L
O
x+
3=0

A
y–
3
=
7x–y+

p–q Y′
0

q
C
E Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the line at a distance r from Q.
q Draws PL and QM are perpendiculars from P and Q on
B D(1,–10) X-axis respectively and draw QN perpendicular on PL.
Y′ Then,
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), slopes of AB and AC are QN = ML = OL − OM = x − x 1
m1 = 7 and m 2 = − 1 and PN = PL − NL = PL − QM = y − y 1
respectively. from ∆PQN ,
7 −m QN x − x 1 x − x1
∴ tanθ = cos θ = = or =r ...(i)
1 + 7m PQ r cos θ
−1 − m 1 + m
and tan ( π − θ ) = = −  PN y − y 1 y − y1
1 + ( − 1) m 1 − m and sin θ = = or =r ...(ii)
PQ r sin θ
1 + m 1 + m
⇒ − tanθ = −   ⇒ tanθ =   From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
1 − m 1 − m
x − x1 y − y1
7 −m 1+m = =r
∴ = cos θ sin θ
1 + 7m 1 − m
x − x1 y − y1
⇒ ( 7 − m ) ( 1 − m ) = ( 1 + 7m ) ( 1 + m ) Corollary 1 : Q = = r , then
cos θ sin θ
⇒ 6m 2 + 16m − 6 = 0
x = x 1 + r cos θ
or 3m 2 + 8m − 3 = 0 or (3m − 1) (m + 3) = 0 
y = y 1 + r sin θ 
1
⇒ m = ,−3
3 parametric equations of straight line AB.
Hence from Eq. (iii), the third side BC has two equations Corollary 2 : If P point above Q then r is positive then
1
y + 10 = ( x − 1) and y + 10 = − 3 ( x − 1) coordinates of P are ( x 1 + r cos θ, y 1 + r sin θ ) and if P
3 below Q then r is negative then coordinates of P are
or x − 3y − 31 = 0 and 3x + y + 7 = 0 ( x 1 − r cos θ, y 1 − r sin θ ).
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 91

y Example 38. The slope of a straight line through 6

3 ⇒ (cos θ + sin θ ) = 1
A ( 3 , 2) is . Find the coordinates of the points on 3
4 3 3
the line that are 5 units away from A. ⇒ cos θ + sin θ = =
6 2
Sol. Let straight line makes an angle θ with positive direction of 1 1 3
X -axis, ⇒ cos θ + sin θ =
2 2 2
3
then tanθ =  π  π
4 ⇒ cos θ −  = cos  
 4  6
3 4
∴ sinθ = and cosθ = π π
5 5 θ − = 2nπ ± ; n ∈I
4 6
5 π π
3 for n = 0, θ=± + (Q0 ≤ θ < π )
6 4
θ
4 = 15° , 75°
∴ Equation of the straight line through A (3, 2) in 3π
parametric form is y Example 40. A line through (2 , 3) makes an angle
4
x −3 y −2
= = ±5 with the negative direction of X-axis. Find the length of
cos θ sin θ the line segment cut off between (2 , 3) and the line
4
∴ x = 3 ± 5 cosθ = 3 ± 5 × = 3 ± 4 = 7 or −1 x + y − 7 = 0.
5 3π
3 Sol. Q Line makes an angle with the negative direction of
and y = 2 ± 5 sinθ = 2 ± 5 × = 2 ± 3 = 5 or −1 X -axis. 4
5 π
∴ Line makes an angle with the positive direction of
Hence, the coordinates of the points are (7, 5) and ( − 1, − 1) . 4
X -axis.
y Example 39. Find the direction in which a straight Y
line must be drawn through the point (1, 2) so that
its point of intersection with the line x + y = 4 may π/4
1 r P
be at a distance 6 from this point.
3 A(2,3)
3π/4
Sol. Let the straight line makes an angle θ with the positive π/4 π/α
direction of X -axis. X′ X
O
x+

∴ Equation of the line through (1, 2) in parametric form is

y–
Y′
7=
x −1 y −2 1
0
= = 6
cos θ sin θ 3 ∴ The equation of the line through (1, 2) in parametric form is
Y x −2 y −3
= =r
 π  π
(0,4) cos   sin  
6  4  4
3
x −2 y −3
i.e. = =r ...(i)
1 1
A(1,2)
2 2
X′ X r r
O (4,0) ∴ x =2+ and y = 3 +
2 2
Y′
Let the line (i) meet the line x + y − 7 = 0 in P
6 6  r r 
or x =1+ cosθ and y = 2 + sinθ ∴ Coordinates of P 2 + ,3 +  lies on x + y − 7 = 0
3 3  2 2
 6 6  r r
Since, the point 1 + cos θ, 2 + sin θ lies on the line then 2+ +3+ −7 =0
 3 3  2 2
x +y = 4 2r
or = 2 or r = 2
6 6 2
∴ 1+ cos θ + 2 + sin θ = 4
3 3 ∴ AP = 2
92 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 41. Find the distance of the point (2 , 3) Special Corollaries

from the line 2x − 3y + 9 = 0 measured along the line (i) Angle made by AB with positive X-axis (where
2x − 2y + 5 = 0 . A and B are given points) :be two points and let AB
makes an angle θ with the positive direction of X-axis
Sol. Since, slope of the line 2x − 2y + 5 = 0 is 1, its makes an
and let d be the distance between A and B. Then Let
π A ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B ( x 2 , y 2 )
angle with positive direction of X -axis.
4 x − x1 y − y1
The equation of the line through (2, 3) and making an angle cos θ = 2 , sin θ = 2
d d
π
in parametric form
4 Y
x −2 y −3 x −2 y −3 B'(x2',y2' )
= = r or = =r
 π  π 1 1 B(x2,y2)
cos   sin  
 4  4 2 2
(y2–y1)
 r r  α
Coordinates of any point on this line are 2 + ,3 + . θ
 2 2 (x1,y1)A
(x2–x1)
This point lies on the line 2x − 3y + 9 = 0 O
X

 r   r 
⇒ 2 2 +  − 3 3 +  +9 =0
 2  2
where, d = ( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 1 ) 2 = AB
r
⇒ − + 4 =0
2 and x 2 = x 1 + d cos θ, y 2 = y 1 + d sin θ
∴ r =4 2 If AB rotates an angle α about A, then new
coordinates of B are
y Example 42. If the line y − 3x + 3 = 0 cuts the
x 2′ = x 1 + d cos(θ + α ),
parabola y 2 = x + 2 at A and B, then find the value of
y ′2 = y 1 + d sin(θ + α )
PA. PB { where P ≡ ( 3, 0)}.
and here, AB = AB ′ = d .
Sol. Slope of line y − 3x + 3 = 0 is 3
(ii) Complex number as a rotating arrow in Argand
If line makes an angle θ with X-axis, then tan θ = 3 plane :
∴ θ = 60° Let z = r (cos θ + i sin θ ) = re iθ , where i = −1 ... (i)
x− 3 y −0
= =r be a complex number representing a point P in the
cos 60° sin 60°
Argand plane.
Y
Y
A
Q(zeiφ)
Imaginary axis

60°
X P(z)
O P(√3,0)

φ
B θ X
O Real axis
 r r 3 Then, OP = | z | = r and ∠ POX = θ
⇒  3+ ,  be a point on the parabola y = x + 2
2
 2 2 
Now, consider complex number z 1` = ze iφ
3 2 r
then, r = 3 + + 2 ⇒ 3r 2 − 2r − 4 (2 + 3 ) = 0 or z 1 = re iθ ⋅ e i φ = r ⋅ e i ( θ + φ ) [from Eq. (i)]
4 2
−4 (2 + 3 )
 = 4 (2 + 3 )
Clearly the complex number z 1 represents a point Q
∴ PA ⋅ PB = r1r 2 =
 3  3 in the Argand plane, when
OQ = r and ∠ QOX = θ + φ
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 93

→
Clearly multiplication of z with e iφ rotates the vector OP Since, AC = r = 2
through angle φ in anti-clockwise sense. Similarly → Put r = 2 in Eq. (i), then
multiplication of z with e − iφ will rotate the vector OP in
1 4+ 2
clockwise sense. x = 2+ 2⋅ =
2 2
Remark 3 6
If z1, z2 and z3 are the affixes of the three points A, B and C such and y = 2. =
that AC = AB and ∠ CAB = θ. Therefore 2 2
→ → Equation of the line AC is
AB = z2 − z1, AC = z3 − z1
x −2 1
→ → = cot 60° =
Then AC will be obtained by rotating AB through an angle θ in y 3
anticlockwise sense and therefore
or x 3 −y −2 3 =0
C(z3)
 4 + 2 6
and coordinates of C are  , .
 2 2
B(z2)
Aliter (By special corollary (ii))
Q A ≡ (2, 0), B ≡ (3, 1), let C ≡ ( x , y )
θ ∴ z A = 2,z B = 3 + i , zC = x + iy , where i = −1
5π
zC − z A i  5π 
A(z1) =e 12
Q15° = 
zB − zA  12 
→ →
AC = ABei θ ⇒ zC − 2 = (1 + i ) (cos 15° + i sin 15° )
iθ  z − z1  iθ  3 +1  3 − 1 
or ( z3 − z1 ) = ( z2 − z1 ) e or  3  =e
 z2 − z1  or zC = 2 + ( 1 + i )  +i  
 2 2  2 2 
y Example 43. The line joining the points A (2 , 0) and  3 +1 3 − 1  3 +1 3 − 1
= 2 + −  +i  + 
B ( 3 , 1) is rotated about A in the anticlockwise direction  2 2 2 2   2 2 2 2 
through an angle of 15°. Find the equation of the line  1  3 4+ 2  6
in the new position. If B goes to C in the new position, = 2 +  +i   = +i  
 2   2 2  2
what will be the coordinates of C ?
 4 + 2 6
Sol. By special corollary (i) ∴ C ≡ , 
 2 2
Here AB = (2 − 3)2 + (0 − 1)2 = 2
and equation of AC
1−0
and slope of AB = = 1 = tan 45° y − 0 = tan 60° ( x − 2) ⇒ x 3 − y − 2 3 = 0
3−2

Y y Example 44. The centre of a square is at the origin

and one vertex is A (2 , 1). Find the coordinates of other
C vertices of the square.
B(3,1)
15°
Sol. [By special corollary (ii)]
45° Q A ≡ ( 2, 1)
X′ X
O A(2,0) ∴ z A = 2 + i , where i = −1

Y′ B
A(2,1)
∴ ∠ BAX = 45°
Now line AB is rotated through an angle of 15°
⇒ ∠ CAX = 45° + 15° = 60°
O
and AB = AC = 2
Equation of line AC in parametric form is
C
x = 2 + r cos 60°
 ...(i) D
y = 0 + r sin 60° 
94 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Now, in triangle AOB,  1 

then centre of square E ≡  − , 0
π  2 
OA = OB, ∠ AOB = 90° =
2 1
∴ zE = −
π 2
i
∴ zB = zA e 2 = iz A = 2i − 1 Now, in ∆ AEB, ( EA = EB )
π
∴ B ≡ ( − 1 , 2) zB − zE i
=e 2 =i
QO is the mid-point of AC and BD zA − zE
∴ C ≡ ( −2, − 1) and D ≡ (1, − 2). 1  1
⇒ zB + = i 1 + i + 
2  2
y Example 45. The extremities of the diagonal of a
square are (1, 1) , ( −2 , − 1). Obtain the other two vertices ∴
3 3
zB = − + i
and the equation of the other diagonal. 2 2
 3 3
Sol. (By special corollary (ii)) B ≡ − , 
 2 2
Q A ≡ (1, 1)
∴ z A = 1 + i , where i = −1  3 3
then D ≡  −1 + , − 
 2 2
and C ≡ ( − 2, − 1)
∴ zC = − 2 − i 1 3
or D ≡ ,− 
B
2 2
A(1,1) Hence, equation of other diagonal BD is
3
−0
90°  1
y −0= 2 x + 
3 1  2
E − +
(–1/2,0) 2 2
⇒ 6x + 4y + 3 = 0
C
(–2,–1)
D

Exercise for Session 1

1. The distance of the point (3, 5) from the line 2x + 3y − 14 = 0 measured parallel to the line x − 2y = 1
is
7 7
(a) (b) (c) 5 (d) 13
5 13

2. The lines x cos α + y sin α = p1 and x cos β + y sin β = p 2 will be perpendicular, if

(a) α = β (b) | α − β | = π / 2
(c) α = π / 2 (d) α ± β = π / 2

3. If each of the points ( x1, 4), ( −2, y1) lies on the line joining the points (2, − 1), (5, − 3), then the point P ( x1, y1) lies
on the line
(a) 6 (x + y ) − 25 = 0 (d) 2x + 6y + 1 = 0
(c) 2x + 3y − 6 = 0 (d) 6 (x + y ) + 25 = 0

4. The equation of the straight line passing through the point (4, 3) and making intercepts on the coordinate axes
whose sum is −1 is
x y x y x y x y
(a) + = − 1 and + =−1 (b) − = − 1 and + = −1
2 3 −2 1 2 3 −2 1
x y x y x y x y
(c) + = 1 and + =1 (d) − = 1 and + =1
2 3 −2 1 2 3 −2 1
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 95

5. If the straight lines ax + by + c = 0 and x cos α + y sin α = c enclose an angle π / 4 between them and meet
the straight line x sin α − y cos α = 0 in the same point, then
(a) a 2 + b 2 = c 2 (b) a 2 + b 2 = 2 (c) a 2 + b 2 = 2c 2 (d) a 2 + b 2 = 4

6. The angle between the lines 2x − y + 3 = 0 and x + 2y + 3 = 0 is

(a) 30° (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) 90°

7. The inclination of the straight line passing through the point (–3, 6) and the mid-point of the line joining the
points (4, –5) and (–2, 9) is
(a) π / 4 (b) π / 2 (c) 3 π / 4 (d) π

8. A square of side a lies above the X-axis and has one vertex at the origin. The side passing through the origin
makes an angle π /6 with the positive direction of X-axis. The equation of its diagonal not passing through the
origin is
(a) y ( 3 − 1) − x (1 − 3 ) = 2a (b) y ( 3 + 1) + x (1 − 3 ) = 2a
(c) y ( 3 + 1) + x (1 + 3 ) = 2a (d) y ( 3 + 1) + x ( 3 − 1) = 2a

9. A (1, 3) and C (7, 5) are two opposite vertices of a square. The equation of side through A is
(a) x + 2y − 7 = 0 (b) x − 2y + 5 = 0
(c) 2x + y − 5 = 0 (d) 2x − y + 1 = 0

10. The equation of a straight line passing through the point ( −5 , 4) and which cuts off an intercept of 2 units
between the lines x + y + 1 = 0 and x + y − 1 = 0 is
(a) x − 2y + 13 = 0 (b) 2x − y + 14 = 0
(c) x − y + 9 = 0 (d) x − y + 10 = 0

11. Equation to the straight line cutting off an intercept 2 from negative direction of the axis of y and inclined at 30°
to the positive direction of axis of x is
(a) y + x − 3 = 0 (b) y − x + 2 = 0
(c) y − x 3 − 2 = 0 (d) y 3 − x + 2 3 = 0

12. What is the value of y so that the line through (3, y ) and (2, 7) is parallel to the line through (–1, 4) and (0, 6) ?

13. A straight line is drawn through the point P (2, 2) and is inclined at an angle of 30° with the X-axis. Find the
coordinates of two points on it at a distance 4 from P on either side of P.
π
14. If the straight line through the point P (3, 4) makes an angle with X-axis and meets the line 12x + 5y + 10 = 0
6
at Q, find the length of PQ.

15. Find the distance of the point (2, 3) from the line 2x − 3y + 9 = 0 measured along the line x − y + 1 = 0.

16. A line is such that its segment between the straight line 5x − y − 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y − 4 = 0 is bisected at the
point (1, 5) . Obtain the equation.

17. The side AB and AC of a ∆ ABC are respectively 2x + 3y = 29 and x + 2y = 16. If the mid-point of BC is (5, 6),
then find the equation of BC.
18. A straight line through A ( −15, − 10) meets the lines x − y − 1 = 0, x + 2y = 5 and x + 3y = 7 respectively at A, B
12 40 52
and C. If + = , prove that the line passes through the origin.
AB AC AD
Session 2
Position of Two Points Relative to a Given Line,
Position of a Point Which Lies Inside a Triangle,
Equations of Lines Parallel and Perpendicular to
X¢

a Given Line, Distance of a Point From a Line,

Distance Between Two Parallel Lines,
Area of Parallelogram,

Position of Two Points Relative ∴ λ is negative

to a Given Line ⇒
 ax + by 1 + c 
− 1  <0
 ax 2 + by 2 + c 
Theorem : The points P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) lie on the
same or opposite sides of the line ax + by + c = 0 according  ax 1 + by 1 + c 
⇒   >0
as  a x 2 + by 2 + c 
ax 1 + by 1 + c
> 0 or <0 . f (x 1 , y 1 )
ax 2 + by 2 + c or >0
f (x 2 , y 2 )
Proof : Let the line PQ be divided by the line
ax + by + c = 0 in the ratio λ : 1 (internally) at the point R. where, f ( x , y ) ≡ ax + by + c .
 x + λx 2 y 1 + λy 2  Case II : Let P and Q are on opposite sides of the line
∴ The coordinates of R are  1 , . ax + by + c = 0
 1+ λ 1+ λ 
The point of R lies on the line ax + by + c = 0 ∴ R divides PQ internally.
 x + λx 2   y 1 + λy 2  ∴ λ is positive
then a 1  +b   +c =0  ax + by 1 + c 
 1+ λ   1+ λ  ⇒ − 1  >0
P R Q

⇒ λ (ax 2 + by 2 + c ) + (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) = 0  ax 2 + by 2 + c 

 ax + by 1 + c   ax 1 + by 1 + c 
⇒ λ =− 1  (Qax 2 + by 2 + c ≠ 0 ) ⇒   <0
 ax 2 + by 2 + c   ax 2 + by 2 + c 
Case I : Let P and Q are on same side of the line f (x 1 , y 1 )
or <0
ax + by + c = 0. f (x 2 , y 2 )
∴ R divides PQ externally. where, f ( x , y ) = ax + by + c

R
Remarks
1. The side of the line where origin lies is known as origin side.
Q 2. A point ( α, β ) will lie on origin side of the line ax + by + c = 0, if
P aα + bβ + c and c have same sign.
Q
P 3. A point ( α, β ) will lie on non-origin side of the line
R
ax + by + c = 0, if aα + bβ + c and c have opposite sign.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 97

y Example 46. Are the points (2 , 1) and ( −3, 5) on the Hence, the given village V does not lie on the canal.
9
same or opposite side of the line 3 x − 2y + 1 = 0 ? Also if f ( x , y ) ≡ x + y −
2
Sol. Let f ( x , y ) ≡ 3x − 2y + 1
 9 
4 +3− 
f ( 2, 1) 3 (2) − 2(1) + 1 5 f ( 4, 3)  2  = −  7 2 − 9  <0
∴ = = − <0 ∴ =  
f ( −3, 5) 3 ( −3) − 2 (5) + 1 18 f (0, 0)  0 + 0 − 9   9 
 
Therefore, the two points are on the opposite sides of the 2
given line. Hence, the village is on that side of the canal on which
origin or the city lies.
y Example 47. Is the point (2 , − 7 ) lies on origin side of
the line 2x + y + 2 = 0 ?
Sol. Let f ( x , y ) ≡ 2x + y + 2
Position of a Point Which Lies
∴ f ( 2, − 7 ) = 2 ( 2) − 7 + 2 = − 1 Inside a Triangle
f (2, − 7 ) < 0 and constant 2 > 0
Hence, the point (2, − 7 ) lies on non-origin side. Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the point and equations of the sides of a
triangle are
y Example 48. A straight canal is at a distance of BC : a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0
1
4 km from a city and the nearest path from the city CA : a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0
2
to the canal is in the north-east direction. Find and AB : a 3 x + b 3 y + c 3 = 0
whether a village which is at 3 km north and 4 km east
A (x′,y′)
from the city lies on the canal or not. If not, then on
which side of the canal is the village situated ?
Sol. Let O (0, 0) be the given city and AB be the straight canal.
9
Given, OL = km P (x1,y1)
2
North
Y
(x′′ ,y′′ )B C (x′′′,y′′′)
B
First find the coordinates of A, B and C say,
L V(4,3)
A ≡ ( x ′ , y ′ ); B ≡ ( x ′ ′ , y ′ ′ ) and C ≡ ( x ′ ′ ′ , y ′ ′ ′ )
t
as
-E
rth

and if coordinates of A, B, C are given, then find equations of

No

45° BC , CA and AB.

X′ X
O A East
If P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies inside the triangle, then P and A must be
Y′
on the same side of BC , P and B must be on the same side
∴ Equation of AB of AC , P and C must be on the same side of AB , then
i.e. Equation of canal is a 1 x 1 + b 1y 1 + c 1
>0 ...(i)
9 a 1 x ′ + b 1y ′ + c 1
x cos 45° + y sin 45° =
2 a 2 x 1 + b 2y 1 + c 2
>0 ...(ii)
9 a 2 x ′ ′ + b 2y ′ ′ + c 2
or x +y = ...(i)
2 a 3 x 1 + b 3y 1 + c 3
Let V be the given village, then V ≡ ( 4, 3)
and >0 ...(iii)
a 3 x ′ ′ ′ + b 3y ′ ′ ′ + c 3
Putting x = 4 and y = 3 in Eq. (i),
9 9 The required values of P ( x 1 , y 1 ) must be intersection of
then 4 + 3 = , i.e. 7 = which is impossible. these inequalities Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii).
2 2
98 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Aliter (Best Method) : First draw the exact diagram of or 4t − 6 < 0

the problem. If the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) 3
∴ t< ...(ii)
move on the line y = ax + b for all x 1 , then 2
P ≡ ( x 1 , ax 1 + b ) and P , C must be on the same side of AB
value of (3x − 2y + 6) at P (t , t + 1)
and the portion DE of the line y = ax + b (Excluding D and ∴ >0
value of (3x − 2y + 6) at C (6, 1)
E) lies within the triangle. Now line y = ax + b cuts any
two sides out of three sides, then find coordinates of D and 3t − 2 ( t + 1) + 6
i.e. >0
E. 18 − 2 + 6
D ≡ (α, β) t +4
or >0
and E ≡ ( γ , δ ) (say) 22
then α < x1 < γ or t + 4>0
∴ t>−4 ...(iii)
and β < ax 1 + b < δ

y Example 49. For what values of the parameter t From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
does the point P (t, t + 1) lies inside the triangle ABC 6
− <t <
3
where A ≡ (0, 3), B ≡ ( − 2 , 0) and C ≡ (6 , 1) . 7 2
 6 3
Sol. Equations of sides i.e. t ∈ − , 
 7 2
BC : x − 8y + 2 = 0
CA : x + 3y − 9 = 0 Aliter : First draw the exact diagram of ∆ ABC, the point
and AB : 3x − 2y + 6 = 0 P (t , t + 1) move on the line
Since, P (t , t + 1) lies inside the triangle ABC, then P and A y = x +1
must be on the same side of BC for all t.
value of ( x − 8y + 2) at P (t , t + 1)
∴ >0 Y
value of ( x − 8y + 2) at A (0, 3) A(0,3)
t − 8 ( t + 1) + 2 E
i.e. >0
0 − 24 + 2
1

− 7t − 6
x+

P
>0 C(6,1)
y=

or
− 22 D
X′ X
or 7t + 6 > 0 B(–2,0) O
6 Y′
∴ t>− ...(i)
7 Now, D and E are the intersection of
Y
y = x + 1, x − 8y + 2 = 0
A(0,3)
and y = x + 1, x + 3y − 9 = 0
respectively.
P
 6 1
∴ D ≡ − , 
C(6,1)  7 7
X′  3 5
B(–2,0) O
X and E≡ , 
 2 2
Y′
and P , B must be on the same side of CA Thus, the points on the line y = x + 1 whose x-coordinates
6 3
value of ( x + 3y − 9 ) at P (t , t + 1) lies between − and lie within the triangle ABC.
∴ >0 7 2
value of ( x + 3y − 9 ) at B ( − 2, 0)
6 3
t + 3 ( t + 1) − 9 Hence, − <t <
i.e. >0 7 2
−2+0−9  6 3
4t − 6 i.e. t ∈ − , 
or >0  7 2
−11
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 99

y Example 50. Find λ if ( λ , 2) is an interior point of  5 7  1 1

A  ,  , B ( − 7, 5) and C  , 
 4 8 3 9
∆ ABC formed by x + y = 4, 3x − 7 y = 8 and
4 x − y = 31. Q P (α, α 2 ) lies inside the ∆ ABC, then
Sol. Let P ≡ ( λ , 2) (i) A and P must lie on the same side of BC
(ii) B and P must lie on the same side of CA
First draw the exact diagram of ∆ ABC, the point P ( λ , 2)
move on the line y = 2 for all λ . (iii) C and P must lie on the same side of AB, then
5 21
Y
+ −1
2 8 >0
A
2α + 3α 2 − 1
D E
=8 33
7y
P ⇒ >0
3x– 2α + 3α 2 − 1
B
X′ X or 3α 2 + 2α − 1 > 0
O
=31

 1
x+

⇒ ( α + 1) α −  > 0
y=

4x–y

 3
4

C 1 
⇒ α ∈ ( − ∞, − 1) ∪  , ∞ ...(i)
3 
Y′ − 35 − 30 − 1
and >0
5α − 6α 2 − 1
Now, D and E are the intersection of
⇒ 5α − 6α 2 − 1 < 0
3x − 7y = 8, y = 2
and 4 x − y = 31, y = 2 respectively.  1  1
⇒ α −  α −  > 0
 3  2
 22   33 
∴ D ≡  , 2 and E ≡  , 2 ∴ α ∈ ( − ∞, 1 / 3) ∪ (1 / 2, ∞ ) ..(ii)
3  4 
1 2
Thus, the points on the line y = 2 whose x-coordinates lies + −3
and 3 9 >0
22 33 α + 2α 2 − 3
between and lie within the ∆ ABC.
3 4
⇒ α + 2α 2 − 3 < 0
22 33
Hence, <λ< ⇒ (2α + 3) (α − 1) < 0
3 4
 22 33  ∴ α ∈ ( − 3 / 2, 1) ...(iii)
i.e. λ ∈ ,  From Eq. (i), Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii), we get
 3 4
α ∈ ( −3 / 2, − 1) ∪ (1 / 2, 1).
y Example 51. Determine all values of α for which the Aliter : Let P (α, α 2 ) first draw the exact diagram of
point (α , α 2 ) lies inside the triangle formed by the lines ∆ ABC.
2x + 3y − 1 = 0, x + 2y − 3 = 0 and 5x − 6 y − 1 = 0. The point P (α, α 2 ) move on the curve y = x 2 for all α.
Sol. The coordinates of the vertices are Now, intersection of y = x 2
and 2x + 3y − 1 = 0
Y
B or 2x + 3x 2 − 1 = 0
1
∴ x = − 1, x =
3
Let intersection points
P
 1 1
A D ≡ ( − 1, 1) and E ≡  , 
3 9
intersection of y = x 2
C
X′ X and x + 2y − 3 = 0
O
or x + 2x 2 − 3 = 0
Y′
∴ x = 1, x = − 3 / 2
100 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y
B
Dividing it by k, then
y=x2 c
G ax + by + =0
k
 c
F or ax + by + λ = 0  writing λ for 
A  k
D
Hence, any line parallel to ax + by + c = 0 is
I
C ax + by + λ = 0
X′ X
O where λ is some constant.
Y′ Aliter : The given line is
Let intersection points ax + by + c = 0 ...(i)
 3 9 a
F ≡ (1, 1) and G ≡  − ,  Its slope = −
 2 4 b
and intersection of y = x 2 and 5x − 6y − 1 = 0 Thus, any line parallel to Eq. (i) is given by
or 5x − 6x 2 − 1 = 0  a
y =  −  x + λ1
1 1  b
∴ x = ,x =
3 2 ⇒ ax + by − bλ 1 = 0
Let intersection points
⇒ ax + by + λ = 0 (writing λ for − bλ 1 )
 1 1 1 1
H ≡  ,  and I ≡  , . where, λ is some constant.
3 9 2 4
Thus the points on the curve y = x 2 whose x-coordinate
Corollary : The equation of the line parallel to
1
ax + by + c = 0 and passing through ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
lies between −3 / 2 & − 1 and & 1 lies within the triangle a ( x − x 1 ) + b (y − y 1 ) = 0
2
ABC. Working Rule :
3 1
Hence, − < α < − 1 or < α < 1 (i) Keep the terms containing x and y unaltered.
2 2
(ii) Change the constant.
 3  1 
i.e. α ∈  − , − 1 ∪  , 1 (iii) The constant λ is determined from an additional
 2  2 
condition given in the problem.
Theorem 2 : The equation of the line perpendicular to the
Equations of Lines Parallel and line ax + by + c = 0 is
bx − ay + λ = 0, where λ is some constant.
Perpendicular to a Given Line Proof : Let the equation of any line perpendicular to
Theorem 1: The equation of line parallel to ax + by + c = 0 ... (i)
ax + by + c = 0 is ax + by + λ = 0, where λ is some be a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(ii)
constant. then aa 1 + bb 1 = 0
Proof : Let the equation of any line parallel to or aa 1 = − bb 1
ax + by + c = 0 ...(i) a1 b1
⇒ = =k (say)
be a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(ii) b −a
a1 b1 ∴ a 1 = bk , b 1 = − ak
then = =k (say)
a b
Then, from Eq. (ii), bkx − aky + c 1 = 0 dividing it by k, then
∴ a 1 = ak , b 1 = bk c
Then from Eq. (ii), bx − ay + 1 = 0
k
akx + bky + c = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 101

 c1  y Example 53. Find the general equation of the line

or bx − ay + λ = 0  writing λ for 
 k which is perpendicular to x + y + 4 = 0 . Also find such
line through the point (1, 2) .
Hence, any line perpendicular to ax + by + c = 0 is
Sol. Equation of any line perpendicular to x + y + 4 = 0 is
bx − ay + λ = 0
x −y + λ =0 ...(i)
where, λ is some constant.
which is general equation of the line.
Aliter : The given line is
Also Eq. (i) passes through (1, 2), then
ax + by + c = 0 ...(i) 1−2+ λ =0
a
Its slope = − ∴ λ =1
b Then from Eq. (i), required line is
b x −y +1=0
Slope of perpendicular line of Eq. (i) is .
a
Thus any line perpendicular to Eq. (i) is given by y Example 54. Show that the equation of the line
passing through the point (a cos 3 θ, a sin 3 θ ) and
b 
y =   x + λ1 perpendicular to the line
a 
x sec θ + y cosec θ = a is
⇒ bx − ay + aλ 1 = 0
x cosθ − y sinθ = a cos2θ
or bx − ay + λ = 0 (writing λ for aλ 1 )
Sol. The given equation x sec θ + y cosec θ = a can be written as
where, λ is some constant. x sin θ + y cos θ = a sin θ cos θ ...(i)
Corollary 1 : The equation of the line through ( x 1 , y 1 ) ∴ equation of perpendicular line of Eq. (i) is
and perpendicular to ax + by + c = 0 is x cos θ − y sin θ = λ ...(ii)
b ( x − x 1 ) − a (y − y 1 ) = 0 Also it is pass through (a cos 3 θ, a sin 3 θ )
Corollary 2 : Also equation of the line perpendicular to ∴ a cos 3 θ ⋅ cos θ − a sin 3 θ ⋅ sin θ = λ
ax + by + c = 0 is written as ⇒ λ = a (cos 4 θ − sin 4 θ )
x y = a (cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ ) (cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ )
− + k = 0, where k is some constant.
a b
= a ⋅ 1 ⋅ cos 2θ = a cos 2θ
Working Rule : From Eq. (ii), the required equation of the line is
(i) Interchange the coefficients of x and y and changing x cos θ − y sin θ = a cos 2θ
sign of one of these coefficients. Aliter : (From corollary (2) of Theorem (2)
(ii) Changing the constant term. Equation of any line perpendicular to the line
x sec θ + y cosec θ = a , is
(iii) The value of λ can be determined from an additional
x y
condition given in the problem. − =k
sec θ cosec θ
y Example 52. Find the general equation of the line or x cos θ − y sin θ = k ...(iii)
which is parallel to 3x − 4 y + 5 = 0. Also find such line Also, it pass through (a cos 3 θ, a sin 3 θ )
through the point ( −1 , 2) .
∴ a cos 3 θ ⋅ cos θ − a sin 3 θ ⋅ sin θ = k
Sol. Equation of any parallel to 3x − 4y + 5 = 0 is
or k = a (cos 4 θ − sin 4 θ )
3x − 4y + λ = 0 ...(i)
= a (cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ ) (cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ )
which is general equation of the line.
Also Eq. (i) passes through ( −1, 2), then = a ⋅ 1 ⋅ cos 2θ
3 ( − 1) − 4 ( 2) + λ = 0 = a cos 2θ
From Eq. (iii), the required equation of the line is
∴ λ = 11
x cos θ − y sin θ = a cos 2θ
Then from Eq. (i) required line is
3x − 4y + 11 = 0
102 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Aliter I : Let PM makes an angle θ with positive

Distance of a Point From a Line direction of X-axis.
Theorem : The length of perpendicular from a point Then, equation of PM in distance form will be
( x 1 , y 1 ) to the line ax + by + c = 0 is x − x1 y − y1
= =p (QPM = p )
| ax 1 + by 1 + c | cos θ sin θ
(a 2 + b 2 ) Therefore coordinates of M will be
( x 1 + p cos θ, y 1 + p sin θ )
Proof : Given line is ax + by + c = 0
Since, M lies on ax + by + c = 0, then
x y
⇒ + =1 a ( x 1 + p cos θ ) + b (y 1 + p sin θ ) + c = 0
 c  c
−  −  or p (a cos θ + b sin θ ) = − (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) …(iii)
 a  b
a
Y
Since, slope of AB = −
b
B(0, –c/b)
b
∴ Slope of PM =
P(x1,y1) a
b
M ∴ tan θ = (Q PM makes an angle θ with
a positive direction of X-axis)
A(–c/a,0) A
X′ X
Y′
(a2+b 2 )
b
Let the given line intersects the X-axis and Y-axis at A and
 c  θ
B respectively, then coordinates of A and B are  − , 0 
 a  B a C

 c b
and  0, −  respectively. then sin θ =
 b (a + b 2 )
2

Draw PM perpendicular to AB . a
Now, Area of ∆ PAB and cos θ =
(a + b 2 )
2
1  c c  c 
= x 1  0 +  −  − − y 1  + 0 (y 1 − 0 ) Now, from Eq. (iii),
2  b  a  b 
1 c   a2 b2 
=  | ax 1 + by 1 + c | ...(i) p +  = − (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
2 ab  (a 2 + b 2 ) 2
+ 2 
 (a b ) 
Let PM = p (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
Also, area of ∆ PAB or p=−
(a 2 + b 2 )
1  c c  
2 2
1  
= ⋅ AB ⋅ PM =  − − 0  +  0 +   ⋅ p Since, p is positive
2 2  a   b  
| ax 1 + by 1 + c |
∴ p=
1 c 
=   (a 2 + b 2 ) ⋅ p ... (ii) (a 2 + b 2 )
2 ab
Aliter II : Let Q ( x , y ) be any point on the line
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
ax + by + c = 0
1 
c  1 c 
(a 2 + b 2 ) ⋅ p =  | ax 1 + by 1 + c | Hence, the length of perpendicular from P on AB will be
2 ab 2 ab least value of PQ.
| ax 1 + by 1 + c |
or p=
(a 2 + b 2 )
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 103

Y Q Least value of PQ is PM
| ax 1 + by 1 + c |
B
(x,y) ∴ p = PM =
Q P(x1,y1) (a 2 + b 2 )

M Aliter III : Let M ≡ (h, k )

Since, M (h, k ) lies on AB,
X′ X ah + bk + c = 0 ..(v)
O A
Y′
Now, AB and PM are perpendicular to each other, then
Let z = ( PQ ) 2 (slope of PM ) × (slope of AB) = − 1
= ( x − x 1 ) 2 + (y − y 1 ) 2 ...(iv) y1 − k  a 
⇒ × −  = − 1
2 x1 −h  b
 c ax 
= (x − x 1 )2 +  − − − y1  x 1 − h y 1 − k a ( x 1 − h ) + b (y 1 − k )
 b b  ⇒ = =
a b a .a +b .b
Q ax + by + c = 0 
 c ax  (by law of proportion)
 ∴y = − − 
 b b  (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) − (ah + bk + c )
=
dz  c ax   a a2 + b2
∴ = 2 (x − x 1 ) + 2  − − − y1  − 
dx  b b   b
ax 1 + by 1 + c
2  a2  = [from Eq. (v)]
d z  a  a a2 + b2
and = 2 + 2  −  −  = 2  1 + 2  = positive
dx 2  b  b  b 
∴ ( PM ) 2 = ( x − x 1 ) 2 + (y − y 1 ) 2
Q z is minimum 2
 ax + by + c 
∴ PQ is also minimum. =  1 2 12  (a 2 + b 2 )
dz  a +b 
For maximum or minimum, =0
dx ∴ Length of perpendicular
 c ax   a (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
2 (x − x 1 ) + 2  − − − y1  −  = 0 PM = ±
 b b   b (a 2 + b 2 )
 a  c ax  | ax 1 + by 1 + c )
or 2 ( x − x 1 ) + 2 (y − y 1 )  −  = 0 Qy = − −  Hence, PM = p =
 b  b b  (a 2 + b 2 )
( x − x 1 ) (y − y 1 ) a ( x − x 1 ) + b (y − y 1 )
or = = Aliter IV : Equation of AB in normal form is
a b a ⋅a + b ⋅b
a b −c
(ax + by + c ) − (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) x+ y=
= (a + b )
2 2
(a + b )
2 2
(a + b 2 )
2
(a 2 + b 2 )
c
(by law of proportion) ⇒ OL = −
0 − (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) (a 2 + b 2 )
= (Qax + by + c = 0 )
(a 2 + b 2 )
Y
a (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
⇒ (x − x 1 ) = − B
(a 2 + b 2 ) P(x1,y1)
b (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
and (y − y 1 ) = − Q
(a 2 + b 2 ) M
L
∴ From Eq. (iv), α A
X′ X
O
(a + b )
2 2
| ax 1 + by 1 + c | Y′
PQ = (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) 2 =
(a 2 + b 2 ) 2 (a 2 + b 2 )
104 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Equation of line parallel to AB and passes through ( x 1 , y 1 ) Working Rule :

is (i) Put the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) for ( x , y ) on the LHS while the
a ( x − x 1 ) + b (y − y 1 ) = 0 RHS is zero.
or ax + by = ax 1 + by 1 (ii) Divide LHS after Eq. (i) by (a 2 + b 2 ) , where a and b
Normal form is are the coefficients of x and y respectively.
a b ax 1 + by 1
x+ y= y Example 55. Find the sum of the abscissas of all the
(a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 ) points on the line x + y = 4 that lie at a unit distance
ax 1 + by 1 from the line 4 x + 3y − 10 = 0.
⇒ OQ =
(a 2 + b 2 ) Sol. Any point on the line x + y = 4 can be taken as ( x 1, 4 − x 1 ).
As it is at a unit distance from the line 4 x + 3y − 10 = 0, we
ax 1 + by 1 + c get
∴ PM = QL = OQ − OL =
| 4 x 1 + 3 ( 4 − x 1 ) − 10 |
(a 2 + b 2 ) =1
( 4 2 + 32 )
Hence, required perpendicular distance
⇒ | x1 + 2 | = 5 ⇒ x1 + 2 = ± 5
| ax 1 + by 1 + c |
p= ⇒ x 1 = 3 or −7
(a 2 + b 2 ) ∴ Required sum = 3 − 7 = − 4.
Aliter V : The equation of line through P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and y Example 56. If p and p ′ are the length of the
perpendicular to ax + by + c = 0 is
perpendiculars from the origin to the straight lines
b ( x − x 1 ) − a (y − y 1 ) = 0 ...(vi) whose equations are x sec θ + y cos ec θ = a and
If this perpendicular meet the line ax + by + c = 0 in x cos θ − y sin θ = a cos 2θ , then find the value of
M ( x 2 , y 2 ) then ( x 2 , y 2 ) lie on both the lines 4p 2 + p ′ 2 .
ax + by + c = 0 and Eq. (vi), then |−a |
Sol. We have, p =
b ( x 2 − x 1 ) − a (y 2 − y 1 ) = 0, ax 2 + by 2 + c = 0 (sec θ + cosec 2θ )
2

ax 2 + by 2 + c = a ( x 2 − x 1 ) + b(y 2 − y 1 ) + ax 1 + by 1 + c = 0 a2 a 2 sin 2 θ cos 2 θ

∴ p2 = =
or b ( x 2 − x 1 ) − a (y 2 − y 1 ) = 0 ...(vii) sec θ + cosec θ
2 2
1
and a ( x 2 − x 1 ) + b (y 2 − y 1 ) = − (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) …(viii) ⇒ 4 p = a 2 sin 2 2θ
2
…(i)
On squaring and adding Eqs. (vii) and (viii), we get | − a cos 2θ |
and p′ = = | − a cos 2θ |
(a 2 + b 2 ) (( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 1 ) 2 ) = (ax 1 + by 1 + c ) 2 (cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ )
or PM = ( x 2 − x 1 ) 2 + (y 2 − y 1 ) 2 ∴ ( p ′ )2 = a 2 cos 2 2θ …(ii)
| ax 1 + by 1 + c | ∴ Adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
= 4 p 2 + p ′2 = a2
(a 2 + b 2 )
Hence, length of perpendicular y Example 57. If p is the length of the perpendicular
x y
| ax 1 + by 1 + c | from the origin to the line + = 1, then prove that
PM = p = a b
(a 2 + b 2 ) 1 1 1
+ = .
Corollary 1 : The length of perpendicular from the origin a2 b2 p2
to the line ax + by + c = 0 is Sol. p = length of perpendicular from origin to
| a ⋅0 + b ⋅0 + c | | c| x y
+ =1
i.e. a b
(a + b )
2 2
(a + b 2 )
2
| 0 + 0 − 1| 1
= =
Corollary 2 : The length of perpendicular from ( x 1 , y 1 ) to  1
2
 1
2
 1 1
the line x cos α + y sin α = p is   +   2 + 2
 a b a b 
| x 1 cos α + y 1 sin α − p |
= | x 1 cos α + y 1 sin α − p | or
1
=
1
+
1
or
1
+
1
=
1
(cos 2 α + sin2 α ) p 2
a 2
b 2
a 2
b 2
p2
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 105

y Example 58. Prove that no line can be drawn y Example 59. Find the distance between the lines
through the point (4, − 5) so that its distance from 5x − 12y + 2 = 0 and 5x − 12y − 3 = 0.
( −2 , 3) will be equal to 12. Sol. The distance between the lines
Sol. Suppose, if possible. 5x − 12y + 2 = 0 and 5x − 12y − 3 = 0 is
Equation of line through ( 4, − 5) with slope of m is | 2 − ( − 3) | 5
=
y + 5 = m (x − 4) (5) + ( −12)
2 2 13
⇒ mx − y − 4m − 5 = 0
Aliter I : The constant term in both equations are 2 and −3
| m ( − 2) − 3 − 4m − 5 |
Then, = 12 which are of opposite sign. Hence origin lies between them.
m2 + 1 | 2| + | − 3| 5
∴ Distance between lines is =
⇒ | − 6m − 8 | = 12 (m 2 + 1) (5) + ( −12)
2 2 13
3
On squaring, (6m + 8)2 = 144 (m 2 + 1) Aliter II : Putting y =0 in 5x − 12y − 3 = 0 then x =
5
⇒ 4 (3m + 4 )2 = 144 (m 2 + 1) 3 
∴  , 0 lie on 5x − 12y − 3 = 0
⇒ (3m + 4 ) = 36 (m + 1)
2 2 5 
Hence, distance between the lines
⇒ 27m 2 − 24m + 20 = 0 ...(i)
5x − 12y + 2 = 0 and (5x − 12y − 3 = 0)
Since, the discriminant of Eq. (i) is ( −24 )2 − 4 ⋅27 ⋅ 20 = − 1584
3 
which is negative, there is no real value of m . Hence no = Distance from  , 0 to the line 5x − 12y + 2 = 0
5 
such line is possible. 3
5× −0+2
5 5
= =
Distance between Two 5 + ( −12)
2 2 13

Parallel Lines y Example 60. Find the equations of the line parallel to
5x − 12y + 26 = 0 and at a distance of 4 units from it.
Let the two parallel lines be
Sol. Equation of any line parallel to 5x − 12y + 26 = 0 is
ax + by + c = 0 and ax + by + c 1 = 0
5x − 12y + λ = 0 ...(i)
The distance between the parallel lines is the perpendicular
Since, the distance between the parallel lines is 4 units, then
distance of any point on one line from the other line.
| λ − 26 |
Let ( x 1 , y 1 ) be any point on ax + by + c = 0 =4
(5)2 + ( −12)2
∴ ax 1 + by 1 + c = 0 ...(i)
or | λ − 26 | = 52 or λ − 26 = ± 52
Now, perpendicular distance of the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) from the or λ = 26 ± 52 ∴ λ = − 26 or 78
line ax + by + c 1 = 0 is
Substituting the values of λ in Eq. (i), we get
| ax 1 + by 1 + c 1 | | c 1 − c| 5x − 12y − 26 = 0
= [from Eq. (i)]
(a + b )
2 2
(a 2 + b 2 ) and 5x − 12y + 78 = 0

This is required distance between the given parallel lines.

Aliter I : The distance between the lines is Area of Parallelogram
λ
d= Theorem : Area of parallelogram ABCD whose sides
(a 2 + b 2 ) AB, BC , CD and DA are represented by a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0,
a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0, a 1 x + b 1 y + d 1 = 0
(i) λ = | c 1 − c |, if both the lines are on the same side of
the origin. and a 2 x + b 2 y + d 2 = 0 is
p1 p2 | c1 − d 1| | c2 − d 2|
(ii) λ = | c 1 | + | c |, if the lines are on the opposite side of the or
origin. sin θ a1 b1
| |
Aliter II : Find the coordinates of any point on one of a2 b2
the given lines, preferably putting x = 0 or y = 0. Then the where, p 1 and p 2 are the distances between parallel sides
perpendicular distance of this point from the other line is and θ is the angle between two adjacent sides.
the required distance between the lines.
106 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Proof : Since, p 1 and p 1 are the distances between the pairs Now, substitute the values of p 1 , p 2 and sin θ in Eq. (i)
of parallel sides of the parallelogram and θ is the angle
between two adjacent sides, then |c1 − d 1 | |c2 − d 2 |
a1x+b1y+d1=0 ∴ Area of parallelogram ABCD =
D C | a 1b 2 − a 2b 1 |

0
2 =0

|c − d 1 | |c2 − d 2 |

c2 =
= 1
+d

2 y+
p1 a1 b1
2y

+b
| |
+b

a2 x
a2 b2
a2 x

θ a1x+b1y+c1=0
A B
M θ Corollaries :
p2 1. If p 1 = p 2 , then ABCD becomes a rhombus
L p 12
∴ Area of rhombus ABCD =
Area of parallelogram ABCD sin θ
= 2 × Area of ∆ ABD (c 1 − d 1 ) 2
1 =
= 2 × × AB × p 1  a 2 + b 12 
2 | a 1 b 2 − a 2 b 1 |  12 
= AB × p 1  a 2 + b 22 
p  p2  2. If d 1 and d 2 are the lengths of two perpendicular
= 2 × p1 Q in ∆ ABL, sin θ = 
sin θ  AB  diagonals of a rhombus, then
p1 p2 1
= …(i) Area of rhombus = d 1 d 2
sin θ 2
Now, p 1 = Distance between parallel sides AB and DC 3. Area of the parallelogram whose sides are y = mx + a,
|a − b | |c − d |
|c1 − d 1 | y = mx + b, y = nx + c and y = nx + d is .
= |m − n|
(a 12 + b 12 )
and p 2 = Distance between parallel sides AD and BC
y Example 61. Show that the area of the parallelogram
formed by the lines x + 3y − a = 0, 3x − 2y + 3a = 0,
|c2 − d 2 | 20 2
= x + 3y + 4a = 0 and 3x − 2y + 7a = 0 is a sq units.
(a 22 + b 22 ) 11
a1  a2  Sol. Required area of the parallelogram
− − −  | −a − 4a| | 3a − 7a | 20 2
m − m 2  b1  b2  = = a sq units
Also, tan θ = 1 = 1 3 11
1 + m 1m 2  a  a  | |
1 + − 1  − 2  3 –2
 b1   b2 
y Example 62. Show that the area of the parallelogram
 a1 
 Q m 1 = slope of AB = −  formed by the lines
 b1 
x cos α + y sin α = p, x cos α + y sin α = q ,
 a2 
 and m 2 = slope of AD = −  x cos β + y sin β = r, x cos β + y sin β = s is
 b2 
|(p − q)(r − s) cosec (α − β)|.
a b − a 2 b 1
= 1 2  Sol. The equation of sides of the parallelogram are
a 1 a 2 + b 1 b 2 x cos α + y sin α − p = 0,
| a 1b 2 − a 2b 1 | x cos α + y sin α − q = 0,
∴ sin θ = x cos β + y sin β − r = 0,
(a 12 + b 12 )(a 22 + b 22 )
and x cos β + y sin β − s = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 107

∴ Required area of the parallelogram |( −1 + 2)( −1 + 2)|

∴ Area of the rhombus =
| − p − ( −q )| | − r − ( −s )| | p − q | | r − s | 1 1
= =
cos α sin α | sin(β − α )| a b |
| | |
cos β sin β 1 1
= |( p − q )(r − s )cosec (α − β )| b a
a 2b 2
y Example 63. Prove that the diagonals of the = (a ≠ b )
|b 2 − a 2 |
parallelogram formed by the lines
x y x y x y x y y Example 64. Show that the four lines ax ± by ± c = 0
+ = 1, + = 1, + = 2 and + = 2
a b b a a b b a 2c 2
enclose a rhombus whose area is .
are at right angles. Also find its area (a ≠ b). | ab |
Sol. The distance between the parallel sides
Sol. The given lines are
x y x y
+ = 1 and + =2 ax + by + c = 0 …(i)
a b a b
ax + by − c = 0 …(ii)
|2 − 1| 1
is = = p1 (say) ax − by + c = 0 …(iii)
1 1 1 1
ax − by − c = 0
 2 + 2  2 + 2 and …(iv)
a b  a b  Distance between the parallel lines Eqs. (i) and (ii) is
and the distance between the parallel sides 2c
= p 1 (say) and distance between the parallel
x y
+ = 1 and
x y
+ =2 (a + b 2 )
2

b a b a lines Eqs. (iii) and (iv) is

|2 − 1| 1 2c
is = = p2 (say) = p2 (say)
1 1 1 1 (a + b 2 )
2
 2 + 2  2 + 2
b a  a b 
Here, p 1 = p 2
Here, p1 = p 2 .
∴ it is a rhombus.
∴ Parallelogram is a rhombus.
|(c + c )(c + c )| 4c 2 2c 2
But we know that diagonals of rhombus are perpendicular ∴ Area of rhombus = = =
a b  | − 2ab | | ab |
to each other. | |
a −b

Exercise for Session 2

1. The number of lines that are parallel to 2x + 6y − 7 = 0 and have an intercept 10 between the coordinate axes is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) infinitely many

2. The distance between the lines 4x + 3y = 11 and 8x + 6y = 15 is

7 7 7 9
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 5 10 10

3. If the algebraic sum of the perpendicular distances from the points (2, 0), (0, 2) and (1, 1) to a variable straight
line is zero, then the line passes through the point
(a) (1, 1) (b) (–1, 1) (c) (–1, –1) (d) (1, –1)

4. If the quadrilateral formed by the lines ax + by + c = 0, a′ x + b ′ y + c′ = 0, ax + by + c′ = 0 and

a′ x + b ′ y + c′ = 0 have perpendicular diagonals, then
(a) b 2 + c 2 = b ′2 + c ′2 (b) c 2 + a 2 = c ′2 + a ′2 (c) a 2 + b 2 = a ′2 + b ′2 (d) None of these

5. The area of the parallelogram formed by the lines 3x − 4y + 1 = 0, 3x − 4y + 3 = 0, 4x − 3y − 1 = 0 and

4x − 3y − 2 = 0, is
1 2 3 4
(a) sq units (b) sq units (c) sq units (d) sq units
7 7 7 7
108 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

6. Area of the parallelogram formed by the lines y = mx , y = mx + 1, y = nx and y = nx + 1equals

|m + n | 2 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(m − n )2 |m + n | |m + n | |m − n |

7. The coordinates of a point on the line y = x where perpendicular distance from the line 3x + 4y = 12 is 4 units,
are
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  (c)  − , −  (d)  , − 
3 5 3 3 8 8 32 32
 7 7  2 2  7 7  7 7

8. A line passes through the point (2, 2) and is perpendicular to the line 3x + y = 3, then its y-intercept is
2 2 4 4
(a) − (b) (c) − (d)
3 3 3 3

9. If the points (1, 2) and (3, 4) were to be on the opposite side of the line 3x − 5y + a = 0, then
(a) 7 < a < 11 (b) a = 7 (c) a = 11 (d) a < 7 or a > 11

10. The lines y = mx , y + 2x = 0, y = 2x + k and y + mx = k form a rhombus if m equals

1
(a) –1 (b) (c) 1 (d) 2
2
x y
11. The points on the axis of x, whose perpendicular distance from the straight line + = 1is a
a b
b a
(a) (a ± (a 2 + b 2 ), 0) (b) (b ± (a 2 + b 2 ), 0)
a b
b a
(c) (a + b , 0) (d) (a ± (a 2 + b 2 ), 0)
a b

12. The three sides of a triangle are given by ( x 2 − y 2 ) (2x + 3y − 6) = 0. If the point ( −2, a ) lies inside and (b ,1) lies
outside the triangle, then
(a) a ∈  2,  ; b ∈ (−1, 1) (b) a ∈  −2,  ; b ∈  −1,
10 10 9

 3  3  2
(c) a ∈  1,  ; b ∈ (−3, 5)
10
(d) None of these
 3

13. Are the points (3, 4) and (2, –6) on the same or opposite sides of the line 3x − 4y = 8 ?

14. If the points (4, 7) and (cos θ, sin θ), where 0 < θ < π, lie on the same side of the line x + y − 1 = 0, then prove
that θ lies in the first quadrant.

15. Find the equations of lines parallel to 3x − 4y − 5 = 0 at a unit distance from it.

16. Show that the area of the parallelogram formed by the lines 2x − 3y + a = 0, 3x − 2y − a = 0,2x − 3y + 3a = 0
2a 2
and 3x − 2y − 2a = 0 is sq units.
5

17. A line ‘L’ is drawn from P (4, 3) to meet the lines L1 : 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 and L2 : 3x + 4y + 15 = 0 at point A and B
respectively. From ‘A’ a line, perpendicular to L is drawn meeting the line L2 at A1. Similarly from point ‘B’ a line,
perpendicular to L is drawn meeting the line L1 at B1. Thus a parallelogram AABB 1 1 is formed. Find the
equation (s) of ‘L’ so that the area of the parallelogram AABB 1 1 is least.

18. The vertices of a ∆OBC are O (0, 0), B ( −3, − 1), C ( −1, − 3). Find the equation of the line parallel to BC and
1
intersecting the sides OB and OC and whose perpendicular distance from the origin is .
2
Session 3
Point of Intersection of Two Lines, Concurrent Lines
Family of Lines, How to Find Circumcentre and
Orthocentre by Slopes
Points of Intersection of a 1 b1 c 1 
a 2 b 2 c 2 = 0
Two Lines  
 a 3 b 3 c 3
Let a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0 be two III Method : The condition for the lines P = 0, Q = 0 and
non-parallel lines. If ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the coordinates of their R = 0 to be concurrent is that three constants l, m, n (not all
point of intersection, zeros at the same time) can be obtained such that
then a 1 x 1 + b 1 y 1 + c 1 = 0 and a 2 x 1 + b 2 y 1 + c 2 = 0 lP + mQ + nR = 0
Solving these two by cross multiplication, then
Remarks
x1 y1 1
= = 1. The reader is advised to follow method I in numerical problems.
b 1c 2 − b 2c 1 c 1a 2 − c 2a 1 a 1b 2 − a 2b 1 2. For finding unknown quantity applying method II.
 b c − b 2c 1 c 1a 2 − c 2a 1  y Example 65. Show that the lines
we get (x 1 , y 1 ) ≡  1 2 , 
 a 1b 2 − a 2b 1 a 1b 2 − a 2b 1 
2 x + 3 y − 8 = 0 , x − 5 y + 9 = 0 and 3 x + 4y − 11 = 0
 b1 b2 c1 c2  are concurrent.
 
≡
c1 c2 a1 a2  Sol. I Method : Solving the first two equations, we see that
,
 a1 a2 a1 a2  their point of intersection is (1, 2) which also satisfies the
  third equation
 b1 b2 b1 b2  3 × 1 + 4 × 2 − 11 = 0
Hence the given lines are concurrent.
Remarks a1 b1 c 1 2 3 8
1. Here lines are not parallel, they have unequal slopes, then,
II Method : We have a 2 b 2 c 2 = 1 −5 9
a1b2 − a2b1 ≠ 0
2. In solving numerical questions, we should not be remember a 3 b 3 c 3 3 4 −11
the coordinates ( x1, y1 ) given above, but we solve the equations
Applying C 3 → C 3 + C 1 + 2C 2
directly.
2 3 0
= 1 −5 0 =0
Concurrent Lines 3 4 0
Hence the given lines are concurrent.
The three given lines are concurrent, if they meet in a III Method : Suppose
point. Hence to prove that three given lines are l (2x + 3y − 8) + m ( x − 5y + 9 ) +n (3x + 4y − 11) = 0
concurrent, we proceed as follows : ⇒ x (2l + m + 3n ) + y (3l − 5m + 4n ) + ( −8l + 9m − 11n ) = 0
I Method : Find the point of intersection of any two lines = 0 ⋅ x + 0 ⋅y + 0
by solving them simultaneously. If this point satisfies the On comparing,
third equation also, then the given lines are concurrent. 2l + m + 3n = 0, 3l − 5m + 4n = 0, − 8l + 9m − 11n = 0
II Method : The three lines a i x + b i y + c i = 0, i = 1 , 2 , 3 are After solving, we get l = 19, m = 1, n = − 13
concurrent if Hence, 19 (2x + 3y − 8) + ( x − 5y + 9 ) − 13 (3x + 4y − 11) = 0
Hence the given lines are concurrent.
110 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 66. If the lines ax + y + 1 = 0 , x + by + 1 = 0  ν

⇒ (a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) + λ (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) = 0  where, λ = 
and x + y + c = 0 (a, b and c being distinct and  µ
different from 1) are concurrent, then find the value of It is a first degree equation in x and y. So it represents
1 1 1
+ + . family of lines through the point of intersection of Eqs. (i)
1 − a 1 −b 1 − c and (ii).
Sol. The given lines are concurrent, then Thus, the family of straight lines through the intersection
a 1 1 a 1−a 1−a of lines
1 b 1 =0 ⇒ 1 b −1 0 =0 L1 ≡ a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0
1 1 c 1 0 c −1 and L2 ≡ a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0 is
(applying C 2 → C 2 − C 1 and C 3 → C 3 − C 1 ) (a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) + λ (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) = 0
Expanding along first row i.e. L1 + λL2 = 0
⇒ a ( b − 1) ( c − 1) − ( 1 − a ) ( c − 1) − ( 1 − a ) ( b − 1) = 0
⇒ a (1 − b ) (1 − c ) + (1 − a ) (1 − c ) + (1 − a ) (1 − b ) = 0 Corollaries :
Dividing by (1 − a ) (1 − b ) (1 − c ), then 1. The equation L1 + λL2 = 0 or µL1 + νL2 = 0 represent
a 1 1 a line passing through the intersection of the lines
+ + =0
1−a 1−b 1−c L1 = 0 and L2 = 0 which is a fixed point, where λ, µ, ν
1 1 1 are constants.
⇒ −1+ + + =0
1−a 1−b 1−c 2. For finding fixed point, the number of constants in
1 1 1 family of lines are one or two. If number of constants
Hence, + + =1
1−a 1−b 1−c more than two, then convert in two or one constant
form.
y Example 67. Show that the three straight lines
2x − 3y + 5 = 0 ,3x + 4 y − 7 = 0 and 9 x − 5y + 8 = 0 y Example 68. Find the equation of the straight line
meet in a point. passing through the point (2 , 1) and through the point
of intersection of the lines x + 2y = 3 and 2x − 3y = 4.
Sol. If we multiply these three equations by 3, 1 and −1, we have
3 (2x − 3y + 5) + (3x + 4y − 7 ) − (9 x − 5y + 8) = 0 Sol. Equation of any straight line passing through the
intersection of the lines x + 2y = 3 and 2x − 3y = 4 is
which is an identity.
λ ( x + 2y − 3) + (2x − 3y − 4 ) = 0 ...(i)
Hence, three lines meet in a point.
Since, it passes through the point (2, 1)
∴ λ ( 2 + 2 − 3) + ( 4 − 3 − 4 ) = 0
Family of Lines ⇒ λ −3=0
Theorem : Any line through the point of intersection of ∴ λ =3
the lines a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0 can be Now, substituting this value of λ in (i), we get
represented by the equation 3 ( x + 2y − 3) + (2x − 3y − 4 ) = 0
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) + λ (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) = 0 i.e. 5x + 3y − 13 = 0
which is the equation of required line.
where λ is a parameter which depends on the other
property of line. y Example 69. The family of lines
Proof : The equations of the lines are x (a + 2b ) + y (a + 3b ) = a + b passes through the point
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(i) for all values of a and b. Find the point.
and a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 = 0 ...(ii) Sol. The given equation can be written as
a ( x + y − 1) + b (2x + 3y − 1) = 0
Multiplying µ and ν in Eqs. (i) and (ii) and adding, we get
which is equation of a line passing through the point of
µ (a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) + ν (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) = 0 intersection of the lines x + y − 1 = 0 and 2x + 3y − 1 = 0.
where µ, ν are any constants not both zero. The point of intersection of these lines is (2, − 1). Hence the
given family of lines passes through the point (2, − 1) for all
Dividing both sides by µ, then values of a and b.
ν
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) + (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) = 0
µ
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 111

y Example 70. If 3a + 2b + 6c = 0 the family of straight Sol. Any line passing through the point of intersection of the
given lines is
lines ax + by + c = 0 passes through a fixed point. Find ( x + 5y + 7 ) + λ (3x + 2y − 5) = 0
the coordinates of fixed point. ⇒ x ( 1 + 3λ ) + y ( 5 + 2λ ) + ( 7 − 5λ ) = 0 ...(i)
Sol. Given, 3a + 2b + 6c = 0 (1 + 3λ)
Its slope = −
a b ( 5 + 2λ )
or + +c =0 ...(i)
2 3 (a) Line Eq. (i) is to be parallel to 7 x + 2y − 5 = 0
and family of straight lines is ( 1 + 3λ ) 7
ax + by + c = 0 ...(ii) then − =−
( 5 + 2λ ) 2
Subtracting Eqs. (i) from (ii), then
⇒ 2 + 6λ = 35 + 14 λ
 1  1
a  x −  + b y −  = 0
 2   3 ⇒ 8λ = − 33
33
which is equation of a line passing through the point of ⇒ λ=−
intersection of the lines 8
1 1 Substituting this value of λ in Eq. (i), we get the required
x − = 0 and y − = 0 equation as 7 x + 2y − 17 = 0
2 3
 1 1 (b) Line, (i) is to be perpendicular to 7 x + 2y − 5 = 0
∴ The coordinates of fixed point are  ,  .
 2 3 ( 1 + 3λ ) 7
∴ − ×−   = −1
( 5 + 2λ )  2
y Example 71. If 4a 2 + 9b 2 − c 2 + 12ab = 0, then the or 7 + 21 λ = − 10 − 4 λ
family of straight lines ax + by + c = 0 is either 17
concurrent at ... or at .... ∴ λ=−
25
Sol. Given, 4a 2 + 9b 2 − c 2 + 12ab = 0 Substituting this value of λ is Eq. (i), we get the required
equation as
or (2a + 3b )2 − c 2 = 0
2x − 7y − 20 = 0.
or c = ± (2a + 3b ) ...(i)
Aliter :
and family of straight lines is
The point of intersection of the given lines
ax + by + c = 0 ...(ii)
x + 5y − 7 = 0 and 3x + 2y − 5 = 0 is (3, − 2).
Substituting the value of c from Eqs. (i) in (ii), then
∴ Equation of line through (3, − 2) is
ax + by ± (2a + 3b ) = 0
y + 2 = m ( x − 3) ...(ii)
⇒ a ( x ± 2) + b ( y ± 3) = 0
(a) Line (ii) is parallel to 7 x + 2y − 5 = 0
Taking ‘+’ sign : a ( x + 2) + b (y + 3) = 0
7
which is equation of a line passing through the point of ∴ m=−
intersection of the lines x + 2 = 0 and y + 3 = 0 2
∴ coordinates of fixed point are ( −2, − 3) . Hence, the equation of the required line is
Taking ‘–’ sign : a ( x − 2) + b (y − 3) = 0 7
y + 2 = − ( x − 3)
which is equation of a line passing through the point of 2
intersection of the lines or 7 x + 2y − 17 = 0
x − 2 = 0 and y − 3 = 0 (b) Line (ii) is perpendicular to 7 x + 2y − 5 = 0
∴ coordinates of fixed point are (2, 3)  7
then m ×  −  = − 1
Hence, the family of straight lines ax + by + c = 0 is either  2
concurrent at ( −2, − 3) or at (2, 3) . 2
or m=
y Example 72. Find the equation of the line passing 7
through the point of intersection of the lines Hence, the equation of the required line is
x + 5y + 7 = 0, 3x + 2y − 5 = 0 2
y + 2 = ( x − 3)
7
and (a) parallel to the line 7 x + 2 y − 5 = 0
or 2x − 7y − 20 = 0
(b) perpendicular to the line 7 x + 2 y − 5 = 0
112 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 73. Find the equation of straight line which y Example 75. A variable straight line through the
passes through the intersection of the straight lines x y
point of intersection of the lines + = 1 and
3 x − 4y + 1 = 0 and 5 x + y − 1 = 0 a b
x y
and cuts off equal intercepts from the axes. + = 1 meets the coordinate axes in A and B. Show
Solution : Equation of any line passing through the b a
intersection of the given lines is that the locus of the mid-point of AB is the curve
( 3x − 4y + 1) + λ ( 5x + y − 1) = 0 2xy (a + b ) = ab ( x + y ).
⇒ x ( 3 + 5λ ) + y ( − 4 + λ ) + ( 1 − λ ) = 0 ...(i) Sol. Any line through the point of intersection of given lines is
x y x y  x y 
⇒ + =1  + − 1 + λ  + − 1 = 0
 λ − 1   λ − 1 a b  b a 
   
 3 + 5λ   λ − 4 
1 λ 1 λ
x  +  + y  +  = (1 + λ )
but given x-intercept = y-intercept a b  b a 
 λ − 1   λ − 1  b + aλ   a + bλ 
i.e.   =  ⇒ x  +y   = (1 + λ )
 3 + 5λ   λ − 4   ab   ab 
1 1 x y
⇒ = ⇒ + =1
3 + 5λ λ − 4  ab (1 + λ )  ab (1 + λ )
   
(λ ≠ 1Qif λ = 1 then line (i) pass through origin)  b + aλ   a + bλ 
∴ λ − 4 = 3 + 5λ
Y
or 4λ = − 7
7
∴ λ=− B
4
Substituting the value of λ in Eq. (i), we get required M(x1,y1)
equation is 23x + 23y = 11.

y Example 74. If t 1 and t 2 are roots of the equation X′ X

O A
t 2 + λt + 1 = 0, where λ is an arbitrary constant. Then Y′
prove that the line joining the points (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and This meets the X-axis at
(at 22 , 2at 2 ) always passes through a fixed point. Also  ab (1 + λ ) 
A≡ , 0
find that point.  b + aλ 
Sol. Qt 1 and t 2 are the roots of the equation t 2 + λt + 1 = 0 and meets the Y-axis at
∴ t 1 + t 2 = − λ and t 1t 2 = 1 ...(i)  ab (1 + λ )
B ≡ 0, 
Equation of the line joining the points (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and  a + bλ 
(at 22 , 2at 2 ) is Let the mid-point of AB is M ( x 1, y1 ), then
2at 2 − 2at 1 ab (1 + λ ) ab (1 + λ )
y − 2at 1 = ( x − at 12 ) x1 = and y1 =
at 22 − at 12 2 (b + aλ ) 2 (a + bλ )
1 1 2 (b + aλ ) 2 (a + bλ )
2 ∴ + = +
⇒ y − 2at 1 = ( x − at 12 ) x 1 y1 ab (1 + λ ) ab (1 + λ )
(t 2 + t 1 )
2
⇒ y (t 1 + t 2 ) − 2at 1t 2 − 2at 12 = 2x − 2at 12 = (b + aλ + a + bλ )
ab (1 + λ )
⇒ y (t 1 + t 2 ) − 2at 1t 2 = 2x
2
⇒ y ( −λ ) − 2a = 2x [from Eq. (i)] = (a + b )(1 + λ )
ab (1 + λ )
y 
or ( x + a) + λ   = 0 ( x 1 + y 1 ) 2 (a + b )
 2 ⇒ =
x 1y1 ab
which is equation of a line passing through the point of
y ⇒ 2x 1y1 (a + b ) = ab ( x 1 + y1 )
intersection of the lines x + a = 0 and = 0.
2 Hence, the locus of mid point of AB is
∴ coordinates of fixed point are ( −a , 0) . 2xy (a + b ) = ab ( x + y ) .
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 113

2β − 11
⇒ = −1
How to Find Circumcentre and 7 (2α − 5)
⇒ 2β − 11 = − 14α + 35
Orthocentre by Slopes ⇒ 14α + 2β = 46
(i) Circumcentre ∴ 7α + β = 23 …(i)
The circumcentre of a triangle is the point of intersection and O ′ E ⊥ CA
of the perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle. It ∴ Slope of O ′ E × Slope of CA = − 1
is the centre of the circle which passes through the 5
β−
vertices of the triangle and so its distance from the ⇒ 2 × −1 − 6 = − 1
vertices of the triangle is the same and this distance is α−
11 5−6
known as the circumradius of the triangle. 2
2β − 5 7
A(x1,y1) ⇒ × = −1
2α − 11 1
⇒ 14 β − 35 = − 2α + 11
∴ 2α + 14 β = 46
F E ∴ α + 7β = 23 ... (ii)
O Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
23
(x2,y2)B C(x3,y3) α =β =
D 8
 23 23
Let O ( x , y ) be the circumcentre. ∴ Circumcentre =  , 
 8 8
If D , E and F are the mid points of BC , CA and AB ∴ Circumradius = O ′ A = O ′ B = O ′ C
respectively and OD ⊥ BC , OE ⊥ CA and OF ⊥ AB
= O ′ C = ( α − 6) 2 + ( β − 6) 2
∴ slope of OD × slope of BC = − 1
2 2
and slope of OE × slope of CA = − 1  23   23 
=  − 6 +  − 6
8  8 
and slope of OF × slope of AB = − 1
2 2
Solving any two, we get ( x , y ).  25  25 25 2
=   +  = units.
 8  8 8
y Example 76. Find the coordinates of the
circumcentre of the triangle whose vertices are (ii) Orthocentre
A ( 5 , − 1), B ( −1, 5) and C (6, 6 ) . Find its radius also. The orthocentre of a triangle is the point of intersection of
Sol. Let circumcentre be O ′ (α, β ) and mid points of sides altitudes.
 5 11  11 5 A
BC , CA and AB are D  ,  , E  ,  and F (2, 2)
2 2   2 2 F
E
respectively. Since O ′ D ⊥ BC .
∴ Slope of O ′ D × slope of BC = − 1 O
11
β−
⇒ 2 × 6−5 = −1
5 6+1
α−
2 B C
D
Y
Here O is the orthocentre since AD ⊥ BC , BE ⊥ CA and
C(6,6)
D CF ⊥ AB, then OA ⊥ BC, OB ⊥ CA, and OC ⊥ AB
(–1,5)B Solving any two we can get coordinates of O.
(α,β) O' E
Remarks
F 1. If any two lines out of three lines i.e. AB, BC and CAare
X′ X perpendicular, then orthocentre is the point of intersection of
O
two perpendicular lines.
A(5,–1)
2. Firstly find the slope of lines BC, CA and AB.
Y′
114 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 77. Find the orthocentre of the triangle Y

0
6=
formed by the lines xy = 0 and x + y = 1.

2y+
Sol. Three sides of the triangle are x = 0, y = 0 and x + y =1. The

3x–
10 , 84
coordinates of the vertices are O (0, 0), A (1, 0) and B (0, 1) . (
A 23 23 )
E
The triangle OAB is a right angled triangle having right F O'

4x
angle at O. Therefore O (0, 0) is the orthocentre. Since we

+
5y
know that the point of intersection of two perpendicular

=
20
lines is the orthocentre of the triangle OAB . X′ X
O
(α,β) B
y Example 78. Find the orthocentre of the triangle ABC D
whose angular points are A (1, 2), B (2, 3) and C (4, 3)..
3−3 Y′ C
Sol. Now, Slope of BC = =0
4 −2
∴ Slope of O ′ A × Slope of BC = − 1
O' 84
−1
⇒ 23 ×m = −1
Y D 10
−1
B(2,3) 23
F C(4,3) 61
⇒ m = −1
E − 13
A(1,2) 13
X′ X ∴ m=
O 61
Y′ Let the vertex B is (α, β ) .
2−3 1 (α, β ) lies on 3x − 2y + 6 = 0
Slope of CA = =
1− 4 3 ∴ 3α − 2β + 6 = 0 …(i)
3−2 and O ′ B ⊥ AC
and Slope of AB = =1
2−1 ∴ Slope of O ′ B × slope of AC = − 1
Let orthocentre be O ′(α, β ) then β − 1  4
× −  = − 1
Slope of O ′ A × slope of BC = − 1 α − 1  5
2−β ⇒ 4β − 4 = 5α − 5
×0= −1
1−α ⇒ 5α − 4β − 1 = 0 ...(ii)
0
⇒ = −1 Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
1−α 33
α = − 13 and β = −
⇒ 1−α =0 2
∴ α =1  33 13
Since, third side passes through  − 13, −  with slope ,
and Slope of OB × slope of CA = − 1  2  61
3−β 1 therefore its equation is
⇒ × = −1
2−α 3 33 13
y+ = ( x + 13)
⇒ 3 − β = 3α − 6 2 61
⇒ 3α + β = 9 ⇒ 122y + 33 × 61 = 26x + 2 × 169
∴ β =6 (Qα = 1) ⇒ 26x − 122y − 1675 = 0
Hence, orthocentre of the given triangle is (1, 6) . Aliter : The equation of line through A. i.e. point of
intersection of AB and AC is
y Example 79. The equations of two sides of a triangle (3x − 2y + 6) + λ ( 4 x + 5y − 20) = 0 ...(i)
are 3x − 2y + 6 = 0 and 4 x + 5y = 20 and the it passes through (1, 1), then
orthocentre is (1, 1). Find the equation of the third side. (3 − 2 + 6) + λ ( 4 + 5 − 20) = 0
Sol. Let 3x − 2y + 6 = 0 and 4 x + 5y = 20 are the equations of the ⇒ 7 − 11λ = 0
sides AB and AC. The point of intersection of AB and AC is 7
∴ λ=
 10 84  11
 ,  . Let slope of BC is m. Since O ′ A ⊥ BC
 23 23 
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 115

7 Since, AD ⊥ BC
From Eq. (i), (3x − 2y + 6) + ( 4 x + 5y − 20) = 0
11 ( 2 − a )  1
∴ − × −  = − 1
⇒ 61x + 13y − 74 = 0 ( 3 − b )  2
61 ⇒ 2 − a = − 6 + 2b
∴ Slope of AD = −
13 ⇒ a + 2b = 8 ...(ii)
13 Similarly, BE ⊥ AC , we get
⇒ Slope of BC =
61 a+b=0 ...(iii)
If coordinates of B (α, β ), B lies on AB Solving Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
∴ 3α − 2β + 6 = 0 ...(ii) b = 8 and a = − 8
and O ′ B ⊥ CA
∴ (a, b ) is ( − 8, 8).
β − 1  4
then × −  = − 1
α − 1  5 y Example 81. If the equations of the sides of a
⇒ 5α − 4β − 1 = 0 ...(iii) triangle are ar x + b r y = 1 ; r = 1 , 2 , 3 and the orthocentre
Solving Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get is the origin, then prove that
α = − 13 and β = −
33 a1a 2 + b1b 2 = a 2a 3 + b 2b 3 = a 3a1 + b 3b1 .
2
Sol. The equation of the line through A, i.e. the point of
∴ Equation of third side i.e. BC is intersection of AB and AC is
33 13 (a 2 x + b 2y − 1) + λ (a 3 x + b 3y − 1) = 0
y+ = ( x + 13) ...(i)
2 61 It passes through (0, 0), then
∴ 26x − 122y − 1675 = 0 A

y Example 80. If the orthocentre of the triangle

formed by the lines 2x + 3y − 1 = 0, x + 2y − 1 = 0, F E

1
3 y=

a2
ax + by − 1 = 0 is at origin, then find (a, b ).

x+
O(0,0)
b
3 x+

2 b
y=
Sol. The equation of a line through A i.e. the point of intersec-
a

1
tion of AB and AC, is
(2x + 3y − 1) + λ (ax + by − 1) = 0 ...(i) B
D C
It passes through O (0, 0) , then a1x+b1y=1
−1− λ =0
−1− λ =0
∴ λ = −1
∴ λ = −1
Y
From Eq. (i), a 2 x + b 2y − 1 − a 3 x − b 3y + 1 = 0
B
∴ (a 2 − a 3 ) x + (b 2 − b 3 ) y = 0
Since, AD ⊥ BC
∴ Slope of AD × slope of BC = − 1
x+
2 y–1 (a 2 − a 3 )  a1 
=0 − × −  = − 1
(b 2 − b 3 )  b1 
X′ X
O
⇒ a1a 2 − a 3a1 = − b1b 2 + b1b 3
2x

–1=0
+

x+by
3y

a
C ⇒ a1a 2 + b1b 2 = a 3a1 + b 3b1
–1

…(ii)
=
0

A Similarly, BE ⊥ CA , then we get

Y′ a1a 2 + b1b 2 = a 2a 3 + b 2b 3 …(iii)
From Eq. (i), From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
2x + 3y − 1 − ax − by + 1 = 0 a1a 2 + b1b 2 = a 2a 3 + b 2b 3 = a 3a1 + b 3b1
⇒ (2 − a ) x + (3 − b ) y = 0
116 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 3

1. The locus of the point of intersection of lines x cos α + y sin α = a and x sin α − y cos α = b (α is a parameter) is
(a) 2 (x 2 + y 2 ) = a 2 + b 2 (b) x 2 − y 2 = a 2 − b 2
(c) x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2 (d) x 2 − y 2 = a 2 + b 2

2. If a, b , c are in AP then ax + by + c = 0 represents

(a) a straight line (b) a family of concurrent lines
(c) a family of parallel lines (d) None of these

3. If the lines x + 2ay + a = 0, x + 3by + b = 0 and x + 4cy + c = 0 are concurrent, then a, b , c are in
(a) AP (b) GP
(c) HP (d) AGP

4. The set of lines ax + by + c = 0, where 3a + 2b + 4c = 0 is concurrent at the point

(a)  ,  (b)  , 
3 1 1 3
 4 2  2 4

(c)  − , −  (d)  − , − 
3 1 1 3
 4 2  2 4

5. If the lines ax + y + 1 = 0, x + by + 1 = 0 and x + y + c = 0, (a, b and c being distinct and different from 1) are
a b c
concurrent, then the value of + + is
a −1 b −1 c −1
(a) −2 (b) −1
(c) 1 (d) 2
a1 b1 c1
6. If u ≡ a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and v ≡ a 2x + b 2y + c2 = 0 and = = , then u + kv = 0 represents
a 2 b 2 c2
(a) u = 0 (b) a family of concurrent lines
(c) a family of parallel lines (d) None of these

7. The straight lines x + 2y − 9 = 0, 3x + 5y − 5 = 0 and ax + by − 1 = 0 are concurrent, if the straight line

35x − 22y + 1 = 0 passes through the point
(a) (a, b ) (b) (b , a )
(c) (a, − b ) (d) (−a, b )

8. If the straight lines x + y − 2 = 0, 2x − y + 1 = 0 and ax + by − c = 0 are concurrent, then the family of lines
2ax + 3by + c = 0 (a, b , c are non-zero) is concurrent at
(b)  ,
1 1
(a) (2, 3) 
2 3
(c)  − ,−  (d)  , − 
1 5 2 7
 6 9  3 5

9. The straight line through the point of intersection of ax + by + c = 0 and a′ x + b ′ y + c′ = 0 are parallel toY-axis
has the equation
(a) x (ab ′ − a ′b ) + (cb ′ − c ′b ) = 0 (b) x (ab ′ + a ′b ) + (cb ′ + c ′b ) = 0
(c) y (ab ′ − a ′b ) + (c ′a − ca ′ ) = 0 (d) y (ab ′ + a ′b ) + (c ′a + ca ′ ) = 0

10. If the equations of three sides of a triangle are x + y = 1, 3x + 5y = 2 and x − y = 0, then the orthocentre of the
triangle lies on the line/lines
(a) 5x − 3y = 1 (b) 5y − 3x = 1
(c) 2x − 3y = 1 (d) 5x − 3y = 2
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 117

11. Find the equation of the line through the intersection of 2x − 3y + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y − 5 = 0 and perpendicular to
6x − 7y + c = 0
(a) 199y + 120x = 125 (b) 199y − 120x = 125
(c) 119x + 102y = 125 (d) 119x − 102y = 125
x y x y 1
12. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines − = m, + = is
a b a b m
(a) a circle (b) an ellipse
(c) a hyperbola (d) a parabola

13. Find the condition on a and b, such that the portion of the line ax + by − 1 = 0, intercepted between the lines
ax + y + 1 = 0 and x + by = 0 subtends a right angled at the origin.
14. If the lines (a − b − c )x + 2ay + 2a = 0, 2bx + (b − c − a )y + 2b = 0 and (2c + 1)x + 2cy + c − a − b = 0 are
concurrent, then prove that either a + b + c = 0 or (a + b + c )2 + 2a = 0.

15. Prove that the lines ax + by + c = 0,bx + cy + a = 0 and cx + ay + b = 0 are concurrent if a + b + c = 0 or

a + bω + c ω 2 = 0 or a + bω 2 + c ω = 0, where ω is a complex cube root of unity.

16. Find the equation of the straight line which passes through the intersection of the lines x − y − 1 = 0 and
2x − 3y + 1 = 0 and is parallel to (i) X-axis (ii) Y-axis ( iii ) 3x + 4y = 14.
17. Let a, b , c be parameters. Then, the equation ax + by + c = 0 will represent a family of straight lines passing
through a fixed-point, if there exists a linear relation between a, b and c.

18. Prove that the family of lines represented by x (1 + λ ) + y (2 − λ ) + 5 = 0, λ being arbitrary, pass through a fixed
point. Also find the fixed point.
 a a
19. Prove that  −a , −  is the orthocentre of the triangle formed by the lines y = m i x + , i = 1, 2, 3; m1, m 2, m 3
 2  mi
being the roots of the equation x 3 − 3x 2 + 2 = 0.
Session 4
Equations of Straight Lines Passing Through a Given Point
and Making a Given Angle with a Given Line, A Line Equally
Inclined With Two Lines, Equation of the Bisectors, Bisector
of the Angle Containing the Origin, Equation of that Bisector
of the Angle Between Two Lines which Contains a Given Point,
How to Distinguish the Acute (Internal) and Obtuse (External)
Angle Bisectors

Equations of Straight Lines ∴ ∠ DQS = ∠ PQR + ∠ RQS = (α + θ )

∴ Equation of line CD is
Passing Through a Given Point y − y 1 = tan (θ + α ) ( x − x 1 ) ...(i)
and Making a Given Angle with and ∠ FRT = ∠ FRB + ∠ BRT
= 180 ° − α + θ
a Given Line = 180 ° + (θ − α )
Theorem : Prove that the equations of the straight lines ∴ Equation of line EF is
which pass through a given point ( x 1 , y 1 ) and make a
y − y 1 = tan (180 ° + θ − α ) ( x − x 1 )
given angle α with the given straight line y = mx + c are
or y − y 1 = tan (θ − α ) ( x − x 1 ) ...(ii)
y − y 1 = tan (θ ± α ) ( x − x 1 )
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
where, m = tan θ.
y − y 1 = tan (θ ± α ) ( x − x 1 )
Proof : Let AB be the given line which makes an angle θ
with X-axis. These are the equations of the two required lines.
∴ m = tan θ y Example 82. Find the equations of the straight lines
Let CD and EF are two required lines which make angle α passing through the point (2 , 3) and inclined at π / 4
with the given line. Let these lines meet the given line AB radians to the line 2x + 3y = 5 .
at Q and R respectively Sol. Let the line 2x + 3y = 5 make an angle θ with positive
Y X -axis.
F D 2
Then tanθ = −
P(x1,y1) 3
π 2
(180°– α)
Now tan θ ⋅ tan = − × 1
B 4 3
α θ
T
α
2
θ
R = − ≠ ±1
Q
S E 3
X′ θ X
O Slopes of required lines are
A
C  π  π
tan θ +  and tan θ − 
Y′  4  4
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 119

 π  2 ⇒ (2 + 3 ) x − y = 1 + 2 3
tan θ + tan   −  + 1
 π  4  3 1 Hence, equations of other sides are
∴ tan θ +  = = =
 4  π  2 5 (2 − 3 ) x − y = 1 − 2 3
1 − tan θ tan   1 −  −  (1)
 4  3
and (2 + 3 ) x − y = 1 + 2 3
 π
tan θ − tan  
 π  4 y Example 84. The straight lines 3x + 4 y = 5 and
and tan θ −  =
 4   π
1 + tan θ tan   4 x − 3y = 15 intersect at a point A. On these lines, the
 4
points B and C are chosen so that AB = AC . Find the
 2 possible equations of the line BC passing through the
−  − 1
 3 point (1, 2) .
= = −5
 2 Sol. Clearly ∠ BAC = 90°
1 +  −  ( 1)
 3
Q AB = AC
∴ Equations of required lines are
∴ ∠ ABC = ∠ BCA = 45°
1
y − 3 = ( x − 2) and y − 3 = − 5 ( x − 2) α = 45°
5
3
i.e. x − 5y + 13 = 0 and 5x + y − 13 = 0 Q Slope of 3x + 4y = 5 is −
4
y Example 83. A vertex of an equilateral triangle is 3
Let tanθ = −
(2 , 3) and the opposite side is x + y = 2 . Find the 4
equations of the other sides. So, possible equations of BC are given by
y − 2 = tan (θ ± α ) ( x − 1)
Sol. Let A (2, 3) be one vertex and x + y = 2 be the opposite side
of an equilateral triangle. Clearly remaining two sides pass Y
3x (1,2)
through the point A (2, 3) and make an angle 60° with +
x +y =2 4y
=
5
Q Slope of x + y = 2 is −1
B
Y
Q A(2,3) X′ X
O 45°
B 60°
A(3,–1)
60°
45°
C C
x+
y=

15
2

X′ X
O
y=
Y′ P –3
4x
Let tanθ = − 1 Y′
∴ θ = 135°
∴ Equations of the other two sides are  tan θ ± tan α 
⇒ y −2=   ( x − 1)
y − 3 = tan (135° ± 60° ) ( x − 2)  1 m tan θ tan α 
i.e. sides are  
3
y − 3 = tan (195° ) ( x − 2) (taking ‘+’ sign)  − ±1 
⇒ y − 3 = tan (180° + 15° ) ( x − 2) ⇒ y −2=  4  ( x − 1)
  3 
⇒ y − 3 = tan 15° ( x − 2)  1 m  −  ( 1) 
 4 
⇒ y − 3 = ( 2 − 3 ) ( x − 2)
 −3 ± 4 
⇒ (2 − 3 ) x − y = 1 − 2 3 ⇒ y −2=   ( x − 1)
 4 m ( − 3) 
and y − 3 = tan (75° ) ( x − 2)
1
(taking ‘−’ sign) ⇒ y −2= ( x − 1) (taking upper sign)
⇒ y − 3 = cot 15° ( x − 2) 4 − ( − 3)

⇒ y − 3 = ( 2 + 3 ) ( x − 2) or x − 7y + 13 = 0
120 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

( −3 − 4 ) y Example 85. Find the equations to the straight lines

and y −2= ( x − 1) (taking below sign)
( 4 + ( −3)) passing through the point (2 , 3) and equally inclined to
or 7x + y − 9 = 0 the lines 3x − 4 y − 7 = 0 and 12x − 5y + 6 = 0.
Hence, possible equation of the line BC are x − 7y + 13 = 0 Sol. Let m be the slope of the required line. Then its equation is
and 7 x + y − 9 = 0 y − 3 = m ( x − 2) ...(i)
It is given that line (i) is equally inclined to the lines
3x − 4y − 7 = 0 and 12x − 5y + 6 = 0 then
A Line Equally Inclined with  3   12 
 −m   −m 
Two Lines ⇒  4
1 + 3 m
 = − 5 
 1 + 12 m 
 4   5 
Theorem : If two lines with slopes m 1 and m 2 be equally
 3 
inclined to a line with slope m, then  slope of 3x − 4y − 7 = 0 is 
 4 
 m1 − m   m2 − m  12
 and slope of 12x − 5y + 6 = 0 is 
  =−   5
 1 + mm 1   1 + mm 2 
 3 − 4m   12 − 5m 
Proof : Let be two lines of slopes m 1 and m 2 intersecting ⇒   =− 
 4 + 3m   5 + 12m 
at a point P.
Let ∠ CPA = ∠ BPC = θ ⇒ (3 − 4m ) (5 + 12m ) + ( 4 + 3m ) (12 − 5m ) = 0
⇒ 63m 2 − 32m − 63 = 0
B
⇒ ( 7m − 9 ) ( 9m + 7 ) = 0
9 7
∴ m= ,−
C 7 9
m2 Putting these values of m in Eq. (i) we obtain the equations
m of required lines as 9 x − 7y + 3 = 0 and x + 9y − 41 = 0.
A
θ y Example 86. Two equal sides of an isosceles triangle
θ m1
are given by the equations 7 x − y + 3 = 0 and
P x + y − 3 = 0 and its third side passes through the
point (1, − 10) . Determine the equation of the third
 m − m1  side.
∴ tan ( ∠ CPA ) =  
 1 + mm 1  Sol. Let m be the slope of BC. Since AB = AC .
 m − m1  Therefore BC makes equal angles with AB and AC.
or tan θ =   (Qm > m 1 ) ...(i)
 1 + mm 1  Y
A
 m −m 
and tan ( ∠ BPC ) =  2 
 1 +m 2m  X′ X
O
x+

 m −m 
y–

tan θ =  2 (Qm 2 > m ) … (ii)

0

or 
3=
+3=

 1 + m 2m 
0
7x–y

θ
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get C

 m − m1   m2 − m   m1 − m   m2 − m  θ D(1,–10)
  =  or   =−  B
 1 + mm 1   1 + m 2m   1 + mm 1   1 + mm 2  Y′

7 −m  −1−m 
Remarks Then   =− 
1. The above equation gives two values of m which are the slopes  1 + 7m   1 + ( − 1) m 
of the lines parallel to the bisectors of the angles between the ⇒ ( 7 − m ) ( 1 − m ) − ( 1 + 7m ) ( 1 + m ) = 0
two given lines.
⇒ 6m 2 + 16m − 6 = 0
2. Sign of m in both brackets is same.
⇒ 3m 2 + 8m − 3 = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 121

⇒ (3m − 1) (m + 3) = 0 y Example 87. Find the equations of the bisectors of

⇒
1
m = , −3 the angles between the straight lines 3x − 4 y + 7 = 0
3 and 12x + 5y − 2 = 0.
Equation of third side BC is y + 10 = m ( x − 1) Sol. The equations of the bisectors of the angles between
1 3x − 4y + 7 = 0 and 12x + 5y − 2 = 0 are
i.e. y + 10 = ( x − 1) and y + 10 = − 3 ( x − 1)
3 ( 3x − 4y + 7 ) (12x + 5y − 2)
=±
or x − 3y − 31 = 0 and 3x + y + 7 = 0
( 3) 2 + ( − 4 ) 2 (12)2 + (5)2
( 3x − 4y + 7 ) (12x + 5y − 2)
or =±
Equation of the Bisectors or
5 13
(39 x − 52y + 91) = ± (60x + 25y − 10)
Theorem : Prove that the equation of the bisectors of the Taking the positive sign, we get
angles between the lines 21x + 77y − 101 = 0
a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0 as one bisector.
Taking the negative sign, we get 99 x − 77y + 81 = 0
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a x + b 2 y + c 2 )
are given by =± 2 as the second bisector.
(a 1 + b 1 )
2 2
(a 22 + b 22 )
Proof : Let the given lines be AA ′ and BB ′ whose
equations are
Bisector of the Angle Containing
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(i) the Origin
and a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 = 0 ...(ii)
Let equations of lines be
Since bisectors of the angles between the two lines are the
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(i)
locus of a point which moves in a plane such that whose
distance from two lines are equal. a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 = 0 ...(ii)
where c 1 and c 2 are positive.
Y
C
B A Let P ( x , y ) be taken on the bisector of the angle which
P(x,y) contains the origin.
L M Y B C A 0
a2x+b2y+c2=0 P P a1x+b1y+c1=0
a 2x

c1 =

X X
+b

D′
1 y+

D
2

X X
y+

+b

PP
c2

X′ X
a1 x
=0

O PP
D¢ X X
P(x,y) D
X X
B′ PP
A′ C′ X¢ X
Y′ O

Let CC ′ and DD ′ be the two bisectors of the angle between

the lines AA′ and BB′. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on CC ′, then B¢
Y¢ A¢ C¢'
Length of the perpendicular from P on AA′
= length of the perpendicular from P on BB ′ (i) Let P ( x , y ) lies on DD ′ ,then either O (0, 0 ) and P ( x , y )
| a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 | | a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 | will lie on the same side of the two lines Eqs. (i) and (ii),
∴ =
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 ) then
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) >0
or =± 0 + 0 + c1
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 ) a 2 x + b 2y + c 2
and >0
These are the required equations of the bisectors. 0 + 0 + c2
Note or a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 > 0
The two bisectors are perpendicular to each other. and a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 > 0 (Qc 1 , c 2 > 0 )
122 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

If the origin O (0, 0 ) and P ( x , y ) lie on the opposite side of ∴ The equation of the bisector bisecting the angle
the two lines Eqs. (i) and (ii), then containing origin is
( − 4 x − 3y + 6) (5x + 12y + 9 )
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 =
< 0 and <0 ( − 4 2 ) + ( − 3) 2 (5)2 + (12)2
0 + 0 + c1 0 + 0 + c2
a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 < 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 < 0  − 4 x − 3y + 6  5x + 12y + 9 
or ⇒   = 
 5   13 
(Qc 1 , c 2 > 0 )
Then equation of bisectors will be ⇒ − 52x − 39y + 78 = 25x + 60y + 45
| a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 | | a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 | ⇒ 77 x + 99y − 33 = 0 or 7 x + 9y − 3 = 0
= and the equation of the bisector bisecting the angle not
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 ) containing origin is
( − 4 x − 3y + 6) (5x + 12y + 9 )
Case I : If a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 > 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 > 0 =−
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) ( − 4 ) + ( − 3) )
2 2
(52 ) + (12)2
then =
 − 4 x − 3y + 6  5x + 12y + 9 
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 ) ⇒   =− 
 5   13 
Case II : If a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 < 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 < 0 ⇒ − 52x − 39y + 78 = − 25x − 60y − 45
(a x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a x + b 2 y + c 2 ) ⇒ 27 x − 21y − 123 = 0 or 9 x − 7y − 41 = 0
then − 1 =− 2
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )

i.e.
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 )
=
(a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) Equation of that Bisector of the
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
Thus is both cases equation of the bisector containing the
Angle between Two Lines which
origin, when c 1 and c 2 are positive is Contains a Given Point
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 )
= Let the equations of the two lines be
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(i)
and equation of the bisector of the angle between the lines and a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 = 0 ...(ii)
a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0
The equation of the bisector of the angle between the two
which does not contain the origin when c 1 and c 2 are lines containing the points (h, k ) will be
positive is (a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 )
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) =
=− (a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 )
or =−
Working Rule :
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
(i) First re-write the equations of the two lines so that
their constant terms are positive. according as a 1 h + b 1 k + c 1 and a 2 h + b 2 k + c 2 are of the
same sign or opposite sign.
(ii) The bisector of the angle containing the origin and
does not containing the origin, then taking +ve y Example 89. Find the bisector of the angle between
and – ve sign in the lines 2x + y − 6 = 0 and 2x − 4 y + 7 = 0 which
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 ) contains the point (1, 2).
=± respectively.
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 ) Sol. Value of 2x + y − 6 at (1, 2) is – 2 (negative)
and value of 2x − 4y + 7 at (1, 2) is 1 (positive)
y Example 88. Find the equations of angular bisector i.e. opposite sign.
bisecting the angle containing the origin and not ∴ Equation of bisector containing the point (1, 2) is
containing the origin of the lines 4 x + 3y − 6 = 0 and ( 2x + y − 6) ( 2x − 4y + 7 )
=−
5x + 12y + 9 = 0 . (2 + 1 )
2 2
( 2) 2 + ( − 4 ) 2
Sol. Firstly make the constant terms (c 1, c 2 ) positive, then ⇒ 2 ( 2x + y − 6) + ( 2x − 4y + 7 ) = 0
− 4 x − 3y + 6 = 0 and 5x + 12y + 9 = 0 or 6x − 2y − 5 = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 123

(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a 2 x `+ b 2 y + c 2 )
How to Distinguish the Acute (a 12 + b 12 )
=±
(a 22 + b 22 )
(Internal) and Obtuse (External) Conditions Acute angle bisector Obtuse angle bisector

Angle Bisectors? a1a 2 + b1b 2 > 0

a1a 2 + b1b 2 < 0
–
+
+
–
Let the equations of the two lines be Remarks
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(i) 1. Bisectors are perpendiculars to each other.
and a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 = 0 ...(ii) 2. `+' sign gives the bisector of the angle containing origin.
3. If a1a2 + b1b2 > 0 then the origin lies in obtuse angle and if
where, c 1 > 0, c 2 > 0. a1a2 + b1b2 < 0, then the origin lies in acute angle.
Q Equations of bisectors are Explanation : Equations of given lines in normal form
(a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) (a x + b 2 y + c 2 ) will be respectively
=± 2 ...(iii)
a1 x b 1y c1
(a 1 + b 1 )
2 2
(a 22 + b 22 ) − − = ( Qc 1 > 0 )
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 12 + b 12 ) (a 12 + b 12 )
when Eq. (iii) be simplified, let the bisectors be
p 1 x + q 1 y + r1 = 0 ...(iv) a2 x b 2y c2
and − − = ( Qc 2 > 0 )
and p 2 x + q 2 y + r2 = 0 ...(v) (a 22 + b 22 ) (a 22 + b 22 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
Since the two bisectors are at right angles, the angle α a1 b1
If cos α = − then sin α = −
between the acute (internal ) bisector and any one of the (a 12 + b 12 ) (a 12 + b 12 )
given lines must lie between 0 and 45° i.e. 0 < α < 45 °.
a2 b2
∴ 0 < tan α < 1 and cos β = − then sin β = −
If m 1 and m 2 are the slopes of Eqs. (i) and (iii) respectively. (a 22 + b 22 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
a p Now, cos (α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β
Then, m 1 = − 1 and m 2 = − 1 (a 1 a 2 + b 1 b 2 )
b1 q1 =
(a 1 + b 12 ) (a 22 + b 22 )
2
m − m2 
∴ tan α = 1 
cos (α − β) > 0 or < 0
1 + m 1 m 2
according as (α − β) is acute or obtuse.
  a1   p1   i.e. a 1 a 2 + b 1 b 2 > 0 or < 0
  − b  −  − q   a q − b p 
=
1 1 1 1 Hence, bisector of the angle between the lines will be
= 1 1
 a   p 
1 +  − 1   − 1  1 1 b q + a 1 p 1 the bisector of the acute or obtuse angle according as
origin lies in the acute or obtuse angle according as
  b 1   q 1  a 1 a 2 + b 1 b 2 < 0 or >0.
Hence, if 0 < tan α < 1, p 1 x + q 1 y + r1 = 0 is the acute
(internal) bisector and if tan α > 1, p 2 x + q 2 y + r2 = 0 is the y Example 90. Find the equation of the bisector of
obtuse (external ) bisector. the obtuse angle between the lines 3x − 4 y + 7 = 0 and
12x + 5y − 2 = 0.

Shortcut Method for finding Acute Sol. Firstly make the constant terms (c 1, c 2 ) positive
3x − 4y + 7 = 0 and − 12x − 5y + 2 = 0
(Internal) and Obtuse (External) Angle Q a1a 2 + b1b 2 = (3) ( − 12) + ( − 4 ) ( − 5) = − 36 + 20 = − 16
Bisectors ∴ a1a 2 + b1b 2 < 0
Let the equations of the two lines be Hence “−” sign gives the obtuse bisector.
∴ Obtuse bisector is
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ( 3x − 4y + 7 ) ( − 12x − 5y + 2)
a 2 x + b 2y + c 2 = 0 =−
( 3) 2 + ( − 4 ) 2 ( − 12)2 + ( − 5)2
Taking c 1 > 0, c 2 > 0 and a 1 b 2 ≠ a 2 b 1
⇒ 13 (3x − 4y + 7 ) = − 5 ( − 12x − 5y + 2)
Then equations of the bisectors are ⇒ 21x + 77y − 101 = 0 is the obtuse angle bisector.
124 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 91. Find the bisector of acute angle Q a1a 2 + b1b 2 = ( − 1) ( − 7 ) + ( − 1) (1) = 6 > 0
between the lines x + y − 3 = 0 and 7 x − y + 5 = 0. ∴ Acute or internal bisector is
Sol. Firstly, make the constant terms (c 1, c 2 ) positive then ( − x − y + 1) ( − 7 x + y + 15)
=−
− x − y + 3 = 0 and 7 x − y + 5 = 0 ( − 1) + ( − 1)
2 2
( − 7 ) 2 + ( 1) 2
Q a1a 2 + b1b 2 = ( − 1) (7 ) + ( − 1) ( − 1) = − 7 + 1 = − 6 ( − x − y + 1) ( − 7 x + y + 15)
i.e. a1a 2 + b1b 2 < 0 ⇒ =−
2 5 2
Hence “+” sign gives the acute bisector.
⇒ − 5x − 5y + 5 = 7 x − y − 15
− x −y +3 7x − y + 5
∴ Acute bisector is =+ or 12x + 4y − 20 = 0
( − 1) + ( − 1)
2 2
( 7 ) 2 + ( − 1) 2 or 3x + y − 5 = 0 ...(iv)
− x − y + 3 7x − y + 5 Internal bisector of BC and CA :
⇒ =
2 5 2 − 7 x + y + 15 = 0
⇒ − 5x − 5y + 15 = 7 x − y + 5 − x +y +1=0
∴ 12x + 4y − 10 = 0 or 6x + 2y − 5 = 0 Q a1a 2 + b1b 2 = ( −7 )( −1) + (1) (1) = 8 > 0
is the acute angle bisector. Q Acute or internal bisector is
( − 7 x + y + 15) ( − x + y + 1)
y Example 92. Find the coordinates of incentre of the =−
( − 7 ) + ( 1)
2 2
( − 1) 2 + ( 1) 2
triangle. The equation of whose sides are
− 7 x + y + 15 ( x − y − 1)
AB : x + y − 1 = 0,BC : 7 x − y − 15 = 0 ⇒ =
5 2 2
and CA : x − y − 1 = 0.
⇒ − 7 x + y + 15 = 5x − 5y − 5
Sol. Firstly, make the constant terms (c 1, c 2 , and c 3 ) positive
or 12x − 6y − 20 = 0
i.e. AB : − x − y + 1 = 0 ...(i) or 6x − 3y − 10 = 0 ...(v)
BC : − 7 x + y + 15 = 0 ...(ii) Finally, solve Eqs. (iv) and (v), we get
CA : − x + y + 1 = 0 ...(iii) 5
Q The incentre of triangle is the point of intersection of x = and y = 0
3
internal or acute angle bisectors.
5 
Internal bisector of AB and BC : Hence coordinates of incentre are  , 0 .
3 
− x −y +1=0
− 7 x + y + 15 = 0

Exercise for Session 4

1. The straight lines 2x + 11y − 5 = 0, 24x + 7y − 20 = 0 and 4x − 3y − 2 = 0
(a) form a triangle
(b) are only concurrent
(c) are concurrent with one line bisecting the angle between the other two
(d) None of the above

2. The line x + 3y − 2 = 0 bisects the angle between a pair of straight lines of which one has the equation
x − 7y + 5 = 0. The equation of other line is
(a) 3x + 3y − 1 = 0 (b) x − 3y + 2 = 0 (c) 5x + 5y + 3 = 0 (d) 5x + 5y − 3 = 0

3. P is a point on either of the two lines y − 3 | x | = 2 at a distance of 5 units from their point of intersection. The
coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular from P on the bisector of the angle between them are
 4 + 5 3  4 − 5 3
(a)  0,  or  0,  depending on which the point P is taken
 2   2 
 4 + 5 3  4 − 5 3  5 5 3
(b)  0,  (c)  0,  (d)  , 
 2   2  2 2 
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 125

4. In a triangle ABC, the bisectors of angles B and C lie along the lines x = y andy = 0 . If A is (1, 2), then the
equation of line BC is
(a) 2x + y = 1 (b) 3x − y = 5 (c) x − 2y = 3 (d) x + 3y = 1

5. In ∆ABC, the coordinates of the vertex A are (4, −1) and lines x − y − 1 = 0 and 2x − y = 3 are the internal
bisecters of angles B and C. Then, the radius of the incircle of triangle ABC is
5 3 6 7
(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 5 5 5

6. The equation of the straight line which bisects the intercepts made by the axes on the lines x + y = 2 and
2x + 3y = 6 is
(a) 2x = 3 (b) y = 1 (c) 2y = 3 (d) x = 1

7. The equation of the bisector of the acute angle between the lines 2x − y + 4 = 0 and x − 2y = 1 is
(a) x + y + 5 = 0 (b) x − y + 1 = 0 (c) x − y = 5 (d) x − y + 5 = 0

8. The equation of the bisector of that angle between the lines x + y = 3 and 2x − y = 2 which contains the point
(1, 1) is
(a) ( 5 − 2 2 )x + ( 5 + 2 )y = 3 5 − 2 2 (b) ( 5 + 2 2 ) x + ( 5 − 2 )y = 3 5 + 2 2
(c) 3x = 10 (d) 3x − 5y + 2 = 0

9. Find the equations of the two straight lines through (7, 9) and making an angle of 60° with the line
x − 3y − 2 3 = 0.

10. Equation of the base of an equilateral triangle is 3x + 4y = 9 and its vertex is at the point (1, 2). Find the
equations of the other sides and the length of each side of the triangle.
11. Find the coordinates of those points on the line 3x + 2y = 5 which are equidistant from the lines 4x + 3y − 7 = 0
and 2y − 5 = 0.

12. Two sides of rhombus ABCD are parallel to the lines y = x + 2 and y = 7x + 3. If the diagonal of the rhombus
intersect at the point (1, 2) and the vertex A lies on Y-axis, find the possible coordinates of A.

13. The bisector of two lines L1 and L2 are given by 3x 2 − 8xy − 3y 2 + 10x + 20y − 25 = 0. If the line L1 passes
through origin, find the equation of line L2.
14. Find the equation of the bisector of the angle between the lines x + 2y − 11 = 0 and 3x − 6y − 5 = 0 which
contains the point (1, –3).

15. Find the equation of the bisector of the angle between the lines 2x − 3y − 5 = 0 and 6x − 4y + 7 = 0 which is the
supplement of the angle containing the point (2, –1).
Session 5
The Foot of Perpendicular Drawn from the
Point (x1, y1) to the Line ax + by + c = 0, Image or
Reflection of a Point (x1, y1) about a Line Mirror,
Image or Reflection of a Point In Different Cases,
Use of Image or Reflection

The Foot of Perpendicular Aliter II : Let the coordinates of M are ( x 2 , y 2 )

PM ⊥ RS
Drawn from the Point ( x 1 , y 1 ) Q
ax + by + c = 0
to the Line ax + by + c = 0
and M lies on
i.e. ax 2 + by 2 + c = 0 ...(iii)
Let P ≡ ( x 1 , y 1 ) and let M be the foot of perpendicular  y2 − y1   a 
and   × −  = − 1 ( Q PM ⊥ RS )
drawn from P on ax + by + c = 0.  x2 − x1   b
In order to find the coordinates of M, find the equation of x2 − x1 y2 − y1
the line PM which is perpendicular to RS and passes or =
a b
through P ( x 1 , y 1 ), i.e. bx − ay = bx 1 − ay 1
x 2 − x 1 y 2 − y 1 a( x 2 − x 1 ) + b(y 2 − y 1 )
or b( x − x 1 ) − a(y − y 1 ) = 0 and solving it with or = =
a b (a 2 + b 2 )
ax + by + c = 0, then we get coordinates of M.
)
(By ratio proportion method)
,y 1
P(x 1 (ax 2 + by 2 ) − (ax 1 + by 1 )
=
a2 + b2
− c − (ax 1 + by 1 )
= [from Eq. (iii)]
S a2 + b2
c =0
b y+ x2 − x1 y2 − y1 (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
ax+ or = =−
M a b (a 2 + b 2 )

R y Example 93. Find the coordinates of the foot of the

perpendicular drawn from the point (2, 3) to the line
Aliter I : Let the coordinates of M are ( x 2 , y 2 ) then
y = 3x + 4.
M ( x 2 , y 2 ) lies on ax + by + c = 0
Sol. Given line is
⇒ ax 2 + by 2 + c = 0 ...(i)
3x − y + 4 = 0 ...(i)
and Q PM ⊥ RS Let Eq. P ≡ (2, 3).
then (Slope of PM ) ( Slope of RS ) = − 1 Let, M be the foot of perpendicular drawn from P on RS.
 y2 − y1   a  Then equation of PM passes through P (2, 3) and
⇒   × −  = − 1 perpendicular to RS is
 x2 − x1   b
x + 3y − (2 + 3 × 3) = 0
or bx 2 − ay 2 = bx 1 − ay 1 ...(ii) i.e. x + 3y − 11 = 0 ...(ii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get ( x 2 , y 2 ).
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 127

Y )
,y 1
S P(x 1
S

(x2,y2)M =0
+c
by
P(2,3) M ax+
+4
y=3x

R y 2)
x 2,
Q(
X′ X
O
 x + x2 y1 + y2 
i.e. M ≡ 1 , 
R  2 2 
Y′ Aliter I : Ratio Proportion Method :
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Q PQ ⊥ RS
1 37 ∴ ( Slope of PQ ) × ( Slope of RS) = − 1
x = − ,y =
10 10  y2 − y1   a 
 1 37 
or   × −  = − 1
∴ M ≡ − ,   x2 − x1   b
 10 10 
( x 2 − x 1 ) (y 2 − y 1 )
Aliter I : Let the coordinates of M be ( x 2 , y 2 ) then or =
M ( x 2 , y 2 ) lies on 3x − y + 4 = 0 a b
⇒ 3x 2 − y 2 + 4 = 0 …(iii) x 2 − x 1 y 2 − y 1 a( x 2 − x 1 ) + b(y 2 − y 1 )
or = =
and Q PM ⊥ RS a b a2 + b2
∴ ( Slope of PM ) × ( Slope of RS ) = − 1 a(2 x − x 1 − x 1 ) + b(2y − y 1 − y 1 )
 y 2 − 3 =
⇒   × ( 3) = − 1 a2 + b2
 x 2 − 2
Q M ( x , y ) is mid-point of P and Q 
or x 2 + 3y 2 − 11 = 0 ...(iv)  
Solving Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get ∴ x 2 = 2 x − x 1 and y 2 = 2y − y 1 
1
x2 = − , y2 =
37 − 2ax 1 − 2by 1 + 2 (ax + by )
10 10 =
a2 + b2
 1 37 
∴ M ≡ − ,  − 2ax 1 − 2by 1 + 2( − c )
 10 10  = (Qax + by = − c )
Aliter II : By Ratio Proportion Method : a2 + b2
x 2 − 2 y 2 − 3 − (3 × 2 − 3 + 4 ) − 2(ax 1 + by 1 + c )
= = =
3 −1 32 + ( − 1) 2 (a 2 + b 2 )
x2 − 2 y2 − 3 7 x2 − x1 y2 − y1 2 (ax 1 + by 1 + c )
⇒ = =− i.e. = =−
3 −1 10 a b (a 2 + b 2 )
1 37
x2 = − and y 2 = Aliter II : By Distance form or Symmetric form or
10 10
parametric form :
 1 37 
∴ M ≡ − ,  a
 10 10  Q Slope of RS = −
b
b
∴ Slope of PQ =
Image or Reflection of a Point a

( x1 , y1 ) About a Line Mirror (a2+b 2)

b
Let Q ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) be the image of P ≡ ( x 1 , y 1 ) then find
coordinates of the foot of perpendicular M drawn from the θ
point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) on RS and use fact that M is the mid- point a
P and Q .
128 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

b Aliter II :
Let tan θ =
a By distance form or Symmetric form or Parametric
b form : Let, P ≡ ( 4, − 13) and Q be the image of P with
∴ sin θ = respect to line mirror (RS) 5x + y + 6 = 0
(a + b 2 )
2
Q Slope of RS = − 5
a
and cos θ =
(a 2 + b 2 ) 26
1
Put the equation of the mirror line such that the
coefficient of y becomes negative. θ
5
Suppose if b >0
1
then ax + by + c = 0 ∴ Slope of PQ = = tanθ
5
becomes − ax − by − c = 0 1 5
∴ sinθ = and cosθ =
and p = PM = Directed distance from P ( x 1 , y 1 ) on 26 26
− ax − by − c = 0 ( i.e. p +ve or –ve) Now, put the equation of the mirror line such that the
 − ax − by − c  coefficient of y becomes negative.
= 1 1  Then, 5x + y + 6 = 0 becomes − 5x − y − 6 = 0 and
 (a + b 2 ) 
2
 p = ⊥ Directed distance from P ( 4, − 13) on
( − 5x − y − 6 = 0)
 − ax − by − c  − 5 × 4 + 13 − 6
PQ = 2 PM = 2 p = 2   =r 13
∴ 1 1
= =−
 (a + b ) 
2 2 ( − 5) + ( − 1)
2 2 26

26
⇒ Required image has the coordinates ∴ PQ = r = 2p = − = − 26
26
( x 1 + r cos θ, y 1 + r sin θ ) .
Hence, required image has the coordinates
y Example 94. Find the image of the point (4, − 13) Q ≡ ( 4 − 26 cos θ, − 13 − 26 sin θ )
with respect to the line mirror 5x + y + 6 = 0.  5 1 
i.e.  4 − 26 × , − 13 − 26 × 
Sol. Let, P ≡ ( 4, − 13) and Let, Q ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) be mirror image P  26 26 
with respect to line mirror 5x + y + 6 = 0. i.e. ( 4 − 5, − 13 − 1)
Let, M (α, β ) be the foot of perpendicular from P ( 4, − 13) on Hence, Q ≡ ( − 1, − 14 )
the line mirror 5x + y + 6 = 0, then
α − 4 β + 13 − (5 × 4 − 13 + 6)
= =
5 1 52 + 12 Image or Reflection of a Point
α − 4 β + 13 1
or
5
=
1
=−
2 in Different Cases
 3 27 
∴ M ≡ ,−  (i) The image or reflection of a point with
2 2
respect to X -a xis
Q M is the mid-point of P and Q, then
 3  27   Let P(α, β) be any point and Q ( x , y ) be its image about
Q ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) ≡ 2 × − 4, 2 ×  −  + 13
 2  2  X-axis, then ( M is the mid-point of P and Q )
i.e. Q ≡ ( − 1, − 14 ) Y
Aliter I :
By Ratio Proportion Method : Let, Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) the image P(α,β)
of P ( 4, − 13) with respect to line mirror 5x + y + 6 = 0, then
x 2 − 4 y 2 + 13 2(5 × 4 − 13 + 6) X′ X
= =− = −1 O M
5 1 52 + 12
or x 2 − 4 = − 5 and y 2 + 13 = − 1 Q(x,y)
∴ x 2 = − 1 and y 2 = − 14
Y′
Hence Q ≡ ( − 1, − 14 ) .
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 129

x = α and y = − β Y

∴ Q ≡ (α, − β) M
(α,β)P Q(x,y)
i.e. sign change of ordinate.

Remark X′ X
O
The image of the line ax + by + c = 0 about X-axis is x=a
ax − by + c = 0
Y′
(ii) The image or reflection of a point with
respect to Y-axis Let P (α, β) be any point and Q ( x , y ) be its image
about the line x = a, then y = β
Let P (α, β) be any point and Q ( x , y ) be its image about
Y-axis, then ( M is the mid-point of PQ ) ∴ Coordinates of M are (a, β)
Y Q M is the mid-point of PQ
∴ Q ≡ (2a − α, β)
(x,y)Q P(α,β)
M
Remark
The image of the line ax + by + c = 0 about the line x = λ is
X′ X a ( 2λ − x ) + by + c = 0
O
(v) The image or reflection of a point with
Y′
respect to the line y = b
x = − α and y = β Let P (α, β) be any point and Q ( x , y ) be its image about
the line y =b, then x = α
∴ Q ≡ ( − α, β )
Y Q(x,y)
i.e. sign change of abscissae.
M y=b
Remark
The image of the line ax + by + c = 0 about Y-axis is
− ax + by + c = 0
P(α,β)
X′ X
(iii) The image or reflection of a point with O
respect to origin Y′
Let P (α, β) be any point and Q ( x , y ) be its image about ∴ Co-ordinates of M are (α, b )
the origin (O is the mid point of PQ ), then
Y Q M is the mid-point of PQ ∴ Q ≡ (α, 2b − β)
P(α,β)
Remark
The image of the line ax + by + c = 0 about the line y = µ is
ax + b ( 2µ − y ) + c = 0.
X′ X
O
(vi) The image or reflection of a point with
respect to the line y = x
Q(x,y) Y′ Let P (α, β) be any point and Q ( x 1 , y 1 ) be its image about
the line y = x ( RS ), then PQ ⊥ RS
x = − α and y = − β Y
S
∴ Q ≡ ( − α, − β ) P(α,β) x
y=
i.e. sign change of abscissae and ordinate.
M
Remark
Q(x1,y1)
The image of the line ax + by + c = 0 about origin is
− ax − by + c = 0.
X′ X
O
(iv) The image or reflection of a point with respect R
to the line x = a Y′
130 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

∴ ( Slope of PQ ) × ( Slope of RS ) = −1 x 1 = α and y1 = − β ...(i)

y1 − β Now, let P2 ( x 2 ,y 2 ) be the image of P1( x 1, y1 ) in the Y-axis.
or ×1= −1 Then
x1 −α
Y
or x1 − α = β − y1 ...(i) P(α,β)
and mid--point of PQ lie on y = x
y1 + β  x 1 + α 
i.e.   =  X' X
 2   2  O

or x1 + α = β + y1 ...(ii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get x 1 = β and y 1 = α P2 (x2,y2) P1(x1,y1)
Y'
∴ Q ≡ (β, α ) i.e. interchange of x and y.
x 2 = − x 1, y 2 = y1
Remark ⇒ x 2 = − α, y 2 = − β [from Eq. (i)] ...(ii)
The image of the line ax + by + c = 0 about the line y = x is further let P3 ( x 3 , y 3 ) be the image of P (α, β ) in the origin
ay + bx + c = 0. O. Then
(vii) The image or reflection of a point with x 3 = − α, y 3 = − β …(iii)
respect to the line y = x tan θ From Eqs. (ii) and (iii) ,we get
x 3 = x 2 and y 3 = y 2 .
Let P (α, β) be any point and Q ( x 1 , y 1 ) be its image about Hence the image of P2 of P after successive reflection in
the line y = x tan θ ( RS ), then PQ ⊥ RS their X-axis and Y-axis is the same as the single reflection
∴ ( Slope of PQ ) × ( Slope of RS ) = − 1 of P in the origin.
y1 − β y Example 96. Find the image of the point ( − 2 , − 7 )
or × tan θ = − 1
x1 −α
under the transformations ( x , y ) → ( x − 2y , − 3x + y ).
⇒ y 1 − β = (α − x 1 ) cot θ ...(i) Sol. Let ( x 1, y1 ) be the image of the point ( x , y ) under the given
and mid-point of PQ lie on y = x tan θ transformation. Then
y1 + β  x 1 + α  x 1 = x − 2y = ( − 2) − 2 ( − 7 ) = 12
i.e.   =  tan θ ∴ x 1 = 12 and y1 = − 3x + y = − 3 ( − 2) − 7 = − 1
 2   2 
∴ y1 = − 1
Y
Hence, the image is (12, − 1).
S
nθ
(α,β)P
=x
ta y Example 97. The image of the point A(1, 2) by the line
y
M
mirror y = x is the point B and the image of B by the
line mirror y = 0 is the point (α , β) . Find α and β.
θ Q(x1,y1) Sol. Let ( x 1, y1 ) be the image of the point (1, 2) about the line
X′ X
O
R y = x.
Y′
Then x 1 = 2, y 1 = 1 ...(i)
or y 1 + β = ( x 1 + α ) tan θ …(ii)
Y
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
A(1,2)
x 1 = α cos 2θ + β sin 2θ
x
y=

and y 1 = α sin 2θ − β cos 2θ

∴ Q ≡ (α cos 2θ + β sin 2θ, α sin 2θ − β cos 2θ )
B(x1,y1)
y Example 95. The point P (α , β) undergoes a reflection
X′ X
O
in the X-axis followed by a reflection in the Y -axis. (α,β)
Y′
Show that their combined effect is the same as the
single reflection of P (α , β) in the origin when α , β > 0. Also given image of B( x 1, y1 ) by the line mirror y = 0 is
(α, β ). Then α = x 1 = 2
Sol. Let P1 ( x 1, y1 ) be the image of (α, β ) after reflection in the
and β = − y1 = − 1 [from Eq. (i)]
X -axis. Then
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 131

Hence, α = 2 and β = − 1
Aliter (Use of complex number) :
y Example 98. The point (4, 1) undergoes the following Let Q be the reflection of P ( 4, 1) about the line y = x , then
three transformations successively : Q ≡ (1, 4 )
(i) Reflection about the line y = x . QQ move 2 units along the +ve direction of X-axis, if new
point is ,R then R ≡ (3, 4 ) .
(ii) Translation through a distance 2 units along the
If R(3, 4 ) = R(z1 )
positive direction of X-axis.
when z1 = ( 3 + 4i )
(iii) Rotation through an angle π / 4 about the origin in
then R ′ ( x , y ) = R ′ (z 2 )
the anticlockwise direction.  π
∴ z 2 = z1e iπ / 4 Q ∠ROR ′ = 
Then, find the coordinates of the final position.  4
Sol. Let Q ( x 1, y1 ) be the reflection of P about the line y = x .  π π
= (3 + 4i )  cos + i sin 
Then  4 4
x 1 = 1
  1 i   1 7i 
y 1 = 4 = ( 3 + 4i )  +  = − + 
 2 2  2 2
∴ Coordinates of Q is (1, 4).  1 7 
Hence, new coordinates are  − , .
Given that Q move 2 units along the positive direction of  2 2
X-axis.
Y
R'
(1,4)Q
R(3,4) y=x
Use of Image or Reflection
5 To make problems simpler and easier use Image or
5
π/4 reflection.
P(4,1)
θ Types of problems : (i) If vertex of a ∆ ABC and
X′ X equations of perpendicular bisectors of AB and AC are
O
given, then B and C are the images or reflections of A
Y′
about the perpendicular bisectors of AB and AC
∴ Coordinates of R is ( x 1 + 2, y1 ) (where M and N are the mid-points of AB and AC ).
or R ( 3, 4 ) A
If OR makes an angle θ , then
4
tan θ =
3
4 3
∴ sin θ = and cos θ = M
N
5 5
π
After rotation of let new position of R is R′ and
4
B C
OR = OR ′ = 32 + 4 2 = 5
∴ OR′ makes an angle ( π / 4 + θ ) with X-axis. y Example 99. The base of a triangle passes through a
 π  π  fixed point ( f , g ) and its sides are respectively bisected
Coordinates of R ′ OR ′ cos  + θ , OR ′ sin  + θ 
 4  4  at right angles by the lines y + x = 0 and y − 9 x = 0.
  1 1  Determine the locus of its vertex.
i.e. R ′ OR ′  cos θ − sin θ ,
  2 2  Sol. Let A ≡ (α, β ) the image of A (α, β ) about y + x = 0 is B,
 1 1  then B ≡ ( − β, − α ) and if image of A (α, β ) about y − 9 x = 0
OR′ sin  cos θ + sin θ  is C ( x 2 , y 2 ), then
 2 2 
x 2 − α y 2 − β −2(β − 9α )
  3 4   3 4  = =
⇒ R′ 5  − ,5  +  −9 1 1 + 81

 5 2 5 2   5 2 5 2
9 β − 40 α 40 β + 9 α
 1 7  ∴ x2 = and y 2 =
⇒ R′  − ,  41 41
 2 2
132 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

 9β − 40α 40β + 9α  h − 3 k + 1 − 2 (3 + 4 + 10)

∴ C ≡ ,  then = = = −2
 41 41  1 −4 12 + ( − 4 ) 2
Y i.e. h = 1, k = 7
C
∴ L ≡ (1, 7 )
A(α,β) Q F be the mid-point of AB.

0
y–9x= Y

X′ X C L(1,7)
O
y+
x=
0 B/2 B (10,5)
(f,g)D B/2

E
F(13/2,2)
B Y′ X′ X
O
A(3,–1)
Hence, B, D , C are collinear, then
Y′
 
 −β −α 1
1 Let F ≡ ( α, β )
 f g 1 = 0
2 then B ≡ (2α − 3, 2β + 1)
9β − 40α 40β + 9α 1
 Q B lie on BE, then
 41 41  (2α − 3) − 4 (2β + 1) + 10 = 0
⇒ 4 ( α 2 + β 2 ) + ( 4 g + 5 f ) α + ( 4 f − 5g ) β = 0 i.e. 2α − 8β + 3 = 0 ...(i)
Hence, locus of vertex is and F lie on CF, then
4 ( x 2 + y 2 ) + ( 4 g + 5 f ) x + ( 4 f − 5g ) y = 0 6α + 10β − 59 = 0 ...(ii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
(ii) The images or reflections of vertex A of a ∆ ABC
13
about the angular bisectors of angles B and C lie on α = ,β = 2
2
the side BC. (By congruence) A1 and A2 are the
 13 
images of A about the angle bisectors BE and CF then F ≡  , 2
2 
respectively, where M and N are the mid-points of
AA1 and AA2 . and B = (10, 5)
A Equation of AB is
2+1
y +1= ( x − 3)
13
−3
E 2
F M 6
N ⇒ y + 1 = ( x − 3)
7
B/2 C/2 or 6x − 7y − 25 = 0
B/2 C/2
B C Equation of BC is
A2 A1
7 −5
y −5= ( x − 10)
1 − 10
y Example 100. Find the equations of the sides of the
2
triangle having ( 3 , − 1) as a vertex, x − 4 y + 10 = 0 and ⇒ y −5 = − ( x − 10)
9
6 x + 10y − 59 = 0 being the equations of an angle
bisector and a median respectively drawn from or 2x + 9y − 65 = 0
different vertices. Q CA is the family of lines of CB and CF
then (2x + 9y − 65) + λ (6x + 10y − 59 ) = 0 ...(iii)
Sol. Let BE be the angle bisector and CF be the median. Given
equations of BE and CF are x − 4y + 10 = 0 and it pass through A (3, − 1)
6x + 10y − 59 = 0 respectively. then (6 − 9 − 65) + λ (18 − 10 − 59 ) = 0
Since, image of A with respect to BE lie on BC . If image of 4
∴ λ=−
A is L (h , k ). 3
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 133

From Eq. (iii), we get equation of AC is (b) Maximization : Let A and B are two given points on
18x + 13y − 41 = 0 the same side of ax + by + c = 0. Suppose we want to
determine a point P on ax + by + c = 0 such that
(iii) Optimization (Minimization or Maximization) | PA − PB | is maximum, then find the equation of line
(a) Minimization : Let A and B are two given points on AB wherever it intersects ax + by + c = 0 is the
the same side of ax + by + c = 0. Suppose we want to required point.
determine a point P on ax + by + c = 0 such that A
PA + PB is minimum. Then find the image of A or B B
about the line ax + by + c = 0 (say A′ or B ′ ) then join
P
B ′ with A or A′ with B wherever it intersects 0
ax + by + c = 0 is the required point. y+c=
ax+b
A
c =0 Remark
B ax+by+
By triangle inequality
P B' Difference of two sides of a triangle < Third side
i.e. |PA − PB| = | AB| (maximum value)

y Example 102. Find a point P on the line

3x + 2y + 10 = 0 such that |PA − PB| is maximum where
A' A is (4, 2) and B is (2, 4).
∴ PA + PB = PA + PB ′ Sol. Let, L ( x , y ) = 3x + 2y + 10
or PA + PB = PA ′ + PB ∴ L ( 4, 2) = 12 + 4 + 10 = 26
and L (2, 4 ) = 6 + 8 + 10 = 24
Remark ∴ A and B lie on the same side of the line
By triangle in equality 3x + 2y + 10 = 0 ...(i)
Sum of two sides of a triangle > Third side Equation of line AB is
i.e.|PA + PB| = |PA + PB′| = | AB′| (minimum value). 4 −2
y −2= (x − 4)
y Example 101. Find a point R on the X-axis such that 2− 4
PR + RQ is the minimum, when P ≡ (1, 1) and Q ≡ ( 3, 2) . or x +y−6=0 ...(ii)
Sol. Since P and Q lie on the same side of X-axis. This line Eq. (ii) meets Eq. (i) at P ≡ ( − 22, 28) which is the
required point.
The image of Q (3, 2) about X -axis is Q ′ (3, − 2) then the
equation of line PQ ′ is Aliter
−2−1 Let P be ( x 1, y1 ) and ∠ APB = θ
y −1= ( x − 1)
3−1 ( PA )2 + ( PB )2 − ( AB )2
then cos θ =
⇒ 3x + 2y − 5 = 0 2PA ⋅ PB
Y Y B
Q (3,2)
P (1,1)

A
θ
X′ X
O R
P (x1,y1)
X′ X
O

Q' (3,–2) Y′
Y′
5 
This line meets X-axis at R  , 0 which is the required
point. 3 
134 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

since cos θ ≤ 1 i.e. P lies on the line AB as well as on the given line.
( PA )2 + ( PB )2 − ( AB )2 ∴ Equation of AB is P
⇒ ≤1
2PA ⋅ PB 4 −2
y −2= (x − 4)
2− 4
⇒ ( PA − PB )2 ≤ ( AB )2 B
⇒ y −2= − x + 4
⇒ | PA − PB | ≤ | AB|
⇒ x +y =6 ...(i)
⇒ | PA − PB | ≤ 2 2
and given line
Maximum value of | PA − PB | is 2 2 3x + 2y + 10 = 0 ...(ii)
when, θ = 0. Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get P ( − 22, 28). A

Exercise for Session 5

1. The coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular from (2, 3) to the line 3x + 4y − 6 = 0 are

(a)  − , −  (b)  ,− 
14 27 14 17
 25 25   25 25 

(c)  −
14 17 
(d)  , 
14 27
, 
 25 25   25 25 

2. If the foot of the perpendicular from the origin to a straight line is at the point (3, − 4). Then the equation of the
line is
(a) 3x − 4y = 25 (b) 3x − 4y + 25 = 0
(c) 4x + 3y − 25 = 0 (d) 4x − 3y + 25 = 0
a
3. The coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular from (a, 0) on the line y = mx + are
m
(a)  0,−  (b)  0,  (c)  0, −  (d)  0, 
1 a a 1
 a  m  m  a

4. If the equation of the locus of a point equidistant from the points (a1, b1) and (a 2, b 2 ) is
(a1 − a 2 ) x + (b1 − b 2 ) y + c = 0, then the value of c is
(a) a12 − a22 + b12 − b 22 (b) (a12 + b12 − a22 − b 22
1 2 1 2
(c) (a1 + a22 + b12 + b 22 ) (d) (a2 + b 22 − a12 − b12 )
2 2

5. The image of the point (3, 8) in the line x + 3y = 7 is

(a) (1, 4) (b) (4, 1) (c) (−1, − 4) (d) (−4, − 1)

6. The image of the point (4, –3) with respect to the line y = x is
(a) (−4, − 3) (b) (3, 4) (c) (−4, 3) (d) (−3, 4)

7. The coordinates of the image of the origin O with respect to the straight line x + y + 1 = 0 are

(a)  − , − 
1 1
(b) (−2, − 2)
 2 2
(c) (1, 1) (d) (−1, − 1)

8. If ( −2, 6) is the image of the point (4, 2) with respect to the line L = 0, then L ≡
(a) 6x − 4y − 7 = 0 (b) 2x − 3y − 5 = 0
(c) 3x − 2y + 5 = 0 (d) 3x − 2y + 10 = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 135

9. The image of P (a, b ) on the line y = − x is Q and the image of Q on the line y = x is R. Then the mid-point of
PR is
a + b b + 2
(a) (a + b , a + b ) (b)  , 
 2 2 
(c) (a − b , b − a ) (d) (0, 0)

10. The nearest point on the line 3x − 4y = 25 from the origin is

(a) (3, 4) (b) (3, − 4) (c) (3, 5) (d) (−3, 5)

11. Consider the points A (0, 1) and B (2, 0), P be a point on the line 4x + 3y + 9 = 0. The coordinates of P such that
| PA − PB | is maximum are
(a)  − ,  (b)  − ,  (c)  − , 
12 17 84 13 6 17
(d) (0, − 3)
 5 5  5 5  5 5

12. Consider the points A (3, 4) and B (7, 13). If P is a point on the line y = x such that PA + PB is minimum, then the
coordinates of P are
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  (c)  , 
12 12 13 13 31 31
(d) (0, 0)
 7 7  7 7  7 7

13. The image of a point P(2, 3) in the line mirror y = x is the point Q and the image of Q in the line mirror y = 0 is
the point R( x , y ). Find the coordinates of R.

14. The equations of perpendicular bisector of the sides AB and AC of a ∆ ABC are x − y + 5 = 0 and x + 2y = 0
respectively. If the point A is (1, –2), find the equation of line BC.

15. In a ∆ ABC, the equation of the perpendicular bisector of AC is 3x − 2y + 8 = 0. If the coordinates of the point A
and B are (1, − 1) and (3, 1) respectively, find the equation of the line BC and the centre of the circumcircle of
∆ ABC.
16. Is there a real value of λ for which the image of the point ( λ , λ − 1) by the line mirror 3x + y = 6λ is the point
( λ2 + 1, λ ) ? If so find λ.
Session 6
Reflection of Light, Refraction of Light, Conditions of
Collinearity if Three Given Points be in Cyclic Order

Reflection of Light 3x − 2y − 5 = 0
∴ x = 1, y = − 1
When a ray of light falls on a smooth polished surface ∴ Coordinates of P are (1, − 1).
(Mirror) separating two media, a part of it is reflected back
Y
into the first medium. R
Normal A'
ence

N
n

I N R
lectio
incid

of ref

O A(3,0)
X′ X
of
Inc

ay

x
dr
Angle
Angle
ide

c te
nt

x P(1,–1)
fle
ray

i r
Re

=0
Point of incidence
0

5
=

y–
y–3
x–2

–2
I

3x
P Reflecting surface
Y′
IP is the incident ray and PR is the reflected ray. A
perpendicular drawn to the surface, at the point of Let slope of reflected ray be m.
incidence P is called the normal. Hence PN is the normal. Since, slope of line mirror is 3/2.
The angle between the incident ray and the normal ∴ Slope of PN = − 2 / 3 and
( ∠ IPN ) is called the angle of incidence which is slope of IP = 1 / 2, line PN is equally inclined to IP and PR,
represented by ∠ i then
i.e. ∠ IPN = ∠i = Angle of incidence and the angle   2   1  2 
between the reflected ray and the normal ( ∠ IPR ) is called  m − −    − −  
 3  3
  =− 2 
the angle of reflection which is represented by ∠r.   2   1  2 
 1 + m −
   1 + −
 
i.e. ∠ IPR = ∠ r = Angle of reflection.   3   2  3 
3m + 2 7
Laws of Reflection : ⇒ =−
3 − 2m 4
(i) The incident ray, normal and the reflected ray to a ⇒ 12m + 8 = − 21 + 14m
surface at the point of incidence all lie in the same ∴ 2m = 29
plane. 29
⇒ m=
(ii) The angle of incidence = angle of reflection 2
i.e. ∠i = ∠r ∴ Equation of reflected ray y + 1 =
29
( x − 1)
2
y Example 103. A ray of light is sent along the line ⇒ 2y + 2 = 29 x − 29
x − 2y − 3 = 0. Upon reaching the line 3x − 2y − 5 = 0, ⇒ 29 x − 2y − 31 = 0.
the ray is reflected from it. Find the equation of the Aliter (Image method) : Take A (3, 0) be any point on IP
line containing the reflected ray. and if A ′ (α, β ) be the image of A about the mirror line
Sol. To get coordinates of point P, we solve the given equation 3x − 2y − 5 = 0, then
of lines together as α − 3 β − 0 − 2 ( 9 − 0 − 5)
= =
x − 2y − 3 = 0 3 −2 9+4
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 137

15 16
∴ α= and β =
13 13 Refraction of Light
 15 16
∴ A′ ≡  , 
 13 13 When a ray of light falls on the boundary separating the
∴ Equation of A ′ P is the equation of the reflected ray then
two transparent media, there is a change in direction of
its equation is, ray. This phenomenon is called refraction.
 16 
 + 1

Normal
 13 

In
y +1= ( x − 1)

ci
de
 15  Angle of incidence

nt
 − 1

r
 13 

ay
i
Medium 1
29
⇒ y +1= ( x − 1) or 29 x − 2y − 31 = 0 Medium 2 Boundary
2
Deviation

Refr
y Example 104. A light beam, emanating from the point r

actio
(3, 10) reflects from the straight line 2x + y − 6 = 0 and, Angle of refraction

n ra
then passes through the point (7, 2). Find the

y
equations of the incident and reflected beams.
Sol. Let images of A and B about the line 2x + y − 6 = 0 are Laws of Refraction
A ′ (α, β ) and B′( γ , δ ) respectively.
(i) The incident ray, normal and the refracted ray to the
α − 3 β − 10 − 2 (6 + 10 − 6)
Then, = = surface separating the two transparent media all lie in
2 1 22 + 12 the same plane.
= −4 (ii) The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine of
∴ α = − 5, β = 6 the angle of refraction is constant for the two given
i.e. A ′ ≡ ( − 5, 6) media. The constant is called the refractive index of
Y
medium 2 with respect to medium 1.
A(3,10)
sin i
i.e. 1 µ2 =
(–5,6)A' sin r

P y Example 105. A ray of light is sent along the line

x − 6 y = 8. After refracting across the line x + y = 1 it
B(7,2) enters the opposite side after turning by 15° away from
X′
O
X the line x + y = 1. Find the equation of the line along
which the refracted ray travels.
2x+

(–1,–2)B'
y–6

Sol. The point of intersection of x − 6y = 8 and x + y = 1 is

=

A ≡ (2, − 1). Let the required ray have the slope = m, then
0

Y′ Y
γ − 7 δ − 2 − 2 (14 + 2 − 6)
and = = =−4
2 1 22 + 12
∴ γ = − 1, δ = − 2
i.e. B′ ≡ ( − 1, − 2).
X′ X
∴ Equation of incident ray AB′ is O
15°
10 + 2 A
y +2= ( x + 1) or 3x − y + 1 = 0 (2,–1) m
3+1 8
x–6y=
and equation of reflected ray A ′ B is
x+
y=

2−6
1

y −6= ( x + 5) Y′
7 +5
m − 1
1
⇒ y − 6 = − ( x + 5) tan 15° = 6
3  m
1+
or x + 3y − 13 = 0  6
138 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

 6m − 1 Then lf (t ) + m g(t ) + n = 0 ...(i)

⇒ 2− 3 = ±  
 m +6 where, t = a, b , c
6m − 1 i.e. a, b, c are the roots of the Eq. (i).
then, = 2 − 3 or 3 − 2
m +6
In this case Eq. (i) must be cubic in t.
70 − 37 3
⇒ m= At 3 + Bt 2 + Ct + D = 0 (say)
13
37 3 − 70 B C
or m= then a +b +c = −
, ab + bc + ca =
61 A A
Let the angle between x + y = 1 and the line through D
and abc = −
70 − 37 3 A
A(2, − 1) with the slope be α, then
13 which are the required conditions.
70 − 37 3 
 − ( − 1) y Example 106. If the points
83 − 37 3
tan α = 13  =   a 3 a 2 − 3  b 3 b 2 − 3  c 3 c 2 − 3
 1 −  70 − 37 3   37 3 − 57  , ,  ,  and  ,  are
  13   a − 1 a − 1  b − 1 b − 1  c − 1 c − 1 
83 − 37 3 collinear for three distinct values a, b , c and different
= from 1, then show that
37 3 − 57
abc − (bc + ca + ab ) + 3 (a + b + c ) = 0.
and if angle between x + y = 1 and the line through
37 3 − 70 Sol. Let the three given points lie on the line
A (2, − 1) with the slope be β, then
61 lx + my + n = 0, where l , m and n are constants.
37 3 − 70   t3   t 2 − 3
Then, l   +m   +n =0
 − ( − 1)  t − 1  t −1
 37 3 − 9 
tan β = 61  = 
1 −  37 3 − 70   131 − 37 3 ⇒ lt 3 + mt 2 + nt − (3m + n ) = 0

  61  for t = a, b, c
37 3 − 9 i.e. a, b, c are the roots of
=
131 − 37 3 lt 3 + mt 2 + nt − 3m − n = 0
Here tan α > tan β, ∴α > β m n
then a+b+c = − , ab + bc + ca =
70 − 37 3 l l
therefore the slope of the refracted ray =
13  3m + n 
∴ The equation of the refracted ray is and abc =  
 l 
(70 − 37 3 )
y +1= ( x − 2) Now, abc − (bc + ca + ab ) + 3 (a + b + c )
13
 3m + n  n 3m
⇒ 13y + 13 = (70 − 37 3 ) x − 140 + 74 3 =  − − =0
 l  l l
or (70 − 37 3 ) x − 13y − 153 + 74 3 = 0 Hence, abc − (bc + ca + ab ) + 3 (a + b + c ) = 0

y Example 107. If t 1 , t 2 and t 3 are distinct, the points

Conditions of Collinearity if (t 1 , 2at 1 + at 13 ), (t 2 , 2at 2 + at 23 ) and (t 3 , 2at 3 + at 33 ) are
collinear, then prove that t 1 + t 2 + t 3 = 0.
Three given points are in Sol. Let the three given points lie on the line lx + my + n = 0,
Cyclic Order where l, m and n are constants. Then,
l (t ) + m (2at + at 3 ) + n = 0
Let the three given points
⇒ (am ) t 3 + (2am + l ) t + n = 0 ...(i)
A ≡ ( f (a ), g(a )), B ≡ ( f (b ), g(b ))
for t = t 1, t 2 , t 3
and C ≡ ( f (c ), g(c )) lie on the line i .e ., t 1, t 2 , t 3 are the roots of Eq. (i), then
lx + my + n = 0, where l, m and n are constants. t1 + t 2 + t 3 = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 139

Exercise for Session 6

1. A ray of light passing through the point (1, 2) is reflected on the X-axis at a point P and passes through the
point (5, 3). The abscissae of the point P is
13 13 13
(a) 3 (b) (c) (d)
3 5 4

2. The equation of the line segment AB is y = x . If A and B lie on the same side of the line mirror 2x − y = 1, then
the image of AB has the equation
(a) x + y = 2 (b) 8x + y = 9 (c) 7x − y = 6 (d) None of these

3. A ray of light travelling along the line x + y = 1is incident on the X-axis and after refraction it enters the other
side of the X-axis by turning π / 6 away from the X-axis. The equation of the line along which the refracted ray
travels is
(a) x + (2 − 3) y = 1 (b) x (2 + 3 ) + y = 2 + 3
(c) (2 − 3 )x + y = 1 (d) x + (2 + 3)y = (2 + 3 )

4. All the points lying inside the triangle formed by the points (0, 4), (2, 5) and (6, 2) satisfy
(a) 3x + 2y + 8 ≥ 0 (b) 2x + y − 10 ≥ 0
(c) 2x − 3y − 11≥ 0 (d) −2x + y − 3 ≥ 0

5. Let O be the origin and let A(1, 0), B(0, 1) be two points. If P ( x , y ) is a point such that xy > 0 and x + y < 1then
(a) P lies either inside in ∆OAB or in third quadrant (b) P cannot be inside in ∆OAB
(c) P lies inside the ∆OAB (d) None of these

6. A ray of light coming along the line 3x + 4y − 5 = 0 gets reflected from the line ax + by − 1 = 0 and goes along
the line 5x − 12y − 10 = 0 then
64 112 64 8
(a) a = ,b = (b) a = − ,b =
115 15 115 115
64 8 64 −8
(c) a = ,b = (d) a = − ,b =
115 115 115 115

7. Two sides of a triangle have the joint equation x 2 − 2xy − 3y 2 + 8y − 4 = 0. The third side, which is variable,
always passes through the point ( −5,−1). Find the range of values of the slope of the third side, so that the origin
is an interior point of the triangle.

8. Determine the range of values of θ ∈[0, 2π ] for which (cos θ, sin θ ) lies inside the triangle formed by the lines
x + y − 2 = 0, x − y − 1 = 0 and 6x + 2y − 10 = 0.
 3   3
9. Let P(sin θ, cos θ ), where 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π be a point and let OAB be a triangle with vertices (0, 0),  , 0 and 0, .
 2   2
Find θ if P lies inside the ∆ OAB.

10. Find all values of θ for which the point (sin2 θ, sin θ ) lies inside the square formed by the line xy = 0 and
4xy − 2x − 2y + 1 = 0.
11. Determine whether the point ( −3, 2) lies inside or outside the triangle whose sides are given by the equations
x + y − 4 = 0, 3x − 7y + 8 = 0, 4x − y − 31 = 0.
12. A ray of light is sent along the line x − 2y + 5 = 0, upon reaching the line 3x − 2y + 7 = 0, the ray is reflected
from it. Find the equation of the line containing the reflected ray.
140 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember

1. Area of parallelogram formed by the lines 6. If A ≡ ( x1, y1 ), B ≡ ( x2 , y2 ) and C ≡ ( x3 , y3 ) are the vertices of
a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0, a2 x + b2 y + d1 = 0, a1 x + b1 y + c 2 = 0 and a ∆ ABC then the equations of medians AD, BE and CF are
a2 x + b2 y + d 2 = 0 is y ( x2 + x3 − 2 x1 ) − x ( y2 + y3 − 2 y1 )
| c1 − c 2 ||d1 − d 2 | = y1 ( x2 + x3 ) − x1 ( y2 + y3 );
a1 b1
| | y ( x3 + x1 − 2 x2 ) − x ( y3 + y1 − 2 y2 )
a2 b2
= y2 ( x3 + x1 ) − x2 ( y3 + y1 )
2. Area of parallelogram formed by the lines and y ( x1 + x2 − 2 x3 ) − x ( y1 + y2 − 2 y3 ) = y3 ( x1 + x2 )
y = m1 x + c1, y = m2 x + d1, y = m1 x + c 2 and y = m2 x + d 2 − x3 ( y1 + y2 ) respectively.
is A
| c1 − c 2 ||d1 − d 2 |
| m1 − m2 |
E
3. If A ≡ ( x1, y1 ), B ≡ ( x2 , y2 ) and C ≡ ( x3 , y3 ) are the vertices of F
G
a ∆ ABC, then angle A is acute or obtuse according as
( x1 − x2 ) ( x1 − x3 ) + ( y1 − y2 ) ( y1 − y3 ) > 0 or <0
Similarly, for ∠ B
B D C
( x2 − x3 ) ( x2 − x1 ) + ( y2 − y3 ) ( y2 − y1 ) > 0 or <0
and for ∠ C Where, G is the centroid of ∆ ABC.
( x3 − x1 ) ( x3 − x2 ) + ( y3 − y1 ) ( y3 − y2 ) > 0 or <0 7. If A ≡ ( x1, y1 ), B ≡ ( x2 , y2 ) and C ≡ ( x3 , y3 ) are the vertices of
4. If the origin lies in the acute angle or obtuse angle a ∆ ABC then the equations of the altitudes AL, BM and
between the lines CN are
a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0 y ( y2 − y3 ) + x ( x2 − x3 ) = y1 ( y2 − y3 ) + x1 ( x2 − x3 );
and a2 x + b2 y + c 2 = 0 y ( y3 − y1 ) + x ( x3 − x1 ) = y2 ( y3 − y1 ) + x2 ( x3 − x1 )
according as (a1a2 + b1b2 ) c1c 2 < 0 or > 0. A
5. If A ≡ ( x1, y1 ), B ≡ ( x2 , y2 ) and C ≡ ( x3 , y3 ) are the vertices of M
a ∆ ABC then the equations of the right bisectors N
(perpendicular bisectors) of the sides BC, CA and AB are O

 x 2 − x32   y22 − y32 

y ( y2 − y3 ) + x ( x 2 − x 3 ) =  2  + ;
 2   2 

A
B C
L

and y ( y1 − y2 ) + x ( x1 − x2 ) = y3 ( x1 − x2 ) + x3 ( x1 − x2 )
respectively. Where O is the orthocentre of ∆ ABC.
8. If sides of a triangle ABC are represented by
O
BC : a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0,
CA : a2 x + b2 y + c 2 = 0
B C
and AB : a3 x + b3 y + c 3 = 0
 x32 − x12   y32 − y12  then | BC|:|CA|:| AB|
y ( y3 − y1 ) + x ( x3 − x1 ) =   + 
 2   2  a2 b2
= (a12 + b12 ) | |
a3 b3
 x 2 − x22   y12 − y22 
and y ( y1 − y2 ) + x ( x1 − x2 ) =  1  +  a3 b3 a1 b1
 2   2  : (a22 + b22 )| |: (a32 + b32 )| |
a1 b1 a2 b2
respectively. Where O is the circumcentre of ∆ ABC.
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 10 multiple choice examples. Each or ( λ2 + 2 λ + 1 ) x + λy − 2 λ2 − 2 = 0
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which or ( λ2 + 1 )( x − 2 ) + λ (2 x + y ) = 0
ONLY ONE is correct.
∴ For fixed point
x − 2 = 0 and 2 x + y = 0
l Ex. 1 A rectangle ABCD has its side AB parallel to y = x
∴ Fixed point is (2, − 4 )
and vertices A, B and D lie on y =1, x = 2 and x = − 2 ∴ Equation of required line is y + 4 = 2( x − 2 )
respectively, then locus of vertex C is or y = 2x − 8
(a) x = 5 (b) x − y = 5
(c) y = 5 (d) x + y = 5 l Ex. 3 A man starts from the point P ( −3, 4 ) and reaches
Sol. (c) Since AB is parallel to y = x. point Q(0, 1) touching X-axis at R such that PR + RQ is
∴ Equation of AB is y = x + a (say) minimum, then the point R is
Q A lies on y = 1 3   3   2 
(a)  , 0 (b)  − , 0 (c)  − , 0 (d) ( −2, 0)
∴ A ≡ (1 − a, 1 ) 5   5   5 
C Sol. (b) Let R = (α , 0 )
Y For PR + PQ to be minimum it should be the path of light and
y=x thus we have
B P(–3, 4)
D

Q(0, 1)

y=1
A
q q X
X¢ X A R B
O (–3, 0) (0, 0)
(a, 0)
x=–2 x=2
∆APR ~ ∆BQR
Y¢
AR PA α+3 4 3
⇒ = ⇒ = ⇒α=−
Again, B lies on x = 2 RB QB 0 −α 1 5
∴ B = (2, 2 + a )  3 
⇒ Hence, R ≡  − , 0
Equation of AD is  5 
y − 1 = − [ x − (1 − a )] or y = 2 − x − a
Q D lies on x = − 2 l Ex. 4 If the point P (a , a 2 ) lies inside the triangle formed
∴ D ≡ ( −2, 4 − a ) by the lines x = 0, y = 0 and x + y = 2, then exhaustive range
Let C ≡ (h, k ) of ‘a’ is
Q Diagonals of rectangle bisects to each other
(a) (0, 1) (b) (1, 2 )
∴ h + 1 −a =2 −2 ⇒ a =1 + h
and k + 1 =2 + a + 4 −a (c) ( 2 − 1, 1) (d) ( 2 − 1, 2)
⇒ k =5 Sol. (a) Since the point P (a, a ) lies on y = x 2
2

∴ Locus of C is y = 5 Solving, y = x2
and x + y = 2, we get
l Ex. 2 The line ( λ + 1) 2 x + λy − 2 λ 2 − 2 = 0 passes x2 + x − 2 = 0
through a point regardless of the value λ. Which of the ⇒ ( x + 2 )( x − 1 ) = 0
following is the line with slope 2 passing through the point? ⇒ x = − 2, 1
(a) y = 2x − 8 (b) y = 2x − 5 It is clear from figure,
(c) y = 2x − 4 (d) y = 2x + 8 A ≡ (1, 1 )
Sol. (a) also a > 0 for I quadrant.
Q ( λ + 1 ) 2 x + λy − 2 λ2 − 2 = 0 ∴ a ∈( 0, 1 )
142 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

l Ex. 5 If 5a + 4b + 20c = t , then the value of t for which the l Ex. 8 Through the point P(α, β), when αβ > 0, the straight
line ax + by + c − 1 = 0 always passes through a fixed point is x y
line + =1 is drawn so as to form with
(a) 0 (b) 20 a b
(c) 30 (d) None of these coordinate axes a triangle of area ∆ . If ab > 0, then the least
Sol. (b) Equation of line
ax
+
by
+ 1 = 0 has two independent value of ∆ is
c −1 c −1 (a) αβ (b) 2αβ
parameters. It can pass through a fixed point if it contains (c) 4αβ (d) 8αβ
only one independent parameter. Now there must be one Sol. (b) Given line is
a b
relation between and independent of a, b and c so x y
c −1 c −1 + =1 …(i)
a b
a b
that can be expressed in terms of and straight line ∴ A ≡ (a, 0 ), B ≡ ( 0, b )
c −1 c −1
contains only one independent parameter. Now that given Y
5a 4b t − 20c
relation can be expressed as + = . B(0, b)
c −1 c −1 c −1
RHS is independent of c if t = 20. P(a, b)

l Ex. 6 If the straight lines, ax + amy + 1 = 0,

bx + (m + 1)by + 1 = 0 and cx + (m + 2 )cy + 1 = 0, m ≠ 0 are X¢ X
Y¢ A(a, 0)
concurrent, then a , b, c are in
(a) AP only for m = 1 (b) AP for all m Q Area of ( ∆AOB ) = ∆
(c) GP for all m (d) HP for all m 1
∴ | ab| = ∆ ⇒ ab = 2 ∆ (Qab > 0)
Sol. (d) The three lines are concurrent if 2
a am 1 Since, the line (i) passes through the point P(α , β ).
b m + 1 1 = 0 α β α aβ  2∆ 
  ∴ + =1 ⇒ + =1 Q b = 
c (m + 2 )c 1 a b a 2∆  a
Applying C 2 → C 2 − mC1, then ⇒ α 2β − 2a∆ + 2 ∆α = 0
a 0 1 Qa is real
b b 1 = 0 ∴ D≥0
 
c 2c 1 ⇒ 4 ∆2 − 4β (2 ∆α ) ≥ 0 or ∆ ≥ 2αβ
or a(b − 2c ) − 0 + 1(2bc − bc ) = 0 ∴ Least value of ∆ is 2αβ.
2ac
or b = , which is independent of m .
a+c l Ex. 9 The coordinates of the point P on the line
∴ a, b, c are in HP for all m. 2 x + 3y + 1 = 0, such that | PA − PB | is maximum,
where A is (2, 0) and B is (0, 2) is
l Ex. 7 If a ray travelling the line x =1 gets reflected the (a) (5, − 3 ) (b) (7, − 5)
line x + y =1, then the equation of the line along which the (c) ( 9, − 7 ) (d) (11, − 9)
reflected ray travels is Sol. (b) | PA − PB| ≤ | AB |
(a) y = 0 (b) x − y = 1 Maximum value of | PA − PB | is | AB |, which is possible only
(c) x = 0 (d) None of these when P , A, B are collinear
Sol. (a) Reflected ray is X-axis. if P ( x, y ), then equation AB is
x y
Y + =1
x=1 2 2
(0, 1)
⇒ x + y =2 …(i)
45° Now solving Eq. (i)
45° and 2 x + 3y + 1 = 0 …(ii)
X
O Then, we get,
(1, 0) x+y=1
x = 7, y = − 5
∴ P ≡ (7, − 5 )
∴ Equation y = 0
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 143

l Ex. 10 Equation of the straight line which belongs to the The line of this family which is farthest from ( 4, − 3 ) is the line
through (1, 1) and perpendicular to the line joining (1, 1) and
system of straight lines a ( 2 x + y − 3 ) + b (3 x + 2y − 5 ) = 0
( 4, − 3 )
and is farthest from the point (4, −3) is ∴ The required line is
(a) 4 x + 11y − 15 = 0 (b) 3 x − 4y + 1 = 0 3
(c) 7 x + y − 8 = 0 (d) None of these y − 1 = (x − 1)
4
Sol. (b) The system of straight lines or 3 x − 4y + 1 = 0
a (2 x + y − 3 ) + b (3 x + 2y − 5 ) = 0 ) passes through the point
of intersection of the lines 2 x + y − 3 = 0 and 3 x + 2y − 5 = 0
i.e. (1, 1)

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n This section contains 5 multiple choice examples. Each x y
l Ex. 12 Line + =1 cuts the coordinate axes at A(a , 0 )
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which a b
MORE THAN ONE may be correct. x y
and B(0, b ) and the line + = −1 at A ′ ( −a ′ , 0 ) and
a′ b′
l Ex. 11 The vertices of a square inscribed in the triangle B ′(0, − b ′ ). If the points A, B, A ′ , B ′ are concyclic, then the
with vertices A(0, 0 ), B( 2, 1) and C(3, 0 ), given that two of its orthocentre of the triangle ABA′ is
vertices are on the side AC, are
(a) (0, 0) (b) (0, b ′ )
3  3 3   9 3 9 
(a)  , 0 (b)  ,  (c)  ,  (d)  , 0  −aa ′   bb ′ 
2   2 4  4 4 4  (c) 0,  (d) 0, 
 b   a 
Sol. (a, b, c, d)
Sol. (b, c)
Let PQRS be a square inscribed in ∆ABC and
Q A, B, A′ , B′ are concyclic then,
PQ = QR = RS = SP = λ (say)
Let P ≡ (a, 0 ), Y

∴ Q ≡ (a + λ , λ ), R ≡ (a + λ , λ ) and S ≡ (a, λ )
Y B(0, b)

B(2, 1)
S R X¢ X
A¢(–a¢, 0) O A(a, 0)

X¢ X
A (0, 0) P Q C(3, 0)
B¢(0,–b¢)
Y¢

Now equation of AB is Y¢
x − 2y = 0 …(i)
OA ⋅ OA′ = OB ⋅ OB′
and equation of BC is
or (a ) ⋅ ( −a′ ) = (b ) ⋅ ( −b′ )
x + y −3 = 0 …(ii)
or aa′ = bb′ …(i)
Q S lies on AB, then
a − 2λ = 0 …(iii) The equation of altitude through A′ is
and R lies on BC, then a
y − 0 = ( x + a′ )
a + λ + λ − 3 = 0 or a + 2 λ − 3 = 0 …(iv) b
3 3 It intersects the altitude
From Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get a = , λ = aa′
2 4 x = 0 at y =
3  9  b
Hence, P ≡  , 0 , Q ≡  , 0 ,
2  4   aa′ 
∴ Orthocentre is  0,  or ( 0, b′ ) [from Eq. (i)]
 b 
 9 3  3 3
R≡ , , S = , 
 4 2  2 4
144 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

l Ex. 13 Two straight lines u = 0 and v = 0 passes through y=Ö3 x

7 Y
the origin and angle between them is tan −1   . If the ratio
 9 B

9
of the slope of v = 0 and u = 0 is , then their equations are C
2
(a) y = 3 x and 3y = 2x
(b) 2y = 3 x and 3y = x 2 D y= x
Ö3
(c) y + 3 x = 0 and 3y + 2x = 0
(d) 2y + 3 x = 0 and 3y + x = 0 2 A
Sol. (a, b, c, d) X¢ X
9m O
Let the slope of u = 0 be m, then the slope of v = 0 is .
2 Y¢
 m − 9m 
 Coordinates of A and C are ( 3, 1 ) and (1, 3 ) in I quadrant and
Therefore, 2 = 7
 9m 9 in III quadrant are ( − 3, − 1 ) and (−1, − 3 )
1+m×
 2 Hence, coordinates of B are ( 3 + 1, 3 + 1 ) and
 −7m  7 ( − 3 − 1, − 3 − 1 )
or  =
2 + 9m  9
2

⇒ 9m 2 + 9m + 2 = 0 or 9m 2 − 9m + 2 = 0
l Ex. 15 A and B are two fixed points whose coordinates
2 1 2 1 are (3, 2) and (5, 4) respectively. The coordinates of a point P,
⇒ m = − , − or m = , if ABP is an equilateral triangle are
3 3 3 3
Therefore, the equation of lines are (a) ( 4 − 3 , 3 + 3 ) (b) ( 4 + 3 , 3 − 3 )
(i) 2 x + 3y = 0 and 3 x + y = 0 (c) (3 − 3 , 4 + 3 ) (d) (3 + 3 , 4 − 3 )
(ii) x + 3y = 0 and 3 x + 2y = 0 Sol. (a, b)
(iii) 2 x = 3y and 3x = y Q AB = AP = BP = 2 2
(iv) x = 3y and 3 x = 2y
∴ Coordinates of P are (3 + 2 2 cos105 °, 2 + 2 2 sin 105 ° )
l Ex. 14 Two sides of a rhombus OABC (lying entirely in P
the first or third quadrant) of are equal to 2 sq units are
x
y= , y = 3 x . Then the possible coordinates of B is/are
3
B(5, 4)
(O being the origin)
(a) (1 + 3 , 1 + 3 ) (b) ( −1 − 3 , − 1 − 3 )
(c) (3 + 3 , 3 + 3 ) (d) ( 3 − 1, 3 − 1) 60°
Sol. (a, b) 45°
X
A(3, 2)
Here, ∠COA = 30 °
Let OA = AB = BC = CO = x or (3 − ( 3 − 1 ), 2 + 3 + 1 )
Q Area of rhombus OABC
or (4 − 3, 3 + 3 )
1
= 2 × × x × x sin 30 ° If P below AB, then coordinates of P are
2
x2 (3 + 2 2 cos15 °, 2 − 2 2 sin 15 °)
= =2 [given]
2 or [(3 + 3 + 1, 2 − ( 3 − 1 )]
∴ x =2 or (4 + 3, 3 − 3 )
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 145

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 2 solved paragraphs based upon 16. (d) Q M lie on y = 1
each of the paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have ∴ Length of ⊥ from M to OA is 1.
to be answered. Each of these question has four choices 17. (c) λ = Perimeter of region R
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
= OA + AD + DE + EO
Paragraph I =3 + 2 + 1 + 2
(Q. Nos. 16 to18) =4+2 2
Let d (P , OA ) ≤ min⋅ {d (P , AB ), d (P , BC ), d (P , OC )}, where d 18. (a) ∆ = Area of region R
denotes the distance from the point to the corresponding the 1
= (OA + ED ) × 1
line and R be the region consisting of all those points P inside 2
the rectangle OABC such that O ≡ (0, 0 ), A ≡ (3, 0 ), B ≡ (3, 2 ) 1
= (3 + 1 ) = 2
and C ≡ (0, 2 ). Let M be the peak of region R. 2
16. Length of the perpendicular from M to OA is
(a) 4 (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) 1
Paragraph II
(Q. Nos. 19 to 21)
17. If λ be the perimeter of region R, then λ is A variable straight line ‘L’ is drawn through O(0, 0 ) to meet
(a) 4 − 2 (b) 4 + 2 (c) 4 + 2 2 (d) 10 this lines L1 : y − x − 10 = 0 and L 2 : y − x − 20 = 0 at the
18. If ∆ be the area of region R, then ∆ is points A and B respectively.
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8 2 1 1
19. A point P is taken on ‘L’ such that = + ,
Sol. Let P ≡ ( x, y ) OP OA OB
Q d ( P , OA ) ≤ min ⋅ {d ( P , AB ), d ( P , BC ), d ( P , OC )} then the locus of P is
Y (a) 3 x + 3y − 40 = 0 (b) 3 x + 3y + 40 = 0
(c) 3 x − 3y − 40 = 0 (d) 3 x − 3y + 40 = 0
(0, 2) C B(3, 2)
20. A point P is taken on ‘L’ such that (OP ) 2 = OA ⋅ OB,
P (x, y) then the locus of P is
(a) (y − x )2 = 25 (b) (y − x )2 = 50
X¢ X
O A(3, 0) (c) (y − x )2 = 100 (d) (y − x )2 = 200
Y¢ 21. A point P is taken on ‘L’ such that
⇒ | y | ≤ min {|3 − x |, |2 − y |, | x| } 1 1 1
As the rectangle OABC lies in I quadrant, 2
= 2
+ , then locus of P is
(OP ) (OA ) (OB ) 2
∴ y ≤ min ⋅ [3 − x, 2 − y . x ]
We draw the graph of (a) (y − x )2 = 32 (b) (y − x )2 = 64
y = 3 − x, y = 2 − y , y = x (c) (y − x )2 = 80 (d) (y − x )2 = 100
or x + y = 3, y = 1, y = x Sol. Let the equation of line ‘L’ through origin is
Y x−0 y −0
= =r
x
y=

cosθ sin θ
x+
y=

∴ P ≡ (r cosθ, r sin θ )
3

Let OA = r1 and OB = r2
(1, 1) E D (2, 1) y=1
∴ A ≡ (r1 cosθ, r1 sin θ )
and B ≡ (r2 cosθ, r2 sin θ )
X¢ X A lies on L1 :y − x − 10 = 0
O A
∴ r1 sin θ − r1 cosθ − 10 = 0
Y¢ 10
⇒ r1 = …(i)
∴ E ≡ (1, 1 ) and D ≡ (2, 1 ) sin θ − cosθ
146 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

⇒ B lies on L1 : y − x − 20 = 0 r sin θ − r cosθ r sin θ − r cosθ

or 2 = +
L 10 20
y −x y −x
or 2= + [Q P ≡ (r cos, r sin θ )]
Y B 10 20
∴ Locus of P is 3 x − 3y + 40 = 0
20. (d) Q (OP ) 2 = OA ⋅ OB
⇒ r 2 = r1 ⋅ r2
A
0

10 20
=

⇒ r2 = ⋅ [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]

20

(sin θ − cosθ ) (sin θ − cosθ )

x–

P
0
=
y–

(r sin θ − r cosθ ) 2 = 200

10

or
x–

∴ Locus of P is (y − x ) 2 = 200
y–

q
X¢ X 1 1 1
O 21. (c) Q = +
(OP ) 2 (OA ) 2 (OB ) 2
Y¢
1 1 1
⇒ = +
∴ r2 sin θ − r2 cosθ − 20 = 0 r 2 r12 r22
20
⇒ r2 = …(ii) 1 (sin θ − cosθ ) 2 (sin θ − cosθ ) 2
sin θ − cosθ ⇒ = +
r2 100 400
2 1 1 2 1 1 400 = 4(r sin θ − r cosθ ) 2 + (r sin θ − r cosθ ) 2
19. (d) Q = + ⇒ = + or
OP OA OB r r1 r2
∴ Locus of P is (y − x ) 2 = 80
2 sin θ − cosθ sin θ − cosθ
⇒ = + [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
r 10 20

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n
This section contains 2 examples. The answer to each example is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9
(both inclusive).

l Ex. 22 P ( x , y ) is called a natural point if x , y ∈N . The l Ex. 23 The distance of the point ( x , y ) from the origin is
total number of points lying inside the quadrilateral formed defined as d = max⋅ {| x |, | y | }. Then the distance of the
by the lines 2 x + y = 2, x = 0, y = 0 and x + y = 5 is common point for the family of lines
Sol. (6) First, we construct the graph of the given quadrilateral. x (1 + λ ) + λy + 2 + λ = 0 (λ being parameter) from the
Y origin is
Sol. (2) Given family of lines is
5 x(1 + λ ) + λy + 2 + λ = 0
4 ⇒ (x + 2) + λ(x + y + 1) = 0
3
for common point or fixed point
x+

x+2=0
y=

2
5

x=0 and x+y +1 =0

1 or x = − 2, y = 1
X¢
O 1 2 3 4 5
X ∴ Common point is ( −2, 1 )
y=0 or d = max{| −2|, |1| }
Y¢ 2x+y
=2
= max{2, 1 } = 2
It is clear from the graph that there are six points lying inside
the quadrilateral.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 147

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n This section contains 2 examples. Examples 24 and 25 l Ex. 25 The equation of the sides of a triangle are
has four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I x + 2y + 1 = 0, 2 x + y + 2 = 0 and px + qy + 1 = 0 and area of
and four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any triangle is ∆ .
given statement in Column I can have correct matching
with one or more statement(s) given in Column II. Column I Column II
(A) p = 2, q = 3, then 8∆ is divisible by (p) 3
l Ex. 24 Consider the following linear equations x and y
(B) p = 3, q = 2, then 8∆ is divisible by (q) 4
ax + by + c = 0 (C) p = 3, q = 4, then 10∆ is divisible by (r) 6
bx + cy + a = 0
(D) p = 4, q = 3, then 20∆ is divisible by (s) 9
cx + ay + b = 0
Sol. (A) → ( p ); (B) → ( p, q, r ); (C) → ( p, r ); (D) → ( p, s )
Column I Column II
(A) a + b + c ≠ 0 and (p) Lines are sides of a triangle D2
Q ∆= , where
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = ab + bc + ca 2| C1 C 2 C 3 |
(B) a + b + c = 0 and (q) Lines are different and
1 2 1
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ≠ ab + bc + ca concurrent
D = 
2 1 2 = 3( p − 1 )
(C) a + b + c ≠ 0 and (r) Number of pair ( x , y ) satisfying
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ≠ ab + bc + ca the equations are infinite p q 1
(D) a + b + c = 0 and (s) Lines are identical and C1, C 2, C 3 are co-factors of third column, then
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = ab + bc + ca C1 = 2q − p, C 2 = 2 p − q, C 3 = − 3
3( p − 1 ) 2
Sol. (A) → (r , s ); (B) → (q ); (C) → ( p ); (D) → (r ) ∴ ∆=
2|2q − p||2 p − q|
(A) if a + b + c ≠ 0 and a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = ab + bc + ca
(A) for p = 2, q = 3
1
or {(a − b ) 2 + (b − c ) 2 + (c − a ) 2 } = 0 3
2 ⇒ ∆=
8
or a − b = 0, b − c = 0, c − a = 0
∴ 8∆ = 3
or a = b = c ⇒ All the lines an identical
(B) for p = 3, q = 2
and number of pair ( x, y ) are infinite.
3
(B) If a + b + c = 0 and a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ≠ ab + bc + ca ⇒ ∆=
2
⇒a + b + c = 0, but a, b, c are not simultaneously equal. ∴ 8 ∆ = 12
Hence, lines are different and concurrent. (C) for p = 3, q = 4
(C) If a + b + c ≠ 0 and a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ≠ ab + bc + ca 6
⇒ ∆=
a b c 10
⇒ ∆ =  ∴ 10 ∆ = 6
b c a ≠ 0 and a, b, c are not all simultaneously equal.
(D) for p = 4, q = 3
c a b
27
∴ Lines are sides of a triangle. ⇒ ∆=
20
(D) If a + b + c = 0 and a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = ab + bc + ca
∴ 20 ∆ = 27
⇒ ∆ = 0 and a = b = c
∴ Equations are satisfied for any ( x, y ) .
148 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Ex. Nos. 26 and 27) are Assertion-Reason Sol. (b) Let L1 ≡ 3 x + 4y = 0,
type examples. Each of these examples contains two L2 ≡ 5 x − 12y = 0 and L3 ≡ y − 15 = 0
statements. 3 + 32
Length of ⊥ from P to L1 = =7
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason) 5
Each of these examples also has four alternative choices. |5 − 96|
Length of ⊥ from P to L2 = =7
Only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select 13
the correct choice as given below. |8 − 15|
(a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II and Length of ⊥ from P to L3 = =7
1
is a correct explanation for statement I.
∴ Statement II is true
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II
is not a correct explanation for statement I. Y
(c) Statement I is true, statement II is false.
B (–20, 15) L 3 =0 A (36, 15)
(d) Statement I is false, statement II is true.

x y x y
l Ex. 26 Consider the lines, L1 : + = 1; L 2 : + = 1; P
3 4 4 3 L1=0
L2=0
x y x y
L3 : + = 2 and L 4 : + = 2
3 4 4 3
Statement I : The quadrilateral formed by these four lines is a X¢ X
O (0, 0)
rhombus.
Statement II : If diagonals of a quadrilateral formed by any
four lines are unequal and intersect at right angle, then it is a Y¢
rhombus. 1
Sol. (c) Q L1, L3 are parallel. Also, Area of ∆OPA = × OA × 7
2
1 12 1
∴ Distance between L1 and L3 = = and = × 39 × 7 = ∆1
1 1 5 2
 + 
 9 16 1
Area of ∆OPB = × OB × 7
L2, L4 are parallel. 2
1 12 1
∴ Distance between L2 and L4 = = = × 25 × 7 = ∆ 2
 1 1  5 2
 +  1
 16 9 and Area of ∆APB = × AB × 7
2
∴ Distance between L1 and L3 = Distance between L2 and L4 .
1
∴ Quadrilateral formed by L1, L2, L3, L4 is a rhombus. = × 56 × 7 = ∆ 3
2
Hence, statement I is true and statement II is false. 7
∴ ∆1 + ∆ 2 + ∆ 3 = (39 + 25 + 56 )
2
l Ex. 27 7 × 120 1
Statement I : Incentre of the triangle formed by the lines = = × 56 × 15 = Area of ∆AOB
2 2
whose sides are 3 x + 4y = 0; 5 x − 12y = 0 and y − 15 = 0 is the
⇒ P inside the triangle.
point P whose coordinates are (1, 8).
Hence, both statements are true and statement II is not correct
Statement II : Point P equidistant from the three lines
explanation of statement I.
forming the triangle.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 149

Subjective Type Examples

n In this section, there are 15 subjective solved examples. l Ex. 29. Let the sides of a parallelogram be
l Ex. 28. If x-coordinates of two points B and C are the
u = p , u = q , v = r and v = s where, u = lx + my + n and
v = l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ . Show that the equation of the diagonal
roots of equation x 2 + 4 x + 3 = 0 and their y-coordinates are
through the point of intersection of u = p and v = r and u = q
the roots of equation x 2 − x − 6 = 0. If x-coordinate of B is
less than x-coordinate of C and y-coordinate of B is greater u v 1
and v = s , is given by p r 1 = 0
than the y-coordinate of C and coordinates of a third point  
A be (3, − 5 ). Find the length of the bisector of the interior q s 1
angle at A . Sol. Equation of the line through point of intersection D of lines
Sol. Q x 2 + 4x + 3 = 0 ⇒ x = − 1, − 3 u − p = 0 and v − r = 0 is
and x2 − x − 6 = 0 ⇒ x = − 2, 3 (u − p ) + λ ( ν − r ) = 0 ...(i)
it is also passing through u = q and v = s , then Eq. (i) becomes
Also given that x and y-coordinates of B are respectively less
than and greater than the corresponding coordinates of C. (q − p ) + λ (s − r ) = 0
(q − p )
∴ B ≡ ( − 3, 3 ) and C ≡ ( − 1, − 2 ) ∴ λ=− …(ii)
(s − r )
Now AB = (3 + 3 ) 2 + ( − 5 − 3 ) 2 = 10
u=p
D C
and AC = (3 + 1 ) 2 + ( − 5 + 2 ) 2 = 5
AB 2
∴ =
AC 1

v=s
v=r
Y
B(–3,3)

A u=q B

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

X′
(q − p )
X (u − p ) − (v − r ) = 0
O (s − r )
– 5,– 1 D
3 3
⇒ u (s − r ) − p (s − r ) − v (q − p ) + r (q − p ) = 0
(–1,–2)C ⇒ u (r − s ) − v ( p − q ) + ps − qr = 0
x
x
u v 1
A(3,–5) ⇒ p r 1 = 0
 
Y′ q s 1

Let AD be the bisector of ∠ BAC, then

l Ex. 30. The vertices B and C of a triangle ABC lie on the
BD AB 2
= = lines 3y = 4 x and y = 0 respectively and the side BC passes
DC AC 1
Thus D divides BC internally in the ratio 2 : 1  2 2
through the point  ,  . If ABOC is a rhombus, O being
 2 ( − 1 ) + 1 ( − 3 ) 2 ( − 2 ) + 1 (3 ) 3 3
∴ D≡ , 
 2+1 2+1  the origin, find the equation of the line BC and the
 5 1 coordinates of A.
Thus, D ≡ − , − 
 3 3 Sol. Let the side of the rhombus be a
2 2 ∴ OB = BA = AC = CO = a
 5  1
Now, AD = 3 +  + − 5 +   4x 
 3   3 Co-ordinates of A is a + x1, 1 
 3 
196 196 14 2
= + = units. ∴ (OB ) 2 = ( BA ) 2 = ( AC ) 2 = (CO ) 2 = a 2 ⇒(OB ) 2 = a 2
9 9 3
150 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

16 x12 25 x12 5x Y
⇒ x12 + = a2 ⇒ = a2 ⇒ a = 1
9 9 3
 5 x1   8 x1 4 x1 
∴ C ≡ , 0 , A ≡  , ,
 3   3 3  (0,b)B P(a,b)
 4x 
B ≡  x1, 1  , O ≡ ( 0, 0 )
 3  Q
Y X′ X
O A(a,0)
Y′
(x1, 4x31)
B A Q PQ ⊥ AB
( 32 , 32 ) ∴ Slope of PQ × Slope of AB = − 1
4x
3 y=

 b − y1   b − 0
⇒   ×   = −1
 a − x1   0 − a
X′ X
O a C(a,0) ⇒ ax1 − by1 = a 2 − b 2 ...(ii)
Y′ x y
Q Equation of AB is + = 1
a b
∴ Equation of BC
x y
4 x1 But Q lies on AB then 1 + 1 = 1
−0 a b
 5 x1 
y −0= 3 x −  ⇒ bx1 + ay1 = ab
5 x1  3  ...(iii)
x1 −
3 From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
10 x1 a3 b3
⇒ y = − 2x + ...(1) x1 = 2 , y1 = 2
3 a +b 2
a + b2
 2 2 (a 2 + b 2 )
it is passing through  ,  , then x12/3 + y12/3 =
 3 3 Now,
(a 2 + b 2 ) 2/3
2 4 10 x1
=− + = (a 2 + b 2 )1/3 = c 2/3 [from Eq. (i)]
3 3 3
10 x1 Hence, required locus is x 2/ 3
+y 2/ 3
=c 2/ 3
.
⇒ 2=
3 Aliter :
3 Since, AB = c
∴ x1 =
5 Let ∠ BAO = θ
Hence, coordinates are ∴ OA = c cosθ and OB = c sin θ
 8 4 Q OB = PA = c sinθ
C ≡ (1, 0 ), A ≡  , 
 5 5
Y
3 4
B≡ ,  , O ≡ ( 0, 0 )
5 5
(0,b)B P(a,b)
From Eq. (i), equation of BC is
y = − 2x + 2
Q
⇒ 2x + y = 2
X′ X
O A(a,0)
l Ex. 31 The ends AB of a straight line segment of constant Y′
length c slide upon the fixed rectangular axes OX and OY
QA QA
respectively. If the rectangle OAPB be completed, then show In ∆ PQA, sin θ = =
PA c sin θ
that the locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from P to
AB is x 2 /3 + y 2 /3 = c 2 /3 . ∴ QA = c sin 2 θ
QM QM
Sol. Let A ≡ (a , 0 ) , B ≡ ( 0 , b ) then P ≡ (a , b ) Now, in ∆QAM, sin θ = =
QA c sin 2 θ
Since AB = c
∴ QM = c sin 3 θ
a2 + b2 = c
MA MA
or a2 + b2 = c2 ...(i) and cosθ = =
QA c sin 2 θ
and let Q ≡ ( x1, y1 )
⇒ MA = c sin 2 θ cosθ
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 151

If coordinates of Q be ( x1, y1 ) l Ex. 33 In a ∆ ABC, A ≡ (α , β), B ≡ (1 , 2 ), C ≡ ( 2 , 3 ) and

then x1 = OM = OA − MA = c cos θ − c sin 2 θ cosθ
point A lies on the line y = 2 x + 3 , where α, β ∈I . If the area
x1 = c cos3 θ ...(i) of ∆ ABC be such that [ ∆ ] = 2 , where [.] denotes the greatest
and y1 = MQ = c sin θ 3
...(ii) integer function, find all possible coordinates of A.
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), Sol. Q (α , β ) lies on y = 2 x + 3
x12/3 + y12/3 = c 2/3 cos2 θ + c 2/3 sin 2 θ = c 2/3 then β = 2α + 3
⇒ x12/3 + y12/3 = c 2/3 Thus ,the coordinates of A are (α , 2α + 3 )
1 α 2α + 3 +  1 2+2 3 
Hence, locus of Q is x 2/3 + y 2/3 = c 2/3 ∆ = | |
2 1 2  2 3 α 2α + 3
= | 2α − 2α − 3 + 3 − 4 + 4α + 6 − 3α |
l Ex. 32 A square lies above the X-axis and has one vertex
1
at the origin. The side passing through the origin makes an ∆ = |α + 2|
2
angle α (0 < α < π / 4 ) with the positive direction of the
1 
X-axis. Prove that the equation of its diagonals are But [ ∆ ] = |α + 2| = 2 (given)
2 
y (cos α − sin α) = x (sin α + cos α) |α + 2|
∴ 2≤ <3
and y (sin α + cos α) + x (cos α − sin α) = a 2
where, is the length of each side of the square. ⇒ 4 ≤ |α + 2 | < 6
Sol. Here, OA = AB = BC = CO = a ⇒ 4 ≤ α + 2 < 6 or − 6 < α + 2 ≤ − 4
⇒ 2 ≤ α < 4 or − 8 < α ≤ − 6
Y
B ∴ α = 2, 3, − 7, − 6
then β = 7, 9, − 11, − 9
Hence, coordinates of A are (2 , 7 ), (3 , 9 ), ( − 7 , − 11 ) and
C
( − 6, − 9 ).
A
π/4 l Ex. 34 Find the values of non-negative real numbers
X′
α
X λ 1 , λ 2 , λ 3 , µ 1 , µ 2 , µ 3 such that the algebraic sum of the
O
Y′
perpendiculars drawn from points
( λ 1 , 4 ), ( λ 2 , 5 ), ( λ 3 , − 3 ), ( 2 , µ 1 ), (3 , µ 2 ) and ( 7, µ 3 ) on a
π 
Equation of OB is y − 0 = tan  + α  ( x − 0 ) variable line passing through ( 2 ,1) is zero.
4 
Sol. Let the equation of the variable line be ax + by + c = 0. It is
π  π 
⇒ y cos  + α  = x sin  + α  given that
4  4  (aλ 1 + 4b + c ) (aλ 2 + 5b + c )
⇒ +
⇒ y (cos α − sin α ) = x (cos α + sin α ) (a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 )
Hence, equation of diagonal OB is
(aλ 3 − 3b + c ) (2a + bµ1 + c )
x (cos α + sin α ) + y (sin α − cos α ) = 0 + +
(a + b )
2 2
(a 2 + b 2 )
Coordinates of A are (a cos α , a sin α )
(3a + bµ 2 + c ) (7a + bµ 3 + c )
Diagonal AC is perpendicular to the diagonal OB, + + =0
1 (a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 )
Slope of AC = −
slope of OB ⇒ a ( λ 1 + λ 2 + λ 3 + 12 ) + b (µ1 + µ 2 + µ 3 + 6 ) + 6c = 0
1 π   λ + λ 2 + λ 3 + 12  µ1 + µ 2 + µ 3 + 6 
=− = − cot  + α  ⇒ a 1  +b   + c = 0 …(i)
π  4   6   6 
tan  + α 
4  But the line passes through (2,1), therefore
Hence, equation of diagonal AC is 2a + b + c = 0 ...(ii)
π  From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
y − a sin α = − cot  + α  ( x − a cos α ) λ 1 + λ 2 + λ 3 + 12 µ + µ2 + µ3 + 6
4  = 2 and 1 =1
 cos α − sin α  6 6
⇒ y − a sin α = −   ( x − a cos α ) ⇒ λ 1 + λ 2 + λ 3 = 0 and µ1 + µ 2 + µ 3 = 0
 cos α + sin α 
⇒ λ 1 = λ 2 = λ 3 and µ1 = µ 2 = µ 3 [Q λ i , µi ≥ 0 for all i ]
⇒ y (cos α + sin α ) − a sin α cos α − a sin 2 α λ1 = λ 2 = λ 3 = α (say)
= − x (cos α − sin α ) + a cos2 α − a sin α cos α and µ1 = µ 2 = µ 3 = β (say)
⇒ x (cos α − sin α ) + y (cos α + sin α ) = a where α ≥ 0 and β ≥ 0.
152 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Ex. 35 The three sides of a triangle are y k y k

l
⇒ − = x − h or x − = h −
Lr ≡ x cos θ r + y sin θ r − pr = 0, where r= 1,2,3. Show that m m m m
x y
the orthocentre is given by ⇒ − =1
 k  k
L1 cos (θ 2 − θ 3 ) = L 2 cos (θ 3 − θ 1 ) = L3 cos (θ 1 − θ 2 ) . h −  m h − 
 m  m
Sol. The given lines are
x y
L1 ≡ x cosθ1 + y sin θ1 − p1 = 0 ⇒ + =1
 k  (k − mh )
L2 ≡ x cosθ 2 + y sin θ 2 − p 2 = 0 h − 
 m
L3 ≡ x cosθ 3 + y sin θ 3 − p 3 = 0
Now, equation of AD is L2 + λL3 = 0 …(i) Y

⇒ ( x cosθ 2 + y sin θ 2 − p 2 ) + λ ( x cosθ 3 + y sin θ 3 − p 3 ) = 0

⇒ x (cosθ 2 + λ cosθ 3 ) + y (sin θ 2 + λ sin θ 3 ) − ( p 2 + λp 3 ) = 0 P
(cosθ 2 + λ cosθ 3 )
∴ Slope of AD = − (h,k)
(sin θ 2 + λ sin θ 3 )
cosθ1
and Slope of BC = −
sin θ1 X′ X
O Q
A Y′

k
∴ OQ = h −
and OP = k − mh
L3 =0 F m
E
L2 =0 1 1  k
O Area of triangle OPQ = . OQ. OP = . h −  (k − mh )
2 2  m
B 1 k2
⇒ = 2hk − mh 2 − 
D C 2 m
L1 =0
mh 2 k 2
Since, AD ⊥ BC ⇒ A (m ) = hk − − …(ii)
2 2m
∴ Slope of BC × slope of AD = − 1 dA
To minimise, =0
cosθ1  (cosθ 2 + λ cosθ 3 )  dm
⇒ − × − = −1
sin θ1  (sin θ 2 + λ sin θ 3 )  h2 k2 k
⇒ 0− + =0 ⇒m=±
⇒ cosθ1 cosθ 2 + λ cosθ 3 cosθ1 2 2m 2 h
= − sin θ1 sin θ 2 − λ sin θ 3 sin θ1 d 2A 2k 2
∴ =−
⇒ cos (θ1 − θ 2 ) + λ cos (θ 3 − θ1 ) = 0 dm 2
2m 3
cos (θ1 − θ 2 )
∴ λ=− d 2A h3
cos (θ 3 − θ1 ) = >0 (Qh > 0, k > 0)
dm 2 m = − k /h
k
Now from Eq. (i),
cos (θ1 − θ 2 ) k k
L2 − L3 = 0 Hence for m = − , A (m ) is minimum . Put m = − in Eq. (ii),
cos (θ 3 − θ1 ) h h
we get minimum area.
∴ L2 cos (θ 3 − θ1 ) = L3 cos (θ1 − θ 2 ) ...(ii)
hk hk
Similarly, we can obtain equation of altitude BE as ⇒ Minimum area of ∆OPQ = hk + + = 2hk
2 2
L3 cos (θ1 − θ 2 ) = L1 cos (θ 2 − θ 3 ) ...(iii)
From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get l Ex. 37 The distance between two parallel lines is unity. A
L1 cos (θ 2 − θ 3 ) = L2 cos (θ 3 − θ1 ) = L3 cos(θ1 − θ 2 )
point P lies between the lines at a distance a from one of
l Ex. 36 Let (h, k) be a fixed point, where h > 0, k > 0. them. Find the length of a side of an eqilateral triangle PQR,
vertex Q of which lies on one of the parallel lines and vertex
A straight line passing through this point cuts the positive
R lies on the other line.
direction of the co-ordinate axes at the points P and Q. Find
Sol. Let PQ = QR = RP = r
the minimum area of the triangle OPQ ,O being the origin.
and ∠ PQL = θ
Sol. Equation of any line passing through the fixed point (h, k )
then ∠ XQR = θ + 60 °
and having slope m can be taken as
Given PL = a and RN = 1 unit
y − k = m (x − h ) ...(i)
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 153

Now, let slope of AB is m

Y
C

R(r,θ+60°) Y

0
α

1=
y+
α

A(1,2)
x–
B
α
60°

2
α

y=
θ P(r,θ)

x–
X′ N X
(0,0) Q L X′ X
O
Y′ A'(x1,y1)

In ∆PQL Y′
PL a
sin θ = =
QP r Q OA and AB are equally inclined to normal of x − y + 1 = 0
then,
∴ a = r sinθ ...(i)
and in ∆QRN,  m1 − m2   m − m2 
  =− 
RN 1  1 + m1m2   1 + mm2 
r sin (θ + 60 ° ) = =
QR r  2 − (− 1)   m − (− 1) 
⇒   =− 
sin (θ + 60 ° ) = 1  1 + 2( − 1 )  1 + m (− 1)
(sin θ cos 60 ° + cosθ sin 60 ° ) = 1 ⇒ 3 (1 − m ) = m + 1
1 3  1
⇒ r  sin θ + cosθ = 1 or m=
2 2  2
1 a ∴ Equation of AB is
3 a2 
⇒ r  × + × 1 − 2  = 1 [from Eq. (i)] 1
2 r 2 r  y − 2 = (x − 1)
2
⇒
a
+
3
(r 2 − a 2 ) = 1 or x − 2y + 3 = 0
2 2 Now, solving x − 2y + 3 = 0
3 a and x −y =2
⇒ (r 2 − a 2 ) = 1 −
2 2 then, we get x = 7, y = 5
3 2 a 2
i.e. B ≡ ( 7, 5 )
or (r − a 2 ) = 1 + −a
4 4 Q BC is parallel to OA
⇒ 3r 2 − 3a 2 = 4 + a 2 − 4a ∴ Equation of BC is
⇒ 3r 2 = 4 (a 2 − a + 1 ) y − 5 = m1 ( x − 7 )
⇒ y − 5 = 2 (x − 7)
2
∴ r= (a 2 − a + 1 ) i.e. 2x − y − 9 = 0
3
Aliter :
If image of A (1, 2 ) with respect to line mirror x − y = 2 be
l Ex. 38 A ray of light travelling along the line OA A′ ( x1, y1 ), then
(O being origin) is reflected by the line mirror x − y + 1 = 0, x1 − 1 y1 − 2 − 2 (1 − 2 − 2 )
is the point of incidence being A (1, 2 ) the reflected ray, = =
1 −1 1+1
travelling along AB is again reflected by the line mirror
or x1 = 4, y1 = − 1
x − y = 2 , the point of incidence being B. If this reflected ray
i.e. A′ ≡ ( 4, − 1 )
moves along BC, find the equation of the line BC. Q BC is parallel to OA
2−0
Sol. Since, slope of OA = = 2 = m1 (say) then equation of BC = equation of A′ C is
1−0
y − y1 = 2 ( x − x1 )
and slope of normal to x − y + 1 = 0 is ⇒ y + 1 = 2 (x − 4)
− 1 = m2 (say) or 2x − y − 9 = 0
154 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

l Ex. 39 Consider two lines L1 ≡ x − y = 0 and L 2 ≡ x + y = 0 l Ex. 40 A rectangle PQRS has its side PQ parallel to the
and a moving point P ( x , y ). Let d (P , Li ), i =1, 2 represents the line y = mx and vertices P , Q and S on the lines y = a , x = b
distance of the point ‘P’ from Li . If point ‘P’ moves in certain and x = − b respectively. Find the locus of the vertex R.
2 Sol. Q PQ is parallel to y = mx
region ‘R’ in such a way Σ d (P , Li ) ∈[ 2 , 4 ].
i =1 ∴ Equation of PQ is y = mx + λ ...(i)
Find the area of region ‘R’. Q Diagonals bisect to each other
2
Sol. Q Given Σ d (P , Li ) ∈ [2, 4] Y
i =1 R(h,k)
2
⇒ 2≤ Σ d (P , Li ) ≤ 4
i =1

⇒ 2 ≤ d ( P , L1 ) + d ( P , L2 ) ≤ 4
(–b,λ2)S Q(b,λ1)
| x − y| | x + y|
⇒ 2≤ + ≤4
2 2
⇒ 2 2 ≤ | x − y| + | x + y| ≤ 4 2 mx
y=
Case I : If x − y > 0, x + y > 0 P(–h,a)
X′ X
then 2 2 ≤ (x − y ) + (x + y ) ≤ 4 2 O
⇒ 2 2 ≤ 2 x ≤ 4 2 or 2 ≤ x ≤ 2 2
Y′
Case II : If x − y > 0, x + y < 0
then 2 2 ≤ (x − y ) − (x + y ) ≤ 4 2 ∴ x-coordinate of P is −h.
⇒ 2 2 ≤ − 2y ≤ 4 2 Suppose y-coordinate of Q and S are λ 1 and λ 2 respectively.
Q Eq. (i) pass through P ( − h, a )
or − 2 ≥ y ≥ − 2 2 or − 2 2 ≤ y ≤ − 2
then a = − mh + λ
Case III : If x − y < 0, x + y > 0 ∴ λ = a + mh
then 2 2 ≤ − (x − y ) + (x + y ) ≤ 4 2 ⇒ y = mx + a + mh
⇒ 2 2 ≤ 2y ≤ 4 2 or 2 ≤ y ≤ 2 2 Q also lie on it, then
Case IV : If x − y < 0, x + y < 0 λ 1 = mb + a + mh
then 2 2 ≤ − (x − y ) − (x + y ) ≤ 4 2 ∴ Q ≡ (b, mb + a + mh )
⇒ 2 2 ≤ − 2x ≤ 4 2 Also, slope of PQ × slope of QR = − 1
(k − (mb + a + mh ))
Y m× = −1
(h − b )
0
y=

⇒ mk − m 2b − am − m 2h = − h + b
x–

B 2√2 A
⇒ (m 2 − 1 ) h − mk + b (m 2 + 1 ) + am = 0
B' √2 A' ∴ Locus of R is
(m 2 − 1 ) x − my + b (m 2 + 1 ) + am = 0
X′ X
–2√2 –√2 √2 2√2

C'
–√2 D'
l Ex. 41. For points P ≡ ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ) of the
coordinate plane, a new distance d (P , Q ) is defined by
d (P , Q ) = | x 1 − x 2 | + | y 1 − y 2 |. Let O ≡ (0, 0 ) and A ≡ (3 , 2 ).
x+

C –2√2 D
y=

Prove that the set of the points in the first quadrant which
0

Y′ are equidistant (with respect to the new distance) from O and

or − 2 ≥ x ≥ −2 2 A consists of the union of a line segment of finite length and
or −2 2 ≤ x ≤ − 2
an infinite ray. Sketch this set in a labelled diagram.
Sol. Let P ( x, y ) be any point in the first quadrant, we have
Combining all cases, we get
x > 0, y > 0
x ∈ [ − 2 2, − 2 ] ∪ [ 2, 2 2 ]
d (P , Q ) = | x − 0| + | y − 0| = | x | + | y | = x + y
and y ∈ [ − 2 2, − 2 ] ∪ [ 2, 2 2 ] and d (P , A ) = | x − 3| + | y − 2|
Hence, area of the required region Given, d (P , Q ) = d (P , A )
= ( 4 2 ) 2 − (2 2 ) 2 x + y = | x − 3| + |y − 2| ...(i)
= 32 − 8 = 24 sq units.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 155

Case I : 0 ≤ x < 3, 0 ≤ y < 2 l Ex. 42. A line through the variable point A (k +1, 2k )
then Eq. (i) becomes
meets the lines 7 x + y − 16 = 0, 5 x − y − 8 = 0, x − 5y + 8 = 0
x + y =3 − x + 2 −y
at B, C , D respectively, prove that AC , AB, AD are in HP.
or x + y =5/2
Sol. Given lines are
Case II : 0 ≤ x < 3, y ≥ 2
7 x + y − 16 = 0 . ..(i)
then Eq. (i) becomes
5x − y − 8 = 0 ...(ii)
x + y =3 − x + y −2
x − 5y + 8 = 0 ...(iii)
1
or x= Let the equation of line passing through A (k + 1, 2k ) making
2
an angle θ with the + ve direction of X -axis, be
Case III : x ≥ 3, 0 ≤ y < 2 x − (k + 1 ) y − 2k
then Eq. (i) becomes = = r1, r2, r3 (if AB = r1, AC = r2, AD = r3 )
cos θ sin θ
x + y = x −3 + 2 −y
∴ B ≡ [(k + 1 ) + r1 cos θ, 2k + r1 sin θ ]
1
⇒ y =− (Impossible) C ≡ [(k + 1 ) + r2 cos θ, 2k + r2 sin θ ]
2
D ≡ [(k + 1 ) + r3 cos θ, 2k + r3 sin θ ]
Case IV : x ≥ 3, y ≥ 2
Points B, C , D satisfying Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii) respectively
x + y = x −3 + y −2
9 (1 − k )
⇒ 0 = −5 (Impossible) then r1 =
7 cos θ + sin θ
Combining all cases, then
3 (1 − k )
x + y = 5 / 2; 0 ≤ x < 3, 0 ≤ y < 2 r2 =
1 5 cos θ − sin θ
and x = ; 0 ≤ x < 3, y ≥ 2 9 (1 − k )
2 and r3 =
Y 5 sin θ − cos θ
1 1 (5 cos θ − sin θ ) (5 sin θ − cos θ )
x=1 ∴ + = +
3 2 r2 r3 3 (1 − k ) 9 (1 − k )
15 cos θ − 3 sin θ + 5 sin θ − cos θ
2 =
9 (1 − k )
x+y =5
1 2 14 cos θ + 2 sin θ 2
= =
X′ X 9 (1 − k ) r1
O 1 2 3
Hence r2, r1, r3 are in HP
Y′ i.e. AC , AB, AD are in HP.
The labelled diagram is given in adjoining figure.
 #L The Straight Lines Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 30 multiple choice questions. 8. If the distance of any point ( x , y ) from the origin is
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c), (d) out of which defined as d ( x , y ) = max {| x |, | y | }, d ( x , y ) = a non-zero
ONLY ONE is correct. constant, then the locus is
1. The straight line y = x − 2 rotates about a point where it (a) a circle (b) a straight line
cuts X-axis and becomes perpendicular on the straight (c) a square (d) a triangle
line ax + by + c = 0, then its equation is 9. If p 1 , p 2 , p 3 be the perpendiculars from the points
(a) ax + by + 2a = 0 (b) ay − bx + 2b = 0
(c) ax + by + 2b = 0 (d) None of these
(m 2 , 2m ), (mm ′ , m + m ′ ) and (m ′ 2 , 2m ′ ) respectively on
sin 2 α
2 2 1 2m the line x cos α + y sin α + = 0, then p 1 , p 2 , p 3
2. If + + = , then orthocentre of the cos α
1! 9 ! 3! 7 ! 5! 5! n !
are in
triangle having sides x − y + 1 = 0, x + y + 3 = 0 and
(a) AP (b) GP
2x + 5y − 2 = 0 is (c) HP (d) None of these
(a) (2m − 2n, m − n ) (b) (2m − 2n, n − m )
(c) (2m − n, m + n ) (d) (2m − n, m − n ) 10. ABCD is a square whose vertices A, B, C and D are (0, 0),
(2, 0), (2, 2) and (0, 2) respectively. This square is rotated
3. If f ( x + y ) = f ( x ) f (y ) ∀ x , y ∈ R and f (1) = 2 , then area in the xy plane with an angle of 30° in anti-clockwise
enclosed by 3| x | + 2| y | ≤ 8 is direction about an axis passing through the vertex A the
1 equation of the diagonal BD of this rotated square is ……
(a) f ( 4 ) sq units (b) f (6 ) sq units
2 . If E is the centre of the square, the equation of the
1 1
(c) f (6 ) sq units (d) f (5 ) sq units circumcircle of the triangle ABE is
3 3
(a) 3 x + (1 − 3 )y = 3 , x 2 + y 2 = 4
4. The graph of the function (b) (1 + 3 ) x − (1 − 2 )y = 2, x 2 + y 2 = 9
y = cos x cos( x + 2) − cos ( x + 1) is
2
(c) (2 − 3 ) x + y = 2( 3 − 1 ), x 2 + y 2 − x 3 − y = 0
(a) a straight line passing through ( 0, − sin 2 1 ) with slope 2
(d) None of the above
(b) a straight line passing through (0, 0)
(c) a parabola with vertex (1, − sin 2 1 ) 11. The point (4, 1) undergoes the following three successive
π 
(d) a straight line passing through the point  , − sin 2 1 are transformations
2 
parallel to the X-axis. (i) reflection about the line y = x − 1.
5. A line passing through the point (2, 2) and the axes (ii) translation through a distance 1 unit along the positive
direction of X-axis.
enclose an area λ. The intercepts on the axes made by π
the line are given by the two roots of (iii) rotation through an angle about the origin in the
anti-clockwise direction 4
(a) x 2 − 2| λ | x + | λ | = 0 (b) x 2 + | λ | x + 2| λ | = 0
Then, the coordinates of the final point are
(c) x − | λ | x + 2| λ | = 0
2
(d) None of these  7 7
(a) ( 4, 3 ) (b)  , 
6. The set of value of ‘b’ for which the origin and the point  2 2
(1, 1) lie on the same side of the straight line (c) ( 0, 3 2 ) (d) (3, 4)
a 2 x + aby + 1 = 0 ∀a ∈ R, b > 0 are 12. If the square ABCD, where A(0, 0), B(2, 0), C(2, 2) and
(a) b ∈(2, 4 ) (b) b ∈( 0, 2 )
(c) b ∈[ 0, 2 ] (d) None of these D(0, 2) undergoes the following three transformations
successively
7. Line L has intercepts a and b on the co-ordinates axes, (i) f1( x, y ) → (y , x )
when the axes are rotated through a given angle; (ii) f 2( x, y ) → ( x + 3y , y )
keeping the origin fixed, the same line has intercepts p x −y x + y
and q, then (iii) f 3( x, y ) →  , 
 2 2 
1 1 1 1
(a) a 2 + b 2 = p 2 + q 2 (b) 2
+ 2 = 2 + 2 then the final figure is a
a b p q
(a) square (b) parallelogram
1 1 1 1
(c) a 2 + p 2 = b 2 + q 2 (d) 2 + 2 = 2 + 2 (c) rhombus (d) None of these
a p b q
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 157

13. The line x + y = a meets the axes of x and y at A and B 20. Suppose that a ray of light leaves the point (3, 4), reflects
respectively. A triangle AMN is inscribed in the triangle off the Y-axis towards the X-axis, reflects off the X-axis,
OAB, O being the origin, with right angle at N, M and N and finally arrives at the point (8, 2). The value of x is
lie respectively on OB and AB. If the area of the triangle Y
3 AN
AMN is of the area of the triangle OAB, then is (3, 4)
8 BN
equal to
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4 (0, y) (8, 2)
14. If P (1, 0), Q ( −1, 0) and R (2, 0) are three given points, then
the locus of point S satisfying the relation
(SQ ) 2 + (SR ) 2 = 2(SP ) 2 is O (x, 0)
X

(a) a straight line parallel to X -axis

(b) a circle through the origin 1 1 2 1
(a) 4 (b) 4 (c) 4 (d) 5
(c) a circle with centre at the origin 2 3 3 3
(d) a straight line parallel to Y -axis 21. m, n are two integers with 0 < n < m. A is the point (m, n )
sin α cos α 
15. If A  − 1, − 1 and B(1, 1), α ∈ [− π, π ] are two on the cartessian plane. B is the reflection of A in the
 3 2  line y = x . C is the reflection of B in the Y -axis, D is the
points on the same side of the line 3x − 2y + 1 = 0, then α reflection of C in the X -axis and E is the reflection of D
belongs to the interval in the Y -axis. The area of the pentagon ABCDE is
 3π   π  (a) 2m(m + n ) (b) m(m + 3n )
(a)  − π , − ∪  , π (b) [ −π , π ]
 4   4  (c) m(2m + 3n ) (d) 2m(m + 3n )
(c) φ (d) None of these 22. A straight line L with negative slope passes through the
16. The line x + y = 1 meets X-axis at A and Y-axis at B, P is point (8, 2) and cuts the positive coordinates axes at
the mid-point of AB. P1 is the foot of the perpendicular points P and Q. As L varies, the absolute minimum value
from P to OA; M 1 is that of P1 from OP ; P2 is that of M 1 of OP + OQ is (O is origin)
from OA ; M 2 is that of P2 from OP ; P3 is that of M 2 (a) 10 (b) 18 (c) 16 (d) 12
from OA and so on. If Pn denotes the nth foot of the 23. Drawn from origin are two mutually perpendicular lines
perpendicular on OA form M n − 1 , then OPn is equal to forming an isosceles triangle together with the straight
1 1 line 2x + y = a, then the area of this triangle is
(a) (b) n
2n 2 a2 a2
(c) 2n − 1 (d) 2n + 3 (a) sq units (b) sq units
2 3
17. The line x = c cuts the triangle with corners (0, 0); (1, 1) (c)
a 2
sq units (d) None of these
and (9, 1) into two regions. For the area of the two 5
regions to be the same, then c must be equal to 24. The number of integral values of m for which the
5
(a) (b) 3 x-coordinate of the point of intersection of the lines
2
3x + 4y = 9 and y = mx + 1 is also an integer is
7 (a) 2 (b) 0 (c) 4 (d) 1
(c) (d) 3 or 15
2
25. A ray of light coming from the point (1, 2) is reflected at
18. If the straight lines x + 2y = 9, 3x − 5y = 5 and ax + by = 1 a point A on the X -axis and then passes through the
are concurrent, then the straight line 5x + 2y = 1, passes point (5, 3). The coordinates of the point A are
through the point  13  5 
(a) (a, − b ) (b) ( −a, b ) (a)  , 0 (b)  , 0
5   13 
(c) (a, b ) (d) ( −a, − b )
(c) ( −7, 0 ) (d) None of these
19. The ends of the base of the isosceles triangle are at (2, 0)
26. Consider the family of lines
and (0, 1) and the equation of one side is x = 2, then the
5x + 3y − 2 + λ(3x − y − 4 ) = 0 and
orthocentre of the triangle is
x − y + 1 + µ(2x − y − 2) = 0. Equation of straight line
 3 3 5 
(a)  , 
 4 2
(b)  , 1
4  that belong to both families is ax + by − 7 = 0, then
a + b is
3  4 7 
(c)  , 1 (d)  ,  (a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 7
4   3 12
158 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

27. In ∆ABC equation of the right bisectors of the sides AB 30. In the adjacent figure combined equation of the incident
and AC are x + y = 0 and x − y = 0 respectively. If and refracted ray is
A ≡ (5, 7 ), then equation of side BC is Y
(a) 7y = 5 x (b) 5x = y
(c) 5y = 7 x (d) 5y = x
28. Two particles start from the point (2, −1), one moving 2
units along the line x + y = 1 and the other 5 units along
the line x − 2y = 4. If the particles move towards
increasing y, then their new positions are 60°
(2, 0)
(a) (2 − 2, 2 − 1 ); (2 2 + 2, 5 − 1 ) X¢
O P
X

(b) (2 2 + 2, 5 − 1 ); (2 2, 2 + 1 ) 30°
(c) (2 + 2, 2 + 1 ); (2 2 + 2, 5 + 1 ) Y¢

(d) (2 − 2, 5 − 1 ); ( 2 − 1, 2 2 + 2 )
4
(a) ( x − 2 ) 2 + y 2 + (x − 2 )y = 0
29. Let P be (5, 3) and a point R on y = x and Q on the X -axis 3
be such that PQ + QR + RP is minimum, then the (b) ( x − 2 ) 2 + y 2 −
4
(x − 2 )y = 0
coordinates of Q are 3
 17   17  y
(a)  , 0 (b)  , 0 (c) ( x − 2 ) 2 + y 2 + (x − 2) = 0
8  4  3
 17  y
(c)  , 0 (d) (17, 0 ) (d) ( x − 2 ) 2 + y 2 − (x − 2) = 0
2  3

#L The Straight Lines Exercise 2 :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n
The section contains 15 multiple choice questions. 34. If the lines x − 2y − 6 = 0, 3x + y − 4 = 0 and
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c), and (d) out of λx + 4y + λ 2 = 0 are concurrent, then
which MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
(a) λ = 2 (b) λ = − 3 (c) λ = 4 (d) λ = − 4
x y
31. The point of intersection of the lines + = 1 and 35. Equation of a straight line passing through the point of
a b
intersection of x − y + 1 = 0 and 3x + y − 5 = 0 are
x y
+ = 1 lies on perpendicular to one of them is
b a (a) x + y + 3 = 0 (b) x + y − 3 = 0
(a) x − y = 0 (c) x − 3y − 5 = 0 (d) x − 3y + 5 = 0
(b) ( x + y )(a + b ) = 2ab
(c) (lx + my )(a + b ) = (l + m )ab 36. If one vertex of an equilateral triangle of side a lies at the
(d) (lx − my )(a + b ) = (l − m )ab origin and the other lies on the line x − 3y = 0, the
32. The equations (b − c )x + (c − a )y + a − b = 0 and coordinates of the third vertex are
 3a −a   − 3a a 
(b 3 − c 3 )x + (c 3 − a 3 )y + a 3 − b 3 = 0 will represent the (a) ( 0, a ) (b)  ,  (c) ( 0, − a ) (d)  , 
 2 2  2 2
same line, if
(a) b = c (b) c = a 37. If the line ax + by + c = 0, bx + cy + a = 0 and
(c) a = b (d) a + b + c = 0 cx + ay + b = 0 are concurrent (a + b + c ≠ 0) then
33. The area of a triangle is 5. Two of its vertices are (2, 1) (a) a 3 + b 3 + c 3 − 3abc = 0 (b) a = b
and (3, −2). The third vertex lies on y = x + 3. The (c) a = b = c (d) a 2 + b 2 + c 2 − bc − ca − ab = 0
coordinates of the third vertex cannot be
38. A(1, 3) and C(7, 5) are two opposite vertices of a square.
 −3 3   3 −3 
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  The equation of a side through A is
 2 2 4 2 
(a) x + 2y − 7 = 0 (b) x − 2y + 5 = 0
 7 13  −1 11
(c)  ,  (d)  ,  (c) 2 x + y − 5 = 0 (d) 2 x − y + 1 = 0
2 2   4 4
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 159

39. If 6a 2 − 3b 2 − c 2 + 7ab − ac + 4bc = 0, then the family of 43. Consider the equation y − y 1 = m( x − x 1 ). If m and x 1
lines ax + by + c = 0 is concurrent at are fixed and different lines are drawn for different
(a) ( −2, − 3 ) (b) (3, − 1 ) values of y 1 , then
(c) (2, 3 ) (d) ( −3, 1 ) (a) the lines will pass through a fixed point
(b) there will be a set of parallel lines
40. Consider the straight lines x + 2y + 4 = 0 and
(c) all the lines intersect the line x = x1
4 x + 2y − 1 = 0. The line 6x + 6y + 7 = 0 is (d) all the lines will be parallel to the line y = x1
(a) bisector of the angle including origin
(b) bisector of acute angle 44. Let L 1 ≡ ax + by + a 3 b = 0 and L 2 ≡ bx − ay + b 3 a = 0
(c) bisector of obtuse angle be two straight lines. The equations of the bisectors of
(d) None of the above the angle formed by the foci whose equations are
41. Two roads are represented by the equations y − x = 6 λ 1 L 1 − λ 2 L 2 = 0 and λ 1 L 1 + λ 2 L 2 = 0, λ 1 and λ 2 being
non-zero real numbers, are given by
and x + y = 8. An inspection bungalow has to be so
(a) L1 = 0 (b) L2 = 0
constructed that it is at a distance of 100 from each of (c) λ 1L1 + λ 2L2 = 0 (d) λ 2L1 − λ 1L2 = 0
the roads. Possible location of the bungalow is given by
(a) (100 2 + 1, 7 ) (b) (1 − 100 2, 7 ) 45. The equation of the bisectors of the angles between the
x −3 y +5 x −3 y +5
(c) (1, 7 + 100 2 ) (d) (1, 7 − 100 2 ) two intersecting lines = and = are
cos θ sin θ cos φ sin φ
42. If (a, b ) be an end of a diagonal of a square and the other x −3 y +5 x −3 y +5
diagonal has the equation x − y = a, then another vertex = and = , then
cos α sin α β γ
of the square can be θ+φ
(a) (a − b, a ) (b) (a, 0 ) (a) α = (b) β = − sin α
2
(c) ( 0, − a ) (d) (a + b, b )
(c) γ = cosα (d) β = sin α

#L The Straight Lines Exercise 3 :

Paragraph Based Questions
n
The section contains 5 Paragraphs based upon each of (a) a line segment of finite length
the paragraphs 3 multiple choice questions have to be (b) a line of infinite length
answered. Each of these questions has four choices (a), (b), (c) a ray of finite length
(c), and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. (d) a ray of infinite length

Paragraph I 48. Let T ( x , y ), such that T is equidistant from point O and C

(Q. Nos. 46 to 48) with respect to new distance and if T lie in first quadrant,
then T consists of the union of a line segment of finite
For points P ≡ ( x1 , y1 ) and Q = ( x 2 , y 2 ) of the coordinate length and an infinite ray whose labelled diagram is
plane, a new distance d ( P , Q ) is defined by
Y Y
d ( P , Q ) = | x1 − x 2 | + | y1 − y 2 |
Let O ≡ ( 0, 0), A ≡ (1, 2), B ≡ ( 2, 3) and C ≡ ( 4, 3) are four 3.5
3
fixed points on x- y plane.
(a) (b)
46. Let R( x , y ), such that R is equidistant from the point O 1/2
and A with respect to new distance and if 0 ≤ x < 1 and X X
O 1/2 3.5 O 3
0 ≤ y < 2, then R lie on a line segment whose equation is
(a) x + y = 3 (b) x + 2y = 3 Y Y
(c) 2 x + y = 3 (d) 2 x + 2y = 3
3.5
47. Let S( x , y ), such that S is equidistant from points O and B 2.5
(c) (d)
with respect to new distance and if x ≥ 2 and 0 ≤ y < 3,
1/2
then locus of S is X
O 1/2 3.5 X
O 2.5
160 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Paragraph II How to find the image or reflection of a curve?

(Q. Nos. 49 to 51) P

In a triangle ABC, if the equation of sides AB, BC and CA are S=0

2x − y + 4 = 0, x − 2 y − 1 = 0 and x + 3 y − 3 = 0 respectively.
49. Tangent of internal angle A is equal to L=0
(a) −7 (b) −3
1 M
(c) (d) 7
2
S′=0
50. The equation of external bisector of angle B is
(a) x − y − 1 = 0 (b) x − y + 1 = 0
(c) x + y − 5 = 0 (d) x + y + 5 = 0 Q

51. The image of point B w.r.t the side CA is Let the given curve be S : f ( x, y ) = 0 and line mirror
 3 26  3 26 L : ax + by + c = 0. We take a point P on the given curve in
(a)  − ,  (b)  − , − 
 5 5  5 5 parametric form. Suppose Q be the image or reflection of point
P about line mirror L = 0, which again contains the same
 3 26  3 26
(c)  , −  (d)  ,  parameter. Let Q ≡ ( φ( t ), ψ ( t )) , where t is parameter. Now let
5 5 5 5 
x = φ( t ) and y = ψ( t )
Paragraph III Eliminating t, we get the equation of the reflected curve S ′.
(Q. Nos. 52 to 54) 55. The image of the line 3x − y = 2 in the line y = x − 1 is
 2 −2 (a) x + 3y = 2 (b) 3 x + y = 2
A (1, 3) and C  − ,  are the vertices of a triangle ABC and
 5 5 (c) x − 3y = 2 (d) x + y = 2
the equation of the angle bisector of ∠ABC is x + y = 2. 56. The image of the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 in the line x + y = 2
52. Equation of BC is is
(a) 7 x + 3y − 4 = 0 (b) 7 x + 3y + 4 = 0 (a) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2y = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 4y + 6 = 0
(c) 7 x − 3y + 4 = 0 (d) 7 x − 3y − 4 = 0 (c) x + y − 2 x − 2y + 2 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 4y + 4 = 0
2 2

53. Coordinates of vertex B are 57. The image of the parabola x 2 = 4y in the line x + y = a is
 3 17  17 3 
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  (a) ( x − a ) 2 = 4(a − y ) (b) (y − a ) 2 = 4 (a − x )
 10 10  10 10
 5 9  9 5 (c) ( x − a ) = 4(a + y )
2
(d) (y − a ) 2 = 4(a + x )
(c)  − ,  (d)  , − 
 2 2  2 2
Paragraph V
54. Equation of AB is (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
(a) 3 x + 7y = 24 In a ∆ABC, the equation of the side BC is 2 x − y = 3 and its
(b) 3 x + 7y + 24 = 0 circumcentre and orhtocentre are (2, 4 ) and (1, 2 ) respectively.
(c) 13 x + 7y + 8 = 0
(d) 13 x − 7y + 8 = 0 58. Circumradius of ∆ABC is
61 51 41 43
Paragraph IV (a) (b) (c) (d)
5 5 5 5
(Q. Nos. 55 to 57)
59. sin B ⋅ sin C =
Let S ′ = 0 be the image or reflection of the curve S = 0 about 9 9 9 9
(a) (b) (c) (d)
line mirror L = 0. Suppose P be any point on the curve S = 0 2 61 4 61 61 5 61
and Q be the image or reflection about the line mirror L = 0,
then Q will lie on S ′ = 0.
60. The distance of orthocentre from vertex A is
1 6 3 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 5 5 5
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 161

#L The Straight Lines Exercise 4 :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n The section contains 10 questions. The answer to eaeh 66. In a plane there are two families of lines : y = x + n,
question is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 y = − x + n, where n ∈ {0, 1, 2, 3, 4 }. The number of squares
(both inclusive). of the diagonal of length 2 formed by these lines is
61. The number of possible straight lines passing through 67. Given A(0, 0) and B ( x , y ) with x ∈(0, 1) and y > 0. Let the
(2, 3) and forming a triangle with the coordinate axes, slope of line AB be m1 . Point C lies on line x = 1 such
whose area is 12 sq units, is that the slope of BC is equal to m 2 , where 0 < m 2 < m1 .
62. The portion of the line ax + 3y − 1 = 0, intercepted If the area of triangle ABC can be expressed as
(m1 − m 2 ) f ( x ) and the largest possible value of f ( x ) is
between the lines ax + y + 1 = 0 and x + 3y = 0 subtend a
1
right angle at origin, then the value of | a | is λ, then the value of is
λ
63. Let ABC be a triangle and A ≡ (1, 2), y = x be the
68. If ( λ , λ + 1) is an interior point of ∆ABC, where A ≡ (0, 3),
perpendicular bisector of AB and x − 2y + 1 = 0 be the B ≡ ( −2, 0) and C ≡ (6, 1), then the number of integral
angle bisector of ∠C. If the equation of BC is given by values of λ is
ax + by − 5 = 0, then the value of a − 2b is
69. For all real values of a and b, lines
64. A lattice point in a plane is a point for which both (2a + b )x + (a + 3b )y + (b − 3a ) = 0 and λx + 2y + 6 = 0 and
coordinates are integers. If n be the number of lattice λx + 2y + 6 = 0 are concurrent, then the value of | λ | is
points inside the triangle whose sides are x = 0, y = 0 and
9 x + 223y = 2007, then tens place digit in n is 70. If from point (4, 4) perpendiculars to the straight lines
3x + 4y + 5 = 0 and y = mx + 7 meet at Q and R and area
65. The number of triangles that the four lines y = x + 3, of triangle PQR is maximum, then the value of 3m is
y = 2x + 3, y = 3x + 2 and y + x = 3 form is

#L The Straight Lines Exercise 5 :

Matching Type Questions
n
The section contains 5 questions. Questions 1, 2 and 3 72. Match the Columns
have four statement (A, B, C and D) given in Column I
Column I Column II
and four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II and
questions 74 and 75 have three statements (A, B and C) (A) Lines x − 2y − 6 = 0, 3 x + y − 4 = 0 and (p) 2
given in Column I and five statements (p, q, r, s and t) in λx + 4y + λ2 = 0 are concurrent, then the
Column II. Any given statement in Column I can have value of | λ| is
correct matching with one or more statement (s) given in (B) The variable straight lines (q) 3
Column II. 3 x (a + 1) + 4y (a − 1) − 3 (a − 1) = 0 for
different value of ‘a’ passes through a fixed
71. Let L 1 , L 2 , L 3 be three straight lines a plane and n be the point ( p , q ) if λ = p − q, then the value of 4 | λ |
number of circles touching all the lines. (C) λ (r) 4
If the line x + y − 1 − = 0 passing through
2
Column I Column II
the intersection of x − y + 1 = 0 and
(A) The lines are concurrent, then n + 1 is a (p) natural number 3 x + y − 5 = 0, is perpendicular to one of
them, then the value of | λ + 1| is
(B) The lines are parallel, then 2n + 3 is a (q) prime number
(D) If the line y − x − 1 + λ = 0 is equidistant from (s) 5
(C) Two lines are parallel, then n + 2 is a (r) composite number the points (1, − 2 ) and ( 3 , 4 ), then the value of
(D) The lines are neither concurrent nor (s) perfect number | λ| is
parallel, then n + 2 is a
162 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

73. Consider the triangle formed by the lines y + 3x + 2 = 0, (s) 3

3y − 2x − 5 = 0 and 4y + x − 14 = 0 (t) 4

Column I Column II
75. Match the following
(A) If ( 0 , λ ) lies inside the triangle, then (p) 4
integral values are less than | 3λ| Column I Column II
(B) If (1, λ ) lies inside the triangle, then (q) 5 (A) If the distance of any point ( x , y ) (p) ( λ , µ ) lies on x = 3y
integral values are less than | 3λ| from origin is defined as
d ( x , y ) = 2 | x | + 3| y |. If perimeter
(C) If ( λ , 2 ) lies inside the triangle, then (r) 6 and area of figure bounded by
integral values of | 6λ| are d ( x , y ) = 6 are λ unit and µ sq units
respectively, then
(D) If ( λ , 7 / 2 ) lies inside the triangle, then (s) 7
integral value of | 6λ| are (B) If the vertices of a triangle are (6, 0), (q) ( λ , µ ) lies on
(0, 6) and (6, 6). If distance between x 2 − y 2 = 64
circumcentre and orthocentre and
74. Match the following distance between circumcentre and
Column I Column II centroid are λ unit and µ unit
respectively, then
(A) The area bounded by the curve (p) 0
max. {| x | , | y | } = 1 is (C) The ends of the hypotenuse of a (r) ( λ , µ ) lies on
right angled triangle are (6, 0) and x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 6y = 0
(B) If the point (a , a ) lies between the lines (q) 1 (0, 6). If the third vertex is ( λ , µ ),
| x + y | = 6, then [| a | ] is (where [. ] then
denotes the greatest integer function)
(s) ( λ , µ ) lies on
(C) Number of integral values of b for which (r) 2 x 2 − 16y = 16
the origin and the point (1, 1) lie on the
same side of the st. line a 2 x + aby + 1 = 0 (t) ( λ , µ ) lies on
for all a ∈ R ~ { 0 } is x 2 − y 2 = 16

#L The Straight Lines Exercise 6 :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n
Directions (Q. Nos 76 to 83) are Assertion-Reason type 78. Statement I If sum of algebraic distances from points
questions. Each of these question contains two statements. A(1, 2), B (2, 3), C(6, 1) is zero on the line ax + by + c = 0,
Statement I (Assertion) and then 2a + 3b + c = 0
Statement II (Reason) Statement II The centroid of the triangle is (3, 2)
Each of these questions has four alternative choices, only
79. Statement I Let A ≡ (0, 1) and B ≡ (2 , 0) and P be a point
one of which is the correct answer.
You have to select the correct choice. on the line 4 x + 3y + 9 = 0, then the co-ordinates of P
 12 17 
(a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II such that | PA − PB | is maximum is  − ,  .
is a correct explanation for statement I  5 5
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II Statement II | PA − PB | ≤ | AB |
is not a correct explanation for statement I
(c) Statement I is true, statement II is false
80. Statement I The incentre of a triangle formed by the
 π  π
(d) Statement I is false, statement II is true line x cos   + y sin   = π,
9 9
76. Statement I The lines x (a + 2b ) + y(a + 3b ) = a + b are
concurrent at the point (2, − 1)  8π   8π 
x cos   + y sin  
9 9
Statement II The lines x + y − 1 = 0 and 2x + 3y − 1 = 0
intersect at the point (2, − 1)  13π   13π 
= π and x cos   + y sin   = π is (0, 0).
 9   9 
77. Statement I The points (3, 2) and (1, 4) lie on opposite
side of the line 3x − 2y − 1 = 0 Statement II Any point equidistant from the given
Statement II The algebraic perpendicular distance three non-concurrent straight lines in the plane is the
from the given point to the line have opposite sign. incentre of the triangle.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 163

81. Statement I Reflection of the point (5, 1) in the line Statement II The image of point A with respect to
x + y = 0 is ( −1 , − 5). 5x + 5y + 6 = 0 lies on the side BC of the triangle.
Statement II Reflection of a point P(α, β ) in the line 83. Statement I If the point (2a − 5, a 2 ) is on the same side of
 α + α′ β + β′ the line x + y − 3 = 0 as that of the origin, then a ∈(2, 4 ).
ax + by + c = 0 is Q (α ′ , β ′ ), if  ,  lies on
 2 2  Statement II The point ( x 1 , y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) lie on the
the line.
same or opposite sides of the line ax + by + c = 0, as
82. Statement I The internal angle bisector of angle C of a ax 1 + by 1 + c and ax 2 + by 2 + c have the same or
triangle ABC with sides AB, AC and BC as y = 0, opposite signs.
3x + 2y = 0, and 2x + 3y + 6 = 0, respectively, is
5x + 5y + 6 = 0.

The Straight Lines Exercise 7 :

Subjective Type Questions
n In this section, there are 15 subjective questions. pass through a fixed point for all θ. What are the
84. If A ( x 1 , y 1 ) , B ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) are the vertices coordinates of this fixed point and its reflection in the
of a triangle, then show that the equation of the line line x + y = 2 ? Prove that all lines through reflection
joining A and the circumcentre is given by point can be represented by equation

 x y 1  x y 1 (2 cos θ + 3 sin θ) x + (3 cos θ − 5 sin θ) y

= ( 2 − 1) (5 cos θ − 2 sin θ)
(sin 2 B ) x 1 y 1 1 + (sin 2 C )x 1 y 1 1 = 0
 
   
90. P is any point on the line x − a = 0. If A is the point (a , 0)
x 2 y 2 1 x 3 y 3 1
and PQ , the bisector of the angle OPA, meets the X-axis
85. Find the coordinates of the point at unit distance from in Q. Prove that the locus of the foot of the
the lines perpendicular from Q on OP is
3x − 4y + 1 = 0, 8x + 6y + 1 = 0 . ( x − a) 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) = a 2y 2 .
86. A variable line makes intercepts on the coordinate axes, 91. Having given the bases and the sum of the areas of a
the sum of whose squares is constant and equal to k 2 . number of triangles is constant, which have a common
Show that the locus of the foot of the perpendicular vertex. Show that the locus of this vertex is a straight
from the origin to this line is line.
( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 ( x −2 + y −2 ) = k 2 .
92. A (3, 0) and B (6, 0) are two fixed points and U (α, β ) is a
87. A variable line intersects n lines variable point on the plane. AU and BU meet the y-axis
y = mx , (m = 1 , 2 , 3 , ..., n ) in the points at C and D respectively and AD meets OU at V. Prove
A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , ...., A n respectively. that CV passes through (2, 0) for any position of U in the
n 1
If Σ = c (constant). Show that line passes through plane.
p = 1 OA p
93. A variable line is drawn through O to cut two fixed
a fixed point. Find the coordinates of this fixed point straight lines L 1 and L 2 in R and S. A point P is chosen
(O being origin). m +n m n
on the variable line such that = + . Show
88. Given n straight lines and a fixed point O. A straight line OP OR OS
is drawn through O meeting these lines in the points that the locus of P is a straight line passing through the
R1 , R 2 , R 3 , ...., Rn and a point R is taken on it such that point of intersection of L 1 and L 2 .
n n 1 94. A line through A ( − 5, − 4 ) meets the lines
= Σ
OR r = 1 ORr x + 3y + 2 = 0, 2x + y + 4 = 0 and x − y − 5 = 0 at the
points B, C and D respectively, if
Prove that the locus of R is a straight line. 2 2 2
 15   10   6 
89. Prove that all lines represented by the equation   +  = 
 AB   AC   AD 
(2 cos θ + 3 sin θ) x + (3 cos θ − 5 sin θ) y
find the equation of the line.
= 5 cos θ − 2 sin θ
164 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

95. Two fixed straight lines X -axis and y = mx are cut by a  1

97. Let O (0, 0), A (2 , 0) and B 1,
 be the vertices of a
variable line in the points A (a , 0) and B (b, mb )  3
triangle. Let R be the region consisting of all those
respectively. P and Q are the feet of the perpendiculars
drawn from A and B upon the lines y = mx and X -axis. points P inside ∆OAB which satisfy
Show that, if AB passes through a fixed point (h, k ), then d ( P, OA ) ≤ min {d ( P, OB ), d ( P, AB )}
PQ will also pass through a fixed point. Find the fixed
where d denotes the distance from the point to the
point.
corresponding line. Sketch the region R and find its area.
98. Two triangles ABC and PQR are such that the
96. Find the equation of straight lines passing through point perpendiculars from A to QR, B to RP and C to PQ are
(2 , 3) and having an intercept of length 2 units between
concurrent. Show that the perpendicular from P to BC , Q
the straight lines 2x + y = 3 , 2x + y = 5 .
to CA and R to AB are also concurrent.

#L The Straight Lines Exercise 8 :

Questions Asked in Previous 13 Year’s Exams
n This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, (a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is not
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. a correct explanation for statement I
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is not
99. The line parallel to the X-axis and passing through the a correct explanation for statement I
intersection of the lines ax + 2by + 3b = 0 and (c) Statement I is true, statement II is false
bx − 2ay − 3a = 0, where (a, b ) ≠ (0, 0) is [AIEEE 2005, 3M] (d) Statement I is false, statement II is true
3
(a) below the X -axis at a distance of
2
from it 103. Let P = ( −1, 0), Q = (0, 0) and R = (3, 3 3 ) be three point.
2 The equation of the bisector of the angle PQR is
(b) below the X -axis at a distance of from it [AIEEE 2007, 3M]
3
3 3
(c) above the X -axis at a distance of from it (a) x+y =0 (b) x + 3 y = 0
2 2
2 3
(d) above the X -axis at a distance of from it (c) 3 x + y = 0 (d) x + y =0
3 2
100. A straight line through the point A(3, 4 ) is such that its 104. Consider the lines given by
intercept between the axes is bisected at A. Its equation L 1 : x + 3y − 5 = 0
is [AIEEE 2006, 4.5M] L 2 : 3x − ky − 1 = 0
(a) x + y = 7 (b) 3 x − 4y + 7 = 0 L 3 : 5x + 2y − 12 = 0
(c) 4 x + 3y = 24 (d) 3 x + 4y = 25
Match the statements/Expressions in Column I with the
x
101. If (a, a 2 ) falls inside the angle made by the lines y = , statements/Expressions in Column II
2
x > 0 and y = 3x , x > 0, then a belong to [AIEEE 2006, 6M] Column I Column II
 1 k = −9
(a)  0,  (b) (3, ∞ ) (A) L1 , L 2 , L 3 are concurrent, if (p)
 2
(B) one of L1 , L 2 , L 3 is parallel to at (q) 6
1   1 k=−
(c)  , 3 (d)  −3, −  least one of the other two, if 5
2   2
(C) L1 , L 2 , L 3 form a triangle, if (r) 5
k=
102. Lines L 1 : y − x = 0 and L 2 : 2x + y = 0 intersect the line 6
L 3 : y + 2 = 0 at P and Q respectively. The bisector of the
(D) L1 , L 2 , L 3 do not form a triangle, if (s) k =5
acute angle between L 1 and L 2 intersects L 3 at R.
[IIT-JEE 2007, 3M] [IIT-JEE 2008, 6M]

Statement I The ratio PR : RQ equals 2 2 : 5 because 105. The perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining
P (1, 4) and Q (k , 3) has y-intercept −4. Then a possible
Statement II In any triangle, bisector of an angle
value of k is [AIEEE 2008, 3M]
divides the triangle into two similar triangles. (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) −2 (d) −4
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 165

106. The lines p ( p 2 + 1)x − y + q = 0 and 111. A ray of light along x + 3y = 3 gets reflected upon
( p + 1) x + ( p + 1)y + 2q = 0 are perpendicular to a
2 2 2
reaching X -axis, the equation of the reflected ray is
common line for [AIEEE 2009, 4M] [JEE Main 2013, 4M]
(a) exactly one values of p (b) exactly two values of p (a) y = x + 3 (b) 3y = x − 3
(c) more than two values of p (d) no value of p (c) y = 3 x − 3 (d) 3y = x − 1
x y
107. The line L given by + = 1 passes through the point 112. For a > b > c > 0, the distance between (1, 1) and the
5 b
point of intersection of the lines ax + by + c = 0 and
(13, 32). The line K is parallel to L and has the equation bx + ay + c = 0 is less than 2 2. Then
x y
+ = 1. Then the distance between L and K is [JEE Advanced 2013, 3M]
c 3 [AIEEE 2010, 4M]
(a) a + b − c > 0 (b) a − b + c < 0
17 (c) a − b + c > 0 (d) a + b − c < 0
(a) 17 (b)
15 113. Let PS be the median of the triangle with vertices P(2, 2),
23 23
(c) (d) Q(6, − 1) and R(7, 3). The equation of the line passing
17 15
through (1, − 1) and parallel to PS is [JEE Main 2014, 4M]
108. A straight line L through the point (3, − 2) is inclined at (a) 4 x + 7y + 3 = 0 (b) 2 x − 9y − 11 = 0
(c) 4 x − 7y − 11 = 0 (d) 2 x + 9y + 7 = 0
an angle 60° to the line 3x + y = 1. If L also intersects
the X -axis, then the equation of L is [IIT-JEE 2011, 3M] 114. Let a, b, c and d be non-zero numbers. If the point of
(a) y + 3 x + 2 − 3 3 = 0 (b) y − 3 x + 2 + 3 3 = 0 intersection of the lines 4ax + 2ay + c = 0 and
(c) 3y − x + 3 + 2 3 = 0 (d) 3y + x − 3 + 2 3 = 0 5bx + 2by + d = 0 lies in the fourth quadrant and is
equidistant from the two axes, then [JEE Main 2014, 4M]
109. The lines L 1 : y − x = 0 and L 2 : 2x + y = 0 intersect the (a) 3bc − 2ad = 0 (b) 3bc + 2ad = 0
line L 3 : y + 2 = 0 at P and Q respectively. The bisector of (c) 2bc − 3ad = 0 (d) 2bc + 3ad = 0
the acute angle between L 1 and L 2 intersects L 3 at R . 115. For a point P in the plane, let d 1 ( P ) and d 2 ( P ) be the
[AIEEE 2011, 4M] distance of the point P from the lines x − y = 0 and
Statement I : The ratio PR : RQ equals 2 2 : 5 x + y = 0 respectively. The area of the region R
consisting of all points P lying in the first quadrant of
Statement II : In any triangle, bisector of an angle
the plane and satisfying 2 ≤ d 1 ( P ) + d 2 ( P ) ≤ 4, is
divides the triangle into two similar triangles.
[JEE Advanced 2014, 3M]
(a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is not
a correct explanation for statement I. 116. The number of points, having both co-ordinates as
integers, that lie in the interior of the triangle with
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is false.
vertices (0, 0), (0, 41) and (41, 0) is
(c) Statement I is false, statement II is true. [JEE Advanced 2015, 4M]
(d) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is a (a) 820 (b) 780
correct explanation for statement I (c) 901 (d) 861
117. Two sides of a rhombus are along the lines, x − y + 1 = 0
110. If the line 2x + y = k passes through the point which
and 7 x − y − 5 = 0. If its diagonals intersect at ( −1, − 2),
divides the line segment joining the points (1, 1) and then which one of the following is a vertex of this
(2, 4) in the ratio 3 : 2, then k equals [AIEEE 2012, 4M] rhombus? [JEE Main 2016, 4M]
29  1 8  10 7
(a) (b) 5 (a)  , −  (b)  − , − 
5  3 3  3 3
11
(c) 6 (d) (c) ( −3, − 9 ) (d) ( −3, − 8 )
5
166 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Answers
Exercise for Session 1 Exercise for Session 6
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (b) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (a,b) 4. (a) 5. (a)
6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (a,d) 10. (c) 6. (c)  1
7. m ∈  −1, 
11. (d) 12. y = 9 13. (2 + 2 3 , 4) and (2 − 2 3 , 0)  5
 5π −1  π 5π π
9. θ ∈  0,  ∪ 
132
14. PQ = 15. 4 2 units 8. θ ∈  0, − tan 3 , 
12 3 + 5  6   12   12 2 
π 5π
16. 83x − 35 y + 92 = 0 17. x + y − 11 = 0 10. θ ∈  ∪  2nπ, 2nπ +   ∪  ∪  2mπ + , 2mπ  
n = z  6  m = z  6 
Exercise for Session 2 11. Outside 12. 29x − 2 y + 33 = 0
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (d)
7. (c,d) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d) Chapter Exercises
13. The two points are on the opposite side of the given line. 1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (b)
15. 3x − 4 y = 0 and 3x − 4 y − 10 = 0 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (b)
17. 7x + y − 31 = 0 18. 2x + 2 y + 2=0 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (c)
19. (b) 20. (b) 21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (a)
Exercise for Session 3 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (a)
31. (a,b,c,d) 32. (a,b,c,d) 33. (a,c) 34. (a,d)
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (a)
35. (b,d) 36. (a,b,c,d) 37. (a,c,d) 38. (a,d) 39. (a,b) 40. (a,b)
7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (a,b) 11. (c) 12. (c) 41. (a,b,c,d) 42. (b,d) 43. (a,b,c) 44. (a,b) 45. (a,b,c)
13. 2a + b2 + b = 0 16. (i) y = 3 (ii) x = 4, (iii) 3x + 4 y = 24 46. (d) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (a) 50. (d) 51. (a)
−5 −5 
18.  , 
52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (d) 57. (b)
 3 3 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (b) 61. (3) 62. (6) 63. (5)
64. (8) 65. (3) 66. (9) 67. (8) 68. (2) 69. (2)
Exercise for Session 4 70. (4) 71. (A) → (p); (B) → (p, q); (C) → (p, r) (D) → (p, r, s)
1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (b) 72. (A) → (p, r); (B) → (q); (C) → (q, s) (D) → (p)
7. (c) 8. (a) 9. x = 7 and x + 3 y = 7 + 9 3 73. (A) → (p, q); (B) → (p, q, r, s); (C) → (p, q, r, s); (D) → (p, q, r, s)
10. x (4 3 + 3) + y(4 − 3 3 ) = 11 − 2 3 and 74. (A) → (t); (B) → (p, q, r); (C) → (s)
4 3 75. (A) → (q, s); (B) → (p, t); (C) → (r) 76. (a) 77. (a)
y (4 + 3 3 ) − x (4 3 − 3) = 11 + 2 3,
15 78. (d) 79. (d) 80. (c) 81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (d)
6 −1 2 −13   3   −8 3 
 1 73 
11.  − ,  and  ,   1 77  85.  ,  ,  − ,  
, 0 ,  
, , 
 14 28   16 32   5 10   5 10   2   5 10 
 n
1 n 
12.  0,  and (0, 0) 13. x + 2 y − 6 = 0
p
5 ±∑ ±∑ 
 2  (1 + p )2
(1 + p ) 
2
87.  p = 1 , p =1  94. 2x + 3 y + 22 = 0
14. 3x = 19 15. 10x − 10 y − 3 = 0  c c 
 
 
Exercise for Session 5  h + mk mh − k 
95.  ,  96. 3x + 4 y − 18 = 0 and x − 2 = 0
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (c)  1 + m2 1 + m2 
6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (b) 97. (2 − 3 ) sq units. 99. (a) 100. (c) 101. (c) 102. (c) 103. (c)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (3, − 2) 14. 14x + 23 y − 40 = 0
103. (c) 104. (A) → (s); (B) → (p, q); (C) → (r); (D) → (p, q, s)

15. 4x − y + 6 = 0,  − , 
4 14 105.(a) 106. (a) 107. (c) 108. (b) 109. (b) 110. (c) 111. (b)
16. (2)
 5 5 112.(a) 113. (d) 114. (a) 115. (6) 116. (b) 117. (a)
Solutions
1. Equation of line passing through (2, 0) and perpendicular to 4. We have, y = cos x cos( x + 2 ) − cos2( x + 1 )
ax + by + c = 0 1
Then, required equation is y = {2 cos x cos( x + 2 ) − 2 cos2( x + 1 )}
2
b 1
y − 0 = (x − 2) = {cos(2 x + 2 ) + cos2 − 1 − cos(2 x + 2 )}
a 2
ay = bx − 2b 1
= (cos2 − 1 )
⇒ ay − bx + 2b = 0 2
2 2 1 2m 1
2. Q + + = = (1 − 2 sin 2 1 − 1 )
1 !9 ! 3 !7 ! 5 !5 ! n ! 2
1 2 × 10 ! 2 × 10 ! 10 !  2m = − sin 2 1
 + + =
10 !  1 !9 ! 3 !7 ! 5 !5 !  n ! which is a straight line passing through ( λ , − sin 2 1 ); ∀ λ ∈ R
1 10 2m and parallel to the X -axis.
⇒ {2 C1 + 210C 3 + 10C 5 } =
10 ! n! x y
5. Let line + =1 …(i)
1 10 2m a b
{ C1 + C 3 + C 5 + C 7 + 10C 9 } =
10 10 10
10 ! n! Its passes through (2, 2), then
1 10 − 1 2m 2 2
⇒ (2 ) = + =1
10 ! n! a b
∴ m = 9 and n = 10 ⇒ 2(a + b ) = ab …(ii)
Hence, x − y + 1 = 0 and x + y + 3 = 0 are perpendicular to Y
each other, then orthocentre is the point of intersection which
is ( −2, − 1 ) (0, b) B
∴ −2 = 2m − 2n and −1 = m − n
∴ Point is (2m − 2n, m − n ).
3. ∴ Required area
6
1 8  64 2
= 4 ×  × 4 = = …(i)
2 3  3 3 X¢
O (a, 0) A
X

Q f ( x + y ) = f ( x ) f (y ) Y¢
Y 1
Q Area of ∆AOB = ab = | λ | (given)
2
(0, 4) ∴ ab = 2| λ |
from Eq. (ii), a + b = | λ |
Hence, required equation is
(–8/3, 0) (8/3, 0)
X¢
x 2 − (a + b ) x + ab = 0
X
O
or x 2 − | λ | x + 2| λ | = 0
Value of (a 2x + aby + 1 ) at (1, 1 )
6. >0
(0, –4) Value of (a 2x + aby + 1 ) at ( 0, 0 )
a 2 + ab + 1
or > 0; ∀ a ∈ R
Y¢ 1
or a 2 + ab + 1 > 0; ∀ a ∈ R
∴ f (2 ) = f (1 ) f (1 ) = 2 2

∴ D<0
f (3 ) = f (1 + 2 ) = f (1 ) f (2 ) = 2 3
………………………………………… ⇒ b −4<0
2

………………………………………… ⇒ −2 < b < 2 but b > 0

∴ f (n ) = 2n ∴ 0 <b <2
2 6 f (6 ) i.e. b ∈( 0, 2 )
∴ Area = = sq units
3 3
168 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

7. Equation of L is a +
x y
= 1 and let the axis be rotated through 3 − 1 ( 3 − 1 )( 3 − 1 )
b Slope of BD = = = 3 −2
−1 − 3 −2
an angle θ and let ( X , Y ) be the new coordinates of any point
P ( x, y ) in the plane, then Y
C
x = X cosθ − Y sin θ, y = X sin θ + Y cosθ, the equation of the
line with reference to original coordinates is
2
x y
+ =1 D
a b E
X cosθ − Y sin θ X sin θ + Y cosθ 90° B
i.e. + =1 …(i) 2
a b 2
75°
and with reference to new coordinates is 30°
X
X Y (0, 0) A
+ =1 …(ii)
p q
Comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get ∴ Equation of BD is
cosθ sin θ 1 y − 1 = ( 3 − 2 )( x − 3 )
+ = …(iii)
a b p ⇒ (2 − 3 ) x + y = 2( 3 − 1 )
sin θ cosθ 1
and − + = …(iv) and equation of the circumcircle of the triangle ABE
a b q (Apply diametric form as AB is diameter)
Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get ( x − 0 )( x − 3 ) + (y − 0 )(y − 1 ) = 0
1 1 1 1 ⇒ x2 + y 2 − x 3 − y = 0
2
+ 2 = 2 + 2
a b p q
11. If (α, β) be the image of (4, 1) w.r.t y = x − 1, then (α, β) = (2, 3),
8. d (x, y ) = max{| x |, | y | } …(i) say point Q
but d ( x, y ) = a …(ii) Y
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get R
a = max{| x |, | y | } R¢ Q (3, 3)
(2, 3)
if | x | > | y |, then a = | x |
∴ x = ±a P
45°
and if | y | > | x |, then a = | y | (4, 1)
45°
∴ y =±a O (1, 0)
X
Therefore locus represents a straight line.
sin 2 α After translation through a distance 1 unit along the positive
9. P1 = | m 2 cosα + 2m sin α + | direction of X -axis at the point whose coordinate are R ≡ (3, 3 ).
cosα π
(m cosα + sin α ) 2 After rotation through are angle about the origin in the
= 4
| cosα | anticlockwise direction, then R goes toR ′ such that
 sin 2 α OR = OR′ = 3 2
p 2 = mm′ cos α + (m + m′ )sin α + 
 cosα  ∴The coordinates of the final point are ( 0, 3 2 ).
|(m cosα + sin α )| | m′ cosα + sin α | 12. Q A ≡ ( 0, 0 ); B ≡ (2, 0 ); C ≡ (2, 2 ); D ≡ ( 0, 2 )
=
| cosα | (i) f1( x, y ) → (y , x ), then
sin 2 α A ≡ ( 0, 0 ); B ≡ ( 0, 2 ); C ≡ (2, 2 ), D ≡ (2, 0 )
and p 3 = | m′ 2 cosα + 2m′ sin α + |
cosα (ii) f 2( x, y ) → ( x + 3y , y ), then
(m′ cosα + sin α ) 2 A ≡ ( 0, 0 ); B ≡ (6, 2 ); C ≡ (8, 2 ), D ≡ (2, 0 )
= x −y x + y
| cosα | (iii) f 3( x, y ) →  ,  , then
 2 2 
Q p 22 = p1 p 3
A ≡ ( 0, 0 ); B ≡ (2, 4 ); C ≡ (3, 5 ), D ≡ (1, 1 )
Hence, p1, p 2, p 3 are in GP.
Now, AB = DC = 2 5, AD = BC = 2
10. Side of the square = 2 unit
and AC = 34, BD = 10
Coordinates of B, C and D are ( 3, 1 ), ( 3 − 1, 3 + 1 ) and
i.e. AC ≠ BD
( −1, 3 ) respectively.
∴ Final figure is a parallelogram.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 169

AN It is clear from the figure

13. Let =λ
BN  −3 π  π 
α ∈  −π,  ∪  , π .
 a aλ   4  4 
Then, coordinate of N are  , 
1 + λ 1 + λ 16. Q Equation of AB is x + y = 1, then coordinates of A and B are
Q Slope of AB = − 1 (1, 0) and (0, 1) respectively.
Y  1 1
∴ Coordinates of P are  , 
 2 2
B(0, a)
Q PP1 is perpendicular to OA
N Y
x+y= a
M B(0, 1)
X
O A(a, 0)

∴ Slope of MN = 1 P
∴ Equation on MN is

x+
M1

y=
M2
aλ a 1−λ
y − =x− ⇒ x − y = a

1
 A(1, 0)
1+λ 1+λ  λ + 1 X
O P3 P2 P1
  λ − 1 
So, the coordinates of M are  0,a  
  λ + 1 
Equation of OP is y = x
3
Therefore, area of ∆AMN = area of ∆OAB Then, OP1 = PP1 =
1
8 2
1 3 1
⇒ ⋅ AN ⋅ MN = ⋅ a ⋅ a We have, (OMn − 1 ) 2 = (OPn ) 2 + ( Pn Mn − 1 ) 2
2 8 2
1 λ 2 2  = 2(OPn ) 2 {Qy = x}
⇒ ⋅
a
⋅
a = ⋅ 1 a ⋅ a
3
2 1 + λ 1 + λ 8 2 = 2α n2 (say)

a λ 2
3 1 Also, (OPn − 1 ) = (OMn − 1 ) 2 + ( Pn − 1Mn − 1 ) 2
2
⇒ = ⋅ a2
(1 + λ ) 2
8 2 1
α n2 − 1 = 2α n2 + α n2 − 1
1 2
∴ λ = 3 or λ = 1 2
3 ⇒ α n − 1 = 2α n2
1 2
For λ = , then M lies outside the segment OB and hence the
3 1
⇒ αn = αn − 1
required value of λ = 3. 2
14. Let S = (x, y ), given (SQ )2 + (SR )2 = 2(SP )2 1
∴ OPn = α n = α n − 1
2
⇒ ( x + 1 ) 2 + y 2 + ( x − 2 ) 2 + y 2 = 2[( x − 1 2 ) + y 2 ]
1 1
⇒ 2 x 2 + 2y 2 − 2 x + 5 = 2 ( x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 1 ) = 2 αn − 2 = 3 αn − 3
2 2
3 ……………………………………………
⇒ 2x + 3 = 0 ⇒ x = −
2 ……………………………………………
A straight line parallel to Y -axis. ……………………………………………
Value of (3 x − 2y + 1 ) at A 1
15. >0 = n − 1 α1
Value of (3 x − 2y + 1 ) at B 2
(sin α − 3 ) − (cosα − 2 ) + 1 1  1 1
⇒ >0 = n −1   = n.
(3 − 2 + 1 ) 2  2 2
⇒ sin α − cosα > 0 ⇒ sin α > cosα 17. Let O ≡ (0, 0), A ≡ (1, 1) and B ≡ (9, 1)
Y 1
Area of ∆OAB = ×8 ×1 = 4
2
It is clear that 1 < c < 9
–p –3p/4
X¢ X  c
–p O p p p and M ≡ (c, 1 ) and N ≡ c, 
2 4 2  9

Y¢
170 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y 20. Let A ≡ (3, 4), B ≡ (0, y ), C ≡ (x, 0), D ≡ (8, 2)

∴ Slope of AB = − Slope of BC
x=c
y −4 0 −y
A(1, 1) (a, 1) ⇒ =− 
M B 0 −3  x − 0
x
N y= 9 or 4 x − xy = 3y …(i)
X
O and slope of BC = − slope of CD
0 −y  2 − 0
⇒   = − 
 x − 0 8 − x
∴ Area of ∆BMN = 2 (given) or 2 x + xy = 8y …(ii)
1  c adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
⇒ × (9 − c ) × 1 −  = 2
2  9 6 x = 11y …(iii)
or (9 − c ) = 36
2 from Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
13 1
or 9 − c = ± 6 ⇒ c = 3 or 15 x= =4
3 3
but 1 <c <9
∴ c =3 21. Y y=x

18. The three lines are concurrent if (–n, m) C B (n, m)

1 2 −9
3 −5 −5 = 0 A (m, n)
a b −1
X¢ X
or 5a + 2b = 1 O
which is three of the line 5 x + 2y = 1 passes through (a, b ).
19. Q BC = AC
⇒ 2 2 + ( λ − 1 ) 2 = λ2
D (–n, –m) E (n,–m)
⇒ 4 = λ2 − ( λ − 1 ) 2 Y¢
= (2 λ − 1 )(1 )
Area of rectangle BCDE = (2n )(2m )
5
∴ λ= = 4mn
2
1
and area of ∆ABE = × 2m × (m − n )
C 2
(2, l)
= m(m − n )
∴ Area of pentagon = 4mn + m(m − n )
B
(0, 1) = m (m + 3n )
22. The equation of the line L, be y − 2 = m(x − 8), m < 0
D
 2 
coordinates of P and Q are P 8 − , 0 and Q( 0, 2 − 8m ).
A (2, 0)
 m 
O
x=2 2
So, OP + OQ = 8 − + 2 − 8m
m
x y  1
Q Equation. of AB is + = 1, D ≡ 1,  (mid-point of AB) 2
2 1  2 = 10 + + 8( −m ) ≥
( −m )
∴ Equation of CD is 2x − y = µ
2
QCD pass through D, thus 10 + 2 × 8( −m ) ≥ 18
( −m )
1 3
2 − = µ or µ = So, absolute minimum value of OP + OQ = 18
2 2
3 23. Let the two perpendiculars through the origin intersect
∴ Equation of CD is 2x − y = …(i) 2x + y = a at A and B so that the triangle OAB is isosceles.
2
and Eq. (i) of line ⊥ to AC and pass through B is y = 1 …(ii) OM = length of perpendicular from O to
a
from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get AB, OM = .
5
5 
Orthocentre ≡  , 1
4 
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 171

Y 27. Q B is the reflection of A(5, 7) w.r.t the line x + y = 0

B ∴ B ≡ ( −7, − 5 )
and C is the reflection of A(5, 7 ) w.r.t the line x − y = 0
A (5, 7)
M

= 0
2x+y=a
x+ x–y
O A X M y =0 N

Also, AM = MB = OM (0, 0)
2a
⇒ AB = B C
5
∴ C ≡ (7, 5 )
1
Area of ∆OAB = ⋅ AB ⋅ OM 5+5
2 ∴ Equation of BC is y + 5 = ( x + 7 ) or 7y = 5 x
7+7
1 2a a a2
= ⋅ ⋅ = sq units 28. Let P ≡ (2, − 1)
2 5 5 5
24. Solving given equations, we get P(2, − 1 ) goes 2 units along x + y = 1 upto A and 5 units along
5 x − 2y = 4 upto B.
x= Now, slope of x + y = − 1 is −1 = tanθ (say)
3 + 4m
∴ θ = 135 °
x is an integer, if 3 + 4m = 1, − 1, 5, −5 1
−2 −4 2 −8 and slope x − 2y = 4 is = tan φ (say)
or m= , , , 2
4 4 4 4 1 2
1 1 ∴ sin φ = , cos φ =
or m = − , − 1, , − 2 5 5
2 2
The coordinates of A
Hence, m has two integral values.
i.e. (2 + 2 cos135 °, − 1 + 2 sin 135 ° )
25. Let the coordinates of A be (a, 0). Then the slope of the or (2 − 2, 2 − 1 )
reflected ray is
3−0 The coordinates of B
= tanθ (say) …(i) i.e. (2 + 5 cos φ, − 1 + 5 sin φ ) or (2 + 2 5, 5 − 1 )
5 −a
Then the slope of the incident ray 29. Q P ≡ (5, 3)
2−0 Let P′ and P′′ be the images of P w.r.t y = x and y = 0 (X -axis)
= = tan( π − θ )
1 −a respectively, then P′ ≡ (3, 5 ) and P′′ ≡ (5, − 3 )
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Q PQ + QR + RP is minimum
tan θ + tan( π − θ ) = 0 ∴ P ′ , R, Q, P ′′ are collinear.
3 2 P¢(3, 5)
⇒ + =0 Y x
5 −a 1 −a y=
⇒ 3 − 3a + 10 − 2a = 0 R P(5, 3)
13
a=
5
X¢ X
 13  Q
Thus, the coordinate of A is  , 0 O
5 
26. Lines 5x + 3y − 2 + λ(3x − y − 4) = 0 are concurrent at (1, −1) P¢¢(5, –3)
and lines
Y¢
x − y + 1 + µ(2 x − y − 2 ) = 0 are concurrent at (3, 4).
∴ Equation of P ′ P ′′ is
Thus equation of line common to both family is
4+1  5 + 3
y +1= (x − 1) y +3=  (x − 5)
3 −1  3 − 5
or 5 x − 2y − 7 = 0 or 4 x + y = 17
∴ a = 5, b = − 2 ⇒a + b = 3  17 
∴ Q ≡  , 0 (QQ on Y -axis)
4 
172 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

30. Equation of incident ray is 35. Equation of any line through the point of intersection of the
y − 0 = tan(90 ° + 60 ° )( x − 2 ) given lines is (3 x + y − 5 ) + λ ( x − y + 1 ) = 0.
1 Since this line is perpendicular to one of the given lines
or y =− (x − 2) 3+λ 1
3 = − 1 or
or (x − 2) + y 3 = 0 λ −1 3

and equation of refracted ray is ⇒ λ = − 1 or −5, therefore the required straight line is
y − 0 = − tan 60 °( x − 2 ) x + y −3 = 0
or y = − 3(x − 2) or x − 3y + 5 = 0
y 36. If B lies on Y -axis, then coordinates of B are (0, a ) or (0, − a )
or (x − 2) + =0
3 Y
∴ Combined equation is B
 y  60°
[( x − 2 ) + y 3 ] ( x − 2 ) +  =0
 3
a A
4 A 60° x– 3y=0
i.e. (x − 2)2 + y 2 + ( x − 2 )y = 0 a
3 60°
O
x y x y 30° 30°
31. Point of intersection of + = 1 and + = 1 is X¢
30° 30°
X
a b b a
 ab 60°
ab  A¢¢
P ,  , this point P satisfies alternates (a), (b), (c) A¢
a + b a + b
A¢
and (d).
32. The two lines will be identical if their exists some real number B¢
k such that
Y¢
b 3 − c 3 = k(b − c ), c 3 − a 3 = k(c − a ) and a 3 − b 3 = k(a − b )
⇒ b − c = 0 or b 2 + c 2 + bc = k If third vertex in IV quadrant or in II quadrant, then its
coordinates are (a cos30 °, − a sin 30 ° ) and ( −a cos30 °, a sin 30 ° )
c − a = 0 or c 2 + a 2 + ca = k a 3 a  a 3 a
i.e.  , −  and  − , ,
and a − b = 0 or a 2 + b 2 + ab = k  2 2  2 2
⇒ a = b or b = c or c = a
37. Since, ax + by + c = 0, bx + cy + a = 0 and cx + ay + b = 0 are
or b 2 + c 2 + bc = c 2 + a 2 + ca
concurrent
⇒ b = c or c = a
a b c 
or a = b or a + b + c = 0 b c a = 0
∴  
33. As the third vertex lies on the line y = x + 3, its coordinates c a b
are of the form ( x, x + 3 ). The area of the triangle with vertices
(2, 1), (3, −2) and ( x, x + 3 ) is given by ⇒ 3abc − a 3 − b 3 − c 3 = 0
x x + 3 1 ⇒ − (a + b + c )(a 2 + b 2 + c 2 − ab − bc − ca) = 0
1 
|2 1 1| = |2 x − 2| = 5 (given) a+b+c≠0
2
3 − 2 1  ∴ a 2 + b 2 + c 2 − ab − bc − ca = 0
−3 7 1
∴ 2x − 2 = ± 5 ⇒ x = , {(a − b ) 2 + (b − c ) 2 + (c − a ) 2 } = 0
2 2 2
 7 13 As a, b, c are real numbers
Thus, the coordinates of the third vertex are  ,  or
2 2  ∴ b − c = 0, c − a = 0, a − b = 0
 −3 3  ⇒ a =b =c
 , .
 2 2
38. Q E ≡ (4, 4)
1 −2 −6
∴ zC = 7 + 5i , z E = 4 + 4i
34. 3 1 −4 = 0 Now, (in ∆BEC)
λ 4 λ2
π
zB − zE i
⇒ λ + 2λ − 8 = 0
2 =e 2 =i
zC − z E
∴ ( λ + 4 )( λ − 2 ) = 0 ⇒ z B − 4 − 4i = i (7 + 5i − 4 − 4i )
⇒ λ = − 4, 2 or z B = 3 + 7i
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 173

∴ B ≡ (3, 7 ), then D ≡ (5, 1 ) After solving, we get

B C (7, 5) x1 = 1 ± 100 2, 1
and y1 = 7, 7 ± 100 2
Hence, (1 + 100 2, 7 ), (1 − 100 2, 7 ),

E
(1, 7 + 100 2 ), (1, 7 − 100 2 )
42. Equation of the other diagonal is x + y = λ which pass
through (a, b ), then
A(1, 3) D a+b=λ
∴ Equation of other diagonal is
Equation of AB is
7 −3 x + y =a + b
y −3 = ( x − 1 ) or 2 x − y + 1 = 0 i.e. then centre of the square is the point of intersection of
3 −1
 b b
and equation of AD is x − y = a and x + y = a + b is a + ,  , then vertex
 2 2
1 −3
y −3 = ( x − 1 ) or x + 2y − 7 = 0
5 −1 b b
a+ ,
B 2 2
39. Given,
6a 2 − 3b 2 − c 2 + 7ab − ac + 4bc = 0 A(a, b)
⇒ 6a + (7b − c )a − (3b − 4bc + c ) = 0
2 2 2

− (7b − c ) ± (7b − c ) 2 + 24 (3b 2 − 4bc + c 2 ) O

⇒ a=
12
⇒ 12a + 7b − c = ± (11b − 5c ) C
⇒ 12a − 4b + 4c = 0
D
or 12a + 18b − 6c = 0
⇒ 3a − b + c = 0 C ≡ (2a + b − a, b − b )
or −2a − 3b + c = 0 ∴ C ≡ (a + b, 0 )
Hence (3, − 1 ) or ( −2, − 3 ) lies on the line ax + by + c = 0, If B ≡z
40. x + 2y + 4 = 0 and 4x + 2y − 1 = 0  b ib 
z − a + +  π
⇒ x + 2y + 4 = 0  2 2 BO i 2
Then, = e = i (Q BO = AO)
and −4 x − 2y + 1 = 0  b ib  AO
(a + ib ) − a + + 
Here, (1 )( −4 ) + (2 )( −2 ) = − 8 < 0  2 2
∴Bisector of the angle including the acute angle bisectors and  b ib   b ib  ib b
⇒ z − a + +  = i  − +  = − −
origin is  2 2  2 2 2 2
x + 2y + 4 ( −4 x − 2y + 1 ) ∴ z =a
=
5 2 5 ∴ B ≡ (a, 0 )
⇒ 6 x + 6y + 7 = 0 then, D ≡ (a + b, b )
41. Let position of bunglow is P (x1, y1 ), then PM = 100 and Hence, other vertices are (a + b, 0 ), (a, 0 ) and (a + b, b ).
PN = 100 43. (y − y1 ) − m(x − x1 ) = 0 is family of lines
x1 + y1 − 8
∴ = ± 100 ∴ y − y1 = 0, x − x1 = 0
2
Then, y = y1 and x = x1
x1 − y1 + 6
and = ± 100 44. Given lines L1 = 0 and L2 = 0 are perpendicular and given
2
Y bisectors are λ 1L1 − λ 2L2 = 0 and λ 1L1 + λ 2L2 = 0
∴bisectors are perpendicular to each other.
(0, 8) (0, 6) Hence, bisectors of λ 1L1 − λ 2L2 = 0 and λ 1L1 + λ 2L2 = 0 are
M L1 = 0 and L2 = 0.
 θ + φ
y–x=6 P(x, y) x+y=8 45. ∴ One bisector makes an angle   with X -axis, then
 2 
X′ X  θ + φ
(–6, 0) O (8, 0) other bisector makes an angle 90 ° +   with X -axis.
 2 
Y′
174 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

f–q
48. QOT = CT
2 ⇒ | x − 0| + | y − 0| = | x − 4| + | y − 3|
Q x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0
⇒ x + y = | x − 4| + | y − 3|
f–q f+q Case I : If 0 ≤ x ≤ 4 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 3
q+ =
q f 2 2 x + y = 4 − x + 3 −y
(3, –5) 7
⇒ x+y =
2
Case II : If 0 ≤ x ≤ 4 and y ≥ 3
∴ Equations of bisectors are x + y = 4− x + y − 3
x −3 y +5 1
= …(i) ⇒ x=
 θ + φ  θ + φ 2
cos  sin  
 2   2  Case III : If x ≥ 4 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 3
x −3 y +5 x + y = x − 4 + 3 −y
and =
 π θ+ φ  π θ+ φ y = −1 / 2 (impossible)
cos +  sin  + 
2 2  2 2  Case IV : If x ≥ 4 and y ≥ 3
x −3 y +5 x + y = x − 4 + y −3
⇒ = …(ii)
 θ + φ  θ + φ ⇒ 0 = −7 (impossible)
− sin   cos 
 2   2  Combining all cases, we get
x −3 y + 5 7
But given bisector are = x + y = , ∀ 0 ≤ x ≤ 4 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 3
cosα sin α 2
θ+φ x −3 y + 5 1
∴ α= and = [from Eq. (i)]…(iii) and x = , ∀ 0 ≤ x ≤ 4 and y ≥ 3
2 β γ 2
 θ + φ Y
∴ β = − sin   = − sin α [from Eq. (ii)]
 2 
 θ + φ 3
and γ = cos   = cosα
 2 
46. QOR = AR
⇒ | x − 0| + | y − 0| = | x −1| + | y − 2| X
O 1/2 3.5
⇒ | x| + | y | = | x − 1| + | y − 2|
Q 0 ≤ x < 1 and 0 ≤ y < 2 Sol. (Q. Nos. 49 to 51)
∴ x + y = − ( x − 1 ) − (y − 2 ) AB : 2 x − y + 4 = 0,
⇒ 2 x + 2y = 3 BC : x − 2y − 1 = 0
47. OS = BS and CA : x + 3y − 3 = 0
⇒ | x − 0| + | y − 0| = | x − 2| + | y − 3| Y
Y

C
X¢ O
infinte ray X

X
O 1 2 B
Y¢

∴ mAB = m1 = 2
⇒ | x| + | y | = | x − 2| + | y − 3| 1
Q x ≥ 2 and 0 ≤ y < 3 mBC = m2 =
2
∴ x + y = x −2 + 3 −y 1
⇒ 2y = 1 and mCA = m3 = −
3
1
∴ y = Q m1 > m2 > m3
2
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 175

49. Q ∠A is obtuse 2 9
− −
m3 − m1 5  5
∴ tan A = or y − 2 − = 5 2 x + 
1 + m3 m1 2 −2 + 5  2
5 2
1
− −2 or 7 x + 3y + 4 = 0
= 3 = −7
2 53. Coordinates of vertex B are (λ, 2 − λ )
1−
3  5 9
i.e. − ,  [from Eq. (i)]
50. For external bisector of B  2 2
AB : 2 x − y + 4 = 0
54. A ≡ (1, 3) and B ≡  − , 
5 9
BC : − x + 2y + 1 = 0  2 2
Q (2 )( −1 ) + ( −1 )(2 ) = − 4 < 0 ∴ Equation of AB is
∴ External bisector of B is 9
−3
 2x − y + 4 ( − x + 2y + 1 )
  =− y −3 = 2 (x − 1)
 5  5 5
− −1
or x+y +5=0 2
or 3 x + 7y = 24
51. Let (α, β) be the image of B(−3, − 2) w.r.t. the line
x + 3y − 3 = 0, then 55. Any point on the line 3x − y = 2 is (t, 3t − 2), t being parameter.
α + 3 β + 2 −2( −3 − 6 − 3 ) If ( x, y ) be image of the point (t, 3t − 2 ) in the line y = x − 1 or
= = x − y − 1 = 0, then
1 3 1+9
x − t y − (3t − 2 )
α + 3 β + 2 12 =
or = = 1 −1
1 3 5 2(t − 3t + 2 − 1 )
3 26 =−
or α = − and β = 1+1
5 5
x − t y − 3t + 2
 3 26 ⇒ = = 2t − 1
∴ Required image is  − ,  , 1 −1
 5 5
or x − t = 2t − 1
Sol. (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)
⇒ x + 1 = 3t …(i)
Let B ≡ (λ, 2 − λ ) (Q B lies on x + y = 2)
and y − 3t + 2 = − 2t + 1
1+λ
Slope of line AB = m1 = ⇒ y + 1 =t …(ii)
1−λ
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
5 λ − 12
and Slope of line BC = m2 = x + 1 = 3 (y + 1 )
−5 λ − 2
⇒ x − 3y = 2
12 − 5 λ
= 56. Any point on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 is (2 cosθ, 2sin θ ),θ being
2 + 5λ
parameter.
Let slope of bisector ( x + y = 2 ) = m3 = − 1 If ( x, y ) be image of the point (2 cosθ, 2 sin θ ), in the line
m3 − m1 m − m3 x + y = 2, then
Now, = 2
1 + m3m1 1 + m2m3 x − 2 cosθ y − 2 sin θ
=
1 + λ 12 − 5 λ 1 1
−1 − +1
1−λ 2 + 5λ −2(2 cosθ + 2 sin θ − 2 )
⇒ = =
1+λ 12 − 5 λ 1+1
1− 1−
1−λ 2 + 5λ or x − 2 cosθ = y − 2 sin θ
−2 14 = − 2 cosθ − 2 sin θ + 2 …(i)
or =
−2 λ −10 + 10 λ or x − 2 cosθ = − 2 cosθ − 2 sin θ + 2
or 14 λ = − 10 + 10 λ ⇒ x − 2 = − 2sinθ
−5 and y − 2 sin θ = − 2 cosθ − 2 sin θ + 2
∴ λ= …(i)
2 ⇒ y − 2 = − 2 cosθ …(ii)
52. Equation of BC is From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
2 ( x − 2 ) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 4
− − (2 − λ )
y − (2 − λ ) = 5 (x − λ ) ⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 4y + 4 = 0
2
− −λ
5
176 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

57. Any point on the parabola x 2 = 4y is (2t, t 2 ), t being parameter. ⇒ cos A = 2 cos B cosC
If ( x, y ) be image of the point (2t, t ) in the x + y = a, then
2 ⇒ − cos( B + C ) = 2 cos B cosC (QA + B + C = π )
⇒ − (cos B cosC − sin B sin C ) = 2 cos B cosC
x − 2t y − t 2
+ or sin B sin C = 3 cos B cosC
1 1 3
−2 (2t + t 2 − a ) =3 ×
= 2R 5
1+1 
9 61 
= Q R = 
= − 2t − t 2 + a 2 61  5
or x − 2t = − 2t − t 2 + a 60. Q AO = 2R cos A
⇒ x − a = −t2 …(i) 3
=2 × [from Eq. (i)]
and y − t 2 = − 2t − t 2 + a 5
⇒ y − a = −2t …(ii) 6
=
From Eqs. (i) and (ii) we get 5
(y − a ) 2 = 4t 2 = − 4( x − a ) 61. The equation of straight line through (2, 3) with slope m is
or (y − a ) = 4(a − x )
2 y − 3 = m( x − 2 )
or mx − y = 2m − 3
Sol. (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
x y
Given orthocentre O ≡ (1, 2 ) or + =1
 2m − 3 (3 − 2m )
and circumcentre  
 m 
O′ = (2, 4 )
2m − 3
A Here, OA = or OB = 3 − 2m
m
E Q The area of ∆OAB = 12
⇒ 1 × OA × OB = 12
F 2 
O¢
O 1  2m − 3
A A or   (3 − 2m ) = ± 12
2 m 
or (2m − 3 ) 2 = ± 24m
B D M 2x–y=3 C Taking positive sign, we get 4m 2 − 36m + 9 = 0
Here D > 0, This is a quadratic in m which given two value of
Q Slope of OO′ = Slope of (2 x − y = 3 )
m, and taking negative sign, we get (2m + 3 ) 2 = 0.
3
and OD = O ′ M = −3
5 This gives one line of m as .
2
Let R be the circumradius
Hence, three straight lines are possible.
∴ O ′ M = R cos A
3 62. Q Point of intersection of ax + 3y − 1 = 0 and ax + y + 1 = 0 is
⇒ R cos A = …(i)  2 
5 A  − , 1 and point of intersection of ax + 3y − 1 = 0 and
 a 
58. R = AO ′ = (AO ) + (OO ′ )
2 2
 1 1 
x + 3y = 0 is B  ,− 
= (2 R cos A ) 2 + 5  a − 1 3(a − 1 )

 6 
2 a
=   +5 [from Eq. (i)] ⇒ Slope of OA is mOA = −
 5 2
1
61 and Slope of OB is mOB =−
= 3
5
Q mOA × mOB = −1
59. QOD = 2R cos B cosC a 1
∴ − × − = −1
3 2 3
∴ 2 R cos B cosC =
5 or a = −6
= R cos A [from Eq. (i)] …(ii) ∴ |a | = 6
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 177

63. Here, B is the image of A w.r.t line y = x 66. Let a be the length of side of square
∴ B ≡ (2, 1 ) and C is the image of A w.r.t line x − 2y + 1 = 0 if ∴ a 2 + a 2 = 22 ⇒ a = 2
C ≡ (α , β ), then i.e. distance between parallel lines is 2
α − 1 β − 2 −2(1 − 4 + 1 ) Now, let two lines of family y = x + n are y = x + n, and
= =
1 −2 1+4 y = x + n2, where
9 2 n1, n2 ∈ { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 }
or α = and β =
5 5 | n1 − n2|
∴ = 2
 9 2  2
∴ C ≡ , 
 5 5 or | n1 − n2| = 2
⇒ Equation of BC is ⇒ {n1, n2 } are { 0, 2 }, {1, 3 } and {2, 4 }
2  Hence, both the family have three such pairs. So, the number
 − 1 of squares possible is 3 × 3 = 9.
5 
y −1 = (x − 2)
9  67. Let the coordinate of C be (1, c ), then
 − 2
5  c −y
m2 =
or 3x − y − 5 = 0 (Q Eq. of BC is ax + by − 5 = 0) 1−x
Here, a = 3, b = − 1 c − m1x
or m2 = (Q slope of AB = m1)
∴ a − 2b = 5 1−x
64. On the line y = 1, the number of lattice points is ⇒ m2 (1 − x ) = c − m1x
2007 − 223  or c = (m1 − m2 ) x + m2
= 198
 9  1
Now, the area of ∆ABC is | cx − y |
Y 2
1
= ((m1 − m2 ) x + m2 ) x − m1x| (Qy = m1x)
(0, 9) B
2
1
= (m1 − m2 )( x − x 2 ) [Qm1 > m2 and x ∈( 0, 1 )]
2
1
2 Hence, f (x ) = (x − x 2 )
1 2
X
O A df ( x ) 1
(223, 0) ∴ = (1 − 2 x )
dx 2
d 2 f (x )
Hence, the total number of points and = −1 < 0
dx 2
2007 − 223y 
8
= ∑  9 
For maximum of
df ( x ) 1
y =1
f ( x ), =0 ⇒ x=
= 198 + 173 + 148 + 123 + 99 + 74 + 49 + 24 = 888 dx 2
Hence, tens place digit is 8. 1  1 1
∴ f ( x ) max =  − 
2  2 4
65. A rough sketch of the lines is given.
1
There are three triangle namely ABC, BCD and ABD = =λ (given)
8
A
1
⇒ =8
λ
68. Equation of AB is 3x − 2y + 6 = 0
Y
Y
A (0, 3)
C
B D
P(l, l+1)
2
y= +3
3

3x+

C (6, 1)
x+
x+

2x

y=
y=

y=

X¢ X
3

X¢ X B O
O (–2, 0)
Y¢
Y¢
178 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Equation of BC is x − 8y + 2 = 0, 71. (A)

Equation of CA is x + 3y − 9 = 0 L1
Let P ≡ (λ, λ + 1)
Q B and P lie on one side of AC, then L2
λ + 3( λ + 1 ) − 9
>0
−2 + 0 − 9
or 4λ − 6 < 0 L3
3
or λ< (i)
2 In this case no circle
and C and P lie on one side of AB, then ∴ n = 0 ⇒ n + 1 =1
3 λ − 2( λ + 1 ) + 6 (B)
>0
18 − 2 + 6
or λ+4>0
or λ > −4 …(ii) In this case no circle
Finally, A and P lie on one side of BC, then ∴ n = 0 ⇒ 2n + 3 = 3
λ − 8( λ + 1 ) + 2
>0 (C)
0 − 24 + 2
or −7 λ − 6 < 0
6
or λ>− …(iii)
7
From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
6 3 In this case two circle which are touching all three lines
− <λ< ∴ n =2 ⇒ n + 2 = 4
7 2
Integral values of λ are 0 and 1. (D)
Hence, number of integral values of λ is 2.
69. Lines
(2a + b ) x + (a + 3b )y + b − 3a = 0
or a (2 x + y − 3 ) + b ( x + 3y + 1 ) = 0
are concurrent at the point of intersection of lines
2 x + y − 3 = 0 and x + 3y + 1 = 0 which is (2, − 1 ).
Now, line λx + 2y + 6 = 0 must pass through (2, − 1 ), therefore,
2 λ − 2 + 6 or λ = − 2
In this case four circle which are touching all three lines
∴ | λ| = 2
∴ n = 4⇒ n + 2 =6
70. Since, PQ is of fixed length.
72. (A) The given lines an concurrent. So,
1
Area of ∆PQR = | PQ | | RP |sinθ 1 −2 −6
2
3 1 −4 = 0
This will be maximum, if sinθ = 1 and RP is maximum.
λ 4 λ2
R or λ2 + 2 λ − 8 = 0
or λ = 2, − 4
P (4, 4)
∴ | λ | = 2, 4
q
(B) Given family is
(0, 7)R¢
3 x(a + 1 ) + 4y (a − 1 ) − 3(a − 1 ) = 0
Q 3x+4y+5=0 or a(3 x + 4y − 3 ) + (3 x − 4y + 3 ) = 0
for fixed point=
3 x + 4y − 3 = 0
Since, line y = mx + 7 rotates about ( 0, 7 ), if PR′ is
and 3 x − 4y + 3 = 0
perpendicular to the line than PR′ is maximum value of PR.
3
 4 − 0 4 ∴ x = 0, y =
∴ m=−  = 4
 4 − 7 3
 3
Fixed point is  0,  ,
Hence, 3m = 4  4
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 179

3 −4 1
Here p = 0, q = ∴ < λ < or −8 < 6 λ < 3
4 3 2
∴ 4| λ | = 4| p − q | = 3 Integral values of 6λ are
(C) The point of intersection of x − y + 1 = 0 and −7, −6, −5, −4, −3, −2, −1, 0, 1, 2
3 x + y − 5 = 0 is (1, 2). It lies on the line ∴ |6λ | = 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
λ (D)Q A ≡ ( −2, 4 )
x + y − 1 −  = 0
2 7
The points on the line y = , whose x-coordinates lies between
λ 2
⇒ 1 + 2 − 1 −  = 0 7
2 0 (put y = in 4y + x − 14 = 0)
2
or | λ | = 4 or λ = − 4, 4
−11 7
∴ λ + 1 = − 3, 5 or | λ + 1| = 3, 5 and (put y = in y + 3 x + 2 = 0)
6 2
(D) The mid-point of (1, − 2 ) and (3, 4) will satisfy
−11
y − x −1 + λ = 0 ∴ <λ<0
6
or 1 −2 −1 + λ = 0
or −11 < 6 λ < 0
∴ λ = 2 or | λ | = 2
Integral value of 6λ are
73. −10, − 9, − 8, − 7, −6, −3, − 2, − 1
y+

Y
3x+

∴ |6 λ | = 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
x=1
2=

74. (A)Q max. {| x|,| y | } = 1

0

A (0, 7/2)
E If | x| = 1 and if | y | = 1
C 4 y +x then x = ± 1 and y = ± 1
–1 4 =
0
D y=2 Y
(0,5/3) y=1
B
X¢ X
O
0
5=
2x–
3 y–
X¢ X
Y¢ x=–1 O x=1
(A) The points on the line x = 0, whose y-coordinate lies
5 7
between and inside the triangle ABC.
3 2 y=–1
5 7 Y¢
∴ <λ< or 5 < 3 λ < 10.5
3 2
∴ Required area = 2 × 2 = 4 sq units
∴ |3 λ | = 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
(B) The line y = x cuts the lines | x + y | = 6
(B)QC ≡ (2, 3 )
i.e. x + y = ±6
The points on the line x = 1, whose y-coordinate lies between
at x = ± 3, y = ± 3
8
( put x = 1 in 3y − 2 x − 5 = 0) or ( −3, − 3 ) and (3, 3)
3
then −3 < a < 3
13
and (put x = 1 in 4y + x − 14 = 0) ∴ 0 ≤ | a| < 3
4
8 13 ∴ [| a| ] = 0, 1, 2
∴ <λ< or 8 < 3 λ < 9.75 (C) Since (0, 0) and (1, 1) lie on the same side.
3 4
∴ |3 λ | = 9 So, a 2 + ab + 1 > 0
(C)Q B ≡ ( −1, 1 ) Q Coefficient of a 2 is > 0
The point on the line y = 2, whose x-coordinate lies between ∴ D<0
−4 b 2 − 4 < 0 or −2 < b < 2
(put y = 2 in y + 3 x + 2 = 0)
3
⇒ b = − 1, 0, 1
1
and (put y = 2 in 3y − 2 x − 5 = 0) ∴ Number of values of b is 3.
2
180 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

75. (A) Q d (x, y ) = 2| x| + 3| y | = 6 (given) (C)∴ Slope of AC × slope of BC = − 1

| x| | y | Y
∴ + =1
3 2 C(l, m)
Y

(0, 6) B
B (0, 2)
13 13
C A
X′ Q X
(–3, 0) (3, 0) X
O A(6, 0)
13 13
D (0, –2)  µ − 0  µ − 6 
⇒   ×  = −1
 λ − 6  λ − 0
Y′ ⇒ µ 2 − 6µ = − λ2 + 6 λ
∴Perimeter, λ = 4 13 or λ2 + µ 2 − 6 λ − 6µ = 0

and area,
1
µ = 4 × × 3 × 2 = 12 Hence, locus of ( λ , µ ) is
2 x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 6y = 0
λ2
then −µ =1 76. Q x(a + 2b ) + y (a + 3b ) = a + b
16
⇒ a ( x + y − 1 ) + b (2 x + 3y − 1 ) = 0
and λ2 − µ 2 = 64
then x + y − 1 = 0 and 2 x + 3y − 1 = 0
Hence, locus of ( λ , µ ) are ∴ point of intersection is (2, − 1 )
x 2 − 16y = 16 Hence, both statement are true and statement II is correct
and x 2 − y 2 = 64 explanation for statement I.
(B) It is clear that orthocentre is (6, 6) 77. Q Algebraic perpendicular from (3, 2) to the line
O′ ≡ (6, 6 ), 9−4+1 6
3 x − 2y + 1 = 0 is i.e. = p1 (say)
Circumcentre is C′ ≡ (3, 3 ) and centroid is G′ ≡ ( 4, 4 ) (9 + 4 ) 13
Y and algebraic perpendicular distance from (1, 4) to the line
3 x − 2y + 1 = 0 is
B (6, 6) 3 −8 + 1 −4
(0, 6) C i.e. = p2 (say)
9+4 13
6 −4 −24
∴ p1p 2 = × = <0
13 13 13
Hence, both statements are true and statement II is a correct
explanation for statement I.
78. Sum of algebraic distances from points A(1, 2), B(2, 3), C(6, 1) to
X
O A (6, 0) the line ax + by + c = 0 is zero (given), then
a + 2b + c (2a + 3b + c ) (6a + b + c )
+ + =0
∴ λ = O′ C ′ = ( 0 − 3 ) 2 + (6 − 3 ) 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 )
= 9 + 9 =3 2 ⇒ 9a + 6b + 3c = 0
and µ = C ′ G′ = ( 4 − 3 ) 2 + ( 4 − 3 ) 2 or 3a + 2b + c = 0
∴ Statement I is false.
= 1+1= 2
 1 + 2 + 6 2 + 3 + 1
Also, centroid of ∆ABC is  , 
∴ λ − µ = 16 and λ = 3µ
2 2
 3 3 
Hence, locus of ( λ , µ ) are i.e. (3, 2)
x 2 − y 2 = 16 and x = 3y ∴ Statement II is true.
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 181

79. Equation of AB is Also, (2a − 5, a 2 ) and ( 0, 0 ) on the same side of x + y − 3 = 0,

0 −1 then
y −1 = ( x − 0 ) ⇒ x + 2y − 2 = 0
2−0 2a − 5 + a 2 − 3
>0
Q | PA − PB| ≤ | AB| 0 + 0 −3
⇒| PA − PB| to be maximum, then A, B and P must be ⇒ a 2 + 2a − 8 < 0
collinear.
or (a + 4 )(a − 2 ) < 0
Solving x + 2y − 2 = 0
∴ a ∈ ( −4, 2 )
and 4 x + 3y + 9 = 0,
⇒ Statement I is false
 24 17
we get, P ≡ ,  Hence, statement I is false and statement II is true.
5 5
BD R
Hence, Statement I is false and Statement II is obviously true. 84. In ∆OBD, = ...(i)
sin ( π − 2 C ) sin θ
80. Statement II is false as the point satisfying such a property can DC R
be the excentre of the triangle. In ∆ODC, = ...(ii)
sin ( π − 2 B ) sin ( π − θ )
 π  π
Let L1 ≡ x cos  + y sin   − π = 0, BD sin 2 C
 9  9 From Eqs. (i) and (ii), =
DC sin 2 B
 8π   8π 
L2 ≡ x cos  + y sin   − π = 0 and
 9  9 (x1,y1)A

 13 π   8π 
L3 ≡ x cos  + y sin   − π = 0
 9   9
h R
and P ≡ ( 0, 0 ) 2C 2B
Length ⊥ from P to L1 = Length of ⊥ from P to L2 = Length of ⊥ R O R
from P to L3 = π and P lies inside the triangle. π–2C π–2B
θ π– θ
∴P( 0, 0 ) is incentre of triangle. (x2,y2)B C(x3,y3)
D
Hence, statement I is true and statement II is false.
81. Q Mid-point of (5, 1) and (−1, − 5) i.e. (2, − 2) lies on x + y = 0
and (slope of x + y = 0) × (slope of line joining (5, 1) ∴ Coordinates of D are
−6  x 2 sin 2 B + x 3 sin 2 C y 2 sin 2 B + y 3 sin 2 C 
and (−1, − 5)) = ( −1 ) ×  , 
−6  sin 2 B + sin 2 C sin 2 B + sin 2C 
∴ Statement I is true.
Let ( x, y ) be any point on AD, then equation of AD is
Statement II is also true.
 
Hence, both statements are true but statement II is not correct  x y 1
explanation of statement I.  x1 y1 1= 0
82. Equation of AC and BC are 3x + 2y = 0 and 2x + 3y + 6 = 0  
Q(3 )(2 ) + (2 )(3 ) = 12 > 0  x 2 sin 2 B + x 3 sin 2 C y 2 sin 2 B + y 3 sin 2 C 1
 sin 2 B + sin 2 C sin 2 B + sin 2 C 
∴Internal angle bisector of C is
 3 x + 2y   2 x + 3y + 6  x y
  = −  or 
 13   13   x1 y1
or 5 x + 5y + 6 = 0 x 2 sin 2 B + x 3 sin 2 C y 2 sin 2 B + y 3 sin 2 C
⇒ Statement I is true. 1 
Also, the image of A about the angle bisectors of angle B and C 1 = 0

lie on the side BC. (by congruence). sin 2 B + sin 2 C 
∴ Statement II is true.  x y 1 
Both statements are true and statement II is not correct 
or  x1 y1 1 
explanation of statement I. 
x 2 sin 2 B y 2 sin 2 B sin 2 B
83. Q Points (x1, y1 ) and (x 2, y 2 ) lie on the same or opposite sides of
 x y 1 
the line
+
 x1 y1 1  = 0
ax + by + c = 0, as
ax1 + by1 + c 3
x sin 2 C y 3 sin 2 C sin 2 C
> 0 or < 0
ax 2 + by 2 + c x y 1  x y 1
∴ Statement II is true. or (sin 2 B ) 
x1 y1 1 + (sin 2 C ) 
 
x1 y1 1 = 0
x 2 y 2 1 x 3 y 3 1
182 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

85. Let (x1, y1 ) be the coordinates of a point at unit distance from ∴ Equation of OP is y = x tan (90 ° − α )
each of the given lines. y
or cot α =
|3 x1 − 4y1 + 1| |8 x1 + 6y1 + 1| x
⇒ = 1 and =1
32 + 42 82 + 62 x
∴ sin α =
⇒ 3 x1 − 4y1 + 1 = ± 5 and 8 x1 + 6y1 + 1 = ± 10 (x + y 2 )
2

⇒ 3 x1 − 4y1 − 4 = 0 ...(i) and cos α =

y
...(ii)
or 3 x1 − 4y1 + 6 = 0 ...(ii) (x 2 + y 2 )
8 x1 + 6y1 − 9 = 0 ...(iii) Substituting the values of sin α and cos α from Eq. (i) in (i)
or 8 x1 + 6y1 + 11 = 0 ...(iv) then we get the required locus of P
(1) ∩ (3) x y
∴ + =k
⇒ x1 / 60 = y1 / − 5 = 1 / 50, y / (x 2 + y 2 ) x / (x 2 + y 2 )
6 1
∴ ( x1, y1 ) =  , −  ⇒ ( x 2 + y 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = kxy
 5 10
(1) ∩ (4) Squaring both sides, we get
⇒ x1 / − 20 = y1 / − 65 = 1 / 50, ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) = k 2x 2y 2
 2 13  x2 y2 
∴ ( x1, y1 ) =  − , −  or (x 2 + y 2 )2  2 2 + 2 2  = k 2
 5 10 x y xy 
(2) ∩ (3) or ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 ( x −2 + y −2 ) = k 2
⇒ x1 / 0 = y1 / 75 = 1 / 50, ∴ ( x1, y1 ) = ( 0, 3 / 2 )
(2) ∩ (4)
87. Let the equation of variable line be
ax + by = 1. Then the coordinates of Ap will be
 8 3
⇒ x1 / − 80 = y1 / 15 = 1 / 50, ∴ ( x1, y1 ) =  − ,   1 p 
 5 10 Ap ≡  , 
 a + bp a + bp 
Hence, the required four points have the coordinates
6 1   2 13  3  8 3 

nx
 , −  ,  − , −  ,  0,  ,  − ,  .
y=
5 10  5 10  2  5 10

3x
Y
2x

y=
y=
86. Let ∠OAB = α y=
x
An
∴ OA = AB cos α and OB = AB sin α
A3
Q (OA ) 2 + (OB ) 2 = k 2 A2
A1
Y
ax
+
by
=

X′ X
1

B O

P
Y′
90°– α α
X′ X (1 + p 2 )
O A ∴ OAp = ...(i)
Y′ | a + bp |
n
1
i.e. ( AB ) 2 (cos2 α + sin 2 α ) = k 2 Given, Σ =c
p =1 OAp
or AB = k
OA = k cos α and OB = k sin α
n
| a + bp |
then ⇒ Σ =c [from Eq. (1)]
x y p =1 (1 + p 2 )
∴ Equation of AB is + =1
k cos α k sin α  n   n 
1 p
x y ⇒ a ±

Σ  +b ± Σ  =c
or +
cos α sin α
=k ...(i)  p =1 (1 + p )  2 
 p =1 (1 + p )  2

 n
1   n
p 
Let P be the foot of perpendicular from O on AB.  Σ   Σ 
 p =1 (1 + p ) 
2
 p =1 (1 + p )  2
or a  ±  +b ±  =1
(x 2+y 2) c c
x    
   
   
α
y
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 183

So, line always passes through a fixed point whose coordinates y1

a+b
are n x1
then = [from Eq. (iv)]
  ( x12 + y12 ) y 
2
 n 1 n p  1 +  1
 ± p Σ= 1 ± Σ
2   x1 
 (1 + p )
2 p = 1 (1 + p ) 
, ⇒ n = ay1 + bx1
 c c 
  Hence, locus of point R is bx + ay = n.
88. Let the equation of given n lines be 89. First equation can be expressed as
y = m r x + cr , (2 x + 3y − 5 ) cos θ + (3 x − 5y + 2 ) sin θ = 0
where r = 1, 2, 3, .... ,n ...(i) ⇒ (2 x + 3y − 5 ) + (3 x − 5y + 2 ) tan θ = 0
Let equation of line through origin O is It is clear that these lines will pass through the point of
y = mx ...(ii) intersection of the lines
2 x + 3y − 5 = 0 
Y′  ...(i)
3 x − 5y + 2 = 0 
y = mx
Rn for all values of θ.
y = mnx+cn Solving the system of Eq. (i), we get (1, 1).
Hence, the fixed point is P (1, 1 ). Let Q (α , β ) be the reflection of
R3 P (1, 1 ) in the line x + y = 2.
α − 1 β − 1 − 2 (1 + 1 − 2 )
R2 Then = = = 2 −2
y = m3x+c3 1 1 12 + 12
R
R1 y = m2x+c2 ∴ α = 2 − 1, β = 2 − 1
i.e. Q ≡ ( 2 − 1, 2 − 1 )
y = m1x+c1 If the required family of lines is
X′ X (2 cos θ + 3 sin θ ) x + (3 cos θ − 5 sin θ ) y = λ
O
in order that each member of the family pass through Q, we
Y′ have
λ = ( 2 − 1 ) (2 cos θ + 3 sin θ + 3 cos θ − 5 sin θ )
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii) , we get
 cr mcr  λ = ( 2 − 1 ) (5 cos θ − 2 sin θ )
Rr ≡  , 
 m − mr m − mr  Hence, equation of required family is
2 2 (2 cos θ + 3 sin θ ) x + (3 cos θ − 5 sin θ ) y
 cr   m cr  = ( 2 − 1 ) (5 cos θ − 2 sin θ ).
∴ OR r =   + 
 m − mr   m − mr 
90. Let R (h, k ) be the foot of perpendicular from Q on OP.
 c 
=  r  (1 + m 2 ) ...(iii) Let equation of OP be
m − mr
Y
Let R ≡ ( x1, y1 )
y1
∴ y1 = mx1 ⇒ m = ...(iv) P(a,ma)
x1
mx x x
n n
1 y=
Given, = Σ R
OR r = 1 OR r x–a=0

m − mr
Σ 
n
n  1
⇒ = [from Eq . (iii)] θ
( x12 + y12 ) r = 1 cr  (1 + m 2 ) X′ X
O Q A(a,0)
  n  1 
1 n
 m  Y′
= m  Σ ±  + Σ m r  
(1 + m ) 
2  r = 1  cr   r = 1  cr   y = mx
1 then k = mh
= (ma + b ) k
(1 + m 2 ) or m= ...(i)
h
  1 n
 mr  n
where a = Σ  ±  and b = Σ  m  and coordinates of P ≡ (a , ma )
r = 1  cr  r =1  cr 

184 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Q PQ is the bisector of OPA  3β 

Similarly, the coordinates of C are  0, 
∴ ∠APQ = ∠RPQ  3 − α
and ∠PAQ = ∠QRP = 90 ° Now, the equation of AD is
∴ PA = PR x (6 − α )
+ y =1 ...(i)
then | ma | = (h − a ) 2 + (k − ma ) 2 3 6β
2 and the equation of OU is
From Eq. (i), ak = (h − a ) 2 + k − ak 
h   h βx = αy ...(ii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
⇒ a | k | = |(h − a )| (h 2 + k 2 ) 6α 6β
x= ,y =
Hence, required locus is 6+α 6+α
( x − a ) 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) = a 2y 2  6α 6β 
Hence, coordinates of V are  , 
91. Let the coordinates of the vertex be (h, k ) and equations of the 6 + α 6 + α
bases be Then, the equation of CV is
x cos α r + y sin α r − pr = 0 where r = 1 , 2 , 3 , ...., n 6β 3β
−
and their lengths be respectively l1, l 2, l 3, ...., ln . 3β 6 + α 3 −α
y − = (x − 0)
Q Length of perpendicular from (h, k ) on 3 −α 6α
−0
x cos α r + y sin α r − pr = 0 is 6+α
| h cos α r + k sin α r − pr | 3β − 9α β
, ⇒ y − = x
(cos2 α + sin 2 α ) 3 −α 6 α (3 − α )
i.e. | h cos α r + k sin α r − pr | 3β  x
⇒ y = 1 − 
Given, sum of areas of all triangles = constant (3 − α )  2
then which pass through the point (2, 0) for all values of (α , β ).
n
1
Σ lr ⋅ | h cos αr + k sin αr − pr | = C ′ 93. Let the equation of the variable line through `O' be
r =1 2
x y
n
1 =
⇒ Σ . lr . (± (h cos αr + k sin αr − pr )) = C ′ cos θ sin θ
r =1 2
and let OR = r1, OS = r2 and OP = r3
 n 1   n 1 
⇒ h  Σ ± lr cos α r  + k  Σ ± lr . sin α r  L2
r = 1 2  r = 1 2  Y
n
1
= Σ ± lr . pr + C ′
r =1 2 S
⇒ Ah + Bk = − C R y=c
L1
∴ Required locus is
P(h,k)
Ax + By + C = 0
X′ X
where A, B, C are constants. O
ax
+

92. The equation of BU is

by

Y′
=

0 −β
1

y −β = (x − α )
6 −α Then coordinates of R , S and P are :
 6β  R (r1 cos θ, r1 sin θ ), S (r2 cos θ, r2 sin θ ), P (r3 cos θ, r3 sin θ )
So that the coordinates of D are  0,  R lies on L1 and S lies on L2.
 6 − α
Let L1 ≡ y − c = 0
Y
and L2 ≡ ax + by − 1 = 0
C ∴ r1 sin θ = c and ar2 cos θ + br2 sin θ = 1
c 1
D ∴ r1 = and r2 =
U(α,β) sin θ a cos θ + b sin θ
V From the given condition
m+n m n
= +
X′ X r3 r1 r2
O (2,0) A(3,0) B(6,0)
m + n m sin θ
Y′
⇒ = + n (a cos θ + b sin θ ) ...(i)
r3 c
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 185

Let the coordinates of P be (h, k ), then Let P ≡ (α , β )

h = r3 cos θ, k = r3 sin θ
Y
mr sin θ mx
From Eq. (i), m + n = 3 + n (ar3 cos θ + br3 sin θ ) y=
c
mk P B(b,mb)
⇒ m+n= + n (ah + bk )
c
my R(h,k)
Locus of P is n (ax + by ) + = (m + n )
c
m X′ X
⇒ n (ax + by − 1 ) + (y − c ) = 0 O (b,0)Q A(a,0)
c
m
⇒ (ax + by − 1 ) + (y − c ) = 0 Y′
nc
Q P be the foot of perpendicular from A on y = mx, then
 m
⇒ L2 + λL1 = 0  where, λ =  α − a β − 0 − ( 0 − ma )
 nc  = =
−m 1 (1 + m 2 )
Hence, locus of P is a point of intersection of L1 and L2.
a am
94. The given lines are ∴ α= , β=
1+m 2
1 + m2
x + 3y + 2 = 0 ...(i)
 a am 
2x + y + 4 = 0 ...(ii) i.e. P ≡ , 
x −y −5 = 0 ...(iii)  1 + m 1 + m2 
2

Equation of the line passing through A ( − 5 , − 4 ) and making ∴ Equation of PQ is

an angle θ with the positive direction of X-axis is am
−0
x+5 y +4 1 + m2
= = r ( AB, AC , AD ) ...(iv) y −0= (x − b )
cos θ sin θ a
− b
∴ Points ( − 5 + AB cos θ, − 4 + AB sin θ ), 1 + m2
( − 5 + AC cos θ, − 4 + AC sin θ ) and a
( − 5 + AD cos θ, − 4 + AD sin θ ) lie on Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii) ⇒ (y − mx ) + am − (1 + m 2 ) y = 0 ...(ii)
b
respectively.
Adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
( − 5 + AB cos θ ) + 3 ( − 4 + AB sin θ ) + 2 = 0
a
⇒ AB (cos θ + 3 sin θ ) = 15 (y − mx + k ) + (mh − k − (1 + m 2 ) y ) = 0
b
15
⇒ = cos θ + 3 sin θ ⇒ (mh − k − (1 + m 2 ) y ) + λ (y − mx + k ) = 0
AB
10  a
Similarly, = 2 cos θ + sin θ  where, λ = 
AC  b
6 Hence PQ pass through a fixed point.
and = cos θ − sin θ
AD For fixed point
From given condition mh − k − (1 + m 2 ) y = 0, y − mx + k = 0
2 2 2
 15   10   6  mh − k h + mk
  +  =  y = ,x=
 AB   AC   AD  (1 + m 2 ) (1 + m 2 )
we get (cos θ + 3 sin θ ) 2 + (2 cos θ + sin θ ) 2 = (cos θ − sin θ ) 2  h + mk mh − k 
Hence, fixed point is  , .
⇒ 4 cos θ + 9 sin θ + 12 sin θ cos θ = 0
2 2
 1 + m2 1 + m2 
⇒ (2 cos θ + 3 sin θ ) 2 = 0 96. Given lines are parallel and distance between them < 2
2 Given lines are
∴ tan θ = −
3 2x + y = 3 ...(i)
Hence the equation of the line from Eq. (iv) is and 2x + y = 5 ...(ii)
2 Equation of any line through Eqs. (ii) and (iii) is
y + 4 = − ( x + 5 ) ⇒ 2 x + 3y + 22 = 0
3 y − 3 = m (x − 2)
95. Q A, R and B are collinear or y = mx − 2m + 3 ...(iii)
k − 0 mb − 0 Let line (iii) cut lines (i) and (ii) at A and B respectively.
then, =
h −a b −a Solving Eqs. (i) and (iii), we get
a  2m 6 − m 
∴ k − am + mh − k = 0 ...(i) A≡ , 
b  m + 2 m + 2
186 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

and solving Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get Also tanθ = − 2 (slope of 2 x + y = 5)
 2m + 2 m + 6 Now, equation of required lines are
B≡ , 
 m + 2 m + 2 y − 3 = tan (θ ± α ) ( x − 2 )
According to question AB = 2  tan θ ± tan α 
⇒ y −3 =   (x − 2)
⇒ ( AB ) 2 = 4  1 m tan θ tan α 
2 2 1
 2   2m  ( −2 ) ±
⇒   +  =4 2 (x −2)
 m + 2  m + 2 ⇒ y −3 =
 1
1 m ( −2 )  
⇒ 1 + m 2 = m 2 + 4m + 4 ...(iv)  2
Case I : When m is finite (line is not perpendicular to X-axis)  1
 −2 ± 
then from Eq. (iv).  2
⇒ y −3 = (x − 2)
1 = 4m + 4 1 m ( −1 )
3
∴ m=−  1
4 ⇒ (1 m ( −1 )) (y − 3 ) =  −2 ±  ( x − 2 )
 2
Case II : When m is infinite (line is perpendicular to X-axis)
3
then from Eq. (iv), ⇒ x − 2 = 0 and 2y − 6 = − (x − 2)
1 4 4 2
+ 1 =1 + + i.e. x − 2 = 0 and 3 x + 4y − 18 = 0
m2 m m2
0 + 1 =1 + 0 + 0 Aliter II : Any line through (2 , 3 ) is
1 = 1 which is true x −2 y −3
= =r
Hence m → ∞ acceptable. cosθ sin θ
Hence, equation of the required lines are Suppose this line cuts 2 x + y = 5 and 2 x + y = 3 at D and C
3 respectively but given DC = 2
y − 3 = − (x − 2)
4 then D ≡ (2 + r cosθ, 3 + r sin θ )
y −3 and C ≡ (2 + (r + 2 ) cosθ, 3 + (r + 2 ) sin θ )
and = x −2 ⇒x −2 = 0
∞ Q D and C lies on
i.e. 3 x + 4y = 18 and x − 2 = 0 2 x + y = 5 and 2 x + y = 3
Aliter I : then 2 (2 + r cosθ ) + (3 + r sin θ ) = 5 ... (v)
Q 2 x + y = 3 cuts Y-axis at ( 0, 3 ) and line 2 x + y = 5 cuts and 2 (2 + (r + 2 ) cosθ ) + (3 + (r + 2 ) sin θ ) = 3 ... (vi)
Y-axis at ( 0, 5 ) Subtracting Eq. (v) from Eq. (vi), then
Y 4 cosθ + 2 sin θ = − 2
or 2 cosθ + sin θ = − 1
 2  θ    θ 
2  1 − tan     2 tan   
 2   2
2
C α  +  = −1
⇒
  θ    2  θ 
 1 + tan     1 + tan   
2
D P(2,3)  2 2
 θ  θ  θ
A ⇒ 2 − 2 tan 2   + 2 tan   = − 1 − tan 2  
 2  2  2
M
X′ X  θ  θ
O α 2 ⇒ tan 2   − 2 tan   − 3 = 0
2x+y=5  2  2
Y′ B  θ
2x+y=3 ∴ tan   = − 1 or 3
 2
Therefore intercept on Y-axis is 2. 3
∴ tanθ = ∞ or −
Also, AM = distance between parallel lines 4
| −5 + 3| 2 ∴ Required lines are
= =
2 +1
2 2 5 y − 3 = ∞ (x − 2)
3
∴ MB = ( AB ) 2 − ( AM ) 2 = 4 −
4
=
4 and y − 3 = − (x − 2)
5 5 4
AM 1 i.e. x −2 = 0
then tanα = = and 3 x + 4y − 18 = 0
MB 2
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 187

97. If I be the incentre of ∆OAB. 99. The line passing through the intersection of lines
If inradius =r ax + 2by + 3b = 0 and bx − 2ay − 3a = 0 is
then ID = IE = IF = r ax + 2by + 3b + λ(bx − 2ay − 3a ) = 0
Y
⇒(a + bλ ) x + (2b − 2aλ )y + 3b − 3 λa = 0
As this line is parallel to X-axis.
a
B 1,
1 ∴ a + bλ = 0 ⇒ λ = −
√3 b
F r r E a
⇒ ax + 2by + 3a − (bx − 2ay − 3a ) = 0
I b
15°
15°
r 2a 2 3a 2
X′ 15° 15°
X ⇒ ax + 2by + 3b − ax + y + =0
O D A(2,0) b b
 2a 2  3a 2
Y′ y 2b +  + 3b + =0
 b  b
If P at I,then
d ( P , OA ) = d ( P , OB ) = d ( P , AB ) = r  2b 2 + 2a 2   3b 2 + 3a 2 
y  = − 
But d ( P , OA ) ≤ min{d ( P , OB ), d ( P , AB )}  b   b 
which is possible only when P lies in the ∆OIA. −3(a 2 + b 2 ) −3
ID r y = =
∴ tan15 ° = = 2(b 2 + a 2 ) 2
OD 1 3
⇒ r = (2 − 3 ) So, it is units below X-axis.
2
1
∴ Required area = ⋅ 2 ⋅ r = r = (2 − 3 ) sq units. 100. Y
2
98. Let A ≡ (x1, y1 ), B ≡ (x 2, y 2 ) and C ≡ (x 3, y 3 ) are the vertices of P(0, b)
a triangle ABC and P ≡ (a1, b1 ), Q ≡ (a 2, b2 ) and R ≡ (a 3, b3 ) are
the vertices of triangle PQR.
Equation of perpendicular from A to QR is A(3, 4)
(a − a 3 )
y − y1 = − 2 ( x − x1 )
(b2 − b3 )
Q(a, 0)
or (a 2 − a 3 ) x + (b2 − b3 ) y − x1 (a 2 − a 3 ) − y1(b2 − b3 ) = 0 …(i) X
O
Similarly, equations of perpendiculars from B to RP and C to
PQ are respectively, Q A is the mid-point of PQ, therefore
(a 3 − a1 ) x + (b3 − b1 ) y − x 2 (a 3 − a1 ) − y 2 (b3 − b1 ) = 0 ...(ii) a+0 0+b
= 3, =4
and (a1 − a 2 ) x + (b1 − b2 ) y − x 3 (a1 − a 2 ) − y 3 (b1 − b2 ) = 0 ...(iii) 2 2
Given that lines (i), (ii) and (iii) are concurrent, then adding, ⇒ a = 6, b = 8
we get x y
( x 2 − x 3 ) a1 + ( x 3 − x1 ) a 2 + ( x1 − x 2 ) a 3 + (y 2 − y 3 ) b1 + ∴Equation of line is + = 1
6 8
(y 3 − y1 )b2 + (y1 − y 2 ) b3 = 0 ...(iv) or 4 x + 3y = 24
Now, equation of perpendicular from P to BC is
101. Clearly for point P,
(x − x 3 )
y − b1 = − 2 ( x − a1 ) y
(y 2 − y 3 ) y=3x
or ( x 2 − x 3 ) x + (y 2 − y 3 ) y − a1
( x 2 − x 3 ) − b1(y 2 − y 3 ) = 0 ...(v)
P(a, a2)
Similarly, equations of perpendiculars from Q to CA and R to
AB are respectively,
( x 3 − x1 ) x + (y 3 − y1 ) y − a 2 y= x
2
( x 3 − x1 ) − b2 (y 3 − y1 ) = 0 ...(vi)
O
and ( x1 − x 2 ) x + (y1 − y 2 ) y − a 3 x
( x1 − x 2 ) − b3 (y1 − y 2 ) = 0 ...(vii)
Adding Eqs. (v), (vi) and (vii), we get a
a 2 − 3a < 0 and a 2 − >0
LHS = 0 (identically) [ from Eq. (iv)] 2
Hence perpendiculars from P to BC, Q to CA and R to AB are 1
concurrent. ⇒ <a <3
2
188 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

102. Point of intersection of L1 and L2 is A(0, 0). (C) Lines are not concurrent or not parallel, then
6
Also P( −2, − 2 ), Q(1, − 2 ) k ≠ 5, k ≠ − 9, k ≠ −
5
A 5
(0, 0) ∴ k=
6
(D) The given lines do not form a triangle if they are

L2
=0

:2
concurrent or any two of them are parallel.
–x

x–
:y

6
y=
∴ k = 5, k = − 9, k = −
1
L

0
5
R 3−4 −1
(– 2, –2) P L3 : y+2=0 Q (1, –2) 105. Slope of PQ = =
k −1 k −1
∴ Slope of perpendicular bisector of PQ = (k − 1 )
Q AR is the bisector of ∠PAQ, therefore R divides PQ in the
 k + 1 7
same ratio as AP : AQ. Also mid-point of PQ  , 
 2 2
Thus PR : RQ = AP : AQ = 2 2 : 5
∴ Statement I is true. ∴ Equation of perpendicular bisector is
7  k + 1
Statement II is clearly false. y − = (k − 1 )  x − 
2  2 
103. Given : The coordinates of points P , Q, R are (−1, 0), (0, 0),
(3, 3 3 ) respectively. ⇒ 2y − 7 = 2(k − 1 ) x − (k 2 − 1 )
Y ⇒ 2 (k − 1 ) x − 2y + (8 − k 2 ) = 0
R (3,3Ö3)
8 −k2
M ∴ Y -intercept = − = −4
−2
⇒ 8 − k 2 = −8 or k 2 = 16 ⇒ k = ± 4
106. If the line p(p 2 + 1)x − y + q = 0
2p/3 p/3
X¢ X and ( p 2 + 1 ) 2 x + ( p 2 + 1 )y + 2q = 0
P (–1, 0) Q (0, 0)
are perpendicular to a common line, then these lines must be
Y¢ parallel to each other,
y 2 − y1 3 3 p( p 2 + 1 ) (p 2 + 1)2
Slope of equation QR = = ∴ m1 = m2 ⇒ − =− 2
x 2 − x1 3 −1 p +1
π ⇒ ( p 2 + 1 )( p + 1 ) = 0
⇒ tanθ = 3 ⇒ θ =
3 ⇒ p = −1
π ∴p can have exactly one value.
⇒ ∠RQX =
3 b
π 2π
107. Slope of line L = −
∴ ∠RQP = π − = 5
3 3 3
Slope of line K = −
Let QM bisects the ∠PQR, c
2π Line L is parallel to line K .
∴ Slope of the line QM = tan =− 3
3 b 3
⇒ = ⇒ bc = 15
∴ Equation of line QM is (y − 0 ) = − 3( x − 0 ) 5 c
⇒ y = − 3x ⇒ 3x + y = 0 (13, 32) is a point on L.
13 32 32 8
104. (A)Q L1, L2, L3 are concurrent, then ∴ + =1 ⇒ =−
5 b b 5
1 3 −5 3
⇒ b = − 20 ⇒ c = −
3 −k −1 = 0 ⇒k = 5 4
5 2 −12 Equation of K : y − 4 x = 3
(B) slope of ( L1 ) = slope of ( L2 ) ⇒ 4x − y + 3 = 0
1 3 |52 − 32 + 3|
⇒ − = ∴ k = −9 Distance between L and K =
3 k 17
and slope of ( L3 ) = slope of ( L2 ) =
23
5 3 6 17
⇒ − = ∴ k=−
2 k 5
 Chap 02 The Straight Lines 189

108. Let the slope of line L be m. 111. Suppose B(0, 1) be any point on given line and coordinate of A
m + 3 
 is ( 3, 0 ). So, equation of
Then = 3
1 − 3m
Y (0, 1)
B

Ö3x+y=1
L
(0, 1)
X¢ X A (3, 0)
O 60°
(3, –2)
Y¢ B¢ (0, –1)
⇒ m + 3 = ± ( 3 − 3m ) −1 − 0 y −0
Reflected ray is =
⇒ 4m = 0 or 2m = 2 3 0− 3 x− 3
⇒ m = 0 or m = 3 ⇒ 3y = x − 3
Q L intersects X-axis,
 −c −c 
∴ m= 3 112. The intersection point of two lines is  , 
a + b a + b
∴Equation of L is y + 2 = 3( x − 3 )
 −c −c 
or 3 x − y − (2 + 3 3 ) = 0 Distance between (1, 1) and  ,  <2 2
a + b a + b
109. L3 2
L1  c 
⇒ 21 +  <8
 a + b
=0 P (–2, –2) c
y– x ⇒ 1+ <2
R (–1, –2) a+b
O ⇒ a + b −c > 0
(0, 0) 2x+
y= 113. Let P , Q, R, be the vertices of ∆PQR
0
P (2, 2)
L2

L1 : y − x = 0, L2 : 2 x + y = 0, L3 : y + 2 = 0
On solving the equation of lines L1 and L2, we get their point of
intersection (0, 0) i.e. origin O.
On solving the equation of lines L1 and L3,
we get P = ( −2, − 2 )
Similarly, we get Q = ( −1, − 2 )
R (7, 3)
We know that bisector of an angle of a triangle, divide the Q (6, –1) S
opposite side the triangle in the ratio of the sides including the
angle [Angle Bisector Theorem of a Triangle] Since, PS is the median, S is mid-point of QR
PR OP ( −2 ) + ( −2 ) 2
2 2
2
 7 + 6 3 − 1  13 
∴ = = = So, S = ,  =  , 1
RQ OQ ( −1 ) 2 + ( −2 ) 2 5  2 2  2 
2 −1 2
110. Let the joining points be A(1, 1) and B(2, 4). Now, slope of PS = =−
13 9
Let point C divides line AB in the ratio 3 : 2. So, by section 2−
2
formula we have
Since, required line is parallel to PS therefore slope of required
 3 × 2 + 2 × 1 3 × 4 + 2 × 1  8 14 line = slope of PS Now, eqn of line passing through (1, − 1 ) and
C = , = , 
 3+2 3+2  5 5  2
having slope − is
 8 14 9
Since Line 2x + y = k passes through C  ,  2
y − ( −1 ) = − ( x − 1 )
5 5 
9
∴C satisfies the equation 2x + y = k. 9y + 9 = − 2 x + 2
2 + 8 14
⇒ + = k ⇒k = 6 ⇒ 2 x + 9y + 7 = 0
5 5
190 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

114. Given lines are 116. Total number of integral points inside the square OABC
4ax + 2ay + c = 0 = 40 × 40 = 1600
5bx + 2by + d = 0 Number of integral points on AC
The point of intersection will be = Number of integral points on OB
x −y 1 = 40 [namely (1, 1), (2, 2) … (40, 40)]
= =
2ad − 2bc 4ad − 5bc 8ab − 10ab
2(ad − bc ) bc − ad (0, 41) C
(41, 41)
⇒ x= = B
−2ab ab
5bc − 4ad 4ad − 5bc
⇒ y = =
−2ab 2ab
Q Point of intersection is in fourth quadrant so x is positive
and y is negative.
Also distance from axes is same
O A
So x = − y (Q distance from X-axis is −y as y is (0, 0) (41, 0)
negative)
bc − ad 5bc − 4ad
= ⇒ 3bc − 2ad = 0 ∴ Number of integral points inside the ∆OAC
ab 2ab
115. Let the point P be (x, y ) 1600 − 40
= = 780
x − y x + y 2
Then d 1( P ) =  and d 2( P ) = 
 2   2  117. x–y+1=0
D C
For P lying in first quadrant x > 0, y > 0.
Also 2 ≤ d 1( P ) + d 2( P ) ≤ 4
x −y x+y
m=0

=0
⇒ 2≤ + ≤4

7x–y–5
2 2 O (–1, –2)
7x–y+

If x > y , then
x −y + x + y
2≤ ≤ 4 or 2 ≤ x ≤ 2 2
2
A x–y+l=0 B
If x < y , then
y −x+x+y Let other two sides of rhombus are
2≤ ≤ 4 or 2 ≤ y ≤ 2 2
2 x −y + λ = 0
The required region is the shaded region in the figure given and 7x − y + µ = 0
below. then O is equidistant from AB and DC and from AD and BC
Y
∴ | −1 + 2 + 1 | = | −1 + 2 + λ | ⇒ λ = −3
y=x and | −7 + 2 − 5 | = | −7 + 2 + µ| ⇒ µ = 15
y=2 2 ∴Other two sides are
x −y −3 = 0
y= 2 and 7 x − y + 15 = 0
On solving the equation of sides pairwise, we get the vertices
 1 −8   −7 −4 
X as  ,  , (1, 2),  ,  , ( −3, − 6 )
O x= 2 x=2 2 3 3   3 3

∴ Required area = (2 2 ) 2 − ( 2 ) 2 = 8 − 2 = 6 sq units

CHAPTER

03
Pair of
Straight Lines
Learning Part
Session 1
● Introduction ● Homogeneous Equation in Two Variables
Session 2
2
● Angle between the Pair of Lines ax + 2hxy + by 2
Session 3
● Bisectors of the Angle between the Lines Given by a Homogeneous Equation

Session 4
● General Equation of Second Degree ● Important Theorems

Session 5
● To Find the Point of Intersection of Lines Represented by

ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 with the Help of Partial Differentiation

● Removal of First Degree Term
● Equation of the Lines Joining the Origin to the Points of Intersection of a
Given Line and a Given Curve

Practice Part
● JEE Type Examples
● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Introduction, Homogeneous Equation in
Two Variables
Introduction i.e. ( x − 4y ) ( x − 2y ) = 0
⇒ x − 4y = 0 and x − 2y = 0
Let the equation of two lines be Aliter :
ax + by + c = 0 ...(i) We have, x 2 − 6xy + 8y 2 = 0
and a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 = 0 ...(ii) 6y ± ( − 6y )2 − 4 ⋅ 8y 2
By Shri Dharacharya method, x =
Hence, (ax + by + c ) (a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) = 0 is called the joint 2
equation of lines Eqs. (i) and (ii) and conversely, if joint ⇒ x = 3y ± y (9 − 8)
equation of two lines be
x = 3y ± y
(ax + by + c ) (a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 ) = 0, ∴ x = 4y and x = 2y
then their separate equations will be Hence, the lines are
ax + by + c = 0 and a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 x − 4y = 0 and x − 2y = 0.

Remark
In order to find the joint equation of two lines, make RHS of two
lines equal to zero and then multiply the two equations.
Homogeneous Equation in
y Example 1 Find the joint equation of lines y = x and
Two Variables
y = − x. An equation of the form
Sol. The given lines can be rewritten as a 0 y n + a 1 y n − 1 x + a 2 y n − 2 x 2 + .... + a n x n = 0 …(i)
x − y = 0 and x + y = 0
∴ Joint equation of lines is ( x − y ) ( x + y ) = 0 in which the sum of the powers of x and y in every term
is the same (here n), is called a homogeneous equation
or x2 − y2 = 0
(of degree n).
Wrong process : Since, the lines are
We will prove that Eq. (i) represents n straight lines
y = x and y = − x
passing through the origin.
Then joint equation is y2 = − x2
a 0 y n + a 1 y n − 1 x + a 2 y n − 2 x 2 + .... + a n x n = 0
⇒ x2 + y2 = 0
This process is wrong, since RHS of two equations are not Dividing each term by x n , we get
equal to zero. n n −1 n −2
y  y  y 
a 0   + a1   + a2   + ... + a n = 0
Remark x x x
In order to find the separate equations of two lines when their joint y
equation is given, first of all make RHS equal to zero and then Above is an equation of nth degree in . Let the roots of
resolve LHS into two linear factors or use Shri Dharacharya method. x
The two factors equated to zero will give the separate equations of this equation be m 1 , m 2 , m 3 , ..., m n .
lines. Then, the above equation will be identical with
y Example 2 Find the separate equation of lines y  y  y  y 
a 0  − m1   − m2   − m 3  ...  − m n  = 0
represented by the equation x 2 − 6 xy + 8 y 2 = 0. x  x  x  x 
Sol. Separate equation of lines represented by the equation ⇒ a 0 (y − m 1 x ) (y − m 2 x ) (y − m 3 x ) .... (y − m n x ) = 0
x 2 − 6xy + 8y 2 = 0
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 193

Hence, Eq. (i) represents n straight lines pass through the origin, let their equations be
y = m1x and y = m2x
y − m 1 x = 0, y − m 2 x = 0,
then, ( y − m1x ) and ( y − m2x )
y − m 3 x = 0,..., y − m n x = 0 must be factors of ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
all of which clearly pass through the origin. then ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = b( y − m1x ) ( y − m2x )
Corollary : Since, ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 is a homogeneous [Making coefficient of y 2 equal on both sides]
equation of second degree, it represents two straight lines Now, comparing both sides, we get
through origin. The given equation is 2h = − b ( m1 + m2 ) and a = bm1m2
2h a
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 ...(i) ∴ m1 + m2 = − and m1m2 =
b b
Dividing by x 2 , we get
2
y Example 3 Find the condition that the slope of one
y  y  of the lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 should
a + 2h   + b   = 0
x x be n times the slope of the other.
2
y  y  Sol. Let the lines represented by
⇒ b   + 2h   + a = 0 ...(ii) ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 are y = m1x and y = m 2 x .
x x
2h
y Therefore, m1 + m 2 = − ...(i)
Putting =m b
x a
and m1m 2 = ...(ii)
then, bm 2 + 2hm + a = 0 ...(iii) b
If m 1 and m 2 be two roots, then Given, m 2 = nm1
2h
2h coefficient of xy From Eq. (i), m1 + nm1 = −
m1 + m2 = − =− b
b coefficient of y 2 2h
∴ m1 = − …(iii)
a coefficient of x 2 b (1 + n )
and m 1m 2 = =
b coefficient of y 2 a
and from Eq. (ii), m1(nm1 ) =
b
∴ |m 1 − m 2 | = {(m 1 + m 2 ) 2 − 4m 1m 2 } a
∴ nm1 =
2

2 b
= (h 2 − ab ) 2
| b|  − 2h  a
⇒ n  = [from Eq. (iii)]
 b( 1 + n )  b
Thus, y = m 1 x and y = m 2 x are two straight lines which
are given by Eq. (i). Also, from Eq. (iii), 4nh 2 a
⇒ =
b (1 + n )2
2
b
− 2h ± 2 (h − ab )
2
m= ⇒ 4nh 2 = ab(1 + n )2 ...(iv)
2b
This is the required condition.
− h ± (h 2 − ab ) y  y Corollary : If slope of one line is double of the other, then
= = Q m = x 
b x   put n = 2 in Eq. (iv), we have
8h 2 = 9ab.
∴ by = {− h + (h 2 − ab ) }x

and by = {− h − (h 2 − ab ) } x y Example 4 If the slope of one of the lines

represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 be the nth power
are two lines represented by Eq. (i). 1 1
(i) The lines are real and distinct, if h 2 − ab > 0. of the other, prove that, (ab ) n n +1
+ (a b )
n n +1
+ 2h = 0.
(ii) The lines are coincident, if h 2 − ab = 0.
n
(iii) The lines are imaginary, if h 2 − ab < 0. Sol. Let m and m be the slopes of the lines represented by
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
Remarks
2h
1. In further discussions, we will consider only real cases. then m + mn = − ...(i)
b
2. Two very useful identities When lines represented by
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
194 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

a a y Example 6 Find the condition that one of the lines

and m ⋅ mn = ⇒ mn + 1 =
b b given by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
1
 a  (n + 1) may be perpendicular to one of the lines given by
⇒ m=  ...(ii)
b a ′ x 2 + 2h ′ xy + b ′ y 2 = 0.
Substituting the value of m from Eq. (ii) in Eq. (i), then Sol. Since, both pair are passing through origin, let y = mx be
1  n  one of the lines represented by
 
 a (n + 1)  a   n + 1 2h
  +  =− ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
b b b
1 n n 1 then, ax 2 + 2hx (mx ) + b (mx )2 = 0
n +1 n +1 n +1 n +1 ⇒ bm 2 + 2hm + a = 0
⇒ a ⋅b +a ⋅b + 2h = 0 ...(i)
1
Corollary : If slope of one line is square of the other, then then, y = − x be one of the line represented by
put n = 2, then m
1 1 a ′ x 2 + 2h ′ xy + b ′ y 2 = 0
(ab 2 ) 3 + (a 2b ) 3 = − 2h  1 
On cubing both sides, we get Qy = − m x is perpendicular to 
1 1  1 1  
y = mx and passing through origin
ab 2 + a 2b + 3 (ab 2 ) 3 (a 2b ) 3 (ab 2 ) 3 + (a 2b ) 3  = − 8h 3
  2
   1   1 
then a ′ x 2 + 2h ′ x  − x + b′ − x = 0
⇒ ab (a + b ) + 3ab ( − 2h ) = − 8h 3  m   m 
(a + b ) 8h 2 ⇒ a ′ m 2 − 2h ′ m + b ′ = 0 ...(ii)
∴ + = 6.
h ab On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), by cross-multiplication rule i.e.
m2 m 1 m2 m
y Example 5 Find the product of the perpendiculars
b 2h a b 2h
drawn from the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) on the lines
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0. a′ − 2h ′ b ′ a′ − 2h ′
2
m m 1
Sol. Let the lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 be ⇒ = =
2hb ′ + 2h ′ a aa ′ − bb ′ − 2h ′ b − 2a ′ h
y = m1x and y = m 2 x .
(hb ′ + h ′ a ) (bb ′ − aa ′ )
Therefore, m1 + m 2 = −
2h
and m1m 2 =
a ∴ m2 = − ,m =
b b (h ′ b + a ′ h ) 2 (a ′ h + h ′ b )
The lengths of the perpendiculars from ( x 1, y1 ) on these On eliminating m, we obtain
lines are 4 (ha ′ + h ′ b ) (h ′ a + hb ′ ) + (bb ′ − aa ′ )2 = 0.
| y1 − m1x 1| | y1 − m 2 x 1|
and
1 + m1
2
1 + m 22 y Example 7 Show that the centroid ( x ′ , y ′ ) of the
| y1 − m1x 1| | y1 − m 2 x 1| triangle with sides ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 and
Their product = ×
1+ m12 1 + m 22 lx + my = 1, is given by
x′ y′ 2
=
|(y1 − m1x 1 ) (y1 − m 2 x 1 )| = = .
bl − hm am − hl 3 (am − 2hlm + bl 2 )
2
(1 + m12 ) (1 + m 22 )
Sol. Let the lines represented by
| y12 − (m1 + m 2 ) x 1y1 + m1m 2 x 12 |
= ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
1 + m12 + m 22 + m12 m 22
be y = m1x
| y12 − (m1 + m 2 ) x 1y1 + m1m 2 x 12 | and y = m2x .
=
1 + (m1 + m 2 )2 − 2m1m 2 + (m1m 2 )2 Y
B
2h a
| y12+ x 1y1 + x 12 |
2x

lx+

= b b
y=m

 2
2a a 2 
y=

4h
1 + 2 − +  G(x′,y′ )
1

 b b b2 
x A
y=m 1
| ax 12 + 2hx 1y1 + by12 | X
= O
{(a − b ) + 4h }
2 2
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 195

2h Y
Therefore, m1 + m 2 = − B
b
a

2x
m1m 2 =

lx+
and

y=m
b

m
y=
1
Coordinates of A and B are
 1 m1   1 m2  x A
 ,  and  ,  y=m 1
 l + mm1 l + mm1   l + mm 2 l + mm 2  O
X

Since, centroid = ( x ′ , y ′ ),
 1 1  Coordinates of A and B are
 + + 0
l + mm l + mm  −n − nm1   −n − nm 2 
then, x ′ =  1 2   ,  and  , ,
 3   l + mm1 l + mm1   l + mm 2 l + mm 2 
 
  respectively.
 2l + m(m1 + m 2 )  Then, required area
= 2 
 3 {l + ml (m1 + m 2 ) + m m1 m 2 ) }
2 1 − n   − nm 2   − n   − nm1 
=    −   
  2 l + mm1   l + mm 2   l + mm 2   l + mm1 
 2l −
2hm 
[Q if coordinates are (0, 0), ( x 1, y1 )and ,
 b 
= 1
 2 2hml m 2a   ( x 2 , y 2 ) , then area = | x 1y 2 − x 2y1 |]
 3 l − +  2
  b  
 b
1 n 2 (m 2 − m1 ) 
2 (bl − hm ) = 2 
= ⋅ ...(i) 2l + lm (m1 + m 2 ) + m m1m 2
2

3 (am 2 − 2hlm + bl 2 )
 m1  1 n 2 (m1 + m 2 )2 − 4m1m 2 
+
m2
+ 0 = 2 
 2l + lm (m1 + m 2 ) + m 2m1m 2
l + mm l + mm
and y ′ =  1 2 
 3 
   4h 2 4a 
  n2  2 − 
1  b b
 l (m1 + m 2 ) + 2mm1m 2  =
= 2  2 2hlm m 2a
 3 {l + lm (m1 + m 2 ) + m m1m 2 ) }
2
l2 − +
b b
 
 −
2hl 2ma
+ 
 b b  n 2 (h 2 − ab )
= =
 2 2hlm m 2 a   |(am 2 − 2hlm + bl 2 )|
 3 l − + 
  b  
 b
y Example 9 Show that the two straight lines
2 (am − hl )
= ⋅ ...(ii) x 2 (tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ ) − 2xy tan θ + y 2 sin 2 θ = 0
3 (am 2 − 2hlm + bl 2 )
move with the axis of x angles such that the difference
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get of their tangents is 2.
x′ y′ 2
= = Sol. Given equation is
bl − hm am − hl 3(am − 2hlm + bl 2 )
2
x 2 (tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ ) − 2xy tan θ + y 2 sin 2 θ = 0 ...(i)
y Example 8 Show that the area of the triangle formed and homogeneous equation of second degree
by the lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 and lx + my + n = 0 ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 ...(ii)
On comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
n 2 (h 2 − ab )
is . a = tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ
|(am 2 − 2hlm + bl 2 )|
h = − tan θ
Sol. Let equation of lines represented by and b = sin 2 θ
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 be y = m1x and y = m 2 x Let separate lines of Eq. (ii) are
therefore, m1 + m 2 = −
2h a
and m1m 2 = . y = m1x
b b and y = m2x
196 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

where, m1 = tan θ1 and m 2 = tan θ 2 2

= tan 2 θ − sin 2 θ (tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ )
2h 2 tan θ sin 2 θ
therefore, m1 + m 2 = − =
b sin 2 θ 2 sin θ
= (sec 2 θ − tan 2 θ − cos 2 θ )
a tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ sin 2 θ
and m1 ⋅ m 2 = =
b sin 2 θ 2 sin θ
= (1 − cos 2 θ )
∴ m1 ~ m 2 = (m1 + m 2 ) − 4m1m 2 2 sin 2 θ
2
4 tan 2 θ 4 (tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ ) = sin θ = 2
⇒ tan θ1 ~ tan θ 2 = − sin θ
sin 4 θ sin 2 θ

Exercise for Session 1

1. The lines given by the equation (2y 2 + 3xy − 2x 2 ) ( x + y − 1) = 0 form a triangle which is
(a) equilateral (b) isosceles
(c) right angled (d) obtuse angled

2. Area of the triangle formed by the lines y 2 − 9xy + 18x 2 = 0 and y = 9 is

(a) 27/4 (b) 0
(c) 9 / 4 (d) 27

3. The equation 3x 2 + 2hxy + 3y 2 = 0 represents a pair of straight lines passing through the origin. The two lines
are
(a) real and distinct, if h 2 > 3 (b) real and distinct, if h 2 > 9
(c) real and coincident, if h 2 = 3 (d) real and coincident, if h 2 > 3

4. If one of the lines of the pair ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 bisects the angle between positive directions of the axes,
then a, b , h satisfy the relation
(a) a + b = 2 |h | (b) a + b = − 2h
(c) a − b = 2 |h | (d) (a − b )2 = 4h 2

5. If the slope of one of the lines given by a 2 x 2 + 2hxy + b 2 y 2 = 0 be three times of the other, then h is equal to
(a) 2 3ab (b) − 2 3ab
2 2
(c) ab (d) − ab
3 3

6. Find the separate equations of two straight lines whose joint equation isab ( x 2 − y 2 ) + (a 2 − b 2 ) xy = 0.

7. Find the coordinates of the centroid of the triangle whose sides are 12x 2 − 20xy + 7y 2 = 0 and 2x − 3y + 4 = 0.

8. If the lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 be two sides of a parallelogram and the line lx + my = 1be one of its diagonal,
show that the equation of the other diagonal is y (bl − hm ) = x (am − hl ).

9. Find the condition that one of the lines given by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 may coincide with one of the lines given
by a′ x 2 + 2h′ xy + b ′ y 2 = 0.
Session 2
Angle between the Pair of Lines ax2 + 2hxy + by2

Angle between the Pair of Corollary 1 Condition for the lines to be perpendicular.

Lines ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 The lines are perpendicular if the angle between them is
π
.
Theorem The angle θ between the pair of lines 2
represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 π
i.e. θ=
2
2 (h 2 − ab ) 
is given by θ = tan −1
 . π
⇒ cot θ = cot
 | a + b |  2
Proof Let y = m 1 x and y = m 2 x be the lines represented by ⇒ cot θ = 0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0. | a + b|
⇒ =0 ⇒ a +b =0
2h a 2 (h 2 − ab )
Then, m 1 + m 2 = − , m 1m 2 =
b b i.e. Coefficient of x 2 + Coefficient of y 2 = 0
Since, θ be the angle between the lines Hence, the lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 are
y = m 1 x and y = m 2 x . perpendicular, iff a + b = 0 i.e. coefficient of x 2 +
Y
coefficient of y 2 = 0.
2x

Remark
m
y=

Pair of any two perpendicular lines through the origin.

x Q Lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
θ y=
m1
be perpendicular, then a + b = 0 or b = − a
X′ X Hence, the equation becomes ax 2 + 2hxy − ay 2 = 0

x 2 +   xy − y 2 = 0
Y′ 2h
⇒
 a
m − m 2  (m 1 + m 2 ) 2 − 4m 1m 2 ⇒ x 2 + pxy − y 2 = 0 ,
Then, tan θ = 1 = (Remember)
1 + m 1m 2 |1 + m 1m 2 | where, p is any constant.
2
 −2h  a  Corollary 2 Pair of lines perpendicular to the lines
  −4 
 b  b  2 (h 2 − ab ) represented by
= =
1 + a 
  |a + b | ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
 b and through origin.
2 (h 2 − ab )  Let lines represented by
∴ θ = tan − 1  
 | a + b|  ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 be y = m 1 x and y = m 2 x
2h
then m1 + m2 = −
Remark b
 2 h − ab 
2
a
θ = sin−1   and m 1m 2 =
 ( a − b) 2 + 4 h2  b
198 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

lines perpendiculars to y = m 1 x On comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

and y = m2 x a = sin 2 α − cos 2 β, h = sin β cos β,
and passing through origin are b = sin 2 α − sin 2 β
1 Let the angle between the lines representing by Eq. (i) is θ.
y =− x h 2 − ab
m1 ∴ tan θ = 2
|a + b |
1
and y =− x
m2 sin 2 β cos 2 β − (sin 2 α − cos 2 β ) (sin 2 α − sin 2 β )
=2
|sin 2 α − cos 2 β + sin 2 α − sin 2 β |
 x   x 
then, pair is y +  y +  =0 {sin 2 β cos 2 β − sin 4 α + sin 2 α sin 2 β
 m1   m2 
+ sin 2 α cos 2 β − sin 2 β cos 2 β}
⇒ x 2 + xy (m 1 + m 2 ) + m 1m 2 y 2 = 0 =2
|(2 sin 2 α − 1)|
2hxy a 2
⇒ x2 − + y =0 sin 2 α (1 − sin 2 α )
b b =2
| − cos 2α|
∴ bx 2 − 2hxy + ay 2 = 0
2 sin α cos α
= = tan 2α
Aid to memory For perpendicular pairs interchange the | − cos 2α|
coefficients of x 2 and y 2 and change the sign of xy. ∴ θ = 2α
Corollary 3 Condition for the lines to be coincident.
y Example 11 Show that the angle between the lines
The lines are coincident, if the angle between them is given by (a + 2hm + bm 2 ) x 2 + 2 {(b − a ) m − (m 2 − 1) h }
0° (or π )
xy + (am 2 − 2hm + b )y 2 = 0 is the same whatever be
i.e. θ = 0 (or π )
the value of m.
∴ tan θ = 0 °
Sol. Given equation is
2 (h 2 − ab ) (a + 2hm + bm 2 )x 2 + 2 { (b − a )m − (m 2 − 1)h }xy +
⇒ =0
| a + b| (am 2 − 2hm + b )y 2 = 0 ...(i)
⇒ h − ab = 0
2
The homogeneous equation of second degree
Ax 2 + 2Hxy + By 2 = 0 ...(ii)
⇒ h 2 = ab
On comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Hence, the lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
A = a + 2hm + bm 2 , H = (b − a )m − (m 2 − 1)h ,
are coincident, iff h 2 = ab, then ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2
B = am 2 − 2hm + b
is a perfect square.
Let the angle between the lines representing by Eq. (i) is θ.
Remark 2 ( H 2 − AB )
∴ tan θ =
The parallel lines will be coincident only as both pass through a | A + B|
point.
{(b − a ) m − (m 2 − 1)h }2 − (a + 2hm + bm 2 )
y Example 10 Find the angle between the lines 2
(am 2 − 2hm + b )
( x 2 + y 2 ) sin 2 α = ( x cos β − y sin β) 2 . =
| a + 2hm + bm 2 + am 2 − 2hm + b |
Sol. Given equation is
2 (m 2 + 1)2 (h 2 − ab ) 2 (h 2 − ab )
( x 2 + y 2 ) sin 2 α = ( x cos β − y sin β )2 = =
| a + b | ( m + 1)
2
|a + b |
⇒ x 2 (sin 2 α − cos 2 β ) + 2xy sin β cos β
 2 (h 2 − ab ) 
+y 2 (sin 2 α − sin 2 β ) = 0 …(i) ⇒ θ = tan − 1  
The homogeneous equation of second degree is  | a + b | 
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 …(ii) which is independent of m. Hence, the angle between the
lines representing by Eq. (i) is same for all values of m.
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 199

y Example 12 Show that the straight lines y Example 13 Show that the condition that two of the
x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 = 0 and the line x − y = 4 form an three lines represented by ax 3 + bx 2 y + cxy 2 + dy 3 = 0
equilateral triangle. may be at right angles is a 2 + ac + bd + d 2 = 0.
Sol. Equation x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 = 0 ...(i) Sol. The given equation being homogeneous of third degree
is a homogeneous equation of second degree in x and y. represents three straight lines through the origin. Since,
Therefore, it represents two lines OP and OQ through the two of these lines are to be at right angles.
origin. Let pair of these lines be ( x 2 + pxy − y 2 ), p is constant and
Equation, x −y = 4 ...(ii) the other factor is (ax − dy ).
represent the line PQ . Hence, ax 3 + bx 2y + cxy 2 + dy 3 = ( x 2 + pxy − y 2 ) (ax − dy )
Y Comparing the coefficients of similar terms, we get
b = ap − d ...(i)
X′ X
O 15° y+(2–√3)x=0 c = − pd − a ...(ii)
60°
Multiplying Eq. (i) by d and Eq. (ii) by a and adding, we get
bd + ac = − d 2 − a 2
15 °

P
⇒ a 2 + ac + bd + d 2 = 0
y+(2

Aliter :
y=
+√3)

x–

Let y = m1x , y = m 2 x and y = m 3 x be the lines represented

x=0

by the equation
Q ax 3 + bx 2y + cxy 2 + dy 3 = 0.
Y′
Then
Let ∠POQ = θ. ax 3 + bx 2y + cxy 2 + dy 3 = d (y − m1x )
2 [(2) − 1 ⋅ 1]
2
(y − m 2 x ) (y − m 3 x )
then, tan θ = = 3 ...(i)
| 1 + 1| On equating the coefficients of x 3 , x 2y and xy 2 on both
∴ θ = 60° sides, we get
From Eq. (i), x 2
+ 4 xy + y 2 = 0 c
m1 + m 2 + m 3 = −
2 d
y  y 
⇒   + 4   +1=0 b
x x m1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m1 =
d
y − 4 ± (42 − 4) a
⇒ = = −2± 3 and m1m 2m 3 = − ...(ii)
x 2 d
⇒ y = (− 2 ± 3) x Let the perpendicular lines be y = m1x and y = m 2 x , then
i.e. OP : y + (2 − 3 ) x = 0 m1m 2 = − 1
OQ : y + (2 + 3 ) x = 0 a
and From Eq. (ii), m3 = ...(iii)
d
Q Slope of PQ = 1 and Slope of OP = − (2 − 3 ).
On putting y = m 3 x in Eq. (i), we get
If ∠OPQ = α
ax 3 + bm 3 x 3 + cm 32 x 3 + dm 33 x 3 = 0
1 − ( − 2 + 3 ) 3− 3
 =
then tan α = = 3 ⇒ dm 33 + cm 32 + bm 3 + a = 0
 1 − 2 + 3  − 1 + 3 3 2
a a a
∴ α = 60° ⇒ d   +c   +b  +a=0 [from Eq. (iii)]
d  d  d 
Hence, ∠OQP = 180° − (60° + 60°) = 60°
Hence, ∆OPQ is an equilateral triangle. Hence, a 2 + ac + bd + d 2 = 0
200 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 2

1. The angle between the pair of straight lines y 2 sin2 θ − xy sin2 θ + x 2(cos 2 θ − 1) = 0 is
π π π 2π
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 2 3 3

2. The angle between the lines given by the equation ay 2 − (1 + λ 2 ) xy − ax 2 = 0 is same as the angle between
the lines
(a) 5x 2 + 2xy − 3y 2 = 0 (b) x 2 − 2xy − 3y 2 = 0
(c) x 2 − y 2 = 100 (d) xy = 0

3. Which of the following pair of straight lines intersect at right angles ?

(a) 2x 2 = y (x + 2y ) (b) (x + y )2 = x (y + 3x )
(c) 2y (x + y ) = xy (d) y = m 2x

4. If h = ab , then the lines represented by ax + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 are

2 2

(a) parallel (b) perpendicular

(c) coincident (d) None of these

5. Equation ax 3 − 9x 2y − xy 2 + 4y 3 = 0 represents three straight lines. If the two of the lines are perpendicular,
then a is equal to
(a) −5 (b) 5
(c) −4 (d) 4

6. Find the angle between the lines whose joint equation is2x 2 − 3xy + y 2 = 0.

7. Show that the lines (1 − cos θ tan α ) y 2 − (2 cos θ + sin2 θ tan α ) xy + cos θ (cos θ + tan α ) x 2 = 0
include an angle α between them.

8. Find the angle between the lines represented by the equation x 2 − 2pxy + y 2 = 0.

9. Show that the lines x 2 − 4xy + y 2 = 0 and x + y = 1form an equilateral triangle and find its area.

10. Prove that the triangle formed by the lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 and lx + my = 1is isosceles,
if h (l 2 − m 2 ) = (a − b ) m .
Session 3
Bisectors of the Angle between the Lines
Given by a Homogeneous Equation

Bisectors of the Angle ∴ The pair of bisectors is

 (y − m x ) (y − m x )   (y − m x ) (y − m x ) 
between the Lines Given by a  1
 (1 + m 2 )
+ 2 
2  
1
− 2
2 
 =0
 (1 + m 2 )   (1 + m 1 )
2
(1 + m 2 ) 
Homogeneous Equation 1

(y − m 1 x ) 2 (y − m 2 x ) 2
Theorem The joint equation of the bisectors of the angles ⇒ − =0
(1 + m 12 ) (1 + m 22 )
between the lines represented by the equation
x 2 − y 2 xy ⇒ (1 + m 22 ) (y 2 + m 12 x 2 − 2m 1 xy )
ax + 2hxy + by = 0 is
2 2
= .
a −b h − (1 + m 12 ) (y 2 + m 22 x 2 − 2m 2 xy ) = 0
Proof Let the lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + bySession-
2
=0 ⇒ (m 22 − m 12 )y 2 − (m 22 − m 12 ) x 2
be y − m 1 x = 0 and y − m 2 x = 0, then +2 xy (m 2 − m 1 ) − 2m 1m 2 (m 2 − m 1 ) xy = 0
2h a
m1 + m2 = − and m 1m 2 = ⇒ (m 2 + m 1 ) (y − x 2 ) + 2 xy − 2m 1m 2 xy = 0
2
b b
[Qm 1 − m 2 ≠ 0 ]
Since, the bisectors of the angles between the lines are the
locus of a point which is equidistant from the two given  2h 
 Qm 1 + m 2 = − 
lines.  2h   a b
⇒ ( x 2 − y 2 )  −  = 2 xy  1 −   
Y
 b   b   mm = a 
 
1 2
b
2x
m
y=

x 2 − y 2 xy
∴ = [b ≠ 0 ]
N ,k) x
P(h m 1
a −b h
y=
M Aliter :
X¢ X Let the equation ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 represent two lines
O
L1 OM 1 and L2 OM 2 making angles θ 1 and θ 2 with the
Y¢
positive direction of X-axis.
Let P (h, k ) be a point on a bisector of the angle between If slopes of L1 OM 1 and L2 OM 2 are m 1 and m 2 , then
the given lines. Then, PM = PN
m 1 = tan θ 1 and m 2 = tan θ 2
| k − m 1 h| | k − m 2 h|
⇒ = and
2h
m 1 + m 2 = − , m 1m 2 =
a
...(i)
(1 + m 12 ) (1 + m 22 ) b b
(k − m 1 h ) (k − m 2 h ) Let NON 1 and KOK 1 are the required bisectors,
⇒ =± θ − θ1
(1 + m 12 ) (1 + m 22 ) Since ∠ NOL1 = ∠ NOL2 = 2
2
Hence, the locus of a P (h, k ) is
θ − θ1 θ1 + θ2
(y − m 1 x ) (y − m 2 x ) ∠ NOX = θ 1 + 2 =
=± 2 2
(1 + m 12 ) (1 + m 22 ) π
Since, ∠ NOK =
2
202 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y Remark
L2
x 2 − y 2 xy
N The joint equation of the bisectors is =
a− b h
L1
K or hx 2 − ( a − b) xy − hy 2 = 0
i.e. coefficient of x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0.

θ1 θ2
Hence, the bisectors of the angle between the lines are always
X′ X perpendicular to each other.
O
M1
N1 K1 Corollaries
M2 Y′

π π  θ + θ2  1. If a = b, the bisectors are x 2 − y 2 = 0

∴ ∠ KOX = + ∠ NOX = +  1 
2 2  2  i.e. x − y = 0, x + y = 0
2. If h = 0, the bisectors are xy = 0
 θ + θ2 
Equation of bisectors arey = x tan  1  i.e. x = 0, y = 0
 2 
 θ + θ2  y Example 14 Find the equation of the bisectors of the
⇒ y − x tan  1  =0 …(ii) angle between the lines represented by
 2 
 π θ + θ2  3 x 2 − 5 xy + 4y 2 = 0.
and y = x tan  + 1 
2 2  Sol. Given equation is
 θ + θ2  3x 2 − 5xy + 4y 2 = 0 ...(i)
⇒ y = − x cot  1 
 2  Comparing it with the equation
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 ...(ii)
 θ + θ2 
⇒ y + x cot  1  =0 ...(iii) 5
 2  then a = 3, h = − , b = 4
2
∴ Pair of bisectors Hence, the equation of bisectors of the angle between the
pair of the lines (i) is
  θ1 + θ2     θ1 + θ2  
y − x tan  2   y + x cot  2   = 0 x2 − y2
=
xy
    3− 4 −5 / 2
  θ + θ2   θ1 + θ2   x 2 − y 2 2xy
⇒ y 2 − x 2 + xy  cot  1  − tan    =0 ⇒ =
  2   2  −1 −5
∴ 5x − 2xy − 5y = 0
2 2
 2  θ1 + θ2  
 1 − tan  
 2  y Example 15 Show that the line y = mx bisects the
⇒ x 2 − y 2 = xy 
  θ1 + θ2   angle between the lines
 tan   
 2   ax 2 − 2hxy + by 2 = 0,
 2  if h (1 − m 2 ) + m (a − b ) = 0.
⇒ x 2 − y 2 = xy  
 tan (θ 1 + θ 2 )  Sol. Equation of pair of bisectors of angles between lines
ax 2 − 2hxy + by 2 = 0 is
 1 − tan θ 1 tan θ 2 
⇒ x 2 − y 2 = 2 xy   x 2 − y 2 xy
 tan θ 1 + tan θ 2  =
a−b −h
 1 − m 1m 2  ⇒ − h ( x 2 − y 2 ) = (a − b ) xy ...(i)
⇒ x 2 − y 2 = 2 xy  
 m1 + m2  But y = mx is one of these lines, then it will satisfy
it. Substituting y = mx in Eq. (i),
1 −a / b 
⇒ x 2 − y 2 = 2 xy   − h ( x 2 − m 2 x 2 ) = (a − b )x ⋅ mx
 − 2h / b 
Dividing by x 2 , h (1 − m 2 ) + m (a − b ) = 0
( x 2 − y 2 ) xy
∴ =
(a − b ) h
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 203

y Example 16 If pairs of straight lines Y S

Q
x 2 − 2pxy − y 2 = 0 and x 2 − 2qxy − y 2 = 0 be such
A
that each pair bisects the angle between the other
pair, then prove that pq = − 1. P
B
Sol. According to the question, the equation of the bisectors of
the angle between the lines x R
x 2 − 2pxy − y 2 = 0 ...(i) x
is x 2 − 2qxy − y 2 = 0 …(ii) X′
O
X
R′
∴ The equation of bisectors of the angle between the lines P′
A′
(i) is S′ B'
x 2 − y 2 xy Q′ Y′
=
1 − ( − 1) − p which are also the bisectors of the second pair.
Let P ′ OP , Q ′ OQ , R ′ OR, S ′ OS be the lines of the Eqs. (i) and
⇒ − px 2 − 2xy + py 2 = 0 …(iii)
(ii) pairs respectively and A ′ OA and B ′ OB be their
Since, Eqs. (ii) and (iii) are identical, comparing Eqs. (ii) and bisectors. We have,
(iii), we get ∠ ROA = ∠ SOA
1 −2q −1 ∠ POA = ∠QOA
= = ⇒ pq = − 1 and
−p −2 p ⇒ ∠ ROA − ∠ POA = ∠SOA − ∠QOA
⇒ ∠ ROP = ∠SOQ
Remark Hence the result.
By taking the bisectors of the angles between the pair of lines (ii),
we will get the same result. y Example 19 If the lines represented by
y Example 17 Prove that the angle between one of the x 2 − 2pxy − y 2 = 0 are rotated about the origin
lines given by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 and one of the through an angle θ , one in clockwise direction and the
lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + λ ( x 2 + y 2 ) = 0 is equal to other in anti-clockwise direction, then find the
equation of the bisectors of the angle between the
angle between other two lines of the system. lines in the new position.
Sol. The equation of the bisectors of the angle between the lines
Sol. Since, lines represented by x 2 − 2pxy − y 2 = 0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 ...(i)
are perpendicular to each other. The bisectors of the angles
x 2 − y 2 xy between the lines in new position are same as the bisectors
is =
a−b h of the angles between their old positions. i.e.
OC , OD ; OA , OB be the old and new pairs respectively and
and the equation of bisectors of the angle between the lines
OE and OF be their bisectors, we have
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + λ ( x 2 + y 2 ) = 0 …(ii) ∠COE = ∠ DOE
⇒ (a + λ) x 2 + 2hxy + (b + λ )y 2 = 0 and ∠COA = ∠ DOB = θ [given]
x2 − y2 xy x 2 − y 2 xy D Y B
is = ⇒ = E
(a + λ ) − (b + λ ) h a−b h
A
∴ Bisectors of angles between lines given by Eqs. (i) and
(ii) are the same. Hence the result. F
θ
y Example 18 Show that the pair of lines given by θ C
a 2 x 2 + 2h(a + b )xy + b 2 y 2 = 0 is equally inclined to the X′ X
O
pair given by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0.
Y′
Sol. Given pair of lines are
⇒ ∠COE − ∠COA = ∠DOE − ∠ DOB
a 2 x 2 + 2h (a + b )xy + b 2y 2 = 0 ...(i)
⇒ ∠ AOE = ∠ BOE
and ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 ...(ii)
x 2 − y 2 xy
Equation of bisectors of first pair is Therefore, the required equation is =
1 − ( − 1) − p
x2 − y2 xy x 2 − y 2 xy
= ⇒ = i.e. px 2 + 2xy − py 2 = 0.
a −b
2 2
h (a + b ) a−b h
204 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 3

1. If coordinate axes are the angle bisectors of the pair of lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0, then
(a) a = b (b) h = 0
(c) a + b = 0
2
(d) a + b 2 = 0

2. If the line y = mx is one of the bisector of the lines x 2 + 4xy − y 2 = 0, then the value of m is
5−1 5+ 1
(a) (b)
2 2
 5 + 1  5 − 1
(c) −   (d) −  
 2   2 

3. If one of the lines of my 2 + (1 − m 2 ) xy − mx 2 = 0 is a bisector of the angle between the lines xy = 0, then
cos −1(m ) is
(a) 0 (b) π/2
(c) π (d) 3 π / 2

4. The bisectors of the angles between the lines (ax + by )2 = c (bx − ay )2, c > 0 are respectively parallel and
perpendicular to the line
(a) bx − ay + µ = 0 (b) ax + by + λ = 0
(c) ax − by + ν = 0 (d) bx + ay + τ = 0

5. If the pairs of straight lines ax 2 + 2hxy − ay 2 = 0 and bx 2 + 2gxy − by 2 = 0 be such that each bisects the angles
between the other, then prove that hg + ab = 0.

6. Prove that the lines 2x 2 + 6xy + y 2 = 0 are equally inclined to the lines 4x 2 + 18xy + y 2 = 0.

7. Show that the lines bisecting the angle between the bisectors of the angles between the lines
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 are given by (a − b ) ( x 2 − y 2 ) + 4hxy = 0.

8. Prove that the bisectors of the angle between the lines ax 2 + acxy + cy 2 = 0 and
 1 2  1 2
3 +  x + xy + 3 +  y = 0 are always the same.
 c  a

9. The lines represented by x 2 + 2λxy + 2y 2 = 0 and the lines represented by (1 + λ )x 2 − 8xy + y 2 = 0 are equally
inclined, find the values of λ.
Session 4
General Equation of Second Degree,
Important Theorems

General Equation of Second Now, ax 12 + 2hx 1 y 1 + by 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = 0

⇒ x 1 (ax 1 + hy 1 + g ) + y 1 (hx 1 + by 1 + f )
Degree + ( gx 1 + fy 1 + c ) = 0
The equation ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ⇒ x 1 ⋅ 0 + y 1 ⋅ 0 + gx 1 + fy 1 + c = 0
[from Eqs. (iii) and (iv)]
is the general equation of second degree and represents a
conics (pair of straight lines, circle, parabola, ellipse, ⇒ gx 1 + fy 1 + c = 0 ...(vi)
hyperbola). It contains six constants a, b, c , f , g, h. On eliminating x 1 , y 1 from Eqs. (iii), (iv) and (vi), we get
the determinant
i.e. a = coefficient of x 2 , b = coefficient of y 2 , a h g
c = constant term, g = half the coefficient of x, h b f =0
f = half the coefficient of y, g f c
h = half the coefficient of xy. ∴ abc + 2 fgh − af − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0,
2

Theorem The necessary and sufficient condition for as the required condition.
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 Remarks
to represent a pair of straight lines is that 1. Without using determinant On solving Eqs. (iii) and (iv),
we get
a h g  hf − bg gh − af 
( x1, y1 ) =  , 
abc + 2 fgh − af − bg − ch = 0 or h
2 2 2
b f =0.  ab − h ab − h 
2 2

g f c and then substituting the values of x1 and y1 in Eqs. (vi), we

obtain
Proof Necessary condition : Let the equation be
 hf − bg   gh − af 
g   + f   + c =0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i) 2
 ab − h 
2
 ab − h 
represent a pair of lines. Assuming that these lines are not ⇒ abc + 2fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch2 = 0
parallel, we suppose further that their point of intersection 2. By making ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
is ( x 1 , y 1 ). Shifting the origin at ( x 1 , y 1 ) without rotating
homogeneous with the help of a new variable z, i.e.
the coordinate axes, we have the Eq. (i) transforms to
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gxz + 2fyz + cz 2 = 0
a( X + x 1 ) 2 + 2h( X + x 1 )(Y + y 1 ) + b(Y + y 1 ) 2 Let f ( x, y, z ) ≡ ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gxz + 2fyz + cz 2 = 0
+ 2 g( X + x 1 ) + 2 f (Y + y 1 ) + c = 0 ...(ii) ∴
∂f
= 2ax + 2hy + 2gz = 0
∂x
Now this Eq. (ii) represents a pair of lines through the new
∂f
origin and consequently, it is homogeneous in X and Y. = 2hx + 2by + 2fz = 0
∂y
Hence, the coefficients of X and Y and the constant term ∂f
= 2gx + 2fy + 2cz = 0
in Eq. (ii) must vanish separately. ∂z
i.e. coefficient of X = coefficient of Y = constant term = 0 and finally putting z = 1, we obtain equations
ax + hy + g = 0, hx + by + f = 0, gx + fy + c = 0
⇒ ax 1 + hy 1 + g = 0 ...(iii)
which are same as Eqs. (iii), (iv) and (vi), respectively.
hx 1 + by 1 + f = 0 ...(iv) 3. If ab − h2 = 0, the lines given by Eq. (i) are parallel. In this
and ax 12 + 2hx 1 y 1 + by 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = 0 ...(v) case, the method followed in the above proof fails and we
follow the following method.
206 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Aliter I : (Proof) Case I If a ≠ 0, then writing Eq. (i) as a quadratic

Let the lines represented by equation in x, we get
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) ax 2 + 2 x (hy + g ) + by 2 + 2 fy + c = 0
be lx + my + n = 0 and l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ = 0 Solving, we have
then ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c −2(hy + g ) ± 4(hy + g ) 2 − 4a(by 2 + 2 fy + c )
x=
≡ (lx + my + n ) (l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ ) ...(ii) 2a
Comparing the coefficients of similar terms in both sides − (hy + g ) ± {(h 2 − ab )y 2 + 2( gh − af )y + ( g 2 − ac ) }
of Eq. (ii), we get ∴x =
a
ll ′ = a, mm ′ = b, nn ′ = c 
  Eq. (i), will represent two straight lines, if LHS of Eq. (i),
lm ′ + l ′ m = 2h, ln′ + l ′ n = 2 g, …(iii) can be resolved into two linear factors, therefore the
mn ′ + m ′ n = 2 f 
  expression under the square root should be a perfect
We now eliminate l, m, n, l ′ , m ′ and n′ from these equations, square.
l l′ 0 l′ l 0 [QAx 2 + Bx + C = 0 is a perfect
we have m m′ 0 × m′ m 0 =0 square ⇔ B 2 − 4 AC = 0 ]
n n′ 0 n′ n 0 Hence, 4( gh − af ) 2 − 4(h 2 − ab )( g 2 − ac ) = 0
[Qeach determinant = 0] or abc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0 ...(ii)
2ll ′ lm ′ + l ′ m ln ′ + l ′ n
Ths is called discriminant of the Eq. (i).
⇒ ml ′ + m ′ l 2mm ′ mn ′ + m ′ n = 0
Case II If a = 0, b ≠ 0, then writing Eq. (i) as a quadratic
nl ′ + n ′ l nm ′ + n ′ m 2nn′ equation in y
2a 2h 2g i.e. by 2 + 2y (hx + f ) + 2 gx + c = 0
⇒ 2h 2b 2f =0 and proceeding above we get the condition
2g 2 f 2c 2 fgh − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0
a h g which is condition obtained by putting a = 0 in Eq. (ii).
⇒ ∆= h b f =0 Case III If a = 0, b = 0 but h ≠0, then Eq. (i) becomes
g f c 2hxy + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
∴ ∆ = abc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0, Multiplying by
h
[Qh ≠ 0 ]
which is the required necessary condition. 2
ch
⇒ h 2 xy + hgx + hfy + = 0
Remark 2
Without using determinant ch
Now, ( lm′ + l ′ m) (ln′ + l ′ n) ( mn′ + m′ n) = 2h ⋅ 2g ⋅ 2f ⇒ (hx + f ) (hy + g ) = fg −
2
⇒ 2ll ′ mm′ nn′ + ll ′ ( m2n′2 + m′2 n2 )
+ mm′( n2l ′2 + n′2 l 2 ) + nn′ ( l 2m′2 + l ′2 m2 ) = 8fgh
Above equation represents two straight lines, if
⇒ 2ll ′ mm′ nn′ + ll ′{( mn′ + m′ n) 2 − 2mm′ nn′}
ch
fg − = 0 ⇒ 2 fgh − ch 2 = 0
+ mm′{( nl ′ + n′ l ) 2 − 2nn′ ll ′} + nn′ {( lm′ + l ′ m) 2 − 2ll ′ mm′} 2
= 8fgh [from Eq. (iii)] which is condition obtained by putting a = 0, b = 0 in
⇒ 2abc + a( 4 f − 4 bc ) + b( 4 g − 4 ca) + c( 4 h − 4 ab) = 8 fgh
2 2 2 Eq. (ii).
Hence in each case, the condition that
∴ abc + 2fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch2 = 0,
which is the required necessary condition.
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
Aliter II : (Proof) represents two straight lines is
Given equation is abc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) which is the required necessary condition.
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 207

Sufficient condition (Conversely)

Here, we have to show that the equation Important Theorems
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 represents a pair of Theorem 1 The angle between the lines represented
straight lines. by
a h g ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
h b f =0 is given by
g f c 2 (h 2 − ab ) 
i.e. lines ax + hy + g = 0, hx + by + f = 0, gx + fy + c = 0 θ = tan −1  .
 | a + b | 
are concurrent.
Let the point of concurrency be ( x 1 , y 1 ). Proof Let y = m 1 x + c 1
Then, ax 1 + hy 1 + g = 0 ...(iii) and y = m2 x + c 2
hx 1 + by 1 + f = 0 ...(iv) be the lines represented by
and gx 1 + fy 1 + c = 0 ...(v) ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
Y
Now, shifting the origin at ( x 1 , y 1 ) without rotating the
coordinate axes the equation P
ax + 2hxy + by + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 reduces to
2 2

1
1 x+c
2
c
θ

+
2x
a( X + x 1 ) + 2h( X + x 1 ) (Y + y 1 ) + b
2

y=m
y=
(Y + y 1 ) 2 + 2 g( X + x 1 ) + 2 f (Y + y 1 ) + c = 0 β α
X′ X
O R Q
⇒ aX + 2hXY + bY + 2 X (ax 1 + hy 1 + g )
2 2

+ 2Y (hx 1 + by 1 + f ) + x 1 (ax 1 + hy 1 + g ) Y′

+ y 1 (hx 1 + by 1 + f ) + ( gx 1 + fy 1 + c ) = 0 where, m 1 = tan α, m 2 = tan β

Then, ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c
⇒ aX 2 + 2hXY + bY 2 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 = 0
[from Eqs. (iii), (iv) and (v)] ≡ (y − m 1 x − c 1 ) (y − m 2 x − c 2 )
i.e. aX 2 + 2hXY + bY 2 = 0 Comparing coefficients of like powers, we obtain
2h a
It is homogeneous equation of second degree. So, it m 1 + m 2 = − , m 1m 2 =
represents a pair of straight lines through the new origin. b b
Now, if θ be the acute angle between the lines
Hence, the equation ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
y = m 1 x + c 1 and y = m 2 x + c 2 , then
represents a pair of straight lines, if
m − m 2  (m 1 + m 2 ) 2 − 4m 1m 2
abc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0. tan θ = 1 =
1 + m 1m 2 | 1 + m 1m 2 |
Some useful identities If y = m 1 x + c 1 , y = m 2 x + c 2 be
2
lines represented by Eq. (i). Then,  2h  a 
−  − 4  
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c  b b  2 (h 2 − ab )
= =
= b (y − m 1 x − c 1 ) (y − m 2 x − c 2 ) 1 + a 
  |a +b |
= b (y 2 − (m 1 + m 2 ) xy + m 1m 2 x 2  b
+ (m 1 c 2 + m 2 c 1 ) x − (c 1 + c 2 )y + c 1 c 2 ) 2 (h 2 − ab ) 
On equating coefficients, we get ∴ θ = tan −1  
 | a + b | 
2h a 2g
m 1 + m 2 = − ,m 1m 2 = ,m 1 c 2 + m 2 c 1 = ,
b b b Corollary 1. The angle between the lines represented by
2f c ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
c1 + c2 = − , c 1c 1 =
b b is the same as the angle between the lines represented by
These five relations are very useful to solve many problems.
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
208 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Corollary 2. The lines represented by then ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c

ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ≡ (lx + my + n ) (l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ )
are perpendicular iff a + b = 0 and parallel iff h = ab. 2 Comparing the coefficients of similar terms in both sides
then ll ′ = a, mm ′ = b, nn ′ = c
Theorem 2 The lines represented by
lm ′ + l ′ m = 2h, ln′ + l ′ n = 2 g, mn ′ + m ′ n = 2 f
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
⇒ (lm ′ − l ′ m ) = (lm ′ + l ′ m ) 2 − 4ll ′ mm ′ = 2 (h 2 − ab )
will be coincident, if h − ab = 0, g − ac = 0
2 2
⇒ (nl ′ − n ′ l ) = (ln ′ + l ′ n ) 2 − 4ll ′ nn ′ = 2 ( g 2 − ac )
and f 2 − bc = 0.
and (mn ′ − m ′ n ) = (mn ′ + m ′ n ) 2 − 4 mm ′ nn ′
Proof Let the lines represented by
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 = 2 ( f 2 − bc )
be lx + my + n = 0 and l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ = 0 Now, solving lx + my + n = 0 and l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ = 0
x y 1
then ax + 2hxy + by + 2 gx + 2 fy + c
2 2
then = =
(mn ′ − m ′ n ) (nl ′ − n ′ l ) (lm ′ − l ′ m )
≡ (lx + my + n ) (l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ )
x y 1
Comparing the coefficients of similar terms in both sides, ⇒ = =
we get 2 ( f 2 − bc ) 2 ( g 2 − ac ) 2 (h 2 − ab )
ll ′ = a, mm ′ = b, nn ′ = c    f 2 − bc   g 2 − ac  
 ∴ (x , y ) =   2 ,  
lm ′ + l ′ m = 2h, ln′ + l ′ n = 2 g    h − ab   h 2 − ab  
 
mn ′ + m ′ n = 2 f 

Q Lines lx + my + n = 0 and l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ =0 are  f 2 − bc  ( f 2 − bc ) (h 2 − ab )
Also, x =  2  =
coincident, then =
l m n
= .  h − ab  (h 2 − ab )
l ′ m ′ n′
f 2 h 2 − abf 2 − bch 2 + b (abc )
Taking the ratios in pairs, then =
lm ′ − l ′ m = 0,mn ′ − m ′ n = 0, ln′ − l ′ n = 0 (h 2 − ab )

⇒ (lm ′ + l ′ m ) 2 − 4ll ′ mm ′ = 0, f 2 h 2 − abf 2 − bch 2 + b (af 2 + bg 2 + ch 2 − 2 fgh )

=
(h 2 − ab )
(mn ′ + m ′ n ) 2 − 4 mm ′ nn ′ = 0
[Qabc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0 ]
and (ln ′ + l ′ n ) 2 − 4ll ′ nn ′ = 0
( f 2 h 2 + b 2 g 2 − 2bfgh ) (bg − hf ) 2
i.e. ( 4h 2 − 4ab ) = 0, ( 4 f 2 − 4bc ) = 0 = =
(h 2 − ab ) (h 2 − ab )
and ( 4 g − 4ac ) = 0
2
 bg − hf 
i.e. h − ab = 0, f 2 − bc = 0, g 2 − ac = 0
2 = 2 
 h − ab 
Theorem 3 The point of intersection of the lines  af − gh 
represented by Similarly, y = 2 
 h − ab 
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 is
 bg − hf af − gh 
  f 2 − bc   g 2 − ca     (x , y ) =  2 .
 or  bg − hf , af − gh  .
Hence, ,
   ,    h − ab h 2 − ab 
  h 2 − ab   h 2 − ab    h 2 − ab h 2 − ab 
 
Remembering Method (For second point)
Proof Let the lines represented by a h g
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 Since, ∆= h b f
be lx + my + n = 0 and l ′ x + m ′ y + n ′ = 0 g f c
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 209

taking first two rows (repeat first column) Theorem 4 The pair of bisectors of the lines
a h g a represented by
h b f h ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0,
⇒ ab − h 2 , hf − bg, gh − af ( x − α ) 2 − ( x − β) 2 ( x − α ) (y − β)
is =
⇒ h 2 − ab, bg − hf , af − gh (a − b ) h
bg − hf af − gh where (α, β) be the point of intersection of the pair of
⇒ 1, , straight lines represented by Eq. (i).
h 2 − ab h 2 − ab
Proof Since (α, β) be the point of intersection of the lines
 bg − hf af − gh  represented by
Hence, point of intersection is  2 , .
 h − ab h 2 − ab  ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
OR Shifting the origin at (α, β) without rotating the coordinate
Cofactors of third column are C 13 , C 23 , C 33 axes, the Eq. (i) reduces to
h b a( X + α ) 2 + 2h( X + α ) (Y + β)
Q C 13 = = hf − bg
g f + b(Y + β) 2 + 2 g( X + α ) + 2 f (Y + β) + c = 0

C 23 = −
a h
= hg − af [Qx = X + α and y =Y + β]
g f ⇒ (aX + 2hXY + bY ) + 2 X (aα + hβ + g )
2 2

and C 33 =
a h
= ab − h 2 + 2Y (hα + bβ + f )
h b + aα + 2hαβ + bβ + 2 gα + 2 f β + c = 0…(ii)
2 2

C C  This equation represents a pair of straight lines passing

Point of intersection is  13 , 23  i.e.
 C 33 C 33  through the new origin. So, it must be homogeneous
equation of second degree in X and Y.
 hf − bg hg − af   bg − hf af − hg 
 ,  or  2 , . ∴ aα + hβ + g = 0 ...(iii)
 ab − h 2 ab − h 2   h − ab h 2 − ab 
hα + bβ + f = 0 ....(iv)
Remembering Mehod (For first point) and aα 2 + 2hαβ + bβ2 + 2 gα + 2 f β + c = 0 …(v)
Cofactors of leading diagonal are
Now, from Eq. (ii), aX 2 + 2hXY + bY 2 = 0 ...(vi)
C 11 , C 22 , C 33
b f The equation of the bisectors of the angles between the
Q C 11 = = bc − f 2 , lines given by Eq. (vi) is
f c
X 2 − Y 2 XY
a g = ...(vii)
C 22 = = ac − g 2 a −b h
g c [with reference to new origin]
a h Replacing X by x − α and Y by y − β in Eq. (vii), then
and C 33 = = ab − h 2
h b ( x − α ) 2 − (y − β) 2 ( x − α ) (y − β)
=
 C 11 C 22  (a − b ) h
∴ Point of intersection are  , 
 C 33 C 33  [with reference to old origin]
which is the required equation of the bisectors of the
  bc − f 2   ac − g 2  
i.e.   ,   angles between the lines given by Eq. (i).
  ab − h 2   ab − h 2  
 
Remark
  f 2 − bc   g 2 − ac   If ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
or   ,  
  h 2 − ab   h 2 − ab   represents two straight lines, then the equation of lines through
  the origin and parallel to them is ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0.
210 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 20 For what value of λ does the To find the angle between the lines
equation 12x 2 − 10xy + 2y 2 + 11x − 5y + λ = 0 If θ be the angle between the lines, then
represent a pair of straight lines? Find their equations 2 h 2 − ab
tan θ =
and the angle between them. |a + b |
Sol. Comparing the given equation with the equation 2 25 − 24 1
= =
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0, | 12 + 2| 7
11 5
we get a = 12, h = − 5, b = 2, g = , f = − and c = λ − 1  1
∴ θ = tan  .
2 2 7
If the given equation represents a pair of straight lines, then
abc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0 y Example 21 Prove that the equation
 5 11 25 8 x 2 + 8 xy + 2y 2 + 26 x + 13y + 15 = 0 represents a pair
⇒ 12 × 2 × λ + 2 ×  −  × × ( − 5) − 12 ×
 2  2 4 of parallel straight lines. Also, find the
121 perpendicular distance between them.
−2× − λ × 25 = 0
4 Sol. Given equation is
∴ λ = 2, also h 2 − ab = 25 − 24 = 1 > 0 8x 2 + 8xy + 2y 2 + 26x + 13y + 15 = 0 …(i)
∴ The given equation will represent a pair of straight lines, Writing Eq. (i) as quadratic equation in x, we get
if λ = 2. 8x 2 + 2x ( 4y + 13) + 2y 2 + 13y + 15 = 0
To find the two lines
− 2 ( 4y + 13) ± 4 ( 4y + 13)2 − 32 ( 2y 2 + 13y + 15)
First method ∴ x=
16
Substituting λ = 2 in the given equation, we get
− ( 4y + 13) ± ( 4y + 13)2 − 8 (2y 2 + 13y + 15)
12x 2 − 10xy + 2y 2 + 11x − 5y + 2 = 0 …(i) ⇒ x=
8
Since, 12x 2 − 10xy + 2y 2 = 2 (3x − y ) (2x − y ) − ( 4y + 13) ± 7
⇒ x=
factors of Eq. (i) can be taken as 8
2 ( 3x − y + l ) ( 2x − y + m ) ⇒ 8x = − 4y − 13 + 7, i.e. 4 x + 2y + 3 = 0
= 12x 2 − 10xy + 2y 2 + 2 (2l + 3m )x + 2 ( −l − m )y + 2lm and 8x = − 4y − 13 − 7, i.e. 2x + y + 5 = 0
11 5 i.e. the given Eq. (i) represents two straight lines
On comparing, 2l + 3m = , l + m = , lm = 1
2 2 2x + y + 5 = 0
1 and 4 x + 2y + 3 = 0
Solving, we get l = 2, m = .
2 3
i.e. 2x + y + = 0
Thus, the factors of Eq. (i) are 2
 1 both lines are parallel.
2(3x − y + 2) 2x − y +  = 0 3
 2 5−
2 7
or (3x − y + 2) ( 4 x − 2y + 1) = 0. ∴ Distance between them = =
∴ The two straight lines represented by the given equation 2 +1
2 2 2 5
are 13
Aliter : Here, ∆ = 8 × 2 × 15 + 2 × × 13 × 4
3x − y + 2 = 0 and 4 x − 2y + 1 = 0. 2
Second Method 2
 13
− 8 ×   − 2 × (13)2 − 15 × ( 4 )2 = 0
Writing Eq. (i) as quadratic equation in x, we get  2
12x 2 + ( − 10y + 11)x + 2y 2 − 5y + 2 = 0 and h 2 = ( 4 )2 = 16 = 8 × 2 = ab
∴ ∴ Given equation
− ( − 10y + 11 ) ± ( −10y + 11)2 − 48 (2y 2 − 5y + 2) 8x 2 + 8xy + 2y 2 + 26x + 13y + 15 = 0
x= …(i)
24
represents two parallel straight lines.
i.e. 24 x = (10y − 11) ± ( 4y 2 + 20y + 25) Since, 8x 2 + 8xy + 2y 2 = 2(2x + y )2
= (10y − 11) ± (2y + 5) factors of Eq. (i) can be taken as
∴ 24 x = 12y − 6, i.e. 4 x − 2y + 1 = 0 2(2x + y + l ) (2x + y + m )
and 24 x = 8y − 16, i.e. 3x − y + 2 = 0 = 8x + 8xy + 2y 2 + 2(2m + 2l )x + 2 (m + l ) y + 2lm
2

are the required lines.

 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 211

On comparing, we get l + m =
13
and lm =
15 Sol. Given ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
2 2 The point of intersection of the lines given by Eq. (i) are
∴ Distance between them
 f 2 − bc   g 2 − ca 
l −m (l + m )2 − 4lm α=  2  ,β =  2 
= =  h − ab   h − ab 
( 22 + 12 ) 5
Y
169 60 A(a,b)
−
= 4 2 = 7
5 2 5

Bis
to
ec

ec
Bis

to
Remark

r
For comparing coefficients write equation in form
X¢ X
2x + y + l O B(x1,0) M C(x2,0)

+ y + Y'
2x m
coefficient of x is 2m + 2l , cofficient of y is l + m and coefficients Hence, equation of the bisectors of the lines given by Eq. (i)
of constant term is lm. is
13 15
i.e. l + m = , lm = ( x − α )2 − (y − β) 2 ( x − α) (y − β)
2 2 =
a −b h
y Example 22 Find the combined equation of the For X-axis, y = 0.
straight lines passing through the point (1, 1) and ( x − α) 2 − β 2 − β( x − α )
∴ =
parallel to the lines represented by the equation a−b h
x 2 − 5xy + 4 y 2 + x + 2y − 2 = 0. or h ( x − α) 2 + β ( x − α) (a − b ) − h β 2 = 0 …(ii)
Sol. Given equation of lines is Eq. (ii) is a quadratic in ( x − α ) and let two values of x be x 1
and x 2 , so that its roots are
x 2 − 5xy + 4y 2 + x + 2y − 2 = 0. …(i)
x 1 − α and x 2 − α
Since, x − 5xy + 4y = ( x − 4y )( x − y )
2 2
− β( a − b )
∴ ( x 1 − α) + ( x 2 − α) = Sum of roots =
Factors of Eq. (i) taken as ( x − 4y + l ) ( x − y + m ) . h
Now, equation of line through (1, 1) and parallel to ( x 1 − α) ( x 2 − α) = Products of roots = − β 2
x − 4y + l = 0 is x − 4y + λ = 0
∴ x 2 − x 1 = |( x 2 − α) − ( x 1 − α) |
i.e. 1− 4 + λ =0
∴ λ =3 = [( x 2 − α) + ( x 1 − α) ]2 − 4 ( x 2 − α) ( x 1 − α)
then line is x − 4y + 3 = 0 …(ii)  β 2 (a − b )2 
and equation of line through (1, 1) and parallel to ∴ | x 2 − x 1| =  2
+ 4 β2
x − y + m = 0 is x − y + µ = 0  h 
i.e. 1−1+µ =0 β
= ( a − b ) 2 + 4h 2
∴ µ =0 h
then line is x −y =0 …(iii) 1
∴ Area of ∆ABC = BC AM
Hence, equation of lines Eqs. (ii) and (iii) is 2
( x − 4y + 3) ( x − y ) = 0 1
= x 2 − x1 β
i.e. x 2 − 5xy + 4y 2 + 3x − 3y = 0 2
1 β
= ( a − b ) 2 + 4h 2 × | β |
y Example 23 If ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 2 h

represents a pair of lines, prove that the area of ( a − b ) 2 + 4h 2 2

= .β
the triangle formed by their bisectors and axis of x 2h

(a − b ) 2 + 4h 2 ca − g 2 (a − b )2 + 4h 2 ca − g 2
is . . = .
2h ab − h 2 2h  ab − h 2
212 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 4

1. If λx 2 + 10xy + 3y 2 − 15x − 21y + 18 = 0 represents a pair of straight lines. Then, the value of λ is
(a) – 3 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) – 4

2. The point of intersection of the straight lines given by the equation 3y 2 − 8xy − 3x 2 − 29x + 3y − 18 = 0 is

(a)  1,  (b)  1, −  (c)  − ,  (d)  − , − 

1 1 3 5 3 5
 2  2  2 2  2 2

3. If the equation 12x 2 + 7xy − py 2 − 18x + qy + 6 = 0 represents two perpendicular lines, then the value of p and
q are
23 23
(a) 12, 1 (b) 12, – 1 (c) 12, (d) 12, −
2 2

4. If the angle between the two lines represented by 2x 2 + 5xy + 3y 2 + 7y + 4 = 0 is tan−1(m), then m is equal to
1 1 3 3
(a) − (b) (c) − (d)
5 5 5 5

5. The equation of second degree x 2 + 2 2xy + 2y 2 + 4x + 4 2 y + 1 = 0 represents a pair of straight lines, the
distance between them is
(a) 2 (b) 2 3 (c) 4 (d) 4 3

6. Find the area of the parallelogram formed by the lines

2x 2 + 5xy + 3y 2 = 0 and 2x 2 + 5xy + 3y 2 + 3x + 4y + 1 = 0.

7. Find the locus of the incentre of the triangle formed by

xy − 4x − 4y + 16 = 0 and x + y = a (a > 4, a ≠ 4 2 and a is the parameter).

8. If the equation 2hxy + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents two straight lines, then show that they form a rectangle of
fg
area with the coordinate axes.
h2

9. Find the area of the triangle formed by the lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 and axis
of x.

10. Find the equations of the straight lines passing through the point (1, 1) and parallel to the lines represented by
the equation x 2 − 5xy + 4y 2 + x + 2y − 2 = 0.
Session 5
To Find the Point of Intersection of Lines
Represented by ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx+ 2fy + c = 0
with the Help of Partial Differentiation, Removal
of First Degree Terms, Equation of the Lines
Joining the Origin to the Points of Intersection
of a Given Line and a Given Curve
To Find the Point of Intersection from first two rows
of Lines Represented by and
a h g ⇒ ax + hy + g = 0
h b f ⇒ hx + by + f = 0 and then solve.
ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 + 2 gx y Example 24 Find the point of intersection of lines
+ 2 fy + c = 0 represented by 2x 2 − 7 xy − 4 y 2 − x + 22y − 10 = 0.
Let φ ( x , y ) ≡ ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 Sol. Let φ ≡ 2x 2 − 7 xy − 4y 2 − x + 22y − 10 = 0
∂φ
∂φ ∴ ≡ 4 x − 7y − 1 = 0
∴ = 2ax + 2hy + 2 g [treating y as constant] ∂x
∂x ∂φ
∂φ and ≡ − 7 x − 8y + 22 = 0
and = 2hx + 2by + 2 f [treating x as constant] ∂y
∂y then, the point of intersection is ( x , y ) = (2, 1).
∂φ ∂φ
For point of intersection = 0 and = 0,
∂x ∂y
we obtain ax + hy + g = 0 and hx + by + f = 0
Removal of First Degree Terms
x y 1 Let point of intersection of lines represented by
Solving them = =
f h − bg gh − af ab − h 2 ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
is (α, β).
 bg − fh af − gh 
(x , y ) =  2 ,   bg − fh af − gh 
 h − ab h 2 − ab  Here, (α, β) =  2 , 
 h − ab h 2 − ab 
Working rule In practice, therefore, the general equation of For removal of first degree terms, shift the origin to
second degree φ = 0, represents a pair of straight lines, we (α, β).
∂φ ∂φ i.e. Replacing x by (X + α) and y be (Y + β) in Eq. (i).
solve its partial derivatives = 0, = 0 for their intersecting
∂x ∂y Aliter : Direct equation after removal of first degree
point ( x , y ) = (α, β). terms is
aX 2 + 2hXY + bY 2 + ( gα + f β + c ) = 0
Remembering Method (without use of partial derivatives)
bg − fh
a h g where, α=
h 2 − ab
Since, ∆= h b f
af − gh
g f c and β= .
h 2 − ab
214 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 25 Find the new equation of curve π  3 π

Taking θ= we can also take θ = 4 
12x 2 + 7 xy − 12y 2 − 17 x − 31y − 7 = 0 after removing 4
1 1
the first degree terms. ⇒ cos θ = , sin θ =
2 2
Sol. Let φ ≡ 12x 2 + 7 xy − 12y 2 − 17 x − 31y − 7 = 0 …(i)
Now, if ( X ′ , Y ′ ) be the coordinates of the point when the
∂φ π
∴ = 24 x + 7y − 17 = 0 axes are rotated through θ = , we have
∂x 4
∂φ X ′ −Y ′ X ′ +Y ′
and ≡ 7 x − 24y − 31 = 0 X = ,Y =
∂y 2 2
Their point of intersection is ( x , y ) ≡ (1, − 1) then Eq. (i) becomes
Here, α = 1, β = − 1 Y ′2 X ′2 Y ′2 X ′2
− =1 ⇒ − 2 =1
Shift the origin to (1, − 1) then replacing x = X + 1 and 6 2 b2 a
y = Y − 1 in Eq. (i) the required equation is where, a 2 = 2 and b 2 = 6.
12( X + 1)2 + 7( X + 1) (Y − 1) − 12(Y − 1)2 − 17( X + 1)
− 31(Y − 1) − 7 = 0
i.e. 12X 2 + 7 XY − 12Y 2 = 0 Equation of the Lines Joining
Aliter :
Here, α = 1 and β = − 1
the Origin to the Points of
and
17 31
g = − , f = − ,c = − 7
2 2
Intersection of a Given Line
∴ gα + f β + c = −
17
2
×1−
31
2
× −1−7 =0 and a Given Curve
∴ Removed equation is Theorem The combined equation of the straight lines
aX 2 + 2hXY + by 2 + ( g α + f β + c ) = 0 joining the origin to the points of intersection of a second
degree curve
12X 2 + 7 XY − 12Y 2 + 0 = 0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
12X 2 + 7 XY − 12Y 2 = 0.
and a straight line lx + my + n = 0 is :
y Example 26 Transform the equation x 2 + 4 xy + y 2  lx + my   lx + my 
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx   + 2 fy  
Y ′2 X ′2  −n   −n 
− 2x + 2y + 4 = 0 into the form 2 − 2 = 1.
b a 2
 lx + my 
+c   =0
Sol. To remove the first degree terms, we shift the origin to the  −n 
point (α, β).
bg − fh 1 × ( − 1) − 1 × 2 Proof The equation of the curve ( PAQ ) is
Then, α= 2 = = −1
h − ab 4 −1×1 ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
af − gh 1 × 1 − ( − 1) × (2)
and β= 2 = =1 and the equation of the line PQ be
h − ab 4 −1×1
lx + my + n = 0 …(ii)
then, the transformed equation is Y
X 2 + 4 XY + Y 2 + ( g α + f β + c ) = 0 P
⇒ X + 4 XY + Y + ( − 1 × ( − 1) + 1 × 1 + 4 ) = 0
2 2

∴ X 2 + 4 XY + Y 2 + 6 = 0 …(i)
A
Now, to remove the XY term from Eq. (i), we rotate the axes Q
through an angle θ given by
a−b X′
cot2θ = =0 [Q here a = b] O
X
2h Y′
⇒ cot2θ = 0
π 3π From the equation of the line Eq. (ii), find the value of ‘1’
⇒ 2θ = or in terms of x and y,
2 2
π 3π lx + my
⇒ θ= or i.e. =1 …(iii)
4 4 −n
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 215

Now, the Eq. (i) can be written as If θ is the acute angle between pair of lines of Eq. (iii), then
or ax + 2hxy + by + (2 gx + 2 fy )(1) + c (1) = 0
2 2 2
2 h 2 − ab 2 (1 + 7 ) 2 8 4 2 2 2
tan θ = = = = =
 lx + my  a + b 7 − 1 6 6 3
or ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + (2 gx + 2 fy )  
 −n  2 2
∴ θ = tan −1  
 lx + my 
2  3 
+c   = 0 …(iv)
 −n 
y Example 28 Find the condition that the pair of
lx + my straight lines joining the origin to the intersections of
[replacing 1 by from Eq. (iii)]
−n the line y = mx + c and the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 may be
Hence, the Eq. (iv) is homogeneous equation of second at right angles.
degree. Above Eq. (iv) on simplification will be of the form Sol. The equations of the line and the circle are
Ax 2 + 2 Hxy + By 2 = 0 and will represent the required y = mx + c …(i)
straight lines. If θ be the angle between them, then and x + y 2 = a2
2
…(ii)
 2 ( H 2 − AB )  The pair of straight lines joining the origin to the
θ = tan −1   intersections of Eqs. (i) and (ii), is obtained by making
  A + B 
  homogeneous Eq. (ii) with the help of Eq. (i).
y − mx
Hence, the equation of pairs of straight lines passing Q y = mx + c ⇒ =1
c
through the origin and the points of intersection of a 2
 y − mx 
curve and a line is obtained by making the curve ∴ x 2 + y 2 = a 2 ( 1) 2 ⇒ x 2 + y 2 = a 2  
 c 
homogeneous with the help of the line.
⇒ x 2 (c 2 − a 2m 2 ) + 2ma 2 xy + y 2 (c 2 − a 2 ) = 0 …(iii)
y Example 27 Prove that the angle between the lines The lines given by Eq. (iii), are at right angles, then
joining the origin to the points of intersection of the coefficient of x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0
straight line y = 3x + 2 with the curve
⇒ c 2 − a 2m 2 + c 2 − a 2 = 0
2 2
x 2 + 2xy + 3y 2 + 4 x + 8 y − 11 = 0 is tan −1  . ∴ 2c 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 )
 3 
which is the required condition.
Sol. Equation of curve is x 2 + 2xy + 3y 2 + 4 x + 8y − 11 = 0 …(i)
y − 3x y Example 29 Prove that the pair of lines joining the
and line y = 3x + 2 ⇒ =1 …(ii) 2
2 x2 y
origin to the intersection of the curve 2 + 2 = 1 by
Making Eq. (i) homogeneous with the help of Eq. (ii), then a b
 y − 3x   y − 3x  the line lx + my + n = 0 are coincident, if a
x 2 + 2xy + 3y 2 + 4 x   + 8y  
 2   2  a 2l 2 + b 2m 2 = n 2 .
2
 y − 3x  x2 y2
−11   =0 =1 +
 2  Sol. The given curve is …(i)
a2 b2
⇒ x + 2xy + 3y + 2xy − 6x + 4y − 12xy
2 2 2 2
and line lx + my + n = 0
11 ⇒ lx + my = − n
− ( y − 3x ) 2 = 0
4 lx + my
⇒ =1 …(ii)
⇒ − 5x 2 − 8xy + 7y 2 −
11 2
(y − 6xy + 9 x 2 ) = 0 −n
4 Making Eq. (i) homogeneous with the help of Eq. (ii), then
⇒ − 20x 2 − 32xy + 28y 2 − 11y 2 + 66xy − 99 x 2 = 0 x2 y2  lx + my 
2
+ = 
⇒ 119 x 2 − 34 xy − 17y 2 = 0 a2 b 2  −n 
⇒ 7 x 2 − 2xy − y 2 = 0 …(iii) n 2x 2 n 2y 2
⇒ 2
+ = l 2 x 2 + m 2y 2 + 2lmxy
This is the equation of lines joining the origin to the points a b2
of intersection of Eqs. (i) and (ii). n2 2 2 n2 2 2
⇒  2 − l  x − 2lmxy +  2 − m  y = 0 …(iii)
Comparing Eq. (iii) with ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 a  b 
a = 7, h = − 1, b = − 1
216 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

This is of the form Ax 2 + 2Hxy + By 2 = 0, y Example 30 Show that the straight lines joining the
n 2 origin to the points of intersection of curves
then A= − l 2 , H = − lm
a 2 ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx = 0
n2 and a ′ x 2 + 2h ′ xy + b ′ y 2 + 2g ′ x = 0
and B= − m2
b2 are at right angles, if g ′ (a + b ) = g (a ′ + b ′ ).
The lines given by Eq. (iii) will be coincident, if Sol. The two curves meet in two points and the required lines
H 2 − AB = 0 ⇒ H 2 = AB joining the origin to these points will be obtained by making
one equation homogeneous with the help of the other.
n2  n2 2
⇒ l 2m 2 =  2 − l 2   2 −m  ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx = 0 …(i)
a  b 
a ′ x 2 + 2h ′ xy + b ′ y 2 + 2g ′ x = 0 …(ii)
4 2 2 2 2
⇒ l m =
2 2 n
−
n m
−
l n
+l m2 2 Multiplying Eq. (i) by g ′ and Eq. (ii) by g and subtracting,
a 2b 2 a2 b2 we get (ag ′ − a ′ g )x 2 + (2hg ′ − 2h ′ g )xy + (bg ′ − b ′ g )y 2 = 0
n4 n 2m 2 n 2l 2 If the lines are at right angles, then coefficient of
⇒ = +
2 2
ab a b 2 2 x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0
⇒ n =b m +a l
2 2 2 2 2 ⇒ ag ′ − a ′ g + bg ′ − b ′ g = 0
∴ (a + b )g ′ = (a ′ + b ′ )g .
⇒ a 2l 2 + b 2m 2 = n 2

Exercise for Session 5

1. If the straight lines joining origin to the points of intersection of the line x + y = 1with the curve
x 2 + y 2 + x − 2y − m = 0 are perpendicular to each other, then the value of m should be
1 1
(a) − (b) 0 (c) (d) 1
2 2
2. The pair of straight lines joining the origin to the common points of x 2 + y 2 = 4 and y = 3x + c are
perpendicular, if c 2 is equal to
(a) –1 (b) 6 (c) 13 (d) 20

3. Mixed term xy is to be removed from the general equation of second degree

ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, one should rotate the axes through an angle θ, then tan 2θ is equal to
(a − b ) 2h (a + b ) 2h
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2h (a + b ) 2h (a − b )

4. The lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of 2x 2 + 3xy − 4x + 1 = 0 and 3x + y = 1 are given by
(a) x 2 − y 2 − 5xy = 0 (b) x 2 − y 2 + 5xy = 0 (c) x 2 + y 2 − 5xy = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + 5xy = 0

5. The equation of the line joining the origin to the point of intersection of the lines 2x 2 + xy − y 2 + 5x − y + 2 = 0 is
(a) x + y = 0 (b) x − y = 0 (c) x − 2y = 0 (d) 2x + y = 0
6. Find the equation of the lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of 3x − 2y = 1 with
3x 2 + 5xy − 3y 2 + 2x + 3y = 0 and show that they are at right angles.

7. If the straight line joining the origin and the points of intersection of y = mx + 1and x 2 + y 2 = 1 be perpendicular
to each other, then find the value of m.
8. Prove that the straight lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of the straight line kx + hy = 2hk with
the curve ( x − h )2 + ( y − k )2 = c 2 are at right angles, if h 2 + k 2 = c 2.
9. Show that for all values of λ, the lines joining the origin to the points common to x 2 + 2hxy − y 2 + gx + fy = 0
and fx − gy = λ are at right angles.
10. Find the equations of the straight lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of x 2 + y 2 − 4x − 2y = 0
and x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 4y = 4.
 Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember
1 If slope of one of the lines represented by 5 If the equation ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 = 0 should be n times the slope of the represents a pair of parallel lines, then
other, then 4nh 2 = ab(1 + n )2 . (i) h 2 = ab, bg 2 = af 2 .
2 If the slope of one of the lines represented by (g 2 − ac )
ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 = 0 be the nth power of the other, then (ii) the distance between them = 2 .
a(a + b)
(abn )1/ n + 1 + (an b)1/ n + 1 + 2 h = 0
6 If ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 and
3 If two of the three lines represented by
ax 2 + 2 hxy + by 2 − 2 gx − 2 fy + c = 0 each represent a pair
ax 3 + bx 2 y + cxy 2 + dy 3 = 0 may be at right angles, then
of lines, then the area of the parallelogram enclosed by
a2 + ac + bd + d 2 = 0
2|c|
4 If pairs of straight lines x 2 + 2 m1 xy − y 2 = 0 and them is .
(h 2 − ab )
x 2 + 2 m2 xy − y 2 = 0 be such that each pair bisects the
angle between the other pair, then m1m2 = − 1
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 6 multiple choice examples. Each l Ex. 3 The pair of lines 3 x 2 - 4 xy + 3y 2 = 0 are
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which p
ONLY ONE is correct. rotated about the origin by in the anti-clockwise sense.
6
The equation of the pair in the new position is
l Ex. 1 If the pairs of lines x 2 + 2 xy + ly 2 = 0 and
(a) x 2 - 3 xy = 0 (b) y 2 - 3 xy = 0
lx 2 + 2 xy + y 2 = 0 have exactly one line in common, then
the joint equation of the other two lines is given by (c) 3 x 2 - xy = 0 (d) 3y 2 - xy = 0
(a) 3 x 2 + 8 xy - 3y 2 = 0 (b) 3 x 2 + 10xy + 3y 2 = 0 Sol. (c) The given equation of pair of straight lines can be written
as
(c) x 2 + 2xy - 3y 2 = 0 (d) 3 x 2 + 2xy - y 2 = 0
( 3x - y ) ( x - 3y ) = 0
Sol. (b) Let y = mx, be a line common to the given pairs of lines,
1
then Þ y = 3x and y = x
3
lm 2 + 2m + 1 = 0 and m 2 + 2m + l = 0
Þ y = x tan 60° and y = x tan 30°
m2 m 1 After rotation, the separate equations are
Þ = 2
=
2( l - 1) (1 - l ) 2( l - 1)
y = x tan 90° and y = x tan 60°
1
Þ m 2 = 1 and m = - ( l + 1) Þ x = 0 and y = x 3
2
Hence, the combined equation in the new position is
Þ ( l + 1) 2 = 4 Þ l + 1 = 2 , - 2
x ( 3x - y ) = 0
\ l = 1 or - 3
But for l = 1, the two pairs have both the lines common. or 3x 2 - xy = 0.
So, l = - 3 and the slope m of the line common to both the
pairs is 1. Now, l Ex. 4 If the pair of lines ax 2 - 2 xy + by 2 = 0 and
x 2 + 2xy + ly 2 = x 2 + 2xy - 3y 2 = ( x - y ) ( x + 3y ) bx 2 - 2 xy + ay 2 = 0 be such that each pair bisects the angle
and lx 2 + 2xy + y 2 = - 3x 2 + 2xy + y 2 = - ( x - y ) (3x + y ) between the other pair, then | a - b | equals to
(a) 1 (b) 2
Hence, the joint equation of other two lines is
( x + 3y ) (3x + y ) = 0 or 3x 2 + 10xy + 3y 2 = 0. (c) 3 (d) 4
Sol. (b) According to the example, the equation of the bisectors of
l Ex. 2 The combined equation of the lines l1 and l 2 is the angle between the lines

2 x 2 + 6 xy + y 2 = 0 and that of the lines m1 and m 2 is ax 2 - 2xy + by 2 = 0 ...(i)

2 2
4 x 2 + 18 xy + y 2 = 0. If the angle between l1 and m 2 is a , is bx - 2xy + ay = 0 ...(ii)
then the angle between l 2 and m1 will be \The equation of bisectors of the angle between the lines
p p Eq. (i) is
(a) - a (b) + a (c) a (d) 2a
2 4 x 2 - y 2 xy
=
Sol. (c) The combined equation of the bisectors of the angles a-b -1
between the lines of the first pair is
Þ x 2 + (a - b )xy - y 2 = 0 ...(iii)
x 2 - y 2 xy 1
= Þ x 2 - y 2 = xy Since, Eqs. (ii) and (iii) are identical, comparing Eqs. (ii) and
2-1 3 3
(iii), we get
and the combined equation of the bisectors of the angles b -2 a
between the lines of the second pair is = =
1 a-b -1
x 2 - y 2 xy 1
= Þ x 2 - y 2 = xy Þ (a - b )b = - 2
4 -1 9 3
and (a - b )a = 2
It is clear that the two pairs are equally inclined to each
other. \ (a - b )2 = 4
Hence, the angle between l 2 and m1 is a. or a-b =2
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 219

l Ex. 5 The equation of line which is parallel to the line (a) g 2 + f 2

=c (b) g 2 - f 2
=c
common to the pair of lines given by 3 x 2 + xy - 4y 2 = 0 and 2
(c) g - f 2
= 2c 2
(d) g + f 2
= c2
6 x 2 + 11xy + 4y 2 = 0 and at a distance of 2 units from it is
Sol. (c) Given,
(a) 3 x - 4y = - 10 (b) x - y = 2
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + c = 0 ...(i)
(c) 3 x + 4y = 10 (d) 2x + y = - 2
2 2
2 2
Sol. (c) We have, 3 x + xy - 4y = 0 and x + y + 2 fy - c = 0 ...(ii)
or ( x - y ) ( 3x + 4y ) = 0 ...(i) On subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (i), we get
and 6x 2 + 11xy + 4y 2 = 0 2gx - 2 fy + 2c = 0
or ( 2x + y ) ( 3x + 4y ) = 0 ...(ii) fy - gx
or =1 ...(iii)
Equation of line common to Eqs. (i) and (ii) is c
3x + 4y = 0 ...(iii) On adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Equation of any line parallel to Eq. (iii) is 2( x 2 + y 2 + gx + fy ) = 0
3x + 4y = l or x 2 + y 2 + gx + fy = 0 ...(iv)
Since, its distance from Eq. (iii) is 2, we have
Homogenising Eq. (iv) with the help of Eq. (iii), then
l -0
= 2 or l = ± 10 æ fy - gx ö
( 32 + 4 2 ) x 2 + y 2 + ( gx + fy ) ç ÷ =0
è c ø
Hence, required lines are 3x + 4y = ± 10. \The lines will be at right angles, when
æ g2 ö æ f 2ö
l Ex. 6 The lines joining the origin to the points of ç1 - ÷ + ç1 + ÷ =0
è c ø è c ø
intersection of x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + c = 0 and
x 2 + y 2 + 2 fy - c = 0 are at right angles, if Þ g2 - f 2
= 2c

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n
This section contains 3 multiple choice examples. Each l Ex. 8 The lines (lx + my ) 2 - 3(mx - ly ) 2 = 0 and
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which lx + my + n = 0 form
MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
(a) an isosceles triangle (b) a right angled triangle
(c) an equilateral triangle (d) None of these
l Ex. 7 The lines joining the origin to the point of
Sol. (a,c) (lx + my ) 2 - 3(mx - ly ) 2 = 0
intersection of 3 x 2 + mxy - 4 x + 1 = 0 and 2 x + y - 1 = 0 are
Þ (l 2 - 3m 2 )x 2 + 8mlxy + (m 2 - 3l 2 )y 2 = 0
at right angles. Which of the following is/are possible value
of m? Þ {(l + m 3 )x + (m - l 3 )y } {(l - 3m )x + (m + 3l )y } = 0
(a) - 4 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 7 Let slope of (l + m 3 )x + (m - l 3 )y = 0 be m1 and slope of
Sol. (a,b,c,d) Given line is 2 x + y = 1 ...(i) (l - m 3 )x + (m + l 3 )y = 0 be m 2 and slope of
and curve is 3x 2 + mxy - 4 x + 1 = 0 ...(ii) lx + my + n = 0 is m 3 .
Homogenising Eq. (ii) with the help of Eq. (i), then l l +m 3
- +
3x 2 + mxy - 4 x (2x + y ) + (2x + y )2 = 0 Now, tan q 1 =
m 3 - m1
=
m m -l 3
1 + m 3m1 l æl + m 3ö
or - x 2 + mxy + y 2 = 0 1+ ×ç ÷
m èm - l 3ø
the lines are at right angles as a + b = 0, when h 2 > ab
3( l 2 + m 2 )
m2 = = 3
i.e. +1>0 (l 2 + m 2 )
4
which is true for all m Î R. Þ q 1 = 60°
220 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

m 2 - m1 Sol. (a,c) Q m and m 2 are the roots of the equation

Similarly, tan q 2 = = 3 2
1 + m 2m1 æy ö æy ö
ç ÷ -6ç ÷ +a=0
Þ q 2 = 60° èx ø èx ø
Hence, an equilateral triangle is formed which is also an \ m + m 2 = 6 and m × m 2 = a ...(i)
isosceles one. Now, 2 3
( m + m ) = ( 6) 3

l Ex. 9 If the equation ax 2 - 6 xy + y 2 + bx + cy + d = 0 Þ m + m + 3m × m (m + m 2 ) = 216

3 6 2

represents a pair of lines whose slopes are m and m 2 , then Þ a + a 2 + 3a (6) = 216 [from Eq. (i)]
2
the value(s) of a is/are Þ a + 19a - 216 = 0
(a) - 27 (b) - 8 Þ (a + 27 ) (a - 8) = 0
(c) 8 (d) 27 \ a = - 27, 8

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Paragraph Based Questions
n
This section contains one solved paragraph based upon 10. (d) For D = 0,
each paragraph 2 multiple choice questions have to be
9 l l2
answered. Each of these questions has four choices (a), (b), 0+2´ ´ - 4 ´ - 0 - 0 + 12 ´ =0
2 2 4
(c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Þ 3l2 - 18l = 0
Paragraph \ l = 0, 6
(Q. Nos. 10 to11) Hence, l =6 [Q for l = 0, it will give an
Consider the equation of a pair of straight lines as equation of first degree]
lxy - 8x + 9 y - 12 = 0 11. (b) Let f ( x, y ) = 6 xy - 8 x + 9y - 12 [Q l = 6]
10. The value of l is ¶f ¶f
\ = 6y - 8 and = 6x + 9
(a) 0 (b) 2 ¶x ¶y
(c) 4 (d) 6 ¶f ¶f
For point of intersection = 0 and = 0, we get
11. The point of intersection of lines is (a, b), then the ¶x ¶y
equation whose roots are a, b, is 3 4
x = - ,y =
(a) 4 x 2 + x - 8 = 0 (b) 6 x 2 + x - 12 = 0 2 3
3 4
(c) 4 x 2 - x - 8 = 0 (d) 6 x 2 - x - 12 = 0 \ a = - and b =
2 3
Sol. Given equation is, Hence, required equation is
lxy - 8x + 9y - 12 = 0 æ 3 4ö
x 2 - ç- + ÷x - 2 = 0
Here, a = 0, b = 0, c = - 12, è 2 3ø
9 l
f = , g = - 4 and h = Þ 6x 2 + x - 12 = 0
2 2
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 221

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 2 examples. The answer to each l Ex. 13 If one of the lines given by 6 x 2 - xy + 4cy 2 = 0 is
example is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 3 x + 4y = 0, then the value of | c | is
(both inclusive). Sol. (3) Q 3 x + 4y = 0 is one of the lines given by
6 x 2 - xy + 4cy 2 = 0, then
l Ex. 12 If the sum of the slopes of the lines given by
2
x 2 - 2cxy - 7y 2 = 0 is four times their product, then the æ 3x ö æ 3x ö é 3x ù
6x 2 - x ç - ÷ + 4c ç - ÷ =0 êëQy = - 4 úû
value of c is è 4 ø è 4 ø
Sol. (2) Given, m1 + m2 = 4m1m2 3 9c
2h a Þ 6+ + =0 ; \ c = -3
Þ - = 4 × Þ h = - 2a 4 4
b b Hence, |c| = 3
\ -c = -2´1 Þ c =2

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n
This section contains one solved example. This example 2h
m + m2 = - ...(i)
has four statements (A, B, C and D) is Column I and four b
statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any given a
and m × m2 = ...(ii)
statements in Column I can have correct matching with b
one or more statement(s) given in Column II. 3
æ 2h ö
From Eq. (i), (m + m 2 )3 = ç - ÷
è bø
l Ex. 14 Match the following
8h 3
Column I Column II Þ m 3 + m 6 + 3m × m 2 (m + m 2 ) = -
b3
(A) If the slope of one of the lines represented by (p) Odd prime a a 2
3a æ 2h ö 8h 3
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 is the square of the number Þ + 2 + ç- ÷ = - 3 [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
b b b è b ø b
a + b 8h 2
other, then + is a 8h 3
h ab Þ ab + a 2 - 6ah = -
b
(B) The product of perpendiculars drawn from (q) Composite
the point (1, 2 ) to the pair of lines number a + b 8h 2
\ + =6
x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 = 0 is l units, then [ l ] is a h ab
(where [×] denotes the greatest integer (B) Let y = m1x and y = m 2 x lines represented by
function). x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 = 0, then m1 + m 2 = - 4, m1m 2 = 1. Then,
(C) Distance between two lines represented by (r) Even prime product of perpendiculars drawn from the point (1, 2)
the line pairx 2 - 4 xy + 4y 2 + x - 2y - 6 = 0 number
(2 - m1 ) (2 - m 2 )
is l unit, then [ l ] is a (where [×] denotes the =
greatest integer function). (1 + m12 ) (1 + m 22 )
(D) If the pairs a1x 2 + 2h1xy + b1y 2 = 0 and (s) Perfect 4 - 2 (m1 + m 2 ) + m1m 2
number =
a 2x 2 + 2h2xy + b2y 2 = 0 have one line 1 + (m1 + m 2 )2 - 2m1m 2 + (m1m 2 )2
(a1b2 - a 2b1 ) 2
common, then is a 4 +8+1 13
(b1h2 - b2h1 ) (a 2h1 - a1h2 ) = = units
(1 + 16 - 2 + 1) 4
Sol. (A) ® (q, s); (B) ® (p); (C) ® (r); (D) ® (q) 13
Q l=
(A) Let m and m 2 be the slopes of the lines represented by 4
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0, then \ [l] = 3
222 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(C) Given, line pair is x 2 - 4 xy + 4y 2 + x - 2y - 6 = 0 (D) Let y = mx be the common line, then
2 b1m 2 + 2h1m + a1 = 0 and b 2m 2 + 2h 2m + a 2 = 0.
Þ ( x - 2y ) + ( x - 2y ) - 6 = 0
2
Þ ( x - 2y + 3) ( x - 2y - 2) = 0 b1 2h1 2h1 a1 a1 b1
Þ ´ =
\ Lines are x - 2y + 3 = 0 and x - 2y - 2 = 0 b 2 2h 2 2h 2 a 2 a2 b2
3 - ( - 2) Þ 4(b1h 2 - b 2h1 ) (a 2h1 - a1h 2 ) = (a1b 2 - a 2b1 )2
Hence, distance between lines = = 5 unit
1+ 4 (a1b 2 - a 2b1 )2
\ =4
\ l= 5 (b1h 2 - b 2h1 ) (a 2h1 - a1h 2 )
Hence, [ l] = [ 5 ] = 2

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Ex. Nos. 15-16) Each of these examples contains Sol. (a) The pair of bisectors of 3 x 2 + 6 xy + 2y 2 = 0 is
two statements. x 2 - y 2 xy
= , i.e. 3 x 2 - xy - 3y 2 = 0 and pair of bisectors of
Statement I (Assertion) and 3 -2 3
Statement II (Reason) x 2 - y 2 xy
5 x + 18 xy + 2y 2 = 0 is
2
=
Each of these examples also has four alternative choices, 5 -2 9
only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select
i.e. 3 x 2 - xy - 3y 2 = 0 are coincides.
the correct choice, as given below :
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is a \ Angle between l1, m2 is same as angle between l 2, m1.
correct explanation for Statement I \ Both statements are true and Statement II is a correct
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is explanation for Statement I.
not a correct explanation for Statement I Ex. 16 Statement I The equation
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false 2 x 2 - 3 xy - 2y 2 + 5 x - 5y + 3 = 0 represents a pair of
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
perpendicular straight lines.
Ex. 15 Statement I The combined equation of l1 , l 2 is Statement II A pair of lines given by
3 x 2 + 6 xy + 2y 2 = 0 and that of m1 , m 2 is ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 are perpendicular if
5 x 2 +18 xy + 2y 2 = 0. If angle between l1 , m 2 is q, then angle a + b = 0.
between l 2 , m1 is q. Sol. (d) Here, D ¹ 0, h 2 > ab and a + b = 0
Statement II If the pairs of lines l1l 2 = 0, m1m 2 = 0 are \ 2x 2 - 3xy - 2y 2 + 5x - 5y + 3 = 0
equally inclinded that angle between l1 and m 2 = angle represents a rectangular hyperbola.
between l 2 and m1 . \ Statement I is false and Statement II is true.

Subjective Type Examples

n
In this section, there are 10 subjective solved examples. and the diagonal 5x + 2y = 1 does not pass through origin,
hence it is AC.
l Ex. 17 If the lines represented by 2 x 2 - 5 xy + 2y 2 = 0 be On solving, x - 2y = 0 and 5x + 2y = 1, we get
the two sides of a parallelogram and the line 5 x + 2y = 1 be æ1 1 ö
one of its diagonal. Find the equation of the other diagonal, A=ç , ÷
è 6 12 ø
and area of the parallelogram.
and solving 2x - y = 0 and 5x + 2y = 1 , we get
Sol. Given pair of lines, 2 x 2 - 5 xy + 2y 2 = 0
æ1 2ö
i.e. ( x - 2y ) (2x - y ) = 0 C º ç , ÷.
è9 9 ø
\ x - 2y = 0 and 2x - y = 0
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 223

Y B Þ {(1 + m1 )y - (m1 - 1)x } {(1 + m 2 )y - (m 2 - 1)x } = 0

C Þ (1 + m1 ) (1 + m 2 )y 2 - xy {(1 + m1 )(m 2 - 1)
+ (m1 - 1) (1 + m 2 )} + (m1 - 1) (m 2 - 1)x 2 = 0
5x+2
0
y=
H
2x–

Þ (1 + m1 + m 2 + m1m 2 )y 2 - 2xy (m1m 2 - 1)

y =1

A
y=0 + {m1m 2 - (m1 + m 2 ) + 1} x 2 = 0
X′ x–2
X
O æ 2h a ö 2 æa ö æ a 2h ö
Y′ Þ ç1 - + ÷y - 2xy ç - 1÷ + ç + + 1÷ x 2 = 0
è b b ø èb ø èb b ø
Since, diagonals of parallelogram bisect each other, if bisect
at H . \ (a + 2h + b )x 2 - 2(a - b )xy + (a - 2h + b )y 2 = 0
ì 1 æ 1 1 ö 1 æ 1 2 öü
Then, H º í ç + ÷ , ç + ÷ý l Ex. 19 If u º ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
î 2 è 6 9 ø 2 è 12 9 øþ
represents a pair of straight lines, prove that the equation of
æ 5 11 ö the third pair of straight lines passing through the points
i.e. H =ç , ÷
è 36 72 ø where these meet the axes is cu + 4( fg - ch ) xy = 0.
Hence, the equation of other diagonal which passes through Sol. u º ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
O and H is
Q u represents a pair of straight line, then D = 0
11
-0 \ abc + 2 fgh - af 2
- bg 2 - ch 2 = 0 …(i)
y - 0 = 72 ( x - 0)
5 Combined equation of axes is xy = 0
-0
36 Now, the curve through the intersection of
11 u = 0 and xy = 0 is
Þ y= x
10 u + lxy = 0 …(ii)
Þ 11x - 10y = 0 Y

Now, area of parallelogram = 2 ´ Area of D OAC

11 2 1 1 1
=2´ ´ - ´ = sq units Third pair
2 6 9 9 12 36

l Ex. 18 Prove that the equation

(a + 2h + b ) x 2 - 2(a - b ) xy + (a - 2h + b ) y 2 = 0 represents X'
O
X

a pair of lines each inclined at an angle of 45° to one or

Y'
other of the lines given by, ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0.
i.e. ax + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c + lxy = 0
2
Sol. Given equation is
Þ ax 2 + xy (2h + l ) + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 …(i)
If it represents a pair of lines, then
Let the lines represented by Eq. (i) are
2
y - m1x = 0 …(ii) æ lö 2 æ lö
abc + 2 fg çh + ÷ - af - bg 2 - c çh + ÷ = 0
and y - m2 x = 0 …(iii) è 2ø è 2ø
2h a 2 cl2
therefore, m1 + m 2 = - , m1m 2 = Þ (abc + 2 fgh - af - bg 2 - ch 2 ) + l( fg - ch ) - =0
b b 4
If m1 = tanq 1 and m 2 = tanq 2 , the equation of lines through cl2
the origin making 45° with the lines Eqs. (ii) and (iii) will be Þ 0 + l ( fg - ch ) - =0 [from Eq. (i)]
4
y - x tan(q 1 - 45° ) = 0 4( fg - ch )
\ l= …(iii)
and y - x tan(q 2 - 45° ) = 0 c
Their combined equation is Hence, the equation of third pair from Eqs. (ii) and (iii) is
{y - x tan(q 1 - 45° )} {y - x tan(q 2 - 45° ) } = 0 4( fg - ch )
u+ xy = 0
æ m -1 ö æ m2 - 1 ö c
Þ çy - 1 x÷ çy - x÷ = 0
è 1 + m1 ø è 1 + m2 ø \ cu + 4( fg - ch ) xy = 0
224 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

l Ex. 20 If the equation ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx we show that by an example that these conditions are not
sufficient because
+ 2 fy + c = 0 represents a pair of parallel lines, prove that h2 = ab Þ h= ± ab
(i) h = ab and g b = f a or (h = - ab and 2 2
and bg = af Þ g b=±f a
g b = - f a ).
Þ h= ab, g b = f a or ( h = - ab, g b = - f a)
æ g 2 - ac ö
(ii) the distance between them is 2 ç ÷. Consider, for example, 4 x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 + 4 x - 2 y + 5 = 0
è a (a + b ) ÷ø Here, a = 4, h = 2, b = 1 , g = 2, f = - 1, c = 5 and
Sol. Given equation is, h= ab, g b = - f a
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i) But abc + 2fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch2
Let the equation of the parallel lines represented = 4 ´ 1 ´ 5 + 2 ´ ( -1) ´ 2 ´ 2 - 4 ´ ( -1) 2 - 1 ´ ( 2) 2 - 5 ´ ( 2) 2
by Eq. (i) be = 20 - 8 - 4 - 4 - 20 = - 16 ¹ 0
lx + my + n = 0 and lx + my + n1 = 0. Hence, the Eq. (i) does not represent a pair of lines at all.
Then, (lx + my + n ) (lx + my + n1 )
º ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c l Ex. 21 A parallelogram is formed by the lines
Equating the coefficients, we get ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 and the lines through ( p, q ) parallel to
l2 = a …(ii) them. Show that the equation of the diagonal of the
2 parallelogram which does not pass through origin is
m =b …(iii)
( 2 x - p )(ap + hq ) + ( 2y - q ) (hp + bq ) = 0.
nn1 = c …(iv) Show also that the area of the parallelogram is
2lm = 2h …(v) |(ap 2 + 2hpq + bq 2 )| / 2 (h 2 - ab ) .
(n + n1 )l = 2g …(vi) Sol. The combined equation of AB and AD is
m( n + n1 ) = 2 f …(vii) S1 º ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
Eq. (i) From Eq. (v)
Now, equation of lines through ( p , q ) and parallel to S1 º 0
Þ h = lm = ± ab is S 2 º a( x - p )2 + 2h ( x - p )(y - q ) + b(y - q )2 = 0
Now, h = ab or h = - ab C(p,q)
2 2 2
Q abc + 2 fgh - af - bg - ch = 0 D
2 2
Þ abc + 2 fg ab - af - bg - c × ab = 0
[substituting the value of h = ab ]
2 B
Þ -( f a - g b ) = 0 Þ f a=g b
Thus, the given equation represents a pair of lines. A(0,0)
Also, if h = - ab , then g b = - f a
Hence, the equation of diagonal BD is S1 - S 2 = 0
(ii) The distance between parallel lines
a( -2xp + p 2 ) + 2h ( - py - qx + pq ) + b ( -2qy + q 2 ) = 0
| n - n1| (n + n1 )2 - 4nn1
= =
-ap (2x - p ) - hq (2x - p ) - hp (2y - q ) - bq (2y - q ) = 0
(l 2 + m 2 ) l 2 + m2
[Q2hpq is written as hpq + hpq]
æ 4g 2 ö
ç 2 - 4c ÷ Hence, diagonal of BD is
è l ø (2x - p ) (ap + hq ) + (2y - q ) (bq + hp ) = 0
= [from Eqs. (vi), (ii) and (iii)]
(a + b ) pp
Area of parallelogram = 1 2
æ g 2 - ac ö sinq
=2 ç ÷ [Ql 2 = a ] Þ p 1p 2 = product of perpendiculars from ( p , q) on AB and
è a(a + b ) ø
AD whose combined equation is
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
Remark
| ap 2 + 2hpq + bq 2 |
In some books, the conditions for parallel lines are stated as \ p 1p 2 =
h2 = ab and bg 2 = af 2 {(a - b )2 + 4h 2 }
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 225

2 (h 2 - ab ) On squaring both sides, we get

\ tan q =
|(a + b )| ( x 12 + y12 ) (h 2 - ab ) = k 2 {(a - b )2 + 4h 2 }

2 (h 2 - ab ) Hence, locus of P ( x 1, y1 ) is
\ sin q = ( x 2 + y 2 ) (h 2 - ab ) = k 2 {(a - b )2 + 4h 2 }.
( a - b ) 2 + 4h 2
| ap 2 + 2hpq + bq 2 | l Ex. 23 Show that if two of the lines ax 3 + bx 2 y + cxy 2
\ Required area =
2
2 (h - ab ) + dy 3 = 0 (a ¹ 0 ) make complementary angles with X-axis in
anti-clockwise sense, then a (a - c ) + d (b - d ) = 0.
l Ex. 22 A point moves so that the distance between the Sol. The given equation can be written as
feet of perpendiculars drawn from it to the lines ax 2 + 2hxy y
dm 3 + cm 2 + bm + a = 0 , where m =
+ by 2 = 0 is a constant 2k. Show that the equation of its x
locus is ( x 2 + y 2 ) (h 2 - ab ) = k 2 {(a - b ) 2 + 4h 2 }. Let its roots be m1, m 2 , m 3 .
p a
Sol. Q ÐONP = Ð OMP = \ m1 m 2 m 3 = - …(i)
2 d
\ O, M, P, N are concyclic with diameter OP. If m1 = tana, then m 2 = tan(90° - a )
Y N [Q two lines makes complementary
angles with X-axis]
k P(x1,y1) \ m 2 = cota then m1m 2 = 1
r L a
θ From Eq. (i), m3 = -
k
O' θ d
r Since, m 3 is root of the above cubic, we have
θ r M
æ a3 ö æ a2 ö æ aö
X′ X d ç- 3 ÷ + c ç 2 ÷ + bç- ÷ + a = 0
O è dø
è d ø èd ø
Y′
æ a 3 ö æ ca 2 ö æ ab ö
Let P º ( x 1, y1 ) Þ ç- 2 ÷ + ç 2 ÷ - ç ÷ + a = 0
æx y ö è d ø èd ø èd ø
\ Coordinates of centre are O ¢ = ç 1 , 1 ÷
è2 2ø Þ - a 3 + ca 2 - abd + ad 2 = 0
\ Radius r = O ¢ N = OM = OO ¢ On dividing each by a, we get
2 2
æx ö æy ö ( x 12 + y12 ) -a 2 + ca - bd + d 2 = 0
= ç 1÷ + ç 1÷ =
è2ø è2ø 2 \ a (a - c ) + d (b - d ) = 0.
Let Ð MON = q
\ Ð MO ¢ N = 2q Þ Ð NO ¢ L = Ð MO ¢ L = q
l Ex. 24 Show that the equation
and given MN = 2k , then NL = LM = k a ( x 4 + y 4 ) - 4bxy ( x 2 - y 2 ) + 6cx 2 y 2 = 0 represents two
Now, in DNO ¢ L, pairs of lines at right angles and that if 2b 2 = a 2 + 3ac , the
NL k k 2k two pairs will coincide.
sin q = = = = …(i)
O¢N r 2 2
( x 1 + y1 ) ( x 1 + y12 )
2 Sol. Given equation is
2 a( x 4 + y 4 ) - 4bxy ( x 2 - y 2 ) + 6c x 2y 2 = 0 …(i)
But angle between the lines represented by Eq. (i) is a homogeneous equation of fourth degree and
2 (h 2 - ab ) since it represents two pairs at right angles. i.e. sum of the
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 is tan q = . coefficients of x 2 and y 2 should be zero.
|a + b |
Let a( x 4 + y 4 ) - 4bxy ( x 2 - y 2 ) + 6cx 2y 2
2 (h 2 - ab )
\ sin q = …(ii)
( a - b ) 2 + 4h 2 = (ax 2 + pxy - ay 2 )( x 2 + qxy - y 2 ),
where, p and q are constants.
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
On comparing similar powers, we get
2 (h 2 - ab ) 2k
= p + aq = - 4b …(ii)
( a - b ) 2 + 4h 2 ( x 12 + y12 ) -2a + pq = 6c …(iii)
226 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Again, given two pairs coincide, then = k 3 (a 2 + b 2 - 2ac + c 2 - 2bd + d 2 )

p
=q = k 3 {(a - c )2 + (b - d )2 }
a
or p = aq …(iv) Hence, locus of P is
From Eqs. (ii) and (iv), (ay 3 + by 2 x + cyx 2 + dx 3 ) = k 3 {(a - c )2 + (b - d )2 }
2b
q=-
a l Ex. 26 If one of the lines given by the equation
and p = - 2b ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 coincides with one of the lines given
Substituting the values of p and q in Eq. (iii), we get by a ¢ x 2 + 2h ¢ xy + b ¢ y 2 = 0 and the other lines represented
4b 2 by them be perpendicular, then .
-2a + = 6c
a ha ¢ b ¢ h ¢ ab 1
= = ( -aa ¢ bb ¢ )
Þ -a 2 + 2b 2 = 3ac b¢ - a¢ b - a 2
\ 2b 2 = a 2 + 3ac Sol. Let the two lines represented by
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 …(i)
l Ex. 25 Show that the locus of a point such that the be y = m1x
product of the perpendiculars let fall from it on three lines and y = m2x
represented by ay 3 + by 2 x + cyx 2 + dx 3 = 0 is 2h
\ m1 + m 2 = - …(ii)
constant = k 3 , is b
a
ay 3 + by 2 x + cyx 2 + dx 3 = k 3 (a - c ) 2 + (b - d ) 2 . and m1m 2 = …(iii)
b
Sol. Let the three represented lines are and the lines represented by
y = m1x , y = m 2 x and y = m 3 x a ¢ x 2 + 2h ¢ xy + b ¢ y 2 = 0 …(iv)
ay 3 + by 2 x + cyx 2 + dx 3 = a(y - m1x ) (y - m 2 x ) (y - m 3 x ) 1
be y=- x and y = m 2 x
On comparing similar powers on both sides m1
b 1 2h ¢
Þ m1 + m 2 + m 3 = - …(i) \ - + m2 = - …(v)
a m1 b¢
c æ 1 ö a¢
m1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m1 = …(ii) and - ç ÷m 2 = …(vi)
a è m1 ø b¢
d
m1m 2m 3 = - …(iii) From Eqs. (iii) and (vi), we get
a
aa ¢ ( -aba ¢ b ¢ )
Let the point P ( x 1, y1 ), from given condition - m 22 = Þ m2 =
bb ¢ bb ¢
(y1 - m1x 1 ) (y1 - m 2 x 1 ) (y1 - m 3 x 1 )
. . = k3 ( -aba ¢ b ¢ )
2 2 2
(1 + m1 ) (1 + m 2 ) (1 + m 3 ) From Eqs. (iii), we get m1 = -
a¢b
1
Þ (ay13 + by12 x 1 + cy1x 12 + dx 13 ) Substituting these values of m1 and m 2 in Eqs. (ii) and (v),
a we get
= k 3 (1 + m12 ) (1 + m 22 ) (1 + m 32 ) -aba ¢ b ¢ -aba ¢ b ¢ 2h
- + =-
3 2
[Qay + by x + cyx + dx 2 3 a¢b bb ¢ b
ha ¢ b ¢ 1
= a (y - m1x ) (y - m 2 x )(y - m 3 x )] Þ = -aa ¢ bb ¢ …(vii)
b¢ - a¢ 2
Þ (ay13 + by12 x 1 + cy1x 12 + dx 13 )
a¢b -aba ¢ b ¢ 2h ¢
= ak 3
(1 + Sm12 + Sm12m 22 + m12m 22m 32 ) and + =-
-aba ¢ b ¢ bb ¢ b¢
{1 + ( Sm1 )2 - 2 Sm1m 2 + ( Sm1m 2 )2 h ¢ ab 1
= - aba ¢ b ¢ …(viii)
= ak 3 b-a 2
2
- 2m1m 2m 3 Sm1 + (m1m 2m 3 ) }
2
From Eqs. (vii) and (viii), we get
3 b2
2c c 2 2d æ bö æ d ö ha ¢ b ¢ h ¢ ab 1
= ak 1+ 2 - + + .ç- ÷ + ç- ÷ = = - aba ¢ b ¢
a a a2 a è aø è aø b¢ - a¢ b - a 2
#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 12 multiple choice questions. (a) 5 (b) 2 5
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c), (d) out of which (c) 3 5 (d) 4 5
ONLY ONE is correct.
8. The four straight lines given by the equations
1. If the sum of the slopes of the lines given by 12x 2 + 7 xy − 12y 2 = 0 and
4 x + 2λxy − 7y = 0 is equal to the product of the
2 2
12x 2 + 7 xy − 12y 2 − x + 7y − 1 = 0 lie along the sides of a
slopes, then λ is equal to (a) square (b) rhombus
(a) − 4 (b) − 2 (c) 2 (d) 4 (c) rectangle (d) parallelogram
2. The equation 3ax 2 + 9 xy + (a 2 − 2)y 2 = 0 represents two 9. Distance between the parallel lines
perpendicular straight lines for 4 x 2 + 20xy + 25y 2 + 2x + 5y − 12 = 0 is
(a) only one value of a (b) for all values of a 3 5
(c) for only two values of a (d) for no value of a (a) (b)
29 29
3. The image of the pair of lines represented by 7 9
(c) (d)
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 by the line mirror y = 0 is 29 29
(a) ax 2 − 2hxy − by 2 = 0 (b) bx 2 − 2hxy + ay 2 = 0 10. The point of intersection of the two lines given by
(c) bx + 2hxy + ay = 0
2 2
(d) ax − 2hxy + by = 0
2 2
2x 2 − 5xy + 2y 2 + 3x + 3y + 1 = 0 is
(a) ( − 2, 2 ) (b) ( − 3, 3 )
4. Number of points lying on the line 7 x + 4y + 2 = 0 which
(c) (3, 3 ) (d) (2, 2 )
is equidistant from the lines 15x 2 + 56xy + 48y 2 = 0 is
11. If α, β > 0 and α < β and
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) 2 (d) 4 αx 2 + 4 γxy + βy 2 + 4 p ( x + y + 1) = 0 represents a pair
5. Orthocentre of the triangle formed by the lines of straight lines, then
xy − 3x − 5y + 15 = 0 and 3x + 5y = 15 is (a) α ≤ p ≤ β (b) p ≤ α
(a) ( − 5, − 3 ) (b) (5, 3 ) (c) p ≥ α (d) p ≤ α or p ≥ β
(c) ( − 3 , − 5 ) (d) (3, 5 ) 12. If the equation of the pair of straight lines passing
6. Two of the straight lines given by through the point (1, 1), one making an angle θ with the
3x + 3x y − 3xy + dy = 0 are at right angles, if d
3 2 2 3 positive direction of the X -axis and the other making the
same angle with the positive direction of the Y -axis, is
equal to
x 2 − (a + 2)xy + y 2 + a ( x + y − 1) = 0, a ≠ − 2 , then the
(a) − 4 (b) − 3
(c) − 2 (d) − 1 value of sin 2θ is
(a) a − 2 (b) a + 2
7. Two lines are given by ( x − 2y ) 2 + λ( x − 2y ) = 0. The 2 2
(c) (d)
value of | λ | so that the distance between them is 3, is (a + 2 ) a

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 2 :

More than One Option Correct Type Questions
n
This section contains 6 multiple choice questions. Each 14. The equation ax 2 + by 2 + cx + cy = 0 represent a pair of
questions has four choices (a), (b), (c), (d) out of which straight lines, if
MORE THAN ONE may be correct. (a) a + b = 0
13. The equation of image of pair of lines y = | x − 1 | in (b) c = 0
(c) a + c = 0
Y -axis is (d) c (a + b ) = 0
(a) y = | x + 1 | (b) y = | x − 1 | + 3
(c) x 2 − y 2 + 2 x + 1 = 0 (d) x 2 − y 2 + 2 x − 1 = 0
228 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

15. If x 2 + αy 2 + 2βy = a 2 represents a pair of 17. Two pair of straight lines have the equations
perpendicular straight lines, then y 2 + xy − 12x 2 = 0 and ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0.
(a) α = 1, β = a One line will be common among them, if
(b) α = 1, β = − a (a) a = − 3(2h + 3b ) (b) a = 8(h − 2b )
(c) α = − 1, β = − a (c) a = 2(b + h ) (d) a = − 3(b + h )
(d) α = − 1, β = a
18. The combined equation of three sides of a triangle is
16. If the pair of lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ( x 2 − y 2 ) (2x + 3y − 6) = 0. If ( − 2 , a ) is an interior and
intersect on Y -axis, then
(b, 1) is an exterior point of the triangle, then
(a) f 2 = bc 10 10
(b) abc = 2 fgh (a) 2 < a < (b) − 2 < a <
3 3
(c) bg 2 ≠ ch 2 9
(c) − 1 < b < (d) − 1 < b < 1
(d) 2 fgh = bg 2 + ch 2 2

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 3 :

Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 3 paragraphs based upon each of (c) ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
the paragraph, 3 multiple choice questions have to be (d) None of the above
answered. Each of these question has four choices (a), (b),
23. If f i + 1 ( x , y ) = 0 represents the equation of a pair of
(c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
perpendicular lines, thenf 3 ( x , y ) = 0 is same as
Paragraph I (a) f1( x, y ) = 0
(Q. Nos. 19 to 21) (b) f 2( x, y ) = 0
(c) hx 2 − (a − b ) xy − hy 2 = 0
Consider the equation of a pair of straight lines as
(d) None of the above
x 2 − 3xy + λy 2 + 3x − 5 y + 2 = 0
5 f n + 2 ( x, y )
19. The value of λ is 24. The value of ∑ f n ( x, y )
is
(a) 1 (b) 2 n=2
(c) 3 (d) 4 (a) 14 (b) 4
(c) 54 (d) 6
20. The point of intersection of lines is (α, β), then the value
of α 2 + β 2 is Paragraph III
(a) 2 (b) 5 (Q. Nos. 25 to 27)
(c) 10 (d) 17 Consider a pair of perpendicular straight lines
21. The angle between the lines is θ, then the value of cos 2θ 2x 2 + 3xy + by 2 − 11x + 13 y + c = 0
is
1 2 25. The value of c is
(a) (b) (a) − 2 (b) 2
3 3
3 4 (c) − 3 (d) 3
(c) (d)
5 5 26. The value of | b + 2c | is
Paragraph II (a) 4 (b) 6
(c) 8 (d) 10
(Q. Nos. 22 to 24)
27. If point of intersection of lines is C and points of
Let f1 ( x, y ) ≡ ax + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 and let f i + 1 ( x, y ) = 0
2
intersection of the lines with the X -axis are A and B, if
denote the equation of the bisectors of f i ( x, y ) = 0 for all distance between the orthocentre and the circumcentre
i = 1, 2, 3, ... of ∆ABC is λ, then [λ] is (where [. ] denotes the greatest
22. f 3 ( x , y ) = 0 is integer function
(a) 2 (b) 3
(a) hx 2 − (a − b ) xy − hy 2 = 0 (c) 4 (d) 5
(b) (a − b ) x 2 + 4hxy − (a − b )y 2 = 0
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 229

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 4 :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 5 questions. The answer to each 30. The lines represented by x 2 + 2λxy + 2y 2 = 0 and ( λ + 1)
question is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 x 2 − 8xy + y 2 = 0 are equally inclined, then the value of
(both inclusive).
| λ | is
28. Equation λx 3 − 10x 2 y − xy 2 + 4y 3 = 0 represented
31. If the lines joining the origin to the intersection of the
three straight lines, out of these three, two lines makes line y = nx + 2 and the curve x 2 + y 2 = 1 are at right
equal angle with y = x and λ > 0, then the value of λ is
angles, then the value of n 2 is
29. Area enclosed by curves y − 5xy + 6x + 3x − y = 0 and
2 2
32. If area of the triangle formed by the line x + y = 3 and
y 2 − 5xy + 6x 2 + 2x − y = 0 is λ sq units, then the value
the angle bisectors of the pair of straight lines
of λ is
x 2 − y 2 + 2y = 1 is λ sq units, then the value of λ is

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 5 :

Matching Type Questions
n
This section contains one question. This question has four statements (A,B,C and D) given in Column I and four
statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any given statements in Column I can have correct matching with one or more
statement(s) given in Column II.
33. Match the following
Column I Column II
(A) The pair of lines joining the origin to the (p) 2
points of intersection of the curve
9x 2 + 16 y2 = 144 by the line 2x + 2 y + λ = 0 are coincident, then | λ | is divisible by

(B) If the straight lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of the straight line 4 x + 3 y = 24 (q) 3
and the curve (x − 3)2 + ( y − 4 )2 = λ2, are at right angles, then | λ | is divisible by

(C) The two line pairs y2 − 4 y + 3 = 0 and x 2 + 4 xy + 4 y2 − 5x − 10 y + 4 = 0 enclose a 4 sided (r) 5

convex polygon, if area of polygon is λ sq units, then λ is divisible by
(D) If the pairs of lines 3x 2 − 2 pxy − 3 y2 = 0 and 5x 2 − 2qxy − 5 y2 = 0 are such that each pair bisects (s) 6
the angle between the other pair. If λ = | pq | , then λ is divisible by
230 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 6 :

Statement I and II Types Questions
n Directions (Q. Nos. 34-37) are Assertion-Reason type 35. Statement I Two of the straight lines represented by
questions. Each of these questions contains two dx 3 + cx 2 y + bxy 2 + ay 3 = 0 will be at right angles if
statements:
d 2 + bd + bc + a 2 = 0.
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason)
Each of these questions also has four alternative choices, Statement II Product of the slopes of two perpendicular
lines is − 1.
only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select
the correct choice as given below : 36. Statement I If αβ = − 1, then the pair of straight lines
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a x 2 − 2αxy − y 2 = 0 and y 2 + 2βxy − x 2 = 0 are the angle
correct explanation for Statement I bisector of each other.
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is not a Statement II Pair of angle bisector lines of the pair of
correct explanation for Statement I lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 is h( x 2 − y 2 ) = (a − b )xy.
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true 37. Statement I If a + b = − 2h, then one line of the pair of
lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 bisects the angle between
34. Statement I The four straight lines given by coordinate axes in positive quadrant.
6x 2 + 5xy − 6y 2 = 0 and 6x 2 + 5xy − 6y 2 − x + 5y − 1 = 0 Statement II If ax + y(2h + a ) = 0 is a factor of
are the sides of a square. ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0, then b + 2h + a = 0.
Statement II The lines represented by general equation
of second degree ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
are perpendicular if a + b = 0.

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 7 :

Subjective Type Questions
n
In this section, there are 7 subjective questions. 42. If ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 and
38. Prove that the straight lines represented by ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 − 2gx − 2 fy + c = 0 each represents a
(y − mx ) = a (1 + m ) and (y − nx ) = a (1 + n )
2 2 2 2 2 2
pair of lines, then prove that the area of the
form a rhombus. 2| c |
parallelogram enclosed by them is .
39. Prove that the equation m ( x 3 − 3xy 2 ) + y 3 − 3x 2 y = 0 (h 2 − ab )
represents three straight lines equally inclined to each 43. Prove that lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
other.
are equidistant from the origin, if
40. Show that the straight lines f 4 − g 4 = c (bf 2 − ag 2 ). Also, find the product of
( A 2 − 3B 2 )x 2 + 8ABxy + ( B 2 − 3A 2 ) y 2 = 0 form with their distances from the origin.
the line Ax + By + C = 0 an equilateral triangle whose
44. Prove that if two of the lines represented by
C2
area is ax 4 + bx 3 y + cx 2 y 2 + dxy 3 + ay 4 = 0
3( A 2 + B 2 ) bisects the angle between the other two, then
41. Find the equations of the diagonals of the parallelogram c + 6a = 0 and b + d = 0.
formed by the lines L 2 − aL = 0 and L ′ 2 − aL ′ = 0, where
L = x cos θ + y sin θ − p and L ′ = x cos θ′ + y sin θ′ − p ′.
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 231

#L Pair of Straight Lines Exercise 8 :

Question Asked in Previous 13 Years Exams
n This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, 46. If one of the lines of my 2 + (1 − m 2 )xy − mx 2 = 0 is a
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. bisector of the angle between the lines xy = 0, then m is
45. If the pair of lines ax + 2(a + b )xy + by = 0 lie long
2 2 [AIEEE 2007, 3M]
1
diameters of a circle and divide the circle into four (a) − (b) −2
2
sectors such that the area of one of the sector is thrice (c) 1 (d) 2
the area of the another sector, then [AIEEE 2005, 3M]
(a) 3a 2 + 2ab + 3b 2 = 0 (b) 3a 2 + 10ab + 3b 2 = 0
(c) 3a 2 − 2ab + 3b 2 = 0 (d) 3a 2 − 10ab + 3b 2 = 0

Answers
Exercise for Session 1 Exercise for Session 5
1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (c, d) 1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (b)
7.  ,
8 8 6. 9x2 + 10xy − 9 y2 = 0 7. ± 1 10. x2 − xy − 2 y2 = 0
6. bx + ay = 0, ax − by = 0 
3 3
9. (ab′ − a′ b)2 = 4 (ah′ − a′ h) (h′ b − hb′ ) Chapter Exercises
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (b)
Exercise for Session 2 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (c)
1. (b) 2. (c, d) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (b, c) 13. (a, c) 14. (a, b, d) 15. (c, d) 16. (a, d) 17. (a, b) 18. (a, d)
6. tan −1  
1 1
8. sec−1 (± p) 9. 3 sq units 19. (b) 20. (c) 21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (b)
 3 6
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (7) 29. (1) 30. (2)
31. (7) 32. (2)
Exercise for Session 3
33. (A) → (p, r); (B) → (r); (C) → (p, q, s); (D) → (q, r)
1. (b) 2. (a, c) 3. (a, c) 4. (b) 9. ± 2
34. (b) 35. (b) 36. (a) 37. (b)
Exercise for Session 4  x(cosθ − cosθ′ ) + y (sin θ − sin θ′ ) − p + p′ = 0
41. 
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a, d) 4. (b) 5. (a) and x(cosθ + cosθ′ ) + y(sin θ + sin θ′ ) − p − p′ − a = 0
| g 2 − ac | | c|
6. 1 sq unit 7. x − y = 0 9. 43.
| a | h2 − ab (a − b ) 2 + 4 h 2

10. x2 − 5xy + 4 y2 + 3x − 3 y = 0 45. (a) 46. (c)

 7. Q ( x - 2y ) 2 + l( x - 2y ) = 0

Solutions Þ ( x - 2y ) ( x - 2y + l) = 0
\ Lines are x - 2y = 0 and x - 2y + l = 0
Distance between lines = 3
Þ
| l - 0|
=3
(given)

(1 + 4 )
- 2l 4
1. Qm1 + m2 = m1m2 Þ = \ | l | =3 5
-7 -7
\ l = -2 8. \ 12 x + 7 xy - 12y 2 = 0
2
...(i)
2. For perpendicular lines Þ (3 x + 4y ) ( 4 x - 3y ) = 0
3a + (a 2 - 2 ) = 0 \Lines represented by Eq. (i) are
3 x + 4y = 0 and 4 x - 3y = 0
- 3 ± (9 + 8 ) - 3 ± 17
Þ a= = and 12 x + 7 xy - 12y 2 - x + 7y - 1 = 0
2
...(ii)
6 6
3. For mirror image with respect to y = 0 replace y by - y, then Þ (3 x + 4y - 1 ) ( 4 x - 3y + 1 ) = 0
image of the pair of lines ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 is \ Lines represented by Eq. (ii) are
3 x + 4y - 1 = 0 and 4 x - 3y + 1 = 0
ax 2 + 2hx( - y ) + b( - y ) 2 = 0
Distance between parallel lines 3 x + 4y = 0 and
or ax 2 - 2hxy + by 2 = 0 1
3 x + 4y - 1 = 0 is .
4. Q 15 x 2 + 56 xy + 48y 2 = 0 ...(i) 5
And distance between parallel lines 4 x - 3y = 0 and
Þ (3 x + 4y ) (5 x + 12y ) = 0 1
Equation of lines represented by Eq. (i) are 4 x - 3y + 1 = 0 is .
5
3 x + 4y = 0 and 5 x + 12y = 0
Hence, all sides along a square.
æ - 7l -2 ö
Let any point on 7 x + 4y + 2 = 0 is ç l, ÷. 9. Given,
è 4 ø
4 x 2 + 20 xy + 25y 2 + 2 x + 5y - 12 = 0 ...(i)
According to questions,
æ - 7l - 2 ö æ - 7l - 2 ö Þ (2 x + 5y ) 2 + (2 x + 5y ) - 12 = 0
3l + 4ç ÷ 5 l + 12 ç ÷
è 4 ø è 4 ø Þ (2 x + 5y + 4 ) (2 x + 5y - 3 ) = 0
=
5 13 \ Lines represented by Eq. (i) are
2 x + 5y + 4 = 0 and 2 x + 5y - 3 = 0
1 1 | 4 - (- 3) | 7
Þ | - 4 l - 2 | = | - 16 l - 6 | Hence, distance between parallel lines = = .
5 13 4 + 25 29

Þ
| 2l + 1 | | 8l + 3 |
= 10. Let f ( x, y ) º 2x 2 - 5xy + 2y 2 + 3x + 3y + 1 = 0
5 13 ¶f ¶f
Þ 13(2 l + 1 ) = ± 5 (8 l + 3 ) \ = 4 x - 5y + 3 and = - 5 x + 4y + 3
¶x ¶y
1 14
\ l=- ,- ¶f ¶f
7 33 For point of intersection = 0 and =0
¶x ¶y
5. Given lines are xy - 3x - 5y + 15 = 0
Þ 4 x - 5y + 3 = 0 and - 5 x + 4y + 3 = 0, we get
Y
y=3 x = 3, y = 3
(0,3) B C (5,3)
\ Point of intersection is (3, 3 ).
3x+ 11. ax 2 + 4g xy + by 2 + 4p( x + y + 1) = 0
5y= x=5
15 represents a pair of straight lines.
X \D=0
O A(5,0)
Þ 4 abp + 16 p 2g - 4 p 2a - 4 p 2b - 16 g 2p = 0
Þ ( x - 5 ) (y - 3 ) = 0
\ x = 5 and y = 3 Þ (16 p ) g 2 - 16 p 2g + 4 p( pa + pb - ab) = 0
Hence, orthocentre is (5, 3). \ B 2 - 4 AC ³ 0
6. 3x 3 + 3x 2y - 3xy 2 + dy 3 = ( x 2 + pxy - y 2 ) (3x - dy ) Þ 2 2
(16 p ) - 4 × (16 p ) × 4 p ( pa + pb - ab) ³ 0
2 2
On comparing coefficients of x y and xy , we get Þ p 2( p 2 - pa - pb + ab) ³ 0
3p - d = 3 Þ ( p - a) ( p - b) ³ 0
and - 3 - pd = - 3 \ p £ a or p ³ b [Q a < b]
\ p = 0, d = -3
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 233

12. Equation of first line is y - 1 = tan q( x - 1) 18. The separate equations of the sides are x + y = 0, x - y = 0 and
Equation of second line is y - 1 = cot q( x - 1 ) x y
+ = 1.
So, their joint equation is 3 2
[(y - 1 ) - tan q ( x - 1 )] [(y - 1 ) - cot q ( x - 1 )] = 0 x=–2
Y

2x+
Þ(y - 1 ) 2 - ( x - 1 ) (y - 1 ) (tan q + cot q) + ( x - 1 ) 2 = 0

3y–
x 2 - (tan q + cot q)xy + y 2 + (tan q B

6=
x+

0
+ cot q - 2 ) ( x + y - 1 ) = 0
=0

y=
y
On comparing with the given equation, we get x–

0
tan q + cot q = a + 2 A
1 y=1
or =a + 2 X′ X
sin q cos q O
2
or sin 2 q = Y′
(a + 2 )
13. For image w.r.t., Y -axis replace x by - x, then required image Intersection of x = - 2 with y = - x and 2 x + 3y - 6 = 0 gives
of lines is the range of values of a.
y = | - x - 1 | or y = | x + 1 | 10
\ 2 <a <
and on squaring both sides, then 3
y 2 = x 2 + 2x + 1 and intersection of y = 1 with y = x and 2 x + 3y - 6 = 0 given
the range of values of b
Þ x 2 - y 2 + 2x + 1 = 0 -1 <b <1 [Q(b, 1 ) is exterior point]
14. Given equation is
ax 2 + by 2 + cx + cy = 0 ...(i) Sol. (Q. Nos. 19 to 21)
Eq. (i) represents a pair of straight lines. Given equation is x 2 - 3 xy + ly 2 + 3 x - 5y + 2 = 0
\ D=0 Here, a = 1, b = l , c = 2,
2
c c2 5 3 3
Þ 0 + 2× 0 - a ´ -b ´ =0 f = - , g = and h = - .
4 4 2 2 2
or c 2(a + b ) = 0 19. D = 0
\ c = 0 or a + b = 0 5 3 3 25 9 9
1 ´ l ´2 + 2 ´ - ´ ´ - -1 ´ - l ´ -2 ´ = 0
15. Given, equation is 2 2 2 4 4 4
x 2 + ay 2 + 2by - a 2 = 0 ...(i) 45 25 9 l 9
Þ 2l + - - - =0
4 4 4 2
Equation (i) represents a pair of perpendicular straight lines
l 1
\ D = 0 and coefficient of x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0 Þ - + =0
4 2
Þ - a 2a - b 2 = 0 and 1 + a = 0 \ l =2
\ a = - 1 and b = ± a 20. Let f ( x, y ) = x 2 - 3xy + 2y 2 + 3x - 5y + 2 [Q l = 2 ]
16. Given pair of lines is ¶f ¶f
\ = 2 x - 3y + 3, = - 3 x + 4y - 5
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) ¶x ¶y
Q Point of intersection of lines represented by (i) is ¶f ¶f
For point of intersection = 0 and = 0, we get
æ hf - bg gh - af ö æ æ f 2 - bc ö æ g 2 - ac ö ö ¶x ¶y
ç , ÷ or ç ç ÷, ç ÷÷
è ab - h 2 ab - h 2 ø çè è h 2 - ab ø è h 2 - ab ø ÷ø x = - 3, y = - 1
\ a = - 3 and b = - 1
For Y -axis put x = 0
\ The value of a 2 + b 2 is 10.
\ hf = bg, f 2 = bc and h 2 ¹ ab
æ9 ö
Also, D = 0 2 ç - 2÷
2 (h 2 - ab ) è4 ø 1
\ abc + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch 2 = 0 21. tan q = = =
(a + b ) 1+2 3
For f 2 = bc, 2 fgh = bg 2 + ch 2 1
1-
17. Let y = mx be the common line, then m 2 + m - 12 = 0 and 1 - tan 2 q 9 =4
\ cos 2 q = =
bm 2 + 2hm + a = 0, then from first equation m = -4, 3 1 + tan 2 q 1 + 1 5
Substitute m = -4 in second equation, then a = 8(h - 2b ) and 9
substitute m = 3 in second equation, then a = - 3(2h + 3b ).
234 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Solutions (Q. Nos. 22 to 24) Also, intersection on X -axis put y = 0.

22. Q f1( x, y ) º ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 ...(i) C
bisectors of f1( x, y ) is f 2( x, y )
x 2 - y 2 xy
\ Equation of bisectors of (i) is =
a -b h (x2,0)B A(x1,0)
2 2 M
Þ hx - (a - b ) xy - hy = 0
11
\ f 2( x, y ) º hx 2 - (a - b ) xy - hy 2 = 0 ...(ii) \ 2 x 2 - 11 x + 2 = 0 Þ x1 + x 2 =
2
Now, equation of bisectors of (ii) is æ x + x2 ö
\ Circumcentre of DABC Þ M ç 1 , 0÷
x2 - y 2 xy è 2 ø
=
h - ( - h ) - (a - b ) æ 11 ö
2 \ M º ç , 0÷
è4 ø
x2 - y 2 2 xy æ 1 19 ö
Þ =- and orthocentre is C ºç , ÷
2h (a - b ) è5 5 ø
Þ (a - b ) x 2 + 4hxy - (a - b )y 2 = 0 2 2
æ 11 1 ö æ 19 ö
2 2 \Required distance = ç - ÷ + ç 0 - ÷
\ f 3( x, y ) º (a - b ) x + 4hxy - (a - b )y = 0 è 4 5ø è 5ø
23. f 2( x, y ) º bx 2 - 2hxy + ay 2= 0 8377
2 2
\ l= = 20.94 = 4.57
and f 3( x, y ) º ax + 2hxy + by = 0 400
is same as f1( x, y ) = 0 [ l ] = [ 4.57 ] = 4
24. For all n ³ 2 28. Given, 4y 3 - xy 2 - 10x 2y + lx 3 = 0
3 2
fn + 2( x, y ) = fn ( x, y ) æy ö æy ö æy ö
Þ 4 ç ÷ - ç ÷ - 10 ç ÷ + l = 0
fn + 2( x, y ) èxø èxø èxø
\ =1
fn ( x, y ) Let y = mx, then
5 fn + 2( x, y ) 5
4m 3 - m 2 - 10m + l = 0
Now, å fn ( x, y )
= å1 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 4 and let m1, m2, m3 be the slopes of three lines, then
n=2 n=2
1
Sol. (Q. Nos. 25 to 27) m1 + m2 + m3 = ...(i)
4
For perpendicular straight lines, then
coefficient of x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0 10
m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 = - ...(ii)
4
Þ 2+b=0
l
\ b = -2 m1m2m3 = - ...(iii)
4
25. 2x 2 + 3xy - 2y 2 - 11x + 13y + c = 0
Since, two lines are equally inclined with y = x, so let m2m3 = 1
represents a pair of straight lines, then we have l
13 11 3 169 121 9 From Eq. (iii), m1 = -
2 ´ -2 ´ c + 2 ´ ´- ´ -2 ´ +2 ´ -c ´ = 0 4
2 2 2 4 4 4 l+1
429 169 121 9c From Eq. (i), m2 + m3 = ...(iv)
Þ - 4c - - + - =0 4
4 2 2 4 æ lö æ l + 1ö 10
and from Eq. (ii), 1 + ç - ÷ ç ÷=-
Þ c = -2 è 4ø è 4 ø 4
26. | b + 2c | = | - 2 - 4 | = 6 Þ 16 - l2 - l = - 40
2 2
27. Now, pair of lines is 2x + 3xy - 2y - 11x + 13y - 2 = 0 Þ l2 + l - 56 = 0
2 2
Let f ( x, y ) º 2 x + 3 xy - 2y - 11 x + 13y - 2 = 0 Þ (l + 8) (l - 7) = 0
¶f ¶f l = - 8, 7
\ = 4 x + 3y - 11 and = 3 x - 4y + 13
¶x ¶y Hence, l =7 [Q l > 0]
For point of intersection,
¶f
= 0 and
¶f
=0 29. Qy 2 - 5xy + 6x 2 + 3x - y = 0
dx ¶y Þ (3 x - y ) (2 x - y + 1 ) = 0
Þ 4 x + 3y - 11 = 0 and 3 x - 4y + 13 = 0 and y 2 - 5 xy + 6 x 2 + 2 x - y = 0
æ 1 19 ö Þ (3 x - y + 1 ) (2 x - y ) = 0
\ C ºç , ÷
è5 5 ø
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 235

2x – y+1=0 33. (A) ® (p, r); (B) ® (r); (C) ® (p, q, s); (D) ® (q, r)
D C 2 x + 2y
(A) Given =1 ...(i)

0
=0

-l

+1 =
3x–y

and 9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 144 ...(ii)

3x–y
A B
Homogenising Eq. (ii) with Eq. (i), we get
2x–y=0 2
æ 2 x + 2y ö
9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 144 ç ÷
(1 - 0 ) (1 - 0 ) è -l ø
\Required Area = = 1 sq unit
3 -1 Þ (9 l2 - 576 ) x 2 - 1152 xy + (16 l2 - 576 )y 2 = 0
2 -1 The lines are coincident, then
\ l =1 ( - 576 ) 2 = (9 l2 - 576 ) (16 l2 - 576 )
30. Given pairs are Þ 144 l4 - 576 l2(25 ) = 0
2 2
x + 2 lxy + 2y = 0 ...(i)
or l2 = 100
2 2
and ( l + 1 ) x - 8 xy + y = 0 ...(ii) \ | l | = 10
Q Equations of angle bisectors of (i) and (ii) are equal 4 x + 3y
(B) Given, =1 ...(i)
x 2 - y 2 xy x2 - y 2 xy 24
Þ = and = must be same
1 -2 l (l + 1) - 1 - 4 and ( x - 3 ) 2 + (y - 4 ) 2 = l2
l 4 or x 2 + y 2 - (6 x + 8y ) + 25 - l2 = 0 ...(ii)
Þ =- Þ l2 = 4 Þ l = ± 2
-1 l Homogenising Eq. (ii) with Eq. (i), we get
2
\ | l| =2 ( 4 x + 3y ) æ 4 x + 3y ö
x 2 + y 2 - (6 x + 8y ) + (25 - l2 ) ç ÷ =0
y - nx 24 è 24 ø
31. Given, =1 ...(i)
2 Þ 16 (25 - l2 ) x 2 + 9(25 - l2 )y 2 + ( - 600 - 24 l2 ) xy = 0
and x2 + y 2 = 1 ...(ii)
The lines will be at right angles, when
Homogenising Eq. (ii) with Eq. (i), we get 16(25 - l2 ) + 9(25 - l2 ) = 0
2
æ y - nx ö Þ 625 - 25 l2 = 0
x2 + y 2 = ç ÷
è 2 ø
Þ l2 = 25
æn 2 ö æ1 ö
Þ ç - 1 ÷ x 2 - nxy + ç - 1 ÷y 2 = 0 \ | l| =5
è 4 ø è4 ø
(C) The lines pairs are (y - 1 ) (y - 3 ) = 0 i.e. y = 1 and y = 3
or (n 2 - 4 ) x 2 - 4 nxy - 3y 2 = 0 the other line pair is x 2 + 4 xy + 4y 2 - 5 x - 10y + 4 = 0
The lines will be at right angles, when i.e. ( x + 2y - 4 ) ( x + 2y - 1 ) = 0
(n 2 - 4 ) + ( - 3 ) = 0 Þ n 2 = 7 or x + 2y - 4 = 0 and x + 2y - 1 = 0
y=3
32. Q x 2 - y 2 + 2y = 1 D C
2 2 2
Þ x = (y - 2y + 1 ) = (y - 1 )
x+2
x+2

y–4=
y

Þ x = ± (y - 1 )
–1=

i.e. x - y + 1 = 0 and x + y - 1 = 0
0
0

\ Bisectors are y = 1 and x = 0 A B

y=1
Y
3 (3 - 1 ) ( 4 - 1 )
Required area = = 6 sq units
1 2
0 1
1 (2,1) \ l =6
(D) Equation of the bisectors of 3 x 2 - 2 pxy - 3y 2 = 0 is
o X
x2 - y 2 xy
= Þ px 2 + 6 xy - py 2 = 0
3 - (- 3) - p
So, area between x = 0, y = 1 and x + y = 3 is given by
1 Which is same as 5 x 2 - 2qxy - 5y 2 = 0
´ 2 ´ 2 = 2 sq units
2 p 6 -p
i.e. = = Þ pq = - 15
\ l =2 5 - 2q - 5
\ l = | pq | = | - 15 | = 15
236 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

34. Q Lines represented by 6x 2 + 5xy - 6y 2 = 0 are l1 : 2x + 3y = 0, 38. From (y - mx ) 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 )

l 2 : 3 x - 2y = 0
Þ y - mx = ± a (1 + m 2 )
and lines represented by
6 x 2 + 5 xy - 6y 2 - x + 5y - 1 = 0 \ Lines y - mx = a 1 + m 2 …(i)
are l 3 : 2 x + 3y - 1 = 0
and y - mx = - a 1 + m 2 …(ii)
l 4 : 3 x - 2y + 1 = 0
2 2 2
Q l1 ^ l 2, l 2 ^ l 3, l 3 ^ l 4 and l 4 ^ l1. and from (y - nx ) = a (1 + n )
Also, l1, l 2 intersect at ( 0, 0 ) and ( 0, 0 ) is equidistant from l 3 and
Þ y - nx = ± a (1 + n 2 )
l 4 . These lines form sides of square.
\Statement I is true. \ Lines y - nx = a 1 + n 2 …(iii)
Statement II is true but Statement II is not a correct
explanation for Statement I. and y - nx = - a 1 + n 2 …(iv)
35. dx 3 + cx 2y + bxy 2 + ay 3 = ( x 2 + pxy - y 2 ) (dx - ay ) Since, lines (i) and (ii) are parallel, the distance between
On comparing, we get lines (i) and (ii) is
c+a
c = - a + pd Þ p = ...(i) |a 1 + m 2 + a 1 + m 2 |
d = | 2a |
-b -d 1 + m2
and b = - ap - d Þ p = ...(ii)
a Similarly, (iii) and (iv) are parallel lines and the distance
From Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii), between them = | 2a |. Therefore, distance between parallel
c + a -b -d lines are same.
=
d a Hence, lines (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) form a rhombus.
Þ d 2 + bd + ac + a 2 = 0 39. Dividing by x 3, the given equation can be written as
æ 2 3
\ Statement I is true. æy ö ö æy ö æy ö
m çç1 - 3ç ÷ ÷÷ + ç ÷ - 3ç ÷ = 0
Hence, both statements are true but Statement II is not correct è x ø è x ø èx ø
è ø
explanation for Statement I.
36. Pair of bisectors between the lines x 2 - 2axy - y 2 = 0 is y
writing = tan q, we have
x
x2 - y 2 xy Y
=
1 - (- 1) - a 2′
Þ ax 2 + 2 xy - ay 2 = 0 ...(i) 3
Comparing it with y 2 + 2bxy - x 2 = 0 , then 2π/3
π/3 1
a 1 l π/3
- = = φ/3
1 b -1 X′ X
O 2π/3
1′ 2π/3
Þ ab = - 1
2 3′
Hence, both statements are true and Statement II is correct Y′
explanation for Statement I.
m(1 - 3 tan 2 q ) + tan 3 q - 3 tan q = 0
37. Put 2h = - (a + b ) in ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0
3 tan q - tan 3 q
Þ ax 2 - (a + b ) xy + by 2 = 0 \ m= = tan 3q
1 - 3 tan 2 q
Þ ( x - y ) (ax - by ) = 0
Þ One of the line bisects the angle between coordinate axes Let m = tan f,
in positive quadrant. then tan 3q = tan f
Also, put b = - 2h - a in ax - by , we have \ 3q = f, f + p , f + 2p
ax - by = ax - ( - 2h - a )y f f p f 2p
= ax + (2h + a )y Þ q= , + , +
3, 3 3 3 3
Hence, ax + (2h + a )y is a factor of
Thus, the given equation represents three lines through the
ax 2 + 2hyx + by 2 = 0 f f p f 2p
origin and they are inclined at angles , + , + with
\ Both statements are true but Statement II is not correct 3 3 3 3 3
explanation for Statement I. the X-axis. Clearly, they are equally inclined to each other.
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 237

40. Given pair of lines is -3A 2 + 3 A 2 B - 3AB 2 + 3B 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 = tan -1
( A - 3B )x + 8ABxy + ( B - 3A ) y = 0 …(i) - 3A 3 + A 2 B - 3AB 2 + B 3
Given line is Ax + By + C = 0 …(ii) = tan -1 ( 3 ) = 60°
2 2
Comparing Eq. (i) with ax + 2hxy + by = 0
then remaining third angle is 180° - (60° + 60° ) = 60°.
a = A 2 - 3B 2 , h = 4 AB, b = B 2 - 3A 2 \ The DAOB is equilateral.
If q be the acute angle between the lines represented by In DOAB,
Eq. (i), then 0+0+C
Length of ^ from O on AB = p = OM =
2 (h 2 - ab ) 2 16A 2 B 2 - ( A 2 - 3B 2 )( B 2 - 3A 2 ) (A 2 + B2 )
tan q = =
|a + b | |( A 2 - 3B 2 + B 2 - 3A 2 )|
C
4 4 2 2 2 2 p=
2 ( 3A + 3B + 6A B ) 3( A + B ) (A + B2 )
2
= 2 2
= 2 2
= 3
| -2( A + B )| (A + B )
and in DOAM,
\ q = 60° p 2p
Y sin60° = Þ OA =
B OA 3
Ax
+

2| C |
By

60° \ OA =
+

M
3 (A 2 + B2 )
C=
0

p
3 3
60°
A
\ Area of the equilateral triangle = (side)2 = (OA )2
60° 4 4
(0,0) 2
X 3 4C C2
O = ´ =
4 3 ´ (A 2 + B 2 ) 3(A 2 + B 2 )
Eq. (i) can be written as 41. Lines of parallelogram are
2
æy ö æy ö L = 0, L = a
( B - 3A )ç ÷ + 8AB ç ÷ + ( A 2 - 3B 2 ) = 0
2 2
èx ø èx ø L¢ = 0, L ¢ = a
C
Solving for y/x, we have L=a

y -8AB ± 64 A 2 B 2 - 4( B 2 - 3A 2 )( A 2 - 3B 2 ) D
=
x 2( B 2 - 3A 2 ) L′=a

- 4 AB ± 16A 2 B 2 - ( A 2 B 2 - 3B 4 - 3A 4 + 9 A 2 B 2 ) L′=0
= 2 2 B
( B - 3A )
L=0
y -4 AB ± 3( A 2 + B 2 ) A
Þ =
x ( B 2 - 3A 2 ) where, L = x cos q + y sin q - p
L ¢ = x cos q ¢ + y sin q ¢ - p ¢
ì -4 AB ± 3 ( A 2 + B 2 ) ü
Þ y =í ýx Equation of the line AC, through the point of intersection of
î B 2 - 3A 2 þ L = 0 and L ¢ = 0 is
Taking the positive sign, slope of one of the lines L + lL ¢ = 0
3 ( A 2 + B 2 ) - 4 AB It also passes through
=
B 2 - 3A 2 L = a and L ¢ = a, …(i)
and slope of the line Ax + By + C = 0 is – A/B. then, a + la = 0
Acute angle between these lines \ l = -1
2 2 Hence, diagonal of AC is L - L ¢ = 0
3( A + B ) - 4 AB A
2 2
+ i.e. x (cos q - cos q ¢ ) + y (sin q - sin q ¢ ) - p + p ¢ = 0
B - 3A B
= tan -1 Equation of the line BD through point of intersection of
2 2
æ A ö é 3( A + B ) - 4 AB ù L = 0 and L ¢ = a is
1 - ç ÷ê ú
è B øë B - 3A 2
2
ûú L + l( L ¢ - a ) = 0
238 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

it also passes through L = a and L ¢ = 0. Since, the lines lx + my + n = 0 and l1x + m1y + n1 = 0 are
\ a + l(0 - a ) = 0 equidistant from the origin, then
\ l =1 |n | | n1 |
=
2 2
Equation of diagonal BD is L + L ¢ - a = 0 l +m l1 + m12
2

Þ x (cos q + cos q¢ ) + y (sin q + sin q¢ ) - p - p ¢ - a = 0 Þ n 2l12 + n 2m12 = n12l 2 + n12m 2

42. Let the first equation represents lines
Þ n 2l12 - n12l 2 = n12m 2 - n 2m12
(lx + my + n ) (l1x + m1y + n1 ) = 0
then the second equation represents lines Þ (nl1 - n1l ) (nl1 + n1l ) = (n1m - nm1 ) (n1m + nm1 )
(lx + my - n )(l1x + m1y - n1 ) = 0 On squaring both sides, we get
On comparing coefficients, ll1 = a , mm1 = b, nn1 = c (nl1 - n1l )2 (nl1 + n1l )2 = (n1m - nm1 )2 (n1m + nm1 )2
mn1 + m1n = 2 f , nl1 + n1l = 2g , lm1 + l1 m = 2h . Þ [(nl1 + n1l )2 - 4ll1nn1 ] [nl1 + n1l ]2
Let the angle between two non-parallel lines be q, then = [(n1m + nm1 )2 - 4mm1nn1 ] [n1m + nm1 ]2
2 (h 2 - ab ) Þ ( 4 g 2 - 4ac ) ( 4 g 2 ) = ( 4 f 2
- 4bc ) ( 4 f 2 )
tan q =
|a + b |
[using the six relations]
2 (h 2 - ab ) Þ 2
( g - ac )g = ( f 2 2
- bc ) f 2
[from Eq. (i)]
\ sin q =
2 2
( a - b ) + 4h Þ f 4 4
- g = c (bf 2
- ag ) 2

pp Also, product of distances from origin to the lines

\ Area of parallelogram = 1 2 ,
sinq represented by
where, p 1 and p 2 are distance between two parallel sides. ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
| n - ( - n )| | n - ( -n1 )|
\ p1 = and p 2 = 1 |n | | n1|
2 2 2 is .
l +m l1 + m12 2 2
(l + m ) (l12 + m12 )
| 4nn1|
\ p 1p 2 = | nn1|
(l 2l12 +l 2
m12 + m 2l12 + m 2m12 ) =
(l 2l12 +l 2
m12 + m 2l12 + m 2m12 )
4| nn1|
= | nn1|
{l 2l12 + m 2m12 + (lm1 + l1m )2 - 4l l1mm1 } =
(l 2l12 +l 2
m12 + m 2l12 + m 2m12 )
4 |c | 4 |c |
= = | nn1|
a 2 + b 2 + 4h 2 - 2ab ( a - b ) 2 + 4h 2 =
(l 2l12 +m 2
m12 + (lm1 + ml1 )2 - 2ll1mm1 )
pp
\ Area = 1 2 |c |
sinq = [from Eq. (i)]
4| c | (a + b + 4h 2 - 2ab )
2 2
=
æ 2 h 2 - ab ö |c |
( ( a - b ) 2 + 4h 2 ) ç ÷ =
ç ( a - b ) 2 + 4h 2 ÷ (a - b ) 2 + 4h 2
è ø
2|c | 44. We know that bisectors are mutually perpendicular to each
= other, then
(h 2 - ab )
ax 4 + bx 3y + cx 2y 2 + dxy 3 + ay 4 = 0
43. Given, equation
represents two pairs of mutually perpendicular lines.
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
Let ax 4 + bx 3y + cx 2y 2 + dxy 3 + ay 4
represents two lines
= (ax 2 + pxy - ay 2 ) ( x 2 + qxy - y 2 )
lx + my + n = 0 and l1x + m1y + n1 = 0
where, p and q are constants.
then, ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c
Comparing the coefficients of similar terms, we get
= (lx + my + n ) (l1x + m1y + n1 )
b = aq + p …(i)
Comparing the coefficients of similar terms, we get
c = pq - 2a …(ii)
ll1 = a , mm1 = b, nn1 = c ü
ý …(i) d = - p - aq …(iii)
lm1 + ml1 = 2h , n1l + nl1 = 2g ,nm1 + n1m = 2 f þ
 Chap 03 Pair of Straight Lines 239

On adding Eqs. (i) and (iii), we have \ A + 3 A + A + 3 A = pr 2

b+d =0 p
Þ A = r2
From Eq. (ii), pq = c + 2a …(iv) 8
But given that bisectors of one pair are given by the other, 1 2 p 2 1
Þ r q= r [Q area of sector = r 2q]
i.e. 2 8 2
x2 - y2 xy \ q=
p
=
a - ( -a ) ( p / 2 ) 4
\ Angle between lines represented by
x2 - y2 a p
Þ = …(v) ax 2 + 2(a + b ) xy + by 2 = 0 is .
4 xy p 4
is the same as the other pair. 2
p 2 (a + b ) - ab
2 2 Þ tan =
x + qxy - y = 0 4 |a + b|
x2 - y2 q 2 (a + b ) 2 - ab
or =- …(vi) Þ 1=
4 xy 4 |a + b|
a q Þ (a + b ) 2 = 4(a + b ) 2 - 4ab
From Eqs. (v) and (vi), =-
p 4 \ 3a 2 + 2ab + 3b 2 = 0
\ pq = - 4a
46. The equation of the bisectors of the lines xy = 0 are y = ± x.
Again from Eq. (iv), -4a = c + 2a
Putting y = ± x in
\ c + 6a = 0 my 2 + (1 - m 2 ) xy - mx 2 = 0, we get
45. Let A be the area of small sector, then area of major sector is 3A. ± (1 - m 2 ) x 2 = 0
r Þ m2 = 1
θ
O r \

r
θ r
 CHAPTER

04
Circle
Learning Part
Session 1
● Definition ● Equation of Circle in Different Forms
● Locus of the Mid-point of the Chords of the Circle
that Subtends an Angle of 2q at its Centre
Session 2
● Diametric Form of a Circle ● Equation of Circle Passing Through Three
Non-Collinear Points
Session 3
● Intercepts Made on the Axes by a Circle ● Different Forms of the Equations of a Circle
● Position of a Point with Respect to Circle ● Maximum and Minimum Distance of a Point from
the Circle
Session 4
● Intersection of a Line and a Circle ● Product of the Algebraical Distances PA and PB is
● The Length of Intercept Cut-off from a Line by a Circle Constant when from P, A Secant be Drawn to Cut the
● Tangent to a Circle at a Given Point Circle in the Points A and B
● Normal to a Circle at a Given Point
Session 5
● Tangents from a Point to the Circle ● Length of the Tangent from a Point to a Circle
● Power of a Point with Respect to a Circle ● Chord of Contact
● Chord Bisected at a Given Point ● Pair of Tangents
● Director Circle
Session 6
● Diameter of a Circle ● Two Circles Touching Each Other
● Common Tangents to Two Circles ● Common Chord of Two Circles
● Family of Circles
Session 7
● Angle of Intersection of Two Circles ● Radical Axis
● Radical Centre ● Co-axial System of Circles
● Limiting Point ● Image of the Circle by the Line Mirror

Practice Part
● JEE Type Examples
● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Definition, Equation of Circle in Different Forms,
Locus of the Mid-point of the Chords of the Circle
that Subtends an Angle of 2q at its Centre
Definition Equation of Circle
A circle is the locus of a point which moves in a plane, so
that its distance from a fixed point in the plane is always
in Different Forms
constant. 1. Centre-radius form
The fixed point is called the centre of the circle and the Let a be the radius and C (h, k ) be the centre of any circle.
constant distance is called its radius. If P ( x , y ) be any point on the circumference.
Then, CP = a Þ (CP ) 2 = a 2
P Þ ( x - h ) 2 + (y - k ) 2 = a 2
fixed us
radi (moving point)
point This equation is known as the central form of the
C (centre) constant
equation of a circle.
distance
P (x, y)
a
i.e. CP = constant distance = Radius
C (h, k)
Equation of a Circle : The curve traced by the moving
point is called its circumference. i.e. the equation of any
circle is satisfied by co-ordinates of all points on its
circumference. Remark
OR When, C ( h, k ) = C ( 0, 0 ), then equation of circle becomes
The equation of the circle is meant the equation of the x 2 + y 2 = a2 which is known as standard form of the circle.
circumference.
OR 2. Parametric form
It is the set of all points lying on the circumference of the If the radius of a circle whose centre is at C (0, 0 ) makes an
circle. angle q with the positive direction of X-axis, then q is
called the parameter.
Chord and Diameter : The line joining any two points
on the circumference is called a chord. If any chord Let CP = a
passing through its centre is called its diameter. \ CM = x , PM = y Þ x = a cos q, y = a sinq
Y
Q

P(x,y)

C B a
θ
X′ X
C (0, 0) M
P
A

AB = Chord, PQ = Diameter
where, C is centre of the circle. Y′
 Chap 04 Circle 243

Hence, (a cos q, a sinq ) or ‘q’ are the parametric (ii) If g 2 + f 2 - c = 0, then the radius of circle will be real.
coordinates of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 and x = a cos q Hence in this case, circle is called a point circle.
(iii) If g 2 + f 2 - c < 0, then the radius of circle will be
and y = a sinq are called parametric equations of the
imaginary number. Hence in this case, circle is called a
circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 with parameters a and q. virtual circle or imaginary circle.
(0 £ q < 2 p ). 4. Concentric circle Two circles having the same centre
C ( h, k ) but different radii r1 and r2 respectively are called
concentric circles. Thus, the circles ( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = r12
Remarks and ( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = r22, r1 ¹ r2 are concentric circles.
1. The parametric coordinates of any point on the circle
Therefore, the equations of concentric circles differ only in
( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = a2 are given by ( h + a cos q, k + a sin q) constant terms.
( 0 £ q < 2p ) and parametric equations of the circle
( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = a2 are x = h + a cos q, y = k + a sinq. y Example 1. Find the centre and radius of the circle
2. Equation of the chord of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 joining 2x 2 + 2y 2 = 3x - 5 y + 7
( a cos a, a sin a) and ( a cos b , a sinb ) is
Sol. The given equation of circle is
a+ bö æ a + b ö = a cos æ a - b ö .
x cos æç ÷ + y sin ç ÷ ç ÷ 2x 2 + 2y 2 = 3x - 5y + 7
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø
3 5 7
General form The equation of the circle with centre or x2 + y2 - x + y - = 0
2 2 2
(h, k ) and radius a is ( x - h ) 2 + (y - k ) 2 = a 2 If centre is (a , b ), then
or x 2 + y 2 - 2hx - 2ky + h 2 + k 2 - a 2 = 0 …(i) 1 æ 3ö 3
a = - ç- ÷ =
2 è 2ø 4
which is of the form
1 æ5ö 5
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(ii) and b = - ç ÷= -
2 è2ø 4
This is known as the general equation of a circle æ3 5ö
comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get \ Centre of circle is (a , b ) i.e. ç , - ÷
è4 4ø
h = - g, k = - f and a = ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) and radius of the circle
= a 2 + b 2 - (constant term)
\ Coordinates of the centre are ( - g, - f ) and
9 25 7 9 + 25 + 56 3 10
= + + = =
Radius = ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) ( g 2 + f 2 ³ c ) 16 16 2 16 4
y Example 2. Prove that the radii of the circles
Remarks
1. Rule for finding the centre and radius of a circle
x 2 + y 2 = 1, x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 6 y = 6 and
(i) Make the coefficients of x 2 and y 2 equal to 1 and right x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 12 y = 9 are in AP.
hand side equal to zero.
Sol. Given circles are x2 + y2 = 1 ...(i)
(ii) Then, coordinates of centre will be ( a, b ),
2 2
1 1 x + y - 2x - 6y - 6 = 0 ...(ii)
where, a = - (coefficient of x) and b = - (coefficient of y)
2 2 and 2 2
x + y - 4 x - 12y - 9 = 0 ...(iii)
(iii) Radius = a2 + b 2 - (constant term)
Let r1, r2 and r3 be the radii of the circles Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii),
2. Conditions for a circle A general equation of second respectively.
degree Then, r1 = 1
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
r 2 = ( - 1) 2 + ( - 3) 2 + 6 = 4
in x, y represent a circle, if
(i) coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 and r 3 = ( - 2) 2 + ( - 6) 2 + 9 = 7
i.e. a= b
Clearly, r 2 - r1 = 4 - 1 = 3 = r 3 - r 2
(ii) coefficient of xy is zero
Hence, r1, r 2 , r 3 are in AP.
i.e. h=0
3. Nature of the circle Radius of the circle
y Example 3. Find the equation of the circle whose
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is ( g 2 + f 2 - c)
centre is the point of intersection of the lines
Now. the following cases are possible :
2x - 3y + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4 y - 5 = 0 and passes
(i) If g 2 + f 2 - c > 0, then the radius of circle will be real. Hence
in this case, real circle is possible. through the origin.
244 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Sol. The point of intersection of the lines 2x - 3y + 4 = 0 and 4 + 49 + 16 - 42 + l = 0

æ 1 22 ö \ l = -27
3x + 4y - 5 = 0 is ç - , ÷.
è 17 17 ø From Eq. (i), required circle is
æ 1 22 ö x 2 + y 2 - 8x + 6y - 27 = 0
Therefore, the centre of the circle is at ç - , ÷.
è 17 17 ø
y Example 5. A circle has radius 3 units and its centre
Since, the origin lies on the circle, its distance from the
centre of the circle is radius of the circle, therefore, lies on the line y = x - 1. Find the equation of the circle
2 2
if it passes through (7, 3).
æ 1 ö æ 22 ö 485
r = ç- - 0÷ + ç - 0÷ = Sol. Let the centre of the circle be (h, k). Since, the centre lies
è 17 ø è 17 ø 289 on y = x - 1, we get
\ The equation of the circle becomes k =h -1 ...(i)
2 2 Since, the circle passes through the point ( 7, 3), therefore
æ 1ö æ 22 ö 485
ç x + ÷ + çy - ÷ = the distance of the centre from this point is the radius r of
è 17 ø è 17 ø 289
the circle. We have,
or 17 ( x 2 + y 2 ) + 2x - 44y = 0 r = ( h - 7 ) 2 + ( k - 3) 2
Aliter : Q Point of intersection of the lines 2x - 3y + 4 = 0
æ 1 22 ö or 3 = ( h - 7 ) 2 + ( h - 1 - 3) 2 [from Eq. (i)]
and 3x + 4y - 5 = 0 is ç - , ÷. 2 2
è 17 17 ø Þ 9 = (h - 7 ) + (h - 4 )
æ 1 22 ö
Therefore, the centre of the circle is at ç - , ÷ Þ h 2 - 11h + 28 = 0
è 17 17 ø or (h - 7 ) (h - 4 ) = 0
Let required circle is or h = 7 and h = 4
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i) For h = 7, we get k = 6 from Eq. (i)
1 22 and for h = 4, we get k = 3, from Eq. (i).
Here, - g = - , -f = ,c = 0
17 17 Hence, there are two circles which satisfy the given
[Q Circle passes through origin] conditions. They are
2 2 2x 44 ( x - 7 ) 2 + ( y - 6) 2 = 9
From Eq. (i), x +y + - y =0
17 17 or x 2 + y 2 - 14 x - 12y + 76 = 0
or 17( x 2 + y 2 ) + 2x - 44y = 0 and ( x - 4 ) 2 + ( y - 3) 2 = 9
or x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 6y + 16 = 0
y Example 4. Find the equation of the circle
concentric with the circle x 2 + y 2 - 8 x + 6 y - 5 = 0 y Example 6. Find the area of an equilateral triangle
and passing through the point ( -2, - 7 ) . inscribed in the circle
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0.
Sol. The given equation of circle is
x 2 + y 2 - 8x + 6y - 5 = 0 Sol. Given circle is
Therefore, the centre of the circle is at ( 4, - 3). Since, the x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
required circle is concentric with this circle, therefore, the Let O be the centre and ABC be an equilateral triangle
centre of the required circle is also at ( 4, - 3). Since, the inscribed in the circle Eq. (i).
point ( -2, - 7 ) lies on the circle, the distance of the centre A
from this point is the radius of the circle. Therefore, we get
60°
r = ( 4 + 2)2 + ( -3 + 7 )2 = 52
Hence, the equation of the circle becomes
O
( x - 4 )2 + (y + 3)2 = 52
60°
or x 2 + y 2 - 8x + 6y - 27 = 0 B
M
C

Aliter : Equation of concentric circle is

x 2 + y 2 - 8x + 6y + l = 0 …(i) O º (-g, - f )
which pass through ( -2, - 7 ), then and OA = OB = OC = g 2 + f 2
-c ...(ii)
 Chap 04 Circle 245

In DBOM, sin60° =
BM
OB Locus of the Mid-point of
Þ BM = OB sin60° = (OB )
3 the Chords of the Circle that
\ BC = 2BM = 3 (OB )
2
...(iii)
Subtends an Angle of 2q at
\ Area of D ABC =
3
( BC )2
its Centre
4 Let mid-point M ( x 1 ,y 1 ) and centre, radius of circle are
3 (h,k ), r respectively, then
= 3 (OB )2 [from Eq. (iii)]
4
CM ( x 1 - h ) 2 + (y 1 - k ) 2
3 3 2 2
cos q = =
= (g + f - c ) sq units. r r
4
A
y Example 7. Find the parametric form of the equation
M
of the circle (x
1, y1 )
x 2 + y 2 + px + py = 0.
q
Sol. Equation of the circle can be re-written in the form q r
C (h , k ) B
2 2 2
æ pö æ pö p
ç x + ÷ + çy + ÷ =
è 2ø è 2ø 2
Therefore, the parametric form of the equation of the given
circle is
p p p ( x - h ) 2 + (y - k ) 2 - r 2
x=- + cos q = ( -1 + 2 cos q ) \ Required locus is = -sin2 q
2 2 2 2
r
p p p
and y=- + sin q = ( -1 + 2 sin q ) Remembering Method :
2 2 2
where, 0 £ q < 2p. First make coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 = 1
LHS of circle
y Example 8. If the parametric of form of a circle is and RHS of circle is zero, then = -sin2 q
(radius) 2
given by
(a) x = - 4 + 5 cosq and y = - 3 + 5 sin q y Example 9. Find the locus of mid-points of the
(b) x = a cosa + b sina and y = a sin a - b cos a chords of the circle 4 x 2 + 4 y 2 - 12x + 4 y + 1 = 0 that
find its cartesian form. 2p
Sol. (a) The given equations are
subtend an angle of at its centre.
3
x = - 4 + 5 cosq 2p p
and y = - 3 + 5 sinq Sol. Here, 2q = Þ q=
3 3
or ( x + 4 ) = 5 cos q …(i) Equation of circle can be written as
and (y + 3) = 5 sin q ...(ii) 1
x 2 + y 2 - 3x + y + = 0
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), then 4
( x + 4 ) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = 52 \Required locus is
or ( x + 4 )2 + (y + 3)2 = 25 1
x 2 + y 2 - 3x + y +
(b) The given equations are 4 = - sin 2 æç p ö÷ = - 3
2 è3ø
æ 9 1 1ö 4
x = a cos a + b sin a ...(iii) ç + - ÷
y = a sin a - b cos a ...(iv) è 4 4 4ø
Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), then 1 27
Þ x 2 + y 2 - 3x + y +=-
x 2 + y 2 = (a cos a + b sin a )2 + (a sin a - b cos a )2 4 16
2 2
Þ x 2 + y 2 = a2 + b2 or 16( x + y ) - 48x + 16y + 31 = 0
246 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 1

1. If x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2ay + a + 3 = 0 represents a real circle with non-zero radius, then most appropriate is
(a) a Î (- ¥, - 1) (b) a Î (-1, 2)
(c) a Î (2, ¥) (d) a Î (- ¥, - 1) È (2, ¥)

2. If the equation ax 2 + (2 - b )xy + 3y 2 - 6bx + 30y + 6b = 0 represents a circle, then a 2 + b 2 is

(a) 5 (b) 13
(c) 25 (d) 41

3. The equation of the circle passing through (4, 5) having the centre at (2, 2) is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 4y - 5 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 4y - 5 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 13 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 4y + 5 = 0

4. Equation of the diameter of the circle is given by x 2 + y 2 - 12x + 4y + 6 = 0 is given by

(a) x + y = 0 (b) x + 3y = 0
(c) x = y (d) 3x + 2y = 0

5. If the lines 3x - 4y + 4 = 0 and 6x - 8y - 7 = 0 are tangents to a circle, then the diameter of the circle is
3
(a) (b) 3
2
5
(c) (d) 5
2
p
6. Area of a circle in which a chord of length 2 makes an angle at the centre is
2
p p
(a) (b)
4 2
(c) p (d) 2p

7. The lines 2x - 3y - 5 = 0 and 3x - 4y = 7 are diameters of a circle of area 154 sq units, then the equation of the
circle is :
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 2y - 62 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 2y - 47 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y - 62 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y - 47 = 0

8. If the lines 2x + 3y + 1 = 0 and 3x - y - 4 = 0 lie along diameters of a circle of circumference 10p, then the
equation of the circle is
(a) x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y - 23 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 2y - 23 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 2y - 23 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 2y - 23 = 0

9. The triangle PQR is inscribed in the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25. If Q and R have coordinates (3, 4) and ( -4,3)
respectively, then ÐQPR is equal to
p p
(a) (b)
2 3
p p
(c) (d)
4 6

10. If a circle is concentric with the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 6y + 9 = 0 and passes through the point ( -4, - 5), then its
equation is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 6y - 87 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - 4x + 6y + 87 = 0
2 2
(c) x + y - 4x - 6y - 87 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 6y + 87 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 247

11. Let AB be a chord of the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 subtending a right angle at the centre. Then, the locus of the
centroid of the DPAB as P moves on the circle is
(a) a parabola (b) a circle
(c) an ellipse (d) a pair of straight lines

12. Let PQ and RS be tangents extremities of the diameter PR of a circle of radius r. If PS and RQ intersect at a
point X on the circumference of the circle, then 2r equals
PQ + RS
(a) PQ × RS (b)
2
2PQ.RS (PQ )2 + (RS )2
(c) (d)
PQ + RS 2

13. Find the centre and radius of the circle 5x 2 + 5y 2 + 4x - 8y = 16.

14. Prove that the centres of the circles x 2 + y 2 = 1, x 2 + y 2 + 6x - 2y - 1 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 12 x + 4y = 1 are

collinear.

15. Find the equation of the circle whose centre is (1, 2) and which passes through the point of intersection of
3x + y = 14 and 2x + 5y = 18.
16. Find the equation of the circle passing through the centre of the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 6y = 8 and being
concentric with the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 8y = 5 .
1 2
17. Prove that the locus of the centre of the circle ( x + y 2 ) + x cos q + y sin q - 4 = 0 is x 2 + y 2 = 1.
2

18. Find the equation of the following curves in cartesian form. If the curve is a circle, then find its centre and radius
x = - 1 + 2 cos a, y = 3 + 2 sin a (0 £ a < 2p )
Session 2
Diametric Form of a Circle, Equation of Circle
Passing Through Three Non-Collinear Points

Diametric Form of a Circle Sol. The centres of the given circles

Theorem : The equation of the circle on the line segment x 2 + y 2 + 6x - 14y - 1 = 0
joining ( x 1 , y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) as diameter is and x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 10y - 2 = 0 are ( - 3, 7 ) and (2, - 5),
( x - x 1 ) ( x - x 2 ) + (y - y 1 ) (y - y 2 ) = 0. respectively.
Proof : Let A ( x 1 , y 1 ) and B ( x 2 , y 2 ) be the end points of According to the question, the points ( -3, 7 ) and (2, - 5) are
the extremities of the diameter of required circle.
a diameter and let P ( x , y ) be any point on the circle
Hence, equation of circle is
Y
( x + 3) ( x - 2) + ( y - 7 ) ( y + 5) = 0
Þ x 2 + y 2 + x - 2y - 41 = 0
, y)
P (x y 2)
(x 2, y Example 11. The sides of a square are
90° B
x = 2, x = 3, y = 1 and y = 2 . Find the equation of the
,k )
C(h circle drawn on the diagonals of the square as its
diameter.
)A
, y1
(x 1 Sol. Let ABCD be a square and equation of its sides
X´ X
O
AB, BC , CD and DA are y = 1, x = 3, y = 2, and x = 2,
Y′ respectively.
y - y1 (2, 2) (3, 2)
Now, Slope of AP = D y=2 C
x - x1
y - y2
and Slope of BP =
x=2

x=3

x - x2
Since, Ð APB = 90°
\ Slope of AP ´ Slope of BP = -1 A y=1 B
(y - y 1 ) (y - y 2 ) (2, 1) (3, 1)
Þ ´ = -1
(x - x 1 ) (x - x 2 ) Then, A º (2, 1), B º (3, 1), C º (3, 2) and D º (2, 2)
Þ ( x - x 1 ) ( x - x 2 ) + (y - y 1 ) (y - y 2 ) = 0 Since, diagonals of squares are the diameters of the circle,
then equation of circle is
Remark ( x - 2) ( x - 3) + (y - 1)(y - 2) = 0
The diameteric form of a circle can also be written as Þ x 2 + y 2 - 5x - 3y + 8 = 0 (If AC as diameter).
x 2 + y 2 - x ( x1 + x 2 ) - y ( y1 + y2 ) + x1x 2 + y1 y2 = 0
y Example 12. The abscissae of two points A and B
or x 2 + y 2 - x (sum of abscissae) - y (sum of ordinates)
are the roots of the equation x 2 + 2ax - b 2 = 0 and
+ product of abscissae + product of ordinates = 0
their ordinates are the roots of the equation
y Example 10. Find the equation of the circle the end x 2 + 2px - q 2 = 0. Find the equation and the radius
points of whose diameter are the centres of the circles of the circle with AB as diameter.
x 2 + y 2 + 6 x - 14 y = 1 and x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 10y = 2. Sol. Given equations are
x 2 + 2ax - b 2 = 0 ...(i)
 Chap 04 Circle 249

and x 2 + 2px - q 2 = 0 ...(ii) x 2 + y 2 - x 23 - y 23 x -x3 y -y3

Let the roots of the Eq. (i) be a and b and those of Eq. (ii) be i.e. x 12 + y 12 - x 23 - y 23 x1 - x 3 y1 - y 3 = 0
g and d. Then,
x 22 + y 22 - x 23 - y 23 x2 - x 3 y2 - y 3
a + b = - 2a ü g + d = - 2p ü
ý and ý
a b = - b2þ gd = - q 2 þ
Remarks
Let A º (a , g ) and B º (b, d ) .
1. Cyclic quadrilateral If all four vertices of a quadrilateral lie
Now, equation of circle whose diameter is AB will be on a circle, then the quadrilateral is called a cyclic
( x - a ) ( x - b ) + (y - g ) (y - d ) = 0 quadrilateral. The four vertices are said to be concyclic.
Þ x 2 + y 2 - (a + b ) x - ( g + d ) y + ab + gd = 0 2. Concyclic points If A, B, C, D are concyclic, then
OA× OD = OB × OC
Þ x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + 2py - b 2 - q 2 = 0 where, O¢ be the centre of the circle.
and radius = (a 2 + p 2 + b 2 + q 2 ) A
B

O´
Equation of Circle Passing D
O

Through Three Non-Collinear C

y Example 13. Find the equation of the circle which

Points passes through the points (4, 1),(6, 5) and has its centre
Let the equation of circle be on the line 4 x + y = 16 .
Sol. Let the equation of circle be
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
If three points ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y 3 ) lie on the circle
Since, the centre of Eq. (i) i.e. ( - g , - f ) lies on 4 x + y = 16
Eq. (i), their coordinates must satisfy its equation. Hence,
then, - 4 g - f = 16
solving equations
or 4 g + f + 16 = 0 ...(ii)
x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = 0, ...(ii) Since, the points ( 4, 1) and (6, 5) lie on circle
x 22 + y 22 + 2 gx 2 + 2 fy 2 + c = 0, ...(iii) x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0, we get the equations
16 + 1 + 8g + 2 f + c = 0
and x 23 + y 23 +2 gx 3 + 2 fy 3 + c = 0, ...(iv)
or 17 + 8g + 2 f + c = 0 ...(iii)
g, f , c are obtained from Eqs. (ii), (iii) and (iv). Then, to and 36 + 25 + 12g + 10 f + c = 0
find the circle Eq. (i). or 61 + 12g + 10 f + c = 0 ...(iv)
Aliter : Eliminate g, f , c from Eqs. (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) Subtracting Eq. (iii) from Eq. (iv), then
with the help of determinant 44 + 4 g + 8 f = 0 ...(v)
Solving Eqs. (ii) and (v), we get
x2 +y2 x y 1
f = - 4 and g = - 3
x 12 + y 12 x1 y1 1
=0 Now, from Eq. (iii), 17 - 24 - 8 + c = 0
x 22 + y 22 x2 y2 1 Þ c = 15
x 23 + y 23 x3 y3 1 Hence, the equation of circle becomes
which is the required equation of circle x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 8y + 15 = 0

Applying R 1 ® R 1 - R 4 , R 2 ® R 2 - R 4 and R 3 ® R 3 - R 4 y Example 14. Find the equation of the circle passing
then, we get through the three non-collinear points (1, 1),(2, - 1) and
( 3, 2 ) .
x 2 + y 2 - x 23 - y 23 x -x3 y -y3 0
Sol. Let the equation of circle be
x 12 + y 12 - x 23 - y 23 x1 - x 3 y1 - y 3 0
=0 x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
x 22 + y 22 - x 23 - y 23 x2 - x 3 y2 - y 3 0
Since, the three given points lie on circle Eq. (i), we get
x 23 + y 23 x3 y3 1 1 + 1 + 2g + 2 f + c = 0
250 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

or 2g + 2 f + c + 2 = 0 ...(ii) Y
Þ 4 + 1 + 4g - 2f + c = 0
or 4g - 2f + c + 5 = 0 ...(iii) C(3,2)
Þ 9 + 4 + 6g + 4 f + c = 0
E
or 6g + 4 f + c + 13 = 0 ...(iv) (1, 1)
A
Subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (iii) and subtracting Eq. (iii)
from Eq. (iv), then O D
2g - 4 f + 3 = 0 ...(v) X´
O
X
and 2g + 6 f + 8 = 0 ...(vi) Y´
B(2,–1)
Solving Eq. (v) and Eq. (vi), we get
1 5 Let D and E are the mid-points of BC and CA, then
f =- and g = -
2 2 æ5 1ö æ 3ö
Now, from Eq. (ii), -5 - 1 + c + 2 = 0 D º ç , ÷ and E º ç2, ÷
è2 2ø è 2ø
\ c =4
2 - ( - 1)
Hence, from Eq. (i), equation of circle is Slope of BC = =3
3-2
x 2 + y 2 - 5x - y + 4 = 0
1
Aliter I Equation of circle passing through three points \ Slope of OD = -
3
(1, 1), (2, - 1) and (3, 2) is
1 1æ 5ö
x2 + y2 x y 1 \ Equation of OD, y - = - ç x - ÷
2 3 è 2ø
12 + 12 1 1 1
=0 Þ 6y - 3 = - 2x + 5
2 + ( - 1) 2
2
2 -1 1
\ 2x + 6y - 8 = 0 …(i)
32 + 22 3 2 1
or x + 3y - 4 = 0
x2 + y2 x y 1 1-2 1
and Slope of CA = =
Þ 2 1 1 1 =0 1-3 2
5 2 -1 1
\ Slope of OE = - 2
13 3 2 1
\ Equation of OE,
Applying R1 ® R1 - R 2 , R 3 ® R 3 - R 2 and R 4 ® R 4 - R 2 , 3
then y - = - 2 ( x - 2)
2
x2 +y2 -2 x -1 y -1 0
Þ 2y - 3 = - 4 x + 8
.
. Þ 4 x + 2y - 11 = 0 ...(ii)
.
2 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 5 1
Solving Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii), we get x = and y =
. 2 2
Þ . =0
. æ5 1ö
3 1 -2 0 \ Circumcentre is ç , ÷ and radius
è2 2ø
.
. 2 2
. æ 5ö æ 1ö 5
11 2 1 0 OC = ç3 - ÷ + ç2 - ÷ =
è 2ø è 2ø 2
Expand with respect to fourth column, then \ Equation of circle is
x2 + y2 - 2 x - 1 y - 1 ( x - 5 / 2) 2 + ( y - 1 / 2) 2 = 5 / 2
3 1 -2 =0
11 2 1 Þ x 2 + y 2 - 5x - y + 4 = 0

Expand with respect to first now, then y Example 15. Show that the four points
( x 2 + y 2 - 2)(5) - ( x - 1)(25) + (y - 1)( -5) = 0 (1, 0), (2, - 7 ), (8, 1) and (9, - 6 ) are concyclic.
or x 2 + y 2 - 5x - y + 4 = 0 Sol. Since, the given four points are concyclic, we are to show
that they lie on a circle. Let the general equation of circle
Aliter II The centre of the circumcircle is the point of is
intersection of the right bisectors of the sides of the triangle
and the radius is the distance of the circumcentre from any x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
of the vertices of the triangle.
 Chap 04 Circle 251

has three parameters, it is sufficient to obtain the equation Now, subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (iii), we get
of the circle passing through any three of these points. For 52 + 2g - 14 f = 0
concyclic, the fourth point should lie on this circle.
or 26 + g - 7 f = 0 ...(v)
Let three points A (1, 0), B (2, - 7 ) and D (8, 1) lie on Eq. (i),
then and subtracting Eq. (iii) from Eq. (iv), we get
1 + 0 + 2g + 0 + c = 0 or 1 + 2g + c = 0 ...(ii) 12 + 12g + 16 f = 0
Y Þ 3 + 3g + 4 f = 0 ...(vi)
Solving Eq. (v) and Eq. (vi), we get
D (8, 1)
X´ X g = - 5 and f = 3
O A (1, 0)
From Eq. (ii), 1 - 10 + c = 0
\ c =9
Therefore, equation of circle passing through these points is
Y´ C (9, –6)
B (2, –7)
x 2 + y 2 - 10x + 6y + 9 = 0
Substituting the fourth point in the equation of this circle,
( 2) 2 + ( - 7 ) 2 + 2g ( 2) + 2 f ( - 7 ) + c = 0 we get
or 53 + 4 g - 14 f + c = 0 …(iii) (9 )2 + ( -6)2 - 10 (9 ) + 6 ( -6) + 9 = 0
2 2
and ( 8) + ( 1) + 2g ( 8) + 2 f ( 1) + c = 0 Hence, the point C (9, - 6) lies on the circle, that is, the four
Þ 65 + 16g + 2 f + c = 0 …(iv) points are concyclic.

Exercise for Session 2

1. If the line x + 2ly + 7 = 0 is a diameter of the circle x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 2y = 0, then the value of l is
(a) 1 (b) 3
(c) 5 (d) 7

2. If one end of a diameter of the circle 2x 2 + 2y 2 - 4x - 8y + 2 = 0 is (-1, 2), then the other end of the diameter is
(a) (2, 1) (b) (3, 2)
(c) (4, 3) (d) (5, 4)

3. If a circle passes through the points (0,0), (a, 0) and (0, b ), then centre of the circle is
a b
(a) (a,b ) (b) æç , ö÷
è 2 2ø
a b a b
(c) æç , ö÷ (d) æç , ö÷
è 2 4ø è 4 2ø

4. A circle passes through the points ( -1, 3) and (5, 11) and its radius is 5. Then, its centre is
(a) (-5, 0) (b) (-5, 7)
(c) (2, 7) (d) (5, 0)

5. The radius of the circle, having centre at (2, 1) whose one of the chord is a diameter of the circle
x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 6y + 6 = 0 is
(a) 3 (b) 2
(c) 1 (d) 3

6. The centre of the circle inscribed in the square formed by the lines x 2 - 8x + 12 = 0 and y 2 - 14y + 45 = 0 is
(a) (4, 7) (b) (7, 4)
(c) (9, 4) (d) (4, 9)
252 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

7. ABCD is a square whose side is a. The equation of the circle circumscribing the square, taking AB and AD as
the axes of reference is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + ax + ay = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - ax + ay = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 - ax - ay = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + ax - ay = 0

8. The locus of the centre of the circle for which one end of the diameter is (3, 3) while the other end lies on the
line x + y = 4 is
(a) x + y = 3 (b) x + y = 5
(c) x + y = 7 (d) x + y = 9

9. The equation of the circle which passes through (1, 0) and (0, 1) and has its radius as small as possible is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + x + y = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - x + y = 0
2 2
(c) x + y + x - y = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 - x - y = 0

10. If the points (2, 0), (0, 1), (4,5) and (0, c ) are concyclic, then the value of c is
(a) 1 (b) -1
14 14
(c) (d) -
3 3

11. The point on a circle nearest to the point P(2,1) is at a distance of 4 units and farthest point is (6, 5), then the
centre of the circle is
(a) (3 + 2, 2 + 2) (b) (2 + 2, 3 + 2)
(c) (4 + 2, 3 + 2) (d) (3 + 2, 4 + 2)

12. The intercept on the line y = x by the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x = 0 is AB. Equation of the circle on AB as a diameter is
(a) x 2 + y 2 - x - y = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - x + y = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 + x + y = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + x - y = 0

13. Find the equation of the circle, the end points of whose diameter are (2, - 3) and ( -2, 4). Find the centre and
radius.

14. If (4, 1) be an extremity of a diameter of the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 6y - 15 = 0, find the coordinates of the other
extremity of the diameter.

15. Find the equation of the circle drawn on the diagonal of the rectangle as its diameter whose sides are
x = 4, x = - 2, y = 5 and y = - 2.
16. Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points (1, 1), (2, 2) and whose radius is 1.

17. Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points (3, 4), (3, - 6) and (1, 2).
Session 3
Intercepts Made on the Axes by a Circle, Different
Forms of the Equations of a Circle, Position of a Point
with Respect to Circle, Maximum and Minimum
Distance of a Point from the Circle

Intercepts Made on the Axes Remarks

by a Circle 1. Intercepts are always positive.
2. If circle touches X-axis, then| AB| = 0
Let the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) \ c = g2
and if circle touches Y-axis, then| CD| = 0
Length of intercepts on X-axis and Y-axis are
\ c = f2
| AB | = | x 2 - x 1 | and | CD | = | y 2 - y 1 | respectively. 3. If circle touches both axes, then| AB| = 0 =| CD|
Y \ c = g2 = f 2

(0, y2)D
y Example 16. Find the equation of the circle whose
diameter is the line joining the points ( -4 , 3) and
(12, - 1) . Find also the intercept made by it on Y-axis.
(0, y1)C Sol. Equation of circle having ( -4, 3) and (12, - 1) as the ends
X´ X
O A B of a diameter is
(x1, 0) (x2, 0)
Y´ ( x + 4 ) ( x - 12) + (y - 3) (y + 1) = 0
Þ x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 2y - 51 = 0 ...(i)
The circle intersects the X-axis, when y = 0
Comparing Eq. (i) with standard equation of circle
then x 2 + 2 gx + c = 0 x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
Since, the circle intersects the X-axis at A ( x 1 , 0 ) and then, g = - 4, f = - 1, c = - 51
B ( x 2 , 0) \ Intercept on Y-axis = 2 ( f 2
- c ) = 2 (1 + 51) = 4 13.
then, x 1 + x 2 = - 2 g, x 1 x 2 = c
\ | AB | = | x 2 - x 1 | = ( x 2 + x 1 ) 2 - 4 x 1 x 2

= 2 (g 2 - c )
Different Forms of the
and the circle intersects the Y-axis, when x = 0, then
Equations of a Circle
(i) When the circle passes through the origin
y 2 + 2 fy + c = 0
(0, 0) and has intercepts 2a and 2b on the
Since, the circle intersects the Y-axis at C (0, y 1 ) and
X-axis and Y -axis, respectively
D (0, y 2 )
Here, OA = 2a, OB = 2b
then, y 1 + y 2 = - 2 f , y 1y 2 = c
then, OM = a and ON = b
\ | CD | = | y 2 - y 1 | = (y 2 + y 1 ) 2 - 4y 2 y 1
Centre of the circle is C(a, b) and radius
= 2 (f 2 - c) OC = (a 2 + b2 )
254 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y Remark
If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches the Y-axis, then
B
| - g| = g 2 + f 2 - c

C (α, β) or c = f2
N
β (iv) When the circle touches both axes
O α M X Here, | OM | = | ON |
A
Since, length of tangents are equal from any point on
then, equation of circle is circle.
( x - a ) 2 + (y - b) 2 = a 2 + b2 Y

or x 2 + y 2 - 2ax - 2by = 0
Remark α C (α, α)
If a circle is passing through origin, then constant term is absent N
i.e. x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0 α

X
(ii) When the circle touches X-axis O M
Let (a, b) be the centre of the circle, then radius =| b |
\ Let centre is (a, a ) also radius = a
\ Equation of circle is
\ Equation of circle is ( x - a ) 2 + (y - a ) 2 = a 2
( x - a ) 2 + (y - b) 2 = b2
Y Þ x 2 + y 2 - 2ax - 2ay + a 2 = 0

Remarks
1. If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches both the axes,
C (α, β)
then |- g| =| - f| = g 2 + f 2 - c
β
\ c = g2 = f 2
X \ g=f =± c
O M
\ Equation of circle is
x 2 + y2 ± 2 c x ± 2 c y + c = 0
Þ x 2 + y 2 - 2ax - 2by + a 2 = 0
Þ (x ± c )2 + ( y ± c )2 = c 2
Remark 2. If a > 0, then centres for I, II, III and IV quadrants are
If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches the X-axis, then ( a, a),( - a, a),( - a, - a) and ( a, - a), respectively.
| - f| = g2 + f 2 - c or c = g2 Then, equation of circles in these quadrants are
( x - a) 2 + ( y - a) 2 = a2, ( x + a) 2 + ( y - a) 2 = a2,
(iii)When the circle touches Y-axis
( x + a) 2 + ( y + a) 2 = a2 and ( x - a) 2 + ( y + a) 2 = a2,
Let (a, b) be the centre of the circle, then
respectively.
radius = | a |
Y (v) When the circle touches X-axis and cut-off
intercepts on Y-axis of length 2l
Let centre be (a, b)
N α C (α, β) Y

P
X l
O α
C (α, β)
M
\ Equation of circle is l β
β
2 2 2
( x - a ) + (y - b) = a Q
α X
Þ x + y 2 - 2ax - 2by + b2 = 0
2 O N
 Chap 04 Circle 255

\ radius = b Let centre be (a, b)

CQ = CN = b Y

In DCMQ, b2 = a 2 + l 2 , a = (b2 - l 2 ) (for I quadrant)

\ Equation of circle is k
α
N C (α, β)
[ x - (b2 - l 2 ) ]2 + (y - b) 2 = b2
k
β
Remark P
l l
Q Length of intercepts on Y-axis of the circle M X
O Q
2 2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is 2l = 2 ( f - c )
i.e. l2 = f 2 - c \ radius = CP = CQ = l (say)
2 2 2
and also circle touches X-axis (CP ) = (CQ ) = l
then, c = g2
a + k 2 = b2 + l 2 = l2
2
\ l 2 = f 2 - g 2 or l 2 = ( - f ) 2 - ( - g ) 2
\ Locus of centre is y 2 - x 2 = l 2 (rectangular hyperbola) \ a = l2 - k 2 and b = l2 - l 2
(vi) When the circle touches Y-axis and cut-off \ Equation of circle is (for I quadrant)
intercept on X-axis of length 2k
( x - l - k ) + (y - l - l 2 ) 2 = l2
2 2 2 2
Let centre be (a, b)
Y
(viii) When the circle passes through the origin
and centre lies on X-axis
Let centre of circle be C (a, 0 )
Y
α
N C (α, β)
α β

X
O Q k M k
C
X
\ radius = a O (a, 0)

CN = CQ = a
In DCMQ, a 2 = b2 + k 2
\ radius = a
b = (a 2 - k 2 ) (for I quadrant)
\ Equation of circle is
\ Equation of circle is ( x - a ) 2 + (y - 0 ) 2 = a 2 or x 2 + y 2 - 2ax = 0
2 2 2 2 2
( x - a ) + (y - a - k ) = a (ix) When the circle passes through origin and
centre lies on Y-axis
Remarks
Q Length of intercept on X-axis of the circle
Let centre of circle be C (0, a )
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is 2k = 2 ( g - c ) 2 Y
2 2
i.e. k =g -c
and also circle touches Y-axis
then, c = f2
\ k 2 = g 2 - f 2 = ( - g )2 - ( - f )2 C (0, a)
2 2 2
\ Locus of centre is x - y = k (rectangular hyperbola)

(vii)When the circle cut-off intercepts on X-axis

X
and Y-axis of lengths 2l and 2k and not O
passing through origin
256 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ radius = a From Eq. (i), the equation of circle can be written as

\ Equation of circle is x 2 + y 2 ± 2 (c + 9 ) x ± 2 cy + c = 0

( x - 0 ) 2 + (y - a ) 2 = a 2 The circle touches the Y-axis

\ x =0
or x 2 + y 2 - 2ay = 0 \ y 2 ± 2 cy + c = 0
y Example 17. Find the equation of the circle which or (y ± c )2 = 0
touches the axis of y at a distance of 4 units from the \ y ± c =0
origin and cuts the intercept of 6 units from the axis y=m c
of x.
Since, the circle touches the Y-axis at a distance of 4 units
Sol. Q CM = NO = 4 from the origin, we have
In DPCM, ( PC )2 = (3)2 + ( 4 )2 y=m c =4
\ PC = 5 or c = 16
radius of circle = 5 therefore, f =± c =±4
\ NC = 5 and g = ± c + 9 = ± 16 + 9 = ± 5
Centre of circle is (5, 4 ).
Hence, there are 4 circles which satisfy the given
Y
conditions. They are
x 2 + y 2 ± 10x ± 8y + 16 = 0

y Example 18. Find the equation of the circle which

N 5 C (5, 4) passes through the origin and makes intercepts of
4 4 length a and b on the X and Y axes, respectively.
5
X´
3 M 3 X Sol. Let the equation of the circle be
O P Q
Y´ x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)

\ Equation of circle, if centre in I quadrant Since, the circle passes through the origin, we get c = 0 and
given the intercepts on X and Y axes are a and b
( x - 5)2 + (y - 4 )2 = 25
then, 2 ( g 2 - c ) = a
If centre in II, III and IV quadrant, then equations are
( x + 5)2 + (y - 4 )2 = 25, or 2 ( g 2 - 0) = a
2 2
( x + 5) + (y + 4 ) = 25 \ g = ± a /2
2 2
and ( x - 5) + (y + 4 ) = 25 and 2 (f 2
- c) = b
Hence, there are 4 circles which satisfy the given
2
conditions. They are or 2 (f - 0) = b
( x ± 5)2 + (y ± 4 )2 = 25 \ f = ± b /2
2 2
or x + y ± 10x ± 8y + 16 = 0 Hence, the equation of circle from Eq. (i) becomes
Aliter : Let the equation of the circle be x 2 + y 2 ± ax ± by = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
Since, the circle touches the Y-axis
y Example 19. Find the equation of the circle which
touches the axes and whose centre lies on the line
\ c =f2
x - 2y = 3 .
or f =± c
Sol. Since, the circle touches both the axes, let the radius of
Also given the circle makes an intercept of 6 units along the circle by a, then
X-axis. Therefore,
Case I If centre (a, a ) but given centre lies on
2 g2 - c = 6 x - 2y = 3
or g2 - c = 9 \ a - 2a = 3
\ a= -3
or g = ± (c + 9 )
\ Centre = ( -3, - 3)
 Chap 04 Circle 257

and radius = | - 3 | = 3 Case II If centre = (a , - a )

Y Since, centre lies on x - 2y = 3
\ a + 2a = 3
(– a, a) (a , a ) \ a=1
a a \ Centre of circle is (1, - 1) and radius = | 1 | = 1
a a Hence, equation of circle will be
X´ X
a
O
a ( x - 1) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 1
a a or x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y + 1 = 0
(– a, –a) ( a, –a)
Aliter II : Let the equation of circle is
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
Y´
centre = ( - g , - f )
\Equation of circle is
Since, centre ( - g , - f ) lies on x - 2y = 3
( x + 3) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = 32
or -g + 2f = 3 ...(ii)
and x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 6y + 9 = 0 Since, circle touches both axes
Case II If centre ( -a, a ) but centre lies on x - 2y = 3 \ g2 = f 2
= c or g = ± f
\ -a - 2a = 3
if g = f , then from Eq. (ii), - f + 2 f = 3
\ a= -1
\ f = 3 and g = 3
then, centre = (1, - 1) and radius = | - 1 | = 1
2
\ Equation of circle is ( x - 1)2 + (y + 1)2 = 1
but c =f = g2 = 9
\ Equation of circle from Eq. (i) is
or x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y + 1 = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 6y + 9 = 0
Case III If the centre = ( -a , - a )
but centre lies on x - 2y = 3 and if g = - f , then from Eq. (ii)
\ - a + 2a = 3 f + 2f = 3
\ a=3 \ f = 1 and g = - 1
then centre ( -3, - 3) and radius = | 3 | = 3 but c = g2 = f 2
=1
\ Equation of circle is \ Equation of circle from Eq. (i) is
( x + 3) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = 32 x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y + 1 = 0
or x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 6y + 9 = 0 Aliter III : Since, centre of circle lies on x - 2y = 3, also
Case IV If centre = (a , - a ) but centre lies on x - 2y = 3 since circle touches the axes, therefore, its centre will lie on
or a + 2a = 3 the line y = x or y = - x
\ a=1 Case I When the centre lies on the line y = x
then centre = (1, - 1) and radius = 1 but x - 2y = 3
\ Equation of circle is or x - 2x = 3
( x - 1) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 1 \ x = -3=y
or x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y + 1 = 0 Hence, the centre = ( -3, - 3) and radius = | - 3 | = 3
Aliter I : Since, the circle touches both the axes, therefore Therefore, the equation of circle in this case will be
its centre will be (a , ± a ) and radius will be | a |, where a is ( x + 3) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = 32
positive or negative number. or x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 6y + 9 = 0
Case I If centre = (a , a )
Case II When the centre lies on the line y = - x
Since, centre lies on x - 2y = 3
but x - 2y = 3
\ a - 2a = 3
or x + 2x = 3
a= -3
\ x = 1 then y = - 1
\ Centre of circle is ( -3, - 3) and radius = | - 3 | = 3.
\Centre of circle (1, - 1) and radius is | 1 | = 1
Hence, equation of circle will be
Hence, equation of circle will be
( x + 3) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = 32 ( x - 1) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 1
or x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 6y + 9 = 0 or x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y + 1 = 0
258 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 20. A circle of radius 2 lies in the first

quadrant and touches both the axes of coordinates.
Position of a Point with
Find the equation of the circle with centre at (6, 5) and Respect to Circle
touching the above circle externally.
Theorem : A point ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on or inside a
Sol. Given, AC = 2 units circle
and A º (2, 2), B º (6, 5) S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
then AB = (2 - 6)2 + (2 - 5)2 according as S 1 > , =, or < 0
= 16 + 9 = 5 where, S 1 = x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c .
Y
Proof : Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the given point and let C be the
centre of the circle
Then, C º ( -g, - f )
B (6, 5)
r
\ CP = ( x 1 + g ) 2 + (y 1 + f ) 2
2 C
A
(2, 2)
If r be the radius of the circle, then
X´ X
O r = (g 2 + f 2 - c )
Y´
The point P lies outside, on or inside the circle according
Since AC + CB = AB
as
\ 2 + CB = 5
\ CB = 3
CP >, = , or < r
Hence, equation of required circle with centre at (6, 5) and Þ (CP ) 2 >, =, or <r2
radius 3 is
Þ ( x 1 + g ) 2 + (y 1 + f ) 2 >, =, or < g2 + f 2 - c
( x - 6) 2 + ( y - 5) 2 = 32
or x 2 + y 2 - 12x - 10y + 52 = 0 Þ x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c >, =, or <0
Þ S 1 >, =, or <0
y Example 21. A circle of radius 5 units touches the
where, S 1 = x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c .
coordinate axes in first quadrant. If the circle makes
one complete roll on X-axis along the positive direction y Example 22. Discuss the position of the points (1, 2)
of X-axis, find its equation in the new position.
and (6, 0) with respect to the circle
Sol. Let C be the centre of the circle in its initial position and
x 2 + y 2 - 4x + 2 y - 11 = 0.
D be its centre in the new position.
Y Sol. Let S º x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 2y - 11 = 0 for the point (1, 2)
S1 = 12 + 22 - 4 × 1 + 2 × 2 - 11 = - 6
5 C (5, 5) D (5+10 π, 5)
N \ S1 < 0
5 5
and for the point (6, 0)
X´
O M L
X S 2 = 62 + 0 - 4 × 6 + 2 × 0 - 11
5 10 π = 36 - 24 - 11
Y´
= 36 - 35 = 1
Since, the circle touches the coordinates axes in first \ S2 > 0
quadrant and the radius of circle be 5 units. Hence, the point (1, 2) lies inside the circle and the point
\Centre of circle is (5, 5) (6, 0) lies outside the circle.
Moving length of circle = circumference of the circle
= 2pr = 2p (5) = 10p
y Example 23. The circle x 2 + y 2 - 6 x - 10y + l = 0
Now, centre of circle in new position is (5 + 10p, 5) and does not touch or intersect the coordinate axes and
radius is 5 units, therefore, its equation will be the point (1, 4) is inside the circle. Find the range of
( x - 5 - 10p )2 + (y - 5)2 = 52 values of l.
or x 2 + y 2 - 10 (1 + 2p ) x - 10y + 100p 2 + 100p + 25 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 259

Sol. Let S º x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 10y + l = 0 and the maximum distance of P from circle = PB

Q Point (1, 4) is inside the circle, then S1 < 0 = CB + CP = r + CP
Y Case II If P outside the circle
In this case S 1 > 0 the minimum distance of P from
circle
C (3, 5) = PA = CP - CA =CP - r
L r
r and the maximum distance of P from the circle
X′ X = PB = CP + CB = r + CP
O M
P
Y′
1 + 16 - 6 - 40 + l < 0 A
Þ l < 29 …(i)
Centre and radius of the circle are (3, 5) and (34 - l ), C
respectively.
B
Q Circle does not touch or intersect the coordinate axes.
\ 5 > r and 3 > r
or 5 > (34 - l ) and 3 > (34 - l ) Case III If P on the circle
Þ 25 > 34 - l and 9 > 34 - l In this case S 1 = 0
Þ l > 9 and l > 25 the minimum distance of P from the circle = 0
\ l > 25 …(ii) and the maximum distance of P from the circle
Also, 34 - l > 0
= PA = 2r
\ l < 34 …(iii)
From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get 25 < l < 29
P

Maximum and Minimum C

Distance of a Point from A

the Circle
Let any point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and circle Remark
If point P inside or outside or on the circle and centre of circle at
S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) C and radius r, then minimum distance of P from the circle
=|CP - r| and maximum distance of P from the circle = CP + r
The centre and radius of the circle are
C ( -g, - f ) and ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) respectively y Example 24. Find the shortest and largest
distance from the point (2, - 7 ) to the circle
Case I If P inside the circle
In this case S 1 < 0 x 2 + y 2 - 14 x - 10y - 151 = 0
Sol. Let S º x 2 + y 2 - 14 x - 10y - 151 = 0
Q r = ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) = CA = CB
\ S1 = (2)2 + ( -7 )2 - 14 (2) - 10 ( -7 ) - 151 = - 56 < 0
Y
B
A

P
C

B C (7, 5)

X′ X
O
P
The minimum distance of P from circle = PA = CA - CP
A
= r - CP Y′
260 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ P (2, - 7 ) inside the circle For the point P

2 2
radius of the circle, r = ( -7 ) + ( -5) + 151 = 15 S1 = 25 + 36 + 10 + 24 - 20
= 75 > 0
Q Centre of circle C º (7, 5)
\Point P( -5,6) lies outside the circle.
\ CP = (7 - 2)2 + (5 + 7 )2 = 13 The centre and radius of the circle are (1, - 2) and 5,
\ Shortest distance = PA = r - CP = 15 - 13 = 2 respectively.
and Largest distance = PB = r + CP = 15 + 13 = 28 Q CP = (1 + 5)2 + ( -2 - 6)2 = 10

y Example 25. Find the points on the circle Now, point A divides CP in the ratio
x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4 y - 20 = 0 which are farthest and AP CP - r 10 - 5
= = =1
AC r 5
nearest to the point ( -5,6 ).
\A is mid-point of CP.
Sol. The given circle is S º x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4y - 20 = 0
æ 1 - 5 -2 + 6 ö
Let P º ( -5,6) \ Aºç , ÷
è 2 2 ø

P
or A º ( -2,2)
and C is the mid-point of AB.
A
r \ B º (2 ´ 1 - ( -2),2 ´ -2 - 2)
C r or B º ( 4, - 6)
Hence, point A( -2,2) is nearest to P and B ( 4, - 6) is farthest
B
from P.

Exercise for Session 3

1. The length of intercept, the circle x 2 + y 2 + 10x - 6y + 9 = 0 makes on the X-axis is
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8

2. 2 2
The circle x + y + 4x - 7y + 12 = 0 cuts an intercept on Y-axis is of length
(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 7

3. The locus of the centre of a circle which passes through the origin and cuts-off a length 2b from the line x = c is
(a) y 2 + 2cx = b 2 + c 2 (b) x 2 + cx = b 2 + c 2 (c) y 2 + 2cy = b 2 + c 2 (d) x 2 + cy = b 2 + c 2

4. If a straight line through C( - 8, 8 ) making an angle of 135° with the X-axis cuts the circle x = 5cos q, y = 5sin q
at points A and B, then the length of AB is
(a) 3 (b) 5 (c) 8 (d) 10

5. If a circle of constant radius 3k passes through the origin and meets the axes at A and B, the locus of the
centroid of DOAB is
(a) x 2 + y 2 = k 2 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 2k 2 (c) x 2 + y 2 = 3k 2 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 4k 2

6. The centre of the circle touching Y-axis at (0, 3) and making an intercept of 2 units on positive X-axis is
(a) (10, 3 ) (b) ( 3, 10) (c) ( 10, 3) (d) (3, 10 )

7. A circle passes through the points A(1, 0) and B(5,0) and touches the Y-axis at C(0, l ). If ÐACB is maximum,
then
(a) |l |= 5 (b) |l |= 2 5 (c) |l |= 3 5 (d) |l |= 4 5
 Chap 04 Circle 261

8. The equation of a circle whose centre is (3, - 1) and which intercept chord of 6 units length on straight line
2x - 5y + 18 = 0 is
(a) x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 2y - 28 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 6x - 2y - 28 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 4x - 2y + 24 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 2y - 12 = 0

9. The locus of the centre of a circle which touches externally the circle x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 6y + 14 = 0 and also
touches the Y-axis, is given by the equation
(a) x 2 - 6x - 10y + 14 = 0 (b) x 2 - 10x - 6y + 14 = 0
(c) y 2 - 6x - 10y + 14 = 0 (d) y 2 - 10x - 6y + 14 = 0

10. The locus of the centre of a circle of radius 2 which rolls on the outside of circle x 2 + y 2 + 3x - 6y - 9 = 0 is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 3x - 6y + 5 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 3x - 6y - 31 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 3x - 6y + 11 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + 3x - 6y - 36 = 0

11. The point ([ l + 1],[ l ]) is lying inside the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 15 = 0. Then, the set of all values of l is (where [.]
represents the greatest integer function)
(a) [-2, 3] (b) (-2, 3) (c) [-2, 0) È (0, 3) (d) [0, 3)

12. The greatest distance of the point (10, 7) from the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 2y - 20 = 0 is
(a) 5 (b) 10 (c) 15 (d) 20

13. Find equations to the circles touching Y-axis at (0, 3) and making intercept of 8 units on the X-axis.

14. Show that the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2ax - 2ay + a 2 = 0 touches both the coordinate axes.

15. If the point ( l, - l) lies inside the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x + 2y - 8 = 0, then find range of l.

16. Find the equation of the circle which passes through the origin and cuts-off chords of lengths 4 and 6 on the
positive side of the X-axis and Y-axis, respectively.
Session 4
Intersection of a Line and a Circle, Product of the
Algebraical Distances PA and PB is Constant when X′

from P, A Secant be Drawn to Cut the Circle in the

Points A and B, The Length of Intercept Cut-off from
a Line by a Circle, Tangent to a Circle at a Given Point,
Normal to a Circle at a Given Point

Intersection of a from (0, 0 ) to y = mx + c

Line and a Circle Þ a > length of perpendicular from (0, 0 ) to y = mx + c
Thus, a line intersects a given circle at two distinct points
Let the equation of the circle be
if radius of circle is greater than the length of
x 2 + y 2 = a2 ...(i) perpendicular from centre of the circle to the line.
and the equation of the line be Case II When the points of intersection are coincident,
y = mx + c ...(ii) then Eq. (iii) has two equal roots
From Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii)
x 2 + (mx + c ) 2 = a 2
M
or (1 + m 2 ) x 2 + 2mcx + c 2 - a 2 = 0 ...(iii) y = mx + c

Case I When points of intersection are real and distinct, a

then Eq. (iii) has two distinct roots.
O
(0, 0)

y=
O
mx
+c \ B 2 - 4 AC = 0
(0, 0)
Þ 4m 2 c 2 - 4 (1 + m 2 ) (c 2 - a 2 ) = 0
c2
\ a2 =
2
(1 + m 2 )
\ B - 4 AC > 0
|c |
or a=
or 4m c - 4 (1 + m ) (c 2 - a 2 ) > 0
2 2 2
(1 + m 2 )
2
c
or a2 > a = length of the perpendicular from the point (0, 0 ) to
1 +m2 y = mx + c
|c | Thus, a line touches the circle if radius of circle is equal to
or a> = length of perpendicular
(1 + m 2 ) the length of perpendicular from centre of the circle to the
line.
 Chap 04 Circle 263

Case III When the points of intersection are imaginary.

In this case (iii) has imaginary roots Product of the Algebraical
Distances PA and PB is
M
y = mx + c
Constant when from P, A
Secant be Drawn to Cut the
Circle in the Points A and B
O
(0, 0)
If a straight line through P (a, b) makes an angle q with
the positive direction of X-axis, then its equation is
x -a y -b
= =r
cos q sin q
\ B 2 - 4 AC < 0
B
4m 2 c 2 - 4 (1 + m 2 ) (c 2 - a 2 ) = 0
c2
\ a2 <
1 +m2 A

|c |
or a < = length of perpendicular from (0, 0 ) to
θ
1 +m2 P
(α, β)
y = mx + c
where, r is the algebraical distance of the point ( x , y ) from
or a < length of perpendicular from (0, 0 ) to y = mx + c
the point P (a, b) .
Thus, a line does not intersect a circle if the radius of
\ ( x , y ) = (a + r cos q, b + r sinq )
circle is less than the length of perpendicular from centre
of the circle to the line. If this point lies on the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
or (a + r cos q ) 2 + (b + r sinq ) 2 + 2g (a + r cos q )
y Example 26. Find the points of intersection of the
+ 2 f (b + r sinq ) + c = 0
line 2x + 3y = 18 and the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25. 2
Þ r + 2r (a cos q + b sinq + g cos q + f sinq )
Sol. We have, 2x + 3y = 18 ....(i) + (a 2 + b2 + 2 ga + 2 f b + c ) = 0
2 2
and x + y = 25 ...(ii) This is quadratic equation in r, then PA and PB are the
18 - 2x roots of this equation.
From Eq. (i), y=
3 \ PA × PB = a 2 + b2 + 2 ga + 2 f b + c = constant
2
æ 18 - 2x ö
Substituting in Eq. (ii), then x 2 + ç ÷ = 25 Since, RHS is independent of q .
è 3 ø
Þ 9 x 2 + 4 (9 - x )2 = 225 Remark
Secants are drawn from a given point Ato cut a given circle at the
Þ 9 x 2 + 4 (81 - 18x + x 2 ) = 225 pairs of points P1, Q1 ; P2, Q2;...; Pn, Qn , then
Þ 13x 2 - 72x + 324 - 225 = 0 AP1 × AQ1 = AP2 × AQ2 = K = APn × AQn

Þ 13x 2 - 72x + 99 = 0
Þ ( x - 3) (13x - 33) = 0 The Length of Intercept
Þ x = 3 or x =
33
13
Cut-off from a Line by a Circle
56 Theorem : The length of the intercept cut-off from the
From Eq. (i), y = 4 or y =
13 line y = mx + c by the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
Hence, the points of intersection of the given line and the
æ 33 56 ö ìa 2 (1 + m 2 ) - c 2 ü
given circle are (3, 4 ) and ç , ÷. 2 í ý
è 13 13 ø î (1 + m 2 ) þ
264 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Proof : Draw OM perpendicular to PQ 4 x - 3y - 10 = 0

| 4 ´ 1 - 3 ´ ( -2) - 10 |
Now, OM = length of perpendicular from O (0, 0 ) to then OM = =0
|c | 4 2 + ( - 3) 2
(y = mx + c ) =
Hence, line 4 x - 3y - 10 = 0 passes through the centre of the
(1 + m 2 ) circle.
and OP = radius of the circle = a Hence, intercepted length = diameter of the circle
= 2 ´ 5 = 10
P
y=
m
M x+c y Example 28. Find the coordinates of the middle point
of the chord which the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 2y - 3 = 0
Q
cuts-off the line x - y + 2 = 0.
O
(0, 0) Sol. Centre and radius of the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 2y - 3 = 0
are ( -2, 1) and 4 + 1 + 3 = 2 2 respectively.
x–y+2=0
2 2
In DOPM, PM = (OP ) - (OM ) Q
2 2 2 2ü O (–2, 1)
c ìa (1 + m ) - c
= a2 - = í ý
2
(1 + m ) î 1 +m2 þ
M

ìa 2 (1 + m 2 ) - c 2 ü
\ PQ = 2 PM = 2 í ý P
î 1 +m2 þ
Draw perpendicular from O upon x - y + 2 = 0 is OM.
Remarks Equation of OM which is perpendicular to x - y + 2 = 0 is
1. If the line y = mx + c touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2, then x + y = l, it passes through ( -2, 1)
intercepted length is zero Then, -2 + 1 = l
2 2 2 \ l = -1
ïì a ( 1 + m ) - c ïü
i.e. PQ = 0 Þ2 í 2 ý=0
ïî 1+ m ïþ then equation of OM is x + y + 1 = 0
Since, M is the mid-point of PQ which is point of
\ c 2 = a2 ( 1 + m2 )
intersection of x - y + 2 = 0 and x + y + 1 = 0, coordinates of
which is the required condition for tangency. æ 3 1ö
M is ç - , ÷.
2. If a line touches the circle, then length of perpendicular è 2 2ø
from the centre upon the line is equal to the radius of the
circle. Aliter : Let M º (a , b ), then
a +2 b -1 ( - 2 - 1 + 2)
= =-
y Example 27. Find the length of the intercept on 1 -1 1+1
the straight line 4 x - 3y - 10 = 0 by the circle (Here, M is foot of perpendicular)
2 2 a +2 b -1 1
x + y - 2x + 4 y - 20 = 0. Þ = =
2 2
1 -1 2
Sol. Centre and radius of the circle x + y - 2x + 4y - 20 = 0 3 1
are (1, - 2) and 1 + 4 + 20 = 5 respectively. or a = - and b =
2 2
æ 3 1ö
\ M º ç- , ÷
è 2 2ø

O (1, – 2) y Example 29. For what value of l will the line

y = 2x + l be a tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 5 ?
=0
10

Sol. Comparing the given line with y = mx + c , we get

y–
–3

m = 2 , c = l and given circle with x 2 + y 2 = a 2

4x

then a2 = 5
Let OM be the perpendicular from O on the line
 Chap 04 Circle 265

Q Condition for tangency is Different forms of the equations of tangents

c 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 )
Þ l 2 = 5 (1 + 4 )
1. Point form :
Theorem : The equation of tangent at the point P ( x 1 , y 1 )
l 2 = 25
to a circle
\ l = ±5
Aliter : Since, line y = 2x + l x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 is
or 2x - y + l = 0 xx 1 + yy 1 + g ( x + x 1 ) + f (y + y 1 ) + c = 0
is the tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 5 then length of Proof : Since, P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be a point on the circle
perpendicular from centre upon the line is equal to the
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
radius of the circle
Let Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) be any other point on the circle Eq. (i). Since,
points P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) lie on the circle, therefore
P (x1 , y )
1
C (0, 0) T
5

C
y = 2x + λ (–g, –f )

Q (x2 , y
2)
\ | CM | = 5
|0 - 0 + l | x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = 0 ...(ii)
or = 5
4 +1 and x 22 + y 22 + 2 gx 2 + 2 fy 2 + c = 0 ...(iii)
|l|
Þ = 5 On subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (iii), we have
5
( x 22 - x 12 ) + (y 22 - y 12 ) + 2 g
Þ |l|=5
or l = ±5 ( x 2 - x 1 ) + 2 f (y 2 - y 1 ) = 0
Þ ( x 2 - x 1 ) ( x 2 + x 1 + 2 g ) + (y 2 - y 1 )

Tangent to a Circle at a (y 2 + y 1 + 2 f ) = 0

Given Point Þ
æ y2 - y1 ö
ç
æ x 1 + x 2 + 2g ö
÷ =-ç
è x2 - x1 ø è y1 + y2 + 2f ø
÷ ...(iv)
Let PQ be a chord and AB be a secant passing through P.
Let P be the fixed point and move along the circle towards Now, the equation of the chord PQ is
P, then the secant PQ turns about P. In the limit, when Q æ y - y1 ö
y - y1 = ç 2 ÷ (x - x 1 ) ...(v)
coincides with P, then the secant AB becomes a tangent to è x2 - x1 ø
the circle at the point P.
æ y - y1 ö
A Putting the value of ç 2 ÷ from Eq. (iv) in Eq. (v),
è x2 - x1 ø
P
then equation PQ becomes
A B
Q3 æ x + x 2 + 2g ö
y - y1 = - ç 1 ÷ (x - x 1 ) ...(vi)
Q2 è y1 + y2 + 2f ø
O Q1 Now, when Q ® P (along the circle), line PQ becomes
Q tangent at P, we have x 2 ® x 1 , y 2 ® y 1 . So, the equation
of tangent at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is :
B
266 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

æ x + x 1 + 2g ö Remarks
y - y1 = - ç 1 ÷ (x - x 1 ) 1. For equation of tangent of circle at ( x1, y1 ), substitute xx1 for
è y1 + y1 + 2f ø x + x1 y + y1 xy + x1 y
x 2, yy1 for y 2, for x, for y and 1 for xy and
æx + gö 2 2 2
Þ y - y1 = - ç 1 ÷ (x - x 1 ) keep the constant as such.
èy1 + f ø
2. This method of tangent at ( x1, y1 ) is applied only for any
Þ (y - y 1 ) (y 1 + f ) + ( x - x 1 ) ( x 1 + g ) = 0 conics of second degree. i.e. equation of tangent of
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at ( x1, y1 )
Þ xx 1 + yy 1 + gx + fy = x 12 + y 12 + gx 1 + fy 1
is axx1 + h( xy1 + x1 y ) + byy1 + g ( x + x1 ) + f ( y + y1 ) + c = 0
On adding gx 1 + fy 1 + c to both sides, we get
xx 1 + yy 1 + g ( x + x 1 ) + f (y + y 1 ) + c Wrong process : Mostly students use wrong process
Suppose any curve
= x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = 0 [from Eq. (ii)]
ax 3 + by 3 = c
Þ xx 1 + yy 1 + g ( x + x 1 ) + f (y + y 1 ) + c = 0
or a ( x ) ( x 2 ) + b (y ) (y 2 ) = c
This is the required equation of the tangent PT to the
circle at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ). Equation of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 )
Aliter : Since, circle is x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 æ x + x1 ö æy + y1 ö 2
Þ aç ÷ xx 1 + b ç ÷ yy 1 = c
è 2 ø è 2 ø
P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lie on the circle
\ x 12 +y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = 0 ...(i) which is a second degree conic not the equation of
tangent.
P (x1 , y )
1
T
Reason : This method is applicable only for second degree
conic, its a third degree conic. (find its tangent only by
calculus)

C y Example 30. Prove that the tangents to the circle

(–g, –f )
x 2 + y 2 = 25 at ( 3, 4 ) and (4, - 3) are perpendicular
to each other.
Its centre is C ( -g, - f ) Sol. The equations of tangents to x 2 + y 2 = 25 at (3, 4 ) and
y - (- f ) y 1 + f ( 4, - 3) are
\ Slope of CP = 1 =
x 1 - ( -g ) x 1 + g 3x + 4y = 25 ...(i)
Since, tangent PT is perpendicular to CP. and 4 x - 3y = 25 ...(ii)
respectively.
æx + gö 3
\ Slope of tangent = - ç 1 ÷ Now, slope of Eq. (i) = - = m1 (say)
èy1 + f ø 4
4
\ Equation of tangent at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is and slope of Eq. (ii) = = m 2 (say)
3
æx + gö Clearly, m1m 2 = - 1
y - y1 = - ç 1 ÷ (x - x 1 )
èy1 + f ø Hence, Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii) are perpendicular to each other.
Þ (y - y 1 ) (y 1 + f ) + ( x 1 + g ) ( x - x 1 ) = 0 y Example 31. Find the equation of tangent to the
Þ xx 1 + yy 1 + gx + fy = x 12 + y 12 + gx 1 + fy 1 circle x 2 + y 2 - 2ax = 0 at the point
On adding gx 1 + fy 1 + c to both sides, we get [a (1 + cos a ), a sin a ].
xx 1 + yy 1 + g( x + x 1 ) + f (y + y 1 ) + c Sol. The equation of tangent of x 2 + y 2 - 2ax = 0 at
[a (1 + cos a ), a sin a ] is
= x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c =0 [from Eq. (i)] x × a (1 + cos a ) + y . a sin a - a [ x + a (1 + cos a )] = 0
or xx 1 + yy 1 + g( x + x 1 ) + f (y + y 1 ) + c = 0 Þ ax cos a + ay sin a - a 2 (1 + cos a ) = 0
This is the required equation of the tangent PT to the or x cos a + y sin a = a (1 + cos a )
circle at the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ).
 Chap 04 Circle 267

y Example 32. Show that the circles æ æ q + fö æ q + fö ö

ç a cos ç ÷ a sin ç ÷÷
x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 6 y + 8 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 10x ç è 2 ø è 2 ø÷
We get ,
- 6 y + 14 = 0 touch at ( 3, - 1) . ç æ q - fö æ q - fö ÷
ç cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷
Sol. Equation of tangent at (3, - 1) of the circle è è 2 ø è 2 ø ÷ø
x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 6y + 8 = 0 is
Corollary 3 : The angle between a pair of tangents from a
3x + ( - 1) y - 2 ( x + 3) + 3 ( y - 1) + 8 = 0
point P to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is a. Then, the locus of
or x + 2y - 1 = 0 ...(i)
the point P is
and equation of tangent at (3, - 1) of the circle
x 2 + y 2 - 10x - 6y + 14 = 0 is a2
x 2 +y 2 =
æa ö
3 × x + ( -1) × y - 5 ( x + 3) - 3 (y - 1) + 14 = 0 sin2 ç ÷
or - 2 x - 4y + 2 = 0 è2ø
or x + 2y - 1 = 0 ...(ii) Proof
which is the same as Eq (i).
Hence, the given circles touch at (3, - 1). Y
R
a
2. Parametric form :
Theorem : The equation of tangent to the circle (f)Q
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 at the point (a cos q, a sinq ) is f
P(q)

x cos q + y sinq = a q
X¢ X
Proof : The equation of tangent of x 2 + y 2 = a 2 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) O

is xx 1 + yy 1 = a 2 (using point form of the tangent)

Putting x 1 = a cosq, y 1 = a sinq
then, we get x cos q + y sinq = a Y¢
Corollary 1 : Equation of chord joining (a cos q, a sinq ) Q f - q + a = 180°
and (a cos f, a sin f) is
q-f æ aö
æ q + fö æ q + fö æ q - fö \ = -ç 90° - ÷
x cos ç ÷ + y sin ç ÷ = a cos ç ÷ 2 è 2ø
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø
æ q - fö æa ö
Corollary 2 : Point of intersection of tangents at or cos ç ÷ = sin ç ÷
è 2 ø è2ø
(a cos q, a sinq ) and (a cos f, a sin f) is
æ Now, point of intersection is
æ q + fö æ q + fö ö
ç a cos ç ÷ a sin ç ÷÷ æ æ q + fö æ q + fö ö
è 2 ø è 2 ø÷ ç a cos ç
ç , ÷ a sin ç ÷÷
ç æ q - fö æ q - fö ÷ ç è 2 ø è 2 ø÷
,
ç cos çè ÷ cos ç
è 2 ø ÷ø
÷ ç æa ö æa ö ÷
è 2 ø
ç sin çè ÷ø sin ç ÷ ÷
è2ø ø
è 2
Remembering method :
æ q + fö æ q + fö æ q - fö æ q + fö æ q + fö
x cos ç a cos ç ÷ a sin ç ÷
Q ÷ +y sin ç ÷ =a cos ç ÷ è 2 ø è 2 ø
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø Let x= and y =
æa ö æa ö
ì æ q + fö ü ì æ q + fö ü sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷
ïa cos çè 2 ÷ø ï ïa sin çè 2 ÷ø ï è2ø è2ø
ï ï ï ï 2
or xí ý +y í ý =a a2
ï cos æç q - f ö ï ï æ q - f öï \ x 2 +y 2 =
÷ cos ç ÷
ïî è 2 ø ïþ ïî è 2 ø ïþ æa ö
sin2 ç ÷
è2ø
268 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Remarks On substituting this value of c in y = mx + c , we get

1. The angle between a pair of tangents from a point P to the
circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is 2q, then the locus of P is y = mx ± a (1 + m 2 ) ...(i)
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = ( g 2 + f 2 - c )cot 2 q
which are the required equations of tangents.
2. If angle between a pair of tangents from a point P to the
p Also, let ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the point of contact, then equation of
circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 is , then the locus of P is
2 tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
x 2 + y 2 = 2a2 æHere, a = p ö
ç ÷
2 2 2
è 2ø xx 1 + yy 1 = a 2 ...(ii)
which is director circle of x + y = a .
(Qlocus of point of intersection of perpendicular tangents is On comparing Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii), we get
director circle) x1 y1 a2
3. The equation of the tangent to the circle = =
( x - a) 2 + ( y - b) 2 = r 2 at the point( a + r cos q, b + r sin q) is
m -1 ± a (1 + m 2 )
( x - a) cos q + ( y - b) sin q = r . x1 y a
Þ =- 1 =±
m 1 (1 + m 2 )
y Example 33. The angle between a pair of tangents
p
from a point P to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25 is . Find am a
3 Þ x1 = ± and y 1 = m
the equation of the locus of the point P. 1 +m2 (1 + m 2 )
p
Sol. Here, a = æ ö
3 am a
25 Hence, ( x 1 , y 1 ) = ç ± ,m ÷
\ Required locus is x 2 + y 2 = = 100 ç 2 2 ÷
æpö è (1 + m ) (1 + m ) ø
sin 2 ç ÷
è6ø
Corollary : It also follows that y = mx + c is a tangent to
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 , if c 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 ) which is condition of
y Example 34. The angle between a pair of tangents
tangency.
from a point P to the circle x 2 + y 2 - 6 x - 8 y + 9 = 0
p Remarks
is . Find the equation of the locus of the point P.
3 p p 1. The reason why there are two equations y = mx ± a 1 + m2 ,
Sol. Here, 2q = or q =
3 6 there are two tangents, both are parallel and at the ends of
\Required locus is diameter.
p 2. The line ax + by + c = 0 is tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 if
x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 8y + 9 = (9 + 16 - 9 )cot 2 and only if c 2 = r 2 ( a2 + b2 ).
6
or x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 8y + 9 = 16 ´ 3 3. If the line y = mx + c is the tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2,
æ mr 2 r 2 ö
or x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 8y - 39 = 0 then point of contact is given by çç - , ÷
è c c ÷ø

3. Slope form : 4. If the line ax + by + c = 0 is the tangent to the circle

æ ar 2 br 2 ö
Theorem : The equation of a tangent of slope m to the x 2 + y 2 = r 2, then point of contact is given by çç - ,- ÷.
è c c ÷ø
circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is y = mx ± a (1 + m 2 ) and the 5. The condition that the line lx + my + n = 0 touches the circle
coordinates of the point of contact are x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is
( lg + mf - n) 2 = ( l 2 + m2 ) ( g 2 + f 2 - c ).
æ am a ö
ç± ,m ÷ 6. Equation of tangent of the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 in
ç 2
(1 + m ) 2 ÷
(1 + m ) ø terms of slope is
è
y + f = m ( x + g ) ± ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) ( 1 + m2 )
Proof : Let y = mx + c is the tangent of the circle
7. The equation of tangents of slope m to the circle
x 2 + y 2 = a2.
( x - a) 2 + ( y - b) 2 = r 2 are given by
\ Length of perpendicular from centre of circle (0, 0 ) on
( y - b) = m ( x - a) ± r ( 1 + m2 )
(y = mx + c ) = radius of circle
and the coordinates of the points of contact are
|c | 2 æ ö
\ =a Þ c = ± a (1 + m ) ça ± mr
,bm
r ÷
(1 + m 2 ) ç
è ( 1 + m2 ) ( 1 + m2 ) ÷ø
 Chap 04 Circle 269

y Example 35. Find the equations of the tangents to then, perpendicular distance from (0, 0) on Eq. (ii) = radius
the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9, which |l|
=3
(i) are parallel to the line 3 x + 4y - 5 = 0 3 + ( - 2) 2
2

(ii) are perpendicular to the line 2 x + 3 y + 7 = 0 or | l | = 3 13

(iii) make an angle of 60° with the X-axis or l = ± 3 13
3 From Eq. (ii), equations of tangents are
Sol. (i) Slope of 3x + 4y - 5 = 0 is -
4 3x - 2y ± 3 13 = 0
3 (iii) Let equation of tangent which makes an angle of 60°
Let m = -
4 with the X-axis is
and equation of circle is x 2 + y 2 = 9 y = 3x + c …(iii)
\ Equations of tangents or 3x - y + c = 0
æ 2ö
3 æ 3ö ÷ and circle x2 + y2 = 9
y = - x ± 3 çç1 + ç- ÷ ÷
4 è è 4ø ø then, perpendicular distance from (0, 0) to Eq. (iii) = radius
|c |
Þ 4y = - 3x ± 15 or 3x + 4y ± 15 = 0 =3
2 ( 3 ) + ( - 1) 2
2
(ii) Slope of 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is -
3 or |c | =6
3 or c =± 6
\ Slope of perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is = m (say)
2 From Eq. (iii), equations of tangents are
and given circle is x 2 + y 2 = 9 3x - y ± 6 = 0
\ Equations of tangents perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is
2 y Example 36. Prove that the line lx + my + n = 0
3 æ3ö
y = x ±3 1+
2
ç ÷
è2ø touches the circle ( x - a ) 2 + ( y - b ) 2 = r 2 if
(al + bm + n ) 2 = r 2 (l 2 + m 2 ) .
Þ 2y = 3x ± 3 13
or 3x - 2y ± 3 13 = 0 Sol. If the line lx + my + n = 0 touches the circle
(iii) Since, tangent make an angle 60° with the X-axis ( x - a )2 + (y - b )2 = r 2 , then length of the perpendicular
\ m = tan60° = 3 from the centre = radius
and given circle x2 + y2 = 9 | la + mb + n |
=r
(l 2 + m 2 )
\ Equation of tangents y = 3x ± 3 1 + ( 3 )2
Þ (la + mb + n )2 = r 2 (l 2 + m 2 )
or 3 x -y ±6=0
Aliter :
Aliter :
Here, line is lx + my + n = 0 and circle is
(i) Let tangent parallel to 3x + 4y - 5 = 0 is
( x - a )2 + (y - b )2 = r 2 . Here, centre of circle (a, b ) shift at
3x + 4y + l = 0 …(i)
(0, 0), then replacing x by x + a and y by y + b in the
and circle x2 + y2 = 9 equation of straight line lx + my + n = 0 and circle
then perpendicular distance from (0, 0) on Eq. (i) = radius ( x - a )2 + (y - b )2 = r 2 , the new form of straight line and
|l| circle are
=3
(3 + 4 2 )
2 l ( x + a ) + m (y + b ) + n = 0
or lx + my + (al + mb + n ) = 0 …(i)
or | l | =15
\ l = ± 15 and x2 + y2 = r 2 …(ii)
From Eq. (i), equations of tangents are respectively.
3x + 4y ± 15 = 0 On comparing Eq. (i) with y = Mx + C
l
(ii) Let tangent perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is then M=-
3x - 2y + l = 0 …(ii) m
(al + bm + n )
and circle x2 + y2 = 9 and C =-
m
270 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Since, Eq. (i) is the tangent of Eq. (ii), then y Example 38. If lx + my = 1 touches the circle
C 2 = r 2 (1 + M 2 ) x 2 + y 2 = a 2 , prove that the point (l , m ) lies on the
(al + bm + n )2 æ l2 ö circle x 2 + y 2 = a -2 .
or = r 2 ç1 + 2 ÷
m2 è m ø
Sol. Since, lx + my = 1 touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 .
or (al + bm + n )2 = r 2 (l 2 + m 2 )
Then, length of perpendicular from (0, 0) on lx + my = 1 is
y Example 37. Show that the line 3x - 4 y = 1 touches equal to radius
| -1|
the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4 y + 1 = 0. Find the then, = a or l 2 + m 2 = a -2
l 2 + m2
coordinates of the point of contact.
Hence, locus of (l , m ) is x 2 + y 2 = a -2
Sol. The centre and radius of the circle
Aliter : Let the point of contact of line lx + my = 1 and
x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 are (1, - 2)
circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is ( x 1, y1 ), then tangent of circle at
and ( -1) + (2)2 - 1 = 2 respectively. ( x 1, y1 ) is xx 1 + yy1 = a 2
Since, length of perpendicular from centre (1, - 2) on Since, xx 1 + yy1 = a 2 and lx + my = 1
3x - 4y = 1 is
x 1 y1 a 2
| 3 ´ 1 - 4 ´ ( -2) - 1 | 10 are identical, then = =
= l m 1
( 3) 2 + ( - 4 ) 2 5
\ x 1 = la 2 , y1 = ma 2
= 2 = radius of the circle
but ( x 1, y1 ) lie on x 2 + y 2 = a 2
Hence, 3x - 4y = 1 touches the circle
x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 then, l 2a 4 + m 2a 4 = a 2

Second part : Let point of contact is ( x 1, y1 ), then tangent \ l 2 + m 2 = a -2

at ( x 1, y1 ) on x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 is \Locus of (l , m ) is x 2 + y 2 = a -2
xx 1 + yy1 - ( x + x 1 ) + 2 (y + y1 ) + 1 = 0
y Example 39. Show that the line
Þ x ( x 1 - 1) + y (y1 + 2) - x 1 + 2y1 + 1 = 0 …(i)
( x - 2) cos q + ( y - 2) sin q = 1 touches a circle for all
and given line 3x - 4y - 1 = 0 …(ii)
values of q. Find the circle.
Since, Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii) are identical, then comparing Eq. (i)
and Eq. (ii), we get Sol. Given line is ( x - 2) cos q + (y - 2) sin q
x 1 - 1 y1 + 2 - x 1 + 2y1 + 1 1 = cos 2 q + sin 2 q
= =
3 -4 -1
On comparing
1 2
or x1 = - and y1 = - x - 2 = cosq ...(i)
5 5
and y - 2 = sinq ...(ii)
æ 1 2ö
\ Point of contact is ç - , - ÷. Squaring and adding Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii), then
è 5 5ø
( x - 2)2 + (y - 2)2 = cos 2 q + sin 2 q
Aliter for second part : Since, perpendicular line to
tangent always passes through the centre of the circle, Þ ( x - 2) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 = 1
perpendicular line to or x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 4y + 7 = 0
3x - 4y = 1 ...(i) Aliter : Since, tangent at (cos q , sin q ) of
is 4 x + 3y = l ...(ii)
x2 + y2 = 1 ...(i)
which passes through (1, - 2), then
is x cos q + y sin q = 1 ...(ii)
4 -6= l
replacing x by x - 2 and y by y - 2 in Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
\ l = -2
From Eq. (ii), 4 x + 3y = - 2 ...(iii) ( x - 2) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 = 1 ...(iii)
Solving Eq. (i) and Eq. (iii), we get the point of contact i.e. ( x - 2) cos q + (y - 2) sin q = 1 …(iv)
1 2 Hence, Eq. (iv) touches the circle Eq. (iii).
x = - and y = -
5 5 \ Equation of circle is
æ 1 2ö
Hence, point of contact is ç - , - ÷. ( x - 2) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 = 1
è 5 5ø
or x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 4y + 7 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 271

write first two rows as ax1 + hy1 + g and hx1 + by1 + f

Normal to a Circle at a Then, normal at ( x1, y1 ) of conic (i)

Given Point x - x1
=
y - y1
ax1 + hy1 + g hx1 + by1 + f
The normal of a circle at any point is a straight line which
is perpendicular to the tangent at the point and always Corollary 1 : Equation of normal of x 2 + y 2 = a 2 at
passes through the centre of the circle. ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
x - x1 y - y1
=
Different form of the Equation of Normals 1× x 1 + 0 + 0 0 + 1× y 1 + 0
1. Point form : (Here, g, f = 0 and a = b = 1)
Theorem : The equation of normal at the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) x - x1 y - y1
Þ =
to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 is x1 y1
x - x1 y - y1 x y
= or =
x1 + g y1 + f x1 y1

Proof : Corollary 2 : Equation of normal of

Equation of the given circle is x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) x - x1 y - y1
= (Here, a = b = 1 and h = 0)
Its centre C is ( -g, - f ) x1 + g y1 + f

P (x1, y1) Remarks

1. Normal always passes through the centre of the circle.
T Just write the equation of the line joining ( x1, y1 ) and the
centre of the circle.
2. The equations of the normals show that they pass through
C the centre i.e. the normals are the radii which we know from
(–g, –f ) Euclidean geometry.

y Example 40. Find the equation of the normal to

Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the given point. the circle x 2 + y 2 = 2x , which is parallel to the line
Q Normal of the circle at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) passes through centre x + 2y = 3.
C ( -g, - f ) of the circle.
Sol. Given circle is x 2 + y 2 - 2x = 0
Then, equation of normal CP passes through the points
C ( -g, - f ) and P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is Centre of given circle is (1, 0)
(y + f ) Since, normal is parallel to x + 2y = 3
y - y1 = 1 (x - x 1 ) let the equation of normal is x + 2y = l
(x 1 + g )
Since, normal passes through the centre of the circle i.e.
x - x1 y - y1 (1, 0)
or =
x1 + g y1 + f then 1+0= l
This is the required equation of normal at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) of the \ l =1
given circle. then, equation of normal is x + 2y = 1
Remark or x + 2y - 1 = 0
Easy method to find normal at ( x1, y1 ) of second degree conics Aliter Equation of normal at ( x 1, y1 ) of x 2 + y 2 - 2x = 0 is
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ...(i) x - x 1 y - y1
=
a h g x 1 - 1 y1 - 0
then, according to determinant h b f
y1
g f c or Slope = = m1 (say)
x1 - 1
272 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Since normal is parallel to x + 2y = 3 Aliter II : Equation of tangent at (5, 6) is

1 5
\ Slope = - = m 2 (say) 5 × x + 6 × y - ( x + 5) + (y + 6) - 48 = 0
2 2
but given m1 = m 2 Þ 10x + 12y - 5x - 25 + 2y + 12 - 96 = 0
y1 1 Þ 5x + 14y - 109 = 0
= - or x 1 + 2y1 - 1 = 0
x1 - 1 2 5
Slope of tangent = -
\ Locus of ( x 1, y1 ) is x + 2y - 1 = 0 14
14
\ Slope of normal =
y Example 41. Find the equation of the normal to the 5
circle x 2 + y 2 - 5x + 2y - 48 = 0 at the point ( 5, 6 ) . \Equation of normal at (5, 6) with slope
14
is
5
Sol. Equation of the normal at (5, 6) is 14
x -5 y -6 x -5 y -6 2x - 10 y - 6 y - 6= ( x - 5)
= Þ = Þ = 5
5 6+1 5 7 5 7 Þ 5y - 30 = 14 x - 70
5-
2 2 or 14 x - 5y - 40 = 0
Þ 14 x - 70 = 5y - 30
\ 14 x - 5y - 40 = 0 2. Parametric form
Aliter I : Since, centre of the circle Since, parametric coordinates of circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
æ5 ö
x 2 + y 2 - 5x + 2y - 48 = 0 is ç , - 1÷, normal at (5,6) is the (a cos q, a sinq ).
è2 ø
æ5 ö \ Equation of normal at (a cos q, a sinq ) is
equation of a line, which passes through ç , - 1÷ and (5, 6) is
è2 ø x y
=
6+1 æ 5ö 14 æ 5ö a cos q a sinq
y +1= çx - ÷ Þ y +1= çx - ÷
5 è 2ø 5 è 2ø
5- x y
2 or = or y = x tanq
cos q sinq
7
Þ y + 1 = ( 2x - 5)
5 or y = mx , where m = tanq
Þ 5y + 5 = 14 x - 35 or 14 x - 5y - 40 = 0 which is slope form of normal.

Exercise for Session 4

1. The length of the chord cut-off by y = 2x + 1from the circle x 2 + y 2 = 2 is
5 6 6 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 5 5 6

2. Circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 8y - 5 = 0 will intersect the line 3x - 4y = l in two distinct points, if

(a) -10 < l < 5 (b) 9 < l < 20 (c) -35 < l < 15 (d) -16 < l < 30

3. If the line 3x - 4y + l = 0, ( l > 0) touches the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 8y - 5 = 0 at (a,b ), then l + a + b is equal to

(a) -22 (b) -20 (c) 20 (d) 22

4. Tangent which is parallel to the line x - 3y - 2 = 0 of the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x + 2y - 5 = 0, has point/points of

contact
(a) (1, - 2) (b) (-1, 2) (c) (3, 4) (d) (3, - 4)

5. If a circle, whose centre is ( -11

, ) touches the straight line x + 2y = 12, then the co-ordinates of the point of
contact are
7 18 21
(a) æç - , - 4ö÷ (b) æç - , - ö÷ (c) (2, - 7) (d) (-2, - 5)
è 2 ø è 5 5ø
 Chap 04 Circle 273

6. The area of the triangle formed by the tangent at the point (a, b ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 and the coordinate
axes is
r4 r4 r4 r4
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2ab 2 | ab | ab | ab |

7. The equation of the tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4x - 4y + 4 = 0 which make equal intercepts on the positive
coordinate axes is
(a) x + y = 2 (b) x + y = 2 2 (c) x + y = 4 (d) x + y = 8

8. If a > 2b > 0, then the positive value of m for which y = mx - b (1+ m 2 ) is a common tangent to x 2 + y 2 = b 2
and ( x - a )2 + y 2 = b 2 is
2b (a 2 - 4b 2 ) 2b b
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2
(a - 4b ) 2 2b a - 2b a - 2b

p
9. The angle between a pair of tangents from a point P to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 16 is and locus of P is
3
x 2 + y 2 = r 2, then value of r is
(a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 8

10. The normal at the point (3, 4) on a circle cuts the circle at the point ( -1, - 2). Then, the equation of the circle is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 2y - 13 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 2y - 11 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 2y + 12 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 2y + 14 = 0

11. The line ax + by + c = 0 is a normal to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2. The portion of the line ax + by + c = 0 intercepted
by this circle is of length
(a) r (b) r (c) r 2 (d) 2r
3
12. If the line ax + by + c = 0 touches the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x = and is normal to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 4y + 1 = 0,
5
then (a,b ) are
(a) (1, 3) (b) (3, 1) (c) (1, 2) (d) (2, 1)

13. 2
Show that for all values of q, x sin q - y cos q = a touches the circle x + y = a .2 2

14. Find the equation of the tangents to the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y - 4 = 0

which are (i) parallel (ii) perpendicular to the line 3x - 4y - 1 = 0.

15. Find the equation of the family of circle which touch the pair of straight lines x 2 - y 2 + 2y - 1 = 0.

16. Find the value of l so that the line 3x - 4y = l may touch the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 8y - 5 = 0.

17. Show that the area of the triangle formed by the positive X-axis, the normal and tangent to the circle
x 2 + y 2 = 4 at (1, 3 ) is 2 3.
Session 5
Tangents from a Point to the Circle, Length of the
Tangent from a Point to a Circle, Power of a Point
with Respect to a Circle, Chord of Contact, Chord
Bisected at a Given Point, Pair of Tangents,
Director Circle

Tangent from a Point If P outside the circle, then substituting these values of m
in Eq. (ii), we get the equation of tangents.
to the Circle Aliter :
Theorem : From a given point two tangents can be drawn First write equation of line through ( x 1 , y 1 ) say
to a circle which are real, coincident or imaginary
y - y 1 = m (x - x 1 ) ...(i)
according as the given point lies outside,on or inside the
2 2 2
circle . which is tangent of the circle x + y = a , then
2 2 2
Proof : If circle is x +y =a ...(i) length of perpendicular from centre (0, 0 ) to Eq. (i) = radius
of the circle
any tangent to the circle Eq. (i) is
| mx 1 - y 1 |
y = mx + a (1 + m 2 ) …(ii) then, =a
(1 + m 2 )
If outside point is ( x 1 , y 1 )
or (mx 1 - y 1 ) 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 )
then, y 1 = mx 1 + a 1 + m 2
2 2 2
or m 2 x 12 - 2m x 1 y 1 + y 12 = a 2 + a 2m 2
or (y 1 - mx 1 ) = a (1 + m )
Þ m 2 ( x 12 - a 2 ) - 2mx 1 y 1 + y 12 - a 2 = 0
or y 12 +m 2
x 12 2
- 2mx 1 y 1 = a + a m 2 2
which is quadratic in m which gives two values of m.
2
Þ m ( x 12 - a ) - 2mx 1 y 1 + y 12 - a 2 = 0
2
...(iii)
y Example 42. Find the equations of the tangents to
which is quadratic in m which gives two values of m.
the circle x 2 + y 2 = 16 drawn from the point (1, 4 ) .
(real coincident or imaginary) corresponding to any value
of x 1 and y 1 . Sol. Given circle is
The tangents are real, coincident or imaginary according x 2 + y 2 = 16 ...(i)
as the values of m obtained from Eq. (iii) are real, Any tangent of Eq. (i) in terms of slope is
coincident or imaginary. y = mx + 4 (1 + m 2 ) ...(ii)
or Discriminant >, =, or <0 which passes through (1, 4 )
Þ 4 x 12 y 12 - 4 ( x 12 - a 2 ) (y 12 - a 2 ) >, =, or < 0 then, 4 = m + 4 (1 + m 2 )
Þ ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) >, = or < 0 Þ ( 4 - m )2 = 16 (1 + m 2 )
i.e. P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on or inside the circle Þ 15m 2 + 8m = 0
x 2 + y 2 = a2. \ m = 0, -
8
15
 Chap 04 Circle 275

From Eq. (ii), equations of tangents drawn from (1, 4) are

y=4 Length of the Tangent from a
and y=-
8
x+4
æ
ç1 +
è
64 ö
÷
Point to a Circle
15 225 ø
Theorem : The length of tangent from the point
or 8x + 15y = 68 respectively.
P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 is
Aliter : Equation of line through (1, 4 ) is y - 4 = m ( x - 1)
Þ mx - y + 4 - m = 0 ...(i) ( x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c ) = S 1
Then, perpendicular length from centre (0, 0) to
mx - y + 4 - m = 0 is equal to radius Proof : Let PT and PT ¢ be two tangents from the given
then,
|4 -m|
=4
point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0.
m 2 +`1 Then, the centre and radius are C ( -g, - f ) and
2 2
or ( 4 - m ) = 16 (m + 1) ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) ( = CT = CT ¢ ) respectively.
2
Þ 15m + 8m = 0
8
\ m = 0, - T
15
f)
From Eq. (i), equation of tangents from (1, 4 ) are y = 4 and C (– g, –
8x + 15y = 68, respectively.

y Example 43. The angle between a pair of tangents

from a point P to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 6 y + 9 sin 2 a T´

+ 13 cos 2 a = 0 is 2a. Find the equation of the locus of P (x 1, y 1

)

the point P. In D PCT,

Sol. Let coordinates of P be ( x 1, y1 ) and given circle is
PT = ( PC ) 2 - (CT ) 2
x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 6y + 9 sin 2 a + 13 cos 2 a = 0
or ( x + 2)2 + (y - 3)2 - 4 - 9 + 9 sin 2 a + 13 cos 2 a = 0 = ( x 1 + g ) 2 + (y 1 + f ) 2 - g 2 - f 2 + c
Þ ( x + 2)2 + (y - 3)2 + 9 sin 2 a - 13 (1 - cos 2 a ) = 0
= ( x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c ) = S 1 = PT ¢
2 2 2
Þ ( x + 2) + (y - 3) = 4 sin a
where, S 1 = x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c
\ Centre and radius are ( -2, 3) and 2 sina, respectively.

Remarks
T 2 sin α 1. To find length of tangent
C (– 2, 3) let S = x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c
2 sin α then, S1 = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c
where, P ( x1, y1 )
R \ length of tangent = S1
α
α 2. For S1 first write the equation of circle in general form i.e.
P (x1, y1) coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 = 1 and making RHS of
circle is zero, then let LHS by S.
Distance between P ( x 1, y1 ) and centre of circle C ( -2, 3) is
CP = ( x 1 + 2)2 + (y1 - 3)2 y Example 44. Find the length of tangents drawn
CT 2 sin a from the point ( 3, - 4 ) to the circle
In D PCT , sin a = =
CP ( x 1 + 2) 2 + ( y 1 - 3) 2 2x 2 + 2y 2 - 7 x - 9 y - 13 = 0.
or ( x 1 + 2) 2 + ( y 1 - 3) 2 = 2 Sol. The equation of the given circle is
2x 2 + 2y 2 - 7 x - 9y - 13 = 0
or ( x 1 + 2) 2 + ( y 1 - 3) 2 = 4
Re-writing the given equation of the circle
The required locus of P ( x 1, y1 ) is 7 9 13
( x + 2) 2 + ( y - 3) 2 = 4 i.e. x2 + y2 - x - y - =0
2 2 2
276 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

7 9 13 12
Let S = x2 + y2 - x- y- \ QM =
2 2 2 5
2 2 7 9 13 1
\ S1 = (3) + ( -4 ) - ´ 3 - ´ ( -4 ) - \ Area of D PQR = × QR × PM
2 2 2 2
21 13 1
= 25 - + 18 - = 43 - 17 = 26 = (2QM ) × PM = (QM ) ( PM )
2 2 2
\ Length of tangent = S1 = 26 æ 12 ö æ 16 ö 192
=ç ÷ç ÷=
è 5 ø è 5 ø 25
y Example 45. If the length of tangent from ( f , g ) to 17
=7 sq units
the circle x 2 + y 2 = 6 be twice the length of the 25
tangent from ( f , g ) to circle x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 3y = 0, then
y Example 47. Show that the length of the tangent
find the value of f 2 + g 2 + 4 f + 4 g .
from any point on the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
Sol. According to the question to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c 1 = 0 is (c 1 - c ) .
(g 2 + f 2
- 6) = 2 ( f 2
+ g 2 + 3 f + 3g )
Sol. Let ( x 1, y1 ) be any point on
On squaring g 2 + f 2
- 6 = 4f 2
+ 4 g 2 + 12 f + 12g
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
2 2
or 3f + 3g + 12 f + 12g + 6 = 0
2
then x 12 + y12 + 2gx 1 + 2 fy1 + c = 0 ...(i)
or f + g 2 + 4 f + 4g + 2 = 0
2
\ Length of tangent from ( x 1, y1 ) to the circle
or f + g 2 + 4 f + 4g = - 2
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c 1 = 0 is
y Example 46. Show that the area of the triangle x 12 + y12 + 2gx 1 + 2 fy1 + c 1
formed by tangents from the point (4, 3) to the circle
= ( -c + c 1 ) = ( c 1 - c ) [From Eq. (i)]
x 2 + y 2 = 9 and the line segment joining their points of
17
contact is 7 square units in length.
25
Sol. Since, PQ = PR = 4 2 + 32 - 9 = 4 units
Power of a Point With
\ ÐCPQ = ÐCPR = a (let) Respect to a Circle
\ PC = ( 4 - 0) + (3 - 0) = 5 units 2 2 Theorem : The power of a point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) with respect to
the circle
Q 4 P (4, 3)
α x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 is S 1
α
3
M 4
where, S 1 = x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c
(0, 0) C
3
Proof : Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be a point outside the circle and PAB
R and PCD drawn two secants. The power of P ( x 1 , y 1 ) with
respect to
B
T
3
\In DPQC, tana = ,
4
A
3
\ sina =
5
4 D
C
and cosa = P (x 1, y 1)
5
In DPMQ, cosa =
PM 4
= S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
4 5
16
is equal to PA × PB which is
\ PM =
5 x 12 + y 12 +2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c = S 1
QM 3
and sina = = \ Power remains constant for the circle
4 5
 Chap 04 Circle 277

i.e. independent of A and B.

\ PA × PB = PC × PD = ( PT ) 2 = S 1 = ( S 1 ) 2 T
(x′, y′ )
2
\ PA × PB = ( S 1 ) = square of the length of tangent. Chord of
contact
Remark
If P outside, inside or on the circle, then PA× PB is + ve, - ve T ′(x ′′, y ′′)
or zero, respectively.
P (x1, y1)

y Example 48. Find the power of point (2, 4 ) with Then, equations of tangents PT and PT ¢ are
2 2
respect to the circle x + y - 6 x + 4 y - 8 = 0 xx ¢ + yy ¢ = a 2 and xx ¢ ¢ + yy ¢ ¢ = a 2 respectively.
Sol. The power of the point (2, 4 ) with respect to the circle Since, both tangents pass through P ( x 1 , y 1 ), then
2 2
x + y - 6 x + 4y - 8 = 0 is ( S 1 ) or S 1 2 x 1 x ¢ + y 1y ¢ = a 2
where, S = x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 4y - 8 and x 1 x ¢¢ + y 1 y ¢¢ = a 2
\ S1 = (2)2 + ( 4 )2 - 6 ´ 2 + 4 ´ 4 - 8 Q Points T ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and T ¢ ( x ¢¢,y ¢¢ ) lie on
= 4 + 16 - 12 + 16 - 8 = 16 xx 1 + yy 1 = a 2
[Q(2, 4 ) is outside from the circle x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 4y - 8 = 0]
\ Equation of chord of contact TT ¢ is xx 1 + yy 1 = a 2
y Example 49. Show that the locus of the point, the
powers of which with respect to two given circles Remark
are equal, is a straight line. Equation of chord of contact like as equation of tangent at
that point but point different.
Sol. Let the given circles be
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) Now, for chord of contact at ( x 1 , y 1 ), replacing x 2 by
x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 x + x1 y + y1
and ...(ii) xx 1 , y 2 by yy 1 , x by , y by
Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be a point, the powers of which with respect 2 2
to the circles Eqs. (i) and (ii) are equal. Then, xy 1 + x 1 y
and xy by .
\ [ ( x 12 + y12 + 2gx 1 + 2 fy1 + c ) ]2 2
Corollary 1 : If R is the radius of the circle and L is the
= [ ( x 12 + y12 + 2g 1x 1 + 2 f 1y1 + c 1 ) ]2
length of the tangent from P ( x 1 ,y 1 ) on S = 0.
or x 12 + y12 + 2gx 1 + 2 fy1 + c
Here, L = S 1 , then
= x 12 + y12 + 2g 1x 1 + 2 f 1y1 + c 1
2 LR
Þ 2 ( g - g 1 ) x 1 + 2 ( f - f 1 ) y1 + c - c 1 = 0 (a) Length of chord of contact TT ¢ =
then, locus of P ( x 1, y1 ) is ( R 2 + L2 )
2 ( g - g1 ) x + 2 ( f - f 1 ) y + c - c1 = 0 (b) Area of triangle formed by the pair of tangents and its
which is a straight line. RL3
chord of contact =
R 2 + L2
Chord of Contact (c) Angle between the pair of tangents from P ( x 1 ,y 1 )
æ 2RL ö
From any external point, two tangents can be drawn to a = tan -1 ç ÷
è L2 - R 2 ø
given circle. The chord joining the points of contact of the
two tangents is called the chord of contact of tangents. Corollary 2 : Equation of the circle circumscribing the
Theorem : The equation of the chord of contact of triangle PTT ¢ is
tangents drawn from a point ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the circle ( x - x 1 )( x + g ) + (y - y 1 )(y + f ) = 0,
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is xx 1 + yy 1 = a 2 .
where, O ( -g, - f ) is the centre of the circle
Sol. Let T ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and T ¢ ( x ¢¢, y ¢¢ ) be the points of contact of x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fx + c = 0
2 2 2
tangents drawn from P ( x 1, y1 ) to x + y = a .
278 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Sol. Equation of chord of contact AB is hx + ky = a 2

T
For equation of pair of tangents of OA and OB, make
homogeneous x 2 + y 2 = a 2 with the help of hx + ky = a 2 or
O(–g, –f)
hx + ky
=1
a2
P T¢
(x1, y1)

A π O (0, 0)
i.e. Required circle always passes through the centre of
2
the given circle (Here, OP is the diameter of the required
circle).
P (h, k) B
y Example 50. If the pair of tangents are drawn from
the point (4, 5) to the circle x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 2y - 11 = 0, æ hx + ky ö
2
then, x 2 + y 2 = a2 ç ÷
then, è a2 ø
(i) Find the length of chord of contact. or a 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) = (hx + ky )2
(ii) Find the area of the triangle formed by a pair of or x 2 (a 2 - h 2 ) - 2hkxy + y 2 (a 2 - k 2 ) = 0
tangents and their chord of contact. p
but Ð AOB =
(iii) Find the angle between the pair of tangents. 2
Sol. Here, P º ( 4,5), \ Coefficient of x 2 + Coefficient of y 2 = 0
R = ((2)2 + (1)2 + 11) = 4 Þ a 2 - h 2 + a 2 - k 2 = 0 or h 2 + k 2 = 2a 2

and L = S1 = (( 4 )2 + (5)2 - 4 ´ 4 - 2 ´ 5 - 11) = 2 y Example 53. The chord of contact of tangents drawn
(i) Length of chord of contact from a point on the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 to the circle
2LR 2´2´ 4 8 x 2 + y 2 = b 2 touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2 . Show
= = = unit
2 2 2 2 5
(R + L ) ( 4 ) + ( 2) that a, b , c are in GP.
RL3 4 ´8 8 Sol. Let P (a cos q , a sin q ) be a point on the circle
(ii) Area of triangle = = = sq units
R + L2 16 + 4 5
2
x 2 + y 2 = a2.
(iii) Angle between the pair of tangents
Then, equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from
æ2 ´ 4 ´ 2ö P (a cos q , a sin q ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = b 2 is
= p + tan -1 ç 2 ÷
è 2 - 42 ø
æ4ö P T
= p - tan -1 ç ÷ (Q L < R)
è3ø

y Example 51. Tangents PQ, PR are drawn to the circle R

x 2 + y 2 = 36 from the point P( -8,2) touching the circle x2 + y2 = c 2
at Q, R respectively. Find the equation of the x2 + y2 = b2
circumcircle of DPQR.
x2 + y 2= a2
Sol. Here, P º ( -8,2) and O º (0,0)
\Equation of the required circle is ax cos q + ay sin q = b 2 ...(i)
( x - ( -8))( x - 0) + (y - 2)(y - 0) = 0 This touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2 ...(ii)
2 2
or x + y + 8 x - 2y = 0 (QOP is the diameter) \ Length of perpendicular from (0, 0) to Eq. (i) = radius of
Eq. (ii)
y Example 52. Find the condition that chord of | 0 + 0 - b2|
\ =c
contact of any external point (h, k ) to the circle (a 2 cos 2 q + a 2 sin 2 q )
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 should subtend right angle at the centre
or b 2 = ac
of the circle .
Þ a, b, c are in GP.
 Chap 04 Circle 279

Chord Bisected at a y Example 55. Find the middle point of the chord
intercepted on line lx + my + n = 0 by the circle
Given Point x 2 + y 2 = a2.
Theorem : The equation of the chord of the circle Sol. Let ( x 1, y1 ) be the middle point of the chord intercepted
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 bisected at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) is given by by the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 on the line lx + my + n = 0.
Then, equation of the chord of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 ,
xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 = x 12 + y 12 - a 2
whose middle points is ( x 1, y1 ), is
or T = S1 xx 1 + yy1 - a 2 = x 12 + y12 - a 2
Proof : Let any chord AB of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 be or xx 1 + yy1 = x 12 + y12 ...(i)
bisected at D ( x 1 , y 1 ). Clearly, lx + my + n = 0 and Eq. (i) represented the same
If centre of circle is represented by C line,
x 1 y1 x 12 + y12
= = =l (say)
l m -n
x1 = l l ü
\ ...(ii)
A
y1 = mlýþ
C (0,0 )
D and x 12 + y12 = - nl
(x 1
,
y 1)

or l 2 l2 + m 2 l2 = - nl [from (ii)]
B
n
\ l=-
l 2 + m2
0 - y1 y1
then, slope of DC = = nl mn
0 - x1 x1 So, from Eq. (ii), x1 = - 2 2
, y1 = -
l +m l + m2
2

x1 æ nl nm ö
\ Slope of the chord AB is - Hence, the required point is ç - 2 ,- 2 ÷.
y1 è l +m 2
l + m2 ø
x1
then, equation of AB is y - y 1 = - (x - x 1 ) y Example 56. Through a fixed point (h, k ) , secants are
y1
drawn to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 . Show that the locus
or yy 1 - y 12 = - xx 1 + x 12
of mid-point of the portions of secants intercepted by
or xx 1 + yy 1 = x 12 + y 12 the circle is x 2 + y 2 = hx + ky .
or xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 = x 12 + y 12 - a 2 or T = S 1 Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be the middle point of any chord AB, which
passes through the point C (h , k ).
Remarks
1. The equation of chord of the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0,
which is bisected at ( x1, y1 ) ; is T = S1
where, T = xx1 + yy1 + g ( x + x1 ) + f ( y + y1 ) + c O
and S1 = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c C (h, k)
B
2. The chord bisected at point ( x1, y1 ) is the farthest from the
y 1)
centre among all the chords passing through the point ( x1, y1 ). x 1,
P(
Also, for such chord, the length of the chord is minimum.
A

y Example 54. Find the equation of the chord of Equation of chord AB is T = S1

\ xx 1 + yy1 - r 2 = x 12 + y12 - r 2
x 2 + y 2 - 6 x + 10y - 9 = 0 which is bisected at ( -2, 4 ).
or x 12 + y12 = xx 1 + yy1
Sol. The equation of the required chord is
- 2x + 4y - 3 ( x - 2) + 5 ( y + 4 ) - 9 But since AB passes through C (h , k ), then
= 4 + 16 + 12 + 40 - 9 x 12 + y12 = hx 1 + ky1
Þ -5x + 9y - 46 = 0 \ Locus of P ( x 1, y1 ) is x 2 + y 2 = hx + ky
or 5x - 9y + 46 = 0
280 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 57. Find the locus of middle points of

chords of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 , which subtend right
Pair of Tangents
angle at the point (c , 0) . Theorem : The combined equation of the pair of tangents
Sol. Let N (h , k ) be the middle point of any chord AB, which drawn from a point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
subtend a right angle at P (c , 0). ( x 2 + y 2 - a 2 ) ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) = ( xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 ) 2
Since, ÐAPB = 90°
\ NA = NB = NP
or SS 1 = T 2

Y where, S = x 2 + y 2 - a 2 , S 1 = x 12 + y 12 - a 2
A and T = xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2
(h, k) Proof : The given circle is x 2 + y 2 = a 2
N
X′ X Its centre and radius are C (0, 0 ) and a respectively . Given
P (c, 0) external point be P ( x 1 , y 1 ).
B O
From point P ( x 1 ,y 1 ) two tangents PT and PR be drawn to
the circle, touching circle at T and R respectively.
Y′
T
(since distance of the vertices from middle a
point of the hypotenuse are equal) C (0, 0)

or ( NA ) = ( NB ) = (h - c )2 + (k - 0)2
2 2
...(i) (α, β) a

But also Ð BNO = 90° Q

R
\ (OB )2 = (ON )2 + ( NB )2
P (x1, y1)
Þ - ( NB )2 = (ON )2 - (OB )2
Þ - [(h - c )2 + (k - 0)2 ] = (h 2 + k 2 ) - a 2 Let Q (a, b) on PT, then equation of PQ is
or 2 (h 2 + k 2 ) - 2ch + c 2 - a 2 = 0 b - y1
y - y1 = (x - x 1 )
\ Locus of N (h , k ) is a - x1
2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) - 2cx + c 2 - a 2 = 0
or y (a - x 1 ) - x (b - y 1 ) - ay 1 + bx 1 = 0
y Example 58. Find the equation of the chord of the Length of perpendicular from C (0, 0 ) on PT = a (radius)
circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 passing through the point (2, 3) | bx 1 - ay 1 |
farthest from the centre. Þ =a
2 2
(a - x 1 ) + (b - y 1 )
Sol. Let P º (2,3) be the given point and M be the middle point
of chord of circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 through P. or (bx 1 - ay 1 ) 2 = a 2 {(a - x 1 ) 2 + (b - y 1 ) 2 }
\ Locus of Q (a, b) is
(yx 1 - xy 1 ) 2 = a 2 {( x - x 1 ) 2 + (y - y 1 ) 2 }
O
Þ y 2 x 12 + x 2 y 12 - 2 xy x 1 y 1 = a 2
P M { x 2 + x 12 - 2 xx 1 + y 2 + y 12 - 2yy 1 }

Then, (OM )2 = (OP )2 - ( PM )2 Þ y 2 ( x 12 - a 2 ) + x 2 (y 12 - a 2 ) - a 2 ( x 12 + y 12 )

If OM maximum, then PM is minimum. i.e. P coincides with = 2 xyx 1 y 1 - 2a 2 xx 1 - 2a 2 yy 1
M, which is middle point of the chord.
Hence, the equation of the chord is On adding both sides, ( x 2 x 12 + y 2 y 12 + a 4 ), then
T = S1 y 2 ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) + x 2 ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) -a 2 ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 )
i.e. 2x + 3y - r 2 = 22 + 32 - r 2
= ( xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 ) 2
or 2x + 3y = 13
 Chap 04 Circle 281

Þ ( x 2 + y 2 - a 2 ) ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) = ( xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 ) 2 Remarks
1. Equation of pair of tangents in notation form is SS1 = T 2
This is the required equation of pair of tangents drawn
where, S º x 2 + y 2 - a2
from ( x 1 , y 1 ) to circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 .
S1 º x12 + y12 - a2, T º xx1 + yy1 - a2
2 2 2
Aliter : Let circle be x + y = a with centre C (0, 0 ) and 2. When circle is x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 and tangents are
radius a. Length of tangents from P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q (a, b) drawn from ( x1, y1 ), then pair of tangents is
are ( x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c ) ( x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c)
= [ xx1 + yy1 + g ( x + x1 ) + f ( y + y1 ) + c ] 2
PT = x 12 + y 12 - a 2
where, S º x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c,
2 2 2
and QT = a + b - a S1 º x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c,
and T º xx1 + yy1 + g ( x + x1 ) + f ( y + y1 ) + c
T
a Advised for Students
M
β)

C (0,0) Students are advised that, if they do not want to use the
α,

N
Q(

a formula (SS 1 = T 2 ), then use the following method :

P Let y - y 1 = m( x - x 1 ) be any line through P ( x 1 ,y 1 ).

(x1, y1) R
Then, use condition of tangency p = r i.e.
Now, equation of TR (chord of contact is) Length of perpendicular from the centre of circle or this
xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 = 0 line = radius of the circle.
| x 12 + y 12 - a 2 | |ax 1 + by 1 - a 2 | Gives the values of m. In such away, we can find the
\ PN = and QM = equations of tangents from P.
( x 12 + y 12 ) ( x 12 + y 12 )
y Example 59. Find the equations of the tangents
But from similar Ds PNT and QMT, from the point A ( 3, 2) to the circle
PN PT ( PN ) 2 ( PT ) 2 x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6 y + 8 = 0.
= Þ =
QM QT (QM ) 2 (QT ) 2 Sol. Combined equation of the pair of tangents drawn from
A (3, 2) to the given circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 8 = 0 can be
( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) 2 written in the usual notation.
( x 12 + y 12 ) x 12 + y 12 - a 2 T 2 = SS1 namely
Þ =
(ax 1 + by 1 - a 2 ) 2 a 2 + b2 - a 2 Þ [3x + 2y + 2 ( x + 3) + 3 (y + 2) + 8]2
( x 12 + y 12 ) = [ x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 8] [9 + 4 + 12 + 12 + 8]

Þ ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 ) (a 2 + b2 - a 2 ) = (ax 1 + by 1 - a 2 ) 2 Þ (5x + 5y + 20)2 = 45 ( x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 8)

Þ 5 ( x + y + 4 )2 = 9 ( x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 8)
\ Locus of Q (a, b) is
Þ 5 ( x 2 + y 2 + 2xy + 8x + 8y + 16)
( x 2 + y 2 - a 2 ) ( x 12 + y 12 - a 2 )
= 9 ( x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 8)
= ( xx 1 + yy 1 - a 2 ) 2
Þ 4 x 2 + 4y 2 - 10xy - 4 x + 14y - 8 = 0
This is the required equation of pair of tangents drawn
or 2x 2 + 2y 2 - 5xy - 2x + 7y - 4 = 0
from ( x 1 , y 1 ) to circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 .
or (2x - y - 4 ) ( x - 2y + 1) = 0
Corollary : The angle between the two tangents from
Hence, the required tangents to the circle from A (3, 2) are
æ a ö
( x 1 ,y 1 ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is 2 tan -1 ç ÷ , where 2x - y - 4 = 0 and x - 2y + 1 = 0
ç S ÷ Aliter : Let S º x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 6y + 8 = 0
è 1ø
S 1 = x 12 + y 12 - a 2 . Centre C ( -2, - 3) and radius = 5
282 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Let the slope of a tangent from A to ‘ S =0’ be m, then or m 2 (h 2 - a 2 ) - 2mkh + k 2 - a 2 = 0

equation of tangent is
y - 2 = m ( x - 3) This is quadratic equation in m, let two roots are m 1 and
or mx - y + 2 - 3m = 0 …(i) m2 .
Length of perpendicular from C ( -2, - 3) on Eq. (i) But tangents are perpendiculars, then
= radius of circle. P (h, k)
A (3, 2) 90°

T1
5
5
T2
C (– 2, –3 ) m 1m 2 = - 1
k - a2
2
S=0 Þ = - 1 or k 2 - a 2 = - h 2 + a 2
h2 - a 2
| - 2m + 3 + 2 - 3m |
Þ = 5 or h 2 + k 2 = 2a 2
2
( m + 1)
Hence, locus of P (h, k ) is x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2
or (5m - 5)2 = 5 (m 2 + 1)
Aliter : The combined equation of the pair of tangents
Þ 25m 2 - 50m + 25 = 5m 2 + 5
drawn from (h, k ) to x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
Þ 20m 2 - 50m + 20 = 0
SS 1 = T 2
or 2m 2 - 5m + 2 = 0
or (2m - 1) (m - 2) = 0 where, S = x 2 + y 2 - a2
1 S 1 = h2 + k 2 - a 2
\ m = or m = 2
2
Substituting these values of m in Eq. (i), we get the and T = hx + ky - a 2
equations of two tangents are x - 2y + 1 = 0 and \ ( x 2 + y 2 - a 2 ) (h 2 + k 2 - a 2 ) = (hx + ky - a 2 ) 2
2x - y - 4 = 0.
This equation will represent a pair of perpendicular lines
if, coefficient of x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0
Director Circle Þ h 2 + k 2 - a 2 - h 2 + h 2 + k 2 -a 2 - k 2 = 0
Director circle : The locus of the point of intersection of Þ h 2 + k 2 - 2a 2 = 0 or h 2 + k 2 = 2a 2
two perpendicular tangents to a given circle is known as
its director circle. Hence, the locus of (h, k ) is x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2
Theorem : The equation of the director circle of the circle
Remarks
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
1. The equation of the director circle of the circle
x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2 ( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = a2 is ( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = 2a2
2. The equation of the director circle of the circle
Proof : The equation of any tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = g 2 + f 2 - c
x 2 + y 2 = a2 3. If two tangents are drawn from a point on the director circle to
2 the circle, then angle between tangents is 90°.
is y = mx + a (1 + m ) ...(i)
Let P (h, k ) be the point of intersection of tangents, then y Example 60. If two tangents are drawn from a point
P (h, k ) lies on Eq. (i) on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 50 to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25,
then find the angle between the tangents.
\ k = mh + a (1 + m 2 )
Sol. Q x 2 + y 2 = 50 is the director circle of x 2 + y 2 = 25
or (k - mh ) 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 ) q
Hence, angle between tangents = 90°
 Chap 04 Circle 283

Exercise for Session 5

1. If the tangent at the point P on the circle x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 6y = 2 meets the straight line 5x - 2y + 6 = 0 at a point Q
on the Y-axis, then the length PQ is
(a) 4 (b) 2 5 (c) 5 (d) 3 5
2. 2 2
If the circle x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is touched by y = x at P such that OP = 6 2, where O is origin, then the
value of c is
(a) 36 (b) 72 (c) 144 (d) 288
3. The chord of contact of tangents from a point P to a circle passes through Q. If l1 and l 2 are the lengths of
tangents from P and Q to the circle, then PQ is equal to
l1 + l 2 l1 - l 2
(a) (b) (c) (l 12 + l 22 ) (d) (l 12 - l 22 )
2 2
4. If the chord of contact of tangents from a point ( x1, y1) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 touches the circle
( x - a )2 + y 2 = a 2, then the locus of ( x1, y1) is
(a) a circle (b) a parabola (c) an ellipse (d) a hyperbola

5. 2 2
The locus of the mid-points of a chord of the circle x + y = 4, which subtends a right angle at the origin is
(a) x + y = 1 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 1 (c) x + y = 2 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 2
6. The length of tangents from P(1, - 1) and Q(3,3) to a circle are 2 and 6 respectively, then the length of tangent
from R( -2, - 7) to the same circle is
(a) 41 (b) 51 (c) 61 (d) 71
p
7. If the angle between the tangents drawn to x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 from (0,0) is , then
2
(a) g 2 + f 2 = 3c (b) g 2 + f 2 = 2c (c) g 2 + f 2 = 5c (d) g 2 + f 2 = 4c
8. The chords of contact of the pair of tangents drawn from each point on the line 2x + y = 4 to the circle
x 2 + y 2 = 1 pass through a fixed point
1 1 1 1
(a) (2, 4) (b) æç - , - ö÷ (c) æç , ö÷ (d) (-2, - 4)
è 2 4ø è 2 4ø
9. The length of tangent from (0, 0) to the circle 2( x 2 + y 2 ) + x - y + 5 = 0 is
5 5
(a) 5 (b) æç ö÷ (c) (d) 2
è 2ø 2
10. The perpendicular tangents to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 meet at P. Then, the locus of P has the equation
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 3a 2 (c) x 2 + y 2 = 4a 2 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 5a 2

11. The tangents to x 2 + y 2 = a 2 having inclinations a and b intersect at P. If cot a + cot b = 0, then the locus of P is
(a) x + y = 0 (b) x - y = 0 (c) xy = 0 (d) xy = 1
12. The exhaustive range of values of a such that the angle between the pair of tangents drawn from (a,a ) to the
æp ö
circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 2y - 6 = 0 lies in the range ç , p ÷ is
è3 ø
(a) (-1, 3) (b) (-5, - 3) È (3, 5) (c) (-3, 5) (d) (-3, - 1) È (3, 5)
13. 2 2 2
Distances from the origin to the centres of the three circles x + y - 2lx = c , where c is a constant and l is
available, are in GP. Prove that the lengths of tangents drawn from any point on the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2 to the
three circles are also in GP.
14. Find the area of the quadrilateral formed by a pair of tangents from the point (4, 5) to the circle
x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 2y - 11 = 0 and a pair of its radii.
15. If the length of the tangent from a point (f , g ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 be four times the length of the tangent
from it to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4x , show that 15f 2 + 15g 2 - 64f + 4 = 0 .
16. Find the equation of that chord of the circle x 2 + y 2 = 15 which is bisected at (3, 2).
17. The chords of contact of the pair of tangents to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 1 drawn from any point on the line
2x + y = 4 pass through the point ( a, b ), then find a 2 + b 2.
Session 6
Diameter of a Circle, Two Circles Touching
Each Other, Common Tangents to Two Circles,
Common Chord of Two Circles, Family of Circles

Diameter of a Circle Aliter : Let (h, k ) be the middle point of the chord
The locus of the middle points of a system of parallel y = mx + c of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2
chords of a circle is called a diameter of the circle. then, T = S 1 Þ xh + ky = h 2 + k 2
Let the circle be x 2 + y 2 = a 2 and equation of parallel h
slope = - = m Þ h + mk = 0
chord is k
y = mx + c
Hence, locus of mid-point is x +my = 0.
, y 2)
B (x 2
y= Remark
m
x+ The diameter of circle always passes through the centre of the
c circle and perpendicular to the parallel chords.
P
O Let circle is x 2 + y 2 = a2 and parallel chord be y = mx + c, then
equation of line ^ to y = mx + c is
er

A (x1, y1)
et
m

my + x + l = 0 …(i)
a
Di

which passes through origin (centre)

then, 0 + 0 + l =0 \ l =0
Then, equation of diameter from Eq. (i) is x + my = 0 .
Let P (h, k ) be the middle point of the chord y = mx + c .
Since, P is the mid-point of A ( x 1 y 1 ) and B( x 2 , y 2 ), then y Example 61. Find the equation of the diameter of
x1 + x2 y1 + y2 the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 which
= h and =k
2 2 corresponds to the chord ax + by + d = 0.
or x 1 + x 2 = 2h and y 1 + y 2 = 2k …(i) Sol. The diameter of circle passes through the centre of the
Q P (h, k ) lie on y = mx + c circle and perpendicular to the chord ax + by + d = 0 is
bx - ay + l = 0 …(i)
then, k = mh + c
which passes through centre of circle i.e. ( - g , - f )
or k - mh = c …(ii) Then, -bg + af + l = 0
Substituting y = mx + c in x 2 + y 2 = a 2 \ l = bg - af
From Eq. (i), the equation of the diameter is
then, x 2 + (mx + c ) 2 = a 2
bx - ay + bg - af = 0
or (1 + m 2 ) x 2 + 2mcx + c 2 - a 2 = 0 …(iii)
Let x 1 , x 2 are roots of Eq. (iii), then
x1 + x2 = -
2mc Two Circles Touching Each Other
1 +m2
Þ 2h = -
2m
(k - mh ) [from Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii)] 1. When two circles touch each other
(1 + m 2 ) externally
Þ h + m 2 h = -mk + m 2 h Þ h + mk = 0 Then, distance between their centres = sum of their radii
Hence, locus of (h, k ) is x + my = 0 i.e. |C 1 C 2 | = r1 + r2
 Chap 04 Circle 285

In such cases, the point of contact P divides the line \ C 1 º (1, 2),r1 = (1 + 4 ) or r1 = 5
joining C 1 and C 2 internally in the ratio r1 : r2 and C 2 º (0, 4 ),r 2 = 0 + 16 + 4 or r 2 = 2 5

Now, C 1C 2 = (1 - 0)2 + (2 - 4 )2

r1 r2 C 1C 2 = 5 = r 2 - r1
C1 P C2 Hence, the two circles touch each other internally.

y Example 63. Prove that the circles

C 1 P r1 x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + c 2 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 2by + c 2 = 0
Þ =
C 2 P r2 1 1 1
touch each other, if 2
+ 2
= .
If C1 º (x 1 , y 1 ) and C 2 º ( x 2 , y 2 ) a b c2
ær x +r x r y +r y ö Sol. Given circles are
then, coordinate of P is ç 1 2 2 1 , 1 2 2 1 ÷ x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + c 2 = 0 …(i)
è r1 + r2 r1 + r2 ø
2 2 2
and x + y + 2by + c = 0 …(ii)
Let C 1 and C 2 be the centres of circles Eqs. (i) and (ii),
2. When two Circles Touch each other respectively and r1 and r 2 be their radii, then
Internally C 1 = ( -a, 0), C 2 = (0, - b ),

Then, distance between their centres =Difference of their r1 = (a 2 - c 2 ) , r 2 = (b 2 - c 2 )

radii
Here, we do not find the two circles touch each other
i.e. | C 1 C 2 | = | r1 - r2 | internally or externally.
In such cases, the point of contact P divides the line For touch, | C 1 C 2 | = | r1 ± r 2 |
joining C 1 and C 2 externally in the ratio r1 : r2
or (a 2 + b 2 ) = | (a 2 - c 2 ) ± (b 2 - c 2 )|
On squaring
a 2 + b 2 = a 2 - c 2 + b 2 - c 2 ± 2 (a 2 - c 2 ) (b 2 - c 2 )
r2 or c 2 = ± a 2b 2 - c 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + c 4
C1 C2 P
Again, squaring,
r1 c 4 = a 2b 2 - c 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + c 4
1 1 1
or c 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) = a 2b 2 or 2
+ 2
=
a b c2
C 1 P r1
Þ =
C 2 P r2
If C 1 º ( x 1 , y 1 ) and C 2 º ( x 2 , y 2 ) Common Tangents to Two
ær x -r x r y -r y ö
then, coordinates of P is ç 1 2 2 1 , 1 2 2 1 ÷
Circles
è r1 - r2 r1 - r2 ø
Different Cases of Intersection of Two
y Example 62. Examine if the two circles
Circles :
x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4 y = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 8 y - 4 = 0 touch
Let the two circles be
each other externally or internally. ( x - x 1 ) 2 + (y - y 1 ) 2 = r12 …(i)
Sol. Given circles are
2 2
x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y = 0 …(i) and ( x - x 2 ) + (y - y 2 ) = r22 …(ii)
and x 2 + y 2 - 8y - 4 = 0 …(ii) with centres C 1 ( x 1 , y 1 ) and C 2 ( x 2 , y 2 ) and radii r1 and r2
Let centres and radii of circles Eqs. (i) and (ii) are respectively. Then following cases may arise :
represented by C 1, r1 and C 2 , r 2 , respectively.
286 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Case I : When |C 1 C 2 | > r1 + r2 i.e. the distance between the How to find transverse common tangent
centres is greater than the sum of their radii.
Direct common
Direct common tangents
tangents D
D
Q
r2
P P´ C2 C2
r2
T
r1 r1 T Q
1
Transverse common
C1 tangent
C1
Transverse common
tangents

Q Equation of circles are

Q C 1 º ( x 1 , y 1 ) , C 2 º ( x 2 ,y 2 )
S 1 º ( x - x 1 ) 2 + (y - y 1 ) 2 - r12 = 0
ær x -r x r y -r y ö
\ D º ç 1 2 2 1 , 1 2 2 1 ÷ º (a, b) (say) and S 2 º ( x - x 2 ) 2 + (y - y 2 ) 2 - r22 = 0
è r1 - r2 r1 - r2 ø
then, equation of common tangent is
ær x +r x r y +r y ö
and T ºç 1 2 2 1, 1 2 2 1÷ S1 - S2 = 0
è r1 + r2 r1 + r2 ø
which is same as equation of common chord.
º ( g, d) (say)
How to find direct common tangents Let equation Remark
In this case circles touch at one point i.e. Number of solutions of
of common tangent through D (a, b) is two circles is one.
y - b = m( x - a ) …(i)
Now, length of ^ from C 1 or C 2 on Eq. (i) = r1 or r2 Case III : When |r1 - r2 | < |C 1 C 2 | < r1 + r2
i.e. the distance between the centres is less than sum of
Then, we get two values of m.
their radii and greater than difference of their radii.
Substituting the values of m in Eq. (i), we get two direct
In this case two direct common tangents are real and
common tangents.
distinct while the transverse tangents are imaginary.
How to find transverse common tangents Let Direct common
equation of common tangent through T ( g, d) is tangents
D
y - d = M(x - g ) …(ii)
Now, length of ^ from C 1 or C 2 on Eq. (i) = r1 or r2
then, we get two values of M. C2
Substituting the values of M in Eq. (i), we get two
transverse common tangents. C1

Remark
In this case circles neither cut nor touch i.e. Number of
solutions of two circles is zero.
Remark
Case II : When |C 1 C 2 | = r1 + r2 In this case circles cuts at two points i.e. Number of solutions of
two circles is two.
i.e. the distance between the centres is equal to the sum of
their radii. Case IV : When | C 1 C 2 | = |r1 - r2 |, i.e. the distance
In this case two direct common tangents are real and between the centres is equal to the difference of their
distinct while the transverse tangents are coincident. radii.
 Chap 04 Circle 287

Tangent at the Common Tangents to two Circles

point of contact
If two circles with centres C 1 and C 2 and their radii are r1
and r2 , then
P
r2
Number of
Condition Figure
C2 common tangents
C1
(i) | C1C 2 | > r1 + r 2 4
r1

In this case two tangents are real and coincident while the
other two tangents are imaginary. (ii) | C1C 2 | = r1 + r 2 3

If circles are represented by S 1 = 0 and S 2 = 0, then

equation of common tangent is S 1 - S 2 = 0 .

Remark
If circles touch each other externally, i.e.| C1C2| = r1 + r2, then (iii) | r1 - r 2 | <| C1C 2 |< r1 + r 2 2
equation of tangent at the point of contact is
S1 - S2 = 0
Tangent at the
point of contact

(iv) | C1C 2 | = | r1 - r 2 | 1
r2 C2
P
r1

C1
(v) | C1C 2 | <| r1 - r 2 | 0

In this case circles touch at one point. Length of External Common Tangent and
i.e. Number of solutions of two circles is one.
Internal Common Tangent to Two Circles
Case V : When | C 1 C 2 | < | r1 - r2 | , i.e. the distance Length of external common tangent Lex = d 2 - (r1 - r2 ) 2
between the centres is less than the difference of their
and length of internal common tangent
radii.
A
r1–r2 Lex
d B
D
r2 r1 r2 r
2
C1 d
C2 C2
C1 r1 r1
r1+ r2 Lin
r2
A¢ Lin

A¢¢

In this case, all the four common tangents are imaginary. Lin = d 2 - (r1 + r2 ) 2 (Applicable only when d > r1 + r2 )
Remark where, d is the distance between the centres of two circles
In this case circles neither cut nor touch each other i.e. Number and r1 ,r2 are the radii of two circles, when |C 1 C 2 | = d .
of solution of two circles is zero.
288 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Hence, the circles do not intersect to each other.

Angle between Direct Common Tangents (DCT)
The direct common tangents meet AB produced at D, then
and Transverse Common Tangents (TCT) point D will divide C 2C 1 in the ratio 3 : 1 (externally).
Case I : If d > r1 + r2 , then æ 3(1) - 1( -3) 3(3) - 1(1) ö
Coordinates of D are ç , ÷ or (3, 4)
æ |r - r | ö è 3-1 3-1 ø
Angle between DCT = 2 sin -1 ç 1 2 ÷
è d ø and the point C divide C 2C 1 in the ratio 3 : 1 (internally)
æ r +r ö æ 3(1) + 1( -3) 3(3) + 1(1) ö
And angle between TCT = 2 sin -1 ç 1 2 ÷ then coordinates of C are ç , ÷ or
è d ø è 3+1 3+1 ø
(0, 5/2)
Case II : If d = r1 + r2 , then
Direct tangents : Any line through (3, 4) is
æ |r - r | ö
angle between DCT = 2 sin -1 ç 1 2 ÷ y - 4 = m( x - 3 )
è r1 + r2 ø Þ mx - y + 4 - 3m = 0 …(i)
and angle between TCT = p Apply the usual condition of tangency to any of the circle
Case III : If |r1 - r2 | < d < r1 + r2 , then m - 3 + 4 - 3m
= ±1
æ |r - r | ö m2 + 1
angle between DCT = 2 sin -1 ç 1 2 ÷
è d ø Þ ( -2m + 1)2 = m 2 + 1
Here, transverse common tangents are not possible . Þ 3m 2 - 4m = 0
Case IV : If d = |r1 - r2 | Þ m = 0, m = 4 / 3
Angle between DCT = p \ Equations of direct common tangents are
y = 4 and 4 x - 3y = 0
Here, transverse common tangents are not possible.
Transverse tangents : Any line through C (0, 5 / 2) is
Case V : If d <|r1 - r2 | y - 5 / 2 = mx
Here, tangents are not possible. or mx - y + 5 / 2 = 0 …(ii)
Apply the usual condition of tangency to any of the circle
y Example 64. Find all the common tangents to the m ×1 - 3 + 5 / 2
circles \ = ±1
m2 + 1
x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 6 y + 9 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 6 x - 2 y + 1 = 0.
1
Sol. The given circles are Þ m2 + - m = m2 + 1
4
x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 6x + 9 = 0 3
Þ 0 ×m2 - m - = 0
Þ ( x - 1) 2 + ( y - 3) 2 = 1 …(i) 4
2 2 \ m = ¥ and m = - 3 / 4
and x + y + 6x - 2y + 1 = 0
Hence, equations of transverse tangents are
Þ ( x + 3) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = 9 …(ii)
x = 0 and 3x + 4y - 10 = 0
Centres and radii of circles Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii) are
D y Example 65. Show that the common tangents to the
circles x 2 + y 2 - 6 x = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 2x = 0 form an
1 equilateral triangle.
3 )
(1, Sol. The given circles are
C1
3 C x 2 + y 2 - 6x = 0

C2 (– 3, 1) or ( x - 3) 2 + ( y - 0) 2 = 9 …(i)
2 2
A and x + y + 2x = 0
or ( x + 1) 2 + ( y - 0) 2 = 1 …(ii)
C 1 (1, 3), r1 = 1 Centres and radii of circles Eqs. (i) and (ii) are C 1(3, 0), r1 = 3
and C 2 ( -1, 0), r 2 = 1, respectively.
and C 2 ( -3, 1),r 2 = 3 respectively.
\ C 1C 2 = (16 + 4 ) = 2 5 Q C 1C 2 = [3 - ( -1)]2 + 0 = 4
\ C 1C 2 > r1 + r 2 \ C 1C 2 = r1 + r 2
 Chap 04 Circle 289

Hence, the two circles touch each other externally, y Example 66. Find the number of common tangents
therefore, there will be three common tangents. Equation of to the circles x 2 + y 2 - 8 x + 2y + 8 = 0 and
the common tangent at the point of contact is S1 - S 2 = 0
Þ ( x 2 + y 2 - 6x ) - ( x 2 + y 2 + 2x ) = 0 x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 6 y - 15 = 0.
Þ - 8x = 0 Sol. For x 2 + y 2 - 8x + 2y + 8 = 0
\ x =0 C 1 º ( 4, - 1), r1 = (16 + 1 - 8) = 3
L and for x + y 2 - 2x - 6y - 15 = 0
2

P C 2 º (1,3), r 2 = (1 + 9 + 15) = 5
M 3
1 Now, | C 1C 2 | = Distance between centres
1 3 (3, 0)
Q
C2 C1 = ( 4 - 1) 2 + ( - 1 - 3) 2 = 5
(–1, 0)
and r1 + r 2 = 3 + 5 = 8
R | r1 - r 2 | = |3 - 5| = 2
or | r1 - r 2 | <| C 1C 2 | < r1 + r 2
Hence, the two circles intersect at two distinct points.
Let the coordinates of Q be (h , k ), then Therefore, two tangents can be drawn.
QC 2 C 2 M 1
= =
QC 1 C 1L 3 y Example 67. Find the lengths of external and
\ QC 2 : QC 1 = 1 : 3
internal common tangents and also find the angle
between external common tangents and internal
1 × ( 3) - 3 × ( - 1)
\ h= = - 3 and k = 0 common tangents of the circles
1- 3
x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 8 y + 13 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 8 x - 2y + 8 = 0.
\ Q º ( - 3, 0)
Sol. The given circles are x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 8y + 13 = 0
Equation of line passing through Q( -3, 0) is
y - 0 = m( x + 3 ) Þ ( x + 1) 2 + ( y - 4 ) 2 = 22 …(i)
2 2
or mx - y + 3m = 0 …(iii) and x + y - 8x - 2y + 8 = 0
where, m is the slope of direct tangents since Eq. (iii) is the Þ ( x - 4 ) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = 32 …(ii)
common tangent (direct) of the circles Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
Centres and radii of circles Eqs. (i) and (ii) are C 1( -1, 4 ),
Length of perpendicular from centre of Eq. (ii) i.e. (–1, 0) to
r1 = 2 and C 2 ( 4,1), r 2 = 3 respectively.
the Eq. (iii) = radius of circle Eq. (ii)
| -m - 0 + 3m | \ | C 1C 2 | = d = (25 + 9 ) = 34
Þ = 1 or 4m 2 = m 2 + 1
2
m +1 Þ d > r1 + r 2
Hence, the circles do not intersect to each other.
Þ 3m 2 = 1
\ Lex = d 2 - (r1 - r 2 )2 = 34 - 1 = 33
1
\ m=±
3 and Lin = d 2 - (r1 + r 2 )2 = (34 - 25) = 3
From Eq. (iii), common tangents are (direct) Angle between external common tangents
x x æ |r - r | ö æ 1 ö
y= + 3 and y = - - 3 = 2sin -1 ç 1 2 ÷ = 2sin -1 ç
3 3 ÷
è d ø è 33 ø
Hence, all common tangents are x =0 …(iv) and angle between internal common tangent
x
y= + 3 …(v) ær + r ö æ 5 ö
3 = 2sin -1 ç 1 2 ÷ = 2sin -1 ç ÷
è d ø è 33 ø
x
and y=- - 3 …(vi)
3
Let P,Q,R be the point of intersection of lines Eqs.(iv), (v);
(v), (vi) and (iv), (vi) respectively, then
Common Chord of Two Circles
P º (0, 3); Q º ( -3, 0) and R º (0, - 3) The chord joining the points of intersection of two given
circles is called their common chord.
Now, PQ = QR = RP = 2 3
Theorem : The equation of common chord of two circles
Hence, DPQR is an equilateral triangle thus common
tangents form an equilateral triangle. S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
290 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

and S ¢ º x 2 + y 2 + 2g ¢ x + 2 f ¢y + c ¢ = 0 or (2x - a - b )( -a + b ) + (2y - b - a )( -b + a ) = 0

Þ 2x - a - b - 2y + b + a = 0
is 2 x ( g - g ¢ ) + 2y ( f - f ¢ ) + c - c ¢ = 0
Þ x -y =0
i.e. S - S¢ = 0
Proof : Q S = 0 and S ¢ = 0 P
be two intersecting circles.
C2 (a, b) P
Then, S - S ¢ = 0 or C1 M C1
2 x ( g - g ¢ ) + 2y ( f - f ¢ ) + c - c ¢ = 0
Q S´ = 0
is a first degree equation in M
S=0
x and y.
C2 ( b, a)
So, it represent a straight line. Also, this equation satisfied Q
by the intersecting points of two given circles S = 0 and
S ¢ = 0.
Hence, S - S ¢ = 0 represents the common chord of circles
S = 0 and S ¢ = 0 Now, C 1M = Length of perpendicular from C 1 (a, b ) on
Length of common chord : |a - b |
PQ ( x - y = 0) =
We have, PQ = 2( PM ) (QM is mid-point of PQ) 2
and C 1P = radius of the circle Eq. (i) = c
= 2 {(C 1 P ) 2 - (C 1 M ) 2 }
\ In DPC 1M , PM = ( PC 1 )2 - (C 1M )2
where, C 1 P = radius of the circle (S = 0)
(a - b )2
and C 1 M = length of perpendicular from C 1 on common = c2 -
chord PQ. 2

Corollary 1 : The common chord PQ of two circles (a - b )2

\ PQ = 2PM = 2 c 2 -
becomes of the maximum length when it is a diameter of 2
the smaller one between them. = 4c 2 - 2(a - b )2
Corollary 2 : Circle on the common chord a diameter, Also, when the circles touch, then chord PQ becomes the
then centre of the circle passing through P and Q lie on tangent and PQ = 0.
the common chord of two circles i.e. \ The condition of tangency is 4c 2 - 2(a - b )2 = 0.
S - S¢ = 0 i.e. 2c 2 = ( a - b ) 2
Corollary 3 : If the length of common chord is zero, then
the two circles touch each other and the common chord
becomes the common tangent to the two circles at the
common point of contact.
Family of Circles
1. The equation of the family of circles passing through the
y Example 68. Prove that the length of the common point of intersection of two given circles S = 0 and S¢ = 0
chord of the two circles : is given as
(x - a) 2 + (y - b) 2 = c 2 S + lS ¢ = 0 (where, l is a parameter, l ¹ -1)
2 2 2 2 2
and (x - b) + (y - a) = c is 4c - 2(a - b) .
Find also the condition when the given circles touch.
Sol. The equation of circles are
S1 º ( x - a )2 + (y - b )2 - c 2 = 0 …(i)
2 2 2
and S 2 º ( x - b ) + (y - a ) - c = 0 …(ii)
then equation of common chord is S1 - S 2 = 0 S=0 S′ = 0
S+λS′ = 0
Þ ( x - a )2 - ( x - b )2 + (y - b )2 - (y - a )2 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 291

2. The equation of the family of circles passing through the and if m is infinite, the family of circles is
point of intersection of circle S = 0 and a line L = 0 is ( x - x 1 ) 2 + (y - y 1 ) 2 + l( x - x 1 ) = 0
given as
(where, l is a parameter)
S + lL = 0 (where, l is a parameter)

S + λL = 0
(x1, y1)

S=0 y – y1 = m (x – x1)
L=0
6. Equation of the circles given in diagram are
3. The equation of the family of circles touching the circle
S = 0 and the line L = 0 at their point of contact P is ( x - x 1 )( x - x 2 ) + (y - y 1 ) (y - y 2 )
S + lL = 0 (where, l is a parameter) ± cot q {( x - x 1 )(y - y 2 ) - ( x - x 2 )(y - y 1 )} = 0

(x1, y1) (x2, y2)

P
= 0
λL
S+

S=0 L=0 θ

4. The equation of a family of circles passing through two y Example 69. Find the equation of the circle
given points P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) can be written in
passing through (1, 1) and the points of intersection
the form
of the circles
x + y 2 + 13 x - 3 y = 0 and 2 x 2 + 2 y 2 + 4x - 7 y - 25 = 0.
2

P (x1, y1 ) Sol. The given circles are

x 2 + y 2 + 13x - 3y = 0 …(i)
and 2x + 2y 2 + 4 x - 7y - 25 = 0
2

Q (x2, y2 ) 7 25
or x 2 + y 2 + 2x - y - =0 …(ii)
2 2
Equation of any circle passing through the point of
intersection of the circles Eqs. (i) and (ii) is
( x - x 1 )( x - x 2 ) + (y - y 1 )(y - y 2 )
æ 7 25 ö
( x 2 + y 2 + 13x - 3y ) + l ç x 2 + y 2 + 2x - y - ÷ = 0 …(iii)
x y 1 è 2 2ø
+ l x1 y1 1 =0 Its passes through (1, 1), then
x2 y2 1 æ 7 25 ö
(1 + 1 + 13 - 3) + l ç1 + 1 + 2 - - ÷ = 0
è 2 2ø
(where, l is a parameter) Þ 12 + l ( -12) = 0 \ l = 1
5. The equation of family of circles which touch Substituting the value of l in Eq. (iii), the required
y - y 1 = m( x - x 1 ) at ( x 1 , y 1 ) for any finite m is equation is
7 25
( x - x 1 ) 2 + (y - y 1 ) 2 x 2 + y 2 + 13x - 3y + x 2 + y 2 + 2x - y - =0
2 2
+ l {(y - y 1 ) - m( x - x 1 )} = 0 13 25
Þ 2x 2 + 2y 2 + 15x - y - =0
2 2
Þ 4 x 2 + 4y 2 + 30x - 13y - 25 = 0
292 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 70. Find the equation of the circle passing y Example 72. Find the equation of the circle passing
through the point of intersection of the circles through points of intersection of the circle
x 2 + y 2 - 6 x + 2y + 4 = 0, x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 4 y - 6 = 0 x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4 y + 4 = 0 and the line x + 2y = 4 which
and with its centre on the line y = x . touches the line x + 2y = 0.
Sol. Equation of any circle through the points of intersection Sol. Equation of any circle through points of intersection of
of given circles is the given circle and the line is
( x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 2y + 4 ) + l ( x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 4y - 6) = 0 ( x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y + 4 ) + l( x + 2y - 4 ) = 0
Þ x 2 (1 + l ) + y 2 (1 + l ) - 2x (3 - l ) + 2y (1 - 2l ) or x 2 + y 2 + ( l - 2)x + (2l - 4 )y + 4(1 - l ) = 0 …(i)
+ ( 4 - 6l ) = 0 It will touch the line x + 2y = 0, then solution of Eq. (i) and
2 x ( 3 - l ) 2y ( 1 - 2 l ) ( 4 - 6 l ) x = - 2y be unique.
or x 2 + y 2 - + + =0 …(i)
(1 + l ) (1 + l ) (1 + l) Hence, the roots of the equation
ì 3 - l 2l - 1ü ( -2y )2 + y 2 + ( l - 2)( -2y ) + (2l - 4 ) y + 4 (1 - l ) = 0
Its centre í , ý lies on the line y = x
î1 + l 1 + l þ or 5y 2 + 4(1 - l ) = 0
2l - 1 3 - l must be equal.
then = Þ l ¹ -1
1+ l 1+ l Then, 0 - 4 × 5 × 4(1 - l ) = 0 or 1 - l = 0 or l = 1
\ 2l - 1 = 3 - l or 3l = 4 From Eq. (i), the required circle is x 2 + y 2 - x - 2y = 0
\ l = 4 /3
y Example 73. Find the circle whose diameter is the
\Substituting the value of l = 4 / 3 in Eq. (i), we get the
required equation is common chord of the circles x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 3y + 1 = 0
7 x 2 + 7y 2 - 10x - 10y - 12 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 3y + 2 = 0.
y Example 71. Find the equation of the circle Sol. Given circles are
passing through the points of intersection of the S º x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 3y + 1 = 0
circles x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4 y - 4 = 0 and and S ¢ º x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 3y + 2 = 0
x 2 + y 2 - 10x - 12y + 40 = 0 and whose radius is 4. Hence, their common chord is S - S ¢ = 0
Sol. Equation of the any circle through the points of Þ - 2x - 1 = 0 or 2x + 1 = 0 …(i)
intersection of given circles is Now, the required circle must pass through the point of
( x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y - 4 ) intersection of S and S¢ .
Hence, its equation is S + lS ¢ = 0
+ l( x 2 + y 2 - 10x - 12y + 40) = 0 2 2
Þ ( x + y + 2x + 3y + 1)
Þ x 2 ( 1 + l ) + y 2 ( 1 + l ) - 2x ( 1 + 5l )
+ l ( x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 3y + 2) = 0
- 2y(2 + 6l ) - 4 + 40l = 0
Þ x 2 ( 1 + l ) + y 2 ( 1 + l ) + 2x ( 1 + 2l )
2 2 ( 1 + 5l ) (2 + 6l ) ( 40l - 4 )
or x + y - 2x - 2y + =0 + 3y (1 + l ) + (1 + 2l ) = 0
(1 + l ) (1 + l ) (1 + l )
( 1 + 2l ) ( 1 + 2l )
…(i) or x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 3y + = 0 …(ii)
Its radius (1 + l ) (1 + l )
2 2 æ 1 + 2l 3ö
æ 1 + 5l ö æ 2 + 6l ö æ 40l - 4 ö Its centre is ç - ,- ÷
ç ÷ +ç ÷ -ç ÷ =4 (given) è 1+ l 2ø
è1+ l ø è1+ l ø è 1+ l ø
But from Eq. (i), 2x + 1 = 0 is a diameter of this circle.
(1 + 5l )2 + (2 + 6l )2 - ( 40l - 4 )(1 + l ) Hence, its centre must lie on this line
Þ = 16
(1 + l )2 æ 1 + 2l ö
\ -2 ç ÷ +1=0
Þ 5l2 - 34 l - 7 = 0 è1+ l ø
or ( l - 7 ) ( 5l + 1) = 0 Þ -2 - 4 l + 1 + l = 0
1 Þ - 1 - 3l = 0
\ l = 7 or l = -
5 1
\ l=-
Substituting the values of l in Eq. (i), the required circles are 3
2x 2 + 2y 2 - 18x - 22y + 69 = 0 Hence, from Eq. (ii), the required circle is
and x 2 + y 2 - 2y - 15 = 0 2x 2 + 2y 2 + 2x + 6y + 1 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 293

y Example 74. If two curves, whose equations are Four concyclic points lie on a circle, then Eq. (i) represents
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 and a circle. Then,
coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 and coefficient of
a ¢ x 2 + 2h ¢ xy + b ¢ y 2 + 2g ¢ x + 2 f ¢ y + c ¢ = 0 intersect in xy = 0
a - b a¢ - b ¢ Þ a + la ¢ = b + lb ¢
four concyclic points, prove that =
h h¢ or ( a - b ) = - l( a ¢ - b ¢ ) …(ii)
Sol. The equation of family of curves passing through the and 2( h + h ¢ l ) = 0
points of intersection of two curves is h
or l=- …(iii)
(ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c ) h¢
+ l (a ¢ x 2 + 2h ¢ xy + b ¢ y 2 + 2g ¢ x + 2 f ¢ y + c ¢ ) = 0 Substituting the value of l from Eq. (iii) in Eq. (ii), then
a - b a¢ - b¢
or (a + la ¢ ) x 2 + 2xy (h + h ¢ l ) + (b + lb ¢ )y 2 =
h h¢
+ 2x ( g + l g ¢ ) + 2y ( f + lf ¢ ) + (c + l c ¢ ) = 0 …(i)

Exercise for Session 6

1. Circles x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 8y - 4 = 0
(a) touch each other internally (b) touch each other externally
(c) cuts each other at two points (d) None of these

2. The number of common tangents that can be drawn to the circles x 2 + y 2 - 4x - 6y - 3 = 0 and
x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 2y + 1 = 0 is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

3. 2 2 2 2
If one of the circles x + y + 2ax + c = 0 and x + y + 2bx + c = 0 lies within the other, then
(a) ab > 0, c > 0 (b) ab > 0, c < 0
(c) ab < 0, c > 0 (d) ab < 0, c < 0

4. The condition that the circle ( x - 3)2 + ( y - 4)2 = r 2 lies entirely within the circle x 2 + y 2 = R 2 is
(a) R + r £ 7 (b) R 2 + r 2 < 49
(c) R 2 - r 2 < 25 (d) R - r > 5

5. The circles whose equations are x 2 + y 2 + c 2 = 2ax and x 2 + y 2 + c 2 - 2by = 0 will touch one another
externally, if
1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) + = (b) + =
b2 c2 a2 c2 a2 b2
1 1 1 1 1 2
(c) + = (d) + =
a2 b2 c2 b2 c2 a2

6. Two circles with radii r1 and r2, r1 > r2 ³ 2, touch each other externally. If q be the angle between the direct
common tangents, then
ær + r ö ær - r ö
(a) q = sin-1 ç 1 2 ÷ (b) q = 2 sin-1 ç 1 2 ÷
è r1 - r2 ø è r1 + r2 ø
ær - r ö
(c) q = sin-1 ç 1 2 ÷ (d) None of these
è r1 + r2 ø

7. The circles x 2 + y 2 - 10x + 16 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 = r 2 intersect each other in two distinct points if
(a) r < 2 (b) r > 8 (c) 2 < r < 8 (d) 2 £ r £ 8

8. If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 22y + c = 0 bisects the circumference of the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 8y - d = 0 , then

c + d is equal to
(a) 40 (b) 50 (c) 60 (d) 70
294 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

9. Two circles x 2 + y 2 = 6 and x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 8 = 0 are given. Then, the equation of the circle through their points
of intersection and the point (1, 1) is
(a) x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 4 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - 3x + 1 = 0
2 2
(c) x + y - 4x + 2 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 1 = 0

10. The equation of the circle described on the common chord of the circles x 2 + y 2 + 2x = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 2y = 0
as diameter is
(a) x 2 + y 2 + x - y = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 - x + y = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 - x - y = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + x + y = 0

11. The equation of the diameter of the circle 3( x 2 + y 2 ) - 2x + 6y - 9 = 0 which is perpendicular to the line
2x + 3y = 12 is
(a) 3x - 2y + 3 = 0 (b) 3x - 2y - 3 = 0
(c) 3x - 2y + 1 = 0 (d) 3x - 2y - 1 = 0

12. If the curves ax 2 + 4xy + 2y 2 + x + y + 5 = 0 and ax 2 + 6xy + 5y 2 + 2x + 3y + 8 = 0 intersect at four concyclic

points, then the value of a is
(a) -6 (b) -4 (c) 4 (d) 6

13. Find the equation of the circle passing through the points of intersection of x 2 + y 2 + 13x - 3y = 0 and
2x 2 + 2y 2 + 4x - 7y - 25 = 0 and the point (1, 1).

14. Show that the common chord of the circles x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 4y + 9 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 6y + 23 = 0

pass through the centre of the second circle and find its length.

15. Prove that the circles x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + 2by = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 2a1x + 2b1y = 0 touch each other, if ab1 = a1 b .

16. Find the equations of common tangents to the circles x 2 + y 2 - 24x + 2y + 120 = 0 and
x 2 + y 2 + 20x - 6y - 116 = 0.
 .

Session 7
Angle of Intersection of Two Circles, Radical Axis, X¢

Radical Centre, Co-axial System of Circles,

Limiting Point, Image of the Circle by the Line
Mirror

Angle of Intersection of or
æ r 2 + r22 - d 2 ö
cos (180° - q ) = çç 1 ÷÷ (\ a = 180° - q )
Two Circles è 2r1 r2 ø
Let the two circles r12 + r22 - d 2
\ cosq = …(i)
S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 2r1 r2
and S ¢ º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1 x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 Orthogonal Intersection of Circles
intersect each other at the points P and Q.The angle q If the angle between the circles is 90°, i.e. q = 90°, then the
between two circles S = 0 and S ¢ = 0 is defined as the angle circles are said to be orthogonal circles or we say that
between the tangents to the two circles at the point of the circles cut each other orthogonally.
intersection. r12 + r22 - d 2
A´
Then, from Eq. (i), 0 =
B´ 2r1 r2
θ
0
S= P or r12 + r22 - d 2 = 0 or r12 + r22 = d 2
S´ = 0
r2
r1 α Þ g 2 + f 2 - c + g 12 + f 12 - c 1 = g 2 + f 2 + g 12
θ C2
d + f 12 - 2 gg 1 - 2 ff 1
C1
A
Q
or 2 gg 1 + 2 ff 1 = c + c 1
B
Remark
Equation of a circle cutting the three circles
C 1 and C 2 are the centres of circles x 2 + y 2 + 2gi x + 2fi y + ci = 0 ( i = 1, 2, 3) orthogonally is
S = 0 and S ¢ = 0, then x 2 + y2 x y 1
- c1 g1 f1 -1
C 1 º ( -g, - f ) and C 2 º ( -g 1 , - f 1 )
- c2 g 2 f2 -1
and radii of circles S = 0 and S ¢ = 0 are - c3 g 3 f3 -1

r1 = ( g 2 + f 2 - c ) and r2 = ( g 12 + f 12 - c 1 )
y Example 75. Find the angle between the circles
Let d = |C 1 C 2 | = Distance between their centres S : x 2 + y 2 - 4x + 6 y + 11 = 0
= ( -g + g 1 ) 2 + ( - f + f 1 ) 2 and S ¢ : x 2 + y 2 - 2 x + 8y + 13 = 0
Sol. Centres and radii of circles S and S¢ are
= ( g 2 + f 2 + g 12 + f 12 - 2 gg 1 - 2 ff 1 )
C 1(2, - 3), r1 = 2, C 2 (1, - 4 ), r 2 = 2.
æ r 2 +r 2 -d 2 ö æQa + q + 90° + 90° ö Distance between centres, d = | C 1C 2 |
Now, in DC1 PC 2 , cosa = çç 1 2 ÷÷ ç ÷
è 2r1 r2 ø è = 360° ø = ( 2 - 1) 2 + ( - 3 + 4 ) 2 = 2
296 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

If angle between the circles is q, then y Example 78. Find the equations of the two circles
r 2 + r 22 - d 2 which intersect the circles
cos q = 1
2r1r 2 x 2 + y 2 - 6 y + 1 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 4y + 1 = 0
2+ 4 -2 1 orthogonally and touch the line 3 x + 4y + 5 = 0.
cos q = =
2 × 2 ×2 2 Sol. Let the required circle be
\ q = 45°
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
y Example 76. Show that the circles and given circles are x 2 + y 2 - 6y + 1 = 0 …(ii)
x 2 + y 2 - 6 x + 4 y + 4 = 0 and and 2 2
x + y - 4y + 1 = 0 …(iii)
x 2 + y 2 + x + 4 y + 1 = 0 cut orthogonally. Since, Eq. (i) cuts Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii) orthogonally
Sol. Comparing the given circles by general equation of circles \ 2g ´ 0 + 2 f ´ ( - 3) = c + 1
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 or -6 f = c + 1 …(iv)
2 2 and 2g ´ 0 + 2 f ´ ( -2) = c + 1
and x + y + 2g 1x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0
then, g = - 3, f = 2, c = 4 or -4 f = c + 1 …(v)
1 Solving, Eqs. (iv) and (v), we get
and g 1 = , f 1 = 2, c 1 = 1 f = 0 and c = - 1
2
Then, given circles cut orthogonally, if From Eq. (i), x 2 + y 2 + 2gx - 1 = 0 …(vi)
2gg 1 + 2 ff 1 = c + c 1 2
centre and radius of Eq. (vi) are ( -g , 0) and ( g + 1),
1 respectively.
We have, 2 ´ ( - 3) ´ + 2 ´ 2 ´ 2 = 4 + 1
2 Since, 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 is tangent of Eq. (vi), then length of
Þ -3 + 8 = 5 or 5 = 5. perpendicular from ( -g , 0) to this line = radius of circle
| - 3g + 0 + 5|
Hence, the given circles cut each other orthogonally. or = ( g 2 + 1)
(9 + 16)
y Example 77. Find the equation of the circle which
cuts the circle x 2 + y 2 + 5x + 7 y - 4 = 0 orthogonally, | - 3g + 5| = 5 ( g 2 + 1)

has its centre on the line x = 2 and passes through the or ( -3g + 5)2 = 25( g 2 + 1)
point (4, - 1) . or 9 g 2 + 25 - 30g = 25g 2 + 25
Sol. Let the required circle be
or 16g 2 + 30g = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
15
Since, ( 4, - 1) lie on Eq. (i), then \ g = 0 and g = -
8
17 + 8g - 2 f + c = 0 …(ii)
Equations of circles are from Eq. (vi),
Centre of Eq. (i) is (- g , - f )
15
Since, centre lie on x = 2 then - g = 2 x 2 + y 2 - 1 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - x -1=0
\ g = -2 …(iii) 4
From Eq. (ii), 1 - 2 f + c = 0 …(iv) or x 2 + y 2 - 1 = 0 and 4 x 2 + 4y 2 - 15x - 4 = 0.
and given circle is
y Example 79. Prove that the two circles, which
x 2 + y 2 + 5x + 7y - 4 = 0 …(v)
Given the circles Eqs. (i) and (v) cut each other
pass through (0, a) and (0, - a ) and touch the line
orthogonally, y = mx + c , will cut orthogonally, if c 2 = a 2 (2 + m 2 )
5 7
\ 2g ´ + 2 f ´ = c - 4 Sol. Let the equation of the circles be
2 2
or 5g + 7 f = c - 4 x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + d = 0 …(i)
-10 + 7 f = c - 4 [from Eq. (iii)] Since, these circles pass through (0, a ) and (0, - a ), then
or -6 + 7 f - c = 0 …(vi) a 2 + 2 fa + d = 0 …(ii)
Solving Eqs. (iv) and (vi), we get and a 2 - 2 fa + d = 0 …(iii)
f = 1 and c = 1 2
Solving, Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii), we get f = 0 and d = - a .
Substituting the values of g, f, c in Eq. (i), we get
Substituting these values of f and d in Eq. (i), we obtain
x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 2y + 1 = 0 x 2 + y 2 + 2gx - a 2 = 0 …(iv)
 Chap 04 Circle 297

Now, y = mx + c touch this circle, therefore, length of the or c = -4

perpendicular from the centre = radius Substituting the values of g , f , c in Eq. (i), then required
| -mg - 0 + c | circle is
= ( g 2 + a2 )
1+m 2 x 2 + y 2 - 16x - 18y - 4 = 0
(c - mg )2 = (1 + m 2 )( g 2 + a 2 )
or g 2 + 2mcg + a 2 (1 + m 2 ) - c 2 = 0
Let g 1, g 2 are the roots of this equation
Radical Axis
\ g 1g 2 = a 2 (1 + m 2 ) - c 2 …(v) The radical axis of two circles is the locus of a point which
moves such that the lengths of the tangents drawn from it
Now, the equations of the two circles represented by
Eq. (iv) are
to the two circles are equal.
x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1x - a 2 = 0 Consider, S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
2 2 2 2 2
and x + y + 2g 2 x - a = 0. and S ¢ º x + y + 2g 1 x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 …(ii)
These two circles will be cuts orthogonal, if Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be a point such that
2g 1g 2 + 0 = - a 2 - a 2 | PA| = | PB|
or g 1g 2 = - a 2 …(vi)
Þ ( x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c )
From Eqs. (v) and (vi),
-a 2 = a 2 ( 1 + m 2 ) - c 2 = ( x 12 + y 12 + 2 g 1 x 1 + 2 f 1 y 1 + c 1 )
or c 2 = a 2 (2 + m 2 ) On squaring, x 12 + y 12 + 2 gx 1 + 2 fy 1 + c
which is the required condition.
= x 12 + y 12 + 2 g 1 x 1 + 2 f 1 y 1 + c 1
y Example 80. Find the equation of the circle which Þ 2 ( g - g 1 ) x 1 + 2( f - f 1 ) y 1 + c - c 1 = 0
cuts orthogonally each of the three circles given below
\ Locus of P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
:
x 2 + y 2 - 2 x + 3 y - 7 = 0, x 2 + y 2 + 5 x - 5 y + 9 = 0 2 ( g - g 1 ) x + 2( f - f 1 )y + c - c 1 = 0
P (x1, y1)
and x 2 + y 2 + 7 x - 9x + 29 = 0.
Sol. Let the required circle be
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
B
Since, it is orthogonal to three given circles respectively,
A
therefore
3
2g ´ ( - 1) + 2 f ´ = c - 7 C1 C2
2
or - 2g + 3 f = c - 7 …(ii) S=0
5 5
æ ö S´ = 0
2g ´ + 2 f ´ ç - ÷ = c + 9
2 è 2ø
P (x1, y1)
or 5g - 5 f = c + 9 …(iii)
7 æ 9ö
and 2g ´ + 2 f ´ ç - ÷ = c + 29
2 è 2ø
or 7 g - 9 f = c + 29 …(iv)
B
Subtracting, Eq. (ii) from Eq. (iii),
A
7 g - 8 f = 16 …(v)
and subtracting Eq. (iii) from Eq. (iv),
C1 C2
2g - 4 f = 20 …(vi)
Solving Eq. (v) and Eq. (vi), we get
g = - 8 and f = - 9
Putting the values of g and f in Eq. (iii)
which is the required equation of radical axis of the given
-40 + 45 = c + 9
circles. Clearly this is a straight line.
Þ 5=c +9
298 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Some Properties of the Radical Axis \ m 1m 2 = - 1

(i) The radical axis and common chord are Hence, C 1 C 2 and radical axis are perpendicular to
identical : Since, the radical axis and common chord each other.
of two circles S = 0 and S ¢ = 0 are the same straight (iii) The radical axis bisects common tangents of two
line S - S ¢ = 0, they are identical. The only difference circles : Let AB be the common tangent. If it meets
is that the common chord exists only if the circles the radical axis LM in M, then MA and MB are two
intersect in two real points, while the radical axis tangents to the circles. Hence, MA = MB since lengths
exists for all pair of circles irrespective of their of tangents are equal from any point on radical axis.
position. Hence, radical axis bisects the common tangent AB.
Radical axis Common tangent M B
A

C1 C2 C1 C2
C1 L C2

Non-intersecting circles Touching circles

Common chord
T T

C1 C2 A B A
C1 C
C1 C2 2

Intersecting circles

The position of the radical axis of the two circles If the two circles touch each other externally or
geometrically is shown below: internally, then A and B coincide. In this case the
P (x1, y1) common tangent itself becomes the radical axis.
(iv) The radical axis of three circles taken in pairs
B are concurrent : Let the equations of three circles be
A
R
S 1 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1 x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 …(i)
2 2
S 2 º x + y + 2g 2 x + 2 f 2y + c 2 = 0 …(ii)
C1 C2
Q
S= 0
S 3 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 3 x + 2 f 3y + c 3 = 0 …(iii)
S´ = 0 The radical axis of the above three circles taken in
From Euclidian geometry pairs are given by
( PA ) 2 = PR × PQ = ( PB ) 2 S 1 - S 2 º 2 x ( g 1 - g 2 ) + 2y ( f 1 - f 2 )
+ c 1 - c 2 = 0 …(iv)
(ii) The radical axis is perpendicular to the straight
S 2 - S 3 º 2 x ( g 2 - g 3 ) + 2y ( f 2 - f 3 )
line which joins the centres of the circles :
+ c 2 - c 3 = 0 …(v)
Consider, S º x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i) S 3 - S 1 º 2 x ( g 3 - g 1 ) + 2y ( f 3 - f 1 )
and S 1 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1 x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 …(ii) + c 3 - c 1 = 0 …(vi)
Since, C 1 º ( -g, - f ) and C 2 º ( -g 1 , - f 1 ) are the Adding Eqs. (iv), (v) and (vi), we find LHS vanished
centres of the circles Eqs. (i) and (ii), then slope of identically. Thus, the three lines are concurrent.
-f + f f - f1 (v) If two circles cut a third circle orthogonally, the
C 1C 2 = 1 = = m1 (say) radical axis of the two circles will pass through
-g 1 + g g - g 1
the centre of the third circle.
Equation of the radical axis is OR
2( g - g 1 ) x + 2 ( f - f 1 )y + c - c 1 = 0 The locus of the centre of a circle cutting two
(g - g1 ) given circles orthogonally is the radical axis of
Slope of radical axis is - = m2 (say)
f - f1 the two circles.
 Chap 04 Circle 299

Let S 1 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1 x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 …(i) Aliter : If two circles touch each other, then

distance between their centres = sum or difference of their
S 2 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 2 x + 2 f 2y + c 2 = 0 …(ii) radii
S 3 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 3 x + 2 f 3y + c 3 = 0 …(iii) ( g - g ¢ )2 + ( f - f ¢ )2 = ( g 2 + f 2 ) ± ( g ¢ 2 + f ¢ 2 )

Since, Eqs. (i) and (ii) both cut Eq. (iii) orthogonally or (g 2 + f 2
+ g ¢ 2 + f ¢ 2 - 2gg ¢ - 2 ff ¢ )
\ 2g 1 g 3 + 2 f 1 f 3 = c 1 + c 3 = ( g 2 + f 2 ) ± ( g ¢2 + f ¢2 )
and 2g 2 g 3 + 2 f 2 f 3 = c 2 + c 3 On squaring, we have
Subtracting, we get g2 + f 2
+ g ¢ 2 + f ¢ 2 - 2gg ¢ - 2 ff ¢
2g 3 ( g 1 - g 2 ) + 2 f 3 ( f 1 - f 2 ) = c 1 - c 2 …(iv)
= g2 + f 2
+ g ¢2 + f ¢2± 2 ( g 2 + f 2 ) ( g ¢2 + f ¢2 )
Now, radical axis of Eqs. (i) and (ii) is
or ( gg ¢ + ff ¢ ) = ± ( g 2 + f 2 )( g ¢ 2 + f ¢ 2 )
S1 - S2 = 0
or 2 x ( g 1 - g 2 ) + 2y ( f 1 - f 2 ) + c 1 - c 2 = 0 Again, on squaring both sides, we get
g 2 g ¢ 2 + f 2 f ¢ 2 + 2gg ¢ ff ¢ = g 2 g ¢ 2
Since, it will pass through the centre of Eq. (iii) circle
+ g 2 f ¢2 + f 2g ¢2 + f 2 f ¢2
\ -2 g 3 ( g 1 - g 2 ) - 2 f 3 ( f 1 - f 2 ) + c 1 - c 2 = 0
or 2 g 3 ( g 1 - g 2 ) + 2 f 3 ( f 1 - f 2 ) = c 1 - c 2 …(v) or g 2 f ¢ 2 + f 2 g ¢ 2 - 2gg ¢ ff ¢ = 0

which is true by Eq. (iv), or ( gf ¢ - g ¢ f )2 = 0

or gf ¢ - g ¢ f = 0
Remark or gf ¢ = g ¢ f
Radical axis need not always pass through the mid-point of the
line joining the centres of the two circles. y Example 82. A and B are two fixed points and P
moves so that PA = nPB. Show that locus of P is a
y Example 81. If two circles x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy = 0 circle and for different values of n all the circles have a
and x 2 + y 2 + 2g ¢ x + 2 f ¢ y = 0 touch each other, then common radical axis.
f ¢ g = fg ¢. Sol. Let A º (a , 0), B º ( -a , 0) and P º (h , k )
Sol. If two circles touch each other, then their radical axis is \ PA = (h - a )2 + k 2
their common tangent.
\ Radical axis of two circles is PB = (h + a )2 + k 2
( x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy ) - ( x 2 + y 2 + 2g ¢ x + 2 f ¢ y ) = 0 Since, PA = nPB
or 2x ( g - g ¢ ) + 2y ( f - f ¢ ) = 0 or ( PA )2 = n 2 ( PB )2
or x ( g - g ¢ ) + y( f - f ¢ ) = 0 …(i) Þ {(h - a )2 + k 2 } = n 2 {(h + a )2 + k 2 }
2 2
If this touches the circle x + y + 2gx + 2 fy = 0, then the Þ (h 2 + k 2 - 2ah + a 2 ) = n 2 (h 2 + k 2 + 2ah + a 2 )
length of perpendicular from its centre ( - g , - f ) to (i)
Þ (1 - n 2 )h 2 + (1 - n 2 )k 2 - 2ah (1 + n 2 )
=radius ( g 2 + f 2 ) of the circle
+ (1 - n 2 )a 2 = 0
| - g(g - g ¢ ) - f ( f - f ¢ ) |
i.e. = g2 + f 2
(1 + n 2 )
( g - g ¢ )2 + ( f - f ¢ )2 or h 2 + k 2 - 2ah + a2 = 0
(1 - n 2 )
or {( -( g 2 + f 2 ) + gg ¢ + ff ¢ )} 2 æ1 + n2 ö
2 2 2 2 \ Locus of P is x 2 + y 2 - çç 2÷
÷ 2ax + a 2 = 0
= (g + f ) { (g - g ¢ ) + ( f + f ¢ ) } è1 - n ø
or ( g + f ) + ( gg ¢ + ff ¢ )2 - 2( g 2 + f 2 )( gg ¢ + ff ¢ )
2 2 2
which is a circle. For different values of n.
2 2 2 2 2 2 If two different values of n are n1 and n 2 , then circles are
= ( g + f ){( g + f ) + ( g ¢ + f ¢ ) - 2 ( gg ¢ + ff ¢ )}
or ( gg ¢ + ff ¢ )2 = ( g 2 + f 2 )( g ¢ 2 + f ¢ 2 ) æ 1 + n12 ö
x2 + y2 - ç 2
÷ 2ax + a = 0 …(i)
è 1 - n12 ø
On simplifying, 2gg ¢ ff ¢ = g 2 f ¢ 2 + f 2 g ¢ 2
æ 1 + n 22 ö
or ( gf ¢ - g ¢ f )2 = 0 and x2 + y2 - ç 2
÷ 2ax + a = 0 …(ii)
è 1 - n 22 ø
or gf ¢ = g ¢ f
300 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ Radical axis of Eqs. (i) and (ii) is S1 = 0 …(i)

ìï 1 + n 22 1 + n12 ü S2 = 0 …(ii)
2ax í 2
- ý=0
ïî 1 - n 2 1 - n12 þ S3 =0 …(iii)
or x = 0 or Y-axis. L
S1 = 0 S2 = 0
Hence, for different values of n the circles have a common
radical axis.

y Example 83. Show that the difference of the O

squares of the tangents to two coplanar circles from
any point P in the plane of the circles varies as the
perpendicular from P on their radical axis. Also,
prove that the locus of a point such that the M N
difference of the squares of the tangents from it to S3 = 0
two given circles is constant is a line parallel to their
Let OL, OM and ON be radical axes of the pair sets of
radical axis.
circles
Sol. Let the two circles be {S 1 = 0, S 2 = 0 }, {S 3 = 0, S 1 = 0}
S1 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0 …(i)
and {S 2 = 0, S 3 = 0 } respectively.
2 2
and S 2 º x + y + 2g 2 x + 2 f 2y + c 2 = 0 …(ii) Equations of OL, OM and ON are respectively
and let P = (h , k )
S1 - S2 = 0 …(iv)
\ Radical axis of Eqs. (i) and (ii) is
S 3 - S1 = 0 …(v)
2( g 1 - g 2 )x + 2( f 1 - f 2 )y + c 1 - c 2 = 0 …(iii)
Let length of tangents from P (h , k ) on Eqs. (i) and (ii) are l1 S2 - S 3 = 0 …(vi)
and l 2 , then Let the straight lines Eqs. (iv) and (v) i.e. OL and OM meet
l1 = S1 = (h 2 + k 2 + 2g 1h + 2 f 1k + c 1 ) in O. The equation of any straight line passing through O is
(S 1 - S 2 ) + l (S 3 - S 1 ) = 0
and l 2 = S 2 = (h 2 + k 2 + 2g 2h + 2 f 2k + c 2 )
where l is any constant.
According to the question,
l12 - l 22 = 2( g 1 - g 2 )h + 2( f 1 - f 2 ) k + c 1 - c 2 …(iv)
For l = 1 this equation becomes
Let p be the perpendicular distance from P (h , k ) on Eq. (iii),
S2 - S 3 = 0
| 2( g 1 - g 2 )h + 2( f 1 - f 2 )k + c 1 - c 2 | which is, by Eq. (vi), equation of ON.
\ p= …(v)
4( g 1 - g 2 ) 2 + 4( f 1 - f 2 ) 2 Thus, the third radical axis also passes through the point
where the Eqs. (iv) and (v) meet. In the above figure O is
From Eqs. (iv) and (v), we get
the radical centre.
| l12 - l 22 |
p=
2 ( g 1 - g 2 )2 + ( f 1 - f 2 )2 Properties of Radical Centre
| l12 - l 22 | 1. Coordinates of radical centre can be found by solving
or = 2 ( g 1 - g 2 )2 + ( f 1 - f 2 )2 = constant the equations
p
\ | l12 - l 22 | µ p S1 = S2 = S 3 = 0
Locus of P (h , k ) in Eq. (iv) is 2. The radical centre of three circles described on
2( g 1 - g 2 )x + 2( f 1 - f 2 )y + c 1 - c 2 = (l 12 - l 22 )
the sides of a triangle as diameters is the
orthocentre of the triangle :
a line which is parallel to Eq. (iii).
A
F E

Radical Centre I

The radical axes of three circles, taken in pairs, meet in a

point, which is called their radical centre. Let the three
B
circles be D C
 Chap 04 Circle 301

Draw perpendicular from A on BC. æ 1ö

2g ç - ÷ + 2 f ( 3) = c + 5
\ ÐADB = ÐADC = p / 2 è 2ø

Therefore, the circles whose diameters are AB and or -g + 6f = c + 5 …(ii)

AC passes through D and A. Hence, AD is their æ5ö
and 2g ç ÷ + 2 f ( -4 ) = c + 15
radical axis. Similarly, the radical axis of the circles è2ø
on AB and BC as diameters is the perpendicular line or 5g - 8 f = c + 15 …(iii)
from B on CA and radical axis of the circles on BC Solving, Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
and CA as diameters is the perpendicular line from C g = - 3, f = - 2 and c = - 14
on AB. Hence, the radial axis of three circles meet in \ Equation of required circle is
a point. This point I is radical centre but here radical x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 4y - 14 = 0
centre is the point of intersection of altitudes i.e.
AD, BE and CF. Hence, radical centre = orthocentre. y Example 85. Find the radical centre of three
3. The radical centre of three given circles will be the circles described on the three sides 4 x - 7 y + 10 = 0,
centre of a fourth circle which cuts all the three x + y - 5 = 0 and 7 x + 4 y - 15 = 0 of a triangle as
circles orthogonally and the radius of the fourth circle diameters.
is the length of tangent drawn from radical centre of
Sol. Since, the radical centre of three circles described on the
the three given circles to any of these circles. sides of a triangle as diameters is the orthocentre of the
Let the fourth circle be ( x - h ) 2 + (y - k ) 2 = r 2 , where triangle.
(h, k ) is centre of this circle and r be the radius. The \ Radical centre = orthocentre
centre of circle is the radical centre of the given Given sides are 4 x - 7y + 10 = 0 …(i)
circles and r is the length of tangent from (h, k) to any x +y -5=0 …(ii)
of the given three circles. 7 x + 4y - 15 = 0 …(iii)
Since, lines Eqs. (i) and (iii) are perpendiculars the point of
y Example 84. Find the radical centre of circles intersection of Eqs. (i) and (iii) is (1, 2), the orthocentre of
x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 2y + 1 = 0 , x 2 + y 2 - x + 6 y + 5 = 0 and the triangle. Hence, radical centre is (1, 2).
x 2 + y 2 + 5x - 8 y + 15 = 0. Also, find the equation of y Example 86. Prove that if the four points of
the circle cutting them orthogonally. intersection of the circles x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0 and
Sol. : Given circles are x 2 + y 2 + a ¢ x + b ¢ y + c ¢ = 0 by the lines Ax + By + C = 0
S1 º x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 2y + 1 = 0
and A ¢ x + B ¢ y + C ¢ = 0 respectively are concyclic, then
S 2 º x 2 + y 2 - x + 6y + 5 = 0
a - a¢ b - b ¢ c - c ¢
S 3 º x 2 + y 2 + 5x - 8y + 15 = 0 A B C =0
Equations of two radical axes are A¢ B¢ C¢
S1 - S 2 º 4 x - 4y - 4 = 0 or x - y - 1 = 0
and S 2 - S 3 º - 6x + 14y - 10 = 0 or 3x - 7 x + 5 = 0 Sol. The given circles and given lines are
Solving them the radical centre is (3, 2) also, if r is the S1 º x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0
length of the tangent drawn from the radical centre (3, 2) to
S2 º x 2 + y 2 + a¢ x + b¢y + c ¢ = 0
any one of the given circles, say S1, we have
r = S1 = 32 + 22 + 3 × 3 + 2 × 2 + 1 = 27 L1 º Ax + By + C = 0
L2 º A ¢ x + B¢y + C ¢ = 0
Hence, (3, 2) is the centre and 27 is the radius of the circle
intersecting them orthogonally. S1 = 0 S2 = 0
N
\ Its equation is P R
( x - 3)2 + (y - 2)2 = r 2 = 27 or x 2 + y 2 - 6x - 4y - 14 = 0
Aliter : Let x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 be the
equation of the circle cutting the given circles orthogonally. L1 = 0 Q S
L2 = 0
S=0
æ3ö
\ 2g ç ÷ + 2 f ( 1) = c + 1
è2ø
or 3g + 2 f = c + 1 …(i) S1 – S2 = 0
302 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Let S1 = 0 meet L1 = 0 at two points P and Q and S 2 = 0 meet )=0

S1 +λ (S1–S2) = 0
L 2 = 0 at two points R and S. λ( S 1–S 2
S 1+
Further P,Q, R and S are given to be concyclic. Let the circle
through them is S2 = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + l = 0 …(i)
Radical axis of S1 = 0 and S 2 = 0 is
S1 - S 2 = 0 S1 = 0 S1 − S2 = 0

Þ (a - a ¢ )x + (b - b ¢ )y + c - c ¢ = 0 …(ii) S 1 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 1 x + 2 f 1y + c 1 = 0
The radical axis of S1 = 0 and S = 0 is L1 = 0 and S 2 º x 2 + y 2 + 2g 2 x + 2 f 2y + c 2 = 0
or Ax + By + C = 0 …(iii)
respectively is
and radical axis of S 2 = 0 and S = 0 is L 2 = 0 S 1 + l(S 1 - S 2 ) = 0 ( l ¹ -1)
or A ¢ x + B¢y + C ¢ = 0 …(iv) or S 2 + l1 (S 1 - S 2 ) = 0 ( l1 ¹ - 1)
Since, the radical axes of any three circles taken in pairs are Other formS 1 + lS 2 = 0 ( l ¹ -1)
concurrent. (i.e. lines Eqs. (ii), (iii) and (iv) are concurrent). (3) The equation of a system of co-axial circles in the
a - a¢ b - b¢ c - c ¢ simplest form is
we have A B C =0
A¢ B¢ C¢ x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + c = 0
where, g is variable and c, a constant.
The common radical axis is the Y-axis
Co-axial System of Circles (since centre on X-axis) and the equation of a system
of other co-axial circles in the simplest form is
A system (or a family) of circles, every pair of which have
the same radical axis, are called co-axial circles. x 2 + y 2 + 2 fy + c = 0
(1) The equation of a system of co-axial circles, when the where, f is variable and c, a constant
equation of the radical axis and of one circle of the (since centre on Y-axis). The common radical axis is
system are the X-axis.

y Example 87. Find the equation of the system of

circles co-axial with the circles
S +λP = 0

S +λP = 0 x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 2 y + 1 = 0
and x 2 + y 2 - 2 x + 6 y - 6 = 0
S +λP = 0
S=0 Also, find the equation of that particular circle
P=0 whose centre lies on the radical axis.
P º lx + my + n = 0 Sol. Given circles are
and 2 2
S º x + y + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 S1 º x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 2y + 1 = 0
and S 2 º x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 6y - 6 = 0
respectively, is
\ Radical axis is S1 - S 2 = 0
S + lP = 0 (l is an arbitrary constant)
i.e. 6x - 4y + 7 = 0 …(i)
(2) The equation of a co-axial system of circles, where Now, system of co-axial circle is
the equation of any two circles of the system are
S1 + l (S1 - S 2 ) = 0
S1 + λS2 = 0 Þ ( x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 2y + 1) + l(6x - 4y + 7 ) = 0
Þ x 2 + y 2 + 2x (2 + 3l ) + 2y (1 - 2l ) + 1 + 7 l = 0 …(ii)
Its centre [ -(2 + 3l ), - (1 - 2l )] lies on Eq. (i)
\ 6 ´ - ( 2 + 3l ) - 4 ´ - ( 1 - 2l ) + 7 = 0
S1 = 0 S2 = 0 or -12 - 18l + 4 - 8l + 7 = 0
or -26 l - 1 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 303

1 ¾¾ ¾¾ ¾¾
\ l=- Now, BC × t 12 + CA × t 22 + AB t 32
26
Substituting the value of l in Eq. (ii), the equation of circle = S ( g 2 - g 3 ) (h 2 + k 2 + 2g 1h + c )
is = (h 2 + k 2 + c ) S ( g 2 - g 3 ) + 2h S g 1( g 2 - g 3 )
æ 3ö æ 2ö 7
x 2 + y 2 + 2x ç2 - ÷ + 2y ç1 + ÷ + 1 - =0 = (h 2 + k 2 + c )( g 2 - g 3 + g 3 - g 1 + g 1 - g 2 )
è 26 ø è 26 ø 26
+ 2h { g 1( g 2 - g 3 ) + g 2 ( g 3 - g 1 ) + g 3 ( g 1 - g 2 )}
Þ 26( x 2 + y 2 ) + 98x + 56y + 9 = 0
= (h 2 + k 2 + c )(0) + 2h (0) = 0
y Example 88. Prove that the tangents from any point which proves the result.
of a fixed circle of co-axial system to two other fixed
circles of the system are in a constant ratio.
Sol. Let the equations of the circles be x 2 + y 2 + 2g i x + c = 0,
Limiting Point
i = 1,2, 3. Since, all the three circles are fixed Limiting points of system of co-axial circles are the
g 1, g 2 and g 3 are constants. centres of the point circles belonging to the family (Circles
Let P (h , k ) be any point on the first circle, so that whose radii are zero are called point circles).
h 2 + k 2 + 2g 1h + c = 0 …(i) 1. Limiting points of the co-axial system
Let PQ and PR be the tangents from P on the other two Let the circle is
circles
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + c = 0 …(i)
2 2
\ PQ = (h + k + 2g 2h + c )
where, g is variable and c is constant.
and PR = (h 2 + k 2 + 2g 3h + c ) \ Centre and the radius of Eq. (i) are ( -g, 0 ) and
( PQ )2 h 2 + k 2 + 2g 2h + c ( g 2 - c ) , respectively. Let
\ =
( PR )2 h 2 + k 2 + 2g 3h + c
g2 - c = 0
-2g 1h + 2g 2h
= [from Eq. (i)]
-2g 1h + 2g 3h \ g =± c
g 2 - g1 Thus, we get the two limiting points of the given
= = constant
g 3 - g1 co-axial system as
because g 1, g 2 , g 3 are constants. ( c , 0 ) and ( - c , 0 )
y Example 89. If A, B, C be the centres of three Clearly the above limiting points are real and
co-axial circles and t 1 , t 2 , t 3 be the lengths of the distinct, real and coincident or imaginary according
tangents to them from any point, prove that as c > , = , < 0
¾¾ ¾¾ ¾¾
BC × t 12 + CA × t 22 + AB t 32 = 0
2. System of co-axial circles whose two
limiting point are given :
Sol. Let the equations of three circles are
x 2 + y 2 + 2g i x + c = 0, i = 1, 2, 3, . Let (a, b) and (g , d) be the two given limiting points.
Then, the corresponding point circles with zero radii
According to the question
are
A º ( - g 1, 0) , B º ( - g 2 , 0), C º ( - g 3 , 0)
Let any point be P (h , k ) ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b) 2 = 0
\ t 1 = h 2 + k 2 + 2g 1h + c and ( x - g ) 2 + (y - d)2 = 0
t 2 = h 2 + k 2 + 2g 2h + c or x 2 + y 2 - 2ax - 2by + a 2 + b2 = 0
t 3 = h 2 + k 2 + 2g 3h + c and x 2 + y 2 - 2 gx - 2 dy + g 2 + d2 = 0
¾¾ The equation of co-axial system is
and AB = ( g 1 - g 2 )
¾¾ ( x 2 + y 2 - 2ax - 2by + a 2 + b2 )
BC = ( g 2 - g 3 )
+l( x 2 + y 2 - 2 gx - 2 dy + g 2 + d2 ) = 0
¾¾
and CA = ( g 3 - g 1 ) where, l ¹ -1 is a variable parameter.
304 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Þ x 2 (1 + l) + y 2 (1 + l) - 2 x (a + gl) y Example 91. If the origin be one limiting point of a

system of co-axial circles of which
- 2y(b + dl) + (a 2 + b2 ) + l( g 2 + d2 ) =0
x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 4 y + 25 = 0 is a member, find the
2( a + gl) (b + dl)
or x2 +y2 - x -2 y other limiting point.
(1 + l) (1 + l)
Sol. Equation of circle with origin as limiting point is
( a 2 + b2 ) + l( g 2 + d2 ) ( x - 0)2 + (y - 0)2 = 0 or x 2 + y 2 = 0
+ =0
(1 + l) belongs to the system of co-axial circles of which one
æ ( a + gl) (b + dl) ö member is
Centre of this circle is ç , ÷ …(i) x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 4y + 25 = 0
è (1 + l) (1 + l) ø
Hence, the equation of the whole system is
For limiting point, ( x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 4y + 25) + l( x 2 + y 2 ) = 0
Radius
or x 2 (1 + l ) + y 2 (1 + l ) + 3x + 4y + 25 = 0
( a + gl) 2 ( b + dl ) 2 ( a 2 + b2 ) + l( g 2 + d2 ) 3 4 25
= + - =0 or x2 + y2 + x+ y+ =0 …(i)
(1 + l) 2 (1 + l) 2 (1 + l) (1 + l ) (1 + l ) (1 + l )
After solving, find l . Substituting value of l in Eq. (i), æ 3 2 ö
\ Its centre = ç - ,- ÷ …(ii)
we get the limiting point of co-axial system. è 2(1 + l ) (1 + l ) ø
Radius of Eq. (i) can be zero for limiting point, then
y Example 90. Find the coordinates of the limiting 9 4 25
+ - =0
points of the system of circles determined by the two 4( 1 + l ) 2
(1 + l ) 2
(1 + l )
circles 9 + 16 - 100(1 + l ) = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 5 x + y + 4 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 10x - 4y - 1 = 0 1 3
Þ 1 +l = or l = -
4 4
Sol. The given circles are
æ -3 -2 ö
S1 º x 2 + y 2 + 5x + y + 4 = 0 From Eq. (ii), ç , ÷
è 2(1 - 3 / 4 ) (1 - 3 / 4 ) ø
and S 2 º x 2 + y 2 + 10x - 4y - 1 = 0
or ( -6, - 8) is the other limiting point of the system.
\ Equation of the co-axial system of circles is S1 + lS 2 = 0
or ( x 2 + y 2 + 5x + y + 4 ) y Example 92. Prove that the limiting points of the
2 2
+ l( x + y + 10x - 4y - 1) = 0 system
2 2 x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + c + l(x 2 + y 2 + 2 fx + k ) = 0
or x ( 1 + l ) + y ( 1 + l ) + 5x ( 1 + 2l )
c k
+ y (1 - 4 l ) + ( 4 - l ) = 0 subtend a right angle at the origin, if 2 + 2 = 2 .
5 ( 1 + 2l ) (1 - 4 l ) (4 - l) g f
2 2
or x +y + x+ y+ =0
(1 + l ) (1 + l ) (1 + l ) Sol. The given circle is
The centre of this circles is x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + c + l( x 2 + y 2 + 2 fy + k ) = 0
æ - 5( 1 + 2l ) ( 1 - 4 l ) ö
ç ,- ÷ …(i) or (1 + l )x 2 + (1 + l )y 2 + 2gx + 2 fyl + c + kl = 0
è 2 (1 + l ) 2 (1 + l ) ø
2g 2 fl c + kl
2 2
or x 2 + y 2 + x+ y+ =0 …(i)
25 (1 + 2l ) (1 - 4 l ) (4 - l) (1 + l ) (1 + l ) (1 + l )
Radius = + - =0
4 (1 + l )2 4 (1 + l )2 (1 + l ) æ -g - f l ö
Its centre is ç , ÷ …(ii)
2 2 è1 + l 1 + l ø
or 25 (1 + 2l ) + (1 - 4 l ) - 4 ( 4 - l ) (1 + l ) = 0
or 25 ( 4 l2 + 4 l + 1) + (16l2 - 8l + 1) - 4 ( - l2 + 3l + 4 ) = 0 B

or 120l2 + 80l + 10 = 0 or 12l2 + 8l + 1 = 0

or ( 6l + 1) ( 2l + 1) = 0
1 1
i.e. and - l=-
6 2 90°
Substituting these values of l in Eq. (i), we get the points O (0, 0) A
(–2, –1) and (0, – 3) which are the required limiting points.
 Chap 04 Circle 305

Radius of circle Eq. (i) is =0 ( x - 1) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 = 0

g2 f 2 l2 (c + kl ) or x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y + 5 = 0 ¼(i)
Þ 2
+ 2
- =0
(1 + l ) (1 + l ) (1 + l ) and 2
( x - 4 ) + ( y - 3) = 0 2

2 2 2
or l (f - k ) - l( k + c ) + g - c = 0 or x + y 2 - 8x - 6y + 25 = 0
2
¼(ii)
which is a quadratic in l. Let roots be l1 and l 2 . Therefore, the corresponding system of co-axial circles is
k +c g2 - c ( x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y + 5)
\ l1 + l 2 = 2 and l1l 2 = 2
f -k f -k + l( x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 6y + 25) = 0 ¼(iii)
then limiting points are [from Eq. (ii)] It passes through origin, then
æ - g - f l1 ö æ -g - f l2 ö 5 + 25l = 0
Aç , ÷ and B ç , ÷
è 1 + l1 1 + l1 ø è1 + l2 1 + l2 ø 1
\ l=-
But given that AB subtend a right angle at the origin. 5
\ Slope of OA ´ Slope of OB = - 1 Substituting the value of l in Eq. (iii), the required circle is
æ - f l1 ö æ - f l 2 ö 5( x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y + 5)
ç ÷ ç ÷ 2 2
Þ ç 1 + l1 ÷ ´ ç 1 + l 2 ÷ = -1 - ( x + y - 8x - 6y + 25) = 0
ç -g ÷ ç -g ÷ or 4 x 2 + 4y 2 - 2x - 14y = 0
ç ÷ ç ÷
è 1 + l1 ø è 1 + l 2 ø
or 2x 2 + 2y 2 - x - 7y = 0
f l1 f l 2
or ´ = -1
g g
or f 2 l1l 2 + g 2 = 0
(g 2 - c )
Image of the Circle by
or f 2
(f 2 -k)
+g =0 2
the Line Mirror
or 2g 2 f 2 - cf 2 - kg 2 = 0 Let the circle be x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 f y +c = 0 and line mirror
c k is lx + my +n = 0 in this condition, radius of circle remains
or 2= 2
+ 2
g f unchanged but centres changes. Let the centre of imaged
circle be ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
y Example 93. Find the radical axis of co-axial system x 1 - ( - g ) y 1 - ( - f ) - 2 ( -lg -mf +c )
of circles whose limiting points are (–1,2) and (2, 3). Then, = =
l m (l 2 +m 2 )
Sol. Equations of circles with limiting points are (–1, 2) and
(2,3) are (l 2 g -m 2 g + 2ml f - 2 nl )
we get, x 1 =
( x + 1) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 = 0 (l 2 +m 2 )
or x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 4y + 5 = 0 ¼(i) (m 2 f - l 2 f + 2ml g - 2mn )
and y1 =
and ( x - 2) 2 + ( y - 3) 2 = 0 (l 2 +m 2 )
or x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 6y + 13 = 0 ¼(ii)
respectively.
\ Radical axis of circles Eqs. (i) and (ii) is C2
r
( x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 4y + 5)
- ( x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 6y + 13) = 0 (– g, – f)
r
lx +

imaged circle
or 6x + 2y - 8 = 0
my

C1
+

or 3x + y - 4 = 0
n=
0

y Example 94. Find the equation of the circle which given circle
passes through the origin and belongs to the co-axial
of circles whose limiting points are (1,2) and (4,3). \ Required imaged circle is ( x - x 1 ) 2 +(y - y 1 ) 2 = r 2
Sol. Equations of circles whose limiting points are (1,2) and where, r = ( g 2 + f 2 - c )
(4,3) are
306 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 95. Find the equation of the image of x 1 - ( -8) y1 - 12

=
the circle x 2 + y 2 + 16 x - 24 y + 183 = 0 by the line 4 7
-2 ( 4( -8) + 7(12) + 13)
mirror 4 x + 7 y + 13 = 0. =
(42 + 72 )
Sol. The given circle and line are x 1 + 8 y1 - 12
x 2 + y 2 + 16x - 24y + 183 = 0 ¼(i) Þ = = -2
4 7
and 4 x + 7y + 13 = 0 ¼(ii) \ x 1 = - 16 , y1 = - 2
Centre and radius of circle Eq. (i) are (-8,12) and 5, \ Equation of the imaged circle is ( x + 16)2 + (y + 2)2 = 52
respectively. Let the centre of the imaged circle be ( x 1,y1 ).
or x 2 + y 2 + 32 x + 4y + 235 = 0
Hence, ( x 1,y1 ) be the image of the point ( -8, 12) with respect
to the line 4 x + 7y + 13 = 0, then

Exercise for Session 7

1. The circles x 2 + y 2 + x + y = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + x - y = 0 intersect at an angle of
(a) p / 6 (b) p / 4 (c) p / 3 (d) p / 2

2. If the circles of same radius a and centres at (2, 3) and (5, 6) cut orthogonally, then a equals to
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

3. 2 2 2 2
If the circles x + y + 2x + 2ky + 6 = 0 and x + y + 2ky + k = 0 intersect orthogonally, k is
3 3 3 3
(a) 2 or - (b) -2 or - (c) 2 or (d) -2 or
2 2 2 2

4. If a circle passes through the point (a,b ) and cuts the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 orthogonally, then the locus of its centre
is
(a) 2ax + 2by + (a 2 + b 2 + 4) = 0 (b) 2ax + 2by - (a 2 + b 2 + 4) = 0
2 2
(c) 2ax - 2by + (a + b + 4) = 0 (d) 2ax - 2by - (a 2 + b 2 + 4) = 0

5. The locus of the centre of the circle which cuts orthogonally the circle x 2 + y 2 - 20x + 4 = 0 and which touches
x = 2 is
(a) x 2 = 16y (b) x 2 = 16y + 4
(c) y 2 = 16x (d) y 2 = 16x + 4

6. The equation of a circle which cuts the three circles x 2 + y 2 - 3x - 6y + 14 = 0, x 2 + y 2 - x - 4y + 8 = 0

and x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 6y + 9 = 0 orthogonally is
(a) x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y + 1 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y + 1 = 0
2 2
(c) x + y - 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y - 1 = 0

7. The equation of radical axis of the circles x 2 + y 2 + x - y + 2 = 0 and 3x 2 + 3y 2 - 4x - 12 = 0 is

(a) 2x 2 + 2y 2 - 5x + y - 14 = 0 (b) 7x - 3y + 18 = 0
(c) 5x - y + 14 = 0 (d) None of these

8. The radical centre of the circles x + y = 1, x + y + 10y + 24 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 - 8x + 15 = 0 is

2 2 2 2

(a) (2, 5 / 2) (b) (-2, 5 / 2)

(c) (-2, - 5 / 2) (d) (2, - 5 / 2)

9. If (1,2) is a limiting point of the co-axial system of circles containing the circle x 2 + y 2 + x - 5y + 9 = 0, then the
equation of the radical axis is
(a) x - 9y + 4 = 0 (b) 3x - y + 4 = 0
(c) x + 3y - 4 = 0 (d) 9x + y - 4 = 0
 Chap 04 Circle 307

9
10. The limiting points of the system of circles represented by the equation 2( x 2 + y 2 ) + lx + = 0 are
2
3 9
(a) æç ± , 0ö÷ (b) (0, 0) and æç , 0ö÷
è 2 ø è2 ø
9
(c) æç ± , 0ö÷ (d) (±3, 0)
è 2 ø

11. One of the limiting points of the co-axial system of circles containing the circles x 2 + y 2 - 4 = 0 and
x 2 + y 2 - x - y = 0 is
(a) ( 2, 2 ) (b) (- 2, 2 )
(c) (- 2 , – 2 ) (d) None of these

12. The point (2, 3) is a limiting point of a co-axial system of circles of which x 2 + y 2 = 9 is a member. The
coordinates of the other limiting point is given by
18 27 9 6
(a) æç , ö÷ (b) æç , ö÷
è 13 13 ø è 13 13 ø
18 27 18 9
(c) æç ,- ö÷ (d) æç - , - ö÷
è 13 13 ø è 13 13 ø

13. Two circles are drawn through the points (a, 5a ) and (4a, a ) to touch the Y-axis. Prove that they intersect at
æ 40 ö
angle tan-1ç ÷ .
è9ø

14. Find the equation of the circle which cuts orthogonally the circle x 2 + y 2 - 6x + 4y - 3 = 0, passes through (3,0)
and touches the axis of y.

15. Tangents are drawn to the circles x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 6y - 19 = 0, x 2 + y 2 = 9 from any point on the line 2x + 3y = 5.
Prove that their lengths are equal.
16. Find the coordinates of the point from which the lengths of the tangents to the following three circles be equal
3x 2 + 3y 2 + 4x - 6y - 1 = 0, 2x 2 + 2y 2 - 3x - 2y - 4 = 0 and 2x 2 + 2y 2 - x + y - 1 = 0

17. Find the equation of a circle which is co-axial with the circles x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 2y + 1 = 0 and
3
x 2 + y 2 - x + 3y - = 0 and having its centre on the radical axis of these circles.
2

18. Find the radical axis of a co-axial system of circles whose limiting points are (1, 2) and (3 , 4).
 Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember
1 If the lines a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0 and a2 x + b2 y + c 2 = 0 cut Remark
the X-axis and Y-axis in four concyclic points, then Equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle formed
a1 a2 = b1 b2 . by the lines ar x + br y + c r = 0, where r = 1, 2 , 3, is :
2 If two conic sections a12 + b12
a1 b1
a1 x 2 + 2 h1 xy + b1 y 2 + 2 g1 x + 2 f1 y + c1 = 0 and a1 x + b1 y + c1
a2 x 2 + 2 h2 xy + b2 y 2 + 2 g 2 x + 2 f2 y + c 2 = 0 will intersect a22 + b22
a -b h a2 b2 = 0
each other in four concyclic points, if 1 1 = 1 . a2 x + b2 y + c 2
a2 - b2 h2 a32 + b32
a3 b3
3 If the circle S1 = 0, bisects the circumference of the circle a3 x + b3 y + c 3
S 2 = 0, then their common chord will be the diameter of
10 Equation of circle circumscribing a quadrilateral whose
the circle S 2 = 0.
sides in order are represented by the lines
4 The radius of the director circle of a given circle is 2
L1 = 0, L2 = 0, L3 = 0 and L4 = 0 is given by
times the radius of the given circle.
L1 L3 + lL2 L4 = 0
5 The point of intersection of the tangents at the points
A
P (acos a , asin a ) and Q (acos b, asin b ) on the circle
x 2 + y 2 = a2 is
L3 = 0 D
æ æ a + bö æ a + bö ö
ç acos çè ÷ asin ç
ø è 2 ø÷
÷ L4 = 0
ç 2 ÷
, B
ç æ a - bö æ a - bö ÷
ç cos çè ÷ cos ç ÷
è 2 ø ÷ø L2 = 0
è 2 ø
6 If the tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 at the point (a, b) L1 = 0
C
meets the coordinates axes at the points A and B and O is
r4
the origin, then the area of the DOAB is . provided coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 and
2 ab
coefficient of xy = 0.
7 The length of the common chord of the circles
x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + bx + ay + c = 0 is 11 The locus of the middle point of a chord of a circle
subtending a right angle at a given point will be a circle.
1
(a + b)2 - 4c . 12 The length of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle
2
x 2 + y 2 = a2 is a 3.
8 The length of the common chord of the circles
2 ab 13 The distance between the chord of contact of tangents to
( x - a)2 + y 2 = a2 and x 2 + ( y - b)2 = b2 is . x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 from the origin and the point
a2 + b2
|g 2 + f 2 - c|
9 Family of circles circumscribing A (g, f ) is .
a triangle whose sides are 2 (g 2 + f 2 )
given by L1 = 0, L2 = 0 and 14 The shortest chord of a circle passing through a point P
L3 = 0 is given by inside the circle is the chord whose middle point is P.
L1L2 + lL2 L3 + mL3 L1 = 0 L3 = 0 L2 = 0
15 The length of transverse common tangent < the length of
provided coefficient of xy = 0
direct common tangent.
and coefficient of x 2 =
B
coefficient of y 2 .
L1 = 0 C
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 10 multiple choice examples. ⇒ (3 − 4 λ )2 − (5 + 7 λ )(1 + λ ) = 0
Each example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. ⇒ 9 − 16λ 2 − 24 λ − 5 − 5λ − 7 λ − 7 λ 2 = 0
⇒ 9 λ 2 − 36λ + 4 = 0
l Ex. 1 Two distinct chords drawn from the point ( p, q ) on 36 ± (36)2 − 4.9.4
λ=
the circle x 2 + y 2 = px + qy , where pq ≠ 0, are bisected by 29
.
the X-axis. Then, 4 2
∴ λ =2±
(a) | p | =|q | (b) p 2 = 8q 2 (c) p 2 < 8q 2 (d) p 2 > 8q 2 3

Sol. (d)
P (p, q) l Ex. 3 If f ( x + y ) = f ( x ) ⋅ f (y ) for all x and y, f (1) = 2
and α n = f (n ), n ∈N , then the equation of the circle having
X′
M
X (α 1 , α 2 ) and (α 3 , α 4 ) as the ends of its one diameter is
(l, 0)
(a) ( x − 2)( x − 8 ) + (y − 4 )(y − 16 ) = 0
(b) ( x − 4 )( x − 8 ) + (y − 2)(y − 16 ) = 0
Q (h
, –q
) (c) ( x − 2)( x − 16 ) + (y − 4 )(y − 8 ) = 0
(d) ( x − 6 )( x − 8 ) + (y − 5)(y − 6 ) = 0
Suppose chord bisect at M( λ , 0 ), then other end point of chord
is (h, − q ) Sol. (a) Q f ( x + y ) = f ( x ). f (y ) …(i)
p +h
where, λ= Q f ( 1) = 2
2
In Eq. (i), Put x = y = 1,
which lie on x 2 + y 2 = px + qy
then f (2) = f (1). f (1) = 22
or h + q = ph − q
2 2 2
Now, in Eq. (i), x = 1,y = 2,then
⇒ h 2 − ph + 2q 2 = 0 f (3) = f (1) f (2) = 22
. 2 = 23
for two distinct chords, B 2 − 4 AC > 0 Hence, f (n ) = 2n
or p 2 − 4 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 2q 2 > 0 ∴ αn = f (n ) = 2n ∀n ∈ N
or p 2 > 8q 2 (α1,α 2 ) ≡ (2, 4 )
and (α 3 ,α 4 ) ≡ (8,16)
l Ex. 2 The values of λ for which the circle Equation of circle in diametric form is
x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 5 + λ( x 2 + y 2 − 8 x + 7 ) = 0 dwindles into a ( x − 2)( x − 8) + (y − 4 )(y − 16) = 0
point are
2 2 2 4 2 4 2 l Ex. 4 Two circles of radii a and b touching each other
(a) 1 ± (b) 2 ± (c) 2 ± (d) 1 ±
3 3 3 3 externally, are inscribed in the area bounded by
1
Sol. (c) The given circle is y = (1 − x 2 ) and the X-axis. If b = , then a is equal to
2
x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 5 + λ( x 2 + y 2 − 8x + 7 ) = 0
1 1
or x 2 ( 1 + λ ) + y 2 ( 1 − λ ) + ( 6 − 8 λ ) x +( 5 + 7 λ ) = 0 (a) (b)
4 8
 6 − 8λ  5 + 7λ  1 1
⇒ x2 +y2 +  x +   =0 (c) (d)
 1+ λ   1+ λ  2 2
This will dwindle into a point circle, then radius of the Sol. (a) Let the centres of circles be C 1 and C 2 , then
circle = 0
C 1 ≡ ( (1 − 2a ),a )
2
3 − 4λ  5 + 7λ  C 2 ≡ ( (1 − 2b ),b )
  +0−   =0 and
 1+ λ   1+ λ 
310 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y Sol. (d) Let f ( x ,y ) = x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c

⇒ f ( x ,1) = x 2 + 1 + 2gx + 2 f + c ≡ ( x − 2)2 (given)
b
C2 then, g = −2, 2 f + c = 3 …(i)
1– b C1
b a Also, f (1, x ) = 1 + x + 2g + 2 fx + c ≡ ( x − 0)
2 2
(given)
X¢ 1– a a X
(–1, 0) O (1, 0) then, f = 0, 2g + c = −1 …(ii)
Y¢ b
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Now, C 1C 2 = a + b g = −2, f = 0,c = 3
 1 
2 2 Thus, equation of circle is
( (1 − 2a ))2 + a −   = a +  
1 1
⇒  Qb = 2
  2   2 x 2 + y 2 − 4x + 3 = 0
2 2
 1  1
or 1 − 2a + a −  = a +  l Ex. 7 A variable circle C has the equation
 2   2
x + y 2 − 2(t 2 − 3t + 1) x − 2(t 2 + 2t )y + t = 0, where t is a
2
1 1
or 1 − 2a + a 2 + − a = a2 + + a parameter. If the power of point (a , b ) w.r.t. the circle C is
4 4
constant, then the ordered pair (a , b ) is
1
or a= 1 1  1 1
4 (a)  ,−  (b)  , 
 10 10  10 10
l Ex. 5 There are two circles whose equations are  1 1  1 1
(c)  − ,  (d)  − , − 
x 2 + y 2 = 9 and x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 6y + n 2 = 0, n ∈I . If the two  10 10  10 10
circles having exactly two common tangents, then the number
Sol. (c) QC : x 2 + y 2 − 2(t 2 − 3t + 1)x − 2(t 2 + 2t )y + t = 0
of possible values of n is
given power of circle = constant
(a) 2 (b) 7 (c) 8 (d) 9
∴ a 2 + b 2 − 2(t 2 − 3t + 1 )a − 2 (t 2 + 2t )b + t = constant
Sol. (d) Given circles are S1: x 2 + y 2 − 9 = 0
⇒ −2(a + b )t 2 + (6a − 4b + 1)t + (a 2 + b 2 − 2a ) = constant
Its centre C 1:(0,0) and radius r1 = 3
and S 2 : x 2 + y 2 − 8x − 6y + n 2 = 0 Q Power of circle is constant, then
a + b = 0 and 6a − 4b + 1 = 0
Its centre C 2 :( 4,3) and radius r 2 = (25 − n 2 ) or b = −a, then 6a + 4a + 1 = 0
Here, 25 − n 2 > 0 ⇒ −5 < n < 5 …(i) 1 1
∴ a = − ,b =
For exactly two common tangents, 10 10
r1 + r 2 > C 1C 2  1 1
Hence, required ordered pair is  − , 
⇒ 3 + (25 − n ) > ( 4 + 3 )
2 2 2  10 10

⇒ (25 − n 2 ) > 2 l Ex. 8 If the radii of the circles ( x − 1) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 1 and

⇒ 25 − n 2 > 4 ( x − 7 ) 2 + (y − 10 ) 2 = 4 are increasing uniformly w.r.t. time
or n 2 < 21 as 0.3 unit/s and 0.4 unit/s respectively, then they will touch
or − 21 < n < 21 …(ii) each other at t equals to
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get (a) 45 s (b) 90 s
− 21 < n < 21 (c) 11 s (d) 135 s
Sol. (b) Given circles are S1 :( x − 1)2 + (y − 2)2 = 1
But n ∈ I . So, n = −4, − 3, − 2, − 1,0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Hence, number of possible values of n is 9. Its centre C 1 :(1,2) and radius r1 = 1
and S 2 :( x − 7 )2 + (y − 10)2 = 4
l Ex. 6 Suppose f ( x , y ) = 0 is the equation of a circle such
Its centre C 2 :(7,10) and radius r 2 = 2
that f ( x ,1) = 0 has equal roots (each equal to 2) and
Q C 1C 2 = 10 > r1 + r 2
f (1, x ) = 0 also has equal roots (each equal to zero). The
Hence, the two circles are separated.
equation of circle is
The radii of the two circles at time t are (1 + 03
. t ) and
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 3 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 4y + 3 = 0
(2 + 0.4 t )
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 3 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 3 = 0
 Chap 4 Circle 311

For the two circles touch each other, then or ( m − 2) 2 = 1 + m 2

C 1C 2 = |(1 + 03. t ) ± (2 + 0.4 t )| or m = ∞, m = 3 / 4
⇒ 10 = |3 + 07. t | or 10 = | −1 − 01 . t| Hence, the slope of the reflected ray is 3/4.
⇒ . t + 3 = ±10 or −1 − 01
07 . t = ±10 Thus, the equation of the incident ray is
⇒ t = 10 or t = 90 [Qt > 0] 3
y + 4 = − ( x + 2)
4
l Ex. 9 A light ray gets reflected from x = −2. If the
i.e. 4y + 3x + 22 = 0
reflected ray touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 and the point of
incident is ( −2, − 4 ), then the equation of the incident ray is l Ex. 10 If a circle having centre at (α, β) radius r
(a) 4y + 3 x + 22 = 0 (b) 3y + 4 x + 20 = 0
completely lies with in two lines x + y = 2 and x + y = −2,
(c) 4y + 2x + 20 = 0 (d) y + x + 6 = 0
then, min.(| α + β + 2|,| α + β − 2| ) is
Sol. (a) Any tangent of x 2 + y 2 = 4 is y = mx ± 2 (1 + m 2 ). (a) greater than 2 r
If it passes through ( −2, − 4 ), then −4 = −2m ± 2 (1 + m 2 ) (b) less than 2 r
Y
(c) greater than 2r
(d) less than 2r

X¢ X
Sol. (a) Minimum distance of the centre from line > radius of
O  | α + β + 2| | α + β − 2| 
x=–2

circle i.e. min.  , >r

 2 2 
Y¢ or min.{| α + β + 2|,| α + β − 2| } > 2r
(–2, –4)

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n
This section contains 5 multiple choice examples. Each lEx. 12 Let x , y be real variable satisfying
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which
MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
x + y 2 + 8 x − 10y − 40 = 0. Let
2

a = max. { ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 } and
l Ex. 11 If point P ( x , y ) is called a lattice point, if x , y ∈I .
b = min. { ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 }, then
Then, the total number of lattice points in the interior of the
(a) a + b = 18 (b) a − b = 4 2
circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 , a ≠ 0 cannot be
(c) a + b = 4 2 (d) a ⋅ b = 73
(a) 202 (b) 203 (c) 204 (d) 205
Sol. (a, b, d) Given circle is
Sol. (a, b, c) Given circle is x 2 + y 2 = a 2 …(i)
x 2 + y 2 + 8x − 10y − 40 = 0
Clearly (0, 0) will belong the interior of circle Eq. (i). Also,
other points interior to circle Eq. (i) will have the coordinates The centre and radius of the circle are ( −4,5 ) and 9,
of the form respectively.
( ± λ , 0 ),( 0, ± λ ), where λ2 < a 2 Distance of the centre ( −4,5 ) from ( −2, 3 ) is
(4 + 4) = 2 2.
and ( ± λ , ± µ ) and ( ± µ, ± λ ), where λ2 + µ 2 < a 2 and λ ,µ ∈ I
Therefore, a =2 2 +9
∴Number of lattice points in the interior of the circle will be of
the form 1 + 4r + 8t, where r , t = 0, 1,2, … and b = −2 2 + 9
∴Number of such points must be of the form 4n + 1, where ∴ a + b = 18, a − b = 4 2, ab = 73
n = 0, 1, 2, …
312 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

l Ex. 13 The equation of the tangents drawn from the Sol. (b, c) Given circle is
origin to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 2rx − 2hy + h 2 = 0, are ( x − 4 )2 + (y − 8)2 = 20
(a) x = 0 or x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 16y + 60 = 0 …(i)
(b) y = 0 Equation of chord of contact from ( −2, 0 ) is
(c) (h 2 − r 2 )x − 2rhy = 0 −2 ⋅ x + 0 ⋅ y − 4( x − 2 ) − 8(y + 0 ) + 60 = 0
(d) (h 2 − r 2 )x + 2rhy = 0 or 3 x + 4y − 34 = 0 …(ii)
Sol. (a, c) The given equation is ( x − r ) + (y − h ) = r 2 2 2 Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
2
tangents are x = 0  34 − 3 x   34 − 3 x 
x2 +   − 8 x − 16   + 60 = 0
 4   4 
Y
or 5 x 2 − 28 x − 12 = 0
or ( x − 6 )(5 x + 2 ) = 0
r 2
D C ( r, h ) or x = 6, −
r 5
 2 44
Therefore, the points are (6, 4 ) and  − ,  .
a E  5 5
a
p/2–2a
X
O l Ex. 15 The equations of four circles are
( x ± a ) 2 + (y ± a ) 2 = a 2 . The radius of a circle touching all
π 
and y = x tan  − 2α  = x cot 2α the four circles is
2 
(a) ( 2 − 1)a (b) 2 2 a
x(1 − tan 2 α )
= (c) ( 2 + 1)a (d) ( 2 + 2 )a
2 tan α
 r 2
Sol. (a, c) Radius of inner circle = OR − a
x 1 − 2 
 h   r = (a 2 + a 2 ) − a
y = Qin ∆ODC , tanα = 
r  h
2  = a( 2 − 1 )
 h
Radius of outer circle = OR + RQ
or (h 2 − r 2 ) x − 2rhy = 0
= a 2 + a = a( 2 + 1 )
l Ex. 14 Point M moved on the circle Y

( x − 4 ) 2 + (y − 8 ) 2 = 20. Then it broke away from it and

Q
moving along a tangent to the circle cut the X-axis at point
(a, a)
( −2, 0 ). The coordinates of the point on the circle at which the R
Pa
moving point broke away is X′ X
O
 42 36   2 44 
(a)  ,  (b)  − , 
5 5  5 5
(c) (6, 4 ) (d) (2, 4)

Y′
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 2 solved paragraphs based upon for fixed point −3 x + y + 4 = 0, x − y − 3 = 0
each of the paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have 1 5
to be answered. Each of these questions has four choices ∴ x = ,y = −
2 2
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
 1 −5 
∴ Fixed point is  , 
Paragraph I 2 2 
(Q. Nos. 16 to 18) 18. (c) Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 6x + 4 = 0.
Consider the relation 4l 2 − 5m 2 + 6l + 1 = 0, where l , m ∈R. ∴ S1 = (2 ) 2 + ( −3 ) 2 − 6(2 ) + 4
16. The line lx + my + 1 = 0 touches a fixed circle whose = 4 + 9 − 12 − 4
equation is =5 > 0
(a) x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 5 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 6 = 0 Therefore, point (2, − 3 ) lies outside the circle from which two
tangents can be drawn.
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 4 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 4 = 0
Paragraph II
17. Tangents PA and PB are drawn to the above fixed circle (Q. Nos. 19 to 21)
from the point P on the line x + y − 1 = 0. Then, the
chord of contact AB passes through the fixed point If α- chord of a circle be that chord which subtends an angle
α at the centre of the circle.
 1 5  1 4  1 3  1 5
(a)  ,−  (b)  ,  (c)  − ,  (d)  , 
 2 2 3 3   2 2  2 2 19. If x + y =1 is α-chord of x 2 + y 2 = 1, then α is equal to
π π π 3π
18. The number of tangents which can be drawn from (a) (b) (c) (d)
the point ( 2, − 3 ) are 6 4 2 4
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 1 or 2 π
20. If slope of a -chord of x 2 + y 2 = 4 is 1, then its
Sol. 3
equation is
16. (c) Let the equation of the circle be
(a) x − y + 6 = 0 (b) x − y + 3 = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
(c) x − y − 3 = 0 (d) x − y − 2 3 = 0
The line lx + my + 1 = 0 touch circle Eq. (i), then
| −lg − mf + 1| 2π
= (g 2 + f 2 − c ) 21. Distance of — chord of x 2 + y 2 + 2 x + 4y + 1 = 0
(l 2 + m 2 ) 3
⇒ (lg + mf − 1 ) 2 = (l 2 + m 2 )( g 2 + f 2 − c ) from the centre is
1
or ( f 2 − c )l 2 + ( g 2 − c )m 2 − 2 gflm + 2 gl +2 fm − 1 = 0 …(ii) (a) (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 2
2
But the given condition is
Sol.
4l 2 − 5m 2 + 6l + 1 = 0 …(iii)
19. (c) From figure
Comparing Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get Y
f 2 − c g 2 − c −2 gf g 2f −1
= = = = = (0, 1)
4 −5 0 3 0 1
x+

Then, we get g = −3, f = 0, c = 4

y=
1

Substituting these values in Eq. (i), the equation of the circle is a

X¢ X
x + y − 6x + 4 = 0
2 2 O (1, 0)

17. (a) Let any point on the line x + y − 1 = 0 is

P ( λ ,1 − λ ), λ ∈ R.
Then, equation of AB is
λx + (1 − λ )y − 3( x + λ ) + 4 = 0 Y¢

⇒ ( −3 x + y + 4 ) + λ ( x − y − 3 ) = 0 π
α=
2
314 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

20. (a) Q Slope of chord is 1. ⇒ λ=± 6

Let the equation of chord be x − y + λ = 0. Hence, equation of chords are
 π x − y ± 6 = 0.
Q OM = 2 cos  = 3
 6
21. (b) From figure,
B B
M

A 2 M
2
p/6

p/6 p/3
2
p/3
O (0, 0) O A
2
(–1, –2)

| 0 − 0 + λ|  π
∴ = 3 OM = 2 cos  = 1
2  3

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 2 examples. The answer to each From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
example is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 p = 4 2 and q = 4 2 + 2
(both inclusive).
Now, p+q =2+8 2 =a +b 2 (given)
l Ex. 22 A circle with centre in the first quadrant is tangent ∴ a = 2, b = 8
to y = x +10, y = x − 6 and the Y-axis. Let ( p, q ) be the centre Hence, | a − b| = |2 − 8| = 6
of the circle. If the value of ( p + q ) = a + b a , when a , b ∈Q ,
then the value of | a − b| is l Ex. 23 If the circles x 2 + y 2 + (3 + sin θ ) x + 2 cos φy = 0
Sol. (6) Q CP = CR and x 2 + y 2 + ( 2 cos φ ) x + 2 λy = 0 touch each other, then
| p − q + 10| the maximum value of λ is
⇒ =p
2
Sol. (1) Since, both the circles are passing through the origin
or p − q + 10 = p 2 …(i) (0, 0), the equation of tangent at (0,0) of first circle will be
and CP = CQ same as that of the tangent at (0, 0) of second circle.
p − q + 10  p − q − 6 Equation of tangent at (0, 0) of first circle is
= −  or p − q = −2 …(ii)
2  2  (3 + sin θ ) x + (2 cos φ )y = 0 …(i)
Y Equaton of tangent at (0, 0) of second circle is
10
y=x+ (2 cos φ ) x + 2 λy = 0 …(ii)
P
Therefore, Eqs. (i) and (ii) must be identical, then
3 + sin θ 2 cos φ
p =
R C (p, q) 2 cos φ 2λ
2 cos2 φ
X¢
O
X or λ=
6 (3 + sin θ )
y=x–
Q
or λ max = 1 (when sinθ = −1 and cos φ = 1)

Y¢
 Chap 4 Circle 315

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n This section contains 2 examples. Examples 24 and 25 (C)QC1 and C 2 intersect, the common chord is
have four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I 2(b − a )( x + y ) = b 2 − a 2
and four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any
given statement in Column I can have correct matching given common chord is longest, then passes through (a, a )
with one or more statement(s) given in Column II. ⇒ 2(b − a )(2a ) = b 2 − a 2
or (b − 3a )(b − a ) = 0
l Ex. 24. Consider the circles C 1 of radius a and C 2 of Q b −a ≠ 0 [b > a ]
radius b, b > a both lying the first quadrant and touching the ∴ b − 3a = 0
coordinate axes. b
or = 3 ⇒ λ = 3, µ = 0
Column I Column II a
(D)QC 2 passes through (a, a ), then a 2 + a 2 − 2ab − 2ab + b 2 = 0
(A) C 1 and C 2 touch each other and (p) λ + µ is a prime
b
= λ + µ, λ ∈ prime number and number or b 2 − 4ab + 2a 2 = 0
a 2
b b
µ ∈whole number, then or   − 4  + 2 = 0
a a
(B) C 1 and C 2 cut orthogonally and (q) λ + µ is a composite
b 4 ± (16 − 8 )
b
= λ + µ, λ ∈prime number and number or = =2+ 2
a a 2
µ ∈whole number, then ⇒ λ = 2, µ = 2
(C) C 1 and C 2 intersect so that the (r) 2λ + µ is a perfect
common chord is longest and number
l Ex. 25. Match the following
b
= λ + µ, λ ∈prime number and Column I Column II
a
µ ∈whole number, then (A) The circles x + y + 2x + c = 0
2 2
(p) 1
(c > 0) and x 2 + y2 + 2 y + c = 0 touch
(D) C 2 passes through the centre of C 1 (s) | λ − µ | is a prime
b number each other, then the value of 2c is
and = λ + µ, λ ∈prime number
a (B) The circles x 2 + y2 + 2x + 3 y + c = 0 (q) 2
and µ ∈whole number, then (c > 0) and x 2 + y2 − x + 2 y + c = 0
intersect orthogonally, then the
Sol. (A)→ (p, s); (B) → (p); (C) → (p, r, s); (D) → (q, r) value of 2c is
Q C1 : x 2 + y 2 − 2ax − 2ay + a 2 = 0 (C) The circle x 2 + y2 = 9 is contains the (r) 3
Centre : (a, a ) and radius : a circle x 2 + y2 − 2x + 1 − c2 = 0 (c > 0),
and C 2 : x 2 + y 2 − 2bx − 2by + b 2 = 0 then 2c can be
(D) The circle x + y = 9 is contains in (s)
2 2
Centre : (b, b ) and radius : b 4
c2
(A)QC1 and C 2 touch each other, then the circle x 2 + y2 − 2x + 1 − = 0
b 4
2(b − a ) = b + a ⇒ = ( 2 + 1 ) 2 = 3 + 8 (c > 0), then (c − 6) can be
a
⇒ λ = 3, µ = 8 Sol. (A) → (p); (B) → (q); (C) → (p, q, r); (D) → (r, s)
(B)QC1 and C 2 intersect orthogonally, then (A) The circles
2(b − a ) 2 = b 2 + a 2 S1 :( x + 1 ) 2 + y 2 = ( (1 − c ) ) 2
⇒ a 2 + b 2 − 4ab = 0 Centre C1 :( −1, 0 ), radius r1 : (1 − c )
2
b b and S 2 : x 2 + (y + 1 ) 2 = ( (1 − c ) ) 2
or   − 4  + 1 = 0
a a
Centre C 2 :( 0, − 1 ), radius : r2 = (1 − c )
b 4 ± (16 − 4 )
∴ = =2+ 3 Now, C1C 2 = 2 and r1 = r2
a 2
∴The circles will touch externally only and C1C 2 = r1 + r2
⇒ λ = 2, µ = 3]
⇒ 2 = 2 (1 − c ) or 2c = 1
316 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

 3
2
  13  
2
and S 2 :( x − 1 ) 2 + y 2 = c 2
(B) The circles S1:( x + 1 ) 2 + y +  =   − c 
 2   4  Centre C 2 :(1, 0 ), radius r2 :c
Now, S 2 will be contained in S1, then
 3  13 
Centre C1 :  −1, −  , radius r1 :  − c C1C 2 < r1 − r2
 2  4 
2
or 1 < 3 − c or c < 2 ⇒2c < 4
 1
2
 5 
and S 2 :  x −  + (y + 1 ) 2 =   − c  (D) The circles
 2   4  S1 : x 2 + y 2 = 9
1  5  Centre C1 :( 0, 0 ), radius r1 :3 and
Centre C 2 :  , − 1 , radius r2 :  − c
2  4  2
c
S 2 :( x − 1 ) 2 + y 2 =  
For intersect orthogonally  2
(C1C 2 ) 2 = r12 + r22 c
Centre C 2 :(1, 0 ), radius r2 :
2 2 2
 3  1 13 5
⇒   +   = −c + −c
 2  2 4 4 Now, S1 will be contained in S 2,
or 2c = 2 then, r2 − r1 > C1C 2
c
(C) The circles ⇒ − 3 > 1 or c > 8
2
S1 : x 2 + y 2 = 3 2
∴ (c − 6 ) > 2
Centre C1 :( 0, 0 ), radius r1 :3

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Statement I and II Type Questions
Y
n
Directions (Ex. Nos. 26 and 27) are Assertion-Reason r 2 − 12r + 4 = 0
Type examples. Each of these examples contains two
12 ± (144 − 16 )
statements : r=
2
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason) C2
Each of these examples also has four alternative choices only =6± 4 2 (r, r)
one of which is the correct answer. You have to select the ∴ r =6+ 4 2 [Qr > 2 ]
(2, 2) r
correct choice as given below : 2

(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a = 2( 2 + 1 ) 2

X¢
O C1 X
correct explanation for Statement I = 2( 2 + 1 )(2 + 2 ) Y¢
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is ∴Statement I is true and Statement II is always not true
not a correct explanation for Statement I (where circles in II or IV quadrants)
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true l Ex. 27 From the point P( 2 , 6 ) tangents PA and PB are
drawn to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4
l Ex. 26 C 1 is a circle of radius 2 touching X-axis and
Y -axis. C 2 is another circle of radius greater than 2 and Statement I Area of the quadrilateral OAPB (O being
touching the axes as well as the circle C 1 . origin) is 4.
Statement I Radius of Circle C 2 = 2 ( 2 + 1)( 2 + 2) Statement II Tangents PA and PB are perpendicular to each
other and therefore quadrilateral OAPB is a square.
Statement II Centres of both circles always lie on the line
Sol. (a) Clearly, P( 2, 6 ) lies on x 2 + y 2 = 8, which is the
y = x.
director circle of x 2 + y 2 = 4.
Sol. (c) C 1 :( x − 2) + (y − 2) = 2
2 2 2
Therefore, tangents PA and PB are perpendicular to each other.
C 2 :( x − r ) 2 + (y − r ) 2 = r 2 (r > 2 ) So, OAPB is a square.
According to question, Hence, area of OAPB = ( S1 ) 2 = S1

(r − 2 ) 2 + (r − 2 ) 2 = r + 2 = ( 2 )2 + ( 6 )2 − 4 = 4
∴Both statements are true and statement II is correct
(r − 2 ) 2 + (r − 2 ) 2 = (r + 2 ) 2
explanation of statement I.
 Chap 04 Circle 317

Subjective Type Examples

n In this section, there are 16 subjective solved examples. and let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − ax − by / 2 = 0
∴ Equation of chord AB is T = S1
l Ex. 28 Find the equation of a circle having the lines a b
hx + 0 − ( x + h ) − (y + 0) = h 2 + 0 − ah − 0
x + 2 xy + 3 x + 6y = 0 as its normals and having size just
2
2 4
sufficient to contain the circle Since, its passes through (a, b / 2) we have
x ( x − 4 ) + y (y − 3 ) = 0. a b2
ah − (a + h ) − = h 2 − ah
Sol. Given pair of normals is x + 2xy + 3x + 6y = 0
2
2 8
or ( x + 2y ) ( x + 3) = 0 3 ah a 2 b 2
⇒ h2 − + + =0
∴ Normals are x + 2y = 0 and x + 3 = 0 the point of 2 2 8
intersection of normals x + 2y = 0 and x + 3 = 0 is the Now, there are two chords bisected by the X-axis, so there
centre of required circle, we get centre C 1 ≡ ( − 3, 3 /2) and must be two distinct real roots of h.
other circle is
∴ B 2 − 4 AC > 0

 − 3a 
2
 a2 b2 
⇒   − 4 ⋅1 ⋅  +  > 0
 2  2 8
C1 ⇒ a 2 > 2b 2 .
Aliter : Given circle is
C2
2x ( x − a ) + y (2y − b ) = 0
by
or x 2 + y 2 − ax − =0 …(i)
x ( x − 4 ) + y ( y − 3) = 0 2
Let chords bisected at M (h , 0) but given chords can be
or x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 3y = 0 …(i)
 b
drawn A a ,  then chord cut the circle at B ( λ , − b / 2)
its centre C 2 ≡ (2, 3 / 2) and radius r = 4 +
9
=
5  2
4 2 Q Mid-point of ordinates of A and B is origin.
Since, the required circle just contains the given circle(i), ∴ B ( λ , b / 2) lies on Eq. (i)
the given circle should touch the required circle internally
from inside. b2 b2
∴ λ2 + −aλ + =0
⇒ radius of the required circle = | C 1 − C 2 | + r 4 4
b2
 3 3 5
2
or λ2 − a λ + =0
= ( − 3 − 2) 2 +  −  + 2
 2 2 2
Q λ is real
5 15
=5+ = b2
2 2 ∴ B 2 − 4 AC > 0 or a 2 − 4 ⋅ > 0 or a 2 > 2b 2
2
Hence, equation of required circle is
2
 15 l Ex. 30 Let C 1 and C 2 be two circles with C 2 lying inside
( x + 3) 2 + ( y − 3 / 2) 2 =  
 2
C 1 . A circle C lying inside C 1 touches C 1 internally and C 2
or x 2 + y 2 + 6x − 3y − 54 = 0 externally. Identify the locus of the centre of C.
Sol. Let the given circles C 1and C 2 have centres O1 and O 2
l Ex. 29 Let a circle be given by with radii r1 and r 2 , respectively. Let centre of circle C is
2 x ( x − a ) + y (2y − b ) = 0 ( a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0) at O radius is r.
Find the condition on a and b if two chords, each bisected by Q OO 2 = r + r 2
the X-axis, can be drawn to the circle from (a, b/2). OO1 = r1 − r
Sol. The given circle is 2x ( x − a ) + y (2y − b ) = 0 ⇒ OO1 + OO 2 = r1 + r 2
or x + y − ax − by / 2 = 0
2 2
which is greater than O1 O 2 as O1O 2 < r1 + r 2 .
Let AB be the chord which is bisected by X -axis at a point ∴ Locus of O is an ellipse with foci O1 and O 2 .
M. Let its coordinates be M (h , 0)
318 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

∴ a 2 + b 2 = 4r 2 …(ii)
O2 Equation of OM which is ⊥ to AB is
r2 ax − by = λ
r2
r
A It passes through (0, 0)
O1 r O r
∴ 0= λ
∴ Equation of OM is
ax − by = 0 …(iii)
On solving Eq. (i) and Eq. (iii), we get
Aliter : x2 + y2 x2 + y2
Let O1 ≡ (0, 0), O 2 ≡ (a, b ) and O ≡ (h , k ) a= and b =
x y
∴ C 1 : x 2 + y 2 = r12
Substituting the values of a and b in Eq. (ii), we get
C 2 : ( x − a )2 + (y − b )2 = r 22
 1 1
C : ( x − h )2 + (y − k )2 = r 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2  2 + 2  = 4r 2
x y 
⇒ OO 2 = r + r 2
or ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 ( x −2 + y −2 ) = 4r 2
⇒ (h − a ) + (k − b )2 = r + r 2
2
…(i)
which is the required locus.
and OO1 = r1 − r
Aliter :
⇒ (h 2 + k 2 ) = r1 − r …(ii) Q AB is the diameter of circle. If ∠OAB = α, then
On adding Eqs. (i) and (ii) we get OA = 2r cos α, OB = 2r sin α
(h − a )2 + (k − b )2 + (h 2 + k 2 ) = r1 + r 2
B
∴ Locus of O is ( x − a ) + (y − b ) + ( x + y ) = r1 + r 2
2 2 2 2
(x 2
+y2
which represents an ellipse with foci are at (a,b ) and (0, 0). )
x
l Ex. 31 A circle of constant radius r passes through the
α
origin O, and cuts the axes at A and B. Show that the locus
O y A
of the foot of the perpendicular from O to AB is
( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 ( x −2 + y −2 ) = 4r 2 Equation of AB is
Sol. Let the coordinates of A and B are (a, 0) and (0, b). x y
+ =1
Y 2r cos α 2r sin α
x y
(0, b) B ⇒ + = 2r …(i)
M cos α sin α
C a, b
( ) and equation of OM is y = x tan (90°− α)
2 2
y
X´ X ⇒ cot α =
O A (a, 0) x
Y´ Y
x y
∴ Equation of AB is + =1 …(i)
a b (0, b) B
M
Centre of circle lie on line AB, since AB is diameter of the
circle (Q ∠ AOB = π / 2)
90°– α α
a b X´ X
∴ Coordinate of centre C is C ≡  ,  O A (a, 0)
 2 2
Y´
Since, the radius of circle = r
x
∴ r = AC = CB = OC ∴ sin α =
2 2
(x + y 2 )
2

 a  b a2 + b2
= 0 −  + 0 −  = y
 2  2 4 and cos α =
(x + y 2 )
2
 Chap 04 Circle 319

Then, from Eq. (i), a b

Let centre be (h , k ) ≡  ,  then a = 2h and b = 2k .
x y  2 2
(x 2 + y 2 ) + ( x + y ) = 2r
2 2
y x Substituting the values of a and b in Eq. (i), then
(x + y ) (x + y )
2 2 2 2
2 2  1 1 
⇒ = 2r + − 1 = −2  2 + 
xy 2h 2k  4h 4k 2 
(x 2 + y 2 ) 1 1  1 1
On squaring, we have ( x 2 + y 2 )2 = 4r 2 ⇒ + − 1 = −  2 + 2
x y 2 2 h k h k 

⇒ ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 ( x −2 + y −2 ) = 4r 2 or h + k − hk + (h 2 + k 2 ) = 0
∴ Locus of M (h , k ) is
l Ex. 32 The circle x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed
x + y − xy + ( x 2 + y 2 ) = 0
in a triangle which has two of its sides along the coordinate
axes. The locus of the circumcentre of the triangle is Hence, the required value of k is 1.
x + y − xy + k ( x 2 + y 2 ) 1/ 2 = 0. Find k.
l Ex. 33 P is a variable on the line y = 4. Tangents are
Sol. The given circle is x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 4y + 4 = 0. This can
drawn to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 from P to touch it at A and
be re-written as ( x − 2)2 + (y − 2)2 = 4 which has centre
C (2, 2) and radius 2. B. The parallelogram PAQB is completed . Find the equation
Let the equation of third side is
of the locus of Q.
x y Sol. Let P (h , 4 ) be a variable point. Given circle is
+ =1 (equation of AB)
a b x2 + y2 = 4 …(i)
Draw tangents from P (h , 4 ) and complete parallelogram
B (0, b) PAQB.
Equation of the diagonal AB which is chord of contact of
M x 2 + y 2 = 4 is hx + 4y = 4 …(ii)
2
2 Y
C (2, 2)
2 (0, 4)
P (h, 4)
O A
(a, 0)
(x1, y1) A
Length of perpendicular from (2, 2) on AB = radius = CM
2 + 2 − 1 X¢
O
X
B (x2, y2)
a b 
∴ =2
1 1
 2 + 2
a b 
Y¢
Since, origin and (2, 2) lie on the same side of AB Q (a, b)

2 2 
 + − 1 Let coordinates of A and B are ( x 1, y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ),
a b 
∴ − =2 respectively.
1 1
 2 + 2 Since, A ( x 1, y1 ) and B ( x 2 , y 2 ) lies on Eq. (ii)
a b  ∴ hx 1 + 4y1 = 4 and hx 2 + 4y 2 = 4
2 2 1 1 ∴ h ( x 1 + x 2 ) + 4 (y 1 + y 2 ) = 8 …(iii)
or + − 1 = −2  2 + 2 …( i )
a b a b  Since, PAQB is parallelogram
π ∴ Mid-point of AB = Mid-point of PQ
Since, ∠ AOB =
2 x1 + x 2 α + h
⇒ =
Hence, AB is the diameter of the circle passing through 2 2
a b y1 + y 2 β + 4
∆OAB, mid-point of AB is the centre of the circle i.e.  ,  . and = …(iv)
 2 2 2 2
320 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Eliminating x from Eqs. (i) and (ii), then µ

=
 4 − 4y 
2 (b 2 − ac ) (c 2 + a 2 )
 +y = 4
2

 h  (a 2 − bc ) (b 2 + c 2 )
∴ λ=
⇒ 16 + 16y 2 − 32y + h 2y 2 = 4h 2 (c 2 − ab ) (a 2 + b 2 )

⇒ (16 + h 2 ) y 2 − 32y + 16 − 4h 2 = 0 (b 2 − ac ) (c 2 + a 2 )
and µ= …(iv)
32 (c 2 − ab ) (a 2 + b 2 )
∴ y1 + y 2 = …(v)
16 + h 2 and given, Eq. (i) passes through the origin then
From Eqs. (iii) and (v), we get ab + bcλ + ca µ = 0 …(v)
8h From Eqs. (iv) and (v), we get
x1 + x 2 = …(vi)
16 + h 2 bc (a 2 − bc ) (b 2 + c 2 ) ca (b 2 − ac ) (c 2 + a 2 )
ab + + =0
From Eqs. (iv) and (vi) (c − ab ) (a + b )
2 2 2
(c 2 − ab ) (a 2 + b 2 )
32 ⇒ (c 2 − ab ) (a 2 + b 2 ) ab + (a 2 − bc )(b 2 + c 2 )bc
β+4=
16 + h 2 + (b 2 − ca ) (c 2 + a 2 ) ca = 0
or (16 + h ) (β + 4 ) = 32
2
…(vii) ⇒ abc 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + a 2bc (b 2 + c 2 ) + b 2ca (c 2 + a 2 )
From Eqs. (iv) and (vi) = a 2b 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + b 2c 2 (b 2 + c 2 )
8h
α +h = + c 2a 2 (c 2 + a 2 )
16 + h 2
⇒ abc {c (a 2 + b 2 ) + a (b 2 + c 2 ) + b (c 2 + a 2 )}
or (16 + h 2 ) (α + h ) = 8h …(viii)
Dividing Eq. (viii) by Eq. (vii), then = a 2b 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + b 2c 2 (b 2 + c 2 )
α +h h 4α + c 2a 2 (c 2 + a 2 )
= or h =
β+4 4 β ⇒ abc {(a + b ) (b + c ) (c + a ) − 2abc }
Substituting the value of h in Eq. (vii) then = a 2b 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + b 2c 2 (b 2 + c 2 )
 16α 2
+ c 2a 2 (c 2 + a 2 )
16 + 2  (β + 4 ) = 32
 β 
⇒ abc (a + b ) (b + c ) (c + a )
⇒ ( α 2 + β 2 ) ( β + 4 ) = 2β 2 = 2a 2b 2c 2 + a 2b 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + b 2c 2 (b 2 + c 2 )
Hence, locus of Q (α, β ) is ( x 2 + y 2 ) (y + 4 ) = 2y 2 + c 2a 2 (c 2 + a 2 )
⇒ abc (a + b ) (b + c ) (c + a )
l Ex. 34 Show that the circumcircle of the triangle formed
= (a 2 + b 2 ) (b 2 + c 2 ) (c 2 + a 2 )
by the lines ax + by + c = 0; bx + cy + a = 0 and
cx + ay + b = 0 passes through the origin if Hence, (a 2 + b 2 ) (b 2 + c 2 ) (c 2 + a 2 )
(b 2 + c 2 ) (c 2 + a 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 ) = abc (b + c ) (c + a ) (a + b ) . = abc (a + b ) (b + c ) (c + a )
Sol. Equation of conic is
(bx + cy + a ) (cx + ay + b ) + λ (cx + ay + b )(ax + by + c )
l Ex. 35 If four points P , Q , R, S in the plane be taken and
+ µ (ax + by + c ) (bx + cy + a ) = 0 …(i) the square of the length of the tangents from P to the circle
where, λ and µ are constants. on QR as diameter be denoted by {P , QR }, show that
{ P , RS } − { P , QS } + {Q, PR } − {Q, RS } = 0
Eq. (i) represents a circle if the coefficient of x 2 and y 2 are
Sol. Let P ≡ ( x 1, y1 ), Q ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 ), R ≡ ( x 3 , y 3 ) and S ≡ ( x 4 , y 4 ).
equal and the coefficient of xy is zero such that
Equation of circle with RS as diameter is
bc + λca + µab = ca + λab + µbc
( x − x 3 ) ( x − x 4 ) + (y − y 3 ) (y − y 4 ) = 0
or (a − b ) c + λ (b − c ) a + µ (c − a ) b = 0 …(ii)
∴ { P , RS } = ( x 1 − x 3 )( x 1 − x 4 ) + (y1 − y 3 )(y1 − y 4 )
and (c 2 + ab ) + λ (a 2 + bc ) + µ (b 2 + ac ) = 0 …(iii)
Now, equation of circle with QS as diameter is
on solving Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii) by cross multiplication rule,
( x − x 2 ) ( x − x 4 ) + (y − y 2 ) (y − y 4 ) = 0
we get
1 λ ∴ { P , QS } = ( x 1 − x 2 )( x 1 − x 4 ) + (y1 − y 2 )(y1 − y 4 )
= 2
(c − ab ) (a + b ) (a − bc ) (b 2 + c 2 )
2 2 2
 Chap 04 Circle 321

Equation of circle with PR as diameter is Equations of common tangents to circle (i) and circle C are
( x − x 1 ) ( x − x 3 ) + (y − y 1 ) (y − y 3 ) = 0 1
x = − 1, y = ± ( x + 2), {T1 and T 2 }
∴ {Q , PR } = ( x 2 − x 1 )( x 2 − x 3 ) + (y 2 − y1 )(y 2 − y 3 ) 3
Equation of circle with RS as diameter is and equations of common tangents to circle (ii) and circle C
( x − x 3 ) ( x − x 4 ) + (y − y 3 ) (y − y 4 ) = 0 are
1
∴ {Q , RS } = ( x 2 − x 3 )( x 2 − x 4 ) + (y 2 − y 3 )(y 2 − y 4 ) x = 1, y = ± ( x + 2) ({T1 and T 2 }
3
Hence, { P , RS } − { P , QS } + {Q , PR } − {Q , RS } = 0 To find the remaining two transverse common tangents to
Eqs. (i) and (ii). If I divides C 1 and C 2 in the ratio
l Ex. 36 Let T1 , T 2 be two tangents drawn from ( −2 , 0 ) on r1 :`r 2 = 1 / 3 : 3 = 1 : 9.
the circle C : x 2 + y 2 = 1. Determine the circles touching C Therefore coordinates of I are ( −4 / 5, 0).
and having T1 , T 2 as their pair of tangents. Further, find the Equation of any line through I is y − 0 = m ( x + 4 / 5). If it
equations of all possible common tangents to these circles will touch Eq. (ii)
when taken two at a time. | m ( 4 + 4 / 5) − 0 |
Sol. In figure OS = 1, OP = 2 then =3
(1 + m 2 )
1
∴ sin ∠SPO = = sin 30° 2
2  24 
⇒   m = 9 (1 + m )
2 2
Y T1 5
B1
A1 S ⇒ 64m 2 = 25 + 25m 2
I1 5
30° X ⇒ 39m 2 = 25 ⇒ m = ±
30° C1 Q O R C2 39
P (– 2, 0)
A2 Therefore, equations of transverse common tangents are
B2
5
T2 y=± ( x + 4 / 5)
39
∴ ∠SPO = 30°
Q PA1 = PA 2 ⇒ ∠PA1A 2 = ∠PA 2 A1 lEx. 37 Find the equation of the circle of minimum radius
⇒ ∆ PA1A 2 is an equilateral triangle. which contains the three circles
Therefore, centre C 1 is centroid of ∆ PA1A 2 ,C 1 divides PQ in x 2 − y 2 − 4y − 5 = 0
the ratio 2 : 1.
x 2 + y 2 + 12 x + 4y + 31 = 0
 4  1
∴ C 1 ≡  − , 0 and its radius = C 1Q =
 3  3 and x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 12y + 36 = 0
2 Sol. The coordinates of the centres and radii of three given
 1
⇒ C 1 : ( x + 4 / 3) 2 + y 2 =   …(i) circles are as given below :
 3
C 1 ≡ (0, 2) ; r1 = 3
The other circle C 2 touches the equilateral triangle PB1B 2 C 2 ≡ ( −6, − 2) ; r 2 = 3
externally.
and C 3 ≡ ( −3, − 6) ; r 3 = 3
∆
its radius is given by = , where B1B 2 = a
s −a
C1
3 2
a
3 )
= 4 = a h, k
3a 2 C(
−a
2
C3 C2
a /2 6
but tan 30° = ⇒ a= P
3 3
3 6
∴ Radius = . =3
2 3 Let C ≡ (h , k ) be the centre of the circle passing through the
centres C 1 (0, 2), C 2 ( −6, − 2) and C 3 ( −3, − 6).
⇒ coordinates of C 2 are (4, 0)
Then, CC 1 = CC 2 = CC 3
∴ Equation of C 2 : ( x − 4 )2 + y 2 = 32 …(ii)
⇒ (CC 1 )2 = (CC 2 )2 = (CC 3 )2
322 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

⇒ ( h − 0) 2 + ( k − 2) 2 = ( h + 6) 2 + ( k + 2) 2 ⇒ 3 cos θ = 2 + 2 sin θ
= ( h + 3) 2 + ( k + 6) 2 ⇒ 9 (1 − sin 2 θ ) = 4 (1 + sin θ )2
⇒ − 4k + 4 = 12h + 4k + 40 = 6h + 12k + 45
⇒ 9 (1 − sin θ ) = 4 (1 + sin θ ) (Q sin θ ≠ − 1)
⇒ 12h + 8k + 36 = 0
5 12
or 3h + 2k + 9 = 0 ...(i) ∴ sinθ = and cosθ =
13 13
and 6h − 8k − 5 = 0 ...(ii)
 12 5  36 15
31 23 From Eq. (ii), P ≡ 3 × , 3 ×  i.e. P ≡  , 
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get h = − , k = −  13 13   13 13
18 12
Eq. (ii) OP will be maximum, if P becomes the point
Now, CP = CC 3 + C 3 P = CC 3 + 3 extended part of OC cuts the circle. Let this point be Q
2 2
 31  23 5  then maximum value of OP = OQ = OC + CQ = ( 13 + 2)
= − 3 +  + − 6 +  +3 =  (949 ) + 3
 18   12   36  Let ∠ COX = α
Hence, equation of required circle is then, Q ≡ (OQ cos α, OQ sin α )
2 2 2
 31  23  5  ≡ ((2 + 13 ) cos α, (2 + 13 ) sin α ) ... (iii)
 x +  + y +  = 3 + 949 
 18  12  36  OL NC 2
Now, in ∆COL, cosα = = =
Remark OC OC 13
If radii of three given circles are distinct say r1 < r2 < r3 then the 3
∴ sinα =
radius of the required circle will be equal to (CC1 or CC2 or CC3) 13
+ r3 (QCC1 = CC2 = CC3)
 4 6 
Now, from Eq. (iii), Q ≡ 2 + ,3 + 
l Ex. 38 Find the point P on the circle  13 13 
x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 6y + 9 = 0 such that
l Ex. 39 The circle x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 8y + 16 = 0 rolls up the
(i) ∠ POX is minimum,
tangent to it at ( 2 + 3 , 3 ) by 2 units, assuming the X-axis as
(ii) OP is maximum, when O is the origin and OX is the
horizontal, find the equation of the circle in the new
X-axis.
position.
Sol. Given circle is
Sol. Given circle is
x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 6y + 9 = 0
x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 8y + 16 = 0 …(i)
or ( x − 2) 2 + ( y − 3) 2 = 22 .... (i)
Let P ≡ ( 2 + 3, 3)
Its centre is C ≡ (2, 3) and radius r = 2
Eq. (i) Let OP and ON be the two tangents from O to the
circle Eq. (i), then OP = ON = 3 B
2
Y Q

C A 2
N
(2,4) P (2 + 3, 3)
θ
60°
H θ
α P
X´ θ X
O L MK Equation of tangent to the circle Eq. (i) at P (2 + 3, 3) is
Y´
(2 + 3 ) x + 3y − 2 ( x + 2 + 3 ) − 4 (y + 3) + 16 = 0
then ∠ POX is minimum when OP is tangent to the circle
Eq. (i) at P or 3 x −y −2 3 =0 …(ii)
Let ∠ POX = θ Let A and B be the centres of the circles in old and new
positions, then
∴ P ≡ (OP cos θ, OP sin θ )
B ≡ (2 + 2 cos 60° , 4 + 2 sin 60° )
i.e. P ≡ (3 cos θ, 3 sin θ ) ...(ii)
(Q AB makes an angle 60° with X-axis)
From figure, OM = OL + LM = NC + HP = NC + CP sinθ
or B ≡ ( 3, 4 + 3 )
⇒ OP cos θ = NC + CP sin θ
 Chap 04 Circle 323

and radius = 22 + 4 2 − 16 = 2 ⇒ 16h 2 − 4h (1 + 2a ) + 4h (1 − 2a )

∴ Equation of the required circle is (1 + 2a )2 (1 − 2a )2
+ + − 2h (1 + 2a )
( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 4 − 3 ) 2 = 22 2 2
(1 + 2a )2 (1 − 2a )2
or x 2 + y 2 − 6x − 2 ( 4 + 3 ) y + 24 + 8 3 = 0 + + 2h (1 − 2a ) + =0
2 2
l Ex. 40 Find the intervals of the values of ‘a’ for which the ⇒ 16h 2 − 12 2 ah + (1 + 2a )2 + (1 − 2a )2 = 0
line y + x = 0 bisects two chords drawn from a point ⇒ 16h 2 − 12 2 ah + 2 + 4a 2 = 0
 1 + 2a 1 − 2a  or 8h 2 − 6 2 ah + 1 + 2a 2 = 0
 ,  to the circle
 2 2  Hence, for two real and different values of h, we must have
2 x 2 + 2y 2 − (1 + 2 a ) x − (1 − 2a )y = 0.
+ +
 1 + 2a 1 − 2a  –2 – 2
Sol. The point A  ,  lies on the given circle as
 2 2  ( −6 2a )2 − 4 ⋅ 8 (1 + 2a 2 ) > 0
its coordinate satisfy the equation of the circle. Let AB
and AC are two chords drawn from A. Let M and N are or 72a 2 − 32 (1 + 2a 2 ) > 0
the mid-points of AB and AC. ⇒ 8a 2 − 32 > 0
Let coordinate of M be (h , − h ) and coordinate of B is (α, β ),
then ⇒ a2 − 4 > 0
C ( a + 2) ( a − 2) > 0
Hence, the required value of a (from wavy curve)
a ∈ ( −∞, − 2) ∪ (2, ∞ )
Aliter : Equation of chord AB whose mid-point is (h , − h ) is
N T = S1
 x + h y − h
2xh − 2yh − (1 + 2a )   − (1 − 2a )  
(h, – h)  2   2 
A M B
= 2h 2 + 2h 2 − (1 + 2a ) h + (1 − 2a ) h
y+ x =0 ⇒ 4 xh − 4yh − (1 + 2a ) ( x + h ) − (1 − 2a ) (y − h )
1 + 2a = 8h 2 − 2 (1 + 2a ) h + 2 (1 − 2a ) h
α+
h= 2 ⇒ x [ 4h − (1 + 2a )] − y [ 4h + (1 − 2a )] − h (1 + 2a )
2
1 − 2a + h (1 − 2a ) = 8h 2 − 2 (1 + 2a ) h + 2 (1 − 2a ) h
β+
and −h = 2 or 8h 2 − (1 + 2a ) h + (1 − 2a ) h − x [ 4h − (1 + 2a )]
2
+ y [ 4h + (1 − 2a )] = 0
1 − 2a
∴ α = 2h −  1 + 2a 1 − 2a 
2 It passes through A  ,  , then
1 − 2a  2 2 
and β = − 2h −
2  1 + 2a 
8h 2 − 2 2ah −   [ 4h − (1 + 2a )]
Since, B (α, β ) lies on the given circle, we have  2 
2 2
 1 + 2a   1 − 2a   1 − 2a 
⇒ 2 2h −  + 2 −2h −
 2   2  +
 2 
 [ 4h + (1 − 2a )] = 0

 1 + 2a 
− (1 + 2a ) 2h − (1 + 2a )2
 2  or 8h 2 − 2 2ah − 2h (1 + 2a ) +
2
 1 − 2a  (1 − 2a )2
− (1 − 2a ) −2h − =0 + 2h (1 − 2a ) + =0
 2  2
or 8h 2 − 6 2ah + 1 + 2a 2 = 0
324 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Hence, for two real and different values of h, we must have 2 cos 2α
⇒ .cos α = 1
+ + sin 2α
–2 – 2 2(1 − 2sin 2 α) cos α
⇒ =1
( −6 2a )2 − 4 ⋅ 8 ⋅ (1 + 2a 2 ) > 0 2sin α cos α
⇒ 1 − 2sin 2 α = sin α
or a2 − 4 > 0
⇒ 2sin α + sin α −1 = 0
2
∴ ( a + 2) ( a − 2) > 0
⇒ (2sin α −1) (sin α +1) = 0
∴ a ∈ ( −∞ , − 2) ∪ (2, ∞ )
⇒ sinα ≠ −1
1
l Ex. 41 A ball moving around the circle ∴ sinα =
x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 4y − 20 = 0 in anti-clockwise direction leaves 2
it tangentially at the point P ( − 2 , − 2 ). After getting reflected ∴ α = 30°
from a straight line, it passes through the centre of the circle. Tangent at P( −2, − 2) is
Find the equation of the straight line if its perpendicular −2x − 2y − ( x − 2) − 2(y − 2) − 20 = 0
distance from P is 5/2. You can assume that the angle of ⇒ 3x + 4y + 14 = 0
incidence is equal to the angle of reflection. Slope of PM = −3 / 4
Sol. Radius of the circle = CP = 9 + 16 = 5 Q ∠PMQ = 90°− α = 90°−30° = 60°
Let the equation is of surface is y = mx + c m +3/ 4 4m + 3
∴ tan 60° = , 3=
5 1 − 3m / 4 4 − 3m
given PQ =
2 4 3 −3
−2m + 2 + c 5 ∴ m=
∴ =± …(i) 4 +3 3
(1 + m )2 2 5 2(1 − m ) + c
From Eq. (i) ± =
C (1, 2)
2 1 + m2
al 11 + 2 3 −39 + 2 3
rm we get c = or
No 4 +3 3 4 +3 3
P N
c being intercept on Y-axis made by surface is clearly–ve.
(–2, –2) Hence, the required line is
5/2  4 3 − 3  −39 + 2 3 
90° α y= x + 
–α α  4 + 3 3  4 +3 3 
Q M Surface ⇒ ( 4 3 − 3) x − ( 4 + 3 3 )y − (39 − 2 3 ) = 0.
Tangent at P strikes it at the point M and after reflection
passes through the centre C (1, 2). l Ex. 42 Find the limiting points of the circles
Let MN be the normal at M. ( x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + c ) + λ ( x 2 + y 2 + 2 fy + d ) = 0 and show
∠ PMN = ∠NMC = α that the square of the distance between them is
PC (c − d ) 2 − 4 f 2 g 2 + 4cf 2 + 4dg 2
In ∆ PCM, tan2α =
PM
f 2 +g2
5
⇒ tan2α =
PM Sol. The given circles are
⇒ PM = 5 cot 2α …(ii) ( x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + c ) + λ ( x 2 + y 2 + 2 fy + d ) = 0
and in ∆ PQM 2g 2 fλ ( c + λd )
⇒ x2 + y2 + x+ y+ =0
5/2 1+ λ 1+ λ 1+ λ
sin(90°−α ) =
PM  −g − f λ 
5 Centre of the circle  , 
∴ PM = …(iii) 1 + λ 1 + λ 
2 cosα
Equating the radius of this circle to zero, we get
5
From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), 5 cot 2α = g2 f 2 λ2 ( c + λd )
2 cos α + − =0
(1 + λ ) 2
(1 + λ )2 (1 + λ )
⇒ 2 cot 2α cos α = 1
 Chap 04 Circle 325

⇒ g 2 + f 2 λ 2 − ( c + λd ) ( 1 + λ ) = 0 l Ex. 43 One vertex of a triangle of given species is fixed

⇒ ( f − d ) λ − (c + d )λ + g − c = 0
2 2 2 and another moves along circumference of a fixed circle.
Prove that the locus of the remaining vertex is a circle and
Let the roots be λ 1 and λ 2
find its radius.
(c + d ) g2 − c
then λ1 + λ 2 = , λ 1λ 2 = Sol. Let OPQ be a triangle of given species. Then the angles
(f 2
− d) f 2
−d α,β, γ will be fixed.

∴ ( λ 1 − λ 2 ) = ( λ 1 + λ 2 )2 − 4 λ 1λ 2 Y
P (r, θ)
(c + d ) 2
4(g − c ) 2
γ
= −
(f 2
− d )2 (f 2
− d) r β Q (r1, θ1)
r1
α
(c + d ) − 4 f g + 4cf
2 2 2 2
+ 4dg 2
θ1
= …(i) X´
a
X
(f −d)
2
O b G(b, 0)
Y´
(c + d ) + (c − d )2 − 4 f 2 g 2 + 4cf 2
+ 4dg 2
∴ λ1 = …(ii)
2( f 2 − d ) Let the polar coordinates of Q be (r1,θ1 ), we have to find the
(c + d ) − {(c − d ) − 4 f g + 4cf + 4dg }
2 2 2 2 2 locus of P (r ,θ ). In ∠OCQ
and λ 2 = …(iii) r12 + b 2 − a 2
2( f 2 − d ) cos θ1 = …(i)
2r1b
Hence, limiting points are
Q θ = α + θ1 , ∴ θ1 = θ − α …(ii)
 −g − f λ1   −g −f λ2
 ,  and  ,  using sine rule in ∆OPQ
1 + λ1 1 + λ1 1 + λ 2 1 + λ 2 
r r
= 1
Substituting the values of λ 1 and λ 2 from Eqs. (ii) and (iii) sin β sin γ
square of the distance between limiting points r sin γ
2 2 ∴ r1 = …(iii)
 −g g   − f λ1 f λ2  sin β
= +  + + 
1 + λ1 1 + λ 2  1 + λ1 1 + λ 2  Substituting the values of θ1 and r1 from Eqs. (ii )and (iii)
in Eq. (i)
(g + f ) (λ1 − λ 2 )
2 2 2
= r sin γ r 2 sin 2 γ
[1 + ( λ 1 + λ 2 ) + λ 1λ 2 ]2 2b cos(θ − α ) = + b2 − a2
sin β sin 2 β
{(c − d )2 − 4 f 2 g 2 + 4cf 2
+ 4dg 2 }
(g 2 + f 2 ) a 2 sin 2 β b 2 sin 2 β r sin β
(f 2
− d )2 ⇒ =r2 + − 2b cos(θ − α)
= 2 sin 2 γ sin 2 γ sin γ
g2 + f 2
 2  sin β
 f −d  This is an equation of circle in polar form with radius .
sin γ
[(c − d )2 − 4 f 2 g 2 + 4cf 2
+ 4dg 2 ]
⇒
(g 2 + f 2 )
 #L Circle Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 30 multiple choice questions. 8. The number of rational point(s) (a point (a, b) is rational,
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of if a and b both are rational numbers) on the
which ONLY ONE is correct
circumference of a circle having centre (π, e) is
1. The sum of the square of the length of the chord (a) atmost one (b) atleast two
intercepted by the line x + y = n, n ∈ N on the circle (c) exactly two (d) infinite
x 2 + y 2 = 4 is 9. Three sides of a triangle have the equations
(a) 11 (b) 22 L r ≡ y − mr x − c r = 0; r = 1, 2, 3. Then
(c) 33 (d) None of these λL 2 L 3 + µL 3 L 1 + vL 1 L 2 = 0, where λ ≠ 0, µ ≠ 0,v ≠ 0 is
2. Tangents are drawn to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 50 from a the equation of circumcircle of triangle, if
point ‘P’ lying on the X -axis. These tangents meet the (a) λ (m2 + m3 ) + µ(m3 + m1 ) + v(m1 + m2 ) = 0
Y -axis at points ‘P1 ’ and ‘P2 ’. Possible coordinates of ‘P’ (b) λ (m2m3 − 1 ) + µ(m3m1 − 1 ) + v(m1m2 − 1 ) = 0
so that area of triangle PP1 P2 is minimum, is (c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
(a) (10, 0 ) (b) (10 2, 0) (c) ( −10 2, 0 ) (d) (10 3, 0 )
10. f ( x , y ) ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + 2by + c = 0 represent a circle. If
3. Equation of chord AB of circle x 2 + y 2 = 2 passing
f ( x , 0) = 0 has equal roots, each being 2 and f (0, y ) = 0
PB
through P(2, 2) such that = 3, is given by has 2 and 3 as its roots, then the centre of the circle is
PA
 5
(a) x = 3y (b) x = y (a) 2,  (b) Data are not consistent
 2
(c) y − 2 = 3( x − 2 ) (d) y − 3 = 3( x − 1 )
 5
(c)  −2, −  (d) Data are inconsistent
4. If r1 and r 2 are the radii of smallest and largest circles  2
which passes through (5, 6) and touches the circle 11. If (1 + αx )n = 1 + 8x + 24 x 2 + ... and a line through P(α, n )
( x − 2) 2 + y 2 = 4, then r1r 2 is
cuts the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 in A and B, then PA. PB is
4 41 5 41
(a) (b) (c) (d) equal to
41 4 41 5
(a) 4 (b) 8 (c) 16 (d) 32
5. Equation of circle S ( x , y ) = 0, (S (2, 3) = 16) which touches 12. A region in the xy-plane is bounded by the curve
the line 3x + 4y − 7 = 0 at (1, 1) is given by
(a) x 2 + y 2 + x + 2y − 5 = 0 y = (25 − x 2 ) and the line y = 0. If the point (a, a + 1) lies
(b) x 2 + y 2 + 2 x + 2y − 7 = 0 in the interior of the region, then
(a) a ∈ ( −4,3 ) (b) a ∈ ( − ∞, − 1 ) ∪ (3, ∞ )
(c) x + y + 4 x − 6y + 13 = 0
2 2
(c) a ∈ ( −1, 3 ) (d) None of these
(d) x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 6y − 7 = 0
13. S( x , y ) = 0 represents a circle. The equation S( x , 2) = 0
6. If P(2, 8) is an interior point of a circle gives two identical solutions x = 1 and the equation
x 2 + y 2 − 2x + 4y − λ = 0 which neither touches nor S(1, y ) = 0 gives two distinct solutions y = 0, 2, then the
intersects the axes, then set for λ is equation of the circle is
(a) ( − ∞, − 1 ) (b) ( − ∞, − 4 ) (a) x 2 + y 2 + 2 x − 2y + 1 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 2y + 1 = 0
(c) (96, ∞ ) (d) φ
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2y − 1 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2y + 1 = 0
7. The difference between the radii of the largest and π
smallest circles which have their centre on the 14. Let 0 < α < be a fixed angle. If P = (cos θ,sin θ) and
2
circumference of the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y − 4 = 0 and Q = (cos(α − θ), sin (α − θ)), then Q is obtained from P by
pass through the point (a, b ) lying outside the given (a) clockwise rotation around origin through an angle α
circle is (b) anti-clockwise rotation around origin through an angle α
(a) 6 (b) (a + 1 ) 2 + (b + 2 ) 2 (c) reflection in the line through origin with slope tanα
(c) 3 (d) (a + 1 ) 2 + (b + 2 ) 2 − 3 α
(d) reflection in the line through origin with slope tan  
 2
 Chap 04 Circle 327

15. The number of points ( x , y ) having integral coordinates 24. One of the diameter of the circle circumscribing the
satisfying the condition x + y < 25 is
2 2 rectangle ABCD is 4y = x + 7. If A and B are the points
( −3, 4 ) and (5, 4) respectively, then the area of the
(a) 69 (b) 80 (c) 81 (d) 77
rectangle is
16. The point ([P + 1],[P ]), (where [. ] denotes the greatest (a) 16 sq units (b) 24 sq units
integer function) lying inside the region bounded by the (c) 32 sq units (d) None of these
circle x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 15 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 7 = 0, then 25. A, B, C and D are the points of intersection with the
(a) P ∈ [ −1, 0 ) ∪ [ 0,1 ) ∪ [1, 2 ) (b) P ∈ [ −1,2 ) − { 0,1 } coordinate axes of the lines ax + by = ab and
(c) P ∈ ( −1, 2 ) (d) None of these bx + ay = ab, then
17. A point P lies inside the circles x 2 + y 2 − 4 = 0 and (a) A, B, C, D are concyclic
(b) A, B, C, D form a parallelogram
x 2 + y 2 − 8x + 7 = 0. The point P starts moving under the (c) A, B, C, D form a rhombus
conditions that its path encloses greatest possible area (d) None of the above
and it is at a fixed distance from any arbitrarily chosen
26. α, β and γ are parametric angles of three points P, Q and
fixed point in its region. The locus of P is
(a) 4 x 2 + 4y 2 − 12 x + 1 = 0 (b) 4 x 2 + 4y 2 + 12 x − 1 = 0
R respectively, on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 1 and A is the
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 3 x − 2 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 3 x + 2 = 0
point ( −1, 0). If the lengths of the chords AP, AQ and AR
 α β γ
are in GP, then cos   , cos   and cos   are in
18. The set of values of ‘c’ so that the equations y = | x | + c  2  2  2
and x 2 + y 2 − 8 | x |−9 = 0 have no solution is (a) AP (b) GP
(a) ( − ∞, − 3 ) ∪ (3, ∞ ) (b) ( −3, 3 ) (c) HP (d) None of these
(c) ( − ∞, − 5 2 ) ∪ (5 2, ∞ ) (d) (5 2 − 4, ∞ ) 27. The equation of the circle passing through (2, 0) and
19. If a line segment AM = a moves in the plane XOY (0, 4) and having the minimum radius is
remaining parallel to OX so that the left end point A (a) x 2 + y 2 = 20
slides along the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 , the locus of M is (b) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 4y = 0
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 4a 2 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 2ax (c) ( x 2 + y 2 − 4 ) + λ ( x 2 + y 2 − 16 ) = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 = 2ay (d) x 2 + y 2 − 2ax − 2ay = 0 (d) None of the above

20. The four points of intersection of the lines 28. A circle of radius unity is centred at the origin. Two
(2x − y + 1)( x − 2y + 3) = 0 with the axes lie on a circle particles start moving at the same time from the point
whose centre is at the point (1, 0) and move around the circle in opposite direction.
One of the particle moves anticlockwise with constant
 7 5  3 5  9 5  5
(a)  − ,  (b)  ,  (c)  ,  (d)  0,  speed v and the other moves clockwise with constant
 4 4  4 4  4 4  4
speed 3v. After leaving (1, 0), the two particles meet first
21. The number of integral values of λ for which at a point P and continue until they meet next at point
x 2 + y 2 + λx + (1 − λ )y + 5 = 0 is the equation of a circle Q. The coordinates of the point Q are
whose radius cannot exceed 5, is (a) (1, 0) (b) (0, 1) (c) (−1, 0) (d) (0, −1)
(a) 14 (b) 18 (c) 16 (d) None of these 29. The circle x + y = 4 cuts the line joining the points
2 2

22. Let φ( x , y ) = 0 be the equation of a circle. If φ (0, λ ) = 0 A(1, 0) and B(3, 4 ) in two points P and Q. Let
BP
= α and
4 PA
has equal roots λ = 2, 2 and φ ( λ , 0) = 0 has roots λ = , 5, BQ
5 = β, then α and β are roots of the quadratic equation
then the centre of the circle is QA
 29  29   29 (a) x 2 + 2 x + 7 = 0 (b) 3 x 2 + 2 x − 21 = 0
(a) 2,  (b)  , 2 (c)  −2,  (d) None of these
 10  10   10 (c) 2 x 2 + 3 x − 27 = 0 (d) None of these

23. The locus of the point of intersection of the tangents to 30. The locus of the mid-points of the chords of the circle
the circle x = r cos θ, y = r sin θ at points whose π
x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 6y − 12 = 0 which subtend an angle of
π 3
parametric angles differ by is
3 radians at its circumference is
(a) x + y = 4(2 − 3 )r
2 2 2
(b) 3( x + y ) = 1
2 2 (a) ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 = 6.25 (b) ( x − 2 ) 2 + (y + 3 ) 2 = 6.25
(c) x 2 + y 2 = (2 − 3 )r 2 (d) 3( x 2 + y 2 ) = 4r 2 (c) ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 = 18.75 (d) ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y + 3 ) 2 = 18.75
328 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Circle Exercise 2 :
More than One Correct Option Type Questions
This section contains 15 multiple choice questions. Each 37. An equation of a circle touching the axes of coordinates
question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which and the line x cos α + y sin α = 2 can be
MORE THAN ONE may be correct. 2
(a) x 2 + y 2 − 2 gx − 2 gy + g 2 = 0, where g =
(cosα + sin α + 1 )
31. If OA and OB are two perpendicular chords of the circle
2
r = a cos θ + b sin θ passing through origin, then the locus (b) x + y − 2 gx − 2 gy + g = 0, where g =
2 2 2

of the mid-point of AB is (cosα + sin α − 1 )

a 2
(a) x 2 + y 2 = a + b (b) x = (c) x 2 + y 2 − 2 gx + 2 gy + g 2 = 0, where g =
2 (cosα − sin α + 1 )
b 2
(c) x 2 − y 2 = a 2 − b 2 (d) y = (d) x 2 + y 2 − 2 gx + 2 gy + g 2 = 0, where g =
2 (cosα − sin α − 1 )
32. If A and B are two points on the circle 38. If α is the angle subtended at P( x 1 , y 1 ) by the circle
x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 6y − 3 = 0 which are farthest and nearest S ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0, then
respectively, from the point (7, 2), then S1 α S1
(a) A ≡ (2 − 2 2, − 3 − 2 2 ) (a) cot α = (b) cot =
(g + f − c )
2 2 2 (g + f 2 − c )
2
(b) A ≡ (2 + 2 2, − 3 + 2 2 )
2 (g 2 + f 2 − c )  (g 2 + f 2 − c ) 
(c) B ≡ (2 + 2 2, − 3 + 2 2 ) (c) tan α = (d) α = 2 tan −1  
 
(d) B ≡ (2 − 2 2, − 3 − 2 2 )
S1  S1 

33. If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 cuts each of the 39. The equation of the circle which touches the axis of
x y
circles x + y − 4 = 0, x + y − 6x − 8y + 10 = 0 and
2 2 2 2
coordinates and the line + = 1 and whose centre lies
3 4
x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4y − 2 = 0 at the extremities of a diameter,
in the first quadrant is x 2 + y 2 − 2λx − 2λy + λ 2 = 0, then
then
λ is equal to
(a) c = −4 (b) g + f = c − 1
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) g 2 + f 2 − c = 17 (d) gf = 6
(c) 3 (d) 6
34. The possible value of λ ( λ > 0) such that the angle 40. If P is a point on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9, Q is a point on
between the pair of tangents from point ( λ , 0) to the the line 7 x + y + 3 = 0, and the line x − y + 1 = 0, is the
 π 2π 
circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 lies in interval  ,  is perpendicular bisector of PQ, then the coordinates of P
2 3  are
 4   72 21
(a)  , 2 2 (b) ( 0, 2 ) (a) (3, 0) (b)  , − 
 3   25 25
 4 4  72 21
(c) (1, 2 ) (d)  ,  (c) (0, 3) (d)  − , 
 3 3  25 25

35. If a chord of the circle x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 2y − c = 0 is  7

41. If a circle passes through the point 3,  and touches
 1 1  8 8  2
trisected at the points  ,  and  ,  , then
 3 3  3 3 x + y = 1 and x − y = 1, then the centre of the circle is
(a) c = 10 (b) c = 20 (a) ( 4, 0 ) (b) (4, 2) (c) (6, 0) (d) (7, 9)
(c) c = 15 (d) c 2 − 40c + 400 = 0 42. The equation of a circle C 1 is x 2 + y 2 = 4. The locus of
36. From the point A(0, 3) on x + 4 x + (y − 3) = 0, a chord
2 2
the intersection of orthogonal tangents to the circle is
AB is drawn and extended to a point M, such that the curve C 2 and the locus of the intersection of
AM = 2AB. An equation of the locus of M is perpendicular tangents to the curve C 2 is the curve C 3 .
(a) x 2 + 6 x + (y − 2 ) 2 = 0 Then,
(b) x 2 + 8 x + (y − 3 ) 2 = 0 (a) C 3 is a circle
(b) the area enclosed by the curve C 3 is 8π
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 8 x − 6y + 9 = 0 (c) C 2 and C 3 are circles with the same centre
(d) x 2 + y 2 + 6 x − 4y + 4 = 0 (d) None of the above
 Chap 04 Circle 329

43. The equation of a tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25 (a) L is the radical axis of C1 and C 2
(b) L is the common tangent of C1 and C 2
passing through ( −2, 11) is
(c) L is the common chord of C1 and C 2
(a) 4 x + 3y = 25 (b) 3 x + 4y = 38
(d) L is perpendicular to the line joining centres of C1 and C 2
(c) 24 x − 7y + 125 = 0 (d) 7 x + 24y = 230
45. A square is inscribed in the circle
44. Consider the circles
C1 ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 4y − 4 = 0 and
x 2 + y 2 − 10x − 6y + 30 = 0. One side of the square is
parallel to y = x + 3, then one vertex of the square is
C 2 ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2 x + 4y + 4 = 0
(a) (3, 3) (b) (7, 3 )
and the line L ≡ x + 2y + 2 = 0, then (c) (6, 3 − 3 ) (d) (6, 3 + 3 )

#L Circle Exercise 3 :
Paragraph Based Questions
This section contains 7 paragraphs based upon each of the 51. If P ≡ (3, 4 ), then the coordinates of S are
paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have to be answered.  46 63  51 68
(a)  − ,  (b)  − , − 
Each of these questions has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d)  25 25  25 25
out of which ONLY ONE is correct.  46 68   68 51
(c)  − ,  (d)  − , 
Paragraph I  25 25  25 25
(Q. Nos. 46 to 48) Paragraph III
Consider the circle S : x 2 + y 2 − 4x − 1 = 0 and the line (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)
L : y = 3x − 1. If the line L cuts the circle at A and B. Equation of the circumcircle of a triangle formed by the lines
46. Length of the chord AB is L1 = 0, L2 = 0 and L3 = 0 can be written as
(a) 5 (b) 10 (c) 2 5 (d) 5 2 L1 L2 + λL2 L3 + µL3 L1 = 0, where λ and µ are such that
coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 and coefficient of xy = 0.
47. The angle subtended by the chord AB is the minor arc of
S is 52. L 1 L 2 2 + λL 2 L23 + µL 3 L21 = 0 represents
π 2π 3π 5π
(a) (b) (c) (d) (a) a curve passing through point of intersection of L1 = 0,
4 3 4 6 L2 = 0 and L3 = 0
48. Acute angle between the line L and the circle S is (b) a circle is coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 and
π π π π coefficient of xy = 0
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 4 3 2 (c) a parabola
Paragraph II (d) pair of straight lines
(Q. Nos. 49 to 51) 53. L 1 = 0, L 2 = 0 be the distinct parallel lines, L 3 = 0, L 4 = 0
P is a variable point on the line L = 0. Tangents are drawn to be two other distinct parallel lines which are not parallel
the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 from P to touch it at Q and R. The to L 1 = 0. The equation of a circle passing through the
vertices of the parallelogram formed must be of the form
parallelogram PQSR is completed.
(a) λL1L4 + µL2L3 = 0 (b) λL1L3 + µL2L4 = 0
49. If L ≡ 2x + y − 6 = 0, then the locus of the circumcenter of (c) λL1L2 + µL3L4 = 0 (d) λL12L3 + µL22L4 = 0
∆PQR is
(a) 2 x − y = 4 (b) 2 x + y = 3 54. If L 1 L 2 + λL 2 L 3 + µL 3 L 1 = 0 is such that µ = 0 and λ is
(c) x − 2y = 4 (d) x + 2y = 3 non-zero, then it represents
192 (a) a parabola
50. If P ≡ (6, 8), then area of ∆QRS is λ sq units. The
25 (b) a pair of straight lines
value of λ is (c) a circle
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 6 (d) an ellipse
330 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Paragraph IV Paragraph VI
(Q. Nos. 55 to 57) (Q. Nos. 61 to 63)
Given two circles intersecting orthogonally having the length of Two variable chords AB and BC of a circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 are
common chord
24
unit. The radius of one of the circles is 3 units. such that AB = BC = a, M and N are the mid-points of AB
5 and BC respectively such that line joining MN intersect the
55. If radius of other circle is λ units, then λ is circle at P and Q, where P is closer to AB and O is the centre
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 5 (d) 6 of the circle.

56. If angle between direct common tangents is 2θ, then 61. ∠OAB is
sin 2θ is (a) 15° (b) 30°
(c) 45° (d) 60°
4 4 6 12 24 62. Angle between tangents at A and C is
(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 25 25 25 (a) 60° (b) 90°
(c) 120° (d) 150°
57. If length of direct common tangent is λ units, then λ is 2

(a) 12 (b) 24 (c) 36 (d) 48 63. Locus of point of intersection of tangents at A and C is
(a) x 2 + y 2 = a 2 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2
Paragraph V (c) x 2 + y 2 = 4a 2 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 8a 2
(Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
Consider the two circles C1 : x 2 + y 2 = a 2 and Paragraph VII
C 2 : x 2 + y 2 = b 2 ( a > b ). Let A be a fixed point on the circle (Q. Nos. 64 to 66)
C1 , say A ( a, 0) and B be a variable point on the circle C 2 . The t 1 , t 2 , t 3 are lengths of tangents drawn from a point ( h, k ) to
line BA meets the circle C 2 again at C. ‘O’ being the origin. the circles x 2 + y 2 = 4, x 2 + y 2 − 4x = 0 and x 2 + y 2 − 4 y = 0
58. If (OA ) 2 + (OB ) 2 + ( BC ) 2 = λ, then λ ∈ respectively further, t 14 = t 22 t 32 + 16. Locus of the point ( h, k )
(a) [5b 2 − 3a 2, 5b 2 + a 2 ] (b) [ 4b 2, 4b 2 + a 2 ]
consist of a straight line L1 and a circle C1 passing through
origin. A circle C 2 , which is equal to circle C1 is drawn
(c) [ 4a 2, 4b 2 ] (d) [5b 2 − 3a 2, 5b 2 + 3a 2 ]
touching the line L1 and the circle C1 externally.
59. The locus of the mid-point of AB is 64. Equation of L 1 is
2 2
 a b2  a a2 (a) x + y = 0 (b) x − y = 0
(a)  x −  + y 2 = (b)  x −  + y 2 =
 2 4  2 4 (c) 2 x + y = 0 (d) x + 2y = 0
2 2
 b a2  b b2 65. Equation of C 1 is
(c)  x −  + y 2 = (d)  x −  + y 2 =
 2 4  2 4 (a) x 2 + y 2 − x − y = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + y = 0
60. If ( BC ) 2 is maximum, then the locus of the mid-point of (c) x 2 + y 2 − x + 2y = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2y = 0
AB is 66. The distance between the centres of C 1 and C 2 is
(a) x 2 + y 2 = b 2 (b) x 2 + y 2 = (a + b ) 2
(a) 2 (b) 2
(c) x 2 + y 2 = (a − b ) 2 (d) None of these (c) 2 2 (d) 4

#L Circle Exercise 4 :
Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n
This section contains 10 questions. The answer to each question is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 (both
inclusive).
67. The point (1, 4) lies inside the circle x 2 + y 2 − 6x − 10y + λ = 0. If the circle neither touches nor cuts the axes, then the
difference between the maximum and the minimum possible values of λ is
68. Consider the family of circles x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 2λy − 8 = 0 passing through two fixed points A and B. Then the distance
between the points A and B is
 Chap 04 Circle 331

69. If C 1 : x 2 + y 2 = (3 + 2 2 ) 2 be a circle and PA and PB are 73. A circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 2 2y + c = 0 is the director circle
pair of tangents on C 1 , where P is any point on the of the circle C 1 and C 1 is the director circle of circle C 2
director circle of C 1 , then the radius of the smallest circle and so on. If the sum of radii of all these circles is 2 and
which touches C 1 externally and also the two tangents if c = λ 2, then the value of λ is
PA and PB, is
74. If the area bounded by the circles x 2 + y 2 = r 2 , r = 1, 2
70. If a circle S( x , y ) = 0 touches the point (2, 3) of the line λπ
1 and the rays given by 2x 2 − 3xy − 2y 2 = 0 , y > 0 is sq
x + y = 5 and S(1, 2) = 0, then radius of such circle is 4
λ units, then the value of λ is
units, then the value of λ 2 is.
75. The length of a common internal tangent of two circles
71. If real numbers x and y satisfy ( x + 5) 2 + (y − 12) 2 = 196, is 5 and that of a common external tangent is 13. If the
1
product of the radii of two circles is λ, then the value of
then the maximum value of ( x + y )
2 2 3
is λ is
72. If the equation of circle circumscribing the quadrilateral 4
formed by the lines in order are 76. Consider a circles S with centre at the origin and radius 4.
2x + 3y = 2, 3x − 2y = 3, x + 2y = 3 and 2x − y = 1 is given Four circles A, B, C and D each with radius unity and
by x 2 + y 2 + λx + µy + v = 0. Then the value of centres ( −3, 0), ( −1, 0), (1, 0) and (3, 0) respectively are drawn.
A chord PQ of the circle S touches the circle B and passes
| λ + 2 µ + ν| is
through the centre of the circle C. If the length of this
λ
chord can be expressed as λ , then the value of is
9

#L Circle Exercise 5 :
Matching Type Questions
n
This section contains 4 questions. Questions 77 and 78 78. Match the following
have four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I
and four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II, and Column I Column II
questions 79 and 80 have three statements (A, B and C) (A) If ax + by − 5 = 0 is the equation of the chord (p) a + b =1
given in Column I and five statements (p, q, r, s and t) in of the circle ( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 4 ) 2 = 4, which
Column II. Any given statement in Column I can have passes through (2 , 3 ) and at the greatest
correct matching with one or more statement(s) given in distance from the centre of the circle, then
Column II.
(B) Let O be the origin and P be a variable point (q) a + b =2
77. Consider the circles S 1 : x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 6y + 12 = 0 and on the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 x + 2y = 0. If the
locus of mid-point of OP is x 2 + y 2 + 2ax
S 2 :( x − 5) 2 + (y − 6) 2 = r 2 > 1
+ 2 by = 0, then
Column I Column II (C) If (a, b) be coordinates of the centre of the (r) a2 + b2 = 2
(A) S1 and S 2 touch internally, then (r − 1) is
2
(p) 3 smallest circle which cuts the circle
x 2 + y 2 − 2 x −4y − 4 = 0 and
divisible by
x 2 + y 2 − 10 x +12y + 52 = 0 orthogonally,
(B) S1 and S 2 touch externally, then r 2 + 2r + 3 (q) 4 then
is divisible by
(D) If a and b are the slope of tangents which are (s) a2 + b2 = 3
(C) S1 and S 2 intersect orthogonally, then r 2 − 1 (r) 5 drawn to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 6 3 x −
is divisible by 6y + 27 = 0 from the origin, then
(D) S1 and S 2 intersect so that the common chord (s) 6
is longest, then r 2 + 5 is divisible by
332 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

79. Match the following 80. Match the following

Column I Column I Column I Column II
(A) If the shortest and largest distance from the (p) M + L = 10 (A) If the straight lines y = a1 x + b and (p) a12 + a 22 = 4
point (10 , 7 ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 2y y = a 2 x + b (a1 ≠ a 2 ) and b ∈ R meet the
coordinate axes in concyclic points, then
−20 = 0 are L and M respectively, then
(B) If the chord of contact of the tangents drawn (q) a1 + a 2 = 3
(B) If the shortest and largest distance from the (q) M + L = 20
to x 2 + y 2 = b 2 and b ∈ R from any point on
point (3, −6) to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 16 x
x 2 + y 2 = a12 , touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 22
−12y − 125 = 0 are L and M respectively,
then (a1 ≠ a 2 ) , then

(C) If the shortest and largest distance from the (r) M + L = 30 (C) If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2a1 x + b = 0 and (r) a1a 2 = b
point (6, −6) to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 6y x 2 + y 2 + 2a 2 x + b = 0 (a1 ≠ a 2 ) and b ∈ R
−12 = 0 are L and M respectively, then cuts orthogonally, then
(s) M − L = 10 (s) a1a 2 = 1

(t) M − L = 26 (t) a1a 2 = b 2

#L Circle Exercise 6 :
Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Q. Nos. 81 to 88) are Assertion-Reason type 84. Statement I Two tangents are drawn from a point on
questions. Each of these questions contains two the circle x 2 + y 2 = 50 to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25, then
statements:
π
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason) Each angle between tangents is
of these questions also has four alternative choices, only 3
one of which is the correct answer. You have to select the Statement II x 2 + y 2 = 50 is the director circle of
correct choice as given below :
x 2 + y 2 = 25.
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II
is a correct explanation for Statement I 85. Statement I Circles x 2 + y 2 = 4 and x 2 + y 2 − 6x + 5 = 0
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II intersect each other at two distinct points
is not a correct explanation for Statement I Statement II Circles with centres C 1 , C 2 and radii r1 , r 2
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false intersect at two distinct points if | C 1C 2 | < r1 + r 2
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
86. Statement I The line 3x − 4y = 7 is a diameter of the
81. Statement I Only one tangent can be drawn from the circle x 2 + y 2 − 2x + 2y − 47 = 0
point (1, 3) to the circle x + y = 1
2 2
Statement II Normal of a circle always pass through
|3 − m| centre of circle
Statement II Solving = 1, we get only one
(1 + m 2 ) 87. Statement I A ray of light incident at the point (−3, −1)
real value of m gets reflected from the tangent at (0, − 1) to the circle
x 2 + y 2 = 1. If the reflected ray touches the circle, then
82. Statement I Tangents cannot be drawn from the point
equation of the reflected ray is 4y − 3x = 5
(1, λ ) to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4y = 0
Statement I The angle of incidence = angle of reflection
Statement II (1 + 1) 2 + ( λ + 2) 2 < 1 2 + 2 2 i.e. ∠i = ∠r
83. Statement I Number of circles passing through (1, 4), 88. Statement I The chord of contact of the circle
(2, 3), (−1, 6) is one x 2 + y 2 = 1 w.r.t. the points (2, 3), (3, 5) and (1, 1) are
Statement II Every triangle has one circumcircle concurrent.
Statement II Points (1, 1), (2, 3) and (3, 5) are collinear.
 Chap 04 Circle 333

Circle Exercise 7 :
Subjective Type Questions
n In this section, there are 16 subjective questions. 98. The circle x 2 + y 2 = 1 cuts the X -axis at P and Q.
89. Find the equation of the circle passing through (1, 0) and another circle with centre at Q and variable radius
(0, 1) and having the smallest possible radius. intersects the first circle at R above the X -axis and the
line segment PQ at S. Find the maximum area of the
90. Find the equation of the circle which touches the circle ∆QSR .
x 2 + y 2 − 6x + 6y + 17 = 0 externally and to which the
99. If the two lines a1 x + b1y + c 1 = 0 and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 = 0
lines x 2 − 3xy − 3x + 9y = 0 are normals.
cut the coordinate axes in concyclic points, prove that
91. A line meets the coordinate axes at A and B. A circle is a1a 2 = b1b 2 and find the equation of the circle.
circumscribed about the triangle OAB. If the distance of 100. The centre of the circle S = 0 lie on the line
the points A and B from the tangent at O, the origin, to
2x − 2y + 9 = 0 and S = 0 cuts orthogonally the circle
the circle are m and n respectively, find the equation of
the circle. x 2 + y 2 = 4. Show that circle S = 0 passes through two
fixed points and find their coordinates.
92. Find the equation of a circle which passes through the
point (2 , 0) and whose centre is the limit of the point of 101. Find the condition on a , b , c such that two chords of
intersection of the lines 3x + 5y = 1 and the circle
(2 + c ) x + 5c 2 y = 1 as c → 1. x 2 + y 2 − 2ax − 2by + a 2 + b 2 − c 2 = 0
passing through the point (a , b + c ) are bisected by the
93. Tangents are drawn from P (6, 8) to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 .
line y = x .
Find the radius of the circle such that the area of the ∆
formed by tangents and chord of contact is maximum. 102. Two straight lines rotate about two fixed points. If
they start from their position of coincidence such that
94. 2x − y + 4 = 0 is a diameter of the circle which one rotates at the rate double that of the other. Prove
circumscribed a rectangle ABCD. If the coordinates of A that the locus of their point of intersection is a circle.
and B are A ( 4, 6) and B (1, 9 ) , find the area of rectangle
ABCD. 103. The base AB of a triangle is fixed and its vertex C moves
such that sin A = k sin B (k ≠ 1) . Show that the locus of
95. Find the radius of smaller circle which touches the straight C is a circle whose centre lies on the line AB and whose
line 3x − y = 6 at (1, − 3) and also touches the line y = x . ak
radius is equal to , a being the length of the base
96. If the circle C 1 , x 2 + y 2 = 16 intersects another circle C 2 (1 − k 2 )
of radius 5 in such a manner that the common chord is of AB.
maximum length and has a slope equal to (3/4), find the 104. Consider a curve ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 1 and a point P
coordinates of centre C 2 .
not on the curve. A line drawn from the point P
97. Let 2x 2 + y 2 − 3xy = 0 be the equation of a pair of intersects the curve at points Q and R. If the product
tangents drawn from the origin O to a circle of radius 3 PQ ⋅ PR is independent of the slope of the line, then
with centre in the first quadrant. If A is one of the points show that the curve is a circle.
of contact, find the length of OA.
334 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Circle Exercise 8 :
Questions Asked in Previous 13 Year’s Exams
n This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, 111. A line L′ through A is drawn parallel to BD. Point S
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. moves such that its distances from the line BD and the
105. A circle is given by x + (y − 1) = 1, another circle C
2 2 vertex A are equal. If locus of S cuts L ′ at T 2 and T 3 and
AC at T 1 , then area of ∆T 1T 2 T 3 is
touches it externally and also the X -axis, then the locus
[IIT-JEE 2006, 5+5+5 M]
of its centre is [IIT-JEE 2005, 3M]
1 2
(a) {( x, y ): x = 4y } ∪ {( x, y ):y ≤ 0 }
2 (a) sq units (b) sq units
2 3
(b) {( x, y ): x 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 4 } ∪ {( x, y ):y ≤ 0 } (c) 1 sq units (d) 2 sq units
(c) {( x,y ): x 2 = y } ∪ {( 0,y ):y ≤ 0 }
112. If the lines 3x − 4y − 7 = 0 and 2x − 3y − 5 = 0 are two
(d) {( x,y ): x 2 = 4y } ∪ {( 0, y ):y ≤ 0 }
diameters of a circle of area 49π square units, the
106. If the circles x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + cy + a = 0 and equation of the circle is [AIEEE 2006, 6M]
x 2 + y 2 − 3ax + dy − 1 = 0 intersect in two distinct points P (a) x 2 + y 2 + 2 x − 2y − 47 = 0
and Q, then the line 5x + by − a = 0 passes through P and (b) x 2 + y 2 + 2 x − 2y − 62 = 0
Q for [AIEEE 2005, 6M]
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 2y − 62 = 0
(a) exactly one value of a (b) no value of a
(d) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 2y − 47 = 0
(c) infinitely many values of a (d) exactly two values of a
107. A circle touches the X -axis and also touches the circle 113. Let C be the circle with centre (0, 0) and radius 3 units.
with centre at (0, 3) and radius 2. The locus of the centre The equation of the locus of the mid-points of the
of the circle is [AIEEE 2005, 3M] 2π
chords of the circle C that subtend an angle of at its
(a) an ellipse (b) a circle 3
(c) a hyperbola (d) a parabola centre is [AIEEE 2006, 6M]
3
108. If a circle passes through the point (a, b ) and cuts the (a) x 2 + y 2 = (b) x 2 + y 2 = 1
2
circle x 2 + y 2 = p 2 orthogonally, then the equation of 27 9
(c) x + y =
2 2
(d) x 2 + y 2 =
the locus of its centre is [AIEEE 2005, 3M] 4 4
(a) x 2 + y 2 − 3ax − 4by + (a 2 + b 2 − p 2 ) = 0
(b) 2ax + 2by − (a 2 − b 2 + p 2 ) = 0
114. Tangents are drawn from the point (17, 7) to the circle
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 2ax − 3by +(a 2 − b 2 − p 2 ) = 0 x 2 + y 2 = 169.
(d) 2ax + 2by − (a 2 + b 2 + p 2 ) = 0 Statement I The tangents are mutually perpendicular.
because
Paragraph
Statement II The locus of the points from which
(Q. Nos. 109 to 111)
mutually perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the
ABCD is a square of side length 2 units. C1 is the circle given circle is x 2 + y 2 = 338. [IIT-JEE 2007, 3M]
touching all the sides of the square ABCD and C 2 is the
circumcircle of square ABCD. L is a fixed line in the same (a) Statement I is True, statement II is True; statement II is a
correct explanation for statement I
plane and R is a fixed point.
(b) Statement I is True, statement II is True; statement II is
109. If P is any point of C 1 and Q is another point on C 2 , then not a correct explanation for statement I
PA 2 + PB 2 + PC 2 + PD 2 (c) Statement I is True, statement II is False
is equal to
QA 2 + QB 2 + QC 2 + QD 2 (d) Statement I is False, statement II is True
(a) 0.75 (b) 1.25 (c) 1 (d) 0.5 115. Consider a family of circles which are passing through
the point ( −1, 1) and are tangent to X -axis. If (h, k ) are
110. If a circle is such that it touches the line L and the circle
the coordinate of the centre of the circles, then the set
C 1 externally, such that both the circles are on the same
of values of k is given by the interval [AIEEE 2007, 3M]
side of the line, then the locus of centre of the circle is
1 1 1
(a) ellipse (b) hyperbola (a) − ≤ k ≤ (b) k ≤
(c) parabola (d) pair of straight line 2 2 2
1 1
(c) 0 ≤ k ≤ (d) k ≥
2 2
 Chap 04 Circle 335

Paragraph 122. The centres of two circles C 1 and C 2 each of unit

(Q. Nos. 116 to 118) radius are at a distance of 6 units from each other. Let
A circle C of radius 1 is inscribed in an equilateral triangle PQR. P be the mid point of the line segment joining the
The points of contact of C with the sides PQ, QR, RP are D, E, F, centres of C 1 and C 2 and C be a circle touching circles
respectively. The line PQ is given by the equation 3x + y − 6 = 0 C 1 and C 2 externally. If a common tangent to C 1 and C
passing through P is also a common tangent to C 2 and
 3 3 3 C, then the radius of the circle C is [IIT-JEE 2009, 4M]
and the point D is  ,  . Further, it is given that the origin
 2 2
123. If P and Q are the points of intersection of the circles
and the centre of C are on the same side of the line PQ.
x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 7y + 2p − 5 = 0 and
116. The equation of circle C is
2 x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 2y − p 2 = 0 then there is a circle passing
 1
(a) ( x − 2 3 ) + (y − 1 ) = 1 (b) ( x − 2 3 ) + y +  = 1
2 2 2
through P, Q and (1, 1) for : [AIEEE 2009, 4M]
 2
(a) all except one value of p
(c) ( x − 3 ) 2 + (y + 1 ) 2 = 1 (d) ( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 1
(b) all except two values of p
117. Points E and F are given by (c) exactly one value of p
 3 3  3 1 (d) all values of p
(a)  ,  ,( 3, 0 ) (b)  ,  ,( 3, 0 )
 2 2  2 2 124. The circle x 2 + y 2d = 4 x + 8y + 5 intersects the line
 3 3  3 1  3 3   3 1 3x − 4y = m at two distinct points if [AIEEE 2010, 4M]
(c)  ,  ,  ,  (d)  ,  ,  , 
 2 2  2 2  2 2   2 2 (a) −35 < m < 15 (b) 15 < m < 65
(c) 35 < m < 85 (d) −85 < m < −35
118. Equations of the sides QR, RP are [IIT-JEE 2008, (4 + 4 + 4) M]
2 2 1 125. The circle passing through the point ( −1, 0) and
(a) y = x + 1, y = − x − 1 (b) y = x, y = 0 touching the Y -axis at (0, 2) also passes through the
3 3 3
3 3 point. [IIT-JEE 2011, 3M]
(c) y = x + 1, y = − x − 1 (d) y = 3 x, y = 0  3   5 
2 2 (a)  − , 0 (b)  − , 2
 2   2 
119. Consider L 1 : 2x + 3y + p − 3 = 0 ; L 2 : 2x + 3y + p + 3 = 0  3 5
where, p is a real number, and C : x 2 + y 2 + 6 x − 10y + 30 = 0 (c)  − ,  (d) (−4, 0)
 2 2
Statement I If line L 1 is a chord of circle C, then line L 2 is 126. The straight line 2x − 3y = 1 divides the circular region
not always a diameter of circle C and
x 2 + y 2 ≤ 6 into two parts.
Statement II If line L 1 is a diameter of circle C, then line
L 2 is not a chord of circle C.  3   5 3   1 1   1 1  
[IIT-JEE 2008, 3M] If S =  2,  ,  ,  ,  , −  ,  ,   then the number
(a) Statement I is True, statement II is True; statement II is a  4   2 4   4 4   8 4  
correct explanation for statement I of point(s) in S lying inside the smaller part is
(b) Statement I is True, statement II is True; statement II is not a [IIT-JEE 2011, 4M]
correct explanation for statement I
127. The two circles x + y = ax and x + y 2 = c 2 (c > 0)
2 2 2
(c) Statement I is True, statement II is False
touch each other if [AIEEE 2011, 4M]
(d) Statement I is False, statement II is True
(a) | a| = c (b) a = 2c
120. The point diametrically opposite to the point P(1, 0) on the (c) | a| = 2c (d) 2| a | = c
circle x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y − 3 = 0 is [AIEEE 2008, 3M]
128. The locus of the mid-point of the chord of contact of
(a) (3, − 4 ) (b) ( −3, 4 ) (c) ( −3, − 4 ) (d) (3, 4) tangents drawn from points lying on the straight line
121. Tangents drawn from the point P(1, 8) to the circle 4 x − 5y = 20 to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9 is
[IIT-JEE 2012, 3M]
x 2 + y 2 − 6x − 4y − 11 = 0 touch the circle at the points A
(a) 20 ( x 2 + y 2 ) − 36 x + 45y = 0
and B. The equation of the circumcircle of the triangle PAB
is [IIT-JEE 2009, 3M] (b) 20 ( x 2 + y 2 ) + 36 x − 45y = 0
(a) x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 6y + 19 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 10y + 19 = 0 (c) 36 ( x 2 + y 2 ) − 20 x + 45y = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 6y − 29 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 4y + 19 = 0 (d) 36 ( x 2 + y 2 ) + 20 x − 45y = 0
336 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

[JEE Advanced 2014, 3M]

Paragraph
(a) radius of S is 8 (b) radius of S is 7
(Q. Nos. 129 and 130)
(c) centre of S is ( −7,1 ) (d) centre of S is ( −8, 1 )
A tangent PT is drawn to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 at the point
136. Locus of the image of the point (2, 3) in the line
P( 3 , 1) . A straight line L, perpendicular to PT is a tangent to
(2x − 3y + 4 ) +k ( x − 2y + 3) = 0, k ∈ R, is a
the circle ( x − 3) 2 + y 2 = 1. [JEE Main 2015, 4M]
129. A possible equation of L is (a) circle of radius 2
(a) x − 3y = 1 (b) x + 3y = 1 (b) circle of radius 3
(c) straight line parallel to X -axis
(c) x − 3y = −1 (d) x + 3y = 5
(d) straight line parallel to Y -axis
130. A common tangent of the two circles is
137. The number of common tangents to the circles
[IIT-JEE 2012, (3 + 3 ) M]
x 2 + y 2 − 4 x −6x − 12 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 + 6x + 18y + 26 = 0,
(a) x = 4 (b) y = 2
(c) x + 3y = 4 (d) x + 2 2y = 6 is [JEE Main 2015, 4M]
(a) 3 (b) 4
131. The length of the diameter of the circle which touches (c) 1 (d) 2
the X -axis at the point (1, 0) and passes through the
point (2, 3) is [AIEEE 2012, 4M] 138. The centres of those circles which touch the circle,
10 3 x 2 + y 2 − 8x − 8y − 4 = 0, externally and also touch the
(a) (b)
3 5 X -axis, lie on [JEE Main 2016, 4M]
6 5 (a) a hyperbola
(c) (d)
5 3 (b) a parabola
(c) a circle
132. The circle passing through (1, − 2) and touching the axis
(d) an ellipse which is not a circle
of x at (3, 0) also passes through the point
[JEE Main 2013, 4M] 139. If one of the diameters of the circle, given by the
(a) ( −5, 2 ) (b) (2, − 5 ) equation, x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 6y − 12 = 0, is a chord of a circle
(c) (5, − 2 ) (d) ( −2,5 ) S, whose centre is at ( −3, 2) , then the radius of S is
[JEE Main 2016, 4M]
133. Circle(s) touching X -axis at a distance 3 from the origin (a) 5 (b) 10
and having an intercept of length 2 7 on Y -axis is (are) (c) 5 2 (d) 5 3
(a) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 8y + 9 = 0 [JEE Advanced 2013, 3M]
140. Let RS be the diameter of the circle x 2 + y 2 = 1, where S
(b) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 7y + 9 = 0
is the point (1, 0). Let P be a variable point (other than R
(c) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 8y + 9 = 0
and S) on the circle and tangents to the circle at S and P
(d) x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 7y + 9 = 0 meet at the point Q. The normal to the circle at P
intersects a line drawn through Q parallel to RS at point
134. Let C be the circle with centre at (1, 1) and radius = 1. If T
E. Then the locus of E passes through the point(s)
is the circle centred at (0, y ), passing through origin and
[JEE Advanced 2016, 4M]
touching the circle C externally, then the radius of T is
1 1   1 1
equal to [JEE Main 2014, 4M] (a)  ,  (b)  , 
1 1 3 3  4 2
(a) (b)
2 4 1 1   1 1
(c)  ,−  (d)  , − 
3 3 3 3  4 2
(c) (d)
2 2 141. For how many values of p, the circle
135. A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) and is x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y − p = 0 and the co-ordinate axes have
orthogonal to the circles ( x − 1) + y = 16 and
2 2
exactly three common points? [JEE Advanced 2017, 3M]
x 2 + y 2 = 1. Then
 Chap 04 Circle 337

Answers
Exercise for Session 1 Exercise for Session 7
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a) 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (c) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (d)
− 2 4 − 16 − 31
11. (b) 12. (a) 13.  , ; 2 12. (a) 14. x + y − 6x − 6 y + 9 = 0
2 2 
16.  , 
 5 5  21 63 
15. x2 + y2 − 2x − 4 y − 4 = 0 17. 4x2 + 4 y2 + 6x + 10 y − 1 = 0 18. x + y − 5 = 0
16. x + y − 2x − 8 y + 15 = 0
2 2

18. (x + 1)2 + ( y − 3)2 = 4; (− 1, 3) ; 2

Chapter Exercises
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (d)
Exercise for Session 2 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (c)
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (d)
6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (c)
13. x2 + y2 − y − 16 = 0 ;  0,
1 65
11. (c) 12. (a) ; 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (a)
 2 2
31. (b,d) 32. (b,d) 33. (a,b,c,d) 34. (a,d) 35. (b,d)
14. (− 2, − 7) 15. x2 + y2 − 2x − 3 y − 18 = 0 36. (b,c) 37. (a,b,c,d) 38. (b,d) 39. (a,d) 40. (a,d)
16. (x2 + y2 − 4x − 2 y + 4) = 0 41. (a,c) 42. (a,c) 43. (a,c) 44. (a,c,d) 45. (a,b) 46. (b)
17. x2 + y2 − 6x + 2 y − 15 = 0 47. (c) 48. (b) 49. (b) 50. (d) 51. (b) 52. (a)
53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (b) 57. (b) 58. (a)
Exercise for Session 3 59. (a) 60. (d) 61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (a)
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (d) 65. (d) 66. (c) 67. (4) 68. (6) 69. (1) 70. (4)
6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 71. (9) 72. (3) 73. (4) 74. (3) 75. (9) 76. (7)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. x2 + y2 ± 10x − 6 y + 9 = 0 77. (A) → (p, s); (B) → (q, r); (C) → (q); (D) → (p, q, s)
15. λ ∈ (− 1, 4) 16. x2 + y2 − 4x − 6 y = 0 78. (A) → (q, r) ; (B) → (p); (C) → (p) (D) → (s)
79. (A) → (q, s); (B) → (r,t); (C) → (p,s)
Exercise for Session 4 80. (A) → (p, q, s); (B) → (p, q, s, t); (C) → (p, q, r, s)
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (b) 81. (d) 82. (a) 83. (d) 84. (d) 85. (c) 86. (b)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 87. (b) 88. (a) 89. (x2 + y2 − x − y) = 0
11. (d) 12. (a) 90. x2 + y2 − 6x − 2 y + 1 = 0
14. (i) 3x − 4 y + 20 = 0 and 3x − 4 y − 10 = 0 (ii) 4x + 3 y + 5 = 0
91. x2 + y2 ± m (m + n ) x ± n (m + n ) y = 0
and 4x + 3 y − 25 = 0,
15. centre of the circle (0, 1, ± r 2 ), where r is radius 92. 25x2 + 25 y2 − 20x + 2 y − 60 = 0
16. 15, − 35 93. (5) 94. 18 sq units
 9 − 12  or  − 9 , 12 
96.  ,
Exercise for Session 5 95. 1.5 units   
5 5   5 5
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (d) 4 3
6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (a) 97. 3 (3 + 10 ) 98. sq units
9
11. (c) 12. (d) 14. 8 sq units
99. a1 a2 (x2 + y2 ) + (a1 c2 + a2 c1 ) x + (b1 c2 + b2 c1 ) y = 0
16. 3x + 2 y − 13 = 0  5
17.   100. (− 4, 4) or 
 − 1, 1
 16  
 2 2
101. 4a 2 + 4b 2 − c2 − 8ab + 4bc − 4ca < 0
Exercise for Session 6
105. (d) 106. (b) 107. (d) 108. (d) 109. (a) 110. (b)
1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (b)
111. (c) 112. (d) 113. (d) 114. (a) 115. (d) 116. (d)
7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (b)
117. (a) 118. (d) 119. (c) 120. (c) 121. (b) 122. (8)
13. 4x2 + 4 y2 + 30x − 13 y − 25 = 0 14. 2 2
123. (a) 124. (a) 125. (d) 126. (2) 127. (a) 128. (a)
16. Direct common tangents are 3x + 4 y = 57, 7x − 24 y = 233, 129. (a) 130. (d) 131. (a) 132. (c) 133. (a,c) 134. (b)
Transverse common tangents are 4x − 3 y = 26, 24x + 7 y = 156
135. (b,c) 136. (a) 137. (a) 138. (b) 139. (d) 140. (a,c)
141. (2)
Solutions (2, 0)
2
(5, 6)

 n2 
1. AB 2 = 4 AM 2 = 4  4 −  = 2(8 − n 2 )
 2
Hence, required sum = 2(8 − 1 2 + 8 − 2 2 ) = 22
B i.e. 3 5
M  3 5 − 2  3 5 + 2
∴ r1r2 =  . 
A  2   2 
(0, 0) O 2
41
=
4
2. Tangent at (5 2 cosθ,5 2 sin θ ) is 5. Any circle which touches 3x + 4y − 7 = 0 at (1, 1) will be of the
form
x cosθ + y sin θ = 5 2
S ( x,y ) ≡ ( x − 1 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 + λ (3 x + 4y − 7 ) = 0
∴ OP = 5 2 secθ, OP, = 5 2 cosecθ
Since, S(2, 3 ) = 16 ⇒1 + 4 + λ(11 ) = 16
∴ Area (∆PP1P2 ) = 2 × area of ∆OPP1 ∴ λ =1
1
= 2 × × 5 2 secθ × 5 2 cosec θ So, required circle will be x 2 + y 2 + x + 2y − 5 = 0
2
100 6. Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 2x + 4y − λ = 0
= ,
sin 2θ for interval point P(2,8 ),
Area ( ∆PP1P2 ) min = 100 4 + 64 − 4 + 32 − λ < 0
π ⇒ λ > 96 …(i)
⇒ θ= ⇒ OP = 10
4 and x-intercept = 2 (1 + λ ) and y-intercept = 2 ( 4 + λ )
⇒ P ≡ (10, 0 ), ( −10, 0 ) given 2 (1 + λ ) < 0 ⇒ λ < −1 …(ii)
3. Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 2 = 0, P ≡ (2,2) and 2 ( 4 + λ ) < 0 ⇒ λ < −4 …(iii)
∴ S1 = 2 2 + 2 2 − 2 = 6 > 0 from Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
⇒ P lies outside the circle λ ∈φ
PA. PB = ( PT ) 2 = S1 = 6 …(i) 7. Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y − 4 = 0
PB Its centre C ≡ ( −1, − 2 ) and radius r = 3. The points on the circle
given =3 …(ii)
PA which are nearest and farthest to the point P (a, b ) are Q and R
respectively. Thus, the circle centred at Q having radius PQ will
be the smallest circle while the circle centred at R having
radius PR will be the largest required circle.
B P (a, b)
T
Q
(0, 0)
A
(2, 2) P C

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

PA = 2, PB = 3 2 R
⇒ AB = PB − PA = 2 2 = Diameter of circle
Hence, the difference between their radii is
Hence, chord AB passes through the centre ( 0, 0 ), y = x
PR − PQ = QR = 2 × 3 = 6
4. Let S ≡ ( x − 2) 2 + y 2 − 4 = 0
Its centre C ≡ (2, 0 ) and radius r = 2 8. Radius = (a − π ) 2 + (b − e ) 2
Distance between C ≡ (2, 0 ) and (5, 6) is (2 − 5 ) 2 + ( 0 − 6 ) 2 = irrational = k
∴ Circle ( x − π ) 2 + (y − e ) 2 = k 2
 Chap 04 Circle 339

9. Given λL2L3 + µL3L1 + vL1L2 = 0 ⇒ a 2 + (a + 1 ) 2 < 5

⇒ λ(y − m2x − c 2 )(y − m3x − c 3 ) + µ(y − m3x − c 3 )(y − m1x − c1 ) ⇒ 2a 2 + 2a − 24 < 0
+ v (y − m1x − c1 )(y − m2x − c 2 ) = 0 ∴ a 2 + a − 12 < 0
for circle coefficient of x = coefficient of y 2 and coefficient of
2
(a + 4 )(a − 3 ) < 0
xy = 0, ⇒ −4 < a < 3 and for I and II quadrant
then, λ (m2m3 − 1 ) + µ(m3m1 − 1 ) + v (m1m2 − 1 ) = 0 a +1 > 0
and (m2 + m3 ) λ + (m3 + m1 )µ + (m1 + m2 )v = 0 ∴ a > −1
10. Q f ( x,y ) ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + 2by +c = 0 Hence, −1 < a < 3
⇒ f ( x, 0 ) = 0 ⇒ x 2 + 2ax + c = ( x − 2 ) 2 13. Let S ( x,y ) ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
∴ a = −2, c = 4 ⇒ S ( x, 2 ) = 0
and f ( 0, y ) = 0 ⇒ y 2 + 2by + c = (y − 2 )(y − 3 ) ⇒ x 2 + 4 + 2 gx + 4 f + c = ( x − 1 ) 2
∴ 2b = −5, c = 6 ∴ g = −1, 3 + 4 f + c = 0 …(i)
or
5
b = − ,c =6 and S (1, y ) = 0 ⇒1 + y 2 + 2 g + 2 fy + c = (y − 0 )(y − 2 )
2 ∴ f = −1, 1 + 2 g + c = 0 …(ii)
Clearly, that data are not consistent. From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
11. Given, (1 + αx )n = 1 + 8x + 24x 2 + ... g = −1, f = −1, c = 1
n(n − 1 ) ∴ Equation of required circle is
⇒ 1 + n(αx ) + (αx ) 2 + ...
1.2 x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2y + 1 = 0
= 1 + 8 x + 24 x 2 + ...
14. See the diagram. Since, there is no condition on θ, Q can be
B
placed either at Q1 or Q2 for a particular position of P. So
C option (a) and (b) cannot be definitely true.

A Q2(a–q)
P(q)
q Q1(a–q)
P (2, 4)
O
Equating the coefficients of x and x 2, we get
nα (nα − α ) P¢(– q)
nα = 8, = 24
1.2
8 (8 − α )
or = 24 ⇒ 8 − α = 6
2 Consider a line through origin y = mx. If Q and P are reflection
∴ α = 2 and n = 4 of each other with line mirror y = mx
x −2 y − 4 (Slope of PQ) ×m = −1
Equation of line is = = r , then point
cosθ sin θ  sin θ − sin(α − θ ) 
(2 + r cosθ, 4 + r sin θ ) lies on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4, or m  = −1
 cosθ − cos(α − θ )
then, (2 + r cosθ ) 2 + ( 4 + r sin θ ) 2 = 4  α  2θ − α  
 2 cos  .sin  
or r 2 + 4r (cosθ + 2 sin θ ) + 16 = 0 2 2 
m = −1
16  α  α − 2θ  
∴ PA ⋅ PB = r1r2 = = 16  2 sin   .sin  
1  2 2 
Aliter : PA ⋅ PB = ( PC ) 2 = 2 2 + 4 2 − 4 = 16  α
or m  − cot  = −1
12. For interior point OP < 5  2
α
C or m = tan  
 2

5 15. Since, x 2 + y 2 < 25 and x and y are integers, the possible values
P (a, a+1)
of x and y ∈ ( 0, ± 1, ± 2, ± 3, ± 4 ). Thus, x and y can be chosen in
B 5 A 9 × 9 = 81 ways. However, we have to exclude cases (3, 4), ( 4, 3 )
(–5, 0) O (0, 0) (5, 0) and ( 4, 4 ) i.e. 3 × 4 = 12 cases. Hence, the number of permissible
y=0 values
= 81 − 12 = 69
340 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

16. Q The point ([ P + 1],[ P ]) lies inside the circle From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 15 = 0, then (x − a )2 + y 2 = a 2
[ P + 1 ]2 + [ P ]2 − 2[ P + 1 ] − 15 < 0 ⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 2ax = 0

(1, 0) A a
O M
a
√8
q
X′ X
O L

⇒ ([ P ] + 1 ) 2 + [ P ]2 − 2([ P ] + 1 ) − 15 < 0
⇒ 2[ P ]2 − 16 < 0 ⇒[ P ]2 < 8 …(i)
Y′
Q Circles are concentric
∴point ([ P + 1 ],[ P ]) out side the circle ⇒ x 2 + y 2 = 2ax
x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 7 = 0 20. Equation of circle is (2x − y + 1)( x − 2y + 3) + λxy = 0
for circle coefficient of xy = 0
∴ ([ P ] + 1 ) + [ P ] − 2([ P + 1 ]) − 7 > 0
2 2
i.e. −5 + λ = 0,
⇒ ([ P ] + 1 ) 2 + [ P ]2 − 2([ P ] + 1 ) − 7 > 0
∴ λ =5
⇒ 2[ P ]2 − 8 > 0 ∴Circle is 2 x + 2y 2 + 7 x − 5y + 3 = 0
2

∴ [ P ]2 > 4 …(ii) 7 5 3
⇒ x2 + y 2 + x − y + = 0
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 2 2 2
4 < [ P ]2 < 8 which is impossible  7 5
∴Centre is  − , 
∴For no value of ‘P’ the point will be within the region.  4 4
17. The circles are x 2 + y 2 = 2 2 and ( x − 4) 2 + (y − 0) 2 = 3 2  λ2 (1 − λ ) 2 
21.  + − 5 ≤ 5
Y 4 4 
⇒ λ2 + (1 − λ ) 2 − 20 ≤ 100
X ⇒ 2 λ2 − 2 λ − 119 ≤ 0
O
1 − 239 1 + 239
∴ ≤λ≤
2 2
⇒ −7.2 ≤ λ ≤ 8.2 (approx.)
For the point P to enclose greatest area, the arbitrarily chosen
3  1 ∴ λ = −7, − 6, − 5,...,7, 8
point should be  , 0 and P should move in a circle of radius 22. Let φ( x,y ) ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
2  2
 3
2
 1
2 ∴ φ( 0, λ ) = 0 + λ2 + 0 + 2 fλ + c = 0
The locus of P is  x −  + (y − 0 ) 2 =  
 2  2 have equal roots,
2f c
⇒ x + y − 3 x + 2 = 0.
2 2
Then, 2 + 2 = − and 2.2 =
1 1
18. Since, y = | x| + c and x + y 2 − 8 | x | − 9 = 0 both are symmetrical
2
∴ f = −2 and c = 4
about Y -axis for x > 0, y = x + c.
and φ( λ , 0 ) ≡ λ2 + 0 + 2 gλ + 0 + c = 0
Equation of tangent to circle x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 9 = 0
∴ λ2 + 2 gλ + c = 0
Parallel to y = x + c is y = ( x − 4 ) + 5 (1 + 1 )
Here, c = 4
⇒ y = x + (5 2 − 4 )
∴ λ2 + 2 gλ + 4 = 0
for no solution c > 5 2 − 4,
have roots 4/5, 5
∴ c ∈ (5 2 − 4, ∞ ) 4
∴ + 5 = −2 g
19. Let ∠AOL = θ 5
∴ A ≡ (a cosθ, a sin θ ) 29
⇒ g=−
∴ M ≡ (a + a cosθ, a sin θ ) 10
x = a + a cosθ  29 
∴ Centre ≡ ( − g, − f ) =  , 2
⇒ ( x − a ) = a cosθ …(i)  10 
and y = a sinθ
 Chap 04 Circle 341

23. Circle is x 2 + y 2 = r 2 cos2 θ + r 2 sin 2 θ 26. Coordinates of P, Q, R are (cosα ,sin α ), (cosβ,sin β) and
x2 + y 2 = r 2 (cos γ,sin γ ) respectively.
and A ≡ ( −1, 0 )
Equation of tangent at θ is
α
x cosθ + y sin θ = r …(i) ∴ AP = ((1 + cosα ) 2 + sin 2 α ) = 2 cos 
 2
 π  π  π
and at θ +  is x cosθ +  + y sin θ +  = r  β
 3  3  3 AQ = ((1 + cosβ ) 2 + sin 2 β ) = 2 cos 
 2
1 3  1 3 
⇒ x  cosθ − sin θ + y  sin θ + cosθ = r  γ
2 2  2 2  AR = ((1 + cos γ ) 2 + sin 2 γ ) = 2 cos  
 2
⇒ x cosθ + y sin θ − x 3 sin θ + y 3 cosθ = 2r
Q AP , AQ, AR are in GP, then
⇒ r − 3( x sin θ − y cosθ ) = 2r α  β  γ
cos   , cos   , cos   are also in GP.
r  2  2  2
or x sin θ − y cosθ = − …(ii)
3 27. Let equation of circle be
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), then we get x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
4r 2
x2 + y 2 = ⇒ 3( x 2 + y 2 ) = 4r 2 It pass through (2, 0) and (0, 4), then 4 + 0 + 4 g + 0 + c = 0
3 (c + 4 )
24. Let MN be the diameter of the circle whose equation is ⇒ g=− and 0 + 16 + 0 + 8 f + c = 0
4
4y = x + 7 …(i) (c + 16 )
⇒ f =−
M 8
C Q Radius r = ( g 2 + f 2 − c )
(c + 4 ) 2 (c + 16 ) 2 
B =  + −c
O
 16 64 
D
L
 4 {c 2 + 8c + 16 } + {c 2 + 32c + 256 } − 64c 
=  
A  64 
N
 5c 2 + 320
and coordinates of A and B are ( −3, 4 ) and (5, 4 ) respectively. =  
 64 
Equation of ⊥ bisector of AB is [ L ≡ (1, 4 )]
1 For minimum radius c = 0
y − 4 = − (x − 1) (Qslope of AB = 0 ) ∴ g = −1, f = −2
0
∴ x =1 ...(ii) Required circle is x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 4y = 0
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get the coordinates of the centre of 28. The particle which moves clockwise is moving three times as
the circle as (1, 2) fast as the particle moving anticlockwise (Q speed in clockwise
3v and in anticlockwise v).
∴ OL = (1 − 1 ) + ( 4 − 2 ) = 2
2 2

∴ BC = 2OL = 4 unit P
AB = 8 unit
∴Area of rectangle ABCD = 4 × 8
= 32 sq units. v
25. QOC ⋅ OA = ab = OB ⋅ OD Q (1, 0)
∴A, B, C, D are concyclic.
3v
Y

(0, b) D
 3
B This mean the clockwise particle travels   th of the way
 4
(0, a) ax+
b y=  1
ab around the circle, the anticlockwise particle will travel   th
A  4
X
O C (b, 0 ) of the way around the circle. So, the second particle will meet
(a, 0) at P( 0,1 ).
Using the same logic, they will meet at Q( −1, 0 ), when they
bx+ay=ab
meet the second time.
342 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

BP 2
29. Q =α  5
  = ( x1 + 2 ) + (y1 − 3 )
2 2
or
PA  2
BP : PA = α :1 25
3 + α 4  ⇒ = x12 + y12 + 4 x1 − 6y1 + 13
∴Coordinates of P is  ,  , P lie on x + y = 4
2 2
4
 1 + α α + 1
4 x12 + 4y12 + 16 x1 − 24y1 + 27 = 0
⇒ (α + 3 ) 2 + 16 = 4(α + 1 ) 2
∴ Locus of mid-point is
⇒ 3α 2 + 2α − 21 = 0 …(i) 27
x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 6y + =0
Y 4
(0, 2)
⇒ ( x + 2 ) 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 = 6.25
B (3, 4)
31. Q r = a cosθ + b sin θ
P ⇒ r 2 = a(r cosθ ) + b(r sin θ )
X or x 2 + y 2 = ax + by (Qx = r cosθ, y = r sin θ )
(–2, 0) O A (2, 0)
(1, 0) or x + y − ax − by = 0
2 2
…(i)
Circle pass through O (origin)
Q
given ∠AOB = 90 °
O
BQ β 90°
and =
QA 1
BQ
BQ :QA = β :1 or −1 = β −1 B A
QA C a, b
2 2
AB (β − 1 )
=
QA 1
AB :QA = (β − 1 ):1
 β − 3 −4  a b
∴Coordinates of Q is  ∴AB is Diameter of circle Eq. (i), Centre is  , 
,   2 2
 β −1 β − 1
∴Locus of mid point AB (Q mid-point of AB is C)
Q lie on x 2 + y 2 = 4
a b
∴ (β − 3 ) 2 + 16 = 4 (β − 1 ) 2 x = ,y =
2 2
⇒ 3β 2 − 21β − 21 = 0 −3 − 2
32. Slope of PC = =1
Hence, α is a root of 3 x 2 + 2 x − 21 = 0 2 −7
and β is a root of 3 x 2 − 2 x − 21 = 0 If tanθ = 1
π ∴ θ = 45 °
30. Q ∠ACB = (given) x −7 y −2
3 Equation of PA is = =r
1 1
2π
∴ ∠AOB = 2 2
3
B A
4
4
5 B
C
(–2, 3) p/3 M(x1, y1)

O p/3 45°
p/3 5 P
(7, 2)
C A
 r r 
∴ 7 + ,2 +  lie on circle,
π  2 2
⇒ ∠AOM = ∠BOM = 2 2
3  r   r   r   r 
then, 7 +  + 2 +  − 47 +  +6  2 +  −3 = 0
Let mid-point of chord AB is ( x1, y1 )  2  2  2  2
∴ In ∆ AOM, ∴ r2 = −5 2 ± 4
π OM ( x1 + 2 ) + (y1 − 3 )2 2
∴ r = −5 2 ± 4
cos = =
3 OA 5
 Chap 04 Circle 343

 −5 2 ± 4 −5 2 ± 4  36. Let M(α ,β)

∴ Points 7 + ,2 + 
 2 2  Q AM = 2 AB ⇒ AB + BM = 2 AB
⇒ (2 ± 2 2, − 3 ± 2 2 ) ∴ AB = BM
Taking + ve sign for A, −ve sign for B. M(a, b)

33. Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0

S1 ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 4 = 0 B
S 2 ≡ x + y − 6 x − 8y + 10 = 0
2 2 O
(–2, 3)
S 3 ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2 x − 4y − 2 = 0
∴Common chords are
S − S1 ≡ 2 gx + 2 fy + c + 4 = 0 …(i) A (0, 3)
S − S 2 ≡ (2 g + 6 ) x + (2 f + 8 )y + c − 10 = 0 …(ii)
S − S 3 ≡ (2 g − 2 ) x + (2 f + 4 )y + c + 2 = 0 …(iii) ∴B is the mid point of AM.
 α 3 + β
For cutting the extremities of diameter, chords Eqs. (i), (ii) and ∴Coordinates of B are  ,  which lie on
(iii) pass through the centres of S1, S 2 and S 3 respectively, then 2 2 
∴ c + 4 = 0, (2 g + 6 ) 3 + (2 f + 8 ) 4 + c − 10 = 0 x 2 + 4 x + (y − 3 ) 2 = 0
and (2 g − 2 )( −1 ) + (2 f + 4 )(2 ) + c + 2 = 0 2
α2 α 3 + β 
after solving c = −4, g = −2, f = −3 + 4× +  − 3 = 0
4 2  2 
34.
A α 2 + 8α + (β − 3 ) 2 = 0
∴Requires locus is
2
x 2 + 8 x + (y − 3 ) 2 = 0
q/2
O
l q/2 P (l, 0) or x 2 + y 2 + 8 x − 6y + 9 = 0
2 x y
37. x cosα + y sin α = 2 or + =1
2 secα 2 cosec α
B
2secα = + ve in IV
π 2π π θ π
Q <θ < ⇒ < < and 2 cosec α = −ve in IV
2 3 4 2 3
value of g in I quadrant
1  θ 3
⇒ < sin   <  g cosα + g sin α − 2
2  2 2 g= 
 1 
1 2 3 λ 2
⇒ < < or 2> > xc
os
2 λ 2 2 3 a+
4 4 ys
ina
or 2 2>λ> or < λ <2 2 (g , g ) =2
3 3
35. It is clear that N is the mid-point of M and P (0, 0)
2
P(a, b) (g, –g)
in a=
1 ys
N a+
(8/3, 8/3) os
1 xc
M
1 (1/3, 1/3) 2
∴ g=
Q cosα + sin α ± 1
and value g of in IV quadrant
g cosα − g sin α − 2
g=
1
16 1 16 1 ⇒ ± g = g(cosα − sin α ) − 2
∴ α= − = 5 and β = − = 5
3 3 3 3 2
(α ,β ) ≡ (5, 5 ) lie on the circle g=
cosα − sin α ± 1
∴ 52 + 52 − 4 × 5 − 2 × 5 − c = 0 Equation of circles in I quadrant
c = 20 ( x − g ) 2 + (y − g ) 2 = g 2
or c − 40c + 400 = 0
2
And in IV quadrant is ( x − g ) 2 + (y − g ) 2 = g 2
344 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

α S1 41. Circle possible in I region and centre of circle on X -axis.

38. ∴ cot   =
 2 (g + f 2 − c )
2 If centre is (h, 0 ), then
| h − 0 − 1| 7
α (g + f − c )
2 2 = (h − 3 ) 3 +
∴ tan   = 2 2
 2 S1
∴ h = 6,4
 (g 2 + f 2 − c ) 
∴ α = 2 tan −1   Y
 
 S1  (0, 1) 0
y=
B x– (3, √7/2)

S1 I
(–g,–f) X
a/2 C (h, 0)
P (1, 0)
a/2
(x1 , y ) (g2+f2–c) x+y=1
1 S2
A (0, –1)
39. For condition of tangency
| 4 λ + 3 λ − 12| Then, centres are (6, 0) and (4, 0)
= λ ⇒ 7 λ − 12 = ±5 λ
5 42. QC 2 is the director circle of C1
∴ λ = 1, 6 ∴Equation of C 2 is
Y x 2 + y 2 = 2(2 ) 2 = 8
(0, 4)
B Again C 3 is the director circle of C 2. Hence, the equation of C 3
is
x 2 + y 2 = 2(8 ) = 16
(1, 1) l
43. The equation of tangent in terms of slope of x 2 + y 2 = 25 is
P
X y = mx ± 5 (1 + m 2 ) …(i)
O A
(3, 0) Given Eq. (i), pass through ( −2,11 ), then
40. Let coordinates of P ≡ (3 cosα ,3 sin α ) 11 = −2m ± 5 (1 + m 2 )
Let x-coordinate of Q is x1, then squaring both sides, then we get
y-coordinate of Q is −7 x1 − 3 21m 2 − 44m − 96 = 0
∴ Q ≡ ( x1, − 7 x1 − 3 ) ⇒ (7m − 24 )(3m + 4 ) = 0
Q x − y + 1 = 0 is the perpendicular bisector of PQ, then 4 24
∴ m=− ,
mid-point of PQ lie on x − y + 1 = 0 3 7
3 cosα + x1 3 sin α − 7 x1 − 3 There from Eq. (i) we get required tangents are
⇒ − +1 = 0
2 2 24 x − 7y ± 125 = 0 and 4 x + 3y = ±25
⇒ 8 x1 + 3 cosα − 3 sin α + 5 = 0 Hence, tangents are 24 x − 7y + 125 = 0 and 4 x + 3y = 25
⇒ 24 x1 + 9 cosα − 9 sin α + 15 = 0 …(i) 44. C1 ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 4y − 4 = 0 …(i)
and slope of ( x − y + 1 = 0 ) × slope of PQ = −1
and C 2 ≡ x + y + 2 x + 4y + 4 = 0
2 2
…(ii)
3 sin α + 7 x1 + 3
⇒ 1× = −1 ∴Radical axis is C1 − C 2 = 0
3 cosα − x1
⇒ −4 x − 8y − 8 = 0
⇒ 3 sin α + 7 x1 + 3 = −3 cosα + x1
or x + 2y + 2 = 0 which is L = 0
⇒ 6 x1 + 3 sin α + 3 cosα + 3 = 0
(a) Option is correct.
⇒ 24 x1 + 12 sin α + 12 cosα + 12 = 0 …(ii)
Centre and radius of C1 = 0 are (1, 2) and 3.
Subtracting Eqs. (i) and (ii), we obtain
Q Length of ⊥ from (1, 2) on L = 0
−3 cosα − 21 sin α + 3 = 0
|1 + 4 + 2| 7
⇒ (1 − cosα ) = 7 sin α is = ≠ radius
1+ 4 5
⇒ (1 − cosα ) 2 = 49(1 − cos2 α )
∴(b) Option is wrong.
⇒ (1 − cosα ) 2 = 49(1 + cosα )(1 − cosα )
L is also the common chord of C1 and C 2.
⇒ (1 − cosα )(1 − cosα − 49 − 49 cosα ) = 0 ∴(c) Option is correct.
24
∴ cosα = 1 and cosα = − Q Centres of C1 = 0 and C 2 = 0 are (1, 2) and ( −1, − 2 )
25
∴Slope of Line joining centres of circles C1 = 0 and C 2 = 0 is
 72 21 −2 − 2 4
∴Coordinates of P are (3, 0) and  − ,  . = = 2 = m1
 25 25 (say)
−1 − 1 2
 Chap 04 Circle 345

and
1
slope of L = 0 is − = m2 (say) From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get x 2 + (3 x − 1 ) 2 − 4 x − 1 = 0
2 or 10 x 2 − 10 x = 0
∴ m1m2 = −1 ∴ x = 0 and x = 1
Hence, L is perpendicular to the line joining centres of C1 and C 2. From Eq. (ii), y = −1 and y = 2
∴ (d) Option is correct. ∴ A ≡ ( 0, − 1 ) and B ≡ (1,2 )
45. Let slope of OA is m,
46. AB = ( 0 − 1) 2 + ( −1 − 2) 2 = 10
m −1
Then, = tan 45 ° 47. Let ∠ACB = 2θ
1+m
5 5
∴ CM = =
C 10 2
CM 1
⇒ cosθ = =
5 2
π
O (5, 3)
∴ θ=
D B 4
2 π 3π
2 Required angle = ∠APB = π − θ = π − =
m 4 4
λ
x+

45° 48. Equation of tangent at A( 0, − 1) to the circle S is

y=

0. x + ( −1 ). y − 2( x + 0 ) − 1 = 0
A
or 2x + y + 1 = 0
m −1 m −1 ∴ Slope (m1 ) = −2
⇒ = ±1 or = −1
1+m m+1 and slope of line L is m2 = 3
⇒ m − 1 = −m − 1 −2 − 3
If θ be the angle between L and S, then tan θ = =1
∴ m=0 1 + ( −2 )(3 )
∴Equation of OA is y = 3 π
∴ θ=
Solving y = 3 and x 2 + y 2 − 10 x − 6y + 30 = 0 4
⇒ x 2 + 9 − 10 x − 18 + 30 = 0 Sol. (Q. Nos. 49 to 51)
⇒ x − 10 x + 21 = 0
2 Q PQ = PR,
⇒ ( x − 7 )( x − 3 ) = 0 parallelogram PQRS is a rhombus.
or x = 3, 7
∴Two vertices are (3, 3) and (7, 3) and other diagonal is ⊥ to
y = 3 and through centre (5, 3) is x = 5. P
Now, solving x = 5 and x 2 + y 2 − 10 x − 6y + 30 = 0 Q
⇒ 25 + y 2 − 50 − 6y + 30 = 0
2
⇒ y 2 − 6y + 5 = 0
L=0
⇒ (y − 1 ) (y − 5 ) = 0 or y = 1, 5 O
2
∴Other two vertices are (5, 1) and (5, 5). R
Sol. (Q. Nos. 46 to 48)
S
S : x 2 + y 2 − 4x − 1 = 0 …(i)
L :y = 3 x − 1 …(ii) ∴Mid-point of QR = mid point of PS and QR ⊥ PS
Therefore, S in the mirror image of P w.r.t. QR.
Q 49. Let P( λ,6 − 2λ ) be any point on L = 0
q Q Circumcircle of ∆PQR always pass through O
∴OP is diameter of circle.
C (2, 0) B λ 
q Ö5 Then, centre is  ,3 − λ  So,
2 
q
Ö5 λ
M x= and y = 3 − λ
P 2
A
or 2 x + y = 3 is the locus of the circumcenter of ∆PQR.
346 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

RL3 3r 1  24
50. Area of ∆QRS = Area of ∆PQR = …(i) ⇒ d = =   (given)
R + L2
2
9+r 2 2 5 
Here, R = 2, L = S1 = (6 2 + 8 2 − 4 ) = 96 r 4
⇒ =
From Eq. (i), (9 − r ) 5
2

2 × 96 × 96 192 6 192 λ ∴ r =4
Area of ∆QRS = = = (given)
4 + 96 25 25 55. λ = r = 4
∴ λ =6 56. Q(C1C 2 ) 2 = r 2 + 3 2 = 16 + 9 = 25
51. Let S ≡ (α,β) ∴ C1C 2 = 5
QS is the mirror image of P w.r.t. QR. BM 4 − 3 1
In ∆ABM, sinθ = = =
Eq. (i) of QR is 3 x + 4y = 4, then AB C1C 2 5
α − 3 β − 4 −2 (3 .3 + 4 . 4 − 4 ) 2
= = 1  1 4 6
3 4 32 + 42 ∴ sin 2θ = 2 sin θ cosθ = 2 × × 1 −   =
5  5 25
42
=−
25 57. Length of direct common tangent = (C1C 2 ) 2 − (r − 3) 2
51 68 = (5 ) 2 − (1 ) 2
∴ α = − and β = −
25 25
= 24 = λ (given)
 51 68
Hence, S ≡ − ,−  ∴ λ2 = 24
 25 25 
Sol. (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
Sol. (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)
Y
52. This is third degree equation which satisfy the point of
intersection of L1 = 0, L2 = 0 and L3 = 0.
53. λL1L2 + µL3L4 = 0 will always pass through the vertices of the C C1
parallelogram for all λ, µ ∈ R ~ { 0 } C2

D L2=0 C B

X¢ X
O A(a, 0)
L4=0
L3=0

A L1=0 B

54. Since, µ = 0 Y¢
So, L1L2 + λL2L3 = 0 Let equation of line AB be
⇒ L2( L1 + λL3 ) = 0 x −a y − 0
= =r
This is the equation of pair of straight lines. cosθ sin θ
Sol. (Q. Nos. 55 to 57) Coordinates of any point on the line AB is (a + r cosθ,r sin θ ),
Let 2d = length of common chord and ∠PC1C 2 = φ, then then
d B ≡ (a + r1 cosθ,r1 sin θ )
sin φ =
3 and C ≡ (a + r2 cosθ,r2 sin θ )
M
58. λ = (OA ) 2 + (OB ) 2 + ( BC ) 2
A = a 2 + b 2 + (r1 − r2 ) 2 cos2 θ+ (r1 − r2 ) 2 sin 2 θ
q P r
B = (a 2 + b 2 ) + (r1 − r2 ) 2
q f (90°–f) = (a 2 + b 2 ) + 4a 2 cos2 θ − 4(a 2 − b 2 )
Q C1 C2
(Q B and C lie on x 2 + y 2 = b 2
∴ (a + r cosθ ) 2 + (r sin θ ) 2 = b 2
or r 2 + 2ar cosθ + a 2 − b 2 = 0
∴ r1 − r2 = 4a 2 cos2 θ − 4(a 2 − b 2 )
d d
and sin(90°− φ ) = or cos φ = ⇒ λ = 5b 2 − 3a 2 + 4a 2 cos2 θ
r r
d2 d2 Q 0 ≤ cos2 θ ≤ 1
1= + ∴ λ ∈ [5b 2 − 3a 2,5b 2 + a 2 ]
9 r2
 Chap 04 Circle 347

59. Let (h,k ) be the mid-point of AB and let (α ,β) be the coordinates 64. Locus of (h,k ) is [From Eq. (i)]
of B, then L1 : x + y = 0
a +α 0+β
= h and =k 65. Locus of (h,k ) is [From Eq. (ii)]
2 2
⇒ α = 2h − a and β = 2k C1 : x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2y = 0
Since, (α , β ) lies on x 2 + y 2 = b 2 66. Q Circle C 2 is equal to circle C1
⇒ (2h − a ) 2 + (2k ) 2 = b 2 ∴Radius of circle C 2 = radius of circle C1 = 2

b2
2 ∴Distance between the centres of C1 and C 2
 a
h −  + k =
2
or
  = 2+ 2
2 4
=2 2 (Q circles C1 and C 2 touch externally)
Hence, locus of (h, k ) is
2 67. The given circle is
 a b2
x −  + y =
2
 S :( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 5 ) 2 = ( (34 − λ ) ) 2
2 4
Since, point P(1, 4 ) lies inside the circle
60. The locus of mid-point of AB, when BC is maximum is a fixed
point M on X -axis. ∴ S1 < 0
Sol. (Q. Nos. 61 to 63) ⇒ 1 + 16 − 6 − 40 + λ < 0
61. From the figure OA = OB = AB = a or λ < 29 …(i)
Also, circle neither touches nor cuts the axes, then
A
P 3 > (34 − λ ) or λ > 25 …(ii)

M and 5 > (34 − λ ) or λ > 9 …(iii)

a T
60° From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
B
O 25 < λ < 29
60°
N Hence, difference = 29 − 25 = 4
a
Q 68. x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 2λy − 8 = 0
C
or ( x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 8 ) − 2 λy = 0
which is of the form S + λL = 0
∴ ∠OAB = 60 °
All the circles pass through the point of intersection of the
62. Let T be the point of intersection of tangents. circle x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 8 = 0 and y = 0
Q ∠AOC = 120 °
Solving, we get
∴ ∠ATC = 180 °−120 ° = 60 °
x 2 − 2x − 8 = 0
63. Locus of point of intersection of tangents at A and C is
or ( x − 4 )( x + 2 ) = 0
a2
x2 + y 2 = ∴ A ≡ ( −2, 0 )
α
sin 2   and B ≡ ( 4, 0 )
 2
Hence, | AB| = 6
a2
= = 4a 2 (Here, α = 60 °) 69. Q AQ = BQ = 3 + 2 2
sin (30 ° ) 2
and PQ = radius of director circle of C1
Hence, x 2 + y 2 = 4a 2
Sol. (Q. Nos. 64 to 66) A¢ P
Here, t12 = h + k − 4,
2 2 A r

t 22 = h 2 + k 2 − 4h, R
B¢
t 32 = h 2 + k 2 − 4k
given t14 = t 22t 32 + 16 Q
B
or (h + k − 4 ) = (h + k − 4h )(h + k − 4k ) + 16
2 2 2 2 2 2 2

or (h 2 + k 2 ) 2 − 8(h 2 + k 2 ) + 16 = (h 2 + k 2 ) 2 − 4(h 2 + k 2 )(h + k )

= 2(3 + 2 2 ) = 3 2 + 4
+16hk + 16
or (h 2 + k 2 )(h + k ) − 2(h 2 + k 2 ) − 4hk = 0 Let ‘r’ be required radius
 PR A′R 
or (h + k )(h + k ) − 2(h + k ) = 0
2 2 2 ∴ 3 2 + 4 =3+2 2 +r +r 2 Q = 
 PQ AQ 
or (h + k )(h 2 + k 2 − 2(h + k )) = 0 ( 2 + 1)
⇒ r= =1
or h+k = 0 …(i) ( 2 + 1)
and h 2 + k 2 − 2h − 2k = 0 …(ii)
348 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

70. Since, A. x + y − 5 = 0 is a tangent to the circle at P(2,3), so the Then,

a
=2
centre of the circle lies on x − y + 1 = 0. Now Q(1,2 ) lies on the 1−
1
circle. 2
Equation of right bisector of PQ is x + y − 4 = 0 or a = 2 − 2 = 6 −c [From Eq. (i)]
∴Centre of circle is point of intersection of x − y + 1 = 0 and or 4 + 2 − 4 2 = 6 −c
 3 5
x + y − 4 = 0 which is  ,  ∴ c=4 2
 2 2
Hence, λ = 4
3 5
+ −5 74. The rays are given as 2x 2 − 3xy − 2y 2 = 0 i.e.
1 2 2 1
∴ Radius = = (2 x + y )( x − 2y ) = 0
λ 2 2
x
∴ λ =2 ⇒ y = or y = −2 x which are perpendicular.
2
Hence, λ2 = 4 ∴Required area
71. Since, given circle is ( x + 5) 2 + (y − 12) 2 = (14) 2 Y
2 2
 x + 5  y − 12 y=–2x
or   +  =1
 14   14  y=
x
2
x +5 y − 12
Let, = cosθ and = sinθ
14 14 O
X¢ X
or x = 14 cosθ − 5 and y = 14 sinθ + 12
∴ x 2 + y 2 = (14 cosθ − 5 ) 2 + (14 sin θ + 12 ) 2
= 196 + 25 + 144 + 28 (12 sin θ − 5 cosθ )
= 365 + 28 (12 sin θ − 5 cosθ )
Maximum value of ( x 2 + y 2 ) = 365 + 28 × 13 = 729
Y¢
(Q −13 ≤ 12 sin θ − 5 cosθ ≤ 13)
1
1 = ( π (2 ) 2 − π (1 ) 2 )
or maximum value of ( x 2 + y 2 ) 3 = 9 4
3 π λπ
72. Let the given lines are represented by L1, L2, L3 = = (given)
4 4
and L4 , then ∴ λ =3
L1 ≡ 2 x + 3y − 2 = 0 L2 ≡ 3 x − 2y − 3 = 0
75. Let radii of circles be r1 and r2 and distance between centres is
L3 ≡ x + 2y − 3 = 0 L4 ≡ 2 x − y − 1 = 0 d, then
Equation of second degree conic circumscribing a quadrilateral
whose sides are L1 = 0, L2 = 0, L3 = 0 and L4 = 0 is d 2 − (r1 + r2 ) 2 = 5 …(i)
L1L3 + kL2L4 = 0 and d 2 − (r1 − r2 ) 2 = 13 …(ii)
or (2 x + 3y − 2 )( x + 2y − 3 ) + k (3 x − 2y − 3 )(2 x − y − 1 ) = 0 …(i) From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
For circle, coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 (r1 + r2 ) 2 − (r1 − r2 ) 2 = (13 ) 2 − (5 ) 2
or 2 + 6k = 6 + 2k ⇒ 4r1r2 = 144 or λ = 36 (Qr1r2 = λ)
∴ k =1 λ
∴ =9
From, Eq. (i), required circle is 4
8 x 2 + 8y 2 − 17 x − 8y + 9 = 0 76. Let ax + by = 1 …(i)
 17  9 be a chord PQ.
or x + y −   x −y +   = 0
2 2
8  8 Y
17 9
Here, λ = − , µ = −1, ν =
8 8
then, | λ + 2µ + ν| = 3 P
73. Let radius of given circle is a
M
∴ a = ( 4 + 2 − c ) = (6 − c ) …(i) X¢ X
O
a a
Now, radius of circle C1 = and radius of circle C 2 = (–1, 0) Q
2 ( 2 )2 (1, 0)
and so on.
a a
Also, a+ + + ... ∞ = 2 (gjven)
2 ( 2 )2 Y¢
 Chap 04 Circle 349

which pass through (1, 0), then a + 0 = 1 (B) Let P be the point (h, k ), then h 2 + k 2 + 2h + 2k = 0 …(i)
∴ a =1 h k
and touch circle B with centre ( −1, 0 ) and radius 1, then mid-point of OP is  , 
 2 2
| −a + 0 − 1|
=1 Let
h
x = ,y =
k
a2 + b2 2 2
or a 2 + b 2 = (a + 1 ) 2 or h = 2 x, k = 2y
or b 2 = 2a + 1 = 3 From Eq. (i), 4 x 2 + 4y 2 + 4 x + 4y = 0
∴ b= 3 or x2 + y 2 + x + y = 0
From Eq. (i), Equation of chord is x + 3 y = 4 On comparing, we get
1 2a = 1, 2b = 1
∴ OM = and OP = 4
2 1
or a =b =
∴ PQ = 2 PM = 2 (OP ) 2 − (OM ) 2 2
 1 ∴ a +b =1
= 2 16 −  = 63 = λ (C) Centre of circles are C1 :(1, 2 ) and C 2 :(5, − 6 )
 4
−6 − 2
∴ λ = 63 Equation of C1C 2 is y − 2 = (x − 1)
5 −1
λ
Hence, =7 or 2x + y − 4 = 0 ...(i)
9
Equation of radical axis is 8 x − 16y − 56 = 0
77. Q S1 :( x − 2) 2 + (y − 3) 2 = 1 or x − 2y − 7 = 0 …(ii)
Centre C1 :(2,3 ) and radius r1 :1 and S 2 :( x − 5 ) 2 + (y − 6 ) 2 = r 2 Point of intersection of Eqs. (i) and (ii) are (3, −2)
Centre C 2 :(5,6 ) and radius r2 :r ∴ a = 3, b = −2
⇒ C1C 2 = 3 2 or a +b =1
(A)QS1 and S 2 touch internally, then (D) Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 6 3 x − 6y + 27 = 0
C1C 2 = r2 − r1 S1 = 0 2 + 0 2 − 0 − 0 + 27 = 27
or 3 2 = r −1 T = 0. x + 0. y − 3 3( x + 0 ) − 3(y + 0 ) + 27
or (r − 1 ) 2 = 18 = −3 3 x − 3y + 27
(B)QS1 and S 2 touch externally, then
Eq. of the pair of tangents is given by
C1C 2 = r2 + r1
SS1 = T 2
or 3 2 =r +1
⇒ 27( x 2 + y 2 − 6 3 x − 6y + 27 ) = ( −3 3 x − 3y + 27 ) 2
or r 2 + 2r + 3 = (r + 1 ) 2 + 2 = 18 + 2 = 20
or 3 ( x 2 + y 2 − 6 3 x − 6y + 27 ) = ( 3 x + y − 9 ) 2
(C)QS1 and S 2 intersect orthogonally, then
(C1C 2 ) 2 = r12 + r22 or 18y 2 − 18 3 xy = 0
⇒ 18 = r 2 + 1 or 18y (y − 3 x ) = 0
or r 2 − 1 = 16 the tangents are y = 0, y = 3 x
(D)QS1 and S 2 intersect, the common chord is S1 − S 2 = 0 ∴ a = 0, b = 3
i.e. 6 x + 6y + r 2 − 49 = 0 then, a2 + b2 = 3
Given, common chord is longest, then passes through (2, 3) 79. (A)Q P ≡ (10,7)
⇒ 12 + 18 + r 2 − 49 = 0 and S = x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 2y − 20
or r = 19
2
∴ S1 = 100 + 49 − 40 − 14 − 20 > 0
∴ r 2 + 5 = 24 ∴P outside the circle, radius r = 4 + 1 + 20 = 5
78. (A) Since (2, 3) lies on ax + by − 5 = 0 centre C ≡ (2,1 )
∴ 2a + 3b − 5 = 0 …(i) ∴Shortest distance L = CP − r
Since, line is at greatest distance from centre = (10 − 2 ) 2 + (7 − 1 ) 2 − 5
 4 − 3  a  = (64 + 36 ) − 5 = 10 − 5 = 5
⇒    −  = −1 i.e. a = b
 3 − 2  b 
And largest distance M = CP + r
From Eq. (i), a = b = 1
= 10 + 5 = 15
∴ a + b = 2 and a 2 + b 2 = 2
M + L = 20, M − L = 10
350 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(B)Q P ≡ (3, − 6 ) 81. Let S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 1 = 0

and S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 16 x − 12y − 125 ∴ S (1,3 ) = 1 2 + 3 2 − 1 = 9 > 0
∴ S1 = 9 + 36 − 48 + 72 − 125 < 0 ⇒ Point (1, 3) outside the circle x 2 + y 2 = 1
∴ P inside the circle radius r = (64 + 36 + 125 ) = 15
∴Two tangents can be drawn from (1, 3) to circle x 2 + y 2 = 1
centre C ≡ (8,6 )
⇒ Statement I is false
∴ Shortest distance L = r − CP |3 − m|
Also, =1
= 15 − (8 − 3 ) 2 + (6 + 6 ) 2 (1 + m 2 )
= 15 − 13 = 2 Squaring both sides, we get
And largest distance M = r + CP
9 + m 2 − 6m = 1 + m 2
= 15 + 13 = 28
4
M + L = 30, or 6m = 8 ⇒m =
3
M − L = 26
⇒ Statement II is true.
(C) P ≡ (6, − 6 )
82. Q x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4y = 0
and S ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 4 x + 6y − 12
⇒ ( x + 1 ) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 1 2 + 2 2
∴ S1 = (6 ) 2 + ( −6 ) 2 − 24 − 36 − 12 = 0
Let S ≡ ( x + 1 ) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 − 1 2 − 2 2
P on the circle
∴ radius r = ( 4 + 9 + 12 ) = 5 Value of S(1, λ ) = (1 + 1 ) 2 + ( λ − 2 ) 2 − 1 2 − 2 2 < 0
∴ Shortest distance L = 0 or (1 + 1 ) 2 + ( λ − 2 ) 2 < 1 2 + 2 2
and largest distance M = 2r = 10 ∴Points (1, λ) inside the circle.
M + L = 10, M − L = 10 ⇒ No tangents can be drawn from the point (1, λ) to the circle
80. (A) Equation of conic x 2 + y 2 + 2 x − 4y = 0
(y − a1x − b )(y − a 2x − b ) + λxy = 0 represent a circle. If and (1 + 1 ) 2 + ( λ − 2 ) 2 < 1 2 + 2 2
coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2
⇒ (λ − 2)2 < 1
∴ a1a 2 = 1
or −1 < λ − 2 < 1
Q AM > GM
or 1 < λ <3
a1 + a 2
∴ > a1a 2 = 1 ∴Statement II and Statement II are both true and statement II
2 is correct explanation for statement I.
⇒ a1 + a 2 > 2
83. Let A ≡ (1, 4), B ≡ (2,3) and C ≡ ( −1,6)
a12 + a 22
and > a12.a 22 = | a1a 2| = 1 1 4 1
2 1
∴Area of ∆ABC = 2 3 1 = 0
∴ a12 + a 22 > 2 2
−1 6 1
(B) Let (a1 cosθ, a1 sin θ ) be any point on x 2 + y 2 = a12, then
⇒ A, B, C are collinear
chord of contact is
i.e. no circle is drawn.
x (a1 cosθ ) + y (a1 sin θ ) = b 2
Hence, Statement I is false and through three non-collinear
which is tangent of x 2 + y 2 = a 22 points in a plane only one circle can be drawn.
| 0 + 0 − b 2| ∴Statement II is true.
∴ = a 2 or b 2 = a1a 2
{(a1 cosθ ) 2 + (a1 sin θ ) 2 } 84. Q Locus of point of intersection of perpendicular tangents is
director circle.
for b = 1, a1a 2 = 1
Q x 2 + y 2 = 50 is director circle of x 2 + y 2 = 25
AM > GM
a1 + a 2 ⇒ Statement I is false and statement II is true.
⇒ > a1a 2 =| b| 85. Here, C1 ≡ ( 0, 0), r1 = 2
2
∴ a1 + a 2 > 2| b|, and C 2 ≡ (3, 0 ), r2 = 2
for b = 1, a1 + a 2 > 2 ∴ | C1C 2| = 3 and r1 + r2 = 4
and then, a12 + a 22 > 2 and | r1 − r2| = 0
(C) 2 gg1 + 2 ff1 = c + c1 ⇒ | r1 − r2| < | C1C 2| < r1 + r2
⇒ 2 × a1 × a 2 + 0 = b + b Hence, circles x 2 + y 2 = 4 and x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 5 = 0 intersect
∴ a1a 2 = b for b = 1,a1a 2 = 1 each other at two distinct points.
and then, a1 + a 2 > 2 ⇒ Statement I is true and Statement II is false.
Also, a12 + a 22 > 2
 Chap 04 Circle 351

86. Q Centre of circle (1, −1) lies on 3x − 4y = 7 For minimum radius, c must be equal to zero, then from
∴ 3 x − 4y = 7 is a diameter of circle Eqs. (ii) and (iii),
1 1
x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 2y − 47 = 0 g=− and f = −
2 2
∴Statement I is true. Equation of required circle, from Eq. (i), is
Statement II is always true but Statement I is not a correct x2 + y 2 − x − y = 0
explanation of Statement I.
90. The given circle is
87. Statement I is true, line 4y − 3x − 5 = 0 passes through
x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 6y + 17 = 0
A( −3, − 1 ) and its distance from O( 0, 0 ) is 1 unit = radius of circle
Centre and radius of this circle are (3, − 3 ) and 9 + 9 − 17 = 1
Y
respectively. But given the required circle has normals
5
x=
–3

C2 (3, 1)
4y

X¢ X
O
r
i r

A(–3, –1) B(0, –1) l

Y¢ C1 (3, – 3)

The tangent at B( 0, − 1 ) is y = −1 and normal at A to line AB is

x = −3 x 2 − 3 xy − 3 x + 9y = 0
 4 or ( x − 3 ) ( x − 3y ) = 0
∴Equation of incident ray is y + 1 =  −  ( x + 3 )
 3 or x = 3 and x − 3y = 0 …(i)
but point of intersection of normals is the centre of the circle.
⇒ 4 x + 3y + 15 = 0
Point of intersection of normals represented by Eq. (i) is
Statement II is obviously true.
(3, 1) which is centre of the required circle. Since, given
Hence, both statements are true and but Statement II is not circle and required circle touch each other externally, then
correct explanation of Statement I. (if radius of required circles is r)
88. The given points are A(1,1), B(2,3) and C(3,5) which are Sum of radii = Distance between the centres
collinear as r + 1 = (3 − 3 ) 2 + ( −3 − 1 ) 2 = 4
Slope of AB = Slope of BC = 2
∴ r =3
Hence, Statement II is true ∴Equation of required circle is
The chords of contact are concurrent, then, ( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 3 2
x1 y1 1
or x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 2y + 1 = 0
x2 y 2 1 = 0
x3 y 3 1 91. Let OA = a and OB = b then the coordinates of A and B are
(a , 0 ) and ( 0 , b ) respectively.
Hence, points ( x1, y1 ), ( x 2, y 2 ) and ( x 3, y 3 ) are collinear.
Since, ∠ AOB = π / 2
Therefore, Both statements are true and statement II is correct
Hence, AB is the diameter of the required circle whose
explanation of statement I.
equation is
89. Let the equation of circle be ( x − a ) ( x − 0 ) + (y − 0 ) (y − b ) = 0
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i) or x 2 + y 2 − ax − by = 0 ... (i)
Since, circle Eq. (i) passes through (1,0) and (0,1) then Y
(1 + c )
1 + 2g + c = 0 ⇒ g = − …(ii)
2
(1 + c )
and 1 + 2f + c = 0 ⇒ f = − …(iii) B (0, b)
2 n
Radius of the circle Eq. (ii) = ( g 2 + f 2 − c )
M
(1 + c ) 2 (1 + c ) 2 1 + c 2
= + −c =   X
4 4  2  O A (a, 0)
m
L
352 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Equation of tangent at (0,0) of Eq. (i) is 93. Equation of chord of contact (QR) is 6x + 8y − r 2 = 0
a b | 6 ⋅6 + 8 ⋅8 − r 2 | | 100 − r 2 |
0 ⋅ x + 0 ⋅ y − (x + 0) − (0 + y ) = 0 ∴ PM = =
2 2
(6 2 + 8 2 ) 10
or ax + by = 0
a ⋅a + 0 | 0 + 0 − r2 | r2
∴ m = AL = and OM = =
a2 + b2 (6 2 + 8 2 ) 10

a2
or m= ...(ii) P (6, 8)
a2 + b2
Q
a ⋅ 0 + b ⋅b
and n = BM = M
a2 + b2 r
R
b2 O (0 r
∴ n= ...(iii) , 0)
a2 + b2
Adding Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
m + n = (a 2 + b 2 )
From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get then QR = 2 ⋅ QM = 2 {(OQ ) 2 − (OM ) 2 }
a = ± m (m + n ) and b = ± n (m + n )  r4 
= 2 r 2 − 
From Eq. (i), equation of required circle is  100
x 2 + y 2 ± m (m + n ) x ± n(m + n ) y = 0 1
∴ Area of ∆QPR = ⋅ QR ⋅ PM
92. Solving the equations 2
(2 + c ) x + 5c 2y = 1 and 3 x + 5y = 1 1  r 4  | 100 − r 2 |
∆ ( say ) = ⋅ 2 r 2 −  .
 1 − 3x  2  100 10
then (2 + c ) x + 5c 2   =1
 5 
r 2 (100 − r 2 ) 3
or (2 + c ) x + c 2 (1 − 3 x ) = 1 ∴ ∆2 = =z (say)
1000
1 − c2 dz 1
∴ x= ∴ = {r 2 . 3 (100 − r 2 ) 2 . ( −2r ) + (100 − r 2 ) 3 ⋅ 2r }
2 + c − 3c 2 dr 1000
(1 + c ) (1 − c ) 1+c 2r (100 − r 2 ) 2
or x= = = {100 − r 2 − 3r 2 }
(3 c + 2 ) (1 − c ) 3c + 2 1000
1+c dz
∴ x = Lim For maximum or minimum = 0, then we get r = 5, ( r ≠ 10 as
c → 1 3c + 2 dr
2 P is outside the circle)
x=
5 d 2z
 = − ve
and
6 dr 2r = 5
1−
1 − 3x 5 =− 1
∴ y = = ∴ ∆ is also maximum at r = 5 .
5 5 25
2 1 94. Since, A ( 4, 6) and B (1, 9) do not lie on 2x − y + 4 = 0.
Therefore, the centre of the required circle is  , −  but
 5 25  5 15
Let M be the mid-point of AB, then coordinates of M is  , 
circle passes through (2, 0) 2 2 
2   1 
2 2 B (1, 9)
∴ Radius of the required circle =  − 2 +  − − 0 5 ,15
5   25  M 2 2
64 1 1601
= + = A (4, 6)
25 625 625
k) P
(h,
0

Hence, the required equation of the circle is

4=

2 2
 2  1 1601
y+

 x −  + y +  = C
 5  25 625
2x –

or 25 x 2 + 25y 2 − 20 x + 2y − 60 = 0
D
 Chap 04 Circle 353

9 −6 ⇒ 4|k + 2| =2 5 |k + 3|
Slope of AB = = −1
1−4 ⇒ 2|k + 2| = 5 |k + 3|
∴ Slope of PM = 1 5
15  5 ∴ k+2=±(k + 3 )
Equation of PM is, y − = 1 . x −  2
2  2 ∴ k = − 7 − 2 5 or k = − 7 + 2 5
which passes through P (h, k ), then
Since, radius from Eq. (ii),
15 5
k− =h − or k −h =5 …(i) 4|k + 2|
2 2 r=
2
and (h, k ) lie on 2 x − y + 4 = 0
4 | −7 − 2 5 + 2 |
∴ 2h − k + 4 = 0 …(ii) (radius)at k = −7 − 2 5 =
2
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
= 10 2 + 4 10 = 26.79
h = 1 and k = 6
2 2 4 | −7 + 2 5 + 2 |
 5  15 (radius)at k = − 7 + 2 =
Now, AD = 2 PM = 2 1 −  + 6 −  5
2
 2   2
= 10 2 − 4 10 = 1.5
9 9
=2 + =3 2 Hence, radius of smaller circle is 1.5 units.
4 4
96. Let the centre of the circle C 2 is Q (h, k ), equation of the circle
and AB = ( 4 − 1 ) 2 + (6 − 9 ) 2 = 3 2 C 2 is
∴ Area of rectangle ( x − h ) 2 + (y − k ) 2 = 5 2
ABCD = AB × AD = 3 2 × 3 2 = 18 sq units. or x + y − 2 xh − 2yk + h 2 + k 2 − 25 = 0
2 2

95. Let C (h, k ) be the centre of the circle. Let AB and C ′ D be the C 2 ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 2 xh − 2yk + h 2 + k 2 − 25 = 0
lines represented by
and equation of circle C1 ≡ x 2 + y 2 − 16 = 0
3 x − y = 6 and y = x respectively.
Clearly, the circle touches AB at A (1, − 3 ).
C2
Y B
A 5
Q(h, k)
D
M
C1 P
(0, 0)
y=x B

O
X ∴ Equation of common chord is
N C1 − C 2 = 0
3x –y = 6
⇒ −2 xh − 2yk + h 2 + k 2 − 9 = 0
C
C′ (h, k)
A (1, –3) or 2hx + 2ky − (h 2 + k 2 − 9 ) = 0 …(i)
Slope of this line = − h / k
But, it is given that its slope = 3 / 4
h 3
∴ − =
Equation of line ⊥ to 3 x − y = 6 is x + 3y = λ which passes k 4
through (1, − 3 ). or 3k + 4h = 0 …( ii )
then 1 −9 = λ Let p be the length perpendicular from P ( 0, 0 ) on chord (1),
∴ λ = −8 then
∴ ⊥ line is x + 3y + 8 = 0 h2 + k 2 − 9
p=
which passes through C (h, k ) ( 4h 2 + 4k 2 )
then h + 3k + 8 = 0 …(i)
(h 2 + k 2 − 9 )
Now, centre C (h, k ) ≡ C ( −3k − 8, k ) or p= …( iii )
| − 3k − 8 − k | 2 (h 2 + k 2 )
Radius CN = = CA
1+1 Length of this chord AB = 2 AM
= ( −3k − 8 − 1 ) + (k + 3 )
2 2 = 2 (16 − p 2 )
4|k + 2| This chord has maximum length, then p = 0, then from Eq. (iii),
⇒ = | k + 3 | 10 …( ii )
2 h2 + k 2 − 9 = 0 …( iv )
354 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

On solving Eqs. (ii) and (iv) we get Equation of circle with centre at Q (1, 0 ) and radius r is
9
h = m ,k = ±
12 ( x − 1 ) 2 + (y − 0 ) 2 = r 2 …(ii)
5 5 (0 < r < 2)
 9 12  9 12
∴ Centre of C 2 is  , −  or  − ,  Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
5 5  5 5
2 − r2 r 4 − r2
97. Q 2x + y − 3xy = 0
2 2 x= and y = ±
2 2
⇒ (2 x − y ) ( x − y ) = 0 but R above the X-axis.
⇒ y = 2x, y = x 2 −r 2 r 4 − r 2 
are the equations of straight lines passing through origin. ∴ R≡ , 
 2 2 
Now, let the angle between tangents is 2α,  
Y r 4 − r2
So, SQ = r and MR =
2
y = 2x

3 C 1
3 ∴ Area of ∆QSR = ⋅QS ⋅ MR
2
x
=

1 r 4 − r2
Ay

∆ = ⋅r ⋅
αα 2 2
r 2 (4 − r 2 )
45°
X ∆ ( say ) =
O 4
tan ( 45 ° + 2α ) = 2 r4
then, ∆ = (4 − r 2 ) = A
2
(say)
tan 45 ° + tan 2α 16
⇒ =2 1
1 − tan 45 ° tan 2α ∴ A= ( 4r 4 − r 6 )
1 + tan 2α 2 2 tan 2α 1 16
⇒ = ⇒ = dA 1 d 2A 1
1 − tan 2α 1 2 3 ∴ = (16r 3 − 6r 5 ) and = ( 48r 2 − 30r 4 )
dr 16 dr 2 16
(By componendo and dividendo rule )
dA
2 tan α 1 For maximum and minimum area, =0
⇒ = dr
1 − tan 2 α 3
8
⇒ tan 2 α + 6 tan α − 1 = 0 r2 =
3
−6 ± (36 + 4 )  d 2A  1  64
∴ tan α = = − 3 ± 10 ∴  2
8
=  48 × − 30 ×  < 0
2  dr  r=
8 16  3 9
 π
= − 3 + 10 Q0 < α < 
3
 4 ∴ A is maximum. Hence, ∆ is also maximum.
3 1 8 1  8
Now, in ∆OAC, tan α = = ( 10 − 3 ) ∴ Maximum value of ∆ = × × 4 − 
OA 2 3 2  3
3 ( 10 + 3 )
∴ OA = = 3 (3 + 10 ) =
2
×
2
( 10 − 3 ) ( 10 + 3 ) 3 3
98. The given circle is x 2 + y 2 = 1 …(i) 4 3
= sq units.
with centre at O ( 0,0 ) and radius 1. It cuts X-axis at the points 9
when y = 0 then x = ± 1 i.e., at P ( −1, 0 ) and Q (1, 0 ) . 99. The equation of any curve passing through
Y a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
a 2x + b2y + c 2 = 0
y = 0 and x = 0 is
R (a1x + b1y + c1 )(a 2x + b2y + c 2 ) + λxy = 0 …(i)
X′ (–1, 0) P X where, λ is a parameter.
S M O Q (1, 0) This curve will represent a circle. If the
coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2,
T
i.e. a1a 2 = b1b2 …(ii)
and if the coefficient of xy = 0
Y′ then a1 b2 + a 2b1 + λ = 0
∴ λ = − (a1b2 + a 2b1 )
 Chap 04 Circle 355

Y 102. Let A ≡ ( −a , 0) and B ≡ (a , 0) be two fixed points.

Let one line which rotates about B an angle θ with the X -axis
at any time t and at that time the second line which rotates
a2x+b2y+c2=0 about A make an angle 2θ with X-axis.
x=0

a1x+b1y+c1=0
X 2θ θ
O y=0
A (– a, 0) O (0, 0) B (a, 0)

Substituting the value of λ in Eq. (i) then Now, equation of lines through B and A are respectively
(a1x + b1y + c1 ) (a 2x + b2y + c 2 ) − (a1b2 + a 2b1 ) xy = 0 y − 0 = tan θ ( x − a ) ...(i)
⇒ a1a 2x 2 + b1b2y 2 + (a1c 2 + a 2c1 ) x + (b1c 2 + b2c1 ) y = 0 and y − 0 = tan 2θ ( x + a ) ...(ii)
From Eq. (ii), b1b2 = a1a 2 2 tan θ
From Eq. (ii), y = (x + a )
∴ Equation of required circle is 1 − tan 2 θ
a1a 2( x 2 + y 2 ) + (a1c 2 + a 2c1) x + (b1c 2 + b2c1 ) y = 0  2y 
 
100. Let circle be  (x − a ) 
= 2  (x + a ) [from Eq. (i)]
S ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …( i ) 1 − y 
Since, centre of this circle ( − g, − f ) lie on 2 x − 2y + 9 = 0  ( x − a ) 2 
∴ −2 g + 2 f + 9 = 0 …( ii ) 2y ( x − a ) ( x + a )
⇒ y =
and the circle S = 0 and x 2 + y 2 − 4 = 0 cuts orthogonally. (x − a )2 − y 2
∴ 2g × 0 + 2 f × 0 = c − 4 ⇒ (x − a )2 − y 2 = 2 (x 2 − a 2 )
∴ c=4 …( iii ) or x 2 + y 2 + 2ax − 3a 2 = 0 which is the required locus.
Substituting the values of g and c from Eqs. (ii) and (iii) in
103. Let the coordinate of C is ( x1, y1 )
Eq. (i), then
x 2 + y 2 + (2 f + 9 ) x + 2 fy + 4 = 0 and let the coordinates of A and B are (0, 0) and (a, 0 )
C (x1, y1)
or (x 2 + y 2 + 9x + 4) + 2 f (x + y ) = 0
Hence, the circle S = 0 passes through fixed point
(Q form S ′ + λP = 0)
∴ x 2 + y 2 + 9 x + 4 = 0 and x + y = 0
 1 1
After solving we get ( −4, 4 ) or  − ,  .
 2 2
(0, 0) (a, 0)
101. Chords are bisected on the line y = x. Let ( x1, x1 ) be the A a B
mid-point of the chord, then equation of the chord is T = S1
sin A BC
∴ xx1 + yx1 − a ( x + x1 ) − b (y + x1 ) + a 2 + b 2 − c 2 given k= =
sin B AC
= x12 + x12 − 2ax1 − 2bx1 + a 2 + b 2 − c 2
⇒ ( BC ) 2 = k 2 ( AC ) 2
⇒ ( x1 − a ) x + ( x1 − b ) y + ax1 + bx1 − 2 x12 = 0
⇒ ( x1 − a ) 2 + y12 = k 2 ( x12 + y12 )
This chord passes through (a , b + c )
⇒ (1 − k 2 ) x12 + (1 − k 2 ) y12 − 2ax1 + a 2 = 0 (Qk ≠ 1)
⇒ ( x1 − a ) a + ( x1 − b ) (b + c ) + ax1 + bx1 − 2 x12 = 0 2
2ax1 a
⇒ 2 x12 − (2a + 2b + c ) x1 + a 2 + b 2 + bc = 0 ⇒ x12 + y12 − + =0
1 − k2 1 − k2
which is quadratic in x1. Since, it is given that two chords are
Hence, locus of C is
bisected on the line y = x, then x1 must have two real roots,
2ax a2
B 2 − 4 AC > 0 x2 + y 2 − + =0
1 −k 2
1 − k2
⇒ (2a + 2b + c ) 2 − 4 ⋅ 2 (a 2 + b 2 + bc ) > 0
This is a circle whose centre is
⇒ 4a 2 + 4b 2 + c 2 + 8ab + 4bc + 4ac − 8a 2 − 8b 2
 a 
− 8b 2 − 8bc > 0  , 0
⇒ 4a + 4b − 8ab + 4bc − 4ac − c < 0
2 2 2 1 − k2 

Hence, the condition on a , b , c is a2 a2 ak

and radius = − =
4a 2 + 4b 2 − c 2 − 8ab + 4bc − 4ca < 0 (1 − k )
2 2
(1 − k 2 ) (1 − k 2 )
356 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

104. Let P be ( x1, y1 ) and line through P ( x1, y1 ) makes an angle θ ∴ Locus of (h, k ) is, x 2 = 2y + 2 | y |
with X-axis, then
Now if y > 0, it becomes x 2 = 4y
x − x1 y − y1
= =r and if y ≤ 0, it becomes x = 0
cosθ sin θ
∴Combining the two, the required locus is
Coordinates of any point on the curve is
( x1 + r cosθ, y1 + r sin θ ). This point must lie on {( x,y ) : x 2 = 4y } ∪ {( 0,y ):y ≤ 0 }
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 1 106. s1 = x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + cy + a = 0
s 2 = x 2 + y 2 − 3ax + dy − 1 = 0
R
Equation of common chord of circles s1 and s 2 is given by
Q s1 − s 2 = 0
⇒ 5ax + (c − d )y + a + 1 = 0
θ
P (x1, y1) Given, that 5 x + by − a = 0 passes through P and Q
∴ The two equations should represent the same line
∴ a ( x1 + r cosθ ) 2 + 2h ( x1 + r cosθ )(y1 + r sin θ ) a c −d a + 1
⇒ = =
+ b (y1 + r sin θ ) 2 = 1 1 b −a
∴ (a cos2 θ + h sin 2θ + b sin 2 θ ) r 2 ⇒ a + 1 = −a 2
+ 2 (ax1 cosθ + hx1 sin θ + hy1 cosθ ) r a2 + a + 1 = 0
No real value of a.
+ ax12 + 2hx1y1 + by12 = 0
107. Equation of circle with centre (0, 3) and radius 2 is
It is quadratic equation in r. Let roots of this equation are r1 and
r2 then x 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 = 4
ax12 + 2hx1y1 + by12 Let centre of the variable circle is (α , β )
r1r2 =
(a cos2 θ + h sin 2θ + b sin 2 θ ) Q It touches X-axis.
∴It’s equation is ( x − α ) 2 + (y + β ) 2 = β 2
ax12 + 2hx1 y1 + by12
∴ PQ ⋅ PR = for a = b, h = 0
a cos2 θ + h sin 2θ + b sin 2 θ Y

+0+
ax12 ay12
∴ PQ ⋅ PR = = x12 + y12
a cos θ + 0 + a sin 2 θ
2
c1
r1
which is independent of θ.
Then curve ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 1 becomes ax 2 + 0 + ay 2 = 1 r2 c2
(a, b)
1
⇒ x2 + y 2 =
a X¢ X
O
1
is a circle with centre (0, 0) and radius . Y¢
a
105. Let the centre of circle C be (h,k). Then as this circle touches Circle touch externally
axis of x, its radius =| k| ⇒ c1c 2 = r1 + r2
Y ∴ α 2 + (β − 3 ) 2 = 2 + β
α 2 + (β − 3 ) 2 = β 2 + 4 + 4β
C ⇒ α 2 = 10(β − 1 / 2 )
k B(h, k)  1
∴Locus is x 2 = 10 y −  which is a parabola.
A (0,1) k  2
O
X 108. Let the centre be (α ,β)
Q It cuts the circle x 2 + y 2 = p 2 orthogonally
Also, it touches the given circle x + (y − 1 ) = 1, centre (0, 1)
2 2
∴Using 2 g1g 2 + 2 f1 f 2 = c1 + c 2, we get
radius 1, externally
2 ( −α ) × 0 + 2 ( −β ) × 0 = c1 − p 2
Therefore, the distance between centres = sum of radii
⇒ (h − 0 ) 2 + (k − 1 ) 2 = 1 + | k | ⇒ c1 = p 2

⇒ h 2 + k 2 − 2k + 1 = (1 + | k | ) 2 Let equation of circle is

x 2 + y 2 − 2αx − 2βy + p 2 = 0
⇒ h 2 + k 2 − 2k + 1 = 1 + 2 | k | + k 2
⇒ h 2 = 2k + 2 | k |
 Chap 04 Circle 357

It passes through T2T3 = latusrectum of parabola

(a, b ) ⇒a 2 + b 2 − 2αa − 2βb + p 2 = 0 Y

∴ Locus of (α , β ) is
∴ 2ax + 2by − (a 2 + b 2 + p 2 ) = 0 T2

109. Without loss of generally it we can assume the square ABCD (–1, 1) B A (1, 1)
with its vertices A(1, 1 ), B( −1,1 ), C( −1, − 1 ), D (1, − 1 ) T3
P to be the point ( 0, 1 ) and Q as ( 2, 0 ). T1
X¢ O X
Y

P(0, –1) C D
B A(1, 1) (–1, –1) (1, –1)
(–1, 1) Q(Ö2, 0)
L
X¢ X Y¢
O
C2 1
C1 = 4× =2 2
D(1, –1) 2
C
(–1, –1) 1 1 1
∴ Area ( ∆T1T2T3 ) = × × 2 2 = = 1 sq units.
2 2 2
112. Point of intersection of 3x − 47 − 7 = 0 and 2x − 3y − 5 = 0 is
Y¢
(1, − 1 ) which is the centre of the circle and radius = 7
PA 2 + PB 2 + PC 2 + PD 2 ∴Equation is ( x − 1 ) 2 + (y + 1 ) 2 = 49
Then,
QA 2 + QB 2 + QC 2 + QD 2 ⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 2y − 47 = 0
1+1+5+5
= 113. Let M(h,k ) be the mid-point of chord AB where
2[( 2 − 1 ) 2 + 1 ] + 2(( 2 + 1 ) 2 + 1 ) 2π
12 ∠AOB =
= = 0.75 3
16
110. Let C ′ be the circle touching circle C1 and L, so that C1 and C ′
are on the same side of L. Let us draw a line T parallel to L at a
distance equal to the radius of circle C1, on opposite side of L. O (0, 0)
Then, the centre of C ′ is equidistant from the centre of C1 and
from line T . 3 p/3
⇒ locus of centre of C ′ is a parabola.
A M (h, k) B

L
π
∴ ∠AOM = .
C¢ 3
O
T π 3
Also, OM = 3 cos =
3 2
C1 3
⇒ h + k2 =
2
2
9
⇒ h +k =
2 2
4
9
∴ Locus of (h, k ) is x 2 + y 2 =
4
111. Since, S is equidistant from A and line BD, it traces a parabola. 114. Equation of director circle of the given circle x 2 + y 2 = 169 is
 1 1 x 2 + y 2 = 2 × 169 = 338.
Clearly, AC is the axis, A(1,1 ) is the focus and T1  ,  is the
 2 2
We know from every point on director circle, the tangents
vertex of parabola.
drawn to given circle are perpendicular to each other.
1
AT1 = . Here, (17, 7) lies on director circle.
2
∴ The tangent from (17, 7) to given circle are mutually
perpendicular.
358 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

115. Equation of circle whose centre is (h,k ) Let coordinates of R be (α ,β ), then using the formula for
centriod of ∆ we get
( x − h ) 2 + (y − k ) 2 = k 2
3 +2 3 +α 3+ 0+β
Y = 3 and =1
3 3
⇒ α = 0 and β = 0
∴Coordinates of R = ( 0, 0 )
(h, k)
 3 3
Now, coordinates of E = mid point of QR =  ,  and
(–1, 1)  2 2
X¢ X
coordinates of F = mid-point of PR = ( 3, 0 )
118. Equation of side QR is y = 3x and equation of side RP is
Y¢
y =0
(radius of circle = k because circle is tangent to x-axis) 119. The given circle is x 2 + y 2 + 6x − 10y + 30 = 0 Centre ( −3,5),
Equation of circle passing through ( −1, + 1 ) radius = 2
∴ ( −1 − h ) 2 + (1 − k ) 2 = k 2 L1 : 2 x + 3y + ( p − 3 ) = 0;
⇒ 1 + h 2 + 2h + 1 + k 2 − 2k = k 2 L2 : 2 x + 3y + p + 3 = 0
⇒ h 2 + 2h − 2k + 2 = 0 D ≥ 0 Clearly, L1|| L2
∴ (2 ) 2 − 4 × 1.( −2 K + 2 ) ≥ 0 Distance between L1 and L2
⇒ 4 − 4( −2k + 2 ) ≥ 0 p+3−p+3 6
= = <2
⇒ 1 + 2k − 2 ≥ 0 ⇒ k ≥
1 22 + 32 13
2 ⇒ If one line is a chord of the given circle, other line may
1 or may not the diameter of the circle.
116. Slope of CD =
3 Statement I is true and statement II is false.
∴ Parametric equation of CD is 120. The given circle is x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y − 3 = 0
3 3 3
x− y−
2 = 2 = ±1
3 1
2 2 P (1, 0) Q (a, b)
C(–1, –2)
∴ Two possible coordinates of C are
 3 3 3 1 3  − 3 3 3 1 3
 + , +  or  + ,− + 
 2 2 2 2  2 2 2 2
Centre ( −1, − 2 )
i.e. (2 3, 2 ) or ( 3, 1 ) Let Q(α , β ) be the point diametrically opposite to the point
As (0, 0) and C lie on the same side of PQ P(1, 0 ),
∴( 3, 1 ) should be the coordinates of C. 1+α 0+β
then, = −1 and = −2
Remark : Remember ( x1, y1 ) and ( x 2, y 2 ) lie on the same or 2 2
opposite side of a line ax + by + c = 0 according as ⇒ α = −3, β = −4, So, Q is ( −3, − 4 )
ax1 + by1 + c
> 0 or < 0.∴ Equation of the circle is 121. Tangents PA and PB are drawn from the point P(1,3) to
ax 2 + by 2 + c circle x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 4y − 11 = 0 with centre C(3,2 )
( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 1
117. ∆PQR is an equilateral triangle, the incentre C must coincide
A
with centroid of ∆PQR and D, E, F must coincide with the mid
points of sides PQ, QR and RP respectively.
Also, ∠CPD = 30 ° ⇒ PD = 3 P(1, 8) C
Writing the equation of side PQ in symmetric form we get, (3, 2)
3 3 3
x− y−
2 = 2 =m 3 B
1 3
−
2 2 Clearly the circumcircle of ∆PAB will pass through C and as
 3 3 3 −3 3  ∠A = 90 °, PC must be a diameter of the circle.
∴Coordinates of P =  + , +  = (2 3, 0 )
 2 2 2 2 ∴ Equation of required circle is
 − 3 3 3 3 3 ( x − 1 )( x − 3 ) + (y − 2 ) = 0
and coordinates of Q =  + , +  = ( 3,3) ⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 4 x − 10y + 19 = 0
 2 2 2 2
 Chap 04 Circle 359

122. Let r be the radius of required circle. Y

Clearly, in ∆C1CC 2, C1C = C 2C = r + 1 and P is mid-point of C1C 2
∴ CP ⊥C1C 2
Also, PM ⊥CC1 (h, 2)
(0, 2)
Now, ∆PMC1 ~ ∆CPC1 (by AA similarity)
MC1 PC1
∴ =
PC1 CC1 X¢ X
(–1, 0) O

C1 1 P 1 C
3 2
1 1 Y¢
M −5
⇒ ( −1 − h ) 2 + 4 = h 2 ⇒h =
2
 −5  5
r r ∴ Centre  , 2 and r =
 2  2
5
Distance of centre from (−4, 0) is
2
∴ It lies on the circle.
126. The smaller region of circle is the region given by
C x2 + y 2 ≤ 6 …(i)
1 3 and 2 x − 3y ≥ 1 …(ii)
⇒ = ⇒ r + 1 = 9 ⇒ r = 8.
3 r +1 Y
123. The given circles are
S1 ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 3 x + 7y + 2 p − 5 = 0 …(i)
S 2 ≡ x 2 + y 2 + 2 x + 2y − p 2 = 0 …(ii)
1
∴ Equation of common chord PQ is S1 − S 2 = 0 y=
x2+y2=6 x–3
2
⇒ L ≡ x + 5y + p 2 + 2 p − 5 = 0
⇒ Equation of circle passing through P and Q is S1 + λL = 0 X¢ X
O
⇒ ( x 2 + y 2 + 3 x + 7y + 2 p − 5 ) + λ ( x + 5y + p 2 + 2 p − 5 ) = 0
As it passes through (1, 1), therefore
⇒ (7 + 2 p ) + λ (2 p + p 2 + 1 ) = 0
2p + 7
⇒ λ=−
(p + 1)2
which does not exist for p = −1 Y¢
124. Circle x 2 + y 2 − 4x − 8y − 5 = 0  3  1 1
We observe that only two points 2,  and  , −  satisfy
Centre = (2, 4 )  4  4 4
Radius = 4 + 16 + 5 = 5 both the inequations Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
If circle is intersecting line 3 x − 4y = m, at two distinct points. ∴2 points in S lie inside the smaller part.
⇒ length of perpendicular from centre to the line < radius 127. As centre of one circle is (0, 0) and other circle passes through
(0, 0), therefore
|6 − 16 − m|
⇒ <5 a 
5 Aslo, C1  , 0 C 2( 0, 0 )
2 
⇒ |10 + m| < 25
|a |
⇒ −25 < m + 10 < 25 r1 = r2 = C
2
⇒ −35 < m < 15
|a |
125. Let centre of the circle be (h, 2) then radius =| h| C1C 2 = r1 − r2 =
2
∴ Equation of circle becomes ( x − h ) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = h 2 |a | |a |
⇒ c− = ⇒ c =| a |
As it passes through (−1, 0) 2 2
If the two circles touch each other, then they must touch each
other internally.
360 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

 4α − 20 130. Y
128. Any point P on line 4x − 5y = 20 is α , .
 5  T1
Equation of chord of contact AB to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9 T2
2
1
X¢ X
C1(0, 0) C3(3, 0) P
A P α, 4α – 20
5
x=2
M (h, k) Y¢
4x–5y=20
C (0, p) From the figure it is clear that the intersection point of two
B direct common tangents lies on X -axis.
Aslo ∆PT1C1 ~ ∆PT2C 2
⇒ PC1 : PC 2 = 2 :1
 4α − 20 or P divides C1C 2 in the ratio 2 :1 externally
drawn from point P α ,  is
 5  ∴Coordinates of P are (6, 0 )
 4α − 20 Let the equation of tangent through P be
x. α + y .   =9 …(i)
 5  y = m( x − 6 )
Also, the equation of chord AB whose mid-point is (h, k ) is As it touches x 2 + y 2 = 4
hx + ky = h 2 + k 2 …(ii) ∴
6m
=2
Q Eqs. (i) and (ii) represent the same line, therefore m2 + 1
h k h2 + k 2 ⇒ 36m 2 = 4(m 2 + 1 )
= =
α 4α − 20 9 1
⇒ m=±
5 2 2
⇒ 5kα = 4hα − 20h 1
∴Equations of common tangents are y = ± (x − 6)
and 9h = α(h 2 + k 2 ) 2 2
20h 9h Also x = 2 is the common tangent to the two circles.
⇒ α= and α = 2
4h − 5k h + k2 131. Let centre of the circle ne (1, 4)
20h 9h
⇒ = [Q circle touches x-axis at (1, 0)]
4h − 5k h 2 + k 2
Y
⇒ 20(h 2 + k 2 ) = 9( 4h − 5k )
∴ Locus of (h, k ) is 20 ( x 2 + y 2 ) − 36 x + 45y = 0
Sol. (Q. Nos. 129 to 130)
Equation of tangent PT to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 at the point (1, h)
C B (2, 3)
P( 3, 1 ) is x 3 + y = 4
X¢ X
Let the line L, perpendicular to tangent PT be A (1, 0)
x −y 3 + λ = 0 …(i)
Y¢
As it is tangent to the circle ( x − 3 ) + y = 1
2 2
Let the circle passes through the point B(2,3 )
∴ length of perpendicular from centre of circle to the tangent ∴ CA = CB (radius)
= radius of circle.
⇒ CA 2 = CB 2
3+ λ
⇒ = 1 ⇒ λ = −1 or −5 ⇒ (1 − 1 ) 2 + (h − 0 ) 2 = (1 − 2 ) 2 + (h − 3 ) 2
2
⇒ h 2 = 1 + h 2 + 9 − 6h
129. From Eq. (i)
10 5
Equation of L can be ⇒ h= =
6 3
x − 3y = 1 10
Thus, diameter is 2h = .
or x − 3y = 5 3
 Chap 04 Circle 361

132. Since, circle touches X-axis at (3, 0) Equation of circle C ≡ ( x − 1 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 1

∴ The equation of circle be Radius of T = | y |
( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 0 ) 2 + λy = 0 T touches C externally
Y therefore,
Distance between the centres = sum of their radii
⇒ ( 0 − 1 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 1 + | y |
⇒ ( 0 − 1 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = (1 + | y | ) 2
A (3, 0)
X¢ X ⇒ 1 + y 2 + 1 − 2y = 1 + y 2 + 2 | y |
2 | y | = 1 − 2y
A
(1,–2) 1
If y > 0 then, 2y = 1 − 2y ⇒y =
4
Y¢ If y < 0 then, −2y = 1 − 2y ⇒ 0 = 1 (not possible)
1
As it passes through (1, −2) ∴ y =
4
∴ Put x = 1, y = −2
135. Let the equation of circle be
⇒ (1 − 3 ) 2 + ( −2 ) 2 + λ ( −2 ) = 0 ⇒ λ = 4
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
∴Equation of circle is ( x − 3 ) 2 + y 2 − 8 = 0
It passes through (0, 1)
Now, from the options (5, −2) satisfies equation of circle. ∴ 1 + 2f + c = 0 …(i)
133. There can be two possibilities for the given circle as shown in This circle is orthogonal to ( x − 1 ) 2 + y 2 = 16
the figure
i.e. x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 15 = 0
Y
and x2 + y 2 −1 = 0
∴We should have
2 g( −1 ) + 2 f ( 0 ) = c − 15
3 (3, 4) or 2 g + c − 15 = 0 …(ii)
Ö7 and 2 g( 0 ) + 2 f ( 0 ) = c − 1 or c = 1
4
4 Solving Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
X¢ X c = 1, g = 7, f = −1
∴ Required circle is
x 2 + y 2 + 14 x − 2y + 1 = 0
With centre ( −7, 1 ) and radius = 7
(3, –4)
136. Intersection point of 2x − 3y + 4 = 0 and x − 2y + 3 = 0 is (1, 2)
A (2, 3)

Y¢

∴ The equations of circle can be

( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 4 ) 2 = 4 2 P
(1, 2)
or ( x − 3 ) + (y + 4 ) = 4
2 2 2

i.e. x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 8y + 9 = 0
or x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 8y + 9 = 0 B(a, b)
134. Y
Since, P is the fixed point for given family of lines
So, PB = PA
C
(α − 1 ) 2 + (β − 2 ) 2 = (2 − 1 ) 2 + (3 − 2 ) 2
(α − 1 ) 2 + (β − 2 ) 2 = 1 + 1 = 2
(0, y) (1, 1)
( x − 1 ) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = ( 2 ) 2
T
X¢ X ( x − a ) 2 + (y − b ) 2 = r 2
Therefore, given locus is a circle with centre (1, 2 ) and radius 2.
Y¢
362 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

137. x 2 + y 2 − 4x − 6y − 12 = 0 …(i) Y
(cos q, sin q)
Centre C1 = (2, 3 ) and Radius, r1 = 5 units P
x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 18y + 26 = 0 …(ii)
Q (1, tan q/2)
Centre, C 2 = ( −3, − 9 ) E
and radius, r2 = 8 units X¢ X
R O S(1, 0)
| C1C 2| = (2 + 3 ) 2 + (3 + 9 ) 2 = 13 units C1
r1 + r2 = 5 + 8 = 13
∴ | C1C 2| = r1 + r2 C2
Therefore, there are three common
Y¢
tangents.
θ
138. For the given circle, centre : (4, 4), radius =6 ∴ Equation of line through Q and parallel to RS is y = tan
2
θ
C(4, 4) ∴ Intersection point E of normal and y = tan
2
6 θ
tan = x tanθ
k 2
P(h , k ) θ
k 1 − tan 2
⇒ x= 2
X¢ X 2
O
1 −y 2
6 + k = (h − 4 ) 2 + (k − 4 ) 2 ∴ Locus of E : x = or y 2 = 1 − 2 x
2
(h − 4 ) 2 = 20k + 20 1 1   1 −1 
It is satisfied by the points  ,  and  ,  .
∴ locus of (h, k ) is ( x − 4 ) 2 = 20(y + 1 ), which is parabola. 3 3 3 3
139. Centre of S :O ( −3,2) and centre of given circle is A(2, − 3) 141. (2) Equation of circle can be written as
( x + 1 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = p + 5 ...(i)
Y
(–2, 0) O
X′ X

O (–3, 2)

5Ö2 (0, –4)

5
B Y′
A (2,–3)
Case I. For p = 0, circle passes through origin and cuts x-axis
and y-axis at ( − 2, 0 ) and ( 0, − 4 ) respectively.
Case II. If circle touch X-axis, then Y

X′ O
X
(1 ) 2 = − p ⇒ p = − 1 (0, –2+√3)

⇒ OA = 5 2 From Eq. (i), we get

Also, AB = 5 (Q AB = radius of the given circle) ( x + 1 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = 2 2
Now, in ∆OAB,
Cut off Y -axis at (put x = 0) (0, –2–√3)
(OB ) 2 = ( AB ) 2 + (OA ) 2 = 25 + 50 = 75
(y + 2 ) 2 = 3 Y′
∴ OB = 5 3
⇒ y = −2 ± 3
140. Circle : x 2 + y 2 = 1
or (0, -2 ± 3)
Equation of tangent at P(cosθ,sin θ ) Y
Case III. If circle touch Y -axis, then
x cosθ + y sin θ = 1 …(i) (2 ) 2 = − p X′
O
X
Equation of normal at P
⇒ p=−4
y = x tanθ …(ii)
From Eq. (i), we get 1
Equation of tangent at S is x = 1 (–1, –2)
( x + 1 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = 1
 1 − cosθ   θ
∴ Q 1,  = Q 1, tan  Cut off X -axis at (put y = 0)
 sin θ   2
( x + 1 ) 2 = − 3 (impossible)
Y′
CHAPTER

05
Parabola
Learning Part
Session 1
● Introduction ● Conic Section
● Section of a Right Circular Cone by Different Planes ● Conic Section : Definition
● Equation of Conic Section ● Recognisation of Conics
● How to Find the Centre of Conics ● Parabola : Definition
● Standard Equation of Parabola ● Some Terms Related to Parabola
● Other forms of Parabola with Latusrectum 4a ● Smart Table
● General Equation of a Parabola ● Equation of Parabola if Equation of axis, Tangent
at Vertex and Latusrectum are given
● The Generalised form (y - k ) 2 = 4 a ( x - h) ● Parabolic Curve

Session 2
● Position of a Point ( x , y ) with respect to a Parabola ● Parametric Relation between the Coordinates of
1 1
y 2 = 4 ax the Ends of a Focal Chord of a Parabola
● Intersection of a Line and a Parabola ● Equation of Tangent in Different Forms
● Point of Intersection of Tangents at any Two Points ● Equation of Normals in Different Forms
on the Parabola
● Point of Intersection of Normals at any Two Points ● Relation Between ’ t1 ’ and ‘ t 2 ’ if Normal at ‘ t1 ’
on the Parabola meets the Parabola Again at ’t 2 ’
● Co-normal Points ● Circle Through Co-normal Points
Session 3
● Pair of Tangents SS
2
1 =T
● Chord of Contact
● Equation of the Chord Bisected at a Given Point ● Diameter
● Lengths of Tangent, Subtangent, Normal and Subnormal ● Some Standard Properties of the Parabola
● Reflection Property of a Parabola ● Study of Parabola of the Form
(ax + by ) 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0

Practice Part
● JEE Type Examples ● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Introduction, Conic Section, Section of a Right Circular
Cone by Different Planes, Conic Section : Definition, Equation
of Conic Section, Recognisation of Conics, How to Find the
Centre of Conics, Parabola : Definition, Other forms of Parabola
with Latusrectum 4a, General Equation of a Parabola, The
Generalised form (y-k)2 = 4a (x-h), Parabolic Curve

Introduction Section of a Right Circular

The famous Greek mathematician Euclid, the father of
creative Geometry, near about 300 BC considering various
Cone by Different Planes
plane sections of a right circular cone found many curves, 1. Section of a right circular cone by a plane which is
which are called conics or conic sections. passing through its vertex is a pair of straight lines,
lines always passes through the vertex of the cone.

Conic Section V Plane

Let l 1 be a fixed vertical line and l 2 be another line

intersecting it at a fixed point V and inclined to it at an
angle a.
P
Axis
Q
O′ 2. Section of a right circular cone by a plane which
l1
l2 parallel to its base is a circle.
Upper Generator
α V
nappe
V Plane

Lower
nappe
O Circle
Circular base
O

Suppose we rotate the line l 2 around the line l 1 in such a 3. Section of a right circular cone by a plane which is
way the angle remains constant then, the surface parallel to a generator of the cone is a parabola.
generated is a double-napped right circular hollow cone. Plane
V
The point V is called the vertex, the line l 1 is the axis of
the cone. The rotating line l 2 is called a generator of the
cone. The vertex separates the cone into two parts called
nappes. The constant angle a is called the semi-vertical
angle of the cone. Parabola

O
 Chap 05 Parabola 365

4. Section of a right circular cone by a plane which is The fixed point is called the focus of the conic and this
not parallel to any generator and not parallel or fixed line is called the directrix of the conic. Also, this
perpendicular to the axis of the cone is an ellipse. constant ratio is called the eccentricity of the conic and is
V
denoted by e.
SP
Plane In the figure, = constant = e
PM
Þ SP = e PM
Ellipse

O
Equation of Conic Section
5. Section of a right circular cone by a plane which is If the focus is (a,b) and the directrix is ax + by + c = 0, then
parallel to the axis of the cone is a hyperbola. the equation of the conic section whose
eccentricity = e is SP = e PM
O′

M P(x, y)

ax + by + c = 0
Hyperbola V

S (α, β)
Axis

|ax + by + c |
3D View Þ ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b) 2 = e ×
(a 2 + b 2 )

(ax + by + c ) 2
Circle Ellipse
Þ ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b) 2 = e 2 × .
(a 2 + b 2 )

Important Terms
Axis The straight line passing through the focus and
perpendicular to the directrix is called the axis of the conic
section.
Vertex The points of intersection of the conic section
Parabola Hyperbola
and the axis is (are) called vertex (vertices) of the conic
section.
Focal Chord Any chord passing through the focus is
Conic Section : Definition called focal chord of the conic section.
The locus of a point which moves in a plane such that the Double Ordinate A straight line drawn perpendicular to
ratio of its distance from a fixed point to its perpendicular the axis and terminated at both end of the curve is a
distance from a fixed straight line is always constant, is double ordinate of the conic section.
known as a conic section or a conic.
Latusrectum The double ordinate passing through the
M P focus is called the latusrectum of the conic section.
Centre The point which bisects every chord of the conic
passing through it, is called the centre of the conic section.
S (focus)
Directrix

Remark
Parabola has no centre but circle, ellipse and hyperbola have
centre.
366 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 1 Find the locus of a point, which moves The nature of the conic section depends upon the position
such that its distance from the point (0, –1) is twice its of the focus S with respect to the directrix and also upon
distance from the line 3x + 4 y + 1 = 0. the value of the eccentricity e. Two different cases arise.
Sol. Let P ( x 1,y1 ) be the point, whose locus is required. Case I (When the focus lies on the directrix)
Its distance from (0, - 1) = 2 ´ its distance from the line In this case Eq. (i) represents the Degenerate conic
3x + 4y + 1 = 0. whose nature is given in the following table :
|3x + 4y1 + 1 |
Þ ( x 1 - 0) 2 + ( y 1 + 1) 2 = 2 ´ 1 Condition Nature of Conic
( 32 + 4 2 ) 2
e >1 ; D = 0, h > ab The lines will be real and
Þ 5 x 12 2
+ ( y 1 + 1) = 2 | 3x 1 + 4y 1 + 1 | distinct intersecting at S.

Squaring and simplifying, we have e = 1 ; D = 0, h 2 = ab The lines will coincident

2
25 ( x 12 + y12 + 2y1 + 1) e < 1 ; D = 0, h < ab The lines will be imaginary.
=4 (9 x 12 + 16y12 + 24 x 1y1 + 6x 1 + 8y1 + 1) Case II (When the focus does not lie on the
or 11x 12 + 39y12 + 96x 1y1 + 24 x 1 - 18y1 - 21 = 0 directrix)
Hence, the locus of ( x 1,y1 ) is In this case Eq. (i) represents the Non-degenerate conic
11x 2 + 39y 2 + 96xy + 24 x - 18y - 21 = 0 whose nature is given in the following table :
Condition Nature of Conic
y Example 2 What conic does the equation 2
e =1 ; D ¹ 0, h = ab a parabola
25 ( x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 1) = (4 x - 3y + 1) 2 represent ? 2
0 < e < 1; D ¹ 0, h < ab an ellipse
Sol. Given equation is 2
e > 1; D ¹ 0, h > ab a hyperbola
25 ( x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 1) = ( 4 x - 3y + 1)2 …(i)
2
e > 1; D ¹ 0, h > ab; a + b = 0 rectangular hyperbola
Write the right hand side of this equation, so that it appears
in perpendicular distance form, then
2
Remark
æ 4 x - 3y + 1 ö 1. If conic represents an empty set, then D ¹ 0, h2 < ab.
( 4 x - 3y + 1)2 = 25 ç ÷
2. If conic represents a single point, the D = 0, h2 < ab.
ç ( 4 2 + 32 ) ÷
è ø
then, Eq. (i) can be re-written as y Example 3 What conic does
é 4 x - 3y + 1 ù
2
13x 2 - 18 xy + 37 y 2 + 2x + 14 y - 2 = 0 represent?
25 [( x - 1)2 + (y - 0)2 ] = 25 ê ú
Sol. Compare the given equation with
êë ( 4 2 + 32 ) úû
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
| 4 x - 3y + 1 |
or ( x - 1) 2 + ( y - 0) 2 = \ a = 13, h = - 9, b = 37, g = 1, f = 7, c = - 2 ,
( 4 2 + 32 ) then, D = abc + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch 2
Here, e = 1 = (13) (37) ( -2) + 2 (7) (1) ( -9)
Thus, the given equation represents a parabola. It may - 13 (7 )2 - 37(1)2 + 2 ( -9 )2
noted that (10, ) is the focus and 4 x - 3y + 1 = 0 is the
= - 962 - 126 - 637 - 37 + 162 = - 1600 ¹ 0
directrix of the parabola.
and also h 2 = ( -9 )2 = 81 and ab = 13 ´ 37 = 481
Here, h 2 < ab
Recognisation of Conics So, we have h 2 < ab and D ¹ 0.
The equation of conics represented by the general Hence, the given equation represents an ellipse.
equation of second degree
y Example 4 What conic is represented by the
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) equation ax + by = 1 ?
can be recognised easily by the condition given in the Sol. Given conic is ax + by = 1
tabular form. For this, first we have to find discriminant of
the equation. We know that the discriminant of above On squaring both sides, we get
equation is represented by D, where ax + by + 2 abxy = 1
D = abc + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 -ch 2 Þ ax + by - 1 = - 2 abxy
 Chap 05 Parabola 367

Again, on squaring both sides, then 1 3 5

then, a = 2, h = , b = 3 , g = - , f = , c = l.
(ax + by - 1)2 = 4abxy 2 2 2
1
Þ a 2 x 2 + b 2y 2 + 1 + 2abxy - 2by - 2ax = 4abxy Q 2
h = , ab = 6
4
Þ a 2 x 2 + b 2y 2 - 2abxy - 2ax - 2by + 1 = 0 2
\ h < ab
Þ a 2 x 2 - 2abxy + b 2y 2 - 2ax - 2by + 1 = 0 …(i) and D = abc + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch 2
Comparing the Eq. (i) with the equation 5 3 1
= ( 2) ( 3) ( l ) + 2 ´
´- ´
Ax 2 + 2Hxy + By 2 + 2Gx + 2Fy + C = 0 2 2 2
25 9 1
\ A = a 2 , H = - ab, B = b 2 , G = - a , F = -b, C = 1 -2´ -3´ - l ´
4 4 4
then, D = ABC + 2FGH - AF 2 - BG 2 - CH 2 15 25 27 l
= 6l - - - -
= a 2b 2 - 2a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 4 2 4 4
= -4a 2b 2 ¹ 0 and H 2 = a 2b 2 = AB 23l
= - 23 = 0
4
So, we have D ¹ 0 and H 2 = AB.
\ l=4
Hence, the given equation represents a parabola.
y Example 8 For what value of l the equation of conic
y Example 5 If the equation x 2 - y 2 - 2x + 2y + l = 0 2xy + 4 x - 6 y + l = 0 represents two intersecting
represents a degenerate conic, find the value of l. straight lines, if l = 17, then this equation represents?
Sol. For degenerate conic D = 0 Sol. Comparing the given equation of conic with
Comparing the given equation of conic with ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 f y + c = 0 \ a = 0 , b = 0, h = 1 , g = 2 , f = -3, c = l
\ a = 1, b = - 1, h = 0, g = -1, f = 1, c = l For two intersecting lines,
\ D = abc + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch 2 = 0 h 2 > ab, D = 0
Q ab = 0, h = 1
Þ ( 1) ( - 1) ( l ) + 0 - 1 ´ ( 1) 2 + 1 ´ ( - 1) 2 - l ( 0) 2 = 0
\ h 2 > ab
Þ - l -1+1=0 Þ l =0 2
and D = abc + 2 fgh - af - bg 2 - ch 2
y Example 6 If the equation x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 2y + c = 0 = 0 + 2 ´ - 3 ´ 2 ´ 1 - 0 - 0 - l ( 1) 2
represents an empty set, then find the value of c. = -12 - l = 0
Sol. For empty set D ¹ 0 and h 2 < ab. \ l = - 12
Now, comparing the given equation of conic with For l = 17, then the given equation of conic
2xy + 4 x - 6y + 17 = 0 according to the first system but
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 f y + c ¢ = 0 here c = 17.
then a = 1, h = 0, b = 1, g = -1, f = -1, c ¢ = c \ a = 0, b = 0, h = 1, g = 2 , f = -3, c = 17,
Q h 2 < ab \ D = abc + 2 f gh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch 2
\ 0 < 1 which is true = 0 + 2 ´ - 3 ´ 2 ´ 1 - 0 - 0 - 17 ´ (1)2
and D = abc ¢ + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - c ¢ h 2 ¹ 0 = - 12 - 17 = -29 ¹ 0
Þ (1)(1)(c ) + 0 - 1 ´ ( -1)2 - 1 ´ ( -1)2 - 0 ¹ 0 \ D ¹ 0 and h 2 > ab
Þ c -2 ¹ 0 So, we have D ¹ 0 and h 2 > ab.
\ c ¹2 Hence, the given equation represents a hyperbola.
Hence, c Î R~ (2)

y Example 7 If the equation of conic How to Find the Centre of Conics

2x 2 + xy + 3y 2 - 3x + 5y + l = 0
If S º ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0.
represent a single point, then find the value of l.
Sol. For single point, Partially differentiating w.r.t.x and y, we get
h 2 < ab and D = 0 ¶S ¶S
= 2ax + 2hy + 2 g ; = 2hx + 2by + 2 f
Comparing the given equation with ¶x ¶y
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 (Treating y as constant) (Treating x as constant)
368 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

¶S ¶S æ hf - bg gh - af ö
For centre, = 0 and =0 \ Centre ç , ÷
¶x ¶y è ab - h 2 ab - h 2 ø
\ 2ax + 2hy + 2 g = 0 and 2hx + 2by + 2 f = 0 æ ( -2)( -29 ) - (11)( -22) ( -22) ( -2) - (14 ) ( -29 ) ö
or =ç , ÷
Þ ax + hy + g = 0 and hx + by + f = 0 è (14 )(11) - ( -2)2 (14 ) (11) - ( -2)2 ø
Solving these equations we get the centre or = (2, 3)
æ hf - bg gh - af ö
( x ,y ) = ç , ÷.
è ab - h 2 ab - h 2 ø
Parabola : Definition
Remembering Method
A parabola is the locus of a point which moves in a plane
½a h g½ such that its distance from a fixed point (i.e. focus) is
Since, D =½
½h b f½
½ always equal to its distance from a fixed straight line
½g f c½ (i.e., directrix).
Write first two rows,
i.e.
a h g a
(Repeat Ist member) Standard Equation of Parabola
h b f h
Let S be the focus and ZM be the directrix of the parabola.
\ ab - h 2 , hf - bg, gh - af Draw SZ perpendicular to ZM, let A be the mid point of
SZ, then as AS = AZ
æ hf - bg gh - af ö æ C 13 C 23 ö
or points ç , ÷ or ç , ÷. Y
è ab - h 2 ab - h 2 ø è C 33 C 33 ø M
P (x, y)

OR x+a=0

According to first two rows,

X
ax + hy + g = 0 and hx + by + f = 0. Z A S N
(a, 0)
After solving we get find the centre of conic.

y Example 9 Find the centre of the conic

14 x 2 - 4 xy + 11y 2 - 44 x - 58 y + 71 = 0 So, A lies on the parabola. Take A as the origin and a line
2 2 AY through A perpendicular to AX as Y-axis.
Sol. Let f ( x , y ) º 14 x - 4 xy + 11y - 44 x - 58y + 71 = 0
Let AS = AZ = a > 0
Differentiating partially w.r.t. x and y, then
¶f ¶f
then, coordinate of S is (a,0 ) and the equation of ZM is
= 28x - 4y - 44 and = - 4 x + 22y - 58 x = - a or x + a = 0
¶x ¶y
¶f ¶f
Now, take P ( x , y ) be any point on the parabola. Join SP
For centre, = 0 and = 0, and from P draw PM perpendicular to the directrix ZM.
¶x ¶y
Then, SP = ( x - a ) 2 + (y - 0 ) 2 = ( x - a ) 2 + y 2
\ 28x - 4y - 44 = 0
or 7 x - y - 11 = 0 ¼(i) and PM = ZN = AZ + AN = a + x
and -4 x + 22y - 58 = 0 Now, for the parabola SP = PM
or -2x + 11y = 29 ¼ (ii) Þ (SP ) 2 = ( PM ) 2 Þ ( x - a ) 2 + y 2 = (a + x ) 2
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii) we get, Þ y 2 = (a + x ) 2 - ( x - a ) 2 = 4ax
x = 2 and y = 3 \ y 2 = 4ax ,
\ Centre is (2, 3). which is required equation of the parabola.
Aliter : Comparing the given conic with
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0
Remark
A parabola has two real foci situated on its axis one of which
\ a = 14, h = - 2, b = 11, g = - 22, f = - 29, c = 71
is the focus S and the other lies at infinity. the corresponding
directrix is also at infinity.
 Chap 05 Parabola 369

Some Terms Related to Parabola 5. Focal chord A chord of a parabola which is passing
through the focus is called a focal chord of the
1. Axis The axis of the parabola is the straight line parabola. In the given figure, PP ¢ and LL¢ are the focal
which is passes through focus and perpendicular to chords.
the directrix of the parabola.
Y Remarks
M L P Q (h, 2Öah) 1. In objective questions use LL¢ as focal chord and in
Focal subjective questions use PP¢ as focal chord.
x+a=0

Latus chord
rectum 2. Length of smallest focal chord of the parabola 4a. Hence, the
Double
(0, 0) ordinate latusrectum of a parabola is the smallest focal chord.
S (a, 0) N X
Z A 6. Focal distance The focal distance of any point P on
Focus Axis
the parabola is its distance from the focus S i.e. SP
P¢ Also, SP = PM = Distance of P from the directrix.
L¢ Q¢ (h, – 2Öah)
Directrix If P º (x , y )
For the parabola y 2 = 4ax , X-axis is the axis. then, SP = PM = x + a
Here, all powers of y are even in y 2 = 4ax then, 7. Parametric equations From the equation of the
y 2x
parabola y 2 = 4ax is symmetrical about its axis (i.e. parabola y 2 = 4ax , we can write = =t
2a y
X-axis).
or where ‘t ’ is a parameter.
If the point ( x , y ) lie on the parabola y = 4ax , then 2 Then, y = 2at and x = at 2
the point ( x , - y ) also lies on it. Hence, the parabola is The equations x = at 2 and y = 2at are called
symmetrical about X-axis (i.e. axis of parabola).
parametric equations. The point (at 2 , 2at ) is also
2. Vertex The point of intersection of the parabola and referred to as the point ‘t ’.
its axis is called the vertex of the parabola. For the
parabola y 2 = 4ax . Remarks
1. Coordinates of any point on the parabola y 2 = 4 ax, may be
A (0, 0 ) i.e. the origin is the vertex.
taken as ( at 2, 2at ).
3. Double ordinate If Q be the point on the parabola,
2. Equation of chord joining t1 and t2 is 2x - ( t1 + t2 ) y + 2at1t2 = 0.
draw QN perpendicular to the axis of parabola and
3. If the chord joining t1, t2 and t3, t4 pass through a point ( c, 0 )
produced to meet the curve again at Q ¢, then QQ ¢ is c
on the axis, then t1t2 = t3t4 = - .
called a double ordinate. a
If abscissa of Q is h, then ordinate of Q,
y 2 = 4ah or y = 2 ah (for first quadrant)
Other forms of Parabola with
and ordinate of Q ¢ is y = -2 ah (for fourth quadrant)
Latusrectum 4a
(1) Parabola opening to left (i.e. y 2 = - 4ax ) : (a > 0 )
Hence, coordinates of Q and Q ¢ are (h, 2 ah ) and
(i) Vertex is A (0, 0 ).
(h, -2 ah ), respectively. (ii) Focus is S ( -a, 0 ).
4. Latusrectum The double ordinate LL¢ passes through (iii) Equation of the directrix MZ is x - a = 0.
the focus is called the latusrectum of the parabola. (iv) Equation of the axis is y = 0 i.e. X-axis.
(v) Equation of the tangent at the vertex is x = 0 i.e. Y-axis.
Since focus S (a, 0 ) the equation of the latusrectum of Y
the parabola is x = a, then solving
x– a=0

L
P M
x =a and y 2 = 4ax
then, we get y = ± 2a X′ X
S (–a,0) A Z
Hence, the coordinates of the extremities of the
latusrectum are L (a, 2a ) and L ¢ (a, - 2a ), respectively. L′
Since, LS = L ¢ S = 2a Y′
\ Length of latusrectum LL ¢ = 2 ( LS ) = 2 ( L ¢ S ) = 4a. (vi) Length of latusrectum = LL ¢ = 4a.
370 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(vii) Ends of latusrectum are L ( -a , 2a ) and L ¢ ( -a , - 2a ). (ix) Parametric coordinates is (2at , at 2 ).

(viii) Equation of latusrectum is x = - a i.e. x + a = 0.
(3) Parabola opening downwards (i.e.
(ix) Parametric coordinates is ( -at 2 , 2at ).
x 2 = - 4ay ) : (a > 0 )
(2) Parabola opening upwards (i.e. x 2 = 4ay ) : (a > 0 ) (i) Vertex is A (0, 0 ). (ii) Focus is S (0, - a ).
(i) Vertex is A (0, 0 ). (iii) Equation of the directrix MZ is y - a = 0.
(ii) Focus is S (0, a ). (iv) Equation of the axis is x = 0 i.e.Y-axis.
(iii) Equation of the directrix MZ is y + a = 0. (v) Equation of the tangent at the vertex is y = 0 i.e.
Y
X-axis.
Y
S (0, a)
L′ L Z My–a=0

P
X′ X A
A X′ X
P

y+a=0 Z M L′ L
S(0,–a)
Y′
(iv) Equations of the axis is x = 0 i.e.Y-axis. Y′
(v) Equation of the tangent at the vertex is y = 0 i.e. X-axis. (vi) Length of latusrectum = LL ¢ = 4a
(vi) Ends of latusrectum are L (2a, a ) and L ¢ ( -2a, a ). (vii) Ends of latusrectum are L (2a, -a ) and L ¢ ( -2a, - a )
(vii) Length of latusrectum = LL ¢ = 4a. (viii) Equation of latusrectum is y = - a i.e. y + a = 0.
(viii) Equation of latusrectum is y = a i.e. y - a = 0. (ix) Parametric coordinates are (2at , - at 2 ).

Smart Table : The Study of Standard Parabolas

Equation and Graph of y 2 = 4ax, a > 0 y 2 = - 4ax, a > 0 x 2 = 4ay , a > 0 x 2 = - 4ay , a > 0
the parabola
Y Y
Y Z M
Y
P L S
M L P M L′ L

P A
X′ X
X′ X X′ X
Z A S S A Z X′ X P
A

L′ L′ L′ L
S
Y′ Z M
Y′
Y′ Y′
Vertex ( 0, 0 ) ( 0, 0 ) ( 0, 0 ) ( 0, 0 )
Focus (a, 0 ) ( - a, 0 ) ( 0, a ) ( 0, - a )
Equation of the axis y=0 y =0 x =0 x =0
Equation of tangent at x =0 x =0 y =0 y =0
vertex
Equation of directrix x +a =0 x -a = 0 y +a =0 y -a = 0
Length of latusrectum 4a 4a 4a 4a
Ends points of (a, ± 2a ) ( - a, ± 2a ) ( ± 2a, a ) ( ± 2a, - a )
latusrectum
Equation of x -a = 0 x +a =0 y -a = 0 y +a =0
latusrectum
Focal distance of a x +a a -x y +a a -y
point P (x , y )
Parametric coordinates (at 2, 2at ) ( - at 2, 2at ) (2at, at 2 ) (2at, - at 2 )
Eccentricity (e) 1 1 1 1
 Chap 05 Parabola 371

General Equation of a Parabola Þ 5 ( x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y + 5)

Let S (a,b ) be the focus, and lx + my + n = 0 is the equation = ( x 2 + 4y 2 - 4 xy + 6x - 12y + 9 )

of the directrix. Let P ( x ,y ) be any point on the parabola. \ 4 x 2 + y 2 + 4 xy + 4 x + 32y + 16 = 0
Then by definition SP = PM
Y y Example 11 Find the equation of the parabola whose
focus is (4, - 3) and vertex is (4, - 1) .
Sol. Let A ( 4, - 1) be the vertex and S ( 4, - 3) be the focus.
M
y)
-3 + 1
(x,
=0

L \ Slope of AS = =¥
P

A
+n

Z 4-4
my

S (a, b) which is parallel to Y-axis.

lx +

L′ \ Directrix parallel to X-axis.

X
O Y
M Z y –1 = 0

O
|lx +my + n | X′ X
Þ ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b ) 2 = A (4, –1)
(l 2 +m 2 )
(lx +my + n ) 2
Þ ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b ) 2 = P (x, y)
(l 2 +m 2 )
Þ m 2 x 2 + l 2 y 2 - 2lmxy + x term+ y term + constant = 0 S (4, –3)
2
This is of the form (mx - ly ) + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0.
Y′
This equation is the general equation of parabola. Let Z ( x 1,y1 ) be any point on the directrix, then A is the
mid-point of SZ .
Remark x +4
\ 4= 1 Þ x1 = 4
Second degree terms in the general equation of a parabola 2
forms a perfect square.
y -3
and -1 = 1 Þ y1 = 1
y Example 10 Find the equation of the parabola whose 2
focus is at ( -1,-2) and the directrix is the straight line \ Z = ( 4, 1)
x - 2y + 3 = 0. Also, directrix is parallel to X-axis and passes through
Z ( 4,1) , so equation of directrix is
Sol. Let P ( x ,y ) be any point on the parabola whose focus is
y = 1 or y - 1 = 0
S( -1,-2) and the directrix x - 2y + 3 = 0 . Draw PM
perpendicular from P ( x ,y ) on the directrix x - 2y + 3 = 0 . Now, let P ( x ,y ) be any point on the parabola. Join SP and
draw PM perpendicular to the directrix. Then, by definition
0
Y 3= SP = PM
y+
x–
2 Þ (SP )2 = ( PM )2
2
2 æ| y - 1 |ö
2
Þ ( x - 4 ) + ( y + 3) = ç ÷
è 12 ø
X′ X
M O
Þ ( x - 4 ) 2 + ( y + 3) 2 = ( y - 1) 2

P
\ x 2 - 8x + 8y + 24 = 0
(x, y)
S Aliter :
(–1,–2)
Here a = AS = 2
Y′ \ Length of latusrectum = 4a = 8
Then, by definition Equation of parabola with vertex (0, 0) and open downward
SP = PM is x 2 = - 8y .
Þ (SP ) 2 = ( PM )2 Shifting ( 4, - 1) on (0, 0), we get required parabola
2
æ | x - 2y + 3| ö ( x - 4 )2 = - 8(y + 1)
Þ ( x + 1) 2 + ( y + 2) 2 = ç ÷
ç ( 1) 2 + ( - 2) 2 ÷ \ x 2 - 8x + 8y + 24 = 0
è ø
372 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 12 The focal distance of a point on a Since, R divide QQ ¢ in 1 : 2 (internally)

parabola y 2 = 8 x is 8. Find it. and T divide QQ ¢ in 2 : 1 (internally).
For locus, let R (h ,k ), then
Sol. Comparing y 2 = 8x with y 2 = 4ax
y1
Y x1 = h and = k or y1 = 3k
M P (x1, y1) 3
x + 2 = 0 Directrix

On substituting the values of x 1 and y1in Eq. (ii), then

Focal
distance = 8 (3k )2 = 4a (h ) or 9k 2 = 4ah
X
Z A S \ The required locus is 9y 2 = 4ax similarly, let T (h ',k ' )
y1
then, x 1 = h ' and - = k'
3
or y1 = - 3k '
\ 4a = 8 Þ a = 2
On substituting the values of x 1 and y1 in Eq. (ii), then
\ Equation of directrix is x + 2 = 0.
( - 3k ' )2 = 4a (h ' )
Let P ( x 1, y1 ) on the parabola
y 2 = 8x or 9k ¢ 2 = 4ah '
\ y12 = 8x 1 …(i) \ The required locus is 9y 2 = 4ax .
Q SP = 8 Hence, the locus of point of trisection is
Þ PM = 8 [QSP = PM ] 9y 2 = 4ax .
Þ x1 + 2 = 8 Aliter : Let R and T be the points of trisection of double
or x1 = 6 ordinates QQ'. Let (h ,k ) be the coordinates of R,
From Eq. (i), y12 = 8 ´ 6 then, AL = h and RL = k
\ y1 = ± 4 3 RT = RL + LT = k + k = 2k .
Since, RQ = TR = Q ¢ T = 2k
\ The required points are (6, 4 3 ) and (6, - 4 3 ).
\ LQ = LR + RQ = k + 2k = 3k
y Example 13 QQ ¢ is a double ordinate of a parabola Thus, the coordinates of Q are (h , 3k ).
y 2 = 4ax . Find the locus of its point of trisection . Since, (h , 3k ) lies on y 2 = 4ax
Þ 9k 2 = 4ah
Sol. Let the double ordinate QQ' meet the axis of the parabola
Hence, the locus of (h , k ) is 9y 2 = 4ax .
y 2 = 4ax …(i)
Let coordinates of Q be ( x 1, y1 ), then coordinates of Q ¢ be y Example 14 Prove that the area of the triangle
( x 1 - y1 ) since, Q and Q ¢ lies on Eq. (i), then
inscribed in the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
y12 = 4ax 1 …(ii)
1
Let R and T be the points of trisection of QQ'. Then, the ( y 1 ~ y 2 ) ( y 2 ~ y 3 ) ( y 3 ~ y 1 ), where y 1 , y 2 , y 3 are
8a
coordinates of R and T are
the ordinates of the vertices.
æ 1 × x 1 + 2 × x 1 1 × ( -y 1 ) + 2 × y 1 ö æ y1 ö
ç , ÷ or ç x 1, ÷ Sol. Let the vertices of the triangle be ( x 1, y1 ) , ( x 2 , y 2 ) and
è 1+2 1+2 ø è 3ø
( x 3 , y 3 ).
æ 2 × x 1 + 1 × x 1 2 × ( -y 1 ) + 1 × y 1 ö æ y ö Q ( x 1, y1 ) is a point on the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
and ç , ÷ or ç x 1,- 1 ÷
è 2+1 2+1 ø è 3ø
\ y12 = 4ax 1
respectively.
Y y12
\ x1 =
Q 4a
y2
Located Similarly, x2 = 2
R parabola 4a
X y2
A L and x3 = 3
4a
T Now , vertices of triangle are
Q′ æ y12 ö æy 2 ö æy 2 ö
ç ,y1 ÷ , ç 2 ,y 2 ÷ and ç 3 ,y 3 ÷.
è 4a ø è 4a ø è 4a ø
 Chap 05 Parabola 373

y12 \ Equation of directrix is x - y + l = 0

y1 1 where, l is constant.
4a
1 y 2 Q A is the mid-point of SZ .
\ Required area of the triangle = | 2 y 2 1 | \ SZ = 2SA
2 4a
y 32 |0 - 0 + l | | 0 - 0 + 1|
y3 1 Þ =2´
2 2
4a ( 1 + ( - 1) ) ( 12 + ( - 1) 2 )

y12 y1 1 |l | 2
Þ =
1 2 1 2 2
= | y2 y2 1 | = (y 1 ~ y 2 ) (y 2 ~ y 3 ) (y 3 ~ y 1 )
8a 2 8a \ l = ±2
y3 y3 1
Þ l =2
[Q l is positive since directrix in this
y Example 15 Find the length of the side of an case always lies in II quadrant]
equilateral triangle inscribed in the parabola y 2 = 4ax , \ Equation of directrix is x - y + 2 = 0.
so that one angular point is at the vertex. Now, take P ( x , y ) be any point on the parabola, draw
Sol. Let ABC be the inscribed equilateral triangle, with one PM ^ ZM , then from definition,
angular point at the vertex A of the parabola SP = PM
y 2 = 4ax …(i) Þ (SP )2 = ( PM )2
2
Let the length of the side of equilateral triangle = l æ | x - y + 2| ö
Þ ( x - 0) 2 + ( y - 0) 2 = ç ÷
\ AB = BC = CA = l è 2 ø
Y
B
Þ 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) = ( x - y + 2) 2
Þ 2x 2 + 2y 2 = x 2 + y 2 - 2xy + 4 x - 4y + 4
l
\ x 2 + y 2 + 2xy - 4 x + 4y - 4 = 0
X′ 30° X
A 30°
l

C
Equation of Parabola if
Y′
\ The coordinates of B is (l cos 30° , l sin 30° )
Equation of axis, Tangent at
æl 3 l ö
Vertex and Latusrectum are
i.e., ç , ÷.
è 2 2ø 2
æl 3 ö
given
æl ö
Since, B lies on Eq. (i), then ç ÷ = 4a ç ÷ or l = 8a 3 Let equation of axis is ax + by + c = 0 and equation of
è2ø è 2 ø tangent at vertex is bx - ay + d = 0.
y Example 16 Prove that the equation of the parabola
Equation of parabola is
whose focus is (0,0) and tangent at the vertex is
t

x - y + 1 = 0 is x 2 + y 2 + 2xy - 4 x + 4 y - 4 = 0.
en
rte ng
ve ta
x

Sol. Let focus is S (0, 0) and A is the vertex of the parabola take
at n of
tio

any point Z such that AS = AZ given tangent at vertex is

ua

N
x - y + 1 = 0, since directrix is parallel to the tangent at
Eq

the vertex.
A P(x,y)
Y 0
2=
+ 0
–y M
x 1=
Z
M y+ axis
x–
A
P (x, y)
X′ X
S ( PM ) 2 = (Latusrectum) (PN )
2
æ ax + by + c ö æ ö
Þ ç ÷ =(Latusrectum) ç bx - ay + d ÷
Y′ ç (a 2 + b 2 ) ÷ ç (b 2 + a 2 ) ÷
è ø è ø
374 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 17 Find the equation of the parabola whose This is called generalised form of the parabola Eq. (i)
latusrectum is 4 units, axis is the line 3x + 4 y - 4 = 0 and and axis A ¢ X ¢¢|| AX with its vertex at A ¢ (h, k ). Its focus
the tangent at the vertex is the line 4 x - 3y + 7 = 0 . is at (a + h, k ) and length of latusrectum = 4a, the
Sol. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the parabola and let PM and PN equation of the directrix is
are perpendiculars from P on the axis and tangent at the x =h -a Þ x +a -h =0
vertex respectively, then
Another form is ( x - h ) 2 = 4a (y - k ) axis parallel to
Y 0
7=

Y Y′′
y+
–3
4x

N
S
P (x, y)
A a

M A′ (h, k)
X′ X y=k–a Directrix
O 3x Z′
+
4y X′ X
–4 A
=
0
Y′
Y′
Y-axis with its vertex (h,k ) its focus is at (h,a + k ) and
( PM )2 = (latusrectum) ( PN )
2
length of latusrectum = 4a, the equation of the directrix
æ 3x + 4y - 4 ö æ ö is
Þ ç ÷ = 4 ç 4 x - 3y + 7 ÷
ç 32 + 4 2 ÷ ç 4 2 + ( - 3) 2 ÷ y = k - a Þ y + a - k = 0.
è ø è ø
\ (3x + 4y - 4 )2 = 20 ( 4 x - 3y + 7 ) Remark
which is required parabola. The parametric equation of ( y - k )2 = 4a(x - h) are x = h + at 2
and y = k + 2at.

The Generalised form

(y - k)2 = 4 a(x - h) Parabolic Curve
The parabola The equations y = Ax 2 + Bx + C and x = Ay 2 + By + C
are always represents parabolas generally called
y 2 = 4ax …(i)
parabolic curve.
2
can be written as (y - 0 ) = 4a ( x - 0 ). Now, y = Ax 2 + Bx + C
The vertex of this parabola is A(0,0 ) ì B Cü
= Aí x 2 + x + ý
Y î A Aþ
x=h–a ìï æ 2
B ö B 2 C üï
= Aí ç x + ÷ - + ý
ïî è 2A ø 4 A 2 A ïþ
a
X′′ 2
Z′ A′ (h, k) S ìï æ B ö ( B 2 - 4 AC ) üï
= Aí ç x + ÷ - ý
ïî è 2A ø 4A2 ïþ
Directrix
2
X′ X æ B ö 1æ B 2 - 4 AC ö
A or ç x + ÷ = ç y + ÷
è 2A ø Aè 4A ø
Y′
Comparing it with ( x - h ) 2 = 4a (y - k ) it represent a
Now, when origin is shifted at A' (h, k ) without changing the æ B B 2 - 4 AC ö
direction of axes, its equation becomes parabola with vertex at (h,k ) = ç - ,- ÷
è 2A 4A ø
(y - k ) 2 = 4a ( x - h ) …(ii)
 Chap 05 Parabola 375

1 The optimum distance of its vertex V from OY is

and axis parallel to Y-axis and latusrectum =
| A| B 2 - 4 AC
- .
and the curve opening upwards and downwards depending 4A
upon the sign of A and B.
Y Remarks
1. The optimum distance of vertex from OX or OY can be easily
V (h, k)
obtained using calculus Method.
2. Equation of the parabola with axis parallel to the X-axis is of
the form x = Ay 2 + By + C.
k 3. Equation of the parabola with axis parallel to the Y-axis is of
the form y = Ax 2 + Bx + C.
h
O M
X Method to Make Perfect Square
If x = ay 2 ± by + g
The optimum distance of its vertex V from OX is
B 2 - 4 AC first make the coefficient of y 2 is unity
-
4A ì b gü
i.e., x = a íy 2 ± y + ý
and x = Ay 2 + By + C î a aþ
ì B Cü Now, in braces write y and put the sign after y which
= A íy 2 + y + ý between y 2 and y i.e. ± and after this sign write the half
î A Aþ
b
ìïæ 2 the coefficient of y i.e. .
B ö B2 C üï 2a
= A íç y + ÷ - + ý
ïîè 2A ø 4 A 2 A ïþ æ b ö
2
Now, write in braces ç y ± ÷
ìïæ B ö
2
B 2 - 4 AC üï è 2a ø
= A íç y + ÷ - ý 2
ïîè 2A ø 4 A 2 ïþ æ bö b2
and always subtract ç ÷ = 2
2 è 2a ø 4a
æ B ö 1 æ B 2 - 4 AC ö
Þ çy + ÷ = çx + ÷ ìï æ 2
è 2A ø Aè 4A ø bö b2 g üï
\ x = aí ç y ± ÷ - + ý
îï
è 2a ø 4a 2 a ïþ
Comparing it with (y - k ) 2 = 4a( x - h ), it represent a
ìï æ 2
parabola with vertex at b ö (b2 - 4 ga ) üï
= aí ç y ± ÷ - ý
æ B 2 - 4 AC B ö è 2a ø 4a 2 þï
(h, k ) = ç - ,- ÷ îï
è 4A 2A ø
y Example 18 Find the vertex, focus, latusrectum, axis
1
and axis parallel to X-axis and latusrectum = and the directrix of the parabola x 2 + 8 x + 12y + 4 = 0.
| A|
Sol. The equation of parabola is
and the curve opening left and right depending upon the x 2 + 8x + 12y + 4 = 0 …(i)
sign of A and B. 2
Þ ( x + 4 ) - 16 + 12y + 4 = 0
Y
Þ ( x + 4 )2 - 12 + 12y = 0
Þ ( x + 4 )2 = - 12y + 12
h Þ ( x + 4 )2 = - 12 (y - 1)
N V (h , k )
Let x + 4 = X,y -1 =Y …(ii)
k \ X 2 = -12Y …(iii)
Comparing it with X 2 = -4aY
O X \ a=3
\ Vertex of Eq. (iii) is (0, 0)
i.e. X = 0 ,Y = 0
376 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

From Eq. (ii), Hence, axis of parabola parallel to X-axis.

x + 4 = 0,y -1 = 0 Y
\ x = - 4, y = 1
\ Vertex of Eq. (i) is ( -4, 1).
Foucs of Eq. (iii) is (0, –3)
(3, 2)
i.e. X = 0, Y = - 3 A S (5, 2)
From Eq. (ii),
x + 4 = 0, y - 1 = - 3
\ x = -4 , y = -2 O
X
\ Focus of Eq. (i) is (–4, –2).
and latusrectum = 4a = 12. The equation is of the form
Equation of axis of Eq. (iii) is X = 0 ( y - k ) 2 = 4a ( x - h )
\ Equation of axis of Eq. (i) is x + 4 = 0 or ( y - 2) 2 = 4a ( x - 3)
Equation of directrix of Eq. (iii) is as (h,k) is the vertex (3,2)
Y = 3 or y - 1 = 3 a = distance between the focus and the vertex
\ y-4 =0
= ( 5 - 3) 2 + ( 2 - 2) 2 = 2
\ Equation of directrix of Eq. (i) is
y - 4 = 0. Hence, the required equation is
( y - 2) 2 = 8( x - 3)
y Example 19 Prove that the equation or y 2 - 8x - 4y - 28 = 0.
y 2 + 2ax + 2by + c = 0 represents a parabola whose axis
is parallel to the axis of x. Find its vertex. y Example 21 Find the equation of the parabola with
Sol. The equation of parabola is latusrectum joining the points (3, 6) and (3, –2).
y 2 + 2ax + 2by + c = 0 -2-6
Sol. Slope of (3,6) and (3, –2) is = ¥, since latusrectum
2 2 3-3
(y + b ) - b + 2ax + c = 0
is perpendicular to axis. Hence, axis parallel to X-axis. The
Þ (y + b )2 = - 2ax + b 2 - c equation of the two possible parabolas will be of the form
æ b2 - c ö ( y - k ) 2 = ± 4a ( x - h ) …(i)
Þ (y + b )2 = - 2a ç x - ÷ …(i)
è 2a ø Since, latusrectum = (3 - 3)2 + (6 + 2)2 = 8
2
b -c \ 4a = 8
Let y +b =Y, x - =X
2a Þ a=2
From Eq. (i) , \ From Eq. (i),
Y 2 = -2aX …(ii) (y - k )2 = ± 8 ( x - h )
axis of its parabola is Y = 0 Since, (3,6) and (3, –2) lie on the parabola, then
or y + b = 0, (6 - k )2 = ± 8 (3 - h ) …(ii)
which is parallel to X-axis 2
and ( -2 - k ) = ± 8 ( 3 - h ) …(iii)
and vertex of Eq. (ii) is X = 0, Y = 0
b2 - c Y
L (3, 6)
Þ x- = 0, y + b = 0
2a
b2 - c
Þ x= , y = -b
2a
æb2 - c ö A
\ Vertex of given parabola is ç , - b ÷. (1, 2) S (3, 2) A′ (5,2)
è 2a ø
X
y Example 20 Find the equation of the parabola with O
its vertex at (3, 2) and its focus at (5, 2). L′ (3, –2)
Sol. Let Vertex A (32
, ) and focus is S(52
, )
2-2 On solving Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
Slope of AS = = 0, which is parallel to X-axis.
5-3 k =2
 Chap 05 Parabola 377

From Eq. (ii), Þ 9 = A+B+4 [QC = 4 ]

16 = ± 8 (3 - h ), \ A+B=5 …(iii)
\ h = 3 ±2 and 5 = 16A + 4 B + C [QC = 4 ]
\ h = 5,1 Þ 5 = 16A + 4 B + 4
Hence, values of (h, k) are (5,2) and (1, 2). \ 16A + 4 B = 1
The required parabolas are 1
Þ 4A + B = …(iv)
( y - 2) 2 = 8( x - 5) 4
On solving Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
and (y - 2)2 = -8( x - 1).
19 79
A = - ,B = …(v)
y Example 22 Find the equation to the parabola whose 12 12
axis parallel to the Y-axis and which passes through On substituting the values of A , B and C from Eqs. (ii) and
Eq. (v) in Eq. (i), then equation of parabola is
the points (0, 4) (1, 9) and (4, 5) and determine its
19 79
latusrectum . y = - x2 + x + 4
12 12
Sol. The equation of parabola parallel to Y-axis is
1 12
y = Ax 2 + Bx + C …(i) Hence, length of latusrectum = = .
19 19
The points (0,4) , (1,9) and (4,5) lie on Eq. (i), then -
12
4 = 0+0+C Þ C = 4 …(ii)
Þ 9 = A + B +C

Exercise for Session 1

1. The vertex of the parabola y 2 + 6x - 2y + 13 = 0 is
(a) (-2, 1) (b) (2, - 1)
(c) (1, 1) (d) (1 , –1)

2. If the parabola y 2 = 4 ax passes through (3, 2), then the length of latusrectum is
1 2
(a) (b)
3 3
4
(c) 1 (d)
3

3. The value of p such that the vertex of y = x 2 + 2px + 13 is 4 units above the X-axis is
(a) ± 2 (b) 4
(c) ± 3 (d) 5

4. The length of the latusrectum of the parabola whose focus is (3,3) and directrix is 3 x - 4y - 2 = 0, is
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 4 (d) 8

5. If the vertex and focus of a parabola are (3,3) and (–3, 3) respectively , then its equation is
(a) x 2 - 6x + 24y - 63 = 0 (b) x 2 - 6x + 24y + 81 = 0
(c) y 2 - 6y + 24x - 63 = 0 (d) y 2 - 6y - 24x + 81 = 0

6. If the vertex of the parabola y = x 2 - 8x + c lies on X-axis, then the value of c is

(a) 4 (b) – 4
(c) 16 (d) –16

7. The parabola having its focus at (3,2) and directrix along the Y-axis has its vertex at
3 3
(a) æç , 1ö÷ (b) æç , 2ö÷
è2 ø è2 ø
3 1ö 3 1ö
(c) æç , ÷ (d) æç , - ÷
è2 2ø è2 2ø
378 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

8. The directrix of the parabola x 2 - 4x - 8y + 12 = 0 is

(a) y = 0 (b) x = 1
(c) y = -1 (d) x = -1

9. The equation of the latusrectum of the parabola x 2 + 4x + 2y = 0 is

(a) 3y - 2 = 0 (b) 3y + 2 = 0
(c) 2y - 3 = 0 (d) 2y + 3 = 0

10. The focus of the parabola x 2 - 8x + 2y + 7 = 0 is

1
(a) æç 0, - ö÷ (b) (4,4)
è 2ø
9 9
(c) æç 4, ö÷ (d) æç -4, - ö÷
è 2ø è 2ø

11. The equation of the parabola with the focus (3,0) and directrix x + 3 = 0 is
(a) y 2 = 2x (b) y 2 = 3x
(c) y 2 = 6x (d) y 2 = 12x

12. Equation of the parabola whose axis is parallel to Y-axis and which passes through the points (1,0) , (0,0) and
( -2,4), is
(a) 2x 2 + 2x = 3y (b) 2x 2 - 2x = 3y
(c) 2x 2 + 2x = y (d) 2x 2 - 2x = y

13. Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is (5,3) and directrix is the line 3x - 4y + 1 = 0 .

14. Find the equation of the parabola is focus is at (–6, –6) and vertex is at (–2, 2).

15. Find the vertex, focus, axis, directrix and latusrectum of the parabola 4y 2 + 12x - 20y + 67 = 0.

æxö æyö
16. Find the name of the conic represented by ç ÷ +
èa ø
ç ÷ = 1.
èb ø

17. Determine the name of the curve described parametrically by the equations
x = t 2 + t + 1, y = t 2 - t + 1.

18. Prove that the equation of the parabola whose vertex and focus are on the X-axis at a distance a and a ¢ from
the origin respectively is y 2 = 4 (a ¢ - a ) ( x - a ).

19. Find the equation of the parabola whose axis is parallel to X-axis and which passes through the points (0, 4) ,
(1, 9) and (–2, 6). Also, find its latusrectum.
20. The equation ax 2 + 4xy + y 2 + ax + 3y + 2 = 0 represents a parabola, then find the value of a.
Session 2
Position of a Point (x1, y1) with respect to a Parabola y2 = 4ax,
Parametric Relation between the Coordinates of the Ends of a Focal
Chord of a Parabola, Intersection of a Line and a Parabola, Equation of
Tangent in Different Forms, Point of Intersection of Tangents at any
Two Points on the Parabola, Equation of Normals in Different Forms,
Point of Intersection of Normals at any Two Points on the Parabola,
Circle Through Co-normal Points

Position of a Point (x 1 , y 1 ) with Remarks

1. The point ( x1, y1 ) lies inside, on or outside y 2 = - 4 ax
Respect to a Parabola y 2 = 4 ax according as y12 + 4 ax1 <, =,or > 0

Theorem The point ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on or inside the 2. The point ( x1, y1 ) lies inside, on or outside x 2 = 4 ay according
as x12 - 4 ay1 <, = ,or > 0
parabola y 2 = 4ax according as
3. The point ( x1, y1 ) lies inside, on or outside x 2 = - 4 ay
y 12 - 4ax 1 >, =, or < 0 . according as x12 + 4 ay1 <, = ,or > 0
Proof Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be a point. From P draw PM ^ AX
(on the axis of parabola) meeting the parabola y 2 = 4ax at y Example 23 Show that the point (2, 3) lies outside
the parabola y 2 = 3x .
Q let the coordinate of Q be ( x 1 , y 2 ).
Sol. Let the point (h , k ) = (2, 3)
Y P (x1, y1)
We have, k 2 - 3h = 32 - 32
. = 9 -6= 3 > 0
Q (x1, y2) \ k 2 - 3h > 0
This shows that (2,3) lies outside the parabola y 2 = 3x .
X′ X
A M
y Example 24 Find the position of the point ( -2,2)
y 2 = 4ax with respect to the parabola y 2 - 4 y + 9 x + 13 = 0.
Y′ Sol. Let the point (h ,k ) = ( -2,2)
We have, k 2 - 4k + 9h + 13 = (2)2
Since, Q ( x 1 , y 2 ) lies on the parabola
- 4 (2) + 9 ( -2) + 13 = 4 - 8 - 18 + 13 = -9 < 0
y 12 = 4ax
Hence, k 2 - 4k + 9h + 13 < 0
then, y 22 = 4ax 1 K(i) Therefore, the point ( -2,2) lies inside the parabola
Now, P will be outside, on or inside the parabola y = 4ax 2 y 2 - 4y + 9 x + 13 = 0.
according as
PM >, =, or <QM Parameteric Relation between
Þ 2
( PM ) >, = ,or <(QM ) 2
the Coordinates of the Ends of
Þ y 12 > , = ,or < y 22 a Focal Chord of a Parabola
Þ y 12 >, = , or < 4ax 1 [from Eq. (i)] Let y 2 = 4ax be a parabola, if PQ be a focal chord.
Then, P º (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q º (at 22 , 2at 2 )
Hence, y 12 - 4ax 1 > , = , or < 0
Since, PQ passes through the focus S (a ,0 ).
380 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ Q ,S , P are collinear. Remark

Y 1
2 ) Q t+ ³ 2for all t ¹ 0 [Q AM ³ GM]
P (at1 , 2at1 t
2
1
\ a æçt + ö÷ ³ 4a
è tø
X Þ Length of focal chord ³ latusrectum i.e. The length of
A S (a , 0 )
smallest focal chord of the parabola is 4a . Hence, the
Q (a latusrectum of a parabola is the smallest focal chord.
t2 2,
2at
2) y Example 26 Prove that the semi-latusrectum of the
\ Slope of PS = Slope of QS parabola y 2 = 4ax is the harmonic mean between the
2at 1 - 0 0 - 2at 2 2t 2t 2 segments of any focal chord of the parabola.
Þ = Þ 1 = Sol. Let parabola be y 2 = 4ax
at 12 - a a - at 22 t 12 - 1 t 22 - 1
If PQ be the focal chord, if
Þ t 1 (t 22 - 1) = t 2 (t 12 - 1)
æ a -2a ö
P º (at 2 , 2at ), then Q º ç 2 , ÷
Þ t 1 t 2 (t 2 - t 1 ) + (t 2 - t 1 ) = 0 èt t ø
Þ t 2 - t 1 ¹ 0 or t 1 t 2 + 1 = 0 \ Length of latusrectum LL ' = 4a.
1 1
Þ t 1 t 2 = -1 or t 2 = - , …(i) \ Semi-latusrectum = ( 4a ) = 2a.
t1 2
which is required relation. If sections of focal chord are k1 and k 2 ,
then, k1 = SP = PM = a + at 2 = a(1 + t 2 )
Remark a a(1 + t 2 )
If one extremity of a focal chord is (at 12 , 2at1 ) then the other and k 2 = SQ = QN = a + 2
=
t t2
æ a 2a ö
extremity (at22 , 2at2 ) becomes çç 2 ,- ÷÷ by virtue of relation Eq. (i). Y
è t1 t1 ø P (at2, 2at)
M
x+a=0

L K1
y Example 25 If the point (at 2 , 2at ) be the extremity of
(0,0)
a focal chord of parabola y 2 = 4ax then show that the Z A d S (a, 0)
X
2
æ 1ö
length of the focal chord is a çt + ÷ . N
Q L′
è tø a, 2a
–
Sol. Since, one extremity of focal chord is P (at 2 ,2at ), then the t2 t
æ a 2a ö \ Harmonic mean of k1
other extremity is Q ç 2 ,- ÷ [Replacing t by –1/t]
èt t ø 2k1k 2
Y and k2 =
2,
P (at 2
at) k1 + k 2
M 2 2
= = 2
1 1 t 1
+ +
X k 2 k 1 a (1 + t 2 ) a (1 + t 2 )
A S (a, 0)
2
x+a=0

= = 2a = Semi-latusrectum.
N Q 1
a, 2a a
–
t2 t

\ Length of focal chord = PQ

Remarks
1. The length of focal chord having parameters t1 and t2 for its
= SP + SQ [QSP = PM and SQ = QN ] end points is a ( t2 - t1 ) 2.
= PM + QN
a 2. If l1 and l2 are the length of segments of a focal chord of a
= at 2 + a + 2 + a 4l l
t parabola, then its latusrectum is 1 2 .
2 l1 + l2
æ 2 1 ö æ 1ö
= a çt + 2 + 2÷ = a çt + ÷
è t ø è tø
 Chap 05 Parabola 381

y Example 27. Show that the focal chord of |2at | 2a

= =
parabola y 2 = 4ax makes an angle a with the ( t 2 + 1) t +
1
t
X-axis is of length 4a cosec 2a.
4a 2
Sol. Let P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ) be the end points of a Þ d2 = 2
…(i)
focal chord PQ which makes an angle a with the axis of æ 1ö
çt + ÷
the parabola. Then, è tø
PQ = a (t 2 - t 1 )2 æa 2a ö
The other end of the focal chord is Q ç 2 , - ÷
2
= a [(t 2 + t 1 ) - 4t 1t 2 ] …(i) èt t ø
2 If length of focal chord = PQ = (l say )
= a[(t 2 + t 1 ) + 4 ] [Q t 1t 2 = - 1]
\ l = PQ = PS + SQ = PM + QN
a
\ l = at 2 + a + 2 + a
\ tana = slope of PQ t
2at 2 - 2at 1 2
= æ 2 1 ö æ 1 ö
at 22 - at 12 Þ l = a çt + 2 + 2÷ Þ l = a çt + ÷
è t ø è t ø
2 2
Þ tana = l æ 1ö
t 2 + t1 Þ = çt + ÷ …(ii)
a è tø
Þ t 2 + t 1 = 2 cota …(ii)
4a 2 4a 3
On substituting the value of t 2 + t 1 from Eq. (ii) in Eq. (i), From Eqs. (i) and (ii), d 2 = =
then (l / a ) l
PQ = a( 4 cot 2 a + 4 ) 4a 3 1
\ l= 2
Þ lµ
d d2
= 4a cosec 2 a.
i.e. the length of the focal chord varies inversely as the
square of its distance from vertex.
y Example 28 Prove that the length of a focal chord
of a parabola varies inversly as the square of its
distance from the vertex.
Sol. Let P (at 2 , 2at ) be one end of a focal chord of the parabola
Intersection of a Line and a
y 2 = 4ax . The focus of its parabola is S (a ,0). Parabola
Y Let the parabola be y 2 = 4ax …(i)
2,
P (at 2at)
M and the given line be y = mx + c …(ii)
x+a=0

On eliminating x from Eqs. (i) and (ii), then

(0,0) æy -c ö
Z A d S (a, 0)
X y 2 = 4a ç ÷
è m ø
N
Q Þ my 2 - 4ay + 4ac = 0 …(iii)
a, 2a
–
t2 t This equation being quadratic in y, gives two values of y,
\ Equation of focal chord is (i.e. equation of PS) shows that every straight line will cut the parabola in two
2at - 0 points may be real, coincident or imaginary according as
y -0= 2 ( x - a)
at - a discriminant of Eq. ( iii ) > , = < 0
Þ y=
2t
( x - a) i.e. ( -4a ) 2 - 4 × m × 4ac >, =, < 0 or a - mc >, =, < 0
2
( t - 1)
or a >, =, < mc …(iv)
2
Þ (t - 1)y = 2tx - 2at
2tx - (t 2 - 1)y - 2at = 0
Þ
Condition of tangency
If d be the distance of this focal chord from the vertex (00
, )
of the parabola y 2 = 4ax , then
If the line Eq. (ii) touches the parabola Eq. (i), then Eq. (iii)
has equal roots
| 0 - 0 - 2at |
d= \ Discriminant of Eq. (iii) = 0
(2t )2 + (t 2 - 1)2
Þ ( -4a ) 2 - 4m × 4ac = 0
382 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

a l n
Þ c= ,m ¹ 0 …(v) \ M=- and c = -
m m m
So, the line y = mx + c touches the parabola y 2 = 4ax if The line Eq. (i) will touch the parabola y 2 = 4ax , if
a a
c = (which is condition of tangency). c = Þ cM = a
M
m
æ n öæ l ö
Substituting the value of c from Eq. (v) in Eq. (ii), then Þ ç- ÷ç- ÷ = a
è m øè m ø
a
y = mx + , m ¹ 0 \ ln = am 2
m
Aliter :
a
Hence, the line y = mx + will always be a tangent to the Given line lx + my + n = 0 …(i)
m
and the parabola y 2 = 4ax …(ii)
parabola y 2 = 4ax .
n + my
a Substituting the value of x from Eq. (i) i.e. x = - in
The point of contact Substituting c = in Eq. (iii), then l
m Eq. (ii), then
a
æ ö (we should not substituting the value of y from Eq. (i), in
my 2 - 4ay + 4a ç ÷ = 0 Eq. (ii) since y is quadratic, substituting the value of x since
èm ø x is linear).
Þ m 2 y 2 - 4amy + 4a 2 = 0 æ n + my ö
y 2 = 4a ç - ÷
è l ø
Þ (my - 2a ) 2 = 0
Þ ly 2 + 4amy + 4an = 0 …(iii)
Þ my - 2a = 0
Since, Eq. (i) touches the parabola Eq. (ii), then roots of
2a Eq. (iii) must be coincident and condition for the same is
or y=
m B 2 = 4 AC ,
a i.e., ( 4am )2 = 4 × l 4an
Substituting this value of y in y = mx +
m Þ am 2 = ln
2a a \ ln = am 2
\ = mx +
m m
a a y Example 30 Show that the line x cos a + y sin a = p
Þ mx = or x =
m m2 touches the parabola y 2 = 4ax , if p cos a + a sin 2 a = 0
æ a 2a ö and that the point of contact is (a tan 2 a , - 2a tan a ) .
Hence, the point of contact is ç , ÷ , (m ¹ 0 ) this
èm 2 m ø Sol. The given line is
known as m-point on the parabola. x cos a + y sin a = p
Þ y = - x cota + p coseca
Remark Comparing this line with y = mx + c .
If m = 0, then Eq. (iii) gives \ m = - cota and c = p coseca
0 - 4 ay + 4 ac = 0 since, the given line touches the parabola
Þ y=c a
\ c = or cm = a
which gives only one value of y and so every line parallel to m
X-axis cuts the parabola only in one real point.
Þ ( p coseca )( - cot a ) = a
y Example 29 Prove that the straight line Þ a sin 2 a + p cos a = 0
lx + my + n = 0 touches the parabola y 2 = 4ax , if æ a 2a ö
and point of contact is ç 2 , ÷
ln = am 2 . èm m ø

Sol. The given line is lx + my + n = 0 æ a 2a ö

i.e. ç 2
,- ÷
l n è cot a cot a ø
or y =- x- …(i)
m m or (a tan 2 a , - 2a tan a )
Comparing this line with y = Mx + c
 Chap 05 Parabola 383

x y y Example 32 Find the equations of the straight lines

y Example 31 Prove that the line + = 1 touches the
l m touching both x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2 and y 2 = 8ax .
parabola y 2 = 4a( x + b ), if m 2 (l + b ) + al 2 = 0. Sol. The given curves are
Sol. The given parabola is Y
y 2 = 4a( x + b ) …(i) ent
o n tang
Comm
Vertex of this parabola is ( -b, 0).
Now, shifting (0, 0) at ( -b, 0),
then, x = X + ( -b ) and y = Y + 0 X
O
or x + b = X and y = Y …(ii)
From Eq. (i),Y 2 = 4aX …(iii)
x y
and the line + =1
l m
X -b Y x 2 + y 2 = 2a 2 …(i)
reduces to + =1 2
l m and y = 8ax …(ii)
æ X - bö The parabola Eq. (ii) is y = 8ax 2
Y = m ç1 - ÷
è l ø
or y 2 = 4(2a )x
æ mö æ bö
Þ Y = ç - ÷ X + m ç1 + ÷ …(iv) \ Equation of tangent of Eq. (ii) is
è l ø è lø
2a
The line Eq. (iv) will touch the parabola Eq. (iii), if y = mx +
m
æ bö a
m ç1 + ÷ = or m 2 x - my + 2a = 0 …(iii)
è l ø æ mö
ç- ÷ It is also tangent of Eq. (i), then the length of perpendicular
è l ø
from centre of Eq. (i) i.e. (0, 0) to Eq. (iii) must be equal to
m2 æ bö the radius of Eq. (i) i.e. a 2.
Þ ç1 + ÷ = -a
l è lø | 0 - 0 + 2a | 4a 2
\ =a 2 Þ = 2a 2
\ m 2 (l + b ) + al 2 = 0 2 2
( m ) + ( -m ) 2 m4 + m2
Aliter :
Þ m4 + m2 - 2 = 0
The given line and parabola are
x y Þ ( m 2 + 2) ( m 2 - 1) = 0
+ =1 …(i)
l m Q m2 + 2 ¹ 0 [gives the imaginary values]
and y 2 = 4a( x + b ) …(ii) \ 2
m -1=0
respectively substituting the value of x from Eq. (i) Þ m = ±1
æ yö Hence, from Eq. (iii) the required tangents are
x = l ç1 - ÷
è mø x ± y + 2a = 0.
ì æ yö ü
in Eq. (ii), then y 2 = 4aíl ç1 - ÷ + bý

2
î
4al
è m ø þ
Equation of Tangent in
or y +
m
y - 4a(l + b ) = 0 …(iii)
Different Forms
Since, the line Eq. (i) touches the parabola Eq. (ii), then the
roots of Eq. (iii) are equal.
æ 4al ö
2 1. Point Form :
\ ç ÷ - 4 × 1 { -4a(l + b )} = 0
èm ø To find the equation of the tangent to the parabola
al 2
y 2 = 4ax at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ).
Þ + (l + b ) = 0
m2 (First Principal Method) Equation of parabola is
Þ al 2 + m 2 (l + b ) = 0 y 2 = 4ax …(i)
2 2
Þ m (l + b ) + al = 0 Let P º ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q º ( x 2 , y 2 ) be any two points on
parabola (i), then
384 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

)
, y1
P (x 1 2. Parametric Form :
T To find the equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
at the point (at 2 , 2at ) or ‘t’.
Since, the equation of tangent of the parabola y 2 = 4ax at
Q (x
2 , y2 ) ( x 1 , y 1 ) is yy 1 = 2a( x + x 1 ) …(i)
2
replacing x 1 by at and y 1 by 2at, then Eq. (i) becomes
y 12 = 4ax 1 …(ii)
y (2at ) = 2a( x + at 2 ) Þ ty = x + at 2
and y 22 = 4ax 2 …(iii)
Subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (iii), then Remark
The equations of tangent of all standard parabolas at ‘t’.
y 22 - y 12 = 4a( x 2 - x 1 )
Equations of Parametric Tangent
y2 - y1 4a Parabolas coordinates ‘t’ at ‘t’
Þ = …(iv)
x2 - x1 y2 + y1 y 2 = 4ax (at 2, 2at ) ty = x + at 2
Equation of PQ is y 2 = - 4ax ( -at 2, 2at ) ty = - x + at 2
y - y1
y - y1 = 2 (x - x 1 ) …(v) x 2 = 4ay (2at, at 2 ) tx = y + at 2
x2 - x1
x 2 = - 4ay (2at, - at 2 ) tx = - y + at 2
From Eqs. (iv) and (v), then
4a
y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) …(vi)
y2 + y1 3. Slope Form :
Now, for tangent at P , Q ® P , i.e. x 2 ® x 1 and y 2 ® y 1 , To find the equation of tangent and point of contact in
then Eq. (vi) becomes terms of m(slope) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
4a
y - y1 = ( x - x 1 ) Þ yy 1 - y 12 = 2ax - 2ax 1 The equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at
2y 1
( x 1 , y 1 ) is yy 1 = 2a( x + x 1 ). …(i)
Þ yy 1 = 2ax + y 12 - 2ax 1 Since, m is the slope of the tangent, then
Þ yy 1 = 2ax + 4ax 1 - 2ax 1 [from Eq. (ii)] 2a 2a
m= Þ y1 =
Þ yy 1 = 2ax + 2ax 1 y1 m
\ yy 1 = 2a( x + x 1 ), Since, ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies on y 2 = 4ax , therefore
which is the required equation of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ). 4a 2
y 12 = 4ax 1 Þ = 4ax 1
Remarks m2
a
1. The equation of tangent at ( x1, y1 ) can also be obtained by \ x1 =
replacing x 2 by xx1, y 2 by yy1, x by
x + x1
, y by
y + y1
and xy by m2
2 2
xy1 + x1 y Substituting the values of x 1 and y 1 in Eq. (i), we get
and without changing the constant (if any) in the a
2 y = mx + …(ii)
equation of curve. This method is apply only when the m
equations of parabola is polynomial of second degree in x a
and y. Thus, y = mx + is a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax ,
2. Equation of tangents of all standard parabolas at ( x1, y1 ).
m
where, m is the slope of the tangent.
Equations of Parabolas Tangent at( x1, y1 ) æ a 2a ö
The coordinates of the point of contact are ç , ÷ .
2
y = 4 ax yy1 = 2 a( x + x1 ) èm 2 m ø
Comparing Eq. (ii) with y = mx + c ,
2
y = - 4 ax yy1 = - 2 a( x + x1 ) a
c=
x 2 = 4 ay xx1 = 2 a( y + y1 )
m
2
which is condition of tangency.
x = - 4 ay xx1 = - 2 a( y + y1 )
when, y = mx + c is the tangent of y 2 = 4ax .
 Chap 05 Parabola 385

Remark
The equation of tangent, condition of tangency and point of contact in terms of slope ( m) of all standard parabolas.
Equation of parabolas Point of contact in terms of Equation of tangent in terms of Condition of tangency
slope (m) slope (m)
y 2 = 4ax æ a 2a ö a a
ç 2, ÷ y = mx + c=
èm m ø m m

y 2 = - 4ax æ a 2a ö y = mx -
a
c =-
a
ç- 2 , ÷
è m mø m m
x 2 = 4ay (2am, am 2 ) y = mx - am 2 c = - am 2
x 2 = - 4ay (2am, - am 2 ) y = mx + am 2 c = am 2
(y - k ) 2 = 4a( x - h ) æ a 2a ö
y = mx - mh + k +
a
c + mh = k +
a
çh + 2 , k + ÷
è m mø m m
(y - k ) 2 = - 4a( x - h ) æ a 2a ö
y = mx - mh + k -
a
c + mh = k -
a
çh - 2 , k + ÷
è m mø m m
( x - h ) 2 = 4a(y - k ) (h + 2am, k + am 2 ) y = mx - mh + k - am 2 c + mh = k - am 2
( x - h ) 2 = - 4a(y - k ) (h + 2am, k - am 2 ) y = mx - mh + k + am 2 c + mh = k + am 2

Point of Intersection of Remarks

Tangents at any two Points on 1. The geometric mean of the x-coordinates of P and Q
(i.e. at12 ´ at22 = at1t2 ) is the x-coordinate of the point of

the Parabola intersection of tangents at P and Q on the parabola. If P and

Q are the ends points of focal chord, then x-coordinate of
Let the parabola be y 2 = 4ax point of intersection of tangents at P and Q is (– at1 t2 ).
2. The arithmetic mean of the y-coordinates of P and Q
let two points on the parabola are æi.e. 2at1 + 2at2 = a ( t + t ) ö is the y-coordinate of the point of
ç 2 ÷
P º (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q º (at 22 , 2at 2 ).
1
è 2 ø
intersection of tangents at P and Q on the parabola.
Equation of tangents at P (at 12 , 2at 1 )
and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ) Remembering Method :
G O A [GOA rule]
are t 1 y = x + at 12 …(i)
and t 2 y = x + at 22 …(ii)
Y t 1)
2, 2a GM of at 12 and at 22 , AM of 2at 1 and 2at 2
at 1
P( 2at 1 + 2at 2
i.e. at 1 t 2 i.e. = a(t 1 + t 2 )
2
X′
O X
R
y Example 33 Find the equation of the common
(at1t2, a(t1 + t2)) tangents to the parabola y 2 = 4ax and x 2 = 4by .
Q (a
t2 2,
2at
Sol. The equation of any tangent in terms of slope (m) to the
2) parabola y 2 = 4ax is
Y′
a
On solving these equations, we get x = at 1 t 2 , y = a(t 1 + t 2 ) y = mx + …(i)
m
Thus, the coordinates of the point of intersection of If this line is also tangent to the parabola x 2 = 4ay , then Eq. (i)
tangents at
meets x 2 = 4by in two coincident points.
(at 12 , 2at 1 ) and (at 22 , 2at 2 ) are (at 1 t 2 , a(t 1 + t 2 )).
386 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Substituting the value of y from Eq. (i) in x 2 = 4by , we get Sol. Let the points P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ) on the parabola
æ aö y 2 = 4ax tangents at P and Q are
x 2 = 4b çmx + ÷
è mø t 1y = x + at 12 …(i)
4ab
Þ x 2 - 4bmx - =0 and t 2y = x + at 22 …(ii)
m
The roots of this quadratic are equal provided
Y
B 2 = 4 AC

Directrix
P
2 æ -4ab ö
i.e., ( -4bm ) = 4 × 1 ç ÷
è m ø
Þ 16b 2m 3 + 16ab = 0, m ¹ 0 90°
X
R
3
or m = -a /b
\ m = - a1/ 3 / b1/ 3 Q
Substituting the value of m in Eq. (i) the required equation is
a1/ 3 ab1/ 3
y = - 1/ 3 x - 1/ 3 Q Point of intersection of these tangents is (at 1t 2 , a(t 1 + t 2 ))
b a
1/ 3 Let this point is (h , k ),
a
Þ y = - 1/ 3 x - a 2 / 3b1/ 3 then, h = at 1t 2 …(iii)
b
and k = a (t 1 + t 2 ) …(iv)
\ a1/ 3 x + b1/ 3y + a 2 / 3b 2 / 3 = 0 1 1
Slope of tangents Eqs. (i) and (ii) are and , respectively.
t1 t2
y Example 34 The tangents to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
Since, tangents are perpendicular, then
make angle q 1 and q 2 with X-axis. Find the locus of
1 1
their point of intersection, if cotq 1 + cotq 2 = c . ´ = -1
t1 t 2
Sol. Let the equation of any tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
is or t 1t 2 = - 1 …(v)
y = mx + (a / m ) …(i) From Eqs. (iii) and (v), we get
Let ( x 1, y1 ) be the point of intersection of the tangents to h = - a or h + a = 0
y 2 = 4ax , then Eq. (i) passes through ( x 1, y1 ). \ Locus of the point of intersection of tangents is
\ y1 = mx 1 + (a / m ) x +a=0
or m 2 x 1 - my1 + a = 0 which is directrix of y 2 = 4ax .

Let m1 and m 2 be the roots of this quadratic equation, then Aliter :

m1 + m 2 = y1 / x 1 and m1m 2 = a / x 1 Let the equation of any tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
or tan q 1 + tan q 2 = y1 / x 1 y = mx + a / m …(i)
and …(ii) 2
tan q 1 tan q 2 = a / x 1 Let the point of intersection of the tangents to y = 4ax
Now, cot q 1 + cot q 2 = c (given) then, Eq (i) passes through ( x 1, y1 ) .
1 1 \ y1 = mx 1 + a / m
Þ + =c
tan q 1 tan q 2 or m 2 x 1 - my1 + a = 0
tan q 1 + tan q 2 Let m1, m 2 be the roots of this quadratic equation then
Þ =c [from Eq. (ii)]
tan q 1 tan q 2 m1m 2 = a / x 1 = - 1
y1 / x 1 [since, tangents are perpendiculars]
Þ =c
a / x1 Þ a + x1 = 0
Þ y1 = ac \ Locus of the point of intersection of tangents is
The required locus is y = ac , x + a = 0 which is directrix of y 2 = 4ax .
which is a line parallel to X-axis.
Remark
y Example 35. Show that the locus of the points of Locus of the point of intersection of the perpendicular tangents
intersection of the mutually perpendicular tangents to to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is called the director circle. Its equation
a parabola is the directrix of the parabola. is x + a = 0, which is parabola’s own directrix.
 Chap 05 Parabola 387

y Example 36 The tangents to the parabola y 2 = 4ax

, y1)
P (x 1
at P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ) intersect at R. Prove
ent
1 Tang
that the area of the DPQR is a 2 |(t 1 - t 2 )| 3 . T al
2 Norm
Sol. Equations of tangents at P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ) are
t 1y = x + at 12 …(i)
and t 2y = x + at 22 …(ii) The slope of the tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) = 2a / y 1
Y t 1)
2 , 2a Since, the normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is perpendicular to the
(at 1
P tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ).
\ Slope of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) = - y 1 / 2a
X′ X Hence, the equation of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
A
y1
R y - y1 = - ( x - x 1 ).
(at1t2, a(t1+ t2)
2a

Q (a
t2 2, Remarks
Y′ 2at
2) 1. The equation of normal at ( x1, y1 ) can also be obtained by
this method
Since, point of intersect of Eqs. (i) and (ii) is
x - x1 y - y1
R(at 1t 2 , a(t 1 + t 2 )). = …(i)
a¢ x1 + hy1 + g hx1 + by1 + f
at 12 2at 1 1
1 a¢, b, g, f , h are obtained by comparing the given parabola with
\ Area of DPQR = at 22 2at 2 1
2 at t a(t + t ) 1 a¢ x 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 …(ii)
1 2 1 2
and denominators of Eq. (i) can easily remembered by the
Applying R 2 ® R 2 - R1 and R 3 ® R 3 - R1 first two rows of this determinant
at 12 ½a¢ h g½
2at 1 1 i.e.
1 ½h b f ½
½ ½
= a(t 22 - t 12 ) 2a(t 2 - t 1 ) 0 ½g f c ½
2 at (t - t ) a(t - t ) 0
1 2 1 2 1
Since, first row a¢( x1 ) + h( y1 ) + g( 1)
Expanding with respect to first row and second row, h( x1 ) + b( y1 ) + f ( 1)
1 a(t 22 - t 12 ) 2a(t 2 - t 1 ) Here, parabola y 2 = 4 ax
=
2 at 1(t 2 - t 1 ) a(t 2 - t 1 ) or y 2 - 4 ax = 0 …(iii)
1 2 t + t1 2 Comparing Eqs. (ii) and (iii), then we get
= a (t 2 - t 1 )2 2
2 t1 1 a¢ = 0, b = 1, g = - 2 a, h = 0, f = 0
1 From Eq. (i), equation of normal of Eq. (iii) is
= a 2 (t 1 - t 2 )2 |(t 2 - t 1 )| x - x1 y - y1
2 =
1 0 + 0 - 2a 0 + y1 + 0
= a 2 (t 1 - t 2 )2 |(t 1 - t 2 )|
2 y1
or y - y1 = -
( x - x1 )
1 2a
= a 2 |(t 1 - t 2 )3 |.
2 2. Equations of normals of all standard parabolas at ( x1, y1 ).
Equations of Parabola Normal at ( x1, y1 )

Equations of Normals in
2 y1
y = 4 ax y - y1 = - ( x - x1 )
2a
Different Forms y 2 = - 4 ax y - y1 =
y1
( x - x1 )
2a
1. Point Form: To find the equation of the normal to
x 2 = 4 ay 2a
the parabola y 2 = 4ax at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ). y - y1 = - ( x - x1 )
x1
Since, the equation of the tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax x 2 = - 4 ay 2a
y - y1 = ( x - x1 )
at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is x1
yy 1 = 2a( x + x 1 )
388 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

2. Parametric form : The equation of normal to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at

( x 1 , y 1 ) is
To find the equation of normal to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
y
at the point (at 2 , 2at ) or ‘t’. y - y 1 = - 1 (x - x 1 ) …(i)
2a
Since, the equation of normal of the parabola y 2 = 4ax at Since, m is the slope of the normal,
( x 1 , y 1 ) is y
y then, m = - 1 Þ y 1 = - 2am
y - y 1 = - 1 (x - x 1 ) …(i) 2a
2a
Replacing x 1 by at 2 and y 1 by 2at, then Eq. (i) becomes Since, ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies on y 2 = 4ax , therefore

y - 2at = - t ( x - at 2 ) y 12 = 4ax 1
or y + tx = 2at + at 3 Þ 4a 2m 2 = 4ax 1
\ x 1 = am 2
Remark
The equations of normals of all standard parabolas at ‘t’ On substituting the values of x 1 and y 1 in Eq. (i) we get
Equations of Parametric Normals y + 2am = m( x - am 2 )
Parabolas coordinates ‘t’ at ‘t’
\ y = mx - 2am - am 3 …(ii)
y 2 = 4 ax ( at 2, 2 at ) y + tx = 2 at + at 3
3
Thus, y = mx - 2am - am is a normal to the parabola
y 2 = - 4 ax ( -at 2, 2 at ) y - tx = 2 at + at 3
y 2 = 4ax , where m is the slope of the normal. The
x 2 = 4 ay (2 at, at 2 ) x + ty = 2 at + at 3
coordinates of the point of contact are (am 2 , - 2am )
2
x = - 4 ay (2 at, - at 2 ) x - ty = 2 at + at 3

On comparing Eq. (ii) with

y = mx + c
3. Slope form : \ c = - 2am - am 3
To find the Equation of normal, condition for
which is condition of normality when y = mx + c is the
normality and point of contact in terms of m (slope) to
normal of y 2 = 4ax .
the parabola y 2 = 4ax

Remark
The equations of normals, point of contact and condition of normality in terms of slope ( m) of all standard parabolas.

Point of contact in terms of Equation of normals in Condition of

Equation of parabolas
slope (m) terms of slope (m) normality
y 2 = 4 ax ( am2, - 2 am) y = mx - 2 am - am3 c = - 2 am - am3
y 2 = - 4 ax ( -am2, 2 am) y = mx + 2 am + am3 c = 2 am + am3
x 2 = 4 ay æ 2a a ö a
y = mx + 2 a + 2 c = 2a + 2
a
ç- , 2÷
è m m ø m m
x 2 = - 4 ay æ 2a a ö
y = mx - 2 a -
a
c = - 2a -
a
ç ,- 2÷
èm m ø m2 m2
( y - k )2 = 4 a( x - h) ( h + am2, k - 2 am) y - k = m( x - h) c = k - mh - 2 am - am3
- 2 am - am3
( y - k )2 = - 4 a( x - h) ( h - am2, k + 2 am) y - k = m( x - h) c = k - mh + 2 am + am3
+ 2 am + am3
( x - h)2 = 4 a( y - k ) æ 2a a ö y - k = m( x - h) c = k - mh + 2 a +
a
çh - , k + 2÷
è m m ø a m2
+ 2a + 2
m
 Chap 05 Parabola 389

Y
t 1)
Point of Intersection of P (a
2 2a
t1 ,

Normals at any Two Points on

the Parabola X′
A
X

Let the parabola be y 2 = 4ax .

Q (a
t2 2,
Let the points on the parabola are Y′
2at
2)

P º (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q = (at 22 , 2at 2 ).

Since, it meet the parabola again at Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ), then
t 1)
2 , 2a
Y
(at 1 Eq. (i) passes through Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ).
P
\ 2at 2 = - at 1 t 22 + 2at 1 + at 13
R Þ 2a(t 2 - t 1 ) + at 1 (t 22 - t 12 ) = 0
A
X′ X
Þ a(t 2 - t 1 )[2 + t 1 (t 2 + t 1 )] = 0
Q a(t 2 - t 1 ) ¹ 0
Q

[Qt 1 and t 2 are different]

(a
t2
2
,2

\ 2 + t 1 (t 2 + t 1 ) = 0
at 2

Y′
)

Equations of normals at P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ) are 2

\ t 2 = -t1 -
t1
y = -t1x + 2at 1 + at 13 …(i)
and y = -t2x + 2at 2 + at 23 …(ii) Remarks
1. If normals at ‘t1’ and ‘t2’ meets the parabola y 2 = 4 ax at
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
same point, then t1t2 = 2.
x = 2a + a(t 12 + t 22 + t 1 t 2 ) and y = - at 1 t 2 (t 1 + t 2 ) Proof Suppose normals meet at ‘ T ’, then
If R is the point of intersection, then 2 2
T = - t1 - = - t2 -
t1 t2
R º [2a + a (t 12 + t 22 + t 1 t 2 ), - at 1 t 2 (t 1 + t 2 )]
æ 1 1ö
(Remember) Þ ( t1 - t2 ) = 2 ç - ÷
è t2 t1 ø
Point of intersection of normals at t 1 and t 2 or t1t2 = 2 [Qt1 ¹ t2 ]
Parabola Equation of normal Point of intersection of 2. If the normals to the parabola y 2 = 4 ax at the points t1 and t2
at any point ‘t’ normals at t 1 and t 2 intersect again on the parabola at the point t3, then
y2 = 4 ax y + tx = 2at + at 3 ( 2a + a ( t12 + t1 t 2 + t 22 ), t3 = - ( t1 + t2 ) and the line joining t1 and t2 passes through a
- at1t2 (t1 + t2 )) fixed point ( - 2a, 0 ).
2 3
y = - 4 ax y - tx = 2at + at ( -2a - a ( t12 + t1 t 2 + t 22 ), y Example 37 Show that normal to the parabola
at1t2 (t1 + t2 )) y 2 = 8 x at the point (2, 4) meets it again at (18, –12).
x2 = 4 ay x + ty = 2at + at 3 ( - at1 t 2 ( t1 + t 2 ), 2a Find also the length of the normal chord.
+ a(t12 + t1t2 + t22 ))
Sol. Comparing the given parabola (i.e. y 2 = 8x ) with
2 3 ( at1 t 2 ( t1 + t 2 ), - 2a
x = - 4 ay x - ty = 2at + at y 2 = 4ax .
- a(t12 + t1t2 + t22 ))
\ 4a = 8 Þ a = 2
Since, normal at ( x 1, y1 ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
Relation between ‘t 1 ’ and ‘t 2 ’ if Normal y1
y - y1 = - ( x - x1 )
at ‘t 1 ’ meets the Parabola Again at ‘t 2 ’ 2a
Here, x 1 = 2 and y1 = 4.
Let the parabola be y 2 = 4ax , equation of normal at
\ Equation of normal is
P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) is 4
y - 4 = - ( x - 2)
y = - t 1 x + 2at 1 + at 13 …(i) 4
390 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y it meet the curve again Q say (at 22 , 2at 2 ).

)
P( 2, 4 2
\ t 2 = - t1 - …(ii)
t1
Y
X′ X
A )
2, 2at 1
(a t 1
P

Q (1
8, –
1 2)
Y′ X′ X
A
Þ y - 4 = -x +2
Þ x +y -6=0 …(i) θ
On solving Eq. (i) and y 2 = 8x , Q (at 2, 2at )
2 2
2
then, y = 8(6 - y ) Y′
2
Þ y + 8y - 48 = 0
Now, angle between the normal and parabola
Þ (y + 12)(y - 4 ) = 0 = Angle between the normal and tangent at Q
\ y = - 12 and y = 4 (i.e. t 2y = x + at 22 )
then, x = 18 and x = 2. If q be the angle, then
Hence, the point of intersection of normal and parabola are 1
(18, - 12) and (2, 4 ), therefore normal meets the parabola at -t 1 -
m1 - m 2 t2 tt +1
(18, - 12) and length of normal chord is distance between tanq = = =- 12
their points 1 + m1m 2 æ1ö t 2 - t1
1 + ( -t 1 ) ç ÷
èt 2 ø
= PQ = (18 - 2)2 + ( -12 - 4 )2 = 16 2
æ 2ö
t 1 ç -t 1 - ÷ + 1
y Example 38 Prove that the chord =-
è t1 ø
[from Eq. (ii)]
2
y - x 2 + 4a 2 = 0 is a normal chord of the -t 1 - - t 1
t1
parabola y 2 = 4ax . Also, find the point on the parabola
-t 12 - 1 t
when the given chord is normal to the parabola. =- =- 1
æ 1 + t 12 ö 2
Sol. We have, y - x 2 + 4a 2 = 0 - 2ç ÷
è t1 ø
i.e., y = x 2 - 4a 2 …(i)
tan f
Comparing the Eq. (i) with the equation y = mx + c , then = [from Eq. (i)]
2
m = 2, c = - 4a 2 æ1 ö
\ q = tan -1 ç tan f ÷
è2 ø
Since, -2am - am 3 = - 2a 2 - a( 2 )3
y Example 40 Prove that the normal chord to a
= - 2a 2 - 2a 2 = - 4a 2 = c
parabola y 2 = 4ax at the point whose ordinate is equal
Hence, the given chord is normal to the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
to abscissa subtends a right angle at the focus.
The coordinates of the points are (am 2 , - 2am ) i.e. Sol. Let the normal at P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) meet the curve at Q (at 22 , 2at 2 ).
(2a, - 2 2 a ) .
\ PQ is a normal chord
2
y Example 39 If the normal to a parabola y 2 = 4ax , and t 2 = - t1 - . …(i)
t1
makes an angle f with the axis. Show that it will cut
By given condition, 2at 1 = at 12
æ1 ö
the curve again at an angle tan -1 ç tan f ÷ . \ t 1 = 2 from Eq. (i), t 2 = - 3
è2 ø
then, P ( 4a, 4a ) and Q (9a, - 6a )
Sol. Let the normal at P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) be
but focus S(a, 0).
y = - t 1x + 2at 1 + at 13 . 4a - 0 4a 4
\ Slope of SP = = =
\ tan f = - t 1 = slope of the normal, …(i) 4a - a 3a 3
 Chap 05 Parabola 391

t 1) This is a cubic equation in m, so it has three roots, say

Y 2
t1 , 2a
P (a m 1 , m 2 and m 3 .
\ m 1 + m 2 + m 3 = 0,
(2a - h )
X′
A S
X m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 = ,
a
k
m 1m 2m 3 = - …(ii)
Q (at 2, 2at ) a
2 2
Y′ Hence, for any given point P (h, k ), Eq. (i) has three real or
-6a - 0 6a 3 imaginary roots. Corresponding to each of these three
and slope of SQ = =- =-
9a - a 8a 4 roots, we have one normal passing through P (h, k ).
4 3 Hence, in total, we have three normals PA, PB and PC
Q Slope of SP ´ Slope of SQ = ´ - = -1
3 4 drawn through P to the parabola.
\ ÐPSQ = p / 2 Points A, B, C in which the three normals from P (h, k )
i.e. PQ subtends a right angle at the focus S. meet the parabola are called co-normal points.
y Example 41 If the normal to the parabola y 2 = 4ax Corollary 1 The algebraic sum of the slopes of three
concurrent normals is zero. This follows from Eq. (ii).
at point t 1 cuts the parabola again at point t 2 , prove
Corollary 2 The algebraic sum of ordinates of the feets of
that t 22 = 8.
three normals drawn to a parabola from a given point is
Sol. A normal at point t 1 cuts the parabola again at t 2 . Then, zero.
2 Let the ordinates of A, B, C be y 1 , y 2 , y 3 respectively, then
t 2 = - t1 - Þ t 12 + t 1t 2 + 2 = 0
t1
y 1 = - 2am 1 , y 2 = - 2am 2 and y 3 = - 2am 3
Since, t 1 is real , so (t 2 )2 - 4 × 1 × 2 ³ 0
\ Algebraic sum of these ordinates is
Þ t 22 ³ 8 y 1 + y 2 + y 3 = - 2am 1 - 2am 2 - 2am 3
= - 2a (m 1 + m 2 + m 3 )

Co-normal Points = - 2a ´ 0
=0
[from Eq. (ii)]

In general three normals can be drawn from a point to a Corollary 3 If three normals drawn to any parabola
parabola and their feet, points where they meet the y 2 = 4ax from a given point (h, k ) be real then h > 2a.
parabola are called conormal points.
When normals are real, then all the three roots of Eq. (i)
Let P (h, k ) be any given point and y 2 = 4ax be a parabola. are real and in that case
The equation of any normal to y 2 = 4ax is m 12 + m 22 + m 23 > 0 (for any values of m 1 , m 2 , m 3 )
y = mx - 2am - am 3
Þ (m 1 + m 2 + m 3 ) 2 - 2 (m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 ) > 0
Y
2 (2a - h )
Þ (0 ) 2 - > 0 Þ h - 2a > 0
A a
B \ h > 2a
X′ X Remark
O P (h, k)
For a = 1normals drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4 x from any point
C ( h, k ) are real, if h > 2.

Corollary 4 If three normals drawn to any parabola

Y′
y 2 = 4ax from a given point (h, k ) be real and distinct, then
If it passes through (h, k ), then 27ak 2 < 4 (h - 2a ) 3
3
k = mh - 2am - am
Let f (m ) = am 3 + m (2a - h ) + k
3
Þ am + m (2a - h ) + k = 0 …(i)
392 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ f ¢ (m ) = 3am 2 + (2a - h ) y = mx - 2am - am 3

Two distinct roots of f ¢ (m ) = 0 are If it passes through (h , k ), then

k = mh - 2am - am 3
æ h - 2a ö æ h - 2a ö
a= ç ÷ and b = - ç ÷, Þ am 3 + m (2a - h ) + k = 0 …(i)
è 3a ø è 3a ø
Let the roots of Eq. (i) be m1, m 2 and m 3 .
Now, f (a ) f (b) < 0 Þ f (a ) f ( -a ) < 0 Then, from Eq. (i), m1 + m 2 + m 3 = 0 …(ii)
3 3 (2a - h )
Þ (aa + a (2a - h ) + k ) ( -aa - a (2a - h ) + k ) < 0 m1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m1 = …(iii)
a
Þ k 2 - (aa 2 + (2a - h )) 2 a 2 < 0
k
2 and m1m 2m 3 = - …(iv)
2æ h - 2a ö (h - 2a ) a
Þ k -ç + (2a - h ) ÷ <0 But here, two of the three normals are given to be
è 3 ø 3a
coincident i.e. m1 = m 2 .
2
æ 4a - 2h ö æ h - 2a ö Putting m1 = m 2 in Eqs. (ii) and (iv), we get
Þ k2 - ç ÷ ç ÷ <0
è 3 ø è 3a ø 2m1 + m 3 = 0 …(v)
k
4 (h - 2a ) 3 and m12m 3 = - …(vi)
Þ k2 - < 0 Þ 27ak 2 - 4 (h - 2a ) 3 < 0 a
27a Putting m 3 = - 2m1 from Eq. (v) in Eq. (vi), we get
\ 27ak 2 < 4 (h - 2a ) 3 - 2m13 = -
k
a
Corollary 5 The centroid of the triangle formed by the feet
3 k
of the three normals lies on the axis of the parabola. Þ m1 =
2a
If A ( x 1 , y 1 ), B ( x 2 , y 2 ) and C ( x 3 , y 3 ) be vertices of DABC, Since, m1 is a root of Eq. (i).
then its centroid is
\ am13 + m1 (2a - h ) + k = 0
æ x1 + x2 + x 3 y1 + y2 + y 3 ö æ x1 + x2 + x 3 ö 1/ 3
ç , ÷ =ç , 0÷ . æk ö æk ö
è 3 3 ø è 3 ø Þ aç ÷+ç ÷ (2a - h ) + k = 0
è 2a ø è 2a ø
Since, y 1 + y 2 + y 3 = 0 (from corollary 2). Hence, the é 1/ 3
æk ö ù
centroid lies on the X-axis OX, which is the axis of the ê putting m1 = ç ÷ ú
êë è 2a ø ú
parabola also. û
1/ 3
x + x2 + x 3 1 æk ö 3k
Now, 1 = (am 12 + am 22 + am 23 ) Þ ç ÷ (2a - h ) = -
3 3 è 2a ø 2
a 2 k 27k 3
= (m 1 + m 22 + m 23 ) Þ (2a - h )3 = -
3 2a 8
a Þ 27ak 2 = 4 (h - 2a )3
= {(m 1 + m 2 + m 3 ) 2
3 Hence, the locus of (h , k ) is
- 2 (m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 )} 27ay 2 = 4 ( x - 2a )3 .
a é 2 ì2a - h üù 2h - 4a
= ê(0 ) - 2 í a ýú = 3 y Example 43 Find the locus of the point through
3 ë î þû which pass three normals to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
æ 2h - 4a ö such that two of them make angles a and b
\ Centroid of DABC is ç , 0÷ . respectively with the axis such that tan a tan b = 2 .
è 3 ø
Sol. Let (h , k ) be the point of intersection of three normals to
y Example 42 Show that the locus of points such the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
that two of the three normals drawn from them to The equation of any normal to y 2 = 4ax is
the parabola y 2 = 4ax coincide is 27ay 2 = 4 ( x - 2a ) 3 . y = mx - 2am - am 3
Sol. Let (h , k ) be the point of intersection of three normals to If it passes through (h1,k ), then
the parabola y 2 = 4ax . The equation of any normal to k = mh - 2am - am 3
y 2 = 4ax is Þ am 3 + m (2a - h ) + k = 0 …(i)
 Chap 05 Parabola 393

Let roots of Eq. (i) be m1, m 2 , m 3 then from Eq. (i) Then, VA = 2a + am12 , VB = 2a + am 22 and
k VC = 2a + am 32 .
m1m 2m 3 = - …(ii)
a Given, VA , VB and VC are in AP.
Also m1 = tan a , m 2 = tan b and tan a tan b = 2 \ 2VB = VA + VC
\ m1m 2 = 2 …(iii) Þ 4a + 2am 22 = 2a + am12 + 2a + am 32
k
From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), 2m 3 = - Þ 2m 22 = m12 + m 32
a
k Þ 2m 22 = (m1 + m 3 )2 - 2m1m 3
or m3 = -
2a 2m1m 2m 3
Þ 2m 22 = (m1 + m 2 + m 3 - m 2 )2 -
Which being a root of Eq. (i) must satisfy it m2
i.e. am 33 + m 3 (2a - h ) + k = 0 2 æ kö
Þ 2m 22 = (0 - m 2 )2 - ç- ÷
æ kö k
3 m2 è a ø
Þ a ç- ÷ - (2a - h ) + k = 0
è 2a ø 2a [from Eqs. (iii) and (v)]
3 2k
k kh Þ m 23 = …(vi)
Þ - 2
-k + +k =0 a
8a 2a
(2a - h )
Þ k 2 - 4ah = 0 Now, from Eq. (iv), m 2 (m1 + m 3 ) + m 3m1 =
a
\ Required locus of (h , k ) is y 2 - 4ax = 0. m1m 2m 3 (2a - h )
Þ m 2 (m1 + m 2 + m 3 - m 2 ) + =
m2 a
y Example 44 If the three normals from a point to the
k (2a - h )
parabola y 2 = 4ax cut the axis in points whose Þ m 2 (0 - m 2 ) - =
am 2 a
distance from the vertex are in AP, show that the point
Þ - am 23 - k = m 2 (2a - h )
lies on the curve 27ay 2 = 2 ( x - 2a ) 3 .
Þ ( - am 23 - k )3 = m 23 (2a - h )3
Sol. Let (h , k ) be the point of intersection of three normals to
2k
the parabola y 2 = 4ax . The equation of any normal to Þ ( -2k - k )3 = (2a - h )3 [from Eq. (vi)]
a
y 2 = 4ax is y = mx - 2am - am 3 …(i) 2k
Þ - 27k 3 = - (h - 2a )3
Y a
Þ 27ak 2 = 2 (h - 2a )3
Hence, locus of (h , k ) is
B C 27ay 2 = 2 ( x - 2a )3 .
X′ A X
V
P (h , k )
y Example 45 The normals at P , Q , R on the parabola
Y′
y 2 = 4ax meet in a point on the line y = k. Prove that
If it passes through (h , k ) then
the sides of the DPQR touch the parabola
x 2 - 2ky = 0.
k = mh - 2am - am 3
Sol. Any normal to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
Þ am 3 + m (2a - h ) + k = 0 …(ii)
Let roots of Eq. (ii) be m1, m 2 , m 3 then from Eq. (ii) y = mx - 2am - am 3 …(i)
m1 + m 2 + m 3 = 0 …(iii) Also, any point on the line y = k is ( x 1, k ).
(2a - h ) If Eq. (i) passes through ( x 1, k ) then k = mx 1 - 2am - am 3
m1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m1 = …(iv)
a or am 3 + m (2a - x 1 ) + k = 0
k
and m1m 2m 3 = - …(v) If the roots of this equation are m1, m 2 , m 3 then we get
a
m1 + m 2 + m 3 = 0 …(ii)
Since, Eq. (i) cuts the axis of parabola viz. y = 0 at
(2a - x 1 )
(2a + am 2 , 0). m1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m1 = …(iii)
a
\The normal through (h , k ) cut the axis at A (2a + am12 , 0), k
and m1m 2m 3 = - …(iv)
B (2a + am 22 , 0) and C (2a + am 32 , 0) and let V (0, 0) be the a
vertex of the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
394 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Also, coordinates of three points P , Q and R are

(am 12, - 2am1 ) (am 22 , - 2am 2 ) and (am 32 , - 2am 3 ), Circle Through Co-normal Points
respectively.
To find the equation of the circle passing through the three
\ The equation of the line PQ is
(conormal) points on the parabola, normals at which pass
( -2am 2 ) - ( -2am1 )
y - ( -2am1 ) = ( x - am12 ) through a given point (a, b).
am 22 - am12 Y
2 B
Þ y + 2am1 = - ( x - am12 ) A
(m 2 + m1 )
Þ y (m1 + m 2 ) + 2am1(m1 + m 2 ) = - 2x + 2am12 (α,β)
X
O
Þ y (m1 + m 2 ) + 2am1m 2 = - 2x
2am1m 2m 3
Þ y (m1 + m 2 + m 3 - m 3 ) + = - 2x
m3 C
2k
Þ y (0 - m 3 ) - = - 2x [from Eqs. (ii) and (iv)] Let A (am 12 , - 2am 1 ), B (am 22 , - 2am 2 ) and C (am 23 , - 2am 3 )
m3
be the three points on the parabola
Þ - ym 32 - 2k = - 2m 3 x
y 2 = 4ax
Þ ym 32 - 2m 3 x + 2k = 0,
which is a quadratic in m 3 . Since, point of intersection of normals is (a, b), then
Since, PQ will touch it, then am 3 + (2a - a ) m + b = 0 …(E)
B 2 - 4 AC = 0 \ m1 + m2 + m 3 = 0 …(i)
Þ ( -2x )2 - 4 × y × 2k = 0 (2a - a )
m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 = … (ii)
\ x 2 - 2ky = 0 a
y Example 46 Find the point on the axis of the b
and m 1m 2m 3 = - …(iii)
parabola 3y 2 + 4 y - 6 x + 8 = 0 from when three a
distinct normals can be drawn. Let the equation of the circle through A, B, C be
Sol. Given, parabola is 3y 2 + 4y - 6x + 8 = 0 x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(iv)
2
æ 4 ö If the point (am , - 2am ) lies on it, then
Þ 3 çy 2 + y ÷ = 6x - 8
è 3 ø (am 2 ) 2 + ( -2am ) 2 + 2 g (am 2 ) + 2 f ( -2 am ) + c = 0
ìï æ 2
2ö 4 üï Þ a 2m 4 + ( 4a 2 + 2ag ) m 2 - 4afm + c = 0 …(v)
Þ 3 í çy + ÷ - ý = 6x - 8
ïî è 3ø 9ï
þ This is a biquadratic equation in m. Hence, there are four
2
æ 2ö æ 4ö values of m, say m 1 , m 2 , m 3 and m 4 such that the circle
Þ 3 çy + ÷ = ç6x - 8 + ÷
è 3ø è 3ø pass through the points.
æ 2ö
2
æ 10 ö A (am 12 , - 2am 1 ), B (am 22 , - 2am 2 ), C (am 23 , -2am 3 ) and
\ çy + ÷ = 2 ç x - ÷
è 3ø è 9ø D (am 24 , - 2am 4 ).
2 10 \ m1 + m2 + m 3 + m 4 = 0 …(F)
Let y + =Y, x - =X
3 9
Þ 0 +m4 = 0 [from Eq. (i)]
Then, Y 2 = 2X
Þ m4 = 0
Comparing with Y 2 = 4aX 2
\ (am 4 , - 2am 4 ) = (0, 0 )
1
\ a= Thus, the circle passes through the vertex of the parabola
2
æ 2ö y 2 = 4ax from Eq. (iv),
any point on the axis of parabola is ç x, - ÷
è 3ø 0 +0 +0 +0 +c =0
10 \ c =0
and X > 2a Þ x - >1
9 From Eq. (v), a m + ( 4a + 2ag ) m 2 - 4afm = 0
2 4 2
19
Þ x> Þ am 3 + ( 4a + 2 g ) m - 4 f = 0 …(vi)
9
 Chap 05 Parabola 395

Now, Eqs. (E) and (vi) are identical. Remark

4a + 2 g 4f This is likewise true for the pairs of chords AB, CD and AD, BC.
\ 1= =-
2a - a b Corollary 3. The circle through conormal point passes
\ 2 g = - (2a + a ), 2 f = - b/ 2 through the vertex (0, 0 ) of the parabola.
\ The equation of the required circle is Corollary 4. The centroid of four points; in which a circle
b intersects a parabola, lies on the axis of the parabola.
x 2 + y 2 - (2a + a ) x - y = 0
2 æ 4 2
4 ö
ç åam i å( -2am i ) ÷
[from Eq. (iv)] ç i =1 i =1 ÷
Corollary 1. The algebraic sum of the ordinates of the four Centroid = ç , ÷
4 4
points of intersection of a circle and a parabola is zero. ç ÷
ç ÷
Sum of ordinates è ø
= -2am 1 - 2am 2 - 2am 3 - 2am 4 æa a ö
= ç {( Sm 1 ) 2 - 2 Sm 1m 2 }, - ( Sm 1 ) ÷
= - 2a (m 1 + m 2 + m 3 + m 4 ) [from Eq. (F)] è4 2 ø
= - 2a ´ 0 = 0 æa æ 2 ( 4a 2 + 2ag ) ö ö
Corollary 2. The common chords of a circle and a parabola = çç ç 0 - ÷ , 0 ÷÷
è4 è a2 ø ø
are in pairs equally inclined to the axis of the parabola.
ψ = ( -2a - g, 0 )
Here y = 0, which is axis of the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
ψ
y Example 47 A circle cuts the parabola y 2 = 4ax at
Y right angles and passes through the focus, show that
A its centre lies on the curve y 2 (a + 2x ) = a (a + 3x ) 2 .
B
φ φ θ θ Sol. Let the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2 fy + c = 0 …(i)
O X meet the parabola y 2 = 4ax at any point P (at 2 , 2at ) cutting
C it at right angles.
D We have to find locus of centre of circle Eq. (i),
i.e. (-g, - f )
Let A, B, C, D be the points of intersection of the circle and But given circle Eq. (i) passes through the focus (a , 0), then
the parabola with A (am 12 , - 2am 1 ), B (am 22 , - 2am 2 ) a 2 + 0 + 2ga + 0 + c = 0
C (am 23 , - 2am 3 ) and D (am 24 , - 2am 4 ) then equation of AC Þ c = - a 2 - 2ag …(ii)

and BD are
90°
y (m 1 + m 3 ) = - 2 x - 2am 1m 3 P
and y (m 2 + m 4 ) = - 2 x - 2am 2m 4 , respectively.
\ Slopes of the chords AC and BD are
2 2 S(a,0)
- and - , respectively.
m1 + m 3 m2 + m 4
2 Now, the circle and parabola intersect at P (at 2 , 2at ) at
\ Slope of AC = -
m1 + m 3 right angles.
2 Since, tangent at P (at 2 , 2at ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
= [Qm 1 + m 2 + m 3 + m 4 = 0]
m2 + m 4 ty = x + at 2
æ 2 ö Hence, this tangent must pass through the centre ( - g , - f )
= - ç- ÷ = - Slope of BD of the circle
è m2 + m 4 ø
\ - ft = - g + at 2
\ Their slopes are equal in magnitude and opposite in
Þ ft = g - at 2 …(iii)
sign.
2
\ The chords of AC and BD are equally inclined to the axis. Also the point P (at , 2at ) lies on the circle (i), then
396 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

a 2t 4 + 4a 2t 2 + 2agt 2 + 4aft + c = 0 æ a - 2g ö æ a - 2g ö
f ç ÷ = g -aç ÷
Hence, from Eqs. (ii) and (iii) when we put values for c and ft. è a ø è a ø
\ a 2t 4 + 4a 2t 2 + 2agt 2 + 4ag - 4a 2t 2 - a 2 - 2ag = 0
æ a - 2g ö
Þ a 2t 4 + 2agt 2 + 2ag - a 2 = 0 Þ f ç ÷ = ( 3g - a )
è a ø
Þ at 4 + 2gt 2 + 2g - a = 0 Þ f 2 ( a - 2g ) = a ( 3g - a ) 2
4 2
Þ a ( t - 1) + 2g ( t + 1) = 0 Þ ( - f )2 [a + 2 ( - g )] = a (a - 3g )2
2 2 2
Þ (t + 1) [a (t - 1) + 2g ] = 0 But t + 1 ¹ 0 Þ ( - f )2 [a + 2 ( - g )] = a [a + 3 ( - g )]2
a - 2g Hence, locus of the centre ( - g , - f ) is the curve
Þ a ( t 2 - 1) + 2g = 0 Þ t 2 =
a y 2 ( a + 2x ) = a ( a + 3x ) 2 .
Hence, from Eq. (iii),

Exercise for Session 2

1. If 2x + y + l = 0 is a normal to the parabola y 2 = - 8x , then the value of l is
(a) - 24 (b) - 16 (c) - 8 (d) 24
2. 2
The slope of a chord of the parabola y = 4ax which is normal at one end and which subtends a right angle at
the origin is
1 1
(a) (b) 2 (c) - (d) - 2
2 2

3. The common tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax and x 2 = 4ay is

(a) x + y + a = 0 (b) x + y - a = 0 (c) x - y + a = 0 (d) x - y - a = 0
4. 2 2 2
The circle x + y + 4lx = 0 which l ÎR touches the parabola y = 8x . The value of l is given by
(a) l Î (0, ¥) (b) l Î (-¥, 0) (c) l Î(1, ¥) (d) l Î(-¥, 1)
5. 2
If the normals at two points P and Q of a parabola y = 4ax intersect at a third point R on the curve, then the
product of ordinates of P and Q is
(a) 4a 2 (b) 2a 2 (c) - 4a 2 (d) 8a 2

6. The normals at three points P , Q, R of the parabola y 2 = 4ax meet in (h, k ). The centroid of DPQR lies on
(a) x = 0 (b) y = 0 (c) x = - a (d) y = a
7. The set of points on the axis of the parabola y 2 - 4x - 2y + 5 = 0 from which all the three normals to the
parabola are real, is
(a) (l, 0) ; l > 1 (b) (l, 1) ; l > 3 (c) (l, 2) ; l > 6 (d) (l, 3) ; l > 8
8. Prove that any three tangents to a parabola whose slopes are in harmonic progression enclose a triangle of
constant area.
9. A chord of parabola y 2 = 4ax subtends a right angle at the vertex. Find the locus of the point of intersection of
tangents at its extremities.
10. Find the equation of the normal to the parabola y 2 = 4x which is
(a) parallel to the line y = 2x - 5. (b) perpendicular to the line 2x + 6y + 5 = 0.
11. The ordinates of points P and Q on the parabola y 2 = 12x are in the ratio 1 : 2. Find the locus of the point of
intersection of the normals to the parabola at P and Q.
12. The normals at P , Q, R on the parabola y 2 = 4ax meet in a point on the line y = c . Prove that the sides of the
DPQR touch the parabola x 2 = 2cy .

13. The normals are drawn from (2l, 0) to the parabola y 2 = 4x . Show that l must be greater than 1. One normal is
always the X-axis. Find l for which the other two normals are perpendicular to each other.
Session 3
Pair of Tangents SS1 = T 2 , Chord of Contact, Equation of the Chord Bisected at
a Given Point, Diameter, Lengths of Tangent, Subtangent, Normal and Subnormal,
Some Standard Properties of the Parabola, Reflection Property of a Parabola,
Study of Parabola of the Form (ax 2 + by)2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0

Pair of Tangents SS1 = T 2 Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be any point outside the parabola. Let a
chord of the parabola through the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) cut the
If y 12 - 4ax 1 > 0, then any point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside the parabola at Q and let R (h, k ) be any arbitrary point on the
parabola and a pair of tangents PQ , PR can be drawn to it line PQ ( R inside or outside).
from P. We find their equation as follows. Let Q divide PR in the ratio l : 1, then coordinates of Q are
Let T (h, k ) be any point on the pair of tangents PQ or PR æ lh + x 1 lk + y 1 ö
drawn from any external point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the parabola ç , ÷ [QPQ : QR = l : 1]
è l +1 l +1 ø
y 2 = 4ax .
Since, Q lies on parabola Eq. (i), then
Q 2
k)
T (h, æ lk + y 1 ö æ lh + x 1 ö
ç ÷ = 4a ç ÷
P (x è l +1 ø è l +1 ø
1,y)
1

R
R (h, k)
Equation of PT is
k - y1 Q
y - y1 = (x - x 1 )
h - x1
æ k - y1 ö æ hy 1 - kx 1 ö
Þ y =ç ÷ x +ç ÷
èh - x1 ø è h - x1 ø P (x1 , y1 )

which is tangent to the parabola

y 2 = 4ax Þ ( lk + y 1 ) 2 - 4a ( lh + x 1 ) ( l + 1) = 0
a Þ (k 2 - 4ah ) l2 + 2 [ky 1 - 2a (h + x 1 )]l
\ c=
m
+ (y 12 - 4ax 1 ) = 0 …(ii)
æ hy - kx 1 ö æ k - y 1 ö
Þ cm = a Þ ç 1 ÷ç ÷ =a Line PR will become tangent to parabola Eq. (i), then roots
è h - x1 ø èh - x1 ø
of Eq. (ii) are equal
Þ (k - y 1 ) (hy 1 - kx 1 ) = a (h - x 1 ) 2
\ 4 [ky 1 - 2a (h + x 1 )]2 - 4 (k 2 - 4ah ) (y 12 - 4ax 1 ) = 0
\ Locus of (h, k ), equation of pair of tangents is
or {ky 1 - 2a (h + x 1 )} 2 = (k 2 - 4ah ) (y 12 - 4ax 1 )
(y - y 1 ) ( xy 1 - x 1 y ) = a ( x - x 1 ) 2
Hence, locus of R (h, k ) i.e. equation of pair of tangents
Þ (y 2 - 4ax ) (y 12 - 4ax 1 ) = {yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 )} 2 from P( x 1 , y 1 ) is
\ SS 1 = T 2 {yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 )} 2 = (y 2 - 4ax ) (y 12 - 4ax 1 )
where S = y 2 - 4ax , S 1 = y 12 - 4ax 1 i.e. T 2 = SS 1 or SS 1 = T 2
and T = yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ).
Remark
Aliter :
S = 0 is the equation of the curve, S1 is obtained from S by
Let the parabola be y 2 = 4ax …(i) replacing x by x1 and y by y1 and T = 0 is the equation tangent at
( x1, y1 ) to S = 0.
398 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Chord of Contact Let P º ( x 1, y1 )

and the tangents from P touch the parabola at Q (at 12 , 2at 1 )
The chord joining the points of contact of two tangents and R(at 22 , 2at 2 ) then P is the point of intersection of
drawn from an external point to a parabola is known as the tangents.
chord of contact of tangents drawn from external point. \ x 1 = at 1t 2 and y1 = a(t 1 + t 2 )
Theorem The chord of contact of tangents drawn from a x y
Þ t 1t 2 = 1 and t 1 + t 2 = 1 …(ii)
point ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is a a
Now, QR = (at 12 - at 22 )2 + (2at 1 - 2at 2 )2
yy 1 = 2a ( x + x 1 ).
Proof Let PQ and PR be tangents to the parabola y 2 = 4ax = a 2 (t 1 - t 2 )2 [(t 1 + t 2 )2 + 4 ]

drawn from any external point P ( x 1 , y 1 ), then QR is called = | a || t 1 - t 2 | {(t 1 + t 2 )2 + 4 }

chord of contact of the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
= | a | {(t 1 + t 2 )2 - 4t 1t 2 } {(t 1 + t 2 )2 + 4 }
Y
′) æy 2 4x ö æy 2 ö
,y
(x′ = | a | ç 12 - 1 ÷ × ç 12 + 4 ÷
Q èa a ø èa ø
[from Eq. (ii)]
X′ X
A
(y12 - 4ax 1 ) (y12 + 4a )2
P Chord of contact =|a| ×
(x1, y1) |a| |a|
R (x′′, 1
y′′)
Y′
= (y12 - 4ax 1 )(y12 + 4a 2 )
|a|
Let Q º ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and R º ( x ¢¢,y ¢¢ ) Aliter :
Equation of tangent PQ is Equation of QR is yy1 = 2a ( x + x 1 )
yy ¢ = 2a ( x + x ¢ ) …(i) yy - 2ax 1
Þ x= 1
2a
and equation of tangent PR is
The ordinates of Q and R are the roots of the equation
yy ¢¢ = 2a ( x + x ¢¢ ) …(ii)
æ yy - 2ax 1 ö
Since, lines Eqs. (i) and (ii) pass through ( x 1 , y 1 ), then y 2 = 4a ç 1 ÷
è 2a ø
y 1 y ¢ = 2a ( x 1 + x ¢ ) and y 1 y ¢¢ =2a ( x 1 + x ¢¢ ) Þ y 2 = 2 (yy1 - 2ax 1 ) … (i)
Hence, it is clear Q ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and R ( x ¢¢,y ¢¢ ) lie on Þ 2
y - 2yy1 + 4ax 1 = 0
yy 1 = 2a ( x + x 1 )
\ k1 + k 2 = 2y1 and k1k = 4ax 1
which is chord of contact QR.
\ (k 2 - k1 ) = (k1 + k 2 )2 - 4k1k 2
y Example 48 Tangents are drawn from the point = ( 4y12 - 16ax 1 ) = 2 (y12 - 4ax 1 ) …(ii)
( x 1 , y 1 ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax , show that the length
1 Y
of their chord of contact is ( y 12 - 4ax 1 )( y 12 + 4a 2 ). Q (h1, k1)
|a|
Sol. Given parabola is
y 2 = 4ax …(i) X′
A
X

Q (at12, 2at1) P (x R (h 2 , k 2 )
Y 1 , y1 )

) Y′
, y1
P (x 1 Since, Q (h1, k1 ) and R (h 2 , k 2 ) lie on the parabola y 2 = 4ax ,
A therefore
X′ X
k12 = 4ah1 and k 22 = 4ah 2
R (at22, 2at2)
Þ k 22 - k12 = 4a (h 2 - h1 )
Y′ (k 2 + k1 ) (k 2 - k1 ) = 4a (h 2 - h1 )
 Chap 05 Parabola 399

Þ 2y1 (k 2 - k1 ) = 4a (h 2 - h1 ) Proof Since, equation of the parabola is

y (k - k 1 )
Þ (h 2 - h1 ) = 1 2 …(iii) y 2 = 4ax …(i)
2a
Let QR be the chord of the parabola whose mid-point is
Now, QR = (k 2 - k1 )2 + (h 2 - h1 )2
P ( x 1 , y 1 ).
y12 (k 2 - k1 )2 Q (x2, y2)
= (k 2 - k 1 )2 + 2
[from Eq. (iii)]
4a
(k 2 - k 1 )
= ( y 1 + 4a 2 )
2
2|a | P (x1, y1)
2 (y12 - 4ax 1 )
= (y12 + 4a 2 ) [from Eq. (ii)]
2 |a |
R
1 (x3, y3)
= (y12 - 4ax 1 ) (y12 + 4a 2 )
|a| Since, Q and R lie on parabola (i),
y 22 = 4ax 2 and y 23 = 4ax 3
y Example 49 Prove that the area of the triangle
formed by the tangents drawn from ( x 1 , y 1 ) to y 2 = 4ax \ y 23 - y 22 = 4a ( x 3 - x 2 )
and their chord of contact is ( y 12 - 4ax 1 ) 3/ 2 / 2a . y 3 - y2 4a
Þ =
Sol. Equation of QR (chord of contact) is x 3 - x2 y 3 + y2
yy1 = 2a ( x + x 1 ) 4a
= [QP ( x 1 , y 1 ) is mid-point of QR]
Þ yy1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ) = 0 2y 1
Q PM = Length of perpendicular from P ( x 1, y1 ) on QR
y 3 - y 2 2a
| y y - 2a ( x 1 + x 1 ) | |(y12 - 4ax 1 )| \ = = Slope of QR
= 1 1 = x 3 - x2 y1
(y12 + 4a 2 ) (y12 + 4a 2 )
2a
[Since, P ( x 1, y1 ) lies outside the parabola. So, y12 - 4ax 1 > 0] Equation of QR is y - y 1 = (x - x 1 )
y1
Q
Þ yy 1 - y 12 = 2ax - 2ax 1
Þ yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ) = y 12 - 4ax 1
P(x
1, y1 ) [subtracting 2ax 1 from both sides]
\ T = S1,
R
where T = yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ) and S 1 = y 12 - 4ax 1 .
1
Now, area of DPQR = QR × PM
2 y Example 50 Find the locus of the mid-points of the
=
1 1 (y 2 - 4ax 1 )
(y12 - 4ax 1 ) (y12 + 4a 2 ) 1
chords of the parabola y 2 = 4ax which subtend a right
2 |a| (y12 + 4a 2 ) angle at the vertex of the parabola.
= (y12 - 4ax 1 )3 / 2 / 2a, if a > 0 Sol. Let P (h , k ) be the mid-point of a chord QR of the parabola
y 2 = 4ax then equation of chord QR is
T = S1
Equation of the Chord Bisected or yk - 2a( x + h ) = k 2 - 4ah

at a Given Point Þ yk - 2ax = k 2 - 2ah

If A is the vertex of the parabola. For combined equation of
…(i)

Theorem The equation of the chord of the parabola AQ and AR making homogeneous of y 2 = 4ax with the help
y 2 = 4ax which is bisected at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is of Eq. (i).
yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ) = y 12 - 4ax 1 \ y 2 = 4ax
æ yk - 2ax ö
or T = S1, Þ y 2 = 4ax ç 2 ÷
è k - 2ah ø
where, T = yy 1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ) and S 1 = y 12 - 4ax 1 .
400 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y 2 (k 2 - 2ah ) - 4akxy + 8a 2 x 2 = 0
Þ
Q
Diameter
The locus of the middle points of a system of parallel chords
90°
is called a diameter and in case of a parabola this diameter
(0, 0) A
P (h, k) is shown to be a straight line which is parallel to the axis of
the parabola.
R Theorem The equation of the diameter bisecting chords
Since, ÐQAR = 90° 2a
of slope m of the parabola y 2 = 4ax is y = .
\ Coefficient of x 2 + Coefficient of y 2 = 0 m
k 2 - 2ah + 8a 2 = 0 Proof Let y = mx + c be system of parallel chords to
Hence, the locus of P (h , k ) is y 2 - 2ax + 8a 2 = 0. y 2 = 4ax for different chords c varies, m remains constant.
Let the extremities of any chord PQ of the set be P ( x 1 , y 1 )
y Example 51 Show that the locus of the middle points and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) and let its middle point be M (h, k ).
of normal chords of the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
Y
y 4 - 2a ( x - 2a ) y 2 + 8a 4 = 0. P
(x1 , y1 )

Sol. Equation of the normal chord at any point (at 2 , 2at ) of the y = mx + c
M
parabola y 2 = 4ax is X′ X
A
y + tx = 2at + at 3 …(i)

t, 2
2 at) Q (x2, y2)
R (a Y′

M (x1 , y1)
On solving equations
y 2 = 4ax and y = mx + c .
Q
æy -c ö
But if M ( x 1, y1 ) be its middle point its equation must be \ y 2 = 4a ç ÷
also è m ø
T = S1 \ my 2 - 4ay + 4ac = 0
Þ yy1 - 2a ( x + x 1 ) = y12 - 4ax 1 y + y 2 2a
4a
Þ yy1 - 2ax = y12 - 2ax 1 …(ii)
\ y1 + y2 = or 1 =
m 2 m
Q From Eqs. (i) and (ii) are identical, comparing, them [Q(h, k ) is the mid-point of PQ]
1 t 2at + at 3 2a
= = 2 Hence, locus of M (h, k ) is y = .
y1 -2a y1 - 2ax 1 m
2a Aliter :
From first two relations, t = - …(iii)
y1 Let (h, k ) be the middle point of the chord y = mx + c of the
t 2at + at 3 parabola y 2 = 4ax then
From last two relations, = 2
-2a y1 - 2ax 1 T = S 1 Þ ky - 2a( x + h ) = k 2 - 4ah
y12 - 2ax 1 2a 2a
Þ = 2a + at 2 slope = =m Þ k =
-2a k m
2
y12 - 2ax 1 æ -2a ö 2a
Þ = 2a + a ç ÷ [from Eq. (iii)] Hence, locus of the mid-point is y = .
-2a è y1 ø m
y12 - 2ax 1 2ay12 + 4a 3 Remarks
Þ =
-2a y12 1. The point in which any diameter meets the curve is called
the extremity of the diameter.
Þ y14 - 2ax 1y12 = - 4a 2y12 - 8a 4
2. Any line which is parallel to the axis of the parabola drawn
Þ y14 - 2a ( x 1 - 2a ) y12 + 8a 4 = 0 through any point on the parabola is called diameter and its
equation is y-coordinate of that point.
Hence, the locus of middle point ( x 1, y1 ) is
If point on diameter ( x1, y1 ), then diameter is y = y1.
y 4 - 2a ( x - 2a ) y 2 + 8a 4 = 0.
 Chap 05 Parabola 401

Corollary 1. The tangent at the extremity of a diameter of Corollary 3. To find the equation of a parabola when the
a parabola is parallel to the system of chords it bisects. axes are any diameter and the tangent to the parabola at the
point where this diameter meets the curve.
y = mx + c
a , 2a
Diameter
Let the equation of the parabola be
m2 m
y 2 = 4ax …(i)
Let AB be the diameter of the parabola Eq. (i), then its
2a
Let y = mx + c (c variable) represents the system of parallel equation is y =
2a m
chords, then the equation of diameter of y 2 = 4ax is y = . Y
m
æ a 2a ö a , 2a
The diameter meets the parabola y 2 = 4ax at ç , ÷ m2 m T P
èm 2 m ø A θ θ
B
a Q M
and tangent is y = mx + which is parallel to y = mx + c .
m X
S N
Corollary 2. Tangents at the end of any chord meet on the
diameter which bisects the chords.
If extremities of the chord be P (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 )
Since, A is the extremity of the diameter
then its slope
2at 2 - 2at 1 æ a 2a ö
2 \ Coordinates of A is ç , ÷
m= Þ m= . èm 2 m ø
2 2 (t 2 + t 1 )
at 2 - at 1
where, m = tanq
y = mx + c 2 2at 1)
,
P (at 1 then, the equation of tangent AT at A is
a
y = mx + .
m
R Diameter
2a Now, let P be any point on the parabola Eq. (i), whose
(x1, y1) y=
m
coordinates referred to Vx and Vy are ( x , y ) and referred
Q to diameter AB and tangent AT are ( X , Y ).
(at22, 2at2)
then X = AQ and Y = QP [since, PQ || AT ]
\ Equation of diameter is Now, VN = VL + LN = VL + AM = VL + AQ + QM
y = 2a / m Þ y = a(t 1 + t 2 ) …(i) a
= + X + QP cosq
Now, tangents at P (at 12 , 2at 1 )
and Q (at 22 , 2at 2 )
meet at a m2
point [at 1 t 2 , a (t 1 + t 2 )] which lies on Eq. (i). a
or x= + X + Y cosq …(ii)
Aliter m2
Let equation of any chord PQ be y = mx + c . and PN = PM + MN = PM + AL
If tangents at P and Q meet at R ( x 1 , y 1 ), then PQ is the 2a
= QP sinq +
chord of contact with respect to R ( x 1 , y 1 ) . m
\ Equation of PQ is 2a
\ y = Y sinq + … (iii)
2a 2ax 1 m
yy 1 = 2 x ( x + x 1 ) or y = x+
y1 y1 From Eqs. (ii) and (iii) coordinates of P are
which is identical to y = mx + c æ a 2a ö
ç 2 + X + Y cos q, Y sinq + ÷
2a 2a èm mø
m= or y 1 = .
y1 m Now, P lies on Eq. (i).
2a 2
Hence, locus of R ( x 1 , y 1 ) is y = , which bisects the æ 2a ö æ a ö
chord PQ. m \ çY sinq + ÷ = 4a ç 2 + X + Y cos q ÷
è m ø è m ø
402 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

4a 2 4a It meets the diameter through P i.e. X -axis or y = 0, then

Þ Y 2 sin2 q + + Y sinq Eq. (iii) reduces
2 m
m
0 = x + lt 12
2
4a
= + 4aX + 4aY cosq Þ x = - lt 12 = PB …(iv)
2
m
Similarly, - lt 22 = PC …(v)
Þ Y 2 sin2 q + 4a 2 cot 2 q + 4a cos qY 2
\ ( PA ) = ( -lt 1t 2 ) = l2t 12t 22
2
2 2
= 4a cot q + 4aX + 4aY cos q [Qm = tanq ] = ( -lt 12 ) ( -lt 22 ) [from Eqs. (iv) and (v)]
2 2
Þ Y sin q = 4aX = PB × PC

\ Y 2 = ( 4a cosec 2 q ) X ,
which is the required parabola referred to diameter and
tangent at the extremity of the diameter as axes.
Lengths of Tangent, Subtangent,
Remark
Normal and Subnormal
The quantity 4acosec 2q is called the parameter of the diameter Let the parabola y 2 = 4ax . Let the tangent and normal at
AQ. It is equal to length of the chord which is parallel to AT and
passes through the focus. P ( x , y ) meet the axis of parabola at T and G respectively
i.e. a cosec 2q = a( 1 + cot 2 q) = a + a cot 2 q and let tangent at P ( x , y ) makes angle y with the positive
a direction of X-axis.
= a+ 2
m Y
= a + VL = SP
2
1 )
But length of focal chord if P ( at 2, 2at ) is [QS ( a, 0 )] a æçt + ö÷ . x, y
è tø P(
2at - 0 2t 1 90°– ψ
\ tanq = = or t - = 2 cot q ψ
at 2 - a t2 - 1 t X′
T A N G
X
2 2
1 ïì 1 ïü
\ a æçt + ö÷ = a íæçt - ö÷ + 4 ý
è tø è t ø
îï ïþ
Y′
= a{( 2 cot q) 2 + 4}
Then, PT = Length of Tangent
= 4 acosec 2q = 4 × SP
PG = Length of Normal
y Example 52 If the diameter through any point P of a TN = Length of Subtangent
parabola meets any chord in A and the tangent at the and NG = Length of Subnormal
end of the chord meets the diameter in B and C, then If A (0, 0 ) is the vertex of the parabola.
prove that PA 2 = PB ×PC .
Q PN = y
Sol. The equation of the parabola referred to the diameter
through P and tangent at P as axes is
\ PT = PN cosec y = y cosec y
y 2 = 4 lx …(i) PG = PN cosec (90° - y ) = y sec y
where, l = a cosec 2q [from previous corollary] TN = PN cot y = y cot y
Let QR be any chord of the parabola Eq. (i). Let the and NG = PN cot(90° - y ) = y tan y
extremities Q and R be ( lt 12 , 2lt 1 ) and ( lt 22 , 2lt 2 ). 2a
where, tan y = =m [slope of tangent at P ( x , y )]
Then, the equation of QR is y
y (t 1 + t 2 ) - 2x - 2lt 1t 2 = 0 … (ii)
It meets the diameter through P i.e. X -axis or y = 0, then y Example 53 Find the length of tangent, subtangent,
Eq. (ii) reduces normal and subnormal to y 2 = 4ax at (at 2 , 2at ) .
0 - 2x - 2l t 1t 2 = 0 Sol. Q Equation of tangent of (at 2 , 2at ) of parabola y 2 = 4ax is
Þ x = - lt 1t 2 = PA ty = x + at 2
Now, tangent at Q is t 1y = x + lt 12 …(iii)
1
Slope of this tangent m =
t
 Chap 05 Parabola 403

Let tangent makes angle y with positive direction of X -axis and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
1
tan y = ( x + a ) (1 + t 2 ) = 0 Þ 1 + t 2 ¹ 0
t
then t = cot y \ x + a = 0, which is directrix.
\ Length of tangent at (2) The portion of a tangent to a parabola intercepted
(at 2 , 2at ) = 2at cosecy between the directrix and the curve subtends a right
angle at the focus.
= 2at (1 + cot 2 y ) = 2at (1 + t 2 )
The equation of the tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at
Length of normals at
P (at 2 , 2at ) is
(at 2 , 2at ) = 2at sec y = 2at (1 + tan 2 y )
ty = x + at 2 …(i)
= 2a (t 2 + t 2 tan 2 y ) = 2a (t 2 + 1)
Let Eq. (i) meet the directrix x + a = 0 at Q,
Length of subtangent at (at 2 , 2at ) = 2at cot y
æ at 2 - a ö
= 2at 2 then coordinates of Q are ç - a, ÷ , also focus S
è t ø
Length of subnormal at (at 2 , 2at ) = 2at tan y is (a , 0 ).
= 2a Y
(at,2 2at)
P

Some Standard Properties Z

Q

V
90°
S (a, 0)
X

of the Parabola x+a=0

Directrix
(1) The tangents at the extremities of a focal chord
intersect at right angles on the directrix. 2at - 0
\ Slope of SP =
The extremities of a focal chord PQ are at 2 - a
æa 2a ö 2t
P º (at 2 , 2at ) and Q º ç , - ÷ = = m1 (say)
èt 2 t ø 2
t -1
P
T at 2 - a
-0
90°
t t2 - 1
X
and slope of SQ = = = m2 (say)
S (a, 0) -a -a -2 t
Q
\ m 1m 2 = - 1
i.e. SP is perpendicular to SQ i.e. Ð PSQ = 90°
Let parabola is y 2 = 4ax
(3) The tangent at any point P of a parabola bisects
\ Tangent at P (at 2 , 2at ) is the angle between the focal chord through P and the
perpendicular from P to the directrix.
ty = x + at 2 …(i)
Let the tangent at P (at 2 , 2at ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
1
Its slope = m 1 (say) meets the axis of the parabola i.e. X-axis or y = 0 at T. The
t
equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at P (at 2 , 2at )
æa 2a ö
and tangent at Q ç , - ÷ is is
èt 2 t ø
ty = x + at 2
y a
- =x + …(ii) Y
t t2 (at2, 2at)
P
2 M θ
Þ - ty = xt + a θ
Its slope - t = m2 (say) θ
X
T Z V S (a, 0)
Q m 1m 2 = - 1
\ Ð PTQ = 90° x+a=0
Directrix
404 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

For coordinates of T solve it with y = 0. \ SP = PM = a + at 2

\ T ( -at 2 , 0 ) SG = VG - VS = 2a + at 2 - a
\ ST = SV + VT = a + at 2 = a (1 + t 2 ) = a + at 2
Also, SP = PM = a + at 2 = a (1 + t 2 ) and ST = VS + VT = a + at 2
\ SP = ST , i.e. ÐSTP = ÐSPT Hence, SP = SG = ST
But ÐSTP = Ð MPT [alternate angles] (6) If S be the focus and SH be perpendicular to the
ÐSPT = Ð MPT tangent at P, then H lies on the tangent at the vertex
(4) The foot of the perpendicular from the focus on any and SH 2 = OS × SP , where O is the vertex of the
tangent to a parabola lies on the tangent at the vertex. parabola.
Equation of tangent at P (at 2 , 2at ) Let P (at 2 , 2at ) be any point on the parabola
On the parabola y 2 = 4ax y 2 = 4ax … (i)
2 2
is ty = x + at then, tangent at P (at , 2at ) to the parabola Eq. (i) is
2
Þ x - ty + at = 0 …(i) ty = x + at 2
Now, the equation of line through S (a, 0 ) and It meets the tangent at the vertex i.e. x = 0.
perpendicular to Eq. (i) is Y
x+a=0 P (at2, 2at)
tx + y = l
M
Since, it passes through (a, 0 ). H
X
\ ta + 0 = l O S (a, 0)

\ Equation tx + y = ta or t 2 x + ty - at 2 = 0 …(ii)
Directrix
By adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
x (1 + t 2 ) = 0 \ Coordinates of H is (0, at )
Þ x =0 [Q1 + t 2 ¹ 0 ] and SP = PM = a + at 2 Þ OS = a
Hence, the point of intersection of Eq. (i) and (ii) lies on and SH = (a - 0 ) 2 + (0 - at ) 2 = a 2 + a 2 t 2
x = 0 i.e. on Y-axis (which is tangent at the vertex of a
parabola). or (SH ) 2 = a {a (1 + t 2 )} = OS × SP.
(5) If S be the focus of the parabola and tangent and
normal at any point P meet its axis in T and G Reflection Property of Parabola
respectively then ST = SG = SP .
The tangent ( PT ) and normal ( PN ) of the parabola
Let P (at 2 , 2at ) be any point on the parabola y 2 = 4ax , y 2 = 4ax
then equation of tangent and normal at P (at 2 , 2at ) are
at P are the internal and external bisectors of ÐSPM and
ty = x + at 2 and y = - tx + 2at + at 2 , respectively. BP is parallel to the axis of the parabola and
Since, tangent and normal meet its axis in T and G. Ð BPN = ÐSPN .
Y
\ Coordinates of T ¢ and G are ( -at 2 , 0 ) and (2a + at 2 , 0 ) P Light ray
M β α B
respectively. nt β α
No

Ta nge Reflected ray

Y
rm

S
al

x+a=0 2 X′ X
P (at , 2at) T A N
M Light ray
90° Light ray
Light ray
X′ X
T Z V S G Y′
(a, 0)
All rays of light coming from the positive direction of
Directrix X-axis and parallel to the axis of the parabola after
Y′
reflection pass through the focus of the parabola.
 Chap 05 Parabola 405

y Example 54 A ray of light is coming along the line i.e. (slope of ax + by + l = 0) ´ (slope of
y = b from the positive direction of X-axis and strikes xf 1 ( l) + yf 2 ( l) + f 3 ( l) = 0 ) = -1
a concave mirror whose intersection with the a f ( l)
xy-plane is a parabola y 2 = 4ax . Find the equation Þ - ´- 1 = -1
b f 2 ( l)
of the reflected ray and show that it passes through
the focus of the parabola. Both a and b are positive. Þ af 1 ( l) + bf 2 ( l) = 0 …(ii)
Now, substitute the value of l in Eq. (i) from Eq. (ii).
Sol. Given parabola is y 2 = 4ax
Multiply and divide (a 2 + b2 ) in LHS of Eq. (i)
Y ) b4a , b )
2

2
P y=b
α
æ ax + by + l ö
α Normal i.e. (ax + by + l) = (a + b ) ç
2 2 2 ÷
ç a 2 + b2 ÷
2α α 180°–α è ø
X′ X
A S 180°–2α
(a, 0)
and RHS of Eq. (i) by (a 2 + b2 )
i.e. xf 1 ( l) + yf 2 ( l) + f 3 ( l)
Y′
æ b2 ö æ xf ( l) + yf ( l) + f ( l) ö
æ b2 ö
Equation of tangent at P ç , b ÷ is yb = 2a ç x + ÷, = (a 2 + b2 ) ç 1 2 3 ÷
è 4a ø è 4a ø ç 2
(a + b ) 2 ÷
è ø
2a
Slope of tangent is .
b Then, Eq. (i) reduce in the form
b 2
Hence, slope of normal = - = tan (180° - a ). æ ax + by + l ö æ ö
2a ç ÷ = 4r ç bx - ay + m ÷
b ç a 2 + b2 ÷ ç (a 2 + b2 ) ÷
\ tana = è ø è ø
2a
\ Slope of reflected ray = tan (180° - 2a ) which is of the form Y 2 = 4rX
= - tan2a
ax + by + l bx - ay + m 1
ì b ü Y= ,X = and 4r = .
ì 2 tan a ü ïï 2 × ï 4ab
2
(a + b ) 2 2
(a + b ) 2
(a + b2 )
2
= -í = - 2a ï = -
2 ý í 2 ý
î 1 - tan a þ ï1 - b ï ( 4a 2 - b 2 ) 1
îï 4a þï
2 Latusrectum is 4r = .
(a + b2 )
2
Hence, equation of reflected ray is
4ab æ b2 ö Axis is Y = 0 or ax + by + l = 0.
y -b= - ç x - ÷
( 4a 2 - b 2 ) è 4a ø Equation of tangent at vertex is
Þ (y - b ) ( 4a 2 - b 2 ) = - ( 4ax - b 2 ) X = 0 or bx - ay + m = 0.
which obviously passes through the focus S (a , 0). Vertex is the point of intersection of
X = 0 and Y = 0

Study of Parabola of the Form i.e. bx - ay + m = 0 and ax + by + l = 0.

Equation of directrix is X + r = 0.
(ax + by ) 2 +2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 Equation of latusrectum is X - r = 0.
Given equation can be written as Focus Since, axis and latusrectum intersect at the focus S
its coordinates are detained by solving
(ax + by ) 2 = - 2 gx - 2 fy - c
X - r = 0 and Y = 0.
Now, add an arbitrary constant l in the square root of the
second degree terms. Then the equation will be of the form y Example 55. Find the length of latusrectum of the
i.e. (ax + by + l) 2 = xf 1 ( l) + yf 2 ( l) + f 3 ( l) …(i) parabola (a 2 + b 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = (bx + ay - ab ) 2 .
Now, choose l such that the lines Sol. Given equation may be written as
ax + by + l = 0 and xf 1 ( l) + yf 2 ( l) + f 3 ( l) = 0 a 2 x 2 + a 2y 2 + b 2 x 2 + b 2y 2 = b 2 x 2 + a 2y 2 + a 2b 2
are perpendicular + 2abxy - 2a 2by - 2ab 2 x
406 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Þ a 2 x 2 - 2abxy + b 2y 2 = - 2ab 2 x - 2a 2by + a 2b 2 Þ (x 2 + y 2 ) =

| bx + ay - ab |
P (x, y)
M
æ ab ö (a 2 + b 2 )

bx+ay–ab = 0
2
Þ (ax - by ) = - 2ab çbx + ay - ÷
è 2ø
Þ ( x - 0) 2 + ( y - 0) 2
ab N
Since, ax - by = 0 and bx + ay - = 0 are perpendicular. | bx + ay - ab | S (0, 0)
2 =
ab ö (a 2 + b 2 )
2 æ
æ ö
2 ç ax - by ÷
ç bx + ay - ÷ which is of the form SP = PM .
2
\ (a + b ) 2 2
= - 2ab (a + b ) ç 2 ÷
ç a2 + b2 ÷ 2 2
1
è ø ç (a + b ) ÷ Since, distance from focus S to ( bx + ay - ab = 0) = ( 4r )
è ø 2
1 ab Y
ab ö , y)
2 æ Þ ( 4r ) = P (x
æ ax - by ö -2ab ç bx + ay - ÷ 2 2
a +b 2 N
Þ ç ÷ = ç 2 ÷
ç a2 + b2 ÷ (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 2 2ab
è ø ç (a + b ) ÷ \ 4r = X
è ø O M
(a 2 + b 2 )
which is of the form Y 2 = - 4 rX .
2ab Remark
Therefore, the latusrectum = 4r = .
(a 2 + b 2 ) Consider the equation of parabola is y 2 = 4 ax.

Aliter : i.e. ( MP ) 2 = (Latusrectum) NP.

Given equation may be written as i.e. if P is any point on the given parabola, then
(bx + ay - ab )2 (the distance of P from its axis) 2 = (Latusrectum)
x2 + y2 =
(a 2 + b 2 ) (The distance of P from the tangent at its vertex).

Exercise for Session 3

1. If m1, m 2 are slopes of the two tangents that are drawn from (2, 3) to the parabola y 2 = 4x , then the value of
1 1
+ is
m1 m 2
2 3
(a) –3 (b) 3 (c) (d)
3 2

2. The angle between the tangents drawn from the origin to the parabola y 2 = 4a( x – a ) is
1
(a) 90° (b) 30° (c) tan-1 æç ö÷ (d) 45°
è 2ø

3. If (a, b) is the mid-point of chord passing through the vertex of the parabola y 2 = 4x , then
(a) a = 2b (b) 2a = b (c) a 2 = 2b (d) 2a = b 2

4. The diameter of the parabola y 2 = 6x corresponding to the system of parallel chords 3x - y + c = 0 is

(a) y - 1 = 0 (b) y - 2 = 0 (c) y + 1 = 0 (d) y + 2 = 0

5. From the point ( -1, 2) tangent lines are drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4x , the area of triangle formed by chord of
contact and the tangents is given by
(a) 8 (b) 8 3 (c) 8 2 (d) None of these

6. For parabola x 2 + y 2 + 2xy - 6x - 2y + 3 = 0, the focus is

(a) (1, - 1) (b) (–1, 1) (c) (3, 1) (d) None of these

7. The locus of the mid-point of that chord of parabola which subtends right angle on the vertex will be
(a) y 2 - 2ax + 8a 2 = 0 (b) y 2 = a (x - 4a ) (c) y 2 = 4a (x - 4a ) (d) y 2 + 3ax + 4a 2 = 0
 Chap 05 Parabola 407

8. A ray of light moving parallel to the X-axis gets reflected from a parabolic mirror whose equation is
( y - 2)2 = 4( x + 1). After reflection, the ray must pass through the point
(a) (–2, 0) (b) (–1, 2) (c) (0, 2) (d) (2, 0)

9. 2
Prove that the locus of the point of intersection of tangents to the parabola y = 4ax which meet at an angle a is
( x + a )2 tan2 a = y 2 - 4ax .

10. Find the locus of the middle points of the chords of the parabola y 2 = 4ax which pass through the focus.

11. From the point P( -1, 2) tangents are drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4x . Find the equation of the chord of contact.
Also, find the area of the triangle formed by the chord of contact and the tangents.

Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember

1 Second degree terms in the equation of a parabola 9 If the normals to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at the points t1 and
should make perfect squares. t 2 intersect again on the parabola at the point
2 If l1 and l 2 are the lengths of segments of a focal chord ‘t 3 ’, then t1t 2 = 2; t 3 = -(t1 + t 2 ) and the line joining t1 and t 2
4l l passes through a fixed point (-2 a, 0).
then the latusrectum of the parabola is 1 2 .
l1 + l 2 10 If the length of a focal chord of y 2 = 4ax at a distance b
3 If a be the inclination of a focal chord with axis of the from the vertex is c then b2c = 4a3 .
parabola then its length is 4acosec 2 a.
11 From an external point only one normal can be drawn.
4 If tangents of y 2 = 4ax at P(t1 ) and Q(t 2 ) meets at R, then
12 If a normal to y 2 = 4ax makes an angle q with the axis of
1
area of DPQR is a2 (t1 - t 2 )3 . y 2 = 4ax then it will cut the curve again at an angle of
2
æ tan q ö
5 The foot of the perpendicular from the focus on any tan -1 ç ÷.
è 2 ø
tangent to a parabola lies on the tangent at the vertex.
13 The orthocentre of any triangle formed by the three
6 The area of the triangle formed by three points on a
tangents to a parabola y 2 = 4ax ‘t1’, ‘t 2 ’ and ‘t ’3 lies on the
parabola is twice the area of the triangle formed by the
tangents, at these points. directrix and has the coordinates
(- a, a(t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t1t 2t 3 )).
7 The equation of the common tangent to the parabolas
x 2 = 4ay and y 2 = 4ax is x + y + a = 0. 14 Normals at the end points of the latusrectum of a parabola
y 2 = 4ax intersect at right angle on the axis of the parabola
8 If the chord joining t1, t 2 and t 3 , t 4 pass through a point
and their point of intersection is (3a, 0 ).
(c, 0) on the axis, then
t1t 2 = t 3t 4 = - c / a. 15 A line ray parallel to axis of the parabola after reflection
passes through the focus.
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 10 multiple choice examples. l Ex. 3 Two parabolas have the same focus. If their
Each example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of directrices are the X-axis and the Y -axis, respectively, then
which ONLY ONE is correct. the slope of their common chord is
4 3
l Ex. 1 A ray of light travels along a line y = 4 and strikes (a) ± 1 (b) (c) (d) None of these
3 4
the surface of curves y 2 = 4( x +y ), then the equation of the Sol. (a) Let the focus be (a, b )
line along which the reflected ray travels is Then, equations are ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b ) 2 = y 2 and
(a) x = 0 (b) x = 2 ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b ) 2 = x 2
(c) x + y = 4 (d) 2x + y = 4
If S1 º ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b ) 2 - y 2 = 0
Sol. (a) The given curve is (y - 2 ) 2 = 4( x + 1 )
and S 2 º ( x - a ) 2 + (y - b ) 2 - x 2 = 0
Y
\Equation of common chord S1 - S 2 = 0 gives
y=4 x2 -y 2 = 0 or y =± x
(0,4)
Hence, slope of common chord is ± 1.
(–1,2) (0,2)
l Ex. 4 Let us define a region R in xy-plane as a set of
points ( x , y ) satisfying [ x 2 ] = [y ] (where [ x ] denotes greatest
X
(0,0) integer £ x), then the region R defines
(a) a parabola whose axis is horizontal
The focus is ( 0, 2 ). (b) a parabola whose axis is vertical
The point of intersection of the curve and y = 4 is ( 0, 4 ). From
the reflection property of parabola the reflected ray passes (c) integer point of the parabola y = x 2
through the focus. (d) None of the above
Therefore, x = 0 is the reflected ray. Sol. (d)Q[ x 2 ] = [y ]
Y
If 0 £ y < 1,
l Ex. 2 A parabola is drawn with focus at (3, 4 ) and vertex
then, [y ] = 0 3
at the focus of the parabola y 2 - 12 x - 4y + 4 = 0. The \ [x 2 ] = 0
equation of the parabola is
0 £ x2 <1 2
(a) x 2 - 6 x - 8y + 25 = 0 (b) y 2 - 8 x - 6y + 25 = 0
Þ x Î( - 1, 1 )
(c) x 2 - 6 x + 8y - 25 = 0 (d) x 2 + 6 x - 8y - 25 = 0 for 1 £ y < 2,
1
2 2
Sol. (a) y - 12 x - 4y + 4 = 0 Þ (y - 2 ) = 12 x then [y ] = 1
S (3,4) X′ X
\ [x 2 ] = 1 –2 – √3 – √2 –1 O 1 √2 √3 2

Þ 1 £ x2 <2 Y′

Þ x Î( - 2, - 1 ] È [1, 2 )
for 2 £ y < 3, then [y ] = 2

A (3,2)
then, [ x 2 ] = 2 Þ2 £ x 2 < 3
Its vertex is ( 0, 2 ) and a = 3, \ x Î( - 3, - 2 ] È [ 2, 3 )
its focus = (3, 2 ). The graph of the region will not only contain of the parabola
Hence, for the required parabola; focus is (3, 4 ), vertex = (3, 2 ) y = x 2 but [ x 2 ] = [y ] contain points within the rectangles of side
and a = 2,
1, 2, ; 1, 2 - 1; 1, 3 - 2 etc.
Hence, the equation of the parabola is
( x - 3 ) 2 = 4(2 ) (y - 2 ) Hence, a, b, c are incorrects.

or x 2 - 6 x - 8y + 25 = 0
 Chap 05 Parabola 409

l Ex. 5 The minimum area of circle which touches the 2m

\ m3 = -
l
parabolas y = x 2 +1 and x = y 2 + 1 is
æ - 2m ö 2 æ - 2m ö ö÷
(a)
9p
sq units (b)
9p
sq units \ D º ça æç ÷ , - 2a ç ÷
è è l ø è l øø
16 32
9p 9p æ 4am 2 4am ö
(c) sq units (d) sq units Þ Dºç 2 , ÷
8 4 è l l ø
Sol. (b) The parabolas y = x 2 + 1 and x = y 2 + 1 are symmetrical
about y = x. l Ex. 7 If d is the distance between the parallel tangents
Therefore, the tangent at point A is parallel to y = x
with positive slope to y 2 = 4 x and
dy
Y
then
dx
= 2x =1
y=x x 2 + y 2 - 2 x + 4y - 11 = 0, then
1 5 (a) 10 < d < 20 (b) 4 < d < 6
or x = ,y =
2 4 A (c) d < 4 (d) None of these
æ 1 5ö Sol. (c) Tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4 x having slope m is
\ Aºç , ÷ B
è2 4ø 1
X′ X y = mx +
O
and æ 5 1ö m
B ºç . ÷
è 4 2ø Y′ and tangent to the circle ( x - 1 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = 4 2 having slope m is
2 2
1 1 æ1 5 ö æ 5 1ö 3 2 y + 2 = m( x - 1 ) + 4 (1 + m 2 )
Hence, Radius (r ) = AB = ç - ÷ +ç - ÷ =
2 2 è2 4ø è 4 2ø 8 1
4 (1 + m 2 ) - m - 2 -
9p
2 m
\ Area = pr = sq units \Distance between tangents (d ) =
32 (1 + m 2 )

l Ex. 6 Let the line lx + my =1 cut the parabola y 2 = 4ax (1 + m 2 )

2
in the points A and B. Normals at A and B meet at point C. = 4- -
(1 + m 2 ) m
Normal from C other than these two meet the parabola at D,
then the coordinate of D are As m>0 (given)
æ 4am 4a ö we get d<4
(a) (a, 2a ) (b) ç 2 , ÷
è l l ø
æ 2am 2 2a ö æ 4am 2 4am ö
l Ex. 8 Two parabolas C and D intersect at two different
(c) ç 2 , ÷ (d) ç 2 , ÷ points, where C is y = x 2 - 3 and D is y = kx 2 . The
è l l ø è l l ø
intersection at which the x value is positive is designated
Sol. (d) Let A º (am12, - 2am1 ) and B º (am22, - 2am2 ) point A , and x = a at this intersection the tangent line l at A
Now, A and B lie on lx + my = 1 to the curve D intersects curve C at point B, other than A. If
Þ l (am12 ) + m( - 2am1 ) = 1 ...(i) x-value of point B is 1, then a is equal to
and l (am22 ) + m( - 2am2 ) = 1 ...(ii) (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
Sol. (c) C : y = x 2 - 3 and D : y = kx 2
Subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (i), then
la(m12 - m22 ) - 2am(m1 - m2 ) = 0 Solving C and D, then
kx 2 = x 2 - 3 ...(i)
Þ a(m1 - m2 ) ¹ 0
3
\ l (m1 + m2 ) - 2m = 0 or x2 = ,
2m 1 -k
Þ m1 + m2 = ...(iii)
l 3k
then, y=
Let D º (am32, - 2am3 ) and C º (h, k ) 1 -k

\ Equation of normal in terms of slope æ 3 3k ö

\ Aºç , ÷ (given x-value of A is positive)
y = Mx - 2aM - aM 3 è 1 -k 1 -k ø
3
then aM - (h - 2a ) M + k = 0 æ 3 ö
and a= ç ÷
\ m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 è 1 -k ø
2m then A º (a, ka 2 ) º (a, a 2 - 3 ) [from Eq. (i)]
Þ + m3 = 0
l
410 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

tangent ‘l’ at A to the curve D is Hence, the corresponding point on the parabola is (1, 2 )
y + a2 -3 \ ( x1 - x 2 ) 2 + (3 + (1 - x12 ) - 4 x 2 ) 2 = ( x1 - x 2 ) 2 + (y1 - y 2 ) 2
= kx × a
2
= Distance between (1, 2 ) and ( 0, 3 ) – radius
æ 3ö
Þ y + a 2 - 3 = 2ax ç1 - 2 ÷ [from Eq. (i)] …(ii) = (1 + 1 ) - 1 = ( 2 - 1 )
è a ø
\ B º (1, - 2 ) (a ¹ 1) or ( x1 - x 2 ) 2 + (3 + (1 - x12 ) - 4 x 2 ) 2 = ( 2 - 1 ) 2
æ 3ö
From Eq. (ii), - 2 + a 2 - 3 = 2a ç1 - 2 ÷ \ min× [( x1 - x 2 ) 2 + (3 + (1 - x12 ) - 4 x 2 ) 2 ] = 3 - 2 2
è a ø
Þ a 3 - 5a = 2a 2 - 6 l Ex. 10 The condition that the parabolas y 2 = 4c ( x - d )
3 2
Þ a - 2a - 5a + 6 = 0
and y 2 = 4ax have a common normal other than X-axis
Þ (a - 1 ) (a + 2 ) (a - 3 ) = 0
(a > 0, c > 0 ) is
\ a =3 (Qa ¹ 1, a ¹ - 2)
(a) 2a < 2c + d (b) 2c < 2a + d
(c) 2d < 2a + c (d) 2d < 2c + a
l Ex. 9 min [( x 1 - x 2 ) 2 + (3 + (1 - x 12 ) - 4 x 2 ) 2 ], " Sol. (a) Normals of parabolas y 2 = 4ax and y 2 = 4c ( x - d ) in terms
x 1 , x 2 Î R, is of slope are
(a) 4 5 + 1 (b) 3 - 2 2 (c) 5 + 1 (d) 5 - 1 y = mx - 2am - am 3 …(i)
Sol. (b) Let y1 = 3 + (1 - x12 ) and y 2 = 4x 2 and y = m ( x - d ) - 2cm - cm 3
…(ii)
or x12 2
+ (y1 - 3 ) = 1 and y 22 = 4x 2 Subtracting Eqs. (ii) from (i), then
2 2
Thus, ( x1, y1 ) lies on the circle x + (y - 3 ) = 1 and ( x 2, y 2 ) lies md - 2am - am 3 + 2cm + cm 3 = 0
on the parabola y 2 = 4 x. m¹0
Thus, the given expression is the shortest distance between \ d - 2a - am 2 + 2c + cm 2 = 0
the curve x 2 + (y - 3 ) 2 = 1 and y 2 = 4 x. Þ (a - c )m 2 = d - 2a + 2c
Now, the shortest distance always occurs along the common d - 2a + 2c
normal to the curves and normal to the circle passes through Þ m2 =
(a - c )
the centre of the circle.
d
Normal to parabola y 2 = 4 x is y = mx - 2m - m 3. It passes Þ -2 > 0
a -c
through centre of circle ( 0, 3 ).
Therefore, 3 = - 2m - m 3 Þm 3 + 2m + 3 = 0 which has only one Þ d > 2a - 2c
real value m = - 1. Þ 2a < 2c + d

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n
This section contains 5 multiple choice examples. Each Sol. (a, b, c, d) Let P (at 2, 2 at ) be a point on the parabola y 2 = 4ax
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which with focus S (a, 0 )
a
MORE THAN ONE may be correct. Now, mid-point of focal radii SP is M æç (t 2 + 1 ), at ö÷.
è2 ø
l Ex. 11 The locus of the mid-point of the focal radii of a a 2
Let x = (t + 1 ) and y = at
2
variable point moving on the parabola y 2 = 4ax is a
a æy 2 ö
parabola whose or x = ç 2 + 1÷
2 èa ø
(a) latusrectum is half the latusrectum of the original a
parabola Þ y 2 = 2ax - a 2 or y 2 = 2a æç x - ö÷
è 2ø
æa ö a
(b) vertex is ç , 0÷ which is a parabola with vertex æç , 0 ö÷ and latusrectum is 2a,
è2 ø è2 ø
a a a a
(c) directrix is Y -axis directrix is x - = i.e. x = 0 (Y ) and focus æç + , 0 ö÷ i.e. (a, 0 ).
2 2 è2 2 ø
(d) focus has the coordinates (a, 0)
 Chap 05 Parabola 411

l Ex. 12 If P1P2 and Q 1Q 2 , two focal chords of a parabola Also, line (i) touches the circle x 2 + (y - 2 ) 2 = 4, then
2
y = 4ax at right angles, then | 2 + am 2 |
=2
(a) area of the quadrilateral P1Q 1P2Q 2 is minimum when (1 + m 2 )
the chords are inclined at an angle p / 4 to the axis of Þ 4 + a 2m 4 + 4am 2 = 4 + 4m 2
the parabola.
4 - 4a
(b) minimum area is twice the area of the square on the \ m2 = and m 2 = 0
latusrectum of the parabola. a2
(c) minimum area of quadrilateral P1Q 1P2Q 2 cannot be Put 4a = 1 for y = x 2, x ³ 0, then m 2 = 48
found. and put 4a = - 1 for y = - x 2, x < 0, then m 2 = 80
(d) minimum area is thrice the area of the square on the \Common tangents are
latusrectum of the parabola.
y = 0, y = 4 3 x - 12 and y = 4 5 x + 20
Sol. (a, b) Let coordinates of P1 are (at 2, 2 at ), then coordinates of P2
a 2a
are æç 2 , - ö÷. l Ex. 14 Let V be the vertex and L be the latusrectum of
èt t ø
Y P the parabola x 2 = 2y + 4 x - 4. Then, the equation of the
P1
parabola whose vertex is at V , latusrectum L / 2 and axis is
Q1 perpendicular to the axis of the given parabola.
(a) y 2 = x - 2 (b) y 2 = x - 4
α
X′ X (c) y 2 = 2 - x (d) y 2 = 4 - x
A S
Sol. (a, c) Given parabola is x 2 = 2y + 4 x - 4
P2
Þ ( x - 2 ) 2 = 2y
Q2
Y′ Vertex of the parabola is (2, 0) and length of latusrectum = 2
Let focal chord P1P2 makes an angle a with X -axis, then \ V (2, 0 ) and L = 2
æ 2a ö Y
2at - ç - ÷
è t ø 2
tan a = =
a 1
at 2 - 2 t- axis of
t t parabola
X′ X
1 (2,0)
Þ t - = 2 cot a … (i)
t
2
æ 1ö ìæ 1ö 2 ü Y′
Now, P1P2 = a çt + ÷ = aí çt - ÷ + 4ý
è tø è tø
î þ Length of latusrectum of required parabola = L / 2 = 1
= a { 4 cot 2 a + 4 } = 4a cosec 2a [from Eq. (i)] \Equation of the required parabola is (y - 0 ) 2 = ± 1( x - 2 )
Similarly, Q1Q2 = 4a cosec 2(90 - a ) = 4a sec 2a Þ y 2 = x - 2 or y 2 = - x + 2
1
\Area of quadrilateral P1Q1P2Q2 = ( P1P2 ) (Q1Q2 )
2 l Ex. 15 Consider a circle with its centre lying on the
= 8a sec a cosec a = 32a 2 cosec 2a
2 2 2
focus of the parabola y 2 = 2ax such that it touches the
\Minimum area = 32a 2 = 2 (latusrectum) 2 and is inclined at directrix of the parabola. Then a point of intersection of the
a=p /4 (Q cosec 2 a = 1) circle and the parabola is
æa ö æa ö
(a) ç , a ÷ (b) ç , - a ÷
l Ex. 13 The equation of the line that touches the curves è2 ø è2 ø
y = x | x | and x 2 + (y - 2 ) 2 = 4, where x ¹ 0 , is æ a ö
(c) ç - , a ÷
æ a ö
(d) ç - , - a ÷
(a) y = 4 5x + 20 (b) y = 4 3 x - 12 è 2 ø è 2 ø

(c) y = 0 (d) y = - 4 5x - 20 Sol. (a, b) Given parabola is y 2 = 2ax …(i)

a a
\ Focus and equation of directrix are S æç , 0 ö÷ and x = -
ì x 2, x ³ 0 è 2 ø 2
Sol. (a, b, c)Qy = x | x | = í 2 respectively.
î- x , x < 0 2
a
\Equation of circle is ç x - ö÷ + (y - 0 ) 2 = a 2
æ … (ii)
Q Equation of tangent in terms of slope (m ) of x 2 = 4ay is è 2ø
y = mx - am 2 … (i) (Q radius = distance between focus and directrix)
412 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), From Eq. (i),

2
æ aö 3a 2 y 2 =a2
ç x - ÷ + 2ax = a 2 Þ x 2 + ax - =0
è 2ø 4 \ y =±a
a 3a 3a a
or x = ,x ¹- (Q for x = - , y = imaginary) Hence, required point of intersection are æç , ± a ö÷.
2 2 2 è2 ø

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 2 Solved Paragraphs based upon Therefore, 4 + 2 l = 0 or l = - 2
each of the paragraph 3 multiple choice question. Each Thus, the required circle is
of these questions has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of ( x - 1 ) 2 + (y - 2 ) 2 - 2( x - y + 1 ) = 0
which ONLY ONE is correct.
or x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 2y + 3 = 0
Paragraph I Y 0
(Q. Nos. 16 to 18) 1=
y+
x–
Tangents are drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4 x at the point P (1,2) P
which is the upper end of latusrectum.
16. Image of the parabola y 2 = 4 x in the tangent line at X
A O
the point P is S (1, 0)
(a) ( x + 4 )2 = 16y (b) ( x + 2)2 = 8 (y - 2)
(c) ( x + 1)2 = 4 (y - 1) (d) ( x - 2)2 = 2(y - 2)

17. Radius of the circle touching the parabola y 2 = 4 x at Its radius is ( 4 + 1 - 3 ) = 2.

the point P and passing through its focus is 18. (a) Area bounded by AOPA = Area of DAOB + Area of OPBO
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 2 Y

18. Area enclosed by the tangent line at P, X-axis and the

M P(1, 2)
parabola is
2 4 B
(a) sq units (b) sq units
3 3
X
14 16 A O
(c) sq units (d) sq units
3 3
Sol. Upper end of latusrectum is P (1, 2 )
\The equation of tangent at P (1, 2 ) is
2
y × 2 = 2 (x + 1) Þ x - y + 1 = 0 1 2y 2 1 éy 3 ù 8 2
= ´1 ´1 + ò dy - ´ 1 ´ 1 = ê ú = = sq unit
16. (c) Any point on the given parabola is (t 2, 2t ). The image of 2 0 4 2 12
ë û0 12 3
(h, k ) of the point (t 2, 2t ) on x - y + 1 = 0 is given by
Paragraph II
h - t 2 k - 2 t - 2(t 2 - 2 t + 1 )
= = (Q. Nos. 19 to 21)
1 -1 1+1
Þ h = 2 t - 1 and k = t 2 + 1 Let C 1 and C 2 be respectively, the parabolas x 2 = y - 1 and
æh + 1ö
2
y 2 = x - 1. Let P be any point on C 1 and Q be any point on
or k =ç ÷ + 1 Þ (h + 1 ) 2 = 4(k - 1 )
è 2 ø C 2 . Let P1 and Q 1 be the reflections of P and Q , respectively
The required equation of image is ( x + 1 ) 2= 4(y - 1 ). with respect to the line y = x .
17. (c)Q Focus is S(1, 0) and P is (1, 2). 19. P1 and Q 1 lie on
Equation of circle touching the parabola at (1, 2) is (a) C1 and C 2 respectively (b) C 2 and C1 respectively
( x - 1 ) 2 + (y - 2 ) 2 + l( x - y + 1 ) = 0 it passes through (1, 0 ). (c) Cannot be determined (d) None of these
 Chap 05 Parabola 413

20. If the point P( l, l2 + 1) and Q(m 2 + 1, m), then P1 and \ P1 and Q1 are ( l2 + 1, l)
Q 1 are and (m, m 2 + 1 ) (Ans. 20(b))
2 2 2 2
(a) ( l + 1, l) and (m + 1, m) (b) ( l + 1, l ) and (m, m + 1) 2
Also, P1 and Q1 lie on y = x - 1
(c) ( l, l2 + 1) and (m, m 2 + 1) (d) ( l, l2 +1) and (m 2 + 1, m)
and x 2 = y - 1.
21. Arithmetic mean of PP1 and QQ 1 is always Hence, P1 and Q1 lie on C 2 and C1 , respectively. (Ans. 19(b))
less than 21. (a)Q A is mid-point of PP1 and B is mid-point of QQ1.
1 3 1
(a) PQ (b) PQ (c) 2PQ (d) PQ \ PA = PP1
2 2 2
Sol. Since, the reflection of a point ( p, q ) with respect to line y = x is 1
and QB = QQ1 ...(i)
(q, p ). 2
Let P( l, l2 + 1 ) and Q(m 2 + 1, m) be points on C1 and C 2, Þ PC ³ PA ...(ii)
respectively. and QC ³ QB ...(iii)
\ Reflection of P( l, l2 + 1 ) with respect to line y = x is On adding Eqs. (ii) and (iii), then
P1( l2 + 1, l) and reflection of Q(m 2 + 1, m) with respect to line PC + QC ³ PA + QB
y = x is Q1(m, m 2 + 1 ). 1 1
= PP1 + QQ1 [from Eq. (i)]
x2 =y –1 Y
2 2
C1
Q1 æ PP + QQ1 ö
y=x =ç 1 ÷
è 2 ø
P B æ PP + QQ1 ö
(0, 1)
\ PC + QC ³ ç 1 ÷
C è 2 ø
C2
A Q Þ PQ ³ (AM of PP1 and QQ1 )
O P1
X
(1, 0)
y2=x–1

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n
This section contains 2 solved examples. The answer to at 2t 3 a(t 2 + t 3 ) 1 t t t +t 1
1 a2 2 3 2 3
each example is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to Area of DPQR = | at 3t1 a(t 3 + t1 ) 1 | = | t 3t1 t 3 + t1 1 |
2 at t a(t + t ) 1 2 tt t +t 1
9 (both inclusive). 12 1 2 12 1 2

a2
l Ex. 22 Points A, B, C lie on the parabola y 2 = 4ax . The =
2
| St 2t 3(t 3 - t 2 ) |
tangents to the parabola at A, B, C taken in pairs intersect at
a2
points P , Q , R, then, the ratio of the areas of the DABC and = | (t1 - t 2 ) (t 2 - t 3 ) (t 3 - t1 ) |
2
DPQR is
1
Sol. (2) Let (at12, 2at1 ), (at 22, 2at 2 ) and (at 32, 2at 3 ) be the points A, B = ´ Area of DABC
2
and C respectively. Area of DABC
\ =2
at12 2at1 1 1 t1 t12 Area of DPQR
1
\Area of DABC = at 2 2at 2 1 | = a | 1 t 2 t 22
2 2
2
at 32 2at 3 1 1 t 3 t 32 l Ex. 23 If the orthocentre of the triangle formed by the
= a 2 | (t1 - t 2 ) (t 2 - t 3 ) (t 3 - t1 ) | points t 1 , t 2 , t 3 on the parabola y 2 = 4ax is the focus, the
Coordinates of P , Q and R are (at 2t 3, a(t 2 + t 3 )), (at 3t1, a(t 3 + t1 )), value of | t 1t 2 + t 2 t 3 + t 3 t 1 | is
(at1t 2, a(t1 + t 2 )) respectively, then
414 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Sol. (5) Q SA is perpendicular to BC[S is focus (a, 0)] A(at12, 2at1)

F E
æ 2at1 - 0 ö æ 2at 3 - 2at 2 ö
Þ ç 2 ÷ç ÷ = -1 S
è at1 - a ø è at 32 - at 22 ø (a,0)
æ 2t1 ö æ 2 ö B C
Þ ç 2 ÷ç ÷ = -1 D
è t1 - 1 ø è t 3 + t 2 ø (at22, 2at2) (at32, 2at3)

Þ 4t1 + t12(t 2 + t 3 ) = t 2 + t 3 …(i) On subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (i), then
4 + (t1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t1 ) = - 1 Þ t1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t1 = - 5
Similarly, 4t 2 + t 22(t 3 + t1 ) = t 3 + t1 …(ii)
\ | t1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t1 | = 5

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n This section contains one solved example. Example 24 (B) Equation of tangent to parabola y 2 = 4 x at P (t 2, 2 t ) is
has three statements (A, B and C) given in Column I and ty = x + t 2
five statements (p, q, r, s and t) in Column II. Any given
Given t 2 Î[1, 4 ]
statement in Column I can have correct matching with
one or more statement(s) given in Column II. 1
\Area of DAPN = ( AN ) ( PN )
2
l Ex. 24 Match the following. Y
)
(t2 , 2t
Column I Column II P

(A) If PQ is any focal chord of the parabola y2 = 32x (p) 2 X′ X

and length of PQ can never be less than l units, A (–t2,0) O N
then l is divisible by
(B) A tangent is drawn to the parabola y2 = 4 x at the (q) 3 Y′
point ‘P’ whose abscissa lies in the interval [1, 4 ] .
1
If maximum possible area of the triangle formed = (2 t 2 ) (2 t )
by the tangent at ‘P’, ordinate of the point ‘P’ and 2
the X-axis is l sq units, then l is divisible by 3
Þ D = 2t 3 = 2(t 2 ) 2
(C) The normal at the ends of the latusrectum of the (r) 4
parabola y2 = 4 x meet the parabola again at A and Q t 2 Î[1, 4 ]
A¢. If length AA¢ = l unit, then l is divisible by Þ D max occurs, when t 2 = 4
(s) 6 3
Þ D max = 2( 4 ) 2 = 16 sq units
(t) 8
\ l = 16
Sol. (A) ® (p, r, t); (B) ® (p, r, t); (C) ® (p, q, r, s)
(C) Given parabola y 2 = 4 x. Now, the ends of latusrectum are
(A) Let P (at 2, 2at ) be any point on the parabola y 2 = 4ax and P(1, 2 ) and Q(1, - 2 ) or P (t 2, 2t ) and Q (t12, 2t1 ), where t = 1, t1 = - 1.
S (a, 0 ) be the focus, then the other end of focal chord through 2
æ a 2a We know that the other end of normal is given by t 2 = - t -
P will be Q ç 2 , - ö÷. t
èt t ø
2
Þ A(t 22, 2t 2 ) and A ¢(t 32, 2t 3 ),
1
Then, length of focal chord PQ = a æçt + ö÷ where t 2 = - 3, t 3 = 3
è tø
2 or A(9, - 6 ) and A¢(9, 6 )
1 æ 1ö
Q t+ ³ 2 Þ a çt + ÷ ³ 4a \ AA¢ = 12 units
t è tø
\ l = 12
or PQ ³ 32 [Q 4a = 32]
\ l = 32
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Ex. Nos. 25 and 26) are Assertion-Reason On differentiating w.r.t. t, we get
type questions. Each of these question contains two 3t 2 + (2 - l ) > 0, for l < 2
statements :
Statement I (Assertion) and The cubic Eq. (i) has only one real root.
Statement II (Reason) \ Statement I is true.
Each of these examples also has four alternative choices, Hence, both statements are true but Statement II is not correct
only one of which is the correct answer. explanation for Statement I.
You have to select the correct choice
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a l Ex. 26 Statement I If there exist points on the circle
correct explanation for statement I.
x + y 2 = l2 from which two perpendicular tangents can be
2
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is not a
1
correct explanation for Statement I. drawn to the parabola y 2 = 2 x , then l ³ .
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false. 2
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true. Statement II Perpendicular tangents to the parabola meet
at the directrix.
l Ex. 25 Statement I Through the point ( l, l +1), l < 2, Sol. (a) Statement II is true as it is property of parabola. Equation
1
there cannot be more than one normal to the parabola y 2 = 4 x . of directrix of parabola y 2 = 2 x is x = - .
2
Statement II The point ( l, l +1) cannot lie inside the æ 1 ö
Any point on directrix is ç - , y ÷ , now this point exists on the
parabola y 2 = 4 x . è 2 ø
Sol. (b) Let S = y 2 - 4 x circle, then
1
\ S1 = ( l + 1 ) 2 - 4 l = ( l - 1 ) 2 ³ 0 + y 2 = l2
4
\ Point ( l, l + 1 ) cannot lie inside the parabola y 2 = 4 x.
1
Þ y 2 = l2 - ³ 0
\ Statement II is true. 4
Now, equation of normal at (t 2, 2 t ) is y + tx = 2t + t 3 passes 1
\ l³
through ( l, l + 1 ). 2
Þ l + 1 + tl = 2t + t 3 Hence, both statements are true and Statement II is correct
explanation for Statement I.
Þ t 3 + (2 - l )t - ( l + 1 ) = 0 …(i)

Subjective Type Examples

n
In this section, there are 16 subjective solved On comparing the coefficients of x and y in Eq. (i) and (ii),
examples. 2a k
we get =
h 2a
l Ex. 27 The two parabolas y 2 = 4a ( x - l ) and Þ hk = 4a 2
x 2 = 4a (y - l1 ) always touch one another, l and l1 being Hence, the locus is xy = 4a 2,
variable parameters. Prove that the point of contact lies on which is independent of l and l1.
2
the curve xy = 4a .
l Ex. 28 Show that the area formed by the normals to
Sol. Let (h, k ) be the common point and if the parabolas touch 2
y = 4ax at the points t 1 , t 2 , t 3 is
each other, then the tangents at (h, k ) should be identical.
Their equations are 1 2
a |(t 1 - t 2 ) (t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t 1 )| l2 , where l = (t 1 + t 2 + t 3 ).
ky = 2a( x - l + h ) 2
Þ 2ax - ky = 2a(l - h ) …(i) Sol. Equation of normals at P , Q, R are
and hx = 2a(y - l1 + k ) y = - t1x + 2at1 + at13
Þ hx - 2ay = 2a(k - l1 ) …(ii)
416 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y = - t 2x + 2at 2 + at 23, y = - t 3x + 2at 3 + at 33, respectively. l Ex. 29 Prove that the two parabolas y 2 = 4ax and
2
(at1 , 2at1) y 2 = 4c ( x - b ) cannot have common normal, other than the
P
N axis unless b / (a - c ) > 2.
L
Sol. Given parabolas y 2 = 4ax and y 2 = 4c( x - b ) have common
M
Q normals. Then equation of normals in terms of slopes are
2
(at2 , 2at2) y = mx - 2am - am 3
R (at 2,2 at )
3 3 and y = m( x - b ) - 2cm - cm 3
Subtracting them two by two, coordinates of L, M and N are respectively then normals must be identical, compare the
L º {2a + a(t12 + t1t 2 + t 22 ), - at1t 2(t1 + t 2 )} coefficients
M º {2a + a(t12 + t1t 3 + t 32 ), - at1t 3(t1 + t 3 )} 2am + am 3
1=
N º {2a + a(t 22 + t 2t 3 + t 32 ), - at 2t 3(t 2 + t 3 )} mb + 2cm + cm 3

\ Area of DLMN Þ m [(c - a )m 2 + (b + 2c - 2a )] = 0,

½2a + a(t12 + t1t 2 + t 22 ) -at1t 2(t1 + t 2 ) 1½ m¹0 [Qother than axis]
1½
= | 2a + a(t12 + t1t 3 + t 32 ) -at1t 3(t1 + t 3 ) 1½| 2a - 2c - b
2½ 2 2 -at 2t 3(t 2 + t 3 ) 1½ and m2 = ,
½2a + a(t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3 ) ½ c -a
On applying R2 ® R2 - R1 and R3 ® R3 - R1
2(a - c ) - b
½ 2 + (t12 + t1t 2 + t 22 )
2 -t1t 2(t1 + t 2 ) 1½ m=±
a c -a
= |½ (t 3 - t 2 )(t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) t1(t 3 - t 2 )(t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) 0½|
½
2 (t - t )(t + t + t ) t (t - t )(t + t + t ) 0½
½ 3 1 1 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 3 ½ æ b ö
Þ m = ± ç-2 - ÷
Expanding by last column è c -a ø
a2 1 t b
= |(t 3 - t1 )(t 3 - t 2 )|(t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) 2 |½ 1½| \ -2 - >0
2 ½1 t 2½ c -a
1 2
= a |(t1 - t 2 )(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )|(t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) 2 b
2 Þ -2 + >0
1 a -c
= a 2 |(t1 - t 2 )(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )| l2 b
2 Þ >2
a -c
Aliter
Equations of sides of DLMN formed by the normals are
y + t1x - (2at1 + at13 ) = 0
l Ex. 30 If on a given base BC, a triangle is described such
that the sum of the tangents of the base angles is m, then
y + t 2x - (2at 2 + at 23 ) = 0
prove that the locus of the opposite vertex A is a parabola.
y + t 3x - (2at 3 + at 33 ) = 0
Sol. Let the given point B and C be (0, 0) and (a, 0 ), respectively.
2
½t1 1 -(2at1 + at13 ) ½ Given, tan a + tan b = m (constant)
1 ½t 1 -(2at + at 3 )½
\ Required area = 2 2 2
2 | C1C 2C 3 | ½t 1 ½ Y
½3 -(2at 3 + at 33 )½
2 A(x,y)
½t1 1 2 t1 + t13 ½
a2 ½t 1 2 t + t 3½
= 2 2 2
| 2(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )(t1 - t 2 )| ½t 1 3½
½ 3 2 t 3 + t 3½
2
ì t 1 2 t ½t 1 t13½ü α β
X
a2 ï½ 1 1½ 1
3 ï
X′
B (0,0)
í½t 2 1 2 t 2½+½t 2 1 t 2 ½ý
= D C (a,0)
2|(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )(t1 - t 2 )| ï t 1 2 t ½t 1 3½ï Y′
½ 3½ t3 ½
î 3 ½3 þ y y
a2 Þ + =m
= x a -x
2|(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )(t1 - t 2 )|
ay
{ 0 - (t1 - t 2 )(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )(t1 + t 2 + t 3 )} 2 Þ =m
1 x(a - x )
= a 2 |(t1 - t 2 )(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )|(t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) 2
2 \ ay = amx - mx 2
1 2
= a |(t1 - t 2 )(t 2 - t 3 )(t 3 - t1 )| l2. which is the equation of parabola.
2
 Chap 05 Parabola 417

l Ex. 31 A parabolic mirror is kept along y 2 = 4 x and two l Ex. 33 A parabola of latusrectum 4a , touches a fixed
light rays parallel to its axis are reflected along one straight equal parabola , the axes of the two curves being parallel;
line. If one of the incident rays is at 3 units distance from the prove that the locus of the vertex of the moving curve is a
axis, then find the distance of the other incident ray from the parabola of latusrectum 8a.
axis. Sol. Let the given parabola is
Sol. Let the incident rays be PA and QB. y 2 = 4ax …(i)
After reflection, both rays passes through the focus S(1, 0 ). If the vertex of moving parabola is ( a, b ), then equation of
Y A moving parabola is
P
(y - b ) 2 = - 4a ( x - a ) …(ii)
2
y
X′ X On substituting the value of i.e. x = in Eq. (ii),
O S(1,0) 4a
Q

Y′
(0,0)
Therefore, AB is a focal chord.
1 -2ö
Let A be (t 2, 2t ), then B be æç 2 , ÷. (α, β)
èt t ø
Given, 2t = 3 \ t = 3 / 2
2 4
Hence, distance of B from the axis of parabola is - = units.
t 3 æy 2 ö
then (y - b ) 2 = -4a ç - a ÷
è 4a ø
l Ex. 32 Prove that the length of the intercept on the Þ y 2 - 2 by + b 2 = - y 2 + 4aa
normal at the point P (at 2 , 2at ) of a parabola y 2 = 4ax made
2y 2 - 2 by + b 2 - 4aa = 0 …(iii)
by the circle on the line joining the focus and point P as
Since, two parabolas (i) and (ii) touch each other.
diameter is a (1 + t 2 ) . Hence, roots of Eq. (iii) are equal i.e. Discriminant = 0
Sol. Let the normal at P (at 2, 2at ) cut the circle in K and the axis Þ “B 2 - 4 AC = 0”
of parabola at G then PK is required intercept.
\ ( -2 b ) 2 = 4 × 2 × (b 2 - 4aa )
SP = PM = a + at 2
) Þ 4b 2 = 32aa
Y 2, 2at
t
P (a or b 2 = 8aa
M θ
φ θ the required locus is y 2 = 8ax
90° K
X which has latusrectum double that of given parabola.
T A S (a,0) G
φ
l Ex. 34 The normal at point P on a given parabola meet
the axis of parabola at Q. Then prove that a line through Q
Directrix (x+a=0) and perpendicular to this normal always touches a fixed
Since angle in a semi-circle being right angle. parabola whose length of latusrectum is same as that of
\ Ð SKP = 90° given parabola.
Sol. Let the equation of parabola is
and normal at P (at 2, 2at ) is
y 2 = 4ax. …(i)
y = - tx + 2at + at 3
2
Let P (at , 2at )
Þ tx + y - 2at - at 3 = 0 …(i)
Normal at P is y + tx = 2at + at 3
\ SK is the perpendicular distance from S (a, 0 ) to the normal (i),
Q Normal meet the axis of parabola (i.e. X-axis), then
| at + 0 - 2at - at 3|
then SK = =a |t | 1 + t2 Q(2a + at 2, 0 ).
t2 + 1
Now, equation of the line through Q and perpendicular to the
\ In DSPK , ( Pk ) 2 = (SP ) 2 - (SK ) 2 normal is
1
= a 2(1 + t 2 ) 2 - a 2t 2 (1 + t 2 ) = a 2(1 + t 2 ) y - 0 = ( x - 2a - at 2 )
t
\ PK = a (1 + t 2 )
418 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Þ ty = x - 2a - at 2 Points P and Q lie on y 2 = 4ax then

Þ ty = ( x - 2a ) - at 2 ( KP ) 2 sin 2 q = 4a(d + KP cos q) …(i)
2 2
which is clearly tangent to the parabola and ( KQ ) sin q = 4a(d - KQ cos q) …(ii)
y 2 = 4a (2a - x ). 2 2 2
4a cos q + (16a cos q + 16ad sin q)
From Eq. (i), KP =
2 sin 2 q
l Ex. 35 TP and TQ are any two tangents to a parabola
-4a cos q + (16a 2 cos2 q + 16ad sin 2 q)
and the tangent at a third point R cuts them in P ¢ and Q ¢, From Eq. (ii), KQ =
TP ¢ TQ ¢ 2 sin 2 q
prove that + =1. 1 1 2a cos2 q + d sin 2 q
TP TQ \ 2
+ 2
=
( KP ) ( KQ ) 2ad 2
Sol. Let parabola be y 2 = 4ax and coordinates of P and Q on this
parabola are P º (at12, 2at1 ) and Q º (at 22, 2at 2 ) ; T is the point of For d = 2a
intersection of tangents at t1 and t 2. 1 1 1
\ + =
( KP ) 2 ( KQ ) 2 d 2
) 1
P (t 1 = 2 , which is independent of q.
4a
P′

T A
l Ex. 37 If the distribution of weight is uniform, then the
R (t3)
rope of the suspended bridge takes the form of parabola. The
height of the supporting towers is 20 m, the distance between
Q ′ Q (t2) these towers is 150 m and the height of the lowest point of
the rope from the road is 3 m. Find the equation of the
\ Coordinates of T º {at1, t 2, a (t1 + t 2 )}
parabolic shape of the rope considering the floor of the
Similarly P ¢ º {at 3t1, a (t 3 + t1 )}
bridge as X-axis and the axis of the parabola as Y-axis. Find
Q ¢ º {at 2t 3, a (t 2 + t 3 )} the height of that tower which supports the rope and is at a
Let TP ¢ : TP = l :1 distance of 30 m from the centre of the road .
t -t TP ¢ t 3 - t 2
\ l= 3 2 Þ = Sol. Here MZ is the road let V is lowest point of the rope given
t1 - t 2 TP t1 - t 2 VZ = 3 m.
TQ ¢ t1 - t 3 S
Similarly, = 150 m
TQ t1 - t 2 P (75, 20)
TP ¢ TQ ¢
\ + =1
TP TQ
20 m
l Ex. 36 Prove that on the axis of any parabola there is a
certain point ‘K’ which has the property that, if a chord PQ
3 V
1 1
of parabola be drawn through it, then + is the M Road Z
2
PK QK 2
Let MZ is X-axis and let MVS is Y-axis.
same for all positions of the chord . Taking X and Y -axes as shown in the given figure, the equation
x -d y - 0 of parabola is of the form
Sol. Any line passing through K is = =r
cos q sin q
x 2 = 4ay
\ Coordinates of P and Q are
if V is origin
(d + KP cos q, KP sin q)
1
and (d - KQ cos q, - KQ sin q). Coordinates of P is ìí (150 ), 20 - 3üý i.e. (75 , 17 ) P lies on
î2 þ
Y
P Eq. (i), then
(75 ) 2 = 4a (17 )
θ 5625
X′ X or 4a =
A K (d, 0) 17
2 5625
Q From Eq. (i), x = y
17
Y′
 Chap 05 Parabola 419

Now, shifting the origin (0, 0) to M ( 0, - 3 ), l Ex. 39 A variable chord PQ of the parabola y = 4 x 2
then equation of parabola in new form is
subtends a right angle at the vertex. Find the locus of the
5625
x2 = (y - 3 ) …(ii) points of intersection of the normals at P and Q.
17
Sol. Parametric point on the parabola
Again, let the required height of supporting tower at a distance
of 30 m from the centre of road be h metres, then the coordinates y = 4 x 2 is (t, 4t 2 )
of the top of this tower are (30, h ) referred to given axes Let P (t1, 4t12 ) and Q (t 2, 4t 22 ),
5625
from Eq. (ii), (30 ) 2 = (h - 3 ) if A is vertex of the parabola, then
17
Slope of AP ´ Slope of AQ = - 1 [QAP^ AQ ]
900 ´ 17 ö
\ h = æç ÷ + 3 = 5.72 m \ 4t1 ´ 4t 2 = - 1
è 5625 ø
1
\ t1t 2 = -
l Ex. 38 Tangent is drawn at any point ( x 1 , y 1 ) on the 16
Equations of normals at P and Q are
parabola y 2 = 4ax . Now tangents are drawn from any point
x + 4t1y = t1 + 16t13 …(i)
on this tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 such that all the
and x + 4t 2y = t 2 + 16t 23 …(ii)
chords of contact pass through a fixed point ( x 2 , y 2 ) . Prove
2 Let the normals (i) and (ii) intersect at (h, k ), then
æ x1 ö æ y 1 ö on solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), then we get
that 4 ç ÷ + ç ÷ = 0.
è x2 ø èy 2 ø 1 + 16 (t12 + t 22 + t1t 2 )
k=
Sol. Tangent at ( x1, y1 ) on the parabola y 2 = 4ax 4
\ yy1 = 2a ( x + x1 ) 1 + 16 (t12 + t 22 ) + 16t1t 2
Þ k=
æ 2a ( x ¢ + x1 ) ö 4
Any point on this tangent will be ç x ¢, ÷ 1 + 16 ( (t1 + t 2 ) 2 - 2t1t 2 ) - 1
è y1 ø = [Q16t1t 2 = - 1 ]
4
æ 2a ( x ¢ + x1 ) ö
Equation of chord of contact of the point ç x ¢, ÷ w.r.t. ì 1ü
è y1 ø = 4 í(t1 + t 2 ) 2 + ý
î 8þ
2a ( x ¢ + x )
circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is xx ¢ + y × 1
=a2 1
y1 k = 4 (t1 + t 2 ) 2 + …(iii)
2
Þ xx ¢y1 + 2ayx ¢ + 2ayx1 = a 2y1 Again h = - 16t1t 2(t1 + t 2 )
Þ (2ayx1 - a 2y1 ) + x ¢ ( xy1 + 2ay ) = 0 Þ h = t1 + t 2 …(iv)
which is family of straight lines passing through point of On eliminating t1 and t 2 from Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
intersection of 1
k = 4h 2 +
2ayx1 - a 2y1 = 0 and xy1 + 2ay = 0 2
ay1 Þ 2k = 8h 2 + 1
\ y=
2 x1 Hence, locus of (h, k ) is 2y = 8 x 2 + 1.
2ay æ 2a ö æ ay1 ö
and x =- = ç- ÷ ç ÷
y1 è y1 ø è 2 x1 ø l Ex. 40 Equilateral triangles are circumscribed to the
a2 parabola y 2 = 4ax . Prove that their angular points lie on the
x =-
x1 conic (3 x + a ) ( x + 3a ) = y 2 .
The fixed point is ( x 2, y 2 ). Sol. Let coordinates of P and Q are (at12, 2at1 ) and (at 22, 2at 2 ),
2
a ay1 respectively.
\ x2 = - and y 2 =
x1 2 x1
2 2
æ x ö æy ö æ x ö æ y1 ö P
\ 4ç 1÷ + ç 1÷ = 4ç 21 ÷ + ç ÷
è x2 ø è y 2 ø è -a / x1 ø è ay1 / 2 x1 ø
4 x12 4 x12 A 60°
=- + 2 =0
a2 a
2 Q
æ x ö æy ö
Hence, 4 ç 1 ÷ + ç 1 ÷ = 0.
è x2 ø è y 2 ø
420 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Tangents at P and Q are t1y = x + at12 and t 2y = x + at 22, This is taken as directrix, then
respectively. SP = PM
1 1
Slope of tangents at P and Q are and , respectively. Þ BS = BM Þ(h - a ) 2 + (k - 0 ) 2 = (a cos q - b ) 2 …(iv)
t1 t2
and AS = AN
Let one angular point of equilateral triangle is A. Þ (h + a ) 2 + (k - 0 ) 2 = (a cos q + b ) 2 …(v)
\ A º (at1t 2, a(t1 + t 2 ))
On adding Eqs. (iv) and (v), then
1 1
- a 2 cos2 q + b 2 = h 2 + k 2 + a 2 …(vi)
t1 t 2 t -t
Given, tan60° = = 2 1 On subtracting Eq. (iv) from Eq. (v), then
1 1 1 + t1t 2
1+ × h
t1 t 2 4ab cos q = 4ah or cos q = …(vii)
2 2 2 b
Þ ( 3 ) (1 + t1t 2 ) = (t 2 - t1 )
From Eqs. (vi) and (vii), we get
Þ 3 (1 + t1t 2 ) 2 = (t1 + t 2 ) 2 - 4t1t 2 a 2h 2
+ b 2 = h2 + k 2 + a 2
For locus of A, put at1t 2 = x and a(t1 + t 2 ) = y , then b2
2 2
x y x
3 æç1 + ö÷ = æç ö÷ - 4 Þ h2
(b 2 - a 2 )
+ k2 =b2 -a2
è a ø èa ø a a2
Þ y 2 = 3 x 2 + 10ax + 3a 2 h2 k2
Þ 2
+ 2 =1
\ (3 x + a ) ( x + 3a ) = y 2
a b -a2
Hence, the locus of S (h, k ) is
l Ex. 41 A parabola is drawn to pass through A and B, the x2 y2
+ = 1.
ends of diameter of a given circle of radius a and to have a a2 b2 -a2
directrix a tangent to a concentric circle of radius b, the axes
being AB and the perpendicular diameter. Prove that the l Ex. 42 Two straight lines are at right angles to one
x2 y2 another and one of them touches y 2 = 4a ( x + a ) and the
locus of the focus of the parabola is + = 1.
b2 b2 -a2 other y 2 = 4b( x + b ) . Prove that the point of intersection of
Sol. Let AB be taken along X -axis, it mid-point O as origin and a the lines lies on the line x + a + b = 0.
line through O perpendicular to AB as Y -axis.
Sol. We know that any tangent in terms of slope (m) of the
Y a
parabola y 2 = 4ax is y = mx + .
m
Replacing x by x + a, we get
a
y = m( x + a ) + which is tangent to
m
y 2 = 4a( x + a ) …(i)
X′ A O X 2
Similarly, tangent in terms of slope of y = 4b( x + b ) is
B
s b
N

y = m1( x + b ) + …(ii)
m1
Given tangents are perpendicular, we have
M

1
Y′
mm1 = - 1 or m1 = -
m
(x + b )
Equation of circle on AB as diameter is then Eq. (ii) becomes y = - - bm
m
x2 + y 2 =a2 …(i) On subtracting Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
The equation of a circle of radius b and concentric to circle (i) is æ 1ö
0 = (x + a + b ) çm + ÷
x2 + y 2 =b2 …(ii) è mø
Let S (h, k ) be the focus of the parabola which passes through 1
Þ m+ ¹0
A( - a, 0 ) and B(a, 0 ). m
Let equation of tangent to circle (ii) be Hence, x +a +b =0
x cos q + y sin q = 6. …(iii)
 #L Parabola Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 30 multiple choice questions. 8. If a ¹ 0 and the line 2bx + 3cy + 4d = 0 passes through
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of the points of intersection of the parabolas y 2 = 4ax
which ONLY ONE is correct and x 2 = 4ay , then
1. A common tangent is drawn to the circle (a) d 2 + ( 2b + 3c )2 = 0 (b) d 2 + (3b + 2c )2 = a 2
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 and the parabola y 2 = 4bx . If the angle 2 2
(c) d + ( 2b - 3c ) = 0 (d) d 2 + ( 2b + 3c )2 = a 2
p
which this tangent makes with the axis of x is , then
the relationship between a and b is (a , b > 0 ) 4 9. A parabola y = ax 2 + bx + c crosses the X-axis at (a, 0 )
and (b, 0 ) both to the right of the origin. A circle also
(a) b = 2a (b) a = b 2 (c) c = 2a (d) a = 2c
passes through these two points. The length of a
2. The equation of parabola whose vertex and focus lie tangent from the origin to the circle is
on the axis of x at distances a and a 1 from the origin bc b c
respectively, is (a) (b) ac 2 (c) (d)
a a a
(a) y 2 = 4 (a1 - a ) x (b) y 2 = 4 (a1 - a ) ( x - a )
(c) y = 4 (a1 - a ) ( x - a1 ) (d) y 2 = 4aa1 x
2 10. Two mutually perpendicular tangent of the parabola
y 2 = 4ax meet the axis at P1 and P2 . It S is the focus of
3. If parabolas y 2 = ax and
1 1
25 [( x - 3 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 ] = (3 x - 4y - 2 ) 2 are equal, the parabola, then + is equal to
SP1 SP2
then the value of a is
(a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 9 1 1 2 4
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4a a a a
4. ABCD and EFGC are squares and the curve y = l x
passes through the origin D and the points B and F. 11. If the normal to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at P meets the
FG curve again at Q and if PQ and the normal at Q make
The ratio is angles a and b respectively with the X-axis, then
BC
Y tan a (tan a + tan b) has the value equal to
1
(a) - 2 (b) - 1 (c) - (d) 0
E F 2
A B 12. If the normals to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at three
points P , Q and R meet at A and S is the focus, then
X SP × SQ × SR is equal to
D C G
(a) (SA ) 2 (b) (SA ) 3 (c) a (SA ) 2 (d) a (SA ) 3
3 +1 3 +1 5 +1 5 +1
(a) (b) (c) (d) 13. The length of the shortest normal chord of the
4 2 4 2
parabola y 2 = 4ax is
5. Let A and B be two points on a parabola y 2 = x with
(a) 2a 27 (b) 9a (c) a 54 (d) 18a
vertex V such that VA is perpendicular to VB and q is
the angle between the chordVA and the axis of the 14. The largest value of a for which the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2
| VA | falls totally in the interior of the parabola
parabola. The value of is
| VB | y 2 = 4 ( x + 4 ) is
(a) tan q (b) cot 2 q (c) tan 3 q (d) cot 3 q 4 6
(a) 4 3 (b) 4 (c) (d) 2 3
6. The vertex of the parabola whose parametric 7
equation is x = t 2 - t + 1, y = t 2 + t + 1, t Î R, is 15. From a point (sin q, cos q ), if three normals can be
1 1 drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4ax , then the value of a is
(a) (1, 1) (b) (2, 2) (c) (3, 3) (d) æç , ö÷ 1 1
è 2 2ø (a) æç , 1ö÷ (b) é - , 0ö÷
è2 ø êë 2 ø
7. The circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 px = 0, p Î R, touches the 1 -1 1
parabola y 2 = 4 x externally, then (c) é , 1ù (d) æç , 0ö÷ È æç0, ö÷
êë 2 úû è 2 ø è 2ø
(a) p > 0 (b) p < 0 (c)p > 1 (d) p > 2
422 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

16. If two different tangents of y 2 = 4 x are the normals 24. Consider the parabola y 2 = 4 x . Let A º ( 4, - 4 ) and
to x 2 = 4 by, then B º ( 9, 6 ) be two fixed points on the parabola. Let C be
1 1 a moving point on the parabola between A and B
(a) | b | < (b) | b | <
2 2 2 such that the area of the triangle ABC is maximum.
1 1 Then the coordinates of C are
(c) | b | > (d) | b | >
1
2 2 2 (a) æç , 1ö÷ (b) (3, - 2 3 )
è4 ø
17. The shortest distance between the parabolas
(c) (3, 2 3 ) (d) ( 4, 4 )
2y 2 = 2 x - 1 and 2 x 2 = 2y - 1 is
(a)
1
(b)
1
(c) 2 2 (d) 4 25. Through the vertex O of the parabola y 2 = 4ax , two
2 2 2 chords OP and OQ are drawn and the circles on OP
18. Normals at two points ( x 1 , y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) of the and OQ as diameters intersect at R. If q 1 , q 2 and f are
the angles made with the axis by the tangents at P
parabola y 2 = 4 x meet again on the parabola, where
and Q on the parabola and by OR, then the value of
x 1 + x 2 = 4, then | y 1 + y 2 | is equal to cot q 1 + cot q 2 is
(a) 2 (b) 2 2 (c)4 2 (d) 8 2 (a) - 2 tan f (b) 2 tan f
(c) 0 (d) 2 cot f
19. A line is drawn from A ( - 2, 0 ) to intersect the curve
y 2 = 4 x at P and Q in the first quadrant such that 26. AB is a double ordinate of the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
1 1 1 Tangents drawn to the parabola at A and B meet the
+ < . Then the slope of the line is always Y -axis at A1 and B1 respectively. If the area of
AP AQ 4
1 1 trapezium AA1B1B is equal to 24a 2 , then the angle
(a) < (b) > (c) > 2 (d) > 3 subtended by A1B1 at the focus of the parabola is
3 3
equal to
20. An equilateral triangle SAB is inscribed in the (a) tan -1 2 (b) tan -1 3 (c) 2 tan -1 2 (d) 2 tan -1 3
parabola y 2 = 4ax having its focus at S. If chord AB n
1
lies towards the left of S, then the side length of this 27. If the 4th term in the expansion of æç px + ö÷ , n Î N
triangle is è xø
5 2
(a) a ( 2 - 3 ) (b) 2a ( 2 - 3 ) is and three normals to the parabola y = x are
2
(c) 4a ( 2 - 3 ) (d) 8a ( 2 - 3 ) drawn through a point (q, 0 ), then
21. Let C be a circle with centre (0, 1) and radius unity. P (a) q = p (b) q > p (c) q < p (d) pq = 1
is the parabola y = ax 2 . The set of values of a for 28. The set of points on the axis of the parabola
which they meet at a point other than origin is y 2 - 4 x - 2y + 5 = 0 from which all the three normals
1 1 1 1
(a) (0, ¥ ) (b) æç0, ö÷ (c) æç , ö÷ (d)æç , ¥ ö÷ to the parabola are real is
è 2ø è 4 2ø è2 ø (a) (k , 0) ; k > 1 (b) (k , 1) ; k > 3
2 (c) (k , 2) ; k > 6 (d) (k , 3 ) ; k > 8
22. Let S be the focus of y = 4 x and a point P be moving
on the curve such that its abscissa is increasing at the 29. The triangle formed by the tangent to the parabola
rate of 4 units/s. Then the rate of increase of the y = x 2 at the point whose abscissa is x 0 ( x 0 Î[1, 2 ]),
projection of SP on x + y =1 when p is at (4, 4) is the Y -axis and the straight line y = x 02 has the
3 greatest area if x 0 is equal to
(a) - 2 (b) - (c) - 1 (d) 2
2 (a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3
2
23. If P is a point on the parabola y = 3 ( 2 x - 3 ) and M is 30. The set of points ( x , y ) whose distance from the line
the foot of perpendicular drawn from P on the y = 2 x + 2 is the same as the distance from (2, 0) is a
directrix of the parabola, then the length of each side parabola. This parabola is congruent to the parabola
of the equilateral triangle SMP, where S is the focus in standard from y = kx 2 for some k which is equal to
of the parabola, is 4 12 5 5
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8 (a) (b) (c) (d)
5 5 4 12
 Chap 05 Parabola 423

#L Parabola Exercise 2 :
More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n This section contains 15 multiple choice questions. 37. If a point P on y 2 = 4 x , the foot of the perpendicular
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of
from P on the directrix and the focus form an
which MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
equilateral triangle, then the coordinates of P may be
31. Equation of the common tangent to the circle (a) (3, - 2 3 ) (b) ( - 3, 2 3 )
x 2 + y 2 = 50 and the parabola y 2 = 40 x can be (c) (3, 2 3 ) (d) ( - 3, - 2 3 )
(a) x + y - 10 = 0 (b) x - y + 10 = 0
(c) x + y + 10 = 0 (d) x - y - 10 = 0 38. The locus of the foot of the perpendicular from the
2
32. Let PQ be a chord of the parabola y = 4 x . A circle focus on a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
(a) the directrix (b) the tangent at the vertex
drawn with PQ as a diameter passes through the
(c) x = a (d) x = 0
vertex V of the parabola. If area of DPVQ = 20 unit 2 ,
then the coordinates of P are 39. The extremities of latusrectum of a parabola are (1, 1)
(a) (16,8) (b) (16, - 8 ) and (1, -1). Then the equation of the parabola can be
(c) ( - 16, 8 ) (d) ( - 16, - 8 ) (a) y 2 = 2x - 1 (b) y 2 = 1 - 2x
(c) y 2 = 2x - 3 (d) y 2 = 2x - 4
33. Let y 2 = 4ax be a parabola and x 2 + y 2 + 2bx = 0 be a
circle. If parabola and circle touch each other 40. If from the vertex of a parabola y 2 = 4ax a pair of
externally, then chords be drawn at right angles to one another and
(a) a > 0, b < 0 (b) a > 0, b > 0 with these chords as adjacent sides a rectangle be
(c) a < 0, b > 0 (d) a < 0, b < 0 made, then the locus of the further angle of the
34. Tangent is drawn at any point ( x 1 , y 1 ) other than the rectangle is
(a) an equal parabola
vertex on the parabola y 2 = 4ax . If tangents are (b) a parabola with focus at (8a, 0)
drawn from any point on this tangent to the circle (c) a parabola with directrix as x - 7a = 0
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 such that all the chords of chords of (d) not a parabola
contact pass through a fixed point ( x 2 , y 2 ), then 41. If two chords drawn from the point (4, 4) to the
y parabola x 2 = 4y are divided by the line y = mx in the
(a) x 1, a, x 2 are in GP (b) 1 , a, y 2 are in GP
2 ratio 1 : 2, then
y1 x 1
(c) - 4, , are in GP (d) x 1x 2 + y 1y 2 = a 2 (a) m Î ( - ¥, - 3 ) (b) m Î ( - ¥, - 3 - 1)
y2 x2
(c) m Î ( 3 , ¥ ) (d) m Î ( 3 - 1, ¥ )
35. Let P, Q and R are three co-normal points on the
42. Through a point P( - 2, 0 ), tangents PQ and PR are
parabola y 2 = 4ax . Then the correct statement(s) is/at
(a) algebraic sum of the slopes of the normals at P , Q and R
drawn to the parabola y 2 = 8 x . Two circles each
vanishes passing through the focus of the parabola and one
(b) algebraic sum of the ordinates of the points P , Q and R touching at Q and the other at R are drawn. Which of
vanishes the following point ( s ) with respect to the triangle
(c) centroid of the triangle PQR lies on the axis of the PQR lie ( s ) on the common chord of the two circles?
parabola (a) centroid (b) orthocentre
(d) Circle circumscribing the triangle PQR passes through (c) incentre (d) circumcentre
the vertex of the parabola
43. The set of points on the axis of the parabola
36. Let P be a point whose coordinates differ by unity 1
and the point does not lie on any of the axes of (y - 2 ) 2 = 4 æç x - ö÷ from which three distinct
è 2ø
reference. If the parabola y 2 = 4 x + 1 passes through
normals can be drawn to the parabola are
P, then the ordinate of P may be (a) (3, 2) (b) (1, 2)
(a) 3 (b) - 1 (c) (4, 2) (d) (5, 2)
(c) 5 (d) 1
424 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

44. Three normals are drawn from the point (14, 7) to the 45. A quadrilateral is inscribed in a parabola, then
curve y 2 - 16 x - 8y = 0. Then the coordinates of the (a) the quadrilateral may be cyclic
feet of the normals are (b) diagonals of the quadrilateral may be equal
(a) (3, - 4 ) (b) (8, 16) (c) all possible pairs of adjacent sides may be perpendicular
(c) (0, 0) (d) (2, 2) (d) None of the above

#L Parabola Exercise 3 :
Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 8 paragraphs based upon each of Paragraph III
the paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have to be (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)
answered. Each of these questions has four choices (a), (b),
(c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. Consider a parabola (P ) x 2 - 4 xy + 4y 2 - 32 x + 4y + 16 = 0.
Paragraph I 52. The focus of the parabola (P ) is
(Q. Nos. 46 to 48) (a) ( 2, 1) (b) ( - 2, 1) (c) ( - 2, - 1) (d) ( 2, - 1)
Consider a parabola P touches coordinate axes at ( 4, 0 ) and 53. Length of latusrectum of the parabola (P ) is
(0, 3 ).
3 6 12 24
(a) (b) (c) (d)
46. If focus of parabola P is (a , b ), then the value of b - a is 5 5 5 5
1 3 4 12
(a) (b) (c) (d) 54. Equation of directrix of parabola (P ) is
25 25 25 25
(a) x - 2y - 4 = 0 (b) 2x + y - 3 = 0
47. Length of latus rectum of parabola P is (c) x - 2y + 4 = 0 (d) 2x + y + 3 = 0
72 144
(a) (b) Paragraph IV
125 125
288 576 (Q. Nos. 55 to 57)
(c) (d)
125 125 If l and m are variable real numbers such that
48. Equation of directrix of parabola P is 5l 2 - 4lm + 6m 2 + 3l = 0, then the variable line lx + my = 1
(a) 4 x + 3y = 0 (b) 3 x + 4y = 12 always touches a fixed parabola, whose axis is parallel to the
(c) 3 x + 4y = 0 (d) 4 x + 3y = 12 X -axis.
Paragraph II 55. If (a , b ) is the vertex of the parabola, then the value of
(Q. Nos. 49 to 51) | a - b | is
Let C be the locus of the circumcentre of a variable triangle (a) 2 (b) 3
having sides Y -axis, y = 2 and ax + by =1, where (a , b ) lies on (c) 4 (d) 5
the parabola y 2 = 4 lx . 56. If (c , d ) is the focus of the parabola, then the value of
49. For l = 2, the product of coordinates of the vertex of 2 | d - c | is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 8
the curve C is
(a) - 8 (b) - 6 (c) 6 (d) 8 57. If ex + f = 0 is directrix of the parabola and e, f are
1 prime numbers, then the value of | e - f | is
50. For l = , the length of smallest focal chord of the (a) 2 (b) 4
32
(c) 6 (d) 8
curve C is
8 Paragraph V
(a) (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 8
3 (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
51. The curve C is symmetrical about the line C 1 is a curve y 2 = 4 x , C 2 is curve obtained by rotating C 1 ,
3 3 120° in anti-clockwise direction C 3 is reflection of C 2 with
(a) x = - (b) y = -
2 2 respect to y = x and S1 , S 2 , S3 are focii of C 1 , C 2 and C 3 ,
3 3 respectively, where O is origin.
(c) x = (d) y =
2 2
 Chap 05 Parabola 425

58. If (t 2 , 2 t ) are parametric form of curve C 1 , then the 63. Let D be the minimum area bounded by the tangent
parametric form of curve C 2 is and the coordinate axes, then the value of 8D is
1 1 (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 8
(a) æç (t 2 + 2 3 t ), ( 3 t 2 + 2t )ö÷
è2 2 ø Paragraph VII
1 1
(b) æç ( - t 2 + 2 3 t ), ( 3 t 2 + 2t )ö÷ (Q. Nos. 64 to 66)
è2 2 ø A parabola (P ) touches the conic
1 1
(c) æç ( - t 2 + 2 3 t ), ( - 3 t 2 + 2t )ö÷ x 2 + xy +y 2 - 2 x - 2y + 1 = 0
è2 2 ø at the points when it is cut by the line x + y + 1 = 0.
1 1
(d) æç ( - t 2 + 2 3 t ), ( - 3 t 2 - 2t )ö÷ 64. If equation of parabola (P ) is
è2 2 ø
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0, then the
59. Area of DOS 2 S3 is value of | a + b + c + f + g + h | is
1 1 (a) 8 (b) 10 (c) 12 (d) 14
(a) (b)
8 4
1 65. The length of latusrectum of parabola (P ) is
(c) (d) 1
2 (a) 2 (b) 3 2 (c) 5 2 (d) 7 2

60. If S1 ( x 1 , y 1 ), S 2 ( x 2 , y 2 ) and S3 ( x 3 , y 3 ), then the value of 66. If (a , b ) is the vertex of the parabola (P ), then the
Sx 12 + Sy 12 is value of | a - b | is
1 3
(a) 2 (b) 3 (a) 0 (b) (c) 1 (d)
2 2
(c) 4 (d) 5
Paragraph VI Paragraph VIII
(Q. Nos. 67 to 69)
(Q. Nos. 61 to 63)
y = 3 x is tangent to the parabola 2y = ax 2 + b.
Tangent to the parabola y = x 2 + ax + 1 at the point of
intersection of the Y -axis also touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2 . 67. The minimum value of a + b is
It is known that no point of the parabola is below X-axis. (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8
2 68. If ( 2 , 6 ) is the point of contact, then the value of 2a is
61. The value of 5 c when a attains its maximum value is
(a) 1 (b) 3 (a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5
(c) 5 (d) 7 69. If b =18, then the point of contact is
62. The slope of the tangent when C is maximum, is (a) (1, 3 ) (b) ( 2, 6 )
(a) - 1 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) 2 (c) (3, 9) (d) (6, 18 )

#L Parabola Exercise 4 :
Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n
This section contains 10 questions. The answer to each 72. The tangents and normals are drawn at the
question is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 (both extremities of the latusrectum of the parabola
inclusive). y 2 = 4 x . The area of quadrilateral so formed is l sq
70. Two tangents are drawn from the point ( - 2, -1) to the units, the value of l is
parabola y 2 = 4 x . If q is the angle between these 73. Three normals are drawn from the point (a , 0 ) to the
tangents, then the value of tanq is parabola y 2 = x . One normal is the X-axis. If other
71. If the distances of two points P and Q from the focus of two normals are perpendicular to each other, then
a parabola y 2 = 4 x are 4 and 9 respectively, the the value of 4a is
distance of the point of intersection of tangents at P
and Q from the focus is
426 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

74. AB is the chord of the parabola y 2 = 6 x with the 77. Radius of the largest circle which passes through the
vertex at A. BC is drawn perpendicular to AB meeting focus of the parabola y 2 = 4 x and contained in it, is
the axis at C. The projection of BC on the axis is l 78. If the circle ( x - 6 ) 2 + y 2 = r 2 and the parabola
units, then the value of l is y 2 = 4 x have maximum number of common chords,
75. The parabolas y = x 2 - 9 and y = lx 2 intersect at then the least integral value of r is
points A and B. If length of AB is equal to 2a and if 79. The slope of the line which belongs to the family of
la 2 + m = a 2 , then the value of m is lines (1 + a ) x + (a - 1)y + 2(1 - a ) = 0 and makes
76. Let n be the number of integral points lying inside shortest intercept on x 2 - 4y + 4 = 0 is
the parabola y 2 = 8 x and circle x 2 + y 2 = 16, then the
sum of the digits of number n is

#L Parabola Exercise 5 :
Matching Type Questions
n This section contains 3 questions. Each question has four
statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I and four (B) If the tangents drawn from the point (0, 2) to (q) 1
statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any given the parabola y2 = 4 ax are inclined at an angle
statement in Column I can have correct matching with 3p
, then the values of a are
one or more statement(s) given in Column II. 4
80. Match the following. (C) If two distinct chords of a parabola y2 = 4 ax (r) 2
Column I Column II passing through (a, 2a) are bisected on the line
x + y =1, then the length of latusrectum can be
(A) The number of common chords of the (p) Prime number
parabola x = y2 - 6 y + 11and (D) If the focus of the parabola x 2 - ay + 3 = 0 is (s) 3
y = x 2 - 6x + 11is (0, 2) and if two values of a are a1, a2 such that
a
(B) AB is a chord of the parabola y2 = 4 x (q) Composite a1 > a2, then the value of 1 is
a2
with vertex A, BC is drawn number
perpendicular to AB meeting the axis 82. Match the following.
at C. The projection of BC on the
axis of the parabola is Column I Column II
2 2
(A) The common chord of the circle x + y = 5 (p) (1, 2)
(C) The maximum number of common (r) Perfect number
normals of y2 = 4 ax and the parabola 6 y = 5x 2 + 7x will passes
and x 2 = 4 by is through the point (s)

(D) If the locus of the middle of point of (s) Even number (B) Tangents are drawn from point (2, 3) to the (q) (4 , 4 )
contact of tangents drawn to the parabola y2 = 4 x. Then, the points
parabola y2 = 8x and the foot of of contact are
perpendicular drawn from its focus to (C) From a point P on the circle x 2 + y2 = 5, the (r) (- 2, 1)
the tangents is a conic, then the length equation of chord of contact to the parabola
of latusrectum of this conic is y2 = 4 x is y = 2(x - 2). Then,
the coordinates of point P will be
81. Match the following.
(D) P(4 , - 4 ) and Q are points on the parabola (s) (9, - 6)
Column I Column II
y2 = 4 x such that the area of DPOQ is 6 sq
(A) If the parabola x 2 = ay makes an intercept of (p) -2 units, where O is the vertex. Then, the
length 40 on the line y - 2x = 1, then the coordinates of Q may be
values of a are
 #L Parabola Exercise 6 :
Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Q. Nos. 83 to 90) are Assertion-Reason type 86. Statement I The conic ax + by =1 represents a
questions. Each of these questions contains two
statements:
parabola.
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II Conic
Statement II (Reason) ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 represents a
Each of these questions also has four alternative choices,
only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select parabola, if h 2 = ab.
the correct choice as given below :
87. Statement I The lines from the vertex to the two
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a
correct explanation for Statement I extremities of a focal chord of the parabola y 2 = 4ax
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is not a are perpendicular to each other.
correct explanation for Statement I
Statement II If extremities of focal chord of a
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
parabola are (at 12 , 2at 1 ) and (at 22 , 2at 2 ), then t 1t 2 = - 1.
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
83. Statement I The equation of the common tangent to 88. Statement I Length of focal chord of a parabola
the parabolas y 2 = 4 x and x 2 = 4y is x + y + 1 = 0. y 2 = 8 x making an angle of 60° with X-axis is 32/3.

Statement II Both the parabolas are reflected to Statement II Length of focal chord of a parabola
each other about the line y = x . y 2 = 4ax making an angle a with X-axis is
84. Statement I Two perpendicular normals can be 4a sec 2 (a / 2 ).
5
drawn from the point æç , - 2 ö÷ to the parabola 89. Statement I Straight line x + y = l touch the
è2 ø
(y + 2 ) 2 = 2( x - 1). parabola y = x - x 2 , if k =1.

Statement II Two perpendicular normals can be Statement II Discriminant of ( x - 1) 2 = x - x 2 is

drawn from the point (3a , 0 ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax . zero.
a 90. Statement I Length of latusrectum of parabola
85. Statement I The line y = mx + is tangent to the (3 x + 4y + 5 ) 2 = 4( 4 x + 3y + 2 ) is 4.
m
parabola y 2 = 4ax for all values of m. Statement II Length of latusrectum of parabola
Statement II A straight line y = mx + c that intersects y 2 = 4ax is 4a.
the parabola y 2 = 4ax one point is a tangent line.

Parabola Exercise 7 :
Subjective Type Questions
n
In this section, there are 15 subjective questions. 93. Prove that the normal chord to a parabola at the
2
91. If the tangent to the parabola y = 4ax meets the axis point whose ordinate is equal to the abscissa
subtends a right angle at the focus.
in T and tangent at the vertex A in Y and the
rectangleTAYG is completed, show that the locus of 94. Find the shortest distance between the parabola
G is y 2 + ax = 0. y 2 = 4 x and circle x 2 + y 2 - 24y + 128 = 0.

92. If incident ray from point ( -1, 2 ) parallel to the axis of 95. Show that the locus of a point that divides a chord of
the parabola y 2 = 4 x strikes the parabola, find the slope 2 of the parabola y 2 = 4 x internally in the ratio
equation of the reflected ray. 1 : 2 is a parabola. Find the vertex of this parabola.
428 Textbook of Coordinate Geometery

96. Show that the locus of the points of intersection of 101. A family of chords of the parabola y 2 = 4ax is drawn
tangents to y 2 = 4ax , which intercept a constant so that their projections on a straight line inclined
length d on the directrix is (y 2 - 4ax )( x + a ) 2 = d 2 x 2 . equally to both the axes are all of a constant length c;
prove that the locus of their middle points is the
97. Through the vertex O of the parabola y 2 = 4ax two curve (y 2 - 4ax ) (y + 2a ) 2 + 2a 2 c 2 = 0.
chords OP and OQ are drawn and the circle on OP
and OQ as diameters intersect in R. If q 1 and q 2 are 102. The normals at P , Q , R are concurrent and PQ meets
the angles made with the axes by the tangents at P the diameter through R on the directrix x = - a . Prove
and Q to the parabola and f is the angle made by OR that PQ touches [or PQ envelopes] the parabola
with the axis of the parabola, then prove that y 2 + 16a ( x + a ) = 0.
cotq 1 + cotq 2 + 2 tan f = 0.
103. If the normals to the parabola y 2 = 4ax at three
98. Three normals with slopes m1 , m 2 and m3 are drawn points P , Q and R meet at A and S be the focus, prove
from a point P not on the axis of the parabola that SP × SQ × SR = a (SA ) 2 .
y 2 = 4 x . If m1m 2 = a, results in the locus of P being a
104. From a point A common tangents are drawn to the
part of the parabola, find the value of a.
circle x 2 + y 2 = (a 2 / 2 ) and the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
99. Find the locus of centres of a family of circles passing Find the area of the quadrilateral formed by the
through the vertex of the parabola y 2 = 4ax and common tangents, the chords of contact of the point
cutting the parabola orthogonally at the other point A, with respect to the circle and the parabola.
of intersection. 105. Prove that the any three tangents to a parabola
100.TP andTQ are tangents to the parabola y = 4ax . The 2 whose slopes are in harmonic progression enclose a
normals at P and Q intersect at R on the curve. Prove triangle of constant area.
that the circle circumscribing the DTPQ lies on the
parabola 2y 2 = a ( x - a ).

#L Parabola Exercise 8 :
Questions Asked in Previous 13 Year’s Exams
n
This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, (a) ( x + y ) 2 = ( x - y - 2) (b) ( x - y ) 2 = ( x + y + 2)
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. (c) ( x - y ) 2 = 4( x + y - 2) (d) ( x - y ) 2 = 8( x + y - 2)
2
106. Tangent to the curve y = x + 6 at a point (1, 7)
109. The equations of the common tangents to the
touches the circle x 2 + y 2 + 16 x + 12y + c = 0 at a
parabolas y = x 2 and y = - ( x - 2 ) 2 is/are
point Q. Then the coordinates of Q are
[IIT-JEE 2005, 3M] (a) y = 4( x - 1) (b) y = 0 [IIT-JEE 2006, 5M]
(a) ( - 6, - 11) (b) ( - 9, - 13 ) (c) y = - 4( x - 1) (d) y = - 30x - 50
(c) ( - 10, - 15) (d) ( - 6, - 7 )
110. The locus of the vertices of the family of parabolas
107. Let P be a point (1, 0) and Q a point on the locus a3x 2 a 2x
y 2 = 8 x . The locus of mid-point of PQ is y= + - 2a is [AIEEE 2006, 4.5 M ]
[AIEEE 2005, 3M] 3 105 2 3
(a) xy = (b) xy =
(a) x 2 - 4y + 2 = 0 (b) x 2 + 4y + 2 = 0 64 4
2 2 35 64
(c) y + 4 x + 2 = 0 (d) y - 4 x + 2 = 0 (c) xy = (d) xy =
16 105
108. The axis of a parabola is along the line y = x and the
111. Angle between the tangents to the curve
distance of its vertex from origin is 2 and that from
y = x 2 - 5 x + 6 at the points (2, 0) and (3, 0) is
its focus is 2 2. If vertex and focus both lie in the
first quadrant, the equation of the parabola is
[AIEEE 2006, 4 .5 M ]
(a) p / 3 (b) p / 2
[IIT-JEE 2006, 3M] (c) p / 6 (d) p / 4
 Chap 05 Parabola 429

112. Consider the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9 and the parabola 117. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the parabola
y 2 = 8 x . They intersect at P and Q in the first and y 2 = 4ax at a point P on it meet its axis at pointsT
fourth quadrants, respectively. Tangents to the circle and N, respectively. The locus of the centroid of the
at P and Q intersect the X-axis at R and tangents to DPTN is a parabola whose [IIT-JEE 2009, 4M ]
the parabola at P and Q intersect the X-axis at S. æ 2a ö
(a) vertex is ç , 0÷ (b) directrix is at x = 0
(i) The ratio of the areas of the DPQS and DPQR is è3 ø
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 2a
(c) latusrectum is (d) focus is (a, 0)
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 8 3

(ii) The radius of the circumcircle of the DPRS is 118. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parabola
(a) 5 (b) 3 3 y 2 = 4 x . If the axis of the parabola touches a circle of
(c) 3 2 (d) 2 3 radius r having AB as its diameter, The slope of the
line joining A and B can be [IIT-JEE 2010, 3M ]
(iii) The radius of the incircle of the DPQR is
1 1 2 2
[IIT-JEE 2007, (4 + 4 + 4) M] (a) - (b) (c) (d) -
(a) 4 (b) 3 r r r r
(c) 8/3 (d) 2 119. If two tangents drawn from a point P to the parabola
x 2 y 2 = 4 x are at right angles, the locus of P is
113. Statement I The curve y = - + x + 1 is symmetric [AIEEE 2010, 4M ]
2 (a) 2x + 1 = 0 (b) x = - 1
with respect to the line x =1 because (c) 2x - 1 = 0 (d) x = 1
Statement II A parabola is symmetric about its axis. 120. Consider the parabola y 2 = 8 x . Let D1 be the area of
[IIT-JEE 2007, 3M ] the triangle formed by the end points of its
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a æ1 ö
correct explanation for Statement I latusrectum and the point P ç , 2 ÷ on the parabola
è2 ø
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is
not a correct explanation for Statement I and D 2 be the area of the triangle formed by drawing
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false tangent at P and at the end points of the latusrectum.
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true D
Then, 1 is [IIT-JEE 2011, 4M ]
D2
114. The equation of a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 8 x is
y = x + 2. The point on this line from which the other 121. Let ( x , y ) be any point on the parabola y 2 = 4 x . Let P
tangent to the parabola is perpendicular to the given
be the point that divides the line segment from (0, 0)
tangent is [AIEEE 2007, 3M ] to ( x , y ) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then, the locus of P is
(a) ( - 1, 1) (b) (0, 2) [IIT-JEE 2011, 3M ]
(c) (2, 4) (d) ( - 2, 0) 2 2
(a) x = y (b) y = 2x
115. Consider the two curves 2
(c) y = x (d) x 2 = 2y
C 1 :y 2 = 4 x , C 2 : x 2 + y 2 - 6 x + 1 = 0, then
[IIT-JEE 2008, 3M ] 122. Let L be a normal to the parabola y 2 = 4 x . If L passes
(a) C 1 and C 2 touch each other only at one point through the point (9, 6), then L is given by
[IIT-JEE 2011, 4M ]
(b) C 1 and C 2 touch each other exactly at two points
(a) y - x + 3 = 0 (b) y + 3 x - 33 = 0
(c) C 1 and C 2 intersect (but do not touch) at exactly
(c) y + x - 15 = 0 (d) y - 2x + 12 = 0
two points
(d) C 1 and C 2 neither intersect nor touch each other 123. The shortest distance between line y - x =1 and curve
116. A parabola has the origin as its focus and the line x = y 2 is [AIEEE 2011, 4M ]
x = 2 as the directrix. The vertex of the parabola is at 3 2 8
[AIEEE 2008, 3M ] (a) (b)
8 3 2
(a) (0, 2) (b) (1, 0)
(c) (0, 1) (d) (2, 0) 4 3
(c) (d)
3 4
430 Textbook of Coordinate Geometery

124. Let S be the focus of the parabola y 2 = 8 x and let PQ 131. Let O be the vertex and Q be any point on the
be the common chord of the circle parabola x 2 = 8y . If the point P divides the line
x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 4y = 0 and the given parabola. The segment OQ internally in the ratio 1 : 3, then the
locus of P is [JEE Main 2015, 4 M]
area of the DPQS is [IIT-JEE 2012, 4M ]
(a) x 2 = y (b) y 2 = x
Paragraph (c) y 2 = 2x (d) x 2 = 2y
(Q. Nos. 125 and 126)
2
132. If the normals of the parabola y 2 = 4 x drawn at the
Let PQ be a focal chord of the parabola y = 4ax . The end points of its latusrectum are tangents to the
tangent to the parabola at P and Q meet at a point lying on circle ( x - 3 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = r 2 , then the value of r 2 is
the line y = 2 x + a, a > 0. [JEE Advanced 2013, 3+3 M] [JEE Advanced 2015, 4M]

125. If chord PQ subtends an angle q at the vertex of 133. Let the curve C be the mirror image of the parabola
y 2 = 4ax , them tanq is equal to y 2 = 4 x with respect to the line x + y + 4 = 0. If A and
2 2 2 2 B are the points of intersection of C with the line
(a) 7 (b) - 7 (c) 5 (d) - 5 y = - 5, the distance between A and B is
3 3 3 3
[JEE Advanced 2015, 4M]
126. Length of chord PQ is
(a) 7a (b) 5a (c) 2a (d) 3a 134. Let P and Q be distinct points on the parabola
y 2 = 2 x such that a circle with PQ as diameter passes
127. The slope of the line touching the parabolas y 2 = 4 x through the vertex O of the parabola. If P lies in the
and x 2 = - 32y is [JEE Main 2014, 4 M]
first quadrant and the area of the DOPQ is 3 2, then
which of the following is (are) the coordinates of P?
(a) 1/8 (b) 2/3
[JEE Advanced 2015, 4M]
(c) 1/2 (d) 3/2
128. The common tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 2 and (a) ( 4, 2 2 ) (b) ( 9, 3 2 )

the parabola y 2 = 8 x touch the circle at the points æ1 1 ö

(c) ç , ÷ (d) (1, 2 )
P , Q and the parabola at the points R, S. Then, the è4 2ø
area of the quadrilateral PQRS is 135. Let P be the point on the parabola y 2 = 8 x , which is
[JEE Advanced 2014, 3 M] at a minimum distance from the centre C of the circle
(a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 9 (d) 15 x 2 + (y + 6 ) 2 = 1, the equation of the circle passing
Paragraph through C and having its centre at P, is
(Q. Nos. 129 and 130) [JEE Main 2016, 4 M]
2 2
(a) x + y - 4 x + 8y + 12 = 0
Let a , r , s and t be non-zero real numbers. Let P (at 2 2at ),
æ a -2a ö (b) x 2 + y 2 - x + 4y - 12 = 0
2 2
Qç , ÷ , R (ar , 2ar ) and S (as , 2as ) be distinct points x
èt 2 t ø (c) x 2 + y 2 - + 2y - 24 = 0
4
on the parabola y 2 = 4ax . Suppose that PQ is the focal
(d) x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 9y + 18 = 0
chord and lines QR and PK are parallel, where K is the
point ( 2a , 0 ). [JEE Advanced 2014, (3 + 3) M] 136. The circle C 1 : x 2 + y 2 = 3 with centre at O, intersects
the parabola x 2 = 2y at the point P in the first
129. The value of r is
quadrant. Let the tangent to the circle C 1 at P
1 t2 +1 1 t2 -1
(a) - (b) (c) (d) touches other two circles C 2 and C 3 at R 2 and R3 ,
t t t t respectively. Suppose C 2 and C 3 have equal radii 2 3
130. If st =1, then the tangent at P and the normal at S to and centres Q 2 and Q 3 , respectively. If Q 2 and Q 3 lie
the parabola meet at a point whose ordinate is on the Y -axis, then [JEE Advanced 2016, 4M]
(t 2 + 1) 2 a(t 2 + 1) 2 (a) Q 2 Q 3 = 12
(a) (b) (b) R 2 R 3 = 4 6
2t 3 2t 3
a(t 2 + 1) 2 a(t + 2) 2
2 (c) area of DOR 2 R 3 is 6 2
(c) (d)
t3 t3 (d) area of DPQ 2 Q 3 is 4 2
 Chap 05 Parabola 431

137. Let P be the point on the parabola y 2 = 4 x which is at (a) 4( 2 + 1)

the shortest distance from the centre S of the circle (b) 2( 2 + 1)
x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 16y + 64 = 0. Let Q be the point on the (c) 2( 2 - 1)
circle dividing the line segment SP internally. Then, (d) 4( 2 - 1)
(a) SP = 2 5 [JEE Advanced 2016, 4M] 139. If a chord, which is not a tangent of the parabola
(b) SQ : QP = ( 5 + 1) : 2 y 2 =16 x has the equation 2x + y = p, and mid-point
(c) the x-intercept of the normal to the parabola at P is 6 (h, k ), then which of the following is (are) possible
1
(d) the slope of the tangent to the circle at Q is value(s) of p, h and k ? [JEE Advanced 2017, 4M]
2 (a) p = 2, h = 3, k = - 4
138. The radius of a circle, having minimum area, which (b) p = - 1, h = 1, k = - 3
touches the curve y = 4 - x 2 and the lines, y = | x | is (c) p = - 2, h = 2, k = - 4
(d) p = 5, h = 4, k = - 3
[JEE Main 2017, 4M]

Answers
Exercise for Session 1 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (d)
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (c) 31. (b,c) 32. (a,b) 33. (b,d) 34. (b,c,d) 35. (a,b,c, d) 36. (a, c)
7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (b) 37. (a,c) 38. (b,d) 39. (a,c) 40. (a,c) 41. (b,c,d) 42. (a,b,c,d)
13. 16x2 + 9 y2 + 24xy - 256x - 142 y + 849 = 0 43. (a,c,d) 44.(a,b,c) 45. (a,b) 46. (d) 47. (d) 48. (c)
49. (b) 50. (c) 51. (d) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (d)
14. 4x2 + y2 - 4xy + 104x + 148 y - 124 = 0
55. (b) 56. (b) 57. (d) 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (b)
-7 5 -17 5 ö 5 11
15. æç , ö÷ ; æç , ÷; y = ; x + = 0; 3 61. (a) 62. (b) 63. (b) 64. (c) 65. (d) 66. (a)
è 2 2ø è 2 2ø 2 4
67. (c) 68. (b) 69. (d) 70. (3) 71. (6) 72. (8)
16. Parabola 17. Parabola 73. (3) 74. (6) 75. (9) 76. (8) 77. (4) 78. (5)
2 68 5
19. x = y2 - 5 y + ; 20. 4 79. (0)
5 5 2 80. (A) ® (q,r,s); (B) ® (q,s); (C) ® (p); (D) ® (q)
81. (A) ® (p,q); (B) ® (p,r); (C) ® (q,r,s); (D) ® (s)
Exercise for Session 2
82. (A) ® (p,r); (B) ® (p,q); (C) ® (r); (D) ® (p,s)
1. (d) 2. (b, d) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (d)
83. (a) 84. (a) 85. (a) 88. (c) 87. (d) 88. (c)
7. (b) 9. x + 4a = 0 10. (a) y = 2x - 12 (b) y = 3x - 33
89. (c) 90. (d) 92. x = 1
12 3
11. y2 = (x - 6 ) 2 13. l = 8 2
343 2 94. 4( 5 - 1) 95. æç , ö÷ 98. (2)
è9 9ø
Exercise for Session 3 99. 2 y2 (2 y2 + x2 - 12ax) = ax (3x - 4a)2
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (c) 6. (c) 15a2
7. (a) 8. (c) 10. y2 = 2a (x - a) 11. y = x - 1, 8 2 sq units 104. sq units 106. (d) 107. (d) 108. (d) 109. (a, b)
4
110.(a) 111. (b) 112. [i] (c) [ii] (b) [iii] (d) 113. (a)
Chapter Exercise 114.(d) 115. (b) 116. (b) 117. (a,d) 118. (c,d) 119. (b)
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (d) 6. (a) 120. (2) 121. (c) 122. (a,b,d)123. (a) 124. 4 sq units
7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c) 125. (d) 126. (b) 127. (c) 128. (d) 129. (d) 130. (b)
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (c)
131. (d) 132. (2) 133. (4) 134. (a,d)
19. (d) 20. (c) 21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (a)
135. (a) 136. (a,b,c) 137. (a,c,d) 138. (d) 139. (a)
Solutions
1. Equation of tangent of y 2 = 4bx is
or

or

or
k12 - l2k1 - l4 = 0

k1 =

k1
l2
FG
=

=
l2 ± ( l4 + 4 l4 )

1+ 5
2
5+1
2
[Q k1 > 0]

BC 2
b
y = mx + …(i) 5. Coordinates of A and B are
m
p (VA cos q, VA sin q) and (VB sin q, - VB cos q) respectively
Here, m = tan = 1
4 Q A and B lie on y 2 = x, then (VA sin q) 2 = VA cos q
From Eq. (i), y = x + b
Y
For common tangent y = x + b is also tangent of circle
A
x 2 + y 2 = a 2, then
|0-0+b|
=a θ
1+1 X′ X
V 90°– θ
Þ b =a 2 [Q a > 0, b > 0]
2. The coordinates of vertex and focus of required parabola are
(a, 0 ) and (a1, 0 ) respectively. Therefore, the distance between B
Y′
the vertex and the focus is AS = a1 - a . So, the length of
latusrectum is 4 (a1 - a ). Thus, the equation of the required cos q
parabola is Þ VA =
sin 2 q
(y - 0 ) 2 = 4 (a1 - a ) ( x - a )
sin q
or y 2 = 4 (a1 - a ) ( x - a ). Similarly, VB =
cos2 q
3. The parabolas are equal if the lengths of their latusrectum are | VA |
equal. \ = cot 3 q
| VB |
The length of latusrectum of y 2 = ax is a
6. Q x = t 2 - t + 1, y = t 2 + t + 1
The equation of second parabola can be written as
\ x + y = 2t 2 + 2 and y - x = 2t
æ 3 x - 4y - 2 ö
( x - 3 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = ç ÷
è 5 ø or 2 ( x + y - 2 ) = 4 t 2 = (2t ) 2 = (y - x ) 2
Here, focus is (3, - 2 ) and the equation of directrix is or (x - y )2 = 2 (x + y - 2)
3 x - 4y - 2 = 0. 2
æx -yö æ x + y - 2ö
\Length of latusrectum= 2 ´ Distance between focus and or ç ÷ = 2ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
directrix
x -y x + y -2
½ 9 - 4 ´ - 2 - 2½ For vertex, = 0 and =0
= 2½ ½= 6 2 2
½ (9 + 16 ) ½
or x = y and x + y = 2
Thus, the two parabolas are equal if a = 6. \ x =y =1
4. Let DC = CB = BA = AD = k Hence, vertex is (1, 1).
\ Coordinates of B are (k, k ), 7. It is clear from figure
which lie on y =l x Y
\ k=l k
\ k = l2 y2=4x
2
\ BC = k = l …(i)
X′ X
(–p,0) (0,0)
Also, let CG = GF = FE = EC = k1
\Coordinates of F are ( l2 + k1, k1 ),
which lie on y =l x
Y′
Then k1 = l ( l2 + k1 )
Þ k12 = l4 + l2k1 - p < 0 or p > 0
 Chap 05 Parabola 433

8. The point of intersection of the parabolas y 2 = 4ax and meet the curve again at Q, then
x 2 = 4ay are (0, 0) and ( 4a, 4a ) but a ¹ 0. 2
t 2 = - t1 - …(i)
t1
Now, 2bx + 3cy + 4d = 0 passes through (0, 0) and ( 4a, 4a ).
Here tan a = - t1 and tan b = - t 2, from Eq. (i)
Therefore, d = 0 and 2b ( 4a ) + 3c ( 4a ) = 0 i.e.,
2
2b + 3c = 0 [Q a ¹ 0] \ - tan b = tan a +
tan a
or d 2 + (2b + 3c ) 2 = 0
Þ tan a (tan a + tan b ) = - 2
9. Q (OT ) 2 = OA × OB 12. Let A º ( a, b)
= a×b The equation of normal at (at 2, 2at )
Y
y + tx = 2at + at 3 …(i)
( a, b ) lie on Eq. (i), then
(0,c)
at 3 + (2a - a ) t - b = 0 …(ii)
X′ o X Let t1, t 2 and t 3 be the roots of Eq. (ii), then
B(β,0)
A(α,0) T at 3 + (2a - a ) t - b = a (t - t1 ) (t - t 2 ) (t - t 3 ) …(iii)
Let P º (at12, 2at1 ), Q º (at 22, 2at 2 ) and R º (at 32, 2at 3 )
Y′ Since, the focus is S (a, 0 )
\ SP = a (1 + t12 ), SQ = a (1 + t 22 )
or OT = a b …(i)
and SR = a (1 + t 32 )
Parabola cuts X -axis at a and b.
On putting t = i = - 1 in Eq. (iii), we get
\a, b are the roots of ax 2 + bx + c = 0
c - ai + (2a - a ) i - b
\ ab = …(ii) = a (i - t1 ) (i - t 2 ) (i - t 3 )
a
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get or | (a - a ) i - b | = a | i - t1 | | i - t 2 | i - t 3 |
c Þ (a - a ) 2 + b 2
OT =
a = a (1 + t12 ) (1 + t 22 ) (1 + t 32 )
10. Q Two perpendicular tangents meet a point on directrix.
or a ((a - a ) 2 + b 2 ) = a (1 + t12 ) × a (1 + t 22 ) × a (1 + t 32 )
Now, equations of tangents at (at12, 2at1 ) and (at 22, 2 at 2 ) are
a (SA ) 2 = SP × SQ × SR
t1y = x + at12 and t 2y = x + at 22, respectively.
or SP × SQ × SR = a (SA ) 2
\ P1 º ( - at12, 0 ), P2 º ( - at 22, 0 )
13. Let AB be a normal chord, where A º (at12, 2at1 ) and
Þ SP1 = a (1 + t12 ), SP2 = a (1 + t 22 ) and t1t 2 = - 1
2
1 1 1 1 B º (at 22, 2at 2 ), we have t 2 = - t1 -
\ + = + t1
SP1 SP2 a (1 + t12 ) a (1 + t 22 )
Now, AB = (at12 - at 22 ) 2 + (2at1 - 2at 2 ) 2
1 1 é 1ù
= + ê\ t 2 = - t ú
a (1 + t12 ) æ 1ö ë 1û
= a | t1 - t 2 | (t1 + t 2 ) 2 + 4
a ç1 + 2 ÷
è t1 ø ½ æ 1ö½ æ 4 ö
= a ½ 2 çt1 + ÷ ½ ç 2 + 4 ÷
1 t12 1 ½ è t ø
1 ½ è t1 ø
= + =
a (1 + t12 ) a (1 + t12 ) a (t12 + 1 ) 3
= 4a
11. Let P º (at12, 2at1 ) and Q º (at 22, 2at 2 ) t14
Y
(t12 + 1 ) 3
P
( AB ) 2 = 16a 2
t14

α β d ( AB ) 2 ì (1 + t12 ) 2 2 ü
X′ X
= 16a 2 í 5
(t1 - 2 )ý
A dt1 î t1 þ
2
d ( AB )
For = 0 Þ t1 = 2
dt1
Y′ Q For which ( AB ) 2 is minimum, thus
Equation of normal at P is 16a 2 (2 + 1 ) 3
ABmin = = 2a 27
y + t1 x = 2at1 + at13 4
434 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

14. On solving \ Shortest distance = AB

x 2 + y 2 = a 2 and y 2 = 4 ( x + 4 ) æ 3 1ö æ1 3 ö
2 2
= ç - ÷ +ç - ÷
Þ x 2 + 4 (x + 4) = a 2 è 4 2ø è2 4ø
or x 2 + 4 x + 16 - a 2 = 0 æ1 1ö 1 1
= ç + ÷ = =
If the circle and parabola touch each other, then è 16 16 ø 8 2 2
D = 0 Þ16 - 4 × 1 × (16 - a 2 ) = 0 18. We know that normals at (at12, 2at1 ) and (at 22, 2at 2 ) meet again
Þ a 2 = 12 or a = 2 3 on the parabola. Then t1t 2 = 2
Here, a =1
15. sin q > | 2a | [Q h > 2a]
and x1 = at12 = t12 and y1 = 2at1 = 2t1
1
Þ 0 < | 2a | < 1 or 0 < | a | < x 2 = at 22 = t 22 and y 2 = 2at 2 = 2t 2
2
æ 1 ö æ 1ö Given x1 + x 2 = 4 Þ t12 + t 22 = 4
\ a Î ç - , 0÷ È ç 0, ÷
è 2 ø è 2ø or (t1 + t 2 ) 2 - 2t1t 2 = 4
2
16. Tangent to y = 4x in terms of m is Þ (t1 + t 2 ) 2 = 8 [Q t1t 2 = 2]
1 or | t1 + t 2 | = 8
y = mx + …(i)
m
or | 2t1 + 2t 2 | = 2 8
and normal to x 2 = 4by in terms of m is
or | y1 + y 2 | = 2 8 = 4 2
b
y = mx + 2b + 2 …(ii) 19. Let any point at distance r from A on the parabola is
m
Q Eqs. (i) and (ii) are same, then ( - 2 + r cos q, r sin q),
1 b then r 2 sin 2 q = 4 ( - 2 + r cos q)
= 2b + 2
m m or r 2 sin 2 q - 4r cos q + 8 = 0
Þ 2bm 2 - m + b = 0
Y
For two different tangents
Q
\ D > 0 Þ 1 - 8b 3 > 0
1 P
or |b| < X′ θ X
2 2 A(–2,0) O
2 2
17. The given parabolas 2y = 2x - 1 and 2x = 2y - 1 are
symmetrical about the line y = x . The shortest distance occurs
along the common normal which is perpendicular to the line Y′
y = x.
Let P and Q are distances r1 and r2 from A, then
Therefore, the tangent at point A on 2y 2 = 2 x - 1 is parallel to
4 cos q
y = x. Therefore, r1 + r2 =
sin 2 q
dy dy 1
4y =2 Þ = =1 8
dx dx 2y and r1r2 =
sin 2 q
1 3
or y = and x = 1 1 1 1 r +r cos q
2 4 Now, + = + = 1 2 =
æ 3 1ö AP AQ r1 r2 r1r2 2
\ A º ç , ÷ , then coordinates of B on 2 x 2 = 2y - 1 is 1 1 1
è 4 2ø given that + <
æ1 3 ö AP AQ 4
Bºç , ÷
è2 4ø cos q 1
Þ <
2 4
2x2=2y–1 y=x 1
B or cos q <
2
or tan q > 3
A
æ pö
2y2=2x–1
[Q cos q is decreasing and tan q is increasing in ç 0, ÷ ]
è 2ø
\ Slope (m ) > 3
 Chap 05 Parabola 435

20. Coordinates of A are (a - l cos 30° , l sin 30° ) 2a - 1

or x2 = >0
Y a2
or 2a - 1 > 0
A
1
l \ a>
60° 2
X′ 30° X
O M 30° S(a,0) æ1 ö
60° or a Î ç , ¥÷
l è2 ø
B ®
22. V = ( l2 - 1) $i + (2l - 0) $j
Y′ ®
V = ( l2 - 1 ) $i + (2 l ) $j …(i)
æ l 3 lö
or A º ça - , ÷
è 2 2ø Y
2
which lies on y = 4ax, then p(l2, 2l)

l2 æ l 3ö 2 2 (0,1) M →
= 4a ça - ÷ Þl + 8a 3l - 16a = 0 v
4 è 2 ø
o X
(1,0)S
- 8a 3 ± (192a 2 + 64a 2 ) x+y=1
\ l =
2
- 8a 3 ± 16a
=
2
= 4a (2 - 3 ) [taking +ve sign] ®
and n = ( 0 - 1 ) i$ + (1 - 0 ) $j
Aliter :
Let A º (at12, 2at1 ) and B º (at12 - 2at1 ). = - $i + $j
® ®
Slope of SA = tan (180° - 30° ) The projection of V on n = y [given]
2at1
= - tan 30° ® ®
at12 - a V× n -( l2 - 1 ) + 2 l
\ y = = …(ii)
2t1 1 ® 2
=- | n|
t12 - 1 3
dx
or t12 + 2 3t1 - 1 = 0' or t1 = - 3 ± 2 Given, =4
dt
Thus, t1 = 2 - 3 [Q t1 = - 2 - 3 rejected]
d 2 dl
Here, AB = 4at1 = 4a (2 - 3 ) Þ (l - 1) = 4 Þ 2l =4
dt dt
21. C : x 2 + (y - 1) 2 = 1 and P : y = ax 2 When P º ( 4, 4 ),
y We have l = 2, therefore
Putting x = in x 2 + (y - 1 ) 2 = 1
2
a dl
y =1 …(iii)
or + (y - 1 ) 2 = 1 dt
a
y From Eq. (ii),
or y 2 - 2y + = 0
a dl
(2 - 2 l )
1 dy dt
\ y = 0 or y = 2 - = [from Eq. (ii)]
a dt 2
Y (2 - 4 ) ´ 1
= =- 2
2
23. Given parabola is
(0,1) 3ö
æ
y 2 = 6 çx - ÷
è 2ø
X′ X
Y′ 3 6
The equation of directrix is x - + =0
2 4
1
On substituting y = 2 - in y = ax 2, then i.e. x=0
a
æ3 3 ö
1 Let the coordinates of P be ç + t 2, 3t ÷
ax 2 = 2 - è2 2 ø
a
436 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y
Þ P , R, Q are collinear.
P 3 3 t2, 3t 2
+
(0,3t) M 60° 2 2 Slope of PQ = [Q OR ^ PQ]
60° t1 + t 2
60°
(t + t 2 )
X′
O
X \ Slope of OR = - 1 = tan f
S (3,0) 2
or t1 + t 2 = - 2 tan f
Þ cot q1 + cot q2 = - 2 tan f
Y′ 26. Let A º (at 2, 2at ) and B º (at 2, - 2at )
Therefore, MS = MP Y
3 3 A
(9 + 9t 2 ) = + t 2
2 2 A1
9
or 9 + 9t = (1 + t 2 ) 2
2
θ
4 X′ X
O θ
or 1 + t2 = 4 S(a,0) M
B1
\Length of each side = MS
B
= 9 (1 + t 2 ) = 36 = 6 Y′

24. The area of DABC is maximum if CD is maximum, because AB

The equations of tangents at A and B are
is fixed.
Y ty = x + at 2 and - ty = x + at 2.
B (9,6)
These tangents meet the Y -axis atA1 ( 0, at ) and B1( 0, - at )
C respectively.
Area of trapezium
X′ X 1
O D AA1 B1B = (AB + A1B1 ) ´ OM
2
A(
4,– 1
4) 24a = ( 4at + 2at ) ´ at 2
2
2
Y′
24a 2 = 3a 2t 3 Þ t 3 = 8
It is clear that tangent drawn to the parabola at C should be
parallel to AB. \ t =2
For y 2 = 4x \Coordinates of A1 and B1 are ( 0, 2a ) and ( 0, - 2a ) respectively.
dy dy 2 If ÐOSA1 = ÐOSB1 = q, then
\ 2y = 4 or = = slope of AB 2a
dx dx y \ tan q = =2
a
2 6+4 1
Þ = = 2 or y = 1, then x = Þ q = tan -1 2
y 9-4 4
Hence, subtended angle = 2 q = 2 tan -1 2
æ1 ö
Hence, coordinates of C are ç , 1 ÷ . 3
è4 ø 5 n æ1ö
27. Given, = C 3( px )n - 3 ç ÷ = nC 3 × pn - 3x n-6
…(i)
2 èxø
25. Q Tangent at P (at12, 2at1 ) is t1y = x + at12.
1 Since, LHS of Eq. (i) is independent of x
\ tan q1 = \ n - 6 = 0 Þn = 6
t1
Y 2 at 1) From Eq. (i),
,2
p(at 1 5 6
= C 3p 3 = 20 p 3
2
3
æ1ö 1
X′ O X Þ p3 = ç ÷ Þ p=
R è2ø 2
Given, parabola is y 2 = x
Q(a 2 Here, 4a = 1
t 2 , 2 at
Y′ 2) 1
Þ a=
1 4
Similarly, tan q2 =
t2 Since, three normals are drawn from point (q, 0 ),
Q Angle in a semicircle is 90°. 1 é 1ù
\ q > 2a or q > or q > p êëQ p = 2 úû
\ ÐORP = ÐORQ = 90° 2
 Chap 05 Parabola 437

2
28. y 2 - 4 x - 2y + 5 = 0 æ x + 2y - 2 ö 12 æ 2 x - y - 1 ö
Þ ç ÷ = ç ÷
Þ (y - 1 ) 2 - 4 x + 4 = 0 è 5 ø 5 è 5 ø

Þ (y - 1 ) 2 = 4 ( x - 1 ) x + 2y - 2 2x - y - 1
Let = X, =Y
5 5
Let y - 1 = Y and x - 1 = X
12 5 2
then, y 2 = 4 X comparing with Y 2 = 4ax or X2 = Y or Y = X
5 12
\ a =1
5
Q All three normals to the parabola are real and meet on the \ k=
12
axis of parabola, then
X > 2a and Y = 0 31. Equation of tangent of parabola
10
i.e., x - 1 > 2 and y - 1 = 0 y 2 = 40 x is y = mx + … (i)
\ x > 3 and y = 1 m
or (k, 1 ); k > 3 which is also tangent of circle x + y 2 = 50 , then
2

29. Let P ( x 0, x 02 ) be any point on the parabola y = x 2 10

Y m
=5 2
(m 2 + 1 )
y = x 02
Þ m4 + m2 - 2 = 0
Q P(x0,x02)
Þ (m 2 + 2 ) (m 2 - 1 ) = 0
X \ m 2 = 1, m 2 + 2 ¹ 0 or m = ± 1
O
From Eq. (i), common tangents are
y = x + 10 and y = - x - 10
2 or x - y + 10 = 0 and x + y + 10 = 0
T (0,–X0 )
32. Let coordinates of P be (t 2, 2t )
Equation of tangent at P ( x 0, x 02 ) is
2t - 0 2
1 \ Slope of PV = =
xx 0 = (y + x 02 ) t2 - 0 t
2
Þ 2 xx 0 - y - x 02 = 0 t
Þ Slope of QV is -
2
Tangent meets the Y -axis at T ( 0, - x 02 ). -t
1 \ Equation of QV is y = x
Hence, the area of the triangle DPTQ = ´ PQ ´ QT 2
2 æ 16 - 8 ö
1 Solving it with y 2 = 4 x, we get Q ç 2 , ÷
= ´ x 0 ´ 2 x 02 = x 03 èt t ø
2
Y
which increases in the interval [1, 2 ] and hence is greatest
when x 0 = 2.
P
æ 2x - y + 2 ö 2 2
30. ç ÷ = ( x - 2 ) + (y - 0 ) [given]
è 5 ø
X¢ X
Þ (2 x - y + 2 ) 2 = 5 ( x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 4 ) V
or x 2 + 4y 2 + 4 xy = 28 x - 4y - 16
Þ ( x + 2y ) 2 = 4 (7 x - y - 4 )
Q
Q x + 2y = 0 and 7 x - y - 4 = 0 and are not perpendicular. Y¢
\ ( x + 2y + l ) 2 = (2 l + 28 ) x + ( 4 l - 4 ) y + l2 - 16 …(i)
Area of DPVQ = 20 (given)
Now, (slope of x + 2y + l = 0) ´ (slope of 2
1 t 2t
(2 l + 28 ) x + ( 4 l - 4 ) y + l2 - 16 = 0 ) = - 1 Þ | 16 - 8 | = 20
1 (2 l + 28 ) 2
\ - ´- = -1 t2 t
2 (4l - 4) 4
Þ t+ =±5
Þ 2 l + 28 = - 8 l + 8 t
or 10 l = - 20 Þ t 2 - 5t + 4 = 0 or t 2 + 5t + 4 = 0
\ l = -2
\ t = 1, 4 or t = - 1, - 4
From Eq. (i),
Hence coordinates of P are (1, 2), (16, 8), (1 - 2 ), (16, - 8 )
( x + 2y - 2 ) 2 = (24 x - 12y - 12 )
438 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

33. Parabola is y 2 = 4ax and circle is ( x + b ) 2 + (y - 0) 2 = b 2 35. Equation of normal in slope form is
If parabola and circle touch each other externally, then y = mx - 2am - am 3,

Y if normals meet at (h, k ), then

a>0 am 3 - (h - 2a )m + k = 0 ...(i)
Let P º (am12, - 2am1 ), Q = (am22, - 2am2 )
X¢ X and R º (am32, - 2am3 )
(–b, 0) S(a, 0)
Þ m1, m2, m3 are the roots of Eq. (i), then
m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 ...(ii)
Y¢
i.e. algebraic sum of the slopes of the normals at P , Q and R
vanishes.
Y
a>0 From Eq. (ii)
- 2am1 - 2am2 - 2am3 = 0
i.e. algebraic sum of the ordinates of the points P , Q and R
X¢ X vanishes.
S(a, 0) (–b, 0)
Also, y-coordinate of centroid of DPQR is zero
\ centroid lies on X -axis
Y¢ and circle circumscribing the triangle PQR always passes
through the vertex of the parabola.
If a > 0, - b < 0 and if a < 0, - b > 0 36. Let P º ( l, l + 1), where l ¹ 0, - 1
or a > 0, b > 0 and a < 0, b < 0 or P º (l, l - 1), where l ¹ 0, 1
2
34. Let ( x1, y1 ) º (at , 2at ) The point (l, l + 1) is on y 2 = 4 x + 1, therefore
Equation of tangent at (at 2, 2at ) is ty = x + at 2 (l + 1)2 = 4 l + 1
æ l + at 2 ö Þ l2 - 2 l = 0
Let any point on this tangent is ç l, ÷
è t ø \ l =2
Therefore, the ordinate of P is 3
The chord of contact of this point w.r.t the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2
and the point ( l, l - 1) is on y 2 = 4 x + 1, therefore
is
æ l + at 2 ö ( l - 1 ) 2 = 4( l) + 1
x×l + y × ç ÷ = a2 Þ l2 - 6 l = 0
è t ø
æ yö \ l =6
Þ (aty - a 2 ) + l × ç x + ÷ = 0 Therefore, the ordinate of P is 5,
è tø
which is family of straight lines passing through the point of 37. From figure,
intersection of
y
aty - a 2 = 0 and x + = 0 P (t2, 2t)
t (–1, 2t) A
æ-a aö 60° 60°
So, the fixed point is ç 2 , ÷ , therefore
è t tø
60°
a a
x2 = - 2 , y 2 =
t t O S (1, 0)
2 2
Clearly, x1x 2 = - a , y1y 2 = 2a
Þ x1x 2 + y1y 2 = a 2
x1 y1
Also, = - t4 , = 2t 2
x2 y2
2 Slope of AP = 0 and slope of AS = - t
æ y1 ö æ x1 ö
or ç ÷ + 4ç ÷ = 0 0 - (- t )
èy2 ø è x2 ø \ tan 60° =
1+0
y1 x1
Þ - 4, , are in G.P. Þ 3 =|t |
y 2 x2
y Þ t=± 3
Also, y1y 2 = 2a 2 Þ 1 , a, y 2 are in G.P.
2 \ Coordinates of P are (3, ± 2 3 )
 Chap 05 Parabola 439

38. Let M( a, b) be the foot of the perpendicular from the focus QOPQR is a rectangle.
S (a, 0 ) on any tangent to the parabola at P (at 2, 2at ). \Mid-point of OQ = mid-point of PR
i.e. ty + x + at 2 16a x 16
Þ x = at 2 + 2 Þ = t2 + 2 … (i)
2 t a t
Þ a - tb + at = 0 …(i)
8a y 4
Y and y = 2at - Þ =t - … (ii)
t 2a t
P
M From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
2
æy ö 2 16 x
ç ÷ =t + 2 -8 = -8
è 2a ø t a
X¢ X
O S (a, 0) Þ y 2 = 4ax - 32a 2
or y 2 = 4a( x - 8a )
which is equal parabola and focus (9a, 0 ) and directrix
Y¢ x - 8a = - a
or x - 7a = 0.
Since, SM is perpendicular to the tangent
1 b-0 41. Let point of intersection of the line y = mx with the chord be
\ ´ = -1 (l, ml), then
t a -a
1.4 + 2. x1 3l - 4
Þ at + b - at = 0 …(ii) l= Þ x1 =
1+2 2
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
1.4 + 2. y1 3ml - 4
a=0 and ml = Þ y1 =
1+2 2
The locus of M( a, b ) is the tangent at the vertex.
i.e. x=0 Y
y=mx
39. Given that the extremities of the latusrectum are (1, 1) and x2=4y
1
(1, - 1 ), then 4a = 2 or a = P (4, 4)
2
2
So, the focus of the parabola is (1, 0).
æ1 ö æ3 ö 1
Hence, the vertex can be ç , 0 ÷ or ç , 0 ÷ .
è2 ø è2 ø (x1, y1) Q
æ 1ö2 X¢ X
Therefore, the equations of the parabola can be y = 2 ç x - ÷
è 2ø
2 æ 3ö Y¢
or y = 2 ç x - ÷
è 2ø
QQ ( x1, y1 ) lies on the parabola x 2 = 4y , then
Þy 2 = 2 x - 1 or y 2 = 2 x - 3. 2
æ 3l - 4 ö æ 3ml - 4 ö
40. Let P º (at 2, 2at ) and R º (at12, 2at1 ) ç ÷ = 4ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
Q OP ^ OR
Þ 9 l2 - 24 l(1 + m ) + 48 = 0
P For two distinct chords D > 0
Þ (24 ) 2 (1 + m ) 2 - 4 × 9 × 48 > 0
or (1 + m ) 2 > 3
O Q (x, y) Þ 1+m<- 3
or 1+m> 3
R \ m < - 3 -1
or m > 3 -1
\Slope of OP ´ Slope of OR = - 1
2 2 Hence , m Î ( -¥, - 3 - 1 ) È ( 3 - 1, ¥ )
Þ ´ = -1
t t1 42. The given parabola is y 2 = 4(2) x
4
\ t1 = - Þ a =2
t
Since, P( - 2, 0 ) lies on the directrix and the axis.
æ 16a - 8a ö
Now, coordinates of R are ç 2 , ÷
è t t ø
440 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Þ The tangents will have slope m = ± 1 and the equations are The diagonals of the quadrilateral may be equal as the
y = x + 2 and y = - x - 2. quadrilateral may be an isosceles trapezium.
A rectangle cannot be inscribed in a parabola.
Directior

Q Sol. (Q. Nos. 46 to 48)

Let A º ( 4, 0 ) and B º ( 0, 3 ).
Q OA and OB are mutually perpendicular tangents to the
45°
X¢
45°
X parabola. Therefore, O will lie on the directrix of the parabola.
(–2, 0) P S(2, 0)
Y

The chord of contact of tangents is QR as x = 2 (i.e. L.R.)

Q Common chord of two circles is X -axis.
Q ÐQPR = 90° L
B (0, 3)
\Circumcentre is S(2, 0 ) on X -axis and orthocentre is P( - 2, 0 )
S(α, β)
on X -axis.
X
Centroid and incentre also lies on X -axis, O A (4, 0)
(Q orthocentre, centroid, circumcentre and
incentre are collinear). M
æ 1ö
43. Given parabola is (y - 2) 2 = 4ç x - ÷ Let S(a, b) be the focus of the parabola.
è 2ø
1 Q Portion of a tangent to a parabola intercepted between the
Let x - = X, y - 2 = Y directrix and point of contact subtends a right angle at the
2
focus.
\ Parabola is Y 2 = 4 X p
\ ÐOSA = ÐOSB =
Any point on axis of parabola is ( x, 2 ) for three distinct normals 2
X > 2.1 Now, OS ^ SA Þ Slope of OS ´ Slope of SA = - 1
1 5
Þ x - > 2 or x > æ b-0 ö æ b - 0 ö
2 2 Þ ç ÷´ç ÷ =- 1
è a - 0ø è a - 4ø
\ x = 3, 4, 5
Hence, points are (3, 2), (4, 2) and (5, 2). Þ a2 + b2 - 4a = 0 ...(i)
44. The given parabola is y 2 - 16x - 8y = 0 Again, OS ^ SB Þ Slope of OS ´ Slope of SB = - 1
2 æ b - 0 ö æ b- 3 ö
Þ (y - 4 ) = 16( x + 1 ) Þ ç ÷´ç ÷ = -1
è a - 0ø è a - 0ø
Shifting the origin to the point ( - 1, 4 ) the equation of parabola
becomes y 2 = 16 x Þ a 2 + b 2 - 3b = 0 ...(ii)
then the coordinates of the point (14, 7) becomes (15, 3). From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
\Equation of any normal to the parabola is Y + tX = 8t + 4t 3. 4 a = 3b ...(iii)
Since, tangents AO and BO at A and B to parabola are at right
Since, it passes through (15, 3)
angles, therefore AB will be a focal chord of the parabola.
\ 3 + 15t = 8t + 4t 3 Þ 4t 3 - 7t - 3 = 0
Equation of AB is
3 1 x y a b
or (t + 1 ) (2t - 3 ) (2t + 1 ) = 0 Þ t = - 1, , - + =1 Þ + =1
2 2 4 3 4 3
\Corresponding points are ( 4, - 8 ), (9, 12) and (1, - 4 ). Þ 3 a + 4b = 12 ...(iv)
Hence, the coordinates of the feet of the normals w.r.t. the
From Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
original system of coordinates are (3, - 4 ), (8, 16) and (0, 0).
36 48
45. As a circle can intersect a parabola at four points, the a = and b =
25 25
quadrilateral may be cyclic.
æ 36 48 ö
\ Focus of parabola is ç , ÷ .
è 25 25 ø
46. Q Focus is (a, b ).
12
\ b - a = b- a =
25
 Chap 05 Parabola 441

36 ö
2
48 ö 16
2 3
æ æ 49. Product of coordinates of vertex = - 2l ´ = - 3l
47. Q AS = ç 4 - ÷ + ç 0 - ÷ = 2
è 25 ø è 25 ø 5
= -3 ´2 [Q l = 2]
2 2
æ 36 ö æ 48 ö 9 = -6
and BS = ç 0 - ÷ + ç3 - ÷ =
è 25 ø è 25 ø 5
50. Length of smallest focal chord = Length of latusrectum
If l be the semi-latusrectum, then l = HM of AS and BS 1
2 5 5 125 =
\ = + = 8l
l 16 9 144 1 1ù
é
288 = =4 êëQ l = 32 úû
Þ l = æ1ö
125 8´ç ÷
è 32 ø
576
\ 2l = 3
125 51. Let y - = Y , x + 2l = X
2
b 4
48. Q Slope of OS = = 1
a 3 \ Y2 = X
8l
3
\ Slope of directrix LM = - Curve is symmetrical about Y = 0
4
3
3 Þ y - =0
\ Equation of directrix is y = - x 2
4
3
Þ 3 x + 4y = 0. \ y =
2
Sol. (Q. Nos. 49 to 51)
Sol. (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)
Since, (a, b ) lies on parabola, y 2 = 4 lx
Given parabola ( P ) can be written as
\ b 2 = 4al ...(i) ( x - 2y ) 2 = 32 x - 4y - 16
It is clear that DPQR is right angled at P( 0, 2 ). On adding 2( x - 2y ) l + l2 both sides, it becomes
Y
(x - 2y + l)2 = 32 x - 4y - 16 + 2( x - 2y ) l + l2
Q P
= 2( l + 16 ) x - 4( l + 1 )y + l2 - 16 ...(i)
y=2
R We choose l such that lines
X′ X x - 2y + l = 0 and 2( l + 16 ) x - 4( l + 1 )y + l2 - 16 = 0
O
ax
+

are perpendicular to each other. It requires

by
=

1 2( l + 16 )
1

´ = -1
Y′ 2 4( l + 1 )
Þ l + 16 = - 4 l - 4
So, its circumcentre is the mid-point of Q and R, where
æ 1 - 2b ö æ 1ö Þ l=-4
Qºç , 2 ÷ and R º ç 0, ÷ . Hence, Eq. (i) becomes
è a ø è bø
æ 1 - 2b 1ö ( x - 2y - 4 ) 2 = 24 x + 12y = 12(2 x + y )
\ Circumcentre º ç ,1 + ÷ 2
è 2a 2b ø æ x - 2y - 4 ö 12 æ 2 x + y ö 2
Þ ç ÷ = ç ÷ Þ Y = 4rX
1 - 2b 1 è 5 ø 5 è 5 ø
\ x= ,y =1 +
2ab 2b 2x + y x - 2y - 4
where, X = ,Y =
1 (y - 2 ) 5 5
Þ 2b = and 2a = ...(ii)
y -1 x(y - 1 ) 12 3
and 4r = Þ r= .
5 5
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 52. Q Equation of axis is Y = 0
x ...(i)
(y - 1 ) (y - 2 ) = Þ x - 2y - 4 = 0
8l and equation of latusrectum is X = r
2
æ 3ö 1 2x + y 3
Þ çy - ÷ = ( x + 2 l) Þ =
è 2 ø 8l 5 5
æ 3ö Þ 2x + y - 3 = 0 ...(ii)
\ Vertex is ç - 2 l, ÷
è 2ø On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii),
1 focus is ( x, y ) = (2, - 1 ).
and length of latusrectum is .
8l
442 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

12 Sol. (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)

53. Length of latusrectum = 4r =
5 Q C1 : y 2 = 4 x
54. Equation of directrix is X + r = 0 \ S1 : (1, 0 )
2x + y 3 Let z = x + iy and z1 = x1 + iy1
Þ + =0
5 5 If z1 is obtained by rotating z, 120° in anti-clockwise direction,
\ 2 x +y + 3 = 0 then
Sol. (Q. Nos. 55 to 57) æ 1 i 3ö
z1 = ze 2pi /3 = ( x + iy ) ç - + ÷
Any parabola whose axis is parallel to the X -axis will be of the è 2 2 ø
form
æ x 3y ö æ 3 yö
(y - q ) 2 = 4l( x - p ) ...(i) =ç- - ÷ + iç x- ÷
è 2 2 ø è 2 2ø
Now, lx + my = 1 can be written as
\ Equation of curve C 2 is
l æ 1 - mq - lp ö
(y - q ) = - ( x - p ) + ç ÷ ...(ii) 2
m è m ø æ 3 yö æ x 3 ö
ç x - ÷ = 4ç - - y÷ ...(i)
Eq. (ii) will touch Eq. (i), then è 2 2ø è 2 2 ø
1 - mq - lp l x 3 3 y
= For focus - - y = 1 and x - = 0.
m l 2 2 2 2
-
m 1 3
\ x = - ,y = -
Þ - l + mlq + l 2p = m 2l 2 2
Þ pl 2 + qlm - lm 2 - l = 0 ...(iii) æ 1 3ö
Þ S2 : ç - , - ÷
But given that è 2 2 ø
5l 2 - 4lm + 6m 2 + 3l = 0 ...(iv) Q C 3 is reflection of C 2 with respect to y = x.
On comparing Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get æ 3 1ö
\ S3 : ç - , - ÷.
p q - l -1 è 2 2ø
= = =
5 -4 6 3
58. Q(t 2, 2 t ) are parametric form of curve C1.
5 4
Þ p = - ,q = , l =2 \ From Eq. (i),
3 3
3 y x 3
So, the parabola is x - = 2t and - - y = t 2,
2 2 2 2 2
æ 4ö æ 5ö 1 1
çy - ÷ = 8ç x + ÷. we get x = ( - t 2 + 2 3t ), y = ( - 3 t 2 - 2t )
è 3ø è 3ø 2 2
æ 5 4ö \ Parametric coordinates of C 2 are
55. Q Vertex is ç - , ÷ .
è 3 3ø æ1 2 1 2 ö
ç ( - t + 2 3t ), ( - 3t - 2t ) ÷ .
5 4 è2 2 ø
Here, a = - and b =
3 3 59. Area of DOS 2S 3
\ a -b = -3
1 3
Þ |a -b | =3 1 -2 - 2
= | |
56. For focus, 2 3 1
5 4 - -
x+ = 2 and y - = 0 2 2
3 3 1 1 3 1
æ1 4ö = - = sq unit
\ Coordinates of focus are ç , ÷ . 2 4 4 4
è3 3 ø 2 2
2 2
1 4 æ 1ö æ 3ö æ 3ö æ 1ö
Here, c = and d = 60. Sx12 + Sy12 = (1) 2 + ç - ÷ + ç - 2
÷ + (0) + ç - ÷ + ç- ÷
è 2ø è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2ø
3 3
\ d -c =1 1 3 3 1
=1 + + +0 + + =3
Þ 2| d - c | = 2 4 4 4 4
æ 5ö Sol. (Q. Nos. 61 to 63)
57. For directrix ç x + ÷ + 2 = 0 Since, no point of the parabola y = x 2 + ax + 1 is below the
è 3ø
Þ 3 x + 11 = 0 given ex + f = 0 X -axis.
\ e =3, f = 11 \ D£0
Now, | e - f | = | 3 - 11 | = 8 Þ a2 - 4 £ 0
Þ -2 £a £2
 Chap 05 Parabola 443

61. The maximum value of a is 2. Þ (1 + l)x 2 + (1 + 2 l)xy + (1 + l )y 2

2
The equation of the parabola is y = x + 2 x + 1. + 2( l - 1 ) x + 2( l - 1 )y + l + 1 = 0
2
It intersect the Y -axis at ( 0, 1 ). It will be a parabola, if h = ab
\Equation of tangent at ( 0, 1 ) is 1
Þ (1 + 2 l)2 = (1 + l)2
y +1 4
= 0 × x + (x + 0) + 1
2 Þ 1 + 4 l + 4 l2 = 4 + 8 l + 4 l2
Þ y = 2x + 1 3
Þ 2x - y + 1 = 0 \ l=-
4
Since, 2 x - y + 1 = 0 touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2, then Hence, from Eq. (i), the required parabola is
0-0+1 3
=c [Qc > 0] ( x 2 + xy + y 2 - 2 x - 2y + 1 ) - ( x + y + 1 ) 2 = 0
4+1 4
2 2
1 Þ x - 2 xy + y - 14 x - 14y + 1 = 0 ...(ii)
Þ c=
5 64. Comparing parabola (ii) with
\ 5c 2 = 1 ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0
62. Equation of the tangent at ( 0, 1) to the parabola \ a = 1, h = -1, b = 1, g = - 7, f = - 7, c = 1
y = x 2 + ax + 1 is Now, | a + b + c + f + g + h | = | 1 + 1 + 1 - 7 - 7 - 1 | = 12
y +1 a 65. The parabola ( P ) can be written as
Þ = 0 × x + (x + 0) + 1
2 2 ( x - y ) 2 = (14 x + 14y - 1 )
Þ y = ax + 1
æx -yö
2 æ 14 x + 14y - 1 ö
Þ ax - y + 1 = 0 Þ ç ÷ = 7 2 çç ÷ ...(iii)
è 2 ø 2 2÷
As it touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2, then è (14 ) + (14 ) ø
1
=c \Length of latusrectum is 7 2.
(a 2 + 1 )
66. For vertex,
i.e. c is maximum, when a = 0. x -y 14 x + 14y - 1
Therefore, the equation of the tangent is y = 1. = 0, =0 [from Eq. (iii)]
2 (14 ) 2 + (14 ) 2
\Slope of the tangent is 0.
Þ x = y , 14 x + 14y = 1
63. Equation of tangent is
1
y = ax + 1 \ x =y =
28
Þ ax - y = - 1
æ1 1ö
x y Vertex is ç , ÷ = (a, b ) [given]
Þ + =1 è 28 28 ø
æ 1 ö (1 )
ç- ÷ \ |a -b | = 0
è aø
Therefore, the area of the triangle bounded by the tangent and Sol. (Q. Nos. 67 to 69 )
the axes is Q y = 3 x is tangent to the parabola
1 1 1 2y = ax 2 + b ...(i)
- |1| =
2 a 2|a | 2
\ 2(3 x ) = ax + b
1
\ D= [for minimum area a = 2] [substitute the value of y = 3 x in 2y = ax 2 + b]
4
Þ 8D = 2 Þ ax 2 - 6 x + b = 0
D =0
Sol. (Q. Nos. 64 to 66) [Qy = 3 x is tangent to 2y = ax 2 + b]
The conic is S º x 2 + xy + y 2 - 2 x - 2y + 1 = 0 \ 36 - 4ab = 0
and the line is L º x + y + 1 = 0 Þ ab = 9 ...(ii)
It is required to find equation of the parabola ( P ) which From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
touches the conic S = 0 at those (two) points, where the line 9
2y = ax 2 + ...(iii)
L = 0 intersect the conic. Obviously at these points the a
parabola is in double contact with the conic. a+b
67. Q ³ ab = 3 [from Eq. (ii)]
\The equation of any such conic is f º S + lL2 = 0 2
Þ ( x 2 + xy + y 2 - 2 x - 2y + 1 ) + l(x + y + 1 ) 2 = 0 ...(i) Þ a + b ³6
\ Minimum value of a + b is 6.
444 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

68. Q(2, 6) is the point of contact. Y

From Eq. (iii), we get L ( 1, 2)

9
12 = 4a +
a
Þ 4a 2 - 12a + 9 = 0 M
X′ X
2 (–1, 0) O (1, 0) N (3,0)
Þ (2a - 3 ) = 0
\ 2a = 3
69. For b = 18
1 L′ (1,–2)
From Eq. (ii), a= Y′
2
x2 The area of the square
From Eq. (iii), 2y = + 18 ...(iv) MLNL¢ is ( ML ) 2 = (1 + 1 ) 2 + (2 - 0 ) 2 = 8 sq units
2
On solving y = 3 x and Eq. (iv), we get \ l =8
x2 73. Parabola is y 2 = x
6x = + 18
2 1
\ a=
Þ x 2 - 12 x + 36 = 0 4
Þ (x - 6)2 = 0 The normal at t is
t3 t
\ x = 6, then y = 3 x = 18 tx + y = +
4 2
\ Point of contact is (6, 18 ).
It passes through (a, 0 ).
70. Equation of tangent in terms of slope (m ) of the parabola t3 t
1 \ ta = +
y 2 = 4 x is y = mx + . 4 2
m 1ö 1
2 æ
Q Point of intersection of tangents is ( - 2, - 1 ), then Þ t = 4 ça - ÷ Þa >
è 2ø 2
1
- 1 = - 2m + æ 1ö æ 1ö
m \ t1 = 2 ça - ÷ , t 2 = - 2 ça - ÷
è 2ø è 2ø
Þ 2m 2 - m - 1 = 0
The normals are perpendicular Þ t1t 2 = - 1
Y 1ö
æ
Þ - 4ça - ÷ = - 1
è 2ø
\ 4a = 3
X′ X
θ O æ 3 ö é 3ù
74. Let B as ç t 2, 3 t ÷ êë Here, a = 2 úû
(–2, –1) è2 ø
and let BD ^ AC and ÐDAB = q
Y′
Y 3 2
B 2 t , 3t
Let m1, m2 be slopes of the tangents, then
D (1 + 8 ) 3 θ
m1 - m2 = = =
a 2 2 X′ θ X
1 A D C
and m1m2 = -
2
m1 - m2 3/2
\ tan q = = =3 Y′
1 + m1m2 1 -1/2
71. Let S be the focus and point of intersection of tangents at P and BD 3 t 2
Q is R. Þ tan q =
= =
AD 3 t 2 t
Q (SR ) 2 = SP × SQ = 4 ´ 9 = 36 2
\ SR = 6 \ Projection of BC on the axis = DC
72. The four lines form a square. The tangents at L(1, 2) and æ2ö
= BD tan q = 3t ç ÷ = 6 units
L¢(1, - 2 ) are x - y + 1 = 0 and x + y + 1 = 0. They intersect at èt ø
M( - 1, 0 ). \ l =6
 Chap 05 Parabola 445

75. The parabolas are y = x 2 - 9 and y = lx 2. 78. For maximum number of common chords, the circle and the
2 2 2 parabola must intersect at four points.
Þ x - 9 = lx Þ x (1 - l ) = 9
Now, solving the given curves, we have
9
Þ x2 = (x - 6)2 + 4x = r 2
1-l
3 Þ x 2 - 8 x + 36 - r 2 = 0
\ x=±
(1 - l ) The curves touch, if D=0
2
Now, from the symmetry about Y -axis, Þ 64 - 4 × 1 × (36 - r ) = 0
6 3 Þ r 2 = 20
AB = 2a = Þ a=
(1 - l ) (1 - l ) \ r =2 5
2 2 2
Þ a (1 - l ) = 9 Þ la + 9 = a Hence, the least integral value of r for which the curves
Þ 2
a +m =a 2
[given] intersect is 5.

\ m =9 79. Given parabola is

x 2 = 4 (y - 1 )
76. Given, y 2 - 8x < 0, x 2 + y 2 < 16 and x > 0.
For x = 1, \ Focus is (0, 2).
y 2 < 8 and y 2 < 15 Þy 2 < 8 Now, the shortest intercept of the line on the parabola which
passes through the focus is latusrectum. The axis of the given
\ y = 0, ± 1, ± 2 parabola is the Y -axis.
\ 5 points. Therefore, the latusrectum is parallel to the X -axis.
For x = 2 , \ Slope = 0
y 2 < 16, y 2 < 12 Þ y 2 < 12 80. (A) The given parabolas are symmetrical about the line y = x
\ y = 0, ± 1, ± 2, ± 3 as shown in the figure
\ 7 points Y
For x = 3,
y 2 < 24, y 2 < 7 Þy 2 < 7
\ y = 0, ± 1, ± 2 3
4
\ 5 points
1
Hence, total points is 17.
2
\ n = 17
Sum of digits of n is 8.
X′ X
77. Focus of the parabola y 2 = 4x is S(1, 0). O
Y
Y′

They intersect each other at four distinct points.

Hence, the number of common chords is
X 4 4 ×3
O S C2 = =6
C 1 ×2
Which is perfect number [Q1 ´ 2 ´ 3 = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6]

y
(B) Q tan q = ...(i)
Let radius of circle be r. x
\ Centre of circle is (1 + r , 0 ). Y
Þ Equation of circle is ( x - 1 - r ) 2 + y 2 = r 2 B(x,y)

Þ (x - 1 - r )2 + 4x = r 2 [Qy 2 = 4 x] θ 90°+θ
Þ x 2 + 2(2 - 1 - r ) x + 2r + 1 = 0 X′ θ X
A L C
2
Þ x + 2(1 - r ) x + 2r + 1 = 0
It would have same roots due to symmetry.
\ D=0
2 Y′
Þ 4(1 - r ) - 4 × 1 × (2r + 1 ) = 0
\ r = 0, 4 LC = Projection of BC on X -axis
Hence, r =4 [Qr ¹ 0] = BL tan q = y tan q
446 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Also A, B lie on y - 2 x = 1
=y ´ [from Eq. (i)]
x \ y1 - 2 x1 = 1 and y 2 - 2 x 2 = 1
y2 or y 2 - y1 = 2( x 2 - x1 ) ...(iv)
=
x 2 2
\ Length of AB = ( x 2 - x1 ) + (y 2 - y1 )
=4 [Qy 2 = 4 x] = 5 | x1 - x 2 | [from Eq. (iv)]
(C) Normals to y 2 = 4ax and x 2 = 4by in terms of m are
= 2 5 (a 2 + a ) [from Eq. (iii)]
b
y = mx - 2am - am 3 and y = mx + 2b + 2 . 2
m Given, 2 5 (a + a ) = 40
For common normal, Þ a2 + a = 2
b
2b + 2 = - 2am - am 3 Þ a2 + a - 2 =0
m
or am 5 + 2am 3 + 2bm 2 + b = 0 Þ (a + 2 ) (a - 1 ) = 0
Þ a = - 2, 1
It is clear that at most five common normals.
(B) If tangents are drawn from ( x1, y1 ) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
(D) Let middle point of P and B be (h, k ), then 2h = at 2
and angle between tangents is q, then
Y
at) (y12 - 4ax1 )
2 ,2 | tan q | =
at | x1 + a |
P(
(0,at) B 3p
Here, x1 = 0, y1 = 2, q = , then
X′ X 4
A S(a, 0) 2
| -1| =
|0+a|
Þ |a | =2
Y′ \ a=±2
Aliter :
and 2k = 3at
2 Observe that one tangent is the Y -axis, the other tangent is at
æ 2k ö p
or 2h = a ç ÷ q = and its equation is ty = x + at 2
è 3a ø 4
or 2k 2 = 9ah for t = 1, we get y = x + a
\Locus of mid-point is Þa = 2 from the symmetry a = - 2 is also possible.
2y 2 = 9ax (C) Let the other end be at (at 2, 2at )
9a æ at 2 + a 2at + 2a ö
\Length of latusrectum = So, mid-point is ç , ÷
2 è 2 2 ø
9
= ´2 [Qa = 2] which satisfy x + y = 1
2
=9 at 2 + a
or + at + a = 1
2
81. (A) Given parabola is x 2 = ay ...(i)
Þ at 2 + 2at + 3a - 2 = 0
and the given line is y - 2 x = 1 ...(ii)
Since, two distinct chords are possible, so D > 0.
Y x2=ay
\ 4a 2 - 4a(3a - 2 ) > 0
1 Þ - 8a 2 + 8a > 0
–2x=
B y
(x1,y1) (x2 , y2 )
Þ 8a(a - 1 ) < 0
A \ 0 <a <1
X′ X or 0 < 4a < 4
O
Y′ or 0 < Length of latusrectum < 4
\Length of latusrectum can be 1 or 2 or 3 from the given
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get values.
x 2 = a(2 x + 1 ) Þ x 2 - 2ax - a = 0 (D) The given parabola is
Let coordinates of A and B are ( x1, y1 ) and ( x 2, y 2 ) respectively, x 2 - ay + 3 = 0
then
æ 3ö
D ( 4a 2 + 4a ) or x 2 = a çy - ÷
| x1 - x 2 | = = = 2 (a 2 + a ) ...(iii) è aø
a 1
 Chap 05 Parabola 447

Let x =X, y -
3
=Y 83. Equation of tangent to y 2 = 4x is
a 1
Then, the parabola is y = mx +
m
X 2 = aY it is also tangent to x 2 = 4y , then
a æ 1ö
For focus X = 0, Y = x 2 = 4 çmx + ÷
4 è mø
3 a
Þ x = 0, y - = 4
a 4 Þ x 2 - 4mx - = 0
m
æ 3 aö
\ Focus is ç 0, + ÷ given focus is ( 0, 2 ) It discriminant = 0
è a 4ø
16
3 a Þ 16m 2 + =0
\ + =2 m
a 4
Þ m3 = - 1
Þ a 2 - 8a + 12 = 0
\ m = -1
Þ (a - 6 ) (a - 2 ) = 0 \ Equation of common tangent is x + y + 1 = 0.
\ a = 2, 6 Statement II is also true and it is correct explanation of
Here, a1 = 6, a 2 = 2 Statement I.

\
a1
=3 84. The vertex of (y + 2) 2 = 2( x - 1) is (1, - 2) and equation of axis
a2 is y = - 2.
82. (A) Points (1, 2) and ( - 2 , 1) satisfy both the curves. Here, 4a = 2
2 2 1 3
(B) Equation of tangent at (t , 2t ) on y = 4 x is \ a= Þ 3a =
2 2
ty = x + t 2 æ 3 ö æ5 ö
\ Required point is ç1 + , - 2 ÷ , i.e. ç , - 2 ÷ .
It passes through the point (2, 3 ), then è 2 ø è2 ø
3t = 2 + t 2 Hence, both statements are true and Statement II is correct
2 explanation for Statement I.
Þ t - 3t + 2 = 0
85. Q y = mx + c …(i)
or (t - 1 ) (t - 2 ) = 0
or t = 1 or 2 and y 2 = 4ax …(ii)
The point of contact is (1, 2 ) or ( 4, 4 ). From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
(C) Let P( 5 cos q, 5 sin q), then the chord of contact of the æy - c ö
y 2 = 4a ç ÷
2 è m ø
parabola y = 4 x w.r.t. P is
Þ my 2 - 4ay + 4ac = 0
y × 5 sin q = 2( x + 5 cos q)
2x If line Eq. (i) intersect the parabola y 2 = 4ax at one point, then
or y = + 2 cot q
5 sin q B 2 = 4 AC
On comparing with y = 2( x - 2 ), then Þ ( - 4a ) 2 = 4 × m × 4ac
5 sin q = 1 and cot q = - 2 a
Þ c=
or 5 sin q = 1 and 5 cos q = - 2 m
From Eq. (i), equation of tangent is
Hence, coordinates of P are ( - 2, 1 ).
a
(D) Let coordinates of Q be (t 2, 2t ). y = mx +
m
Now, the area of DOPQ is \Statement I and Statement II are individual true and
1 t2 2t Statement II is correct explanation of Statement I.
| |=6 [given]
2 4 -4 86. Q ax + by = 1 …(i)

Þ 2
2t + 4t = ± 6 On squaring both sides, then
2 ax + by + 2 abxy = 1
or t + 2t ± 3 = 0
Þ (ax + by - 1 ) = - 2 abxy
\ t 2 + 2t - 3 = 0 [Qt 2 + 2t + 3 ¹ 0]
Again, on squaring both sides, we get
Þ (t + 3 ) (t - 1 ) = 0
a 2x 2 + b 2y 2 + 1 + 2abxy - 2ax - 2by + 1 = 4abxy
Then, t = 1 or - 3
Hence, the point Q are (1, 2 ) or (9, - 6 ). Þ a 2x 2 - 2abxy + b 2y 2 - 2ax - 2by + 1 = 0
448 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Now, comparing with From Eq. (i)

Ax 2 + 2 Hxy + By 2 + 2Gx + 2 Fy + C = 0 PQ = a(cot ( a / 2 ) + tan( a / 2 )) 2
\ A = a 2, H = - ab, B = b 2, G = - a, F = - b, C = 1 æ 1 ö
2
=aç ÷
\ D = ABC + 2 FGH - AF 2 - BG 2 - CH 2 è sin( a / 2 ) cos( a / 2 ) ø
= a 2b 2 - 2a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 æ 2 ö
2
2
=aç ÷ = 4a cosec a
2 2
= - 4a b ¹ 0 è sin a ø
2
and H = AB For a = 60°, 4a = 8 and
2
Hence, Eq. (i) represent a parabola. æ 2 ö
PQ = 8 cosec 2 60° = 8 ç ÷ = 32 / 3
\ Statement I is true and Statement II is false. è 3ø
2at - 0 2 \ Statement I is true and Statement II is false.
87. Q Slope of AP = m1 = 21 =
at1 - 0 t1 89. Q x + y = l Þy = l - x …(i)
2at 2 - 0 2 and y =x-x 2
…(ii)
and slope of AQ = m2 = =
at 22 - 0 t 2 From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
4 l - x = x - x2
Q m1m2 = ¹ -1
t1t 2
Þ x 2 - 2x + l = 0
Y
2 2at 1) Q Eq. (i) touch the parabola Eq. (ii), then
P(at 1,
B 2 - 4 AC = 0
Þ (- 2)2 - 4 × 1 × l = 0
X′ X
A S(a,0) \ l =1
Þ Statement I is true.
Q (a t 2 From Statement II,
2 , 2at
2)
(x - 1)2 = x - x 2
Y′
Þ 2x 2 - 3x + 1 = 0
Also, P , S , Q are collinear, then
2at1 - 0 0 - 2at 2 \ Discriminant = ( - 3 ) 2 - 4 × 2 × 1 = 1 ¹ 0
=
at12 - a a - at 22 \ Statement II is false.
Þ t1 - t1t 22 = - t12t 2 + t 2 90. Q 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 2 = 0 are not perpendicular
Þ (t1 - t 2 ) + t1t 2(t1 - t 2 ) = 0 to each other.
Q t1 - t 2 ¹ 0, 1 + t1t 2 = 0 \Latusrectum ¹ 4
\ t1t 2 = - 1 \Statement I is false and Statement II is true.
Hence, Statement I is false and Statement II is true. 91. Let P (at 2, 2at ) be any point on the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
1ö
2 Then, tangent at P (at 2, 2at ) is ty = x + at 2.
æ
88. Length of focal chord PQ = a çt + ÷ …(i) Since, tangent meet the axis of parabola in T and tangent at the
è tø
vertex in Y
2a æ1ö
2at + 2ç ÷ Y
t 2t èt ø
and tan a = = 2 = 2 P
2 a t - 1 æ1ö 2
at - 2 1-ç ÷ G (at, 2at)
t èt ø
X′ X
1 T A
\ = tan( a / 2 )
t
Y Y′
22at)
P(at ,
\ Coordinates of T and Y are ( - at 2, 0 ) and ( 0, at ) respectively.
α Let coordinates of G be ( x1, y1 ).
X′ X Since, TAYG is rectangle.
A S(a,0)
Q Mid-points of diagonals TY and GA is same.
Q a , –2 a x1 + 0 -at 2 + 0
t 2, Þ =
t 2 2
Y′
Þ x1 = - at 2 …(i)
 Chap 05 Parabola 449

y1 + 0 0 + at 94. The centre and radius of the given circle are (0, 12) and 4,
and + Þ y1 = at …(ii)
2 2 respectively.
Eliminating t from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Now, the shortest distance always occurs along the common
2 normal.
æy ö
x1 = - a ç 1 ÷ Y
èaø (0, 12)
2 C P
Þ y1 = - ax1
Þ y12 + ax1 = 0 A

Hence, the locus of G( x1, y1 ) is y 2 + ax = 0. X′ X

O
92. Equation of incident ray parallel to axis of parabola (X -axis) is
y = l, which pass through ( - 1, 2 ), then 2 = l.
\ Equation of incident ray is y = 2 Y′
2
Incident ray strikes the parabola y = 4 x at (1, 2). Let A º (t 2, 2t )
Y Equation of normal at A is y + tx = 2t + t 3,
(–1,2) which passes through (0, 12), then
(1,2) 12 + 0 = 2t + t 3 Þ t 3 + 2t - 12 = 0
2
X′ X
or (t - 2 ) (t + 2t + 6 ) = 0
S(1,0) \ t =2 [Qt 2 + 2t + 6 ¹ 0]
Coordinates of A are (4, 4).
\ Shortest distance = AP = AC - CP = 80 - 4 = 4( 5 - 1 )
Y′
95. Let P (t12, 2 t1 ) and Q (t 22, 2 t 2 ) be extremities of the chord with
The reflected ray passes through the focus (1, 0). slope 2.
Hence, the equation of the reflected ray is x = 1. 2 t1 - 2 t 2
\ =2
t12 - t 22
93. Let PQ be a normal chord to a parabola at P (at 2, 2at ).
Since, the ordinate and abscissa of P are equal. Þ t1 + t 2 = 1 ...(i)
2 Y
Þ at = 2at, t ¹ 0 2
(t1, 2t1)
\ t =2 P
2 1
(at, 2 a t) R (h, k)
P X′ X
A 2
90° Q2
X′ X (t2, 2t2)
A S
Y′
Q Let R (h, k ) be coordinates of the point which divides PQ in the
2
(at1 , 2at1) ratio 1 : 2, then
2 t 2 + t 22
h= 1
Since, normal at P (at 2, 2at ) meet the parabola at Q (at12, 2at1 ). 3
2 4 t1 + 2 t 2
\ t1 = - t - and k=
t 3
or t1 = - 2 - 1 Þ 3h = 2 t12 + (1 - t1 ) 2
or t1 = - 3
and 3k = 4t1 + 2 (1 - t1 ) [from Eq. (i)]
\ Coordinates of P and Q are ( 4a , 4a ) and (9a , - 6a ), respectively.
or 3h = 3 t12 - 2 t1 + 1
4a - 0 4
\ Slope of SP = = = m1 (say)
and
4a - a 3 3k = 2 t1 + 2
-6a - 0 3 Eliminating t1
and slope of SQ = = - = m2 (say) 2
9a - a 4 æ 3k - 2 ö æ 3k - 2 ö
\ 3h = 3 ç ÷ - 2ç ÷ +1
è 2 ø è 2 ø
\ m1m2 = - 1
Hence, SP and SQ are perpendicular to each other Þ 9k 2 - 16k - 4h + 8 = 0
i.e. Ð PSQ = 90° 16k 4h 8
Þ k2 - - + =0
9 9 9
450 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

2
æ 8ö 4æ 2ö Aliter :
Þ çk - ÷ = çh - ÷
è 9ø 9 è 9ø Let point of intersection of tangents at P and Q is T (h, k ) then
æ 8ö 4æ 2ö
2 equation of pair of tangents TP and TQ is
\ Locus of R (h, k ) is çy - ÷ = ç x - ÷ ,
è 9 ø 9 è 9ø SS1 = T 2
æ8 2ö Þ (y 2 - 4ax )(k 2 - 4ah ) = [ky - 2a( x + h )]2 …(i)
which is a parabola with vertex ç , ÷ .
è9 9ø
Let the pair of tangents cut the directrix x + a = 0 are in R and
96. Let coordinates of P and Q on the parabola y 2 = 4ax are S, then substitute x = - a in Eq. (i), then we get
(at12, 2at1 ) and (at 22, 2at 2 ).
hy 2 - k(h - a )y + a {(h + a ) 2 - k 2 } = 0
Equation of tangents at P and Q are
Now let coordinates of R and S be
t1y = x + at12 and t 2y = x + at 22
( -a , y1 ) and ( -a , y 2 ).
Let these tangents meet x + a = 0 at R and S, then coordinates k(h - a )
æ a(t 2 - 1 ) ö æ a(t 2 - 1 ) ö \ y1 + y 2 =
of R and S ¢ are ç - a, 1 ÷ and ç - a, 2 ÷, h
è t1 ø è t2 ø
a {(h + a ) 2 - k 2 }
respectively. and y1y 2 =
h
Y but given | RS | = d
P Þ ( RS ) 2 = d 2
R Þ (y1 - y 2 ) 2 = d 2
X′ d X
A S (a, 0)
T S′ Þ (y1 + y 2 ) 2 - 4y1y 2 = d 2
Q k2 4a
Þ (h - a ) 2 - {(h + a ) 2 - k 2 } = d 2
Y′ h2 h
x+a=0
Þ k 2 {(h - a ) 2 + 4ah } - 4ah(h + a ) 2 = d 2h 2
Given, | RS ¢| = d
Þ (k 2 - 4ah )(h + a ) 2 = d 2h 2
½ æ t12 - 1 ö æ t 2 - 1 ö½
\ ½a ç ÷ - aç 2 ÷½ = d Hence, locus of T (h, k ) is
½ è t1 ø è t 2 ø½
(y 2 - 4ax )( x + a ) 2 = d 2x 2.
½ a
Þ ½ t12t 2 - t 2 - t1t 22 + t1½
½= d 97. Let P (at12, 2at1 ) and Q(at 22, 2at 2 ) be two points on the parabola
½ 1t 2
t ½
y 2 = 4ax
½ a
Þ ½ ((t1 - t 2 )(1 + t1t 2 ))½
½= d The equations of tangents at P and Q are
½ 1t 2
t ½
t1y = x + at12
½a {(t1 + t 2 ) 2 - 4t1t 2 } (1 + t1t 2 )½
Þ ½ ½= d and t 2y = x + at 22
t1t 2
½ ½ 1 1
\ tan q1 = , tan q2 =
Let the point of intersection of tangents at P at Q is T then t1 t2
T = (at1t 2, a(t1 + t 2 )) Equations of circles with OP and OQ as diameters are
Now, let T = (h, k ) ( x - 0 )( x - at12 ) + (y - 0 )(y - 2at1 ) = 0
\ h = at1t 2 and k = a(t1 + t 2 )
and ( x - 0 )( x - at 22 ) + (y - 0 )(y - 2at 2 ) = 0 respectively.
h k
\ t1t 2 = and t1 + t 2 = …(ii) i.e. x 2 + y 2 - axt12 - 2at1y = 0
a a
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get and x 2 + y 2 - axt 22 - 2at 2y = 0
½ æ k 2 4h ö æ h ö½ then, point of intersection of circles are O (0, 0)
½a ç 2 - ÷ çè1 + ÷ø½
½ èa a ø a ½ æ -4at1t 2 2at t (t + t ) ö
=d and Rç 2
, 1 2 12 2 ÷
½ h ½ è (t1 + t 2 ) + 4 (t1 + t 2 ) + 4 ø
½ a ½
½ ½ Since, OR makes an angle f with the X-axis. Therefore,
2 2 2 2 æ t + t2 ö
Þ (k - 4ah )(h + a ) = h d tan f = - ç 1 ÷
è 2 ø
Hence, required locus is
Now, cot q1 + cot q2 + 2 tan f = t1 + t 2 - (t1 + t 2 )
(y 2 - 4ax )( x + a ) 2 = d 2x 2.
=0
 Chap 05 Parabola 451

98. Any normal of the parabola y 2 = 4x with slope m is Eqs. (i) and (ii) both pass through ( x1, y1 ) which is the centre of
3 the circle
y = mx - 2m - m
ty1 = x1 + at 2 …(iii)
m 1)
Y 2 , –2a and 2 tx1 + 4y1 = at + 4at 3
…(iv)
(a m 1
A Multiplying Eq. (iii) by t and subtracting Eq. (iv), we have
t 2y1 + t( 4a - 3 x1 ) - 4y1 = 0 …(v)
X′ X 2
O Also, from Eq. (iii), at - ty1 + x1 = 0 …(vi)
(am22 , –2am2) B P (h, k)
Eliminating t from Eqs. (v) and (vi), we get
C t2 t 1
= =
Y′ (am32 , –2am2) x1( 4a - 3 x1 ) - 4y12 -4ay1 - x1y1 -y12 - a( 4a - 3 x1 )

It passes through P, then On simplyfying, we get

k = mh - 2m - m 3 2y12(2y12 + x12 - 12ax1 ) = ax1(3 x1 - 4a ) 2

Hence, required locus is
Þm 3 + (2 - h )m + k = 0 …(i)
2y 2(2y 2 + x 2 - 12ax ) = ax(3 x - 4a ) 2.
Thus, m1m2m3 = - k
am3 = - k (Q m1m2 = a ) 100. Let P (at12, 2at1 ) and Q (at 22, 2at 2 ) be two points on the parabola
k y 2 = 4ax such that the normals at P and Q intersect at a point
Þ m3 = -
a R (aT 2, 2aT ) on the parabola y 2 = 4ax, then
Q m3 is a root of Eq. (i), then 2 2
T = - t1 - = - t 2 - , then t1t 2 = 2
k3 æ kö t1 t2
- 3 + (2 - h ) ç - ÷ + k = 0
a è aø
Q Tangents at P and Q intersect at T (at1t 2, a (t1 + t 2 ))
Þ k 3 + (2 - h )ka 2 - ka 3 = 0 i.e. T (2a , a (t1 + t 2 )).
\ Locus of P (h, k ) is Y R
y 3 + (2 - x )ya 2 - ya 3 = 0
Þ y 2 + (2 - x )a 2 - a 3 = 0 [Q y ¹ 0 ]
(P does not lie on the axis of the parabola) X
O
2 2 2 3
Þ y = a x - 2a + a
P
If it is a part of the parabola y 2 = 4 x T
Q
then, a2 = 4
Also, the coordinates of R being the point of intersection of
and -2 a 2 + a 3 = 0
normals at P and Q are
Þ a 2( a - 2 ) = 0 (2a + a (t12 + t 22 + t1t 2 ), - at1t 2 (t1 + t 2 ))
Þ a - 2 = 0, a ¹ 0 Þ ( 4a + a (t12 + t 22 ), - 2a (t1 + t 2 ))
\ a =2
Now, Ð TPR = Ð TQR = 90°
99. Let P (at 2, 2at ) be any point on y 2 = 4ax. Then, vertex A( 0,0).
Þ Ð TPR + Ð TQR = 180°
The equation of tangent at P is
Þ Quadrilateral PTQR is a cyclic quadrilateral, therefore centre
ty = x + at 2 …(i) of the circle circumscribing the DTPQ is at the mid-point of TR.
Tangent at P will be normal to the circle, AP is a chord whose Let its coordinates be (h, k ), then
æ at 2 ö 2 2h = 2a + 4a + a (t12 + t 22 )
mid-point is ç , at ÷ and slope is .
è 2 ø t 2h - 6a
Þ = (t1 + t 2 ) 2 - 2 t1t 2
\ Equation of the line passing through mid-point of AP and a
perpendicular to AP is 2h - 2a
Þ = (t1 + t 2 ) 2 [Q t1t 2 = 2 ] ...(i)
t æ at 2 ö a
y - at = - ç x - ÷
2è 2 ø and 2k = a (t1 + t 2 ) - 2 a (t1 + t 2 )
3 2k
at Þ - = (t1 + t 2 ) ...(ii)
Þ tx + 2y = + 2at …(ii) a
2
452 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

2
æ 2h - 2a ö æ 2k ö 102. Equation of normal at (am 2, - 2am ) is
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), then ç ÷ = ç- ÷
è a ø è aø
y = mx - 2am - am 3
Þ 2k 2 = a (h - a )
If the three normals of P , Q, R meet at (h, k ), then
Hence, locus of (h, k ) is 2y 2 = a ( x - a ). am 3 + m(2a - h ) + k = 0
101. Let the equation of straight line (h, k ) as its mid-point, \ Sm1 = 0
x -h y -k (2a - h )
then, = =r …(i) Sm1m2 = ,
cos q sin q a
Any point on the line Eq. (i) is (h + r cos q , k + r sin q). -k
m1m2m3 =
Y θ–π/4 a
P º (am12, - 2am1 )
r
(h,k) π/ θ Q º (am22, - 2am2 )
4
π/4 X
O
–r and R º (am32, - 2am3 )
π/4 Equation of PQ is
-y (m1 + m2 ) = 2( x + am1m2 ) …(i)
and equation of diameter through R is
Solving with the equation of parabola
y = - 2am3 …(ii)
y 2 = 4ax, we get
Point of intersection of Eqs. (i) and (ii) is on the directrix and
(k + r sin q) 2 = 4a(h + r cos q) hence it must be ( - a , - 2am3 ) and it satisfies Eq. (ii), then
Þ r 2 sin 2 q + 2r (k sin q - 2a cos q) + k 2 - 4ah = 0 …(ii) 2am3(m1 + m2 ) = 2 ( - a + am1m2 )
which is quadratic in r. Þ m3 ( -m3 ) = - 1 + m1m2
The roots of the quadratic equation will be equal but of Þ m1m2 = 1 - m32
opposite sign as (h, k ) is the mid-point. \ Equation of PQ becomes
2(k sin q - 2a cos q)
Sum of roots = - =0 -y ( 0 - m3 ) = 2 ( x + a - am32 )
sin 2 q
Þ 2am32 + m3y - 2 ( x + a ) = 0 [m3 is parameter]
\ k sin q - 2a cos q = 0
2a Its envelope is given by the discriminant of this quadratic
\ tan q = equated to zero.
k
Now, from Eq. (ii), \ (y ) 2 - 4 × 2a × { -2 × ( x + a )} = 0
r 2 sin 2 q + (k 2 - 4ah ) = 0 Þ y 2 + 16a ( x + a ) = 0
4a 2 103. Equation of normal at ‘t’ is y = - tx + 2at + at 3.
Þ r2 . + (k 2 - 4ah ) = 0 …(iii)
( 4a + k 2 )
2
Let A be (h, k ), then k = - th + 2at + at 3
Length of the chord will be 2r. Angle between the two lines or at 3 - t(h - 2a ) - k = 0 …(i)
will be ( q - p / 4 ) and the projection of the chord on the given
line will be 2r cos( q - p / 4 ) = c Let the coordinates of P , Q, R are (at12, 2at1 ), (at 22, 2at 2 ), (at 32, 2at 3 )
2r respectively, then from Eq. (i),
Þ (cos q + sin q) = c
2 Y
2r æç k + 2a ö÷ M
P (t1)
Þ =c
2 çè 4a 2 + k 2 ÷ø x+a=0
A (h,k)
Þ 2r 2(k + 2a ) 2 = c 2( 4a 2 + k 2 ) X
(t2)Q S
2r 2 c2
Þ = …(iv)
( 4a 2 + k 2 ) (k + 2a ) 2 (t3)R
From Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
2a 2c 2 t1 + t 2 + t 3 = 0
+ (k 2 - 4ah ) = 0
(k + 2a ) 2 æ h - 2a ö
Þ t1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t1 = - ç ÷
Þ 2 2
(k - 4ah ) (k + 2a ) + 2a c = 0 2 2 è a ø
Hence, the locus of the middle points is k
and t1t 2t 3 =
2 2
(y - 4ax ) (y + 2a ) + 2a c = 0. 2 2 a
 Chap 05 Parabola 453

Since, SP = PM = a + at12 æ a aö
Hence coordinates of S are ç - , ÷ .
Similarly, SQ = a + at 22 è 2 2ø

and SR = a + at 32 \ RS ¢ = a

\ SP × SQ × SR = a(1 + t12 ) × a(1 + t 22 ) × a(1 + t 32 ) Hence, quadrilateral PQRS ¢ is trapezium whose area
1 æ aö
= a 3 {1 + (t12 + t 22 + t 32 ) + (t12t 22 + t 22t 32 + t 32 t12 ) + (t12 t 22 t 32 )} = ( PQ + RS ¢ ) ´ ça + ÷
2 è 2ø
= a 3 {1 + (t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) 2 - 2(t1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t1 )
1 3a 15a 2
+ (t1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t1 ) 2 - 2 t1t 2t 3(t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) + (t1t 2t 3 ) 2 } = ´ ( 4a + a ) ´ = sq units.
2 2 4
ìï 2
æ h - 2a ö æ h - 2a ö k 2 üï Aliter :
= a 3 í1 + 0 + 2 ç ÷+ç ÷ - 0 + 2ý
ïî è a ø è a ø a ïþ Here, centre of the circle is the vertex of the parabola and both
2 circle and parabola are symmetrical about axis of parabola. In
ìï æ h - 2a ö k 2 üï
= a 3í ç + 1÷ + 2 ý this case the point of intersection of common tangents must lie
ïî è a ø a ïþ on the directrix and axis of the parabola.
i.e. A( -a , 0 ).
= a { (h - a ) 2 + (k - 0 ) 2 } = a(SA ) 2
Chord of contact of circle w.r.t. A( -a , 0 ) is
104. Equation of tangent at P (at 2, 2at ) is
a2
2 2 x( -a ) + y × 0 =
ty = x + at Þ x - ty + at = 0 …(i) 2
which is also tangent to the circle a
\ x=-
x2 + y 2 = a2 / 2 …(ii) 2
then, length of perpendicular from centre of Eq. (ii) to Eq. (i) æ a aö
\ Coordinates of R are ç - , ÷ and chord of contact of
radius of the circle è 2 2ø
| at 2 | a parabola w.r.t. A( -a, 0 ) is
Þ = y × 0 = 2a( x - a )
2 2
1+t
i.e. x =a
Þ 2 t 4 = (1 + t 2 ) \ Coordinates of P is (a, 2a )
Þ (t 2 - 1 )(2 t 2 + 1 ) = 0 \ Area of quadrilateral
\ 2t 2 + 1 ¹ 0 \ t 2 - 1 = 0 PQRS ¢ = 2 {Area of DPAS - Area of DRAN }
then, t=±1 ì1 1 a aü
= 2 í × 2a × 2a - × × ý
then, coordinates of P and Q are (a , 2a ) and (a , - 2a ) î2 2 2 2þ
respectively. a 2 15a 2
= 4a 2 - = sq units
P 4 4
R 105. Let parabola be y 2 = 4ax and let P (at12, 2at1 ), Q (at 22, 2at 2 ) and
R (at 32, 2at 3 ) are three points on the parabola.
A NO S
(a, 0) Q Tangents at P , Q and R on parabola y 2 = 4ax
S
Q are t1y = x + at12, t 2y = x + at 22

\ PQ = 4a and t 3y = x + at 32
\ Equation of tangent at P (a , 2a ) is 1 1 1
Slopes of these tangents are , ,
x -y + a = 0 …(iii) t1 t 2 t 3
[from Eq. (i)] but given slopes are in HP.
Let R be ( x1, y1 ) \ t1, t 2, t 3 are in AP if d is the common difference. Then,
then, equation of tangent at R( x1, y1 ) on Eq. (ii) is t 2 - t1 = d , t 3 - t 2 = d
a2 and t 3 - t1 = 2 d ...(i)
xx1 + yy1 = …(iv)
2 Let the tangents at Q and R meet at P ¢, R and P meet at Q¢, P
Hence, Eqs. (iii) and (iv) are identical. and Q meet at R ¢.
x1 y1 a \ P ¢ = {at 2t 3, a (t 2 + t 3 )}
\ = =-
1 -1 2 Q ¢ = {at 3t1, a (t 3 + t1 )}
æ a aö and R ¢ = {at1t 2, a (t1 + t 2 )}
\ ( x1, y1 ) = ç - , ÷
è 2 2ø
454 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

at 2t 3 a (t 2 + t 3 ) 1 108. Coordinates of S are (2 2 cos 45°, 2 2 sin 45°) i.e. (2, 2).
1
\ Area of DP ¢Q ¢ R ¢ = at 3t1 a (t 3 + t1 ) 1
2 Y
at1t 2 a (t1 + t 2 ) 1
P (x, y)
1
= {at 2t 3 {a (t 3 + t1 ) - (t1 + t 2 )} + ... + ... } S (2, 2)
2 √2
1 √2 A
= a 2S t 2t 3 (t 3 - t 2 ) M 45°
2 X′ X
O
1 x+
= a 2 (t1 - t 2 ) (t 2 - t 3 ) (t 3 - t1 ) y=

Di
2

re
0

ct
1

r ix
= a 2 ( -d ) ( -d ) (2d ) [by using Eq. (i)]
2
Y′
= a 2d 3, which is constant.
\ SP = PM
Remark Þ (SP ) 2 = ( PM ) 2
St12 ( t2 - t3 ) = S t2t3 ( t3 - t2 ) = ( t1 - t2 ) ( t2 - t3 ) ( t3 - t1 ) 2
é (x + y ) ù
Þ ( x - 2 ) 2 + (y - 2 ) 2 = ê
Corollary Area of triangle of P( at12, 2at1 ), Q( at22, 2at2 ) and ë 2 úû
R( at32, 2at3 ) is a2( t1 - t2 )( t2 - t3 )( t3 - t1 ) = D (say)
Þ 2( x 2 + y 2 - 4 x - 4y + 8 ) = x 2 + y 2 + 2 xy
It is clear from just previous example the area of the triangle
inscribed in a parabola is twice the area of the triangle Þ x 2 + y 2 - 2 xy - 8 x - 8y + 16 = 0
formed by the tangents at the vertices. \ ( x - y ) 2 = 8( x + y - 2 )
2
106. Equation of tangent at (1, 7) to y = x + 6 109. Equation of tangent to y = x 2 is
1 1
Þ (y + 7 ) = x × 1 + 6 y = mx - m 2 …(i)
2 4
Þ y = 2x + 5 …(i)
Equation of tangent to ( x - 2 ) 2 = - y is
This tangent also touches the circle.
1 2
x 2 + y 2 + 16 x + 12y + c = 0 …(ii) y = m( x - 2 ) + m …(ii)
4
Now, solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Q Eqs. (i) and (ii) are identical.
x 2 + (2 x + 5 ) 2 + 16 x + 12(2 x + 5 ) + c = 0 Þ m = 0 or 4
Þ 5 x 2 + 60 x + 85 + c = 0 \ Common tangents are y = 0 and y = 4 x - 4 = 4 ( x - 1 ).
Since, roots are equal, so 110. Given parabola is
B 2 - 4 AC = 0 a 3x 2 a 2x
y = + - 2a …(i)
2 3 2
Þ (60 ) - 4 ´ 5 ´ (85 + c ) = 0
Þ 85 + c = 180 dy 3
For vertex =0 Þ x=-
Þ 5 x 2 + 60 x + 180 = 0 dx 4a
60 3
Þ x=- = -6 Þ y = -7 Substitute x = - in Eq. (i), we get
10 4a
Hence, point of contact is ( -6, - 7 ). 35a
y =-
107. Q P º (1,0), let Q º (h, k ) 16
æ 3 35a ö
such that k 2 = 8h …(i) \ Coordinates of vertex are ç - , - ÷.
è 4a 16 ø
Let ( a, b ) be the mid-point of PQ.
3 35a
h+1 k+0 For locus let x = - and y = - .
\ a= ,b = 4a 16
2 2
105
Þ h = 2 a - 1, k = 2b \ xy = , which is the required locus.
64
From Eq. (i), we get
(2b ) 2 = 8(2 a - 1 ) 111. Q y = x 2 - 5x + 6

Þ b2 = 4a - 2 \ Equation of tangent at (2, 0) is

y +0 5
Þ b2 - 4a + 2 = 0 = x × 2 - (x + 2) + 6
2 2
\ Required locus is y 2 - 4 x + 2 = 0. Þ y =-x+2 …(i)
 Chap 05 Parabola 455

and equation of tangent at (3, 0) is 115. The circle and the parabola touch each other at x = 1, i.e. at the
Þ y = x -3 …(ii) points (1, 2) and (1, - 2 ) as shown in figure.
Q Eqs. (i) and (ii) are perpendicular. (1,2)
\ Angle between tangents is p / 2.
(3,0)
112. (i) Coordinates of P and Q are (1, 2 2 ) and (1, - 2 2 ). X′ X
(1,0) 2 2
Y √

(1, –2)

P
116. Vertex is (1,0).
(1,2 √2 ) Y
,0)

S R x=2
(1

X′ X
(–3,0) (–1, O
0 ) (9,0) (0, 0) (1, 0)
X
Q S A (2, 0)
(1,–2√2 )

Y′ Y′
1 117. G º (h, k )
Area of DPQR = × 4 2 × 8 = 16 2
2 2a + at 2 2at
1 Þ h= ,k =
Area of DPQS = × 4 2 × 2 = 4 2 3 3
2 Y 2)
2at
\ Ratio of area of DPQS and DPQR is 1 : 4. P(at,
(ii) Equation of circumcircle of DPRS is
( x + 1 ) ( x - 9 ) + y 2 + ly = 0 X
T(–at2,0) (0,0) N(2a +at2, 0)
It will pass through (1, 2 2 ), then
8
- 16 + 8 + l 2 2 = 0 Þ l = =2 2
2 2
2
Equation of circumcircle is æ 3h - 2a ö 9k
Þ ç ÷= 2
x 2 + y 2 - 8 x + 2 2y - 9 = 0 è a ø 4a
Hence, radius is 3 3. \ Required parabola is
Aliter : 9y 2 (3 x - 2a ) 3 æ 2a ö
2
= = çx - ÷
4a a a è 3ø
2 2
Let ÐPSR = q Þ sin q = 4a æ 2a ö
2 3 Þ y2 = çx - ÷
3 è 3ø
Þ PR = 6 2 = 2 R × sin q Þ R = 3 3.
æ 2a ö
D \ Vertex º ç , 0 ÷ ; Focus º (a, 0 ).
(iii) Radius of incircle is r = . è3 ø
s
2t 2 - 2t1 2
As D = 16 2 118. Slope of AB = = …(i)
(t 22 - t12 ) (t 2 + t1 )
6 2+6 2+4 2
\ s= =8 2 Y
2 2
B(t2,2t2)
(t 1, 2t 1)
2
16 2
\ r= =2 r M
8 2
X
x2 3 1
113. y = - + x + 1 Þ y - = - (x - 1)2
2 2 2
Þ It is symmetric about x = 1.
Hence, both statement are true and Statement II is correct
explanation of Statement I. æ t 2 + t 22 ö
M = Mid-point of AB = ç 1 , t1 + t 2 ÷
114. Q Point of intersection of two perpendicular tangents to the è 2 ø
parabola lies on directrix of the parabola. \ r = | t1 + t 2 | Þ t1 + t 2 = ± r
\ Equation of directrix is x + 2 = 0. Now, from Eq. (i),
So, point is ( - 2, 0 ). 2
slope of AB = ± .
r
456 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

119. The locus of perpendicular tangent is directrix, i.e., x + 1 = 0 or 123. The shortest distance between y = x - 1 and y 2 = x is along the
x = - 1. normal of y 2 = x.
120. D1 = Area of DPLL¢ Y
1 æ 1ö
= ´ 8 ´ ç2 - ÷ = 6 sq unitss Q
2 è 2ø
1
Y x= P(t2, t)
y–
A L(2,4) X′ X
P O
1,
P 2
2
X′ X
C O
B

L′(2,–4) Y′
Y′

Let P (t 2, t ) be any point on y 2 = x.

Now, equation of AB is y = 2 x + 1,
x t
equation of AC is y = x + 2 and \ Tangent at P is y = + .
2t 2
equation of BC is y = - x - 2
1
On solving above equations, we get \ Slope of tangent =
2t
A(1, 3 ), B ( - 1, - 1 ) and C ( - 2, 0 )
and tangent at P is parallel to y - x = 1
1 1+2 3-0
\ D2 = = 3 sq units 1 1 æ 1 1ö
2 -1 + 2 -1 - 0 \ =1 Þ t = Þ Pç , ÷
2t 2 è 4 2ø
D1
\ =2 1 1
D2 - -1
2 4 3 3 2
121. Let A( x, y ) = A(t 2, 2t ) be any point on the parabola y 2 = 4x, then Hence, shortest distance = PQ = = =
(1 + 1 ) 4 2 8
t2
x= …(i) 124. We observe that both parabola y 2 = 8x and circle
4
x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 4y = 0 pass through origin say P( 0, 0 ).
2t
and y = …(ii) Y
4

Y A(t2, 2t) Q(2,4)

3 )
1 : (x, y (1,2)
P
X′ X 90°
O X′ X
(0,0)P S (2,0)
Y′
Y′

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

x =y2
Let Q be the point (2 t 2, 4 t ), then it will satisfy the equation of
122. The equation of normal to
circle.
y 2 = 4 x is y = mx - 2m - m 3 …(i)
\ (2t 2 ) 2 + ( 4t ) 2 - 2(2t 2 ) - 4( 4t ) = 0
As it passes through (9, 6), then
Þ 4t 4 + 12 t 2 - 16 t = 0
6 = 9m - 2m - m 3
Þ t(t - 1 ) (t 2 + t - 4 ) = 0 Þ t = 0 or 1
Þ m 3 - 7m + 6 = 0
For t = 0, we get point P, therefore t = 1 gives point Q as (2, 4).
Þ(m - 1 ) (m - 2 ) (m + 3 ) = 0
Here, P( 0, 0 ) and Q(2, 4 ) are end points of diameter of the given
Þ m = 1, 2, - 3 circle and focus of the parabola is the point S(2, 0 ).
From Eq. (i), equations of normals are \ ÐPSQ = 90°
y = x - 3, y = 2 x - 12 , y = - 3 x + 33 1
Þ y - x + 3 = 0, y - 2 x + 12 = 0, y + 3 x - 33 = 0 Hence, area of DPQS = ´ 2 ´ 4 = 4 sq units.
2
 Chap 05 Parabola 457

Sol. (Q. Nos. 125 and 126) 2

128. Let the tangent to, y 2 = 8x be y = mx + .
Q PQ is the focal chord of y = 4ax. 2 m
2a ö Y R
æa
\ Coordinates of P and Q are (at 2, 2at ) and ç 2 , - ÷ .
èt t ø P
Y
P (at2,2at)
X′ X
T(−2, O
R 90° 0)
O Q
X′ θ X
S(a,0) Y′ S
Q If it is common tangent to parabola and circle, then
a ,– 2a
Y′ 2
t2 t y = mx + is a tangent to x 2 + y 2 = 2.
m
Tangents at P and Q are 2
ty = x + at 2 and ty = xt 2 + a \ m = 2
æ æ 1öö (1 + m 2 )
which intersect each other at R ç - a, a çt - ÷ ÷ .
è è t øø 4
Þ =2
As R lies on the line y = 2 x + a, a > 0 m 2(1 + m 2 )

\
æ 1ö
a çt - ÷ = - 2a + a Þ m4 + m2 - 2 = 0
è tø Þ (m 2 + 2 ) (m 2 - 1 ) = 0
1
Þ t - = -1 \ m=±1
t
\ Required tangents are y = x + 2 and y = - x - 2.
2
125. Q Slope of OP = and slope of OQ = - 2 t Their common point is T ( - 2, 0 ).
t
Chord of contact PQ to circle is
2
+ 2t x × (- 2) + y × 0 = 2
2 1
\ tan q = t = t+ Þ x = -1
1-4 3 t
Hence, coordinates of P and Q are ( - 1, 1 ) and ( - 1, - 1 ) and
2
chord of contact RS to parabola is
2 æ 1ö 2 é 1 ù y × 0 = 4 (x - 2)
= çt - ÷ + 4 = 5 êëQ t - t = - 1 úû
3 è tø 3 Þ x =2
Q q > 90° Hence, coordinates of R and S are (2, 4) and (2, - 4 ).
2 1
\ tan q = - 5 \Area of trapezium PQRS = (2 + 8 ) ´ 3 = 15 sq units
3 2
2 ìï æ 2 üï
æ 1ö 1ö Sol. (Q. Nos. 129 and 130)
126. PQ = a çt + ÷ = a í çt - ÷ + 4ý
è tø ïî è tø ïþ æ a - 2a ö
Q PQ is a focal chord, then Q ç 2 , ÷.
é 1 ù èt t ø
= a(1 + 4 ) = 5a êëQ t - t = - 1 úû
Also, QR || PK Þ mQR = mPK
127. Equation of tangent of y 2 = 4x in terms of slope is 2a
2ar +
1 Þ t = 0 - 2at
y = mx + …(i) a 2
m ar - 2 2a - at
2

Q Line Eq. (i) touches x 2 = - 32y t

2 - 2t
æ 1ö Þ =
Þ x 2 = - 32 çmx + ÷ 1 2 - t2
è mø r-
32 t
2
Þ x + 32mx + =0 …(ii) 1
m [Qr + ¹ 0, otherwise Q will coincide with R]
For touching roots of Eq. (ii) are equal. t
\ D=0 Þ 2 - t 2 = - rt + 1
æ 32 ö t2 - 1
Þ (32m ) 2 = 4 × 1 × ç ÷ \ r=
èmø t
1 t2 - 1
Þ m3 = 129. r =
8 t
\ m =1/2
458 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

130. Tangent at P is ty = x + at 2 …(i) æt2 ö æt2 ö

134. Let P ç 1 , t1 ÷ and Q ç 2 , t 2 ÷ such that t1 > 0
3 è2 ø è2 ø
Normal at S is y + sx = 2as + as …(ii)
[Q P lies in first quadrant]
Putting the value of x from Eq. (i) in Eq. (ii), then
Q Circle with PQ as diameter passes through the vertex O( 0, 0 )
y + s (ty - at 2 ) = 2as + as 3 of the parabola.
Þ y + (st )y - a(st )t = 2as + as 3 \ ÐPOQ = 90°
2a a Þ Slope of OP ´ Slope of OQ = - 1
Þ y + y - at = + 3 [Q st = 1 ]
t t 2 2
Þ ´ = -1
æ 2 1ö t1 t 2
Þ 2y = a çt + + 3 ÷
è t t ø Þ t1t 2 = - 4 [Q t 2 < 0 ]
2 2
a(t + 1 ) 2
\ y = P t1 , t
2t 3 Y 2
1

131. Let any point Q on x 2 = 8y is ( 4t, 2 t 2 ) and given P (h, k ) divides

OQ in the ratio 1:3 (internally).
Y X′ X
O

3 Q (4t,2t2) Q
P Y′ 2
1 t2 , t
2
X 2
O
Now, area of DOPQ = 3 2
4t 2t 2
Then, h= = t and k = Þ 2k = h 2 t12
4 4 1 2 t1
Þ =3 2
\ Required locus of P is x 2 = 2y . 2 t 22
t2
132. End points of latusrectum of 2
y 2 = 4 x are (1, ± 2 ). 1
Þ t1t 2(t1 - t 2 ) = ± 3 2
4
Equation of normal to y 2 = 4 x at (1, 2) is
Þ t1 - t 2 = ± 3 2 [Q t1t 2 = - 4 ]
2
y - 2 = - (x - 1) 4
2 Þ t1 + = ± 3 2
t1
Þ x + y -3 = 0
4
As it is tangent to circle ( x - 3 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = r 2 or t1 + = 3 2 [Q t1 > 0 ]
t1
|3 -2 -3|
\ = r Þ r2 = 2 Þ t12 - 3 2t1 + 4 = 0
(1 + 1 )
3 2± 2
133. Let (t 2, 2 t ) be any point on y 2 = 4x. Let (h, k ) be image of (t 2, 2t ) \ t1 = = 2 2 , 2.
2
with respect to the line x + y + 4 = 0, then
\ Point P can be ( 4, 2 2 ) or (1, 2 ).
h - t 2 k - 2t - 2(t 2 + 2 t + 4 )
= = 135. Let P (2 t 2, 4t ) and C( 0, - 6).
1 1 1+1
Þ h = - (2 t + 4 ) and k = - (t 2 + 4 ) \ (CP ) 2 = 4 t 4 + ( 4 t + 6 ) 2 = z (say)
2 dz
æh + 4ö \ =0
Þ (k + 4 ) = - ç ÷ dt
è -2 ø
Þ 16t 3 + 2( 4t + 6 ) × 4 = 0
Þ (h + 4 ) 2 = - 4(k + 4 )
Þ t 3 + 2t + 3 = 0
2
Locus of (h, k ) is ( x + 4 ) = - 4(y + 4 ).
Þ (t + 1 ) (t 2 - t + 3 ) = 0
2
\ Curve C is ( x + 4 ) = - 4(y + 4 ) \ t = -1
Now, intersection of C with y = - 5, then Þ P(2, - 4 )
( x + 4 ) 2 = - 4( - 5 + 4 ) = 4 Equation of circle is
\ x + 4 = ± 2 Þ x = - 6,- 2 ( x - 2 ) 2 + (y + 4 ) 2 = (2 - 0 ) 2 + ( - 4 + 6 ) 2
\ A( - 6, - 5 ) and B( - 2, - 5 ) Þ x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 8y + 12 = 0
\ AB = 4
 Chap 05 Parabola 459

136. QC1 : x 2 + y 2 = 3 and parabola x 2 = 2y , then Alternate (c) Equation of normal at P( 4, 4 ) is

2
y + 2y - 3 = 0 Þ y = 1,- 3 4
y - 4 = - (x - 4)
\ P( 2, 1 ) [Q P lies in first quadrant] 2
Þ y - 4 = - 2x + 8
Now, tangent at P( 2, 1 ) on the circle C1 is
Þ 2 x + y = 12
x 2 + y =3 \ Intercept on X -axis is 6.
Let Q2 or Q3( 0, l ) Alternate (d) Slope of tangent at Q = Slope of tangent at
| 0 + l -3| 1
\ =2 3 P =
(2 + 1 ) 2
Þ | l -3| =6 138. Centre of circle
\ l = 9 or - 3 Y
Þ Q2( 0, - 3 ) and Q3( 0, 9 ).
y= (0, 4)
Alternate (a) Q2Q3 = 12 x
–x
r
Alternate (b) R2R3 = Length of external common tangent C r y=
M
= (Q2Q3 ) 2 - (2 3 + 2 3 ) 2 X′ X
O
= (144 - 48 = 4 6
1 | 0 + 0 - 3|
Alternate (c) Area of DOR2R3 = ´ R 2R 3 ´
2 (2 + 1 )
1 3
=
´4 6´ =6 2 Y′
2 3
1 C º ( 0, 4 - r )
Alternate (d) Area of DPQ2Q3 = ´ Q2Q3 ´ 2
2 Q CM = r
1 | 10 - ( 4 - r )|
= ´ 12 ´ 2 = 6 2 \ =r
2 2
137. Let P (t 2, 2 t ), S(2, 8) and r = ( 4 + 64 - 64) = 2 Þ 4 -r =r 2
We know that, shortest distance between two curves lies along 4
or r=
their common normal. The common normal will pass through 2+1
centre of circle.
= 4( 2 - 1 )
\ Slope of PS = Slope of normal to the parabola
139. (a) Equation of chord of parabola y 2 = 16x whose mid-point
y 2 = 4 x at P (t 2, 2t )
(h, k ) is
2t - 8
Þ = - t or t 3 = 8 Þ t = 2 T = S1
t2 - 2
or ky - 8( x + h ) = k 2 - 16h
\ P( 4, 4 )
or 8 x - ky = 8h - k 2 ...(i)
Alternate (a) SP = (2 - 4 ) 2 + (8 - 4 ) 2 = 2 5
Now comparing Eq. (i) and 2x + y = p, then
Alternate (b) SQ = r = 2
8 - k 8h - k 2
SQ SQ 2 = =
\ = = 2 1 p
QP SP - SQ 2 5 - 2
Þ k = - 4 and 4 p = 8h - k 2
1 ( 5 + 1) 5+1
= ´ = or k = - 4 and p = 2h - 4
( 5 - 1) ( 5 + 1) 4
Hence, p = 2, h = 3, k = - 4
Þ SQ : QP = ( 5 + 1 ) : 4
CHAPTER

06
Ellipse
Learning Part
Session 1
● Ellipse Definition ● Standard Equation of Ellipse
● The Foci and Two Directrices of an Ellipse ● Tracing of the Ellipse
● Some Terms Related to an Ellipse ● Focal Distances of a Point
x2 y 2 ● Mechanical Construction of an Ellipse
● The Shape of the Ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, when b > a
a b
Session 2
● Position of a Point with Respect to an Ellipse ● Intersection of a Line and an Ellipse
● Equation of Tangent in Different Forms ● Equations of Normals in Different Forms
● Properties of Eccentric Angles of the Co-normal Points ● Co-normal Points Lie on a Fixed Curve
● Smart Table
Session 3
● Pair of Tangents ● Chord of Contact
● Chord Bisected at a Given Point ● Diameter
● Conjugate Diameters ● Equi-Conjugate Diameters
● Director Circle ● Sub-Tangent and Sub-Normal
● Co+ncyclic Points ● Some Standard Properties of the Ellipse
● Reflection Property of an Ellipse
● Equation of an Ellipse Referred to Two Perpendicular Lines

Practice Part
● JEE Types Examples ● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Ellipse Definition, Standard Equation of Ellipse,
Tracing of the Ellipse,Focal Distances of a Point,
The Shape of the Ellipse x2/a2 + y2/b2 = 1, When b > a,
Mechanical Construction of an Ellipse,

Ellipse Definition Then, adding Eqs. (i) and (ii),

SA + SA ¢ = e ( AZ + A ¢ Z )
An ellipse is the locus of a point which moves in a plane
such that its distance from a fixed point (i.e. focus) is a Þ AA ¢ = e (CZ - CA + CA ¢ + CZ ) (from figure)
constant ratio from a fixed line (i.e. directrix). Þ AA ¢ = e (2CZ ) (QCA = CA ¢)
This ratio is called eccentricity and is denoted by e. Þ 2a = 2eCZ
For an ellipse 0 < e < 1. Q CZ = a / e
\ The directrix MZ is x = CZ =a /e
Standard Equation of Ellipse or
a
- x =0
æ a
çQe < 1 ,\ > 1÷
ö
Let S be the focus and ZM the directrix of the ellipse. Drow e è e ø
SZ^ ZM . Divide SZ internally and externally in the ratio and subtracting Eqs. (i) from (ii), then
e : 1(0 < e < 1) and let A and A¢ be these internal and
external point of division SA ¢ - SA = e ( A ¢ Z - AZ )
Þ (CA ¢ + CS ) - (CA - CS ) = e ( AA ¢ )
Directrix

Directrix

Y Þ 2CS = e ( AA ¢ ) (QCA = CA ¢ )
(0, b) B Þ 2 CS = e (2a )
P (x, y)
M′ M
\ CS = ae
Z¢ C Z
X′ X \ The focus S is (CS , 0 ) i.e. (ae , 0 )
A¢ S¢ (–ae, 0) S (ae, 0) A Axis
(–a, 0) (a, 0) Now draw PM ^ MZ
(0, –b) B¢ SP
\ = e or (SP ) 2 = e 2 ( PM ) 2
x = –a/e x = a/e PM
Y¢
2
æa ö
Then, SA = eAZ ...(i) ( x - ae ) 2 + (y - 0 ) 2 = e 2 ç - x ÷
èe ø
and SA ¢ = eA ¢ Z ...(ii)
Þ ( x - ae ) 2 + y 2 = (a - ex ) 2
Clearly A and A¢ will lie on the ellipse
Let AA ¢ = 2a and take C the mid point of AA¢ as origin Þ x 2 + a 2 e 2 - 2aex + y 2 = a 2 - 2aex + e 2 x 2
\ CA = CA ¢ = a ...(iii) Þ x 2 (1 - e 2 ) + y 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )
Let P ( x , y ) by any point on the ellipse referred to CA and x2 y2
CB as co-ordinate axes Þ + =1
a2 a 2 (1 - e 2 )
 Chap 06 Ellipse 463

x2 y2 The equation being the same as that of the ellipse

or + =1
a 2
b 2 when S (ae , 0 ) is focus and MZ i.e. x = a /e is directrix.
Hence, coordinates of foci are ( ± ae , 0 ) and equations
where, b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )
of directrices are x = ± a / e.
This is the standard equation of an ellipse, AA¢ and BB¢
are called the major and minor axes of the ellipse. Remarks
(Here b < a ) and A and A¢ are the vertices of the ellipse. 1. Distance between foci SS ¢ = 2ae and distance between
directrices ZZ ¢ = 2a / e
Remark 2. If e = 0
Two ellipse are said to be similar if they have the same value of then b2 = a2 ( 1 - 0 )
eccentricity. \ b2 = a2
Generally, x2 y2
then equation of ellipse 2
+ = 1 changes in circle
The equation to the ellipse, whose focus is the point (h, k ) a b2
and directrix is lx + my + n = 0 and whose eccentricity is e, i.e. x 2 + y 2 = a2
is x2 y2
3. Since, 2
+ =1
a b2
(lx + my + n ) 2
( x - h ) 2 + (y - k ) 2 = e 2 . y2 x2 a2 - x 2
Þ = 1- =
(l 2 + m 2 ) b2
a 2
a2
y2 (a+ x) (a- x)
=
b2 a2
The Foci and Two Directrices Y

of an Ellipse B P (x, y)

On the negative side of origin take a point S ¢ which is X′ X

A′ C N A
such that (-a, 0) (a, 0)
CS = CS ¢ = ae B′
and another point Z ¢, then
Y′
a
CZ = CZ ¢ =
e ( PN ) 2 A¢ N × AN
or =
\ Coordinates of S ¢ are ( -ae , 0 ) and equation of second b2 a2
a ( PN ) 2 b2 ( BC) 2
directrix (i.e ., Z ¢ M ¢ ) is x = - or = 2=
AN × A¢ N a ( AC) 2
e
i.e. ( PN ) 2 : AN × A¢ N ::( BC) 2 :( AC) 2
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the ellipse, then
4. The distance of every focus from the extremity of minor axis is
S ¢ P = ePM ¢ equal to a.
or (S ¢ P ) 2 = e 2 ( PM ¢ ) 2 i.e. ( a2e2 + b2 ) = ( a2 - b2 + b2 ) = a

2
2 æ aö
2 2
or ( x + ae ) + (y - 0 ) = e ç x + ÷
è eø Tracing of the Ellipse
or ( x + ae ) 2 + y 2 = (ex + a ) 2 Equation of the ellipse is
2 2 2 2 2
or x (1 - e ) + y = a (1 - e ) x2 y2
=1 + …(i)
x2 y2 a2 b2
or + =1
a2 a 2 (1 - e 2 ) 1. The ellipse (i) cuts X-axis at A (a, 0 ) and A ¢ ( -a, 0 ) and
cuts Y-axis at B (0, b ) and B ¢ (0, - b ).
x2 y2 2. The Eq. (i) does not change when y is replaced by - y
or + = 1,
a2 b2 and x is replaced by -x, Hence ellipse (i) is
symmetrical about both axes
where, b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )
464 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

3. The equation (i), may be written in either of the form 4. Axes : The lines AA¢ and BB¢ are called the major
and minor axes of the ellipse
æ x2 ö
y = ± b ç1 - ÷ ...(ii) Q 0 <e <1
è a2 ø
or 0 < e2 < 1 (\ 0 > - e 2 > - 1)
æ y2 ö
or x = ± a ç1 - ÷ …(iii) or 0 < 1 - e2 < 1 (or 1 > 1 - e 2 > 1 - 1)
è b2 ø
or a 2 (1 - e 2 ) < a 2 (or 0 < 1 - e 2 < 1)
From Eq. (ii), it follows that (y is real)
or b2 < a2
2
x
if 1- ³ 0 or a 2 - x 2 ³ 0 i.e. b <a
a2
or x 2 £ a 2 or -a £ x £ a Remark
The major and minor axis together are called principal axes of
Also from Eq. (iii), it follows that (x is real) the ellipse.
y2 5. Double ordinates : If P be a point on the ellipse
if 1- ³ 0 or b 2 - y 2 ³ 0 or y 2 £ b 2
2 draw PN perpendicular to the axis of the ellipse and
b
\ -b £ y £ b produced to meet the curve again at P ¢. Then PP ¢ is
called a double ordinate.
Ellipse (i) is a closed curve lies entirely between the lines
x = a and x = - a and the lines y = b and y = - b. If abscissa of P is h, then ordinate of P,
Since, when x increases, then y decreases from Eq. (ii) and y2 h2
=1-
when y decreases, then x increases from Eq. (iii). b2 a2
b
Remark y= (a 2 - h 2 ) (for first quadrant)
a
x2 y2
Area of the ellipse + = 1 is pab.
a2
b2 and ordinate of P ¢ is
b
y = - (a 2 - h 2 ) (for fourth quadrant)
a
Some Terms Related Hence, coordinates of P and P ¢ are
to an Ellipse æ b
ç h,
ö æ
(a 2 - h 2 ) ÷ and ç h, -
b ö
(a 2 - h 2 ) ÷
è a ø è a ø
x2 y2 respectively.
Let the equation of the ellipse + =1
a2 b2 6. Latusrectum The double ordinates LL¢ and L1 L1 ¢
(a > b ) are latusrectums of the ellipse. These line are
1. Centre : All chords passing through C is bisected at C perpendicular to major axis A ¢ A and through the foci
Here C º (0, 0 ) S and S ¢, respectively.
Y Length of the latusrectum
B P Now let LL ¢ = 2k
M¢ M
L1 L then LS = L ¢ S = k
Z X
Z¢ A¢ S¢ C N S A Coordinates of L and L¢ are (ae , k ) and (ae , - k ) lies on
L1¢ the ellipse
B¢ P¢ L¢
x2 y2
+ =1
a2 b2
2. Foci : S and S ¢ are two foci of the ellipse and their
coordinates are (ae , 0 ) and ( -ae , 0 ) respectively. a 2e 2 k2
\ + = 1 or k 2 = b 2 (1 - e 2 )
2 2
3. Directrices : ZM and Z ¢ M ¢ are two directrices of the a b
a a æ b2 ö
ellipse and their equation are x = and x = -
e e = b2 ç ÷ [Qb 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )]
è a2 ø
respectively.
 Chap 06 Ellipse 465

b2 2b 2 1
\ k= (Qk > 0) Þ = (2b )
a a 2
or 2b = a
2b 2
\ 2k =
= LL ¢ or 4b 2 = a 2
a
2b 2 Þ 4a 2 ( 1 - e 2 ) = a 2
\ Length of latusrectum LL ¢ = L1 L1 ¢ = and end of
points of latusrectum are a or 4e 2 = 3
æ b2 ö æ b2 ö 3
L º ç ae , ÷ ; L ¢ º ç ae , - ÷ \ e=
2
è a ø è a ø
Example 3 If the distance between the directrices is
æ b2 ö æ b2 ö thrice the distance between the foci, then find eccentricity
L1 º ç - ae , ÷ ; L1 ¢ º ç -ae , - ÷
è a ø è a ø of the ellipse.
2a 1
respectively. Sol. Given, = 3 (2ae ) Þ e 2 =
e 3
Remark 1
\ e=
Latusrectum 3
2b2 ( 2b) 2 (Minor axis) 2
= L L¢ = = = y Example 4 If P ( x , y ) be any point on the ellipse
a ( 2a) (Major axis)
a
= 2a ( 1 - e ) = 2e ç - aeö÷
2 æ 16 x 2 + 25y 2 = 400 and F1 º ( 3, 0), F 2 º ( -3, 0), then find
èe ø
the value of PF1 + PF 2 .
= 2e (distance from focus to the corresponding directrix)
Sol. We have, 16 x 2 + 25y 2 = 400
7. Focal chord : A chord of the ellipse passing through
x2 y2
its focus is called a focal chord. Þ +
=1
52 42
Remark Q Coordinates of foci an ( ± ae , 0)
Semi latusrectum is the harmonic mean of the segments of focal or æç ± (a 2 - b 2 ), 0ö÷
1 1 2a è ø
chord or + = , ( a > b), where PQ is the focal chord and S
SP SQ b2 i.e. ( ± (25 - 16), 0) or ( ± 3, 0)
is the focus.
Thus, F1 and F2 are foci of the ellipse.
8. Vertices : The vertices of the ellipse are the points
\ PF1 + PF2 = Length of major axis
where the ellipse meets its major axis.
= 2a = 2 ´ 5 = 10
Hence, A and A¢ are the vertices
9. Parametric equation of the ellipse : The circle
\ A º (a, 0 ) and A ¢ º ( -a, 0 ) described on the major-axis of an ellipse as diameter
is called the auxiliary circle of the ellipse.
y Example 1 If PSQ is a focal chord of the ellipse
16 x 2 + 25y 2 = 400, such that SP = 8, then find the Let the equation of ellipse be
length of SQ. x2 y2
+ =1
x2 y2 a2 b2
Sol. The given ellipse is 16x 2 + 25y 2 = 400 or + =1
25 16 \ Equation of its auxiliary circle is
1 1 2a x 2 + y 2 = a 2 (QAA¢ is diameter of the circle)
Q + = 2
SP SQ b
1 1 2(5) 5 1 1 Q
Þ + = = or =
8 SQ 16 8 SQ 2 P
\ SQ = 2
φ
X¢ X
Example 2 If the latusrectum of an ellipse is equal to A¢ C N S A
(–a, 0) (a, 0)
half of its minor-axis, then find its eccentricity.
1
Sol. Q Latusrectum = (minor axis)
2
466 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Let Q be a point on the auxiliary circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 if focal chord pass through ( ae,0 ), then
f f æ e - 1ö
such that QP produced is perpendicular to the X-axis. tan æç 1 ö÷ tan æç 2 ö÷ = ç ÷
è2ø è 2 ø è e + 1ø
Then P and Q are the corresponding points on the
and if focal chord pass through ( -ae, 0), then
ellipse and the auxiliary circle respectively. f f æ e + 1ö
tan æç 1 ö÷ tan æç 2 ö÷ = ç ÷
Let ÐQCA = f (0 £ f < 2 p ) è2ø è 2 ø è e - 1ø
i.e. the eccentric angle of P on an ellipse is the angle f f æ e - 1ö
or cot æç 1 ö÷ cot æç 2 ö÷ = ç ÷
which the radius (or radius vector) through the è2ø è 2 ø è e + 1ø
corresponding point on the auxiliary circle makes
with the major axis. Remark
\ Q º (a cos f, a sin f) Circle described on focal length as diameter always touches the
auxiliary circle.
\ Now x-coordinate of P is a cos f
Proof
Let y-coordinate of P is y, then (a cos f, y ) lies on the x 2 y2
Consider ellipse 2 + 2 = 1
ellipse a b
x2 y2 Let P be ( a cos q, b sin q)
+ =1 and S be ( ae, 0 )
a2 b2 a
\ SP = e PM = e æç - acos qö÷
a 2 cos 2 f y2 èe ø
+ =1
a2 b2 = ( a - ae cos q)
The auxiliary circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 having center
Þ y 2 = b 2 sin2 f
C1 ( 0, 0 ) and radius r1 = a
\ y = ± b sin f Y
Q P is in I quadrant
\ y = b sin f
P
Coordinates of P are (a cos f, b sin f). We have
x = a cos f, y = b sin f are called parametric equations X′
S
X
C1
of the ellipse.
This point (a cos f, b sin f) is also called the point ‘f’.

Remark Y′
The equation of the chord joining the points The circle having SP as the diameter has center
P º ( a cos f1, b sin f 1) ae + a cos q b sin q ö
C2 æç , ÷
and Q º ( a cos f 2, b sin f 2) is è 2 2 ø
x æ f + f 2ö y æ f + f 2ö æ f - f 2ö SP a ( 1 - e cos q)
cos ç 1 ÷ + sin ç 1 ÷ = cos ç 1 ÷ and radius r2 = =
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø 2 2
If its focal chord, then it pass through ( ae, 0 ) or ( -ae, 0 ), then ae + a cos q ö
2
æ b sin q ö
2

f + f2ö æ f1 - f 2 ö Now, C1C2 = æç ÷ +ç ÷

± ecos æç 1 ÷ + 0 = cos ç ÷ è 2 ø è 2 ø
è 2 ø è 2 ø
1 2
f - f2ö = a ( e + cos q) 2 + a2 ( 1 - e2 ) sin2 q
cos æç 1 ÷ 2
è 2 ø e a
Þ =± = ( e2 + cos 2 q + 2e cos q + sin2 q - e2 sin2 q)
æ f1 + f 2 ö 1 2
cos ç ÷
è 2 ø a
= ( e2 cos 2 q + 2e cos q + 1)
f - f2ö æ f1 + f 2 ö
cos æç 1 ÷ - cos ç ÷
2
è 2 ø è 2 ø æ ± e - 1ö a
Þ =ç ÷ = ( 1 + e cos q)
f - f2ö æ f 1 + f 2 ö è ± e + 1ø
cos æç 1 ÷ + cos ç ÷
2
è 2 ø è 2 ø = r1 - r2
f f æ ± e - 1ö Hence, the circle on SP as diameter touches the auxiliary circle
Þ tan æç 1 ö÷ tan æç 2 ö÷ = ç ÷ internally.
è2ø è 2 ø è ± e + 1ø
 Chap 06 Ellipse 467

y Example 5 Find the eccentric angle of a point on the Another definition of ellipse : An ellipse is the locus of
2
x2 y a point which moves in a plane such that the sum of its
ellipse + = 1. Whose distance from the center of distances from two fixed points in the same plane is
6 2
always constant.
the ellipse is 5.
Sol. Any point on the ellipse is P ( 6 cos q , 2 sin q) Remark
Where, 0 £ q < 2p and C (0, 0) is center, given CP = 5 SP and S ¢ P are also called focal radii of the ellipse
\ SP = a - ex1 and S ¢ P = a + ex1
Þ (CP )2 = 5
Þ 6 cos 2 q + 2 sin 2 q = 5 y Example 6 An ellipse having foci at (3, 3) and ( -4, 4 )
Þ 2 2
6 (1 - sin q) + 2 sin q = 5 and passing through the origin, then find eccentricity
1 of the ellipse.
or sin 2 q = Sol. The ellipse is passing through O (0, 0) and has foci
4
1 p P (3, 3) and Q ( -4, 4 ), then
or sin q = ± = ± sin OP + OQ = 2a and PQ = 2ae
2 6
p 5p 7 p 11p PQ 50 5
\ q= , , , \ e= = =
6 6 6 6 OP + OQ 3 2 + 4 2 7

Focal Distances of a Point The Shape of the Ellipse

The sum of focal distances of any point on the ellipse is x2 y 2
equal to the major axis. The ellipse is
2
+ 2 = 1, when b > a
x2 y2
+ =1 ...(i) a b
a2 b2
The foci S and S ¢ are (ae , 0 ) and ( -ae , 0 ). In this case major and minor-axis of the ellipse along
Y-axis and X-axis respectively.
The equations of its directrices MZ and M ¢ Z ¢ are x = a / e
and x = - a / e then AA ¢ = 2b and BB ¢ = 2a
Y
Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be any point on Eq. (i)
Z M
Y
B P A(0, b)
M¢ M
C Z
X¢ X S
Z¢ A¢ S¢ S A
(0,be)
B¢ X¢ X
B¢ C (0,0) B
Y¢ (–a,0) (a,0)

æa ö S¢
Now SP = ePM = e ç - x 1 ÷ (0,–be)
èe ø
= a - ex 1 A¢(0, -b)
æa ö Z¢
and S ¢ P = ePM ¢ = e ç + x 1 ÷ M¢
èe ø
Y¢
= a + ex 1
The foci S and S ¢ are (0, be ) and (0, -be ) respectively
SP + S ¢ P = (a - ex 1 ) + (a + ex 1 )
The directrices are MZ and M ¢ Z ¢ are
= 2a = AA ¢ = major axis b b
Hence, the sum of the focal distances of a point on the y= and y = -
e e
ellipse is constant and is equal to the length of the major
are respectively,
axis of the ellipse.
468 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Mechanical Construction of an Ellipse

Let S and S ¢ be two drawing pins and let an inextensible string whose ends at S and S ¢ P
and length is equal to sum of SP and S ¢ P i.e. 2a, where P is point of pencil. The point of
pencil move on paper and the fixed ends always tight. So as to satisfy these conditions it
will trace out the curve on the paper. This curve is an ellipse. Hence the locus of the S¢ S
point of pencil is an ellipse.

Smart Table : Difference between both (Horizontal and Vertical) Ellipses will be clear from the following table
Horizontal ellipse Vertical ellipse
Equation and graph of x 2
y 2
x 2
y2
the ellipse ® 2
+ 2
= 1;a > b 2
+ = 1;a < b
a b a b2
Y Y
ZA M
M′ B P
M P
X′ X S
Z′ A′ S′ C S A Z
X′ X
B′ B′ C B
S′
Basic fundamentals
¯ Y′
Z′ A′ M′
Y′
Centre (0 , 0 ) (0 , 0 )

Vertices (± a, 0 ) (0 , ± b)

Length of major axis 2a 2b

Length of minor axis 2b 2a

Foci ( ± ae , 0 ) or ( ± (a 2 - b 2 ) , 0 ) ( 0 , ± be ) or ( 0 , ± (b 2 - a 2 ) )

Distance between foci 2 ae or 2 (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 be or 2 (b 2 - a 2 )

Equation of directrices a b
x=± y=±
e e

Distance between directrices 2a 2b

e e

Relation between a , b and e b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 ) a 2 = b 2 (1 - e 2 )

Length of latusrectum 2b 2 2a 2
or 2a (1 - e 2 ) or 2b (1 - e 2 )
a b

End points of latusrectum æ b2 ö æ a2 ö

ç ± ae , ± ÷ ç± , ± be ÷
è aø è b ø

Focal radii SP = a - ex 1 , S ¢ P = a + ex 1 and SP + S ¢ P = 2a SP = b - ey1 , S ¢ P = b + ey1 and SP + S ¢ P = 2b

Parametric Coordinates (a cos q, b sin q), 0 £ q < 2 p (a cos q, b sin q), 0 £ q < 2 p

Tangents at the vertices x=±a y=±b

 Chap 06 Ellipse 469

y Example 7 Find the lengths of major and minor axes, Þ (SP )2 = e 2 ( PM )2

the coordinates of foci, vertices and the eccentricity of 1 ì x - y + 3ü
2

the ellipse 3x 2 + 2y 2 = 6. Also, find the equation of the Þ ( x + 1) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = í ý

4 î 2 þ
directrices. Þ 8 ( x 2 + y 2 + 2x - 2y + 2)
Sol. The equation of ellipse is
= x 2 + y 2 + 9 - 2xy + 6x - 6y
3x 2 + 2y 2 = 6
Þ 7 x 2 + 7y 2 + 2xy + 10x - 10y + 7 = 0
x2 y2
Þ + =1 which is the required equation of the ellipse.
2 3
x2 y2 y Example 9 Show that the line lx + my + n = 0 will cut
Þ + =1
( 2 )2 ( 3 )2 the ellipse x 2 / a 2 + y 2 / b 2 = 1 in points whose
Comparing this equation with
eccentric angles differ by ( p /2), if a 2l 2 + b 2m 2 = 2n 2 .
x2 y2
+ =1 Sol. Let eccentric angles are q and f, then
a2 b2
p
\ a = 2, b = 3 (Here b > a) q-f= (given)
2
Length of major axis = 2b = 2 3 p
\ q= +f
and Length of minor axis = 2a = 2 2 2
If e be the eccentricity, then a 2 = b 2 (1 - e 2 ) The line joining the point ‘ q ’ and ‘ f ’ is
1 x æq + fö y æq + fö æq - fö
Þ 2 = 3 (1 - e 2 ) Þ e 2 = cos ç ÷ + sin ç
è 2 ø b è 2 ø
÷ = cos ç
è 2 ø
÷
3 a
1 x æp ö y æp ö p æ p ö
\ e= or cos ç + f ÷ + sin ç + f ÷ = cos çQ q = + f ÷
3 a è4 ø b è4 ø 4 è 2 ø
Vertices = (0, ± b ) = (0, ± 3 ) x æp ö y æp ö 1
and foci are (0, ± be ) = (0, ± 1) or cos ç + f ÷ + sin ç + f ÷ = …(i)
a è 4 ø b è 4 ø 2
and equation of the directrices are y = ± b /e
and the given line is lx + my + n = 0
3
y=± or lx + my = - n …(ii)
(1 / 3 )
Now, Eqs. (i) and (ii) represent the same line, so comparing
\ y = ±3 them, we get
y Example 8 Find the equation of an ellipse whose æp ö æp ö
cos ç + f ÷ sin ç + f ÷
1 è4 ø è4 ø 1
focus is (–1, 1), eccentricity is and the directrix is = =-
2 la mb n 2
x - y + 3 = 0. æp ö la
\ cos ç + f ÷ = - …(iii)
Sol. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the ellipse whose focus is è4 ø n 2
S ( -1, 1) and the directrix is x - y + 3 = 0. Draw PM
perpendicular from P ( x , y ) on the directrix x - y + 3 = 0. æp ö mb
and sin ç + f ÷ = - …(iv)
Then by definition è4 ø n 2
Y Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), then
l 2a 2 m 2b 2
+ =1
2n 2 2n 2
0
3=

l 2a 2 + m 2b 2 = 2n 2
y+
x–

S (–1, 1)
M y Example 10 If a chord joining two points whose
X¢ X eccentric angles are a , b cut the major axis of an
O
ellipse at a distance d from the centre. Show that
tan(a /2) tan(b/2) = (d - a )/(d + a ), where 2a is the
P( x,y) Y¢
length of major axis.
SP = ePM
470 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Sol. Let the equation of the ellipse be b-0 b

\ Slope of BS is m1 = =-
x2 y2 0 - ae ae
+ =1 …(i)
a2 b2 and slope of BS¢ is m 2 =
b-0
=
b
Y 0 + ae ae
P (α) Q The angle between BS and BS¢ is 90°,
\ m1m 2 = - 1
X¢ X
C (d, 0) b b
Þ - ´ = -1
ae ae
Q (β)
Þ b 2 = a 2e 2
Y¢
The equation of the line joining ‘a’ and ‘ b’ on the ellipse a 2 (1 - e 2 ) = a 2e 2
Eq. (i) is Þ 1 - e2 = e2
x æa + b ö y æa + b ö æa - b ö Þ 2e 2 = 1
cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ = cos ç ÷ ...(ii)
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø 1
\ e=
Since, it cuts the major axis of the ellipse at a distance d 2
from the centre i.e. passes through the point (d , 0), then
d æa + b ö æa - b ö y Example 12 Find the equation of the ellipse referred
cos ç ÷ + 0 = cos ç ÷ to its centre whose minor axis is equal to the distance
a è 2 ø è 2 ø
between the foci and whose latusrectum is 10.
æa - b ö
cos ç ÷ Sol. Let the equation of the ellipse is
d è 2 ø
or = x2 y2
a æa + b ö + =1 (let a > b )
cos ç ÷ a2 b2
è 2 ø
Then, the foci are S (ae , 0) and S ¢ ( - ae , 0), length of minor
æa - bö æa + bö
cos ç ÷ - cos ç ÷ 2b 2
d -a è 2 ø è 2 ø axis BB ¢ =2b and length of latusrectum =
or = a
d +a æa - bö æa + bö B
cos ç ÷ + cos ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
(By componendo and dividendo) A¢ A
S¢ S
2 sin (a / 2) sin(b / 2)
=
2 cos(a / 2) cos(b / 2) B¢
= tan(a / 2) tan(b / 2) \According to the question
d -a BB ¢ = SS ¢ Þ 2b = 2ae
\ tan(a / 2) tan (b / 2) =
d +a Þ b = ae ...(i)
2b 2
and = 10
y Example 11 If the angle between the straight lines a
joining foci and the ends of the minor axis of the Þ b 2 = 5a …(ii)
2
x2 y 2 2 2
ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, is 90°. Find its eccentricity. also we have b = a (1 - e ) …(iii)
a b Putting the value of b from Eq. (i) in Eq. (iii), we have
x2 y2 a 2e 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )
Sol. The equation of the ellipse is + =1
a2 b2
Þ e2 = 1 - e2
Let a > b
B (0, b) Þ 2e 2 = 1
90° 1
\ e=
A¢ A 2
S¢ (-ae, 0) C (ae, 0) S
From Eq. (i), we have
B¢ (0, -b) a
b=
\The ends of minor axis are B (0, b ) and B ¢ (0, - b ). If the 2
eccentricity of the ellipse is e, then the foci are S (ae , 0) and a2
S ¢ ( -ae , 0) \ b2 =
2
 Chap 06 Ellipse 471

a2 Y
Þ 5a = [from Eq. (ii)]
2 B
Þ a = 10
From Eq. (ii) θ
P (h, k)
b 2 = 5 ´ 10 = 50 h
k
θ
x2 y2 O A
X
Putting the values of a and b in 2
+ 2
= 1, the equation of
a b
3h
required ellipse is or = l cosq …(ii)
2
x2 y2
+ =1 Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
100 50
9h 2
x 2 + 2y 2 = 100 9k 2 + = l2
4
y Example 13 Prove that the ratio of area of any or 9h 2 + 36k 2 = 4l 2
2
x2 y \ Locus of P (h , k ) is
triangle PQR inscribed in the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 and
a b 9 x 2 + 36y 2 = 4l 2
that of triangle formed by the corresponding points on Aliter :
b Let A º (a, 0) and B º (0, b )
the auxiliary circle is .
a Q P (h , k ) divide AB in the ratio 1 : 2 (internally), then
Sol. Let the three points on the ellipse be P (a cos a , b sin a), 10
. + 2.a 3h
h= Þ a=
Q (a cos b, b sin b ) and R (a cos g , b sin g). 1+2 2
Then, the corresponding points on the auxiliary circle are 1.b + 20
.
and k= Þ b = 3k
A (a cos a , a sin a), B (a cos b, a sin b) and 1+2
C (a cos g , a sin g), then
Q a2 + b2 = l 2
a cos a b sin a 1
1
a cos b b sin b 1 9h 2
2 a cos g b sin g 1 Þ + 9k 2 = l 2
Area of D PQR 4
=
Area of D ABC
1
a cos a a sin a 1 or 9h 2 + 36k 2 = 4l 2
a cos b a sin b 1
2 a cos g a sin g 1 \ Locus of P (h , k ) is
9 x 2 + 36y 2 = 4l 2
cos a sin a 1
ab cos b sin b 1 y Example 15 Find the lengths and equations of the
cos g sin g 1
= focal radii drawn from the point (4 3 , 5) on the
cos a sin a 1
a 2 cos b sin b 1 ellipse 25x 2 + 16 y 2 = 1600.
cos g sin g 1
Sol. The equation of the ellipse is
b
= 25x 2 + 16y 2 = 1600
a
x2 y2
or + =1
y Example 14 The extremities of a line segment of 64 100
length l move in two fixed perpendicular straight lines. Y
Find the locus of that point which divides this line
segment in ratio 1 : 2. )S
,6
Sol. Let PA : PB = 1 : 2 (0 P (4Ö3, 5)
l 2l
PA = and PB = X¢
3 3 X
C
l
k = sinq
(0

3
,–
6) S

or 3k = l sinq ...(i)
'

2l
and h = cosq Y¢
3
472 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Here, b > a and S¢ is (0, - be )

a 2 = 64, b 2 = 100 i.e.
æ 3ö
ç0, - 10 ´ ÷
è 5ø
a 2 = b 2 (1 - e 2 )
i.e. (0, - 6)
\ 64 = 100 (1 - e 2 )
\ Equation of SP is
Þ e = 3/5 6-5
Let P ( x 1, y1 ) º ( 4 3, 5) y -5= (x - 4 3)
0- 4 3
be a point on the ellipse, then SP and S ¢ P are the focal radii
- 4 3y + 20 3 = x - 4 3
\ SP = b - ey1 and S ¢ P = b + ey1
3 3 or x + 4 3y - 24 3 = 0
\ SP = 10 - ´ 5 and S ¢ P = 10 + ´ 5
5 5 and equation of S ¢ P is
Þ SP = 7 and S ¢ P = 13 -6 - 5
\ y -5= (x - 4 3)
Also, S is (0, be ) 0- 4 3
æ 3ö
i.e. ç0, 10 ´ ÷ i.e. (0, 6) Þ -4 3y + 20 3 = - 11x + 44 3
è 5ø
or 11x - 4 3y - 24 3 = 0

Exercise for Session 1

x2 y2
1. The length of the major axis of the ellipse + = 1, is three times the length of minor axis, it eccentricity is
a2 b 2
1 1 2 2 2 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 3 5
x2 y2
2. The equation + = 1, represents an ellipse, if
10 - a 4 - a
(a) a < 4 (b) a > 4 (c) 4 < a < 10 (d) a > 10
2 2
x y
3. The eccentricity of an ellipse + = 1, whose latusrectum is half of its major axis, is
a2 b 2
1 1 3 2
(a) (b) (c) (d) æç ö÷
3 2 2 è 3ø
1
4. If the eccentricity of an ellipse is , then its latusrectum is equal to its
2
(a) minor axis (b) semi minor axis (c) major axis (d) semi major axis

5. If the distance between the foci of an ellipse is equal to its minor axis, then its eccentricity is
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2 3 3
x2 y2
6. The eccentric angle of a point on the ellipse + = 1, whose distance from the centre of ellipse is 2, is
6 2
p p 3p 5p
(a) - (b) (c) (d)
4 4 2 3
a2 x2 y2
7. If tan a tanb = - 2
, then the chord joining two points a and b on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, will subtend a right
b a b
angle at
(a) focus (b) centre (c) end of major axis (d) end of minor axis
 Chap 06 Ellipse 473

x2 y2 x2 y2
8. If the eccentricity of the two ellipses + = 1 and 2 + 2 = 1 are equal, then the value of a /b is
169 25 a b
5 6
(a) (b)
13 13
13 13
(c) (d)
5 6
x2 y2
9. The ratio of the areas of triangle inscribed in ellipse + = 1, to that of triangle formed by the corresponding
a2 b 2
1
points on the auxiliary circle is , then the eccentricity of the ellipse is
2
1 3
(a) (b)
2 2
1 1
(c) (d)
2 3

10. If PSQ is a focal chord of the ellipse 16x 2 + 25y 2 = 400 such that SP = 16, then the length SQ is
2 4
(a) (b)
9 9
8 16
(c) (d)
9 9
x2 y2
11. Let P be a variable point on the ellipse + = 1 with foci at S and S¢. If A be the area of triangle PSS¢, then
25 16
the maximum value of A is
(a) 12 sq units (b) 24 sq units
(c) 36 sq units (d) 48 sq units

12. If S and S¢ are the foci of an ellipse of major axis of length 10 units and P is any point on the ellipse such that
the perimeter of triangle PSS¢ is 15 units, then the eccentricity of the ellipse is
1 1
(a) (b)
2 4
7 3
(c) (d)
25 4

13. Find the latusrectum, eccentricity, coordinates of the foci, coordinates of the vertices, the length of the axes and
the centre of the ellipse
4x 2 + 9y 2 - 8x - 36y + 4 = 0

14. The distance between the foci of an ellipse is 10 and its latusrectum is 15 ; find its equation referred to its axes
as axes of coordinates.

15. Find the equation of the ellipse whose axes are parallel to the coordinate axes having its centre at the point
(2, - 3) one focus at (3, - 3) and one vertex at (4, - 3).
16. Find the equation of the ellipse whose foci are (2, 3), ( -2, 3) and whose semi-minor axes is 5.

17. Show that the equation (10x - 5)2 + (10y - 5)2 = (3x + 4y - 1)2 represents an ellipse, find the eccentricity of the
ellipse.

18. Find the locus of the extremities of the latusrectum of the family of ellipses b 2x 2 + y 2 = a 2b 2 having a given
major axes.
Session 2
Position of a Point with Respect to an Ellipse,
Intersection of a Line and an Ellipse, Equation of
Tangent in Different Forms, Equations of Normals
in Different Forms, Properties of Eccentric Angles
of the Co-normal Points, Co-normal Points Lie on
a Fixed Curve
Position of a Point with Þ y 1 > , = or, < y 2
Respect to an Ellipse Þ
y 12
2
>, = or, <
y 22
b b2
Theorem : Prove that the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on,
y 12 x 12
x2 y2 Þ >, = or, < 1 - [from Eq. (i)]
or inside the ellipse + = 1 according as b2 a2
a2 b2
x 12 y 12 x 12 y 12
+ - 1 >, = or, < 0 Þ + >, = or, < 1,
a2 b2 a2 b2
Proof : From point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) draw perpendicular PM on x 12 y 12
or +
- 1 >, = or, < 0
AA¢ to meet the ellipse at Q ( x 1 , y 2 ). a2 b2
Y Hence, the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on or inside the
P (x1, y1)
B x2 y2
Q (x1, y2) ellipse + = 1 according as
a2 b2
X¢
A¢ C M A
X x 12 y 12
+ - 1 > 0, = or, < 0
a2 b2
B¢

Y¢ Remark
x2 y2 x12 y12
Since, Q ( x 1 , y 2 ) lies on the ellipse Let S = 2
+ 2
- 1, then S1 = -1 2
+
a b a b2
x2 y2 The point ( x1, y1 ) lies outside, on or inside the ellipse S = 0
+ =1 according as S1 >, = or < 0.
a2 b2
x 12 y 22 y Example 16 Find the position of the point (4, - 3)
then, + =1
a2 b2 relative to the ellipse 5x 2 + 7 y 2 = 140 .
y 22 x 12 x2 y2
Þ =1- ...(i) Sol. The given ellipse can be written as + -1 = 0
28 20
b2 a2
x2 y2
Now, point P lies outside, on or inside the ellipse Let S= + -1
28 20
according as
( 4 ) 2 ( - 3) 2 3
PM > , = or, < QM \ S1 = + -1= >0
28 20 140
 Chap 06 Ellipse 475

So, the point ( 4, - 3) lies outside the ellipse 5x 2 + 7y 2 = 140. Substituting the value of c from Eq. (v) in Eq. (ii), then
Example 17 Find the integral value of a for which the y = mx ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 )
2 2
æ 5a ö x y
point ç 7 - , - a ÷ lies inside the ellipse + = 1. Hence, the lines y = mx ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) will always
è 4 ø 25 16
æ 5a ö
tangents to the ellipse.
Sol. Since, the point ç7 - , - a ÷ lies inside the ellipse
è 4 ø Point of contact : Substituting c = ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) in
2 2 2
x y 1 æ 5a ö 1 2 Eq. (iii), then
+ = 1, then ç7 - ÷ + ( -a ) - 1 < 0
25 16 25 è 4 ø 16
2 2
(a 2m 2 + b 2 ) x 2 ± 2ma 2 x
Þ (28 - 5a ) + 25a - 400 < 0
Þ 50a 2 - 280a + 384 < 0 (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) a 2 - a 2 b 2 = 0
Þ 25a 2 - 140a + 192 < 0 or (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) x 2 ± 2ma 2 x (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) + a 4m 2 = 0
Þ (5a - 12) (5a - 16) < 0
12 16 or ( x (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) ± a 2m ) 2 = 0
\ <a <
5 5 a 2m a 2m
Hence, integral value of a is 3 \ x =± =±
(a 2m 2 + b 2 ) c

a 4m 2 1 y2
Intersection of a Line and From Eq. (i),
c2
×
a2
+
b2
=1

an Ellipse Þ
y2
=1-
a 2m 2
=
c 2 - a 2m 2
=
b2

x2 y2 b2 c2 c2 c2
Let the ellipse be + =1 …(i)
a2 b2 b2
y =±
and the given line be y = mx + c …(ii) c
Eliminating y from Eqs. (i) and (ii), then æ a 2m b 2 ö
Hence, the point of contact is ç ± , ± ÷ this known
x2 (mx + c ) 2 è c c ø
+ =1
a2 b2 as m-point on the ellipse.

Þ (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) x 2 + 2mca 2 x + c 2 a 2 - a 2 b 2 = 0 …(iii) Remark

Above equation being a quadratic in x gives two values of If m = 0, then Eq. (iii) gives b2x 2 + c 2a2 - a2b2 = 0
x. Shows that every straight line will cut the ellipse in two or b2x 2 + ( a2m2 + b2 ) a2 - a2b2 = 0
points may be real, coincident or imaginary according as a2m
\ x=±
Discriminant of Eq. (iii) >, =, < 0 b
i.e. 4m 2 c 2 a 4 - 4 (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) (c 2 a 2 - a 2 b 2 ) >, =, < 0 which gives two values of x.

or - a 2 b 2 c 2 + a 4 b 2m 2 + a 2 b 4 >, =, < 0 y Example 18 Prove that the straight line

2
x2 y
or a 2m 2 + b 2 >, =, < c 2 …(iv) lx + my + n = 0 touches the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 if
a b
Condition of Tangency : If the line Eq. (ii) touches the a 2l 2 + b 2m 2 = n 2 .
ellipse Eq. (i), then Eq. (iii) has equal roots.
Sol. The given line is
\ Discriminant of Eq. (iii) = 0
lx + my + n = 0
Þ c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2 or c = ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) …(v) or y=- x-
l n
…(i)
m m
so, the line y = mx + c touches the ellipse
Comparing this line with y = Mx + c
x2 y2 l n
+ = 1 if c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2 \ M=- and c = -
2 2
a b m m
(which is condition of tangency)
476 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y2
The line Eq. (i) will touch the ellipse
a2
+
b2
= 1 if Equation of Tangent in
c 2 = a2M 2 + b2 Different Forms
n2 a 2l 2 1. Point Form
2
= + b2
m m2
Theorem : The equation of tangent to the ellipse
a 2l 2 + b 2m 2 = n 2 x2 y2 xx yy
+ = 1 at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) is 1 + 1 = 1
2 2 2
y Example 19 Show that the line x cos a + y sin a = p a b a b2
2
x2 y Proof : (By first Principal Method)
touches the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 if P (x1, y1)
a b
a 2 cos 2 a + b 2 sin 2 a = p 2 and that point of contact T
æ a 2 cos a b 2 sin a ö
is ç , ÷.
è p p ø Q(x2, y2)
Sol. The given line is x cos a + y sin a = p x 2
y2
Q Equation of ellipse is +
=1 ...(i)
y = - x cota + p cosec a a2 b2
Comparing this line with y = mx + c
Let P º ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q º ( x 2 , y 2 ) be any two point on
\ m = - cota and c = p cosec a
Eq. (i), then
Hence, the given line touches the ellipse, then x 12 y 12
c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
+ =1 …(ii)
a2 b2
Þ p 2 cosec 2a = a 2 cot 2 a + b 2
x 22 y 22
Þ p 2 = a 2 cos 2 a + b 2 sin 2 a and + =1 …(iii)
a2 b2
æ a 2m b 2 ö
and point of contact is ç - , ÷ Subtracting Eqs. (ii) from (iii), then
è c c ø 1 1
( x 22 - x 12 ) + (y 22 - y 12 ) = 0
æ a 2 ( - cot a ) b2 ö a 2
b2
i.e. ç- , ÷
è p cosec a p cosec a ø ( x 2 + x 1 ) ( x 2 - x 1 ) (y 2 + y 1 ) (y 2 - y 1 )
Þ + =0
æ a 2 cos a b 2 sin a ö a2 b2
i.e. ç , ÷
è p p ø y2 - y1 b 2 (x 1 + x 2 )
Þ =- …(iv)
x2 - x1 a 2 (y 1 + y 2 )
y Example 20 For what value of l does the line Equation of PQ is
y = x + l touches the ellipse 9 x 2 + 16 y 2 = 144. y2 - y1
y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) …(v)
Sol. Q Equation of ellipse is x2 - x1
x2 y2 From Eqs. (iv) and (v), then
9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 144 or
+ =1
16 9 b 2 (x 1 + x 2 )
y - y1 = - (x - x 1 ) …(vi)
x2 y2 a 2 (y 1 + y 2 )
Comparing this with + =1
a2 b2
Now, for tangent at P , Q ® P i.e ., x 2 ® x 1 and y 2 ® y 1 ,
then, we get a 2 = 16 and b 2 = 9 then Eq. (vi) becomes
and comparing the line y = x + l with y = mx + c b 2 (2 x 1 )
y - y1 = - (x - x 1 )
\ m =1 a 2 (2y 1 )
and c =l
yy 1 - y 12 æ xx - x 12 ö
If the line y = x + l touches the ellipse or = - çç 1 ÷÷
9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 144 b2 è a2 ø
then c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2 xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12 xx 1 yy 1
or + = + = 1 [from (ii)]
or +
Þ l 2 = 16 ´ 12 + 9 a 2
b a 2
b 2
a b2 2 2

Þ l 2 = 25 which is required equation of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ).

\ l = ±5
 Chap 06 Ellipse 477

Remark Proof : Let y = mx + c be a tangent to the ellipse

The equation of tangent at ( x1, y1 ) can be obtained by replacing
x + x1 y + y1 xy + x1 y x2 y2
x 2 by xx1, y 2 by yy1, x by , y by and xy by 1 . + = 1.
2 2 2 a2 b2
This method is applicable only when the equation of ellipse is a
polynomial of second degree in x and y. x2 (mx + c ) 2
Then the equation + =1
a2 b2
2. Parametric form
Þ x 2 (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) + 2a 2mcx + a 2 (c 2 - b 2 ) = 0 ...(i)
Theorem : The equation of tangent to the ellipse
x2 y2 must have equal roots
+ = 1 at the point (a cos f, b sin f) is
a2 b2 4a 4m 2 c 2 - 4 (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) a 2 (c 2 - b 2 ) = 0
x y
cos f + sin f = 1 {Q B 2 - 4 AC = 0 }
a b
x2 y2 Þ a 2m 2 c 2 - (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) (c 2 - b 2 ) = 0
Proof : The equation of tangent to the ellipse + =1
a2 b2 Þ a 2m 2 c 2 - a 2m 2 c 2 + a 2 b 2m 2 - b 2 c 2 + b 4 = 0
xx 1 yy 1
at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) is =1 + (by point form)
a b22 Þ a 2 b 2m 2 - b 2 c 2 + b 4 = 0
Replacing x 1 by a cos f and y 1 by b sin f, then we get Þ c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
x y
cos f + sin f = 1
a b \ c = ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 )
Remark Substituting this value of c in y = mx + c , we get
Point of intersection of tangent at ‘ q’ and ‘ f’ on the ellipse
æ æ q + f ö b sin æ q + f ö ö
y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 + b 2 )
ç a cos ç ÷ ç ÷÷
x 2 y2 è 2 ø è 2 ø÷
+ = 1 is ç , as the required equations of tangent of ellipse in terms of
a2 b2 ç æ q - f ö cos æ q - f ö ÷
ç cos çè ÷ ç
è 2 ø ÷ø
÷
slope, putting c = ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) in (i), we get
è 2 ø

Remembering method : Q Equation of chord joining

x 2 (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) ± 2a 2m (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) x + a 4m 2 = 0
(a cos q, b sinq ) and (a cos f, b sin f) is
x æ q + fö y æ q + fö æ q - fö Þ ( (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) x ± a 2m ) 2 = 0
cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ = cos ç ÷
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø
a 2m
ì æ q + fö ü ì æ q + fö ü Þ x =m
cos ç ÷ï sin ç ÷
xïï è 2 øï y ï ï è 2 ø ïï (a 2m 2 + b 2 )
Þ í ý+ í ý =1
aï æ q - fö ï b ï æ q - fö ï Substituting this value of x in
cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷
ïî è 2 ø ïþ ïî è 2 ø ïþ y = mx ± a 2m 2 + b 2
ì æ q + fö ü ì æ q + fö ü
ï a cos ç ÷ï ï b sin ç ÷ b2
x ï è ø
2 ï y ï è 2 ø ïï we obtained y =±
or í ý + í ý =1 (a 2m 2 + b 2 )
a 2 ï cos æ q - f ö ï b 2 ï cos æ q - f ö ï
ç ÷ ç ÷
ïî è 2 ø ïþ ïî è 2 ø ïþ Thus, the coordinates of the points of contact are
æ a 2m b2 ö
3. Slope form çm ,± ÷
ç 2 2 2
(a m + b ) 2 2 2 ÷
(a m + b ) ø
Theorem : The equations of tangents of slope m to ellipse è
x2 y2
+ = 1 are y = mx ± (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) and the y Example 21 If the line 3x + 4 y = 7 touches the
2 2
a b
coordinates of the points of contact are ellipse 3x 2 + 4 y 2 = 1, then find the point of contact.
æ ö Sol. Let the given line touches the ellipse at point P ( x 1, y1 ).
çm a 2m b2 ÷
,± The equation of tangent at P is
ç 2 2 2
(a m + b ) 2 2 2 ÷
(a m + b ) ø
è 3xx 1 + 4yy1 = 1 …(i)
478 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Comparing Eq. (i) with the given equation of line 1 x

y=- x or m = - ...(ii)
3x + 4y = 7 , we get m y
3x 1 4y 1 1 Substituting the value of m from Eq. (ii) in Eq. (i), then
= =
3 4 7 x2 æ x2 ö
1 y=- + ça 2 2 + b 2 ÷
\ x 1 = y1 = y è y ø
7
æ 1 1 ö Þ ( x 2 + y 2 )2 = a 2 x 2 + b 2y 2
Hence, point of contact ( x 1, y1 ) is ç , ÷.
è 7 7ø or changing to polars by putting x = r cos q , y = r sin q it
becomes
y Example 22 Find the equations of the tangents to r 2 = a 2 cos 2 q + b 2 sin 2 q
the ellipse 3x 2 + 4 y 2 = 12 which are perpendicular to
the line y + 2x = 4. y Example 24 Find the point on the ellipse
Sol. Let m be the slope of the tangent, since the tangent is 16 x 2 + 11y 2 = 256, where the common tangent to it
perpendicular to the line y + 2x = 4.
\ m ´ -2 = -1
and the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x = 15 touch.
1 x2 y2
Þ m= Sol. The given ellipse is + =1
2 16 (256 / 11)
2 2
Since 3x + 4y = 12 æ 16 ö
2 2
Equation of tangent to it at point ç 4 cos q , sin q ÷ is
x y è 11 ø
or + =1
4 3 x 11
cos q + y sin q = 1
x2 y2 4 16
Comparing this with 2 + 2 = 1
a b It also touch the circle ( x - 1)2 + (y - 0)2 = 4 2
\ a2 = 4 Therefore,
2
and b =3 1
cos q - 1
So the equations of the tangents are 4
=4
1 1 æ cos 2 q 11 ö
y = x ± 4 ´ +3 ç + sin 2 q ÷
2 4 è 16 256 ø
1
Þ y = x ±2 Þ | cos q - 4 | = (16 cos 2 q + 11 sin 2 q )
2
or x - 2y ± 4 = 0 or 4 cos 2 q + 8 cos q - 5 = 0
or (2 cos q - 1) (2 cos q + 5) = 0
y Example 23 Find the locus of the foot of the 1 5ö
æ
perpendicular drawn from centre upon any tangent to or cos q = çQ cos q ¹ - ÷
2 2 è 2ø
x2 y
the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1. \ q= ,
p 5p
a b 3 3
x2 y2 æ 8 3ö
Sol. Any tangent of + = 1 is Therefore, points are ç2, ± ÷.
a2 b2 è 11 ø
y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) …(i)
Equation of the line perpendicular to Eq. (i) and passing y Example 25 Find the maximum area of the ellipse
2
through (0, 0) is x2 y
+ = 1 which touches the line y = 3x + 2.
a2 b 2
x2 y2
Sol. Q Line y = 3x + 2 touches ellipse + =1
a2 b2
C (0, 0) Here, m = 3 and c = 2
Substituting in c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
or 4 = 9a 2 + b 2 …(i)
 Chap 06 Ellipse 479

Now, AM ³ GM y Example 27 Show that the product of the

9a 2 + b 2 9a 2 + b 2 perpendiculars from the foci of any tangent to an
Þ ³ ( 9a 2 ) b 2 Þ ³ 3ab
2 2 ellipse is equal to the square of the semi minor axis,
Þ 2 ³ 3ab [from Eq. (i)] and the feet of a these perpendiculars lie on the
2p auxiliary circle.
or ³ p ab
3 Sol. Let equation of ellipse be
2p x2 y2
or ³ Area of ellipse =1 + ... (i)
3 a2 b2
2p
Therefore, the maximum area of the ellipse is . Equation of any tangent in term of slope (m ) of (i) is
3
y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 )
y Example 26 A circle of radius r is concentric with
x2 y
2 or y - mx = a 2m 2 + b 2 ...(ii)
the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1. Prove that the common
a b Equation of a line perpendicular to Eq. (ii) and passing
through S (ae , 0) is
tangent is inclined to the major axis at an angle 1
ær 2 -b 2 ö y - 0 = - ( x - ae )
m
tan -1 ç 2 2
÷.
èa - r ø or x + my = ae ...(iii)
The lines Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii) will meet at the foot of
Sol. Equation of the circle of radius r and concentric with perpendicular whose locus is obtained by eliminating the
x2 y2 variable m between Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii), then squaring and
ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is
a b adding Eq. (ii) and Eq. (iii), we get
x2 + y2 = r 2 …(i) (y - mx )2 + ( x + my )2 = a 2m 2 + b 2 + a 2e 2
2 2
x y Þ (1 + m 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = a 2m 2 + b 2 + a 2 - b 2
any tangent to ellipse 2
+ 2
= 1 is
a b
Þ (1 + m 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = a 2 (1 + m 2 )
M or x 2 + y 2 = a2
which is auxiliary circle of ellipse, similarly we can show
θ that the other foot drawn from second focus also lies on
C
x 2 + y 2 = a2.
Again if p 1 and p 2 be perpendiculars from foci S(ae , 0) and
S ¢ ( -ae , 0) on (ii), then
y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) (where m = tan q )
| (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) + mae |
p1 =
If it is a tangent to circle, then perpendicular from (0, 0) is
(1 + m 2 )
equal to radius r ,
(a 2m 2 + b 2 ) | (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) - mae |
\ = | r | or a 2m 2 + b 2 = m 2r 2 + r 2 and p2 =
( m 2 + 1) (1 + m 2 )
(a 2 - r 2 ) m 2 = r 2 - b 2 | a 2m 2 + b 2 - a 2e 2m 2 |
\ p 1p 2 =
ær 2 - b2 ö (1 + m 2 )
\ m= ç 2 ÷ | a 2m 2 + b 2 - (a 2 - b 2 ) m 2 |
èa - r 2 ø =
(1 + m 2 )
ær 2 - b2 ö
tanq = ç 2 ÷ b 2 (1 + m 2 )
èa - r 2 ø =
(1 + m 2 )
ær 2 - b2 ö = b 2 = (semi minor axis )2
q = tan -1 ç 2 ÷
èa - r 2 ø
480 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 28 Prove that the locus of mid-points of the \ The coordinates of L and L ¢ are
x2 y 2 æ b2 ö æ b2 ö
portion of the tangents to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 çae , ÷ and çae , - ÷ respectively
a b è aø è aø
intercepted between the axes is a 2 y 2 + b 2 x 2 = 4 x 2 y 2 . æ b2 ö
\ Equation of tangent at L çae , ÷ is
Sol. Let P ( x 1, y1 ) be any point on the ellipse è aø
x2 y2 æb2 ö
2
+ 2
=1 ...(i) yç ÷
a b x (ae ) èaø
xx 1 yy1 Þ + =1
\ Equation of tangent at ( x 1, y1 ) to (i) is + =1 a2 b2
2 2
a b Þ xe + y = a …(i)
Y 2
R æ b ö
The equation of the tangent at L ¢ çae , - ÷ is
M(h, k) è aø
P (x1, y1)
æ b2 ö
X¢
C Q X y ç- ÷
x (ae ) è aø
+ =1
a2 b2
Y¢ Þ ex - y = a ...(ii)
This meet the coordinate axes at Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
æ a2 ö æ b2 ö a
Q ç , 0÷ and R ç0, ÷ x= and y = 0
è x1 ø è y1 ø e
Thus, the tangents at L and L ¢ intersect at (a / e , 0) which is
Let M (h , k ) be the mid-point of QR then, a
a2 b2 a point lying on the corresponding directrix i.e. x = .
+0 0+ e
x y1
h= 1 ,k =
2 2

Þ
a2
x 1 = ,y 1 =
b2 Equations of Normals in
Since, ( x 1, y1 ) lies on Eq. (i)
2h 2k
Different Forms
2 2
æ a2 ö æb2 ö 1. Point form
ç ÷ ç ÷
è 2h ø è 2k ø Theorem : The equation of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the
\ + =1
a2 b2 x2 y2
a2 b2 ellipse + = 1 is
Þ + =1 a2 b2
4h 2 4k 2
a 2 x b 2y
Þ a 2k 2 + b 2h 2 = 4h 2k 2 - = a2 - b2
x1 y1
Hence, the locus of M (h , k ) is a 2y 2 + b 2 x 2 = 4 x 2y 2
Proof : Since the equation of tangent to the ellipse
y Example 29 Prove that the tangents at the x2 y2
+ = 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
extremities of latusrectum of an ellipse intersect on the a2 b2
corresponding directrix.
xx 1 yy 1
x2 y2 + =1
Sol. Let LSL ¢ be a latusrectum of the ellipse 2
+ = 1. a2 b2
a b2
Tangent
Y
P (x1, y1)
b2 T
L (ae, a )
Normal
X¢ X
A' C S A
2
b
L¢(ae, a ) b2x 1
The slope of the tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) = -
Y¢
a 2y 1
 Chap 06 Ellipse 481

a 2y 1 a 2 x b 2y
\ Slope of Normals at ( x 1 , y 1 ) = - = a2 - b2 …(i)
b2x 1 x1 y1
Hence, the equation of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is Replacing x 1 by a cos f andy 1 by b sin f , then Eq.(i)
2 becomes
a y1
y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) a2x b 2y
b2x 1 - = a2 - b2
a cos f b sin f
a 2 x b 2y
or - = a2 - b2 ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2
x1 y1
is the equation of normal at (a cos f, b sin f)
Remark
The equation of normal at ( x1, y1 ) can also be obtained by this 3. Slope form
method Theorem : The equations of the normals of slope m to the
x - x1 y - y1
=
a¢ x1 + hy1 + g hx1 + b¢ y1 + f
...(i) x2 y2
ellipse + = 1 are given by
a¢, b¢, g, f , h are obtained by comparing the given ellipse with a2 b2
a¢ x 2 + 2hxy + b¢ y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ...(ii) m (a 2 - b 2 )
y = mx m
The denominors of (i) can easily remembered by the first two rows
of this determinant (a 2 + b 2m 2 )
a¢ h g
i.e. h b¢ f
æ a2 mb 2 ö
g f c at the points ç ± ,± ÷.
ç 2 2 2
(a + b m ) 2 2 2 ÷
(a + b m ) ø
è
Since, first row, a¢ ( x1 ) + h( y1 ) + g( 1)
and second row, h( x1 ) + b¢( y1 ) + f ( 1) x2 y2
x 2 y2
Proof : The equation of normal to the ellipse + =1
Here ellipse + =1 a2 b2
a2 b2
at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
x 2 y2
or + - 1= 0 ... (iii)
a2 b2 a 2 x b 2y
- = a2 - b2 …(i)
Comparing Eqs. (ii) and (iii), then we get x1 y1
1 1
a¢ = 2 , b¢ = 2 , g = 0, f = 0, h = 0 Since, ‘m’ is the slope of the normal, then
a b
From, Eq. (i), equation of normal of Eq. (iii) at ( x1, y1 ) is a 2y 1
x - x1 y - y1 m=
1
=
1 b2x 1
x1 + 0 + 0 0 + 2 y1 + 0
a2 b b 2 x 1m
a2( x - x1 ) b2 ( y - y1 ) y1 = …(ii)
or = a2
x1 y1
a2x b2 y x2 y2
or - = a2 - b2 Since, ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies on + =1
x1 y1 a2 b2

2. Parametric form x 12 y 12
\ + =1
Theorem : The equation of normal to the ellipse a2 b2

x2 y2 x 12 b 4 x 12m 2
+ = 1 at (a cos f , b sin f) is or + =1
a 2
b 2 a2 a 4b 2

ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2 x 12 b 2 x 12m 2 a4

or + = 1 or x 12 =
a2 a4 (a 2 + b 2m 2 )
Proof : Since, the equation of normal of the ellipse
x2 y2 a2
+ = 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is \ x1 = ±
a2 b2 a 2 + b 2m 2
482 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

From Eq. (ii), Y

2
mb (0, b) B b2
P (ae, a )
y1 = ±
(a 2 + b 2m 2 )
X′ S X
\ Equation of normal in terms of slope is (–a, 0) A′ A (a, 0)

æ ö æ æ öö B¢(0, -b)
mb 2 ÷ =m çx - ç ± a2 ÷÷
y - ç± Y′
ç ÷ ç ç ÷÷
è a 2 + b 2m 2 ø è è a 2 + b 2m 2 øø It passes through one extremity of the minor axis whose
2 2 coordinates are (0, - b )
m (a - b )
Þ y = mx m …(iii) \ 0 + ab = a 2 - b 2
(a 2 + b 2m 2 ) or (a 2b 2 ) = (a 2 - b 2 )2
2 2
m (a - b ) or a 2a 2 (1 - e 2 ) = (a 2e 2 )2
Thus y = mx ± is a normal to the ellipse
(a 2 + b 2m 2 ) or 1 - e2 = e4
x2 y2 or e4 + e2 - 1 = 0
+ = 1, where m is the slope of the normal.
a2 b2 or (e 2 )2 + e 2 - 1 = 0
The coordinates of the point of contact are -1 ± 1 + 4
\ e2 =
æ a2 mb 2 ö 2
ç± ,± ÷
ç ÷ 5 - 1
è a 2 + b 2m 2 a 2 + b 2m 2 ø Þ e2 = (taking + ve sign)
2
Comparing Eq. (iii) with,
y Example 31 Prove that the straight line
y = mx + c 2
x2 y
m (a 2 - b 2 ) lx + my + n = 0 is a normal to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 if
\ c =m a b
2 2 2
(a 2 + b 2m 2 ) a 2 b 2 (a - b )
+ = .
m 2 (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 l2 m2 n2
or c2 =
(a 2 + b 2m 2 ) x2 y2
Sol. The equation of any normal to + = 1 is
which is condition of normality, when y = mx + c is the a2 b2
normal of ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2 ... (i)

x2 y2 The straight line lx + my + n = 0 will be a normal to the

+ =1 x2 y2
a2 b2 ellipse 2 + 2 = 1
a b
Therefore, Eq. (i) and lx + my + n = 0 represent the
y Example 30 If the normal at an end of a same line
2
x2 y a sec f -b cosec f a 2 - b 2
latusrectum of an ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 passes = =
a b l m -n
through one extremity of the minor axis, show that -na
cos f =
the eccentricity of the ellipse is given by l (a 2 - b 2 )
5 -1 nb
e 4 + e 2 - 1 = 0 or e 2 = and sin f =
2 m (a 2 - b 2 )
Sol. The coordinates of an end of the latusrectum are Q sin 2 f + cos 2 f = 1
(ae , b 2 / a ) . The equation of normal at P (ae , b 2 / a ) is n 2b 2 n 2a 2
\ 2 2 2 2
+ =1
a 2 x b 2 (y ) m (a - b ) l (a 2 - b 2 )2
2
- 2 = a2 - b2
ae b /a a2 b2 (a 2 - b 2 )2
Þ + =
ax l2 m2 n2
or - ay = a 2 - b 2
e
 Chap 06 Ellipse 483

y Example 32 A normal inclined at an angle of 45° to x2 y2

2 Sol. Let equation of ellipse is + = 1 its auxiliary
x2 y a2 b2
x-axis of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is drawn. It meets the
a b circle is
major and minor axes in P and Q respectively. If C is x 2 + y 2 = a2
the centre of the ellipse, prove that area of DCPQ is Coordinates of P and Q are (a cos f, b sin f ) and
(a 2 - b 2 ) 2 (a cos f, a sin f ) respectively. Equation of normal at P to the
sq units.
2(a 2 + b 2 ) x2 y2
ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is
a b
Sol. Let R (a cos f, b sin f ) be any point on the ellipse, then
ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2 ...(i)
equation of normal at R is
ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2
x y and equation of normal at Q to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
or + =1
cos f (a 2 - b 2 ) - sin f (a 2 - b 2 ) y = x tan f ...(ii)
a b y
From Eq. (ii), tan f =
æ (a 2 - b 2 ) ö x
If meets the major and minor axes at P ç cos f, 0÷ y x
è a ø \ sin f = and cos f =
2 2
(x + y ) (x + y 2 )
2
æ (a 2 - b 2 ) ö
and Q ç0, - sin f ÷ are respectively
è b ø (x 2 + y 2 )
or cosec f =
æ a2 - b2 ö y
\ CP = ç ÷ | cos f |
è a ø (x 2 + y 2 )
and sec f = …(iii)
æ a2 - b2 ö x
and CQ = ç ÷ | sin f | Substituting the values of sec f and cosec f from
è b ø Eq. (iii) in Eq. (i)
1
\ Area of DCPQ = ´ CP ´ CQ (x 2 + y 2 ) (x 2 + y 2 )
2 \ ax ´ - by ´ = a2 - b2
x y
(a 2 - b 2 )2 | sin f cos f |
= ... (i)
2ab or (a - b ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = (a + b ) (a - b )
a
But slope of normal = tan f = tan 45° (given) or x2 + y2 = a + b
b
a \ x 2 + y 2 = (a + b )2
tan f = 1
b which is required locus.
b
tan f =
a
\ sin 2f =
2 tan f
=
2ab
1 + tan 2 f a 2 + b 2
Properties of Eccentric Angles
(a 2 - b 2 )2 ½
sin 2f½ of the Co-normal Points
½ 2 ½
\ From Eq. (i), Area of DCPQ = 1. In general, four normals can be drawn to an
2ab
ab ellipse from any point and if a , b, g , d the
2 2 2
(a - b ) eccentric angles of these four co-normal points,
(a 2 + b 2 )
= then a + b + g + d is an odd multiple of p.
2ab
2
(a - b ) 2 2 Let Q (h, k ) be any given point and let P (a cos f, b sin f)
= sq units. be any point on the ellipse
2 (a 2 + b 2 )
x2 y2
+
=1
y Example 33 Any ordinate MP of an ellipse meets the a2 b2
auxiliary circle in Q. Prove that the locus of the point Equation of normal at P (a cos f, b sin f) is
of intersection of the normals at P and Q is the circle
x 2 + y 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 . ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2
484 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

it passes through Q (h, k ) Now, Eq. (i), reduces to

2 2 ah bk
\ ah sec f - bk cosec f = a - b - = a2 - b2
2 2
æ z + 1ö æ z - 1ö
ah bk
or - = a2 - b2 ...(i) ç ÷ ç ÷
cos f sin f è 2z ø è 2iz ø
ah bk Þ (a 2 - b 2 )z 4 - 2 (ah - ibk ) z 3
or - = a2 - b2 …(ii)
2
æ 1 - tan ( f/2 ) ö æ 2 tan( f/2 ) ö
ç ÷ ç ÷ + 2 (ah + ibk ) z - (a 2 - b 2 ) = 0 ...(iv)
è 1 + tan2 ( f/2 ) ø è 1 + tan2 ( f/2 ) ø if
Consequently z = e
Let tan f/2 = t
gives four values of f, say a, b, g, d (Here, sum of four
then, Eq. (ii) reduced to angles)
bkt 4 + 2 {ah + (a 2 - b 2 )} t 3 + 2 \ z1. z2. z 3. z 4 = -1
{ah - (a 2 - b 2 )} t - bk = 0 ... (iii) Þ e ia × e ib × e ig × e id = - 1
Which is a fourth degree equation in t, hence four Þ e i ( a + b + g + d) = -1
normals can be drawn to an ellipse from any point.
cos (a + b + g + d) + i sin(a + b + g + d) = -1
Consequently, it has four values of f say a, b, g, d
(Qt = tan f / 2 ). or cos (a + b + g + d) = -1
æ a b g dö S -S3 and sin (a + b + g + d) = 0
Now, tan ç + + + ÷ = 1
è 2 2 2 2 ø 1 - S2 + S 4 a + b + g + d = (2n + 1) p
and a + b + g + d = rp
(β) (α )
where, n r ,ÎI
(h, k)
Hence, a + b + g + d = odd multiple of p
2. If a , b, g are the eccentric angles of three points
(γ)
x2 y2
(δ ) on the ellipse + = 1, the normals at which
a2 b2
- 2 {ah + (a 2 - b 2 )} 2 {(ah - (a 2 - b 2 )} are concurrent, then
+
= bk bk sin (a + b) + sin (b + g ) + sin ( g + a ) = 0
1-0 -1 Here, in each term sum of two eccentric angles
=¥ (From trigonometry) (Qa ¹ b ) \ From Eq. (iv),
Sz 1 z 2 = 0
æ a b g dö
or cot ç + + + ÷ = 0 or z 1 z 2 + z 1 z 3 + z 1 z 4 + z 2 z 3 + z 2 z 4 +z 3 z 4 = 0
è 2 2 2 2ø
i (a + g ) i (a + d ) i (b + g ) i (b + d ) i (g + d )
a b g d Þ ei (a + b ) + e +e +e +e +e
=0
or + + + = an odd multiple of p / 2 Þ [cos (a + b) + cos(a + g ) + cos (a + d)
2 2 2 2
Þ a + b + g + d = an odd multiple of p + cos (b + g ) + cos (b + d)
Aliter : + cos ( g + d)] + i [(sin (a + b)
+ sin (a + g ) + sin (a + d) + sin(b + g )
Let z = e if = cos f + i sin f
+ sin (b + d) + sin ( g + d)] = 0
1
\ = e -if = cos f - i sin f Comparing the imaginary part, then
z
1 sin (a + b) + sin (a + g ) + sin (a + d) + sin (b + g )
z+ 2
\ cos f = z = z +1 + sin (b + d) + sin ( g + d) = 0 …(v)
2 2z Since, from property Eq. (i)
1 a + b + g + d = odd multiple of p
z- 2
and sin f = z = z -1 (a + d) = odd multiple of p - (b + g )
2i 2 iz
(b + d) = odd multiple of p - (a + g )
 Chap 06 Ellipse 485

( g + d) = odd multiple of p - (a + b) sin g (cos a + cos b)

sin (a + d) = sin (b + g )ü
Þ å sina sinb sin g
=0
ï
sin (b + d) = sin (a + g )ý
sin ( g + d) = sin (a + b)ïþ
Þ å sin g (cosa + cosb) = 0
Þ sin g (cos a + cos b) + sina
{Qsin (np - a ) = sina, if n is integer)} …(vi) (cos b + cos g ) + sinb (cos g + cos a ) = 0
From Eqs. (v) and (vi), we get Þ sin (a + b) + sin(b + g ) + sin ( g + a ) = 0
2 sin (a + b) + 2 sin (b + g ) + 2 sin ( g + a ) = 0
Hence, sin (a + b) + sin (b + g ) + sin ( g + a ) = 0
Aliter : Co-normal Points Lie on a
From Eq. (iii), St 1 t 2 = 0 ...(vii) Fixed Curve
and t 1t 2t 3t 4 = - 1 ...(viii)
Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ), Q ( x 2 , y 2 ), R ( x 3 , y 3 ) and T ( x 4 , y 4 ) be
Now, St 1 t 2 = 0
conormal points so that normal drawn from them meet in
Þ t 1 t 2 + t 2 t 3 + t 3 t 1 = - t 4 (t 1 + t 2 + t 3 ) T (h, k ).
t + t2 + t 3 Then, equation of normal at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
Þ t 1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t 1 = 1 {from (viii)}
t 1t 2t 3
, y 2)
Q (x 2
1 1 1 P (x1 , y1 )
Þ t 1t 2 + t 2t 3 + t 3t 1 = + +
t 2t 3 t 3t 1 t 1t 2 T (h, k)
a b b g g a
Þ tan tan + tan tan + tan tan R (x3, y3) S (x4, y4)
2 2 2 2 2 2
b g g a a b a 2 x b 2y
= cot cot + cot cot + cot cot - = a2 - b2
2 2 2 2 2 2 x1 y1
æ a b a bö or (a 2 - b 2 ) x 1 y 1 + b 2 yx 1 - a 2 xy 1 = 0
Þ å çè tan 2 tan 2 - cot 2 cot 2 ÷ø = 0
but the point T (h, k ) lies on it
æ sin2 (a / 2 ) sin2 (b/ 2 ) - cos 2 (a / 2 ) cos 2 (b/ 2 ) ö \ (a 2 - b 2 ) x 1 y 1 + b 2 kx 1 - a 2 hy 1 = 0
Þ åç ÷ =0
è sin(a / 2 ) sin(b / 2 ) cos(a / 2 ) cos(b/ 2 ) ø Similarly, for points Q, R and S are
æ {cos(a / 2 ) cos(b/ 2 ) + sin(a / 2 ) sin(b/ 2 )} ö (a 2 - b 2 ) x 2 y 2 + b 2 kx 2 - a 2 hy 2 = 0
ç {cos(a / 2 ) cos(b/ 2 ) - sin (a / 2 ) sin (b /2 )} ÷
Þ å-4 ç ÷=0 (a 2 - b 2 ) x 3 y 3 + b 2 kx 3 - a 2 hy 3 = 0
ç sina sinb ÷
è ø and (a 2 - b 2 ) x 4 y 4 + b 2 kx 4 - a 2 hy 4 = 0
æ æa - bö æa + bö ö Hence, P , Q , R, S all lie on the curve
ç cos ç ÷ cos ç ÷÷
ç è 2 ø è 2 ø÷ (a 2 - b 2 ) xy + b 2 kx - a 2 hy = 0
Þ å ç
- 4
sina sinb ÷
=0
This curve is called Apollonian rectangular hyperbola.
ç ÷
è ø
Remark
[cos a + cos b]
Þ å -2 sina sinb
=0 The feet of the normals from any fixed point to the ellipse lie at
the intersections of the Apollonian rectangular hyperbola with
the ellipse.
486 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Exercise for Session 2

x2
1. The number of values of c such that the straight line y = 4x + c touches the curve + y 2 = 1, is
4
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) infinite
2 2
x y a2 b 2
2. If any tangent to the ellipse 2
+ 2 = 1 cuts off intercepts of length h and k on the axes, then 2 + 2 is equal to
a b h k
(a) - 1 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) None of these

3. The equations of the tangents to the ellipse 3x 2 + y 2 = 3 making equal intercepts on the axes are
(a) y = ± x ± 2 (b) y = ± x ± 4 (c) y = ± x ± 30 (d) y = ± x ± 35
2 2
x y x y
4. If + = 2 touches the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, then its, eccentric angle q is equal to
a b a b
(a) 0 (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) 90°

5. The number of values of q Î[0, 2p ] for which the line 2x cos q + 3y sin q = 6 touches the ellipse 4x 2 + 9y 2 = 36 is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) infinite

6. 2 2
The common tangent of x + y = 4 and 2x + y = 2 is 2 2

(a) x + y + 4 = 0 (b) x - y + 7 = 0 (c) 2x + 3y + 8 = 0 (d) None of these

x2 y2
7. If the normal at any point P on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 meets the axes in G and g respectively, then PG × Pg =
a b
(a) a : b (b) a 2 : b 2 (c) b : a (d) b 2 : a 2
2 2
x y
8. Number of distinct normal lines that can be drawn to the ellipse + = 1 , from the point (0, 6) is
169 25
(a) one (b) two (c) three (d) four
x2 y2
9. If a tangent of slope 2 of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 , is normal to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 1 = 0, then the
maximum value of ab is a b
(a) 4 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) None of these
x2 y2
10. If the normal at the point P (q) to the ellipse + = 1, intersect it again at the point Q (2q), then cos q is
equal to 14 5
2 2 3 3
(a) (b) - (c) (d) -
3 3 2 2
x2 y2
11. The line 5x - 3y = 8 2 is a normal to the ellipse + = 1. If ‘ q’ be eccentric angle of the foot of this normal,
25 9
then ‘ q’ is equal to
p p p p
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 4 3 2
12. If the tangent drawn at point ( l 2, 2l ) on the parabola y 2 = 4x is same as the normal drawn at a point
( 5 cos q, 2 sin q) on the ellipse 4x 2 + 5y 2 = 20. Find the values of l and q.
x2 y2
13. If the normal at any point P of the ellipse + = 1 , meets the major and minor axes in G and H respectively
a2 b 2
and C in the centre of the ellipse, then prove that
a 2 (CG )2 + b 2(CH )2 = (a 2 - b 2 )2

14. If the normal at the point P ( q) to the ellipse 5x 2 + 14y 2 = 70 intersects it again at the point Q(2q), show that
2
cos q = - .
3
x2 y2
15. The tangent and normal at any point P of an ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 cut its major axis in point Q and R respectively.
a b
If QR = a prove that the eccentric angle of the point P is given by
e 2 cos 2 f + cos f - 1 = 0
Session 3
Pair of Tangents, Chord of Contact, Chord Bisected
at a Given Point, Diameter, Conjugate Diameters,
Equi-Conjugate Diameters, Director Circle, Sub-
Tangent and Sub-Normal, Concyclic Points, Some
Standard Properties of the Ellipse, Reflection
Property of an Ellipse, Equation of an Ellipse
Referred to Two Perpendicular Lines

Pair of Tangents or
æ k - y1 ö
y =ç
æ hy 1 - kx 1 ö
÷ x +ç ÷
èh - x1 ø è h - x1 ø
Theorem : The combined equation of the pair of tangents
x2 y2 which is the tangent to the ellipse
drawn from a point ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the ellipse + = 1 is
a2 b2 x2 y2
+ =1
æ x2 y2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö æ xx yy ö
2
a2 b2
ç 2 + 2 - 1÷ çç + - 1÷÷ = ç 1 + 1 - 1÷
èa b ø è a2 b2 ø è a2 b2 ø \ c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
2 2
or SS 1 = T 2 æ hy 1 - kx 1 ö 2 æ k - y1 ö 2
or ç ÷ =a ç ÷ +b
è h - x1 ø èh - x1 ø
x 2
y 2
x 12 y 12
where S= + - 1 ; S1 = + -1
a 2
b2 a b 2 2 Þ (hy 1 - kx 1 ) 2 = a 2 (k - y 1 ) 2 + b 2 (h - x 1 ) 2
xx 1 yy Hence, locus of (h, k ) is
and T= + 1 -1
a 2
b2 ( xy 1 - x 1 y ) 2 = a 2 (y - y 1 ) 2 + b 2 ( x - x 1 ) 2
Proof : Let T (h, k ) be any point on the pair of tangents PQ
or ( xy 1 - x 1 y ) 2 = (b 2 x 2 + a 2 y 2 ) + (b 2 x 12 + a 2 y 12 )
or PR drawn from any external point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the
x2 y2 - 2 (b 2 xx 1 + a 2 yy 1 )
ellipse + =1
a2 b2 2
æ x 2 y 2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö
æ xy 1 - x 1 y ö
k)
P (x1 , y1) or ç ÷ = ç 2 + 2 ÷ + çç 2 + 2 ÷÷ - 2
h, è ab ø èa b ø èa b ø
T(
Q R æ xx 1 yy 1 ö
ç 2 + 2 ÷
è a b ø
2
æ xy 1 - x 1 y ö æ x2 y2 ö
or ç ÷ -ç 2 + 2÷
\ Equation of PT is è ab ø èa b ø
k - y1 æ x 12 y 12 ö æ xx 1 yy 1 ö 2
y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) - çç + ÷÷ + ç + ÷
h - x1 è a2 b2 ø è a2 b2 ø
488 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

2
æ xx yy ö æ xx yy ö Remark
= ç 1 + 1 ÷ +1-2 ç 1 + 1 ÷
2 2 2 S = 0 is the equation of the curve, S1 is obtained from S by
è a b ø è a b2 ø
replacing x by x1 and y by y1 and T = 0 is the equation of tangent
æ x 12 y 12 2 at ( x1, y1 ) to S = 0
æ x2 y2 ö ö æ xx yy ö
or ç 2 + 2 - 1÷ çç + - 1÷÷ = ç 1 + 1 - 1÷
èa b ø è a2 b2 ø è a2 b2 ø

or SS 1 = T 2 Chord of Contact
x2 y2 Theorem : The equation of chord of contact of tangents
Aliter : Let the ellipse be + =1 ...(i)
a b 2 2 x2 y2
drawn from a point ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the ellipse + = 1 is
Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be any point outside the ellipse let a chord a2 b2
of the ellipse through the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) cut the ellipse at x x1 yy1
+ =1
Q and let R (h, k ) be any arbitrary point on the line PQ a2 b2
(R inside or outside). Let Q divides PR in the ratio l : 1 then Proof : Let PQ and PR be the tangents drawn from a point
coordinates of Q is x2 y2
P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the ellipse + = 1 such that
R (h, k) a2 b2

y¢ )
x¢,
Q(
R
Chord of contact
Q
P (x1 , y1) R (x¢¢, y¢¢)
P (x1, y1)
æ lh + x 1 lk + y 1 ö
ç , ÷ (QPQ : QR = l : 1) Q º ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and R º ( x ¢¢,y ¢¢ )
è l +1 l +1 ø
are the points of contacts of these tangents the chord QR is
since Q lies on ellipse Eq. (i), then
called chord of contact of the ellipse
2 2
1 æ lh + x 1 ö 1 æ lk + y 1 ö x2 y2
2 ç ÷ + 2 ç ÷ =1 + =1
a è l +1 ø b è l +1 ø a2 b2
Þ b 2 ( lh + x 1 ) 2 + a 2 ( lk + y 1 ) 2 = a 2 b 2 ( l + 1) 2 Equations of tangents at Q ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and R ( x ¢¢,y ¢¢ ) are
xx ¢ yy ¢
Þ (a 2 k 2 + b 2 h 2 - a 2 b 2 ) l2 + 2 + =1
a2 b2
(hx 1 b 2 + ky 1 a 2 - a 2 b 2 ) l + (b 2 x 12 + a 2 y 12 - a 2 b 2 ) = 0 …(ii) xx ¢¢ yy ¢¢
and + = 1, respectively
Line PR will become tangent to ellipse Eq. (i) then roots of a2 b2
Eq. (ii) are equal These tangents pass through P ( x 1 , y 1 ) therefore,
\ 4 (hx 1 b 2 + ky 1 a 2 - a 2 b 2 ) 2 x ¢ x 1 y ¢y 1 x ¢¢x 1 y ¢¢y 1
+ = 1 and + =1
2 2
- 4(a 2 k 2 +b 2 h 2 - a 2 b 2 ) (b 2 x 12 + a 2 y 12 - a 2 b 2 ) = 0 a b a2 b2
xx yy
Dividing by 4a 4 b 4 Þ ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and ( x ¢¢,y ¢¢ ) lie on 1 + 1 = 1
2
a b2
2
æ hx 1 ky 1 ö æ k 2 h2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö xx yy
\ ç 2 + - 1÷ = ç 2 + 2 - 1÷ çç + - 1÷÷ Hence, the equation QR is 1 + 1 = 1
2
è a b 2 ø èb a ø èa 2
b 2
ø a b2
which is same as the equation of tangent but position of
Hence, locus of R(h, k ) i.e. equation of pair of tangents
point differ.
from P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
æ xx 1 yy 1 ö
2
æ x2 y2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö y Example 34 Find the locus of the points of the
ç 2 + - 1÷ = ç + - 1÷ çç + - 1÷÷ x2 y 2
è a b2 ø è a2 b2 ø è a2 b2 ø intersection of tangents to ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 which
a b
i.e. T 2 = SS 1 or SS 1 = T 2 make an angle q .
 Chap 06 Ellipse 489

x2 y2 y Example 35 Prove that the chord of contact of

Sol. Given ellipse is 2
+
=1 ...(i)
a b2 tangents drawn from the point (h, k ) to the ellipse
Equation of any tangent to ellipse Eq. (i) in terms of 2
x2 y
slope (m ) is y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) + = 1 will subtend a right angle at the centre,
a2 b 2
P (α, β) h2 k 2 1 1
if 4 + 4 = 2 + 2 . Also, find the locus of (h, k ) .
θ a b a b
Sol. The equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from
R
Q x2 y2 hx ky
P (h , k ) to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is 2 + 2 = 1 ...(i)
a b a b
The equation of the straight lines CA and CB is obtained by
x2 y2
Since, its passes through P (a , b ) then making homogeneous ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 with the help of
a b
b = ma + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) Eq. (i) 2
x 2 y 2 æ hx ky ö
Þ (b - ma ) = (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) \ + = ç + ÷
a2 b2 è a2 b2 ø
Þ (b - ma )2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
æk 2 1 ö 2 æk 2 1 ö 2 2hk
Þ m 2 (a 2 - a 2 ) + 2abm + (b 2 - b 2 ) = 0 …(ii) Þ ç 4 - 2 ÷ x + ç 4 - 2 ÷ y + 2 2 xy = 0 ...(ii)
è a a ø è b b ø ab
Eq. (ii) being a quadratic equation in m.
But given Ð ACB = 90°
Let roots of Eq. (ii) are m1 and m 2 , then
\ Coefficient of x 2 + Coefficient of y 2 = 0
2ab b2 - b2
\ m1 + m 2 = - 2 2
, m1m 2 = 2 A
(a - a ) a - a2
90° C(0, 0)
\ (m1 - m 2 ) = (m1 + m 2 )2 - 4m1m 2 P
(h, k)
4a 2b 2 4 (b 2 - b 2 ) B
= - 2
2
(a - a ) 2 2 2
(a - a ) 2 h 1 1 k2
Þ 4
- 2
+
=0 -
a a b2 b4
4a 2b 2 - 4 (b 2 - b 2 ) (a 2 - a 2 )
= h2 k2 1 1
(a 2 - a 2 )2 Þ + = +
a4 b4 a2 b2
4 {a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 + b 2a 2 + a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 } Hence, locus of (h , k ) is
=
(a 2 - a 2 )2 x2 y2 1 1
4
+ 4 = 2 + 2
2 a b a b
= (a 2b 2 + b 2a 2 - a 2b 2 )
| (a 2 - a 2 ) |
Q q be the angle between these two tangents, then
½m - m 2 ½
Chord Bisected at a Given Point
tanq =½ 1 ½
½1 + m1m 2½ Theorem : The equation of a chord of the ellipse
2 x2 y2
(a 2b 2 + b 2a 2 - a 2b 2 ) =1 +
(a 2 - a 2 ) a2 b2
=
æ b2 - b2 ö bisected at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) is given by
ç1 + 2 ÷
è a - a2 ø xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12
+ - 1=-1 +
½2 (a 2b 2 + b 2a 2 - a 2b 2 )½ a2 a2 b2
b2
tan q =½ 2 2 2 2 ½
½ a +b -a -b ½ or T = S1
or (a 2 + b 2 - a 2 - b 2 )2 tan 2 q = 4 (a 2b 2 + b 2a 2 - a 2b 2 ) Proof : Let Q º ( x 2 , y 2 ) and R º ( x 3 , y 3 ) be the end points
x2 y2
Þ (a 2 + b 2 - a 2 - b 2 )2 tan 2 q = 4 (b 2 a 2 + a 2b 2 - a 2b 2 ) of a chord QR of the ellipse + = 1 and let P º ( x 1 , y 1 )
a2 b2
\ Locus of P(a , b ) is
be its mid point.
( x 2 + y 2 - a 2 - b 2 )2 tan 2 q = 4 (b 2 x 2 + a 2y 2 - a 2b 2 )
490 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Q (x2, y2)
Sol. Let (h , k ) be the middle point of any chord of an ellipse,
then its equation is T = S1
P (x1 , y1) P (a cos φ, b sin φ)

R (x3 , y3) (h, k)

2 2
x y
Now, Q º ( x 2 , y 2 ) and R º ( x 3 , y 3 ) lie on + = 1, then
2
a b2 xh yk h2 k2 xh yk h2 k2
x 22 y 22 or + -1= + - 1 or ...(i)
+ = +
+ =1 ...(i) a2 b2 a2 b2 a2 b2 a2 b2
a2 b2 If Eq. (i) is a normal chords, then it must be of the form
x 23 y 23 ax sec f - by cosec f = a 2 - b 2 ...(ii)
and + =1 ...(ii)
a2 b2 Thus, the Eqs. (i) and (ii) represents the same normal chord
Subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (i), of the ellipse with its middle point (h , k ).
Hence, they are identical and comparing their co-efficients,
1 1 2
\ ( x 22 - x 23 ) + (y 2 - y 23 ) = 0 h2 k2
a 2
b 2 2 2 + 2
h /a k /b 2
we get = = a 2 b2
( x 2 + x 3 ) ( x 2 - x 3 ) (y 2 + y 3 ) (y 2 - y 3 ) a sec f - b cosec f (a - b )
Þ + =0
a2 b2 æh2 k 2 ö
ç 2 + 2÷
y2 - y 3 b 2 (x 2 + x 3 ) b 2 2x a3 è a b ø
Þ =- =- × 1 Þ cos f = ...(iii)
x2 - x 3 a 2 (y 2 + y 3 ) a 2 2y 1 h (a 2 - b 2 )

æ x2 + x 3 y +y3 ö æh2 k 2 ö
and y 1 = 2 ç 2 + 2÷
çQx 1 = ÷ b èa 3
b ø
è 2 2 ø and sin f = - ...(iv)
2 k (a - b 2 )
2
b x1
=- …(iii) Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), then
a 2y 1 2
æ a6 b6 ö æ h 2 k 2 ö
\ Equation of QR is ç 2 + 2÷ ç 2 + 2÷
y2 - y 3 èh k ø èa b ø
y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) cos 2 f + sin 2 f =
x2 - x 3 (a 2 - b 2 )2
2
b2x 1 æ a6 b6 ö æ h 2 k 2 ö
Þ y - y1 = - (x - x 1 ) [from Eq. (iii)] ç 2 + 2÷ ç 2 + 2÷
èh k ø èa b ø
a 2y 1 Þ 1=
(a 2 - b 2 )2
yy 1 y 12 xx 1 x 12
Þ - =- + 2
æ h 2 k 2 ö æ a6 b6 ö
b2 b 2
a2 a 2
Þ 2 2 2
ç 2 + 2 ÷ ç 2 + 2 ÷ = (a - b )
èa b ø èh k ø
xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12
Þ + -1= - 1 or T = S 1
+ 2
a2 b2 a2 b2 æ x 2 y 2 ö æ a6 b6 ö
Hence, locus of (h , k ) is ç 2 + 2 ÷ ç 2 + 2 ÷ = (a 2 - b 2 )2
xx yy èa b ø èx y ø
where, T = 1 + 1 -1
2
a b2 y Example 37 Show that the locus of the middle points
x 12 y 12 of chords of an ellipse which pass through a fixed
and S1 = + -1
a2 b2 point, is another ellipse
Sol. Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be the middle point of any chord AB of
y Example 36 Prove that the locus of the middle x2 y2
2 the ellipse + = 1, then equation of chord AB is
x2 y
points of normal chords of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is a2 b2
a b A
2 2 2 6 6
æx y ö æa b ö
the curve ç 2 + 2 ÷ ç 2 + 2 ÷ = (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 . P (x1 , y1)
èa b ø èx y ø
B
Q(h, k)
 Chap 06 Ellipse 491

T = S1 Since, x 1 and x 2 be the roots of this equation, then

xx 1 yy1 x 12 y12 2mca 2
Þ + - 1 = + -1 x1 + x2 = - ...(i)
a2 b2 a2 b2
a 2m 2 + b 2
xx 1 yy1 x 12 y12
Þ + 2 = 2 + 2 ... (i) Since, (h, k ) be the middle point of QR, then
a2 b a b
But it passes through a fixed point Q (h , k ) its coordinates x + x2
h= 1
must satisfy Eq. (i), 2
hx 1 ky1 x 12 y12 then, from Eq. (i),
\ + 2 = 2 + 2
a2 b a b
2mca 2
This can be re-written as 2h = -
2 2 a 2m 2 + b 2
æ hö æ kö
ç x1 - ÷ çy 1 - ÷
è 2ø è 2ø 1 æh2 k 2 ö mca 2
+ = ç + ÷ Þ h=- ...(ii)
a2 b2 4 è a2 b2 ø a 2m 2 + b 2
Hence, locus of P ( x 1, y1 ) is but (h, k ) lies on y = mx + c
2 2
æ hö æ kö \ k = mh + c , c = k - mh ...(iii)
çx - ÷ çy - ÷
è 2ø è 2ø 1 æh2 k 2 ö
2
+ = ç + ÷ ma 2 (k - mh )
a b2 4 è a2 b2 ø From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), then , h = -
a 2m 2 + b 2
æh k ö
Its obviously an ellipse with centre at ç , ÷ and axes
è2 2ø Þ a 2m 2 h + b 2 h = - mka 2 + m 2 a 2 h
parallel to coordinates axes. b 2h
Þ b 2 h = - mka 2 or k = -
a 2m
2
Diameter Hence, locus of R(h, k ) is y = -
a 2m
b x

The locus of the middle points of a system of parallel which is diameter of the ellipse passing through (0, 0 ).
chords of an ellipse is called a diameter and the point Aliter : Let (h, k ) be the middle point of the chord
where the diameter intersects the ellipse is called the
x2 y2
vertex of the diameter. y = mx + c of the ellipse + = 1, then
a2 b2
x2 y2
Let y = mx + c be system of parallel chords to + =1 T = S1
a2 b2
for different chords c varies, m remains constant. xh ky h2 k2
Þ + = +
Y a2 b2 a2 b2
P (x1, y1)
b 2h
R
\ Slope = - =m
X¢
Q (x2, y2)
X a 2k
C
b 2h
Þ k=-
a 2m
Y¢
Hence, locus of the mid-point is
Let the extremities of any chord PQ of the set be P ( x 1 , y 1 ) b2x
and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) and let its middle point be R (h, k ), then y =-
solving equations. a 2m
x2
2
+
y2
2
= 1 and y = mx + c Conjugate Diameters
a b
Two diameters are said to be conjugate when each bisects
x 2
(mx + c ) 2 all chords parallel to the other. If y = mx and y = m 1 x be
\ + =1
a2 b2 b2
two conjugate diameters of an ellipse, then mm 1 = .
Þ (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) x 2 + 2mca 2 x + a 2 (c 2 - b 2 ) = 0 a2
492 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y
b2 b2
Þ tan f tan f¢ = -
a2 a2
A
B
Þ tan f tan f¢ = - 1
P
D æp ö
90° Þ tan f = - cot f¢ = tan ç + f¢ ÷
φ è2 ø
T N
X′ X
L M p p
C′ Þ f= + f¢ Þ f - f¢ =
D′ 2 2
P′
Prop. 2 : The sum of the squares of any two conjugate semi
B′
A′ diameters of an ellipse is constant and equal to the sum of
the squares of the semi-axes of the ellipse i.e.
Y′

Conjugate diameters of circle i.e. AA¢ and BB¢ are CP 2 + CD 2 = a 2 + b 2

perpendicular to each other. Hence, conjugate diameters
Let CP and CD be two conjugate semi-diameters of an
of ellipse are PP ¢ and DD ¢.
x2 y2
Hence, angle between conjugate diameters of ellipse ¹ 90°. ellipse + = 1 and let eccentric angle of P is f. The
a2 b2
Now the co-ordinates of the four extremities of two p
conjugate diameters are eccentric angle of D is + f. So the coordinates of P and D
2
P (a cos f , b sin f), P ¢ ( -a cos f , - b sin f), are
D ( -a sin f , b cos f), D ¢ (a sin f , - b cos f) æ æp ö æp öö
(a cos f, b sin f) and ç a cos ç + f÷ , b sin ç + f÷ ÷
è è 2 ø è 2 øø

Properties of Conjugate i.e. ( -a sin f, b cos f) respectively

CP 2 + CD 2 = (a 2 cos 2 f + b 2 sin2 f)
Diameters \
+ (a 2 sin2 f + b 2 cos 2 f)
Prop. 1 : The eccentric angles of the ends of a pair of
conjugate diameters of an ellipse differ by a right angle. = a2 + b2
Let PCP ¢ and DCD ¢ be two conjugate diameters of the Prop. 3 : The product of the focal distances of a point on an
x2 y2 ellipse is equal to the square of the semi diameter which is
ellipse + = 1 and let the eccentric angles of the conjugate to the diameter through the point.
a2 b2
(a cos φ, b sin φ) Let PCP ¢ and DCD ¢ be the conjugate diameters of an
D P (a cos φ, b sin φ) ellipse and let the eccentric angle of P is f then
coordinates of P is (a cos f, b sin f)
A¢ A \ Coordinates of D is ( -a sin f, b cos f)
C

P¢ D¢ D P (a cos φ, b sin φ)

extremities P and D be f and f¢ respectively. Then, the

co-ordinates of P and D are (a cos f, b sin f) and S¢ C S
(a cos f¢ , b sin f¢ ) respectively.
P¢ D¢
b
Now m 1 = slope of CP = tan f
a Let S and S ¢ be two foci of the ellipse. Then
b SP × S ¢ P = (a - ae cos f) × (a + ae cos f)
and m 2 = slope of CD = tan f¢
a = a 2 - a 2 e 2 cos 2 f
since, the diameters PCP ¢ and DCD ¢ are conjugate diameters.
2 = a 2 - (a 2 - b 2 ) cos 2 f {Qb 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )}
b
\ m 1m 2 = - = a 2 sin2 f + b 2 cos 2 f = CD 2
a2
{\ a 2 - b 2 = a 2 e 2 }
 Chap 06 Ellipse 493

Prop. 4 : The tangents at the extremities of a pair of Now from Eq. (i),
conjugate diameters form a parallelogram whose area is Area of parallelogram QRQ ¢ R ¢
constant and equal to product of the axes. ab
Y
= 4 ´ (a 2 cos 2 f + b 2 sin2 f) ´
M
Q a cos f + b 2 sin2 f)
2 2

D P
= 4ab ( = constant) = (2a ) (2b )
R R¢
X¢ X = Area of rectangle contained under major
C
P¢ D¢ and minor axes.
Prop. 5 : The polar of any point with respect to ellipse is
Q¢
Y¢
parallel to the diameter to the one on which the point lies.
Hence obtain the equation of the chord whose mid-point is
Let PCP ¢ and DCD ¢ be a pair of conjugate diameters of the (h, k ) .
x2 y2 Let (h, k ) be the point on the diameter y = m 1 x
ellipse + = 1. Let the eccentric angle of P be f .Then
a2 b2 \ m1 = k / h
æp ö
the eccentric angle of D is ç + f÷ so the coordinates of any diameter conjugate to it is y = m 2 x
è2 ø
b2 k b2
P and D are but m 1m 2 = - Þ m2 = -
a2 h a2
æ æp ö æp öö
(a cos f, b sin f) and ç a cos ç + f÷ , b sin ç + f÷ ÷ b 2h
è è2 ø è2 øø \ m2 = -
a 2k
i.e. ( -a sin f, b cos f)
hx ky
Similarly the coordinates of P ¢ and D ¢ are Polar of (h, k ) is + =1 …(i)
2
a b2
( -a cos f, - b sin f) and (a sin f, - b cos f) respectively.
b 2h
Equation of tangents at P , D , P ¢ and D ¢ are respectively. Its slope is - = m 2 and hence parallel.
a 2k
x y x y
cos f + sin f = 1 ,- sin f + cos f = 1, Now, equation of chord parallel to the Eq. (i) is
a b a b
hx ky
x y + =l …(ii)
- cos f - sin f = 1 a2 b2
a b
x y It is passes through points (h, k )
and sin f - cos f = 1
a b h2 k2
\ l= + ... (iii)
Clearly the tangents at P and P ¢ are parallel. Also, the a2 b2
tangents at D and D ¢ are parallel. Hence, the tangents at hx ky h2 k2
P , D , P ¢ , D ¢ form a parallelogram. From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), + = +
b2 a2 b2 a2
Area of parallelogram QRQ ¢ R ¢ = 4
i.e. T = S1
(the area of parallelogram QDCP )
which is the equation of chord of the ellipse, if mid-points
= 4 × | QD |× { ^ from C on QD } is (h, k ).
= 4 × | CP |× { ^ from C on QD } …(i)

Now | CP | = (a 2 cos 2 f + b 2 sin2 f) Equi-Conjugate Diameters

x y Two conjugate diameters are called equi-conjugate if their
Q tangent at D is - sin f + cos f = 1
a b lengths are equal. In such cases therefore.
\ ^ from C on (CP ) 2 = (CD ) 2
1 ab
QD = = \ a 2 cos 2 f + b 2 sin2 f = a 2 sin2 f+ b 2 cos 2 f
2 2
sin f cos f a cos f + b 2 sin2 f
2 2
+ Þ (a 2 cos 2 f - sin2 f) - b 2 (cos 2 f - sin2 f) = 0
a2 b2
494 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Þ (a 2 - b 2 ) cos 2 f = 0 or
æp ö k
2 sin ç + f ÷ = ...(iv)
2 2 è4 ø b
Q (a - b ) ¹ 0
Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), then
\ cos2 f = 0 h2 k2 æ æp ö æp öö
p 3p 2
+ 2 = 2 ç cos 2 ç + f ÷ + sin 2 ç + f÷ ÷
\ f= or a b è è4 ø è4 øø
4 4
h2 k2
2 2 \ 2
+ =2
(a + b ) a b2
\ (CP ) = (CD ) =
2 x2 y2
Hence, locus of (h , k ) is =2 +
a2 b2
y Example 38 Show that the tangents at the ends of Aliter : Equation of tangents at P and D are
conjugate diameters of the ellipse x 2 / a 2 + y 2 / b 2 = 1 x y
cos f + sin f = 1 ... (i)
intersect on the ellipse x 2 / a 2 + y 2 / b 2 = 2 . a b
Or x æp ö y æp ö
and cos ç + f ÷ + sin ç + f ÷ = 1
Prove that the locus of the poles of the line joining the a è2 ø b è2 ø
extremities of two conjugate diameters is the ellipse x y
i.e. - sin f + cos f = 1 ...(ii)
x 2 / a 2 + y 2 /b 2 = 2 . a b
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Sol. Let CP and CD be two semi-conjugate diameters, so that if
eccentric angle of P is f then eccentric angle of D is x2 y2
+ =2
p a2 b2
+f
2 which is required locus.
R (h, k)

D P
y Example 39 If x cos a + y sin a = p is a chord joining
the ends P and D of conjugate semi-diameters, of the
C ellipse then prove that a 2 cos 2 a + b 2 sin 2 a = 2p 2 and
P¢ D¢ hence or otherwise deduce that the line PD always
\ Coordinates of P and D are touches a similar ellipse.
æ æp ö æp öö
(a cos f, b sin f ) and ça cos ç + f ÷, b sin ç + f ÷ ÷ x2 y2
è2 ø è2 øø Sol. Let equation of ellipse be = 1, eccentric angle
+
è b2 a2
respectively p
of P is f, then eccentric angle of D is + f
\ Equation of ( PD ) is 2
æ p ö æ p ö æp ö \ Coordinates of P and D are
x ç f + + f÷ y ç f + + f÷ ç +f- f÷
cos ç 2 ÷ + sin ç 2 ÷ = cos ç 2 ÷ æ æp ö æp öö
a 2 ÷ b 2 ÷ 2 (a cos f, b sin f ) and ça cos ç + f ÷, b sin ç + f ÷ ÷
ç ç ç ÷ è è2 ø è2 øø
è ø è ø è ø
\ Equation of PD is
x æp ö y æp ö 1
Þ cos ç + f ÷ + sin ç + f ÷ = …(i) æ p ö æ p ö æp ö
a è4 ø b è4 ø 2 ç f + + f÷ y ç f + + f÷ ç +f- f÷
x 2 2
If its pole or point of intersection of tangents at its cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ = cos ç 2 ÷
a ç 2 ÷ b ç 2 ÷ ç 2 ÷
extremities be (h , k ), then its equation is the same as that of è ø è ø è ø
the polar or the chord of contact of (h , k ).
hx ky x æp ö y æp ö 1
i.e. + =1 …(ii) Þ cos ç + f ÷ + sin ç + f ÷ = …(i)
a è4 ø b è4 ø 2
a2 b2
Since, Eqs. (i) and (ii) are identical, comparing If it is same as x cos a + y sin a = p …(ii)
h k then on comparing, we get
= = 2
æp ö æp ö æp ö æp ö
a cos ç + f ÷ b sin ç + f ÷ cos ç + f ÷ sin ç + f ÷
è4 ø è4 ø è4 ø è4 ø 1
= =
æp ö h a cos a b sin a p 2
or 2 cos ç + f ÷ = ...(iii)
è4 ø a
 Chap 06 Ellipse 495

or
æp ö
a cos a = p 2 cos ç + f ÷ ...(iii) Þ k 2 + m 2 h 2 - 2mhk = a 2m 2 + b 2
è4 ø
Þ m 2 (h 2 - a 2 ) - 2hkm + k 2 - b 2 = 0
æp ö
and b sin a = p 2 sin ç + f ÷ ...(iv)
è4 ø It is quadratic equation in m let slope of two tangents are
Squaring and adding Eq. (iii) and (iv), we get
m 1 and m 2
k2 - b2
a 2 cos 2 a + b 2 sin 2 a = ( p 2 )2 \ m 1m 2 =
h2 - a 2
ì 2 æp ö 2æp öü
í cos ç + f ÷ + sin ç + f ÷ý k2 - b2
î è 4 ø è 4 øþ -1 =
Þ a 2 cos 2 a + b 2 sin 2 a = 2p 2 h2 - a 2
Again, line Eq. (i) can be written as (Q tangents are perpendicular)
x y
cos q + sin q = 1, Þ -h 2 + a 2 = k 2 - b 2
a/ 2 b/ 2
p or h2 + k 2 = a 2 + b 2
where q= +f
4 Hence, locus of P (h, k ) is
which is clearly a tangent to the ellipse
x2 +y2 =a2 +b2
x2 y2 x2 y2 1
+ = 1 or + 2 = ...(v) Aliter :
(a / 2 )2 (b 2 )2 a2 b 2
If e ¢ be its eccentricity, then If any tangent y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) ...(i)
(b / 2 )2 = (a / 2 )2 (1 - e ¢ 2 )
x ìï æ 1 ö 2 üï
Þ b 2 = a 2 (1 - e ¢ 2 ) and y =- + ía 2 ç - ÷ + b 2 ý ...(ii)
m è mø
but 2 2
b = a (1 - e ) 2
îï þï
\ e = e¢ touch the ellipse and intersect at right angles.
Hence, ellipse (v) is a similar ellipse.
From Eq. (i),
y - mx = (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) ...(iii)
Director Circle Eq. (ii) can be re-written as
The locus of the point of intersection of the tangents x + my = (a 2 + b 2m 2 ) ...(iv)
x2 y2
to an ellipse + = 1 which are perpendicular to Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), then
a2 b2
each other is called director circle. (y - mx ) 2 + ( x + my ) 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2 + a 2 + b 2m 2
x2 y2 Þ (1 + m 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = (1 + m 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 )
Let any tangent in terms of slope of ellipse + = 1 is
a2 b2
P (h, k)
Hence, x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2 is the director circle of the
90°
ellipse.
B
y Example 40 Tangents at right angles are drawn to
A′
C
A x2 y 2
the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1. Show that the locus of the
B′ a b
middle points of the chord of contact is the curve
2
2 2 2
æ x2 y2 ö x2 +y2
y = mx + (a m + b ) ç 2 + 2÷ = 2
èa b ø a + b2
It is passes through (h, k )
Sol. Let Q (h, k ) be the middle point of the chord of contact
\ k = mh + (a 2m 2 + b 2 )
\ Equation of chord AB whose mid point Q (h , k ) is
or (k - mh ) 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
496 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y
T = S1
T¢
P (x1, y1) P (x1 , y1 )
90°
X¢ X
C G N T
A B
Q (h, k)
Y¢
xx 1 yy 1
+ =1 …(i)
a2 b2
hx ky h2 k2 Q T lies on X-axis.
+ = + …(i)
a2 b2 a2 b2 Put y = 0 in Eq. (i) Þ x = CT
and equation of chord of contact AB with respect to
P ( x 1, y1 ) is a2
\ CT = and CN = x 1
xx 1 yy1 x1
+ 2 =1 ...(ii)
a2 b
a2
the Eqs. (i) and (ii) are identical, hence comparing their and length of sub-tangent NT = CT - CN = - x1
coefficient, we get x1
x 1 y1 1 Equation of normal at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the ellipse
= =
h k æh2 k 2 ö
ç 2 + 2÷ x2 y2
èa b ø + = 1 is
a2 b2
h
\ x1 = ...(iii) x - x1 y - y1
æh2 k 2 ö = ...(ii)
ç 2 + 2÷ x 1 /a2 y 1 /b2
èa b ø
k Q G lies on X-axis. Put y = 0 in Eq. (ii)
and y1 = …(iv)
æh2 k 2 ö Þ x = CG
ç 2 + 2÷
èa b ø b2
\ CG = x 1 - x 1
Since tangents are at right angles, then the point ( x 1, y1 ) must a2
lie on the director circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2 of the ellipse \ Length of sub-normal
x 12 + y12 = a 2 + b 2 æ b2 ö
GN = CN - CG = x 1 - ç x 1 - x 1 ÷
h2 k2 è a2 ø
+ = a2 + b2 2
2 2 b
æh 2
k ö 2 æh 2
k ö 2
= x 1 = (1 - e 2 ) x 1
ç 2 + 2÷ ç 2 + 2÷ a2
è a b ø è a b ø
[from Eqs. (iii) and (iv)]
2
2 2
æh k ö h + k2 2
\ ç 2 + 2÷ = 2
èa b ø a + b2
Concyclic Points
2
æ x2 y2 ö x2 + y2 Any circle intersects an ellipse in two or four real points.
Hence, locus of mid-point Q (h , k ) is ç 2 + 2 ÷ = 2 They are called concyclic points and the sum of their
èa b ø a + b2
eccentric angles is an even multiple of p. If a, b, g, d be the
eccentric angles of the four concyclic points on an ellipse,
then prove that a + b + g + d = 2np where n is any integer.
Sub-Tangent and Sub-Normal
Let the tangent and normal at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) meet the axes at T Q (β) P (α)
and G respectively.
x2 y2
Equation of tangent at P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the ellipse + =1
R (γ ) S (δ)
a2 b2
is
 Chap 06 Ellipse 497

Let the given circle be Now, the equation of any curve passing through P , Q , R
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i) and S is given by
and the given ellipse be æ x2 y2 ö
ç 2 + 2 - 1÷ + l
x2 y2 èa b ø
+ =1 ...(ii)
a2 b2
æx æa + bö y æa + bö æa - böö
Let (a cos f, b sin f) be a point of intersection of Eqs. (i) ç cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ - cos ç ÷÷
èa è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 øø
and (ii).
As it lies on the circle Eq. (i). æx æ g + dö y æ g + dö æ g - dö ö
´ ç cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ - cos ç ÷÷ = 0
\ a 2 cos 2 f + b 2 sin2 f + 2 ga cos f èa è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 øø

+ 2 fb sin f + c = 0 …(iii) But the given points are concyclic. Hence this equation
2 2 will represent a circle, if co-efficient of x 2 = co-efficient y 2 .
tan2 ( f/2 ) ö
2 æ1 - æ 2 tan( f/2 ) ö and co-efficient of xy = 0
or a ç
2
÷ + b2 ç ÷
è 1 + tan ( f/2 ) ø è 1 + tan2 (f/2 ) ø Now equation of the co-efficient of xy = 0
æ 1 - tan2 ( f/2 ) ö æ 2 tan( f/2 ) ö æ a + bö æ g + dö æa + bö æ g + dö
+ 2 ga ç ÷ + 2 fb ç ÷ + c = 0 ...(iv) cos ç ÷ sin ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ cos ç ÷ =0
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø
è 1 + tan2 ( f/2 ) ø è 1 + tan2 ( f/2 ) ø
Put tan( f /2 ) = t æ a + b + g + dö
or sin ç ÷ = 0 = sin np
\ Eq. (iv) reduces to è 2 ø

æ1 - t2 ö
2
æ 2t ö
2 1
2 \ (a + b + g + d) = np or a + b + g + d = 2np
a ç
2
÷ + b2 ç ÷ + 2 ga 2
è1 +t ø è1 + t2 ø where, n is any integer.
æ1 - t2 ö æ 2t ö Hence, the sum of eccentric angles of four concylic points
ç ÷ + 2 fb ç ÷ +c =0
2
è1 +t ø è1 + t2 ø on an ellipse is always an even multiple of p

or (a 2 - 2 ga + c )t 4 + 4bf t 3 + ( 4b 2 - 2a 2 + 2c ) t 2 Corollary 1 : Prove that the common chords of a circle and

an ellipse are equally inclined to the axes of the ellipse.
+ 4bft + (a 2 + 2 ga + c ) = 0 ...(v)
If the point of intersection of chords PQ and RS is T, then
which is biquadratic equation in t. equation of chord PQ is
i.e. it has four values of t x æa + bö y æa + bö æa - bö
cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ = cos ç ÷
t = tan( f/2 ) a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø
Since, four values of eccentric angles are a, b, g, d
æ a b g dö S -S3
\ tan ç + + + ÷ = 1 P (α)
è 2 2 2 2 ø 1 - S2 + S 4 Q (β)

St 1 - St 1 t 2 t 3 T
= =0 R (γ)
1 - St 1 t 2 + t 1 t 2 t 3 t 4
1 S (δ)
Þ (a + b + g + d) = np
2
\ a + b + g + d = 2np, when n is any integer. b æa + bö
Aliter : Let P , Q , R,S be four concyclic points on an \ Slope of PQ = - cot ç ÷
a è 2 ø
ellipse, whose eccentric angles a, b, g, d respectively.
b æ g + dö
Then equation of the chords PQ and RS are =- cot ç np - ÷ (Qa + b + g + d =2np )
(Take any two chords) a è 2 ø
x æa + bö y æa + bö æa - bö b æ g + dö
cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ - cos ç ÷ =0 = cot ç ÷ = - (slope of RS )
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø a è 2 ø
x æ g + dö y æ g + dö æ g - dö Hence, PQ and RS are equally inclined to the axis of x.
and cos ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ - cos ç ÷ =0
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø
498 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Corollary 2 : Find the centre of the circle passing through p

The eccentric angles of P , P ¢ and D are a, p + a, +a
the three points on an ellipse whose eccentric angles are 2
a, b, g. respectively. Let b be the eccentric angle of the fourth point.
Let the point of intersection of ellipse As above
x2 y2 æp ö
+ =1 ...(i) a + ( p + a ) + ç + a ÷ + b = 2np
è2 ø
a2 b2
and circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(ii) æ 3p ö p
\ b = 2np - ç + 3a ÷ = - 3a (for n = 1)
è 2 ø 2
be a, b, g, d
\ a + b + g + d = 2np (where n is an integer) Note
Let f be any point on Eq. (i) Any other values of n gives the same point on the ellipse.

\ x = a cos f, y = b sin f
This point also lie on Eq. (ii)
\ a 2 cos 2 f + b 2 sin2 f + 2 ga cos f + 2 fb sin f + c = 0...(iii)
Some Standard Properties of
Þ {(a 2 - b 2 ) cos 2 f + 2 ga cos f +
the Ellipse
(b 2 + c )} 2 = 4 f 2 b 2 (1 - cos 2 f) (i) If S be the focus and G be the point where the normal
2 2 2 4 2 3 at P meets the axis of an ellipse, then SG = e × SP and
Þ (a - b ) cos f + 4 ga (a - b ) cos f
the tangent and normal at P bisects the external and
+ {2 (a 2 - b 2 ) (b 2 + c ) + 4 g 2 a 2 + 4 f 2 b 2 }cos 2 f internal angles between the focal distances of P.
+ 4 ga (b 2 + c ) cos f + {b 2 + c 2 - 4 f 2 b 2 } = 0 Y
Normal
This is a fourth degree equation in cos f . P (x1, y1)
It has four roots (i.e. cos a, cos b, cos g, cos d)
4 ga X′ X
\ cos a + cos b + cos g + cos d = - …(iv) S¢ C G S T
(a - b 2 )
2

Similarly changing Eq. (iii) in sin f , we get

4 fb Y′
sina + sinb + sin g + sin d = - ...(v)
2
b -a 2 Let P be any point on the ellipse
Q a + b + g + d = 2np x2 y2
+
=1
\ d = 2np - (a + b + g ) a2 b2
\ sin d = - {sin (a + b + g )} and cos d = cos (a + b + g ) \ Equation of normals PG is
then, from Eqs. (iv) and (v), we get a2 b2
(x - x 1 ) = (y - y 1 )
æ a2 - b2 ö x1 y1
-g =ç ÷ {cos a + cos b + cos g + cos (a + b + g )} Putting y = 0. For the point G, we have
è 4a ø
a2
æ b2 - a2 ö (x - x 1 ) = - b2
and -f = ç ÷ {sina + sinb + sin g - sin (a + b + g )} x1
è 4b ø
æ a2 - b2 ö a 2e 2
which give co-ordinate of centre of circle through a, b \ x = CG = ç ÷ x1 = x 1 = e2x 1
2 2
è a ø a
and g.
Corollary 3 : P ¢ CP and D ¢ CD are conjugate diameters of \ SG = CS - CG = ae - e 2 x 1 = e (a - ex 1 )
an ellipse and a is the eccentric angle of P. Prove that the = eSP
eccentric angle of the point where the circle through P , P ¢ , D Similarly S ¢ G = eS ¢ P
p SG eSP SP
again cuts the ellipse is - 3a. \ = =
2 S ¢ G eS ¢ P S ¢ P
 Chap 06 Ellipse 499

\ The normal PG bisects the internal ÐSPS ¢ between y Example 41 A ray emanating from the point ( -3, 0) is
the focal distances but tangent and normal are at incident on the ellipse 16 x 2 + 25y 2 = 400 at the point
right angles, the tangent PT bisects the external angle
SPL between them. P with ordinate 4. Find the equation of the reflected
ray after first reflection.
(ii) The locus of the feet of the perpendiculars from the
Sol. For point P ,y -coordinate = 4
foci on any tangent to an ellipse is the auxiliary circle.
Q Given ellipse is 16x 2 + 25y 2 = 400
The equation of any tangent in terms slope (m ) of the
x2 y2 16x 2 + 25 ( 4 )2 = 400
ellipse + = 1 is
a2 b2 Coordinate of P is (0, 4)
16 9
e2 = 1 - =
y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) 25 25
3
or y - mx = (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) ...(i) e=
5
Equation of perpendicular line of Eq. (i) and passes Y
through ( ± ae , 0 ) is
my + x = ± ae ...(ii)
(0, 4)
The locus of the point of intersection of the line
given by Eqs. (i) and (ii) can be obtained by
X′ X
eliminating m between them, squaring and adding (–3, 0)S′ C S (3, 0)
Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
y 2 (1 + m 2 ) + x 2 (1 + m 2 ) = a 2m 2 + b 2 + a 2 e 2
Þ (1 + m 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = a 2m 2 + a 2
Y′
= a 2 (1 + m 2 ) foci ( ± ae , 0) i.e. ( ± 3,0)
or x 2 + y 2 = a2 Equation of reflected ray ( i.e. PS ) is
x y
which is the equation of the auxiliary circle of the + = 1 or 4 x + 3y = 12 .
3 4
x2 y2
ellipse + = 1.
a2 b2
Equation of an Ellipse Referred
Reflection Property of to Two Perpendicular Lines
an Ellipse Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the ellipse
x2
+
y2
=1
a2 b2
If an incoming light ray passes through on focus (S ) strike
the concave side of the ellipse, then it will get reflected then, y = PM , x = PN
towards other focus (S ¢ ) . ( PN ) 2 ( PM ) 2
\ + =1
B
Tang
ent Light ray a2 b2
Q P Y
αα
B (0, b)
P (x, y)
X¢ X N x
A¢ S¢ C N S A
y
Normal X¢ X
A¢ O M A
B¢ (–a, 0) (a, 0)
Reflected ray

and ÐSPS ¢ = ÐSQS ¢ B' (0, –b)

Y¢
500 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

suppose if axes along the lines Directrices :

a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 and b 1 x - a 1 y + c 2 = 0 (i) If a > b,
|a x + b 1 y + c 1 | a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 a
then PN = 1 =±
(a 12 + b 12 ) (a 12 + b 12 ) e

|b 1 x - a 1 y + c 2 | (ii) If a < b,
PM =
(b 12 + a 12 ) b 1 x - a 1y + c 2 b
=±
(a 12 + b 12 ) e
Y¢
)
c1 =0 P (x, y
b 1y + y Example 42 Determine the equations of major and
a 1x + N = 0 X¢
+ c2 minor axes of the ellipse
b b 1x – a 1y
C Ma 4( x - 2y + 1) 2 + 9(2x + y + 2) 2 = 25
a b Also, find its centre, length of the latusrectum and
X¢¢ eccentricity.
Sol. The equation of the ellipse can be written as
2 2
Y¢¢ æ x - 2y + 1 ö æ 2x + y + 2 ö
4 ´5ç ÷ +9 ´5ç ÷ = 25
then, equation of ellipse is è 5 ø è 5 ø
2 2 2 2
ìa x + b y + c ü ìb x - a y + c ü æ x - 2y + 1 ö æ 2x + y + 2 ö
ï 1 1 1ï ï 1 1 2ï ç ÷ ç ÷
í ý í ý è 5 ø è 5 ø
or + =1
ïî (a 12 + b 12 ) ïþ ïî (b 12 + a 12 ) ïþ (5 / 4 ) (5 / 9 )
+ =1
a2 b2 X2 Y2
or 2
+ =1
Centre : Is the point of intersection of a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0 and a b2
b 1 x - a 1y + c 2 = 0 Here a > b
Equations of Major and Minor Axes : \ Equation of major axis is Y = 0
i.e. 2x + y + 2 = 0
(i) If a > b, then major axis lies along b 1 x - a 1 y + c 2 = 0
and minor axis lies along a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0. and Equation of minor axis is X = 0
i.e. x - 2y + 1 = 0
(ii) If a < b, then major axis lies along a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0
Centre : X = 0, Y = 0
and minor axis lies along b 1 x - a 1 y + c 2 = 0
Þ x - 2y + 1 = 0, 2x + y + 2 = 0
Eccentricity : we get x = - 1, y = 0
(i) If a > b, b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 ) (ii) If a < b, a 2 = b 2 (1 - e 2 ) \ Centre is ( -1, 0)
Foci : 2b 2 2 ´ 5 / 9 8
Length of latusrectum = = =
a 5/ 4 9
(i) If a > b
Eccentricity : b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 )
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 b 1 x - a 1y + c 2
= ± ae, =0 5 5
Þ = (1 - e 2 )
(a 12 + b 12 ) (b 12 + a 12 9 4
we get after solving ( x , y ) 4
Þ = 1 - e2
9
(ii) If a < b
5
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1 b x - a 1y + c 2 Þ e2 =
= 0, 1 = ± be 9
a 12 + b 12 b 12 + a 12 \ e=
5
3
we get after solving ( x , y )
 Chap 06 Ellipse 501

Exercise for Session 3

1. The angle between the pair of tangents drawn from the point (1, 2) to the ellipse 3x 2 + 2y 2 = 5 is
12 6 12
(a) tan-1 æç ö÷ (b) tan-1 æç ö÷ (c) tan-1 æç ö÷ (d) tan-1 (12 5 )
è 5ø è 5ø è 5ø

x2 y2
2. If chords of contact of tangents from two points ( x1, y1) and ( x 2, y 2 ) to the ellipse + = 1 are at right angles,
a2 b 2
x1x 2
then is equal to
y1y 2
a2 b2 a4 b4
(a) 2
(b) - 2
(c) - 4
(d) -
b a b a4
x2 y2
3. From the point ( l, 3) tangents are drawn to + = 1 and are perpendicular to each other than l is
9 4
(a) ± 1 (b) ± 2 (c) ± 3 (d) ± 4

4. 2 2
The eccentric angle of one end of a diameter of x + 3y = 3 is p / 6, then the eccentric angle of the other end
will be
5p 5p 2p 2p
(a) (b) - (c) - (d)
6 6 3 3
x2 y2
5. The locus of the mid-points of a focal chord of the ellipse + = 1 is
a2 b 2
x2 y2 ex x2 y2 ex
(a) 2
+ 2
= (b) 2
- = (c) x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2 (d) x 2 - y 2 = a 2 + b 2
a b a a b2 a
( x + y - 2 )2 ( x - y )2
6. The centre of the ellipse + = 1 is
9 16
(a) (0, 0) (b) (1, 0) (c) (0, 1) (d) (1, 1)
2
x y2
7. The locus of the point of intersection of two perpendicular tangents of the ellipse + = 1 is
9 4
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 4 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 9 (c) x 2 + y 2 = 13 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 5

x2 y2
8. The area of the parallelogram inscribed in the ellipse + = 1 whose diagonals are the conjugate diameters
a2 b 2
of the ellipse is given by
(a) 2ab (b) 3ab (c) 4ab (d) 5ab
2
x y2
9. Find the locus of the vertices of equilateral triangle circumscribing the ellipse + = 1.
a2 b 2

10. A tangent to the ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 4 meets the ellipse x 2 + 2y 2 = 6 at P and Q. Prove that the tangents at P
and Q of the ellipse x 2 + 2y 2 = 6 are at right angles.
x2 y2
11. Find the locus of the mid-point of chords of the ellipse + = 1(a > b ) passing through the point (2a , 0).
a2 b 2
x2 y2
12. Find the locus of the point the chord of contact of tangents from which to the ellipse + = 1, touches the
a2 b 2
circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2.
13. Find the centre and eccentricity of the ellipse
4( x - 2y + 1)2 + 9(2x + y + 2)2 = 5

14. A ray emanating from the point (0, - 5 ) is incident on the ellipse 9x 2 + 4y 2 = 36 at the point P with abscissa 2.
Find the equation of the reflected ray after first reflection.
 Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember
1 If S and S ¢ are foci and P be a point, then x2 y2
6 If ellipse 2
+ 2 = 1, then
(a) If|SP| + |S ¢ P| > |SS ¢|, then the locus of P is an ellipse. a b
Y
(b) If|SP| + |S ¢ P| = |SS ¢|, then the locus of P is a straight
line. B P (x, y)
(c) If|SP| + |S ¢ P| < |SS ¢|, then the locus of P is an empty
set. X¢ X
A¢ C N A
x2 y2 x2 y2 x2 y2
2 If the ellipses 2 + 2 = 1, 2 + 2 = 1 and 2 + 2 = 1
a b a b q f
B¢
½a2 2
b 1½
have a common tangent, then ½a 2 b 2 1½ = 0 Y¢
½ 2 ½ (PN ) : AN × A¢ N = (BC )2 :( AC )2
2
½q f 2 1½
7 If a and b are the eccentric angles of extremittes of a focal
3 Area of the quadrilateral formed by the common tangents
x2 y2
x2 y2 chord of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, then
of the circle x 2 + y 2 = c 2 and the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1; a b
a b e - 1 e +1
2c 2|a2 - b2| tan(a / 2 ).tan(b / 2 ) = or according as focus (ae,
c Î(a, b) is e + 1 e -1
(a2 - c 2 )(c 2 - b2 ) 0) or (-ae , 0 ).

4 The product of the two perpendicular distances from the 8 If the tangent at P on an ellipse meets the directrix in F;
foci on any tangent of an ellipse is b2 . then the PF will subtend a right angle at the
corresponding focus.
5 If the normals at the point P( x1, y1 ); Q( x2 , y2 ) and R( x3 , y3 )
i.e. Ð PSF = p / 2
x2 y2 Y
on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 are concurrent, then
a b B P
x y
½ 1 1 1 1 ½x y
F
½ x 2 y2 x 2 y2 ½
½ ½ = 0 and if points P(a ), Q(b ) and R(g ), then 90°
X′ X
½ x 3 y3 x 3 y3 ½ Z′ A′ S′ C S A Z
½sec a cosec a 1½
½sec b cosec b 1½
½ ½= 0 B′
½sec g cosec g 1½
Y′
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 10 multiple choice examples. l Ex. 2 Let Pi and Pi ¢ be the feet of the perpendiculars
Each example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. drawn from the foci S and S¢ on a tangent Ti to an ellipse
whose length of semi-major axis is 20. If
10
l Ex. 1 Point ‘O’ is the centre of the ellipse with major axis
AB and minor axis CD. Point F is one focus of the ellipse. If
å(SPi )(S ¢Pi ¢ ) = 2560, then the value of eccentricity is
i =1
OF = 6 and the diameter of the inscribed circle of triangle 1 2
OCF is 2, then the product ( AB ) (CD ) is equal to (a) (b)
5 5
(a) 52 (b) 56 (c) 78 (d) None of these 3 4
(c) (d)
Sol. (b) Q Diameter of the inscribed circle of triangle OCF is 2. 5 5
\ Radius = 1 Sol. (c) \ Product of length of perpendiculars from foci on a
x y tangent to an ellipse = b 2
Centre of the circle is (1, 1) and equation of CF is + = 1
6 b
Y
\ (SP1 )(S ¢ P1 ) = (SP2 )(S ¢ P2 ) = K = (SP10 ) (S ¢ P10 ¢ ) = b 2
10

C(0, b)
Given å(SPi )(S ¢ Pi ¢ ) = 2560
i =1

(1,1) Þ 10b 2 = 2560 or b 2 = 256

(–a, 0) E (a, 0)
X¢ O X or b = 16
B F(b, 0) A
and b 2 = a 2(1 - e 2 )
Þ (16 ) 2 = (20 ) 2(1 - e 2 )
D(0, –b)
16
or 1 -e2 =
Y¢ 25
Now, length of perpendicular from (1, 1) on CF = 1 (radius) 9 3
or e2 = or e =
1 1 25 5
+ -1
6 b æ 1 5ö æ1 1ö
Þ = 1 or - ç - ÷ = ç + 2÷
æ 1 1 ö èb 6ø è 36 b ø l Ex. 3 Coordinates of the vertices B and C of a DABC are
ç + 2÷ (2, 0) and (8, 0) respectively. The vertex A is varing in such a
è 36 b ø
æBö æC ö
æ5 1 ö æ1 1ö way that 4 tan ç ÷ . tan ç ÷ = 1. Then, the locus of A is
Þ ç - ÷ = ç + 2÷ è 2ø è2ø
è6 b ø è 36 b ø
2 ( x - 5) 2 y 2 ( x - 5) 2 y 2
æ5 1 ö 1 1 (a) + =1 (b) + =1
On squaring both sides, then ç - ÷ = + 2 25 16 16 9
è 6 b ø 36 b
( x - 5) 2 y 2 ( x - 5) 2 y 2
25 1 5 1 1 (c) + =1 (d) + =1
Þ + - = + 25 9 16 25
36 b 2 3b 36 b 2
5 24 2 æBö æC ö
Sol. (a) Q 4 tan ç ÷ × tan ç ÷ = 1
Þ = = è2ø è2ø
3b 36 3
5 (s - c ) (s - a ) (s - a ) (s - b )
\ b= Þ 4´ ´ =1
2 s (s - b ) s (s - c )
Also, b 2 = a 2(1 - e 2 ) s -a 1
Þ =
2 2
b = a - (ae ) 2 s 4
25 Þ 3s = 4a
Þ a 2 = b 2 + (ae ) 2 = + 36 [Qae = 6 ] æa + b + c ö
4 Þ 3ç ÷ = 4a
è 2 ø
13
Þ a= 5a
2 or b +c = = 10 = 2a1 , [Qa = BC = 6 ]
Hence, ( AB ) (CD ) = (2a ) (2b ) = 13 ´ 5 = 65 3
504 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Since, the sum of distances of A from two given fixed points B x2

and C is always 10. l Ex. 5 If the ellipse + y 2 = 1 meets the ellipse
4
Here, B and C are foci.
y2
\ Centre (5, 0) and distance between foci = 6 x2 + = 1 in four distinct points and a = b 2 - 5b + 7, then b
2
Þ 2a1 e = 6 a
6 3 belongs to
Þ e= = [Qa1 = 5 ]
10 5 (a) (1, 4) (b) ( - ¥, 2) È (3, ¥ )
æ 9ö (c) (2, 3) (d) None of these
and b 2 = a12(1 - e 2 ) = 25 ç1 - ÷ = 16 or b = 4
è 25 ø x2 y 2
Sol. (b) The ellipse + = 1 will intersect in four distinct points
Q A lies on the ellipse 12 a 2
\ Locus of A is x2 y 2
with ellipse + = 1, where a 2 > 1
( x - 5 ) 2 (y - 0 ) 2 4 1
+ =1
(5 ) 2 (4)2 Þ a >1 [Q a always positive]
(x - 5)2 y 2 Now, a = b 2 - 5b + 7
or + =1
25 16 Þ b 2 - 5b + 7 > 1
or b 2 - 5b + 6 > 0
l Ex. 4 A ray emanating from the point (0, 6) is incident on
or (b - 2 ) (b - 3 ) > 0
the ellipse 25 x 2 + 16y 2 = 1600 at the point P with ordinate S.
or b Î( - ¥, 2 ) È (3, ¥ )
After reflection, ray cuts the Y -axis at B. The length of PB is
(a) 5 (b) 7 (c) 12 (d) 13 l Ex. 6 The normal at a variable point P on an ellipse
Sol. (d) Q Ellipse is 25 x 2 + 16y 2 = 1600
x 2
y2
x2 y 2 + = 1 of eccentricity e meets the axes of the ellipse in
or + =1 a2 b2
8 2 10 2
Q and R, then the locus of the mid-point of QR is a conic
Y with eccentricity e¢ such that
(a) e ¢ is independent of e (b) e ¢ = 1
1
(c) e ¢ = e (d) e ¢ =
(0, 6) e
B¢
P(4Ö3, 5) Sol. (c) Normal at P (a cos q, b sin q) is
P
ax secq - by cos ec q = a 2 - b 2 (let a > b )
X¢ X It meets the axes at
æ (a 2 - b 2 ) ö æ (a 2 - b 2 ) ö
B (0, –6) Qç cos q, 0 ÷ and R ç 0, - sin q÷
è a ø è b ø
Let mid-point of QR is T ( x, y ), then
(a 2 - b 2 )
2x = cos q
a
Y¢
or 2ax = (a 2 - b 2 ) cos q ...(i)
Coordinating foci an æè 0, ± (10 2 - 8 2 ) öø 2
(a - b ) 2
and 2y = - sin q
b
i.e. ( 0, ± 6 )
or 2by = - (a 2 - b 2 ) sin q ...(ii)
Let coordinates of P are ( l, 5 )
l2 5 2 On squaring and adding Eq. (i) and Eq.(ii), we get
\ + =1 4a 2x 2 + 4b 2y 2 = (a 2 - b 2 ) 2
8 2 10 2
Þ l=± 4 3 x2 y2
Þ + =1
æa2 -b 2 ö2 æa2 -b2 ö
2
\ P º ( ±4 3, 5 ) (lie in I or II quadrants)
ç ÷ ç ÷
According to reflection property, a ray passing through focus è 2a ø è 2b ø
B ¢( 0, 6 ) will passing through B( 0, - 6 ) (other focus). If P lies in I which is an ellipse, having eccentricity e¢, then
quadrant, then
a2 -b2 a2 -b2
PB = 48 + (5 + 6 ) 2 = 169 = 13 Let A= ,B =
2a 2b
 Chap 06 Ellipse 505

A 2 = B 2(1 - e ¢2 ) [Q B > A ] Þ 25 tan 2 q + 16 cot 2 q + 41 ³ 81

A2 b2 9
Þ e ¢2 = 1 - =1 - 2 =e2 or £1
B 2
a (25 tan q + 16 cot 2 q + 41 )
2

\ e¢ =e Þ p £1
Thus, maximum value of p is 1.
x2 x2
l Ex. 7 If the curves + y 2 = 1 and + y 2 = 1 for a
4 2
a l Ex. 9 If f ( x ) is a decreasing function, then the set of
suitable value of a cut on four concyclic points, the equation values of ‘k’, for which the major axis of the ellipse
of the circle passing through these four points is x2 y2
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 8 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 4
+ = 1 is the X-axis, is
f (k 2 + 2k + 5 ) f (k + 11)
(c) x 2 + y 2 = 2 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 1 (a) k Î ( - 2, 3 )
Sol. (d) The equation of conic through the point of intersection of (b) k Î ( -3, 2)
given two ellipses is
(c) k Î ( -¥, - 3 ) È ( 2, ¥ )
æ x2 ö æ x2 ö
ç + y 2 - 1÷ + lç 2 + y 2 - 1÷ = 0 (d) k Î ( -¥, - 2) È (3, ¥ )
è 4 ø èa ø Sol. (b) Q f ( x ) is a decreasing function and for major axis to be
æ1 l ö X -axis.
or x ç + 2 ÷ + y 2 (1 + l ) = (1 + l )
2
è4 a ø \ f (k 2 + 2k + 5 ) > ( f (k + 11 )
æ a 2 + 4l ö Þ k 2 + 2k + 5 < k + 11
or x2ç 2 ÷ + y 2 =1
è 4a (1 + l ø or k2 + k -6 < 0
a 2 + 4l or (k + 3 ) (k - 2 ) < 0
for circle =1
4a 2(1 + l ) or k Î( -3, 2 )
3a 2
Þ l=-
4(a 2 - 1 ) x2 y2
l Ex. 10 If a tangent of slope 2 of the ellipse = 1 is +
2
Therefore, the circle is x + y = 1 2 a2 b2
normal to the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x + 1 = 0, then the maximum
l Ex. 8 If p is the length of perpendicular drawn from the value of ab is
x2 y2 (a) 1 (b) 2
origin to any normal to the ellipse + = 1, then the (c) 4 (d) 8
25 16
maximum value of p is Sol. (c) Equation of tangent is y = 2 x + ( 4a 2 + b 2)
(a) 5 (b) 4 This is normal to the circle
(c) 2 (d) 1 x 2 + y 2 + 4x + 1 = 0
Sol. (d) The equation of any normal at (5 cos q, 4 sin q) to the ellipse This tangent passes through ( - 2, 0 ), then
x2 y 2
+ = 1 is 0 = - 4 + ( 4a 2 + b 2 )
25 16
5 x sec q - 4y cos ec q = 9 Þ 4a 2 + b 2 = 16
\ Q AM ³ GM
| 0 - 0 - 9| 9 4a 2 + b 2
p= = \ ( 4a 2 )(b 2 )
2 2
(25 sec q + 16 cos ec q) (25 tan q + 16 cot 2 q + 41 )
2
2
Now, AM ³ GM 16
Þ ³ 2ab
25 tan 2 q + 16 cot 2 q 2
Þ ³ 25 ´ 16 = 20 or ab £ 4
2
\ 25 tan 2 q + 16 cot 2 q ³ 40 Hence, maximum value of ab is 4.
506 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n This section contains 5 multiple choice examples. Each l Ex. 13 A tangent to the ellipse 4 x 2 + 9y 2 = 36 is cut by
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which
the tangent at the extremities of the major axis at T and T ¢.
MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
The circle TT ¢ as diameter passes through the point
l Ex. 11 Extremities of the latusrectum of the ellipse (a) ( - 5, 0) (b) ( 5, 0)
x 2
y2 (c) ( 3 , 0) (d) ( - 3 , 0)
+ = 1 (a > b ) having a given major axis 2a lies on
a2 b2 Sol. (a, b) Given equation of the ellipse is 4 x 2 + 9y 2 = 36
(a) x 2 = a(a - y ) (b) x 2 = a(a + y ) x2 y 2
i.e., + =1 …(i)
(c) y 2 = a(a + x ) (d) y 2 = a(a - x ) 9 4
The equation of tangent at (3 cos q, 2 sin q) is
æ b2 ö
Sol. (a, b) Q Extremities of the latusrectum are çae, ± ÷ x y
è aø cos q + sin q = 1
3 2
b2 which meets the tangent at x = 3 and x = -3 at the extremities
Let x = ± ae and y = ±
a of major axis
or x 2 = a 2e 2 and b 2 = ± ay æ 2(1 - cos q) ö
T º ç3, ÷
è sin q ø
or x 2 = a 2 - b 2 and b 2 = ± ay
æ 2(1 + cos q) ö
\ x 2 = a 2 ± ay or x 2 = a(a ± y ) and T ¢º ç -3,
è
÷
sin q ø
\Equation of circle on TT ¢ as diameter is
l Ex. 12 The locus of the image of the focus of the ellipse
æ 2(1 - cos q) ö æ 2(1 + cos q) ö
x2 y2 ( x - 3 )( x + 3 ) + çy -
è
÷ çy -
ø è
÷ =0
+ = 1, with respect to any of the tangent to the ellipse sin q sin q ø
25 9 4
is Þ x2 + y 2 - ×y - 5 = 0
sin q
(a) ( x + 4 )2 + y 2 = 100 (b) ( x + 2)2 + y 2 = 50 4
or (x 2 + y 2 - 5) - y =0 …(ii)
(c) ( x - 4 )2 + y 2 = 100 (d) ( x - 2)2 + y 2 = 50 sin q
Sol. (a, c) Let M(h, k ) be the image SM cuts a tangent at a point Clearly Eq. (ii), passes through point of intersection of
which lies on the auxiliary circle of the ellipse, therefore x 2 + y 2 - 5 = 0 and y = 0 i.e., ( ± 5, 0 )
2
æh ± 4ö k2
ç ÷ + = (5 ) 2 [Q foci of the given ellipse are ( ± 4, 0 )] x2 y2
è 2 ø 4 l Ex. 14 Consider the ellipse +
= 1, where
tan 2 a sec 2 a
M(h, k)
a Î(0, p / 2 ). Which of the following quantities would vary as
Y
a varies?
(a) degree of flatness (b) ordinate of the vertex
(c) coordinate of the foci (d) length of latusrectum
Sol. (a, b, d) In a Î( 0, p / 2 )

X¢ X sec 2 a > tan 2 a

C S
\Coordinates of foci ( 0, ± (sec 2 a + tan 2 a ) ) i.e., ( 0, ± 1 ) which
is independent of a .
Vertices are ( 0, ± sec a ) and latusrectum
2a 2 2 tan 2 a
Y¢ =
=
b sec a
Q a Î( 0, p / 2 )
or (h ± 4 ) 2 + k 2 = 100
Þ tan a Î( 0, ¥ ) and sec a Î(1, ¥ )
Hence, the locus is ( x ± 4 ) 2 + y 2 = 100
Hence, a µ degree of flatness.
 Chap 06 Ellipse 507

l Ex. 15 Let A(q ) and B( f) be the extremities of a chord of æ b sin f - b sin q ö b cos a
Þ ç ÷ =-
è a cos f - a cos q ø a sin a
an ellipse. If the slope of AB is equal to the slope of the
tangent at a point C (a ) on the ellipse, then the value of a is æ q+ fö æ f - qö
b.2 cosç ÷.sin ç ÷
q+f q-f è 2 ø è 2 ø b
(a) (b) Þ = - cot a
2 2 æ q+ fö æ f - qö a
-a.2 sin ç ÷.sin ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
q+f q+f
(c) +p (d) -p
2 2 æ q+ fö
\ tan a = tan ç ÷
è 2 ø
Sol. (a. c) Q Slope of AB = Slope of tangent at C
æ q+ fö
Þ a = np + ç ÷,n ÎI
è 2 ø

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 2 solved Paragraphs based upon If an > bn
each of the Paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have Then, bn2 = an2 (1 - en2 ) …(i)
to be answered. Each of these questions has four choices
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. According to the question, bn = bn -1 …(ii)
and an - 1 = anen …(iii)
Paragraph I For ellipse En -1, a 2n - 1 = bn2 - 1 (1 - en2 - 1 ) …(iv)
(Q. Nos. 16 to 18)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get bn2-1 = an2 (1 - en2 ) …(v)
A sequence of ellipses E 1 , E 2 , E 3 , …, E n is constructed as
2
follows : Ellipse E n is drawn so as to touch ellipse E n - 1 as Substituting the values of an-1 and bn-1 from Eqs. (iii) and (v) in
the extremities of the major axis of E n - 1 and to have its foci Eq. (iv), then
at the extremities of the mirror axis of E n - 1 . an2en2 = an2(1 - en2 )(1 - en2-1 )
16. If E n is independent of n, then the eccentricity of Þ en2 = (1 - en2 )(1 - en2-1 ) ...(vi)
ellipse E n - 2 is Q En is independent of n
æ3 - 5 ö æ 5 - 1ö \ en = en -1 = e [say]
(a) ç ÷ (b) ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø From Eq. (vi), we get
e 2 = (1 - e 2 ) 2
æ2 - 3 ö æ 3 - 1ö
(c) ç ÷ (d) ç ÷ Þ e 4 - 3e 2 + 1 = 0
è 2 ø è 2 ø
2
3 ± 5 6 ± 2 5 æ 5 ± 1ö
17. If eccentricity of ellipse E n is en , then the locus of \ e2 = = =ç ÷
2 4 è 2 ø
(en2 , en2-1 ) is
5 -1
(a) a parabola (b) an ellipse \ e= [Q 0 < e < 1 ]
2
(c) a hyperbola (d) a rectangular hyperbola 17. (d) From Eq. (vi), en2 = (1 - en2 ) (1 - en2-1 )
x2 y2 Locus of (en2, en2-1 ) is
18. If equation of ellipse E 1 is + = 1, then the
9 16 x = (1 - x ) (1 - y )
equation of ellipse E 3 is Þ xy - 2 x - y + 1 = 0
x2 y2 x2 y2 Here, a = 0, b = 0, c = 1,
(a) + =1 (b) + =1
9 16 25 49 1 1
f = - , g = - 1, h =
x2 y2 x2 y2 2 2
(c) + =1 (d) + =1
25 41 16 25 1 1 1 1
\ D = 0 + 2 ´ - ´ -1 ´ - 0 - 0 -1 ´ = ¹ 0
Sol. 2 2 4 4
x2 y 2 and h 2 > ab, a + b = 0
16. (b) If En : + = 1 and eccentricity of En is en
an2 bn2 Þ rectangular hyperbola.
508 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

æ 1 - en2-1 ö 20. If perimeter of DOCS1 is p units, then the value of p is

18. (c) From Eq. (vi), en = ç ÷ ...(vii)
è 2 - en2-1 ø (a) 10 (b) 15 (c) 20 (d) 25
Y 21. The equation of the director circle of (E ) is
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 48.5 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 97
(c) x 2 + y 2 = 48.5 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 97
Sol.
E3
Q OS1 = ae = 6, OC = b
E2
\ CS1 = (OS1 ) 2 + (OC ) 2 = (a 2e 2 + b 2 ) = a
E1
X¢ X 1 1
O Area of DOCS1 = ´ (OS1 ) ´ (OC ) = ´ 6 ´ b = 3b
2 2
1 1
and semi-perimeter of DOCS1 = (OS1 + OC + CS1 ) = (6 + a + b )
2 2
Y

Y¢

x2 y 2 X¢ X
B O S1 A
Q E1 º + =1
9 16
\ a1 = 3, b1 = 4 and 9 = 16 (1 - e12 )
D
7
\ e1 =
4 Y¢
æ 7 ö
æ 1 - e12 ö ç1 - ÷ 3 Q In radius of DOCS1 = 1
From Eq. (vii), e 2 = ç ÷= ç 16 ÷= 3b
è 2 - e12 ø ç2 - 7 ÷ 5 \ =1
è 1
16 ø (6 + a + b )
2
æ 9 ö 1
ç1 - ÷ Þ b = (6 + a ) ...(i)
25 4 5
and then, e3 = ç ÷=
9 41
ç2 - ÷ Also, b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 ) = a 2 - 36 ...(ii)
è 25 ø
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Also, a1 = a 2e 2 and b1 = b2
1
\ b2 = 4 = b3e 3 Þ b3 = 41 (6 + a ) 2 = a 2 - 36
25
æ 16 ö Þ 2a 2 - a - 78 = 0
and a 32 = b32(1 - e 32 ) = 41 ç1 - ÷ = 25
è 41 ø 13
or a= , -6
x2 y 2 2
\ Ellipse E 3 is + =1
25 41 13 5
19. (c) \ a= and b = [from Eq. (i)]
2 2
Paragraph II 13 5
(Q. Nos. 19 to 21) Q D = pab = p ´ ´
2 2
x2 y2 \ 4 D = 65 p
Consider an ellipse E : + = 1, centred at point ‘O’ and 20. (b) p = (OS1 + OC + CS1 ) = 6 + b + a
2 2
a b
having AB and CD as its major and minor axes respectively 5 13
=6 +
+ = 15
if S1 be one of the focus of the ellipse, radius of incircle of 2 2
DOCS1 be 1 unit and OS1 = 6 units. 21. (a) Equation of director circle of E is
x2 + y 2 =a2 + b2
19. If area of ellipse (E ) is D sq unit, then the value of 4D
169 + 25
is = = 48.5
4
(a) 63p (b) 64p (c) 65p (d) 66p
 Chap 06 Ellipse 509

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 2 examples. The answer to each æ1 1 1 1 ö Sx1x 2x 3
example is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 ç + + + ÷=
è x1 x 2 x 3 x 4 ø x1 × x 2 × x 3 × x 4
(both inclusive).
2a 4h(a 2 - b 2 )
l Ex. 22 If the normals at the four points ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), - (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 2(a 2 - b 2 )
= = …(iv)
a 6h 2 a 2h
x2 y2 2 2 2
( x 3 , y 3 ) and ( x 4 , y 4 ) on the ellipse + = 1 are - (a - b )
a2 b2
Multiplying Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
æ 4 öæ 4 1ö
concurrent, then the value of ç å x i ÷ ç å ÷ is æ1 1 1 1 ö
( x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 ) ç + + + ÷ =4
è i =1 ø è i =1 x i ø è x1 x 2 x 3 x 4 ø
Sol. (4) Let point of concurrent is (h, k ). æ 4 öæ 4 1ö
or ç å xi ÷ ç å ÷ = 4
Equation of normal at ( x ¢, y ¢ ) is è i =1 ø è i =1 xi ø
x - x¢ y -y ¢
=
x ¢a 2 y ¢b 2 l Ex. 23 If x , y Î R, satisfies the equation
It is passes through (h, k ), then
( x - 4) 2 y 2
y ¢2 {a 2(h - x ¢ ) + b 2x ¢ 2} = b 4k 2x ¢2 ...(i) + = 1, then the difference between the largest
4 9
2 2 2
x¢ y ¢ b x2 y2
But + = 1 or y ¢2 = 2 (a 2 - x ¢2 ) ...(ii) and the smallest value of the expression + is
a2 b2 a
4 9
Value of y ¢2 from Eq. (ii), putting in Eq. (i), we get
(x - 4)2 y 2
2 Sol. (8) Parametric coordinates on + = 1 are
b 2 4 9
(a - x ¢2 ) {a 2h + (b 2 - a 2 ) x ¢ } 2 = b 4k 2x ¢2
a2 ( 4 + 2 cos q, 3 sin q)
2
b 2 x2 y 2
Þ (a - x ¢2 ){a 4h 2 + (b 2 - a 2 ) 2 x ¢2 + 2a 2hx ¢(b 2 - a 2 )} Now, let E= +
a2 4 9
= b 4 k 2 x ¢2 ( 4 + 2 cos q) 2 (3 sin q) 2
= +
Arranging above as a fourth degree equation in x ¢, we get 4 9
Þ - (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 x ¢4 + 2ha 2(a 2 - b 2 ) x ¢3 + x ¢2 (... ) = (2 + cos q) 2 + sin 2 q

- 2a 4h(a 2 - b 2 ) x ¢ + a 6h 2 = 0 = 4 + 4 cos q + cos2 q + sin 2 q

above equation being of fourth degree in x ¢, therefore roots of = 5 + 4 cos q

the above equation are x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 , then \ E max = 5 + 4(1 ) = 9 (Q - 1 £ cos q £ 1 )
2 2 2 2
2ha (a - b ) 2ha and E min = 5 + 4 ( -1 ) = 1
( x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 ) = - = …(iii)
- (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 (a 2 - b 2 ) Hence, E max - E min = 9 - 1 = 8
510 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n This section contains only one example. This example \Locus of the pair of perpendicular tangents to the ellipse
has four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I x2 y 2
and four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any + =1
a2 b2
given statement in Column I can have correct matching
\ Required locus is
with one or more statement(s) given in Column II.
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2 = 8 + `4 = 12
l Ex. 24 Match the following Þ r 2 = 12
Column I Column II (B)Q Major axis on the line y = 2 and minor axis on the line
x = -1
A. ì (p) 3
ï ax , x < 2
\ Centre of ellipse is ( - 1, 2 )
ï
Let f ( x ) = í 8, x = 2 Þ h = - 1, k = 2
ïb ( x 2 - b 2 ) Also, 2a = 10 and 2b = 4
ï ,x >2
î (x - 2 ) \ M = a 2 = 25
If f is continuous at x = 2, then the locus of the
pair of perpendicular tangents to the ellipse
and N =b2 = 4
x2 y2 Now, h + k + M + N = - 1 + 2 + 25 + 4 = 30
+ = 1 is x 2 + y 2 = r 2 , then r 2 is divisible by
a2 b2 (C) Here, a = 5, b = 4
( x - h ) 2 (y - k ) 2 (q) 4 Q b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 ) Þ 16 = 25 (1 - e 2 )
B. If the ellipse + = 1 has major axis
M N 3
on the line y = 2, minor-axis on the line x = - 1, \ e=
major axis has length 10 and minor axis has length 5
4. Then, h + k + M + N is divisible by Foci ( ±3, 0 )
x 2
y 2
(r) 5 Here, SA = 2 [A and A¢ are vertices]
C. If PQ is a focal chord of ellipse + = 1 , which
25 16 Also gives PS = 2
passes through S( 3 , 0 ) and PS = 2 , then length of \ P coincides with A and Q coincides with A¢
PQ is divisible by
\ PQ = 2a = 10
x2 y2 (s) 6
D. A tangent to the ellipse + = 1 having slope x2 y 2
27 48 (D) Let ( 27 cos q, 48 sin q) be a point on the ellipse + =1
æ - 4 ö cuts the x and y-axis at the points A and B 27 48
ç ÷
è 3ø \ Equation of tangent at ( 27 cos q, 48 sin q) is
respectively. If O is the origin, then area of DOAB
x cos q y sin q
is divisible by + =1
27 48
Sol. (A) ® (p, q, s); (B) ® (p, r, s); (C) ® (r); (D) ® (p, q, s) 48 cos q 4
\ slope = - × =- [given]
(A) Lt f ( x ) = Lt f ( x ) = f (2 ) 27 sin q 3
x ® 2- x ® 2+
\ tan q = 1
2-h b((2 + h ) 2 - b 2 ) p
Þ Lt a = Lt =8 Þ q=
h®0 h®0 2 + h -2 4
(2 + h ) 2 - b 2 x y
Þ a 2 = b Lt =8 \ Equation of tangent is + =1
h®0 h 54 96
at h ® 0, (2 + h ) 2 - b 2 ® 0 1
\ Area of triangle = ´ 3 6 ´ 4 6 = 36
2
\ b 2 = 4 and a 2 = 8
 Chap 06 Ellipse 511

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Ex. Nos. 25 and 26) are Assertion. Reason \ 2 3 x + y = 8 is a tangent to the ellipse, the auxiliary circle is
type examples. Each of these examples contains two x 2 + y 2 = 16.
statements.
Hence, Statement I is true and Statement II is false.
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason)
Each of these example also has four alternative choices,
only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select
l Ex. 26 Statement II The condition on a and b for which
the correct choice as given below. x2 y2
two distinct chords of the ellipse + = 2 passing
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a2 b2
a correct explanation for statement I through (a , - b ) are bisected by the line x + y = b is
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true, Statement II is a 2 + 6ab - 7b 2 > 0.
not a correct explanation for Statement I
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is flase x2 y2
Statement II Equation of chord of the ellipse + =1
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true a2 b2
whose mid-point ( x 1 , y 1 ) is T = S1
l Ex. 25 Statement I Feet of perpendiculars drawn from Sol. (a) Let ( l, b - l ) is a point on the line x + y = b, then equation
foci of an ellipse 4 x 2 + y 2 = 16 on the line 2 3 x + y = 8 lie of chord whose mid-point ( l, b - l ) is T = S1
on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 16. lx (b - l )y l2 (b - l ) 2
or 2
+ 2
-1 = 2 + -1 ...(i)
2a 2b 2a 2b 2
Statement II If perpendiculars are drawn from foci of an
ellipse to its any tangent, the feet of these perpendiculars lie (a, - b ) lies on Eq. (i), then
on director circle of the ellipse. la b(b - l ) l2 (b - l ) 2
- = 2+
Sol. (c) Simultaneously solving the equations of ellipse and the 2a 2 2b 2 2a 2b 2
given line, we get Þ l2(a 2 + b 2 ) - abl(3a + b ) + 2a 2b 2 = 0
2 2
4 x + (8 - 2 3 x ) = 16 For two distinct chords D > 0
Þ x 2 + (4 - 3x )2 = 4 Þ a 2b 2(3a + b ) 2 - 8a 2b 2(a 2 + b 2 ) > 0
Þ 4 x 2 - 8 3 x + 12 = 0 Þ a 2 + 6ab - 7b 2 > 0
or x 2 - 2 3x + 3 = 0 Hence, both Statements are true and Statement II is correct
2 explanation for Statement I.
or (x - 3 ) = 0

Subjective Type Questions

n
In this section, there are 12 subjective solved examples.
Q DPQR is equilateral.
l Ex. 27 Find the locus of the centroid of an equilateral \ Centroid of the DPQR is same as the circumcentre.
triangle inscribed in the ellipse Y
x2 y 2
+ = 1. P (α)
a2 b2
Sol. Let the vertices of the equilateral triangle P , Q and R and
whose eccentric angles are a, b and g. X¢
O
X
G (h, k)
Let the centroid of DPQR be (h, k ) then Q (β) R (γ)
a
h = (cos a + cosb + cos g ) …(i)
3 Y¢
b
and k = (sin a + sin b + sin g ) …(ii) Q Circumcentre of DPQR be
3
512 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(a 2 - b 2 ) SS ¢ = 2ae Y
h= {cos a + cosb + cos g + cos( a + b + g )}
4a 2
Þ ( x1 - x 2 ) + (y1 - y 2 ) = 4a e 2 2 2

ì Concyclic pointsü x2
í Coro : 2 ý Þ( x1 + x 2 ) 2 - 4 x1x 2 + (y1 + y 2 ) 2 S'
î þ
C
y2
(b 2 - a 2 ) x1 (h , k )
k= {sin a + sin b + sin g - sin( a + b + g )} - 4y1y 2 = 4 (a 2 - b 2 ) B S
4b y1
Þ
Using Eqs. (i) and (ii), then X
(2h ) 2 + (2k ) 2 - 4 ( x1x 2 + y1y 2 ) O A
æ 4a 3 ö h(a 2 + 3b 2 )
cos ( a + b + g ) = h ç 2 2
- ÷= …(iii) = 4 (a 2 - b 2 ) ...(i)
èa -b a ø a(a 2 - b 2 )
Since, the ellipse always slides between the two fixed lines OX
(3a 2 + b 2 )k
and sin( a + b + g ) = …(iv) and OY , they are always tangents to it. Therefore y1, y 2 and
b(a 2 - b 2 )
x1, x 2 are perpendicular distances of the foci from their
Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
tangents whose product are always b 2.
(a 2 + 3b 2 ) 2 2 (3a 2 + b 2 ) 2 2
\ I= 2 2 h + 2 2 k Hence, x1x 2 = y1y 2 = 6 2
a (a - b 2 ) 2 b (a - b 2 ) 2
Þ Eq. (i) becomes
Hence, locus of (h, k ) is
2 2 2
(a + 3b ) 2 (3a + b ) 2 2 2 2 4h 2 + 4k 2 - 8b 2 = 4 (a 2 - b 2 )
x + y = (a 2 - b 2 ) 2.
a2 b2 Þ h2 + k 2 = a 2 + b 2
\ Locus of the centre (h, k ) is the circle
x2 y2
l Ex. 28 If the normals to + = 1 at the ends of the x2 + y 2 =a2 + b2
2 2
a b
chords lx + my =1 and l ¢ x + m ¢ y =1 l Ex. 30 Triangles are formed by pairs of tangents drawn
be concurrent; show that a 2 ll ¢ = b 2 mm ¢ = -1. from any point on the ellipse a 2 x 2 + b 2 y 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 to
Sol. Let these normals meet in (h, k ), then their feet lie on the x2 y2
curve the ellipse + = 1, and the chord of contact. Show that
a2 b2
b 2x(k - y ) + a 2y ( x - h ) = 0
the orthocentre of each such triangles lies on the ellipse.
Þ (a 2 - b 2 ) xy + b 2kx - a 2hy = 0 x2 y 2
Sol. Let the coordinates of P and Q on the ellipse + = 1 are
\ The locus passes through the points where the lines a2 b2
lx + my - 1 = 0 and l ¢ x + m ¢y - 1 = 0 P º (a cos a, b sin a ) and Q = (a cosb, b sin b )
meet the given ellipse, Equation of tangents at P and Q are
x y
æ x2 y 2 ö cos a + sin a = 1 ...(i)
ç 2 + 2 - 1 ÷ - l (lx + my - 1 ) (l ¢ x + m ¢y - 1 ) a b
èa b ø x y
and cosb + sin b = 1 ...(ii)
º (a 2 - b 2 ) xy + b 2kx - a 2hy a b
Comparing the co-efficients of x 2, y 2 and constant terms.
α)
1 1 P(
2
- lll ¢ = 0, 2 - lmm ¢ = 0, - 1 - l = 0
a b
R
1 1
\ 2
+ ll ¢ = 0 and + mm ¢ = 0 (Q l = - 1 ) Q (β)
a b2
x2+ y2 = 1
\ a 2ll ¢ = b 2 mm ¢ = - 1 a2 b2
a2x2 + b2y2 = (a2+b2)2
l Ex. 29 An ellipse slides between two straight lines at
right angles to each other. Show that the locus of its centre is Point of intersection of Eqs. (i) and (ii) are
a circle. ì æ a + bö æ a + bö ü
Sol. Let the length of major and minor axes of an ellipse are 2a ïï cos çè 2 ÷ø sin çè 2 ÷ø ïï
and 2b and if the centre of the ellipse be C (h, k ) R ía ,b ý
ï cos æç a - b ö÷ cos æç a - b ö÷ ï
If S ( x1, y1 ) and S ¢( x 2, y 2 ) be two foci of the ellipse, then ïî è 2 ø è 2 ø ïþ
 Chap 06 Ellipse 513

This point R lies on the ellipse x2 y 2

If it touches + =1
a 2x 2 + b 2y 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 a2 b2
then a 2l 2 + b 2m 2 = n 2 [from corollary]
æ a + bö 2 æ a + bö
Þ a 4 cos2 ç 4
÷ + b sin ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø a 2x12 b 2y12
Þ + =1
2 æ a -bö
2 2 2
a 2 (a + b ) 2 b 2 (a + b ) 2
= (a + b ) cos ç ÷ ...(iii)
è 2 ø Þ x12 + y12 = (a + b ) 2
The equation of the line of perpendicular from Q on the Locus of T ( x1, y1 ) is x 2 + y 2 = (a + b ) 2
tangent at P is
a sin a ( x - a cosb ) - b cos a (y - b sin b ) = 0 ...(iv) = a (a + b ) + b (a + b )
Similarly the equation to other perpendicular will be which is the director circle of (ii).
Hence, PT and TQ are intersect at right angle.
a sin b ( x - a cosb ) - b cosb (y - b sin a ) = 0 ...(v)
On solving Eqs. (iv) and (v), we get
x2 y2
cosç
æ a + bö æ a + bö
sin ç
l Ex. 32 From any point on the conic + = 4,
÷ ÷ a2 b2
a3 è 2 ø b3 è 2 ø
x= 2 × and y = ×
a + b 2 cos æ a - b ö a 2 + b 2 cos æ a - b ö x2 y2
ç
è 2 ø
÷ ç
è 2 ø
÷ tangents are drawn to the conic +
= 1. Prove that the
a2 b2
Since, this orthocentre lies on ellipse normals at the points of contact meet on the conic
x2 y 2 1
+ =1 a 2 x 2 + b 2 y 2 = (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 .
a2 b2 4
æ a + bö 2 æ a + bö Sol. Equations of concentric ellipses are
then, a 4 cos2 ç 4
÷ + b sin ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
x2 y 2
æ a -bö + =4 ...(i)
2
= (a + b ) cos ç 2 2
÷
2
...(vi) a2 b2
è 2 ø
which is true by Eq. (iii). x2 y 2
+ =1 ...(ii)
Hence, the orthocentre of the triangle lies on the ellipse. a2 b2
Y
l Ex. 31 Show that the tangents drawn at those points of
x2 y2 P (α
) (i)
the ellipse + = (a + b ), where it is cut by any tangent
a b R
X′ (h, k) C X
A (ii)
x2 y2 Q (β)
to + = 1, intersect at right angles.
a2 b2
Sol. The given ellipses, are Y′
Let points P (a cos a, b sin a ) and Q (a cosb, b sin b ) on the
x2 y 2
+ =1 ...(i) ellipse (ii). Equation of tangents at P and Q are
a2 b2 x y
cos a + sin a = 1 ...(iii)
x2 y2 a b
+ =1 ...(ii)
a (a + b ) b (a + b ) x y
Y
and cosb + sin b = 1 ...(iv)
a b
P Point of intersection of Eqs. (iii) and (iv) is
(ii) T (x1, y1)
(i) ì æ a + bö æ a + böü
M
X′ X ïï a cos çè 2 ÷ø b sin çè 2 ÷ø ïï
C Aí ,
Q ý
ï cos æç a - b ö÷ cos æç a - b ö÷ ï
ïî è 2 ø è 2 ø ïþ

Y′ this point A satisfy Eq.(i)

Chord of contact of ( x1, y1 ) w.r.t ellipse (ii) is æ a + bö 2 æ a + bö
cos2 ç ÷ sin ç ÷
xx1 yy1 è 2 ø è 2 ø
+ =1 ...(iii) \ + =4
æ a -bö 2æ a - bö
a (a + b ) b (a + b ) cos2 ç ÷ cos ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
or lx + my = n (say)
514 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

æ a -bö 1 Let the coordinates of P are (a cos f, b sin f)

Þ 1 = 4 cos2 ç ÷,
è 2 ø 2 P (a cos φ, b sin φ)
= 1 + cos ( a - b )
1

φ)
\ cos ( a - b ) = - ...(v)

a (1
co s
2

–e
+e
Equations of normals PR and QR are

cos
a (1
ax sec a - by cosec a = a 2 - b 2 I (x, y)

φ)
and ax sec b - by cosec b = (a 2 - b 2 ) 2ae
S' S
or ax sin a - by cos a = (a 2 - b 2 ) sin a cos a ...(vi) (–ae, 0) (ae, 0)
ax sin b - by cosb = (a 2 - b 2 ) sin b cosb ...(vii) By hypothesis,
Multiplying Eq. (vi) by cosb and (vii) by cos a and subtracting, b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 ) and S (ae, 0 ), S ¢ ( -ae, 0 )
we get \ SP = focal distance of the point P
ax sin ( a - b ) = (a 2 - b 2 ) cos a cosb (sin a - sin b ) = a - ae cos f and S ¢ P = a + ae cos f
æ a + bö æ a -bö Also SS ¢ = 2ae
cos a cosb × 2 cos ç ÷ sin ç ÷
ax è 2 ø è 2 ø If ( x, y ) be the incentre of the DPSS ¢, then
=
a2 -b2 æ a -bö æ a -bö (2ae ) a cos f + a (1 - e cos f ) ( -ae ) + 1 (1 + e cos f ) ae
2 sin ç ÷ cos ç ÷ \ x=
è 2 ø è 2 ø 2ae + a (1 - e cos f ) + a (1 + e cos f )
æ a + bö x = ae cos f …(i)
cos a cosb cos ç ÷
è 2 ø 2ae (b sin f ) + a (1 + e cos f ) × 0 + a (1 - e cos f ) × 0
= and y= ,
æ a -bö 2ae + a (1 - e cos f) + a (1 + e cos f )
cos ç ÷
è 2 ø
eb sin f
æ a + bö Þ y= ...(ii)
= ± 2 cos a cos b cosç ÷ [From (v)] (e + 1 )
è 2 ø
Eliminating f from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
æ a + bö
= ± cos ç ÷ [cos ( a + b ) + cos ( a - b )] x2 y2
è 2 ø 2 2
+ 2
=1
ae é be ù
ax æ a + bö ì 1ü ê ú
2 2
= ± cos ç ÷ í cos ( a + b ) - ý [Using (v)] ëe + 1û
a -b è 2 ø î 2þ
2 which represents an ellipse.
a 2x 2 æ a + bö é 1ù
Þ = cos2 ç ÷ cos ( a + b ) - ú Let e1 be its eccentricity.
(a - b 2 ) 2
2 è 2 ø êë 2û
b 2e 2 b2
2 2 2 \ 2
= a 2e 2 (1 - e12 ) Þ e12 = 1 - 2
by æ a + bö é 1ù (e + 1 ) a (e + 1 ) 2
Similarly, = sin 2 ç ÷ cos ( a + b ) + ú
(a 2 - b 2 ) 2 è 2 ø êë 2û
1 -e2 1 -e 2e æ 2e ö
=1 - =1 - = Þ e1 = ç ÷
a 2x 2 b 2y 2 (e + 1 ) 2 1+e 1+e è1 + e ø
\ +
(a 2 - b 2 ) 2 (a 2 - b 2 ) 2
1
= cos2 ( a + b ) +- cos2 ( a + b )
l Ex. 34 Prove that the eccentricity of the ellipse
4 x2 y2 e 2 sin 2q
+ = 1 is given by 2 cot w =
Hence, required locus is 2 2
a b (1 - e 2 )
1
a 2x 2 + b 2y 2 = (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 where, w is one of the angles between the normals at the
4
p
points whose eccentric angles are q and + q.
l Ex. 33 A variable point P on an ellipse of eccentricity e , is 2
p
Sol. The equation of the normals at two given points q and +q
joined to its foci S, S ¢ prove that the locus of the incentre of are 2
æ 2e ö ax sec q - by cosec q = a 2 - b 2 ...(i)
the triangle PSS¢ is an ellipse whose eccentricity is ç ÷.
è1 + e ø æp ö æp ö
and ax sec ç + q÷ - by cosec ç + q÷ = a 2 - b 2 ...(ii)
Sol. Let the given ellipse be è2 ø è2 ø

x2 y 2 a a
+ =1 their slopes are m1 = tan q and m2 = - cot q
a2 b2 b b
 Chap 06 Ellipse 515

a æb ö
- (cot q + tan q) \ ( Area of DPQR ) = ç ÷ Area of ( DP1Q1R1 )
m - m1 b 2 ab èa ø
\ tan w = 2 = = 2
1 + m2m1 æ a2 ö (a - b 2 ) sin 2 q \Area of DPQR is the greatest when area of DP1Q1R1 be the
ç1 - 2 ÷
è b ø greatest and hence DP1Q1R1 must be equilateral
2p
(a 2 - b 2 ) sin 2 q a 2e 2 \ a -b =b - g = g - a =
Þ 2 cot w = = sin 2 q 3
ab a ×a 1 - e2 \ The eccentric angles of P , Q, R will be
2 cot w e2
\ = 2p 4p
sin 2 q a, a + ,a+
(1 - e 2 ) 3 3
l Ex. 35 Show that the area of the triangle inscribed in an l Ex. 36 Let ABC be an equilateral triangle inscribed in
ellipse is
the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 suppose perpendiculars form A, B, C
é æb - g ö æg -aö æ a - b öù
ê 2ab sin çè 2 ÷ø sin çè 2 ÷ø sin çè 2 ÷ø ú , to the major axis of the ellipse
ë û x2 y2
where a, b, g are the eccentric angles of the vertices and + =1 (a > b )
a2 b2
hence find the condition that the area of a triangle inscribed
meet the ellipse respectively at P , Q , R so that P , Q , R lie on
in an ellipse may be maximum.
the same side of the major axis as A, B, C respectively. Prove
Sol. The vertices of the triangle PQR are
that the normal to the ellipse drawn at the points P , Q and R
P º (a cos a, b sin a ) are concurrent.
Q º (a cosb, b sin b ) Sol. Equation of normal at P (a cos q, b sin q) is
R º (a cos g, b sin g )
Y ax sec q - by cosec q = (a 2 - b 2 )
1
P (α
) Q (β ) or ax sin q - by cos q = (a 2 - b 2 ) sin 2 q …(i)
2
Y
X′ X

A (θ)
R (γ)

Y′
a cos a b sin a 1 cos a sin a 1
(θ + 2π3)B 2π/3 P
1 ab Q θ
\ Area of DPQR = a cosb b sin b 1 = cosb sin b 1 X′
O
X
2 a cos g b sin g 1 2 cos g sin g 1 2π/3 R
ab
= [sin ( g - b ) + sin ( a - g ) + sin (b - a )]
2
ab ì æ a -bö æ 2g - a - b ö æ a -bö æ a - b öü C (θ +4π
3 )
= í2 sin ç ÷ cos ç ÷ - 2 sin ç ÷ cos ç ÷
2 î è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 øýþ
Y′
æ a -bö é æ 2g - a - b ö æ a -böù Similarly, the other normals
= ab sin ç ÷ cos ç ÷ - cos ç ÷
è 2 ø êë è 2 ø è 2 ø úû
æ 2p ö æ 2p ö
æ a -bö æ g -bö æa-gö ax sin ç q + ÷ - by cos ç q + ÷
= 2ab sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ è 3 ø è 3 ø
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø
æ a -bö æb - g ö æ g - aö 1 æ 4p ö
\ Area of D PQR = 2ab sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ ...(i) = (a 2 - b 2 ) sin ç2 q + ÷ ...(ii)
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø 2 è 3 ø
If P1, Q1, R1 be the points upon the auxiliary circle æ 4p ö æ 4p ö
corresponding to points P , Q, R, then and ax sin ç q + ÷ - by cos ç q + ÷
è 3 ø è 3 ø
æ a -bö æb - g ö æ g - aö
Area of DP1Q1R1 = 2a 2 sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ sin ç ÷ 1 æ 8p ö
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø = (a 2 - b 2 ) sin ç2 q + ÷ ...(iii)
2 è 3 ø
{taking b = a in Eq. (i)}
Area of DPQR b æ 4p ö æ 2p ö æ 4p ö æ 2p ö
\ = Q sin ç q + ÷ = sin ç q - ÷ , cos ç q + ÷ = cos ç q - ÷
Area of DP1Q1R1 a è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø
æ 8p ö æ 4p ö
and sin ç2 q + ÷ = sin ç2 q - ÷
è 3 ø è 3 ø
516 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Further the three normals are concurrent, then Þ 1 - e 2 - e ¢2 = - e 2e ¢2 cos2 q

e 2 + e ¢2 - 1
sin q cos q sin 2 q \ cos q =
æ 2p ö æ 2p ö æ 4p ö ee ¢
sin ç q + ÷ cos ç q + ÷ sin ç2 q + ÷ =0 æ (e 2 + e ¢2 - 1 ö
è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø
2p ö 2p ö 8p ö \ q = cos-1 ç ÷
æ æ æ ç ee ¢ ÷
sin ç q - ÷ cos ç q - ÷ sin ç2 q + ÷ è ø
è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø
Applying R2 ® R2 + R3 , then l Ex. 38 If the normals at the four points ( x 1 , y 1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ),
x2 y2
( x 3 , y 3 ) and ( x 4 , y 4 ) on the ellipse + = 1 are
sin q cos q sin 2 q a2 b2
2p 2p 2p
LHS = 2 sin q cos 2 cos q cos 2 sin (2 q + 2 p ) cos concurrent. Prove that
3 3 3 æ1 1 1 1 ö
æ 2p ö æ 2p ö æ 8p ö (x1 + x 2 + x3 + x 4 ) ç + + + ÷ =4
sin ç q - ÷ cos ç q - ÷ sin ç2 q + ÷ è x1 x 2 x3 x 4 ø
è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø
or ( S cos a ) ( S sec a ) = 4
sin q cos q sin 2 q where, a, b, g, d are the eccentric angles of the points.
= - sin q cos q sin2 q =0
æ 2p ö æ 2p ö æ 8p ö Sol. Let point of concurrent is (h, k ) .
sin ç q - ÷ cos ç q - ÷ sin ç2 q + ÷
è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø Equation of normal at ( x ¢, y ¢ ) is
(QR1 = R2 )
x - x ¢ y1 - y ¢
=
x ¢/a 2 y ¢/b 2
l Ex. 37 If two concentric ellipses be such that the foci of
one be on the other and if e and e¢ be their eccentricities. It is passes through (h, k ) then
Prove that the angle between their axes is y ¢2 {a 2 (h - x ¢ ) + b 2x ¢ } 2 = b 4k 2x ¢2 ...(i)
2 2 2
ì (e 2 + e ¢ 2 - 1) ü x¢ y ¢ b
+ 2 = 1 or y ¢2 = 2 (a 2 - x ¢2 )
ï ï But ...(ii)
cos -1 í ý a 2
b a
ïî ee ¢ ïþ Values of y ¢2 from Eq. (ii), putting in Eq. (i) we get
Sol. Let S and S ¢ be the foci of one ellipse and H and H ¢ be b2 2
the other, C being their common centre. Then, SHS ¢ H ¢ is (a - x ¢2 ){a 2h + (b 2 - a 2 ) x ¢ } 2 = b 4k 2x ¢2
a2
a parallelogram and since
b2 2
SH + S ¢ H = HS ¢ + H ¢S ¢ = 2a Þ (a - x ¢2 ) {a 4h 2 + (b 2 - a 2 ) 2 x ¢2 + 2a 2hx ¢ (b 2 - a 2 )} = b 4k 2x ¢2
K a2
Arranging above as a fourth degree equation in x ¢, we get
H Þ - (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 x ¢4 + 2ha 2 (a 2 - b 2 ) x ¢3 + x ¢2 (...)
S' θ - 2a 4h (a 2 - b 2 ) x ¢ + a 6h 2 = 0
A′ C S A
above equation being of fourth degree in x ¢, therefore roots of
H′ the above equation are x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 then
2ha 2 (a 2 - b 2 ) 2ha 2
K′ ( x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 ) = -
2 2 2
= 2 ...(iii)
- (a - b ) (a - b 2 )
Since, the sum of the focal distances of any point on an ellipse
æ1 1 1 1 ö Sx1x 2x 3
is equal to its major axis which is 2a. ç + + + ÷=
è x1 x 2 x 3 x 4 ø x1 × x 2 × x 3 × x 4
Then CS = ae , CH = ae ¢
Let q be the angle between their axes. 2a 4h (a 2 - b 2 )
then SH 2 = a 2e 2 + a 2e ¢2 - 2a 2ee ¢cos q - (a 2 - b 2 ) 2 2 (a 2 - b 2 )
= = …(iv)
a 6h 2 a 2h
HS ¢2 = a 2e 2 + a 2e ¢2 + 2a 2ee ¢ cos q 2 2 2
- (a - b )
Now, 2a = SH + S ¢ H
Multiplying Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
Squaring both sides, then
2 2 2 æ1 1 1 1 ö
4a = (SH ) + (S ¢ H ) + 2 (SH ) × (S ¢ H ) ( x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 ) ç + + + ÷ =4
è x1 x 2 x 3 x 4 ø
Þ 4a 2 = 2a 2 (e 2 + e ¢2 ) + 2 (a 2e 2 + a 2e ¢2 ) 2 - 4a 4e 2e ¢2 cos2 q
Replacing x1 by a cos a, x 2 by a cosb, …… etc, then, we get the
Þ (2 - e 2 - e ¢2 ) 2 = (e 2 + e ¢2 ) 2 - 4e 2e ¢2 cos2 q second form
i.e. S cos a S sec a = 4.
Þ 4 + (e 2 + e ¢2 ) 2 - 4 (e 2 + e ¢2 ) = (e 2 + e ¢2 ) 2 - 4e 2e ¢2 cos2 q
#L Ellipse Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 30 multiple choice questions.
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of 7. Consider the particle travelling clockwise on the
which ONLY ONE is correct. x2 y2
elliptical path + = 1. The particle leaves the
1. Given f is increasing, the equation 100 25
orbit at the point ( − 8, 3 ) and travels in a straight line
x2 y2
+ = 1 represents an ellipse with X-axis tangent to the ellipse, then the point will the particle
f ( 2a ) f (a 2 − 3 ) cross the Y -axis is
as major axis if  25  7
(a) 0, −  (b) 0, 
(a) [−1, 3] (b) [1, 3 ] (c) ( −1, 3 ) (d) (0, 5)  3  3
x2 y2  25
2. If + represents an ellipse with (c) 0,  (d) (0, 9)
f ( 4a ) f (a 2 − 5 )  3

major axis as Y -axis and f is a decreasing fucntion, x2 y2

8. C is the centre of the ellipse + = 1 andA and B
then 16 9
(a) a ∈ ( − ∞, 1) (b) a ∈ (5, ∞ ) (c) a ∈(1, 4 ) (d) a ∈ ( −1, 5) are two points on the ellipse such that ∠ACB = 90 °,
3. The curve represented by the equation 1 1
then + =
x2 y2 (CA ) 2 (CB ) 2
+ = 1 is
sin 2 − cos 3 sin 3 − cos 2 7 12
(a) (b)
(a) an ellipse with foci on X -axis 12 7
(b) an ellipse with foci on Y -axis 25 144
(c) (d)
(c) a hyperbola with foci on X -axis 144 25
(d) a hyperbola with foci on Y -axis
9. Let (α, β) be a point from which two perpendicular
4. The minimum distance of the centre of the ellipse tangents can be drawn to the ellipse 4 x 2 + 5y 2 = 20. If
x2 y2
+ = 1 from the chord of contact of mutually F = 4α + 3β, then
16 9 (a) − 15 ≤ F ≤ 15 (b) F ≥ 0
perpendicular tangents of the ellipse is (c) − 5 ≤ F ≤ 20 (d) F ≤ − 5 5 or F ≥ 5 5
144 16 9
(a) (b) (c) (d) None of 10. If a = [t 2 − 3t + 4 ] and b = [3 + 5t ], where[⋅] denotes
5 5 5
these the greatest integer function, then the latusrectum of
x2 y2 x2 y2 3
5. P and Q are the foci of the ellipse + = 1 and B is the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 at t = is
a2 b2 a b 2
an end of the minor axis. If PBQ, is an equilateral (a) 20 (b) 10
triangle, then the eccentricity of the ellipse is 1 1
(c) (d)
1 1 5 10
(a) (b)
2 3 11. If the line x + 2y + 4 = 0 cutting the ellipse
1 3 x2 y2
(c) (d) + = 1 in points whose eccentric angles are 30°
2 2
a2 b2
5 and 60° subtends a right angle at the orgin, then its
6. A circle of radius is concentric with the ellipse
2 2
2 equation is
x y x2 y2
+ = 1, then the acute angle made by the (a) + =1
16 9 8 4
common tangent with the line 3 x − y + 6 = 0 is x2 y2
π π (b) + =1
(a) (b) 16 4
3 4 x2 y2
π π (c) + =1
(c) (d) 4 16
6 12 (d) None of the above
518 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

12. An arc of a bridge is semi-elliptical with major axis 18. From a point on the axis of x common tangents are
horizontal. If the length of the base is 9 m and the drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4 x and the ellipse
highest part of the bridge is 3 m from the horizontal; x2 y2
the best approximation of the height of the arch 2 m + = 1 (a > b > 0 ). If these tangents form an
a2 b2
from the centre of the base is
11 8
equilateral triangle with their chord of contact w.r.t
(a) m (b) m parabola, then set of exhaustive values of a is
4 3
 3
7 (a) (0, 3 ) (b) 0, 
(c) m (d) 2m  2
2
3   3
x2 y2 (c) , 3 (d) 1, 
13. A tangent to the ellipse + = 1 at any point P 2   2
25 16
meet the line x = 0 at a point Q. Let R be the image of 19. If circumcentre of an equilateral triangle inscribed in
Q in the line y = x , then circle whose extremities of a x2 y2
+ = 1, with vertices having eccentric angle
diameter are Q and R passes through a fixed point. a2 b2
The fixed point is α, β, γ respectively is (h, k ), then Σ cos (α − β) =
(a) (3, 0) (b) ( 4, 0) 9h 2 9k 2 3
(a) + 2 + (b) 9h 2 − 9k 2 + a 2b 2
(c) (5, 0) (d) (0, 0) a2 b 2
2
9h 9k 2 9h 2 9k 2 3
14. If tangents PQ and PR are drawn from a point on the (c) 2 + 2 + 3 (b) + −
a b 2a 2 2b 2 2
x2 y2
circle x 2 + y 2 = 25 to the ellipse + = 1 , (b < 4 ), 20. A parabola is drawn with focus at one of the foci of
16 b 2
x2 y2
so that the fourth vertex S of parallelogram PQSR lies the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, where a > b and directrix
on the circumcircle of triangle PQR, then the a b
eccentricity of the ellipse is passing through the other focus and perpendicular to
5 5 the major axis of the ellipse. If the latusrectum of the
(a) (b)
4 3 ellipse and that of the parabola are some, then the
7 7 eccentricity of the ellipse is
(c) (d) (a) 2 − 1 (b) 3 − 1
4 3
(c) 2 2 − 2 (d) 3 3 − 5
15. The equation of the chord of contact of the pair of
tangents drawn to the ellipse 4 x 2 + 9y 2 = 36 from the 21. If the maximum distance of any point on the ellipse
point (m, n ), where m ⋅ n = m + n, m, n being non-zero x 2 + 2y 2 + 2 xy = 1 from its center is r, then r is equal
positive integers is to
(a) 2x + 9y = 18 (b) 2x + 2y = 1 6 +1 5 +1
(c) 4 x + 9y = 18 (d) 4 x + 2y = 1 (a) (b)
2 2
16. x − 2y + 4 = 0 is a common tangent to y 2 = 4 x and 3 +1 2+2
(c) (d)
x2 y2 2 2
+ = 1. Then, the value of b and the other
4 b2 22. The length of the common chord of the ellipse
common tangent are given by ( x −1) 2 (y − 2 ) 2
+ = 1 and the circle
(a) b = 3 ; x + 2y + 4 = 0 9 4
(b) b = 3; x + 2y + 4 = 0 ( x − 1) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 1 is
(c) b = 3; x + 2y − 4 = 0 (a) zero (b) one
(d) b = 3 , x − 2y − 4 = 0 (c) three (d) eight
23. The eccentricity of the ellipse ax 2 + by 2 + 2 fx
17. The point , at shortest distance from the line x + y = 7
+ 2 gy + c = 0 if axis of ellipse parallel to X-axis is
and lying on an ellipse x 2 + 2y 2 = 6, has coordinates
b − a a + b 
(a) ( 2, 2) (b) (0, 3 ) (a)   (b)  
 b   b 
 1
(c) ( 2, 1) (d)  5,  a + b 
 2 (c)   (d) None of these
 a 
 Chap 06 Ellipse 519

24. A circle has the same center as an ellipse and passes 27. An ellipse slides between two perpendicular straight
through the foci F1 and F 2 of the ellipse, such that lines.
two curves intersect at four points. Let P be any one Then, the locus of its centre is a/an
of their point of intersection. If the major axis of the (a) parabola (b) ellipse
ellipse is 17 and the area of triangle PF1F 2 is 30, then (c) hyperbola (d) circle
the distance between the foci is x2 y2
(a) 13 (b) 11 28. The length of the chord of the ellipse + = 1,
25 16
(c) 9 (d) 7 1 2
where mid-point is  ,  is
25. The area of the rectangle formed by the 2 3
perpendicular from the centre of the standard ellipse 1 8161
to the tangent and normal at its point whose (a) (b)
10 10
π
eccentric angle is , is 8061
4 (c) (d) None of these
10
(a − b ) ab
2 2
(a) 29. The equation of the locus of the middle point of the
a2 + b 2
(a 2 − b 2 ) x2 y2
(b) 2 portion of the tangent to the ellipse + =1
(a + b 2 ) ab 16 9
(a 2 + b 2 ) ab include between the coordinate axes is the curve
(c) (a) 9x 2 + 16y 2 = 4 x 2y 2 (b) 16 x 2 + 9y 2 = 4 x 2y 2
(a 2 − b 2 )
(c) 3 x 2 + 4y 2 = 4 x 2y 2 (d) 9x 2 + 16y 2 = x 2y 2
(a 2 + b 2 )
(d) 2
(a − b 2 ) ab x2 y2
30. The tangent at the point ‘θ’ on the ellipse + =1
26. An ellipse is inscribed in a circle and a point within a2 b2
the circle is chosen at random. If the probability that meets the auxilliary circle in two points which
this point lies outside the ellipse is 2/3, then the subtends a right angle at the centre, then the
eccentricity of the ellipse is eccentricity ‘e’ of the ellipse is given by the equation
(a) e 2 (1 + cos 2 θ ) = 1
2 2 5
(a) (b) (b) e 2 (cosec2 θ + 1) = 1
3 3
8 2 (c) e 2 (1 + sin2 θ ) = 1
(c) (d) (d) e 2 (1 + tan2 θ ) = 1
9 3

#L Ellipse Exercise 2 :
More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n
This section contains 15 multiple choice questions. 33. If the equation of family of ellipse is
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of π π
which MORE THAN ONE may be correct. x 2 sec 2 θ + y 2 cosec 2 θ = 1, where < θ < , then the
4 2
31. The locus extremities of the latusrectum of the family locus of extremities of the latusrectum is
of ellipse b 2 x 2 + y 2 = a 2b 2 is (a) 2y 2 (1 + x 2 ) = (1 − x 2 )2 (b) 2x 2 (1 + y 2 ) = (1 − y 2 )2
(a) x 2 − ay = a 2 (b) x 2 − ay = b 2 (c) 2y (1 − x 2 ) = 1 + x 2 (d) 2y 2 (1 + x 2 ) = 1 + y 4 − 2x 2
(c) x 2 + ay = a 2 (d) x 2 + ay = b 2
34. Let F1 , F 2 be two focii of the ellipse and PT and PN be
2 2
x y the tangent and the normal respectively to the ellipse
32. The distance of a point on the ellipse + =1
6 2 at point P. Then.
from the centre is 2, then the eccentric angles are (a) PN bisects ∠F1PF 2
π 3π 5π 7π (b) PT bisects ∠F1PF 2
(a) (b) (c) (d) (c) PT bisects angle (180° − ∠F1PF 2 )
4 4 4 4
(d) None of the above
520 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y2 (a) x − 2y = 0 (b) 2x − y = 0
35. + = 1 will represent an ellipse (c) x + 2y = 0 (d) 2x + y = 0
(a 2 − a − 6 ) (a 2 − 6a + 5 )
if a lies in the interval 41. In the ellipse 25 x 2 + 9y 2 − 150 x − 90y + 225 = 0
(a) ( − ∞, − 2) (b) (1, ∞ ) 4
(a) foci are at (3, 1), (3, 9) (b) e =
(c) (3, ∞ ) (d) (5, ∞ ) 5
(c) centre is (5, 3) (d) major axis is 6
36. A latusrectum of an ellipse is a line
(a) passing through a focus 42. If the tangent to the ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 16 at the point
(b) passing through the centre P(θ ) is a normal to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 4y = 0,
(c) perpendicular to the major axis
(d) parallel to the minor axis
then θ equals
π π
(a) (b)
37. If the axes of an ellipse coincide with the coordinate 2 4
axes and the ellipse passes through the point ( 4, − 1) π
(c) 0 (d) −
and touches the line x + 4y − 10 = 0, then its equation 4
is
43. The product of eccentricties of two conics is unity,
(a) x 2 + 64y 2 = 80 (b) x 2 + 4y 2 = 20
one of them can be a/an
(c) x 2 + 20y 2 = 100 (d) x 2 + 8y 2 = 40 (a) parabola (b) ellipse
x 2
y 2 (c) hyperbola (d) circle
38. If P is a point on the ellipse + 2 = 1, whose foci
a 2
b 44. The parametric angle α, where − π < α ≤ π of the
are S and S ′. Let ∠PSS ′ = θ and ∠PS ′ S = φ, then x2 y2
(a) SP + S ′ P = 2a, if a > b (b) SP + S ′ P = 2b , if b > a point on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 at which the tangent
a b
 θ  φ 1 − e  θ  φ e − 1
(c) tan   tan   = (d) tan   tan   = drawn cuts the intercept of minimum length on the
 2  2 1 + e  2  2 e + 1
coordinate axes, is/are
39. If (5, 12 ) and (24, 7) are the focii of a conic passing b  b 
(a) tan−1   (b) − tan−1  
through the origin, then the eccentricity of conic is a a

386 386 b  b 
(a) (b) (c) π − tan−1   (d) π + tan−1  
38 12 a a
386 386
(c) (d) 45. If latusrectum of the ellipse x 2 tan 2 α + y 2 sec 2 α = 1
13 25
is 1/2, then α(0 < α < π ) is equal to
40. If a pair of variable straight lines x 2 + 4y 2 + axy = 0 (a) π / 12 (b) π / 6
(where a is a real parameter) cuts the ellipse (c) 5π / 12 (d) π / 2
x 2 + 4y 2 = 4 at two points A and B, then the locus of
the point of intersection of tangents at A and B is

#L Ellipse Exercise 3 :
Paragraph Based Questions
n
This section contains 5 paragraphs based upon each (a) (0, 0) (b) (1, 0) (c) (0, 1) (d) (1, 1)
paragraph 3 multiple choice question have to be
answered. Each of these questions has four choices (a), (b),
47. The eccentricity of the conic C is
1 1
(c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. (a) (b)
2 2
Paragraph I 2 2
(Q. Nos. 46 to 48) (c) (d)
3 5
A conic is represented by
48. The lengths of axes of conic C are
C ≡ 9x 2 + 4xy + 6 y 2 − 22x − 16 y + 9 = 0
(a) 2, 2 2 (b) 4, 2 3
46. The centre of the conic C is (c) 6, 2 5 (d) 5, 2 6
 Chap 06 Ellipse 521

Paragraph II Paragraph IV
(Q. Nos. 49 to 51) (Q. Nos. 55 to 57)
An ellipse E has its centre C( 3, 1), focus at ( 3, 6) and passing An ellipse whose distance between foci S and S ′ is 4 units is
through the point P( 7, 4 ) inscribed in the ∆ABC touching the sides AB , AC and BC at
P , Q and R, respectively. If centre of ellipse is at origin and
49. The product of the lengths of the perpendicular
major axis along X -axis, SP + S ′ P = 6.
segments from the focii on tangent at point P is
(a) 20 (b) 45 55. Equation of the ellipse is
(c) 40 (d) 90 (a) 9x 2 + 5y 2 = 45 (b) 4 x 2 + 9y 2 = 36
50. If F and F′ are the foot of perpendiculars from focii S (c) 5x 2 + 9y 2 = 45 (c) 9x 2 + 4y 2 = 36
and S′ on tangent at point P, then point of 56. If AB = BC and ∠B = π / 2, then locus of A is
intersection of lines SF ′ and S ′ F is (a) ( x 2 + y 2 − 14 )2 = 4(5x 2 + 9y 2 − 45)
 5  4
(a) 5,  (b) 3,  (b) ( x 2 + y 2 − 14 )2 = 4(5x 2 + 9y 2 − 54 )
 3  3
(c) ( x 2 + y 2 − 14 )2 = 4( 9x 2 + 5y 2 − 45)
 10  8
(c) 5,  (d) 3,  (d) ( x 2 + y 2 − 14 )2 = 4( 9x 2 + 5y 2 − 54 )
 3  3
57. If the difference of eccentric angles of P and Q is π / 3,
51. If the normal at a variable point on the ellipse (E)
then locus of A is
meets its axes in Q and R, then the locus of the
(a) 5x 2 + 9y 2 = 15 (b) 5x 2 + 9y 2 = 60
mid-point of QR is a conic with eccentricity (e1 ), then
(c) 9x 2 + 5y 2 = 14 (d) 9x 2 + 5y 2 = 144
3 5
(a) e1 = (b) e1 =
5 3 Paragraph V
3 10 (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
(c) e1 = (d) e1 =
10 3
The line 2 px + y (1− p 2 ) = 1 (| p|< 1) for different values of p,
Paragraph III touches a fixed ellipse whose axes are the coordinate axes.
(Q. Nos. 52 to 54) 58. The eccentricity of the ellipse is
x2 y2 1 1
Curves C 1 : x + y = r and C 2 : +
2 2 2
= 1 intersect at four (a) (b)
16 9 5 3
distinct points A, B, C and D. Their common tangents form a 3 2
(c) (d)
parallelogram PQRS. 2 5
2
52. If ABCD is a square, then the value of 25r is 59. The foci of the ellipse are
(a) 36 (b) 72  3   3
(c) 144 (d) 288 (a)  ± , 0 (b) 0, ± 
 2   2 
53. If PQRS is a square, then the value of 2r 2 is
(c) ( ± 3 , 0) (d) (0, ± 3 )
(a) 12 (b) 15
(c) 20 (d) 25 60. The locus of the point of intersection of perpendicular
54. If PQRS is a square, then the ratio of the area of curve tangents of ellipse is
3
C 1 to the area of circumcircle of ∆PQR is (a) x 2 + y 2 = 2 (b) x 2 + y 2 =
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 2 2
5 1
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 9 : 16 (c) x 2 + y 2 = (d) x + y =
2 2

4 2
522 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Ellipse Exercise 4 :
Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 10 questions. The answer to each 66. Number of distinct normal lines that can be drawn to
question is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 x2 y2
(both inclusive). ellipse + = 1 from the point P(0, 6 ) is n, then the
169 25
61. Two concentric ellipse be such that the foci of one be value of 2 n is
on the other and if 3/5 and 4/5 be their eccentricities. 67. If p is the length of the perpendicular from a focus
If θ be the angle between their axes, then the value of
upon the tangent at any point P of the ellipse
2(1 + sin 2 θ + sin 4 θ ) must be x2 y2
+ = 1 and r is the distance of P from the focus,
62. Rectangle ABCD has area 200 unit 2 . An ellipse with a2 b2
area 200π unit 2 , passes through A and C and has foci 2a b 2
then the value of − 2 is
at B and D. If the perimeter of the rectangle is P, then r p
the value of (P +1) is 68. An ellipse passing through the origin has its foci (3, 4)
63. Number of points on the ellipse 2 x + 5y = 100 from
2 2 and (6, 8). The length of its semi-minor axis is b, then
the value of b / 2 is
which pair of perpendicular tangents may be drawn
to the ellipse 9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 144 is 69. The maximum value of 5λ for which four normals can
x2 y2
64. The length of sides of square which can be made by be drawn to ellipse + = 1 through a point ( λ, 0 )
25 16
four perpendicular tangents to the ellipse
is
x 2 2y 2
+ = 1 is 70. An ellipse with major and minor axis 6 3 and 6
7 11
respectively, slides along the coordinate axes and
65. The length of the focal chord of the ellipse always remains confined in the first quadrant. If the
x2 y2 πλ
+ = 1 which makes an angle θ with the major length of arc described by centre of ellipse is ,
a2 b2
λab 2 6
axis is 2 , then the value of λ is then the value of λ is
a sin 2 θ + b 2 cos 2 θ
 Chap 06 Ellipse 523

#L Ellipse Exercise 5 :
Matching Type Questions
n This Section Contains 3 questions. Each question has four statements (A,B,C and D) given in Column I and four
statements (p,q,r and s) in Column II. Any given statement in Column I can have correct matching with one or more
statement (s) given in Column II.

71. Match the following

Column I Column II Column I Column II
2 2
(p) Natural (C) The orbit of the earth is an ellipse with (r) 5
(A) For the ellipse x + y = 1 with 1
9 4 number eccentricity with the sun at one focus
60
vertices A and A′, tangents drawn at
the major axis being approximately
the point P in the first quadrant meets
186 × 106 miles in length. If the shortest
the y − axis at Q and the chord A′ P
and longest distances of the earth from
meets the y-axis at M. If O is the
the sun are λ × 105 miles and µ × 105
origin, then OQ 2 − MQ 2 is a
miles, then µ − (λ + 1) is divisible by
(B) If y = x and 3 y + 2x = 0 are the (q) Composite (D) If the mid point of a chord of the ellipse (s) 6
equations of a pair of conjugate number x 2 y2
x 2 y2 + = 1 is (0,3) and length of the
diameters of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 16 25
a b 4λ
and e be the eccentricity, then chord is , then λ is divisible by
5
4 (1 + e2 + e4 + ... + ∞ ) is a
(C) If the variable line y = kx + 2h is (r) Prime 73. Match the following
tangent to an ellipse 2x 2 + 3 y2 = 6, number Column I Column II
then the locus of P (h, k ) is a conic C
whose eccentricity is e, thus 3e2 is a (A) The minimum and maximum (p) L + G = 10
distances of a point (2,6) from
(D) If extremities of the latusrectum of (s) Perfect the ellipse
x 2 y2 number 9x 2 + 8 y2 − 36x − 16 y − 28 = 0
the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 , (a > 1) having are L and G , then
a b
positive ordinates lie on the parabola (B) The minimum and maximum (q) L + G = 6
x 2 = −2( y − 2), then a is a distances of a point (1,2) from
the ellipse
72. Match the following 4 x 2 + 9 y2 + 8x − 36 y + 4 = 0 are
L and G, then
Column I Column II
(C) The minimum and maximum (r) G − L = 8
(A) An ellipse is sliding along the cordinate (p) 3  9 12
distances of a point  , 
axes. If the foci of the ellipse are (1,1) 5 5
and (3,3) if area of the director circle of
from the ellipse
the ellipse (in square units) is π λ , then λ
4 (3x + 4 y)2 + 9(4 x − 3 y)2 = 900
is divisible by
are L and G , then
(B) If from a point P (0, λ) two normals (q) 4
(D) The minimum and maximum (s) G − L = 6
other then axes are drawn to the ellipse
distances of a point (0,4) from
x 2 y2
+ = 1, such that | λ | < p, then 4 p is the ellipse 25x 2 + 9 y2 = 225 are
25 16 L and G, then
divisible by,
524 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Ellipse Exercise 6 :
Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Q. Nos. 74 to 81) are Assertion-Reason type 77. Statement I In an ellipse the distance between
questions. Each of these qustions contains two statements : foci is always less than the sum of focal distances
Statement I (Assertion) and of any point on it.
Statement II (Reason)
Each of these questions also has four alternative choices, only Statement II If e be the eccentricity of the ellipse,
one of which is the correct answer. then 0 < e < 1.
You have to select the correct choice as given below. 78. Statement I The sum of the focal distances of a
(a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is a correct point on the ellipse 4 x 2 + 5y 2 − 16 x − 30y + 41 = 0
explanation for statement I
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is not a is 2 5.
correct explanation for statement I Statement II The equation
(c) Statement I is true, statement II is false 4 x 2 + 5y 2 − 16 x − 30y + 41 = 0 can be expressed as
(d) Statement I is false, statement II is true
4( x − 2 ) 2 + 5(y − 3 ) 2 = 20.
x2 y2
74. Let the equation of ellipse be = ) =1 79. Statement I Locus of centre of a variable circle
(a 2 + 1) (a 2 + 2 touching to circles ( x − 1) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 25 and
1 ( x − 2 ) 2 + (y − 1) 2 = 16 is an ellipse.
Statement I If eccentricity of the ellipse be , then
6
10 Statement II If a circle S 2 = 0 lies completely
length of latusrectum is . inside the circle S1 = 0, then the locus of centre of a
6 variable circle S = 0 which touches both the circles
2(a 2 + 1) is an ellipse.
Statement II Length of latusrectum = .
(a 2 + 2 ) 80. Statement I The tangent and normal at any point
P on a ellipse bisect the external and internal
75. Statement I The area of the ellipse 2 x 2 + 3y 2 = 6 is more angles between the focal distance of P.
than the area of the circle
Statement II The straight line joining the foci of
x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 4y + 4 = 0.
the ellipse subtends of a right angle at P.
Statement II The length of semi-major axis of an ellipse 81. Statement I In a ∆ABC, if base BC is fixed and
is more than the radius of the circle.
perimeter of the triangle is also fixed, then vertex
76. Statement I The equation of the director circle to the moves on an ellipse.
ellipse 4 x 2 + 9y 2 = 36 is x 2 + y 2 = 13
Statement II If sum of distances of a point P
Statement II The locus of the point of intersection of from two fixed points is constant, then locus of P
perpendicular tangents to an ellipse is called the director is an ellipse.
circle.
 Chap 06 Ellipse 525

Ellipse Exercise 7 :
Subjective Type Questions
n In this section, there are 12 subjective questions. 88. The eccentric angle of any point P measured from the
82. If three of the sides of a quadrilateral inscribed in an semi major axis CA is φ. If S be the focus nearest to A ,
ellipse are parallel respectively to three given straight and ∠ ASP = θ. Prove that
lines. Show that fourth side will also be parallel to a θ 1 + e  φ
fixed straight line. tan   =   tan  
 2 1 − e   2
83. If S and S′ are the focii of an ellipse and P any point
on the curve, show that 89. If θ is the difference of the eccentric angles of two
points on an ellipse, the tangents at which are at
 PSS ′   PS ′ S  1 − e right angles. Prove that ab sin θ = d 1d 2 , where d 1 , d 2
tan   tan  =
 2   2  1+e are the semi diameters parallel to the tangents at the
Hence, or otherwise show that the locus of the centre points and a , b are the semi-axes of the ellipse.
of the circle inscribed in the triangle PSS′ is another x2 y2
ellipse. 90. A straight line PQ touches the ellipse + = 1 and
a2 b2
x2 y2 the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 (b < r < a ) . RS is a focal chord
84. If the normal at any point P of the ellipse + =1
a2 b2 of the ellipse. If RS is parallel to PQ and meets the
meets the major and minor axes in G and g circle at points R and S. Find the length of RS.
respectively, and if CF is the perpendicular upon this 91. Let d be the perpendicular distance from the centre of
normal from the centre C of the ellipse. the ellipse to the tangent drawn at a point P on the
Show that PF ⋅ PG = b 2 ellipse. If F1 and F 2 are two foci of the ellipse. Show
that
and PF ⋅ Pg = a 2 .
 b2 
85. PQ is double ordinate of the ellipse (PF1 − PF 2 ) 2 = 4a 2 1 − 2  .
 d 
x 2 / a 2 + y 2 / b 2 = 1 and B an extremity of the minor
axis. PB and QB meet the major axis in M and N. 92. TP and TQ are tangents drawn from an external point
Show that M and N are inverse points with respect to x2 y2
the auxiliary circle of the ellipse. ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1. Show that
a b
86. Consider the family of circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 , 2 < r < 5 . If ST 2 x2 y2
in the first quadrant the common tangent to a circle (i) = 12 + 12
SP ⋅ SQ a b
of the family and the ellipse 4 x 2 + 25y 2 = 100 meets
the coordinate axes at A and B, then find the (ii) ST ⋅ S ′ T cos θ = (CT ) 2 − a 2 − b 2
equation of the locus of the mid-point of AB. where, S and S′ are the foci, C the centre and θ is the
87. Prove that the normals at the four points, where the angle between the tangents.
lines 93. If PSQ and PHR are focal chords of the ellipse
lx my x2 y2
+ =1 + = 1, where S and H are the foci. The tangents
a b a2 b2
x y at Q and R meet atT . Show that the locus of T as P
and + = −1 moves round the ellipse is
la mb
x2 y2
x2 y2 (1 + e 2 ) 2 2 + (1 − e 2 ) 2 2 = (1 + e 2 ) 2
cut the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 are concurrent. a b
a b where, e is the eccentricity of the ellipse.
526 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Ellipse Exercise 8 :
Questions Asked in Previous 13 Year’s Exams
n This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, 100. The line passing through the extermity A of the
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. major axis and extremity B of the minor axis of the
ellipse x 2 + 9y 2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the
94. The minimum area of triangle formed by the tangent
point M. Then, the area of the triangle with vertices
x2 y2
to the 2 + 2 = 1 and coordinate axes is at A, M and the origin O is [IIT-JEE 2009, 3M]
a b [IIT-JEE 2003, 3M] 31 29
a2 + b 2 (a) (b)
(a) ab sq units (b) sq units 10 10
2 21 27
(c) (d)
(a + b )2 a 2 + ab + b 2 10 10
(c) sq units (d) sq units
2 3
101. The normal at a point P on the ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 16
95. Find the equation of the common tangent in meets the X-axis at Q. If M is the mid-point of the
1st quadrant to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 16 and the ellipse line segment PQ, then the locus of M intersects the
x2 y2 latusrectum of the given ellipse at the points
+ = 1. Also find the length of the intercept of
25 4 [IIT-JEE 2009, 3M]
the tangent between the coordinate axes.  3 5 2  3 5 19 
[IIT-JEE 2005, 4M]
(a)  ± ,±  (b)  ± ,± 
 2 7  2 4
96. An ellipse has OB as semi minor axis, F and F ′ its focii  1  4 3
and the angle FBF ′ is a right angle. Then, the (c)  ±2 3 ,±  (d)  ±2 3 ,± 
 7  7 
eccentricity of the ellipse is [AIEEE 2005, 3M]
1 1 1 1 102. In a triangle ABC with fixed based BC, the vertex A
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2 4 3 moves such that
A
97. In an ellipse, the distance between its foci is 6 and cos B + cos C = 4 sin 2
2
minor axis is 8. Then, its eccentricity is
[AIEEE 2006, 4.5M] If a, b and c denote the lengths of the sides of the
3 1 triangle opposite to the angles A, B and C,
(a) (b)
5 2 respectively, then [IIT-JEE 2009, 4M]
4 1 (a) b + c = 4a
(c) (d)
5 5 (b) b + c = 2a
(c) locus of point A is an ellipse
98. Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q( x 2 , y 2 ), y 1 < 0, y 2 < 0 be the end
(d) locus of point A is a pair of straight lines
points of the latusrectum of the, ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 4.
103. The conic having parametric representation
The equations of parabolas with latusrectum PQ are
[IIT-JEE 2008, 4M] 1 − t 2  2t
x = 3  ,y = is [IIT-JEE 2009, 2M]
(a) x 2 + 2 3y = 3 + 3 (b) x 2 − 2 3y = 3 + 3 1 + t 2  1+t2
(c) x 2 + 2 3y = 3 − 3 (d) x 2 − 2 3y = 3 − 3 (a) a circle (b) a parabola
(c) an ellipse (d) a hyperbola
99. A focus of an ellipse is tat the origin. The directrix is
1 104. The ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 4 is inscribed in a rectangle
the line x = 4 and the eccentricity is . Then, the
2 aligned with the coordinate axes, which in turn is
length of the semi-major axis is [AIEEE 2008, 3M] inscribed in another ellipse that passes through the
8 2 point (4, 0). Then, the equation of the ellipse is
(a) (b) [AIEEE 2009, 4M]
3 3
4 5 (a) x 2 + 12y 2 = 16 (b) 4 x 2 + 48y 2 = 48
(c) (d)
3 3 (c) 4 x 2 + 64y 2 = 48 (d) x 2 + 16y 2 = 16
 Chap 06 Ellipse 527

Paragraph 4 3
Statement II : If the line y = mx + ,(m ≠ 0 ) is a
(Q. Nos. 105 to 107) m
Tangents are drawn from the point P( 3, 4 ) to the ellipse common tangent to the parabola y 2 = 16 3 x and the
x2 y2 ellipse 2 x 2 + y 2 = 4, then m satisfies m 2 + 2m 2 = 24
+ = 1 touching the ellipse at points A and B. [AIEEE 2012, 4M]
9 4
(a) Statement I is false, statement-II is true
105. The coordinates of A and B are (b) Statement I is true, statementII is true; statement-II
(a) (3, 0) and (0, 2) is a correct explanation for statement-I
 8 2 161  9 8 (c) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II
(b)  − ,  and  − , 
 5 15   5 5 is not a correct explanation for statement I
(d) Statement I is true, statement II is false
 8 2 161
(c)  − ,  and (0, 2)
 5 15  111. An ellipse is drawn by taking a diameter of the circle
( x −1) 2 + y 2 = 1 as its semi-minor axis and diameter
 9 8
(d) (3, 0) and  − ,  of the circle x 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 4 is semi-major axis. If the
 5 5
centre of the ellipse is at the origin and its axes are
106. The orthocenter of the triangle PAB is the coordinate axes, then the equation of the ellipse
 8  7 25 is
(a) 5,  (b)  ,  [AIEEE 2012, 4M]
 7 5 8 
(a) 4 x 2 + y 2 = 4 (b) x 2 + 4y 2 = 8
 11 8   8 7 (c) 4 x 2 + y 2 = 8 (d) x 2 + 4y 2 = 16
(c)  ,  (d)  , 
 5 5  25 5 
112. The equation of the circle passing through the foci of
107. The equation of the locus of the point whose x2 y2
distances from the point P and the line AB are equal, the ellipse + = 1, and having centre at (0, 3) is
16 9 [JEE Main 2013, 4M]
is [IIT-JEE 2010, (3+3+3)M]
(a) 9x 2 + y 2 − 6 xy − 54 x − 62y + 241 = 0 (a) x 2 + y 2 − 6y − 7 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 − 6y + 7 = 0
(b) x 2 + 9y 2 + 6 xy − 54 x + 62y − 241 = 0 (c) x 2 + y 2 − 6y − 5 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 6y + 5 = 0
(c) 9x 2 + 9y 2 − 6 xy − 54 x − 62y − 241 = 0 113. A vertical line passing through the point (h, 0)
(d) x 2 + y 2 − 2xy + 27 x + 31y − 120 = 0 x2 y2
intersects the ellipse + = 1 at the points P and
108. Equation of the ellipse whose axes are the axes of 4 9
coordinates an which passes through the point (−3, 1) Q. Let the tangents to the ellipse at P and Q meet at
2 the point R. If ∆(h) = area of the triangle PQR,∆ 1 =
and has eccentricity is [AIEEE 2011, 4M] 1 1
5 ≤ h ≤ max ∆(h) and ∆ 2 = ≤ h ≤ min ∆(h), then
2 2
(a) 5x 2 + 3y 2 − 48 = 0 (b) 3 x 2 + 5y 2 − 15 = 0
8
(c) 5x 2 + 3y 2 − 32 = 0 (d) 3 x 2 + 5y 2 − 32 = 0 ∆1 − 8 ∆ 2 = [JEE Advanced 2013, 3M]
5
x2 y2
109. The ellipse E 1 : + =1 is inscribed in a rectangle 114. The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the
9 4
centre of the ellipse x 2 + 3y 2 = 6 on any tangent to it
R whose sides are parallel to the coordinate axes.
Another ellipse E 2 passing through the point (0, 4) is [JEE Main 2014, 4M]

circumscribes the rectangle R. the eccentricity of the (a) ( x 2 + y 2 )2 = 6 x 2 + 2y 2 (b) ( x 2 + y 2 )2 = 6 x 2 − 2y 2

ellipse E 2 is [IIT-JEE 2012, 4M] (c) ( x 2 − y 2 )2 = 6 x 2 + 2y 2 (d) ( x 2 − y 2 )2 = 6 x 2 − 2y 2
2 3 115. The area (in sq units) of the quadrilateral formed by
(a) (b)
2 2 the tangents at the end points of the latus rectum to
1 3 x2 y2
(c) (d)
2 4 the ellipse + = 1 is [JEE Main 2015, 4M]
9 5
110. Statement I : An equation of a common tangent to 27
(a) (b) 27
the parabola y 2 = 16 3 x and the ellipse 2 x 2 + y 2 = 4 2
27
is y = 2 x + 2 3 (c) (d) 18
4
528 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

116. Let E 1 and E 2 be two ellipses whose centers are at the Paragraph
origin. The major axes of E 1 and E 2 lie along the X-axis (Q. Nos. 118 and 119)
and the Y -axis, respectively. Let S be the circle Let F1 ( x 1 , 0) and F2 ( x 2 , 0) for x 1 < 0 and x 2 > 0, be the foci
x 2 + (y − 1) 2 = 2. The straight line x + y = 3 touches the x2 y2
of the ellipse + = 1. Suppose a parabola having
curves, S, E 1 and E 2 at P, Q and R respectively. Suppose 9 8
2 2 vertex at the origin and focus at F2 intersects the ellipse at
that PQ = PR = . If e1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of
3 point M in the first quadrant and at point N in the fourth
E 1 and E 2 , respectively, then the correct expression(s) is quadrant.
(are) [JEE Advanced, 2015 4M] 118. The orthocentre of the triangle F1MN is
43 7  9  2  9  2 
(a) e + e =
2
1
2
2 (b) e1e 2 = (a)  − , 0 (b)  , 0 (c)  , 0 (d)  , 6 
40 2 10  10  3   10  3 
5 3
(c) |e12 − e 22 | = (d) e1e 2 = 119. If the tangents to the ellipse at M and N meet at R
8 4
and the normal to the parabola at M meets the
x2 y2 X-axis at Q, then the ratio of area of the triangle
117. Suppose that the foci of the ellipse + = 1 are ( f 1 , 0 )
9 5 MQR to area of the quadrilateral MF1NF 2 is
and ( f 2 0 ) where f 1 > 0 and f 2 > 0. Let P1 and P2 be two [JEE Advanced 2016, (3+3)M]

parabolas with a common vertex at (0, 0) and with foci at (a) 3 : 4 (b) 4 : 5 (c) 5 : 8 (d) 2 : 3
( f 1, 0 ) and ( 2 f 2 , 0 ), respectively. LetT1 be a tangent to P1 120. The eccentricity of an ellipse whose centre is at
which passes through ( 2 f 2 ,0 ) and T 2 be a tangent to P2 the origin is 1/2. If one of its directices is x = − 4,
which passes through ( f 1 , 0 ). If m1 is the slope of T1 and then the equation of the normal to it at (1, 3 / 2 ) is
 1  [JEE Main 2017, 4M]
m 2 is the slope of T 2 , then the9 value of  2 + m 22  is (a) x + 2y = 4 (b) 2y − x = 2
 m1 
(c) 4 x − 2y = 1 (d) 4 x + 2y = 7
[JEE Advanced 2015, 4M]

Answers
Exercise for Session 1 Chapter Exercises
1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (b) 1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (d)
6. (a,b) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (d) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (b)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (c)
8 5 19. (d) 20. (a) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a)
13. , ; (1 ± 5 , 2); (−2, 2) and (4, 2); 6 and 4; (1, 2)
3 3 25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (a) 30. (c)
(x − 2 ) 2 ( y + 3 ) 2 31. (a,c) 32. (a,b,c,d) 33. (b,d) 34. (a,c) 35. (a,d) 36. (a, c)
14. 3x2 + 4 y2 = 300 15. + =1
4 3 37. (a,b) 38. (a,b,c) 39. (a,b) 40. (a,c) 41. (a,b) 42. (a,c)
1 43. (a,b,c) 44.(a,b,c) 45. (a,c) 46. (d) 47. (b) 48. (a)
16. 5x2 + 9 y2 − 54 y + 36 = 0 17.
2 49. (a) 50. (c) 51. (b) 52. (d) 53. (d) 54. (b)
18. x2 ± ay = a2 55. (c) 56. (a) 57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (c)
61. (6) 62. (9) 63. (4) 64. (5) 65. (2) 66. (8)
67. (1) 68. (5) 69. (9) 70. (6)
Exercise for Session 2
71. (A) → (p,q); (B) → (p,q,s); (C) → (p,r); (D) → (p,r)
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (d)
72. (A) → (q); (B) → (p); (C) → (p,r,s); (D) → (q)
6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (b)
73. (A) → (p,s); (B) → (q); (C) → (q,s); (D) → (p,r)
; θ = cos−1  −
1 1 
11. (b) 12. λ = −  74. (a) 75. (b) 76. (a) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (c)
5  5
 r2 − 4 
80. (c) 81. (a) 86. y = ±   x 90. (2b)
Exercise for Session 3  (25 − r ) 
2

95. 
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (d) 14 
94. (a)  96. (a) 97. (a) 98. (b,c) 99. (a)
7. (b) 8. (a)  3
9. 3(x2 + y2 − a2 − b2 )2 = 4 (b2 x2 + a2 y2 − a2 b2 ) 100. (d) 101. (c) 102. (b,c) 103. (c) 104. (a) 105. (d)
(x − a ) 2 y2 106. (c) 107. (a) 108. (d) 109. (c) 110. (b) 111. (d)
11. 2
+ 2 = 1 12. b4 c2 x2 + a2 c2 y2 = a4 b4
a b 112. (a) 113. (9) 114. (a) 115. (b) 116. (a,b) 117. (4)
13. (−1, 0); 5 3 14. x 5 + 2 y = 2 5 118. (a) 119. (c) 120. (c)
 x2 y 2

Solutions
6. Any tangent to + = 1, is
16 9
y = mx + (16m 2 + 9 )
2
 5 
It is also tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 =   , then
 2
5
perpendicular distance from ( 0, 0 ) is equal to
1. Q Major axis on X -axis. 2
∴ f (2a ) > f (a 2 − 3 )
(16m 2 + 9 ) 5
⇒ 2a > a 2 − 3 [Q f is increasing] ∴ =
(m + 1 )
2
2
⇒ a − 2a − 3 < 0 or (a − 3 ) (a + 1 ) < 0
2

or −1 <a <3 ⇒ 32m 2 + 18 = 25m 2 + 25

∴ a ∈ ( − 1, 3 ) or 7m 2 = 7 ⇒ m = ± 1
2. Q Major axis on Y -axis. for acute m = 1.
∴ f (a 2 − 5 ) > f ( 4a ) Now, let θ be the angle between common tangent and the line
3 x − y + 6 = 0, then
⇒ a 2 − 5 < 4a [Q f is decreasing]
 3 − 1
⇒ a − 4a − 5 < 0  = 3 − 1 = tan  π 
2
tan θ = 
or (a − 5 ) (a + 1 ) < 0 1 + 3 3+1  12
or −1 <a <5 π
∴ θ=
∴ a ∈ ( − 1, 5 ) 12
π  7. Tangent at ( − 8, 3) is
3. Let a 2 = sin 2 − cos 3 = sin 2 − sin  − 3
2 
x ( − 8 ) y (3 )
π + =1
 100 25
= sin 2 + sin  3 − 
 2 or 2 x − 3y + 25 = 0
= sin (1.41) + sin (1.73 − 1.57 ) 25
for Y -axis put x = 0, then y =
= sin (1.41 ) + sin ( 0.16 ) > 0 3
and b 2 = sin 3 − cos 2  25
Hence, required point is  0,  .
 3
π 
= sin 3 − sin  − 2
2  8. Let A ≡ ( 4 cosθ, 3 sin θ ), then
= sin (1.73 ) − sin (1.57 − 1.41 ) B ≡ ( − 4 sin θ, 3 cosθ )
= sin (1.73 ) − sin ( 0.36 ) > 0 ∴ (CA ) 2 = 16 cos2 θ + 9 sin 2 θ
Also, a 2 > b 2 and (CB ) 2 = 16 sin 2 θ + 9 cos2 θ
Hence, curve represent an ellipse with foci on X -axis. Y
4. Mutually perpendicular tangents have been drawn by taking B
any point on the director circle of given ellipse. Any point on A
the director circle can be taken as (5 cos θ, 5 sin θ) . Equation of 90°
corresponding chord of contact is q
5x 5y X¢ X
C
cosθ + sin θ − 1 = 0
16 9
It’s distance from the origin is equal to
1 144
=
 25 cos θ 25 sin θ 
2 2 5 Y¢
 +  1 1 1 1
 256 81  ∴ + = +
(CA ) 2 (CB ) 2 16 cos2 θ + 9 sin 2 θ 16 sin 2 θ + 9 cos2 θ
1 144 16
⇒ ≤ = 25
(256 − 175 cos θ ) 2 5.9 5 =
144 (sin 4 θ + cos4 θ ) + 337 sin 2 θ cos2 θ
5. We have, PQ = BP 25
=
⇒ 2ae = (a 2e 2 + b 2 ) = a 2 = a 144 (1 − 2 sin 2 θ cos2 θ ) + 337 sin 2 θ cos2 θ
1 25 25
∴ e= = = (for θ = 0)
2 144 + 49 sin θ cos θ 144
2 2
530 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

9. (α , β) lies on the director circle of the ellipse i.e. on x 2 + y 2 = 9 If x = 2, then y 2 =

65
So, we can assume 9
α = 3 cosθ, β = sin θ 65 8
⇒ y = = [approximately]
∴ F = 12 cosθ + 9 sin θ = 3 ( 4 cos θ + 3 sin θ ) 3 3
⇒ − 15 ≤ F ≤ 15 13. Equation of tangent of the ellipse at P(5 cosθ, 4 sin θ ) is
3 x y
10. At, t = , b > a cosθ + sin θ = 1
2 5 4
2a 2 2 [t 2 − 3t + 4 ] 2 It meets the line x = 0 at Q ( 0, 4 cosec θ ) and image of Q in the
∴ Length of latusrectum = =
b [3 + 5t ] line y = x is R ( 4 cosec θ , 0 ).
2 ∴Equation of the circle is
 9 9 
2 − +4 ( x − 0 ) ( x − 4 cosec θ ) + (y − 4 cosec θ ) (y − 0 ) = 0
 4 2  3
= [at t = ] i.e. x 2 + y 2 − 4 ( x + y ) cosec θ = 0
 15  2
3+ ∴Each member of the family passes through the intersection of
 2 
x 2 + y 2 = 0 and x + y = 0
2 [1.75 ]2 2(1 ) 2 1
= = = i.e. the point ( 0, 0 ).
[10.5 ] 10 5
14. A cyclic parallelogram will be a rectangle or square.
b  sin 60 ° − sin 30 °  b 1
11. Slope of line =   = − = − or a = 2b So, ∠QPR = 90 °
a  cos 60 ° − cos 30 ° a 2 Therefore, P lies on the director circle of the ellipse
Homogenizing the ellipse with x + 2y + 4 = 0, then x2 y 2
2 + =1
x2 y 2  x + 2y  16 b 2
+ 2 = 
4b 2
b  −4  x2 y 2
Hence, x 2 + y 2 = 25 is the director circle of + = 1,
 1 1  1 1  xy 16 b 2
or x2  2 −  + y 2  2 −  − =0
 4b 16 b 4 4 then 16 + b 2 = 25 or b 2 = 9
Now, coefficients of x 2 + coefficient of y 2 = 0 ⇒ a (1 − e 2 ) = 9
2

1 1 1 1 ⇒ 16 (1 − e 2 ) = 9 [Q a 2 = 16 ]
⇒ − + − =0 9 7
4b 2 16 b 2 4 ⇒ e2 = 1 − =
5 5 16 16
or =
4b 2 16 7
∴ e=
or b 2 = 4 then, a 2 = 16 4
15. Qm, n ∈ N and m.n = m + n
2
x y2
∴ Ellipse is + =1
16 4 or m (n − 1 ) = n
12. Let the equation of the semi elliptical arch be n is divisible by n − 1. Therefore
x2 y 2 n −1 =1
+ =1 [y > 0 ]
a2 b2 ⇒ n = 2, m = 2
Length of the major axis = 2a = 9 Hence, the chord of contact of tangents drawn from
⇒ a=
9 (2, 2 ) to 4 x 2 + 9y 2 = 36
2 is 4 x ⋅ 2 + 9y . 2 = 36
Length of the semi minor axis b = 3 or 4 x + 9y = 18
Y x
16. Q x − 2y + 4 = 0 or y = + 2
2
Condition of tangency
B 1
c 2 = a 2 m2 + b 2 ⇒ 4 = 4 × + b 2
4
3 ∴ b= 3
Now, common tangent meet on X -axis at a point ( − 4, 0 ).
C O A According to symmetry other common tangent meet Y -axis
9m at ( 0, − 2 ).
So, the equation of the arch becomes ∴Equation of other common tangent is
4x 2 y 2 x y
+ =1 + = 1 or x + 2y + 4 = 0
81 9 −4 −2
 Chap 06 Ellipse 531

17. The tangent at the point of shortest distance from the line 20. Q Latusrectum and parabola = 4 (ae ) …(i)
x + y = 7 parallel to the given line.
Any point on the given ellipse is Y

( 6 cosθ, 3 sin θ ).
Equation of the tangent is
x cosθ y sin θ O
+ = 1. X¢
S¢ (–ae, 0) S(ae, 0)
X
6 3
It is parallel to x + y = 7
cosθ sin θ
⇒ =
6 3 Y¢
cosθ sin θ 1 2b 2
⇒ = = and latusrectum of ellipse = …(ii)
2 1 3 a
The required point is (2, 1 ). Q Latusrectum and parabola and ellipse be equal
1 2b 2
18. Let y = mx + be a tangent to the parabola, then for the ∴ = 4ae [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
m a
required equilateral triangle. ⇒ 2b 2 = 4a 2 e
1 or 2a (1 − e 2 ) = 4a 2e or e 2 + 2e − 1 = 0
2
m=± and it is tangent to ellipse also, if
3 − 2 ± (4 + 4)
2 Therefore, e = = −1 ± 2
 1 2
  =a m + b
2 2 2
 m Hence, e = 2 −1
a2
⇒ 3= + b2 21. Here, the center of the ellipse is ( 0, 0)
3
Let P (r cosθ, r sin θ ) be any point on the given ellipse, then
a2
⇒ 3= + a2 − a2 e2 r 2 cos2 θ + 2r 2 sin 2 θ + 2r 2 sin θ cosθ = 1
3
1
4a 2 or r2 =
⇒ a 2e 2 = −3 1 + sin 2 θ + sin 2θ
3
2 2
4 3 = =
or e2 = − 2 2 + (1 − cos2θ ) + 2 sin 2θ 2 sin 2θ − cos2θ + 3
3 a
Now, 0 < e2 < 1 Q 3 − 5 ≤ 2 sin 2θ − cos2θ + 3 ≤ 3 + 5
4 3 For rmax , 2 sin 2θ − cos2θ + 3 = 3 − 5
⇒ 0 < − 2 <1
3 a 2
2 2 (3 + 5 ) 6 + 2 5  5 + 1
3 ∴ 2
r = = = = 
⇒ <a <3 max
3− 5 4 4  2 
2
19. For equilateral triangle 5+1
Hence, rmax =
Circumcentre = Centroid 2
a cosα + a cosβ + a cos γ 3h 22. Centre of the ellipse if (1, 2) and length of major axis and minor
∴ h= or = Σ cosα
3 a axis are 6 and 4 respectively and centre and radius of the circle
 3h 
2 are (1, 2 ) and 1 respectively.
  = ( Σ cosα ) = Σ cos α + 2 Σ cosα cosβ
2 2
or …(i)
a Y
b sin α + b sin β + b sin γ
and k=
3 1
3k
or = Σsinα
b X¢ X
–3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3
2
 3k 
  = ( Σ sin α ) = Σ sin α + 2 Σ sin α sin β
2 2
or …(ii)
b –1

Adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

Y¢
9h 2 9k 2
+ 2 = 3 + 2 Σ cos(α − β )
a2 b Hence, ellipse and circle do not touch or cut.
9h 2 9k 2 3 ∴ Common chord impossible.
or Σ cos (α − β ) = 2 + 2 −
2a 2b 2 ∴ Hence, length of common chord = 0 *
532 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

23. ax 2 + by 2 + 2 fx + 2gy + c = 0 x2 y 2
26. Let equation of ellipse be + =1
 2 fx   2 2 gy  a2 b2
a x 2 +  + b y + +c =0
 a   b  Y

f 
2 2
 f  g 2 2
g
⇒ a  x +  + b y +  =  + − c
 a   b   a b 
(x + f /a )2 (y + g / b ) 2
⇒ + =1
 f 2 g2   f 2 g2  X¢ X
 + − c / a  + − c / b A¢ C A
 a b   a b 
If e eccentricity, then
 f 2 g2   f 2 g2 
 + − c  + − c
 a b   a b 
= (1 − e 2 ) Y¢
b a
and equation of circle is x 2 + y 2 = a 2
a
⇒ 1 − e2 = ∴ Area of ellipse = πab
b
and Area of circle = πa 2
b −a
⇒ e =
2
π a 2 − π ab a − b 2
b ∴ Probability = = = [given]
πa 2 a 3
b − a
∴ e=   ⇒ 3a − 3b = 2a
 b 
or a = 3b
x2 y 2 or a 2 = 9b 2 = 9a 2 (1 − e 2 )
24. Let ellipse be + = 1 and the circle be x 2 + y 2 = a 2e 2 ,
a2 b2 ⇒ 9e 2 = 8
point of intersection of the circle and the ellipse is
2 2
a a  ∴ e=
P  (2e 2 − 1 ), (1 − e 2 ) 3
e e 
27. Let S ≡ ( x1 , y1 ), S ′ ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 )
1 a
Now, area of ∆ PF1 F2 = × 2ae × (1 − e 2 ) Let C ≡ (h, k )
2 e Y
= a (1 − e ) = 30
2 2
[given]
2
 17 169
or a 2e 2 = a 2 − 30 =   − 30 = S′
2 4 T
C
13
∴ ae = or 2ae = 13 S
2 R
x2 y 2 X′ X
25. Let standard ellipse is 2 + 2 = 1 (a > b ) O Q P
a b
 a b  Y′
Equations of tangent and normal at  ,  x1 + x 2
 2 2 ∴ =h
2
(a 2 − b 2 )
are bx + ay − 2 ab = 0 and ax − by − =0 ⇒ x1 + x 2 = 2h
2
and y1 + y 2 = 2k
If sides of rectangles are p and q, then
Q SP S ′ Q = b 2
| 0 + 0 − 2 ab| 2 ab
p= = ⇒ y1 y 2 = b 2 and SR ⋅ S ′ T = b 2
(a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 ) ⇒ x1 x 2 = b 2
 (a 2 − b 2 )  Distance between foci SS′ = 2ae
0−0−
 2  ⇒ ( x1 − x 2 ) 2 + (y1 − y 2 ) 2 = (2ae )
and q = 
 (a + b ) 
2 2
⇒ ( x1 − x 2 ) 2 + (y1 − y 2 ) 2 = 4a 2e 2
 
⇒ ( x1 + x 2 ) − 4 x1 x 2 + (y1 + y 2 ) 2 − 4 y1y 2 = 4a 2e 2
2

(a 2 − b 2 ) ⇒ 4h 2 − 4b 2 + 4k 2 − 4b 2 = 4 (a 2 − b 2 )
=
2 (a 2 + b 2 ) ⇒ h 2 + k 2 − 2b 2 = a 2 − b 2
(a 2 − b 2 ) ab ∴ h2 + k 2 = a 2 + b 2
∴ Area of rectangle = pq =
(a 2 + b 2 ) Locus of centre is x + y = a + b 2 which is a circle.
2 2 2
 Chap 06 Ellipse 533

28. If chord AB, then equation of AB, here mid-point of the 30. Equation of tangent at (a cosα , b sin α ) is
 1 2 x y
chord is  ,  cos α + sin α = 1 …(i)
 2 3 a b
Y
∴ T = S1
x y 1 1
+ = + …(i)
50 24 100 36 B P
A
Let A ≡ ( x1 , y1 ) and B ≡ ( x 2 , y 2 )
x1 y1 1 1
∴ + = + …(ii) X¢
O
X
50 24 100 36
x2 y 2 1 1
and + = + …(iii)
50 24 100 36
( x 2 − x1 ) (y 2 − y1 )
∴ + =0 Y¢
50 24
Equation of auxiliary circle is
∴ AB = ( x 2 − x1 ) + (y 2 − y1 )
2 2

x2 + y 2 = a2 …(ii)
2
 24 For combined equation of OA and OB, making homogeneous
= ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 +   ( x 2 − x1 ) 2
 50 Eq. (ii) with the help of Eq. (i), then
2
| x 2 − x1 | x y 
= 769 x 2 + y 2 = a 2  cosα + sin α 
25 a b 

Now, solving
x
+
y
=
1
+
1  a2  2axy
⇒ x 2 sin 2 α + y 2 1 − 2 sin 2 α − sin α cosα = 0
50 24 100 36  b  b
x2 y 2 Q ∠ AOB = 90 °
and + =1
25 16 ∴ Coefficient of x 2 + Coefficient of y 2 = 0
5336 a2
then, x 2 − x − =0 ⇒ sin 2 α + 1 − 2 sin 2 α = 0
9 b
D 21353
∴ | x 2 − x1 | = = a2
a 3 ⇒ 1 + sin α − 2
2
sin 2 α = 0
a (1 − e 2 )
21353
∴ AB = × 769 ⇒ (1 − e 2 ) (1 + sin 2 α ) − sin 2 α = 0
3 × 25
⇒ 1 − e 2 (1 + sin 2 α ) = 0
29. Equation of tangent at the point P( 4 cosθ, 3 sin θ ) is or e 2 (1 + sin 2 α ) = 1
x y x 2
y2
cosθ + sin θ = 1 31. Q b 2 x 2 + y 2 = a 2b 2 ⇒ 2 + 2 2 = 1
4 3 a ab
x y a > ab,
or + =1 Let
4 sec θ 3 cosec θ Then, (ab ) 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 )
Y
⇒ b2 = 1 − e2 …(i)
B ∴ Extremities of the latusrectum ( ± ae, ± ab 2 )
Let x1 = ± ae and y1 = ± ab 2 = ± a(1 − e 2 )
P
or y1 = ± (a − ae 2 )
X¢
O A X ⇒ ay1 = ± (a 2 − a 2e 2 )
= ± (a 2 − x12 ) [Q x1 = ± ae ]
or x1 ± ay1 = a 2
2

∴ Required locus is x 2 ± ay = a 2
Y¢ 32. Let P ≡ ( 6 cos θ, 2 sin θ ) be any point on the ellipse
Coordinates of A and B are Y
A ≡ ( 4 sec θ, 0 ) and B ≡ ( 0, 3cosec θ )
Let middle point (h, k ) P(θ)
3
∴ h = 2secθ, k = cosec θ
2 X¢ X
2 2
C
 2 3
⇒   +   =1
 h  2k 
∴ Locus is 9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 4 x 2y 2
Y¢
534 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y 2 11
+ =1 or a≠ …(iii)
6 2 5
Given, CP = 2 ⇒ (CP ) 2 = 4 From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii) we get
⇒ 6 cos2 θ + 2 sin 2 θ = 4 a ∈ ( − ∞, − 2 ) ∪ (5, ∞ )
⇒ 6 cos θ + 2(1 − cos2 θ ) = 4
2
36. Q A latusrectum of an ellipse is a line passing through a focus,
1  1  
2
π
2 perpendicular to major axis i.e. parallel to minor axis.
or cos2 θ = =   =  cos 
2  2  4 37. Let the required equation be
π x2 y 2
∴ θ = nπ ± , n ∈ I + =1 …(i)
4 a2 b2
π 3π 5π 7π Since, Eq. (i) passes through ( 4, − 1 ), then
∴ θ= , , , 16 1
4 4 4 4 + =1 …(ii)
33. Here, a = cos θ and b = sin θ a2 b2
x 10
π π The equation of given line is y = − +
∴ <θ < 4 4
4 2
Which touches the ellipse Eq. (i),
∴ a <b 2 2

a 2 = b 2 (1 − e 2 )  10 2 1
  = a −  +b
2
then,
 4  4
⇒ cos2 θ = sin 2 θ(1 − e 2 )
∴ e 2 = 1 − cot 2 θ a2 25
⇒ + b2 = …(iii)
 π π 16 4
or e = (1 − cot 2 θ ) Q < θ <  Solving, Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get a 2 = 20, b 2 = 5
 4 2
 a2  5
Q Extremities of latusrectum are  ± , ± be or a 2 = 80, b 2 =
 b  4
a2 Therefore, the required equation of ellipse will be
⇒ x = ± , y = ± be x2 y 2 x2 y2
b + = 1 or + =1
or b 2 x 2 = a 4 and y 2 = b 2e 2 = sin 2 θ − cos2 θ 20 5 80 5 / 4
or sin 2 θx 2 = cos4 θ and y 2 = 1 − 2 cos2 θ i.e. x 2 + 4y 2 = 20 or x 2 + 64y 2 = 80
1 −y2 38. From focal property of ellipse
or (1 − cos2 θ ) x 2 = cos4 θ and cos2 θ =
2 SP + S ′ P = 2a, if a > b

2 and SP + S ′ P = 2b, if b > a
1 − y  2 1 − y 
2 2
∴ 1 − x =   Also, PS cos θ + PS ′ cos φ = 2ae …(i)
 2   2 
PS sin θ − PS ′ sin φ = 0 …(ii)
or 2 x 2 (1 + y 2 ) = (1 − y 2 ) 2
Y
or 2y 2 ( x 2 + 1 ) = 1 + y 4 − 2 x 2
PF1 NF1 P
34. Q =
PF2 NF2
Y f q
X¢ X
S¢ C S
B
P
x x
X¢ F2 C X
A¢ N F1 A T
Y¢
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
B¢
2ae sin φ 2ae sin θ
PS = , PS ′ =
Y¢ sin (θ + φ ) sin (θ + φ )
∴ PN bisects the ∠F1 PF2 Q SP + S ′ P = 2a
Q Bisectors are perpendicular to each other. ∴ e (sin θ + sin φ ) = sin(θ + φ )
∴ PT bisects the angle (180 º − ∠F1 PF2 )  θ + φ  θ − φ  θ + φ  θ + φ
⇒ e ⋅ 2 sin   cos   = 2 sin   cos  
35. Q a 2 − a − 6 > 0 ⇒ (a − 3) (a + 2) > 0  2   2   2   2 
∴ a < − 2 or a > 3 …(i)  θ − φ
cos  
and a − 6a + 5 > 0 ⇒ (a − 1 )(a − 5 ) > 0
2  2  1
or =
∴ a < 1 or a > 5 …(ii)  θ + φ e
cos  
Also a 2 − a − 6 ≠ a 2 − 6a + 5  2 
 Chap 06 Ellipse 535

 θ − φ θ + φ 41. Q 25 x 2 + 9y 2 − 150 x − 90y + 225 = 0

cos   − cos  
 2   2  1 −e
or = ⇒ 25( x 2 − 6 x ) + 9(y 2 − 10y ) + 225 = 0
 θ − φ θ + φ 1 + e ⇒ 25 {( x − 3 ) 2 − 9 } + 9 {(y − 5 ) 2 − 25 } + 225 = 0
cos   + cos  
 2   2 
⇒ 25( x − 3 ) 2 + 9(y − 5 ) 2 = 225
 θ  φ 1 − e ( x − 3 ) 2 (y − 5 ) 2
or tan   tan   = ⇒ + =1 …(i)
 2  2 1 + e 32 52
39. Let S ≡ (5, 12) , S′ ≡ (24, 7) and let P ≡ ( 0, 0) Let x − 3 = X, y − 5 = Y
Then, Eq. (i) becomes
Now, SS′ = (24 − 5 ) 2 + (7 − 12 ) 2
X2 Y2
+ 2 =1 …(ii)
= (361 + 25 ) = (386 ) 32 5
For ellipse SP + S ′ P = 2a Now, comparing Eq. (ii) with
⇒ 13 + 25 = 2a X2 Y2
+ 2 =1
∴ 2a = 38 a2 b
386 ∴ a = 3, b = 5
Q SS ′ = 2ae ⇒ e =
38 ⇒ a 2 = b 2 (1 − e 2 )
and for hyperbola S ′ P − SP = 2a ⇒ 9 = 25(1 − e 2 )
⇒ 25 − 13 = 2a ⇒ 2a = 12 4
⇒ e=
386 5
∴ SS ′ = 2ae ⇒ e = Centre : X = 0, Y = 0
12
x − 3 = 0, y − 5 = 0
40. Let the point of intersection of tangents at A and B be P ( x1 , y1 ). ∴ Centre ≡ (3, 5 )
Then, equation of AB is Foci : X = 0, Y = ± be
xx1 + 4yy1 = 4 ⇒ x − 3 = 0, y − 5 = ± 4
xx1
or + yy1 = 1 …(i) ⇒ y =5 ± 4
4
∴ Foci (3, 1) and (3, 9)
Y
Major axis 2b = 10
A 42. P(θ ) on the ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 16 is ( 4 cos θ, 2 sin θ )
P (x1, y1) Equation of tangent at P is
4 cos θ x + 8 sin θ y = 16
X¢ X
O ⇒ x cos θ + 2y sin θ = 4
B
It passes through centre (4, 2) of the given circle
∴ 4 cos θ + 4 sin θ = 4
π
Y¢
⇒ cos θ + sin θ = 1, θ = 0,
2
For point of OA and OB, homogenizing the equation of ellipse 43. Since, the product of the two eccentricities e and e′ is 1. Either
with the help of Eq. (i), then e = e′ = 1 in which case both the conics are parabolas or if
 xx 
2
e > 1, e′ < 1 and vice-versa.
x 2 + 4y 2 = 4  1 + yy1 
 4  So, one of them is an ellipse and the other is a hyperbola.
 x2  44. Equation of tangent at ‘α’ is
or x 2  1 − 1 + y 2 ( 4y12 − 4 ) + 2 xyx1y1 = 0 …(ii) x y
 4  cos α + sin α = 1
a b
But gives equation of OA and OB is
x y
x 2 + 4y 2 + axy = 0 …(iii) ⇒ + =1
a sec α b cosec α
Since, Eqs. (ii) and (iii) an identical, then
Now, length of intercept,
x12
−1 z = (a 2 sec 2 α + b 2 cosec 2 α )
4 4y 2 − 4 2 x1y1
= 1 =
1 4 a or z 2 = a 2 sec 2 α + b 2 cosec 2 α
or x1 − 4 = 4(y1 − 1 )
2 2
d (z 2 )  a 2 sin α b 2 cos α 
∴ = 2 − 
or x12 − 4y12 = 0 dα  cos3 α sin 3 α 
Therefore, the locus is x 2 − 4y 2 = 0
d 2 (z 2 )
or ( x + 2y )( x − 2y ) = 0 and >0
dα 2
or x + 2y = 0 and x − 2y = 0
536 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

d (z 2 ) 48. Lengths of axes are 2a and 2b

For minimum of z, =0
dα i.e. 2 and 2 2.
b2 Sol. (Q. Nos. 49 to 51)
∴ tan 4 α = 2
a Here, b >a
b
or tan α = ±   Y
a
b b
⇒ α = tan −1   , π − tan
−1
 ,
a a P (7, 4)
b b S (3, 6)
− π + tan −1   , − tan
−1
 
a a
minor axis
45. x 2 tan 2 α + y 2 sec 2 α = 1 X¢ X
C (3, 1)
x2 y2
⇒ + =1
cot 2 α cos2 α S¢ (3, –4)
Q cos α = cot α (1 − e )
2 2 2

⇒ sin 2 α = (1 − e 2 )
∴ e 2 = cos2 α (α ≠ 90 ° )
e = cos α
Y¢
1 2b 2
Q Latusrectum = =
2 a and CS = 5 = be …(i)
⇒ a = 4b 2
⇒ cot α = 4 cos2 α Equation of ellipse is
1 1 ( x − 3 ) 2 (y − 1 ) 2
⇒ = 4 cos α ⇒ sin 2α = + =1 …(ii)
sin α 2 a2 b2
n π nπ π Which pass through P(7, 4 ), then
2α = nπ + ( − 1 ) ⇒ α= + ( − 1 )n
6 2 12 16 9
+ =1
For n = 0 a2 b2
π 16 9
α= and for n = 1 ⇒ + = 1 [Q a 2 = b 2 (1 − e 2 ) = b 2 − 25 ]
12 b 2 − 25 b 2
π π 5π
α= − = ⇒ b 4 − 50b 2 + 225 = 0
2 12 12
or (b 2 − 45 )(b 2 − 5 ) = 0
Sol. (Q. Nos. 46 to 48)
∴ b =3 5 (b ≠ 5 )
Q 9 x 2 + 4 xy + 6y 2 − 22 x − 16y + 9 = 0
From Eq. (i),
or 2 (2 x + y − 3 ) 2 + ( x − 2y + 1 ) 2 = 10
2 2 5
 2x + y − 3  x − 2y + 1 e= and a 2 = 45 − 25 = 20
or 2  +  =2 3
 5   5 
2 2
From Eq. (ii), ellipse (E) is
 2x + y − 3  x − 2y + 1 ( x − 3 ) 2 (y − 1 ) 2
    + =1
 5   5 
or + =1 20 45
1 2
49. Product of the lengths of the perpendicular segments from the
X2 Y2 foci on tangent at P(7, 4 ) is equal to a 2 i.e. 20 (Q b > a )
or + =1
a2 b2
Here, b > a
50. Q Lines SF ′ and S ′F meet the normal PG and bisects it.
46. For centre: X = 0, Y = 0 ∴ Required point is mid-point of PG.
Q Equation of ellipse E is
⇒ 2x + y − 3 = 0
( x − 3 ) 2 (y − 1 ) 2
and x − 2y + 1 = 0 + =1
20 45
we get, x = 1, y = 1
∴ Centre is (1, 1). 2( x − 3 ) 2(y − 1 ) dy
⇒ + =0
47. For eccentricity: a 2 = b 2 (1 − e 2 ) 20 45 dx
1 dy
⇒ 1 = 2(1 − e 2 ) or e 2 = ∴ = −3
2 dx (7, 4)
1
∴ e= 1
2 ∴ Slope of normal =
3
 Chap 06 Ellipse 537

Equation of normal at P(7, 4 ) is For common tangent, r 2 (m 2 + 1 ) = 16m 2 + 9

1  16m 2 + 9
y − 4 = (x − 7) ⇒ r=  2
3 
 m +1 
⇒ x − 3y + 5 = 0
If PQRS is a square,
 8
Which meet the major axis in G 3,  . then, m = ±1
 3
or r 2 = 25
 10
Required point is mid-point of PG i.e. 5 ,  . or 2r 2 = 25
 3
54. Q PQRS is a square, then ∠PQR = 90°
51. Since locus of mid-point of QR is another ellipse having the
∴ PR is diameter of circle through P, Q, R
same eccentricity as that of ellipse ( E ).
∴ Area of circumcircle of
 a2   20   4 5
⇒ e1 = e = 1 − 2  = 1 −  = 1 −  = ∆PQR = π(OP ) 2 = π (r 2 ) 2 = 2 πr 2
 b   45  9 3
and area of circle C1 is πr 2 .
Sol. (Q. Nos. 52 to 54) Hence, the required ratio is 1/2.
52. Solving curves C1 and C 2 Sol. (Q. Nos. 55 to 57)
x2 + y 2 −r 2 = 0 55. Q Distance between foci S and S′ is 4 units
and 9 x + 16y 2 − 144 = 0
2
∴ SS′ = 4
Y ⇒ 2ae = 4
∴ ae = 2 K (i)
A B
and given SP + S ′P = 6
X¢ X ⇒ 2a = 6
O
Q a =3 K (ii)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
D C 2
e=
3
Y¢ and b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 ) = a 2 − (ae ) 2 = 9 − 4 = 5
then, ∴ Equation of ellipse with centre (0, 0) is
x2 y2 1 x2 y2 x2 y 2
1 1 −r 2 1 1 + = 1 ⇒ 5 x 2 + 9y 2 = 45
9 5
9 16 −144 9 16
56. Q AB = AC and ∠B = π / 2
x2 y2 1
∴ = = Q ∠A = ∠C = π / 4
16r − 144 144 − 9r 2 7
2
x2 y 2
16r 2 − 144 144 − 9r 2 Now, if two tangents drawn from ( x1 ,y1 ) on ellipse + =1
∴ x2 = and y 2 = a2 b2
7 7 A
If ABCD is a square, then x 2 = y 2
16r 2 − 144 144 − 9r 2
or = ⇒ 25r 2 = 288
7 7
53. Tangents of slope m to the circle and ellipse are respectively. P Q
O
y = mx ± r (m 2 + 1 ) and y = mx ± (16m 2 + 9 ) S′ S
Y
B R C
P
and angle between tangents is α, then
 x2 y 2 
2ab  12 + 12 − 1
a b 
X¢ X tan α =
Q O S | x12 + y12 − a 2 − b 2 |
Let A ( x1 , y1 )
π
Here, α = and a = 3, b = 5
R 4

Y¢
538 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

 x2 y 2  1
6 5  1 + 1 − 1 58. Here, a 2 = , b 2 = 1
 9 5  4
then, 1= Q b >a
( x12 + y12 − 9 − 5 )
1
∴ a 2 = b 2 (1 − e 2 ) ⇒ = 1 −e2
 x2 y 2  4
or ( x12 + y12 − 14 ) 2 = 180  1 + 1 − 1
 9 5  3
⇒ e2 =
∴ Required locus is 4
( x 2 + y 2 − 14 ) 2 = 4 (5 x 2 + 9y 2 − 45 ) ∴ e=
3
57. Let P = (3 cosθ, 5 sin θ ) and Q ≡ (3 cos φ, 5 sin φ ) 2
π 59. Foci of ellipse are ( 0, ± (b 2 − a 2 ) )
Given, θ − φ =
3  3
Q A is the point of intersection of tangents at P and Q
i.e.  0, ± 
 2 
  θ + φ  θ + φ 
 3 cos  5 sin 
  2 
 60. Required locus in the director circle of ellipse is
2
∴ A≡ ,  1
  θ − φ  θ − φ  x2 + y 2 = +1
    
 2  
cos cos 4
  2 
i.e. x 2 + y 2 = 5/4
 θ + φ  θ + φ
3 cos  3 cos  61. Let S and S ′ be the foci of one ellipse and H and H ′ be the
 2   2   θ + φ
Let x = = = 2 3 cos  K (i) other, C being their common centre. Then, SHS ′H ′ is a
 θ − φ  π  2  parallelogram and since
cos  cos 
 2   6 SH + S ′H = HS ′ + H ′S ′ = 2a
 θ + φ Since, the sum of the focal distances of any point on an ellipse
5 sin  
 2  is equal to its major axis which is 2a.
and y =
 θ − φ Then, CS = ae, CH = ae′
cos  
 2  K
 θ + φ
2 5 sin  
 2 
= K (ii) H
3
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get S¢ q
2 A¢ C S A
 x  3 
2

  +  y  = 4 or 5 x + 9y = 60
2 2
 3  5  H¢
which is required locus of A.
Sol. (Q. Nos. 58 to 60) K¢
Given, line is Let θ be the angle between their axes.
2 px + y (1 − p ) = 1
2
Then, SH 2 = a 2e 2 + a 2e′ 2 − 2a 2ee′ cos θ
2p 1 HS 2 = a 2e 2 + a 2e′ 2 + 2a 2ee′ cos θ
⇒ y =− x+
(1 − p )
2
(1 − p 2 ) Now, 2a = SH + S ′ H
Squaring both sides, then
Q Equation of tangent in terms of slope (m ) of ellipse
4a 2 = (SH ) 2 + (S ′ H ) 2 + 2(SH ) ⋅ (S ′ H )
x2 y 2
+ = 1 is y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) ⇒ 4a 2 = 2a 2 (e 2 + e′ 2 ) + 2 (a 2e 2 + a 2e′ 2 ) 2 − 4a 4e 2e′ 2 cos2 θ
a2 b2
2p ⇒ (2 − e 2 − e′ 2 ) 2 = (e 2 + e′ 2 ) 2 − 4e 2e′ 2 cos2 θ
∴ m=−
(1 − p 2 ) ⇒ 4 + (e 2 + e′ 2 ) 2 − 4(e 2 + e′ 2 )
1 = (e 2 + e′ 2 ) 2 − 4e 2e′ 2 cos2 θ
and a 2m 2 + b 2 = ⇒ 1 − e − e′ = − e 2e′ 2 cos2 θ
2 2
1 − p2
 m2  9 16 
1
a 2m 2 + b 2 = m 2 + 1  + − 1
Q p = 2   25 25 
2
or e 2 + e′ 2 − 1
4  m + 4 ∴ cos θ = = =0
ee′ 12 / 25
1
∴ a =
2
and b 2 = 1 π
4 ∴ θ=
2
x2 y2
Equation of ellipse is + =1 sin θ = 1
1/4 1
∴ 2(1 + sin 2 θ + sin 4 θ ) = 2(1 + 1 + 1 ) = 6
 Chap 06 Ellipse 539

62. Let the sides of the rectangle be p and q. Let length of sides = a
A a
∴ OA = OB = OC = OD =
2
q
p a 5
Given =
2 2
B D
∴ a =5
π
65. We know that, for θ = the focal chord will be latusrectum
2
2b 2
∴ Area of rectangle = pq = 200 …(i) with length .
a
and area of ellipse = πab = 200 π λab 2 2b 2
∴ ab = 200 …(ii) ⇒ =
 π  π a
Perimeter of rectangle = 2( p + q ) …(iii) a 2 sin 2   + b 2 cos2  
 2  2
In ∆ABD,
λab 2 2b 2
Distance BD = ( p 2 + q 2 ) = Distance between foci ⇒ =
a +0
2
a
= 2ae ∴ λ =2
or p 2 + q 2 = 4a 2e 2 = 4(a 2 − b 2 ) …(iv)
66. Equation of normal at the point (13 cos θ, 5 sin θ ) is
Also, BA + DA = 2a [Q SP + S ′ P = 2a ]
13 sin θ
⇒ p + q = 2a …(v) y − 5 sin θ = ( x − 13 cos θ )
5 cos θ
From Eq. (iv),
( p + q ) 2 − 2 pq = 4(a 2 − b 2 ) or 5y cos θ − 25 sin θ cos θ = 13 x sin θ − 169 sin θ cos θ
⇒ (2a ) 2 − 2 × 200 = 4(a 2 − b 2 ) [From Eqs. (i) and (v)] It passes through (0, 6), then
or b 2 = 100 or b = 10 30 cos θ − 25 sin θ cos θ = 0 − 169 sin θ cos θ
From Eq. (ii), a = 20 ⇒ 30 cos θ + 144 sin θ cos θ = 0
From Eq. (iii), or 6 cos θ (5 + 24 sin θ ) = 0
5
P = 2( p + q ) = 2(2a ) = 4a = 80 or cos θ = 0, sin θ = −
24
∴ P + 1 = 81
π 5
Hence, ( P + 1 ) = 9 ∴ θ = , θ = π + sin −1   ,
2  24
63. For ellipse 5
x2 y 2 θ = 2 π − sin −1  
9 x + 16y = 144 or
2 2
+ =1  24
16 9
Hence, three normals can be drawn.
Equation of director circle is i.e. n =3
x 2 + y 2 = 25 ∴ 2n = 2 3 = 8
x2 y 2
This director circle will cut the ellipse + = 1 at four 67. The equation of the tangent at P (a cos θ, b sin θ ) on the given
50 20
x2 y 2 x y
points. ellipse + = 1 is cos θ + sin θ = 1
a2 b2 a b
Hence, number of points = 4
Length of the perpendicular from the focus (ae, 0 ) on the ellipse
64. Q Perpendicular tangents meets on director circle of is
x2 y2 11
ellipse + = 1 is x 2 + y 2 = 7 + | e cos θ − 1 |
7 11 / 2 2 p=
 cos2 θ sin 2 θ 
 2 +
2
 5  
i.e., x2 + y 2 =    a b2 
 2
| ab (e cos θ − 1 )|
B =
(b cos2 θ + a 2 (1 − cos2 θ ))
2

a a ab (1 − e cos θ )  1 − e cos θ 
= =b  
a − a e cos θ
2 2 2 2  1 + e cos θ 
C A
O b 2
1 + e cos θ
⇒ =
p 2 1 − e cos θ
a a
Now, r 2 = (ae − a cos θ ) 2 + b 2 sin 2 θ
= a 2 [(e − cos θ ) 2 + (1 − e 2 ) sin 2 θ ]
D
540 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

= a 2 [e 2 cos2 θ − 2e cos θ + 1 ] Y
= a 2 (1 − e cos θ ) 2
⇒ r = a(1 − e cos θ )
2a b 2 2 1 + e cos θ Y
Now, − 2 = − =1
r p 1 − e cos θ 1 − e cos θ 3

6
68. The points are A(3, 4), B(6, 8) and O( 0, 0).
θ
Q OA + OB = 2a (where, a is semi major axis) 30° X X
⇒ 5 + 10 = 2a O O
15
∴ a=
2 Hence, rotation 30° takes place in totality
Now, AB = 2ae 2 πr 2 π πλ
15 ⇒ Length of arc = = ×6 = π = [given]
⇒ (6 − 3 ) 2 + (8 − 4 ) 2 = 2 × ×e 12 12 6
2 ∴ λ =6
or 5 = 15e
71. (A) Let point P be (a cosθ , b sin θ). The equation of tangent at
1
∴ e= x y
3 point P iscos θ + sin θ = 1
a b
225  1
∴ b = a 2 (1 − e 2 ) =
2
1 −  = 50 The point Q is (0, b cosec θ).
4  9 Y
 b 
Hence,   =5 Q
 2
P
x2 y 2
69. For the ellipse + = 1, a normal at P(5 cos θ, 4 sin θ ) is M
25 16
X¢ X
5 x sin θ − 4y cos θ = 9 sin θ cos θ A¢ O A
Since, the normal pass through ( λ , 0 ), then
5 λ sin θ − 0 = 9 sin θ cos θ
For, sin θ ≠ 0 (i.e. θ ≠ 0, π ), we get
5 λ = 9 cos θ < 9 (Q cos θ < 1 ) Y¢
∴ 5λ < 9 The equations of chord A′ P is
Hence, maximum value of 5λ is 9. b sin θ − 0
y −0 = (x + a )
70. Here, a = 3 3, b = 3 a cos θ + a
Since, axes are at 90° to each other.  b sin θ 
The point M is  0, 
 1 + cosθ 
Y
2
 b sin θ 
Then, (OQ) − ( MQ ) 2 = b 2 cos ec 2 θ − b cos ec θ −
2

 1 + cos θ 
2b 2 b 2 sin 2 θ
= −
1 + cosθ (1 + cos θ ) 2
C
2b 2 b 2 (1 − cos2 θ)
= −
(0, k) (h , k ) 1 + cosθ (1 + cos θ ) 2
2b 2 b 2 (1 − cos θ)
θ = −
X (1 + cosθ ) (1 + cosθ )
O (h, 0)
= b2 = 4
∴ O( 0, 0 ) being the centre of arc and radius of arc is OC (B) We know that, two diameters y = m1 x, y = m2 x are
x2 y 2 b2
⇒ OC = (27 + 9 ) = 6 units conjugate diameters of 2 + 2 = 1 if m1m2 = − 2
a b a
The two extreme positions are horizontal and vertical
2 −b 2
orientation. ⇒ 1×− = 2
3 a
 Chap 06 Ellipse 541

or
2
b2 = a2 5 x sec θ − 4y cos ec θ = 9 and it passes through P( 0, λ ).
3 Then, 0 − 4 λ cosec θ = 9
2 2 9
or a (1 − e ) = a
2 2
or λ = − sin θ
3 4
2 1 9 9
or 1 − e = or e 2 =
2
or | λ | = |sin θ | <
3 3 4 4
  9
 1  ∴ p = ⇒ 4p = 9
1 1 4
Hence, 4(1 + + + K ∞ ) = 4   =6
3 9 1 − 1 (C) Let the orbit of the earth be the ellipse
 3 x2 y 2
x2 y 2 + =1 ...(i)
(C) Q 2 x 2 + 3y 2 = 6 ⇒ + =1 a2 b2
3 2 Its major axis = 2a = 186 × 10 6 miles (given)
By using condition of tangency (2h ) 2 = 3 × (k ) 2 + 2 i.e. a = 93 × 10 6 miles and e = 1 / 60 (given)
Therefore, the locus of P (h, k ) is
4 x 2 − 3y 2 = 2 (which is hyperbola)
A¢ A
x2 y2 S
or − =1
1/2 2/3
2 1 2 Let the Sun be at the focus S (ae,0 ). Then, the Earth will be at
Hence, = (e − 1 )
3 2 shortest and longest distance from the Sun when the Earth is
4 at the extremities of the major axis which are respectively
⇒ e 2 = 1 + or 3e 2 = 7 nearest and farthest from this focus S.
3
 ∴ Shortest distance of the Earth from the Sun
b2 
(D)  ± ae,  are extremities of the latusrectum having = SA, where S is (ae, 0 ) and A is (a,0 )
 a
= a − ae = a(1 − e )
positive ordinates, then,
= (93 × 10 6 )(1 + (1 / 60 ))
b 2 
a 2e 2 = −2  − 2 ...(i) = 91450000 miles = 914.5 × 10 5 miles and longest
a  distance of Earth from the Sun
But b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 ) ...(ii) = SA′, where S is (ae,0 ) and A′ is ( −a, 0 )
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get = a + ae
a 2e 2 = −2(a(1 − e 2 ) − 2 ) = a(1 + e )
⇒ a e − 2ae + 2a − 4 = 0
2 2 2
= (93 × 10 6 )(1 + (1 / 60 ))
⇒ ae 2 (a − 2 ) + 2(a − 2 ) = 0 = 94550000 miles = 945.5 × 10 5 miles
∴ (ae 2 + 2 )(a − 2 ) = 0 ∴ µ − λ + 1 = 945.5 − 914.5 − 1 = 30
Hence, a = 2 (D) Equation of chord whose mid-point (0,3) is T = S1
72. (A)Q (0, 0) lies on the director circle and mid-point of foci 3.y 9
⇒ 0+ −1 = 0 + −1
(2, 2 ) is the center of the circle. 25 25
Hence, radius of director ⇒ y =3
circle = OC x2 y 2
It intersects the ellipse + =1
r = (4 + 4) = 2 2 16 25
x2 3 2 16
Y at =1− =
16 25 25
16
or x=±
5
S(3, 3)
32 4 λ
∴ Length of chord = = (given)
C(2, 2)
5 5
∴ λ =8
S¢(1, 1) 73. (A) Let S = 9x 2 + 8y 2 − 36x − 16y − 28
∴Value of S at (2,6)
O
X S1 = 9(2 ) 2 + 8(6 ) 2 − 36(2 ) − 16(6 ) − 28
= 36 + 288 − 72 − 96 − 28
Therefore, the area is πr 2 i.e. 8π = πλ (given) = 128 > 0
∴ λ =8 ∴ Point (2,6) lies outside the ellipse.
(B) Equation of normal at (5 cosθ, 4 sin θ) is
542 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

The equation of the given ellipse be rewritten as X2 Y2

4 X 2 + 9Y 2 = 36 ⇒ + =1
9( x − 2 ) 2 + 8(y − 1 ) 2 = 72 9 4
( x − 2 ) 2 (y − 1 ) 2 ∴Vertices, X = ± 3, Y = 0
⇒ + =1
8 9 3 x + 4y 4 x − 3y
or = ± 3, =0
Centre of ellipse is (2,1) and axis parallel to Y -axis 5 5
∴Vertices are x − 2 = 0 or 3 x + 4y = ± 15, y =
4x
and y −1 = ±3 3
or (2,−2 ) and (2,4 )  9 12  9 −12
Vertices are  ,  and  − , 
∴ Minimum distance 5 5   5 5 
L = PA = 2 Q Given point is a vertex.
∴ Minimum distance L = 0
P(2, 6) and maximum distance G = Length of major axis = 2 × 3 = 6
A(2, 4) Then, L + G = 6, G − L = 6
(D) Given ellipse is 25 x 2 + 9y 2 = 225
Y

C(2, 1) B(0, 5)

S(0, 4)

B(2, –2)
X′ X
.

and maximum distance C

G = PB = 8
S′(0, –4)
Then, L + G = 10, G − L = 6
(B) Let S = 4 x 2 + 9y 2 + 8 x − 36y + 4
∴Value of S at (1,2) is B′(0, –5)
S1 = 4(1 ) 2 + 9(2 ) 2 + 8(1 ) − 36(2 ) + 4
Y′
= 4 + 36 + 8 − 72 + 4
= −20 < 0 x2 y 2
or + =1
∴ Point (1,2) lies inside the ellipse 9 25
The equation of the given ellipse be rewritten as ∴ focii ( 0, ± (25 − 9 ) ) or ( 0, ± 4 )
4( x + 1 ) 2 + 9(y − 2 ) 2 = 36 and vertices are B ( 0, 5 ) and B′ ( 0, − 5 )
( x + 1 ) 2 (y − 2 ) 2 ∴ Minimum distance L = SB = 1
or + =1
9 4 and maximum distance G = SB′ = 4 + 5 = 9
∴ Centre of ellipse is ( −1, 2 ) and axis parallel to X -axis. Then, L + G = 10, G − L = 8
∴ Vertices are x + 1 = ± 3 74. Here, (a 2 + 1) < (a 2 + 2)
and y −2 = 0 2(a 2 + 1 ) 10
or (-4,2) and (2,2) ∴ Length of latusrectum = =
(a + 2 )
2
6
⇒ 6 (a + 1 ) = 25(a 2 + 2 )
2 2

A¢ C(–1, 2) P(1, 2) A or 6a 4 − 13a 2 − 44 = 0

(–4, 2) (2, 2) or (a 2 − 4 )(6a 2 + 11 ) = 0
∴ a 2 = 4, 6a 2 + 11 ≠ 0
.

∴Minimum distance L = PA = 1
If e be the eccentricity, then
and Maximum distance
(a 2 + 1 ) = (a 2 + 2 ) (1 − e 2 )
G = PA′ = AA′− PA = 6 − 1 = 5
5 1
∴ L + G = 6, G − L = 4, ⇒ e2 = 1 − =
6 6
(C) Here 3 x + 4y = 0 and 4 x − 3y = 0 are mutually 1
perpendicular lines, then substituting ∴ e=
3 x + 4y 4 x − 3y 6
= X and =Y Hence, both statements are true, statement II is correct
(3 + 4 )
2 2
(( 4 ) 2 + ( −3 ) 2 )
explanation for statement I.
Then, the given equation can be written as
 Chap 06 Ellipse 543

x2 y 2 | C1C 2 | = 2 > | r1 − r2 |
75. The given ellipse is + =1
3 2 ∴ Circle (iii) lies completely inside the circle (ii)
∴ Area of ellipse = π 3 2 = π 6 Q CC 2 = r + 4 and CC1 = 5 − r
The circle is x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 4y + 4 = 0 ⇒ CC1 + CC 2 = 9 = constant
or ( x − 1 ) 2 + (y + 2 ) 2 = 1 ∴ C lies on a ellipse.
Its area is π. Hence, statement I is true. Statement I is true and Statement II is false.
Also, statement II is true but it is not the correct explanation of 80. Statement I is obviously true since it is a theorem
statement I. P(a cos f, bsin f)
76. Given, ellipse is 4x 2 + 9y 2 = 36
x2 y 2
or + 2 =1 …(i) (–ae, 0) S¢ S(ae, 0)
32 2
Equation of tangents in terms of slope (m ) are
y = mx ± (9m 2 + 4 ) Q (Slope of SP ) × (Slope of S ′ P ) ≠ − 1
∴ Statement II is false.
⇒ (y − mx ) 2 = 9m 2 + 4
⇒ m ( x − 9 ) − 2mxy + y 2
2 2
−4=0 81. Given, a = constant and a + b + c = constant = 2s.
y2 −4 Now, BA + CA = c + b = 2s − a = constant
∴ m1m2 = − 1 ⇒ 2 = −1
x −9 A

⇒ x + y = 13, which is director circle of (i).

2 2

c b
Hence, both statements are true and statement II is a correct
explanation for statement I.
77. Distance between foci = 2ae and sum of focal distances from a
B a C
point = 2a
∴ Locus of A is an ellipse.
∴ 2ae < 2a ⇒ e < 1
⇒ Both statements are true and statement II is a correct
Both statements are true, statement II is correct explanation for
explanation for statement I.
statement I.
82. Let PQRS be a quadrilateral inscribed in the ellipse.
78. 4x 2 + 5y 2 − 16x − 30y + 41 = 0 …(i)
x2 y 2
⇒ 4( x 2 − 4 x ) + 5(y 2 − 6y ) + 41 = 0 + =1
a2 b2
⇒ 4 {( x − 2 ) 2 − 4 } + 5 {(y − 3 ) 2 − 9 } + 41 = 0
Let PQ, QR and RS be the three sides parallel to the given lines.
⇒ 4( x − 2 ) 2 + 5(y − 3 ) 2 = 20
Y
∴ statement II is true.
R (γ) Q (β)
( x − 2 ) 2 (y − 3 ) 2 ( x − 2 ) 2 (y − 3 ) 2
and + = 1 or + =1
5 4 ( 5 )2 22
∴ Sum of focal distances of a point ( P ) on the ellipse (i) is 2 5. X¢
O
X

∴ Statement I is true, but statement II is not a correct

explanation for statement I. S (δ) P (α)
79. Let variable circle is ( x − h ) 2 + (y − k ) 2 = r 2 …(i) Y¢
∴ C (h, k ) and radius r and given circles Equation of PQ is
( x − 1 ) 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 5 2 …(ii) x  α + β y  α + β  α − β
cos   + sin   = cos  
∴ C1 (1, 2 ) and r1 = 5 a  2  b  2   2 
and ( x − 2 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 4 2 …(iii) b  α + β
Its slope is − cot   which is constant by hypothesis
a  2 
∴ α + β = constant = 2 λ 1 (say)
Similarly β + γ = constant = 2 λ 2 (say)
C2 and γ + δ = constant = 2 λ 3 (say)
C1 Now the equation of SP is
x  α + δ y  α + δ
cos   + sin  
a  2  b  2 
C  α − δ
= cos  
 2 
∴ C 2 (2, 1 ) and r2 = 4
544 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

b  α + δ 1 − e 2
Its slope m=− cot   y 2 = −  (x − a e )
2 2
[From Eq. (i)]
a  2  1 + e
But α + δ = (α + β ) − (β + γ ) + ( γ + δ ) 1 − e 2 21 − e
or y 2 + x2   =a e  
= 2λ1 − 2λ 2 + 2λ 3 1 + e 1 + e
= constant x2 y2
Hence, the slope of the fourth side PS is constant. Hence the or + =1
a 2e 2 1 − e
fourth side is also parallel to a fixed straight line. a 2e 2  
1 + e
83. Let ∠PSS ′ = α and ∠ PS ′ S = β
which is an ellipse.
∴ SS ′ = 2ae
84. Let P be (a cos φ, b sin φ )
P (a cosφ, b sin φ)
∴ Equation of tangent at P is
bisectors
β/2 x y
cos φ + sin φ = 1 …(i)
π
α/2

β α a b
2 and equation of normal at P is
A¢ A
S¢ (–ae, 0) C M S (ae, 0) ax sec φ − by cosec φ = a 2 − b 2 …(ii)
β/2 α/2 It is clear from the figure CFPQ is rectangle
∴ PF = CQ
{i.e. the perpendicular from C( 0, 0 ) on Eq. (i)}
By sine rule in ∆PSS′, then Q
B
SP S′ P SS ′ P
= =
sin β sin α sin { π − (α + β )}
SP S′ P SS ′ A' A
⇒ = = C G
sin β sin α sin (α + β ) F
SP + S ′ P SS ′
or = B'
sin β + sin α (sin α + β )
2a 2ae
or = [Q SP + S ′P = 2a ] g
sin β + sin α sin(α + β )
2a sin β + sin α 1 ab
or = = = …(iii)
2ae sin(α + β )  cos φ sin φ 
2 2
(a sin φ + b 2 cos2 φ )
2 2

 2 + 
 α + β  α − β  α − β  a b2 
2 sin   cos   cos  
1  2   2  1  2  a2 − b2 
⇒ = ⇒ = Putting y = 0 in Eq. (ii), the point G is  cos φ, 0
e  α + β  α + β e  α + β  a 
2 sin   cos   cos  
 2   2   2 
and Putting x = 0 in Eq. (ii), the point g is
 α − β  α + β
cos   − cos    (a 2 − b 2 ) 
1 −e  2   2   0, − sin φ
=  b 
1+e  α − β  α + β
cos   + cos   2
 2   2   a2 − b2  
∴ ( PG ) 2 = a cos φ −   cos φ + (b sin φ − 0 )
2

{By componendo and dividendo rule}   2  

1 −e b4 b2
⇒ = tan(α / 2 ) tan(β / 2 ) …(i) = cos2 φ + b 2 sin 2 φ = 2 (b 2 cos2 φ + a 2 sin 2 φ )
1+e a 2
a
 PSS ′   PS ′ S  1 − e b
or tan   tan   = ∴ PG = (a sin φ + b cos φ )
2 2 2 2
…(iv)
 2   2  1+e a
2
The centre of the circle inscribed in ∆ PSS′ will lie on the  (a 2 − b 2 ) 
bisectors of angles α and β whose equations are and ( Pg ) 2 = (a cos φ − 0 ) 2 + b sin φ + sin φ
 b 
 β
y = tan   ( x + ae ) a4 a2
 2 = a 2 cos2 φ + 2
sin 2 φ = 2 (a 2 sin 2 φ + b 2 cos2 φ )
b b
 α α
and y = tan  π −  ( x − ae ) or y = − tan   ( x − ae ) a
 2  2 ∴ Pg = (a 2 sin 2 φ + b 2 cos2 φ ) …(v)
b
By multiplying we get From Eqs. (iii) and (iv), PF ⋅ PG = b 2
α  β and from Eqs. (iii) and (v), PF ⋅ Pg = a 2 .
y 2 = − tan   tan   ( x 2 − a 2e 2 )
 2  2
 Chap 06 Ellipse 545

85. Let the coordinates of P be ( x1 , y1 ) then Q is ( x1 , − y1 ). k2   k2   k

or 25  2  + 4 = r 2 1 + 2  Q m = − 
Also B is ( 0, b ) h   h   h
∴ Equation of PB is Hence the locus of P (h, k ) is
b − y1 25y 2 + 4 x 2 = r 2 ( x 2 + y 2 )
y − y1 = ( x − x1 )
0 − x1
 (r 2 − 4 ) 
It meets major axis i.e. y = 0 in M or y =±  x
 (25 − r 2 )
B
lx my
87. Let the normals at the points when the line, + =1
P (x1, y1) a b
meet in P (h, k )
C N A M Let the line joining the feet of the other two normals from
(h, k ) have for its equation, rx + sy = 1
Q (x1, –y1)
A C

 bx1  (h, k)
∴ M is  , 0 P
 (b − y1 ) 
b + y1
Also equation of BQ is y + y1 = ( x − x1 ) B D
0 − x1
Then the general equation of a curve through the intersection
It meets the major axis i.e., y = 0 in N. of the ellipse and the two lines is
 bx1   x2 y 2   lx my 
∴ N is  , 0  2 + 2 − 1 + λ  + − 1 × (rx + sy − 1 ) = 0 ...(i)
 b + y1  a b  a b 
Now the polar of M with respect to the auxiliary circle But the four points A, B, C , D also lie on the ellipse
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
(a 2 − b 2 ) xy + kb 2 x − ha 2y = 0 ...(ii)
xbx1
+ 0 ⋅y = a2 Curves Eqs. (i) and (ii) must be identical.
b − y1
This is possible only one coefficient of x 2 and y 2 and the
or bxx1 = a 2 (b − y1 ) …(i) constant terms in Eq. (i) must vanish separately.
If Eq. (i) passes through N, then 1 λrl 1 λms
b 2 x12 2
+ = 0, and 2
+ = 0, λ − 1 = 0
= a 2 (b − y ) a a b b
(b + y1 )
∴ λ = 1, 1 + arl = 0 = 1 + bms
⇒ b 2 x12 = a 2 (b 2 − y12 ) −1 −1
x12
y12 ∴ r= and s =
or + = 1 which is true. al mb
a2 b2 Therefore, the line rx + sy = 1 become
86. The equation of any tangent to the ellipse x y x y
− − = 1 or + = −1
x2 y 2 al mb al mb
4 x 2 + 25y 2 = 100 or + = 1 is
25 4 b
  sin φ
b sin φ a
y = mx + (25m 2 + 4 ) ...(i) 88. ∴ tan θ = =
(a cos φ − ae ) (cos φ − e )
It meets the coordinate of axes at
Q b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 )
 (25m 2 + 4 )   
A  − , 0 and B  0, (25m 2 + 4  b
 m    ∴ = (1 − e 2 )
a
Let P (h, k ) be the mid-point of AB. Then Y
B
(25m + 4 )
2
P (a cosφ, b sinφ )
2h = − and 2k = (25m 2 + 4 )
m q
X¢ X
2k k A¢ C S (ae, 0) A
⇒ = −m ⇒ m = −
2h h
B¢
Since, Eq. (i) touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2
Y¢
(25m 2 + 4 )
Therefore, =|r | (1 − e 2 ) sin φ
(1 + m 2 ) ⇒ tan θ =
(cos φ − e )
25m 2 + 4
or = r2
1 + m2 ⇒ sin θ cos φ − e sin θ = (1 − e 2 ) sin φ cosθ
546 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

2 tan(θ / 2 ) 1 − tan 2 ( φ / 2 ) e (2 tan (θ / 2 )) 90. y = mx + (a 2m 2 + b 2 ) is a tangent to the ellipse this tangent

⇒ ⋅ −
1 + tan 2 (θ / 2 ) 1 + tan 2 ( φ / 2 ) (1 + tan 2 (θ / 2 )) also touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2
0 − 0 + a 2m 2 + b 2
2 tan( φ / 2 ) 1 − tan 2 (θ / 2 ) then ±r =
= (1 − e 2 ) ⋅ . 1 + m2
1 + tan 2 ( φ / 2 ) 1 + tan 2 (θ / 2 )
r 2 − b2 
⇒ 2 tan(θ / 2 ) (1 − tan 2 ( φ / 2 )) − 2e tan(θ / 2 ) (1 + tan 2 ( φ / 2 )) we get m=  2  (Qb < r < a )
a − r 2
= 2 (1 − e ) ⋅ tan( φ / 2 ) (1 − tan (θ / 2 ))
2 2

Y
⇒ (1 − e ) tan(θ / 2 ) − (1 + e ) tan(θ / 2 ) P

tan ( φ / 2 ) − (1 − e ) tan( φ / 2 )
2 2
R
Q
T
+ (1 − e 2 ) tan 2 (θ / 2 ) tan( φ / 2 ) = 0 X′ X
O
(0, 0) (ae, 0)
S
⇒ (1 + e ) tan 2 ( φ / 2 ) + (1 − e 2 ) tan( φ / 2 )

(cot (θ / 2 ) − tan(θ / 2 )) − (1 − e ) = 0 Y′

⇒ (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ){ (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ) − (1 − e ) tan(θ / 2 ) } The line RS passes through (ae , 0 ) and parallel to PQ is
y − 0 = m ( x − ae )
+ (1 − e ) cot (θ / 2 ){ (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ) − (1 − e ) tan(θ / 2 )} = 0
⇒ mx − y − ame = 0
⇒ ( (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ) + (1 − e ) cot (θ / 2 )) Let T be the feet of the perpendicular dropped from the origin
on RS
( (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ) − (1 − e ) tan(θ / 2 )) = 0 ame
∴ OT =
But φ and θ lies between 0 and π 1 + m2
then tan( φ / 2 ) > 0 and tan(θ / 2 ) > 0 ( RT ) 2 = (OR ) 2 − (OT ) 2
then (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ) + (1 − e ) cot (θ / 2 ) ≠ 0 a 2m 2e 2
= r2 − = r 2 − (r 2 − b 2 ) = b 2
1 + m2
∴ (1 + e ) tan( φ / 2 ) − (1 − e ) tan(θ / 2 ) = 0
∴ RT = b , RS = 2b
1 + e
tan(θ / 2 ) =   tan( φ / 2 ) 91. Equation of the tangent at the point P (a cos φ, b sin φ ) on
1 − e
x2 y 2
+ = 1 is
89. Let the given ellipse be a2 b2
x y
x2 y 2 cos φ + sin φ = 1 ...(i)
+ =1 ...(i) a b
a2 b2
and foci F1 ≡ (ae, 0 ) F2 ≡ ( −ae, 0 )
Let P (α ) and Q (β ) be two points on Eq. (i) such that
∴ d = perpendicular distance of Eq. (i) form the centre ( 0, 0 ) of
θ =α −β ...(ii)
the ellipse
Given that tangents at P and Q are right angles. 1 ab
∴ d = =
 b   b  cos φ sin φ
2 2
(a sin φ + b 2 cos2 φ )
2 2
∴  − cot α   − cot β = − 1 +
 a   a  2 2
a b
⇒ a 2 sin α sin β + b 2 cosα cosβ = 0 ...(iii)  b2   b 2 (a 2 sin 2 φ + b 2 cos2 φ)
But the diameter parallel to the tangent at P (α ) will be ∴ 4a 2 1 − 2  = 4a 2 1 − 
 d   a 2b 2 
conjugate to the diameter CP, then its extremities will be
( −a sin α , b cosα )  b2 
= 4a 2 1 − sin 2 φ − 2 cos2 φ
∴ d12 = a 2 sin 2 α + b 2 cos2 α  a 
Similarly d = a 2 sin 2 β + b 2 cos2 β
2 (a − b )
2 2
2 = 4a 2 cos2 φ
⇒ d d = (a 2 sin 2 α + b 2 cos2 α ) (a 2 sin 2 β + b 2 cos2 β )
2 2 a2
1 2
= 4 cos φ (a − b 2 )
2 2
= (a 2 sin α sin β + b 2 cosα cosβ ) 2
= 4a 2e 2 cos2 φ = (2 ae cos φ ) 2
+ a 2b 2 (sin α cosβ − cosα sin β ) 2
= [(a − ae cos φ ) − (a + ae cos φ )]2
= 0 + a 2b 2 sin 2 (α − β ) [from Eq. (iii)]
= ( PF1 − PF2 ) 2
= a 2b 2 sin 2 θ [from Eq. (ii)]
 b2 
∴ ab sinθ = d1d 2 Hence ( PF1 − PF2 ) 2 = 4a 2 1 − 2  .
 d 
 Chap 06 Ellipse 547

x2 y 2 Q Eqs. (i) and (ii) passes through (ae, 0 ) and ( −ae, 0 ) then
92. (i) Equation of ellipse is + =1 ...(i)
a2 b2 Eqs.(i) and (ii) becomes
 φ + φ1   φ − φ1 
PQ is the chord of contact. e cos   = cos   ...(iii)
xx1 yy1  2   2 
Equation of chord of contact is + 2 =1 ...(ii)
a2 b  φ + φ2  φ − φ2
and −e cos   = cos   ...(iv)
Y  2   2 
Y

P P
X′ X
S(–ae,0)C S (ae, 0) X′
H X
T(x O S
1, y )
1
Q
R Q
Y′ T
Y′
Eliminate y from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
By componendo and dividendo
x 2 (a 2y12 + b 2 x12 ) − 2a 2b 2 xx1 + a 4 (b 2 − y12 ) = 0
1 −e 2 cos( φ / 2 ) cos( φ 2 / 2 )
Let x′ and x′′ be it roots =−
1+e 2 sin( φ / 2 ) sin( φ 2 / 2 )
2a 2b 2 x1 a 4 (b 2 − y12 )
∴ x′ + x′′ = 2 2 , x′ x′′ = 2 2 1 −e
(a y1 + b x1 )
2 2
(a y1 + b 2 x12 ) or = − cot ( φ / 2 ) cot ( φ 2 / 2 )
1+e
Now, ST 2 = ( x1 − ae ) 2 + y12 (1 + e )
or tan ( φ 2 / 2 ) = − cot ( φ / 2 )
Also, SP ⋅ SQ = (a − ex′ ) (a − ex′′ ) (1 − e )
= a 2 − ae ( x′ + x′′ ) + e 2 x′ x′′ (1 − e )
Similarly, tan( φ 1 / 2 ) = − cot ( φ / 2 )
ae ⋅ (2a 2b 2 x1 ) e 2a 4 (b 2 − y12 ) (1 + e )
= a2 − 2 2 +
(a y1 + b 2 x12 (a 2y12 + b 2 x12 ) the equation of QR is
a2 x  φ + φ 2 y  φ + φ2  φ − φ2
= {b 2 ( x1 − ae ) 2 + b 2y12 } cos  1  + sin  1  = cos  1 
(a y + b 2 x12 )
2 2 a  2  b  2   2 
1

a 2b 2 (ST ) 2 Dividing both sides by cos ( φ 1 / 2 ) cos( φ 2 / 2 ), we get

= x y
(a 2y12 + b 2 x12 ) ⇒ (1 − tan( φ 1 / 2 ) tan( φ 2 / 2 ) + (tan( φ 1 / 2 ) + tan( φ 2 / 2 ))
a b
(ST ) 2 y 2 x2
∴ = 12 + 12 = 1 + tan( φ 1 / 2 ) tan( φ 2 / 2 ) or
x
(1 − cot 2 ( φ / 2 )) +
y
SP ⋅ SQ b a a b
(ii) ST ⋅ S ′ T cosθ = ( ( x1 − ae ) 2 + y12 ) ( ( x1 + ae ) 2 + y12 ) cosθ  1 + e2  
− 2  2
cot ( φ / 2 )  = 1 + cot ( φ / 2 )
2

= ( x12 + y12 + a 2e 2 ) 2 − 4a 2e 2 x12 cosθ ...(i)  1 − e  

Equation pair of tangents. x (1 − cot 2 ( φ / 2 )) 1 + e 2 2 cot φ / 2 y
or − ⋅ ⋅ =1
SS1 = T 2
a (1 + cot 2 ( φ / 2 )) 1 − e 2 1 + cot 2 φ / 2 b
x 2
y   x1
2 2
y12
  xx1 yy1 
2
x 1 + e2  y
 2 + 2 − 1  2 + 2 − 1 =  2 + 2 − 1 or − cos φ −   sin φ ⋅ = 1
a b  a b  a b  a  1 − e2  b
x y
 x12 y12  or (1 − e 2 ) cos φ + (1 + e 2 ) sin φ = − (1 − e 2 ) …(v)
2ab  2 + 2 − 1 a b
a b 
∴ tan θ = But QR is also chord of contact.
( x12 + y12 − a 2 − b 2 )
Thus equation of QR is
( x12 + y12 − a 2 − b 2 ) xx1 yy1
∴ cosθ = + 2 =1 …(vi)
( x12 + y12 + a 2e 2 ) 2 − 4a 2e 2 x12 a2 b
Comparing the co-efficients of Eqs. (v) and (vi), we get
From Eq. (i), ST ⋅ S ′ T cosθ = x12 + y12 − a 2 − b 2
(1 − e 2 ) cos φ (1 + e 2 )sin φ
Hence ST ⋅ S ′ T cosθ = (CT ) 2 − a 2 − b 2 = = − (1 − e 2 )
x1 / a y1 / b
93. Let coordinates of T be ( x1 , y1 ). Let eccentric angles of P , Q, R x2 y 2 (1 − e 2 ) 2
be φ , φ 1 , φ 2 ⇒ cos2 φ = 12 and sin 2 φ = 12
a b (1 + e 2 ) 2
Thus equation of chords PSQ and PHR are Q cos φ + sin φ = 1
2 2

x  φ + φ1  y  φ + φ1   φ − φ1  y 2 (1 − e 2 ) 2
 + sin   = cos 
2
cos   ...(i) x1
a  2  b  2   2  ∴ + 12 ⋅ =1
a 2
b (1 + e 2 ) 2
x  φ + φ2 y  φ + φ2  φ − φ2
cos   + sin   = cos   ...(ii) x2 2
and 2 2y
a  2  b  2   2  Locus of ( x1 , y1 ) is (1 + e 2 2
) + (1 − e ) = (1 + e 2 ) 2 .
a2 b2
548 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y 2
94. Any tangent to the ellipse + = 1 at P (a cosθ, b sin θ ) is Y
a2 b2 B(0, b)
x cosθ y sin θ
+ =1
a b
X¢ X
Y F(–ae, 0) O F(ae, 0)

B P(
aco
sq
,b Y¢
s in
q)
X¢
O A X Also, e = 1 −b / a = 1 − e2
2 2 2

1
⇒ 2e 2 = 1, e =
2
97. 2ae = 6 ⇒ ae = 3; 2b = 8
Y¢
. ⇒ b=4
It meets coordinate axes at A(a sec θ, 0 ) and B( 0, b cosecθ ). b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 ); 16 = a 2 − a 2e 2
1 ⇒ a 2 = 16 + 9 = 25 ⇒ a = 5
∴ Area of ∆OAB = × a secθ × b cosecθ
2 3 3
ab ∴ e= =
⇒ ∆= a 5
sin2θ
For ∆ to be min, sin 2θ should be max and we know max value 98. Y
of sin 2θ = 1.
S¢(–ae, 0) S(ae, 0)
∴ ∆ max = ab sq units.
95. Let the common tangent to circle x 2 + y 2 = 16 and ellipse X¢ X
x 2 / 25 + y 2 / 4 = 1 be
–b2
–ae, a
y = mx + 25m 2 + 4 …(i) Q –b2
P ae, a
As it is tangent to circle x 2 + y 2 = 16, we should have
Y¢
25m 2 + 4
.

=4
[Using: length of perpendicular Y
m2 + 1 from (0, 0) to (1) = 4]
⇒ 25m 2 + 4 = 16m 2 + 16
⇒ 9m 2 = 12
−2
⇒ m= X¢
A¢
X
3 1 L
–Ö3, – 2 Q P Ö3, –1
[Leaving + ve sign to consider tangent in I quadrant] R 2
A
∴Equation of common tangent is
2 4
y =− x + 25 ⋅ + 4
3 3
Y¢
2 7
⇒ y =− x+4 Given, ellipse is x + 4y = 4
2 2

3 3 x2 y 2
 or + = 1 ⇒ a = 2, b = 1
7 22 1
This tangent meets the axes at A(2 7, 0 ) and B  0, 4  .
 3 1 3
∴ e= 1− =
∴Length of intercepted portion of tangent between axes 4 2
 7
3
∴ ae = 3
AB = (2 7 ) +  4 
 3  1
As per question P ≡ (ae, − b 2 / a ) =  3, − 
 2
= 14 / 3
 1
96. Q ∠FBF ′ = 90° ⇒ FB 2 + F ′ B 2 = FF ′ 2 Q ≡ ( −ae, − b 2 / a ) =  − 3,− 
 2
∴ ( a 2e 2 + b 2 ) 2 + ( a 2e 2 + b 2 ) 2 = (2ae ) 2 ∴ PQ = 2 3
⇒ 2 (a 2e 2 + b 2 ) = 4a 2e 2 Now, if PQ is the length of latusrectum to be found, then
b2 3
⇒ e2 = 2 PQ = 4a = 2 3 ⇒ a =
a 2
 Chap 06 Ellipse 549

Also, as PQ is horizontal, parabola with PQ as latusrectum can So, the A(3, 0 ) and B (0, 1)
be upward parabola (with vertex at A) or down ward parabola x y
(with vertex at A′). ∴Equation of AB is + = 1 or x + 3y − 3 = 0 …(i)
3 1
3 Also, auxillary circle of given ellipse is
For upward parabola, Ar = a =
2 x2 + y 2 = 9 …(ii)
  3 + 1  Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get the point M where line AB
∴Coordinates of A =  0, −  
  2  meets the auxillary circle.
Putting x = 3 − 3y from Eqs. (i) and (ii)
So, Equation of upward parabola is given by
we get (3 − 3y ) 2 + y 2 = 9
 3 + 1
x 2 = 2 3 y +  or x 2 − 2 3y = 3 + 3 …(i) ⇒ 9 − 18y + 9y 2 + y 2 = 9
 2 
⇒ 10y 2 − 18y = 0
3 9 −12
For downward parabola A′ R = a = ⇒ y = 0, ⇒ x = 3,
2 5 5
 1 − 3  −12 9
∴Coordinates of A′ =  0, −   Clearly, M  , 
 5 5
  2 
So, equation of downward parabola is given by 0 0 1
 1 − 3 1 27
x 2 = − 2 3 y +  ∴Area of ∆OAM = ×| 3 0 1 |=
 2  2 10
−12 9
1
or x 2 + 2 3y = 3 − 3 …(ii) 5 5
∴ Equation of required parabola is given by Eqs. (i) and (ii). x2 y 2
101. The given ellipse is + 2 =1
42 2
99. Perpendicular distance of directrix from focus
a such that a 2 = 16 and b 2 = 4
= − ae = 4 4 3
e ∴ e2 = 1 − =
16 4
 1 8
⇒ a 2 −  =4 ⇒ a= 3
 2 3 ⇒ e=
Y 2
Let P (4 cosθ, 2 sin θ) be any point on the ellipse, then equation
of normal at P is
4 x sin θ − 2y cosθ = 12sin θ cosθ
a –ae
x y
e ⇒ − =1
3 cosθ 6 sin θ
X¢ X
O S ∴ Q, the point where normal at P meets X -axis, has
coordinates (3 cosθ, 0 )
(ae, 0)
 7 cosθ 
∴ Mid-point of PQ is M  ,sin θ
 2 
x=a/e
For locus of point M we consider
Y¢
7 cosθ
∴Semi major axis = 8/3 x= and y = sinθ
2
100. The given ellipse is x 2 + 9y 2 = 9 2x 4x 2
⇒ cosθ = and sinθ = y ⇒ + y2 =1 …(i)
x2 y 2 7 49
or + 2 =1
32 1 Also, the latusrectum of given ellipse is
Y
3
x = ± ae = ± 4 × = ±2 3
2
M
or x = ±2 3 …(ii)
B
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
4 × 12
X¢
O A
X + y2 =1
49
1 1
⇒ y2 = or y = ±
49 7
 1
∴The required points are  ±2 3,±  .
Y¢  7
550 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

A If PQRS is the rectangle in which it is inscribed, then

102. In ∆ABC, given that cos B + cosC = 4 sin 2
2 P = (2, 1).
B+C B −C A x2 y 2
⇒ 2 cos cos − 4 sin 2 = 0 Let 2 + 2 = 1 be the ellipse circumscribing the rectangle
2 2 2 a b
A B −C A PQRS. Then it passes through P(2, 1 )
⇒ 2 sin cos − 2 sin =0
2  2 2  Y
A  B −C B + C
⇒ sin = 0 or  cos − 2 cos  =0
2  2 2  B(0, 1)
Q P(2, 1)
 A  B + C
Q = 90 ° −  
 2 2 
A
A X¢ (2, 0) (4, 0) X
But in a triangle sin ≠0 O
2
B −C B+C
cos − 2 cos =0 R S
2 2
 B + C
cos  
 2  1 Y¢
⇒ =
 B −C 2 4 1
cos   ∴ + =1 …(i)
 2  a2 b2
Applying componendo and dividendo, we get Also, given that, it passes through (4, 0)
 B + C  B −C ∴
16
+ 0 =1
cos   + cos  
 2   2  1+2 a2
= = −3
 B + C  B −C 1 − 2 ⇒ a 2 = 16
cos   − cos  
 2   2  ⇒ b2 = 4 / 3 [substituting a 2 = 16 in Eq. (i)]
2
B C x y2
2 cos cos ∴ The required ellipse is + =1
⇒ − 2 2 = −3 16 4 / 3
B C or x 2 + 12y 2 = 16
2 sin sin
2 2 x 2
y 2

B C 1 105. Tangent to 2 + 2 = 1 at the point (3 cosθ, 2 sin θ) is

⇒ tan tan = 3 2
2 2 3 x cosθ y sin θ
+ =1
(s − a )(s − c ) (s − a )(s − b ) 1 3 2
⇒ =
s (s − b ) s (s − c ) 3 P
(3, 4)
s −a 1 2)
⇒ = (0,
s 3
or 2s = 3a B
⇒ a + b + c = 3a
or b + c = 2a
A(3, 0)
i.e. AC + AB = constant
[Q base BC = a is given to be constant]
⇒ A moves on an ellipse.

2 2
 1 − t2   2t 
2
 x
103.   + (y ) =   + 
2
 3 1 + t2 1 + t2 As it passes through (3, 4), we get
(1 + t 2 ) 2 cosθ + 2 sin θ = 1
= =1 ⇒ 4 sin 2 θ = 1 + cos2 θ − 2 cosθ
(1 + t 2 ) 2
⇒ 5 cos2 θ − 2 cosθ − 3 = 0
x2
⇒ + y2 =1 3
3 ⇒ cosθ = 1,−
5
Which is an ellipse.
4
x2 y 2 ⇒ sin θ = 0,
104. The given ellipse is + =1 5
4 1
 9 8
So, A = (2, 0 ) and B = (0,1) ∴ Required points are A (3, 0) and B  ,  .
 5 5
 Chap 06 Ellipse 551

106. Let H be orthocentre of ∆PAB, then as BH⊥ AP, BH is a Y

horizontal line through B.
P(3, 4) (0, 4)
–9 , 8 B A(3, 2)
5 5
B X¢ X
O
H
C D
A(3, 0)

Y¢

Let the ellipse circumscribing the rectangle ABCD is

∴y-coordinate of B = 8 / 5 x2 y 2
+ =1
Let H has coordinate (α , 8 / 5 ) a2 b2
8
−4 Given that, it passes through (0, 4)
−12
Then, slope of PH = 5 = ∴ b 2 = 16
α − 3 5 (α − 3 )
Also, it passes through A(3, 2)
8−0 9 4
8 −1 ∴ + = 1 ⇒ a 2 = 12
and s lope of AB = 5 = = a 2 16
−
9 − 24 3
12 1 1
5 −3 ∴ e= 1− = =
16 4 2
But PH ⊥ AB
−12  −1  110. Given, equation of ellipse is 2x 2 + y 2 = 4
⇒ ×   = −1
5(α − 3 )  3  2x 2 y 2 x2 y 2
⇒ + =1 ⇒ + =1
⇒ 4 = − 5α + 15 or α = 11 / 5 4 4 2 4
 11 8 x2 y 2
Hence H  ,  . Equation of tangent to the ellipse + = 1 is
 5 5 2 4
107. Clearly, the moving point traces a parabola with focus at y = mx ± 2m 2 + 4 …(i)
P(3, 4) and directrix as x2 y 2
Q equation of tangent to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1
y − 0 −1 a b
AB: =
x −3 3 is y = mx + c, where c = ± a 2m 2 + b 2
or x + 3y − 3 = 0
Now, equation of tangent to the parabola
∴ Equation of parabola is
4 3
( x + 3y − 3 ) 2 Q y 2 = 16 3 x is y = mx + …(ii)
( x − 3 ) 2 + (y − 4 ) 2 = m
10
(Q Equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
or 9 x 2 + y 2 − 6 xy − 54 x − 62y + 241 = 0 a
y = mx + )
x2 y 2 m
108. Let the ellipse be 2 + 2 = 1
a b On comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
It passes through (−3, 1), so 4 3
9 1 = ± 2m 2 + 4
+ =1 …(i) m
a2 b2 Squaring on both the sides, we get
Also, b 2 = a 2 (1 − 2 / 5 ) 16(3 ) = (2m 2 + 4 )m 2
⇒ 5b 2 = 3a 2 …(ii) ⇒ 48 = m 2 (2m 2 + 4 )
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get ⇒ 2m 2 + 4m 2 − 48 = 0
32 32
a 2 = ,b 2 = ⇒ m 4 + 2m 2 − 24 = 0
3 5
⇒ (m 2 + 6 )(m 2 − 4 ) = 0
So, the equation of the ellipse is 3 x 2 + 5y 2 = 32
⇒ m2 = 4 (Q m 2 ≠ −6 )
109. As rectangle ABCD circumscribed the ellipse ⇒ m = ±2
x2 y 2 ⇒ Equation of common tangents are y = ± 2 x ± 2 3
+ =1
9 4
Thus, statement I is true.
∴ A = (3, 2)
statement II is obviously true.
552 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

111. Equation of circle is ( x − 1) 2 + y 2 = 1 1 2 4 

Area of ∆PQR = × 3 ( 4 − h ) ×  − h
2 h 
⇒ Radius = 1 and Diameter = 2
∴Length of semi-minor axis is 2. 3 (4 − h 2 )3 / 2
i.e. ∆(h ) =
Equation of circle is x 2 + (y − 2 ) 2 = 4 = (2 ) 2 2 h
⇒ Radius = 2 and Diameter = 4 d∆  ( 4 − h 2 )(h 2 + 2 ) 
⇒ Length of semi-major axis is 4 = − 3 <0
dh  h2 
We know, equation of ellipse is given by
x2 y2 ∴∆(h ) is a decreasing function.
2
+ =1 1
(Major- axis) (Major- axis) 2 ∴ ≤h ≤1
2
x2 y2 x2 y 2
⇒ + 2 =1 ⇒ + =1 1
⇒ ∆ max = ∆   and ∆ max = ∆(1)
2
(4) (2 ) 16 4
 2
⇒ x 2 + 4y 2 = 16
 1 
3/2
112. From the given equation of ellipse, we have  4 −  
3  4  45
a = 4, b = 3e = 1 −
9 ∴ ∆1 = = 5
2  1  8
16  
7  2 
⇒ e=
4 3 3 3 9
∆2 = ⋅ =
Y 2 1 2
8
∴ ∆1 − 8 ∆ 2 = 45 − 36 = 9
5
r 114. Given, equation of ellipse can be written as
X¢ X x2 y 2
+ =1
6 2
⇒ a 2 = 6, b 2 = 2
Now, equation of any variable tangent is
Y¢ y = mx ± a 2m 2 + b 2 …(i)
Now, radius of this circle = a = 16 2 where m is slope of the tangent
⇒ Foci = ( ± 7, 0 ) So, equation of perpendicular line drawn from centre to
tangent is
Now, equation of circle is ( x − 0 ) 2 + (y − 3 ) 2 = 16
−x
x 2 + y 2 − 6y − 7 = 0 y = …(ii)
m
x2 y 2
113. Vertical line x = h, meets the ellipse + = 1 at Eliminating m,we get
4 3 ( x 4 + y 4 + 2 x 2y 2 ) = a 2 x 2 + b 2y 2
 3   − 3 
P h, ( 4 − h 2 ) and Q h, (4 − h 2 ) ⇒ (x 2 + y 2 ) 2 = a 2 x 2 + b 2y 2
 2   2  ⇒ ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 = 6 x 2 + 2y 2
By symmetry, tangents at P and Q will meet each other at 115. The end point of latusrectum of ellipse
X -axis
x2 y 2  b2 
y + 2 = 1 in first quadrant is ae,  and the tangent at this
a 2
b  a
a 
point intersects X -axis at  , 0 and Y - axis at (0, a).
P e 
x2 y 2
The given ellipse is + =1
(h, 0) X 9 5
O R
Then, a 2 = 9,b 2 = 5
Q
 5 2
⇒ e = 1 −  =
 9 3
∴ End point of latusrectum in first quadrant is L( 2, 5/3)
xh y 3
Tangent at P is + (4 − h 2 ) = 1 2x y
4 6 Equation of tangent at L is + =1
9 3
4 
Which meets X -axis at R  ,0 It meets X -axis at A (9/2, 0) and Y -axis at B (0, 3)
h 
 Chap 06 Ellipse 553

1 9 27 4
∴Area of ∆OAB = × ×3 = T2 :y = m2 x −
2 2 4 m2
Y It passes through (2, 0)
4
(0, 3) 0 = 2m2 − ⇒ m22 = 2
m2
1
L (2, 5/3) ∴ + m22 = 4
m12
X¢ X Sol. (Q. Nos. 118 & 119)
C O S A
(9/2, 0) x2 y 2  8 1
118. For ellipse + = 1, e = 1 −  =
9 8  9 3
D
∴ F1 ( −1, 0 ) and F2 (1, 0)
Y¢ Parabola with vertex at (0, 0) and focus at F2 (1, 0) is y 2 = 4 x.
3 
.
By symmetry area of quadrilateral Intersection points of ellipse and parabola are M  , 6 and
27 2 
= 4 × (Area ∆OAB) = 4 × = 27 sq units
4 3 
x 2
y 2 N  ,− 6 .
116. Let E1 : + 2 = 1, where a > b 2 
2
a b
For orthocentre of ∆F1 MN , clearly one altitude is X -axis
x2 y 2
and E 2 : 2 + 2 = 1, where c < d i.e. y = 0 and altitude from M to F1 N is
c d 5  3
Also, S : x 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = 2 y − 6= x − 
2 6 2
Tangent at P ( x1 , y1 ) to S is x + y = 3
9
To find point of contact put x = 3 − y in S, we get P(1, 2) Putting y = 0 in above equation, we getx = −
10
writing equation of tangent in parametric form  9 
Orthocentre  − ,0
x −1 y −2 2 2  10 
= =±
−1 1 3 119. Tangents to ellipse at M and N are
2 2
x y 6 x y 6
−2 2 2 −2 + = 1 and − =1
x= + 1 or + 1 and y = + 2 or +2 6 8 6 8
3 3 3 3
their intersection point is R (6, 0)
1 5 8 4
⇒ x = or and y = or 3 
3 3 3 3 Also, normal to parabola at M  , 6 is
2 
 5 4  1 8
∴ Q  ,  and R  ,  6 3
 3 3  3 3 y − 6=− x − 
2  2
Equation of tangent to E1 at Q is
5x 4y x y 7 
+ = 1 which is identical to + = 1 Its intersection with x-axis is Q  , 0
3a 2 3b 2 3 3 2 
4 1 1 5 5 6
⇒ a = 5 and b = 4 ⇒ e1 = 1 − =
2 2 2
Now, ar ( ∆MQR ) = × × 6=
5 5 2 2 4
Equation of tangent to E 2 at R is Also, area ( MF1 NF2 ) = 2 × Area of ( F1 MF2 )
x 8y x y 1
+ = 1 identical to + = 1 =2 × ×2 × 6 =2 6
3c 2 3d 2 3 3 2
1 7 area (∆MQR ) 5 6
⇒ c = 1, d = 8 ⇒ e 2 = 1 − =
2 2 2
= =5:8
8 8 area (MF1 NF2 ) 4 × 2 6
43 7 27
∴ e1 + e 2 = , e1e 2 =
2 2
, e12 − e 22 = 1 a
40 2 10 40 120. Here, e = and x = − =−4
2 e
x2 y 2 2
117. Ellipse + = 1 ⇒ a = 3, b = 5 and e = ∴ a =2
9 5 3 and b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 ) = 4 (1 − 1 / 4 ) = 3
∴ f1 = 2 and f 2 = − 2 x2 y 2
P1 :y 2 = 8 x and P2 :y 2 = − 16 x ∴ Equation of ellipse is + =1
4 3
2
T1 :y = m1 x + ⇒ Equation of normal at (1, 3/2) is
m1 4 x 3y
It passes through (−4, 0), − = 4 −3
2 1 1 3 /2
0 = − 4m1 + ⇒ m12 =
m1 2 or 4 x − 2y = 1
CHAPTER

07
Hyperbola
Learning Part
Session 1
● Hyperbola : Definition ● Standard Equation of Hyperbola
● The Foci and Two Directrices of a Hyperbola ● Tracing of the Hyperbola
● Some Terms Related to Hyperbola ● Focal Distances of a Point
● Conjugate Hyperbola ● Position of a Point with Respect to a Hyperbola
● Intersection of a Line and a Hyperbola

Session 2
● Equations of Tangents in Different Forms ● Equations of Normals in Different Forms
● Pair of Tangents ● Chord of Contact
● Equation of the Chord Bisected at a Given Point

Session 3
● Diameter ● Conjugate Diameters

● Properties of Hyperbola ● Intersection of Conjugate Diameters and Hyperbola

● Director Circle ● Asymptotes

● Rectangular Hyperbola ● The Rectangular Hyperbola xy = c

2

● Study of Hyperbola xy = c
2 ● Properties of Rectangular Hyperbola xy = c
2

● Reflection Property of a Hyperbola

● Equation of a Hyperbola Referred to Two Perpendicular Lines

Practice Part
● JEE Type Examples
● Chapter Exercises

Arihant on Your Mobile !

Exercises with the #L
symbol can be practised on your mobile. See inside cover page to activate for free.
Session 1
Hyperbola : Definition, Standard Equation of Hyperbola,
The Foci and Two Directrices of a Hyperbola, Tracing of
the Hyperbola, Focal Distances of a Point, Conjugate
Hyperbola, Position of a Point with Respect to a
Hyperbola, Intersection of a Line and a Hyperbola

Hyperbola : Definition \ The focus S is (CS , 0 ) i.e. (ae , 0 ) and subtracting Eq. (i)
The locus of a point which moves in a plane such that its from Eq. (ii), then
distance from a fixed point (i.e. focus) is e times its SA ¢ - SA = e ( A ¢ Z - AZ )
distance from a fixed line (i.e. directrix) is known as AA ¢ = e [(CA ¢ + CZ ) - (CA - CZ )]
hyperbola. For hyperbola e > 1. Þ AA ¢ = e (2 CZ ) (QCA = CA ¢ )
Þ 2a = e (2 CZ )
Standard Equation of Hyperbola \ CZ = a /e
Let S be the focus and ZM the directrix of the hyperbola. \ The directrix MZ is x = CZ = a /e
Draw SZ^ ZM . Divide SZ internally and externally in the æ a ö
ratio e : 1(e > 1) and let A and A¢ be their internal and or x - a /e = 0 çQe > 1 , \ < 1÷
è e ø
external points of division.
Y Now, draw PM^ MZ ,
SP
M′ M P
(x, y) \ = e or (SP ) 2 = e 2 ( PM ) 2
PM
axis 2
X′ X æ aö
(–ae, 0) S′(–a, 0) A′ Z′ C Z A (a, 0) S (ae, 0) or ( x - ae ) 2 + (y - 0 ) 2 = e 2 ç x - ÷
è eø
Directrix

Directrix

or ( x - ae ) 2 + y 2 = (ex - a ) 2
x= –a/e x=a/e
Y′ Þ x 2 + a 2 e 2 - 2aex + y 2 = e 2 x 2 - 2aex + a 2
then SA = e AZ …(i) Þ x 2 (e 2 - 1) - y 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)
and SA ¢ = e A ¢ Z …(ii)
x2 y2
Clearly A and A¢ will lie on the hyperbola. Let AA ¢ = 2a Þ - =1
and take C the mid-point of AA¢ as origin a2 a 2 (e 2 - 1)
\ CA = CA ¢ = a x2 y2
or - = 1 , where, b 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)
2 2
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the hyperbola and CA as a b
X-axis, the line through C perpendicular to CA as Y-axis. This is the standard equation of the hyperbola.
Then adding Eqs. (i) and (ii) Generally : The equation of the hyperbola whose focus is
\ SA + SA ¢ = e ( AZ + A ¢ Z ) the point (h, k ) and directrix is lx + my + n = 0 and whose
Þ CS - CA + CS + CA ¢ = e ( AA ¢ ) eccentricity is e, is
Þ 2CS = e (2a ) (QCA = CA ¢ ) (lx + my + n ) 2
( x - h ) 2 + (y - k ) 2 = e 2
\ CS = ae (l 2 + m 2 )
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 557

y2 x2
The Foci and Two Directrices Þ
b 2
=
a2
-1

y2
of a Hyperbola b2
=
a2
( x - a)( x + a)
...(i)

Q AN = CN - CA = ( x - a)
On the negative side of origin take a point S ¢ which is and A¢ N = CN + CA¢ = ( x + a)
such that and PN = y
CS = CS ¢ = ae
( PN ) 2 b2
a \ From Eq. (i), = 2
and another point Z ¢, then CZ = CZ ¢ = AN × A¢ N a
e
\ Coordinates of S ¢ are ( -ae , 0 ) and equation of second
directrix (i.e. Z ¢ M ¢ ) is Tracing of the Hyperbola
a
x =- Equation of the hyperbola is
e
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the hyperbola, then x2 y2
- =1 …(i)
2
S ¢ P = ePM ¢ or (S ¢ P ) = e ( PM ¢ ) 2 2 a2 b2
2 (i) Since only even powers of x and y occur in this
æ aö
or ( x + ae ) 2 + (y - 0 ) 2 = e 2 ç x + ÷ equation so it (hyperbola) is symmetrical about the
è eø both axes.
or ( x + ae ) 2 + y 2 = (ex + a ) 2 (ii) The hyperbola (i) does not cutY-axis in real points
or x 2 + 2aex + a 2 e 2 + y 2 = e 2 x 2 + 2aex + a 2 where as it cuts X-axis at (a, 0 ) and ( -a, 0 ).
(iii) The Eq. (i) may be written as
or x 2 (e 2 - 1) - y 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)
b
y =± (x 2 - a 2 )
x2 y2 a
or - =1
a2 a 2 (e 2 - 1) If follows that x 2 - a 2 ³ 0
x2 y2 \ x 2 ³ a2
or - = 1, where, b 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)
a2 b2 Þ x £ - a or x ³ a
The equation being the same as that of hyperbola when Hence, x Ï( -a, a )
a The curve does not exist in the region
S (ae , 0 ) is focus and MZ i.e. x = is directrix.
e x = - a to x = a .
Hence, coordinates of foci are ( ± ae , 0 ) and equations of (iv) As x increases, y also increases i.e. the curve extends
directrices are to infinity.
x = ± a /e
Remarks
1. Distance between foci SS ¢ = 2ae and distance between
Some Terms Related to
directrices ZZ ¢ = 2a / e
2. Two hyperbolas are said to be similar if they have the same
Hyperbola
value of eccentricity. x2 y2
x 2 y2
Let the equation of hyperbola is =1 -
3. Since, - =1 a2 b2
a2 b2
(1) Centre : All chords passing through C and bisected
Y , y)
P (x at C.
Here C º (0, 0 )
x2 y2
X′ X (2) Eccentricity : For the hyperbola - = 1 we have
(–a, 0) A′ C A (a, 0) N a2 b2
b 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)
Y′ a2 + b2
Þ e2 =
a2
558 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

æ b2 ö ì (2b ) 2 ü (6) Latusrectum : The double ordinates LL¢ and L1 L1 ¢

Þ e = 1 + ç ÷ Þ e = í1 + are the latusrectums of the hyperbola. These lines are
2ý
è a2 ø î (2a ) þ perpendicular to transverse axis AA¢ and through the
ì (conjugate axis) 2 ü foci S and S ¢ respectively.
Þ e = í1 +
2ý Length of latusrectum
î (transverse axis) þ
Now, let LL ¢ = 2k, then LS = L ¢ S = k
(3) Foci and directrices : S and S ¢ are the foci of the
Coordinates of L and L¢ are (ae , k ) and (ae , - k )
ellipse and their coordinates are (ae , 0 ) and ( -ae , 0 )
respectively and ZM and Z ¢ M ¢ are two directrices of x2 y2
lie on the hyperbola - =1
the hyperbola and their equations are a2 b2
a a a 2e 2 k2
x= and x = - respectively. \ - =1
e e a2 b2
Y Q
L æ b2 ö
L1 (x, y) or k 2 = b 2 (e 2 - 1) = b 2 ç ÷ [Qb 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)]
M′ M P è a2 ø
N b2
X′
S' (-a, 0) A′ Z′ C Z A S
X \ k= (Qk > 0 )
a
2b 2
\ 2k = = LL ¢
L 1′ L′ a
Y′ Q′ 2b 2
\ Length of latusrectum LL ¢ = L1 L ¢ 1 = and end
(4) Axes : The points A (a, 0 ) and A ¢ ( -a, 0 ) are called the a
points of latusrectums are
vertices of the hyperbola and line AA¢ is called
transverse axis and the line perpendicular to its æ b2 ö æ b2 ö
L º ç ae , ÷ ; L ¢ º ç ae , - ÷ ;
through the centre (0, 0 ) of the hyperbola is called è a ø è a ø
conjugate axis.
æ b2 ö æ b2 ö
The length of transverse and conjugate axes are taken L1 º ç -ae , ÷ ; L1 ¢ º ç -ae , - ÷ respectively.
as 2a and 2b respectively. è a ø è a ø
(5) Double ordinates : If Q be a point on the hyperbola (7) Focal chord : A chord of hyperbola passing through
draw QN perpendicular to the axis of the hyperbola its focus is called a focal chord.
and produced to meet the curve again at Q ¢. Then (8) Parametric equations of the hyperbola : Let
QQ ¢ is called a double ordinate of Q. x2 y2
If abscissa of Q is h, then ordinates of Q are - = 1 be the hyperbola with centre C and
a2 b2
y2 h2 transverse axis A ¢ A. Therefore, circle drawn with
=-1
b2
a2 centre C and segment A ¢ A as a diameter is called
b auxiliary circle of the hyperbola.
\ y =± (h 2 - a 2 )
a x2 y2
- =1
b a2 b2
\ y= (h 2 - a 2 ) (for I quadrant)
a Y
and ordinate of Q ¢ is x, y
)
Q P(
b
y =- (h 2 - a 2 ) (for IV quadrant) 90°
a φ
φ N
X′ A (a, 0) X
Hence, coordinates of Q and Q ¢ are (–a, 0)A′ (0, 0)C

æ b ö æ b ö
ç h, (h 2 - a 2 ) ÷ and ç h , - (h 2 - a 2 ) ÷
è a ø è a ø
respectively.
Y'
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 559

\ Equation of the auxiliary circle is x 2 + y 2 = a 2 If it is focal chord, then pass through ( ae, 0 ) or ( -ae, 0 ). Suppose it
pass through ( ae, 0 ), then
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the hyperbola ecos æç 1
f - f2ö æ f1 + f 2 ö
÷ - 0 = cos ç ÷
x2 y2 è 2 ø è 2 ø
- = 1. Draw PN perpendicular to X-axis. f - f2ö
a2 b2 cos æç 1 ÷
è 2 ø 1
Þ =
Let NQ be a tangent to the auxiliary circle f + f2ö e
cos æç 1 ÷
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 . Join CQ è 2 ø
f - f 2 ö - cos æ f 1 + f2 ö
Let ÐQCN = f cos æç 1 ÷ ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø 1- e
Þ =
Here, P and Q are the corresponding points of the f - f2ö æ f 1 + f2 ö 1 + e
cos æç 1 ÷ + cos ç ÷
hyperbola and the auxiliary circle. f is the eccentric è 2 ø è 2 ø
angle of P × (0 £ f < 2p ) or
f1 ö f
tan ç ÷ tan æç 2 ö÷ =
æ 1- e
Since, è2ø è 2 ø 1+ e
Q º (a cos f, a sin f)
CN Hence, if f 1 and f 2 are the eccentric angles of extremities of a
Now, x = CN = × CQ = sec f× a x 2 y2
CQ focal chord of the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1, then
a b
f f 1- e 1+ e
\ x = CN = a sec f tan æç 1 ö÷ tanæç 2 ö÷ = or
è2ø è 2 ø 1+ e 1- e
\ P ( x , y ) º (a sec f, y )
according as focus ( ae, 0 ) or ( -ae, 0 ).
x2 y2
Q P lies on - =1
a2 b2

\
a 2 sec 2 f
-
y2
=1
Focal Distances of a Point
a2 b2 The difference of the focal distances of any point on the
y2 hyperbola is constant and equal to length of the transverse
or = sec 2 f - 1 = tan2 f axis of the hyperbola.
2
b
\ y = ± b tan f x2 y2
The hyperbola is - =1 …(i)
\ y = b tan f (P lies in I quadrant) a2 b2
The equations of x = a sec f and y = b tan f are The foci S and S ¢ are (ae , 0 ) and ( -ae , 0 ).
known as the parametric equations of the hyperbola The equation of its directrices MZ and M ¢ Z ¢ are
x2 y2 x=
a
and x = -
a
=1 -
a2 b2 e e
Position of points Q an auxiliary circle and the respectively.
corresponding point P which describes the hyperbola and Y
0 £ f < 2p . M
M′ P
f varies from Q (a cos f , a sin f) P (a sec f, b tan f)
p I I X′ X
0 to S′ A′ Z′ C Z A S
2
p II III
to p
2
3p III II Y′
p to
2
3p IV IV Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be any point on Eq. (i).
to 2p
2 æ aö
Now SP = ePM = e ç x 1 - ÷ = ex 1 - a
è eø
Remark
Equation of the chord joining the points P º ( a sec f 1, b tan f 1) and æ aö
and S ¢ P ¢ = ePM ¢ = e ç x 1 + ÷ = ex 1 + a
Q º ( a sec f2, b tan f2 ) is è eø
x f - f2ö y æ f 1 + f 2 ö = cos æ f 1 + f 2 ö
cos æç 1 ÷ - sin ç ÷ ç ÷ \ S ¢ P - SP = (ex 1 + a ) - (ex 1 - a ) = 2a = AA ¢
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø
= Transverse axis
560 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

A hyperbola is the locus of a point which moves in a plane its shape is shown alongside.
such that the difference of its distances from two fixed Y
point (foci) is always constant.
S′
y Example 1 To find the equation of the hyperbola (0, be)

from the definition that hyperbola is the locus of a

point which moves such that the difference of its Z B (0, b) y = b/e
distances from two fixed points is constant with the
fixed point as foci. C
Sol. Let two fixed point be S (ae , 0) and S ¢ ( -ae , 0). Let P ( x , y ) X′ X
Z′ y = –b/e
be a moving point such that
B′ (0, –b)
S ¢ P - SP = constant = 2a (say)
i.e. ( x + ae )2 + (y - 0)2 - ( x - ae )2 + (y - 0)2 = 2a
S′
or ( x 2 + y 2 + 2aex + a 2e 2 ) (0, –be)

- ( x 2 + y 2 - 2aex + a 2e 2 ) = 2a …(i) Y′
Let 2 2
l = x + y + 2aex + a e 2 2
…(ii) x2 y2
Various results related to hyperbola - =1
and m = x 2 + y 2 - 2aex + a 2e 2 …(iii) a2 b2
and its conjugate
Eq. (i) can be re-written as
l - m = 2a …(iv)
x2 y2 x2 y2
- + = 1 or - = -1
From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), a2 b2 a2 b2
l - m = 4aex are given in the following table
Þ ( l + m ) ( l - m ) = 4aex
x2 y2
Þ 2a ( l + m ) = 4aex [from Eq. (iv)] Hyperbola - + =1
x2 y2 a2
b2
Basic - =1
or l + m = 2ex …(v) a2 b2 x2 y2
fundamentals or - = -1
Adding Eqs. (iv) and (v), then a2 b2

2 l = 2a + 2ex Centre (0 , 0 ) (0 , 0 )
Length of transverse
Þ l = a + ex Þ l = (a + ex )2 axis
2a 2b

x 2 + y 2 + 2aex + a 2e 2 = a 2 + 2aex + e 2 x 2 Length of conjugate

2b 2a
axis
2 2 2 2 2
or x ( e - 1) - y = a ( e - 1)
Foci ( ±ae , 0 ) ( 0 , ± be )
x2 y2 Equation of directrices x = ± a /e y = ± b /e
or - =1
a2 a 2 ( e 2 - 1)
æa 2 + b 2 ö æa 2 + b 2 ö
Eccentricity e= ç ÷ e= ç ÷
x2 y2 è a
2
è b
2
or - = 1, where b 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1). ø ø
a2 b2
2b 2 2a 2
Length of latusrectum
a b

Conjugate Hyperbola Parametric coordinates

(a sec f , b tan f),
0 £ f < 2p
(a tan f , b sec f),
0 £ f < 2p
SP = ex 1 - a and SP = ey1 - b and
The hyperbola whose transverse and conjugate axes are Focal radii
S ¢ P = ex 1 + a S ¢ P = ey1 + b
respectively the conjugate and transverse axes of a given Difference of focal
2a 2b
hyperbola is called the conjugate hyperbola of the given radii (S ¢ P - SP )
hyperbola. Tangents at the x = - a, x = a y = - b, y = b
vertices
The conjugate hyperbola of the hyperbola
Equation of the y=0 x=0
x2 y2 x2 y2 transverse axis
- = 1 is - + =1
a2 b2 a2 b2 Equation of the
conjugate axis
x=0 y=0
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 561

2
Remarks ì 2x + y - 1ü
1. If the centre of hyperbola is (h,k) and axes are parallel to the Þ ( x - 1) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 = 3 í ý
coordinates axes, then its equation is î 4 +1 þ
( x - h) 2
-
( y - k )2
= 1.
Þ 5{ x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 4y + 5}
2 2
a b = 3( 4 x 2 + y 2 + 1 + 4 xy - 2y - 4 x )
By shifting the origin at ( h, k ) without rotating the coordinate
axes, the above equation reduces to Þ 7 x 2 - 2y 2 + 12xy - 2x + 14y - 22 = 0
X2 Y2 which is the required hyperbola.
2
- =1
a b2
where, X = X + h, y = Y + k y Example 3 Find the lengths of transverse axis and
2. If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of a hyperbola and its conjugate axis, eccentricity, the coordinates of foci,
conjugate, respectively, then e12 + e22 = 1 . vertices, lengths of the latusrectum and equations of
Proof For hyperbola b2 = a2 ( e12 - 1) the directrices of the following hyperbolas
b2 a2 + b2 (i) 9 x 2 - y 2 = 1 (ii) 16x 2 - 9y 2 = - 144
or e12 = 1 + = … (i)
a2 a2 Sol. (i) The equation 9 x 2 - y 2 = 1 can be written as
2 2 2
and for conjugate hyperbola a = b ( e2 - 1)
x2 y2
- = 1.
a2 a2 + b2 (1 / 9 ) 1
or e22 = 1 + 2
= … (ii)
b b2 x2 y2
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get This is of the form 2
- =1
1 1 a b2
+ = 1 or e1-2 + e2-2 = 1
e12 e22 1
\ a2 = , b2 = 1
9
3. The foci of a hyperbola and its conjugate are concyclic and 1
form the vertices of a square. Þ a = ,b = 1
3
4. A simple method to find the coordinates of the centre of the
hyperbola expressed as a general equation of degree two
Length of transverse axis : The length of transverse, axis
should be remembered as : 2
= 2a =
Let f( x, y ) = 0 represents a hyperbola. 3
¶f ¶f Length of conjugate axis : The length of conjugate axis
Find (differentiate w.r.t x keeping y as constant) and
¶x ¶y
= 2b = 2
(differentiate w.r.t. y keeping x as constant).
Then the point of intersection of
¶f
= 0 and
¶f
= 0 gives the
æ b2 ö 1
Eccentricity : e = ç1 + 2 ÷ = 1 + = 10
¶x ¶y è a ø (1 / 9 )
centre of the hyperbola.
æ 10 ö
y Example 2 Find the equation of the hyperbola whose Foci : The coordinates of the foci are ( ±ae , 0) i.e. ç ± , 0÷ .
è 3 ø
directrix is 2x + y = 1, focus (1, 2) and eccentricity 3.
Vertices : The coordinates of the vertices are ( ± a, 0) i.e.
Sol. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the hyperbola. Draw PM
æ 1 ö
perpendicular from P on the directrix. ç ± , 0÷.
è 3 ø
Then, by definition SP = e PM
Length of latusrectum : The length of latusrectum
Þ (SP ) = e 2 ( PM )2
2
2b 2 2 (1)2
Y S (1, 2) = = =6
a 1/3
Equation of the directrices : The equations of the
P (x, y) directrices are
a
M x=±
e
1/3
i.e. x=±
X′ X 10
O
2x

1
or x=±
+
y=

3 10
1

Y′
562 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(ii) The equation 16x 2 - 9y 2 = - 144 can be written as ìa 1 b 1 ü

y Example 5 Prove that the point í æçt + ö÷ , æçt - ö÷ ý
î2 è t ø 2 è t øþ
2 2
x y
- = -1
9 16 lies on the hyperbola for all values of t (t ¹ 0) .
x2 y2
This is of the form 2 - 2 = - 1 aæ 1ö
a b Sol. Let x = çt + ÷
2 è tø
\ a 2 = 9, b 2 = 16 2x 1
or =t +
Þ a = 3, b = 4 a t
Length of transverse axis : The length of transverse axis 2
æ 2x ö 2 1
= 2b = 8. or ç ÷ =t + 2 +2 …(i)
èa ø t
Length of conjugate axis : The length of conjugate axis
= 2a = 6. bæ 1ö
and let y = çt - ÷
2è tø
æ a2 ö æ 9ö 5
Eccentricity : e = ç1 + 2 ÷ = ç1 + ÷ = 2y 1
è b ø è 16 ø 4 or =t -
b t
Foci : The coordinates of the foci are (0, ± be ) i.e. (0, ± 5) 2
æ 2y ö 2 1
Vertices : The coordinates of the vertices are (0, ± b ) i.e. or ç ÷ =t + 2 -2 …(ii)
èbø t
(0, ± 4 ).
2a 2 Subtracting Eqs. (ii) from (i),
Length of latusrectum : The length of latusrectum = 4 x 2 4y 2
b - 2 =4
2 ( 3) 2
9 a2 b
= = x2 y2
4 2 or - =1
Equation of directrices : The equation of directrices are a2 b2
b which is hyperbola.
y=±
e
4
y Example 6 Show that the equation
y=±
(5 / 4 )
7 y 2 - 9 x 2 + 54 x - 28 y - 116 = 0 represent a hyperbola.
16 Find the coordinates of the centre, lengths of
Þ y=± transverse and conjugate axes, eccentricity,
5
latusrectum, coordinate of foci, vertices and equations
y Example 4 Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola of the directrices of the hyperbola.
whose latusrectum is half of its transverse axis. Sol. We have, 7y 2 - 9 x 2 + 54 x - 28y - 116 = 0
Sol. Let the equation of hyperbola be or 7 (y 2 - 4y ) - 9 ( x 2 - 6x ) - 116 = 0
x2 y2 or 7 (y 2 - 4y + 4 ) - 9 ( x 2 - 6x + 9 ) = 116 + 28 - 81
- =1
a2 b2
or 7 (y - 2)2 - 9 ( x - 3)2 = 63
2b 2
Then, transverse axis = 2 a and latusrectum = ( y - 2) 2 ( x - 3) 2
a or - =1
2 9 7
2b 1
According to question = (2a ) Y2 X2
a 2 or - =1
9 7
Þ 2b 2 = a 2 (Qb 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1))
where X = x - 3 andY = y - 2
Þ 2a 2 (e 2 - 1) = a 2 This equation represents conjugate hyperbola. Comparing
Þ 2e 2 - 2 = 1 it with
3 Y2 X2
Þ e2 = - 2 =1
2 b2 a
3 we get, b 2 = 9 and a 2 = 7
\ e=
2 \ b = 3 and a = 7
3 Centre : X = 0, Y = 0
Hence, the required eccentricity is .
2 i.e. x - 3 = 0, y - 2 = 0
\ Centre is (3, 2).
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 563

Length of transverse axis : Length of transverse axis ( x - 1) 2 ( y - 4 ) 2

= 2b = 6. - =1
æ 25 ö æ 75 ö
Length of conjugate axis : Length of conjugate axis ç ÷ ç ÷
è4ø è4ø
= 2a = 2 7 .
or 12 ( x - 1)2 - 4 (y - 4 )2 = 75
Eccentricity : The eccentricity e is given by
or 12 ( x 2 - 2x + 1) - 4 (y 2 - 8y + 16) = 75
a2 7 4
e = 1+ 2 = 1+ =
b 9 3 or 12x 2 - 4y 2 - 24 x + 32y - 127 = 0
Length of latusrectum : The length of latusrectum y Example 8 Obtain the equation of a hyperbola
2a 2 2 (7 ) 14 with coordinate axes as principal axes given that
= = =
b 3 3 the distances of one of its vertices from the foci
Foci : The coordinates of foci are (0, ± be ) are 9 and 1 units.
\ X = 0, Y = ± be
Sol. Let equation of hyperbola is
4
Þ x - 3 = 0, y - 2 = ± 3 ´ x2 y2
3 - =1 …(i)
a2 b2
or (3, 2 ± 4 )
If vertices are A (a , 0) and A ¢ ( -a , 0) and foci are S (ae , 0)
i.e. (3, - 2) and (3, 6)
and S ¢ ( -ae , 0).
Vertices : The coordinates of vertices are (0, ± b )
Given l (S ¢ A ) = 9 and l (SA ) = 1
or X = 0, Y = ± b
Þ a + ae = 9 and ae - a = 1
or x - 3 = 0, y - 2 = ± 3 or (3, 2 ± 3)
or a (1 + e ) = 9 and a (e - 1) = 1
or vertices are (3, - 1) and (3, 5)
a (1 + e ) 9
Equation of directrices : The equation of directrices are \ =
a ( e - 1) 1
b 5
Y =± Þ 1 + e = 9e - 9 Þ e =
e 4
3
Þ y -2= ± Q a (1 + e ) = 9
4 /3 5ö
æ
æ 9ö \ a ç1 + ÷ = 9 Þ a=4
Þ y = ç2 ± ÷ è 4ø
è 4ø
æ 25 ö
17 1 b 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1) = 16 ç - 1÷
i.e. y= and y = - è 16 ø
4 4 \ b2 = 9
y Example 7 Find the equation of the hyperbola whose From Eq. (i) equation of hyperbola is
foci are (6, 4) and ( -4, 4 ) and eccentricity is 2. x2 y2
- =1
Sol. The centre of the hyperbola is the mid-point of the line 16 9
joining the two foci. So, the coordinates of the centre are
æ6 - 4 4 + 4 ö y Example 9 The foci of a hyperbola coincide with the
ç , ÷ i.e. (1, 4 ) x2 y
2
è 2 2 ø foci of the ellipse + = 1. Find the equation of the
Let 2a and 2b be the lengths of transverse and conjugate 25 9
axes and let e be the eccentricity. Then, equation of hyperbola if its eccentricity is 2.
hyperbola is x2 y2
Sol. The given ellipse is + =1
( x - 1) 2 ( y - 4 ) 2 25 9
- =1
a2 b2 x2 y2
Q Distance between the foci = 2ae Comparing with + =1
a2 b2
(6 + 4 )2 + ( 4 - 4 )2 = 2a ´ 2 \ a 2 = 25 and b 2 = 9
Þ 10 = 4a b2 9 4
then eccentricity e = 1 - = 1- =
\ a = 5/2 a2 25 5
25 75 \ Foci of ellipse are ( ±ae , 0) i.e. ( ±4, 0)
\ b 2 = a 2 ( e 2 - 1) =
( 4 - 1) =
4 4 So, the coordinates of foci of the hyperbola are ( ± 4, 0).
Thus, the equation of the hyperbola is
564 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Let e ¢ be the eccentricity of the required hyperbola and its 1

replacing m by - in Eq. (i)
equation be m
2
x2 y2 æ 1ö
- =1 …(i) b2 - a2 ç - ÷
A 2 B2 1 è mø b 2m 2 - a 2
then = = ...(ii)
the coordinates of foci are ( ± Ae ¢ , 0) (CQ )2 æ
2 2 ç
2 2 2
æ 1 ö ö÷ a b (1 + m )
2

\ Ae ¢ = 4 Þ A ´ 2 = 4 Þ A = 2 a b ç1 + ç - ÷ ÷
è è mø ø
Also B 2 = A 2 ( e ¢ 2 - 1) (Qgiven e ¢ = 2)
Adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
= 4 ( 4 - 1) = 12 1 1 b 2 (1 + m 2 ) - a 2 (1 + m 2 )
Substituting the values of A and B in Eq. (i), we get + =
(CP )2 (CQ )2 a 2b 2 (1 + m 2 )
x2 y2
- = 1 or 3x 2 - y 2 - 12 = 0 b2 - a2 1 1
4 12 = 2 2
= 2
-
ab a b2
which is required hyperbola.

y Example 10 If two points P and Q on the hyperbola

x2 y
-
2
= 1 whose centre is C, are such that CP is
Position of a Point with
a2 b 2
perpendicular to CQ , a < b , then prove that
Respect to a Hyperbola
1 1 1 1 Theorem : The point ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on or inside the
2
+ 2
= 2
- .
(CP ) (CQ ) a b2 hyperbola
Sol. Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the given hyperbola. Let x2 y2
- =1
slope of CP is m, then equation of CP is y = mx . a2 b2
x2 y2
Solving, y = mx and - =1 x 12 y 12
a2 b2 according as - 1 <, = or > 0
-
Y a2 b2
Proof : Let P º ( x 1 , y 1 ) then Q º ( x 1 , y 2 )
P (x, y) Draw PL perpendicular to X-axis
P (x1, y1)
X′ X Y
C 90°
Q (x1, y2)
Q Interior Exterior
region region Interior region
X′ X
Y′ A′ C A L
Exterior
x2 m2x 2 region
- =1
a2 b2
Y′
a 2b 2
\ x2 =
(b 2 - a 2m 2 ) Clearly, PL > QL
2
am b 2 2 Þ y1 > y2
and y 2 = m2x 2 = y 12 y 22
b 2 - a 2m 2 Þ >
a 2b 2 b2 b2
\ x2 + y2 = (1 + m 2 ) y2 y2
(b 2 - a 2m 2 ) Þ - 1 <- 2
a 2b 2 (1 + m 2 ) b2 b2
\ (CP )2 = x 2 + y 2 = x 1 y 1 x 1 y 22
2 2 2
(b 2 - a 2m 2 ) Þ - < -
1 2
b -a m 2 2 a2 b2 a2 b2
Þ = ...(i)
(CP ) 2
a b (1 + m 2 ) 2 2 x 12 y 12 æ x2 y2 ö
Þ - < 1 çQQ ( x 1 , y 2 ) lies on - = 1÷
1 2 2 2 2
and equation of CQ is y=- x a b è a b ø
m x 12 y 12
Þ - -1<0
a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 565

Thus, the point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside the hyperbola. y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 - b 2 )

Hence the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on or inside the
hyperbola Hence, the line y = mx ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) will always be
x2 y2 tangent to the hyperbola.
- =1
2 2
a b Point of contact : Substituting c = ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) in
x 12 y 12 Eq. (iii)
according as - - 1 <, = or > 0.
a2 b2 (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) x 2 ± 2ma 2 (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) x + a 4m 2 = 0

y Example 11 Find the position of the point or ( x (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) ± a 2m ) 2 = 0

( 5, - 4 ) relative to the hyperbola 9 x 2 - y 2 = 1. a 2m a 2m
\ x =± =±
Sol. Since, 9 (5)2 - ( -4 )2 - 1 = 225 - 16 - 1 = 208 > 0, c
(a 2m 2 - b 2 )
2 2
So, the point (5, - 4 ) inside the hyperbola 9 x - y = 1.
a 4m 2 1 y2
From Eq. (i), . - =1
c2 a2 b2
Intersection of a Line and a Þ
y2
=
a 2m 2
-1 = -
(c 2 - a 2m 2 )
=
b2
b2 c2 c2 c2
Hyperbola b2
\ y =±
x2 y2 c
Let the hyperbola be =1 - ...(i)
a2 b2 æ a 2m b 2 ö
Hence, the point of contact is ç ± ,± ÷.
and the given line be y = mx + c ...(ii) è c c ø
Eliminating y from Eqs. (i) and (ii), This is known as m-point on the hyperbola.
2 2
x (mx + c )
- = 1 Þ b 2 x 2 - a 2 (mx + c ) 2 = a 2 b 2 Remark
2 2
a b If m = 0, then Eq. (iii) gives - b2x 2 + a2 ( b2 + c 2 ) = 0

Þ (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) x 2 + 2mca 2 x + a 2 (b 2 + c 2 ) = 0 …(iii) a2 ( b2 + c 2 )
x2 =
b2
Above equation being a quadratic in x gives two values of a
\ x=± ( b2 + c 2 )
x. It shows that every straight line will cut the hyperbola b
in two points, may be real, coincident or imaginary, which gives two values of x.
according as discriminant of Eq. ( iii ) >, =, < 0
y Example 12 Prove that the straight linelx + my + n = 0
i.e. 4m 2 c 2 a 4 - 4 (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) a 2 (b 2 + c 2 ) >, =, < 0 2
x2 y
or - a 2m 2 + b 2 + c 2 >, =, < 0 touches the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 if
a b
or c 2 >, =, < a 2m 2 - b 2 …(iv) a 2l 2 - b 2m 2 = n 2 .
Condition of Tangency : If the line (ii) touches the l n
Sol. The given line is lx + my + n = 0 or y = - x-
hyperbola (i), then Eq. (iii) has equal roots. m m
\ Discriminant of Eq. ( iii ) = 0 Comparing this line with
2 2 2 2 y = Mx + c …(i)
Þ c =a m -b
l n
\ M=- and c = -
or c = ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) …(v) m m
This line (i) will touch the hyperbola
So, the line y = mx + c touches the hyperbola
x2 y2
x 2
y 2 - = 1 if c 2 = a 2 M 2 - b 2
- = 1 if c 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2 a2 b2
a2 b2 n2 a 2l 2
Þ = - b 2 or a 2l 2 - b 2m 2 = n 2
(which is condition of tangency) m2 m2
Substituting the value of c from Eq. (v) in Eq. (ii)
566 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y Example 13 Show that the line x cos a + y sin a = p x2 y2

Comparing this with 2
- 2
= 1, we get a 2 = 9, b 2 = 16
touches the hyperbola a b
2 and comparing this line y = 2x + l with y = mx + c
x2 y
- = 1 if a 2 cos 2 a - b 2 sin 2 a = p 2 . \ m = 2 and c = l
a2 b2 If the line y = 2x + l touches the hyperbola
Sol. The given line is 16x 2 - 9y 2 = 144
x cos a + y sin a = p
then c 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2
Þ y sin a = - x cos a + p
Þ y = - x cot x + p cosec a Þ l 2 = 9 (2)2 - 16 = 36 - 16 = 20
Comparing this line with y = mx + c \ l = ±2 5
Þ m = - cot a , c = p cosec a
Since, the given line touches the hyperbola y Example 15 If it possible to draw the tangent to the
2
x2 y2 x2 y
- = 1, then c 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2 hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 having slope 2, then find its
a2 b2 a b
Þ p 2 cosec 2a = a 2 cot 2 a - b 2 range of eccentricity.
or p 2 = a 2 cos 2 a - b 2 sin 2 a Sol. Tangent having slope m is y = mx ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 )

y Example 14 For what value of l does the line The tangent having slope 2 is y = 2x ± ( 4a 2 - b 2 ), which
y = 2x + l touches the hyperbola 16 x 2 - 9 y 2 = 144 ? is real if
4a 2 - b 2 ³ 0
Sol. Equation of hyperbola is
16x 2 - 9y 2 = 144 b2
or £ 4 or e 2 - 1 £ 4 or e 2 £ 5
a2
x2 y2
or - =1 or 1<e £ 5 (for hyperbola e > 1)
9 16

Exercise for Session 1

1. The eccentricity of the conic represented by x 2 - y 2 - 4x + 4y + 16 = 0 is
1
(a) 1 (b) (c) –1 (d) 2
2

2. If e1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of the conic sections 16x 2 + 9y 2 = 144 and 9x 2 - 16y 2 = 144, then
(a) e12 - e22 = 1 (b) e12 + e22 < 3 (c) e12 + e22 = 3 (d) e12 + e22 > 3

3. The transverse axis of a hyperbola is of length 2a and a vertex divides the segment of the axis between the
centre and the corresponding focus in the ratio 2 : 1, then the equation of the hyperbola is
(a) 4x 2 - 5y 2 = 4a 2 (b) 4x 2 - 5y 2 = 5a 2 (c) 5x 2 - 4y 2 = 4a 2 (d) 5x 2 - 4y 2 = 5a 2

4. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latusrectum is 8 and conjugate axis is equal to half of the distance
between the foci, is
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 3 3 3

5. The straight line x + y = 2 p will touch the hyperbola 4x 2 - 9y 2 = 36, if

(a) p 2 = 2 (b) p 2 = 5 (c) 5p 2 = 2 (d) 2p 2 = 5

x2 y2
6. The equation of the tangent, parallel to y - x + 5 = 0 drawn to - = 1 is
3 2
(a) x - y - 1 = 0 (b) x - y + 2 = 0 (c) x + y - 1 = 0 (d) x + y + 2 = 0
 x2 y2 x2 y2 æ1 1ö
7. If e and e ¢ are the eccentricities of the hyperbola 2
- 2 = 1 and 2 - 2 = 1, then the point ç , ÷ lies on the
è e e ¢ø
a b b a
circle
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 1 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 2 (c) x 2 + y 2 = 3 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 4

8. If e and e ¢ are the eccentricities of the ellipse 5x 2 + 9y 2 = 45 and the hyperbola 5x 2 - 4y 2 = 45 respectively,
then ee ¢ =
(a) -1 (b) 1 (c) -4 (d) 9
2 2
x y
9. The equation + = 1 represents
10 - l 6 - l
(a) a hyperbola if l < 6 (b) an ellipse if l > 6 (c) a hyperbola if 6 < l < 10 (d) an ellipse if 0 < l < 6

10. 2
The eccentricity of the hyperbola conjugate to x - 3y = 2x + 8 is2

2
(a) (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) 2
3
x2 y2
11. For hyperbola - = 1 which of the following remains constant with change in ‘a’
cos 2 a sin2 a
(a) Abscissae of vertices (b) Abscissae of foci (c) Eccentricity (d) Directrix
2 2 2 2
x y x y 1
12. If the foci of the ellipse + = 1 and the hyperbola - = coincide, then the value of b 2 is
16 b 2 144 81 25
(a) 1 (b) 5 (c) 7 (d) 9

13. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose foci are (0, ± 10 ) and which passes through the point (2, 3).

14. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose foci are (10, 5) and ( -2, 5) and eccentricity 3.
x y x y 1
15. Prove that the straight lines - = m and + = always meet on a hyperbola.
a b a b m

16. Find the centre, eccentricity and length of axes of the hyperbola 3x 2 - 5y 2 - 6x + 20y - 32 = 0.

17. Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola conjugate to the hyperbola x 2 - 3y 2 = 1.

18. For what value of l, does the line y = 3x + l touch the hyperbola 9x 2 - 5y 2 = 45 ?

19. Find the equation of the tangent to the hyperbola 4x 2 - 9y 2 = 1 which is parallel to the line 4y = 5x + 7. Also find
the point of contact.
Session 2
Equations of Tangents in Different Forms,
Equations of Normals in Different Forms, Pair
of Tangents, Chord of Contact, Equation of the
Chord Bisected at a Given Point

Equations of Tangents in Þ
y 2 - y 1 b 2 (x 1 + x 2 )
= …(iv)
Different Forms x 2 - x 1 a 2 (y 1 + y 2 )
Equation of PQ is
1. Point form (first principal method) : y2 - y1
Theorem : The equation of the tangent to the hyperbola y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) …(v)
x2 - x1
x2 y2
= 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
- From Eqs. (iv) and (v),
a2 b2
b 2 (x 1 + x 2 )
xx 1 yy 1 y - y1 = . (x - x 1 ) …(vi)
- = 1. a 2 (y 1 + y 2 )
a2 b2
Now, tangent at P , Q ® P
Proof : Equation of hyperbola is
i.e. x 2 ® x 1 and y 2 ® y 1 , then Eq. (vi) becomes
x2 y2
- =1 …(i) b 2 (2 x 1 )
2
a b 2 y - y1 = × (x - x 1 )
a 2 (2y 1 )
Let P º ( x 1 , y 1 ) and Q º ( x 2 , y 2 ) be any
two points in Eq. (i), then yy 1 - y 12 xx 1 - x 12 xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12
or = or - = -
x 12 y 12 b2 a2 a2 b2 a2 b2
- =1 …(ii)
a2 b2 xx 1 yy 1
or - =1 [from Eq. (ii)]
x 22 y 22 a2 b2
and - =1 …(iii) which is the required equation of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ).
a2 b2
Y T Remark
P (x1, y1) The equation of tangent at ( x1, y1 ) can be obtained by replacing x 2
x + x1 y + y1 xy + x1 y
by xx1 , y 2 by yy1 , x by , y by and xy by 1 . This
2 2 2
X′ X method is applied only when the equation of conic is a polynomial
A′ C A
of second degree in x and y.
Q (x2, y2)

2. Parametric form :
Y′
Theorem : The equation of tangent to the hyperbola
Subtracting Eq. (ii) from Eq. (iii), then
x2 y2
1 1 2 - = 1 at (a sec f, b tan f) is
( x 22 - x 12 ) - (y 2 - y 12 ) = 0 a2 b2
2
a b2
x y
( x 2 - x 1 ) ( x 2 + x 1 ) (y 2 - y 1 ) (y 2 + y 1 ) sec f - tan f = 1
Þ - =0 a b
a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 569

Proof : Since, equation of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is Substituting the value of y = mx + c in Eq. (i), then
xx 1 yy 1 x2 (mx + c ) 2
- =1 - =1
a2 b2 a2 b2
Now, replacing x 1 by a sec f and y 1 by b tan f , we get
or (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) x 2 + 2mca 2 x + a 2 (c 2 + b 2 ) = 0
x y
sec f - tan f = 1 must have equal roots
a b
Remark \ 4a 4m 2 c 2 - 4 (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) a 2 (c 2 + b 2 ) = 0
The point of intersection of tangents at ‘q’ and ‘ f’ on the hyperbola [QB 2 - 4 AC = 0 ]
x 2 y2
- = 1 is
a2 b2 Þ a 2m 2 c 2 - (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) (b 2 + c 2 ) = 0
æ æ q - f ö b sin æ q + f ö ö
ç a cos ç
è 2 ø
÷ ç
è 2 ø÷
÷÷ Þ a 2m 2 c 2 - a 2 b 2m 2 - a 2m 2 c 2 + b 4 + b 2 c 2 = 0
ç ,
ç æ q + f ö cos æ q + f ö ÷ Þ - a 2 b 2m 2 + b 4 + b 2 c 2 = 0 Þ c 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2
ç cos çè ÷ ç
è 2 ø ÷ø
÷
è 2 ø

Remembering method : \ c = ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 )
Q Equations of chord joining ‘q’ and ‘ f’ is Substituting this value of c in y = mx + c , we get
x æ q - fö y
cos ç
æ q + fö æ q + fö y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 - b 2 ) …(ii)
÷ - sin ç ÷ = cos ç ÷
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø
as the required equation of tangents of hyperbola in terms
ì æ q - fö ü ì æ q + fö ü of slope.
ï cos ç ÷ ï sin çè 2 ÷ø ï
xï è 2 ø ïï y ï ï x2 y2
or í ý- í ý =1 Q Tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the hyperbola - = 1 is
aï æ q + fö ï b
cos ç ïcos æç q + f öï a2 b2
÷ ÷
ïî è 2 ø ïþ ïî è 2 ø ïþ xx 1 yy 1
-
=1 …(iii)
2
ì æ q - fö ü ì æ q + fö ü a b2
ï a cos ç ÷ ïb sin çè 2 ÷ø ï
x ï è 2 ø ïï y ï ï On comparing Eqs. (ii) and (iii) we get
or í ý- í ý =1
a 2 ï cos æ q + f ö ï b 2 æ
ï cos ç q + f ö x 1 /a 2 y 1 /b 2 1
ç ÷ ÷ï = =±
ïî è 2 ø ïþ ïî è 2 ø ïþ m 1 a m2 - b2
2

ì æ q - fö æ q + fö ü Thus, the coordinates of the points of contact are

ïa cos çè 2 ÷ø b sin çè 2 ÷ø ï
ï ï æ ö
i.e. í , ý ± a 2m b2
ç ÷
ï cos æç q + f ö÷ cos æç q + f ö÷ ï ç (a 2m - b 2 )
,±
2 2 ÷
ïî è 2 ø è 2 ø ïþ è (a m - b ) ø
Remark
3. Slope form : The equations of tangents of slope m to the hyperbola
Theorem : The equations of tangents of slope m to the x 2 y2
- 2 + 2 = 1are given by y = mx ± ( b2 - a2m2 )
x2 y2 a b
hyperbola - = 1 is given by and the coordinates of the points of contact are
a2 b2
æ a2m b2 ö
çm ÷
y = mx ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) ç
,m
è ( b2 - a2m2 ) ( b2 - a2m2 ) ÷ø
The coordinates of the points of contact are
æ ö y Example 16 Find the equation of the tangent to the
a 2m b2
ç± ,± ÷ hyperbola x 2 - 4 y 2 = 36 which is perpendicular to the
ç 2 2
(a m - b 2 2 2 2 ÷
(a m - b ) ø
è line x - y + 4 = 0.
Proof : Let y = mx + c be a tangent to the hyperbola Sol. Let m be the slope of the tangent. Since, the tangent is
2 2
perpendicular to the line x - y + 4 = 0
x y \ m ´ 1 = -1
- =1 …(i)
2
a b2 Þ m = -1
570 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y2 ìï b2 a2 üï
Since x 2 - 4y 2 = 36 or - =1 and í m
36 9 ,m ý [from Eqs. (iii) and (iv)]
ïî (a 2 - b 2 ) (a 2 - b 2 ) ïþ
x2 y2
Comparing this with 2
=1- Length of common tangent i.e. the distance between the
a b2 (a 2 + b 2 )
\ a 2 = 36 and b 2 = 9 above points is 2 and equation of common
(a 2 - b 2 )
So the equation of tangents are tangent on putting the values of sec f and tan f in Eqs. (i) is
y = ( -1) x ± 36 ´ ( -1)2 - 9 x y
± m =1
2 2
Þ y = - x ± 27 (a - b ) (a - b 2 )
2

or x +y ±3 3 =0 or x m y = ± (a 2 - b 2 )
Aliter : The given two hyperbolas are
y Example 17 Find the equation and the length of the
common tangents to hyperbola x2 y2
- =1 …(i)
2 a2 b2
x2 y y2 x2
- = 1 and - = 1. x2 y2
a2 b2 a2 b2 and - =1 …(ii)
( -b 2 ) ( -a 2 )
Sol. Tangent at (a sec f, b tan f ) on the 1st hyperbola is
we know that
x y
sec f - tan f = 1 …(i) y = mx ± (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) …(iii)
a b
Similarly tangent at any point (b tan q , a sec q ) on 2nd is tangent to Eq. (i) for all m.
hyperbola is Similarly y = m1x ± ( -b 2 ) m12 - ( -a 2 )
y x
sec q - tan q = 1 …(ii)
a b y = m1x ± (a 2 - b 2m12 ) …(iv)
If Eqs. (i) and (ii) are common tangents then they should be will be tangent to Eq. (ii)
identical. Comparing the coefficients of x and y For common tangents to Eqs. (i) and (ii), the lines (iii)
sec q tan f and (iv) must be identical
Þ =-
a b i.e. m = m1 and a 2m 2 - b 2 = a 2 - b 2m12
a
or sec q = - tan f …(iii) i.e. ( a 2 + b 2 ) ( m 2 - 1) = 0
b
tan q sec f Þ m2 = 1 Þ m = ± 1
and - =
b a \ The equation of common tangent lines are
b y = ± x ± (a 2 - b 2 ) [from Eq. (iii)]
or tan q = - sec f …(iv)
a
or y m x = ± (a 2 - b 2 ) …(v)
Q sec 2 q - tan 2 q = 1
Equation of tangent to Eq. (i) at ( x 1, y1 ) is
a2 b2
Þ tan 2 f - sec 2 f = 1 [from Eqs. (iii) and (iv)] xx 1 yy1
b2 a2 - 2 =1 …(vi)
a2 b
a2 b2
or tan 2 f - (1 + tan 2 f ) = 1 On comparing Eqs.(v) and (vi), then
b2 a2 x 1 / a 2 -y 1 / b 2 1
æ a2 b2 ö b2 = =
or 2
ç 2 - 2 ÷ tan f = 1 + 2 m1 1 ± (a 2 - b 2 )
èb a ø a
æ a2 b2 ö
2 b2 i.e. çm ,m ÷
\ tan f = ç 2 2 2 2 ÷
a2 - b2 è ( a - b ) ( a - b ) ø
a2 and equation of tangent to Eq. (ii) at ( x 2 , y 2 ) is
and sec2 f = 1 + tan 2 f = 2 2 xx 2 yy 2
a -b - =1 …(vii)
( -b 2 ) ( -a 2 )
Hence, the points of contact are
ìï üï On comparing Eqs. (v) and (vii), then
a2 b2
í± ,± ý x 2 / ( -b 2 ) y 2 1
ïî (a 2 - b 2 ) (a 2 - b 2 ) ïþ = =
m1 1 ± (a - b 2 )
2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 571

æ b2 a2 ö a2
i.e. ç± ,± ÷ and RHS = 2
m2 - b2
ç cos a
è (a 2 - b 2 ) (a 2 - b 2 ) ÷ø
a2 b 2 cos 2 a
The points of contact are = ´ - b2
cos 2 a æ f
a 2 sin 2 ç 1
+ f 2ö
æ ö ÷
ç± a2 b2 ÷ è 2 ø
,±
ç 2 2 2 2 ÷
è ( a - b ) ( a - b ) ø b2
= - b2
æ ö 2 æ f1 + f 2 ö
çm b2 a2 ÷
sin ç ÷
and ,m è 2 ø
ç (a 2 - b 2 ) (a 2 - b 2 ) ÷ø
è
æf + f2 ö
b 2 cos 2 ç 1 ÷
Hence, the length of common tangent is è 2 ø
= Hence proved.
(a 2 + b 2 ) æf + f2 ö
2× sin ç 1 ÷
(a 2 - b 2 ) è 2 ø

y Example 18 PQ is the chord joining the points f 1 and y Example 19 If the line y = mx + (a 2m 2 - b 2 )
x2 y
2
x2 y2
f 2 on the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1. If f 1 - f 2 = 2a, touches the hyperbola - = 1 at the point
a b a2 b2
where a is constant, prove that PQ touches the æ b ö
(a sec q , b tan q ) , show that q = sin -1 ç ÷.
hyperbola è am ø
x2 y2
2
cos 2 a - = 1. Sol. Since (a sec q , b tan q ) lies on
a b2
x2 y2 y = mx + (a 2m 2 - b 2 )
Sol. Given hyperbola is - =1 …(i)
a2 b2 \ b tan q = am sec q + (a 2m 2 - b 2 )
Equation of the chord PQ to the hyperbola (i) is Þ (b tan q - am sec q )2 = a 2m 2 - b 2
x æf - f2 ö y æ f1 + f 2 ö æ f1 + f 2 ö
cos ç 1 ÷ - sin ç ÷ = cos ç ÷ Þ b 2 tan 2 q + a 2m 2 sec 2 q - 2abm tan q sec q = a 2m 2 - b 2
a è 2 ø b è 2 ø è 2 ø
Þ a 2m 2 tan 2 q - 2 abm tan q q + b 2 sec 2 q = 0
x y æf + f2 ö æ f1 + f 2 ö
Þ cos a - sin ç 1 ÷ = cos ç ÷
a b è 2 ø è 2 ø or a 2m 2 sin 2 q - 2abm sin q + b 2 = 0 (Qcos q ¹ 0)
(Given f 1 - f 2 = 2a ) 2 2 2 2 2 2
2abm ± 4a b m - 4a b m æ b ö
\ sinq = =ç ÷
æf + f2 ö 2a 2m 2 è am ø
b cos ç 1 ÷
b cos a è 2 ø æ b ö
i.e. y= x+ …(ii) \ q = sin -1 ç ÷
a æf + f2 ö æf + f2 ö è am ø
sin ç 1 ÷ sin ç 1 ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
Comparing this line with y = mx + c y Example 20 If SY and S ¢Y ¢ be drawn perpendiculars
æf + f2 ö from foci to any tangent to a hyperbola. Prove that Y
b cos ç 1 ÷ and Y ¢ lie on the auxiliary circle and that product of
b cos a è 2 ø
\ m= × and c = these perpendiculars is constant.
a æf + f2 ö æf + f2 ö
sin ç 1 ÷ sin ç 1 ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø Sol. Let hyperbola be
x 2
y 2
x2 y2
For line y = mx + c to be a tangent on cos 2 a - = 1, 2
-
=1 …(i)
a 2
b 2
a b2
we have Tangent at P (a sec f , b tan f ) on Eq. (i) is
a2 x y
c2 = m2 - b2 sec f - tan f = 1 …(ii)
cos 2 a a b
æf + f2 ö (b sec f )
b 2 cos 2 ç 1 ÷ Its slope is
2 è 2 ø (a tan f )
\ LHS = c =
2 æ f1 + f 2 ö Equation of SY which is perpendicular to Eq. (i) and passes
sin ç ÷
è 2 ø through focus S i.e. (ae , 0) is
572 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

a tan f Tangent
y -0= - ( x - ae ) (x1 , y1) P
b sec f

No
rm
x y ae

al
or tan f + sec f = tan f …(iii)
b a b A′ C A
Q Lines (ii) and (iii) intersect at Y and in order to find its
locus we have to eliminate f between Eqs. (ii) and (iii), for
which squaring and adding Eqs. (ii) and (iii) then, we get
æ sec2 f tan 2 f ö a 2e 2
(x 2 + y 2 ) ç 2 + ÷ = 1 + tan 2 f Hence, the equation of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 )
è a b2 ø b2
a 2y 1
a2 + b2 a2 y - y1 = - (x - x 1 )
=1+ 2
tan 2 f = (1 + tan 2 f ) + 2
tan 2 f b2x 1
b b
æ 2 a2 ö æ sec 2
f tan 2 f ö a 2 x b 2y
= ç sec f + 2 tan 2 f ÷ = a 2 ç 2 + ÷ or + = a2 + b2
è b ø è a b2 ø x1 y1
\ x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is the required locus.
Remark
Similarly the point Y ¢ also lies on it. Again, if p 1 and p 2 be The equation of normal at ( x1, y1 ) can also be obtained by this
the length of perpendiculars from S (ae , 0) and S ¢ ( -ae , 0) on method
the tangent (ii), then x - x1 y - y1
= …(i)
(e sec f - 1) × (e sec f + 1) a¢ x1 + hy1 + g hx1 + b¢ y1 + f
p 1p 2 =
æ sec f tan 2 f ö æ sec2 f tan 2 f ö
2
a¢, b¢, g, f , h are obtained by comparing the given hyperbola with
ç 2 + ÷ ç + ÷
è a b2 ø è a2 b2 ø a¢ x 2 + 2hxy + b¢ y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 …(ii)
The denominator of Eq. (i) can easily be remembered by the first
a 2b 2 (e 2 sec2 f - 1)
= two rows of this determinant
b 2 sec2 f + a 2 tan 2 f a¢ h g
a 2b 2 (e 2 sec2 f - 1) i.e. h b¢ f
= g f c
a 2 (e 2 - 1) sec2 f + a 2 tan 2 f
Since first row is a¢ ( x1 ) + h ( y1 ) + g ( 1)
b 2 (e 2 sec2 f - 1)
= = b2 [(Qb 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1)] and second row i h ( x1 ) + b¢( y1 ) + f ( 1)
(e 2 sec2 f - 1)
x2 y2
Here, hyperbola 2
- =1
a b2
x2 y2
Equations of Normals in or
a2
-
b2
- 1= 0 …(iii)

Different Forms On comparing Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get

1
a¢ =
1
, b¢ = - 2 , g = 0, f = 0, h = 0
a2 b
1. Point form : From Eq. (i), equation of normal of (iii) at ( x1, y1 ) is
Theorem : The equation of the normal to the hyperbola x - x1 y - y1
=
1 y
x2 y2 a 2 x b 2y x +0+0 0- 1 +0
- = 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is + = a2 + b2 a2 1
b2
a2 b2 x1 y1
a2x b2 y
or - a2 = - + b2
Proof : Since the equation of tangent to the hyperbola x1 y1
x2 y2 xx 1 yy 1 a2x b2 y
- = 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is - =1 or + = a2 + b2
a2 b2 a2 b2 x1 y1

b2x 1 2. Parametric form :

The slope of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) =
a 2y 1 Theorem : The equation of normal at (a sec f, b tan f) to
a 2y 1 x2 y2
\ Slope of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) = - the hyperbola - = 1 is ax cos f + by cot f = a 2 + b 2
b2x 1 a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 573

Proof : Since the equation of normals of the hyperbola a2

\ x1 = ±
x2 y2
- = 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is (a 2 - b 2m 2 )
a2 b2
a 2 x b 2y mb 2
+ = a2 + b2 …(i) From Eq. (ii), y1 = m
x1 y1 (a 2 - b 2m 2 )
Replacing x 1 by a sec f and y 1 by b tan f , then Eq. (i) \ Equation of normal in terms of slope is
becomes æ
æ mb 2 ö æ a2 öö
a2x b 2y y - çm ÷ =m çx - ç ± ÷÷
+ = a2 + b2 ç (a 2 - m 2 b 2 ) ÷ ç ç 2 2 2 ÷÷
a sec f b tan f è ø è è (a - m b ) ø ø

or ax cos f + by cot f = a 2 + b 2 m (a 2 + b 2 )
Þ y = mx m …(iii)
is equation of normal at (a sec f, b tan f). (a 2 - m 2 b 2 )

3. Slope form : Thus Eq. (iii) is a normal to the hyperbola

Theorem : The equations of normals of slope m to the x2 y2
-
=1
x2 y2 a2 b2
hyperbola - = 1 are given by
a2 b2 where m is the slope of the normal.
m (a 2 + b 2 ) The coordinates of the point of contact are
y = mx m
(a 2 - m 2 b 2 ) æ a2 mb 2 ö
ç± ,m ÷
æ ö ç 2 2 2
(a - b m ) 2 2 2 ÷
(a - b m ) ø
a2 mb 2 è
at the points ç ± , m ÷
ç 2 2 2
(a - m b ) 2 2 2 ÷
(a - m b ) ø Comparing Eq. (iii) with y = mx + c
è
Proof : The equation of normal to the hyperbola m (a 2 + b 2 )
\ c =m
x2 y2 (a 2 - m 2 b 2 )
- = 1 at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
a2 b2
m 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) 2
a 2 x b 2y or c2 =
+ = a2 + b2 …(i) (a 2 - m 2 b 2 )
x1 y1
Since ‘m’ is the slope of the normal, then which is condition of normality, where y = mx + c is the
normal of
a 2y 1
m=- x2 y2
b2x 1 - =1
a2 b2
b 2 x 1m
y1 = - …(ii)
a2 Remark
Normal other than transverse axis, never passes through the
x2 y2 focus.
Since ( x 1 , y 1 ) lies on - =1
a2 b2
x2 y2
x 12 y 12 y Example 21 A normal to the hyperbola =1 -
\ - =1 a2 b 2
2 2
a b
meets the axes in M and N and lines MP and NP
x 12 b 4
x 12m 2 are drawn perpendiculars to the axes meeting at P.
or - =1
2 4 2
a a b Prove that the locus of P is the hyperbola
a4 a 2 x 2 - b 2 y 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 .
or x 12 =
a 2 - b 2m 2 Sol. The equation of normal at the point (a sec f , b tan f ) to
x2 y2
the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 is
a b
574 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

ax cos f + by cot f = a 2 + b 2 …(i) a cos f b cot f (a 2 + b 2 )

= =
l m n
æ a2 + b2 ö
The normal (i) meets the X -axis in M ç sec f , 0÷ and na nb
è a ø or sec f = 2 2
and tan f =
l (a + b ) m( a + b 2 )
2
æ a +b 2 ö 2
Y-axis in N ç0, tan f ÷ Q sec 2 f - tan 2 f = 1
è b ø
n 2a 2 n 2b 2
Y \ - =1
l 2 (a 2 + b 2 )2 m 2 (a 2 + b 2 )2
N P a2 b2 (a 2 + b 2 )2
Q Þ 2
- 2
=
l m n2
X′ M X
A′ C A
y Example 23 If the normal at `f' on the hyperbola
2
x2 y
- = 1 meet transverse axis at G, prove that
Y′ a2 b 2
\ Equation of MP, the line through M and perpendicular to
AG × A ¢ G = a 2 (e 4 sec 2 f - 1).
X axis, is
æ a2 + b2 ö where A and A¢ are the vertices of the hyperbola.
x=ç ÷ sec f
è a ø Sol. The equation of normal at (asec f, b tan f ) to the given
ax hyperbola is ax cos f + by cot f = (a 2 + b 2 )
or sec f = …(ii) This meets the transverse axis i.e. X-axis at G. So, the
(a + b 2 )
2
æ æ a2 + b2 ö ö
and the equation of NP, the line through N and coordinates of G are ç ç ÷ sec f, 0÷ and the
perpendicular to the Y-axis, is èè a ø ø
æ a2 + b2 ö coordinates of the vertices A and A ¢ are A (a, 0) and
y=ç ÷ tan f A ¢ ( -a, 0) respectively.
è b ø
æ æ a2 + b2 ö öæ æ a2 + b2 ö ö
by \ AG × A ¢ G = ç -a + ç ÷ sec f ÷ ça + ç ÷ sec f ÷
or tan f = …(iii) è è a ø øè è a ø ø
(a + b 2 )
2
2
The locus of the point of intersection of MP and NP will be æ a2 + b2 ö 2 2
=ç ÷ sec f - a
obtained by elminating f from Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we have è a ø
sec 2 f - tan 2 f = 1
= (ae 2 )2 sec2 f - a 2 = a 2 (e 4 sec2 f - 1)
2 2 2 2
a x by
Þ - =1
2
(a + b ) 2 2
(a + b 2 )2
2 y Example 24 Find the locus of the foot of
or a 2 x 2 - b 2y 2 = (a 2 + b 2 )2
perpendicular from the centre upon any normal to the
2
x2 y
is the required locus of P. hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1.
a b
y Example 22 Prove that the line lx + my - n = 0 will be Sol. Normal at P (a sec f, b tan f ) is
2
x2 y ax cos f + by cot f = a 2 + b 2 …(i)
a normal to the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 if
a b and equation of line perpendicular to Eq. (i) and passing
2 2 2 2 2
a b (a + b ) through origin is
2
- 2 = .
l m n2 bx - ay sin f = 0 …(ii)
x2 y2 Y
Sol. The equation of any normal to 2
- 2
= 1 is
a b Q
ax cos f + by cot f = a 2 + b 2 P (a sec φ, b tan φ)
2 2
or ax cos f + by cot f - (a + b ) = 0 …(i) X′ X
A′ C A
The straight line lx + my - n = 0 will be a normal to the
x2 y2
hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1, then Eq. (i) and Ix + my - n = 0
a b
Y′
represent the same line
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 575

Eliminating f from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we will get the equation x2 y2
- =1
of locus of Q, as from Eq. (ii), a2 b2
ay k - y1
bx
\ Equation of PT is y - y 1 = (x - x 1 )
h - x1
φ
(a2y2 – b2x2) æ k - y1 ö æ hy 1 - kx 1 ö
or y =ç ÷x + ç ÷
sin f =
bx èh - x1 ø è h - x1 ø
ay
which is the tangent to the hyperbola
2 2 2 2
(a y - b x )
\ cos f = x2 y2
ay - =1
a2 b2
(a 2y 2 - b 2 x 2 )
and cot f = \ c 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2
bx
2 2
From Eq. (i), æ hy 1 - kx 1 ö 2 æ k - y1 ö 2
or ç ÷ =a ç ÷ -b
a 2y 2 - b 2 x 2 (a 2y 2 - b 2 x 2 ) è h - x1 ø èh - x1 ø
ax ´ + by ´ = a2 + b2
ay bx
Þ (hy 1 - kx 1 ) 2 = a 2 (k - y 1 ) 2 - b 2 (h - x 1 ) 2
Þ ( x 2 + y 2 ) (a 2y 2 - b 2 x 2 ) = (a 2 + b 2 )xy
Hence, locus of (h, k ) is
or ( x 2 + y 2 )2 (a 2y 2 - b 2 x 2 ) = (a 2 + b 2 )2 x 2y 2
( xy 1 - x 1 y ) 2 = a 2 (y - y 1 ) 2 - b 2 ( x - x 1 ) 2
which is required locus.
or ( xy 1 - x 1 y ) 2 = - (b 2 x 2 - a 2 y 2 ) - (b 2 x 12 - a 2 y 12 )
- 2(a 2 yy 1 - b 2 xx 1 )
Pair of Tangents æ xy 1 - x 1 y ö
2
æ x2 y2 ö
or ç ÷ =-ç 2 - 2÷
Theorem : The combined equation of the pair of tangents è ab ø èa b ø
drawn from a point P ( x 1 , y 1 ), lying outside the hyperbola
æ x2 y2 ö æ xx yy ö
x2 y2 x2 y2 - çç 1 - 1 ÷÷ + 2 ç 1 - 1 ÷
- = 1 to the hyperbola - = 1 is èa 2 2
b ø è a 2
b2 ø
a2 b2 a2 b2
2
æ x2 y2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö æ xx 1 yy 1 2 æ xy 1 - x 1 y ö æ x 2 y 2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö
ö or -ç ÷ - ç 2 - 2 ÷ - çç 2 - 2 ÷÷ + 1
ç 2 - 2 - 1÷ çç 2 - 2 - 1÷÷ = ç 2 - 2 - 1÷ è ab ø
èa b øè a b ø è a b ø èa b ø èa b ø
2
æ xx yy ö
or SS 1 = T 2 +ç 1 - 1÷
2
è a b2 ø
x2 y2 æ xx yy ö æ xx
2
yy ö
where S= - - 1; = ç 1 - 1 ÷ -2 ç 1 - 1 ÷ +1
a2 b2 è a 2 2
b ø è a 2
b2 ø
x 12 y 12 xx 1 yy 1 2
S1 = - - 1 and T = - -1 æ x2 y2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö æ xx 1 yy 1 ö
a b 2 2
a b 2 2 or ç 2 - 2 - 1÷ çç - - 1÷÷ = ç - - 1÷
èa b ø è a2 b2 ø è a2 b2 ø
Proof : Let T (h, k ) be any point on the pair of tangents PQ
or PR drawn from any external point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the or SS 1 = T 2
hyperbola Aliter :
Y
x2 y2
Let the hyperbola be - =1 …(i)
Q a2 b2
(h, k)T Let P ( x 1 , y 1 ) be any point outside the hyperbola.
X′ A′ C A X
P Let a chord of the hyperbola through the point P ( x 1 , y 1 )
(x1 , y1 ) cut the hyperbola at Q and R. Let R(h, k ) be any arbitrary
R point on the line PQ (R inside or outside).
Y′
576 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

R (h, k) Proof : Let Q º ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and R º ( x ¢ ¢ , y ¢ ¢ )

Y
R
Q
Chord of contact

Q
X′ X
C
P
P (x1 , y1)

Let Q divides PR in the ratio l : 1, then coordinates of Q are R

Y′
æ lh + x 1 lk + y 1 ö
ç , ÷ (Q PQ :QR = l : 1)
è l +1 l +1 ø Now, equation of tangents PQ and PR are
Since, Q lies on hyperbola (i), then xx ¢ yy ¢
- =1 …(i)
2 2 a2 b2
1 æ lh + x 1 ö 1 æ lk + y 1 ö xx ¢ ¢ yy ¢ ¢
2 ç ÷ - 2 ç ÷ =1 and - =1 …(ii)
a è l +1 ø b è l +1 ø a2 b2
Þ b 2 ( lh + x 1 ) 2 - a 2 ( lk + y 1 ) 2 = a 2 b 2 ( l + 1) 2 Since, Eqs. (i) and (ii) pass through P ( x 1 , y 1 ), then
Þ (b 2 h 2 - a 2 k 2 - a 2 b 2 ) l2 + 2 (b 2 hx 1 - a 2 ky 1 - a 2 b 2 ) l x ¢ x 1 y ¢y 1
- =1 …(iii)
a2 b2
+ (b 2 x 12 - a 2 y 12 - a 2 b 2 ) = 0 …(ii)
x ¢ ¢ x 1 y ¢ ¢y 1
Let PR will become tangent to the hyperbola (i), then roots and - =1 …(iv)
of Eq. (ii) are equal a2 b2
4 (b 2 hx 1 - a 2 ky 1 - a 2 b 2 ) 2 - 4 (b 2 h 2 - a 2 k 2 - a 2 b 2 ) Hence, it is clear that Q ( x ¢ , y ¢ ) and R( x ¢ ¢ , y ¢ ¢ ) lie on
xx 1 yy 1
´ (b 2 x 12 - a 2 y 12 - a 2 b 2 ) = 0 - = 1 or T = 0
Dividing by 4a b 4 4 a2 b2
2 which is chord of contact QR.
æ hx 1 ky 1 ö æ h2 k 2 ö æ x 12 y 12 ö
\ ç 2 - 2 - 1÷ = ç 2 - 2 - 1÷ çç 2 - 2 - 1÷÷
è a b ø èa b ø èa b ø
Hence, locus of R (h, k ), i.e. equation of pair of tangents Equation of the Chord Bisected
from P ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
2
æ x2 y2 ö æ x 12 y 2 ö
at a Given Point
æ xx 1 yy 1 ö
ç 2 -
2
- 1÷ = ç 2
-
2
- 1÷ çç 2 - 2 - 1÷÷ Theorem : The equation of the chord of the hyperbola
è a b ø èa b ø èa b ø
x2 y2
i.e. T 2 = SS 1 or SS 1 = T 2 = 1,-
a2 b2
Remark bisected at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) is
S = 0 is the equation of the curve, S1 is obtained from S by
replacing x by x1 and y by y1 and T = 0 is the equation of the xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12
tangent at ( x1, y1 ) to S = 0.
- -1= - -1
a2
b2 a2 b2
xx yy
or T = S 1 , where T = 1 - 1 - 1
Chord of Contact a2 b2
x 12 y 12
Theorem : If the tangents from a point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) to the and S1 = - 1.-
x2 y2 a2 b2
hyperbola - = 1 touch the hyperbola at Q and R,
a2 b2 Proof : Since equation of the hyperbola is
then the equation of the chord of contact QR is x2 y2
- =1 …(i)
xx 1 yy 1
- =1 a2 b2
a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 577

Let QR be the chord of the hyperbola whose mid-point is Sol. Let (h , k ) be the mid-point of the chord of the hyperbola.
P ( x 1 , y 1 ). Since Q and R lie on the hyperbola (i). Then its equation is
hx ky h2 k2
Q (x2 , y2) - -1= - -1
a2 b2 a2 b2
P (x1 , y1) hx ky h2 k2
or 2
- 2
= 2
- …(i)
a b a b2
R (x3 , y3)
The equation of the lines joining the origin to the points of
intersection of the hyperbola and the chord (i) is obtained by
making homogeneous hyperbola with the help of Eq. (i)
2
x 22 y 22 æ hx ky ö
ç 2 - 2÷
\ - =1 …(ii) x 2
y èa 2
b ø
a2 b2 \ 2
- 2
= 2
a b æh2 k 2 ö
x 23 y 23 ç 2 - 2÷
and - =1 …(iii) èa b ø
2 2
a b 2 2
Subtracting Eq. (iii) from Eq. (ii), 1 æh2 k 2 ö 2 1 æh2 k 2 ö 2
Þ ç - ÷ x - 2 ç 2 - 2÷ y
1 1 a2 è a2 b2 ø b èa b ø
( x 22 - x 23 ) - (y 22 - y 23 ) = 0
a 2
b2 h2 k2 2hk
= 4
x2 + 4
y2 -
xy …(ii)
( x 2 + x 3 )( x 2 - x 3 ) (y 2 + y 3 ) (y 2 - y 3 ) a b a 2b 2
Þ - =0 The lines represented by Eq. (ii) will be at right angle if
a2 b2
Coefficient of x 2 + Coefficient of y 2 = 0
y 2 - y 3 b 2 (x 2 + x 3 ) 2 2
Þ = 1 æh2 k 2 ö h2 1 æh2 k 2 ö k2
x 2 - x 3 a 2 (y 2 + y 3 ) Þ ç - ÷ - - ç - ÷ - =0
a2 è a2 b2 ø a4 b2 è a2 b2 ø b4
b 2 (2 x 1 ) æh2 k 2 ö æ 1
2
1 ö h2 k2
= [P is the mid-point of QR] Þ ç 2 - 2÷ ç 2 - 2÷ = 4 + 4
a 2 (2y 1 ) èa b ø èa b ø a b
b2x 1 Hence, the locus of (h , k ) is
= …(iv) 2
2
a y1 æ x2 y2 ö æ 1 1 ö x2 y2
ç 2 - 2÷ ç 2 - 2÷ = 4 + 4
\ Equation of QR is èa b ø èa b ø a b
y2 - y 3
y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) y Example 26 From the points on the circle
x2 - x 3
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 , tangents are drawn to the hyperbola
b2x 1 x 2 - y 2 = a 2 ; prove that the locus of the middle-points
Þ y - y1 = (x - x 1 ) [from Eq. (iv)]
a 2y 1 of the chords of contact is the curve
( x 2 - y 2 )2 = a 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) .
yy 1 y 12 xx 1 x 12
Þ - = - Sol. Since any point on the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is
b2 b2 a2 a2
(a cos q , a sin q ) chord of contact of this point w.r.t.
xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12 hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = a 2 is
Þ - = -
a2 b2 a2 b2 x (a cos q ) - y (a sin q ) = a 2
xx 1 yy 1 x 12 y 12 or x cos q - y sin q = a …(i)
Þ - -1= - -1
2 2 2 2 If its mid-point be (h , k ), then it is same as
a b a b
T = S1
Þ T = S1
i.e. hx - ky - a 2 = h 2 - k 2 - a 2
y Example 25 Find the locus of the mid-points of the or hx - ky = h 2 - k 2 …(ii)
2
x2 y On comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
chords of the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 which subtend a
a b cos q sin q a
= = 2
right angle at the origin. h k (h - k 2 )
578 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

or (h 2 - k 2 ) cos q = ah …(iii) It passes through (a , b ), then

and 2 2
(h - k ) sin q = ak …(iv) ah bk h 2 k 2
- 2 = 2 - 2
Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get a2 b a b
\ locus of (h , k ) is
(h 2 - k 2 )2 = a 2h 2 + a 2k 2
xa yb x 2 y 2
Þ (h 2 - k 2 )2 = a 2 (h 2 + k 2 ) - 2 = 2 - 2
a2 b a b
Hence, the required locus is 1 1
( x 2 - y 2 )2 = a 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) . Þ ( x 2 - ax ) - 2 (y 2 - by ) = 0
a2 b
ì 2 2
y Example 27 Prove that the locus of the middle-points 1 ïæ aö a 2 üï 1 ìï æ bö b 2 üï
Þ 2 íç
x - ÷ - ý - 2 íç y - ÷ - ý =0
x2 y
2 a îï è 2ø 4 ï b ïè
þ î
2ø 4ï
þ
of the chords of the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 which 2 2
a b æ aö æ bö
çx - ÷ çy - ÷
pass through a fixed point (a , b ) is a hyperbola whose è 2ø è 2ø 1 ìa 2 b 2 ü
or - = í 2 - 2 ý = l (say)
æa b ö a 2
b 2
4îa b þ
centre is ç , ÷.
è 2 2ø 2 2
æ aöæ bö
Sol. Let the mid-point of the chord be (h , k ). The equation of çx - ÷ çy - ÷
è 2øè 2ø
the chord whose mid-point is (h , k ) is \ 2
- 2
=1
a l b l
hx ky h2 k2 hx ky h 2 k 2
- 2 - 1 = 2 - 2 - 1 or 2 - 2 = 2 - 2 æa b ö
a 2
b a b a b a b The centre of this hyperbola is ç , ÷.
è 2 2ø

Exercise for Session 2

1. The tangents from (1, 2 2 ) to the hyperbola 16x 2 - 25y 2 = 400 include between them an angle equal to
p p p p
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 4 3 2

2. If 4x 2 + ly 2 = 45 and x 2 - 4y 2 = 5 cut orthogonally, then the value of l is

1 1
(a) (b) (c) 9 (d) 18
9 3
x2 y2
3. If the tangent at the point (2sec f, 3 tan f ) of the hyperbola - = 1 is parallel to 3x - y + 4 = 0, then the
4 9
value of f is
p p p 5p
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 4 3 12

4. If the line 2x + 6 y = 2 touches the hyperbola x 2 - 2y 2 = 4, then the point of contact is

æ1 1 ö
(a) (- 2, 6 ) (b) (- 5, 2 6 ) (c) ç , ÷ (d) (4, - 6 )
è2 6ø

5. The equation of the chord of hyperbola 25x 2 - 16y 2 = 400, whose mid-point is (5, 3), is
(a) 115x - 47y = 434 (b) 125x - 48y = 481
(c) 127x - 49y = 488 (d) 155x - 67y = 574
x2 y2
6. The value of m for which y = mx + 6 is a tangent to the hyperbola - = 1 is
100 49
17 17 20 21
(a) æç ö÷ (b) - æç ö÷ (c) æç ö÷ (d) - æç ö÷
è 20 ø è 21ø è 17 ø è 17 ø
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 579

x2 y2
7. P is a point on the hyperbola - = 1, N is the foot of the perpendicular from P on the transverse axis. The
a2 b 2
tangent to the hyperbola at P meets the transverse axis at T. If O is the centre of the hyperbola, then OT × ON is
equal to
(a) a 2 (b) b 2 (c) e 2 (d) b 2 /a

8. If x = 9 is the chord of contact of the hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = 9, then the equation of the corresponding pair of
tangents, is
(a) 9x 2 - 8y 2 + 18x - 9 = 0 (b) 9x 2 - 8y 2 – 18x + 9 = 0

(c) 9x 2 - 8y 2 - 18x - 9 = 0 (d) 9x 2 - 8y 2 + 18x + 9 = 0

p x2 y2
9. Let P (a sec q, b tan q) and Q (a sec f, b tan f ), when q + f = , be two points on the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1. If
2 a b
(h,k ) is the point of intersection of the normals at P and Q, then k is equal to
æa 2 + b 2 ö æa 2 + b 2 ö æa 2 + b 2 ö æa 2 + b 2 ö
(a) çç ÷÷ (b) - çç ÷÷ (c) çç ÷÷ (d) - çç ÷÷
è a ø è a ø è b ø è b ø

x2 y2
10. The tangent at a point P on the hyperbola - = 1 passes through the point (0, –b) and the normal at P
a2 b 2
passes through (2a 2, 0); then eccentricity of the hyperbola is
5 3
(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) 2 2
4 2
x2 y2 x2 y2
11. A tangent to the hyperbola 2
- 2 = 1 cuts the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 in points P and Q. Find the locus of the
a b a b
mid-point of PQ.

12. A line through the origin meets the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 at P and the hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = a 2 at Q. Prove that the
locus of the point of intersection of tangent at P to the circle with the tangent at Q to the hyperbola is the curve.
x2 y2
13. Normals are drawn to the hyperbola - = 1 at the points P (a sec q1, b tan q1) and Q(a sec q2, b tan q2 )
a2 b 2
meeting the conjugate axis at G1 and G2 respectively. If q1 + q2 = p /2 , prove that
a 2e4
CG1 × CG2 =
(e 2 - 1)
where C is the centre of the hyperbola and e is its eccentricity.

14. Chords of the hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = a 2 touch the parabola y 2 = 4ax . Prove that the locus of their middle-points is
the curve y 2( x - a ) = x 3.
Session 3
Diameter, Conjugate Diameters, Properties of Hyperbola,
Intersection of Conjugate Diameters and Hyperbola,
Director Circle, Asymptotes, Rectangular Hyperbola, The
Rectangular Hyperbola xy = c2, Reflection Property of a
Hyperbola, Equation of a Hyperbola Referred to Two
Perpendicular Lines

Diameter Þ (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) x 2 + 2mca 2 x + a 2 (c 2 + b 2 ) = 0
The locus of the middle points of a system of parallel Since, x 1 and x 2 be the roots of this equation, then
chords of a hyperbola is called a diameter and the point
-2mca 2
where the diameter intersects the hyperbola is called the x1 + x2 = …(i)
vertex of the diameter. a 2m 2 - b 2
Theorem : The equation of a diameter bisecting a system Since, (h, k ) be the middle point of QR, then
x2 y2 x + x2
of parallel chords of slopem of the hyperbola - = 1 is h= 1
a2 b2 2
b2 mca 2
y= x then from Eq. (i), h = -
a 2m a 2m 2 - b 2
Proof : Let y = mx + c be a system of a parallel chords to
but (h, k ) lies on y = mx + c
x2 y2
- = 1 for different chords. As c varies, m remain \ k = mh + c
a2 b2
or c = k - mh …(ii)
constant.
Y From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
P (x1 , y1)
ma 2 (k - mh )
h=-
a 2m 2 - b 2
R (h, k)
X′
A' C A
X Þ a 2m 2 h - b 2 h = - ma 2 k + m 2 a 2 h
b 2h
Q Þ -b 2 h = - ma 2 k or k =
(x2 , y2) a 2m
Y′
b2x
Let the extremities of any chord PQ of the set be P ( x 1 , y 1 ) Hence, locus of R (h, k ) is y =
and Q ( x 2 , y 2 ) and let its middle point be R (h, k ). Then a 2m
solving equations which is the diameter of the hyperbola passing through
(0, 0).
x2 y2
- = 1 and y = mx + c Aliter :
a2 b2
Let (h, k ) be the middle-point of the chord y = mx + c of the
x2 (mx + c ) 2
we get - =1 x2 y2
a2 b2 hyperbola - = 1 then
a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 581

T = S1 If y = m 2 x and y = m 3 x are the conjugate diameters of

xh yk h 2
k 2 Eq. (ii), then
Þ - = -
a 2
b 2
a 2
b2 ( -b 2 )
m 2m 3 =
hb 2 ( -a 2 )
\ Slope = =m
a 2k b2
==mm 1 [from Eq. (i)]
b 2h a2
Þ k=
a 2m This proves the proposition.
b2x Prop. 2. The parallelogram formed by the tangents at the
Hence, the locus of mid-point is y = . extremities of conjugate diameters of a hyperbola has its
a 2m
vertices lying on the asymptotes and is of constant area.
x2 y2
Since, P and D lie on hyperbola - =1
Conjugate Diameters a2 b2
x2 y2
Two diameters are said to be conjugate when each bisects and its conjugate diameter - =1 +
a2 b2
all chords parallel to the others.
then coordinates of P and D are (a sec f, b tan f) and
b2
If y = mx , y = m 1 x be conjugate diameters, then mm 1 = . (a tan f, b sec f) respectively.
a2 Y
Let y = m 1 x + c be a set of chords parallel to y = m 1 x , then
D Q
b2
the diameter y = x bisects them all. But being the M
a 2m R P
conjugate diameter y = mx also bisects them. X' X
C
Hence, these two lines must be identical P'

b2 b2 R'
\ m= Þ mm 1 = D'
2 2
a m1 a Q'

Y'

Properties of Hyperbola Then D ¢ º ( -a tan f, - b sec f)

and P ¢ º ( -a sec f, - b tan f)
Prop. 1. If a pair of diameters be conjugate with respect to a
b
hyperbola, they are conjugate with respect to its conjugate Since, equations of asymptotes CQ and CR are y = x and
hyperbola also. a
b
Let y = mx and y = m 1 x be two conjugate diameters of the y = - x respectively and the equations of tangents at
a
x2 y2
hyperbola - = 1, then P , P ¢ , D and D ¢ are
a2 b2 x y
b2 sec f - tan f = 1 ...(i)
mm 1 = ...(i) a b
a2 x y
- sec f + tan f = 1 ...(ii)
x2 y2 a b
Now conjugate hyperbola of - = 1 is
a2 b2 x y
- tan f + sec f = 1 ...(iii)
x2 y2 a b
- + =1
a2 b2 x y
and tan f - sec f = 1 ...(iv)
a b
x2 y2
or - =1 ...(ii) respectively.
-a 2 -b 2
Now, the lines (i) and (ii) are parallel and so are Eqs. (iii)
and (iv).
582 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Hence these tangents form a parallelogram. Solving =e 2 x 1 - ae = e (ex 1 - a ) = e × SP

Eqs. (i) and (iii), we get the coordinate of Q as
Similarly, S ¢G = e × S ¢ P
[a (sec f + tan f), b (sec f + tan f)] which clearly lies on the
b SG SP
asymptote y = x similarly the other points of intersection \ =
a S ¢G S ¢ P
lies on the asymptotes. This relation shows that the normal PG is the external
The equations of PCP ¢ and DCD ¢ are bisector of the angle SPS ¢. The tangent PT being
b tan f perpendicular to PG is therefore the internal bisector of
y= x or bx tan f - ay sec f = 0 ...(v) the angle SPS ¢.
a sec f
Prop. 4. If a pair of conjugate diameters meet the hyperbola
b sec f in P , P ¢ and its conjugate in D , D ¢, then the asymptotes
and y= x or bx sec f - ay tan f = 0 ...(vi)
a tan f bisect PD , PD ¢ , P ¢ D and P ¢ D ¢.
Hence by symmetry. The coordinates of four points P , D , P ¢ , D ¢ are
Area of parallelogram QRQ ¢ R ¢ = 4 (Area of parallelogram (a sec f, b tan f); (a tan f, b sec f);
QDCP ) ( -a sec f, - b tan f) ;( -a tan f, - b sec f) respectively.
= 4 × CP ´ (Perpendicular length from C on QD ) If (h, k ) be the middle point of PD, then
1 a
= 4 × (a 2 sec 2 f + b 2 tan2 f) ´ h = (sec f + tan f)
2
tan2 f sec 2 f
+ b
a2 b2 and k = (tan f + sec f)
2
= 4ab = Constant.
h a
Prop. 3. If the normal at P meets the transverse axis in G, \ =
k b
then SG = e × SP . Prove also that the tangent and normal
bisect the angle between the focal distances of P. b
\ Locus of mid-point (h, k ) is y = x which is equation of
Y
a
)
(x 1
,y 1 x2 y2
P asymptote of hyperbola - = 1.
a2 b2
Similarly other mid-points lie on the other asymptotes.
X′ X
S′ A′ C T A M S G

Intersection of Conjugate
Y′
Diameters and Hyperbola
Let the coordinates of P be ( x 1 ,y 1 ). The equation of To prove that of a pair of conjugate diameters of a
x2 y2 hyperbola, only one meets the curve in real points
normal at P on the hyperbola - = 1 is
a2 b2 Let y = mx …(i)

a 2 x b 2y and y = m1 x …(ii)
+ = a2 + b2 ... (i)
be a pair of conjugate diameters of the hyperbola
x1 y1
x2 y2
The normal (i) meets the X-axis i.e. y = 0 in Eq. (i), then - = 1, then
coordinates of G are a2 b2
b2
æ (a 2 + b 2 ) ö mm 1 = …(iii)
ç x 1 , 0 ÷ or (e 2 x 1 , 0 ) a2
2
è a ø
On solving Eq. (i) and the equation of hyperbola
\ CG = e 2 x 1 x2 y2
- = 1, we get
Now SG = CG - CS a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 583

x2 m2 x 2 Then (CP )2 - (CD )2 = a 2 sec2 f

- =1
a2 b2 + b 2 tan 2 f - a 2 tan 2 f - b 2 sec2 f

a 2b 2 = a 2 ( sec2 f - tan 2 f ) - b 2 ( sec2 f - tan 2 f )

or x2 = …(iv)
b 2 - a 2m 2 = a 2 ( 1) - b 2 ( 1) = a 2 - b 2
Similarly Eq. (ii) meets the hyperbola at points whose
y Example 29 For the hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = a 2 , prove
abscissa are given by
that the triangle CPD is isosceles and has constant
a 2b 2
x2 = …(v) area, where CP and CD are a pair of its conjugate
b - a 2m12
2
diameters.
The two values of x given by Eq. (iv) will be real if Sol. Since, CP and CD are the conjugate diameters of
æb ö x 2 - y 2 = a 2 , hence coordinates of P and D are
b 2 - a 2m 2 > 0 i.e. m < ç ÷
èa ø P º (a sec f, a tan f ), D º (a tan f, a sec f ) respectively.
P (a sec φ, a tan φ)
b2æb ö ì b2 ü
i.e. <ç ÷ íQmm 1 = ý
2
a m1 è a ø î a2 þ
b
Þ < m 1 i.e. if b 2 < a 2m 12 a (sec φ + tan φ), a (sec φ + tan φ)
a C M
2 2
i.e. if b 2 - a 2m 12 < 0
Then from Eq. (v) the values of x are imaginary.
Hence, if Eq. (i) meets the hyperbola in real points then D (a tan φ, a sec φ)
Eq. (ii) meets it in imaginary points and vice-versa.
\ CP = a 2 (sec 2 f + tan 2 f ) = CD [QC = 0 (0, 0)]
Remark Hence, DCPD is isosceles triangle.
If CD is the conjugate diameter of a diameter CP of the hyperbola Draw ^ from C on PD, where M is the mid-point of PD
x 2 y2
- = 1, where P is ( a sec f, b tan f), then equation of CP, where æa a ö
a2 b2 \ M º ç (sec f + tan f ), (sec f + tan f )÷
C is ( 0, 0 ) is è2 2 ø
b tan f - 0 b | (sec f + tan f ) |
y -0 = ( x - 0 ) Þ y = sin f . x \ CM = (a 2 + a 2 )
a sec f - 0 a 2
Comparing this with y = mx and PD = [a (sec f - tan f )]2 + [a (sec f - tan f )]2
b
m = sin f
a = | sec f - tan f ) | (a 2 + a 2 )
b2 b b2 1
Q mm¢ = 2 Þ sinf ´ m¢ = 2
a a a \ Area of D PCD = × PD × CM
2
b
\ m¢ = æç ö÷ cosec f 1 a2
è aø = (a 2 + a 2 ) = = constant
4 2
\ Equation of conjugate diameter is y = m¢ x = ( b / a) cosec f. x on
solving
y Example 30 Find the condition for the lines
x 2 y2
y = ( b / a) cosec f× x and - 2 + 2 = 1. Ax 2 + 2Hxy + By 2 = 0 to be conjugate diameters of
a b
2
Then we get coordinates of D x2 y
- = 1.
i.e. D º ( a tan f, b sec f) a2 b 2
Sol. Let the lines represented by
y Example 28 If a pair of conjugate diameters meets
the hyperbola and its conjugate in P and D Ax 2 + 2 Hxy + By 2 = 0
respectively, then prove that CP 2 - CD 2 = a 2 - b 2 . are y = mx and y = m1x
Sol. Q Coordinates of P and D are (a sec f, b tan f ) and A
\ mm1 = …(i)
(a tan f, b sec f ) respectively. B
But y = mx and y = m1x are the conjugate diameters of
584 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y2 y = mx + (a 2m 2 - b 2 )
2
- 2
=1
a b
It passes through (h, k )
b2
then mm1 = …(ii)
a2 \ k = mh + (a 2m 2 - b 2 )
A b2 or (k - mh ) 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2
\ From Eqs. (i) and (ii), =
B a2
or a2A = b2B
Þ k 2 + m 2 h 2 - 2mhk = a 2m 2 - b 2
which is the required condition. Þ m 2 (h 2 - a 2 ) - 2hkm + k 2 + b 2 = 0

y Example 31 If the lines lx + my + n = 0 passes It is quadratic equation in m. Let slopes of two tangents
are m 1 and m 2
through the extremities of a pair of conjugate
2 k2 + b2
x2 y \ m 1m 2 =
diameters of the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1, show that h2 - a 2
a b
a 2 l 2 - b 2m 2 = 0 . k2 + b2
-1 = (Q tangents are perpendicular)
Sol. The extremities of a pair of conjugate diameters of h2 - a 2
x2 y2
- = 1 are (a sec f, b tan f ) and (a tan f , b sec f ) Þ - h2 + a 2 = k 2 + b 2
a2 b2
respectively. or h2 + k 2 = a 2 - b 2
According to the question, since extremities of a pair of Hence, locus of P (h, k ) is
conjugate diameters lie on lx + my + n = 0
\ l (a sec f ) + m (b tan f ) + n = 0 …(i) x 2 + y 2 = a2 - b2 (a > b )
Þ l (a tan f ) + m (b sec f ) + n = 0 …(ii) Aliter :
then from Eq. (i), al sec f + bm tan f = - n
If tangents y = mx + (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) …(i)
or a 2l 2 sec 2 f + b 2m 2 tan 2 f + 2ablm sec f tan f = n 2 …(iii)
ìï 2 ü
and from Eq. (ii), al tan f + bm sec f = - n x æ 1ö 2ï
and y =- + ía 2 ç - ÷ -b ý …(ii)
or a 2l 2 tan 2 f + b 2m 2 sec 2 f + 2ablm sec f tan f = n 2 …(iv) m è mø
ïî ïþ
then subtracting Eq. (iv) from Eq. (iii),
a 2l 2 (sec 2 f - tan 2 f ) + b 2m 2 (tan 2 f - sec 2 f) = 0 touch the hyperbola and intersects at right angles
or a 2l 2 - b 2m 2 = 0
\ From Eq. (i),
y - mx = (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) …(iii)

Director Circle Eq. (ii) can be rewritten as

The locus of the point of intersection of the tangents to x + my = (a 2 - b 2m 2 ) …(iv)

x2 y2 Squaring and adding Eqs. (iii) and (iv), then
the hyperbola - = 1, which are perpendicular to
a2 b2 (y - mx ) 2 + ( x + my ) 2 = a 2m 2 - b 2 + a 2 - b 2m 2
each other is called director circle. (1 + m 2 ) ( x 2 + y 2 ) = (1 + m 2 ) (a 2 - b 2 )
2 2
x y Hence, x 2 + y 2 = a 2 - b 2 is the director circle of the
Let any tangent in terms of slope of hyperbola - =1
2 2
a b hyperbola.
is
Remarks
, k) x2 y2
P (h 1. For director circle of 2
- = 1, a must be greater than b.
90° a b2
If a < b, then director circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 - b2 does not exist.
A′ C A
x2 y2
2. The equation of director circle of - 2
+ = 1is
a b2
2 2 2 2
x + y = b - a ( b > a),
If b < a , then director circle does not exist.
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 585

y Example 32 If any tangent to the hyperbola x2 y2 b x y

2 - = 1 are y = ± x or ± = 0.
x2 y a 2
b 2 a a b
- = 1 with centre C, meets its director circle in P
a2 b 2 Proof : Let y = mx + c be an asymptote of the hyperbola
and Q, show that CP and CQ are conjugate
x2 y2
semi-diameters of the hyperbola. =1 - …(i)
Sol. Since, equation of hyperbola is a2 b2
Substituting the value of y in Eq. (i),
x2 y2
- =1 …(i) x 2 (mx + c ) 2
a2 b2 - =1
Equation of tangent at (a sec f, b tan f ) on Eq. (i) is a2 b2
x y
sec f - tan f = 1 …(ii) or (a 2m 2 - b 2 ) x 2 + 2a 2mcx + a 2 (b 2 + c 2 ) = 0 …(ii)
a b
If the line y = mx + c is an asymptote to the given
Equation of director circle of Eq. (i) is
hyperbola, then it touches the hyperbola at infinity. So
x 2 + y 2 = a2 - b2 …(iii) both roots of Eq. (ii) must be infinite.
Equation of lines joining the point of intersection of Eqs. (i)
\ a 2m 2 - b 2 = 0
and (ii) to the origin is obtained by making Eq. (iii)
homogeneous with the help of Eq. (ii). and - 2a 2mc = 0
2
æx y ö b
\ x 2 + y 2 = (a 2 - b 2 ) ç sec f - tan f ÷ then and c = 0
m=±
èa b ø a
æ (a 2 - b 2 )sec2 f ö 2æ (a 2 - b 2 )tan 2 f ö Substituting the value of m and c in y = mx + c , we get
or x 2 ç1 - 2
÷ + y ç1 - ÷
è a ø è b2 ø b x y
y =± x Þ ± =0
2(a 2 - b 2 )sec f tan f a a b
+ xy = 0 …(iv)
ab Aliter :
Let m and m¢ represent the slopes of the lines given by The difference between the second degree curve and pair
Eq. (iv), then of asymptotes is constant.
x2 y2
Q Given hyperbola is - =1
P a2 b2

C
x2 y2
\ Pair of asymptotes is + l =0 - ... (i)
a2 b2
Q Eq. (i) represents a pair of lines, then D = 0
1 æ 1ö
(a 2 - b 2 )sec 2 f
\ × ç - ÷ × l + 0 - 0 - 0 - l× 0 = 0
1- a2 è b2 ø
a2 b 2 a 2 - (a 2 - b 2 )sec 2 f
mm ¢ = = . \ l =0
(a 2 - b 2 )tan 2 f a 2 b 2 - (a 2 - b 2 )tan 2 f
1-
b 2 x2 y2
From Eq. (i), pair of asymptotes is - =0
b b sec f - a 2 tan 2 f b 2
2 2 2
a2 b2
= 2. 2 2 =
a b sec f - a 2 tan 2 f a 2 b x y
or y = ± x or ± = 0
Hence, the lines CP and CQ are conjugate semi-diameters of a a b
the hyperbola.
Remarks
x2 y2
1. If b = a , then = 1 reduces to x 2 - y 2 = a2. The asymptotes
-
Asymptotes a 2
b2
of rectangular hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = a2 are y = ± x which are at
right angles.
An asymptotes of any hyperbola or a curve is a straight
2. A hyperbola and its conjugate hyperbola have the same
line which touches in it two points at infinity. asymptotes.
Asymptotes of hyperbola : The equations of two x 2 y2 b
3. The angle between the asymptotes of 2 - 2 = 1 is 2 tan-1 æç ö÷.
asymptotes of the hyperbola a b è aø
586 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

y = –x Y y=x 2x + 3y - 8 = 0 and 3x + 2y - 7 = 0
Let the equation of hyperbola be
B (2x + 3y - 8) (3x + 2y - 7 ) + v = 0 ... (i)
90° x2 – y2 = a 2 It passes through (5,3) , then
X¢ X (10 + 9 - 8) (15 + 6 - 7 ) + v = 0
A¢ C A
Þ 11 ´ 14 + v = 0
B¢ \ g = - 154
Putting the value of v in Eq. (i), we obtain
Y¢ (2x + 3y - 8) (3x + 2y - 7 ) - 154 = 0
– x2 + y2 = a 2
which is the equation of required hyperbola.
x2 y2
4. If the angle between the asymptotes of a hyperbola - =1
a2
b2 y Example 35 Show that the tangent at any point of a
is 2 q, then e = sec q. hyperbola cuts off a triangle of constant area from the
5. The asymptotes pass through the centre of the hyperbola. asymptotes and that the portion of it intercepted
6. The bisectors of the angles between the asymptotes are the between the asymptotes is bisected at the point of
coordinate axes. contact.
x 2 y2
7. Let H º 2 - 2 - 1 = 0 Sol. Let P (a sec f, b tan f ) be any point on the hyperbola
a b
x 2 y2 x 2 y2 x2 y2
A º 2 - 2 = 0 and C º 2 - 2 + 1 = 0 - =1 ... (i)
a b a b a2 b2
be the equation of the hyperbola, asymptotes and the Asymptotes of Eq. (i) are
conjugate hyperbola respectively, then clearly C + H = 2 A. b
y=± x
a
y Example 33 Find the asymptotes of the hyperbola
Equation of tangent of Eq. (i) at P (a sec f , b tan f ) is
xy - 3y - 2x = 0.
x y
Sol. Since equation of a hyperbola and its asymptotes differ sec f - tan f = 1 ... (ii)
in constant terms only, a b
b
\ Pair of asymptotes is given by Solving Eq. (ii) and y = x
a
xy - 3y - 2x + l = 0 ...(i)
x
where, l is any constant such that it represents two straight We get ( sec f - tan f ) = ( sec2 f - tan 2 f )
lines. a
\ abc + 2 fgh - af 2 - bg 2 - ch 2 = 0 \ x = a ( sec f + tan f )
2
and y = b ( sec f + tan f )
3 1 æ1ö Q
Þ 0+2´ - ´ -1 ´ - 0 - 0 - l ç ÷ = 0
2 2 è2ø
\ l =6 P (a sec f, b tan f)
From Eq. (i), the asymptotes of given hyperbola are given C
by R
xy - 3y - 2x + 6 = 0
or (y - 2) ( x - 3) = 0.
\ Asymptotes are x - 3 = 0 and y - 2 = 0. Let Q º [a ( sec f + tan f ), b ( sec f + tan f )]
b
y Example 34 The asymptotes of a hyperbola having Now solving Eq. (ii) and y = - x
x a
centre at the point (1, 2) are parallel to the lines We get, ( sec f + tan f ) = ( sec2 f - tan 2 f )
2x + 3y = 0 and 3x + 2y = 0. If the hyperbola passes a
through the point ( 5, 3) , show that its equation is or x = a ( sec f - tan f )
(2 x + 3 y - 8)(3 x + 2 y + 7) = 154. and y = - b ( sec f - tan f )
Let R º [a ( sec f - tan f ), - b ( sec f - tan f )]
Sol. Let the asymptotes be 2x + 3y + l = 0 and
Mid-point of QR is (a sec f, b tan f ) which is coordinate of P.
3x + 2y + m = 0. Since asymptotes passes through (1, 2),
then 1
Area of DCQR = | ( x 1y 2 - x 2y1 )|
l = - 8 and m = - 7 2
Thus, the equation of asymptotes are 1
= | - ab - ab | = ab = constant.
2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 587

Rectangular Hyperbola Y

A hyperbola whose asymptotes include a right angle is x=0

said to be rectangular hyperbola. M P (x, y)
y
OR x
X¢ X
O N y=0
If the lengths of transverse and conjugate axes of any
hyperbola be equal, it is called rectangular or
equilateral hyperbola.
According to the first definition
æb ö p Y¢
2 tan -1 ç ÷ =
èa ø 2
Second method (By rotation of axes) :
æb ö p b The equation of rectangular hyperbola is x 2 - y 2 = a 2 and
Þ tan -1 ç ÷ = Þ =1
èa ø 4 a its asymptotes are x - y = 0 and x + y = 0. Since,
a =b asymptotes are inclined at 45° and 135° to the X-axis
x 2
y 2 respectively.
then, - = 1 becomes x 2 - y 2 = a 2
2 2 Y
a b 0
y=

x+
According to the second definition x–

y=
0
x2 y2 135°
When a = b, - = 1 becomes
2 2
a b 45°
X¢ X
x - y 2 = a2
2 O

æ b2 ö
Eccentricity, e = ç 1 + ÷ = 2
è a2 ø
Hence, x 2 - y 2 = a 2 is the general form of the equation of Y¢
the rectangular hyperbola.
If we rotate the axes through q = - 45° without changing
Remark the origin. Thus, when we replace ( x , y ) by
x2 y2 [ x cos ( -45° ) - y sin ( -45° ), x sin ( -45 )°
All the results of = 1 are applicable to the hyperbola
-
a2 b2 + y cos ( -45° )]
2 2 2
x - y = a after changing b by a.
æ x + y -x + y ö
i.e. ç , ÷
è 2 2 ø
The Rectangular Hyperbola then equation x 2 - y 2 = a 2 reduces to

xy = c 2 æx +y ö
ç
2
æ- x +y ö
÷ -ç ÷ =a
2
2

è 2 ø è 2 ø
When the centre of any rectangular hyperbola be at the
1
origin and its asymptotes coincide with the coordinate or {( x + y ) 2 - ( - x + y ) 2 } =a 2
axes its, equation is xy = c 2 . 2
1
Since, asymptotes coincides the coordinate axes. Þ (2y ) (2 x ) = a 2
2
Hence, asymptotes are y = 0 and x = 0. 2
\ Combined equation of asymptotes is xy = 0. Now a2 æ a ö
or xy = = ç ÷ = c2 (say)
equation of any hyperbola and its asymptotes differ in 2 è 2ø
respect of constant terms only.
or xy = c 2
\ Equation of rectangular hyperbola is xy = c 2 where c is
any constant.
588 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Study of Hyperbola xy = c 2 y Example 36 If the normal at the point ‘t 1 ’ to the

rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 meets it again at the
(i) Vertices : A (c ,c ) and A ¢ ( - c ,- c ). point ‘t 2 ’, prove that t 13t 2 = - 1.
(ii) Transverse axis : y = x . æ cö
Sol. Since, the equation of normal at çct 1, ÷ to the hyperbola
(iii) Conjugate axis : y = - x . è t1 ø
(iv) Foci : S (c 2 ,c 2 ) and S ¢ ( -c 2 , -c 2 ). xy = c 2 is
(v) Length of latusrectum = Length of AA ¢ = 2 2 c . xt 13 - yt 1 - ct 14 + c = 0
(vi) Equation of auxiliary circle : x 2 + y 2 = 2c 2 . æ c ö
but this passes through çct 2 , ÷, then
(vii) Equation of director circle x 2 + y 2 = 0. è t2 ø
(viii) Asymptotes : x = 0, y = 0. ct 2t 13 -
c
t 1 - ct 14 + c = 0
t2
Remarks
Þ t 22t 13 - t 1 - t 14t 2 + t 2 = 0
1. The equations of the asymptotes and the conjugate hyperbola
of the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2, where the axes are the Þ t 2t 13 (t 2 - t 1 ) + (t 2 - t 1 ) = 0
asymptotes, are xy = 0 and xy = - c 2 respectively.
Þ (t 13t 2 + 1) (t 2 - t 1 ) = 0
2. The equation of a rectangular hyperbola having coordinate
axes as its asymptotes is xy = c 2. If the asymptotes of a Þ t 13t 2 + 1 = 0 [Qt 2 ¹ t 1 ]
rectangular hyperbola are x = a, y = b then its equation is \ t 13t 2 = -1
( x - a) ( y - b ) = c 2 or xy - ay - bx + l = 0.
c y Example 37 A triangle has its vertices on a
3. Since x = ct, y = satisfies xy = c 2
t rectangular hyperbola. Prove that the orthocentre of
æ cö
\( x, y ) = ç ct, ÷ ( t ¹ 0 ) is called a ‘t’ point on the rectangular
è tø
the triangle also lies on the same hyperbola.
c Sol. Let “t 1”, “t 2 ” and “t 3 ” are the vertices of the triangle ABC,
hyperbola. The set ìíx = ct, y = üý represents its parametric
î tþ described on the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 .
equations with parameter ‘t’.
Y

c
A ct1, t
Properties of Rectangular E
1

c
Hyperbola xy = c 2 C
ct3,
t3

X' X
O D
(i) Equation of the chord joining ‘t 1 ’ and ‘t 2 ’ is
x + yt 1 t 2 - c (t 1 + t 2 ) = 0. c B
ct2,
t2
(ii) Equation of tangent at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is xy 1 + x 1 y = 2c 2 .
x
(iii) Equation of tangent at ‘t ’ is + yt = 2c .
t Y'
(iv) Point of intersection of tangents at ‘t 1 ’ and ‘t 2 ’ is æ cö æ c ö
æ 2ct 1 t 2 2c ö \ Coordinates of A , B and C are çct 1, ÷, çct 2 , ÷ and
ç , ÷. è t1 ø è t2 ø
è t1 + t2 t1 + t2 ø æ c ö
çct 3 , ÷ respectively.
(v) Equation of normal at ( x 1 , y 1 ) is xx 1 - yy 1 = x 12 - y 12 . è t3 ø
c c
(vi) Equation of normal at ‘t ’ is xt 3 - yt - ct 4 + c = 0. -
t3 t2 1
Now, slope of BC is =-
(vii) Point of intersection of normals at ‘t 1 ’ and ‘t 2 ’ is. ct 3 - ct 2 t 2t 3
æ c {t 1 t 2 (t 12 + t 1 t 2 + t 22 ) - 1} c {t 13 t 23 + (t 12 + t 1 t 2 + t 22 )} ö \ Slope of AD is t 2t 3
çç , ÷÷ .
è t 1 t 2 (t 1 + t 2 ) t 1 t 2 (t 1 + t 2 ) ø Equation of altitude AD is
c
y - = t 2t 3 ( x - ct 1 )
t1
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 589

or t 1y - c = x t 1t 2t 3 - ct 12t 2t 3 ...(i) \ (8, a ) lies on Eq. (i)

Similarly equation of altitude BE is 64 a 2
\ - =1
t 2y - c = x t 1t 2t 3 - c t 1t 22t 3 ...(ii) 16 9
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get the orthocentre Þ a 2 = 27
æ c ö Þ a =3 3 (Q P lies in first quadrant)
ç- , - c t 1t 2t 3 ÷ which lies on xy = c 2 .
è t 1t 2t 3 ø Hence coordinate of point P is (8, 3 3 ).
Q Equation of reflected ray passing through
P (8, 3 3 ) and S¢ ( -5, 0).
Reflection Property of a \ Its equation is y - 3 3 =
0-3 3
( x - 8)
Hyperbola or 13y - 39 3 = 3 3x - 24 3
-5 - 8

If an incoming light ray passing through one focus S strike or 3 3x - 13y + 15 3 = 0.

convex side of the hyperbola then it will get reflected
towards other focus S ¢.
Y
a
L Equation of a Hyperbola
cted
Refleay
r
a
Referred to Two Perpendicular
No

Lines
rm
nt
ge

al
n
Ta

X¢ X
S¢ C T S N
(–ae, 0) (ae, 0)
x2 y2
Let P ( x , y ) be any point on the hyperbola - = 1,
a2 b2
then
Y¢
PM = y and PN = x
y Example 38 A ray emanating from the point ( 5, 0) is x2 y2
\ - =1
incident on the hyperbola 9 x 2 - 16 y 2 = 144 at the a2 b2
point P with abscissa 8. Find the equation of the ( PN ) 2 ( PM ) 2
reflected ray after first reflection and point P lies in Þ - =1
a2 b2
first quadrant.
Y
Sol. Given, hyperbola is 9 x 2 - 16y 2 = 144. This equation can
be rewritten as N P (x, y)
x2 y2
- =1 …(i)
16 9
Coordinates of foci are (0, ± 16 + 9 ) i.e., (0, ± 5) X' X
A' C A M
(–a, 0) (a, 0)
Y
L
a

ay a Y'
No

d r
cte
rm
nt

le
Ref
ge

al

If perpendicular lines represented by

n
Ta

X¢ X
S¢ A¢ C T A S (5, 0) N
(–5, 0) L1 º a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 = 0
and L2 º b 1 x - a 1 y + c 2 = 0
æa x +b y +c ö
Y¢ then PN = p 1 = ç 1 1 1÷
ç (a 1 + b 1 ) ÷ø
2 2
è
Since x-coordinate of P is 8. Let y-coordinate of P is a.
590 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(iv) Foci : The foci of the hyperbola is the point of

) intersection of the lines
p1 P (x, y
N
p2
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1
= ± ae and L2 = 0.
=0
y+c2 (a 12 + b 12 )
x–a1
M L 2= b 1
A
A¢ C (v) Directrix : The directrices of the hyperbola are
a 1 x + b 1y + c 1
L 1= a 1

a
=±
(a 2 + b 2 ) e
x+b1

1 1

(vi) Latusrectum : The latusrectum of the hyperbola is

y+c1

2b 2
.
=0

a
æb x -a y +c ö
and PM = p 2 = ç 1 1 2÷ y Example 39 The equations of the transverse and
ç (b 1 + a 1 ) ÷ø
2 2
conjugate axes of a hyperbola are respectively
è
3x + 4 y - 7 = 0, 4 x - 3y + 8 = 0 and their respective
Now equation of hyperbola becomes lengths are 4 and 6. Find the equation of the
2 2
æa x +b y +c ö æb x -a y +c ö hyperbola.
ç 1 1 1÷ ç 1 1 2÷
ç ÷ Sol. The equation of the required hyperbola is
2 2
(a 1 + b 1 ) ø ç (b 1 + a 1 ) ÷ø
2 2
è è 2 2
- =1 æ 3x + 4y - 7 ö æ ö
a2 b2 ç ÷ ç 4 x - 3y + 8 ÷
ç ( 32 + 4 2 ) ÷ ç 4 2 + ( - 3) 2 ÷
è ø è ø
Then the point P describes a hyperbola in the plane of the 2
- 2
=1
given lines such that : æ4ö æ6ö
ç ÷ ç ÷
è2ø è2ø
(i) Centre : The centre of the hyperbola is the point of
intersection of the lines L1 = 0 and L2 = 0. 1 1
Þ ( 3x + 4y - 7 ) 2 - ( 4 x - 3y + 8)2 = 1
100 225
(ii) Transverse axis : The transverse axis lies along
L2 = 0. Þ 9 (3x + 4y - 7 )2 - 4 ( 4 x - 3y + 8)2 = 900

Conjugate axis : The conjugate axis lies along L1 = 0. Þ 9 (9 x 2 + 16y 2 + 49 + 24 xy - 42x - 56y )
(iii) Length of transverse and conjugate axes : The - 4 (16x 2 + 9y 2 + 64 - 24 xy + 64 x - 48y ) = 900
length of transverse and conjugate axes are 2a and 2b Þ 17 x 2 + 312xy + 108y 2 - 634 x - 312y - 715 = 0.
respectively.

Exercise for Session 3

1. The diameter of 16x 2 - 9y 2 = 144 which is conjugate to x = 2y is
16 32 16 32
(a) y = x (b) y = x (c) x = y (d) x = y
9 9 9 9
x2 y2
2. Tangents drawn from a point on the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9 to the hyperbola - = 1, then tangents are at angle
25 16
p p p p
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 4 3 2
x2 y2 x2 y2 x2 y2
3. If H º 2
- 2 - 1 = 0, C º 2 - 2 + 1 = 0 and A º 2 - 2 = 0 then H, A and C are in
a b a b a b
(a) AP (b) GP (c) HP (d) AGP
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 591

x2 y2
4. The angle between the asymptotes of - = 1 is equal to
4 9
2 3 2 3
(a) tan-1 æç ö÷ (b) tan-1 æç ö÷ (c) 2 tan-1 æç ö÷ (d) 2 tan-1 æç ö÷
è 3ø è 2ø è 3ø è 2ø

5. If e and e1 are the eccentricities of the hyperbolas xy = c 2 and x 2 - y 2 = a 2, then (e + e1)2 is equal to
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8
x2
6. The product of the lengths of perpendiculars drawn from any point on the hyperbola - y 2 = 1 to its
2
asymptotes is
1 2 3
(a) (b) 2 (c) (d)
2 3 2
x2 y2
7. The number of points on hyperbola - = 3 from which mutually perpendicular tangents can be drawn to
a2 b 2
the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 is/are
(a) 0 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

8. If the sum of the slopes of the normal from a point P to the hyperbola xy = c 2
is equal to l ( l Î R + ), then the
locus of point P is
(a) x 2 = lc 2 (b) y 2 = lc 2 (c) xy = lc 2 (d) None of these

9. If S º x 2 + 4xy + 3y 2 - 4x + 2y + 1 = 0, then the value of l for which S + l = 0 represents its asymptotes is

(a) 20 (b) 18 (c) - 16 (d) - 22

10. A ray emanating from the point ( - 41, 0) is incident on the hyperbola 16x 2 - 25y 2 = 400 at the point P with
abscissa 10. Then the equation of the reflected ray after first reflection and point P lies in second quadrant is
(a) 4 3x - (10 - 41) y + 4 123 = 0 (b) 4 3x + (10 - 41) y - 4 123 = 0
(c) 4 3x + (10 - 41) y + 4 123 = 0 (d) 4 3x - (10 - 41) y - 4 123 = 0

x2 y2
11. A ray of light incident along the line 3x + (5 - 4 2 )y = 15 gets reflected from the hyperbola - = 1, then its
16 9
reflected ray goes along the line
(a) x 2 - y + 5 = 0 (b) y 2 - x + 5 = 0 (c) y 2 - x - 5 = 0 (d) None of these

12. The equations of the transverse and conjugate axes of a hyperbola are x + 2y - 3 = 0 and 2x - y + 4 = 0
2
respectively and their respective lengths are 2 and . The equation of the hyperbola is
3
(a) 2 (x + 2y - 3)2 - 3 (2x - y + 4)2 = 5 (b) 2 (2x - y + 4)2 - 3 (x + 2y - 3)2 = 5
2 2
(c) 2 (x + 2y - 3) - 3 (2x - y + 4) = 1 (d) 2 (2x - y + 4)2 - 3 (x + 2y - 3)2 = 1

x2 y2
13. Find the equation of that diameter which bisects the chord 7x + y - 2 = 0 of the hyperbola - = 1.
3 7

14. Find the equation of the hyperbola which has 3x - 4y + 7 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 1 = 0 for its asymptotes and which
passes through the origin.

15. The asymptotes of a hyperbola are parallel to lines 2x + 3y = 0 and 3x + 2y = 0. The hyperbola has its centre at
(1, 2) and it passes through (5, 3), find its equation.
x2 y2
16. If the pair of straight lines Ax 2 + 2Hxy + By 2 = 0 be conjugate diameters of the hyperbola - = 1, then
a2 b 2
prove that Aa 2 = Bb 2.

17. A circle cuts the rectangular hyperbola xy = 1in points ( x r , y r ), r = 1, 2, 3, 4 then prove that
x1x 2x 3x4 = y1y 2y 3y4 = 1.
 Shortcuts and Important Results to Remember
1 If P be any point and F1 and F2 are any other two points then : 14 The portion of tangent between the point of the contact
(a) If| PF1 - PF2| < |F1F2|, then the locus of P is a hyperbola. and the directrix subtends a right angle at the
corresponding focus.
(b) If|PF1 - PF2| = |F1F2|, then the locus of P is a straight line.
15 The equation of the pair of asymptotes differ the
(c) If| PF1 - PF2| > | F1F2|, then the locus of P is an empty set.
hyperbola and the conjugate hyperbola by the same
2 The orthocentre of triangle inscribed in the hyperbola constant only.
xy = c 2 lies on it.
16 The asymptotes pass through the centre of the hyperbola
3 Length of the chord of the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 and the bisectors of the angles between the asymptotes
are the axes of the hyperbola.
æ (h 2 + k 2 ) (hk - c 2 )ö
whose middle-point is (h, k ) is 2 ç ÷. 17 The asymptotes of a hyperbola are the diagonals of the
è hk ø
rectangle formed by the lines drawn through the
4 The product of length of perpendicular drawn from any point extremities of each axis parallel to the other axis.
x2 y2 a2 b2 18 Perpendicular from the foci on either asymptote meet it in
on the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 to its asymptotes is 2 .
a b (a + b2 ) the same points as the corresponding directrix and the
common points of intersection lie on the auxiliary circle.
5 Asymptotes are the tangents from the centre of a hyperbola.
19 If from any point on the asymptote a straight line be drawn
6 If the angle between the asymptotes is 2a, then eccentricity
perpendicular to the transverse axis, the product of the
of the hyperbola is sec a.
segments of this line, intercepted between the point and
7 If the tangent and normal to a rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 the curve is always equal to the square of the semi
at a point cuts off intercepts a1 and a2 on one axis and b1, b2 conjugate axis.
on the other axis, then a1a2 + b1b2 = 0. x2 y2
20 The tangent at any point P on a hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1
x2 y2 a b
8 The equation of common tangents to 2
- = 1 and with centre C, meets the asymptotes in Q and R and cuts
a b2
x2 y2 off a DCQR of constant area equal to ab from the
- 2
+ = 1 are y = ± x ± (a2 - b2 ). asymptotes and the portion of the tangent intercepted
a b2
between the asymptotes is bisected at the point of the
x2 y2 contact. This implies that locus of the centre of the circle
9 The director circle of hyperbola - = 1 will be imaginary
a2 b2 circumscribing the DCQR in case of rectangular hyperbola
if a < b and will become a circle, if a > b (for a = b, point is the hyperbola itself and for a standard hyperbola the
circle). locus would be the curve 4(a2 x 2 - b2 y 2 ) = (a2 + b2 )2 .
x2 y2 21 If a circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 intersects a
10 The ellipse 2
+ = 1 and the hyperbola
a b2 rectangular hyperbola xy = l 2 or x 2 - y 2 = a2 at four
x2 y2
2 2
- = 1 (a > k > b) are confocal and therefore points then the Arithmetic mean of the points of
a -k k - b2 2
intersection lies on the middle of the line joining the
orthogonal. centres of the circle and hyperbola.
11 If four normals can be drawn to a hyperbola from any point 22 The points (two) in which any tangent meets the tangents
and if a, b, g, d be eccentric angles of these four co-normal at the vertices and the foci of the hyperbola are concyclic
points, then a + b + g + d = odd multiple of p . i.e. S , P, S ¢ and Q are lie on circle.

12 If a, b, g are the eccentric angles of three points on the

x2 y2
hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1, the normals at which are concurrent, P
a b
then sin(a + b ) + sin(b + g ) + sin(g + a ) = 0.
13 The locus of the foot of the perpendiculars drawn from the S' S
x2 y2 A' C A
focus of the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 upon any tangent is its
a b
auxiliary circle i.e. x 2 + y 2 = a2 and product of the Q
perpendiculars is b2 .
JEE Type Solved Examples :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 10 multiple choice examples. l Ex. 3 The equation of the chord joining two points
Each example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of
( x 1 ,y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) on the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 is
which ONLY ONE is correct.
x y x y
(a) + = 1 (b) + =1
2 2 2 x 1 + x 2 y1 + y 2 x 1 - x 2 y1 - y 2
l Ex. 1 If the eccentricity of the hyperbola x -y sec a = 5
is 3 times the eccentricity of the ellipse x 2 sec 2 a + y 2 = 25, x y x y
(c) + = 1 (d) + =1
y1 + y 2 x 1 + x 2 y1 - y 2 x 1 - x 2
then a value of a is
p p æ x + x 2 y1 + y 2 ö
(a) (b) Sol. (a) The mid-point of the chord is ç 1 , ÷
è 2 2 ø
6 4
p p \The equation of chord whose mid-point
(c) (d)
3 2 æ x1 + x 2 y1 + y 2 ö
ç , ÷ is T = S1
x2 y2 è 2 2 ø
Sol. (b) For the hyperbola - =1
5 5 cos2 a 1 æ æ y1 + y 2 ö æ x + x2 ö ö 2
or çx ç ÷ +yç 1 ÷ -c
2
5 cos a 2è è 2 ø è 2 ø ÷ø
we have, e12 = 1 + = 1 + cos2 a … (i)
5 æ x + x 2 ö æ y1 + y 2 ö 2
=ç 1 ÷ç ÷ -c
x 2
y 2 è 2 øè 2 ø
For the ellipse + =1
25 cos2 a 25 Þ x (y1 + y 2 ) + y ( x1 + x 2 ) = ( x1 + x 2 )(y1 + y 2 )
2 x y
25 cos a
we have, e 22 = 1 - = 1 - cos2 a = sin 2 a … (ii) or + =1
25 x1 + x 2 y1 + y 2
Given that, e1 = 3 e 2 or e12 = 3 e 22
Þ 1 + cos2 a = 3 sin 2 a [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
l Ex. 4 Area of quadrilateral formed with the foci of the
x2 y2 x2 y2
Þ 2 = 4 sin 2 a hyperbola - = 1 and - = - 1 is
1
a2 b2 a2 b2
or sin a = (a) 4 (a 2 + b 2 ) (b) 2 (a 2 + b 2 )
2
p 1
Þ a= (c) (a 2 + b 2 ) (d) (a 2 + b 2 )
4 2
Sol. (b) Required area = 4 ´ Area of DS1OS 3
2 2
x y Y
l Ex. 2 The asymptote of the hyperbola 2
-
2
= 1 form
a b S3
with any tangent to the hyperbola a triangle whose area is
a 2 tan l in magnitude, then its eccentricity is
(a) sec l (b) cosec l
X¢ X
(c) sec 2 l (d) cosec 2 l S2 O S1
x2 y 2
Sol. (a) Any tangent to the hyperbola - = 1 forms a triangle
a2 b2
with the asymptotes which has constant area ab.
S4
Given, ab = a 2 tan l
Y¢
or b = a tan l 1
= 4 ´ ae ´ be1 = (2ab ) (ee1 ) …(i)
or b 2 = a 2 tan 2 l 2
or a 2 (e 2 - 1 ) = a 2 tan 2 l Q b 2 = a 2(e 2 - 1 )

or e 2 = 1 + tan 2 l = sec 2 l (a 2 + b 2 )
\ e= …(ii)
\ e = sec l a
and a 2 = b 2 (e12 - 1 )
594 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(a 2 + b 2 ) \Director circle is x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2
\ e1 = …(iii)
b and b 2 = a 2(1 - e12 )
Substituting the values of e and e1 from Eqs. (ii) and (iii) in given a 2 + b 2 = (2 R ) 2
Eq. (i), then
Þ a 2 + a 2 (1 - e12 ) = 4 R 2
(a 2 + b 2 ) (a 2 + b 2 )
Required area = 2ab ´ ´ 4R 2
a b Þ 2 - e12 = … (i)
= 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) a2
x2 y 2
and equation of hyperbola is - =1
l Ex. 5 Let P (a secq, b tan q ) and Q (a sec f, b tan f), where a 2 b12

p x2 y2 \Director circle is x 2 + y 2 = a 2 - b12

q + f = , be two points on the hyperbola - = 1. If
2 a2 b2 and b12 = a 2 (e 22 - 1 )
(h,k ) is the point of intersection of normals at P and Q, then Given a 2 - b12 = R 2
k is equal to Þ a 2 - a 2 (e 22 - 1 ) = R 2
2
æa + b ö 2 æa + b ö2 2
(a) ç ÷ (b) - ç ÷ R2
Þ 2 - e 22 = … (ii)
è a ø è a ø a2
æa2 + b 2 ö æa2 + b 2 ö Dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), then
(c) ç ÷ (d) - ç ÷
è b ø è b ø 2 - e12
= 4 Þ 4 e 22 - e12 = 6
2 - e 22
Sol. (d) Equations of the normals at P( q) and Q( f ) are
ax cos q + by cot q = a 2 + b 2 … (i) l Ex. 7 The tangent to the hyperbola xy = c 2 at point P (t )
2 2
and ax cos f + by cot f = a + b … (ii)
intersects the X-axis at T and the Y-axis. at T ¢. The normal to
Now, dividing by cos q and cos f in Eqs. (i) and (ii) respectively, the hyperbola at P (t ) intersects the X-axis at N and the Y-axis
then at N ¢. The areas of the triangles PNT and PN ¢T ¢ are D and D¢
ax + by cosec q = (a 2 + b 2 ) sec q … (iii) 1 1
2 2
respectively, then + is
and ax + by cosec f = (a + b ) sec f … (iv) D D¢
Subtracting Eq. (iv) from Eq. (iii), we get (a) equal to 1 (b) depends on t
æ a 2 + b 2 ö æ sec q - sec f ö (c) depends on c (d) equal to 2
y =ç ÷.ç ÷ æ cö x
è b ø è cosec q - cosec f ø Sol. (c) Equation of tangent at P çct, ÷ is + ty =2c
è tø t
\ k =y
x y
æ æp ö ö or + =1
2ç sec q - sec çè - q÷ø ÷
2ö 2ct (2c / t )
æa + b 2 æ pö
=ç ÷.ç ÷ çQ q + f = ÷ æ 2c ö
è b ø ç cosec q - cosec æ p - qö ÷ è 2ø \ T º (2ct, 0 ), T ¢ º ç 0, ÷
ç ç ÷÷ è t ø
è è2 øø
æ cö
æ a 2 + b 2 ö æ secq - cosec q ö æa2 + b2 ö and equation of normal at P çct, ÷ is
=ç ÷.ç ÷ =-ç ÷ è tø
è b ø è cosec q - sec q ø è b ø
xt 3 - yt - ct 4 + c = 0
x y
l Ex. 6 Let the major axis of a standard ellipse equals the or + =1
æ c (t 4 - 1 ) ö æ c (t 4 - 1 ) ö
transverse axis of a standard hyperbola and their director ç ÷ ç ÷
circles have radius equal to 2R and R respectively. If e1 and è t 3 ø è -t ø
e 2 are the eccentricities of the ellipse and hyperbola, then æ c (t 4 - 1 ) ö æ c (t 4 - 1 ) ö
\ N ºç , 0 ÷, N ¢ º ç 0, - ÷
the correct relation is è t 3
ø è t ø
(a) 4e12 - e 22 = 6 (b) e12 - 4e 22 = 2 Q Area of triangle PNT = D
(c) 4e 22 - e12 =6 (d) e 22 - 4e12 =2 c
ct - 2ct -0
Sol. (c) Let equation of ellipse is 1 t
\ D= | 4 |
2 c (t - 1 )
x2 y 2 - 2ct 0-0
+ = 1 (a > b ) t3
a2 b2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 595

1 c æ c (t 4 - 1 ) ö c2 æt4 + 1ö Sol. (d) Y

= - ç 3
- 2ct ÷ = ç 4 ÷
2 tè t ø 2 è t ø M
and Area of DPN ¢T ¢ = D ¢ P
c 2c
ct - 0 - O
1 t t X¢ X
\ D¢ = | |
2 c (t 4 - 1 ) 2c
0-0 - -

3x
t t

+2
y+
1 æ c (t 4 - 1 ) 2c ö c 2 4

1
= ct ç - - ÷ = (t + 1 )

=0
2 è t t ø 2 Y¢

1 1 2t 4
2 2 Let point P is nearest to the given line if the tangent at P is
\ + = + = parallel to the given line.
D D ¢ c 2 (t 4 + 1 ) c 2 (t 4 + 1 ) c 2
Now, equation of tangent at P ( x1, y1 ) is
xx1 yy1
l Ex. 8 Let any double ordinate PNP ¢ of the hyperbola - =1
24 18
x2 y2
- = 1 be produced both sides to meet the asymptotes \Slope of tangent at P ( x1, y1 ) is
25 16
3 x1
is Q and Q ¢, then (PQ ) (P ¢ Q ) is equal to
4 y1
(a) 9 (b) 16 (c) 25 (d) 41
3
Sol. (b) Let Q º( x1, y1 ) which must be equal to -
2
Y
Therefore,
3 x1 3
4 x Q . = - or x1 = - 2y1 …(i)
y= 5 P 4 y1 2
Also, P ( x1, y1 ) lies on the curve
X¢ X
O N x12 y12
Hence, - =1 …(ii)
y= – P¢ 24 18
4
5 x Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get two points (6, - 3 )
Q¢ and ( -6,3 ) of which ( - 6, 3 ) is the nearest.
Y¢
Aliter :
4
We have NP = ( x12 - 25 ) The equation of normal at P (2 6 sec q, 3 2 tan q) is
5
4 (2 6 cos q) x + (3 2 cot q) y = 42
and Q is on y= x
5 Now, this line will be perpendicular to
4 3 x + 2y + 1 = 0
\ NQ = x1
5 then, (2 6 cos q) ´ 3 + (3 2 cot q) ´ 2 = 0
Now, PQ = NQ - NP
4 1
= ( x1 - ( x12 - 25 ) ) or sin q = -
5 3
and P ¢Q = NP ¢ + NQ = NP + NQ (Q NP ¢ = NP ) 1 3
\ tan q = and sec q = -
4 2 2
= ( x1 + ( x12 - 25 ) )
5 Hence, P º ( - 6,3 )
16 2
\ ( PQ ) ( P ¢Q ) = ( x1 - ( x12 - 25 ))
25
16
l Ex. 10 For each positive integer n, consider the point P
= ´ 25 = 16
25 with abscissa n on the curve y 2 - x 2 = 1. If d n represents the
shortest distance from the point P to the line y = x , then
l Ex. 9 The coordinates of a point on the hyperbola lim (n.d n ) has the value equal to
n ®¥
x2 y2 (a)
1
(b)
1
- - 1. Which is nearest to the line 3 x + 2y + 1 = 0 are 2
24 18 2 2
(a) (6, 3) (b) (-6, - 3) 1
(c) (d) 0
(c) (6, - 3 ) (d) ( -6,3 ) 2
596 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Sol. (a) Let P º (n, (n 2 + 1 ) ) 1 n (1 )

= lim
2 n ® ¥ æ æ 1ö ö
æ (n 2 + 1 ) - n ö n ç ç1 + 2 ÷ + 1÷
\ dn = ç ÷ è è n ø ø
ç 2 ÷
è ø
æ ö
n ç ÷
or n . dn = ( (n 2 + 1 ) - n ) 1 ç 1 ÷
2 = lim
2 n ® ¥ç æ 1ö ÷
1 ç ç1 + 2 ÷ + 1 ÷
or lim (n. dn ) = lim n ( (n 2 + 1 ) - n ) è è n ø ø
n®¥ 2 n®¥
1 æ 1 ö 1
1 n ( (n 2 + 1 ) - n ) ( (n 2 + 1 ) + n ) = .ç ÷=
= lim è
2 1+1 ø 2 2
2 n®¥ ( (n 2 + 1 ) + n )

JEE Type Solved Examples :

More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n This section contains 5 multiple choice examples. Each let e1 and e 2 be the eccentricities of ellipse and hyperbola, then
example has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which a 2 = l2a 2 (1 - e12 )
MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
æ 1ö
or e1 = ç1 - 2 ÷
è l ø
l Ex. 11 If two tangents can be drawn to the different
x2 y2 and e2 = 2
branches of hyperbola - = 1 from the point (a, a 2 ),
1 4 Now, lae1 = ae 2
then æ 1ö
Þ l ç1 - 2 ÷ = 2
(a) a Î( - ¥,- 2) (b) a Î( - 2,0) è l ø
(c) a Î(0, 2) (d) a Î( 2, ¥ ) Þ l2 - 1 = 2 or l = ± 3
Sol. (a, d) Q ( a, a 2 ) lie on the parabola y = x 2
\ l= 3 (Q l > 0 )
\( a, a 2 ) must lie between the asymptotes of hyperbola
e 1 1
x2 y 2 Alternate (a) : 1 = =
- = 1 in I and II quadrants. e2 l 3
1 4
Major axis of ellipse
x2 y 2 Alternate (b) : =
Q Asymptotes of - = 1 are y = ± 2 x Transverse axis of hyperbola
1 4
2 la
then 2 a < a 2 and - 2a < a2 = =l= 3
2a
Þ a ( a - 2 ) > 0 and a(a + 2) > 0
Alternate (c) : Equations of tangents of ellipse and hyperbola
\ a < 0 or a > 2 and a < -2 or a > 0 at ( x1, y1 ) are
\ a Î( - ¥, - 2 ) È (2, ¥ ) xx1 yy1
+ =1
l2a 2 a 2
l Ex. 12 If the ellipse x 2 + l2 y 2 = l2 a 2 ; l2 > 1 is confocal and xx1 - yy1 = a 2
with the hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = a 2 , then x x
i.e., slopes are = - 2 1 and 1 (say m1 and m2 )
(a) ratio of eccentricities of ellipse and hyperbola is 1: 3 l y1 y1

(b) ratio of major axis of ellipse and transverse axis of According to alternate,
hyperbola is 3 :1 x1 x x2
m1m2 = - 2
´ 1 = - 21 2
(c) The ellipse and hyperbola cuts each other orthogonally l y1 y1 l y1
(d) ratio of length of latusrectum of ellipse and hyperbola 2a 2 æ 2a 2l2 ö
is 1 : 3 ç x12 = 2 ÷
l2 + 1 2 çQ l +1 ÷
x2 y2 =- 2 2 =- 2 2 2
Sol. (a, b, c) Given ellipse is + 2 = 1 ; l2a 2 > a 2 and a (l - 1) l -1 ç 2 a (l - 1)
÷
2 2
la a ç and y1 = 2 ÷
(l2 + 1 ) è (l + 1 ) ø
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 597

=-
2
= -1 (Q l = 3 ) 8 m2 1
Þ = -
3 -1 m2 9 9
Latus reaction of ellipse Þ m 4 - m 2 - 72 = 0
Alternate (d) : =
Latus reaction of hyperbola
Þ (m 2 - 9 ) (m 2 + 8 ) = 0
2a 2
\ m2 - 9 = 0
1 1
= la2 = =
2a l 3 but m2 + 8 ¹ 0
a \ m=±3
Hence, from Eq. (i), the equation of tangents are
l Ex. 13 If the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2 intersects the 8
y = 3x +
hyperbola xy = c 2 at four points P ( x 1 , y 1 ), Q ( x 2 , y 2 ), 3
8
R ( x 3 , y 3 ) and S ( x 4 , y 4 ), then and y = - 3x -
3
(a) S x 1 = 0 (b) Sy 1 = 0
or 9 x - 3y + 8 = 0
(c) Px 1 = 0 (d) Py 1 = 0
and 9 x + 3y + 8 = 0
Sol. (a, b, c, d) Solving x 2 + y 2 = a 2 and xy = c 2,
c4 dx 3y
we have, x2 + =a2 l Ex. 15 The differential equation = represents a
x2 dy 2 x
or x 4 - a 2x 2 + c 4 = 0 family of hyperbolas (except when it represents a pair of
or Sx1 = 0 and Px1 = c 4 lines) with eccentricity
Similarly, if we eliminate x, then 7 5
(a) (b)
4 2 2 4 3 3
y -a y + c = 0
or Sy1 = 0 and Py1 = c 4 3 5
(c) (d)
2 2
l Ex. 14 A straight line touches the rectangular hyperbola dx 3y
Sol. (b, d) Q =
9 x 2 - 9y 2 = 8 and the parabola y 2 = 32 x , the equation of dy 2 x

the line is or ò 2x dx = ò 3y dy
(a) 9x + 3y - 8 = ¥ (b) 9x - 3y + 8 = 0 3y 2
(c) 9x + 3y + 8 = 0 (d) 9x - 3y - 8 = 0 or x2 = +c
2
Sol. (b, c) Equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 32 x is x2 y 2 c
or - =
8 3 2 3
y = mx + … (i)
m x2 y 2
2 2 or - = c1
Which is also touches the hyperbola 9 x - 9y = 8 3 2
8 æ 2ö 5
i.e. x2 -y 2 = Case I If c1 > 0, then e = ç1 + ÷ =
9 è 3ø 3
2
æ8ö 8 2 8 æ 3ö 5
So that, ç ÷ = ´m - Case II If c1 < 0, then e = ç1 + ÷ =
èmø 9 9 è ø
2 2
598 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Paragraph Based Questions
n This section contains 2 solved paragraphs based upon 17. (a) Equation of the ellipse E is
each of the paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have x2 y 2 x2 y 2
to be answered. Each of these questions has four choices 2
+ 2 = 1 i.e, + =1
a b 3 1
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
18. (a) Required locus is the director circle of E which is
Paragraph I x 2 + y 2 = 3 + 1 or x 2 + y 2 = 4
(Q. Nos. 16 to 18) Paragraph II
A conic C satisfies the differential equation. (Q. Nos. 19 to 21)
(1 + y 2 ) dx - xy dy = 0 and passes through the point (1, 0). x 2
y2
An ellipse E which is confocal with C having its eccentricity For the hyperbola -
= 1, the normal at point P meets
a2 b2
æ 2ö the transverse axis AA¢ in G and the conjugate axis BB¢ in g
equal to ç ÷ .
è3ø and CF be perpendicular to the normal from the centre.
16. Length of latusrectum of the conic C is PF . PG
19. The value of is equal to
(a) 1 (b) 2 (CB ) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4 (a) 4 (b) 3
17. Equations of the ellipse E is (c) 2 (d) 1
x2 y2 x2 y2 20. The value of PF .Pg is equal to
(a) + =1 (b) + =1
3 1 1 3 (a) (CA )2 (b) (CF )2
x2 y2 x2 y2
(c) + =1 (d) + =1 (c) (CB )2 (d) CA . CB
4 9 9 4
18. Locus of the point of intersection of the 21. Locus of middle-point of G and g is a hyperbola of
perpendicular tangents to the ellipse E, is eccentricity
(a) x 2 + y 2 = 4 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 8 1 e
(a) (b)
2 2
2 2
(c) x + y = 10 2
(d) x + y = 13 2 (e - 1) (e - 1)
Sol. Given differential equation is (1 + y ) dx - xy dy = 0 2 e
(c) 2 (e 2 - 1) (d)
dx ydy 2dx 2y dy 2
Þ – = 0 or - =0 Sol. C º( 0, 0 )
x (1 + y 2 ) x 1+y2
On integrating, we have 2 ln x - ln (1 + y 2 ) = ln c AA ¢ = 2a, BB ¢ = 2b
\ CA = CA ¢ = a and CB = CB ¢ = b
or ln x 2 = ln(c (1 + y 2 )) or x 2 = c (1 + y 2 )
Y
x2 y 2
or - =1 (Hyperbola) g
c 1
1 F
It passes through (1, 0), then - 0 =1 P
c O
X¢ X
\ c =1 A¢ C A G
2 2
\C is rectangular hyperbola x - y = 1, having its eccentricity
= 2 and its foci are ( ± 2, 0 ).
If a is the length of semi major axis of ellipse E, then ae = 2
Y¢
2
or a = 2 or a = 3 Let P º (a sec q, b tan q)
3
æ 2ö Equation of normals at P is
Now, b 2 = a 2 (1 - e 2 ) = 3 ç1 - ÷ = 1
è 3ø ax cos q + by cot q = a 2 + b 2 … (i)
2
2 (1 ) 2
æ (a + b ) 2 ö æ (a + b ) ö 2 2
16. (b) Length of latusrectum of the conic C is =2 \ Gºç sec q, 0 ÷, g º ç 0, tan q÷
1 è a ø è b ø
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 599

Equation of CF which is perpendicular to Eq. (i) and through ab a

origin is bx cot q - ay cos q = 0 \ PF . Pg = ´ (b 2 sec 2 q + a 2 tan 2 q)
2 2
(b sec q + a tan q) 2 2 b
ab
\ PF =
= a = (CA ) 2
2
(b sec q + a 2 tan 2 q)
2 2

2
21. (b) Q Mid-point of G and g is
æ a2 + b2 ö
æ (a 2 + b 2 )
and PG = ça sec q - sec q÷ + (b tan q - 0 ) 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) ö
è a ø ç sec q, tan q÷
è 2a 2b ø
b
= (b 2 sec 2 q + a 2 tan 2 q) æa2 + b2 ö æa2 + b2 ö
a \ x =ç ÷ sec q, y = ç ÷ tan q
ab b è 2a ø è 2a ø
19. (d) Q PF . PG = × (b 2 sec 2 q + a 2 tan 2 q) \ (2 ax ) 2 - (2 by ) 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) 2
2 2 2
(b sec q + a tan q) 2 a
x2 y2
= b 2 = (CB ) 2 or - =1
æa2 + b 2 ö2 æa2 + b2 ö
2
PF . PG ç ÷ ç ÷
\ =1 è 2a ø è 2b ø
(CB ) 2
2 2
2 æa2 + b2 ö æa2 + b2 ö
æ 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) ö ç ÷ +ç ÷ æ 1 1 ö
20. (a) Q Pg = (a sec q - 0) + çb tan q - tan q÷ è 2a ø è 2b ø ç 2 + 2÷
è b ø \ e1 = = ç a b ÷
2
æa2 + b2 ö ç 1 ÷
æ 4 ö ç ÷ è a 2 ø
a
= ça 2 sec 2 q + 2 tan 2 q÷ è 2a ø
è b ø
a a2 + b2 a 2 + a 2 (e 2 - 1 ) e
= (b 2 sec 2 q + a 2 tan 2 q) = 2
= 2 2
=
2b a (e - 1 ) 2
b (e - 1 )

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n
This section contains 2 examples. The answer to each l Ex. 23 If a variable line has its intercepts on the
example in a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9 e e¢
(both inclusive).
coordinate axes are e and e¢, where and are the
2 2
eccentricities of a hyperbola and its conjugate hyperbola, then
l Ex. 22 The equation of transverse axis of hyperbola
the line always touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 , where r is
(passing through origin) having asymptotes 3 x - 4y - 1 = 0 e e¢
and 4 x - 3y - 6 = 0 is ax + by - c = 0, a , b, c ÎN and g.c.d Sol. (2) Since and are the eccentricities of a hyperbola and its
2 2
(a , b, c ) =1, then the value of a + b + c is conjugate, we have
Sol. (7) Since the equation of asymptotes are -2 -2
æe ö æ e¢ö 4 4
3 x - 4y - 1 = 0 and 4 x - 3y - 6 = 0 ç ÷ +ç ÷ = 1 or + =1
è2ø è2ø e 2 (e ¢ ) 2
\Equation of transverse axis is given by
e 2e ¢2
|(3 x - 4y - 1 )| | 4 x - 3y - 6| or 4= … (i)
= e + e ¢2 2
(3 ) 2 + ( - 4 ) 2 (4)2 + (- 3)2 x y
Equations of variable line is + = 1
or |3 x - 4y - 1| = | 4 x - 3y - 6| e e¢
or (3 x - 4y - 1 ) = ± ( 4 x - 3y - 6 ) Þ x + y - 5 = 0 i.e. xe ¢ + ye - ee ¢ = 0.
and x -y -7 = 0 It is tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2
\Transverse axis is given by ax + by - c = 0; a, b, c ÎN | 0 - ee ¢|
\ =r
Þ ax + by - c º x + y - 5 = 0 e 2 + e ¢2
Þ a = 1, b = 1, c = 5 ee ¢
\ r= =2 [from Eq. (i)]
Hence, a + b + c =1 + 1 + 5 =7 (e 2 + e ¢2 )
600 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Matching Type Questions
n This section contain only one example. This example has (B) Here, e= 3
three statements (A, B and C) given in Column I and four
\ b 2 = a 2 (3 - 1 ) = 2a 2 … (i)
statements (p, q, r, and s) in Column II. Any given
statment in Column I can have correct matching with one Now, hyperbola convert in the form
or more statements (s) given in Column II. x2 y 2
- =1
a 2 2a 2
l Ex. 24 Match the following. Let P (a sec q, a 2 tan q) be any point on the hyperbola.
Column I Column II Q Asymptotes of hyperbola are
(A) The locus of the point of (p) a natural number x2 y 2
- =0
intersection of the lines 3x - y - a 2 2a 2
4 3 t = 0 and 3 tx + ty - 4 3 = 0 or 2x 2 - y 2 = 0
(where t is a parameter) is a
or x 2 +y =0
hyperbola whose eccentricity is
(B) If the product of the perpendicular (q) a prime number and x 2 -y = 0
distances from any point on the Q Product of the perpendiculars from P on asymptotes =6
x 2 y2
hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 of eccentricity | a 2 sec q + a 2 tan q| | a 2 sec q - a 2 tan q |
a b \ . =6
(2 + 1 ) 2+1
e = 3 from its asymptotes is equal
to 6, then the length of the 2a 2
or =6
transverse axis of the hyperbola is 3
(C) The area of the triangle that a (r) a composite \ a =3
tangent at a point of the hyperbola number Hence, length of transverse axis = 2a = 6
x 2 y2
- = 1 makes with its (C) Equation of tangent at (a, 0) is x = a
16 a b
asymptotes is Equation of asymptotes are y = ± x
a
(s) a perfect number \ P º (a, b ), Q º (a, - b )
Sol. (A) ® (p, q); (B) ® (p, r, s); (C)® (p, r) Y
(A) The given lines are g b x
y= a
3 x -y - 4 3 t = 0 … (i)
P
and 3 tx + ty - 4 3 = 0 … (ii)
X¢ X
Eliminate ‘t’ from Eqs. (i) and (ii), then O
3x - y 4 3 Q
= y= –b
4 3 3x + y
a x
Þ 3 x 2 - y 2 = 48 x=a
Y¢ .
x2 y 2 1
or - =1 \Required area = ´ a ´ 2b
16 48 2
or 48 = 16 (e 2 - 1 ) = ab
Þ e2 = 4 = ( 4 ) (3 ) = 12 (Here a = 4, b = 3)
\ e =2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 601

JEE Type Solved Examples :

Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Ex. Nos. 25 and 26) are Assertion-Reason type Hence, both statements are true but statement II is not a
examples. Each of these examples contains two statements. correct explanation of statement I.
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason)
Each of these also has four alternative choices, only one of l Ex. 26 Statement I If a circle S º 0 intersect a
which is the correct answer. You have to select the correct
choice as given below :
hyperbola xy = 4 at four points, three of them being (2, 2),
(4, 1) and (6, 2/3), then the coordinates of the fourth point
(a) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is a
correct explanation for statement I æ1 ö
are ç , 16 ÷ .
(b) Statement I is true, statement II is true; statement II is not è4 ø
a correct explanation for statement I Statement II If a circle S º0 intersects a hyperbola xy = c 2
(c) Statement I is true, statement II is false at t 1 , t 2 , t 3 and t 4 , then t 1 t 2 t 3 t 4 = 1.
(d) Statement I is false, statement II is true Sol. (d) Let circle S º x 2 + y 2 - a 2 = 0

l Ex. 25 Statement I Director circle of hyperbola and given hyperbola xy = c 2

x 2
y2 c4
- + 1 = 0 is defined only when b ³ a Then, x2 + = a 2 or x 4 - a 2x 2 + c 4 = 0
x2
a2 b2
x2 y2 If four intersecting points are
Statement II Director circle of hyperbola - = 1 is æ cö æ cö æ cö æ cö
2 2
25 9 çct1, ÷, çct 2 ÷ , çct 3, ÷ and çct 4 , ÷ , then
x + y = 16. è t1 ø è t 2 ø è t 3 ø è t4 ø
x2 y 2 (ct1 ) (ct 2 ) (ct 3 ) (ct 4 ) = c 4
Sol. (b) Hyperbola - + 1 = 0 can be re-written as
a2 b2 \ t1 t 2 t 3 t 4 = 1
x2 y2 \ Statement II is true
- =1
(-a )2 (-b 2 ) For the point (2, 2); t1 = 1
So, the director circle will be For the point (4, 1); t 2 = 2
x 2 + y 2 = ( - a 2 ) - ( - b 2 ) = b 2 - a 2; For the point (6, 2/3); t 3 = 3
Which will be defined only where b ³ a (i.e. b 2 - a 2 ³ 0) æ1 ö 1
For the point ç , 16 ÷ ; t 4 =
è4 ø 8
x2 y 2
\Statement I is true and director circle of hyperbola - =1 3
25 9 Now, t1 t 2 t 3 t 4 =
¹1
2 2 4
is x + y = 25 - 9 = 16
\ Statement I is false.
\Statement II is true.

Subjective Type Questions

n
In this section there are 11 subjective examples. x + yt 2 = 2 ct ...(ii)
Asymptotes of Eq. (i) are x = 0, y = 0.
l Ex. 27 PP ¢ is a diameter of the rectangular hyperbola \The equation of the line through P ¢ and parallel to the
xy = c 2 . Show that the intersection of the tangent of P with asymptote y = 0 is
the straight line through P ¢ parallel to either asymptote is y = -c / t ...(iii)
the locus xy + 3c 2 = 0. Putting the value of t from Eq. (iii) in Eq. (ii), then
Sol. The given rectangular hyperbola is c2 c
x +y ´ = 2c ´ -
xy = c 2 ...(i) y2 y

Given that PP ¢ is a diameter of Eq. (i). Therefore, if P is the or xy + c 2 = - 2 c 2

point (ct, c / t ) then P ¢ is ( - ct, - c / t ). Equation of tangent at P is or xy + 3c 2 = 0
602 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

which is the required locus of the point of intersection of l Ex. 29 Prove that the perpendicular focal chords of a
Eqs. (ii) and (iii).
rectangular hyperbola are equal.
Again the equation of the line through P ¢ and parallel to the
Sol. Let rectangular hyperbola is x 2 - y 2 = a 2.
asymptote x = 0 is
x = - ct ...(iv) Let equations of PQ and DE are
Putting the value of t from Eq. (iv) in Eq. (ii), we get y = mx + c ...(i)
æ x2 ö and y = m1x + c1 ...(ii)
x
x + y ç 2 ÷ = 2c ´ - or xy + 3 c 2 = 0 respectively.
èc ø c Y
which is the required locus of the point of intersection of
Eqs. (ii) and (iv). P
x 2– y 2= a 2

l Ex. 28 The tangent at a point P of a rectangular X' X

C S
D (a 2, 0)
hyperbola meets the asymptotes at L and M and C is the E
centre of the hyperbola. Prove that
PL = PM = CP . Q
Y'
Sol. Since hyperbola is
Be any two focal chords of any rectangular hyperbola
xy = c 2 ....(i) x 2 - y 2 = a 2 through its focus. We have to prove PQ = DE .
æ cö Since, PQ ^ DE .
Let P çct, ÷ be any point on Eq. (i), then equation of tangent at
è tø \ mm1 = - 1 ...(iii)
P on Eq. (i) is Also PQ passes through S (a 2 , 0 ) then from Eq. (i),
x + t 2y = 2 ct ...(ii) 0 = ma 2 + c
Y
or c 2 = 2a 2m 2 ...(iv)
Let ( x1, y1 ) and ( x 2, y 2 ) be the coordinates of P and Q then
M
P ( PQ ) 2 = ( x1 - x 2 ) 2 + (y1 - y 2 ) 2 ...(v)

X'
Since, ( x1, y1 ) and ( x 2, y 2 ) lie on Eq. (i)
X
C L \ y1 = mx1 + c and y 2 = mx 2 + c
\ (y1 - y 2 ) = m ( x1 - x 2 ) ...(vi)
From Eqs. (v) and (vi),
( PQ ) 2 = ( x1 - x 2 ) 2 (1 + m 2 ) ...(vii)
Y'
2 2 2
Now, solving y = mx + c and x - y = a then
Since, asymptotes of xy = c 2 are x = 0 and y = 0
x 2 - (mx + c ) 2 = a 2
i.e. Y -axis and X -axis.
Q Tangents meet X-axis at L and Y-axis at M. or (m 2 - 1 ) x 2 + 2mcx + (a 2 + c 2 ) = 0
æ 2c ö
\ Coordinates of L and M are (2 ct, 0 ) and ç 0, ÷ respectively. 2mc a2 + c2
è t ø \ x1 + x 2 = and x1x 2 =
m2 - 1 m2 - 1
æ 2c ö
ç 2 ct + 0 0 + ÷ Þ ( x1 - x 2 ) 2 = ( x1 + x 2 ) 2 - 4 x1x 2
The middle-point of LM is ç , t ÷ i.e. æçct, c ö÷ .
ç 2 2 ÷ è tø 4m 2c 2 4 (a 2 + c 2 )
è ø = -
(m 2 - 1 ) 2 (m 2 - 1 )
i.e. the point of P. 4 {a 2 + c 2 - a 2m 2}
\ PL = PM =
(m 2 - 1 ) 2
æ c2 ö 4 a 2 (m 2 + 1 )
Also, CP = çc 2t 2 + 2 ÷ = [Qc 2 = 2 a 2m 2]
è t ø (m 2 - 1 ) 2
2
æ 4c 2 ö æ m2 + 1 ö
and ML = ç 4c 2t 2 + 2 ÷ = 2 CP From Eq. (vii), ( PQ ) 2 = 4 a 2 ç 2 ÷
è t ø èm -1 ø
1 æ m2 + 1 ö
2
\ CP = ML = PL = PM
2 Similarly, ( DE ) 2 = 4 a 2 ç 12 ÷
è m1 - 1 ø
Hence, PL = PM = CP .
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 603

2
æ æ 1 ö2 ö æ1 1 1ö
ç ç- ÷ + 1÷ or (- 1) ç + + ÷ = 0 [from Eq. (v)]
è m ø è t1 t 2 t 3 ø
= 4a 2 ç ÷ (Qmm1 = - 1 )
ç æ 1 ö2 ÷ 1 1 1
ç ç- ÷ -1 ÷ \ + + =0
è è mø ø t1 t 2 t 3
2 æ1 1 1ö
æ m2 + 1 ö or c ç + + ÷ =0
= 4a 2 ç 2 ÷ è t1 t 2 t 3 ø
èm -1 ø
= ( PQ ) 2 æ1 1 1ö
Hence, c (t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) = 0, c ç + + ÷ = 0
è t1 t 2 t 3 ø
Thus, ( PQ ) 2 = ( DE ) 2 Þ PQ = DE .
Þ Centroid of DPQR is the origin.
Hence, perpendicular focal chords of a rectangular hyperbola
are equal.
l Ex. 31 Find the equation of the hyperbola whose
l Ex. 30 The normals at three points P , Q , R on a asymptotes are x + 2y + 3 = 0 and 3 x + 4y + 5 = 0 and which
passes through the point (1, -1). Find also the equation of the
rectangular hyperbola intersect at a point T on the curve.
conjugate hyperbola.
Prove that the centre of the hyperbola is the centroid of the
Sol. Combined equation of asymptotes is
triangle PQR.
( x + 2y + 3 ) (3 x + 4y + 5 ) = 0
æ cö
Sol. Equation of the normal at point çct, ÷ on xy = c 2 is or 3 x 2 + 10 xy + 8y 2 + 14 x + 22y + 15 = 0 ...(i)
è tø
3 4
xt - yt - ct + c = 0 Also, we know that the equation of the hyperbola differs from
that of asymptotes by a constant.
It will pass through the point (h, k )
Let the equation of the hyperbola be
\ ht 3 - kt - ct 4 + c = 0 ...(i)
3 x 2 + 10 xy + 8y 2 + 14 x + 22y + l = 0 ...(ii)
Also T (h, k ) lies on xy = c 2
Since it passes through (1, - 1 ) then
\ hk = c 2
3 (1 ) 2 + 10 (1 ) ( -1 ) + 8 ( -1 ) 2 + 14 (1 ) + 22 ( -1 ) + l = 0
c
Therefore, h = cq and k =
q Þ 3 - 10 + 8 + 14 - 22 + l = 0
c \ l =7
From, cqt 3 - t - ct 4 + c = 0
q From Eq. (ii), equation of hyperbola is
t 3 x 2 + 10 xy + 8y 2 + 14 x + 22y + 7 = 0 ...(iii)
or qt 3 - -t4 + 1 = 0
q But we know that equation of conjugate hyperbola
2 3 4 = 2 (Combined equation of asymptotes) - (Equation of hyperbola)
or q t - t - qt + q = 0
or q (qt + 1 ) - t (qt 3 + 1 ) = 0
3 Þ 6 x 2 + 20 xy + 16y 2 + 28 x + 44y + 30

or (q - t ) (qt 3 + 1 ) = 0 - 3 x 2 - 10 xy - 8y 2 - 14 x - 22y - 7 = 0
q ¹t or 3 x 2 + 10 xy + 8y 2 + 14 x + 22y + 23 = 0.
\ qt 3 + 1 = 0
The three points other than T are given by
l Ex. 32 A triangle is inscribed in xy = c 2 and two of its
qt 3 + 1 = 0 ...(ii) sides are parallel to y = m1 x and y = m 2 x prove that the
third side envelopes the hyperbola
æ cö æ cö æ cö
If coordinates of P çct1, ÷, Q çct 2, ÷ and R çct 3, ÷
è t1 ø è t 2 ø è t3 ø
4m1m 2 xy = c 2 (m1 + m 2 ) 2 .
Sol. Let a triangle PQR be inscribed in xy = c 2.
then from Eq. (ii),
t1 + t 2 + t 3 = 0 ...(iii) Let the coordinates of the vertices of the triangle be
t1 t 2 + t 2 t 3 + t 3 t1 = 0 ...(iv) æ cö æ cö æ cö
P çct1, ÷, Q çct 2, ÷ and R çct 3, ÷
and t1 t 2 t 3 = - 1 ...(v) è t1 ø è t 2 ø è t3 ø
From Eq. (iii), Now, the equation of chord joining P and Q is
c (t1 + t 2 + t 3 ) = 0 x + yt1t 2 = c (t1 + t 2 ) ...(i)
and from Eq. (iv), and the equation of chord joining Q and R is
æ1 1 1ö x + yt 2t 3 = c (t 2 + t 3 ) ...(ii)
t1t 2t 3 ç + + ÷ = 0
è t1 t 2 t 3 ø Let Eq. (i) be parallel to y = m1x and Eq. (ii) be parallel to y = m2x.
604 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

\ m1 = -
1
and m2 = -
1 \ sin 2 f + cos2 f = 1
t1t 2 t 2t 3
b 2k 2 (aeh + b 2 ) 2
Þ + =1
m1 t 3 æm ö a 2h 2 a 2h 2
\ = i.e. t 3 = ç 1 ÷ t1 ...(iii)
m2 t1 è m2 ø \ Locus of (h , k ) is
Again the equation to the third side RP is b 2y 2 + (aex + b 2 ) 2 = a 2x 2
x + yt 3t1 = c (t 3 + t1 ) Þ b 2y 2 + a 2e 2x 2 + b 4 + 2aeb 2x = a 2x 2
æm ö æm ö
x + y ç 1 ÷ t12 = c ç 1 t1 + t1 ÷ Þ b 2y 2 + (a 2 + b 2 ) x 2 + b 4 + 2aeb 2x = a 2x 2
è m2 ø è m2 ø
Þ y 2b 2 + b 2 ( x 2 + 2aex ) + b 4 = 0
or ym1 t12 - ct1 (m1 + m2 ) + xm2 = 0 ...(iv)
Þ b 2y 2 + b 2 {( x + ae ) 2 - a 2e 2} + b 4 = 0
t1 being a parameter. Since t1 is real the envelope of Eq. (iv) is
given by the discriminant of Eq. (iv) = 0 Þ b 2y 2 + b 2 ( x + ae ) 2- b 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) + b 4 = 0
i.e. c 2 (m1 + m2 ) 2 - 4ym1 × xm2 = 0 Þ b 2y 2 + b 2 ( x + ae ) 2 - a 2b 2 = 0
or 4m1m2xy = c 2 (m1 + m2 ) 2. Þ ( x + ae ) 2 + y 2 = a 2

l Ex. 33 In both an ellipse and a hyperbola, prove that the l Ex. 34 Show that an infinite number of triangles can be
focal distance of any point and the perpendicular from the inscribed in the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 , whose sides
centre upon the tangent at it meet on a circle whose centre is all touch the parabola y 2 = 4ax .
the focus and whose radius is the semi-transverse axis.
æ cö
Sol. Let the hyperbola be Sol. From any point A çct1, ÷ on the rectangular hyperbola
è t1 ø
x2 y 2
- =1 ...(i)
a2 b2 xy = c 2. …(i)
Y
Let there be any point P (a sec f , b tan f ) on the hyperbola Eq. (i).
xy = c 2
\ Equation of tangent at ‘P’ is
x y A
sec f - tan f = 1 ...(ii)
a b
Equation of focal chord SP is [if S º ( - ae , 0 )]
X¢ X
b tan f - 0 O
y -0= ( x + ae ) B
a sec f + ae
C
b sin f ( x + ae ) y 2 =4ax
Þ y= ...(iii)
(a + ae cos f )
Equation of line passing through (0, 0) and perpendicular to
Eq. (ii) is
Y¢
a
y = - sin f × x ...(iv) Tangent AB and AC are drawn to the parabola y 2 = 4ax,
b
Let Eqs. (iii) and (iv) are passing through (h, k ), then æ cö æ cö
then B º çct 2, ÷ and C º çct 3, ÷ .
b (h + ae ) sin f è t2 ø è t3 ø
k= ...(v)
(a + ae cos f )
Then DABC is inscribed in the rectangular hyperbola and its
a sides AB and AC touch the parabola.
k = - sin f × h ...(vi)
b Q BC is also a tangent to it
bk Equations of chords AB, BC and CA are
From Eq. (iv), sin f = -
ah AB º x + yt1t 2 = c (t1 + t 2 )
ì a 2h + (h + ae ) b 2 ïü BC º x + yt 2t 3 = c (t 2 + t 3 )
and from Eq. (v), cos f = - í ý
î a 2eh þï CA º x + yt 3t1 = c (t 3 + t1 )
ì (a 2 + b 2 )h + aeb 2 üï Q AB is tangent to parabola y 2 = 4ax, its equation
= -í ý 1 c (t + t )
î a 2eh ïþ y =- x+ 1 2
t1t 2 t1t 2
ì a 2e 2h + aeb 2 ü ì aeh + b 2 ü
= -í ý = - í ý a
a 2eh Touching condition c = or cm = a
î þ î ah þ m
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 605

c (t1 + t 2 ) æ -1 ö l Ex. 36 If the normals at ( x i , y i ), i =1, 2 , 3 , 4 on the

×ç ÷ = a
t1t 2 è t1t 2 ø
rectangular hyperbola , xy = c 2 , meet at the point (a, b)
Þ - at12t 22 = c (t1 + t 2 ) show that
(at12 ) t 22 + ct 2 + ct1 = 0 (i) Sxi = a (ii) Syi = b (iii) Pxi = Pyi = - c 4
Similarly, (at 22 ) t 32 + ct 3 + ct1 = 0 (iv) Sxi2 = a 2 (v) Syi2 = b 2
Hence, (at12 ) t 2 + ct + ct1 = 0 …(ii) æ cö
Sol. Let ( xi , yi ) = çcti , ÷, i = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 are the points on the rectangu-
and t 2 and t 3 are the roots of Eq. (ii), è ti ø
c c lar hyperbola xy = c 2.
\ t 2 + t 3 = - 2 and t 2t 3 =
at1 at 1 Equation of normal to the hyperbola
Þ c = at1t 2t 3 æ cö
xy = c 2 at çct, ÷ is
è tø
c2 (at t t ) 2
\ c (t 2 + t 3 ) = - = - 1 223 = - at 22t 32
2
at1 at1 ct 4 - t 3x + ty - c = 0
c (t 2 + t 3 ) It passes through ( a, b ), then
Þ - at 2t 3 = is the condition.
t 2t 3 ct 4 - t 3a + tb - c = 0
This proves BC to be also a tangent to the parabola. But any its biquadratic equation in t. Let the roots of this equation are
point A can be taken in infinite ways anywhere on the curve t1, t 2, t 3, t 4 then
representing the rectangular hyperbola. Hence such triangles a
exist in infinite number. St1 = ,
c
St1t 2 = 0 , St1t 2t 3 = - b / c , t1t 2t 3t 4 = - 1
l Ex. 35 A circle with centre (3a, 3 b) and of variable
Now, (i) Sxi = c St1 = a
radius cuts the rectangular hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = 9a 2 at the
æ 1ö æ St t t ö
points P , Q , R, S. Prove that the locus of the centroid of the (ii) Sy i = c ç S ÷ = c ç 1 2 3 ÷ = b
è t1 ø è t1t 2t 3t 4 ø
triangle PQR is ( x - 2a ) 2 - (y - 2 b) 2 = a 2 .
Sol. The equation of the circle with centre (3 a, 3 b ) is (iii) P xi = c 4 P ti = - c 4

x 2 + y 2 - 6 ax - 6by + k = 0 ...(i) æ 1 ö
and P yi = c 4 ç ÷ = -c
4
where k is variable. è Pti ø
Given hyperbola is x 2 - y 2 = 9a 2 ...(ii) (iv) Sxi2 = c 2 ( St12 ) = c 2 {( St1 ) 2 - 2 St1t 2 }
Eliminating y from Eq. (i) with the help of Eq. (ii), we get
= a2
( x 2 + x 2 - 9a 2 - 6 ax + k ) 2 = 36 b 2 ( x 2 - 9a 2 )
(v) Syi2 = ( Sy1 ) 2 - 2 Sy1y 2
Þ 4 x 4 - 24 a x 3 + .... = 0
æ 1 ö St t
this is a biquadratic equation. = b 2 - 2 c 2S ç ÷ = b 2 - 2c 2 × 1 2 = b 2
Let the abscissas of four points P , Q, R and S are x1, x 2, x 3 and è t1t 2 ø t1t 2t 3t 4
x 4 , then
x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 = 6 a ...(iii) l Ex. 37 If a circle cuts a rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 in
Similarly, y1 + y 2 + y 3 + y 4 = 6b ...(iv) A, B, C and D and the parameters of these four points be
If ( x ¢, y ¢ ) be the centroid of the triangle PQR, then t 1 , t 2 ,t 3 and t 4 respectively prove the following :
x + x 2 + x 3 6a - x 4 1
x¢ = 1 = (i) t 1t 2 t 3 t 4 = 1, find the value of S .
3 3 t1
\ - 3 (x ¢ - 2a) = x 4 (ii) If H be the orthocentre of the triangle ABC , then H and
y + y 2 + y 3 6b - y 4 D are extremities of a diameter of the rectangular hyper-
and y¢= 1 =
3 3 bola.
\ - 3 (y ¢ - 2b) = y 4 (iii) The centre of mean position of the four points bisects
But x 42 - y 42 = 9a 2 the distance between the centres of the two curves.
Þ 9 ( x ¢ - 2 a ) 2 - 9 ( y ¢ - 2 b ) 2 = 9a 2 (iv) The centre of the circle through A , B and C is
Þ (x ¢ - 2a)2 - (y ¢ - 2b)2 = a 2 éc æ 1 ö c æ1 1 1 öù
ê çt1 + t 2 + t3 + ÷ , ç + + + t 1t 2 t 3 ÷ ú .
Hence, locus of centroid ( x ¢, y ¢ ) is ( x - 2 a ) 2 - ( y - 2 b ) 2 = a 2. ë2 è t 1t 2 t 3 ø 2 è t 1 t 2 t 3 øû
606 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Sol. (i) Let the equation of the circle is (iii) The centre of the mean position of the four points is
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + k = 0 ...(i) æc c æ 1 1 1 1 öö
ç (t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 ), ç + + + ÷ ÷
and the equation of the rectangular hyperbola is è4 4 è t1 t 2 t 3 t 4 ø ø
xy = c 2 ...(ii) æc c æ 1 öö
c i.e. ç St1, S ç ÷ ÷
Put x = ct and y = in Eq. (i) è 4 4 è t1 ø ø
t
c2 2 fc æ g fö
then, c 2t 2 + 2 + 2 gct + +k =0 i.e. ç- , - ÷ [from relation Eq. (i)]
è 2 2ø
t t
Þ c 2t 4 + 2 gct 3 + kt 2 + 2 fct + c 2 = 0 Q Centres of the circle and rectangular hyperbola are ( - g, - f )
and (0, 0); mid point of centres of circle and rectangular
this equation being fourth degree in t. Let roots be t1, t 2, t 3, t 4 then æ -g - f ö
hyperbola is ç , ÷.
2g k è 2 2 ø
St1 = - , St1t 2 = 2 ,
c c Hence the centre of the mean position of the four points bisects
2f the distance between the centres of the two curves (circle and
St1t 2t 3 = - and t1t 2t 3t 4 = 1
c rectangular hyperbola).
-2 f (iv) Let the circle passing through ABC meet the hyperbola in
1 St1t 2t 3 -2 f fourth point D; then centre of circle is
\ S = = c =-
t1 t1t 2t 3t 4 1 c ( - g, - f ), ( - g, - f )
æ -c ö æ c æ -2 g ö c æ -2 f ö ö
(ii) Orthocentre of the D ABC is ç , - ct1t 2t 3 ÷ Þ ç çè ÷, ç ÷÷ [from Eq. (i) relation]
è t1t 2t 3 ø è2 c ø 2 è 2 øø

æ -ct 4 - ct1 t 2 t 3 t 4 ö æc c æ 1 1 1 1 öö
Hence orthocentre is ç , ÷ Þ ç (t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 ), ç + + + ÷ ÷
è2 2 è t1 t 2 t 3 t 4 ø ø
è t1 t 2 t 3 t 4 t4 ø
But t1t 2t 3t 4 = 1
æ -c ö
i.e. ç - ct 4 , ÷ 1
è t4 ø \ t4 =
t1t 2t 3
æ cö Hence, centre of circle is
But D is çct 4 , ÷ .
è t4 ø æc æ 1 ö c æ1 1 1 öö
Hence H and D are the extremities of a diagonal of rectangular
ç çt1 + t 2 + t 3 + ÷, ç + + + t1t 2t 3 ÷ ÷ .
è 2 è t t
123t ø 2 è t1 t 2 t 3 øø
hyperbola.
#L Hyperbola Exercise 1 :
Single Option Correct Type Questions
n This section contains 30 multiple choice questions. 8. From a point on the line y = x + c , c (parameter),
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of
x2 y2
which ONLY ONE is correct. tangents are drawn to the hyperbola − =1 such
2 1
1. P is any point on the hyperbola x 2 − y 2 = a 2 . that chords of contact pass through a fixed point
If F1 and F 2 are the foci of the hyperbola and x
PF1 ⋅ PF 2 = λ(OP ) 2 , where O is the origin, then λ is ( x 1 , y 1 ). Then, 1 is equal to
y1
equal to
(a) 2 (b) 3
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 2 (d) 3
(c) 4 (d) None of these
2. If the sum of the slopes of the normals from a point P x2 y2 a
to the hyperbola xy = c 2 is equal to λ ( λ ∈R + ) , then 9. Two conics 2
− 2 = 1 and x 2 = − y intersect, if
a b b
locus of point P is
1 1
(a) x 2 − y 2 = λc 2 (b) y 2 = λc 2 (a) 0 < b ≤ (b) 0 < a <
2 2
(c) xy = λc 2 (d)x 2 = λc 2
(c) a 2 < b 2 (d) a 2 > b 2
3. If xy = λ − 9 be a rectangular hyperbola whose
2

10. The number of points outside the hyperbola

branches lie only in the second and fourth quadrant,
x2 y2
then − = 1 from where two perpendicular tangents
(a) | λ | ≥ 3 (b) | λ | < 3 9 16
(c) λ ∈ R − { − 3, 3 } (d) None of these can be drawn to the hyperbola are
(a) 0 (b) 1
4. If there are two points A and B on rectangular (c) 2 (d) None of these
hyperbola xy = c 2 such that abscissa of A = ordinate
of B, then the locus of point of intersection of 11. Let A ≡ ( − 3, 4 ) and B ≡ ( 2, −1) be two fixed points.
tangents at A and B is A point C moves such that
c2 1  1 
(a) y 2 = x 2 + 2c 2 (b) y 2 = x 2 +
2 tan  ∠ABC  : tan  ∠BAC  = 3 : 1
2  2 
(c) y = x (d) y = 3 x
5. A series of hyperbola is drawn having a common Thus, locus of C is a hyperbola, distance between
transverse axis of length 2a. Then the locus of a point whose foci is
5 5
P on each hyperbola, such that its distance from the (a) 5 (b) 5 2 (c) (d)
transverse axis is equal to its distance from an 2 2
asymptote, is 12. A point P is taken on the right half of the hyperbola
(a) ( x 2 − y 2 ) 2 = 4 x 2 ( x 2 − a 2 ) x2 y2
(b) ( x 2 − y 2 )2 = x 2 ( x 2 − a 2 ) − = 1 having its foci as S1 and S 2 . If the internal
a2 b2
(c) ( x 2 − y 2 )2 = 4y 2 ( x 2 − a 2 ) angle bisector of the angle∠S1PS 2 cuts the x-axis at
(d) ( x 2 − y 2 )2 = y 2 ( x 2 − a 2 ) point Q(α, 0 ), then range of α is
6. If a rectangular hyperbola ( x − 1) (y − 2 ) = 4 cuts a (a) [ −a,a ] (b) [0,a ]
(c) (0,a ] (d) [ −a,0)
circle x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 at points (3, 4) (5, 3),
13. If angle between asymptotes of hyperbola
(2, 6) and ( −1, 0 ), then the value of ( g + f ) is equal to
x2 y2
(a) − 8 (b) − 9 (c) 8 (d) 9 − = 1 is 120° and product of perpendiculars
a 2 b 2`
7. If f ( x ) = ax + bx + cx + d , (a , b, c , d are rational
3 2
drawn from foci upon its any tangent is 9, then locus
numbers) and roots of f ( x ) = 0 are eccentricities of a of point of intersection of perpendicular tangents of
parabola and a rectangular hyperbola, then the hyperbola can be
a + b + c + d equals (a) x 2 + y 2 = 3 (b) x 2 + y 2 = 6
(a) −1 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) data inadequate (c) x 2 + y 2 = 9 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 18
608 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

14. If α + β = 3 π, then the chord joining the points α and x2 y2

22. Let F1 , F 2 are foci of the hyperbola − = 1 and
x2 y2 16 9
β for the hyperbola 2 − 2 = 1 passes through F 3 , F 4 are the foci of its conjugate hyperbola.
a b
(a) focus If eH and eC are their eccentricities respectively, then
(b) centre the statement which holds true is
(c) one of the end point of the transverse axis (a) their equations of their asymptotes are different
(d) one of the end points of the conjugate axis (b) e H > e C
x2 y2 (c) area of the quadrilateral formed by their foci is 50 sq
15. If the curves + = 1 (a > b ) and x 2 − y 2 = c 2 cut units
a2 b2
(d) their auxiliary circles will have the same equation
at right angles, then
(a) a 2 + b 2 = 2c 2 (b) b 2 − a 2 = 2c 2 23. Locus of the point of intersection of the tangents at
(c) a 2 − b 2 = 2c 2 (d) a 2b 2 = 2c 2 π
the points with eccentric angles φ and − φ on the
2
16. If chords of the hyperbola x 2 − y 2 = a 2 touch the 2 2
x y
parabola y 2 = 4ax , then the locus of the middle points hyperbola 2 − 2 = 1 is
a b
of these chords is the curve (a) x = a (b) y = b
(a) y 2 ( x + a ) = x 3 (b) y 2 ( x − a ) = x 3 (c) x = ab (d) y = ab
(c) y 2 ( x + 2a ) = 3 x 3 (d) y 2 ( x − 2a ) = 2x 3
24. Latusrectum of the conic satisfying the differential
17. An ellipse has eccentricity 1/2 and one focus at the equation xdy + ydx = 0 and passing through the point
point P(1 / 2,1). Its one directrix is the common ( 2, 8 ) is
tangent nearer to the point P, to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 1 (a) 4 2 (b) 8
and the hyperbola x 2 − y 2 = 1. The equation of the (c) 8 2 (d) 16
ellipse is standard form is
25. The points of the intersection of the curves whose
(a) 9x 2 + 12y 2 = 108
parametric equations are x = t 2 + 1, y = 2t and
(b) 9( x − 1 / 3 )2 + 12(y − 1)2 = 1
2
(c) 9( x − 1 / 3 )2 + 4 (y − 1)2 = 36 x = 2 s , y = is given by
s
(d) None of the above
(a) (1, − 3 ) (b) (2, 2)
18. The equation of the line passing through the centre (c) ( − 2, 4 ) (d) (1, 2)
of a rectangular hyperbola is x − y − 1 = 0.
26. If the tangent and normal to a rectangular hyperbola
If one of its asymptote is 3 x − 4y − 6 = 0, the equation cut off intercepts x 1 and x 2 on one axis and y 1 and y 2
of the other asymptote is on the other axis, then
(a) 4 x − 3y + 8 = 0 (b) 4 x + 3y + 17 = 0 (a) x 1y 1 + x 2y 2 = 0 (b) x 1y 2 + x 2y 1 = 0
(c) 3 x − 2y + 15 = 0 (d) None of these (c) x 1x 2 + y 1y 2 = 0 (d) None of these
19. The condition that a straight line with slope m will be 27. The focus of rectangular hyperbola
normal to parabola y 2 = 4ax as well as a tangent to ( x − h ) (y − k ) = p 2 is
rectangular hyperbola x 2 − y 2 = a 2 is (a) (h − p ,k − p )
(a) m 6 − 4m 2 + 2m − 1 = 0 (b) m 4 + 3m 3 + 2m + 1 = 0 (b) (h − p , k + p )
(c) m 6 − 2m = 0 (d) m 6 + 4m 4 + 3m 2 + 1 = 0 (c) (h + p ,k − p )
(d) None of the above
20. The locus of the middle points of chords of hyperbola
3 x 2 − 2y 2 + 4 x − 6y = 0 parallel to y = 2 x is 28. The equation of a hyperbola, conjugate to the
(a) 3 x − 4y = 4 (b) 3y − 4 x + 4 = 0 hyperbola x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2 x + 3y = 0 is
(c) 4 x − 4y = 3 (d) 3 x − 4y = 2 (a) x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2x + 3y + 1 = 0
(b) x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2x + 3y + 2 = 0
21. The coordinates of the centre of the hyperbola
x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2 x + 3y + 2 = 0 is (c) x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2x + 3y + 3 = 0
(d) x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2x + 3y + 4 = 0
(a) ( − 1, 0) (b) (1, 0) (c) (− 1, 1) (d) (1, − 1)
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 609

29. If the values of m for which the line y = mx + 2 5 30. Let C be a curve which is the locus of the point of
touches the hyperbola 16 x 2 − 9y 2 = 144 are the roots intersection of lines x = 2 + m and my = 4 − m.
of the equation x 2 − (a + b ) x − 4 = 0 , then the value A circle s = ( x − 2 ) 2 + (y + 1) 2 = 25 intersects the curve
of a + b is C at four points P , Q , R and S. If O is the centre of the
curve C, then (OP ) 2 + (OQ ) 2 + (OR ) 2 + (OS ) 2 is
(a) − 2 (b) 0
(c) 2 (d) 4 (a) 25 (b) 50 (c) 100 (d) 200

#L Hyperbola Exercise 2 :
More than One Correct Option Type Questions
n This section contains 15 multiple choice questions. 36. If the line ax + by + c = 0 is normal to the hyperbola
Each question has four choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of
xy =1, then
which MORE THAN ONE may be correct.
(a) a > 0, b > 0 (b) a > 0, b < 0
31. Equation of common tangent to the parabola y 2 = 8 x (c) a < 0, b > 0 (d) a < 0, b < 0
y2
and hyperbola x 2 − = 1 is 37. If P ( x 1 , y 1 ), Q ( x 2 , y 2 ), R( x 3 , y 3 ) and S( x 4 , y 4 ) are 4
3 concyclic points on the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 ,
(a) 2x − y + 1 = 0 (b) 2x − y − 1 = 0
(c) 2x + y + 1 = 0 (d) 2x + y − 1 = 0 the coordinates of the orthocentre of the ∆PQR are
(a) ( x 4 , − y 4 ) (b) ( x 4 , y 4 )
x2 y2 (c) ( − x 4 , − y 4 ) (d) ( − x 4 , y 4 )
32. If the foci of the ellipse + = 1 and the
k 2a 2 a 2
38. The line y = x + 5 touches
x2 y2
hyperbola − = 1 coincide, then k is equal to (a) the parabola y 2 = 20x
a2 b2
(b) the ellipse 9x 2 + 16y 2 = 144
(a) − 2 (b) 2 (c) − 3 (d) 3 x2 y2
(c) the hyperbola − =1
33. If (a sec θ, b tan θ) and (a sec φ, b tan φ ) are the ends of 29 4
(d) the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25
x2 y2 θ φ
a focal chord of 2 − 2 = 1, then tan   tan   is
a b  2  2 39. The coordinates of a point common to a directrix and
equal to an asymptote of the hyperbola x 2 / 25 − y 2 / 16 = 1 are
e −1 1− e 1+ e e +1 (a) ( 25 / 41, 20 / 41) (b) ( − 25 / 41, − 20 / 41)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
e +1 1+ e 1− e e −1 (c) ( 25 / 3, 20 / 3 ) (d) ( − 25 / 3, − 20 / 3 )
x2 y2 40. If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the foci of a hyperbola passing
34. If foci of − = 1 coincide with the foci of
a2 b2 through the origin, then
x2 y2 386 386
+ = 1 and eccentricity of the hyperbola is 3, (a) e = (b) e =
25 16 12 13
121 121
then (c) latusrectum = (d) latusrectum =
3 6
(a) a 2 + b 2 = 9
x2 y2
(b) there is no director circle to the hyperbola 41. For the hyperbola − = 1, let n be the number of
(c) centre of the director circle is (0, 0) a2 b2
(d) length of the latusrectum of the hyperbola = 16 points on the plane through which perpendicular
35. The equation16 x 2 − 3y 2 − 32 x − 12y − 44 = 0 tangents are drawn
(a) if n = 1, then e = 2
represents a hyperbola with
(b) if n > 1, then 0 < e < 2
(a) length of the transverse axis = 2 3
(b) length of the conjugate axis = 8 (c) if n = 0, then e > 2
(c) centre at (1, − 2) (d) None of the above
(d) eccentricity = 19
610 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

42. Which of the following equations in parametric form x2 y2

44. Given ellipse + = 1 and the hyperbola
can represent a hyperbola, where ‘t’ is a parameter? 16 7
a 1 b  1 x2 y2 1
(a) x = t +  and y = t −  − = , if the ordinate of one of the points of
2 t 2 t 144 81 25
tx y x ty intersection is produced to cut an asymptote at P,
(b) − + t = 0 and + − 1= 0
a b a b then which of the following is true?
(c) x = e t + e −t and y = e t − e −t (a) They have the same foci
t  63
(d) x − 6 = 2 cos t and y + 2 = 4 cos  
2 2 2
(b) Square of the ordinate of point of intersection is
 2 25
(c) Sum of the squares of coordinate of P is 16
43. Equation of common tangent to the two hyperbolas (d) P lies on the auxiliary circle formed by ellipse
x2 y2 y2 x2
− = 1 and − = 1 is 45. Solution of the differential equation
a2 b2 a2 b2 dy
(a) y = x + (a 2 − b 2 ) (1 − x 2 ) + xy = ax, where a ∈R, is
dx
(b) y = x − (a 2 − b 2 ) (a) a conic which is an ellipse
(b) centre of the conic is (0, a )
(c) y = − x + (a − b )
2 2
(c) length of one of the principal axes is 1
(d) y = − x − (a 2 − b 2 ) (d) length of one of the principal axes is equal to 2

#L Hyperbola Exercise 3 :
Paragraph Based Questions
n
This section contains 5 paragraphs based upon each of 49. The equation of the curve C is
the paragraph 3 multiple choice questions have to be (a) x 2 = 2y (b) x 2 = 4y
answered. Each of these questions has four choices (a),
(c) x 2 = 6y (d) x 2 = 8y
(b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.

Paragraph I 50. If the tangent to the curve C cuts the coordinate axes
at A and B, then, the locus of the middle-point of AB
(Q. Nos. 46 to 48)
is
The graph of the conic x 2 − ( y − 1) 2 = 1 has one tangent line (a) x 2 + 2y = 0 (b) x 2 = y
with positive slope that passes through the origin. The point of (c) 2x 2 + y = 0 (d) x 2 = 2y
tangency being ( a, b )` .
a 
51. The area of the equilateral triangle inscribed in the
46. The value of sin −1   is curve C having one vertex as the vertex of curve C is
b
(a) 8 3 sq units (b) 12 3 sq units
5π π π π
(a) (b) (c) (d) (c) 27 3 sq units (d) 48 3 sq units
12 6 4 3
47. Length of the latusrectum of the conic is
Paragraph III
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 2 (d) 4 (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)

48. If e be the eccentricity of the conic, then the value of Let P ( x, y ) be a variable point such that
(1 + e 2 + e 4 ) is | ( x − 1) 2 + ( y − 2) 2 − ( x − 5) 2 + ( y − 5) 2 | = 4
7 which represents a hyperbola.
(a) 3 (b) 7 (c) (d) 21
4
52. The eccentricity of the corresponding conjugate
Paragraph II hyperbola is
(Q. Nos. 49 to 51) 5 4
(a) (b)
A point P moves such that the sum of the slopes of the normals 4 3
5 3
drawn from it to the hyperbola xy = 4 is equal to the sum of the (c) (d)
ordinates of feet of normals. The locus of P is a curve C. 3 2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 611

53. Locus of point of intersection of two perpendicular  θ +θ2  2  θ1 − θ 2 

56. If cos 2  1  = λ cos   , then λ is
tangents to the hyperbola is  2   2 
1
(a) ( x − 3 )2 + (y − 7 / 2)2 = equal to
4
a 2 + b 2  a 2 + b 2 
(b) ( x − 3 ) + (y − 7 / 2) =
2 2 3 (a)   (b)  
4  a2   b2 
(c) ( x − 3 ) + (y − 7 / 2) =
2 2 5 a 2 + b 2  a 2 + b 2 
4
(c)   (d)  
 ab   2ab 
7
(d) ( x − 3 ) + (y − 7 / 2) =
2 2

4 θ
57. The value of cos   is
54. If origin is shifted to point (3, 7/2) and axes are  2
rotated in anticlockwise sense through an angle θ, so (a)
1
(b)
1
that the equation of hyperbola reduces to its 2e e
x2 y2 1 1
standard form 2 − 2 = 1, then θ equals (c) 2 (d) 2
a b e 2e
 4 3 Paragraph V
(a) tan −1   (b) tan −1  
3  4 (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
 5
−1  4
−1
The vertices of ∆ABC lie on a rectangular hyperbola such that
(c) tan   (d) tan  
 4  5 the orthocentre of the triangle is (2, 3) and the asymptotes of
Paragraph IV the rectangular hyperbola are parallel to the coordinate axes.
The two perpendicular tangents of the hyperbola intersect at
(Q. Nos. 55 to 57)
the point (1, 1).
Let P(θ 1 ) and Q(θ 2 ) are the extremities of any focal chord of
x2 y2
58. The equation of the asymptotes is
the hyperbola 2 − 2 = 1 whose eccentricity is e. Let θ be the (a) xy − 1 = y − x (b) xy + 1 = x + y
a b (c) xy − 1 = x − y (d) xy + 1 = − x − y
angle between its asymptotes. Tangents are drawn to the
hyperbola at some arbitrary point R. These tangent meet the 59. The equation of the rectangular hyperbola is
coordinate axes at the points A and B respectively. The (a) xy − 5 = y − x
(b) xy − 1 = x + y
rectangle OACB (O being the origin) is completed, then
(c) xy = x + y + 1
55. Locus of point C is (d) xy − 11 = − x − y
b 2 a2 b 2 a2
(a) − =1 (b) + =1 60. The number of real tangents that can be drawn from
x2 y2 x2 y2
the point (1, 1) to the rectangular hyperbola is
a2 b 2 a2 b 2
(c) 2 + 2 = 1 (d) 2 − 2 = 1 (a) 0 (b) 2
x y x y (c) 3 (d) 4
612 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Hyperbola Exercise 4 :
Single Integer Answer Type Questions
n This section contains 10 questions. The answer to each 4e12 − e 22 = λ, where e1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of
question is a single digit integer ranging from 0 to 9 ellipse and hyperbola respectively, then the value of λ
(both inclusive)
is
x2 y2 x2 y2
61. The ellipse + = 1 and the hyperbola − =1 x2 y2
a2 b2 A2 B2 66. The shortest distance between the curves − =1
a2 b2
are given to be confocal and length of minor axis of
and 4 x 2 + 4y 2 = a 2 (b > a ) is f (a , b ), then the value of
the ellipse is same as the conjugate axis of the
hyperbola. If e1 and e 2 represents the eccentricities of f (4, 6) + f (2, 3) is
ellipse and hyperbola respectively, then the value of 67. ABC is a triangle such that ∠ABC = 2 ∠BAC .
e1−2 + e 2−2 is If AB is fixed and locus of C is a hyperbola, then the
eccentricity of the hyperbola is
62. If abscissa of orthocentre of a triangle inscribed in a
1 68. Point P lie on 2 xy = 1. A triangle is constructed by P , S
rectangular hyperbola xy = 4 is , then the ordinate
2 and S′ (where S and S′ are foci ). The locus of
of orthocentre of triangle is ex-centre opposite S (S and P lie in first quadrant) is
63. Normal drawn to the hyperbola xy = 2 at the point ( x + py ) 2 = ( 2 − 1) 2 ( x − y ) 2 + q, then the value of
P (t 1 ) meets the hyperbola again at Q (t 2 ), then p + q is
minimum distance between the point P and Q is 69. Chords of the circle x 2 + y 2 = 4, touch the hyperbola
3 x2 y2
64. The normal at P to a hyperbola of eccentricity − = 1. The locus of their middle-points is the
2 2 4 16
intersects the transverse and conjugate axes at M and curve ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 = λx 2 − 16y 2 , then the value of λ is
N respectively. The locus of mid-point of MN is a 70. Tangents are drawn from the point (α, β) to the
hyperbola, then its eccentricity
hyperbola 3 x 2 − 2y 2 = 6 and are inclined at angles θ
x2 y2 and φ to the X-axis. If tan θ . tan φ = 2, then the value
65. If radii of director circle of the ellipse + = 1 and
a2 b2 of 2α 2 − β 2 is
x2 y2
hyperbola − = 1 are in the ratio 1 : 3 and
a 2 b12
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 613

#L Hyperbola Exercise 5 :
Matching Type Questions
n This section contains 3 questions. Each question has
four statements (A), (B), (C) and (D) given in Column I B. With one focus of the hyperbola (q) A Prime
and four statements (p, q, r and s) in Column II. Any x2 y2 number
− = 1 as the centre, a circle is
given statement in Column I can have correct matching 9 16
with one or move statements (s) given in Column II. drawn which is tangent to the
hyperbola with no part of the circle
71. Match the following. being outside the hyperbola. The radius
of the circle is
Column I Column II
C. If S1 and S 2 are the foci of the hyperbola (r) A
(A) If λ be the length of the latusrectum of (p) 4
whose length of the transverse axis is 4 Composit
the hyperbola
and that of the conjugate axis is 6, and e number
16x 2 − 9 y2 + 32x + 36 y − 164 = 0, then
S 3 and S 4 are the foci of the conjugate
3λ is divisible by
hyperbola, then the area of quadrilateral
(B) If the chord x cosα + y sin α = p of the (q) 6 S1S 2 S 3 S 4 is
x2 y2
hyperbola − = 1 subtends a right D. If equation of hyperbola whose (s) A Perfect
16 18
angle at the centre, a circle touches the conjugate axis is 5 and distance number
given chord and concentric with between its foci is 13, is ax 2 − by2 = c,
hyperbola, then the diameter of circle 3ab
where a and b are co-prime, then is
is divisible by 2c
(C) For the hyperbola xy = 8 any tangent of (r) 8
it at P meets coordinate axes at Q and 73. If e1 and e 2 are the roots of the equation x 2 − λx + 2 = 0
R, then the area of triangle CQR is
divisible by (where ‘C’ is centre of the Column I Column II
hyperbola) A. If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of (p) 2 2
(D) For the hyperbola x − 3 y = 9, acute
2 2
(s) 16 ellipse and hyperbola respectively, then
πλ the values of λ are
angle between its asymptotes is ,
24 B. If both e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of (q) 2 3
then λ is divisible by the hyperbolas, then the values of λ
are
72. Match the following.
C. If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the (r) 2 5
Column I Column II hyperbola and conjugate hyperbola,
A. If the vertex of a hyperbola bisects the (p) A Natural then the values of λ are
distance between its centre and the number D. If e1 is the eccentricity of the hyperbola (s) 2 6
corresponding focus, then the ratio of for which there exist infinite points
the square of its conjugate axis to the from which perpendicular tangents can
square of its transverse axis is
be drawn and e2 is the eccentricity of
the hyperbola in which no such points
exist, then the values of λ are
614 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

#L Hyperbola Exercise 6 :
Statement I and II Type Questions
n Directions (Q. Nos. 74 to 81) are Assertion-Reason type 77. Statement I Two tangents are drawn from a point on
questions. Each of these questions contains two x2 y2
statements : the circle x 2 + y 2 = 9 to the hyperbola − = 1,
25 16
Statement I (Assertion) and Statement II (Reason)
then angle between tangents is π / 2.
Each of these questions also has four alternative choices,
only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select Statement II x 2 + y 2 = 9 is the director circle of
the correct choice as given below : x2 y2
− = 1.
(a) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is a 25 16
correct explanation for Statement I
78. Statement I If eccentricity of a hyperbola is 2, then
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is
eccentricity of its conjugate hyperbola is 2/ 3.
not a correct explanation for Statement I
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is false Statement II If e and e1 are the eccentricities of two
(d) Statement I is false, Statement II is true conjugate hyperbolas, then ee1 > 1.
5 5 79. Statement I The line 4 x − 5y = 0 will not meet the
74. Statement I and are the eccentricities of two
3 4 hyperbola 16 x 2 − 25y 2 = 400.
conjugate hyperbolas.
Statement II The line 4 x − 5y = 0 is an asymptote to
Statement II If e1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of two the hyperbola.
conjugate hyperbolas, then e1e 2 > 1. 80. Statement I The point (5, − 3 ) inside the hyperbola
75. Statement I A hyperbola and its conjugate 3y 2 − 5 x 2 + 1 = 0.
hyperbola have the same asymptotes. Statement II The point ( x 1 , y 1 ) inside the hyperbola
Statement II The difference between the second x2 y2 x 12 y 12
− = 1, then − − 1 < 0.
degree curve and pair of asymptotes is constant. a2 b2 a2 b2
76. Statement I The equation of the director circle to the 81. Statement I A hyperbola whose asymptotes include
hyperbola 5 x 2 − 4y 2 = 20 is x 2 + y 2 = 1. π / 3 is said to be equilateral hyperbola.
Statement II Director circle is the locus of the point Statement II The eccentricity of an equilateral
of intersection of perpendicular tangents. hyperbola is 2.

Hyperbola Exercise 7 :
Subjective Type Questions
n
In this section, there are 12 Subjective questions. 84. If a hyperbola be rectangular and its equation be
82. Given the base of a triangle and the ratio of the xy = c 2 , prove that the locus of the middle points of
tangent of half the base angles. Show that the vertex chords of constant length 2 d is
moves on a hyperbola whose foci are the extremities ( x 2 + y 2 ) ( xy − c 2 ) = d 2 xy .
of the base. 85. If four points be taken on a rectangular hyperbola
83. A , B, C are three points on the rectangular hyperbola such that the chord joining any two is perpendicular
xy = c 2 , find to the chord joining the other two, and if α, β, γ , δ be
the inclinations to either asymptote of the straight
(i) The area of the triangle ABC.
line joining these points to the centre, prove that
(ii) The area of the triangle formed by the tangents tan α tan β tan γ tan δ =1.
at A , B and C.
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 615

86. P and Q are two variable points on the rectangular 90. From the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ), tangents are
hyperbola xy = c 2 such that tangent at Q passes drawn to the rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2 . If the
through the foot of the ordinate of P. Show that the conic passing through the two given points and the
locus of the intersection of tangents at P and Q is a four points of contact is a circle, then show that
x 1 x 2 = y 1y 2 and x 1y 2 + x 2 y 1 = 4c 2 .
hyperbola with the same asymptotes as of the given
hyperbola. 91. A rectangular hyperbola passes through two fixed
points and its asymptotes are in given directions.
87. A circle cuts two perpendicular lines so that each
Prove that its vertices lie on an ellipse and hyperbola
intercept is of given length. Prove that the locus of
which intersect orthogonally.
the centre of the circle is a rectangular hyperbola.
92. Let normals are drawn from (α, β) to the hyperbola
88. (a) Prove that any line parallel to either of the xy =1, and ( x i , y i ), i =1 , 2 , 3 , 4 be the feet of the
asymptotes of a hyperbola shall meet it in one point co-normal points. If the algebraic sum of the
at infinity. perpendicular distances drawn from
(b) Prove that the asymptotes of a hyperbola are the ( x i , y i ), i =1 , 2 , 3 , 4 onto a variable line vanishes,
diagonals of the rectangle formed by the lines drawn show that the variable line passes through the point
parallel to the axes at the vertices of the hyperbola (α / 4, β / 4 ) .
[i.e. at ( ± a , 0 ) and (0 , ± b )]. 93. A series of hyperbolas is drawn having a common
89. Let the tangent at a point P on the ellipse meet the transverse axis of length 2a . Prove that the locus of a
point P on each hyperbola such that its distance from
major axis at B and the ordinate from it meet the
the transverse axis is equal to its distance from on
major axis at A. If Q is a point on the line AP such
asymptote, is the curve
that AQ = AB, prove that the locus of Q is a
hyperbola. Find the asymptotes of this hyperbola. ( x 2 − y 2 ) 2 = 4 x 2 ( x 2 − a 2 ).

#L Hyperbola Exercise 8 :
Questions Asked in Previous 13 Year’s Exams
n
This section contains questions asked in IIT-JEE, AIEEE, x2 y2
(a) the equation of hyperbola is − =1
JEE Main & JEE Advanced from year 2005 to 2017. 9 16
94. The locus of a point P (α, β) moving under the x2 y2
(b) the equations of hyperbola is − =1
9 25
condition that the line y = αx + β is a tangent to the
(c) focus of hyperbola is (5, 0)
x2 y2
hyperbola 2 − 2 = 1 is [AIEEE 2005, 3M] (d) vertex of hyperbola is (5 3 ,0)
a b
(a) an ellipse 96. A hyperbola, having the transverse axis of length
(b) a circle 2 sin θ, is confocal with the ellipse 3 x 2 + 4y 2 = 12 .
(c) a parabola Then, its equation is [IIT- JEE 2007, 3M]
(d) a hyperbola (a) x 2 cosec2θ − y 2 sec 2 θ = 1
95. Let a hyperbola passes through the focus of the (b) x 2 sec2θ − y 2 cosec2θ = 1
x2 y2 (c) x 2 sin 2θ − y 2 cos 2 θ = 1
ellipse + = 1. The transverse and conjugate axes
25 16 (d) x 2 cos2θ − y 2 sin2 θ = 1
of this hyperbola coincide with the major and minor
axes of the given ellipse, also the product of 97. Two branches of a hyperbola [IIT- JEE 2007, 1.5M]

eccentricities of given ellipse and hyperbola is 1, then (a) have a common tangent
(b) have a common normal
[IIT- JEE 2006, 5M] (c) do not have a common tangent
(d) do not have a common normal
616 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y2 5 3
98. For the hyperbola − = 1, which of the (a) (b)
cos 2 α sin 2 α 2 2
following remains constant when α varies (c) 2 (d) 3
[AIEEE 2007, 3M]
x2 y2
(a) abscissae of vertices (b) abscissae of foci 105. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola − = 1 be
(c) eccentricity (d) directrix a2 b2
reciprocal to that of the ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 4. If the
99. Consider a branch of the hyperbola
x 2 − 2y 2 − 2 2x − 4 2y − 6 = 0 hyperbola passes through a focus of the ellipse, then
with vertex at the point A. Let B be one of the end points [IIT- JEE 2011, 4M]
of its latusrectum. If C is the focus of the hyperbola x2 y2
(a) the equation of the hyperbola is − =1
nearest to the point A, then the area of the triangle ABC 3 2
is [IIT- JEE 2008, 3M] (b) a focus of the hyperbola is ( 2,0)
2 3 2 3 5
(a) 1 − (b) −1 (c) 1 + (d) +1 (c) the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
3
3 2 3 2
(d) the equation of the hyperbola is x 2 − 3y 2 = 3
100. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2 x 2 − 2y 2 = 1
x2 y2
orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse is 106. Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola − = 1,
reciprocal of that of the hyperbola. If the axes of the 9 4
ellipse are along the coordinate axes, then parallel to the straight line 2 x − y = 1. The points of
[IIT- JEE 2009, 4M] contact of the tangents on the hyperbola are
(a) equation of ellipse is x 2 + 2y 2 = 2 [IIT- JEE 2012, 4M]

(b) the foci of ellipse are ( ±10

, )  9 1  9 1
(a)  ,  (b)  − ,− 
(c) equation of ellipse is x 2 + 2y 2 = 4  2 2 2  2 2 2
(d) the foci of ellipse are ( ± 2,0) (c) (3 3 , − 2 2 ) (d) ( − 3 3 , 2 2 )
Paragraph 107. Consider the hyperbola H : x 2 − y 2 = 1 and a circle S
(Q. Nos. 100 and 102) with centre N ( x 2 , 0 ). Suppose that H and S touch each
x2 y2 other at a point P ( x 1 , y 1 ) with x 1 > 1 and y 1 > 0. The
The circle x 2 + y 2 − 8x = 0 and hyperbola − =1
9 4 common tangent to H and S at P intersects the X-axis
intersect at the points A and B. at point M. If (l , m ) is the centroid of the triangle PMN,
then the correct expression(s) is(are)
101. Equation of a common tangent with positive slope to
[JEE Advanced 2015, 4M]
the circle as well as to the hyperbola is dl 1 dm x1
(a) 2x − 5y − 20 = 0 (b) 2x − 5y + 4 = 0 (a) = 1− for x 1 > 1 (b) = for x 1 > 1
dx 1 3 x 12 dx 1 3( ( x 12 − 1))
(c) 3 x − 4y + 8 = 0 (d) 4 x − 3y + 4 = 0
dl 1 dm 1
102. Equation of the circle with AB as its diameter is (c) = 1+ for x 1 > 1 (d) = for y 1 > 0
dx 1 3 x 12 dy 1 3
(a) x 2 + y 2 − 12x + 24 = 0 (b) x 2 + y 2 + 12x + 24 = 0
(c) x 2 + y 2 + 24 x − 12 = 0 (d) x 2 + y 2 − 24 x − 12 = 0 108. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose length of the
[IIT- JEE 2010, 3 + 3M] latusrectum is equal to 8 and the length of its
conjugate axis is equal to half of the distance
103. The line 2 x + y = 1 is tangent to the hyperbola between its foci, is [JEE Main 2016, 4M]
x2 y2 2
− = 1. If this line passes through the point of (a) (b) 3
a2 b2 3
intersection of the nearest directrix and the X-axis, 4 4
(c) (d)
then the eccentricity of the hyperbola is 3 3
[IIT- JEE 2010, 3M]
109. A hyperbola passes through the point P( 2 , 3 ) and
x2 y2
104. Let P(6, 3 ) be a point on the hyperbola − = 1. If has foci at (± 2, 0). Then the taught to this hyperbola
a2 b2 at P also passes through the point [JEE Main 2017, 4M]
the normal at the point P intersects the X-axis at
(9, 0), then the eccentricity of the hyperbola is (a) (– 2,– 3 ) (b) (3 2, 2 3 )
[IIT- JEE 2011, 3M] (c) ( 2 2, 3 3 ) (d) ( 3 , 2 )
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 617

110. If 2 x −y + 1 = 0 is a tangent to the hyperbola 1

111. The tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) at ( 3 , )
x2 y2 2
− = 1, then which of the following cannot be is found to be 3 x + 2y = 4, then which of the
a 2 16
sides of a right angled triangle? [JEE Advanced 2017, 4M] following options is the only correct combination?
(a) 2a, 8, 1 (b) a, 4, 1 (a) (IV) (iii) (S)
(c) a, 4, 2 (d) 2a, 4, 1 (b) (II) (iv) (R)
(c) (IV) (iv) (S)
n Direction (Q. No. 111 to 113) Matching the information (d) (II) (iii) (R)
given in the three columns of the following table.
Columns 1, 2 and 3 contain conics, equations of tangents 112. For a = 2, if a tangent is drawn to a suitable conic
to the conics and points of contact, respectively. (Column 1) at the point of contact ( −1, 1), then which
[JEE Advanced 2017, (3 + 3 + 3) M] of the following options is the only correct
combination for obtaining its equation?
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 (a) (III) (i) (P) (b) (I) (i) (P)
(I) x2 + y2 (i) my = m 2 x + a (P)  a 2 a  (c) (II) (ii) (Q) (d) (I) (ii) (Q)
= a2  2, 
m m 
113. If a tangent of a suitable conic (Column 1) is found to
(II) x2 + a 2 y2 (ii) y = mx (Q)  − ma 
= a2 + a m2 + 1
 ,
a  be y = x + 8 and its point of contact is (8, 16), then
 m2 + 1 m2 + 1
  which of the following options is the only correct
(III) y2 = 4 ax (iii) y = mx (R)  − a 2 m 1  combination?
 , 
+ a2 m 2 − 1  a2 m 2 + 1 a2 m 2 + 1  (a) (III) (i) (P) (b) (III) (ii) (Q)
 
(c) (II) (iv) (R) (d) (I) (ii) (Q)
(IV) x2 − a 2 y2 (iv) y = mx (S)  − a 2 m −1 
= a2  , 
+ a2 m 2 + 1  a2 m 2 − 1 a2 m 2 − 1 
 

Answers
Exercise for Session 1 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b)
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (c)
6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (c,d) 10. (c) 25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (b) 30. (c)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. y2 − x2 = 5 31. (a,c) 32. (c,d) 33. (b,c) 34. (a,b,d) 35. (a,b,c) 36. (b,c)
14. 8x2 − y2 − 64x + 10 y + 71 = 0 37. (b,c) 38. (a,b,c) 39. (a,b) 40. (a,d) 41. (a,b,c) 42. (a,c,d)
43. (a,b,c,d) 44. (a,b,c,d) 45. (a,b,d)
16. (1, 2); 2   ; 2 5 ; 2 3
2
17. 2 18. λ = ± 6
 5 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (b) 49. (b) 50. (c) 51. (d)
52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (a) 57. (b)
(161) = 0;  ±
15 8 
19. 30x − 24 y ± ,±  (b) 59. (c) 60. (b) 61. (2) 62. (8) 63. (4)
 2 161 3 161  58.
64. (3) 65. (7) 66. (3) 67. (2) 68. (5) 69. (4)
70. (7)
Exercise for Session 2
71. (A) → (p,r,s); (B) → (p,q,r); (C) → (p,r,s); (D) → (p,r)
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (b)
72. (A) → (p,q); (B) → (p,q); (C) → (p,r); (D) → (p,r,s)
6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c)
2 73. (A) → (q,r,s); (B) → (p); (C) → (p); (D) → (q,r,s)
 x2 y2  x2 y2
11.  2 + 2  = 2 − 2 74. (b) 75. (a) 76. (d) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (a)
a b  a b
80. (c) 81. (d)
c2
Exercise for Session 3 83. (i) | (t1 − t2 ) ( (t2 − t3 ) (t3 − t1 ) |
2t1t2 t3
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (d)
6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b)  (t − t ) (t − t3 ) (t3 − t1 ) 
(ii) 2c2  1 2 2 
11. (d) 12. (b) 13. x + 3 y = 0  (t1 + t2 ) (t2 + t3 ) (t3 + t1 ) 
14. 12x2 − 7xy − 12 y2 + 31x + 17 y = 0 89. x = 0 and x + y = 0
15. 6x2 + 13xy + 6 y2 − 38x − 37 y − 98 = 0 94. (d) 95. (a,c) 96. (a) 97. (b,c) 98. (b) 99. (b)
100. (a,b) 101. (b) 102. (a) 103. (2) 104. (b) 105. (b,d)
Chapter Exercises 106. (a,b) 107. (a,b,d) 108. (a) 109. (c) 110. (a,b,c)
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (a) 111. (b) 112. (d) 113. (a)
7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (c)
 Further (h, k ) lies on hyperbola

Solutions h2 k 2
−
a2 b2
= 1

From Eq. (i) and (ii), we get

⇒b =
 a 2k 2 
 2
h − a2 


(k 2 − h 2 ) = ± 2h (h 2 − a 2 )
…(ii)

 a  a
1. Q PF1 ⋅ PF2 = e  x1 −  . e  x1 + 
 e   e ⇒ (k 2 − h 2 ) 2 = 4h 2 (h 2 − a 2 )
= e 2 x12 − a 2 ∴ Required locus is
= 2 x12 − a 2 (for rectangular hyperbola e = 2) (x 2 − y 2 )2 = 4x 2 (x 2 − a 2 )

= x + x −a
2 2 2
(Q P ( x1 , y1 ), x12 − y12 = a 2 )
6. We know that if a circle cuts a rectangular hyperbola, then
1 1
arithmetic mean of points of intersections is the mid-point of
=x +y1
2
1
2
centre of hyperbola and circle.
= (OP ) 2 3 + 5 + 2 + ( −1 ) − g + 1
∴ λ =1 So, =
4 2
2. Let the point of contact of normal from point P (h, k ), be R(t ) 4 + 3 + 6 + 0 −f + 2
and =
for the hyperbola xy = c 2 4 2
⇒ The equation of normal is ∴ g + f = −8
ct 4 − xt 3 + yt − c = 0 which gives 7. We know that eccentricity of a parabola and rectangular
ct 4 − ht 3 + kt − c = 0 [Q It passes through (h, k )]…(i) hyperbola are 1 and 2 respectively. Also, irrational roots
⇒ t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 = λ
2 2 2 2
(given) … (ii) occur in conjugate pair, thus roots of f ( x ) = 0 are 1, 2 and
From Eq. (i), − 2
h ∴ f ( x ) = ( x − 1 )( x − 2 )( x + 2 )
Σt1 = , Σ t1 t 2 = 0
c
= x 3 − x 2 − 2x + 2
∴ ( Σt1 ) 2 − 2 Σt1t 2 = t12 + t 22 + t 32 + t 42
2 ∴ a + b + c + d = 1 − 1 − 2 + 2= 0
 h
⇒   −0=λ 8. Let the point be (α, β)
c
⇒ β =α + c
or h 2 = λc 2
Chord of contact of hyperbola T = 0.
∴ Locus of P is x 2 = λc 2
xα yβ
3. As branches lies in the second and fourth quadrant. ∴ − =1
2 1
∴ We have xy < 0 xα
⇒ m 2 − 9 < 0 ⇒| m| < 3 ⇒ − y (α + c ) = 1
2
4. Let A is (α , β) , the B is (β, α) x 
⇒  − y  α − (yc + 1 ) = 0
Q A and B an symmetrical about the line y = x. 2 
So, tangents at A and B will be mirror images of each other Since, this passes through point ( x1 , y1 )
about y = x. Thus, point of intersection will lie on y = x. ∴ x1 = 2y1 and y1c + 1 = 0
5. Let P (h,k ) be any point on any one member of hyperbola x
x2 y 2 ∴ y1 = 1
family, having equation − = 1 ; b is any arbitrary 2
a2 b2 x1
b Hence, =2
constant, then its asymptotes are given by y = ± x, then y1
a
according to question 9. Eliminating x, we have
b y2 y
± h −k + +1=0
a b 2 ab
| k| =
b2  This equation has real and distinct roots
 2 + 1 1 4
a  ∴ − >0
a 2b 2 b 2
  a 
2
 b
2
⇒ k 2 =  ± h − k  2  1 1
 a  a + b2  i.e. > 4 or a 2 <
a2 4
( ± bh − ak ) 2 1 1
⇒ a < and hence the conics intersect if 0 < a < .
or k2 = …(i)
(a 2 + b 2 ) 2 2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 619

10. Points from where perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the b
13. Q Angle between asymptotes = 2 tan −1   = 120°
give hyperbola lie on the director circle x 2 + y 2 = 9 − 16 = − 7 a
which is an imaginary circle. Hence, no point exists.
b
1  or tan − 1   = 60 °
tan  ∠ABC  a
2  3
11. Q = b
1  1 or = 3
tan  ∠BAC  a
2 
∴ b = a 3 or b 2 = 3a 2
b C
(–3, 4) A ⇒ a 2 =3 (Q b 2 = 9 )
Required locus is director circle of the hyperbola and which is
x2 + y 2 = a2 − b2 = 3 − 9 = − 6
c a which is not possible.
b
Now, angle between asymptotes = 2 tan −1   = 60 °.
a
Y
A(2, –1)

 B ∆
tan  
 2 s (s − b )
or =3 or =3
 A ∆ 30°
tan   X¢ X
 2 s (s − a ) 30°
O
s −a
or =3
s −b
⇒ s − a = 3s − 3b
Y¢
or 2s = 3b − a .

or a + b + c = 3b − a b
or tan −1   = 30 °
c a
or b −a =
2 b 1
or =
or AC − BC = constant a 3
∴Locus of C is a hyperbola, whose foci are A and B. or a 2 = 3b 2 = 27 (Q b 2 = 9 )
∴ Distance between foci = | AB| = 5 2. ∴Required locus is
12. Y x 2 + y 2 = a 2 − b 2 = 27 − 9 = 18
14. Equation of chord joining α and β is
x  α − β y  α + β  α + β
P cos   − sin   = cos  
x x a  2  b  2   2 
X¢
S2 C Q S1 X Put α + β = 3 π , then
x  α − β y
cos  + =0
a  2  b
It passes through the centre (0, 0).
Y¢ 15. Let P (a cosθ, b sin θ) on the ellipse.
Let P ≡ ( x1 , y1 ) Y
It is clear from figure
α>0 … (i)
and Q(α , 0 ) out side on the hyperbola, then P
x2 y 2 X¢ X
− −1 ≤ 0 A′ O A
a2 b2
α2
⇒ −1≤ 0
a2
or α2 ≤ a2 Y¢
∴ −a ≤α ≤a
.
… (ii)
∴ Equation of tangent at P on ellipse is
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
x y
0 <α ≤a cosθ + sin θ = 1 … (i)
a b
α ∈( 0, a ]
620 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

and equation of tangent at P on x 2 − y 2 = c 2 is ∴Centre is ( − 2, − 3 ), also ( − 2, − 3 ) lies on Eq. (i)

x (a cos θ ) − y (b sin θ ) = c 2 …(ii) then −8 −9 + λ = 0
Since, curves intersect at right angle, then ∴ λ = 17
b a Hence, other asymptote is
− cot θ × cot θ = − 1
a b 4 x + 3y + 17 = 0 [from Eq. (i)]
∴ tan 2 θ = 1 … (iii) 19. Equation of normal of y = 4ax is
2

Since, P (a cosθ, b sin θ ) also lies on hyperbola

y = mx − 2am − am 3
∴ (a cosθ ) 2 − (b sin θ ) 2 = c 2
which is tangent of x 2 − y 2 = a 2
Dividing both sides by cos2 θ , then
∴ ( − 2am − am 3 ) 2 = a 2m 2 − a 2
or a 2 − b 2 tan 2 θ = c 2 (1 + tan 2 θ)
or 4m 2 + m 6 + 4m 4 = m 2 − 1
a 2 − b 2 = 2c 2 [from Eq. (iii)]
or m 6 + 4m 4 + 3m 2 + 1 = 0
16. Let mid-point of the chord is (h,k ).
20. Let the middle-point of the chord is (h,k )
∴Equation of chord of x 2 − y 2 = a 2 is
∴ T = S1
T = S1
3 xh − 2yk + 2 ( x + h ) − 3 (y + k ) = 3h 2 − 2k 2 + 4h − 6k
hx − ky = h 2 − k 2
3h + 2
h (h 2 − k 2 ) Slope of this chord = =2 (given)
or y = x− 2k + 3
k k
which is tangent of y = 4ax
2 or 3h + 2 = 4k + 6
(h 2 − k 2 ) a ⇒ 3h − 4k = 4
∴ − =
k h Hence, locus of middle-point is
k 3 x − 4y = 4
ak 2
or − (h − k ) =
2 2
21. Let f ( x, y ) ≡ x 2 + 3xy + 2y 2 + 2x + 3y + 2 = 0
h
∂f ∂f
or − h 3 + hk 2 = ak 2 ∴ = 2 x + 3y + 2 and = 3 x + 4y + 3
∂x ∂y
or k 2 (h − a ) = h 3
∂f ∂f
Hence, locus of mid-point is For centre, = 0 and =0
∂x ∂y
y 2 (x − a ) = x 3
∴ 2 x + 3y + 2 = 0
17. It is clear from the figure the common tangent to the circle
3 x + 4y + 3 = 0
x + y = 1 and hyperbola x − y = 1 is x = 1 (which is nearer
2 2 2 2

to P (1/2, 1) and given one focus at P (1/2, 1), so the equation of After solving, we get
the directrix is x = 1. Hence, the equation of the ellipse is x = − 1, y = 0
Y ∴Coordinates of centre are ( − 1, 0 ).
x2 y 2
22. Q Hyperbola is − =1 … (i)
16 9
Foci are ( ± 5, 0 )
X¢ X F1 ≡ (5, 0 ), F2 ≡ ( − 5, 0 )
O (1, 0)
Also, 4e H = 5
5
∴ eH =
x=1 4
Y¢ Conjugate hyperbola of Eq. (i) is
1 x2 y 2
( x − 1 / 2 ) 2 + (y − 1 ) 2 = | x − 1| − + =1 … (ii)
2 16 9
⇒ 9 ( x − 1 / 3 ) 2 + 12 (y − 1 ) 2 = 1 Foci are ( 0, ± 5 )
18. Since, asymptotes of rectangular hyperbola are perpendicular F3 ≡ ( 0, 5 ), F4 ≡ ( 0, − 5 )
to each other. Also, 3 ec = 5
Q Given asymptote is 3 x − 4y − 6 = 0 ∴ ec =
5
∴ Other asymptote is 4 x + 3y + λ = 0 … (i) 3
Given, centre of hyperbola lies on x − y − 1 = 0 Equation of asymptotes of Eqs. (i) and (ii) are same
Since, asymptotes pass through the centre of hyperbola 3
y = ± x and e H < ec
∴ Centre is the point of intersection of x − y − 1 = 0 4
and 3 x − 4y − 6 = 0 Auxiliary circle of Eq. (i) is x 2 + y 2 = 7 and Eq. (ii) is
x2 + y 2 = − 7
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 621

1 16
and area of quadrilateral formed by their foci = 4 × ×5 ×5 ⇒ = 4(x − 1)
2 x2
= 50 sq units ⇒ 4 = x3 −x2
Y ⇒ x3 − x2 − 4 = 0
F3 ⇒ (x − 2) (x 2 + x + 2) = 0
∴ x = 2, x 2 + x + 2 ≠ 0
From Eq. (ii),
5
4
X¢ X
y = =2
F2 5 O 5 F1 2
5 Point of intersection is (2, 2)
26. Let rectangular hyperbola xy = c 2
F4 Equation of tangent at ‘t’ is
x
Y¢ + yt = 2c
. t
23. Point of intersection of tangents at (a sec α, b tan α ) and x y
⇒ + =1 … (i)
(a sec β, b tan β ) is 2ct  c 
2
 
  α − β  α + β  t
 a cos   b sin 
  2 

 2  and equation of normal at ‘t’ is
,
  α + β  α + β  xt 3 − yt − ct 4 + c = 0
    
 2  
cos cos
  2  ⇒ xt 3 − ty = ct 4 − c
π x x
Here, α = φ, β = −φ ⇒ + =1 … (ii)
2  ct 4 − c   − ct 4 + c 
 3   
 π    t   t 
 a cos  − φ 
4
then, point of intersection is  , b From Eqs. (i) and (ii) it is clear that
 1   ct 4 − c 
  x1 = 2ct, x 2 =  3 
 2   t 
π   − ct 4 + c 
x = a 2 cos  − φ 2c
4  and y1 = , y2 = 
t  t 
and y =b
∴ x1 x 2 + y1y 2
∴ Required locus is y = b
2ct(ct 4 − c ) 2c ( − ct 4 + c )
= + ⋅
24. xdy + ydx = 0 t3 t t
⇒ d ( xy ) = 0 2c (t − 1 ) 2c 2 (t 4 − 1 )
2 4
= + =0
∴ xy = c t2 t2
which pass through (2, 8), then 2 × 8 = c 27. CS = p 2
∴ c = 16 Y
Equation of conic is xy = 16 S
∴Length of latusrectum = 2 2 ( 4 ) = 8 2
25. x = t 2 + 1, y = 2t 45°
2
y  C (h , k )
⇒ x=  +1
 2
y2
⇒ x= +1 X
4 O
⇒ y 2 = 4(x − 1) … (i) ∴Coordinate of S is either
2 (h + p, k + p ) or (h − p, k − p )
Also, x = 2s , y =
s
28. Q H : x 2 + 3xy + 2y 2 + 2x + 3y = 0
∴ xy = 4 …(ii)
Let pair of asymptotes is
From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
2 x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2 x + 3y + λ = 0
 4
  = 4(x − 1) ∴ ∆=0
 x
622 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

3 3 9 9 or m 4 − 3m 2 − 4 = 0
1 ×2 × λ + 2 × ×1 × −1 × −2 ×1 − λ × = 0
2 2 4 4 or (m − 4 ) (m 2 + 1 ) = 0
2

λ 9 9 ∴ m2 − 4 = 0
⇒ − + − −2 = 0
4 2 4 or m=±2
λ 9 1 From Eq. (i), common tangents are
⇒ = −2 =
4 4 4 y = 2 x + 1 and y = − 2 x − 1
∴ λ =1 i.e. 2 x − y + 1 = 0 and 2 x + y + 1 = 0
A : x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2 x + 3y + 1 = 0 x2 y2
32. Foci of the ellipse 2 2 + 2 = 1 are ( ± a (k 2 − 1), 0) and foci
Q H + C = 2A ka a
∴ C = 2A − H x2 y 2
of the hyperbola 2 − 2 = 1 are ( ± ae, 0 ), e > 1
= x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2 x + 3y + 2 a b
∴Conjugate hyperbola is x 2 + 3 xy + 2y 2 + 2 x + 3y + 2 = 0 Q Foci are coincide, then
x2 y 2 a (k 2 − 1 ) = ae or (k 2 − 1 ) > 1
29. The equation of the hyperbola is − =1
9 16 or k2 − 1 > 1 or k2 > 2
The equation of the tangent is ∴ k < − 2 or k> 2
y = mx + (9m 2 − 16 ) 33. Equation of chord joining θ and φ is
(9m − 16 ) = 2 5  θ − φ y  θ + φ  θ + φ
2
or x
cos   − sin   = cos 
or 9m − 16 = 20
2 a  2  b  2   2 
or m2 = 4 It passes through (kae, 0 ), where k = ± 1 , then
∴ m=±2  θ − φ
cos  
 2  1
or a + b = sum of roots = 0 =
 θ + φ ke
4 cos  
30. Q x − 2 = m and y + 1 =  2 
m
∴ ( x − 2 ) (y + 1 ) = 4  θ − φ  θ + φ
cos   − cos  
 2   2  1 − ke
Y ⇒ =
 θ − φ  θ + φ  1 + ke
cos   + cos  
 2   2 
P
 θ  φ  1 − ke
∴ tan   tan   =
 2  2  1 + ke
Q 1 − e
, for k = 1
X¢ X 1 + e
O =
S 1+e
 , for k = − 1
 1 − e
R 34. Q Foci of hyperbola are ( ± 3a, 0) and foci of ellipse are
( ± (25 − 16 ), 0 ) i.e. ( ± 3, 0 ) according to question.
Y¢ a =1
Let x − 2 = X, y + 1= Y and b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 ) = 1 (9 − 1 ) = 8
∴ XY = 4 … (i) x2 y 2
Now, hyperbola is − =1
and s = ( x − 2 ) 2 + (y + 1 ) 2 = 25 1 8
or X 2 + Y 2 = 25 Alternate (a) a 2 + b 2 = 1 + 8 = 9
Curve C and circle are concentric, therefore, Alternate (b) Director circle is x 2 + y 2 = 1 − 8 = − 7
(OP ) 2 + (OQ ) 2 + (OR ) 2 + (OS ) 2 = 4r 2 i.e. there is no director circle.
= 4(5 ) 2 2b 2 2 (8 )
Alternate (d) Length of latusrectum = = = 16
= 100 a 1
35. 16x − 3y − 32x − 12y − 44 = 0
2 2

31. Equation of any tangent to the parabola y 2 = 8x ⇒ 16( x 2 − 2 x ) − 3(y 2 + 4y ) − 44 = 0

2
is y = mx + … (i) ⇒16 {( x − 1 ) 2 − 1 } − 3 {(y + 2 ) 2 − 4 } − 44 = 0
m
⇒ 16 ( x − 1 ) 2 − 3 (y + 2 ) 2 = 48
which is also touches the hyperbola
( x − 1 ) 2 (y + 2 ) 2
− =1
2
x2 y 2  2
− = 1, then   = 1 × m 2 − 3 ( 3 )2 42
1 3  m
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 623

Alternate (a) : Length of transverse axis c 2 hx 2 x 3 x1 x 2 x 3

⇒ k− = 2 − … (iv)
=2 × 3 =2 3 x1 c c2
Alternate (b) : Length of conjugate axis Also, slope of PQ × slope of OR = −1
=2 × 4 =8 c 2 h x1 x 2 x1 x 2 x 3
k− = − …(v)
Alternate (c) : Centre x − 1 = 0 x3 c2 c2
and y + 2 = 0, i.e. (1, − 2 ) From Eqs. (iii) and (iv),
Alternate (d) : 4 2 = ( 3 ) 2 (e 2 − 1 ) c4 xxx
∴ h=− and k = − 1 22 3
16 x1 x 2 x 3 c
or e2 − 1 =
3 From Eq. (iii),
19 c2
∴ e =
2
h = − x 4 and k = −
3 x4
19 ∴Orthocentre lies on xy = c 2
then e=
3 i.e. ( x 4 , y 4 ) and ( − x 4 , − y 4 )
36. xy = 1 38. (c) y = x + 5
 1 Comparing with y = mx + c
Equation of normal at ‘t’ i.e. t, 
 t ∴ m = 1, c = 5
is xt 3 − yt − t 4 + 1 = 0 Alternate (a) : Condition of tangency
a a
Slope is t2 =− , c=
b m
a a 5
− > 0⇒ < 0 5=
b b 1
∴ a > 0, b < 0 which is true.
or a < 0, b > 0 Alternate (b) :
37. P ,Q, R, S lies on the circle 9 x 2 + 16y 2 = 144
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 x2 y 2
… (i) ⇒ + =1
16 9
and also lies on
Q Condition of tangency
xy = c 2 … (ii)
c 2 = a 2m 2 + b 2
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
2 ⇒ 25 = 16 × 1 + 9 = 25
c2 2 fc 2
x 2 +   + 2 gx + +c=0 Which is true
 x x
Alternate (c) :
⇒ x 4 + 2 gx 3 + cx 2 + 2 fc 2 x + c 4 = 0 x2 y 2
− =1
∴ x1 x 2 x 3 x 4 = c 4 … (iii) 29 4
 c 2
Q Condition of tangency
and P ≡ ( x1 , y1 ) ≡  x1 , 
 x1  c 2 = a 2m 2 − b 2
 c2  25 = 29 × 1 − 4 = 25
Q ≡  x2,  Which is true.
 x2 
Alternate (d) : Now length of perpendicular from centre (0, 0)
 c2  |5| 5
and R ≡  x3,  to the line y = x + 5 is i.e. ≠ radius (5).
 x3  2 2
Let orthocentre O ≡ (h, k ) x2 y 2
39. Equation of the directrices of the given hyperbola − =1
Then, slope of QR × slope of OP = − 1 25 16
 c2 c2   c2  are
 −  k −  5 ×5 25
 x3 x2  
×
x1 
= −1 x=± =± … (i)
 x3 − x 2   h − x1  (25 + 16 ) 41
   
    Equations of the asymptotes of the given hyperbola are
 c  2 x2 y 2
− =0 …(ii)
k −  15 16
c2 x1 
⇒ − × = −1 The points of intersection of Eqs. (i) and (ii) are
x 2 x 3  h − x1 
  ( ± 25 / 41, ± 20 / 41 )
 
624 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

40. Q| SP − S ′ P | = 2a t
⇒ x 2 − 4 = 2 (1 + cost ) = 4 cos2   … (i)
 2
⇒ 2a = (24 − 0 ) 2 + (7 − 0 ) 2 − (5 − 0 ) 2 + (12 − 0 ) 2
t
= 25 − 13 = 12 and y 2 + 2 = 4 cos2   … (ii)
 2
∴ a =6
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), then
and 2ae = (24 − 5 ) 2 + (7 − 12 ) 2 = (386 )
x2 − 4 = y 2 + 2
∴ e=
386 or x2 − y 2 = 6
12 43. Equation of any tangent to hyperbola is
 386  121
and b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 ) = 36  − 1 = y = mx ± (a 2m 2 − b 2 ) … (i)
 144  2 2 2
x y
2b 2 121 which is tangent of − + =1
∴ Latusrectum = = b2 a2
a 6
then a 2m 2 − b 2 = a 2 − b 2m 2
41. The locus of the point of intersection of perpendicular tangents
⇒ (a 2 + b 2 )m 2 = (a 2 + b 2 )
is director circle
∴ m2 = 1
x2 + y 2 = a2 − b2
or m=±1
b2
Now, e2 = 1 + 2 From Eq. (i), common tangent are
a
if a 2 = b 2 , there is exactly one point (centre of the hyperbola) y = ± x ± (a 2 − b 2 )
i.e, e= 2 x2 y 2
44. Vertices and foci of ellipse + = 1 are ( ± 4, 0 )
b2 16 7
if a 2 > b 2 or <1 and ( ± 3, 0 ) respectively.
a2
i.e. e <2 2 x2 y1
Vertices and foci of the hyperbola − =1
or 0 < e < 2 , there are infinite (or more than one) points on  144  81
   
 25   25
the circle.
b2  12 
if a 2 < b 2 or 2 > 1 are  ± , 0 and ( ± 3, 0 ), respectively.
a  5 
i.e. e2 > 2 –3 Y 3 x
y= x y= 4
or e > 2, there does not exist any point on the plane. 4
P
42. Alternate (a) : Q
2 2 2 2
 2x   2y   1  1
  −   = t +  − t −  = 4 X¢ X
a b  t  t O
A

x2 y 2
⇒ − =1
a2 b2
Alternate (b) : Y¢
tx y ay For point of intersection
Q − +t=0 ⇒ t= … (i)
a b b (x + a )  x2  x2 1
7 1 −  = 81  − 
x ty (a − x ) b  16   144 25
and + −1 = 0 ⇒ t = … (ii)
a b ay 256
⇒ x2 =
25
 16  63
and y 2 = 7 1 −  =
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get  25 25
ay (a − x )b = square of the ordinate of point of intersection
=
b (x + a ) ay 9 2 9 256 144
y 2 for P = x = × =
⇒ a 2y 2 = b 2 (a 2 − x 2 ) 16 16 25 25
⇒ b x + a 2y 2 = a 2b 2
2 2 ∴Sum of the squares of coordinates of P is x 2 + y 2 = 16
x2 y 2 which is auxiliary circle formed by ellipse.
or + =1 dy
a2 b2 45. (1 − x 2 ) + xy = ax
Alternate (c) : x 2 − y 2 = (et + e −t ) 2 − (et − e −t ) 2 = 4 dx
2dy 2 x dx
Alternate (d) : Q x 2 − 6 = 2 cost or =
(a − y ) (1 − x 2 )
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 625

⇒ − 2 ln(a − y ) = − ln(1 − x 2 ) − ln c ∴ t12 + t 22 + t 32 + t 42 =

2 2
+ + +
2 2
or (a − y ) 2 = c (1 − x 2 ) t1 t 2 t 3 t 4
⇒ cx + (y − a ) 2 = c
2
 1
⇒ Σt12 = 2 Σ  
x 2 (y − a ) 2  t1 
or + =1
1 c
 Σ t1t 2t 3 
for c > 0, ellipse and for c < 0, hyperbola centre of the conic is 49. ( Σt1 ) 2 − 2 Σt1t 2 = 2  
(0, a) and length of one of the principal axes = 2a = 2  t1t 2t 3t 4 
2
 h  −k / 2
Sol. (Q. Nos. 46 to 48) ⇒   − 0 = 2  or h = 4k
2
 2  −1 
Give conic is
x 2 − y 2 + 2y − 2 = 0 … (i) Hence, the locus of (h, k ) is x 2 = 4y
Equation of tangent at (a, b ) is
50. Q Curve C is x 2 = 4y
ax − by + (y + b ) − 2 = 0
∴Equation of tangent at (2t, t 2 ) is tx = y + t 2
Q Tangent line pass through (0, 0), then
b =2 ⇒ A ≡ (t, 0 ) and B ≡ ( 0, − t 2 )
Also, (a, b ) lies on Eq. (i), then Let mid-point of AB is (h, k ).
a 2 − b 2 + 2b − 2 = 0 ∴ 2h = t and 2k = − t 2
or a2 − 4 + 4 − 2 = 0 ⇒ 2k = − (2h ) 2 or 2h 2 + k = 0
⇒ a2 = 2 ∴Required locus is 2 x 2 + y = 0
∴ a=± 2 51. Y
a
46. Q Slope of tangent =
b
2
= (for positive slope) M 2
2 (–2t1, t12) Q R (2t1, t1 )
1
=
2
30° 30°
 a   1 
∴ sin −1   = sin −1  
b  2
X¢ X
O
π
=
4
47. Q Conic is x 2 − (y − 1) 2 = 1 Y¢
2t 1 2
∴ tan30 ° = 21 or =
2
2(1 )
∴ Length of latusrectum = =2 t1 3 t1
1
48. Q Given curve is rectangular hyperbola ∴ t1 = 2 3
∴ e= 2 ⇒ QR = 4t1 = 8 3
Thus, 1 + e + e =1 + 2 + 4 =7
2 4
Area of equilateral ∆OQR
Sol. (Q. Nos. 49 to 51) 3
= (8 3 ) 2 = 48 3 sq units
Any point on the hyperbola is (2t, 2 / t ) normal at this point is 4
xt 3 − yt − 2t 4 + 2 = 0 Sol. (Q. Nos. 52 to 54)
If the normal passes through P (h,k ), then QS1 (1, 2 ) and S 2 (5, 5) are the foci
2t 4 − ht 3 + kt − 2 = 0 then S1S 2 = 5 = 2 ae … (i)
The equation has roots t1 , t 2 , t 3 , t 4 , then and | S ′ P − SP | = 2a
h
Σt1 = , Σt1t 2 = 0, Here, 2a = 4 … (ii)
2 From Eqs. (i) and (ii)
k 5
Σt1t 2t 3 = − , t1t 2t 3t 4 = − 1 e=
2 4
 2  2 52. Let e′ be the eccentricity of conjugate hyperbola.
Q Feet of normals are 2t1 ,  , 2t 2 ,  ,
 t1   t2  1 1
∴ + =1
 2  2 e 2 e′ 2
2t 3 ,  and 2t 4 ,  16 1 1 9
 t3   t4  ⇒ + =1 ⇒ 2 =
25 e′ 2 e′ 25
Q Sum of slopes of normals = Sum of ordinates of feet of
5
normals ∴ e′ =
3
626 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

53. Locus of point of intersection of two mutually perpendicular From Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get
tangents is the director circle given by a2 b2
− =1
( x − h ) 2 + (y − k ) 2 = (a 2 − b 2 ); h2 k 2
where (h, k ) is the centre of hyperbola given by Hence, required locus is
 1 + 5 2 + 5  7 a2 b2
(h, k ) =  ,  ≡ 3,  − =1
 2 2   2 x2 y 2
∴ a 2 = 4, b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 ) 56. From Eq. (i)
 25  9 θ  θ 
= 4  − 1 = 1 + tan  1  tan  2  =
2
 16  4  2 2 1+e
∴Required locus (director circle) is
 θ − θ2 
 7
2 cos  1 
9 7
(x − 3) + y −  = 4 − =
2  2  2
 2 ⇒ = … (v)
4 4  θ1   θ2  1 + e
cos   cos  
54. S2 (5, 5)  2 2
θ  θ  2e
and 1 − tan  1  tan  2  =
 2 2 1+e
q
 θ + θ2 
cos  1 
C (3, 7/2)  2  2e
⇒ = … (vi)
 θ1   θ2  1 + e
cos   cos  
 2 2
S1(1, 2) From Eqs. (v) and (vi), we get
 θ + θ2   θ + θ2 
Qθ should be the angle between the transverse axis and X-axis, cos  1  cos2  1 
 2   2 
given by = e or = e2
 θ1 − θ 2  2  θ1 − θ 2 
5 −2 3 cos   cos  
tanθ = =  2   2 
5 −1 4
or λ = e2 (given)
 3
∴ θ = tan −1   a2 + b2
 4 =
a2
Sol. (Q. Nos. 55 to 57)
57. From Eq. (ii),
Q P (a sec θ1 , b tan θ1 ) and Q (a sec θ 2 , b tan θ 2 ) are the extremities b
θ = 2 tan −1  
of focal chord, then a
θ  θ  1 − e  θ b
tan  1  tan  2  = for focus S (ae, 0 ) …(i) ∴ tan   =
 2 2 1+e  2 a
b  θ 1 1
and θ = 2 tan −1   … (ii) ⇒ cos   = =
a  2  θ
sec    θ
R ≡ (a sec φ, b tan φ )  2 1 + tan 2  
Let  2
∴Equation of tangent at R is 1
=
x y  b2 
sec φ − tan φ = 1
a b 1 + 2 
 a 
∴ A ≡ (a cos φ, 0 ) 1 1
and B ≡ ( 0, − b cot φ ) = =
1 + e2 − 1 e
55. Let C = (h,k )
Sol. (Q. Nos. 58 to 60)
QOACB is rectangle
58. Q Perpendicular tangents intersect at the centre of rectangular
∴ Mid-point of OC = mid-point of AB hyperbola. Hence, centre of the hyperbola is (1, 1) and the
 h k   a cos φ −b cot φ 
⇒  ,  ≡ ,  equations of asymptotes are
 2 2  2 2  x − 1 = 0 and y − 1 = 0
a ∴Pair of asymptotes is
or h = a cos φ ⇒ sec φ = … (iii)
h ( x − 1 ) (y − 1 ) = 0
b xy − x − y + 1 = 0
and k = − b cot φ ⇒ tan φ = − … (iv) or
k
or xy + 1 = x + y
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 627

59. Let equation of the hyperbola be  1 

= 2 | t1 − t 2 | 1 + 2 2 
xy − x − y + λ = 0  t1 t 2 
It passes through (2, 3), then
(t14 + 1 ) 3 / 2
6 −2 −3 + λ = 0 = 2 [from Eq. (i)]
| t13 |
∴ λ = −1 3/2
So, equation of hyperbola is  1
= 2 t12 + 2  ≥ 2 (2 ) 3 / 2 = 4 (Q AM ≥ GM)
xy = x + y + 1  t1 
60. From the centre of the hyperbola, we can draw two real ∴ Distance PQ ≥ 4
tangents to the rectangular hyperbola. Hence, minimum distance between the points P and Q is 4.
61. For ellipse (if a > b ) x2 y 2
64. Let P (a sec θ, b tan θ ) be a point on the hyperbola − =1
ae1 = (a − b ) 2 2
a2 b2
a 2e12 = a 2 − b 2 3
or with eccentricity e =
and for hyperbola 2 2
Ae 2 = ( A 2 + B 2 ) ∴ a 2 = 8b 2 (Q b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 ) …(i)
Q Equation of normal at P is
⇒ = (A 2 + b 2 ) [Q 2b = 2 B (given)]
ax cosθ + by cot θ = a 2 + b 2
or Ae =A +b
2 2
2
2 2
a2 + b2  
1 1 a2 A2 ∴ M ≡   secθ, 0
⇒ + 2 = 2 + 2 … (i)  a  
e12
e 2 (a − b ) ( A + b 2 )
2

 a2 + b2  
Since, both the curves are confocal ⇒ae1 = Ae 2 N ≡  0,   tanθ
or a 2e12 = A 2e 22   b  

⇒ a2 − b2 = A2 + b2 Let mid-point of MN is R (h,k )

or A 2 = a 2 − 2b 2 … (ii) a2 +b2 
∴ 2h =   secθ … (ii)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get  a 
1 1 a2 a 2 − 2b 2 a2 +b2 
+ = + and 2k =   tanθ … (iii)
e12 e 22 a 2 − b 2 a 2 −b 2  b 
2 (a 2 − b 2 )
= =2
(a 2 − b 2 ) From Eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
 c  c 4a 2h 2 − 4b 2k 2 = (a 2 + b 2 ) 2
62. Othrocentre of triangle formed by the points ct1 ,  , ct 2 , 
 t1   t2  ∴Locus of R is
x2 y2
 c 2
− 2
=1
and ct 3 ,  on the rectangular hyperbola. a2 + b2  a2 + b2 
 t3     
 2a   2b 
 c 
xy = c 2 is  − , − c t1t 2t 3  which have eccentricity
 t1t 2t 3 
 a2 
−c 1 e1 = 1 + 2  = (1 + 8 ) = 3 [from Eq. (i)]
Here, c = 2 and = or t1t 2t 3 = − 2c  b 
t1t 2t 3 2
65. Equations of director circle of ellipse
∴ Ordinate of orthocentre = − c t1t 2t 3
x2 y 2
= − c × − 2c + = 1 is x 2 + y 2 = a 2 + b 2
a2 b2
= 2c 2 = 2 (2 ) 2
∴ Radius (r1 ) = (a 2 + b 2 )
=8
63. Since the normal drawn at P (t1 ) meets the hyperbola xy =2 = a 2 + a 2 (1 − e12 )
again at Q (t 2 ), then = a (2 − e12 ) … (i)
t13 t 2 = − 1 … (i) x2
y 2

 2  2 and director circle of hyperbola − = 1 is

Q P ≡  2 t1 ,  and Q ≡  2 t 2 ,  a 2 b12
 t1   t2  x 2 + y 2 = a 2 − b12
2 ∴ Radius (r2 ) = (a 2 − b12 )
 2 2
∴ Distance PQ = ( 2t1 − 2t 2 ) +  − 2

 t1 t2  = a 2 − a 2 (e 22 − 1 ) = a (2 − e 22 ) … (ii)
628 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

r1 1 2y (a + x ) y
Given, = or =
r2 3 a + x + 2ax − y
2 2 2
a −x
a (2 − e12 ) 1 ⇒ 2 (a 2 − x 2 ) = a 2 + x 2 + 2ax − y 2
⇒ = [from Eqs. (i) and (ii)] or 3 x + 2ax − y 2 − a 2 = 0
2
a (2 − e 22 ) 3
2
 a 2a 2
⇒ 9 − 9e12 = 2 − e 22 or 3x +  − y 2 =
 3 3
∴ 9e1 − e 22 = 7 = λ
2
2
∴ λ =7  a
x + 
 3 y2
x2 y 2 a2 or − =1
66. Q 2 − 2 = 1 and x + y 2 = having origin as their common
2
 2a 
2
 2a 2 
a b 4    
centre.  9   3 
Y
 2a 2 2a 2 
 + 
∴ Eccentricity (e ) =  9 2 3  = 2
 2a 
 
X¢
B¢  9 
B A X
A¢ O
 t 1 
68. Let P  ,  be any point on 2 xy = 1 and S ≡(1, 1 )
 2 t 2
and S′ ≡ ( − 1, − 1 )
. Y¢ Here t>0
So, vertex is the nearest point. Hence, shortest distance = BA Let R (h, k ) be the ex-centre of ∆PSS′ opposite to vertex S.
a a tb
=a − = − a −c +
2 2 2
a ⇒ h=
∴ f (a, b ) = a + b −c
2 b
4 2 −a −c +
Hence, f ( 4,6 ) + f (2, 3 ) = + = 3 and k= t 2
2 2 a + b −c
Here, b = 2 2, a = ePM
67. Let A ≡(a, 0) and B ≡ ( − a, 0)
If C ≡( x , y ) P
t , 1
y Ö2 Ö2
∴ tanθ = … (i)
a+x
c a
y
and tan2θ = … (ii)
a−x
Y
C (–1, –1) S¢ b S (1, 1)

 t 1 
 + − 1
 2 t 2  t 1
= 2 = + −1
2 2 t 2
2q q
X¢
M O A(a, 0)
X  t 1 
(–a, 0) B  + + 1
 2 t 2 
and c= 2
2
t 1
= + +1 (Q Directrices are x + y = ± 1)
Y¢ 2 t 2
From Eq. (ii),  1
− 2 t +  + 2t
2 tan θ y  t
= ∴ h=
1 − tan 2 θ a − x 2 2 −2
2y  1 2
− 2 t +  +
a+x y  t t
⇒ = [from Eq. (i)] and k=
 y 
2
a −x 2 2 −2
1− 
a + x  1
∴ h + k = − t +  … (i)
 t
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 629

1 Since, these lines are perpendicular to each other, then

t−
and h −k = t … (ii) 1 cos2 α   1 sin 2 α 
2 −1  −  + − −  =0
 16 p 2   18 p2 
2 2
 1  1 1 1 1
Q t +  = t −  + 4 or − =
 t  t 16 18 p 2
⇒ (h + k ) 2 = ( 2 − 1 ) 2 (h − k ) 2 + 4 or p = ± 12
∴ Locus of R is ( x + y ) 2 = ( 2 − 1 ) 2 ( x − y ) 2 + 4 ∴ Radius of circle = | p | = 2
On comparing, we get p =1 and q = 4 Hence, diameter of the circle = 24
∴ p + q =5  8
(C) Any point on xy = 8 is P  8 t, 
69. Let P (h,k ) be the middle-point, then equation of chord whose  t 
mid-point P (h, k ) is Y
T = S1
⇒ hx + ky − 4 = h 2 + k 2 − 4 R
h (h 2 + k 2 )
or y =− x+ P
k k
x2 y 2
It will touch the hyperbola − = 1, then X¢
C Q
X
4 16
2
 h2 + k 2  h2
  = 4 × 2 − 16
 k  k
⇒ (h 2 + k 2 ) 2 = 4h 2 − 16k 2
∴ Locus of P (h, k ) is
Y¢
( x 2 + y 2 ) 2 = 4 x 2 − 16y 2
∴ λ=4 Equation of tangent at P
x2 y 2 8 x x
70. The given hyperbola is − =1 x× + y × 8 t = 16 or + =1
2 3 t  16t   16 
   
 8  8t
Equation of tangents is y = mx ± (2m 2 − 3 )
Q Tangents from the point (α , β) will be 16t 16
∴ CQ = and CR =
(β − mα ) 2 = 2m 2 − 3 8 8t
or m (α − 2 ) − 2 m αβ + β 2 + 3 = 0
2 2 1
Hence, area of ∆CQR = × CQ × CR
β2 + 3 β2 + 3 2
Q m1m2 = 2 ⇒ tan θ tan φ = 2 1 16t 16
α −2 α −2 = × × = 16
2 8 8t
β2 + 3
⇒ 2= (D) Hyperbola is x 2 − 3y 2 = 9
α2 − 2
2α 2 − β 2 = 7 x2 y 2
or or − =1
9 3
71. (A) 16x 2 − 9y 2 + 32x + 36y − 164 = 0
Q Angle between asymptotes
⇒ 16 ( x 2 + 2 x + 1 ) − 9 (y 2 − 4y + 4 ) − 144 = 0
 3  1 
or 16 ( x + 1 ) 2 − 9 (y − 2 ) 2 = 144 = 2 tan −1   = 2 tan −1  
 3   3
( x + 1 ) 2 (y − 2 ) 2
or − =1 π πλ
9 16 =2 × = (given)
2 × 16 32 6 24
∴ λ = length latusrectum = = ∴ λ =8
3 3
or 3 λ = 32 x2 y 2
72. (A) Let the hyperbola be − =1
x2 y 2 a2 b2
(B) Making − = 1 homogeneous with the help of
16 18 then 2a = ae
x cosα + y sin α = p, then ⇒ e =2
x 2 y 2  x cosα + y sin α 
2
(2b ) 2 b 2
− =  ∴ = = e 2 − 1 = (2 ) 2 − 1 = 3
16 18  p  (2a ) 2 a 2
630 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

(B) Given hyperbola is Hence, area of quadrilateral S1S 2S 3S 4

Y
= 4 × Area of ∆S1CS 3
1
= 4 × × CS1 × CS 3
2
(3, 0)
X¢
C A S(5, 0)
X = 2 × 13 × 13 = 26
(D) Given hyperbola is
ax 2 − by 2 = c
2
Y¢ x y2
− =1
.
or
x2 y 2 (c / a ) (c / b )
− =1 … (i)
9 16 c 5
16 25 Q = …(i)
or e =1 + 2
= b 2
9 9
c c
5 and 2  +  = 13 …(ii)
or e= a b
3
Hence, its foci are ( ± 5, 0 ) From Eqs. (i) and (ii)
The equation of the circle with (5, 0) as centre is  c 25
2  +  = 13
( x − 5 ) 2 + (y − 0 ) 2 = r 2 … (ii) a 4
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have c 169 25
or = − = 36 … (iii)
16 x 2 − 9 (r 2 − ( x − 5 ) 2 ) = 144 a 4 4
c 25
or 25 x 2 − 90 x − 9r 2 + 81 = 0 and = … (iv)
b 4
Since, the circle touches the hyperbola, the above equation
must have equal roots. c
a b 25
Hence, (90 ) 2 − 4 (25 ) (81 − 9r 2 ) = 0 ∴ = =
b c 144
or r =0
a
which is not possible.
Q a and b are co-prime
Hence, the circle can not touch at two points. It can only be
∴ a = 25, b = 144
tangent at the vertex.
and from Eq. (iii), c = 900
Hence, r =5 −3 =2
3ab 3 × 25 × 144
(C) Equation of hyperbola is Hence, = =6
2c 2 × 900
x2 y 2
− =1
22 32 73. Let f ( x ) = x 2 − λx + 2
Y
S3

X¢ e1 e2 X

∴ D = λ2 − 8
λ
X¢
S2 C S1
X x-coordinate of vertex = and f (1 ) = 3 − λ
2
(A) We must have
e1 < 1 < e 2
then D > 0 and f (1 ) < 0
S4 ⇒ λ2 > 8 and 3 − λ < 0
Y¢ ⇒ λ ∈ ( − ∞, − 2 2 ) ∪ (2 2, ∞ ) and λ > 3
Its foci ( ± (2 2 + 3 2 ), 0 ) ∴ λ >3
or S1 ≡ ( 13, 0 ) and S 2 ≡ ( − 13, 0 ) (B)Q e1 > 1, e 2 > 1
and equation of conjugate hyperbola is λ
then D ≥ 0 and f (1 ) > 0 and >1
x2 y 2 2
− 2 + 2 =1
2 3 ⇒ λ ∈ ( − ∞, − 2 2 )] ∪ [2 2, ∞ )
Its foci ( 0, ± (3 + 2 ) )
2 2
and λ < 3 and λ > 2
or S 3 ≡ ( 0, 13 ) and S 4 ≡ ( 0, − 13 ) ∴ λ ∈[2 2, 3 )
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 631

1 1 78. The conjugate hyperbolas are

(C) We must have 2
+ 2 =1
e1 e2 x2 y 2 y 2 x2
− 2 = 1 and 2 − 2 = 1
e + e = (e1e 2 )
2 2 2 2
or 1 2
a b b a
⇒ (e1 + e 2 ) − 2e1e 2 = (e1e 2 ) 2
2 a 2
+ b 2
a 2
+ b2
then e2 = 2
and e12 =
⇒ λ2 − 4 = (2 ) 2 or λ2 = 8 a b2
1 1
∴ λ=±2 2 ∴ + =1
e 2 e12
(D) We must have e1 < 2 < e 2
1 1 1 3 4
then D > 0 and f ( 2 ) < 0 Q + = + = 1 and ee1 = >1
22  2  2 4 4 3
⇒ λ2 > 8 and 2 − λ 2 + 2 < 0  
 3
or λ ∈( − ∞, − 2 2 ) ∪ (2 2, ∞ ) ∴ Statement I and Statement II are both true and Statement II
and λ >2 2 is not a correct explanation of Statement I.

∴ λ >2 2
79. If we solve 4x − 5y = 0
4
74. Since, e1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of two conjugate or y = x
5
hyperbolas, so e1 > 1 and e 2 > 1.
and 16 x 2 − 25y 2 = 400
⇒ e 2e 2 > 1 x2 y 2
or − =1
∴ Statement II is true. 25 16
As for e1 and e 2 for hyperbola and its conjugate, we get, 0 = 1 ⇒ No solution
1 1 4
2
+ 2 =1 ⇒ The line y = x does not meet but the line satisfies the
e1 e2 5
5 5 condition of being a tangent.
Let e1 = and e 2 = 16
3 4 c 2 − a 2m 2 + b 2 = 0 − 25 × + 16 = 0
1 1 9 16 25
Now, + = + =1 ⇒ It must touch the curve at infinity.
e12 e 22 25 15
∴Statement I and Statement II are both true but Statement II is
∴Statement I is true, but Statement II is not correct explanation a correct explanation for Statement I.
of Statement I.
80. The point ( x1 ,y1 ) inside the hyperbola.
75. By definition, if H ( x, y ) = 0
x2 y 2 x2 y 2
then A1 ( x, y ) = H ( x, y ) + λ 2
− 2 = 1, then 12 − 12 − 1 > 0
a b a b
∴ Statement II is true
∴ Statement II is false.
Since, C ( x, y ) = H ( x, y ) + 2
Also, 3y 2 − 5 x 2 + 1 = 0
= A1 ( x, y ) + (2 − λ )
or 5 x 2 − 3y 2 − 1 = 0
Since, for A1 ( x, y ) = 0, we have ∆ = 0 and also for
∴ Value of 5 x 2 − 3y 2 − 1 at (5, − 3 ) is
A2 ( x, y ), ∆ = 0, So A1 = A2
5 (5 ) 2 − 3 ( − 3 ) 2 − 1
∴Statement I is true and Statement II is correct explanation of
= 125 − 27 − 1 = 97 > 0
Statement I.
∴ Statement I is true.
76. Q Director circle is the locus of the point of intersection of
x2 y 2
perpendicular tangents. 81. If hyperbola is 2 − 2 = 1
∴ Statement II is true. a b
Q Director circle of 5 x 2 − 4y 2 = 20 b
∴Angle between asymptotes = 2 tan −1  
a
x2 y 2
or − =1
4 5 For equilateral hyperbola a = b
is x 2 + y 2 = 4 − 5 or x 2 + y 2 = − 1
∴ Statement I is false. then, angle between asymptotes
x2 y 2 π π
77. Director circle of − = 1 is = 2 tan −1 (1 ) = 2 . =
25 16 4 2
x 2 + y 2 = 25 − 16 = 9 ∴Statement I is false.
Hence, angle between tangents is π/2. a2 + b2  a2 + a2 
and eccentricity e =   =   = 2
∴ Statement I and Statement II are true and Statement II is a  a 2
  a2 
correct explanation for Statement I. ∴Statement 2 is true.
632 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

82. BC = base of the triangle =a (constant) and A is the vertex. 1 t 22 1 t12 1 t12
where C1 = 2
, C2 = − 2
and C 3 =
(s − c ) (s − a ) 1 t3 1 t3 1 t 22
tan( B / 2 ) s (s − b ) ∴ C1 = t 32 − t 22 , C 2 = t12 − t 32 and C 3 = t 22 − t12
=
tan(C / 2 ) (s − a ) (s − b ) From Eq. (i)
s (s − c ) =
1
2 | (t 3 − t 2 ) (t1 − t 32 ) (t 22 − t12 )|
2 2 2
s − c 2s − 2c
= = 4c 2 ⋅ (t1 − t 2 ) 2 (t 2 − t 3 ) 2 (t 3 − t1 ) 2
s − b 2s − 2b
(t1 − t 2 ) (t 2 − t 3 ) (t 3 − t1 )
a + b −c = 2c 2
= =k (let) (t1 + t 2 ) (t 2 + t 3 ) (t 3 + t1 )
a −b + c
A (t − t ) (t − t ) (t − t )
∴ Required area is, 2 c 2  1 2 2 3 3 1 
(t1 + t 2 ) (t 2 + t 3 ) (t 3 + t1 )
 c
84. Let chord be PQ and coordinates of P and Q are ct1 ,  and
c b  t1 
 c
ct 2 ,  respectively.
 t2 

B C Now let mid-point of PQ is M (h, k )

a
1
∴ h = (ct1 + ct 2 )
By componendo and dividendo 2
k −1 b −c 2h 1 c c
⇒ = ∴ t1 + t 2 = and k =  + 
k+1 a c 2 t1 t 2 
 k − 1 2 k t1 + t 2
or =
⇒ b −c =a   = constant c t1t 2
 k + 1
2h
⇒ CA − BA = constant
2k  2h 
By the focal property the locus of A is a hyperbola whose foci or = c Q t1 + t 2 = 
c t1t 2  c
are B and C .
h
83. Let coordinates of A, B and C on the hyperbola xy = c 2 are or t1t 2 =
k
 c  c  c
ct1 ,  , ct 2 ,  and ct 3 ,  respectively. 4h 2 4h
 t1   t2   t3  ∴ (t1 − t 2 ) 2 = (t1 + t 2 ) 2 − 4 t1t 2 = −
c2 k
c c c 4h
ct ct 2 ct 3 = (hk − c 2 ) ...(i)
1 1 t1 t2 t3 c 2k
(i)∴ Area of triangle ABC = + +
2 ct c c c
2 ct 3 ct1 Since, | PQ | = 2 d
t2 t3 t1
2
c c
c 2 t t t t t t ∴ (ct1 − ct 2 ) 2 +  −  = 2 d
=  1 − 2 + 2 − 3 + 3 − 1  t1 t 2 
2 t 2 t1 t 3 t 2 t1 t 3
 1 
c2 or c 2 (t1 − t 2 ) 2 1 + 2 2  = (2 d ) 2
= | t 22t 3 − t 22t 3 + t1t 22 − t 32t1 + t 2t 32 − t12t 2 |
2 t1 t 2 t 3  t1 t2 

c2 4h  k2 
= | (t1 − t 2 ) (t 2 − t 3 ) (t 3 − t1 )| or c2 × 2
(hk − c 2 ) 1 + 2  = 4d 2 [from Eq. (i)]
2 t1t 2t 3 ck  h 

(ii) Equations of tangents at A, B, C are or (h 2 + k 2 ) (hk − c 2 ) = d 2hk

x + yt12 − 2 ct1 = 0 Hence, locus of the middle-point of PQ is
x + yt 22 − 2 ct 2 = 0 ( x 2 + y 2 ) ( xy − c 2 ) = d 2 xy .
and x + yt 32 − 2 ct 3 = 0 85. Let the rectangular hyperbola is
2 xy = c 2 ...(i)
1 t 1
2
− 2 ct1
1 Since, the centre of hyperbola (i) is origin (0, 0) and equation of
∴ Required area = 1 t 2
− 2 ct 2 ... (i)
2 | C1C 2C 3 |
2
asymptotes are x = 0 and y = 0.
1 t 3
2
− 2 ct 3 The equation of a line through (0, 0) and makes an angle θ with
asymptote (X -axis) is y = x tan θ.
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 633

It will meet the hyperbola, where x ( x tan θ ) = c 2 87. Take two given perpendicular straight lines as the coordinate
i.e. x =c cot θ axes and let the equation of variable circle be
x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c = 0 ...(i)
Putting x =c cot θ in (1)
Suppose circle (i) make an intercept of length a on X-axis and
then y = c (tan θ ) an intercept of length b on Y-axis.

∴The four points are (c cot θ , c tan θ ) where ∴ a = 2 (g 2 − c )

Q = α , β, γ, δ. and b = 2 (f 2 − c)
The line joining the points α and β is perpendicular to the line Squaring and subtracting these, we get
joining the points γ and δ .
4 (g 2 − c ) − 4 ( f 2 − c ) = a 2 − b 2
Y
1
or g 2 − f 2 = (a 2 − b 2 )
4
1
or ( − g ) 2 − ( − f ) 2 = (a 2 − b 2 )
4
X¢ X Hence locus of the centre of circle ( − g, − f ) is
C
1
x 2 − y 2 = (a 2 − b 2 )
4
which is a rectangular hyperbola.
Y¢ 88. Let the hyperbola be
Therefore, the product of their slopes = − 1 x2 y 2
− =1 ...(i)
c tan β − c tan α c tan δ − c tan γ a2 b2
i.e. × = −1 Its asymptotes are
c cot β − c cot α c cot δ − c cot γ x y x y
− = 0 and + =0
⇒ ( − tan α tan β ) × ( − tan γ tan δ ) = − 1 a b a b
or tan α tan β tan γ tan δ = 1 (a) Let us take the asymptote
x y b
 c  c − =0 ⇒y = x ...(ii)
86. Let P ct1 ,  and Q ct 2 ,  be any two points on xy = c 2 . a b a
 t1   t2 
Any line parallel to Eq. (ii) is
Then tangents at P and Q are b
y = x+c ...(iii)
x + yt12 = 2 ct1 ...(i) a
and x + yt 22 = 2 ct 2 ...(ii) Eliminate y from Eqs. (i) and (iii), then
2
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), the point of intersection, say (h, k ), x2 1 b 
− 2  x + c = 1
is given by a 2
b a 
2 ct1t 2 2c x2 1  b 2x 2 
h= and k = ...(iii) ⇒ − 2  2 + c2 +
2bc
x = 1
t1 + t 2 t1 + t 2 a 2
b  a a 
The foot of the ordinate of P is (ct1 , 0 ) and it lies on Eq. (ii) then 2c (c 2 + b 2 )
ct1 + 0 = 2 ct 2 ⇒ 0⋅ x2 − x− =0
ab b2
∴ t1 = 2 t 2 ...(iv) One root of its equation is infinite since coefficient of x 2 in it is
Then, from Eqs. (iii) and (iv), zero. Also from Eq. (iii), when y → ∞ as x → ∞.
2c ⋅ 2t2 ⋅ t2 2c ∴ Eqs. (i) and (iii) meet in one point at infinity.
h= and k = (b) Lines through (a, 0 ); ( −a, 0 ); ( 0, b ) and ( 0, − b ) are parallel to
2t2 + t2 2t2 + t2
the principal axes, enclose a rectangle whose vertices are
4c 2c A (a, b ), B ( −a , b ), C ( −a , − b ) and D (a , − b ). Now equation of
∴ h= t2 and k =
3 3t2 diagonal AC is
4c 2c b − ( −b )
∴ h ⋅k = t2 × y −b = (x − a )
3 3t2 a − ( −a )
8 b
∴ hk = c 2 ⇒ y −b = (x − a )
9 a
8 2 b
∴Locus of (h , k ) is xy = c , which is a rectangular hyperbola ⇒ y = x
9 a
with the same asymptotes x = 0 and y = 0 as those of xy = c 2 . ⇒
x y
− =0
a b
634 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

Y ∴ y1y 2 = x1 x 2
and coefficient of xy = 0
(–a, b) (a, b)
B (0, b) A ⇒ x1y 2 + x 2y1 + λ = 0 ...(v)
Again the conic (iv) passes through ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) then
X′ X
(2 x1 y1 − 2 c 2 ) ( x1y 2 + x 2y1 − 2c 2 ) + λ ( x1y1 − c 2 ) = 0
(–a, 0) O (a, 0)
or 2 ( x1y 2 + x 2y1 − 2 c 2 ) + λ = 0 (Q x1y1 ≠ c 2 ) …(vi)
and ( x 2 y1 + y 2 x1 − 2 c ) (y 2 x 2 + x 2y 2 − 2 c ) + λ ( x 2y 2 − c 2 ) = 0
2 2

C (0,–b) D (a, –b)

(–a,–b) ⇒ 2 ( x 2 y1 + x1y 2 − 2 c 2 ) + λ = 0 (Q x 2 y 2 ≠ c 2 ) … (vii)
From Eqs. (v) and (vi), we get
Y′ 2 (− λ − 2c 2 ) + λ = 0
i.e. The diagonal AC is one of the asymptotes of the hyperbola
− λ − 4c 2 = 0
x2 y 2
− = 1. Similarly the diagonal BD is the other asymptote. ∴ λ = − 4c 2
a2 b2
Then from Eq. (v)
89. Let the equation of ellipse is
x1y 2 + x 2 y1 = 4c 2
x2 y 2
+ =1 ...(i) which is the other condition.
a2 b2
91. Let two perpendicular asymptotes of a rectangular hyperbola
Tangent to Eq. (i) at P (a cos φ, b sin φ ) is are CD and CE.
x y Let the coordinates of A , B and C are (a , 0 ), ( 0, b ), (α , β ). OX
cos φ + sin φ = 1
a b and OY are parallel to CD and CE.
Coordinate of point B is Then equations of CD and CE are
B ≡ (a sec φ , 0 ) and AB = a {sec φ − cos φ} y − β = 0 and x − α = 0
Let coordinate of Q be ( x1 , y1 ) then Thus combined equation of CD and CE is
x1 = a cos φ and y1 = a ( sec φ − cos φ ) ( x − α ) (y − β ) = 0
a x or xy − αy − βx + αβ = 0
So y1 = a  − 1  is the equation of asymptotes of rectangular hyperbola.
 x1 a 
E Y
⇒ x1y1 = a 2 − x12
Hence, locus of Q is xy = a 2 − x 2 …(ii) B (0, b)
which is clearly a hyperbola.
Since, the equation of a hyperbola and its asymptotes differ in w v
constant terms only, asymptotes of Eq. (ii) are given by A (a, 0)
O X
x 2 + xy − a 2 + k = 0, k is any constant. X′ D
( a, b)
It represents two straight lines. The required condition for C
this is v' w'
abc + 2 fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch 2 = 0
then k = a2
∴ Asymptotes are
x = 0 and x + y = 0 Y′
90. The given rectangular hyperbola is
Hence, equation of rectangular hyperbola is
xy = c 2 ...(i)
xy − αy − βx + k = 0,
Equations of chords of contact of ( x1 , y1 ) and ( x 2 , y 2 ) w.r.t.,
where k is any constant.
xy = c 2 are
It passes through A (a , 0 ) and B ( 0, b )
xy1 + x1y = 2 c 2 ...(ii)
∴ 0 − 0 − βa + k = 0
and xy 2 + x 2y = 2 c 2 ...(iii)
and 0 − αb − 0 + k = 0
The equation of the conic passing through Eq. (i) with
k k
Eqs. (ii) and (iii) is ∴ β= and α =
a b
( xy1 + x1y − 2 c 2 ) ( xy 2 + x 2y − 2 c 2 ) + λ
Hence equation of rectangular hyperbola becomes
( xy − c 2 ) = 0 ...(iv)
x y 
Now, Eq. (iv) represents a circle xy − k  + − 1 = 0 ...(i)
a b 
∴ coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 635

Eq. (i) represents two sets of rectangular hyperbolas whose Since, algebraic sum of perpendicular distances from
vertices lie on the straight lines VCV ′ andWCW ′ both passing ( x1 , y1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y 3 ) and ( x 4 , y 4 ) to Eq. (ii) is zero.
through (α , β ) inclined at 45° and 135° to OX.  px + qy + r   px + qy + r   px + qy + r 
 1   2  + 3 
 (p 2 + q 2 )  + 
1 2 3
k k
Then α = , β = and their equations are    p 2 + q 2   ( p 2 + q 2 ) 
b a
y − β = ± (x − α )  px + qy + r 
+  4 4  =0
⇒
k 
y − = ± x − 
k
 ( p 2
+ q 2
) 
a  b
⇒ p ( x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 ) + q (y1 + y 2 + y 3 + y 4 ) + 4r = 0
 1 1
or x + y =k  +   x + x2 + x3 + x4  y + y2 + y3 + y4
a b ⇒ p 1  +q 1  +r =0
 4   4 
 1 1
and x −y =k  −  ...(ii) α β
b a ⇒ p⋅ + q⋅ + r = 0
4 4
ab ( x + y )
or k=  α β
(a + b ) ∴ Eq. (ii) passes through  ,  .
 4 4
ab ( x − y )
and k= 93. Let the equation of hyperbola is
(a − b )
x2 y 2
Putting in Eq. (i) then − =1
a2 b2
x2 y 2
+ − x −y = 0 whose asymptotes are
a b x y
x2 y 2 + =0
and − −x+y =0 a b
b a x y
and − =0
Differentiating these equations, we get a b
2 x 2y dy dy Let there be any point P (h, k ) on the hyperbola
+ −1 − =0
a b dx dx k = distance of P from transverse axis
2 x 2y dy dy h = distance of P from any asymptotes
and − −1 + =0
b a dx dx
x y 
∴ Slopes of lines are say  − = 0
a b 
dy b (a − 2 x )
m1 = = bh − ak
dx a (2y − b ) ∴ k=
(a 2 + b 2 )
dy a (2 x − b )
and m2 = = Squaring (a 2 + b 2 ) k 2 = b 2h 2 + a 2k 2 − 2ab hk
dx b (2y − a )
⇒ b (h 2 − k 2 ) = 2ahk
At (0, 0) m1 = − 1 and m2 = 1
2ahk
∴ m1m2 = − 1 ⇒ (h 2 − k 2 ) =
b
which shows that curves intersect orthogonally. k2 
92. Equation of the normal to the hyperbola xy = 1 at t is Squaring (h 2 − k 2 ) 2 = 4a 2h 2  2 
b 
xt 3 − yt − t 4 + 1 = 0 ...(i)  h2   h2 k 2 
Q It passes through (α , β ) = 4a 2h 2  2 − 1 Q 2 − 2 = 1 
a   a b 
∴ t 4 − αt 3 + βt − 1 = 0
⇒ (h 2 − k 2 ) 2 = 4h 2 (h 2 − a 2 )
If foot of the co-normal points are
Hence locus of P (h , k ) is
 1  1   1   1 ( x 2 − y 2 ) 2 = 4 x 2 ( x 2 − a 2 ).
t1 ,  , t 2 ,  , t 3 ,  and t 4 , 
 t1   t 2   t 3   t4  x2 y 2
94. Tangent to the hyperbola 2 − 2 = 1 is
∴ t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 = α a b
⇒ x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 = α y = mx ± a 2m 2 − b 2
1 1 1 1 Given that y = αx + β is the tangent of hyperbola
and + + + =β
t1 t 2 t 3 t 4 ⇒ m = α and a 2m 2 − b 2 = β 2
⇒ y1 + y 2 + y 3 + y 4 = β ∴ a 2α 2 − b 2 = β 2
Let the variable line be Locus is a x − y = b which is hyperbola.
2 2 2 2

px + qy + r = 0 ...(ii)
636 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

x2 y 2 Q b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 )
95. For the given ellipse + =1
25 16 ∴ sin α = cos2 α (e 2 − 1 )
2

 16 3 or sin α + cos2 α = cos2 α . e 2

2

⇒ e = 1 −  =
 25 5 or e 2 = 1 + tan 2 α = sec 2 α ⇒e =secα
5 1
⇒ Eccentricity of hyperbola = ∴ ae = cosα . =1
3 cosα
x2 y 2 Coordinates of foci are ( ± ae, 0 ) i.e. ( ± 1, 0 )
Let the hyperbola be − = 1 then
A2 B 2 Hence, abscissae of foci remain constant, when α varies.
 25  16 2
B 2 = A 2  − 1 = A
9  9 99. The given hyperbola is
x2 9y 2 x 2 − 2y 2 − 2 2 x − 4 2y − 6 = 0
∴ 2 − = 1, As it passes through focus of ellipse i.e. (3, 0 )
A 16 A 2 ⇒ ( x 2 − 2 2 x + 2 ) − 2 (y 2 + 2 2y + 2 ) = 6 + 2 − 4
∴ We get A = 9 ⇒ B = 16
2 2
⇒ ( x − 2 ) 2 − 2 (y + 2 ) 2 = 4
x2 y 2
∴ Equation of hyperbola is − = 1, focus of hyperbola is ( x − 2 ) 2 (y + 2 ) 2
9 16 ⇒ − =1
22 ( 2 )2
(5, 0), vertex of hyperbola is (3, 0).
 2 3
96. The length of transverse axis = 2 sinθ = 2a ∴ a = 2, b = 2 ⇒ e = 1 +  =
 4 2
⇒ a = sinθ
Clearly, ∆ABC is a right triangle.
Also for ellipse 3 x 2 + 4y 2 = 12
 b2 
x2 y 2 B ae, 
or + = 1, a 2 = 4, b 2 = 3  a
4 3
b2 3 1 Y 2
e= 1− = 1− = B ae, b
a2 4 2 a
 1 
∴ Focus of ellipse = 2 × , 0 ⇒ (1, 0)
 2 
X¢ X
As hyperbola is confocal with ellipse, focus of hyperbola = (1, 0 ) A C(ae, 0)
⇒ ae = 1 ⇒ sinθ × e = 1 (a, 0)
⇒ e = cosecθ
∴ b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 )
= sin 2 θ ( cosec 2θ − 1 ) = cos2 θ Y¢
∴Equation of hyperbola is 1
∴ Area of ( ∆ABC ) = × AC × BC
x2 y2 2
− =1
sin θ cos2 θ
2 1 b2
= × (ae − a ) ×
or, x 2 cosec 2 θ − y 2 sec 2 θ = 1 2 a
97. Two branches of hyperbola have no common tangent but have 1 1  3 
= (e − 1 ) b 2 =  − 1 . 2
a common normal joining SS′. 2 2 2 
Y  3 
= − 1
 2 
100. The given hyperbola is
1
X¢ X x2 − y 2 = … (i)
S¢ C S 2
which is rectangular hyperbola
∴ e= 2
x2 y 2
Let the ellipse be + =1
Y¢ a2 b2
1
98. Given, equation of hyperbola is Its eccentricity =
x2 y2 2
− =1
cos α sin 2 α
2  1 a 2
∴ b 2 = a 2 (1 − e 2 ) = a 2 1 −  =
Here, a 2 = cos2 α and b 2 = sin 2 α  2 2
 Chap 07 Hyperbola 637

So, the equation of ellipse becomes x2 y 2

103. Q line 2x + y = 1 is tangent to the hyperbola − =1
x 2 + 2y 2 = a 2 … (ii) a2 b2
Let the hyperbola (i) and ellipse (ii) intersect each other at ∴ (1 ) 2 = a 2 ( − 2 ) 2 − b 2
P ( x1 , y1 ). ⇒ 4a − b 2 = 1
2
… (i)
∴(Slope of hyperbola (i) at ( x1 , y1 )) × (Slope of ellipse (ii) at a a 
( x1 , y1 ) = − 1 Intersection point of nearest directrix x = and X-axis is  , 0
e e 
x1 − x1 a 
⇒ × = −1 As, 2 x + y = 1 passes through  , 0
y1 2y1 e 
or x12 = 2y12 … (iii) 2a e
∴ + 0 =1 ⇒ a = … (ii)
1 e 2
Also ( x1 , y1 ) lies on x − y =
2 2
2
2 e
and b 2 = a 2 (e 2 − 1 ) = (e 2 − 1 ) … (iii)
1 4
∴ x1 − y1 =
2 2
… (iv)
2 Substituting the values of a and b from Eqs. (ii) and (iii) in
1 Eq. (i), then
From Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get y12 = and x12 = 1
2 e2
e 2 − (e 2 − 1 ) = 1
and ( x1 , y1 ) lies on ellipse x 2 + 2y 2 = a 2 4
∴ x12 + 2y12 = a 2 ⇒ (e 2 − 4 ) (e 2 − 1 ) = 0
⇒ 1 + 1 = a 2 or a 2 = 2 ∴ e 2 = 4, e 2 ≠ 1 (Q e > 1 )
∴ Equation of ellipse is x 2 + 2y 2 = 2 Hence, e =2
whose foci ( ± 1, 0 ). 104. Equation of normal at P (6, 3) is
Sol. (Q. Nos. 101 and 102) a 2 x b 2y
+ = a2 + b2
The intersection points of given circle 6 3
x 2 + y 2 − 8x = 0 … (i) Q Normal intersects the X-axis at (9, 0), then
and hyperbola 9a 2
+ 0 = a 2 + b 2 ⇒ 3a 2 = 2a 2 + 2b 2
4 x 2 − 9y 2 = 36 … (ii) 6
can be obtained by solving these equations substituting value or a 2 = 2b 2
of y 2 from Eq. (i) in Eq. (ii), we get or a 2 = 2a 2 (e 2 − 1 )
4 x 2 − 9 (8 x − x 2 ) = 36 3
⇒ 13 x 2 − 72 x − 36 = 0 ∴ e2 =
2
6
⇒ x = 6, − 3
13 Hence, e=
2
660
⇒ y = 12, −
2
(not possible) 105. Given, ellipse is x 2 + 4y 2 = 4
169
∴A(6, 2 3 ) and B (6, − 2 3 ) are points of intersection. x2 y 2
or + =1
4 1
101. Equation of tangent to hyperbola having slope m is
 1 3
y = mx + (9m 2 − 4 ) … (i) ∴ e = 1 −  =
 4 2
Equation of tangent to circle is
and foci are ( ± 3, 0 )
y = m ( x − 4 ) + (16m 2 + 16 ) … (ii) 2
∴ Eccentricity of hyperbola = = e1
Eqs. (i) and (ii) will be identical, then 3
2
4  a
2
m= and b 2 = a 2 (e12 − 1 ) = a 2  − 1 =
5 3  3
So, equation of common tangents then equation of hyperbola becomes
2x  36  x 2 − 3y 2 = a 2
y = +  − 4
5 5 
which pass through ( ± 3, 0 )
2x 4
⇒ y = + 3 − 0 = a2
5 5 ⇒ a2 = 3
or 2 x − 5y + 4 = 0 ∴Equation of hyperbola is
102. Equation of circle with AB as its diameter is x 2 − 3y 2 = 3
( x − 6 ) ( x − 6 ) + (y − 2 3 ) (y + 2 3 ) = 0  2 
and foci of hyperbola are  ± 3 × , 0 i.e., ( ± 2, 0 )
 3 
⇒ x 2 + y 2 − 12 x + 24 = 0
638 Textbook of Coordinate Geometry

106. Equation of tangent at ( x1 ,y1 ) is 1 2 2 4

⇒ a 2 (e 2 − 1 ) =a e ⇒ 4e 2 − 4 = e 2 or e 2 =
xx1 yy1 4 3
− =1 … (i) 2
9 4 ∴ e=
Equation of line parallel to 3
1 1
2x − y = λ … (ii) ⇒ b = 4a and b = ae or b 2 = a 2e 2
2

x2 y 2 2 4
Q Line (ii) is tangent of − = 1, then x2 y 2
9 4 109. Let Equation of hyperbola is 2 – 2 = 1
λ2 = 9 × 2 2 − 4 a b
2 3
∴ λ=±4 2 When it passes through P( 2, 3 ), then 2 – 2 = 1
a b
From Eq. (ii), Equation of tangent is ⇒ 2b 2 – 3a 2 = a 2b 2 …(i)
2x − y = ± 4 2 … (iii) and ae = 2 ⇒ a 2 + b 2 = 4 …(ii)
x1 y1 1 From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 2( 4 – a 2 ) – 3a 2 = a 2 ( 4 – a 2 )
Comparing Eqs. (i) and (iii), we get = =±
18 4 4 2 ⇒ a 2 – 9a 2 + 8 = 0 ⇒ (a 2 – 1 )(a 2 – 8 ) = 0
9 1 ∴ a2 = 1 (Qa 2 ≠ 8)
or x1 = ± and y1 = ± From Eq. (ii), b = 3
2
2 2 2
x2 y 2
Hence, points of contact of the tangents on the hyperbola are ∴ Equation of Hyperbola is – =1
1 3
 9 1   9 1 
 ,  and  − ,−  x 2 y 3
2 2 2  2 2 2 Equation of tangent at P( 2, 3 ) is – =1
1 3
107. H : x 2 − y 2 = 1 Which is passes through (2 2, 3 2 )
S : Circle with centre N ( x 2 , 0 ) x2 y 2
Common tangent to H and S at P ( x1 , y1 ) is 110. (a,b,c)Q2x − y + 1 = 0 is a tangent of − = 1, then
a 2 16
x
xx1 − yy1 = 1 ⇒m1 = 1 (1 ) 2 = a 2 (2 ) 2 − 16 or (2a ) 2 = (1 ) 2 + ( 4 ) 2
y1
∴ 2a, 4, 1 are the sides of a right angled triangle.
Also radius of circle S with centre N ( x 2 , 0 ) through point of Sol. (Q. Nos. 111-113)
contact ( x1 , y1 ) is perpendicular to tangent.
I. x 2 + y 2 = a 2
x 0 − y1
∴ m1m2 = − 1 ⇒ 1 × = −1 Equations of tangents in terms of slopes are
y1 x 2 − x1
y = mx + a (m 2 + 1 ) (ii)
⇒ x1 = x 2 − x1 or x 2 = 2 x1
M is the point of intersection of tangent at P and X-axis and points of contact in terms of slopes are
1   − ma a 
∴ M  , 0  
 x1   (m 2 + 1 ) (m 2 + 1 )  (Q)
,
 
Q Centroid of ∆PMN is ( l, m ) ∴ I (ii) (Q) (Ans. Q.No. 112) (Here, a = 2, m = ±1)
1 x2 y 2
∴ x1 + + x 2 = 3 l and y1 = 3 m II. x 2 + a 2y 2 = a 2 or 2 + 2 = 1
x1 a 1
Using x 2 = 2 x1 , Equations of tangents in terms of slopes are
1 1 y y = mx + (a 2m 2 + 1 ) (iv)
⇒ 3 x1 +  = l and 1 = m
3 x1  3 and points of contact in terms of slopes are
dl 1 dm 1  − a 2m 
∴ =1 − 2, =  1 
dx1 3 x1 dy1 3  (a 2m 2 + 1 ) , (a 2m 2 + 1 )  (R)
 
Also, ( x1 , y1 ) lies on H,
− 3
∴ x12 − y12 = 1 or y1 = ( x12 − 1 ) ∴ II (iv) (R) (Ans. Q.No. 111) (Here, a = 2, m = )
2
1 III. y 2 = 4ax
∴ m= ( x12 − 1 )
3 Equation of tangent in terms of slopes are
dm x1 a
∴ = y = mx + or my = m 2 x + a (i)
dx1 3 ( x12 − 1 ) m
and points of contact in terms of slopes are
2b 2 1
108. Q = 8 and 2b = (2ae )  a 2a 
a 2  2 ,  (P)
m m
1 1
⇒ b 2 = 4a and b = ae or b 2 = a 2e 2 ∴ III (i) (P) (Ans. Q.No. 113) (Here, a = 8, m = 1)
2 4